Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
IC PAP COMBINED SPEC 1-4-21
IC PA COMBINED FOR PERMIT SET 1-7-21.pdf ARCHITECTURAL: QPK DESIGN ARCHITECTS/ENGINEERS 450 SOUTH SALINA ST SYRACUSE NY 13201 315-472-7806 MEP: MURPHY ENGINEERING 5623 BURDOCK STREET MORAVIA, NEW YORK 13118 315-730-4185 LOCATION MAP ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 DRAWING LIST GENERAL ---COVER SHEET STRUCTURAL S-101PARTIAL FLOOR FRAMING PLAN, DTLS & NOTES S-102PARTIAL ROOF FRAMING PLAN, SECTIONS & DTLS ARCHITECTURAL INFORMATION A-001GENERAL INFORMATION A-002PARTITION INFORMATION 1A-003REGULATORY PLAN AD-101REMOVAL PLANS ARCHITECTURAL A-100WALL LAYOUT PLANS FOR REF A-101FLOOR PLANS A-102ROOF PLAN A-103REFLECTIVE CEILING PLANS A-401ENLARGED PLANS - STAIRS & TOILET ROOMS A-402ENLARGED PLAN - IP CLINIC, INTERIOR ELEVS & SCHEDULES A-403ENLARGED PLANS - CLINICAL LEARNING CENTER AND SIMULATION LAB A-551STAIR & MISC DETAILS A-601SCHEDULE-DOORS AND DETAILS A-602SCHEDULE- ROOMS AND DETAILS A-801FLOOR PLANS - FF&E A-802ENLARGED PLANS - FF&E FIRE PROTECTION FP-100FIRE PROTECTION INFO FP-101FIRE PROTECTION 1ST FLOOR PLAN FP-102FIRE PROTECTION 2ND FLOOR PLAN FP-103FIRE PROTECTION ELEVATIONS PLUMBING P-100UNDERSLAB PLUMBING PLAN P-1011ST FLOOR PLUMBING PLAN P-1022ND FLOOR PLUMBING PLAN P-401PLUMBING ENLARGED PLAN / ISOS P-601PLUMBING INFO MECHANICAL M-100MECHANICAL INFO M-1011ST FLOOR DUCTWORK PLAN M-1022ND FLOOR DUCTWORK PLAN M-103ROOF PLAN M-2011ST & 2ND FLOOR PIPING PLAN M-501CONTROLS M-601SCHEDULES M-602DETAILS & DIAGRAMS M-603DIAGRAMS ELECTRICAL E-100GENERAL INFO E-1011ST FLOOR PLAN POWER & SYSTEMS E-1022ND FLOOR PLAN POWER & SYSTEMS E-2011ST FLOOR PLAN - LIGHTING E-2022ND FLOOR PLAN - LIGHTING E-401ENLARGED PLANS - POWER & SYSTEMS E-402ENLARGED PLANS - POWER & SYSTEMS E-501DETAILS & DIAGRAMS E-502DETAILS & DIAGRAMS E-503DETAILS & DIAGRAMS E-601SCHEDULES E-602SCHEDULES UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACT TA001COVER SHEET AV TA101KEY PLAN - AV TA102AV INFRASTRUCTURE DESIGN TA103AV INFRASTRUCTURE DESIGN TA104AV INFRASTRUCTURE DESIGN TA105AV INFRASTRUCTURE DESIGN TA106AV INFRASTRUCTURE DESIGN TA107AV INFRASTRUCTURE DESIGN TA501DETAILS - AV TA502DETAILS - AV TA601SCHEDULES MCE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING RENOVATION QPK JOB NO: 220157.00 DECEMBER 18, 2020 FOR CONSTRUCTION A1 S-101 A2 S-101 A3 S-101 A4 S-101 A5 S-101 B1 S-101 B2 S-101 B4 S-101 C1 S-101 D1 S-101 D2 S-101 D4 S-101 E1 S-101 A6 S-101 B6 S-101 C6 S-101 D6 S-101 D:BASEPL BASE PLATE DETAIL NO SCALE 8" EQ.EQ. 2" TYP. 2" TYP. EQ.EQ. 1'-0" ANCHORS RODS 1/2" THK BASE PLATE COL. SEE PLAN 8" (TYP.) 1/4" LEVELING PLATE, SAME SIZE AS BASE PLATE 3/4" NON-SHRINK AND NON-METALIC GROUT CENTERLINE OF COLUMN EXG. FLOOR EL. COAT STEEL w/ ASPHALTIC MASTIC BELOW SLAB (4) 3/4"Ø HOOKED ANCHOR RODS 3" (TYP.) BASE PLATE 1/2" x 8" x 1'-0" & FTG, SEE PLAN HSS COL., SEE PLAN 5"± (V.I.F.) SEE PLAN SAW CUT & DEMO EXG. CONC. SLAB TO INSTALL NEW FTG. DO NOT OVER CUT CORNERS. INFILL SLAB FLUSH w/ T/ EXG FLOOR AFTER CONC. FTG SEE PLAN FOR 3" CLR 3" CLR A3 S-101 SIZE & REINF. D:BASEPL COLUMN BASE DETAIL NO SCALE FTG & STEEL INSTALLATION. PROVIDE 4x4-W1.4xW1.4 ON BOLSTERS 1 1/2" FROM T/ SLAB PROVIDE VAPOR BARRIER IF ONE CURRENTLY EXISTS, LAP EXG. AND TAPE PROVIDE (3) 1/2"Ø x 12"LG SMOOTH DOWELS ON EA. FACE. SET 4" INTO GREASED HOLE. D:SECT3401 FRAMING SECTION NO SCALE D:SECT3401 FRAMING SECTION NO SCALE D:SECT3401 FRAMING SECTION NO SCALE OPERABLE PARTITION SEE ARCH'L DWGS T/ STEEL EL. +11'-8" ABOVE 1ST FLOOR W BEAM + CHANNEL SEE PLAN 3-12 PUNCHED HOLES IN FLANGE FOR HANGER RODS. COORD. w/ PARTITION SUPPLIER D:SECT3401 FRAMING SECTION NO SCALE SEE PLAN EXG. SLAB ON METAL DECK SEE PLAN HSS POST SEE PLAN EXG. SLAB ON METAL DECK 17 EXG. 412" STAIRS BEYOND SEE ARCH'L DWGS RAILING SEE ARCH'L DWGS SAW CUT & DEMO EXG. SLAB. TEMP. SHORE AS REQ'D. DO NOT OVERCUT CORNERS (TYP.) 412"± V.I.F. CONT. C12x20.7 EXG. BEAM SAW CUT & DEMO EXG. SLAB. TEMP. SHORE AS REQ'D. DO NOT OVERCUT CORNERS 1/4 SEE ARCH'T A A PLAN DETAIL A-A C12 WEBEXG. BEAM WEB 1/4 (2) L3x3x3/8 x 0'-4" LG PLACED HEEL TO HEEL PROVIDE AT SOUTH END OF CHANNEL D:SECT3401 FRAMING SECTION NO SCALE E.9 EXG. EXG. BEAM + CHANNEL EXG. OPENING (V.I.F.) (V.I.F.) T/ STEEL EL. EXG. BEAM EXG. SLAB ON METAL DECK 3'-212"± (V.I.F.) 1" L5x3x1/4 (LLV) 612" = CENTERLINE OF ARCH'L CENTERLINE OF POST PARTITION. COORD w/ ARCH'T. HSS POST SEE PLAN (1) 3/4"Ø THRU BOLT PROVIDE 13/16" x 1 7/8" VSH IN ANGLE 1/4" GUSSET PLATE (TYP.) TYP. TYP. EXG. SLAB ON METAL DECK EXG. BEAM HSS POST SEE PLAN 412"± V.I.F. 412"± V.I.F. 412"± V.I.F. SEE PLAN 3/16 TYP. EXG. BEAM L5x3x1/4 (LLV) 1/4" GUSSET PLATE (TYP.) TYP. 1" (1) 3/4"Ø THRU BOLT PROVIDE 13/16" x 1 7/8" VSH IN ANGLE L7x4x3/8 x 0'-4" LG EA. SIDE OF POST w/ (1) 3/4"Ø THRU BOLT PROVIDE 13/16" x 1 7/8" VSH IN ANGLE 1" GAP 7"TYP. NEW BEAM ATTACH TO DECK PER DETAIL B6/S-101 D:PLAN-18-2ND PARTIAL 2ND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN 1/4" = 1'-0" 17 18 D E EXG. W24 EXG. W24 EXG. W24 EXG. W24 EXG. W16 EXG. W16 EXG. W16 EXG. W24 EXG. W24 EXG. W16 EXG. W16 EXG. W16 29'-0"± 29'-0"± EXG. W18 EXG. W18 EXG. W16 EXG. W16 EXG. W18 EXG. W16 EXG. W16 EXG. W16 EXG. W16 EXG. W24 EXG. W24 EXG. W8 EXG. W18 EXG. W18 W21x44 W21x44 W14x22 DEMO EXG. STEEL FRAMING & FLOOR AS SHOWN. PROVIDE 10'-914" 10'-034" 412" 22'-3" 6'-412"± (V.I.F.) 812" 812" 812" HSS BELOW SEE FDN PLAN HSS BELOW SEE FDN PLAN D:PLAN-18-2ND PARTIAL 1ST FLOOR / FOUNDATION PLAN 1/4" = 1'-0" 17 18 D E 29'-0"± 29'-0"± EXG. COL. (TYP.) (TYP. U.N.O.) PIER & FTG 12'-412"16'-7 1 2" 10'-634" 8'-714" 9'-10" HSS4x4x1/4 HSS4x4x1/4 EXG. COL., A4 S-101 A4 S-101 8'-2" BELOW. REFER TO ARCH'L DWGS FOR STAIR INFO. INTERMEDIATE LANDING EXG. FLOOR CONSTR. TO REMAIN (U.N.O.) EXG. FLOOR CONSTR. TO REMAIN (U.N.O.) D:PLAN-18-2ND PARTIAL 2ND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN 1/4" = 1'-0"D:PLAN-18-2ND PARTIAL 1ST FLOOR / FOUNDATION PLAN 1/4" = 1'-0" 1716 E E.9 7'-414" 612" 26'-612" 13'-1112" 40'-6" EXG. W16 EXG. W18 + C10 EXG. W16 EXG. W24 EXG. W18 + C12 EXG. W16 EXG. W24 EXG. W24 EXG. W24 EXG. W24 W24x55 + C12x20.7 HAT CHANNEL (BELOW) SEE SECTION FOR T/ STL ELEVATION EXG. W16EXG. W16 EXG. W16EXG. W16 EXG. W16 EXG. W16 EXG. W16 EXG. W14 EXG. W16 EXG. W16 EXG. W24 EXG. W16 EXG. W16EXG. W16 27'-1"± 612"± (V.I.F.) 3"± (V.I.F.) EXG. W16 EXG. OPENING (V.I.F.) EXG. FLOOR CONSTR. TO REMAIN (U.N.O.) EXG. COL. (TYP.) C1 S-101 B1 S-101 TEMP. SHORING (7 LOC. TYP.) DENOTES SLAB EDGE (TYP.) D1 S-101 D1 S-101 6" 534" 8'-714" A6 S-101 TYP. EA. END B6 S-101 TYP. C6 S-101 C6 S-101 A6 S-101 TYP. EA. END C6 S-101 E1 S-101 L5x3x1/4 (LLV) TEMP. SHORING AS REQ'D. EXG. W24 A2 S-101 16 17 E E.9 27'-1"± ARCH'L PARTITION (TYP.) OPERABLE PARTITION SEE ARCH'L DWGS HSS3 1/2x3 1/2x1/4 HSS3 1/2x3 1/2x1/4 7'-414" 612" 26'-612" 13'-1112" 40'-6" A4 S-101 A4 S-101 132133 CONC. FTG 3'-0"W x 3'-0"L x 1'-0"H REINF. w/ (4) #4 BARS E.W. BOTT. CONC. FTG 3'-0"W x 3'-0"L x 1'-0"H REINF. w/ (4) #4 BARS E.W. BOTT. CONC. FTG 3'-0"W x 3'-0"L x 1'-0"H REINF. w/ (4) #4 BARS E.W. BOTT. CONC. FTG 1'-8"W x 4'-0"L x 1'-0"H REINF. w/ (5) #4 BARS E.W. BOTT. SIM. SIM. EXISTING SLAB TO REMAIN NOTE: FIELD VERIFY ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS. NEW L6x4x3/8 (LLV) ALL AROUND OPENING FASTEN TO EXISTING BEAM TOP FLANGE (TYP.) SAWCUT AND REMOVE PORTION OF EXIST. SLAB AS REQ'D COORDINATE w/ ARCH. & MECH. DWG.'s TYP. D:SECT3402 IN EXG. FLOOR SLAB 3/4" = 1'-0" EXISTING SLAB ON METAL DECK NEW OPNG REFER TO ARCH'L & MECH'L DWGS FOR OPENING SIZE & LOCATIONS TYP. DETAIL @ NEW OPENING 3/16 D:SECT3441-A FLOOR FRAMING SECTION 3/4" = 1'-0" EXG. BEAM ON METAL DECK EXG. FLOOR SLAB 1/4 (4) BOLT EXTENDED SHEAR TAB CONNECTION CONNECTION, EA. END NEW BEAM ATTACH TO DECK PER DETAIL B6/S-101 3/8" PLATE 112" MAX. 112" D:SECT1501-E ON METAL DECK NEW BEAM 3/16"Ø TAPCON @ 24"o.c. TYP. FLOOR CONNECTION DETAIL NO SCALE EXG. FLOOR SLAB D:SECT3403 FLOOR FRAMING SECTION 3/4" = 1'-0" ON METAL DECK EXG. FLOOR SLAB SEE PLAN REMOVE EXG. BEAM EXG. BEAM TO REMAIN TEMP. SHORE AS REQ'D 112" MAX. NEW BEAM ATTACH TO DECK PER DETAIL B6/S-101 2" 10" 3/8" PLATE EXG. BEAM SAW CUT & DEMO EXG. SLAB. TEMP. SHORE AS REQ'D. DO NOT OVERCUT CORNERS 1/4 1/4 DRY-PACK HIGH HAT AREAS OF EXG. SLAB ON METAL DECK AS REQ'D D:NOTES01 GENERAL NOTES GENERAL NOTES A. STRUCTURE WAS DESIGNED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE 2020 EXISTING BUILDING CODE OF NEW YORK STATE. B. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY IN THE FIELD ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS AND DIMENSIONS PRIOR TO STARTING ANY WORK. CONTACT ARCHITECT IF EXISTING CONDITIONS AND DIMENSIONS ARE NOT ACCURATE TO THE DRAWINGS. SEQUENCE OF WORK FOR NEW 2ND FLOOR STAIR OPENING: 1. PROVIDE TEMPORARY SHORING OF EXISTING FRAMING AND EXISTING SLAB ON METAL DECK. 2. SAW CUT EXISTING SLAB ON METAL DECK PER DIMENSIONS SHOWN ON PLAN. DEMO AND REMOVE EXISTING SLAB ON METAL DECK. 3. CUT EXISTING STRUCTURAL STEEL MEMBERS AS REQUIRED TO FRAME NEW OPENING. 4. INSTALL NEW STRUCTURAL STEEL BEAMS PER FRAMING PLAN. 5. CONNECT EXISTING STEEL BEAMS THAT WERE CUT IN STEP 3 TO NEW STEEL BEAMS INSTALLED IN STEP 4. 6. REMOVE TEMPORARY SHORING. C. DESIGN LOADS: 1. ROOF LOADS: a. ROOF LIVE LOAD.............................................................20 PSF b. GROUND SNOW LOAD.................................................... 40 PSF c. FLAT ROOF SNOW LOAD................................................28 PSF d. SNOW EXPOSURE....................... ....................................1.0 e. SNOW IMPORTANCE FACTOR.......................................1.0 f. THERMAL FACTOR...........................................................1.0 2. WIND LOADS: a. ULTIMATE DESIGN WIND SPEED...................................115 MPH b. NOMINAL DESIGN WIND SPEED....................................89 MPH c. WIND EXPOSURE CATEGORY............ ........................... B d. RISK CATEGORY............................................................. II e. WIND LOAD IMPORTANCE FACTOR............................. 1.0 D. ROOF TOP UNIT MAXIMUM DESIGN WEIGHTS ARE AS FOLLOWS: DOAS-1................................. 3,470 LBS DOAS-2................................. 3,470 LBS HP-1...................................... 670 LBS HP-2...................................... 260 LBS HP-3...................................... 260 LBS HP-4...................................... 1,340 LBS NOTIFY ARCHITECT IF WEIGHT OF ACTUAL EQUIPMENT PURCHASED EXCEEDS DESIGN WEIGHT, PROJECT NORTH 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 PARTIAL FLOOR FRAMING PLANS, DETAILS & NOTES S-101 DECEMBER 18, 2020 220157.00 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 FOR CONSTRUCTION A1 S-102 A2 S-102 A3 S-102 A4 S-102 A5 S-102 B1 S-102 B2 S-102 B3 S-102 B4 S-102 B5 S-102 C1 S-102 C2 S-102 C3 S-102 C4 S-102 C5 S-102 D1 S-102 D2 S-102 D3 S-102 D4 S-102 E1 S-102 E2 S-102 E3 S-102 E4 S-102 A6 S-102 D:PLAN-18-RF PARTIAL ROOF FRAMING PLAN 1/4" = 1'-0" A B 28'-7"± 17 18 29'-0"± C 29'-0"± EXG. W14 EXG. W14 EXG. W14 EXG. W14 EXG. W14 EXG. W14 EXG. W24 EXG. W14 EXG. W14 EXG. W18 (0") EXG. W18 EXG. W16 (0") EXG. W16 EXG. W18 EXG. W18 EXG. W14 EXG. W14 EXG. W14 EXG. W14 EXG. W14 EXG. W14 EXG. W14 EXG. W14 EXG. W14 EXG. W14 EXG. W14 EXG. W14 EXG. W24 EXG. W24 EXG. W24 EXG. W24 EXG. W24 EXG. W24(-1 1/2") (-3") (-4 1/2") (-6") (-6 3/4") (-5 3/4") (-4 3/4") (-3") HP-4 HP-1 HP-2 HP-3 PROPOSED LOCATION OF NEW MECH. UNITS (TYP.) DOAS-2DOAS-1 REFER TO A6/S-102 FOR DETAIL @ NEW ROOF OPENING (TYP.) W8x10W8x10 A5 S-102 TYP. W8x10W8x10 W8x10W8x10 W8x10 W8x10 W8x10 W8x10 A5 S-102 TYP. W8x10 W8x10 W8x10 W8x10 W8x10 W8x10 W8x10 W8x10 W8x10 FOR LOC. & SIZE SEE MECH. DWG'S NEW ROOF OP'NG FIELD VERIFY EXG BEAM OR JOIST SPACING FOR OPENINGS 6" TO 12" IN DIAMETER, REINFORCE DECK OPENING 3. NOTES: 1. FIELD VERIFY EXG BEAM & JOIST SIZE & LOCATIONS. FRAME REINFORCING SHOWN REQUIRED FOR PENETRATIONS2. GREATER THAN 12" IN DIAMETER. WITH 14 GAGE PLATE. EXTEND PLATE MINIMUM ONE FULL RIB EACH SIDE. ATTACH WITH SCREWS @ 4" o.c. D:SECT3409-A IN EXG. ROOF DETAIL 3/4" = 1'-0" EXG BEAMEXG BEAM 1/4" CONN P (TYP AS NEEDED) WELD ALL L AROUND TO EXG BEAM TYP EXG ROOFING MAT'L EXG ROOF DECK L3 1/2 x 3 1/2 x 5/16 (4 SIDES) VERIFY ALL OPENING LOCATIONS w/ ARCHITECTURAL AND/OR MECHANICAL DWGS.4. ATTACH EXISTING ROOF DECK TO NEW SUPPORT FRAMING w/ #12 SDS SCREWS5. FROM BELOW @ 16" o.c. TYPICAL NEW ROOF OPENING NO SCALE D:SECT3404 MECH'L CURB SUPPORT SECTION EXIST. BEAMADDED WF WHERE SHOWN ON PLAN. CENTER EXIST. ROOF (2) BOLT EXTENDED 3/8" SHEAR TAB CONNECTION, EA. END 112" MAX. DECK UNDER MECH'L UNIT CURB FRAMING w/ #12 SDS SCREWS FROM BELOW @ 16" o.c. DECK TO NEW SUPPORT ATTACH EXISTING ROOF 1/4 112" PROJECT NORTH 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 PARTIAL ROOF FRAMING PLAN, SECTIONS & DETAILS S-102 220157.00 ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 DECEMBER 18, 2020 FOR CONSTRUCTION ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 1 N A ROOM NAME DESIGNATION ROOM NUMBER DESIGNATION (IF PRESENT) ROOM AREA DESIGNATION (IF PRESENT) PARTITION TYPE DESIGNATION. SEE PARTITION LEGEND DOOR NUMBER DESIGNATION SPECIAL NOTATION (e.g. DEMO NOTE) W1WINDOW TYPE DESIGNATION 1TACCESSORY ITEM-SEE ACCESSORY SCHEDULE DATUM POINT OR WORK POINT BUILDING SECTION WALL SECTION DETAIL NUMBER SHEET NUMBER WHERE DETAIL IS LOCATED DETAIL NUMBER SHEET NUMBER WHERE DETAIL IS LOCATED EXTENT OF SECTION A-XXX A1 A2B1 DETAIL NUMBERS SHEET NUMBER WHERE DETAIL IS LOCATED ELEVATIONS REVISION NOTE REVISION NUMBER EXTENT OF REVISION A1A2A3A4A5A6A7 B1B2B3B4B5B6B7 C1C2C3C4C5C6C7 D1D2D3D4D5D6D7 E1E2E3E4E5E6E7 F1F2F3F4F5F6F7 DETAIL NUMBERDETAIL SCALE DETAIL NAME DETAIL NUMBER SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" AXX View Name ROOM NAME 00000 1500 SF DETAIL SECTION DETAIL NUMBER SHEET NUMBER WHERE DETAIL IS LOCATED EXTENT OF SECTION PLAN DETAIL DETAIL NUMBER SHEET NUMBER WHERE DETAIL IS LOCATED EXTENT OF DETAIL R1 NNNL 1 A-XXX 1 A-XXX 1 A-XXX 1 A-XXX 1 A-XXX NEW DOOR IN NEW OR EXISTING PARTITION, SEE DOOR SCHEDULE EXISTING DOOR IN NEW OR EXISTING PARTITION, WITH MODIFICATION. SEE DOOR SCHEDULE EXISTING DOOR TO BE REMOVED, SEE REMOVAL PLAN EXISTING DOOR TO REMAIN, IN EXISTING PARTITION ### E-### FINISHED SURFACES-NEW REMOVAL OF EXISTING EXISTING SURFACES GRAVEL / STONE CONCRETE -CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT BRICK CONCRETE PRECAST STONE GRANITE MARBLE SAND / MORTAR GYPSUM WALLBOARD ALUMINUM STEEL RIGID INSULATION TILE P LAM OVER COMPOSITE WOOD WOOD -FINISHED PLYWOOD ACOUSTIC TILE CARPET EARTH BATT INSULATIONWOOD BLOCKING REINFORCING WWF SOLID SURFACE QUARTZ CULTERED MARBLE SYNTHETIC GENERAL NOTES; 1. DO NOT INTERRUPT UTILITIES SERVING FACILITIES UNLESS PERMITTED UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS AND THEN ONLY AFTER PROVIDING TEMPORARY UTILITY SERVICES ACCORDING TO THE REQUIREMENTS INDICATED: 1.1 NOTIFY OWNER NOT LESS THAN (5) DAYS IN ADVANCE OF PROPOSED UTILITY INTERRUPTIONS. 1.2 OBTAIN OWNER'S WRITTEN PERMISSION BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH UTILITY INTERRUPTIONS. 2. SMOKING IS NOT PERMITTED WITHIN ANY BUILDING OR STRUCTURE OR WITHIN 25 FEET OF ENTRANCES, OPERABLE WINDOWS, OR OUTDOOR AIR IN-TAKES. 3. PROVIDE IDENTIFICATION TAGS FOR CONTRACTOR AND SUBCONTRACTOR PERSONNEL WORKING ON PROJECT SITE. REQUIRE PERSONNEL TO USEIDENTIFICATION TAGS AT ALL TIMES. 4. LIMIT USE OF PROJECT SITE TO AREAS APPROVED BY OWNER. MAINTAIN PORTIONS OF EXISTING BUILDING AFFECTED BY CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS IN A WEATHERTIGHT AND SECURE CONDITION THROUGHOUT CONSTRUCTION PERIOD. 5. MAINTAIN EXISTING EGRESS (EXITING) PATHS AND COMPONENTS (STAIRS, CORRIDORS, DOORS) THROUGHOUT DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTIONACTIVITIES. 6. CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT A CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND SCHEDULE OF VALUES FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO START OF CONSTRUCTION. 7. REFER TO A/M/E/P REMOVAL PLANS FOR EXTENTS OF PATCHING DUE TO REMOVALS. REFER TO MEP DRAWINGS FOR PIPE AND DUCT PENETRATIONS (ABANDONED, EXISTING, AND NEW LOCATIONS). PROVIDE MINIMUM 2-HOUR FIRE RESISTIVE FIRE STOPPING AT PENETRATIONS THROUGH SHAFT WALLS (ELEVATOR, STAIR, DUCT SHAFTS) AND AT FLOOR PENETRATIONS. PATCH AND SEAL ABANDONED, EXISTING, AND NEW FIRE-RESISTIVE FLOOR AND WALL PENETRATIONS. 8. CLOSEOUT -PROVIDE OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS THAT CONTAIN PRODUCT DATA, WARRANTIES, AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR EACH PRODUCT. PROVIDE RECORD DOCUMENTS THAT INCLUDE ALL CHANGES MADE DURING CONSTRUCTION. 9. OWNER WILL REMOVE FURNISHINGS, LOOSE EQUIPMENT, AND DISPLAYS FROM WORK AREA PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. 10. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE PROTECTION FOR FLOORING IN MAIN CORRIDOR AND LOBBIES DURING SELECTIVE DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION. PROVIDE PLYWOOD AND "PLASTIC COVER" POLYETHYLENE CARPET PROTECTION OR EQUIVALENT. 11. REFER TO THE A/M/E/P REMOVAL PLANS FOR EXTENTS OF PATCHING REQUIRED FOR REMOVAL OF EXISTING MATERIAL, FIXTURES AND FINISHES. 12. SIGNAGE PROVIDED BY ITHACA COLLEGE. CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL SIGNAGE USING SECURITY SCREWS AD SILICONE. PROVIDE BLOCKING ASREQUIRED AND AT ANY BUILDING MOUNTED SIGNAGE. COORDINATE WITH OWNER'S VENDOR. 13. AT CONCLUSION OF CONSTRUCTION, THOROUGHLY CLEAN MIRRORS, FLOORING, WINDOWS AND WINDOW SILLS, AND OTHER SURFACES TO REMOVE DUST AND DEBRIS. 14. PROVIDE VERIFICATION OF LANDLORD PROVIDED TENANT BOUNDARY WALLS PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF CONSTRUCTION. GC VERIFY REMAINING LAYOUT BEFORE COMMENCING WORK. REPORT ANY DISCREPANCIES BACK TO ARCHITECT/OWNER REPRESENTATIVE. SOAP DISH MIRROR ACC-MOUNTHTS -ANSI 2009 (RECOMM) 3'-6" 2'-6" MIN 2'-10" CL EXCEPTION: 24" GRAB BAR IS PERMITTED DUE TO A RECESSED FIXTURE ADJACENT TO WATER CLOSET. SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL SIDE WALL GRAB BAR FOR WATER CLOSET REAR WALL GRAB BAR FOR WATER CLOSET PAPER TOWEL DISPENSERS NOTE: MOUNTING HEIGHTS MAY VARY DEPENDING ON REACH RANGE CONDITION. 33" - 36" 12" MAX42" MIN 54" MIN 16"-18" 24" MIN12"MIN 36" MIN 18" MIN 48" MAX TOILET PAPER DISPENSER LOCATION (RECESSED) OPERATING HW 48" MAX TO HAND DRYE R SANITARY NAPKIN DISPENSE R COAT HOOK 48" MAX 39" - 41"18" MIN 39" - 41" 40" MAX M A X 1 ' 5 " 24" MIN 36" MAX CL 42' MAX 1 8 " M I N TOILET PAPER DISPENSER LOCATION (PROTRUDING BELOW GRAB BAR) 24" MIN 42 " MAX 4 8 " M A X TOILET PAPER DISPENSER LOCATION (PROTRUDING ABOVE GRAB BAR) 24" MIN 36" MAX 1 1 / 2 " M I N 1 2 " M I N DIAPER CHANGIN G TABLE 2 ' 0 " 3 4 " M A X 2 8 " M I N S E A T H T 1 7 " 1 9 " URINAL SUSPENDED ACOUSTIC CEILING (2'X4') SUSPENDED ACOUSTIC CEILING (2'X2') GWB SUPPLY DIFFUSER GRILLE RETURN REGISTER GRILLE LINEAR SUPPLY DIFFUSER LINEAR RETURN REGISTER CAN LIGHT FIXTURE SURFACE MOUNT LIGHT FIXTURE RECESS MOUNT LIGHT FIXTURE EQ = EQUAL SPACES (IN ROOM) LAYOUT INSTRUCTIONS START GRID AT THIS WALL GRID IN ROOM WITH ARROW ALIGNS WITH GRID IN ROOM WITH DOT LINEAR DROP LIGHT FIXTURE FINISH CEILING HEIGHT CEILING TAG GRAPHIC SYMBOLS 604 AT 10' -0" AFF PROJECT NORTH 123456 123456 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 GENERAL INFORMATION A-001 DECEMBER 18, 2020 220157.00 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 FOR CONSTRUCTION ABBREVIATIONS PVCPOLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PLASTIC) PVGPAVING Q QTQUARRY TILE QTYQUANTITY R RRADIUS/RISER RBRESILIENT BASE RBRRUBBER RCPREFLECTED CEILING PLAN RDROOF DRAIN REFREFRIDGERATOR REINFREINFORCE(D) REQ'DREQUIRED RESILRESILIENT RESIL CRESILIENT CHANNEL RETRETURN REVREVISION RMROOM ROROUGH OPENING S SCSOLID CORE SCHEDSCHEDULE SECTSECTION SFSQUARE FEET SHTSHEET SHTHGSHEATHING SIMSIMILAR SLNTSEALANT SNDSANITARY NAPKIN DISPENSER SNDUSANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL UNIT SPECSPECIFICATION SPKLRSPRINKLER SQSQUARE SSMSOLID SURFACE MATERIAL SSTSTAINLESS STEEL STCSOUND TRANSMISSION CLASS STDSTANDARD STLSTEEL STL JSTSTEEL JOIST STL LNTLSTEEL LINTEL STL PLATESTEEL PLATE STNSTONE STRUCTSTRUCTURAL SUSPSUSPENDED SVSHEET VINYL SVTSHEET VINYL FLOORING SYMMSYMMETRICAL T TTREAD T>ONGUE AND GROOVE TELTELEPHONE TEMPTEMPERATURE TERTERRAZZO TERMTERMINAL THKTHICKNESS THRESTHRESHOLD TK BDTACKBOARD TMPDTEMPERED TOTOP OF TOCTOP OF CONCRETE TOSTOP OF STEEL TOWTOP OF WALL TRANSTRANSOM, TRANSPARENT TYPTYPICAL U UCUNDERCUT ULUNDERWRITER'S LABATORY (TEST) UNOUNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE URURINAL V VCTVINYL COMPOSITION TILE VERTVERTICAL VESTVESTIBULE VIFVERIFY IN FIELD VNRVENEER VPVENEER PLASTER VRVAPOR RETARDER VTVINYL TILE VWCVINYL WALLCOVERING W WWIDE W/WITH W/OWITHOUT WCWATER CLOSET WDWOOD WDWWINDOW WDWTWINDOW TREATMENT WGLWIRED GLASS WPWATERPROOFING WPTWORKPOINT WSWEATHERSTRIP WWFWELDED WIRE FABRIC ABBREVIATIONS FOSFACE OF STUD FPFIREPROOFING FRFRAME FRMGFRAMING FRPFIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC/PANEL FRTWFIRE RETARDANT TREATED WOOD FTFOOT/FEET FTGFOOTING FURGFURRING FURNFURNISHED/FURNITURE FWCFABRIC WALL COVERING G GAGAUGE GALVGALVANIZED GBGRAB BAR GCGENERAL CONTRACTOR GCTGLAZED CERAMIC TILE GLGLASS/GLAZING GWBGYPSUM WALLBOARD GYPGYPSUM H HCHOLLOW CORE HCPHANDICAPPED HDBDHARDBOARD HDWHARDWARE HDWDHARDWOOD HMHOLLOW METAL HNDRLHANDRAIL HORIZHORIZONTAL HRHOUR HTHEIGHT HVACHEATING/VENTILATING/AIR CONDITIONING I IDINSIDE DIAMETER INCLINCLUDE(D)(-ING) INSULINSULATE(D)(-ION)(-ING) INTINTERIOR INVINVERT J JANJANITOR JTJOINT L LAMLAMINATE(D) LAVLAVATORY LFLINEAR FEET LLLIVE LOAD LLHLONG LEG HORIZONTAL LLVLONG LEG VERTICAL LT GALIGHT GAUGE LTGLIGHTING LVRLOUVER M MACHMACHINE MATLMATERIAL MAXMAXIMUM MECHMECHANICAL MEMBMEMBRANE MEZZMEZZANINE MFRMANUFACTURER MINMINIMUM MISCMISCELLANEOUS MKR BDMARKER BOARD MLDGMOULDING MOMASONRY OPENING MRMOISTURE RESISTANT MTLMETAL MULLMULLION N NANOT APPLICABLE NATNATURAL NICNOT IN CONTRACT NONUMBER NOMNOMINAL NPSNOMINAL PIPE SIZE NTSNOT TO SCALE O OAOVERALL OCON CENTER ODOUTSIDE DIAMETER OPHOPPOSITE HAND OPNGOPENING OPPOPPOSITE P PBDPARTICLE BOARD PCTPORCELAIN CERAMIC TILE PERIMPERIMETER PLPROPERTY LINE PLAMPLASTIC LAMINATE PLASPLASTER PLBGPLUMBING PLYWDPLYWOOD PNLPANEL PNTPAINT PNTDPAINTED PRPAIR PREFABPREFABRICAT(D) PTPRESSURE TREATED PTDPAPER TOWER DISPENSER PTNPARTITION ABBREVIATIONS A A/CAIR CONDITIONING ABANCHOR BOLT ACCACCESIBLE ACS PNLACCESS PANEL ADDMADDENDUM ADJADJUSTABLE AFFABOVE FINISH FLOOR AHRANCHOR(AGE) ALTALTERNATE ALUMALUMINUM ANN PNLANNUNCIATOR PANEL ANODANODIZED APCACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING APPROXAPPROXIMATE ARCHARCHITECT(URAL) ASBASBESTOS ASPHASPHALT ATCACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING B BDBOARD BEVBEVELED BLDGBUILDING BLKGBLOCKING BLKTBLANKET BMBEAM, BENCHMARK BOT OFBOTTOM OF BRGBEARING BSMTBASEMENT BURBUILT-UP ROOF C CABCABINET CEMCEMENT CH BDCHALKBOARD CIPCAST-IN-PLACE CJCONTROL JOINT CLGCEILING CLLCONTRACT LIMIT LINE CLOCLOSET CLRCLEAR CMPCORRUGATED METAL PIPE CMPSTCOMPOSITE CMTCERAMIC MOSAIC TILE CMUCONCRETE MASONRY UNIT COLCOLUMN COMBCOMBINATION CONCCONCRETE CONSTRCONSTRUCTION CONTCONTINUOUS CONTRCONTRACTOR COORDCOORDINATE CORRCORRIDOR CPRS FLCOMPRESSIBLE FILLER CPTCARPET CRCARD READER CRSCOLD ROLLED STEEL CTCERAMIC TILE D DDEPTH DETDETAIL DFDRINKING FOUNTAIN DFLCTDEFLECTION DHDOUBLE HUNG DIADIAMETER DIAGDIAGONAL DIMDIMENSION DLDEAD LOAD DMPFDAMPPROOFING DRDOOR DWGDRAWING E EAEACH EIFSEXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM EJEXPANSION JOINT ELELEVATION ELECELECTRIC(AL) ELEVELEVATOR EMHOELECTROMAGNETIC HOLD OPEN ENTRENTRANCE EPELECTRIC PANEL EQEQUAL EQUIPEQUIPMENT ESTESTIMATE EWCELECTRIC WATER COOLER EXHEXHAUST EXISTEXISTING EXPEXPOSED, EXPANSION EXTEXTERIOR F FAAPFIRE ALARM ANNUNCIATOR PANEL FCUFAN COIL UNIT FDFLOOR DRAIN FDTNFOUNDATION FEFIRE EXTINGUISHER FECFIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET FHFIRE HYDRANT FINFINISH(ED) FIXTFIXTURE FLASHFLASHING FLGFLOORING FLRFLOOR FMFACTORY MUTUAL FOFACE OF FOFFACE OF FINISH SCALE: NO SCALE A2 ABBREVIATIONS SCALE: NO SCALE MATERIALS LEGEND SCALE: NO SCALE B3 GRAPHIC KEY SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" D5 GENERAL NOTES SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" A3 ACC-MOUNTHTS -ANSI 2009 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" RCP LEGEND JOB SPECIFIC: ACDACCESS CONTROL DEVICES EXTEND ALL MATERIALS TO UNDERSIDE OF DECK/SLAB _A STOP ALL MATERIAL AT CEILING _B CLG CLG EXTEND GWB MATERIAL ABOVE CLG & BRACE STUDS AT STRUCT ABOVE, AS REQD TO PROVIDE STABILITY _C CLG 6 " STOP GWB ABOVE CLG ONE SIDE; EXTEND ALL OTHER MATERIALS TO UNDERSIDE OF DECK/SLAB _D CLG 6 " LOW WALL, SEE DWGS FOR HT _E CLG V A R I E S BULKHEAD CONDITIONS VARYSEE DWGS FOR DETAILS. BRACE STUDS AT STRUCT ABOVE, AS REQD TO PROVIDE STABILITY _F CLG 6 " V A R I E S BULKHEAD CONDITIONS VARYSEE DWGS FOR DETAILS. BRACE STUDS AT STRUCT ABOVE, AS REQD TO PROVIDE STABILITY _G CLG 6 " V A R I E S CLG 1A CONSTRUCTION TYPES : HEIGHT TYPES : ADDITIONAL RELATED NOTES: SEE "GENERAL NOTES" SEE SPECIFIC NOTES ON PLANS AND DETAILS; SEE SPECIFICATIONS TEST DESIGNATIONS : UL= UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES OSU= OHIO STATE UNIVERSITY UC= UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA ALPHABET SUFFIX DESIGNATES PARTITION HEIGHT NOTED BELOW NUMERAL PREFIX DESIGNATES PARTITION CONSTRUCTION NOTED ABOVE NOTE: BRACE STUDS AT STRUCT ABOVE, 4'-0" ON CENTER AT 12'-0" AFF (TYPICAL). 4 1/4" 3-5/8" METAL STUDS-20 GAUGE AT 16" OC 5/8" GWB-TYPE X TYPE 3 3 1/8" 2-1/2" METAL STUDS-20 GAUGE AT 16" OC TYPE 5 5/8" GWB-TYPE X 3 5 5 3/8" 3-5/8" METAL STUDS-20 GAUGE AT 16" OC 5/8" GWB-TYPE X TYPE 1 5/8" GWB-TYPE X 1 4 7/8" 3-5/8" METAL STUDS-20 GAUGE AT 16" OC TYPE 2 5/8" GWB-TYPE X 5/8" GWB-TYPE X 3" SOUND BATTS 2 7 3/4" 5/8" GWB-TYPE X TYPE 4 46" METAL STUDS-20 GAUGE AT 16" OC 4 7/8" TYPE 6 5/8" GWB-TYPE X 5/8" GWB-TYPE X 6 3" SOUND BATTS 5/8" GWB-TYPE X 5" SOUND BATTS 3 5/8" x 1 5/8" x 16 GA (Fy = 50 ksi) SPACING @ 16"oc. TYPE 5TYPE 6 7 1/4" 5/8" GWB-TYPE X 76" METAL STUDS-20 GAUGE AT 16" OC 5/8" GWB-TYPE X 5" SOUND BATTS 3" SOUND BATTS 1/2" RESIL CHANNEL (SYMBOL SIDE) 1/2" RESIL CHANNEL (SYMBOL SIDE) 1 1/8" 5/8" GWB 81/2" RESIL CHANNEL (SYMBOL SIDE) EXISTING GWB WALL 1 B 4 " 1 " 5 / 8 " 5 1 / 2 " 5 / 8 " S E E P L A N 2 " 3 3 ACTUAL FACE OF MASONRY NOMINAL DIMENSION FROM PLAN 1/2" JT WIDTH FACE OF FINISHED SURFACE FROM PLAN NOMINAL DIM FROM PLAN NOMINAL OPENING 1 ' 4 " ELEVSECTION 8 " 1 ' 4 " 2 ' 0 " TOP OF MASONRY UNIT BEYOND ACTUAL FACE OF MASONRY FROM ELEVATION 4 1 1' AB FOR DOOR OPENING INFORMATION SEE DOOR SCHEDULE 2 9 2 5 7 9 8 6 WP A-101 2" 7'-4"4'-8" 1 3 ' 0 " WP 2'-2" FINISHED FACE OF NONMASONRY WALL NOMINAL FACE OF MASONRY WALL 3 B 6 A 6 A 1 A B6 A-001 1 ' 6 " 5 NON-RATED PARTITION PARALLEL TO DECK MTL DECK STUFF TRACK & FLUTES W/SOUND BATT INSULATION AT NON-RATED PTN WHERE RUNNER TRACK CAN NOT ATTACH TO UNDERSIDE OF FLUTES SPAN FLUTES W/4" WIDE x20 GA PLATES @ 24"OC ANCHOR GWB BELOW RUNNER DO NOT ATTACH TO RUNNER. NON-RATED PARTITION PERPENDICULAR TO DECK ACOUSTICAL SEALANT (EACH SIDE) X 1 X 2 X 2 X 1 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT STD 1"-1 1/4" LEG RUNNER TRACK. 2 1/2" DEEP LEG RUNNER TRACK. STUFF TRACK & FLUTES W/SOUND BATT INSULATION AT NON-RATED PTN. STL STUD SEE PTN TYPE FOR GA & SPACING. HEAD DETAIL -UL-HW-D-0025 RATED PARTITION -PARALLEL TO DECK 1 HR & 2 HR RATING -3/4" DEFLECTION MTL DECK VARIES ANCHOR GWB BELOW RUNNER PER UL. DO NOT ATTACH TO RUNNER. WHERE RUNNER TRACK CAN NOT ATTACH TO UNDERSIDE OF FLUTES SPAN FLUTES W/4" WIDE x20 GA PLATES @ 24"OC COVER PLATE W/ TH FILL MATERIAL. FILL MATERIAL HEAD DETAIL -UL-HW-D-0025 RATED PARTITION -PERPENDICULAR TO DECK 1 HR & 2 HR RATING -3/4" DEFLECTION FILL MATERIAL DETAILS ARE FOR ILLUSTRATION PURPOSE ONLY. PROVIDE INSTALLATION PER UL LISTED ASSEMBLY. FORMING MATERIAL ANCHOR PER UL ASSEMBLY REQUIREMENTS DEFLECTION TRACK CEILING RUNNER A S S E M B L Y P E R U L FASTENER LOCATION PER UL ASSEMBLY SEE PTN LEGEND & PLANS FOR REQUIRED FIRE RATINGS. TOP OF STUD HEAD DETAIL -UL-HW-S-0009 1 HR RATING -1/2" DEFLECTION EXISTING ROOF ASSEMBLY FILL MATERIALFORMING MATERIAL ANCHOR PER UL ASSEMBLY REQUIREMENTS DEFLECTION TRACK A S S E M B L Y P E R U L FASTENER LOCATION PER UL ASSEMBLY SEE PTN LEGEND & PLANS FOR REQUIRED FIRE RATINGS. TOP OF STUD 1 / 2 " HEAD DETAIL -UL-HW-S-0010 2 HR RATING -1/2" DEFLECTION EXISTING ROOF ASSEMBLY FILL MATERIALFORMING MATERIAL ANCHOR PER UL ASSEMBLY REQUIREMENTS DEFLECTION TRACK A S S E M B L Y P E R U L FASTENER LOCATION PER UL ASSEMBLY SEE PTN LEGEND & PLANS FOR REQUIRED FIRE RATINGS. TOP OF STUD 1 / 2 " PROJECT NORTH 123456 123456 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 PARTITION INFORMATION A-002 DECEMBER 18, 2020 220157.00 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 FOR CONSTRUCTION SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" PARTITION CONSTRUCTION TYPES SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" DIMENSIONING GUIDE DETAIL SCALE: 1" = 1'-0" DIMENSIONING GUIDE ELEV/SECTION SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" DIMENSIONING GUIDE PLAN DIMENSIONING LEGEND NOTES 1MASONRY PLAN DIMENSIONS AT SCALES NOT SHOWING INDIVIDUAL MODULES ARE TO NOMINAL FACE OF MASONRY 2NON MASONRY DIMENSIONS ARE TO FINISHED FACE OF MATERIAL UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE 3MASONRY ON DRAWINGS SHOWN WITH INDIVIDUAL MODULAR UNITS ARE DIMENSIONED TO ACTUAL SIZE, AND WHERE SHOWN INCLUDE REFERENCES TO MODULAR DIMENSIONS. 4MASONRY COURSING LINES IN ELEVATON REPRESENT NOMINAL DIMENSIONS. VERTICAL JOINTS ARE DIMENSIONED TO CENTERLINE OF JOINT. HORIZONTAL JOINTS ARE DIMENSIONED TO TOP OF MASONRY IN ELEVATION AND IN SECTION. 5DIMENSIONS ARE FROM STRUCTURAL COLUMN CENTERLINES, UNO. 6AT INTERSECTION OF DIFFERENT PARTITION TYPES, CONTINUE PARTITION OF GREATER FIRE RATING THROUGH INTERSECTION UNO. 7REFER TO PARTITION SCHEDULE FOR PARTITION THICKNESS AND HEIGHT. 8NON-ARCHITECTURAL DISCIPLINE INFORMATION IF SHOWN IS FOR REFERENCE ONLY. OBJECTS AND INFORMATION SHOWN MAY NOT BE ALL INCLUSIVE. REFER TO APPROPRIATE DISCIPLINE FOR INFORMATION. 9REFER TO WORKPOINTS WHERE SHOWN FOR ELEMENTS PLACED ON NON-PARALLEL OR NON-PARALLEL RELATIONSHIPS. WORKPOINTS MAY ALSO BE SHOWN AS LAYOUT STARTING POINTS IN ORDER TO MAINTAIN CORRECT RELATIONSHIPS BETWEEN ELEMENTS. SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" D6 TYP DEFLECTION TRACKS SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" D4 TYP UL ASSEMBLY PARTITION NOTES 1PROVIDE MOISTURE RESISTANT GWB AT WINDOW SILLS, UNLESS OTHERWISE SCHEDULED TO RECEIVE NON-GWB FINISH. PROVIDE MOISTURE RESISTANT GWB ON SINK WALLS IN RESTROOMS, KITCHENS, KITCHENETTES (KIT), AND JANITOR'S CLOSETS (ALL WALLS TOUCHING MOP SINKS), AND WALLS IN PULIC RESTROOMS SCHEDULED TO RECEIVE CERAMIC TILE 2SEAL ALL GWB INTERIOR PARTITIONS AT FULL PERIMETER AND AT PERIMETER OF NON-FIRE STOPPED CUTOUTS & PENETRATIONS WITH ACOUSTICAL SEALANT. 3PROVIDE HEAD OF WALL FIRE RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEM PER "TYPICAL DEFLECTION TRACK" DETAIL FOR RATED PARTITIONS OR PARTITIONS FOR SMOKE ENCLOSURE. 4SEE CODE PLANS FOR RATINGS UP UP UP NON-RATED 1 HOUR RATED 2 HOUR RATED 3 HOUR RATED LOBBY 15000 SF10 1500 AREA NAME AREA TOTAL OCCUPANTS OCCUPANT LOAD FACTOR TRAVEL DISTANCE LINE TO EXIT TRAVEL DISTANCE PATH-SEE SCHEDULE FOR DISTANCE E-1 E-2 624 SF 31 LEARNING CENTER 20 1061 SF 53 CLASSROOM 20 1029 SF 51 CLASSROOM 20 98 SF 1 PRINCIPAL FACULTY 150 98 SF 1 DIR CLIN ED 150 131 SF 1 COORD OFFICE 150 231 SF 1 FACULTY & STAFF BREAK RM 150 109 SF 1 PRINCIPAL FACULTY 150 104 SF 1 PRINCIPAL FACULTY 150 104 SF 1 INSTRUCTIONAL FACULTY 150 98 SF 1 ADMISSIONS COORDINATOR 150 103 SF 1 IT CLO 150 100 SF 1 OFFICE 4 150 100 SF 1 OFFICE 3 150 100 SF 1 OFFICE 2 150 100 SF 1 OFFICE 1 150 109 SF 1 IP EXAM 4 150 108 SF 1 IP EXAM 3 150 109 SF 1 IP EXAM 2 150 110 SF IP EXAM 1 106 SF 1 SM GROUP/RELAX 150 183 SF 12 CONF 15 191 SF 1 SITTING AREA 150 526 SF 3 SITTING AREA 150 128 SF 1 PROGRAM ACTIVITY CTR 150 568 SF 3 WAITING/RECPT 150 E-1 E-3 EXIST ELEV E-4 LOBBY 100 CORR / STAIR 122 E-5 445 SF 22 LEARNER BREAK ROOM 20 154 SF 3 LOCKERS 50 51 SF 1 IT 300 142 SF 1 LAUNDRY/STOR 300 179 SF 1 SIM STOR 300 1148 SF 57 CLASSROOM 20 109 SF 1 PAT EXAM RM 150108 SF 1 PAT EXAM RM 150109 SF 1 PAT EXAM RM 150 111 SF 1 PAT EXAM RM 150 109 SF 1 PAT EXAM RM 150 109 SF 1 PAT EXAM RM 150 159 SF 1 READY RM 150 48 SF 1 CONTROL 150 150 SF 1 PROCEDURE ROOM 150 213 SF 1 PATIENT RM 150 53 SF 1 PATIENT TLT 150 56 SF 1 CONTROL 150 380 SF 2 OPERATING ROOM 150 318 SF 2 ADMIN ASST / RECEPTION 150 86 SF 1 MED DIR 150 164 SF 1 DDE OFFICE 150 162 SF 1 PD OFFICE 150 1045 SF 52 CLASSROOM 20 710 SF 35 LEARNING CTR 20 270 SF 1 RECEPTION WAITING 150 267 SF 13 CONTROL 20 63 SF 1 MED STOR 150 92 SF 6 SM GROUP 15 109 SF 7 SM GROUP 15 HALL 229 E-6 E-9 E-7 E-8 E-11 E-10 DEBRIEF 219 CORRIDOR 228 ELEV LOBBY 200 ELEVATOR STAIR STAIR DN EXISTING BUILDING INFORMATION: Existing Occupancy Classification: Primary Use Group: • B Group (Higher Education) Secondary Uses: • Storage (Ancillary storage Groups S-1 and S-2). Construction type:Type IIA • Existing 1974 Building • Building rating and classification per BSB Design Permit Set dated 9/8/20 Existing Sprinkler and Fire Alarm Systems: • Building is fully sprinklered. Existing Floor Areas (obtained from Base Drawing) Overall Building: Main level=29,644 sf Second Level=29,644 sf Total= 59,288 sf total Existing Floor Areas (Permitting Area) Main level=9,197 sf Second Level=11,648 sf Total= 20,845 sf total PROPOSED OCCUPANCY USES: Note: Existing occupancies currently in use on main level shall be considered a “Change of Occupancy”. Proposed Second Level, shall remain as B-Business Occupancy and is NOT considered a “Change of Occupancy” Primary Occupancies B-Business: • Main level; Business (Higher Education) B Business • Second Level: Business (Higher Education). A3 Assembly (classrooms with 50+ occupants) Accessory Occupancies Various Storage Areas: • S-1 Occupancy and S-2 Occupancy. Existing Building Code: The proposed Total Work area of is greater than 50% of the Aggregate area of the building. Therefore, work is classified as an Alteration Level 3. Additions, system extensions, new work shall comply with NYS Building Code. BC506.2.4 Mixed-occupancy, multistory buildings.Each story of a mixed-occupancy building with more than one story above grade plane shall individually comply with the applicable requirements of Section BC508.1. For buildings with more than three stories above grade plane, the total building area shall be such that the aggregate sum of the ratios of the actual area of each story divided by the allowable area of such stories, determined in accordance with Equation BC5-3 based on the applicable provisions of Section BC508.1, shall not exceed three. Chapter 7: Fire and Smoke Protection Features BC1023.1 General. Interior exit stairwaysandrampsshall be enclosed and lead directly to the exterior of the building or shall be extended to the exterior of the building withanexit passagewayconforming to the requirements of Section BC1024, except as permitted in Section BC1028.1. BC1023.2 Construction.Enclosures forinterior exit stairwaysandrampsshall be constructed as fire barriersin accordance with Section BC707 orhorizontalassembli esconstructed in accordance with Section BC711, or both. Interior exit stairwayandrampenclosures shall have afire-resistance ratingof not less than 2 hours where connecting four stories or more and not less than1 hour where connecting less than four stories. The number of stories connected by theinterior exit stairwaysor rampsshall include anybasements,but not any mezzanines.Interior exit stairwaysandrampsshall have afire resistance ratingnot less than the floor assembly penetrated but need not exceed 2 hours. Section 707: Fire Barriers BC707.3.1 Shaft enclosures.Thefire-resistance ratingof thefire barrierseparating building areas from a shaft shall comply with Section BC713.4. 1 hour rated is required BC707.3.7 Incidental uses.Thefire barrierseparating incidental uses from other spaces in the building shall have afire-resistance ratingof not less than that indicated in Table BC509. No rating required Section 708: Fire Partitions BC708.1 General.The following wall assemblies shall comply with this section. 3. Corridor walls as required by Section BC1020.1. No rating required 4. Elevator lobby separation as required by Section BC3006.2. No rating required BC3006.2 Hoistway opening protection required.Elevator hoistway door openings shall be protected in accordance with Section BC3006.3 where an elevator hoistway connects more than three stories, is required to be enclosed within a shaft enclosure in accordance with Section BC712.1.1 and any of the following conditions apply: Note: Elevator Lobby Protection is not required since we only connect 2-stories). Chapter 10 –Means of Egress BC1004.1.1 Cumulative occupant loads.Where the path of egress travel includes intervening rooms, areas or spaces, cumulativeoccupant loadsshall be determined in accordance with this section. Table 1004.1.2 –Minimum Floor Area per Person: Mercantile 60 gsf Business150 gsf Storage and Mechanical Rooms300 gsf Classroom Area 20 net Lower Level: • Assembly (Learning areas) 2712 nsf 181 occupants • Business (Higher Education); 2531 sf 17 occupants • Classroom 932 sf 47 occupants • TOTAL occupants = 245 occupants Second Level: • Assembly (Learning areas) 2,001 nsf 134 occupants • Locker Room 198 sf 3 occupants • Business (Higher Education) 2959 sf 20 occupants • Classroom (service portion); 1348 sf 68 occupants • Storage; 458 sf 3 occupants • TOTAL occupants = 227 occupants Total Building Occupants = 472 occupants BC1005.3.1 Stairways. The capacity, in inches, of means of egress stairways shall be calculated by multiplying the occupant load served by such stairways by a means of egress capacity factor of 0.3 inch (7.6 mm) per occupant. Where stairways serve more than one story, only the occupant load of each story considered individually shall be used in calculating the required capacity of the stairways serving that story. BC1005.3.2 Other egress components. The capacity, in inches, of means of egress components other than stairways shall be calculated by multiplying the occupant load served by such component by a means of egress capacity factor of 0.2 inch (5.1 mm) per occupant. Each 3’-0”door provides approximately 34”clear/ .2 = 170 occupants. Each 44”door provides approximately 42”clear/ .2 = 210 occupants. Each pair of 3’-0”doors providesapproximately 68”clear/ .2 = 340 occupants. BC1005.5 Distribution of minimum width and required capacity.Where more than one exit, or access to more than one exit, is required, the means of egress shall be configured such that the loss of any one exit, or access to one exit, shall not reduce the available capacity or width to less than 50 percent of the required capacity or width. Section 1006: Number of Exits and Exit Access Doorways BC1006.2.1 Egress based on occupant load and common path of egresstravel distance.Twoexitsorexit access doorwaysfrom any space shall be provided where the designoccupant loador thecommon path of egress traveldistance exceeds the values listed in Table BC1006.2.1. Table 1006.2.1 (Common Path of Travel): A, E and M occupancies =75’-0” B and S occupancies = 100’-0” BC1006.2.2 Egress based on use.The numbers of exits or access to exits shall be provided in the uses described in Sections BC1006.2.2.1 through BC1006.2.2.5. Section 1007: Exit and Exit Access Doorway Configuration BC1007.1.1 Two exits or exit access doorways.Where two exits, exit access doorways, exit access stairways or ramps, or any combination thereof, are required from any portion of the exit access, they shall be placed a distance apart equal to not less than one-half of the length of the maximum overall diagonal dimension of the building or area to be served measured in a straight line between them. Interlocking or scissor stairways shall be counted as one exit stairway. Exception #2. Where a building is equipped throughout with an automatic sprinkler system in accordance with Section BC903.3.1.1 or BC903.3.1.2, the separation distance shall be not less than one-third ofthe length of the maximum overall diagonal dimension of the area served.. Section 1009: Accessible Means of Egress BC1009.1 Accessible means of egress required.Accessible means of egressshall comply with this section.Accessiblespaces shall be provided with not less than oneaccessible means ofegress.Where more than onemeans of egressare required by Section BC1006.2 or BC1006.3 from anyaccessiblespace, eachaccessibleportion of the space shall be served by not less than twoaccessiblemeans of egress. Section 1017: Exit Travel Distance Table BC1017.2 Exit Access Travel Distance: Occupancies A, E, M and S-1 (sprinklered) =250 feet Section 1020: Corridors Table BC1020.1 Corridor Fire-Resistance Rating: Occupancies A, B, E, M and S (sprinklered) =0 hours Table BC2902.1 Minimum Number of Required Plumbing Fixtures: B Occupancy: Men: WC: 1 per 25 for the 1st50; 1per 50 for the remainder above 50; Lav: 1 per 40 for the 1st80; 1 per 80 for the remainder above 80. Women: WC: 1 per 25 for the 1st 50; 1per 50 for the remainder above 50; Lav: 1 per 40 for the 1st 80; 1 per 80 for the remainder above 80. • Business; 472 occupants • Men WC = 6 • Women WC =6 • Men Lav =4 • Women Lav = 4 PROJECT NORTH 123456 123456 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 REGULATORY PLAN A-003 DECEMBER 18, 2020 220157.00 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 FOR CONSTRUCTION SCALE: NO SCALE A6 GRAPHIC KEY SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" B1 1st FLOOR REGULATORY PLAN SCHEDULE-TRAVEL DISTANCE PATHS PATHLENGTHCOMMENTS E-163'-9"300'-0" MAX E-2130'-5"300'-0" MAX E-350'-3"100'-0" MAX E-485'-9"300'-0" MAX E-550'-3"100'-0" MAX E-657'-4"100'-0" MAX E-780'-3"300'-0" MAX E-859'-1"300'-0" MAX E-949'-6"100'-0" MAX E-10114'-6"300'-0" MAX E-11105'-11"300'-0" MAX REF TO BSB FOR CONSTRUCTION SET FOR ADDITIONAL INFO SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" B4 2nd FLOOR REGULATORY PLAN SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" A1 CODE SUMMARY 11-7-21REV 1 1 161718 15.119 C B A D E F E.9 15 REMOVE ALL PLYWOOD AND GWB PARTITIONS, CABINETRY, CEILINGS AND FLOORING IN THIS AREA. EXIST ELEVATOR TO REMAIN EXIST STAIR TO REMAIN EXIST STAIR TO REMAIN DN EXISTING STEEL POST TO REMAIN, REMOVE ENCLOSURE. 8'-8" +/1 1 ' 7 " + / 9 1/2"28'-2 1/2"29'-0"29'-0"29'-0" 2 8 ' 7 " 2 9 ' 0 " 2 9 ' 0 " 2 9 ' 0 " 2 7 ' 1 " 1 ' 1 1 " R1 R1R1 R1 R2 R2 R2 R1 R1 R1 R1 R3 R4 EXISTING FACADE REMOVAL, SEE LANDLORD/BLDG CORE & SHELL DOCUMENTS R10 R10 EXISTING WALL REMOVAL, SEE LANDLORD/BLDG CORE & SHELL DOCUMENTS 7'-4 1/4" APPROX LOCATION FOR MOVABLE PARTITION. SEE STRUCT DWGS FOR POST FOUNDAITONS. 4 0 ' 6 " 6 1 / 2 " EXISTING FACADE REMOVAL, SEE LANDLORD/BLDG CORE & SHELL DOCUMENTS 9 ' 1 0 1 / 8 " 8 ' 7 1 / 4 " 1 0 ' 6 5 / 8 " DOOR & OPENING BY LANDLORD. 16'-5 1/8"12'-6 7/8" SEE STRUCT DWGS CUT AND REPAIR FOR POST FOUNDAITONS.SEE STRUCT DWGS CUT AND REPAIR FOR POST FOUNDAITONS. R10 R10 161718 15.1 C B A D E F E.9 15 8 ' 0 " ( V I F ) 9 1/2"28'-2 1/2"29'-0"29'-0" 2 8 ' 7 " 2 9 ' 0 " 2 9 ' 0 " 2 9 ' 0 " 2 7 ' 1 " 1 ' 1 1 " R2 R1 R5 R3 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R5 R5R5 R4 R4 R1 EXIST STAIR EXIST ELECT CLO TO REMAIN. R5 R9 R9 R1 R4 R4 4'-1" R1 R1 R1 R1 R6 R7 LINE OF EXISTING GWB SKYLIGHT WELL ABOVE. LINE OF EXISTING GWB SKYLIGHT WELL ABOVE. LINE OF EXISTING GWB SKYLIGHT WELL ABOVE. LINE OF EXISTING GWB SKYLIGHT WELL ABOVE. LINE OF EXISTING GWB SKYLIGHT WELL ABOVE. EXISTING ELEVATOR OPENING FOR STAIR BY LANDLORD. R8 R8 EXISTING OPENING, INFILL BY LANDLORD / BLDG OWNER. REMOVE FLOOR FINISH, PREP FLOOR FOR SCHEDULED FINISH. CABINETS TO REMAIN. REMOVE COUNTERTOP, PREP FOR SCHEDULED FINISH. CONC AS SPECIFIED. PROVIDE VAPOR BARRIER IF ONE CURRENTLY EXISTS. LAP WITH EXIST AND TAPE. PROVIDE 4x4 -W1.4xW1.4 WWF SET ON BOLSTERS 1 1/2" FROM TOP. EXIST SLAB ON GRADE. PROVIDE CRUSHER RUN, COMPACT TO 95% PROCTOR DENSITY. SAWCUT EXISTING REINFORCED CONC SLAB . DO NOT OVERCUT CORNERS (TYP). SANITARY PIPING WITH SAND BEDDING. AT CONC INFILL LOCATIONS. MAINTAIN POSITIVE SLOPE. DO NOT UNDERMINE 6" BEARING LEDGE. SCORE 1" DEEP CJ IN SHORT DIRECTION @ 4'-0" oc MAX AND AT EACH CORNER. REPAIR VB IF DAMAGED BY CUTTING. MIN 6" D E P T H + / 4 " V I F M A T C H E X I S T 12" LONG X 1/2" DIA SMOOTH DOWELS, SET 4" INTO GREASED HOLE AT 18"oc. REMOVAL NOTES: APPROX AREA SHOWN FOR FLOOR SLAB REMOVALS. COORDINATE WITH PLUMBING DRAWINGS FOR EXACT LOCATION & EXTENTS OF UNDERSLAB PIPING. PATCH SLAB SEE DETAIL A2 / AD-101. 1. COORDINATE NEW PENETRATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL, HEATING AND PLUMBING. VERIFY LOCATION AND SIZE OF MISC SMALL CONDUIT AND PIPE PENETRATIONS W/ MECHANICAL, PLUMBING & ELECTRICAL SUBCONTRACTORS. REFER TO MEP/FP DWGS FOR PATCHING REQUIREMENTS. 2. REMOVE ALL WINDOW TREATMENTS, SALVAGE, STORE AND RE-INSTALL AFTER CONSTRUCTION. 3. REMOVE ALL FLOOR TRANSITIONS IN REMOVAL WORK SCOPE ARE. PATCH AS REQUIRED TO PREPARE SLAB FOR FLOOR FINISH, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. 4. REMOVE ALL WALL BASE IN WORK SCOPE AREA. PREP WALLS TO REMAIN FOR SCHEDULED BASE. 5. REMOVE ALL WALL SIGNS, TACK BOARDS AND ART WORK THOUGHOUT WORK AREAS AND TURN OVER TO COLLEGE. PROJECT NORTH 123456 123456 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 REMOVAL PLANS AD-101 DECEMBER 18, 2020 220157.00 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 FOR CONSTRUCTION SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" B1 1ST FLOOR REMOVAL PLAN SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" B4 2ND FLOOR REMOVAL PLAN KEYED NOTES-DEMOLITION NUMBERCOMMENT R1REMOVE WALL IN IT'S ENTIRETY FROM FLOOR TO STRUCTURE ABOVE. PATCH END OF WALLS THAT ARE TO REMAIN. R2REMOVE DOOR(S) IN THEIR ENTIRETY. R3REMOVE STOREFRONT DOOR AND SIDELIGHTS IN IT'S ENTIRETY. R4REMOVE COLUMN ENCLOSURE IN IT'S ENTIRETY. R5REMOVE WINDOW IN IT'S ENTIRETY. R6REMOVE WINDOW IN IT'S ENTIRETY. SALVAGE FOR RE-USE. SEE PLAN FOR LOCATION. R7REMOVE FLOOR SLAB FOR STAIR INSTALLATION. REFER TO STRUCTURAL DWGS. R8SLAB REMOVAL FOR MECHANICAL, REFER TO STRUCTURAL AND MEP DWGS. R9REMOVE WALL AS REQUIRED TO INSTALL NEW DOOR AS SCHEDULED. R10SAW CUT SLAB AND EXCAVATE FOR NEW UNDERSLAB PIPING AND REMOVALS (SEE PLUMBING DWGS FOR SIZES, LOCATIONS AND DEPTHS). SEE DTL A2/AD-101. COORD EXTENTS OF REMOVALS WITH PLUMBING CONTRACTOR AND EXISTING CONDITIONS. DO NOT UNDERMINE EXISTING FOUNDATIONS. SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" A2 SLAB ON GRADE-CUT/PATCH DTL SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" A4 REMOVAL AND REPAIR NOTES REF. UP REF. UP W D REF. 161718 15.119 C B A D E F E.9 15 EXIST ELEVATOR 100 121 110 111 115 112 115A 131 101 102 103 104 117 118 119 124 125 126 120 127 132 133 130 OPEN TO ABOVE NEIGHBORING BUILDING 134 UP 108 128 129 29'-0"29'-0"29'-0"29'-0" EXIST STAIR (NO WORK) EXIST STAIR (NO WORK) EXIST TENANT SPACE (NO WORK) EXIST TENANT SPACE (NO WORK) EXIST COMMON SPACE (NO WORK) EXIST COMMON SPACE (NO WORK) 107 RECEPTION 109 114 8'-8" 28'-7" 29'-0" 29'-0" 29'-0" 29'-0" EXIST STAIR (NO WORK) 1'-11" EXISTING PARKING GARAGE 9 1/2" 9'-6"4 3/4" DN 106 122A 122 113 COL CENTER TO FACE OF WALL. 74'-1" 48'-3 3/4" 41'-8" DIM FROM COL CENTER LINE. DIM FROM COL CENTER LINE. 48'-10 1/4" DIM FROM COL CENTER LINE. 17'-9 3/4"18'-0" 161718 15.1 C B A D E F E.9 15 240 241 242 238 235234 239 233 231 202A 202B 225 223 226 227 224 222 221 210 208 212213214 217216215 219 207 206 205 204 203 202 EXIST STAIR EXIST STAIR EXIST ELEVATOR 200 211 228 230 220 209 239A OPEN TO BELOW 144'-7" 28'-7" 29'-0" 29'-0" 29'-0" 29'-0" 1'-11" 4'-1" 85'-7 3/4" (EXISTING WALL TO EXISTING WALL) 141'-9" (GWB WALL TO GWB WALL) EXISTING CMU WALL EXISTING GWB WALL. 9 1/2"28'-2 1/2"29'-0"29'-0" A-402 D3 PROJECT NORTH 123456 123456 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 WALL LAYOUT PLANS FOR REF A-100 DECEMBER 18, 2020 220157.00 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 FOR CONSTRUCTION SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" A1 FIRST FLOOR PLAN SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" A4 SECOND FLOOR PLAN UP REF. UP REF. W D REF. 161718 15.119 C B A D E F EXIST ELEVATOR LOBBY 100 JAN 121 IP EXAM 2 110 IP EXAM 3 111 LEARNING CENTER 115 IP EXAM 4 112 SM GROUP/RELAX 115A CONF 131 OFFICE 1 101 OFFICE 2 102 OFFICE 3 103 OFFICE 4 104 ADMISSIONS COORDINATOR 117 ALL GENDER BATHROOM 118 WOMENS 119 INSTRUCTIONAL FACULTY 124 PRINCIPAL FACULTY 125 PRINCIPAL FACULTY 126 MENS RM 120 FACULTY & STAFF BREAK RM 127 CLASSROOM 132 CLASSROOM 133 PRINCIPAL FACULTY 130 OPEN TO ABOVE NEIGHBORING BUILDING CAPACITY: 18 STUDENTS AV CLO 134 ALL GENDER BATHROOM 108 COORD OFFICE 128 DIR CLIN ED 129 Scale Area A-402 B4 A-401 A1 106B 101 102 103 106C 104 124 118 119 126 125 130 129 128 127 120 134133A132 29'-0"29'-0"29'-0"29'-0" EXIST STAIR (NO WORK) EXIST STAIR (NO WORK) EXIST TENANT SPACE (NO WORK) EXIST TENANT SPACE (NO WORK) EXIST COMMON SPACE (NO WORK) EXIST COMMON SPACE (NO WORK) 4 A 4 A PROGRAM ACTIVITY CTR 107 5'-10" RECEPT IP EXAM 1 109 109 110 111 112 CLEAR 5'-6" IT CLO 114 E.9 28'-7" 29'-0" 29'-0" 29'-0" 29'-0" EXIST STAIR (NO WORK) 10'-4 1/2" +/- 37'-5" 6" 1'-4" 1'-11" EXISTING PARKING GARAGE 15 9 1/2" 10'-0" DN 3'-3" 5'-0" WAITING/RECPT 106 SITTING AREA 122A 3'-0" 4'-3" 107 SITTING AREA 113 CORR / STAIR 122 122 HALL 116 100 114 105 121 117 1 MOP SINK 5'-6" 108 CLO 106A 106A 40'-0" (WALL TO WALL) 4" 2 A 9" 10'-3" 17'-0" 1'-0" 115C CLEAR 5'-6" DF&BF 4 A 2 A EAST STATE STREET -"THE COMMONS" 115A BL1 115B BL3 11'-2"10'-7" 2 A ELEV LOBBY 105 131 2 A 2 A 1:48 SLOPE 1:20 6 6 FLAT 2 -9 2 -9 2 -9 2 -9 2 -9 2 -9 2 -9 4'-0" 5'-0" 6'-6" 1:20 SLOPE FLAT 2 A 8'-10" 5'-0" ALUM STOREFRONT. 4'-0" 2'-0" 2 -82 -8 2 A 2 A 133B A-101 A1TYP 5'-10" 1'-10" 7'-4 1/4" +/BL8 26'-3 5/8"28'-6" TEMP1 10'-10 1/4" EXIST FIRE WALL. 7'-4 1/4" 40'-6" (COL CENTER TO COL CENTER) 6 1/2" 4 A 3 C FURN & EQUIP TO BE FUTURE PURCHASE FURN & EQUIP TO BE FUTURE PURCHASE FURN & EQUIP TO BE FUTURE PURCHASE FURN & EQUIP TO BE FUTURE PURCHASE FURN & EQUIP TO BE FUTURE PURCHASE INTERPROFESSIONAL CLINIC FEC 5 C HALL 123 EXIST CONC COLUMN. 161718 15.1 C B A D E F A-403 C3 WOMENS 240 MENS 241 ALL GENDER TLT 242 FACULTY & STAFF TLT 238 IT 235 LAUNDRY/STOR 234 LEARNER BREAK ROOM 239 SIM STOR 233 CLASSROOM 231 SM GROUP 202A SM GROUP 202B PROCEDURE ROOM 225 PATIENT RM 223 CONTROL 226 READY RM 227 PATIENT TLT 224 CONTROL 222 OPERATING ROOM 221 CONTROL 210 RECEPTION WAITING 208 PAT EXAM RM 212 PAT EXAM RM 213 PAT EXAM RM 214 PAT EXAM RM 217 PAT EXAM RM 216 PAT EXAM RM 215 DEBRIEF 219 PD OFFICE 207 DDE OFFICE 206 MED DIR 205 ADMIN ASST / RECEPTION 204 CLASSROOM 203 LEARNING CTR 202 EXIST STAIR EXIST STAIR 207206 205 203B203A202 209 210B 210A 219A 221 222 223 225 227 226 235 239A 234 218 217B216B215B 215A 216A 217A 212A213A214A 220 208B 208A 212B213B 214B 224 A-401 E1 EXIST ELEVATOR 240 230 ELEV LOBBY 200 HALL 211 CORRIDOR 228 CORR 230 MED STOR 220 TLT 209 A-402 C1 A-402 C2 2 A 4 A 2 A 2 A 2 A4 A 4 A 4 A4 A 4 A4 A 4 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 2 A 7 A +/- 6'-7"11'-0"15'-9" LOCKERS 239A OPEN TO BELOW E.9 144'-7" 28'-7" 29'-0" 29'-0" 29'-0" 29'-0" 13'-8" 23'-8" 27'-1" 1'-11" 15 4'-1" +/C L E A R 5 ' 0 " 3 ' 0 " (110) EXISTING 12"x12" (5 HIGH) LOCKERS (40) NEW HALL 201 HALL 243 HALL 218 HALL 236 JAN 237 1 1 1 29'-0"29'-0"29'-0" 9 1/2" ELECT RM 232 232 DN 4 4 5 C3 BOTTLE FILLER 40'-2" 4 A 5'-0" 6'-0" +/233 219B BL2 BL2A BL2A EOS 6'-5 223/256" 231A 22 A BL4 BL2 BL1 2 A 204 9"9"4'-8 3/4" DF&BF 6 ' 4 " 1 BL2A 8 ' 0 " BL3 241 242 238 237 EXIST ELECT CLO 3 5 ' 0 " 201 2 ' 0 " 3'-0" 202A 202B 231B HALL 229 2 A 2 A 5 ' 0 " 1'-4"27'-5"1'-7" 4 A 5 C 5 C 4 A 6 3 2 -9 2 -9 2 -9 2 -8 2 -9 5 A 2 -8 EMS RACK A-101 A1 TYP 5 A +/- 6'-0" 3 1 / 4 " 3 1 / 4 " 8 " 2'-8" +/- 2'-8" MATCH EXIST DIM. A-101 A5 TEMP2 TEMP3 TEMP4 TEMP5 1 0 ' 3 " + / 1 2 ' 6 " +/- 13'-0"13'-6 1/2" 1'-4" 2 -14 2 -9 2 -9 2 -9 FEC SEE ELEV D3/A-402 A-101 A5 EXIST CONC COLUMN. EXIST CMU FIREWALL. 17 E 9 " 9 " 6"6"CORNER BEAD, TYP AT ALL EXPOSED CORNERS. EXIST COLUMN. EXIST FIREPROOFING. 2 1/2" MTL STUDS, 20 GA. 5/8" TYPE 'X' GWB. NOTES: ADJUST STUD/GWB ENCLOSURE AS REQUIRED TO BYPASS EXISTING FIREPROOFING. MAINTAIN SMALLEST/NARROWEST DIMENSIONS POSSIBLE. EXIST WINDOW MULLION GASKET WITH ADHESIVE ON BOTH SIDES. 5/8" GWB 3 5/8" METAL STUD SEE PLAN FOR PARTITION TYPE. FIELD VERIFY RECESS DEPTH PRIOR TO SUBMITTAL OF PRODUCT DATA (ADJUST ALUM CLOSURE AS REQ'D) BELOW FO SILL 5/8" GWB 3 5/8" METAL STUD GASKET WITH ADHESIVE ON BOTH SIDES. SEE PLAN FOR PARTITION TYPE. PROJECT NORTH 123456 123456 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 FLOOR PLANS A-101 DECEMBER 18, 2020 220157.00 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 FOR CONSTRUCTION SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" B1 FIRST FLOOR PLAN SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" B4 SECOND FLOOR PLAN KEYED NOTES-PLAN NUMBERCOMMENT 1TEMPORARY PARTITION TO UNDERSIDE OF CEILING (PTN TYPE 2B) WITH TEMPORARY DOOR WITH ITHACA COLLEGE WIFI ACCESS CONTROL LOCK. 2ALIGN FACE OF PARTITION WITH FACE OF PARTITION OR COLUMN ENCLOSURE. 3ALIGN NEW PARTITION WITH CORNER OF EXISTING WALLS. PROVIDE GWB CONTROL JOINT IF REQ'D. 4EXISTING WINDOW TO REMAIN. 5EXISTING WINDOW RELOCATED. 6PRINTER / COPIER LOCATION. EQUIP BY COLLEGE. COORD POWER AND DATA. SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" A1 PLAN DTL -TYP COL ENCLOSURE SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" A5 PLAN DETAIL -MULLION TO WINDOW PROJECT WORK AREA: LIMITS OF WORK AREA ARE DEFINED BY OWNER'S TENANT WALLS AND AREAS OUTSIDE TENANT WALLS REQUIRED ACCESS TO COMPLETE THE WORK. REVIEW ACCESS REQ'D TO ALL AREAS OUTSIDE OF OWNERS TENANT WALLS WITH OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF WORK. 161718 15.1 C B A D E F E.9 15 28'-7" 29'-0" 29'-0" 29'-0" 27'-1" 1'-11" 9 1/2"28'-2 1/2"29'-0"29'-0" HI-POINT RIDGE DOAS-1DOAS-2 HP-1 HP-4 HP-2HP-3 HI-POINT RIDGE EXISTING SKYLIGHT. EXISTING SKYLIGHT. EXISTING SKYLIGHT. EXISTING SKYLIGHT. SLOPESLOPE SLOPESLOPE SLOPE SLOPE SLOPE EXISTING ROOF HATCH. CRICKET. EXISTING SKYLIGHT. 12x12 ROOF CURB, SEE MECH DWGS. DRYER VENT, SEE MECH DWGS. EXHAUST FAN, SEE MECH DWGS. NOTE: Protect EPDM roofing as necessary during the progress of work. Repair roofing with material to match existing where new openings have been cut as necessary to maintain watertight performance. Provide all flashing accessories and materials as required to seal new HVAC curb and utility penetrations. Spud back roofing and install new cricket insulation (1/2”per foot slope) on high side of equipment where indicated. Fully adhere all new insulation and roof membrane materials. Coordinate all work with existing warranty holder to maintain any in place warranty coverage of roofing system. OPENING INTO EXISTING ROOF DECK. EPDM ROOFING. EXISTING INSULTION. EXIST ROOF DECK. EPDM FLASHING. 3/4" CDX PLYWD. SEE MECH FOR PENETRATIONS. 2x12 PT CURB. 2" RIGID INSUL. ATTACHMENT ANGLES (3 PER SIDE) SEALANT. CAP BY PLUMB CONTRACTOR. LAP SEALANT AT LIP OF PIPE. MEMBRANE FLASHING . PLUMBING VENT, SEE PLUMB DWGS. EXISTING ROOF DECK. WOOD BLOCKING AS REQUIRED EXISTING EPDM ROOF SYSTEM. SEALANT. EXIST EPDM ROOFING. EXIST INSULTION. EXIST ROOF DECK. MECH UNIT, SEE MECH DWGS. PRE-FAB INSULATED CURB WITH WOOD NAILER BY MECH CONTRACTOR. S E E M E C H D W G S 1 ' 0 " M I N FULLY ADHERED EPDM BASE FLASHING. SEE STRUCTURAL DWGS. SEALANT. PROJECT NORTH 123456 123456 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 ROOF PLAN A-102 DECEMBER 18, 2020 220157.00 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 FOR CONSTRUCTION SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" B4 PARTIAL ROOF PLAN SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" A4 SECTION -MECH CURB PENETRATIONS SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" A6 SECTION -PIPE VENT DETAIL SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" A3 SECTION -MECH CURB DTL 161718 15.119 C B A D E F 601 AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 9'-0" AFF 602 AT 9'-0" AFF 602 AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 9'-0" AFF EXIST STAIR (NO WORK) EXIST STAIR (NO WORK) EXIST TENANT SPACE (NO WORK) EXIST TENANT SPACE (NO WORK) EXIST COMMON SPACE (NO WORK) EXIST COMMON SPACE (NO WORK) EXIST ELEVATOR GWB AT 8'-0" AFF 601 AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 9'-0" AFF OPEN 601 AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 13'-0" AFF E.9 15 601 AT 9'-0" AFF EQEQ EQ EQ 601 AT 9'-0" AFF EQEQ EQ 130 128 127 121 120 119 118 117 124 122 115 132 133 113 114 104 103 102 131 115A 112 111 110 106 109 107 100 108 9 1/2"28'-2 1/2"29'-0"29'-0"29'-0" 28'-7" 29'-0" 29'-0" 29'-0" 27'-1" 1'-11" EQEQ EQ EQ 601 AT 10'-0" AFF EQEQ EQ 129 126 125 601 AT 9'-0" AFF EQEQ EQ 101 EQEQ EQEQ EQ EQ EQ EQ D3 A-551 GWB AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 10'-0" AFF 602 AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 13'-0" AFF 601 AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 9'-0" AFF GWB AT 8'-10" AFF GWB AT 8'-10" AFF GWB AT 8'-10" AFF 601 AT 10'-0" AFF PAINT EXPOSED STAIR 905 GWB AT 15'-0" AFF GWB AT 8'-4" AFF GWB AT 9'-0" AFF GWB AT 8'-10" AFF 2 -2 EQ EQ EQ 105 EQ 2'-2" EQ EQ A3 A-103 2'-0" GWB AT 14'-0" AFF +/- 1'-3 1/2" 2 -152 -15 123 116 122A 161718 15.1 C B A D E F 601 AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 8'-0" AFF 601 AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 8'-6" AFF 601 AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 9'-0" AFF EXIST CEILING (NO WORK) EXIST CEILING (NO WORK) EXIST CEILING (NO WORK) EXIST CEILING (NO WORK) EXIST STAIR (NO WORK) EXIST STAIR (NO WORK) GWB AT 8'-0" AFF GWB AT 8'-0" AFF EXIST ELEV 601 AT 10'-0" AFF 601 AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 9'-0" AFF E.9 15 601 AT 10'-0" AFF 601 AT 9'-0" AFF EQEQ EQEQ EQEQ 9 1/2"28'-2 1/2"29'-0"29'-0" 28'-7" 29'-0" 29'-0" 29'-0" 27'-1" 1'-11" 221 201 204 203 202 206 205 207 ? 208 210 219 222 223 225 228 228 231 233 239A 239 240 241 242 238 237235 234 202A 202B 230 211 215 216 217 212 213214 220 209 224 243 EQ EQ EQ 227 218 601 AT 9'-0" AFF EQ EQ EQEQ EQEQ EQ EQ EQEQ 1'-0" 6'-0" 1'-0" 1'-0"20'-0"1'-0" ALT #1: VIRTUAL SKYLIGHT, MOUNT AT 11'-0" AFF. EXIST SKYLIGHT EXIST SKYLIGHT EXIST SKYLIGHT EXIST SKYLIGHT EXIST SKYLIGHT 8'-0" 601 AT 10'-0" AFF GWB AT 12'-0" AFF GWB AT 12'-0" AFF GWB AT 10'-0" AFF GWB AT 12'-0" AFF GWB AT 12'-0" AFF GWB AT 10'-0" AFF GWB AT 10'-0" AFF GWB AT 10'-0" AFF EQ GWB AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 9'-0" AFF GWB AT 9'-0" AFF GWB AT 9'-0" AFF GWB AT 9'-0" AFF GWB AT 9'-0" AFF GWB AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 9'-0" AFF EQ EQ EQ 601 AT 10'-0" AFF EQ EQ EQ 601 AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 10'-0" AFF 601 AT 10'-0" AFF 601 AT 10'-0" AFF EQ EQ 601 AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 8'-6" AFF 4'-5" 4'-5" 601 AT 10'-0" AFF EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ 601 AT 9'-0" AFF A5 A-103 _________ 601 AT 9'-0" AFF E5 A-551 GWB AT 7'-2" AFF A4 A-103 A4 A-103 601 AT 9'-0" AFF GWB AT 9'-0" AFF GWB AT 9'-0" AFF GWB AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 9'-0" AFF GWB AT 9'-0" AFF GWB AT 9'-0" AFF GWB AT 9'-0" AFF 200 2 -152 -15 2 -15 2 -15 NOTE: EXISTING SKYLIGHT GWB BULKHEADS: EXIST ELEVATION +/-10'-0"AFF. EXTEND BULKHEAD DOWN TO ELEVATION PER RCP, BRACE AS REQ'D. EXIST MTL DECK TYP 6" REFER TO RCP CORNER BEAD (TYPICAL). REFER TO PLANS FOR PTN TYPES. CEILING CONSTRUCTION (REFER TO PLANS FOR TYPES). REFER TO RCP NOTE: TYPICAL FOR BULKHEADS 6'-0" OR LESS IN WIDTH. DO NOT EXTEND TO DECK 3 5/8" MTL STUDS x 20GA @ 16"OC WITH 5/8" GWB EACH SIDE. REFER TO PLANS FOR CEILING HEIGHTS CORNER BEAD (TYPICAL). REFER TO PLANS FOR CEILING HEIGHTS + + + + + + + + PLANS FOR DIM VARIES REFER TO CLG REFER TO PLANS FOR PTN TYPES. CEILING SYSTEM'S CONT WALL ANGLE FASTENED TO WALL AT 16"oc. 2 1/2"x1 1/2"x CONT 20 GA MTL ANGLE ATTACHED TO EACH STUD. 2 1/2"x1 1/2" x 20 GA CHANNELS AT 48"oc. 2 1/2"xCONT 20 GA TRACK SUSPENDED WITH WIRES AT 48"oc. 5/8" GWB TYPE 'X' ON 2 1/2" MTL STUDS, 20 GA @ 16"oc. 6" A + 10'-0" AFF CEILING CONSTRUCTION (REFER TO PLANS FOR TYPES). CORNER BEAD (TYPICAL). 6" EXISTING EXTERIOR WALL. EXISTING EXTERIOR WINDOW. GWB COLUMN ENCLOSURE, BEYOND. 2" +/METAL STUD BRACE AT 4'-0"OC MAX. + + 5/8" GWB TYPE 'X' ON 3 5/8" MTL STUDS @ 16"oc. ANCHOR TO STRUCT ABOVE. SEE SHEET A-002 FOR HEAD OF WALL & DEFLECTION TRACK DTLS. CJ REFER TO RCP FOR CEILING HEIGHTS REFER TO PLANS CEILING SYSTEM'S EDGE MOULDING FASTENED TO WALL AT 16" OC, TYP. SUSPENSION WIRE. HEADER: (2) 6 STUDS, W/ 6" TRACK T&B (SEE NOTE 2). CLG PLAN VARIES SEE CEILING AS SCHEDULED. MTL CORNER BEAD, TYP. SEE CLG PLAN FOR SOFFIT CONDITIONS. NOTES: 1. PROVIDE (2) ROWS OF STUDS AS REQUIRED TO CREATE BULKHEAD WIDTH AS SHOWN ON CEILING PLANS. 2. PROVIDE 20 GA DRYWALL FRAMING FOR OPENINGS BETWEEN 6'-0" & 12'-0' WIDE. PROVIDE 18 GA COLD FORMED FRAMING FOR OPENINGS > 12'-0' WIDE. (NOTE 1) VARIES 6" CEILING AS SCHEDULED. HEIGHTS VARY, SEE RCP. PROJECT NORTH 123456 123456 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 REFLECTIVE CEILING PLANS A-103 DECEMBER 18, 2020 220157.00 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 FOR CONSTRUCTION SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" B1 FIRST FLOOR REFLECTIVE CEILING PLAN SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" B4 SECOND FLOOR REFLECTIVE CEILING PLAN SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" A3 TYP BULKHEAD DETAIL SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" A4 DTL-TYP-SOFFIT SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" A5 SECTION -CLASSRM CLG SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" A2 SECTION -SOFFIT AT STAIR REF. REF. 1718 E5 A-401 _________ A-401 E3 OPEN TO BELOW GUARDRAIL. TEMP5 CORRIDOR 228 HALL 218 CORR 230 4 A 29'-0" DN DN 3" 7'-5" 3" 8 1/2"13T @ 11" = 11'-11"3'-10 1/2" 3" TO COL CL 10'-10 3/4" TO COL CL 10'-2 1/4" B6 A-401 _________ 8'-0" TEMP4 231A 218 2 A 2 A 2 A 4 A 5 C4'-6" 2'-6" 2 A 217B 216B215B 5'-9" (EXIST WALL TO WALL BELOW) +/- 6'-6" PROVIDE PTN TYPE 2A ABOVE STOREFRONT. 2 A 3'-2" 1 1 GUARDRAIL. A4 A-551 6'-0" +/5'-0" 8'-0"4'-7" 21'-9 1/2" 2 -14 12'-3" (STRINGER TO COL LINE) TO SLAB 0" TO SLAB -2ND FLR 17'-0" INSTRUCTIONAL FACULTY 124 OPEN GWB, PAINTED. CORR / STAIR 122 PAINTED SOFFIT. CEILING, AS SCHEDULED. BASE, AS SCHEDULED. 8'-0" BASE, AS SCHEDULED. CORRIDOR 17'-0" B6 A-401 _________ BL7 9'-0" PAINT EXPOSED MTL STAIR, 905 (TYP). CJ TO SLAB 0" TO SLAB -2ND FLR 17'-0" OPEN GWB PAINTED. INSTRUCTIONAL FACULTY 124 CORR / STAIR 122 CEILING, AS SCHEDULED. PAINTED SOFFIT, 902. BASE, AS SCHEDULED. 16R @ 6.8" = 9'-0 205/256" +/- 7'-2" 6'-8" BENCH 219B ALT #1: VIRTUAL SKYLIGHT B6 A-401 _________ BASE, AS SCHEDULED. ALUM STOREFRONT SYSTEM. 8'-4" A-551 A1 A-551 A2 GWB PAINTED. A-551 A6 A-551 C1 4'-0" 5'-0" BL5 BENCHBENCH A-551 E5 PAINTED WALLS, 901. PAINTED SOFFIT, 902. A-551 D5 CJ. A-103 A2 CJ. 20 GA STUDS @ 16" OC, BRACE AT 4'-0' OC AND ADJACENT TO FULL HEIGHT WALL. DO NOT FASTEN BULKHEAD FRAMING TO WALL FRAMING. SEE PLAN ON A-801 AND DETAILS ON A-602 FOR BENCHES. 1718 E F ALL GENDER BATHROOM 118 WOMENS 119 MENS RM 120 FACULTY & STAFF BREAK RM 127 A-401B4 E5 A-401 _________ A-401 E3 A-401A5 1 -7 1 -7 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 5'-6"9'-4"1'-1" E.9 27'-1" 1'-11" 118 119 120 121 HALL 116 PRINCIPAL FACULTY 126 PRINCIPAL FACULTY 125 2 A 3'-10"9'-4"1'-1" 3 C 3 C 7'-6 1/2" 8'-8 7/8" 6'-8" 7'-0 5/8" 8'-6 115/256" JAN 121 1'-8 1/4" 4'-4 1/4" 3'-4 7/8" 5'-2" 3'-7 3/4" 3'-0" 3'-10 7/8" 3'-0" 3'-7" 5'-3 115/256" 1'-6" INSTRUCTIONAL FACULTY 124 ADMISSIONS COORDINATOR 117 5 C 2 A 2 A 2 A 5 C 5 C 117 3 27 A 6'-6"4'-4 3/4"5'-6"8'-6 3/4"1'-10 1/4" 3 C 2 A 2 A 29'-0" 124 125 126 130 129 128 127 PRINCIPAL FACULTY 130 DIR CLIN ED 129 CLASSROOM 132 COORD OFFICE 128 CORR / STAIR 122 4 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 3 C 2 A OPEN TO ABOVE 15T @ 11" = 13'-9"4'-9 1/2" 3" 5'-9" 3" 3'-3" 11" 3'-3" 3" 1/2" 2 A 5 C 5 C A-401 A4 10'-9 1/2" 10'-10" +/- 11'-4" 9'-6"5'-6"6'-6" DF/BF 2 -9 2 -9 4 A 5'-2 227/256" 4'-8" 3'-2" 1 -11 1 -11 -2 1 -10 1 -9 1 -8 3 C +/- 6'-3" 9'-9" 7 A WATER HEATER SHELF. INSTALL PER MFR'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. 6 A A-101 A1 10'-6 3/4"8'-7 1/4" B6 A-401 _________ 2'-2"8 1/2"21'-9 1/2" 8'-0" 10'-10 1/4" +/- 11'-5 1/4" 11'-2" 14'-10" 6" 2 A 1 -10 1 -10 3'-0" 2 -9 3 C 6" 2 -8 9'-9 131/256" 1 -12 TYP UP 12'-4 1/2" EXIST FIRE WALL. EXIST CONC COLUMN. 1'-6" 2'-8" 2'-10" 2 -3 W3630 W3615 B36 SB36 1 -9 1 -10 2 -5 KITCHEN: COUNTERTOP: SSM 503 CABINETS: PLAM 504 WALL BASE, AS SCHEDULED. WOMENS 119 MENS RM 120 WALL BASE, AS SCHEDULED. BASE, AS SCHEDULED. ALL GENDER BATHROOM 118 2'-10" 1 -8 1 -4 2'-10" 1 -7 1 -7 1 -10 1 -9 1 -5 1 -1 1 -9 1 -91 -9 1 -91 -4 1 -4 SLOPED PANEL SSM 501 SLOPED PANEL SSM 501 SSM 501 COUNTER W/ INTEGRAL SINKS, SSM 502. B5 A-401 1 -3 1 -5 1 -4 1 -1 1 -2 3'-0" 9'-0" GWB, PAINT AS SCHEDULED. WALL BASE, AS SCHEDULED. 1 -12 TO SLAB 0" TO SLAB -2ND FLR 17'-0" TO ROOF 35'-0" E5 A-401 _________ 18'-0" 17'-0" 8'-4" GWB SOFFIT, PAINT 901. 9'-0" 14R @ 6.8" = 7'-11 1/4" 16R @ 6.8" = 9'-0 3/4" WALL MOUNTED HANDRAIL. ALT #1: VIRTUAL SKYLIGHT APC, AS SCHEDULED. GWB SOFFIT, PAINT 902. ALUM STOREFRONT AS SCHEDULED. ALUM STOREFRONT AS SCHEDULED. A-551 E5OPH ROOF FLOOR FINISH, AS SCHEDULED. WRAP EXPOSED PIPING, SEE PLUMB DWG. "RAKKS" EHV COUNTERTOP SUPPORT BRACKET, WITH ADA APRON. 6" 2'-10" CONT 2x8 SECURE TO WOOD STUD MOUNTED BETWEEN MTL STUDS. FRAMED MIRROR UNIT. SSM #501 ON SUBSTRATE. DO NOT PIECE SUBSTRATE. UTILIZE OVAL SINK TEMPLATE FOR CUTOUT. PARTITION-SEE PLAN AND PARTITION TYPES. 9" 11" 8" 2'-3" KNEE CLEARANCE SSM #501 APRON. SSM #501 BACKSPLASH. PROVIDE FULL HT WOOD STUDS @ EACH RAKKS BRACKET. ATTACH SECURLY W/ SCREWS @ 12" OC MIN OR AS REQUIRED TO PREVENT DEFLECTION OF RAKKS BRACKET. SINK AS SCHEDULED, SSM 502. CONT 2x2 ALUM ANGLE AT WALL EDGES AND BACK WALL INCLUDING IN BETWEEN SUPPORT BARCKETS. ANGLE TIGHT TO PLYWOOD. 2'-0" 6 1/2" PROJECT NORTH 123456 123456 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 ENLARGED PLANS STAIRS & TOILET ROOMS A-401 DECEMBER 18, 2020 220157.00 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 FOR CONSTRUCTION SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" E1 ENLARGED PLAN AT STAIR -2ND FLOOR SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" E3 ELEVATION AT STAIR SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" E5 SECTION AT STAIR SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" A1 ENLARGED TOILET RMS / STAIR KEYED NOTES-PLAN NUMBERCOMMENT 1TEMPORARY PARTITION TO UNDERSIDE OF CEILING (PTN TYPE 2B) WITH TEMPORARY DOOR WITH ITHACA COLLEGE WIFI ACCESS CONTROL LOCK. 2ALIGN FACE OF PARTITION WITH FACE OF PARTITION OR COLUMN ENCLOSURE. 3ALIGN NEW PARTITION WITH CORNER OF EXISTING WALLS. PROVIDE GWB CONTROL JOINT IF REQ'D. 4EXISTING WINDOW TO REMAIN. 5EXISTING WINDOW RELOCATED. 6PRINTER / COPIER LOCATION. EQUIP BY COLLEGE. COORD POWER AND DATA. SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" B4 STAFF KITCHENETTE SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" A5 INT ELEVS -TLT ROOMS 118 -120 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" A4 INT ELEV -TLT 118 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" B6 CROSS SECTION -STAIR SCALE: 1" = 1'-0" B5 SECTION -RAKKS VANITY BRACKET UP 1718 C B A ALL GENDER BATHROOM 108LOBBY 100 OFFICE 1 101 OFFICE 2 102 OFFICE 3 103 OFFICE 4 104 LEARNING CENTER 115 IP EXAM 2 110 IP EXAM 3 111 IP EXAM 4 112 A-402 A1 A-402 D2 D1 WAITING AREA C L E A R 4'-3" 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A IP EXAM 1 109 WAITING/RECPT 106 PROGRAM ACTIVITY CTR 107 100 101 102 105 103 104 106C 112 111 110 109 107 106B A-402E2 A-402 E1 28'-7" 29'-0" 29'-0" 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 9"9'-7 7/8"10'-4 7/8"10'-4 7/8"10'-4 7/8"7'-6 1/2"8'-10 1/4" +/1'-3"4'-4 5/8"1'-6" 106A 108 CLO 106A 3 2'-6 1/2" 2 C 11'-4 7/8"7'-7 1/4" +/3 2 C 2 A 2 2'-9" EXISTING STAIR 2 C 3'-0" 3 3 2 A 2 A TEMP1 15'-6" 10'-4 7/8" 10'-4 7/8" 10'-4 7/8" 8'-2"10'-4 7/8" 5'-10" EXIST COL ENCLOSURE. 2 -6 BL1 SEE TLT RM 118 ON A-401 FOR INTERIOR ELEVATIONS. 2 -9 6 1 2'-0" BL8 5'-0"4'-0" 1:20 SLOPE FLAT FURN, EQUIP & CABINETRY TO BE FUTURE PURCHASE ITEMS SHOWN FOR FUTURE LAYOUT FURN & EQUIP TO BE FUTURE PURCHASE FURN & EQUIP TO BE FUTURE PURCHASE FURN & EQUIP TO BE FUTURE PURCHASE FURN & EQUIP TO BE FUTURE PURCHASE 2'-10" 2 C EXISTING ELEVATOR 106C ELEVATOR 106B BL1 WALL BASE, AS SCHEDULED. PNT 903PNT 901 2'-6" 1'-8" 2'-10" 1 -9 3-13B 3-13C 111 2 -2 4'-0" WORK SURFACE MONITOR WALL BASE, AS SCHEDULED. 5 -30 2'-6" 1'-10" 2'-10" 4" F F W3630 B36 W3630 B36 W3630 B36 7'-2" BL1 COUNTERTOP AND CABINETS TO BE PURCHASED AT A FUTURE DATE. COORD WITH ITHACA COLLEGE. 2'-6" 1'-10" 2'-10" 106A BL1 106B Scale Area B30 W3030 B30 W3030 B30 W3030 WALL BASE, AS SCHEDULED. COUNTERTOP AND CABINETS TO BE PURCHASED AT A FUTURE DATE. COORD WITH ITHACA COLLEGE. (110) EXISTING 12"x12" (5 HIGH) LOCKERS (40) NEW 4 -12 TYP WALL BASE, AS SCHEDULED. DF/BF GWB PAINTED AS SCHEDULED. 2 -1 2 -1 TYP (8) ROWS 1'-3" 1'-3" 1'-10" 2'-10" 2 -3 B30B30SB36 W3030W3030W3615 1 -10 1 -9 2 -5 TEMP4 KITCHEN: COUNTERTOP: SSM 503 CABINETS: PLAM 504 GWB SOFFIT, PAINT AS SCHED. WALL BASE, AS SCHEDULED. 2'-6" 1'-8" 2'-10" 7'-0" 2 -4 2 -3 239A EXISTING B27 SB36 W3630W2730EXISTING KITCHEN: COUNTERTOP: SSM 503 CABINETS: RE-USE EXISTING IN STORAGE OR PROVIDE NEW TO MATCH. COORD WITH OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. WALL BASE, AS SCHEDULED. EXISTING 4" 4" 2'-6" 18'-0" PLAM 505 COUNTERTOP AND BACKSPLASH. WALL BASE, AS SCHEDULED. COUTERTOP SUPPORT BRACKETS. GWB PAINTED, AS SCHEDULED. 2 -10 2 -10 2 -102 -102 -102 -10 A3 A-402 2'-10"4" 2 -12 2 -13 COUNTERTOP & BACKSPLASH, PLAM 505. COUNTERTOP SUPPORT BRACKETS. WALL BASE, AS SCHEDULED. "RAKKS" COUNTERTOP SUPPORT BRACKET -#EH-1212 FM (FLUSH MOUNT CONFIGURATION, 4'-0" oc MAX) PARTITION-SEE PLAN AND PARTITION TYPES FINISHED FLOOR AS SCHEDULED. 5/8" GWB. PLAM OVER COMPOSITE WOOD SUBSTRATE, SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS. 1'-6" OR 1'-8" 4" HIGH BACKSPLASH. 3'-0" 2'-6" PLAM OVER COMPOSITE WOOD SUBSTRATE, SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS. "RAKKS" COUNTERTOP SUPPORT BRACKET -#EH-1212 FM (FLUSH MOUNT CONFIGURATION, 4'-0" oc MAX) 1'-6" CONT WD STUD BLOCKING. 2x WD CROSS SUPPORT BETWEEN WD BLOCKING @ STUDS. PROJECT NORTH 123456 123456 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 ENLARGED PLAN -IP CLINIC, INTERIOR ELEVS & SCHEDULES A-402 DECEMBER 18, 2020 220157.00 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 FOR CONSTRUCTION SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" B4 ENLARGED INTERPROFESSIONAL PRACTICE CLINIC -FIRST FLOOR SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" A1 INT ELEV -ELEVATOR/HALL 105 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" D1 ELEVATION -IP EXAM SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" D2 ELEVATION -IP EXAM SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" E1 INT ELEV -RECEPT 106 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" E2 INT ELEV -RECEPT/WAIT 106 KEYED NOTES-PLAN NUMBERCOMMENT 1TEMPORARY PARTITION TO UNDERSIDE OF CEILING (PTN TYPE 2B) WITH TEMPORARY DOOR WITH ITHACA COLLEGE WIFI ACCESS CONTROL LOCK. 2ALIGN FACE OF PARTITION WITH FACE OF PARTITION OR COLUMN ENCLOSURE. 3ALIGN NEW PARTITION WITH CORNER OF EXISTING WALLS. PROVIDE GWB CONTROL JOINT IF REQ'D. 4EXISTING WINDOW TO REMAIN. 5EXISTING WINDOW RELOCATED. 6PRINTER / COPIER LOCATION. EQUIP BY COLLEGE. COORD POWER AND DATA. SCHEDULE-MISC ACCESSORIES, APPLIANCES, EQUIP TAG PREFIXMARKITEMMANUFACTUR ER AND CODE NO.TYPE REMARKS 215 TIER LOCKERS - 12"x12"SALSBURY INDUSTRIES - COLOR: BLUE WITH 6" LEGS110 EXISTING + 40 NEW = 150 TOTAL, MATCH EXISTING 22CURVED CURTAIN TRACK & CURTAININPRO NANOTRACK CUBICLE TRACK WITH MESH TOP & SOLID BOTTOM PANEL CURTAINCOLOR TBD - FUTURE PURCHASE COORD WITH COLLEGE 23REFRIGERATOREXISTING REF - RELOCATEDOWNER INSTALL 24FREE STANDING STOVEEXISTING STOVE - RELOCATEDCOORD WITH OWNER 25MICROWAVEITHACA COLLEGE TO PROVIDEOWNER INSTALL 26ADJUSTIBLE SHELVING - 5 HIGHHEAVY DUTY ADJUSTABLE SHELVING, KANPE & VOGT 85 SERIES STANDARDS WITH 185 SERIES BRACKETS. PROVIDE STANDARD WHITE SHELVING, 5 HIGH. PROVIDE 2x BLOCKING IN WALL. 27CORNER GUARDS (801 ON FINISH LEGEND)ACROVYN SSM SERIES - 2" WIDE 2810'-0"Wx4'-0"H WHITE BOARDSTEELCASE 110 SERIES - ITHACA COLLEGE TO PROVIDECONTRACTOR TO INSTALL 29TV / MONTIOR & BRACKETSITHACA COLLEGE TO PROVIDE - COORD WITH AV DWGSAV CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL, GC CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL BLOCKING 210COUNTERTOP GROMMETS2" DIA - MOCKETT, TG3-2" COLOR: WARM GREY 92W 211STAINLESS STEEL WIRE SHELVING 72"Wx30"Dx74"HNEXEL - SST WIRE SHELVING #WGB2345987 212WASHERITHACA COLLEGE TO PROVIDEIC VENDOR TO INSTALL 213DRYERITHACA COLLEGE TO PROVIDEIC VENDOR TO INSTALL 214LAPTOP SECURITY CABINETWHITNEY BROTHERS BIRCH LAMINATE LAPTOP SECURITY CABINET #WBO779 215PROJECTION SCREENSDA-LITE ADVANTAGE ELECTROLREF TO AV DWGS FOR SIZE AND LOCATIONS SCHEDULE-TOILET ACCESSORIES AND MIRRORS TAG PREFIXMARKITEMMANUFACTURER AND MDL NO.TYPE REMARKS 11TOILET PAPER HOLDERITHACA COLLEGE TO PROVIDESURFACE MOUNTED, SEE A4 / A-451 - CONTRACTOR INSTALLED 12FEM NAPKIN DISPOSALBRADLEY CORP - #4722-15SURFACE MOUNTED 13GRAB BAR- 18" VERTICALBRADLEY CORP - 812 SERIESCONCEALED MOUNTING 14GRAB BAR- 36" HORIZONTALBRADLEY CORP - 812 SERIESCONCEALED MOUNTING 15GRAB BAR- 42" HORIZONTALBRADLEY CORP - 812 SERIESCONCEALED MOUNTING 17FRAMED MIRROR 6'-6"x3'-0"BRADLEY CORP - 780 SERIES 18FRAMED MIRROR 1'-6"x2'-6"BRADLEY CORP - 780 SERIES 19SOAP DISPENSERITHACA COLLEGE TO PROVIDESURFACE MOUNTED, SEE A4 / A-451 - CONTRACTOR INSTALLED 110PAPER TOWEL ROLL DISPENSERITHACA COLLEGE TO PROVIDESURFACE MOUNTED, SEE A4 / A-451 - CONTRACTOR INSTALLED 111MOP AND BROOM HOLDERBRADLEY CORP - #9934SURFACE MOUNTED 112BABY CHANGING WALL UNITBRADLEY CORP - #9631SURFACE MOUNTED COLOR: LIGHT GRAY NOTES: 1. OWNER = ITHACA COLLEGE 2. SEE A3 / A-001 FOR ACCESSIBLE MOUNTING HEIGHTS AND FOR ANY NOT LISTED. PROVIDE 2x BLOCKING FOR ALL ACCESSORIES PROVIDED BY ITHACA COLLEGE, ITHACA COLLEGE'S VENDOR AND / OR CONTRACTOR. SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" C3 INT ELEV -LOCKERS SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" C2 LOCKER ELEVATION -TYP SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" B1 STUDENT ACTOR KITCHEN SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" C1 LEARNER KITCHENETTE SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" B2 INT ELEV -CONTROL RM 210 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" D3 INT ELEV -LAUNDRY RM SCALE: 1" = 1'-0" A3 SECTION AT COUNTERTOP REF. 161718 15.1 C D OPERATING ROOM 221 CONTROL 210 TLT 209 RECEPTION WAITING 208 PAT EXAM RM 212 PAT EXAM RM 213 PAT EXAM RM 214 PAT EXAM RM 215 PAT EXAM RM 216 PAT EXAM RM 217 DEBRIEF 219 MED STOR 220 CONTROL 222 PATIENT TLT 224 PATIENT RM 223 PROCEDURE ROOM 225 CONTROL 226 READY RM 227 A-403 D2 E1 E2 D1 A-403 C1 C2 B1 A-403A1 B2 A2 A-403 A3 B3 A4 A-403 A5 A6 A-402 B1 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 1 A 2 A 2 A 1 A 2 A 2 A 3 A 4 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 1 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 15'-4 1/2"9'-6" +/- 20'-0"7'-11"9'-8 1/2"7'-10"19'-8" 219A210A 209208A 208B 212B 213B214B 214A 213A 212A 217A216A215A 217B216B215B 218 227 226 225 223 224 222 220 210B 221 CLEAR 6'-0"10'-4 7/8"10'-4 7/8"10'-4 7/8"2'-8 1/2"+/- 6'-0" 15 9 1/2" 28'-2 1/2"29'-0"29'-0" 29'-0" HALL 211 HALL 243 HALL 218 ELEV LOBBY 200 BL1 BL2 BL2 BL2A BL4 SCRUB SINKS 12'-5" 1'-4" 6'-1" SCRUB SINK BL2A BOTTLE FILLER 7 1/2" 5 C +/- 10'-5"14'-8"8'-11"19'-10"5'-0"3'-0" 8'-0" +/- 53'-10" 2 2 219B EMS RACK 1 1 1 2 -7 2 -7 2 -7 2 -7 2 -7 7 A 1 A 8 C 4 A 8 C 8 C 1 A TEMP4 TEMP3 5 C3'-0" 2'-0" EXISTING ELEVATOR 2 -7 2 -72 2 5'-8 1/2" 2 A 2 2 TEMP2 15'-4" 1'-8"4'-7"10'-6 1/2"2'-3" 4'-7"10'-6 1/2"1'-11 1/2"+/- 5'-4"1'-11 1/2"10'-6 1/2"4'-7" +/- 7'-3"8'-0"10'-4 7/8"10'-4 7/8"10'-7 1/2" 1'-7" 3 A3 A 7" 3'-5" 1'-8" HALL 201 2 8'-3 3/8"7'-0"8" 1'-7" 1'-3 3/4"4'-5"1'-6" 1'-3" 4'-5" 1'-6" SEE TLT RM 118 ON A-401 FOR INTERIOR ELEVATIONS. SEE TLT RM 118 ON A-401 FOR INTERIOR ELEVATIONS. EQEQ A-403 B4 A-402 B2 202 203A 203B 1 -10 1 -9 DN BL2A 1'-6" 1'-6" 2 A 1'-6" 3'-2" 4 A 4 A 4 A4 A 4 A 4 A BL3 3 C 4 A 4 A BL7 4 A 3'-0" 5 A 7"7" 3'-8" 7'-2" 6" 204 1'-4"5'-4"5'-7 1/2"1'-7"4'-8" 5'-0" 3 -12 3 -02 3 -16 3 -05 3'-6" 3'-0" 3 -18 BL2A BL2ABL2A 3 -18 3 -18 3 -16 3 -05 3 -12 WALL BASE, AS SCHEDULED. 7'-2" 3 -11 221 BL4 3 -18 3 -16 3 -18 3 -14 3 -18 3 -18 3 -16 3 -05 224 BL2 WALL BASE, AS SCHEDULED. 5 -33 223 1 -10 1 -9 3 -11 13B 13C 5'-0" 3 -02 3 -12 3 -04 3 -01 3 -03 2'-6" MONITOR & SHELF 5 -30 WALL BASE, AS SCHEDULED. 4'-0" 3'-2" BL1 GWB, PAINT AS SCHEDULED 225 BL1 4'-0" 3'-2" WALL BASE, AS SCHEDULED. 3 -17 3 -12 3 -11 1 -9 1 -10 13B 13C CONTROL 226 227 1 -9 1 -10 2'-6" 1'-8" 2'-10" 13B 13C 3 -11 WALL BASE, AS SCHEDULED. 3 -17 3 -12 WALL BASE, AS SCHEDULED. MONITOR & SHELF BL2 WALL BASE, AS SCHEDULED. 4'-0" 3'-2" 1 -9 3 -11 WALL BAE AS SCHEDULED. 13B 13C 2'-6" 1'-8" 2'-10" 3'-0" MONITOR & SHELF 5 -30 13B 13C 3'-0" 2'-6" 220 3 -06 6" 3'-0" 2 -7 2 -9 212A PLAM 505 COUNTERTOP, BACKSPLASH AND SHELF. WALL BASE, AS SCHEDULED. COUTERTOP SUPPORT BRACKETS (3' -0" OC). GWB PAINTED, AS SCHEDULED. PLAM 505 COUNTERTOP & BACKSPLASH. 2 -10 A3 A-402 PROJECT NORTH 123456 123456 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 ENLARGED PLANS CLINICAL LEARNING CENTER AND SIMULATION LAB A-403 DECEMBER 18, 2020 220157.00 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 FOR CONSTRUCTION SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" C3 CLINICAL LEARNING CENTER AND SIMULATION LAB -SECOND FLOOR SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" E1 ELEV -OPERATING ROOM SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" E2 ELEV -OPERATING ROOM SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" D1 ELEV -OPERATING ROOM SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" D2 ELEV -OPERATING ROOM SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" C1 ELEV -PATIENT ROOM SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" C2 ELEV -PATIENT ROOM SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" B1 ELEV -PATIENT ROOM SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" B2 ELEV -PROCEDURE RM 225 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" A1 ELEV -PROCEDURE RM 225 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" A2 ELEV -PROCEDURE RM 225 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" B3 ELEV -READY RM NORTH WALL SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" A4 ELEV -READY RM EAST WALL SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" A3 ELEV -READY RM WEST WALL SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" A5 ELEVATION -PATIENT EXAM SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" A6 ELEVATION -PATIENT EXAM KEYED NOTES-PLAN NUMBERCOMMENT 1TEMPORARY PARTITION TO UNDERSIDE OF CEILING (PTN TYPE 2B) WITH TEMPORARY DOOR WITH ITHACA COLLEGE WIFI ACCESS CONTROL LOCK. 2ALIGN FACE OF PARTITION WITH FACE OF PARTITION OR COLUMN ENCLOSURE. 3ALIGN NEW PARTITION WITH CORNER OF EXISTING WALLS. PROVIDE GWB CONTROL JOINT IF REQ'D. 4EXISTING WINDOW TO REMAIN. 5EXISTING WINDOW RELOCATED. 6PRINTER / COPIER LOCATION. EQUIP BY COLLEGE. COORD POWER AND DATA. SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" B4 INT ELEV -DEBRIEF AREA 1ST FLR EXISTING FLOOR SYSTEM. FINISH AS SCHEDULED. 1 1/4 NPS SCH 40 VERT PIPE POST, CENTER ON CHANNEL. C12x20.7 STRINGER W/ 1/4" PLATE CLOSURE. CONC FILL. 1 1/4"x1 1/4"x1/4" CARRIER ANGLE. S E C T I O N SEE STAIR STRINGER 1'-0" 2" +3'-6" 2'-10" 3"x3"x1/4" CLIP ANGLE @ EACH STRINGER, EXPAN BOLT INTO SLAB, WELD TO STRINGER. 3/4" SQ STL PICKETS @ 4 1/2" OC MAX. (TYP) 1 1/4 NPS RAILS. RAIL BRACKET @ EA VERT POST; WELD (TYPICAL). 1 1/2" 11"1" RETURN RAILING TO BALUSTER. (TYP) MAX 4" 1/2" 11" FLOOR SYSTEM. FINISH AS SCHEDULED. 1 1/4 NPS POST, CENTER ON CHANNEL. 1 1/4 NPS RAILS. 1" STL CHANNEL, PUNCH TO RECEIVE PICKETS; WELD TO STL PIPE. 3"3'-6" 3" C12x20.7 STRINGER. L3x3x1/4" POUR STOP, SEE STRUCT DWGS. 1" STL CHANNEL, PUNCH TO RECEIVE PICKETS; WELD TO STL PIPE. 3/4" SQ STEEL PICKETS EXIST FLOOR SYSTEM, SEE STRUCT DWGS. EXISTING STL BEAM, SEE STRUCT DWGS. FINISHED AS SCHEDULED. C12x20.7 STRINGER W/ 1/4" PLATE CLOSURE. 1 1/4 NPS POST, CENTER ON CHANNEL. 1 1/4 NPS RAILS. 6" 3'-0" MAX 4 1/2" 3/4" SQ STL BAR PICKETS @ 4 1/2" OC MAX (TYP). 1" CHANNEL. 1" STL CHANNEL, PUNCH TO RECEIVE PICKETS; WELD TO STL PIPE. SEE STRUCT 4 1/2"4" TYP TREAD 11" 1'-0" 1" CHANNEL. 4" MTL CORNER BEAD, TYP. 5/8" TYPE X GWB ON 2 1/2" MTL STUDS, 20 GA @ 16"oc. 5/8" TYPE X GWB ON 6" MTL STUDS, 20 GA @ 16"oc. WALL MOUNTED HANDRAIL, BEYOUND. BENT PLATE, SEE STRUCT DWGS. 2" L-BEAD AND SEALANT (TYP). C12x20.7 STRINGER W/ 1/4" PLATE CLOSURE. CONC FILL. 1 1/4"x1 1/4"x1/4" CARRIER ANGLE. C6x15.1 CHANNEL SUPPORT, SEE STRUCT DWGS. ANGLE SUPPORT SECTION SEE STAIR 7"3"2" STRINGER 1'-0" STRINGER BEYOND. 2'-10" 3'-6" 6" 3'-0" 1 1/4 NPS RAILS. 1 1/2" 5" MAX 4" 1/2" 1" CHANNEL. 1 1/4 NPS SCH 40 VERT PIPE POST, CENTER ON CHANNEL. 3/4" SQ STL PICKETS @ 4 1/2" OC MAX (TYP). RAIL BRACKET @ EA VERT POST; WELD (TYPICAL). 1" CHANNEL. 1" CHANNEL. 1 1/4 NPS RAILS. 2 1/2" GENERAL STAIR NOTES: 1. ALL WELDS SHALL BE GROUND SMOOTH, ALL MILL MARKS, SCALE, ETC SHALL BE REMOVED, GROUND OUT AND PATCHED. 2. ALL EXPOSED METAL RAILINGS, GUARDS, PICKETS, CHANNELS, PANS, ETC SHALL BE PRIMED AND PAINTED. SEE FINISH SCHEDULE FOR COLOR AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR PAINT REQUIREMENTS. 3. FOLLOW STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICAITONS REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL STELL SIZES, CONNECTIONS, ETC. 4. MAINTAIN 6'-8" MIN HEADROOM AT STAIR. TYP CLG +10'-0" AFF CORNER BEAD (TYPICAL). BULKHEAD +9'-0" AFF 3 5/8" 20 GA MTL STUDS @ 16" oc. EXIST 2nd FLOOR. 5/8" GWB. SEE PLAN FOR ALIGNMENT. 1'-0"+/- 6'-8"4 1/2" +/+ + + + + + + + GUIDE RAIL. FIXED TOP SWEEP SEALS. ALUM TRACK. 1 1/2" AUTOMATIC BOTTOM SEALS. 3 1/4" PARTITION PANELS. WF STL BEAM W/ CHANNEL, SEE STRUCT DWGS. 3/4"MIN 6" FINISHED FLOOR AS SCHEDULED. FIRST FLOOR 20 GA MTL ANGLE. SUSPENDED CEILING, AS SCHEDULED. 2 1/2" 20 GA BRACING @ 4'-0" oc MIN. TRACK. UNFACED R-11 BATT INSULATION. 2'-0" 6" INTERM RUBBER FLOOR FINISH AS SCHEDULED. C12x20.7 CHANNEL STRINGER W/ 1/4" PLATE CLOSURE. CONC FILL. 1 1/4"x1 1/4"x1/4" CARRIER ANGLE. SECTION SEE STAIR 1 1 / 2 " +2'-10" STRINGER BEYOND. C6x15.1 CHANNEL SUPPORT, SEE STRUCT DWGS. ANGLE SUPPORT 3 1/2" GWB WALL, PAINTED AS SCHEDULED. HANDRAIL BRACKET W/ ESCUTCHEON PLATE; 5'-0" MAX SPACING (TYP). 11" LANDING 2" REFER TO RCP ANCHOR STOREFRONT TO STUDS.SEALANT, TYP EACH SIDE. CEILING AS SCHEDULED. FOR CEILING HEIGHTS REFER TO PLANS FOR PTN TYPES. ALUM STOREFRONT SYSTEM, AS SCHEDULED. REFER TO PLANS CEILING SYSTEM'S EDGE MOULDING FASTENED TO WALL AT 16" OC, TYP. SUSPENSION WIRE. 5/8" TYPE X GWB ON 2 1/2' MTL STUDS, 20 GA @ 16"oc. 2 1/2" MTL STUD BRACE AT 4'-0" OC MAX. (2)6 x 18 GA x 1 5/8" COLD FORMED FRAMING, W/ 3 5/8"x18 GA TRACK T&B. 1'-0"6" 1'-0" CEILING AS SCHEDULED. MTL CORNER BEAD, TYP. EXIST FLOOR SYSTEM. STL BEAM, SEE STRUCT DWGS. FINISHED AS SCHEDULED. MTL CORNER TRIM. (GORDON FINAL FORMS II, TD-58. CLEAR ANODIZED FINISH. 5/8" TYPE X GWB ON 3 5/8" MTL STUDS, 20 GA @ 16"oc. SEE STRUCT 8 1/2" 1 1/2" BLOCKING & SHIM SPACE. ALUM STOREFRONT SYSTEM, AS SCHEDULED. CONTROL JOINT. DEFLECTION CONNECTION. FIREPROOFING BY LANDLORD. PROJECT NORTH 123456 123456 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 STAIR & MISC DETAILS A-551 DECEMBER 18, 2020 220157.00 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 FOR CONSTRUCTION SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" A1 SECTION-STAIR BOTTOM LANDING SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" A6 SECTION-STAIR LANDING RAILING SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" C1 SECTION-STAIR TOP LANDING SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" A2 SECTION-STAIR TYP INTERM LANDING SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" D3 SECTION -OPERABLE PTN DTL SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" A4 SECTION-STAIR INTERM LANDING / WALL SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" E5 SECTION -STOREFRONT HEAD/CLG SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" D5 SECTION -STOREFRONT BASE -2ND FLR J2 ALUMINUM DOOR AND FRAME AS SCHEDULED PTN AS SCHEDULED 2X BLOCKING MTL "L" TRIM (TYP)SEALANT BOTH SIDES (TYP) 2" T Y P 4 1/2" DOUBLE STUD SCHEDULED PTN AS H3 ALUMINUM FRAME AS SCHEDULED CENTER OF STOREFRONT SYSTEM ON CENTER OF PTN 2X BLOCKING MTL "L" TRIM (TYP) SEALANT BOTH SIDES (TYP) GLAZING AS SCHEDULED 2" 1/8" TYP 4 1/2" M1 TYP 4 1/2" 2" ALUM FRAME, AS SCHEDULED. M2 4 1/2" 4 1/2" ALUM FRAME, AS SCHEDULED. J3 J3A ALUMINUM FRAME AS SCHEDULED PTN AS SCHEDULED 2X BLOCKING MTL "L" TRIM (TYP) SEALANT BOTH SIDES (TYP) DOUBLE STUDS GLAZING AS SCHEDULED ALUMINUM DOOR AS SCHEDULED 2" TYP 4 1/2" 2" H W F TYPE 1TYPE 2 2" AS SCHED2" 2" AS SCHEDULED H1 J2 2"AS SCHED2" 2" AS SCHEDULED H1 J1 TYPE 3 2" +/-AS SCHED 3" +/- AS SCHEDULED H5 EXAMSLIDE DOOR FG NOTE: PROVIDE 1/4" TEMPERED GLASS AT INTERIOR DOORS. H W STILE WIDE HM WD & HM ALUM & HM DOOR SLIDING TYPE 4TYPE 5 2" AS SCHED 2" 2" AS SCHEDULED H3 3'-9" 2" J2 J3 H2 J3A B2 ALUM & HM 2" AS SCHED 2" 2" AS SCHEDULED H1 6"6'-9"6"6'-9" 2" TYP J1 J4 H4 M4 TYPE 6 HM 17'-10" 2" AS SCHED2" 2" AS SCHEDULED H6 J6 POCKET DOOR H2 J1 G H W 6"6" 3'-0"6" GL-6 2" M3 22'-6" M2 B1 H3 ALUM BL6BL7 9'-0" 4 1/2" 2" TYP M1 8'-0" 4 1/2"2 EQ PANELS M2 B1 H3 ALUM 9'-0" H4 7'-2" 6'-0" 3'-2"4'-0" BL3 7'-2" 6'-6" 3'-2"4'-0" TYP 2" TYP 2" J4 BL4 2" AS SCHED 2" 2" 2'-0" 2" 7'-0" H4 6" 4'-10" @ DR 202A 6'-0" @ DR 202B 2" TYP J1 J4 M3 M4 TYPE 7 HM 8'-8" @ DR 202A 9'-10" @ DR 202B H1H4 J4AJ4 J1 B1 M4 J4A M4 EQEQ H4 J4 M4 EQEQ BL5 H3 9'-0" 22'-6" J3 4'-0"5'-0" 7'-2"6"7'-2"6"7'-2" M3 2" ALUM BL1BL2 4'-0" 3'-2" 5'-0" TYP 2" 7'-2" 4'-0" 3'-2" 4'-0" TYP 2" H4 J4 H4 J4 7'-2" BL8 2" 2" TYP M1 9'-0" 2"2 EQ PANELS M1 B1 H3 ALUM 13'-0" 4'-11" 8'-1" J3 BL2A 3'-1" 4'-1" 5'-0" TYP 2" 7'-2" H4 J4 7'-2"6"7'-2"6"7'-2" 5'-0" 4'-0" M1 M2 J3 ALUMWD J5 J4 EQEQ H4 EQEQ 4'-0"3'-2" 5'-4" 4'-0" EQEQ H4 B1 4 1/2" ALUMINUM STOREFRONT FRAME GLAZING, AS SCHED. RECEIVER CHANNEL (MFR STD) 1/2" 1/2" 2" FOR THROAT DIM SEE PTN TYPES H1 DOOR AS SCHEDULED HM FRAME FINISH AS SCHEDULED. SCHEDULED PTN AS H2 ALUMINUM DOOR AND FRAME AS SCHEDULED CENTER OF STOREFRONT SYSTEM ON CENTER OF PTN 2X BLOCKING MTL "L" TRIM (TYP) SEALANT BOTH SIDES (TYP) 1/8" 2" TYP 4 1/2" DOUBLE STUD SEALANT BOTH SIDES (TYP) HM FRAME W/ MIN 3 ANCHORS PER JAMB FOR THROAT DIM SEE PTN TYPES J1 CORNER PTN WHERE APPLICABLE 1/2" 1/2" UNO 2"2" DOOR AS SCHEDULED DOUBLE STUDS. SCHED PTN AS J5 ALUM FRAME W/ MIN 3 ANCHORS PER JAMB. SLIDING DOORS AS SCHEDULED. SEALANT, BOTH SIDES (TYP). H5 SCHED PTN AS ALUM (EXAMSLIDE FRAME) FINISH AS SCHEDULED. SLIDING DOORS AS SCHEDULED. DOOR OPERATOR HOUSING, PROVIDE BY DOOR MFR.1/2" 1/2" FOR THROAT DIM SEE PTN TYPES H6 DOOR AS SCHEDULED 2 1/2"2" HEAVY DUTY HM POCKET FRAME W/ ATTACHED POCKET. REMOVABLE FACIA. 1 1/2" DOOR OPENING HT J6 DOOR AS SCHEDULED DOUBLE STUD FOR THROAT DIM SEE PTN TYPES HEAVY DUTY HM POCKET FRAME. HEAVY DUTY HM POCKET FRAME W/ ATTACHED POCKET. 1/2" SEALANT, BOTH SIDES. 2" (-) 1" NOM DOOR SIZE2" 1/2" 1/2" 2" FOR THROAT DIM SEE PTN TYPES H4 GLAZING STOP HM FRAME W /MIN 3 ANCHORS PER JAMB. GLAZING AT PASSAGE SIDE (AS SCHEDULED) J4 DOUBLE STUD SEALANT BOTH SIDES (TYP) HM FRAME W/ MIN 3 ANCHORS PER JAMB FOR THROAT DIM SEE PTN TYPES 1/2" 1/2" 2" GLAZING STOP DOOR AS SCHEDULED 2"GLAZING AT PASSAGE SIDE (AS SCHEDULED) HM FRAME W/ MIN 3 ANCHORS PER JAMB. J4A M4 GLAZING STOP GLAZING AT PASSAGE SIDE (AS SCHEDULED) 2" GLAZING STOP GLAZING AT PASSAGE SIDE (AS SCHEDULED) B2 HM FRAME GLAZING, AS SCHED. RECEIVER CHANNEL (MFR STD) GLAZING STOP 4" M3 ALUMINUM FRAME AS SCHEDULED PTN AS SCHEDULED 2X BLOCKING MTL "L" TRIM (TYP) SEALANT BOTH SIDES (TYP) DOUBLE STUDS GLAZING AS SCHEDULED6" 2" 123456 123456 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 SCHEDULE-DOORS AND DETAILS A-601 DECEMBER 18, 2020 220157.00 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 FOR CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE-DOOR DR NO DOORFRAME RATINGREMARKSDR NO DR WIDTHDR HEIGHTP1 WIDTHP1 TYPEP2 WIDTHP2 TYPEMATF INISHCOLORTYPEMATFINISHCOLORHEADJAMBTHRESHOLD 1006'-0"8'-0"3'-0"FG3'-0"FGEXIST----EXIST----------SEE HARDWARE SCHEDULE FOR WORK SCOPE100 1013'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1T1101 1023'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1T1102 1033'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1T1103 1043'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1T1104 1053'-0"7'-0"3'-0"FG0"ALUMFACTY FIN--3ALUMFACTY FIN--H2-H3J2,J3,J3A--105 106A3'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1--106A 106B3'-0"7'-0"3'-0" FG0"ALUMFACTY FIN--1ALUMFACTY FIN--H2J2T1106B 106C3'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1T1106C 1073'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1--107 1083'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1T 1108 1093'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1T1109 1103'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1T1110 1113'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1T1111 1123'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAIN T904H1J1T1112 1143'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1T1114 115A3'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9124HMPAINT904H6J6--115A 115B3'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1T1115B 115C3'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDS TAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1--115C 1173'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1--117 1183'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1T1118 1193'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1T1119 1203'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1T1120 1213'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1T1121 1223'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"EXIST----1EXIST HMPAINT904----T2SEE HARDWARE SCHEDULE FOR WORK SCOPE122 1243'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1--124 1253'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1--125 1263'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1--126 1273'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN 9121HMPAINT904H1J1T1127 1283'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1--128 1293'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1--129 1303'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1--130 1313'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F 0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1--131 1323'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1T1132 133A3'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1T1133A 133B3'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"EXIST----1EXIST HMPAINT904----T3133B 1343'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1--134 2013'-8"7'-0"3'-8"F0"EXIST--1EXIST HMPAINT904----T2201 2023'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1--202 202A3'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9127HMPAIN T904H4 & J4AJ1, J4 & J4A--202A 202B3'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9127HMPAINT904H4 & J4AJ1, J4 & J4A--202B 203A3'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1T1203A 203B3'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H 1J1T1203B 2043'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9126HMPAINT904H1 & H4J1, J4 & J4A--204 2053'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1--205 2063'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1--206 2073'-0"7'-0"3'-0" F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1--207 208A3'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9123HMPAINT904H1 & H4J1, J4 & J4AT1208A 208B3'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1T1208B 2093'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904 H1J1T1209 210A3'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1--210A 210B3'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1--210B 212A3'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1T4212A 212B3'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTA IN9125ALUMFACTY FIN--H5J5T4212B 213A3'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1T4213A 213B3'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9125ALUMFACTY FIN--H5J5T4213B 214A3'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1T4214A 214B3'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9125ALUMFACTY FIN--H5J5T4214B 215A3'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1T4215A 215B3'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9125ALUMFACTY FIN--H5J5T4215B 216A3'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDST AIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1T4216A 216B3'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9125ALUMFACTY FIN--H5J5T4216B 217A3'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1T4217A 217B3'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9125ALUMFACTY FIN--H5J5T4217B 2183'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1--218 219A3'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1T1219A 219B3'-8"7'-0"3'-8"F0"ACROVYNSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1T1219B 2203'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1--220 2213'-8"7'-0"3'-8"G0"STAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1T4221 2223'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1--222 2234'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F1'-0"FWDSTAIN9122HMPAINT9 04H1J1T4223 2243'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1T4224 2253'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1T4225 2263'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1--226 2273'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN912 1HMPAINT904H1J1T4227 2303'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN--1HMPAINT904H1J1T245 MIN230 231A3'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1T1231A 231B3'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1T1231B 2325'-0"7'-0"2'-6"F2'-6"FWDSTAIN9122HMPAINT904H1J1--232 2333'-8"7'-0"3'-8"F0"ACROVYNSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1T1233 2343'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"ACROVYNSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1T1234 2353'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN 9121HMPAINT904H1J1T1235 2373'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"EXIST----1EXIST HMPAINT904----T2237 2383'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"EXIST----1EXIST HMPAINT904----T2238 239A3'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1T1239A 2403'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1T2240 2413'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"EXIST----1EXIST HMPAINT904----T2241 2423'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"EXIST----1EXIST HMPAINT904----T2242 TEMP13'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN91 21HMPAINT904H1J1--TEMP1 TEMP23'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1--TEMP2 TEMP33'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1T1TEMP3 TEMP43'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1T1TEMP4 TEMP53'-0"7'-0"3'-0"F0"WDSTAIN9121HMPAINT904H1J1--TEMP5 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" C1 DOOR AND FRAME TYPES SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" A1 DOOR AND FRAME DETAILS NOTE: COORDINATE ANY DOOR REQUIREMENTS WITH LANDLORD / BUILDING ARCHITECTS CORE & SHELL DRAWINGS RELATING TO DOOR NUMBER, RATINGS, ETC. L10 L10 DOORS WITH SIDE -LITESDOORS WITHOUT SIDE -LITES L10 DOORS IN ALCOVES 100 CARPET (CPT, MAT) 101 (CPT) OFFICES / CONF -ITHACA COLLEGE TO PROVIDE 102 (CPT) CORRIDOR / HALLWAYS -THACA COLLEGE TO PROVIDE 103 (CPT) 200 TILE AND STONE (TILE, STN) 201 (TILE) NOT USED 300 RESILIENT FLOORING AND WOOD (RESIL, LVT, WD) 301 (LVT) PATIENT ROOMS / CLASSROOMS -ITHACA COLLEGE TO PROVIDE 302 (LVT) DEBRIEF / BREAK RMS / STORAGE -ITHACA COLLEGE TO PROVIDE 303 (RESIL) 24" x 24" RUBBER FLOOR TILE, JOHNSONITE, COLOR: 72 HARBOUR, PATTERN: HAMMERED. PROVIDE STAIR TREAD, RISERS, COLOR: 72 HARBOUR, PATTERN: HAMMERED, TREAD TO HAVE SOLID CONTRAST INSERT. INSERT COLOR: 262 DRIZZLE. 350 RESINOUS FLOORING (EPX) 351 (EPX) NOT USED 400 BASE (RB, RBR, TILE) 401 (RB) JOHNSONITE, 4" TRADITIONAL BASE, VINYL, COLOR: 20 CHARCOAL 402 (RB) 500 PLASTIC LAMINATE, SOLID SURFACE (PLAM, SSM) 501 (SSM) CORIAN, COLOR: RAIN CLOUD (TOILET ROOM COUNTERS) 502 (SSM) CORIAN SINKS -MODEL #810, COLOR: WHITE FROST 503 (SSM) CORIAN, COLOR: JUNIPER (BREAK RM COUNTER TOPS) 504 (PLAM) WILSONART, COLOR: 7928-38 CASTLE OAK (BREAK RM CABINETS) 505 (PLAM) WILSONART, COLOR: 5014K-19 BATTLESHIP (COUNTER TOPS) 506 (PLAM) NEVAMAR, COLOR: VA6001T CALM DISTINCTION (TLT PARTITIONS) 507 (PLAM) WILSONART, COLOR: #5023K-19 NIGHTFALL (BENCHES) 600 ACOUSTICAL CEILING (APC) 601 (APC) 24" x 24" USG GLACIER, WITH DONN DXL GRID (15/16") 602 (APC) ARMSTRONG, ULTIMA HEALTH ZONE, 24" x 24" WITH 15/16" PRELUDE GRID 700 WALLCOVERINGS (VWC, FWC, FRP) 701 (FRP) MARLITE, STANDARD WITH PEBBLED SURFACE. COLOR: 151 LIGHT GREY, PROVIDE PVC MOLDING FOR A COMPLETE INSTALLATION TO 9'-0" AFF 800 JOB SPECIFIC (WOOD, FIBERGLASS PANEL, METAL, WINDOW TREATMENTS) 801 (PLAST) CORNER GUARDS, ACROVYN, COLOR TO BE SELECTED FROM MFR'S STANDARD (PROVIDE AT OUTSIDE CORNERS, SEE PLAN FOR LOCATIONS) 802 900 PAINT, STAIN (PNT, STAIN) 901 (PNT) SHERWIN WILLIAMS, COLOR: SW7070 SITE WHITE (WALLS) 902 (PNT) SHERWIN WILLIAMS, COLOR: SW7005 PURE WHITE (GWB SOFFITS) 903 (PNT) SHERWIN WILLIAMS, COLOR: SW6240 WINDY BLUE (ACCENT WALLS) 904 (PNT) SHERWIN WILLIAMS, COLOR: SW7069 IRON ORE (HM DOORS AND FRAMES) 905 (PNT) SHERWIN WILLIAMS, COLOR: SW6249 STORM CLOUD (EXPOSED MTL STAIR) 910 (SLR) CONC SEALER -CLEAR 912 (STAIN) COLOR TO MATCH VT INDUSTRIES -WHITE OAK VENEER COLOR: CLEAR TOILET PARTITIONS: TOILET AND URINAL STALL PARTITIONS: BRADLEY FLOOR MOUNTED OVER-HEAD BRACED SERIES 400 SENTINEL -PHENOLIC. PROVIDE PLAM FINISH #506. EXISTING ELEVATOR: PAINT ELEVATOR DOOR AND FRAME PAINT 904. FINISH NOTES: DOOR/FRAMES -SEMIGLOSS FINISH WALLS -EGGSHELL FINISH CEILINGS -FLAT FINISH PAINT EXISTING ELECT CLOSET DOORS AND FRAME, PAINT 904 (NEAR NORTH STAIR) SEE SHEET A-801 FOR ACCENT PAINT LOCATIONS ITHACA COLLEGE IS PROVIDING SOME FLOORING MATERIALS FOR CONTRACTOR INSTALL. COORDINATE WITH COLLEGE REPRESENTATIVE FOR OVERALL SCOPE OF IC PROVIDED AND NEW PURCHASE FLOORING FINISHES. T1 CL OF DOOR 1/8"x1" MTL EDGE PROTECTOR CPT, AS SCHEDULED. LVT, AS SCHEDULED. T2 CL OF DOOR UNDERLAYMENT FEATHERED OUT TO CONC SUBSTRATE CPT, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. EXIST FLOORING (TO REMAIN). EXIST EDGE PROTECTOR TO REMAIN (VIF). PROVIDE NEW TRANSITION AS REQ'D TO INSTALL CPT. T3 CL OF DOOR UNDERLAYMENT FEATHERED OUT TO CONC SUBSTRATE LVT, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. EXIST FLOORING (TO REMAIN). EXIST EDGE PROTECTOR TO REMAIN (VIF). PROVIDE NEW TRANSITION AS REQ'D TO INSTALL LVT.T4 CL OF DOOR RUBBER TRANSITION LVT, AS SCHEDULED. LVT, AS SCHEULED. 11"4"11" DOOR; SEE PLANS & SCHEDULE. HIGHEST RAISED CHARACTER SHALL BE 5'-0" AFF LOWEST RAISED CHARACTER SHALL BE 4'-0" AFF CEILING; SEE PLANS & SCHEDULE. SIDE-LITE SIDE-LITE DOOR FRAME. BASE; SEE SCHEDULE. ROOM SIGN; MOUNT ON CORRIDOR WALL ON STRIKE SIDE OF EACH ROOM. DOOR/SIDELITE FRAME. SEE PLANS & SCHEDULE. OUTSIDE CORNER OF ALCOVE. CEILING; SEE PLANS & SCHEDULE. ROOM SIGN; MOUNT ON CORRIDOR WALL ON STRIKE SIDE OF EACH ROOM. DOOR; SEE PLANS & SCHEDULE. CEILING; SEE PLANS & SCHEDULE. DOOR FRAME. BASE; SEE SCHEDULE. ROOM SIGN; MOUNT ON CORRIDOR WALL ON STRIKE SIDE OF EACH ROOM. HIGHEST RAISED CHARACTER SHALL BE 5'-0" AFF LOWEST RAISED CHARACTER SHALL BE 4'-0" AFF HIGHEST RAISED CHARACTER SHALL BE 5'-0" AFF LOWEST RAISED CHARACTER SHALL BE 4'-0" AFF NOTE: SIGNAGE PROVIDED BY ITHACA COLLEGE, INSTALLED BY GC. 3" 1'-3" 2" 1'-8" 3/4" PLAM 507 PLAM 507 PLAM 507 TIGHT MITER ALL CHANGES IN PLANE. 3/4" RED OAK VENEER PLYWOOD (PLAIN SLICED, SHIP MATCHED PANELS TO MATCH FACE OF WOOD DOORS) 3 SIDES, CLEAR FINISH. CENTER PANEL: 3/4' OAK VENEER PANEL OVER (2) LAYERS OF 3/4' PLYWOOD & 3/4" OAK VENEER PANEL. CONT 2x2 FLOOR CLIP. SECTIONELEVATION 2'-0" 2'-0" CENTER OF BENCH 3/4"3/4" PLAM 507 PLAM 507 3/4" RED OAK VENEER PLYWOOD (PLAIN SLICED, SHIP MATCHED PANELS TO MATCH FACE OF WOOD DOORS) 3 SIDES, CLEAR FINISH. 123456 123456 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 SCHEDULE-ROOMS AND DETAILS A-602 DECEMBER 18, 2020 220157.00 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 FOR CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE-ROOM FINISH ROOM NUMBERROOM NAME FLOORBASEWALLCEILING COMMENTSROOM NUMBER MATERIALFINISHCOLOR MATERIALFINISHCOLOR MATERIALF INISHCOLOR MATERIALFINISHCOLOR 100LOBBYEXIST CONCLVT302RB401EXIST / GWBPAINT901 & 903APC / GWB-- / PNT601 / 902100 101OFFICE 1EXIST CONCCPT101RB401EXIST / GWBPAINT901APC--601101 102OFFICE 2EXIST CONCCPT101RB401EXIST / GWBPAINT901APC--601102 103OFFICE 3EXIST CONCCPT101RB401EXIST / GWBPAINT901APC--601103 104OFFICE 4EXIST CONCCPT101RB401EXIST / GWBPAINT901APC--601104 105ELEV LOBBYEXIST CONCLVT302RB401EXIST / GWBPAINT901 & 903APC / GWB-- / PNT601 / 902105 106WAITING/RECPTEXIST CONCCPT102RB401EXIST / GWBPAINT901 & 903APC--601106 106ACLOEXIST CONCCPT102RB401GWBPAINT901APC- -601106A 107PROGRAM ACTIVITY CTREXIST CONCCPT102RB401EXIST / GWBPAINT901APC--601107 108ALL GENDER BATHROOMEXIST CONCLVT302RB401GWBPAINT901GWBPNT902108 109IP EXAM 1EXIST CONCLVT301RB401EXIST / GWBPAINT901APC--601109 110IP EXAM 2EXIST CONCLVT301RB401EXIST / GWBPAINT901APC--601110 111IP EXAM 3EXIST CONCLVT301RB401EXIST / GWBPAINT901APC--601111 112IP EXAM 4EXIST CONCLVT301RB401EXIST / GWBPAINT901APC--601112 113SITTING AREAEXIST CONCCPT102RB401EXIST / GWBPAINT901 & 903APC / GWB-- / PNT601 / 902113 114IT CLOEXIST CONCLVT302RB401EXIST / GWBPAINT901------114 115LEARNING CENTEREXIST CONCCPT101RB401GWBPAINT901APC--601115 115ASM GROUP/RELAXEXIST CONCCPT101RB401GWBPAINT901APC--601115A 116HALLEXIST CONCCPT102RB401GWBPAINT901 & 903APC--601116 117ADMISSIONS COORDINATOREXIST CONCCPT101RB401EXIST / GWBPAINT901APC--601117 118ALL GENDER BATHROOMEXIST CONCLVT302RB401GWBPAINT901APC--602118 119WOMENSEXIST CONCLVT302RB401EXIST / GWBPAINT901APC--602119 120MENS RMEXIST CONCLVT302RB401EXIST / GWBPAINT901APC--602120 121JANEXIST CONCLVT302RB401EXIST / GWBFRP701APC--601121 122CORR / STAIREXIST CONCCPT / RESIL102 / 303RB401EXIST / GWBPAINT901 & 903APC / GWB-- / PNT601 / 902RESIL 303 AT STAIR LANDING, TREADS AND RISERS122 122ASITTING AREAEXIST CONCCPT102RB401EXIST / GWBPAINT901APC--601122A 123HALLEXIST CONCCPT102RB401GWBPAINT901 & 903APC--601123 124INSTRUCTIONAL FACULTYEXIST CONCCPT101RB401GWBPAINT901APC--601124 125PRINCIPAL FACULTYEXIST CONCCPT101RB401GWBPAINT901APC--601125 126PRINCIPAL FACULTYEXIST CONCCPT101RB401GWBPAINT 901APC--601126 127FACULTY & STAFF BREAK RMEXIST CONCLVT302RB401EXIST / GWBPAINT901APC--601127 128COORD OFFICEEXIST CONCCPT101RB401EXIST / GWBPAINT901APC--601128 129DIR CLIN EDEXIST CONCCPT101RB401GWB PAINT901APC--601129 130PRINCIPAL FACULTYEXIST CONCCPT101RB401GWBPAINT901APC--601130 131CONFEXIST CONCCPT101RB401GWBPAINT901APC--601131 132CLASSROOMEXIST CONCLVT301RB401EXIST / GWBPAINT901 & 903APC / GWB-- / PNT601 / 902132 133CLASSROOMEXIST CONCLVT301RB401EXIST / GWBPAINT901 & 903APC / GWB-- / PNT601 / 902133 134AV CLOEXIST CONCCPT101RB401GWBPAINT901------134 200ELEV LOBBYEXIST CONCLVT302RB401EXIST / GWBPAINT901 & 903APC / GWB-- / PNT601 / 902200 201HALLEXIST CONCCPT102RB401EXIST / GWBPAINT901 & 903APC / GWB-- / PNT601 / 902201 202LEARNING CTREXIST CONCCPT101RB401EXIST / GWBPAINT901APC--601202 202ASM GROUPEXIST CONCCPT101RB401EXIST / GWBPAINT901APC / GWB-- / PNT601 / 902202A 202BSM GROUPEXIST CONCCPT101RB401GWBPAINT901APC / GWB-- / PNT601 / 902202B 203CLASSROOMEXIST CONCLVT301RB401EXIST / GWBPAINT901 & 903APC / GWB-- / PNT601 / 902203 204ADMIN ASST / RECEPTIONEXIST CONCCPT101RB401EXIST / GWBPAINT901 & 903APC--601204 205MED DIREXIST CONCCPT101RB401GWBPAINT901APC--601205 206DDE OFFICEEXIST CONCCPT101RB401EXIST / GWBPAINT901APC / GWB-- / PNT601 / 902206 207PD OFFICEEXIST CONCCPT101RB401EXIST / GWBPAINT901APC / GWB-- / PNT601 / 902207 208RECEPTION WAITINGEXIST CONCCPT101RB401EXIST / GWBPAINT901APC--601208 209TLTEXIST CONCLVT302RB401GWBPAINT901GWBPNT902209 210CONTROLEXIST CONCCPT101RB401GWBPAINT901APC--60 1210 211HALLEXIST CONCCPT102RB401EXIST / GWBPAINT901 & 903APC / GWB-- / PNT601 / 902211 212PAT EXAM RMEXIST CONCLVT301RB401GWBPAINT901APC--601212 213PAT EXAM RMEXIST CONCLVT301RB401GWBPAINT901APC--60 1213 214PAT EXAM RMEXIST CONCLVT301RB401EXIST / GWBPAINT901APC--601214 215PAT EXAM RMEXIST CONCLVT301RB401GWBPAINT901APC--601215 216PAT EXAM RMEXIST CONCLVT301RB401GWBPAINT901APC--601216 217PAT EXAM RMEXIST CONCLVT301RB401GWBPAINT901APC--601217 218HALLEXIST CONCLVT302RB401GWBPAINT901APC--601218 219DEBRIEFEXIST CONCLVT302RB401GWBPAINT / FRP901 / 701APC--601219 220MED STOREXIST CONCLVT302RB401GWBPAINT901APC--601220 221OPERATING ROOMEXIST CONCLVT301RB401GWBPAINT901APC--601221 222CONTROLEXIST CONCLVT302RB401GWBPAINT901APC--601222 223PATIENT RMEXIST CONCLVT301RB401GWBPAINT901APC--601223 224PATIENT TLTEXIST CONCLVT302RB401GWBPAINT901GWBPNT902224 225PROCEDURE ROOMEXIST CONCLVT301RB401GWBPAINT901APC--601225 226CONTROLEXIST CONCLVT302RB401GWBPAINT9 01APC--601226 227READY RMEXIST CONCLVT301RB401GWBPAINT901APC--601227 228CORRIDOREXIST CONCCPT102RB401EXIST / GWBPAINT901APC / GWB-- / PNT601 / 902228 229HALLEXIST CONCCPT102RB401GWBPAINT901 & 903APC / GWB-- / PNT601 / 902229 230CORREXIST CONCCPT102RB401EXIST / GWBPAINT901 & 903APC / GWB-- / PNT601 / 902230 231CLASSROOMEXIST CONCLVT301RB401EXIST / GWBPAINT901 & 903APC--601231 232ELECT RMEXIST CONCSEALER910RB401EXIST / GWBPAINT901------232 233SIM STOREXIST CONCLVT302RB401GWBPAINT901APC--601233 234LAUNDRY/STOREXIST CONCLVT302RB401EXIST / GWBPAINT901APC--601234 235ITEXIST CONCLVT302RB401EXIST / GWBPAINT901APC--601235 236HALLEXIST CONCCPT102RB401EXIST / GWBPAINT901APC / GWB-- / PNT601 / 902236 237JANEXIST CONCEXIST--EXIST401EXISTFRP701EXIST----237 238FACULTY & STAFF TLTEXIST CONCEXIST--EXIST401EXIST----EXIST----238 239LEARNER BREAK ROOMEXIST CONCLVT302RB401EXIST / GWB901APC--601239 239ALOCKERSEXIST CONCLVT302RB401EXIST / GWBPAINT901APC--60123 9A 240WOMENSEXIST CONCEXIST--EXIST/RBEXIST/401EXIST / GWB-- / PAINT901EXIST----PAINT NEW GWB WALL ONLY240 241MENSEXIST CONCEXISTEXISTEXISTEXIST----EXIST----241 242ALL GENDER TLTEXIST CONCEXISTEXISTEXISTEXIST----EXIST----242 243HALLEXIST CONCCPT102RB401EXIST / GWBPAINT901APC / GWB-- / PNT601 / 902243 SCALE: NO SCALE D2 FINISH LEGEND SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" A4 TYPICAL DOOR THRESHOLDS SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" A1 ELEVATIONS TYPICAL SIGN LOCATIONS SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" B1 SECTION / ELEV -BENCHES UP REF. REF. UP W D REF. 161718 15.119 C B A D E F EXIST ELEVATOR LOBBY 100 JAN 121 IP EXAM 2 110 IP EXAM 3 111 LEARNING CENTER 115 IP EXAM 4 112 SM GROUP/RELAX 115A CONF 131 OFFICE 1 101 OFFICE 2 102 OFFICE 3 103 OFFICE 4 104 ADMISSIONS COORDINATOR 117 ALL GENDER BATHROOM 118 WOMENS 119 INSTRUCTIONAL FACULTY 124 PRINCIPAL FACULTY 125 PRINCIPAL FACULTY 126 MENS RM 120 FACULTY & STAFF BREAK RM 127 CLASSROOM 132 CLASSROOM 133 PRINCIPAL FACULTY 130 OPEN TO ABOVE NEIGHBORING BUILDING LOW SHELVING CAPACITY: 18 STUDENTS AV CLO 134 UP ALL GENDER BATHROOM 108 COORD OFFICE 128 DIR CLIN ED 129 CAPACITY: 60 STUDENTS PROGRAM ACTIVITY CTR 107 IP EXAM 1 109 Scale Area RECEPTION IT CLO 114 EXIST STAIR (NO WORK) EXIST TENANT SPACE (NO WORK) EXIST TENANT SPACE (NO WORK) EXIST COMMON SPACE (NO WORK) EXIST COMMON SPACE (NO WORK) EXIST STAIR (NO WORK) E.9 15 A-802 C1 4-4 4-4 ELEV LOBBY 105 CORR / STAIR 122 CLO 106A WAITING/RECPT 106 5-1 4-2 4-1 4-1 4-2 4-54-5 CAPACITY: 50 STUDENTS PRINTER PRINTER TEMP DF/BF BENCHES 2 -9 2 -9 WATER HEATER SHELF. FLAT SLOPE 1:20 ALUM STOREFRONT WALL SITTING AREA 113 SITTING AREA 122A HALL 116 4-11 5-5 4-11 4-11 5-5 5-5 5-8 5-9 5-9 5-95-9 5-85-9 5-9 5-95-9 5-9 5-9 5-95-9 5-8 5-8 5-8 5-8 5-8 5-7 5-7 5-7 5-7 5-7 5-7 5-2 5-1 5-2 5-12 5-2 FURN & EQUIP TO BE FUTURE PURCHASE FURN & EQUIP TO BE FUTURE PURCHASE FURN & EQUIP TO BE FUTURE PURCHASE FURN & EQUIP TO BE FUTURE PURCHASE FURN & EQUIP TO BE FUTURE PURCHASE FURN & EQUIP TO BE FUTURE PURCHASE PAINT 903 PNT 903 HALL 123 T1 PNT 903 PAINT 903 PAINT 903 SEE SHEET A-602 FOR BENCH DTLS. PNT 903 PNT 903 PAINT 903 PNT 903 PAINT 903 PNT 903 ITEMS SHOWN FOR FUTURE LAYOUT 161718 15.1 C B A D E F WOMENS 240 MENS 241 ALL GENDER TLT 242 FACULTY & STAFF TLT 238 IT 235LAUNDRY/STOR 234 LEARNER BREAK ROOM 239 SIM STOR 233 CLASSROOM 231 SM GROUP 202A SM GROUP 202B PROCEDURE ROOM 225 PATIENT RM 223 CONTROL 226 READY RM 227 PATIENT TLT 224 CONTROL 222 OPERATING ROOM 221 CONTROL 210 RECEPTION WAITING 208 PAT EXAM RM 212 PAT EXAM RM 213 PAT EXAM RM 214 PAT EXAM RM 217 PAT EXAM RM 216 PAT EXAM RM 215 DEBRIEF 219 PD OFFICE 207DDE OFFICE 206 MED DIR 205 ADMIN ASST / RECEPTION 204 CLASSROOM 203 LEARNING CTR 202 ELEV LOBBY 200 HALL 211 CORRIDOR 228 CORR 230 MED STOR 220 TLT 209 E.9 15 A-802 C3 ELECT RM 232 LOW SHELVING (110) EXISTING 12"x12" (5 HIGH) LOCKERS (40) NEW ELEV LOCKERS 239A ELECT PANEL SHELVING 4-10 CAPACITY: 52 STUDENTS 4-24-2 4-1 4-24-2 4-1 PRINTER EXIST STAIR EXIST STAIR SHELF & MONITOR TEMP TEMP TEMP TEMP EMS 4-2 4-1 CAPACITY: 53 STUDENTS HALL 229 BF BF 5-3 TYP 5-3TYP 3-20 2-11 2-11 2-11 2-11 PRINTER 4-11 5-32 5-4 5-5 5-10 5-10 5-10 4-3 4-3 4-3 PRINTER 2 -1 4 -12 4 -12 DN 5-2 5-2 5-11 5-25-2 5-11 5-4 5-25-2 5-6 5-6 5-20 5-21 5-24 5-23 5-22 5-21 5-24 5-24 5-24 5-20 5-24 5-22 5-23 5-21 5-20 5-20 5-21 5-23 5-23 5-24 5-24 5-20 5-23 5-24 5-21 5-3 5-23 2 -14 PAINT 903 PAINT 903PAINT 903 HALL 243 JAN 237 HALL 236 HALL 218 T1 T1 PNT 903 PNT 903 PNT 903 PNT 903 PNT 903 PAINT 903 PAINT 903 PAINT 903 PAINT 903 PNT 903 PNT 903 PNT 903 PNT 903 FRP 701 FRP 701 PROJECT NORTH 123456 123456 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 FLOOR PLANS -FF&E A-801 DECEMBER 18, 2020 220157.00 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 FOR CONSTRUCTION SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" B1 FIRST FLOOR PLAN -FF&E SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" B4 SECOND FLOOR PLAN -FF&E REF. 161718 15.1 C D 15 3-13B 3-13C 4M PS MS 4M PS MS MS4M MS4M WALL MOUNTED DEBRIEFING COMPUTER & PRESENTATION SYSTEM. EMS SIM EMS SIM EMS SIM PSPSPS PS PSPSPS EMS EQUIP RACK OPERATING ROOM 221 CONTROL 222 PATIENT TLT 224 PATIENT RM 223 PROCEDURE ROOM 225 READY RM 227 CONTROL 226 PAT EXAM RM 217PAT EXAM RM 216 PAT EXAM RM 215 DEBRIEF 219 CONTROL 210 RECEPTION WAITING 208 MED STOR 220 PAT EXAM RM 212 PAT EXAM RM 213 PAT EXAM RM 214 HALL 211 TLT 209 CORRIDOR 228 WALL MOUNTED 43" EMS MONITOR EXAM CONTROL & EMS EMS EMS EMS EMS EMS EMS EMS EMS EMS 1M 1M 1M 1M1M1M 5'-2 1/2" 9'-9 13/128" 8'-6 3/4" 7'-0 1/4" HALL 218 HALL 201 6'-9" ELEVATOR 3-13A 3-13G 3-13D 3 -01 3-13G 3-13D 3-13A 3 -11 3 -12 3 -03 3 -04 3-08 3-09 3 -12 3-07 3-13D 3-13A 3-13G3-13G 3-13A 3-13D 1 1 1 3-13G 3-13A 3-13D 3 -11 3-13B 3-13C 3-13B 3-13C 3-13D 3 -113 -11 3-13D 3-13D 3-13G3-13G 3-13G 3-13A3-13A3-13A 3-13B 3-13C 3-13B 3-13C 3-13B 3-13C 3-09 3-08 3-07 3 -18 3 -18 3 -14 3 -05 3 -12 3 -16 9 1/2"28'-2 1/2"29'-0"29'-0" DN 3 -06 BOTTLE FILLER EMS SIM 3 -11 3 -12 3 -11 3 -17 3 -113 -11 3 -173 -17 3 -17 3 -17 3 -17 3 -17 3 -17 3 -11 4-3 4-3 3-19 CG 801. CG 801. CG 801. CG 801. CG 801. CG 801. CG 801. 4-6 4-6 4-6 4-6 4-6 4-6 4-6 4-6 4-94-9 4-9 4-9 3-13F 3-13F 3-13F 3-13F 5-31 5-32 5 -33 3-13F3-13F3-13F 3-13F 3-13B 3-13C 5 -30 3 -11 3 -02 4-3 5-10 5-10 5-10 5-10 5-10 5-105-105-10 5-25 4-3 4-34-3 4-3 4-3 4-3 4-3 4-3 4-3 4-3 4-3 4-3 4-3 4-3 4-3 4-3 4-3 ELEV LOBBY 200 HALL 243 3-13F 3-13D3-13B 3-13C 3-10 3-13B 3-13C 5 -30 5 -30 5 -305 -30 5 -30 5 -30 5 -30 5-23 3-10 3 -02 3-13G 17 C B IP EXAM 4 112 IP EXAM 3 111 IP EXAM 2 110 IP EXAM 1 109 WAITING/RECPT 106 LEARNING CENTER 115 2 -2 2 -2 2 -2 2 -2 FURN & EQUIP TO BE FUTURE PURCHASE FURN & EQUIP TO BE FUTURE PURCHASE FURN & EQUIP TO BE FUTURE PURCHASE FURN & EQUIP TO BE FUTURE PURCHASE NO DIAMEDICAL EQUIPMENT IN IP CLINIC 5 -30 5 -30 5 -30 5 -30 FURN & EQUIP SHOWN FOR FUTURE LAYOUT MS PS _M IM MANNEQUIN VOICE SPEAKER OVERHEAD PAGING SPEAKER # OF MICROPHONES EXAM IP PTZ CAMERA LOCATION PROJECT NORTH 123456 123456 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 ENLARGED PLANS FF&E A-802 DECEMBER 18, 2020 220157.00 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 FOR CONSTRUCTION SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" C3 ENLARGED PLAN -SECOND FLOOR CLINICAL LEARNING CENTER -FF&E SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" C1 ENLARGED PLAN -FIRST FLOOR CLINIC -FF&E NOTES: 1. COORDINATE CAMERA LOCATIONS WITH OWNER. SCHEDULE -SPEAKERS AND MICROPHONES COUNTDEVICEDEPARTMENT (ROOM NAME) 4 9 22 25 MANNEQUIN VOICE SPEAKER OVERHEAD PAGING SPEAKER MICROPHONE IP PTZ CAMERA (4) OPERATING ROOM (221), (4) PATIENT ROOM (225), (4) PROCEDURE ROOM (225), (4) PROCEDURE ROOM (227), (6) PATIENT EXAM RM (212-217) (1) DEBRIEF (219), (1) OPERATING ROOM (221), (1) PATIENT ROOM (223), (6) PATIENT EXAM RM (212-217) (1) DEBRIEF (219), (3) OPERATING ROOM (221), (3) PATIENT ROOM (223), (3) PROCEDURE ROOM (225), (3) PROCEDURE ROOM (227), (12)PATIENT EXAM RM (212-217) (1) OPERATING ROOM (221), (1) PATIENT ROOM (223), (1) PROCEDURE ROOM (225), (1) PROCEDURE ROOM (227) SCHEDULE-EXISTING FURNITURE TO BE RE-USED TAG PREFIXMARKITEMMANUFACTURER AND CODE NO.TYPE REMARKS 41STACKING CHAIRS - BLACKITHACA COLLEGE TO PROVIDE & INSTALL 423'-0" DIA ROUND TABLESITHACA COLLEGE TO PROVIDE & INSTALL 43TASK CHAIR - FABRICITHACA COLLEGE TO PROVIDE & INSTALL 449'-0"L COUCHITHACA COLLEGE TO PROVIDE & INSTALL 45LOUNGE CHAIRS (BROWN)ITHACA COLLEGE TO PROVIDE & INSTALL 46DESK- WORK- 48"x28"ITHACA COLLEGE TO PROVIDE & INSTALL 49WOOD STORAGE SHELVINGITHACA COLLEGE TO PROVIDE & INSTALL 410SHELVING UNIT 2'x4'ITHACA COLLEGE TO PROVIDE & INSTALL 411LOW BOOK SHELFITHACA COLLEGE TO PROVIDE & INSTALL 4125 TIER LOCKERS - 12"x12"SALSBURY INDUSTRIES - COLOR: BLUE WITH 6" LEGS110 EXISTING + 40 NEW = 150 TOTAL, SEE ITEM 2-1. CONTRACTOR TO RETRIEVE AND CLEAN FROM BASEMENT & INSTALL ALONG WITH NEW. SCHEDULE-CLASSROOM & OFFICE FURNITURE TAG PREFIXMARKITEMMANUFACTURER AND NDL NO.TYPE REMARKS 51TRAPEZOID CLASSROOM TABLE 52CLASSROOM CHAIRTEKNION 53STUDENT CHAIR & WRITING TABLET 544 STUDENT DIVIDED STUDY TABLE 556 STUDENT DIVIDED STUDY TABLE 568 STUDENT DIVIDED STUDY TABLE 57LOBBY LOUNGE CHAIR 58SMALL ROUND SIDE TABLE 59PATIENT RM SIDE CHAIR 510WAITING AREA SIDE CHAIR 511SMALL CONF TABLE 512LARGE CONF TABLE 520ADJUSTABLE DESKINTIVITY 521CREDENZA WITH BOX FILESINTIVITY 5223'-0' DIA OFFICE TABLEINTIVITY 523DESK SHAIRINTIVITY 524OFFICE SIDE CHAIRINTIVITY 525RECEPTION DESK 530MONITOR BRACKET & SHELFHERMAN MILLER CF210 INCLUDE SHELF & MONITOR ARM SUPPORTCOLORS TO BE SELECTED BY MFR STANDARDS 531PATIENT RM COUCH 532PATIENT RM SIDE CHAIR 533PATIENT RM WARDROBE / DESK MODULE NOTES: 1. FOR OTHER LAERDAL EQUIPMENT, REQUEST INFORMATION FROM COLLEGE VENDOR. 2. EQUIPMENT, FURNITURE AND ACCESSORIES FOR ROOMS 109-112 TO BE PURCHASED AT LATER DATE. COORD WITH ITHACA COLLEGE. SCHEDULE-MEDICAL EQUIPMENT TAG PREFIXMARKCOUNTITEMSUPPLIERMODEL NO.DEPARTMENT (ROOM NAME) UTILITIES COMMENTS POWERDATAWATERDRAINAIR 3011DIAMEDICAL USA VANTAGE MED SURG TUTOR BEDDIAMEDICALBS029901PATIENT ROOM (223)YOWNER FURNISHED & CONTRACTOR INSTALLED 302236 FUNCTIONAL WALL MOUNTED HORIZ DISCOVER HEADWALL W/ COMPLETE ACCESSORIES PACKAGE AND SILENT AIR COMPRESSOR DIAMEDICALHW020802PATIENT ROOM (223) & OPERATING RM (221)YYYOWNER FURNISHED & CONTRACTOR INSTALLED 3031AUTOMATIC OVERBED TABLEDIAMEDICALFR023210PATIENT ROOM (223)OWNER FURNISHED & CONTRACTOR INSTALLED 3041BEDSIDE CABINETDIAMEDICALFR013201PATIENT ROOM (223)YYOWNER FURNISHED & CONTRACTOR INSTALLED 3051LOADED ANESTHESIA CART W/ ANESTHESIA PACKAGEDIAMEDICALLC067980OPE RATING ROOM (221)YYOWNER FURNISHED & CONTRACTOR INSTALLED 3061LOADED 6 DRAWER EMERGENCY CRASH CART W/ EMERGENCY CART PACKAGEDIAMEDICALDEBRIEF ROOMYYOWNER FURNISHED & CONTRACTOR INSTALLED 3072COVERED SQUARE HAMPERDIAMEDICALCS013201(1) OPERATING ROOM (221), (1) PATIENT ROOM (223)OWNER FURNISHED & CONTRACTOR INSTALLED 3082NYLON HAMPER BAGDIAMEDICALCS013202(1) OPERATING ROOM (221), (1) PATIENT ROOM (223)OWNER FURNISHED & CONTRACTOR INSTALLED 3092ALARIS MEDLEY COMBO #1 - RECONDITIONEDDIAMEDICALIV010519(1) OPERATING ROOM (221), (1) PATIENT ROOM (223)YOWNER FURNISHED & CONTRACTOR INSTALLED 3102STAINLESS STEEL IV POLEDIAMEDICALIV043201(1) OPERATING ROOM (221), (1) PATIENT ROOM (223)OWNER FURNISHED & CONTRACTOR INSTALLED 31110TRIPLE HORIZONTAL WIRE GLOVE BOX HOLDERDIAMEDICALIC042302OPERATING RM, PATIENT RMS & PROCEDURE RMSOWNER FURNISHED & CONTRACTOR INSTALLED 3124KENDALL 5 QUART SHARPS DISPOSAL SYSTEM WALL ENCLOSUREDIAMEDICALIC042401(1) OPERATING ROOM (221), (1) PATIENT ROOM (223), (2) PROCEDURE ROOM (225, 227)OWNER FURNISHED & CONTRACTOR INSTALLED 313A8CLASSIC FAMILY PRACTICE TABLE W/ STEP STOOLDIAMEDICAL-PATIENT EXAM RM (212-217 & 223)YOWNER FURNISHED & CONTRACTOR INSTALLED 313B948" WALL CABINET W/ 2 DOORSDIAMEDICAL-PATIENT EXAM RM (212-217 & 223)OWNER FURNISHED & CONSTRACTOR INSTALLED 313C948" BASE CABINET W/ 4 DOORS AND 2 DRAWERS - SINK AND CHROME FAUCET SET INCLUDEDDIAMEDICAL-PATIENT EXAM RM (212-217 & 223)YYOWNER FURNISHED & CONSTRACTOR INSTALLED 313D95-LEG, PNEUMATIC STOOLDIAMEDICAL-PATIENT EXAM RM (212-217 & 223)OWNER FURNISHED & CONTRACTOR INSTALLED 313F920-QUART STAINLESS STEEL WASTE RECEPTACLEDIAMEDICAL-PATIENT EXAM RM (212-217 & 223)OWNER FURNISHED & CONTRACTOR INSTALLED 313G9PREMIUM, PADDED, SIDE CHAIRDIAMEDICAL-PATIENT EXAM RM (212-217 & 223)OWNER FURNISHED & CONTRACTOR INSTALLED 3141LARGE STAINLESS STEEL INSTRUMENT TABLE W/ BOTTOM SHELFDIAMEDICALSR026130OPERATING ROOM (221)OWNER FURNISHED & CONTRACTOR INSTALLED 3161TORINO EXL SURGERY TABLEDIAMEDICALSR019901OPERATING ROOM (221)YOWNER FURNISHED & CONTRACTOR INSTALLED 317830" INTEGRATED WALL DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEMWELCH ALLYN777 SERIESPATIENT EXAM RM (212-217)YOWNER FURNISHED & CONTRACTOR INSTALLED 3182MIRA LED 65 CEILING MOUNT, SINGLE, STANDARD ARM, SURGICAL LIGHTDIAMEDICALSR060805OPERATING ROOM (221)YOWNER FURNISHED & CONTRACTOR INSTALLED 3191PORTABLE PATIENT LIFT SYSTEMDIAMEDICALOPERATING ROOM (221)OWNER FURNISHED & CONTRACTOR INSTALLED 3201HARVEY CARTLAERDALSTORAGEOWNER FURNISHED & INSTALLED FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER RENOVATION NOTES ITHACA COLLEGE ROTHCHILD BUILDING - 2020 INFORMATION SHOWN ON BID DOCUMENTS IS DIAGRAMMATIC TO PRESENT THE EXTENT OF WORK. EXACT LOCATIONS AND ROUTING SHALL BE COORDINATED BY CONTRACTOR WITH OTHER TRADES. RENOVATED AREAS FOR 1ST & 2ND FLOORS SHALL HAVE EXISTING PIPING REMOVED AS DESCRIBED HEREIN. SPRINKLER PROTECTION SHALL BE MAINTAINED TO OTHER TENANT SPACES CONTINUOUSLY DURING THE CONSTRUCTION PERIOD, EXCEPT FOR THE DAILY INTERRUPTION TO CONDUCT DEMOLITION, OR RECONNECTION TO THE BUILDING WIDE SYSTEM, UPON COMPLETION OF INSTALLATION AND HYDROSTATIC TESTING. SEE SPECIFIC DIRECTIONS. ALL WORK NOT CONFORMING TO THE SPECIFICATION SHALL BE REWORKED AT THE CONTRACTOR'S COST. ALL COMPONENTS SHALL BE UL LISTED AND FM APPROVED FOR FIRE PROTECTION. CAUTION MUST BE OBSERVED TO CONTROL THE DISCHARGE OF WATER FROM MAIN DRAIN CONNECTIONS AT THE SECTIONAL VALVES, TO PREVENT FREEZE HAZARDS AT EXTERIOR. 1. PREPARE AND SUBMIT FOR REVIEW: SHOP DRAWINGS, CALCULATIONS, TECHNICAL DATA SHEETS FOR EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS. DOCUMENTS SHALL BE PREPARED AND SUBMITTED BY A NICET III TECHNICIAN. 2. SUBMIT COPIES TO THE ITHACA FIRE PREVENTION BUREAU & ENGINEER. 3. CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD SURVEY THE EXISTING FIRE PROTECTION INSTALLATION TO THE WATER SUPPLY TO DETERMINE ELEVATIONS, PIPE SIZE, TYPE, DISTANCES, EQUIVALENT LENGTH OF FITTINGS, TO AID IN THE HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS. 4. CERTAIN DIRECTIVES IN THIS SPECIFICATION EXCEED THE MINIMUM STANDARD NFPA 13, 2019 EDITION, AND SHALL BE FOLLOWED BY THE CONTRACTOR 5. OBSERVE RULES FOR SPRINKLER PLACEMENT: WHERE CONDITIONS ARISE, OR EXIST THAT CAUSE THE REQUIRED PLACEMENT TO EXCEED THE SPECIFIED MAXIMUM, ADDITIONAL SPRINKLERS SHALL BE PROVIDED. 6. HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS SHALL BE PREPARED FOR AREAS OF THE GREATEST SPRINKLER HEAD POPULATION. THE AREA OF HYDRAULIC DESIGN SHALL BE 1500 SQUARE FEET. THE REDUCTION MODIFIER TO 900 S.F. SHALL NOT BE EMPLOYED. INCLUDE SMALL OFFICE ROOMS WITHIN THE CALCULATED AREA. 6.1. CALCULATIONS SHALL CONTAIN AN ALLOWANCE OF 15 PSI FOR POTENTIAL FUTURE BACKFLOW DEVICE, AND 10 PSI SAFETY FACTOR FOR PRESSURE OVERALL. 6.2. LIGHT HAZARD OCCUPANCY. .1 GPM PER S.F. 6.2.1. STORAGE SPACES AND SIMILAR OCCUPANCY SPACES ROOM SHALL BE ORDINARY HAZARD GROUP 1 6.3. LIGHT HAZARD SPRINKLER HEAD SPACING SHALL NOT EXCEED 168 SQ.FT. 6.4. 1" PIPE SHALL SUPPLY ONLY ONE SPRINKLER. 6.5. OBTAIN WATER FLOW SUPPLY DATA FROM ITHACA WATER FOR PURPOSES OF PREPARING HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS. 7. "ARM OVER" PIPING TO DROPS SHALL BE SUPPORTED IN ACCESS OF 2'-0" LENGTH, OR WHERE WEIGHT MAY IMPACT PIPE STABILITY. 8. HARD PIPING SHALL BE MADE TO THE SPRINKLER. "FLEXIBLE DROPS" ARE DISCOURAGED FROM USE. WHERE FLEX DROPS MUST BE UTILIZED, THE FOLLOWING SHALL BE REQUIRED: 8.1. THE MAXIMUM MANUFACTURERS' DATA (LENGTH & BENDS ) SHALL BE USED IN THE CALCULATION, WITHOUT CONSIDERATION FOR THE ACTUAL DEVICE LENGTH EMPLOYED. 8.2. SUCH MATERIAL SHALL ONLY START FROM A DOWN ORIENTED TEE OR ELBOW, DIRECTLY ABOVE THE SPRINKLER INSTALLATION LOCATION. TRAVERSE ROUTING OF FLEX HOSE SHALL NOT BE MADE. 8.3. FLEX HOSE SHALL BE OF DOMESTIC MANUFACTURE. VICTAULIC OR EQUAL APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER. 8.4. ALL MANUFACTURERS INSTALLATION DATA SHALL BE PROVIDED, INCLUDED ON SHOP DRAWINGS, AND ALL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS SHALL BE FOLLOWED, 8.5. FLEXIBLE PIPING SHALL ONLY BE UTILIZED IN A VERTICAL ORIENTATION. NO HORIZONTAL ROUTING SHALL BE EMPLOYED. 8.6. THE INSTALLATION SHALL USE THE SHORTEST FEASIBLE HOSE LENGTH. PROVIDE IN A MANNER SUPPORT BRACKETS DO NOT OBSTRUCT OTHER EQUIPMENT ROUTING, AND PREVENTS ADJACENT CEILING TILE REMOVAL AND ABOVE CEILING ACCESS. 9. FUTURE----10. COORDINATE ALL IMPAIRMENTS, SHUT DOWN, WITH OWNERS AGENTS PRIOR TO SHUTDOWN. 11. ALL MATERIALS SHALL BE OF DOMESTIC MANUFACTURE, UL LISTED AND FM APPROVED. INSTALLATION SHALL BE IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURERS' INSTALLATION GUIDELINES. 12. REMOVE ALL SPRINKLER PIPING FROM THE AREA OF WORK AS DENOTED IN DEMOLITION SECTION OF NOTES. NEW PIPING LAYOUT TO BE INSTALLED AS DIRECTED. 13. RECORD AND REPORT TO THE ENGINEER, THE INTERIOR CONDITION OF THE PIPING. REPORT IMMEDIATELY, ANY ADVERSE CONDITIONS THAT MAY BE DISCOVERED DURING DISASSEMBLY. PIPE INSTALLATION 1. ALL PIPE SHALL BE INSTALLED LEVEL, PLUMB, AND SQUARE AND AT RIGHT ANGLE TO THE BUILDING LINES. SPRINKLER PIPING SHOULD OCCUPY A CONSTANT ELEVATION FOR THE SUPPLY PIPING AND BRANCH LINES, WITHOUT VARYING ELEVATION AS TO INTERFERE WITH OTHER TRADES INSTALLATIONS, AND PREVENT DRAINING. 2. OFFSETS AND CHANGES ARE ANTICIPATED, AND SHALL BE PERFORMED WITH PROPER FITTINGS TO ACHIEVE THE LOCATION CHANGE, IN A SKILLED MANNER. REQUIRED & ADEQUATE SUPPORTS SHALL BE PROVIDED. 3. MODIFY SUPPLY ROUTING AS CONDITIONS REQUIRE. INSTALL IN A MANNER THAT THE SYSTEM WILL DRAIN TO THE CONTROL RISER MAIN DRAIN. TRAPPED SECTIONS OF PIPING SHALL BE FITTED WITH ACCESSIBLE DRAIN VALVES, AND LOCATIONS SHALL BE NOTED ON SHOP DRAWINGS. 4. CROSS MAIN PIPE SIZE SHALL TERMINATE AT THE END NOT SMALLER THAN 3" PIPE SIZE, AS SHOWN. 5. PIPE HANGERS SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE NFPA 13 STANDARD, AND PIPE SHALL BE SUSPENDED FROM THE STRUCTURAL STEEL WITH TOP BEAM CLAMPS, MTR, AND AUTOGRIP PIPE HANGERS. 6. MASONRY ANCHORS SHALL BE "DROP IN" TYPE OR "POWER STUD". UL/FM. (POWERS OR APPROVED EQUAL). 7. "ARM OVER" PIPE TO SPRINKLER LOCATIONS SHALL BE SUPPORTED. 8. WHERE REQUIRED, EXTEND HORIZONTAL PIPE(S) TO PROPERLY SUPPORT SYSTEM FROM BUILDING STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS, AS SHOWN ON DRAWING. 9. ALL SPRINKLERS SHALL BE SUPPORTED AND RESTRAINED BY THE SPRINKLER PIPING. THE ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM SHALL NOT BE USED TO PROVIDE SUPPORT TO PIPING COMPONENTS. 10. ANAEROBIC THREAD SEALANT SHALL NOT BE UTILIZED. 11. TRAPEZE HANGERS SHALL BE PROPERLY SIZED AND ATTACHED FOR THE SECTION MODULUS REQUIRED FOR THE SPAN. SPRINKLERS 1. ALL SPRINKLERS SHALL BE RELIABLE MODEL G5-56 CONCEALED 5.6K WITH WHITE COVER PLATE 2. ALL SPRINKLER HEADS SHALL BE INSTALLED IN THE CENTER OF EACH CEILING TILE. 3. PROVIDE NEW SPARE SPRINKLER CABINET(S) IN THE RISER ROOM, MOUNTED TO WALL; INCLUDE WITHIN THE CABINET, MANUFACTURERS HEAD WRENCH RC-1; MINIMUM OF SIX (6) SPARE SPRINKLERS, FOR EACH TYPE/STYLE OF SPRINKLER INSTALLED; THREE F-2 ESCUTCHEONS. PERMANENTLY ATTACH A PLACARD AS REQUIRED BY NFPA 13, 6.2.9.7.1 THAT DESCRIBES ALL THE SPRINKLER CHARACTERISTICS, AND LOCATIONS WHERE INSTALLED. INFORMATION 1. SECOND FLOOR PIPING WITHIN IC LEASED SPACE SHALL BE REMOVED UP TO THE 4" GROOVE JOINTS AS THEY ENTER THE SPACE. SEE DRAWINGS FOR LOCATIONS. CAP OFF AT THIS LOCATION. RE-CONNECT WHEN SYSTEM INSTALLATION IS COMPLETED. 2. ALL NEW PIPE , 2" AND UNDER SHALL BE SCHEDULE 40 THREADED. UL/FM. DOMESTIC MANUFACTURE. WHEATLAND OR EQUAL. 3. 3" & 4" MAY BE SCHEDULE 10. DOMESTIC MANUFACTURE. 4. FITTINGS 4.1. 2" AND SMALLER- CAST IRON CLASS 125 OR DUCTILE IRON SCREWED FITTINGS. UL/FM . DOMESTIC MANUFACTURE. 4.2. NO PLAIN END FITTINGS ALLOWED. 4.3. 3" AND 4" GROOVED JOINT. DOMESTIC MANUFACTURE. ANVIL - VICTAULIC- APPROVED EQUAL. 5. CO-ORDINATE WORK WITH OTHER TRADES TO AVOID INTERFERENCES. 6. PATCH ALL HOLES, CAUSED BY DEMOLITION OR INSTALLATION. 7. HANGERS AT END PENDANT SPRINKLERS SHALL BE INSTALLED AS REQUIRED FOR PRESSURE CONDITIONS THAT MAY BE ABOVE 100 PSI. 8. PIPE PENETRATIONS : 8.1. SLEEVES SHALL BE PROVIDED WHERE PIPE PENETRATIONS ARE MADE THROUGH WALLS OF FIRE RATING. 8.2. ANNULAR SPACE AROUND PIPE PENETRATIONS SHALL BE SEALED WITH UL LISTED FIRE RATED INTUMESCENT FIRE STOPPING MATERIAL. APPLY IN A NEAT MANNER TO AVOID ERRANT APPLICATION TO SURROUNDING SURFACES. 8.3. HOLES THROUGH GWB AND ACT SHALL BE MADE WITH A HOLE SAW TO THE SMALLEST PRACTICAL DIAMETER. 9. WHERE CONDITIONS EXIST THAT ARE NOT IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE NFPA STANDARDS, THESE SHALL BE BROUGHT TO THE ENGINEERS ATTENTION. DRAINS - SECOND FLOOR 1. THE SOUTH CROSS MAIN AT COLS. 15 TO 16 & D TO E SHALL HAVE AN 11 4" AUXILIARY DRAIN PIPED FROM THE BOTTOM OF THE CROSS MAIN TO THE BASIN IN UTILITY ROOM NUMBER 236. 2. A VENT AND INSPECTORS TEST LINE SHALL BE INSTALLED FROM THE TOP OF THE BRANCH LINE IN AREA 237 AND PIPED TO THE DRAIN BASIN IN ROOM 236. THE LINE SOURCE CONNECTION SHALL ORIGINATE FROM THE TOP OF THE BRANCH LINE. THIS IS DESIGNED FOR REMOVAL OF AIR WITHIN THE SYSTEM. INSTALL A TEST AND DRAIN DEVICE AT ACCESSIBLE HEIGHT. SUPERVISORY DEVICES. BY BUILDING OWNER, NOT PART OF THIS CONTRACT, FOR INFORMATION ONLY THE OWNER SHALL PROVIDE: 1. INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTMENT OF OS&Y TAMPER SWITCHES ON THE 1ST & 2ND FLOOR OS&Y CONTROL VALVES. ADD CHAIN AND BREAKABLE LOCK WITH COMMON KEY, TO ALL CONTROL VALVES. 2. SUPERVISORY ALARM CONNECTIONS, AND PROGRAMMING TO EACH VALVE SHALL BE PROVIDED BY THE FIRE ALARM VENDOR. WORK SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 72. 3. FIRE SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR SHALL TEST THE DEVICE THROUGH A FULL CYCLE OPERATION AT THE PROJECT COMPLETION. VERIFY RECEIPT OF SIGNAL AT THE ALARM PANEL, AND BY THE CENTRAL STATION. TESTS UPON COMPLETION 1. HYDROSTATICALLY TEST THE COMPLETED PIPING INSTALLATION AT 200 PSI FOR 2 HOURS WITHOUT LOSS. REPAIR ANY LEAK AND RE-TEST. 2. PERFORM MAIN DRAIN TESTING AND RECORD TEST RESULTS. 3. TEST WATER FLOW DETECTORS FOR EACH ZONE, RECORD THE ZONE DISPLAY INFORMATION, AND OBTAIN HISTORY OF SIGNALS SENT, FROM THE CENTRAL STATION. PROVIDE DOCUMENTS AS PART OF FINAL SUBMITTAL. 4. PERFORM AND RECORD OPERATIONAL TEST OF ALL SUPERVISORY VALVE TAMPER SWITCHES. VERIFY RECEIPT OF SIGNALS WITH THE CENTRAL STATION. 5. ACCURATELY COMPLETE THE "ABOVE GROUND PIPING & MATERIALS CERTIFICATE" AND INCLUDE CORRECT DESCRIPTIONS OF THE COMPONENTS EMPLOYED. 6. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE O&M MANUALS WITH CUT SHEETS AND TECHNICAL DATA, INCLUDING FLOW TESTS, HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS & AS-BUILT SHOP DRAWINGS. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE 2 SETS WHICH INCLUDE 3 HARD COPIES AND ONE ELECTRONIC COPY ON USB DRIVE OF ALL INFORMATION. ONE SET TO BUILDING OWNER AND ONE SET TO ITHACA COLLEGE. FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER RENOVATION NOTES DEMOLITION NOTES ITHACA COLLEGE - ROTHCHILD BUILDING - 2020 RENOVATED AREAS (ITHACA COLLEGE LEASED SPACE) SHALL HAVE EXISTING PIPING REMOVED AS DESCRIBED HEREIN. SPRINKLER PROTECTION SHALL BE MAINTAINED TO OTHER TENANT SPACES CONTINUOUSLY DURING THE CONSTRUCTION PERIOD, EXCEPT FOR THE DAILY INTERRUPTION TO EFFECT DEMOLITION, OR RECONNECTION TO THE BUILDING WIDE SYSTEM UPON COMPLETION OF INSTALLATION AND HYDROSTATIC TESTING. SEE SPECIFIC DIRECTIONS. DEMOLITION 1ST FLOOR @ COLUMN LINE 'C' CROSS MAIN 1. CROSS MAIN THAT RUNS PARALLEL TO COLUMN LINE 'C' , FROM COLUMN LINE 19 THROUGH 15 AND BEYOND SHALL BE RETAINED IN SERVICE TO SERVE EXISTING TENANT SPACES. 2. BRANCH LINES WITHIN THE AREA OF WORK SERVED BY THIS MAIN WILL BE REMOVED, AND OUTLETS PLUGGED. 3. SYSTEM SHALL BE RESTORED AT THE END OF EACH DAY WHEN DEMOLITION IS PERFORMED. DEMOLITION 2ND FLOOR @ COLUMN LINE 'B' 4. DISASSEMBLE EXISTING 4" SCHEDULE 40 CROSS MAIN ALONG COLUMN LINE 'B', WEST OF COLUMN LINE '18', AND REMOVE ALL PIPING. CAP FOR RECONNECTION UPON COMPLETION OF THE SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND TESTING. 2ND FLOOR @ COLUMN LINES 'D' TO 'E'. 5. DISCONNECT 4" SCHEDULE 40 PIPE AT GROOVE COUPLING, CLOSE TO WALL WEST OF COLUMN LINE 18. REMOVE ALL PIPING UP TO 3" GROOVE COUPLING WEST OF COLUMN LINE 16. 6. REMOVE ALL BRANCH LINES AND CROSS MAIN PIPING WITHIN THE RENOVATED AREA INSTALLATION 1ST FLOOR - COLUMN 'B' 1. A NEW 3" CROSS MAIN SHALL SUPPLY THE NEW SPRINKLER PROTECTION TO THIS AREA. REFER TO DRAWING SECTIONAL VIEW A-A FOR CROSS MAIN ARRANGEMENT. 2. CONNECT EXISTING AUXILIARY DRAIN IN TRAPPED SECTION OF 4" NEAR ELEVATOR, (COLUMN LINES 'C' & 18) INTO NEW 3" CROSS MAIN TO ESTABLISH AN "AUTOMATIC DRAIN" . MAINTAIN OR REPLACE THE EXISTING 11 4" DRAIN VALVE. 3. FINAL ATTACHMENT TO THE EXISTING CROSS MAIN SHALL BE ACCOMPLISHED AFTER PIPING INSTALLATION IS COMPLETE, AND HYDROSTATIC TESTING IS PERFORMED. 1ST FLOOR @ COLUMN LINE 'F' (SOUTH) CROSS MAIN A NEW 4" CROSS MAIN HAS BEEN INSTALLED TO SUPPLY SPRINKLER PROTECTION FOR SPRINKLERS LOCATED WITHIN COLUMN LINE "D" THROUGH "E". ADD MECHANICAL TEES AS NECESSARY TO PROPERLY SERVE REQUIRED SPRINKLERS. INSTALLATION 2ND FLOOR COLUMN LINE B CROSS MAIN 4. INSTALL NEW 4" CROSS MAIN, TRANSITIONING TO 3" TO THE END OF THE CROSS MAIN, BASED ON HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS AND SIZING DIRECTIVE. LEAVE ROOM FOR 4" SPACER APPROXIMATELY 1'-6"+, TO BE CUT TO FIT FOR FINAL CONNECTION. 5. REPLACE TRAPEZE HANGERS WITH PROPERLY SIZED STRUCTURAL MEMBERS. CROSS MAIN SUPPORT SHALL BE ACCOMPLISHED BY DRILLING THROUGH THE SUPPORT MEMBER, AND ATTACHED M.T.R. WITH HEX NUTS AND WASHERS. BAND HANGER RINGS SHALL NOT BE USED ON THE TRAP BAR TO SUPPORT THE CROSS MAIN. 6. MECHANICAL TEES SHOULD HAVE HORIZONTAL ORIENTATION TO RISER NIPPLE AND RISER TEE TO SUPPLY BRANCHLINES. INSTALLATION 2ND FLOOR - COLUMN LINE D TO E CROSS MAIN. 7. OFFSET FROM THE 4" GROOVED JOINT, WITH TWO ELLS, TO RELOCATE CROSS MAIN AWAY FROM ROOF LEADER. INSTALL NEW 4" MAIN DOWN TO EXISTING 3" GROOVE JOINT WEST OF COLUMN LINE 16 AND RE-ATTACH. 8. MECHANICAL TEES SHOULD HAVE HORIZONTAL ORIENTATION TO RISER NIPPLE AND RISER TEE TO SUPPLY BRANCHLINES. 9. RETAIN PIPING BEYOND THE 3" COUPLING, AND MODIFY AS NECESSARY TO PROPERLY PROTECT THE AREAS AND ROOMS. 9.1. PROVIDE PROPER SUSPENSION AS NEEDED OF EXISTING BRANCH LINES. 10. FUTURE USE. INSTALLATION OF NEW WORK 11. SYSTEM DESIGN IS DIRECTED IN OTHER AREAS OF THE SPECIFICATION. 12. CROSS MAIN SIZING BE BASED ON HYDRAULIC CALCULATION REQUIREMENTS, EXCEPT THAT THEY SHALL NOT BE SMALLER THAT 3" AT THE END OF MAIN, FOR ADEQUATE SYSTEM FLUSHING PURPOSES. 13. AUXILIARY DRAINS AND VENTING LINES SHALL BE PROVIDE AS DIRECTED IN OTHER PARTS OF THE SPECIFICATION, AND ON DRAWINGS. 14. ALL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS OF NFPA 13 SHALL BE FOLLOWED. FIRE PROTECTION INFORMATION 220157.00 FOR CONSTRUCTION 5623 BURDOCK ROAD MORAVIA, NEW YORK 13118 PHONE: 315-730-4185 e-mail- smurphy@murphengineering.com MCE MURPHY CONSULTING ENGINEERING PROJECT NORTH 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 FP-100 DECEMBER 18, 2020 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 CONCEALED SPRINKLER - RELIABLE G5-56 CONCEALED SPRINKLER EXISTING SPRINKLER PIPING NEW SPRINKLER PIPING SYMBOL LIST CONNECTION BETWEEN NEW & EXISTING PROVIDE UPRIGHT SPRINKLER BELOW STAIRS. HEAD GUARD. EXISTING 4" MAIN (RECENTLY INSTALLED) - ELEVATION 13'-81 2" AFF 31 2" 18 19 20 21 22 SSU EXISTING 4" SCH. 40 - RISER - HORIZONTAL PROVIDE 3" PIPING WITH 4x3 MECHANICAL TEE ON HORIZONTAL RUN. EXISTING PIPING TO REMAIN IN SERVICE TO CURRENT TENANT SPACES. PROVIDE TRAPEZE HANGERS PER NFPA13. START OF THIS PROJECT - 4" SUPPLY TO AREA BY OTHERS. PROVIDE 4" MAIN - ALTER MECHANICAL TEE OUTLETS AS REQUIRED. 4" DOWN EX. - ELEVATION AT 12'-73 4" + EXISTING 4" SCH. 40 - LOCATION APPROXIMATE ELEVATION 14'-11" AFF EXISTING 4" SCH. 40 - ELEVATION 12'-81 2" AFF EXISTING 4" MAIN PROVIDE 3" CROSS MAIN REFER TO INSTALLATION NOTE 2 ON DWG FP100 TIE IN 11 4" EXISTING AUX. DRAIN TO TO NEW 3" MAIN. RETAIN DRAIN VALVE. TO EXISTING TENANT PROTECTION ELEVATION 12'-73 4" AFF 1' MAIN DRAIN ANGLE VALVE WATER FLOW DETECTOR 4" OS&Y 6" RISER UP UP 16 17 1815.1 19 C B A D E F E.9 15 A A LOBBY 100 JAN 121 IP EXAM 2 110 IP EXAM 3 111 LEARNING CENTER 115 IP EXAM 3 112 SM GROUP/RELAX 115A CONF 131 OFFICE 1 101 OFFICE 2 102 OFFICE 3 103 OFFICE 4 104 ADMISSIONS COORDINATOR 117 ALL GENDER BATHROOM 118 WOMENS 119 INSTRUCTIONAL FACULTY 124 INSTRUCTIONAL FACULTY 125 PRINCIPAL FACULTY 126 MENS RM 120 FACULTY & STAFF BREAK RM 127 CLASSROOM 132 CLASSROOM 133 PRINCIPAL FACULTY 130 AV CLO 134 ALL GENDER BATHROOM 108 PRINCIPAL FACULTY 128 PRINCIPAL FACULTY 129 PROGRAM ACTIVITY CTR 107 IP EXAM 1 109 IT CLO 114 WAITING/RECPT 106 SITTING AREA 122A SITTING AREA 113 CORR / STAIR 122 HALL 116 CLO 106A ELEV LOBBY 105 PROVIDE CONCEALED TYPE SPRINKLER HEAD WITH WHITE COVER PLATE IN ALL 2X2 ACT CEILINGS. CENTER IN CEILING TILE 3"3" 18 19 ELEVATION - 4" MAIN OFFSET AUXILIARY DRAIN PROVIDE 4" x 3" MECHANICAL TEE FOR NEW SUPPLY TO AREA SPRINKLERS RUN AT SAME ELEVATION AFF. PROVIDE 3" MAIN TO EXISTING 11 4" DRAIN OUTLET TO CREATE AN AUTOMATIC DRAIN. EXISTING 4" SCH. 40 ELEVATION SECTION A-A - NTS EXISTING 31 2" SCH. 40 W16 PROJECT NORTH 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 FIRE PROTECTION FIRST FLOOR PLAN 220157.00 FOR CONSTRUCTION 5623 BURDOCK ROAD MORAVIA, NEW YORK 13118 PHONE: 315-730-4185 e-mail- smurphy@murphengineering.com MCE MURPHY CONSULTING ENGINEERING 1/8" = 1'-0" FIRST FLOOR FIRE PROTECTION PLAN FP-101 DECEMBER 18, 2020 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 EXIST. 4" SCH 40 MAIN - ELEVATION 15'-3 1 4" AFF EXISTING 4" SCHEDULE 40 ELEVATION 15'-4 + AFF PROVIDE 1 1/4" AUXILIARY DRAIN CONNECTION AT BOTTOM OF CROSS MAIN PIPE. PIPE TO DRAIN VALVE AT SLOP SINK. PROVIDE MANUAL VENT LINE. PROVIDE 1" LINE FROM TOP OF BRANCH LINE & PIPE OFF HORIZONTAL TO SLOP SINK. PROVIDE UL/FM TEST N DRAIN VALVE AT ACCESSIBLE HEIGHT, AND PIPE TO SINK BASIN. REMOVE EXISTING PIPING FROM 4" GROOVE COUPLING. CAP FOR FUTURE RE-CONNECTION. PROVIDE NEW 4" CROSSMAIN. ROUTE AWAY FROM ROOF LEADER. PROVIDE TRAPEZE HANGERS - SIZED AND SPACING PER NFPA 13. PROVIDE ATTACHMENT AS DESCRIBED IN SPECIFICATION. EXIST. 4" SCHEDULE 40 APPROXIMATE LOCATION OF EXISTING MAIN. CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY. 4" GV COUP EXISTING REMOVE EXISTING PIPING FROM 4" GROOVE COUPLING. CAP FOR FUTURE CONNECTION. PROVIDE NEW 11 4" AUXILIARY DRAIN VALVE IN BOTTOM OF 4" SCHEDULE 40 MAIN EXIST. 6" RISER EXIST. 4" OS&Y EXIST. 1" MAIN DRAIN EXIST. WATERFLOW DETECTOR MECHANICAL TEE (TYP) RISER NIPPLE TYP 4" sch. 10 PROVIDE TRAPEZE HANGERS AS REQUIRED. 4" sch. 10 CONNECT NEW 4" CROSS MAIN TO EXISTING 3" GROOVED OUTLET. UP 16 17 1815.1 C B A D E F E.9 15 19 20 21 22 WOMENS 240 MENS 241 ALL GENDER TLT 242 FACULTY & STAFF TLT 238 IT 235 LAUNDRY STORAGE 234 LEARNER BREAK ROOM 239 SIM STOR 233 CLASSROOM 231 SM GROUP 202A SM GROUP 202B PROCEDURE ROOM 225 PATIENT RM 223 CONTROL 226 READY RM 227 PATIENT TLT 224 CONTROL 222 OPERATING ROOM 221 CONTROL 210 RECEPTION WAITING 208 PAT EXAM RM 212 PAT EXAM RM 213 PAT EXAM RM 214 PAT EXAM RM 217 PAT EXAM RM 216 PAT EXAM RM 215 DEBRIEF 219 PD OFFICE 207 PRINCIPAL FACULTY OFFICE 206 MED DIRECTOR 205 ADMIN ASST / RECEPTION 204 1047 SF CLASSROOM 203 LEARNING CTR 202 ELEV LOBBY 200 HALL 211 CORRIDOR 228 CORR 230 MEDICAL STORAGE 220 TLT 209 LOCKERS 239A HALL 201 HALL 243 HALL 218 HALL 236 JAN 237 MEP 232 HALL 229 PROJECT NORTH 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 FIRE PROTECTION SECOND FLOOR PLAN FP-102 220157.00 FOR CONSTRUCTION 5623 BURDOCK ROAD MORAVIA, NEW YORK 13118 PHONE: 315-730-4185 e-mail- smurphy@murphengineering.com MCE MURPHY CONSULTING ENGINEERING 1/8" = 1'-0" SECOND FLOOR FIRE PROTECTION PLAN DECEMBER 18, 2020 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 Elev. +32'-3" (1'-9" + BELOW 1ST FL. SLAB.) ELEVATION DATUM FROM 1973 DRAWINGS. ELEVATION OF INCOMING 8" SUPPLY IN BASEMENT. 8" INCOMING SERVICE. +34'-0" SLAB T.O.S. + 33'-71 2" SLAB @ 51'-0" T.O.S + 50'-7" T.O.S. +68'-4" +22'-6" ELEVATION EXISTING SPRINKLER MAIN +15'-3" TO 31 2" AFF 12" WF 6" SCH. 40 BASEMENT 1st FLOOR 2nd FLOOR 6" SCH 40 +12-81 2" AFF +15'-31 2" AFF ELEVATION DATUM FROM 1973 DRAWINGS. 8" INCOMING SERVICE ELEV. +32'-3"+ APPROX. +34'-0" SLAB T.O.S. + 33'-71 2" SLAB @ 51'-0" T.O.S + 50'-7" T.O.S. +68'-4" +22'-6" ELEVATION EXISTING SPRINKLER MAIN +15'-3" TO 31 2" AFF 12" WF 6" SCH. 40 BASEMENT 1st FLOOR 2nd FLOOR 6" SCH 40 +12-81 2" AFF +15'-31 2" AFF TO BSMT. SPRINKLERS & FDC E D 4" 6" 6" E D 21.7 21 8" SERVICE 6" DOWN 4" 6" 6" SCH 40 6" RISER TO FLOORS 6" RISER ACV & OS&Y BSMT SPRK. & FDC W12 W24 PROJECT NORTH 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 FIRE PROTECTION ELEVATIONS 220157.00 FOR CONSTRUCTION 5623 BURDOCK ROAD MORAVIA, NEW YORK 13118 PHONE: 315-730-4185 e-mail- smurphy@murphengineering.com MCE MURPHY CONSULTING ENGINEERING FP-103 DECEMBER 18, 2020 NOT TO SCALE PARTIAL BASEMENT PLAN - RISER PLAN VIEW AT COLUMN LINES 21-21.7 & E-D NOT TO SCALE NORTH ELEVATION VIEW AT COLUMN LINES 21-21.7 & D-E NOT TO SCALE EAST ELEVATION VIEW AT COLUMN LINES 21-21.7 & D-E ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 4" SAN 4" SAN 4" SAN UP TO DPCO 4" SAN UP W/P-TRAP TO FD-1 4" SAN UP THRU SLAB 2" V UP THRU SLAB P100 2 2" SAN UP THRU SLAB 2" SAN UP THRU SLAB 2" SAN UP THRU SLAB 2" SAN UP THRU SLAB 4" SAN UP THRU SLAB 4" SAN (E) 4" SAN (E) 4" SAN 2" SAN UP THRU SLAB UP UP 16 17 1815.1 1915 3 8" STORM (E) 8" STORM (E) 3 2 2 4 1 1 TYP 1 TYP 1 TYP 4" SAN LOBBY 100 JAN 121 IP EXAM 2 110 IP EXAM 3 111 LEARNING CENTER 115 IP EXAM 3 112 SM GROUP/RELAX 115A CONF 131 OFFICE 1 101 OFFICE 2 102 OFFICE 3 103 OFFICE 4 104 ALL GENDER BATHROOM 118 WOMENS 119 INSTRUCTIONAL FACULTY 124 INSTRUCTIONAL FACULTY 125 PRINCIPAL FACULTY 126 MENS RM 120 FACULTY & STAFF BREAK RM 127 CLASSROOM 132 CLASSROOM 133 PRINCIPAL FACULTY 130 AV CLO 134 108 PRINCIPAL FACULTY 128 PRINCIPAL FACULTY 129 PROGRAM ACTIVITY CENTER 107 IP EXAM 1 109 IT ROOM 114 WAITING/RECPT 106 SITTING AREA 122A SITTING AREA 113 CORR / STAIR 122 HALL 116 CLO 106A ELEV LOBBY 105 4" SAN 1 4" SAN 4" SAN UP TO DPCO 4" SAN UP TO DPCO 4" SAN 2" SAN 4" SAN 4" SAN 4" SAN 4" SAN 2" V UP THRU SLAB 2" V UP THRU SLAB 2" V UP THRU SLAB 2" SAN UP THRU SLAB 4" SAN UP W/P-TRAP TO FD-1 4" SAN UP THRU SLAB 4" SAN UP THRU SLAB 4" SAN UP W/P-TRAP TO FD-1 4" SAN UP W/P-TRAP TO FD-1 4" SAN UP TO DPCO 3" SAN 2" V UP THRU SLAB 3" SAN UP TO MS-1 2" SAN UP THRU SLAB 4" SAN4" SAN REF. 2" SAN 4" SAN 4" SAN 4 4 TYP 1 TYP 1 TYP 1 TYP 1 4" SAN ALL GENDER BATHROOM 118 WOMENS 119 MENS RM 120 1 KEYED RENOVATION NOTES 2 3 CONTRACTOR REQUIRED TO SAWCUT EXISTING CONCRETE FLOOR AND EXCAVATE BASE MATERIAL AS REQUIRED TO INSTALL UNDERSLAB WASTE PIPING AS SHOWN. EXISTING UNDERSLAB 8" STORM PIPING IS LOCATED IN THIS AREA. THE EXACT LOCATION AND INVERT IS UNKNOWN. SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY. 4" UNDERSLAB SANITARY WASTE LATERAL TO BE INSTALLED BY BUILDING OWNER'S CONTRACTOR UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACT. COORDINATE LOCATIONS AND INVERTS WITH ITHACA COLLEGE AND BUILDING OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE. REFER TO DRAWING P101 FOR PLUMBING FIXTURE DESIGNATIONS. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE ALL CUTTING AND PATCHING REQUIRED TO PERFORM WORK AS SHOWN ON DOCUMENTS. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE ALL MATERIALS, SAW CUTTING & EXCAVATION AS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE THE WORK AS SHOWN AND DESCRIBED. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PATCHING ALL MATERIALS TO MATCH ADJACENT SURFACE(S). PATCH TO MATCH EXISTING ADJACENT CONSTRUCTION AND SURFACES IN MATERIAL, FINISH, TEXTURE AND COLOR. CUTTING & PATCHING NOTE 4 P-100 UNDERSLAB PLUMBING PLAN 1/8" = 1'-0"P100 1 UNDERSLAB PLUMBING PLAN 1/2" = 1'-0"P100 2 ENLARGED UNDERSLAB PLUMBING PLAN PROJECT NORTH 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 220157.00 FOR CONSTRUCTION DECEMBER 18, 2020 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 5623 BURDOCK ROAD MORAVIA, NEW YORK 13118 PHONE: 315-730-4185 e-mail- smurphy@murphengineering.com MCE MURPHY CONSULTING ENGINEERING 2" DCW, 1" DHW AND 3/4" DHR UP THRU FLOOR DPCO FD-1 1/2" DCW/DHW TOL-1 1" DCW DN TO WC 1" DCW LOBBY 100 IP EXAM 2 110 IP EXAM 3 111 LEARNING CENTER 115 IP EXAM 3 112 SM GROUP/RELAX 115A CONF 131 OFFICE 1 101 OFFICE 2 102 OFFICE 3 103 OFFICE 4 104 ADMISSIONS COORDINATOR 117 ALL GENDER BATHROOM 118 WOMENS 119 INSTRUCTIONAL FACULTY 124 INSTRUCTIONAL FACULTY 125 PRINCIPAL FACULTY 126 MENS RM 120 FACULTY & STAFF BREAK RM 127 CLASSROOM 132 CLASSROOM 133 PRINCIPAL FACULTY 130 AV CLO 134 ALL GENDER BATHROOM 108 PRINCIPAL FACULTY 128 PRINCIPAL FACULTY 129 EXIST ELEVATOR -CORR / STAIR 122 PROGRAM ACTIVITY CENTER 107 IP EXAM 1 109 3/4" DHR 1" DHW 2 1/2" DCW DPCO (E) DPCO (E) P101 2 P101 3 3/4" DHR 1" DHW 2" DCW 2 1/2" DCW 1 1/2" DHW 3/4" DHR 3" V 3" V UP THRU FLR WC-1 (DOMESTIC) (SAN/VENT) 1 1/2" DCW 3/4" DHR 1" DHW 1" DHW 3/4" DHR 1 1/2" DCW 1/2" DCW/DHW DN TO SK-1, 1 1/2" V UP, 2" SAN DN THRU SLAB (TYP OF 4) 1 1/2" V 1 1/2" V 1 1/2" V 2" V 1 1/2" V 2" V 1 1/2" V 2" V UP THRU FLR SITTING AREA 113 CO CO 1 1/2" SAN 3" SAN 3" SAN 1 1/2" SAN 1 1/2" SAN 1 1/2" SAN 1 1/2" SAN UP THRU FLR 1 1/2" SAN UP THRU FLR 1 1/2" SAN UP THRU FLR 1 1/2" SAN UP THRU FLR 1 1/2" SAN UP THRU FLR 1 1/2" SAN UP THRU FLR 1 1/2" SAN UP THRU FLR1 1/2" SAN UP THRU FLR 1 1/2" SAN UP THRU FLR 1 1/2" SAN UP THRU FLR 1 1/2" SAN UP THRU FLR 1 1/2" SAN UP THRU FLR 3" SAN UP THRU FLR CO 4" SAN3" SAN 4" SAN 3" SAN 3" SAN 4" SAN 4" SAN DN THRU SLAB DPCO 1 1/2" V 1/2" DCW EWC-1 1/2" DCW TO EWH-5, LOCATED UNDER L-1 1 1/2" V UP, 1 1/2" SAN DN THRU SLAB 1 1/2" V 2" V 2" V 2 1 9 1" DHW 3/4" DHR 1 1/2" DCW 1/2" DHW 3/4" DHR 1 1/4" DCW 3/4" DHW 3/4" DHR 1 1/4" DCW 3" SAN 1 1/2" SAN 1 1/2" SAN UP THRU FLR 3" SAN UP THRU FLR CIRCUIT BALANCING VALVE, BALANCE TO 1.0 GPM CIRCUIT BALANCING VALVE, BALANCE TO 2.0 GPM UP UP 16 17 1815.1 19 C B A D E F E.9 15 8 1 9 1 9 1 9 6 TYP 5 1 1/2" DCW 1" DCW 1 1/2" DCW 1" DCW TO WC (TYP) WC-1 WC-2 L-2 1/2" DCW 1/2" DCW/DHW TO LAV (TYP) 3/4" DCW 3/4" DCW 3/4" DCW 1 1/2" DCW 1" DCW WC-2 WC-1 WC-1 L-1 1/2" DCW TO LAV-1 2" DCW 2" DCW DN IN CHASE MENS RM 120 WOMENS 119 ALL GENDER BATHROOM 118 L-2 L-2 L-2 CS-1 MS-1 EWH-1 1 1/2" DHW 1 1/2" DCW 3/4" DHW 3/4" DCW 1/2" DHW 1/2" DCW 1 1/2" DCW 2" DCW 2 1/2" DCW 2 1/2" DCW 1 1/2" DHW 3/4" DHR EWH-2 1/2" DCW TO EWH-2 EWH-3 1/2" DCW TO EWH-3 EWH-4 1/2" DCW TO EWH-4 REF. 21/2" DCW 1 3 8 7 5 5 5 2 2 2 TYP 8 M 10 WC-1 WC-2 L-2 WC-2 WC-1 WC-1 L-1 MENS RM 120 WOMENS 119 ALL GENDER BATHROOM 118 1 1/2" SAN DN, 1 1/2" V UP 2" V DN THRU SLABFD-1 2" V DN THRU SLAB FD-1 DPCO 2" V DN THRU SLAB FD-1 1 1/2" SAN DN, 1 1/2" V UP 1 1/2" SAN DN, 1 1/2" V UP 1 1/2" SAN DN, 1 1/2" V UP 1 1/2" SAN DN, 1 1/2" V UP 3" V 3" V 3" V 3" V 1 1/2" V 1 1/2" V 1 1/2" V 1 1/2" V L-2 L-2 L-2 4" SAN FROM WC, 2" V UP (TYP) 4" SAN THRU SLAB, 3" V UP 4" SAN FROM WC, 2" V UP (TYP) 3" V 2" V 2" V MS-1 CS-1 1 1/2" V 1 1/2" SAN DN THRU SLAB, 1 1/2" V UP 2" V DN THRU SLAB REF. 1 KEYED RENOVATION NOTES 2 3 4 5 6 7 CEILING PLENUM THE SPACE LOCATED ABOVE THE CEILING ON BOTH FIRST AND SECOND FLOOR LEVELS IS BEING USED AS A RETURN/EXHAUST AIR PLENUM. ALL MATERIALS INSTALLED ABOVE CEILING LEVEL WITHIN THE RETURN/EXHAUST AIR PLENUM SHALL BE PLENUM RATED AND IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 602 OF THE 2020 MECHANICAL CODE OF NEW YORK STATE. THE CONTRACTOR IS REQUIRED TO SUPPORT ALL EQUIPMENT DUCTWORK & PIPING LOCATED ABOVE THE CEILINGS FROM THE EXISTING BUILDING STRUCTURAL STEEL SUPPORTS. SUPPORTING DUCTWORK, EQUIPMENT, PIPING, ETC... FROM THE EXISTING METAL ROOF DECKING IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED. THE REUSE OF EXISTING HANGERS ATTACHED TO ROOF DECKING IS PROHIBITED. PROVIDE ALL INTERMEDIATE STEEL BETWEEN EXISTING STRUCTURAL STEEL MEMBERS AS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE ALL SUPPORTS. CONTRACTOR SHALL TAKE CARE TO MINIMIZE THE DISPLACEMENT OF THE EXISTING FIREPROOFING. HANGERS & SUPPORTS PROVIDE 1/2" DOMESTIC HOT & COLD WATER SUPPLY DOWN TO SINK. PROVIDE 1/2" DOMESTIC HOT & COLD WATER SUPPLY DOWN TO ELECTRIC WATER HEATER (EWH) LOCATED UNDER LAVATORY. CONCEAL HEATER & PIPING IN CABINETRY. PROVIDE ASSE 1070 MIXING VALVE AT SINK FAUCET SUPPLY PIPES. PIPE PER MANUFACTURERS SPECIFICATIONS. SET DHW OUTLET TEMPERATURE TO MAXIMUM 110°. TYPICAL PROVIDE PLUMBING FIXTURE AS INDICATED BY DESIGNATION. TYPICAL FOR ALL. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS ON THIS DRAWING FOR MORE INFORMATION. PROVIDE POINT OF USE WATER HEATER A SHOWN AND DESIGNATED. WATER HEATER WH-2 & WH-3 SERVE 2 LAVATORIES EACH, WH-4, 5 & 6 SERVE ONE LAVATORY. COORDINATE ALL SANITARY PIPING LOCATED OUTSIDE IC LEASE SPACE WITH IC REPRESENTATIVE. PROVIDE 50 GALLON TANK TYPE WATER HEATER AND MOUNT ON SHELF SUPPORT. REFER TO PLUMBING FIXTURE SPECIFICATIONS FOR WATER HEATER INFORMATION. EXTEND 1-1/2" HOT AND COLD WATER PIPING & CONNECT TO HEATER. PROVIDE UNIONS AT CONNECTION TO HEATER. EXTEND RELIEF VALVE DISCHARGE AND TERMINATE WITH OPEN END 6" ABOVE MOP SINK. PROVIDE HOLDRITE MODEL 50-SWHP-W SERIES WATER HEATER PLATFORM. REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE 2-1/2" DOMESTIC COLD WATER SUPPLY PIPING TIE-IN TO BUILDING WITH BUILDING OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. CONTRACTOR TO STUB SUPPLY & WASTE PIPE THROUGH WALL AND CAP FOR FUTURE INSTALLATION OF SINK. PROVIDE 2" NEPTUNE MACH 10 ULTRASONIC WATER METER. PIPE IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS. PROVIDE BALL VALES & UNIONS ON EACH SIDE OF METER. PROVIDE ISOLATION BALL VALVES IN EACH BRANCH DOMESTIC WATER PIPE. PROVIDE VALVE WHERE CONNECTION IS MADE TO EACH BRANCH MAIN. TYPICAL FOR ALL PIPING INSTALLED UNDER THIS CONTRACT. ISOLATION VALVE NOTE 8 9 10 PROJECT NORTH 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 220157.00 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 FOR CONSTRUCTION P-101 FIRST FLOOR PLUMBING PLAN 1/8" = 1'-0"P101 1 FIRST FLOOR PLUMBING PLAN 1/4" = 1'-0"P101 2 ENLARGED PLUMBING PLAN - DOMESTIC 1/4" = 1'-0"P101 3 ENLARGED PLUMBING PLAN - SANITARY/VENT DECEMBER 18, 2020 5623 BURDOCK ROAD MORAVIA, NEW YORK 13118 PHONE: 315-730-4185 e-mail- smurphy@murphengineering.com MCE MURPHY CONSULTING ENGINEERING SIM STOR 233 PD OFFICE 207 PRINCIPAL FACULTY OFFICE 206 MED DIRECTOR 205 CLASSROOM 203 LEARNING CTR 202 ADMIN ASST / RECEPTION 204 PATIENT TLT 224 PATIENT RM 223 PROCEDURE ROOM 225 READY RM 227 PAT EXAM RM 212 PAT EXAM RM 213 PAT EXAM RM 214 PAT EXAM RM 215 PAT EXAM RM 216 PAT EXAM RM 217 LAUNDRY STORAGE 234 ALL GENDER TLT 242 MENS 241 FACULTY & STAFF TLT 238 WOMENS 240 LEARNER BREAK ROOM 239 CLASSROOM 231 SM GROUP 202A SM GROUP 202B IT 235 CONTROL 210 RECEPTION WAITING 208 MEDICAL STORAGE 220 TLT 209 CONTROL 226 CONTROL 222 DEBRIEF 219 LOCKERS 239A OPERATING ROOM 221 ELEV LOBBY 200 HALL 211 CORRIDOR 228 CORR 230 3/4" DCW/DHW TO WASHER CS-1 WC-1 L-1 US-1 US-1 US-1 WC-1 L-1 1/2" DCW 1/2" DHW 3/4" DHR 1 1/2" DCW 3/4" DHW 3/4" DHR 1 1/2" DCW 3/4" DHW 3/4" DHR 2 1/2" DCW 1" DCW TO WC-1 1 1/4" DCW DN IN CHASE 1 1/4" DCW 1 1/2" DCW 1/2" DHW 2" DCW, 1" DHW AND 3/4" DHR DN THRU FLOOR 1" DCW 1" DHW 3/4" DHR 3/4" DCW 3/4" DHW 3/4" DCW 3/4" DHW 3/4" DHR 1 1/2" DCW 1" DHW 1 1/2" DCW 1" DHW 1/2" DCW/DHW TO US-1, 2 FAUCETS PER US-1 (6 FAUCETS TOTAL) 3/4" DHR 1/2" DCW DN TO EWC-1 EWC-2 3 1/2" DCW BF-1 EWH-6 1 3 4 5 UP 16 17 1815.1 C B A D E F E.9 15 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 31 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 7 8 11 9 9 9 9 9 999 9 10 10 10 10 10 12 SIM STOR 233 PD OFFICE 207 PRINCIPAL FACULTY OFFICE 206 MED DIRECTOR 205 CLASSROOM 203 LEARNING CTR 202 ADMIN ASST / RECEPTION 204 PATIENT TLT 224 PATIENT RM 223 PROCEDURE ROOM 225 READY RM 227 PAT EXAM RM 212 PAT EXAM RM 213 PAT EXAM RM 214 PAT EXAM RM 215 PAT EXAM RM 216 PAT EXAM RM 217 LAUNDRY STORAGE 234 ALL GENDER TLT 242 MENS 241 FACULTY & STAFF TLT 238 WOMENS 240 LEARNER BREAK ROOM 239 CLASSROOM 231 SM GROUP 202A SM GROUP 202B IT 235 CONTROL 210 RECEPTION WAITING 208 MEDICAL STORAGE 220 TLT 209 CONTROL 226 CONTROL 222 DEBRIEF 219 LOCKERS 239A OPERATING ROOM 221 ELEV LOBBY 200 HALL 211 CORRIDOR 228 CORR 230 1 1/2" SAN DN THRU FLR, 1 1/2" V UP 1 1/2" SAN DN THRU FLR, 1 1/2" V UP 1 1/2" SAN DN THRU FLR, 1 1/2" V UP CS-1 1 1/2" SAN DN THRU FLR, 1 1/2" V UP 1 1/2" SAN DN THRU FLR, 1 1/2" V UP 1 1/2" SAN DN THRU FLR, 1 1/2" V UP 1 1/2" SAN DN THRU FLR, 1 1/2" V UP 1 1/2" SAN DN THRU FLR, 1 1/2" V UP WC-1 L-1 2" V 2" V 2" V 2" V 2" V 1 1/2" V 1 1/2" V 1 1/2" V 3" V3" V UP, 4" VTR 1 1/2" V 1 1/2" V 2" V 2" V 1 1/2" V 2" V 1 1/2" V 1 1/2" SAN DN THRU FLR, 1 1/2" V UP 2" V 3" V DN THRU FLR 2" V DN THRU FLR 4" SAN DN THRU FLR, 2" V UP 1 1/2" SAN DN THRU FLR, 1 1/2" V UP US-1 US-1 US-1 WC-1 L-1 EWC-2 1 1/2" V UP, 1 1/2" SAN DN THRU FLOOR 2" V 1 1/2" V 1 1/2" V 2" V 3" SAN DN THRU FLOOR, 2" V UP BF-1 1 1/2" SAN DN, 1 1/2" V UP 3" V 3" V 6 TYP UP 16 17 1815.1 C B A D E F E.9 15 6 TYP 11 9 9 9 99 9 999 12 1 KEYED RENOVATION NOTES 2 3 4 5 6 7 CEILING PLENUM THE SPACE LOCATED ABOVE THE CEILING ON BOTH FIRST AND SECOND FLOOR LEVELS IS BEING USED AS A RETURN/EXHAUST AIR PLENUM. ALL MATERIALS INSTALLED ABOVE CEILING LEVEL WITHIN THE RETURN/EXHAUST AIR PLENUM SHALL BE PLENUM RATED AND IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 602 OF THE 2020 MECHANICAL CODE OF NEW YORK STATE. THE CONTRACTOR IS REQUIRED TO SUPPORT ALL EQUIPMENT DUCTWORK & PIPING LOCATED ABOVE THE CEILINGS FROM THE EXISTING BUILDING STRUCTURAL STEEL SUPPORTS. SUPPORTING DUCTWORK, EQUIPMENT, PIPING, ETC... FROM THE EXISTING METAL ROOF DECKING IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED. THE REUSE OF EXISTING HANGERS ATTACHED TO ROOF DECKING IS PROHIBITED. PROVIDE ALL INTERMEDIATE STEEL BETWEEN EXISTING STRUCTURAL STEEL MEMBERS AS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE ALL SUPPORTS. CONTRACTOR SHALL TAKE CARE TO MINIMIZE THE DISPLACEMENT OF THE EXISTING FIREPROOFING. HANGERS & SUPPORTS PROVIDE 1/2" DOMESTIC HOT & COLD WATER SUPPLY DOWN TO SINK. PROVIDE 1/2" DOMESTIC HOT & COLD WATER SUPPLY DOWN TO ELECTRIC WATER HEATER (EWH) LOCATED UNDER LAVATORY. CONCEAL HEATER & PIPING IN CABINETRY. PROVIDE ASSE 1070 MIXING VALVE AT SINK FAUCET SUPPLY PIPES. PIPE PER MANUFACTURERS SPECIFICATIONS. SET DHW OUTLET TEMPERATURE TO MAXIMUM 110°. TYPICAL PROVIDE CIRCUIT BALANCING VALVE. BALANCE TO 1.0 GPM. CONNECT 1" DOMESTIC COLD WATER LINE TO EXISTING 1" COLD WATER FEEDING EXISTING GANG TOILET AREA. FIELD VERIFY EXACT TIE-IN LOCATION. PROVIDE PLUMBING FIXTURE AS INDICATED BY DESIGNATION. TYPICAL FOR ALL. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS ON THIS DRAWING FOR MORE INFORMATION. PROVIDE POINT OF USE WATER HEATER A SHOWN AND DESIGNATED. WATER HEATER WH-6 SERVES ONE LAVATORY. EXISTING WATER HEATER REMAINS. SINK AND CABINETRY TO BE PROVIDED BY OTHERS. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE INSTALLATION OF SINK AND FINAL PLUMBING CONNECTIONS. EXISTING PLUMBING FIXTURES LOCATED IN THIS SPACE REMAIN. PROVIDE TOILET FIXTURES AS SHOWN AND SPECIFIED. TOILET ROOM DOES NOT GET PLUMBED. PROVIDE WASHING MACHINE OUTLET BOX, RECESS BOX IN WALL. PROVIDE SANITARY WASTE AND SUPPLY PIPING AS SPECIFIED. PROVIDE ISOLATION BALL VALVES IN EACH BRANCH DOMESTIC WATER PIPE. PROVIDE VALVE WHERE CONNECTION IS MADE TO EACH BRANCH MAIN. TYPICAL FOR ALL PIPING INSTALLED UNDER THIS CONTRACT. ISOLATION VALVE NOTE 8 9 10 11 12 PROJECT NORTH 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 220157.00 FOR CONSTRUCTION P-102 SECOND FLOOR PLUMBING PLANS 1/8" = 1'-0"P102 1 SECOND FLOOR PLUMBING PLAN - DOMESTIC 1/8" = 1'-0"P102 2 SECOND FLOOR PLUMBING PLAN - SANITARY/VENT DECEMBER 18, 2020 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 5623 BURDOCK ROAD MORAVIA, NEW YORK 13118 PHONE: 315-730-4185 e-mail- smurphy@murphengineering.com MCE MURPHY CONSULTING ENGINEERING 1/2" DCW 1/2" DHW 1/2" DCW 1" DCW 2" DCW 1" DCW 1" DCW 3/4" DCW 1/2" DCW/DHW TO L-2 (TYP) L-2 1 1/2" DCW 1" DCW 1" DCW 1 1/2" DCW 3/4" DCW 1/2" DCW 2" DCW L-1 WC-1 WC-2 WC-1 WC-2 WC-1 (TYP OF 4) EWH-4 EWH-3 EWH-2 1 1/2" DCW DPCO 3" V 4" SAN 4" SAN 2" SAN 1 1/2" SAN 1 1/2" SAN 2" V 2" V 1 1/2" V 3" V 3" V 1 1/2" V 1 1/2" V 1 1/2" V 1 1/2" V 2" V 4" SAN FD-1 DPCO FD-1 FD-1 L-1 WC-1 WC-2 WC-1 WC-2 WC-1 L-2 2" SAN 4" SAN 4" SAN 2" V 3" V 3" V 2" V 1 1/2" V 2" V (TYP OF 4) 1 1/2" V 1 1/2" V 1 1/2" V 1 1/2" V 3" V 4" SAN 2" V 2" V 2" V 2" V 1 1/2" V 4" SAN 4" SAN P-401 PLUMBING ENLARGED PLANS/ISOS P401 2 MEN AND WOMENS TOILET ROOMS - DOMESTIC ISOMETRIC P401 1 MEN AND WOMENS TOILET ROOMS - SANITARY/VENT ISOMETRIC S.A. S.A. S.A. PROJECT NORTH 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 220157.00 FOR CONSTRUCTION DECEMBER 18, 2020 NOT TO SCALE NOT TO SCALE ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 5623 BURDOCK ROAD MORAVIA, NEW YORK 13118 PHONE: 315-730-4185 e-mail- smurphy@murphengineering.com MCE MURPHY CONSULTING ENGINEERING PROVIDE ALL CUTTING AND PATCHING, EXCEPT OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, REQUIRED TO PERFORM THE WORK SHOWN ON CONTRACT DRAWINGS. CONTRACTOR IS REQUIRED TO FIRE SEAL ALL PENETRATIONS THROUGH FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES WITH UL LISTED FIRE RATED MATERIALS AN FIRE RATED CAULK. PROVIDE PATCHING AND PAINTING AS REQUIRED TO MATCH EXISTING SURFACES; THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE WILL DETERMINE WHETHER THE CUTTING, PATCHING AND PAINTING HAS BEEN EXECUTED PROPERLY. AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER, REMOVE AND REPLACE WORK WHICH, IN THE JUDGMENT OF THE ENGINEER/OWNER HAS BEEN INSTALLED IN UNSATISFACTORY MANNER. PROVIDE CLEARANCE AROUND EQUIPMENT TO ELEMENTS OF PERMANENT CONSTRUCTION, INCLUDING OTHER INSTALLED EQUIPMENT WHICH IS SUFFICIENT TO ALLOW INSPECTION, SERVICE, REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT WITHOUT REQUIRING THE REMOVAL OF SUCH PERMANENT CONSTRUCTION. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, PROVIDE (AT A MINIMUM) THE EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED SERVICE CLEARANCES. ACCESS & SERVICE EQUIPMENT DESIGNATIONS SHOWN ARE FOR REFERENCE PURPOSES DURING CONSTRUCTION ONLY. COORDINATE ACTUAL EQUIPMENT DESIGNATIONS WITH OWNER PRIOR TO EQUIPMENT LABELING. EQUIPMENT DESIGNATIONS NEATLY CORE DRILL ALL PIPE PENETRATIONS THRU WALLS AND FLOORS. FIRE SEAL ALL PENETRATIONS WITH FIRE RATED CAULK. OVERCUTS ARE NOT ALLOWED. IT IS THE CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR ANY PENETRATIONS DEEMED UNSUITABLE BY THE OWNER/ENGINEER, TO THE OWNER/ENGINEERS SATISFACTION. MASONRY WALL/FLOOR PENETRATIONS CUTTING & PATCHING NOTE THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING ALL RIGGING AND LABOR NECESSARY TO PROVIDE THE SPECIFIED EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, PIPING, ETC. TO & FROM THE SPECIFIED AREAS USING THE EXISTING BUILDING OPENINGS. RIGGING NOTE THE CONTRACTOR IS REQUIRED TO SUBMIT COORDINATION SHOP DRAWINGS SHOWING ALL TRADES. DRAWINGS SHALL INCLUDE ELEVATIONS ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR FOR ALL PIPING (INCLUDING PLUMBING AND FIRE PROTECTION), DUCTWORK. COORDINATION SHOP DRAWING SHALL BE SUBMITTED FOR ENGINEER REVIEW PRIOR TO FABRICATION OR INSTALLATION. SHOP DRAWINGS CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING ALL MATERIALS AND LABOR AS REQUIRED TO RESULT IN A FULLY FUNCTIONING MECHANICAL & PLUMBING SYSTEMS. CONTRACTORS NOTE THE CONTRACTOR IS REQUIRED TO SUPPORT ALL EQUIPMENT DUCTWORK & PIPING LOCATED ABOVE THE CEILINGS FROM THE EXISTING BUILDING STRUCTURAL STEEL SUPPORTS. SUPPORTING DUCTWORK, EQUIPMENT, PIPING, ETC... FROM THE EXISTING METAL ROOF DECKING IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED. THE REUSE OF EXISTING HANGERS ATTACHED TO ROOF DECKING IS PROHIBITED. PROVIDE ALL INTERMEDIATE STEEL BETWEEN EXISTING STRUCTURAL STEEL MEMBERS AS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE ALL SUPPORTS. CONTRACTOR SHALL TAKE CARE TO MINIMIZE THE DISPLACEMENT OF THE EXISTING FIREPROOFING. HANGERS & SUPPORTS CEILING PLENUM THE SPACE LOCATED ABOVE THE CEILING ON BOTH FIRST AND SECOND FLOOR LEVELS IS BEING USED AS A RETURN/EXHAUST AIR PLENUM. ALL MATERIALS INSTALLED ABOVE CEILING LEVEL WITHIN THE RETURN/EXHAUST AIR PLENUM SHALL BE PLENUM RATED AND IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 602 OF THE 2020 MECHANICAL CODE OF NEW YORK STATE. -CONNECTION BETWEEN NEW & EXISTING WORK PLUMBING SYMBOLS & ABBREVIATIONS -EXISTINGEXIST. -CLEANOUTCO PIPE HANGER SPACING SCHEDULE -DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPING (NEW) -DOMESTIC HOT WATER PIPING 140° -DOMESTIC HOT WATER RECIRC PIPING 140° D -DRAIN LINE -DIRECTION OF FLOW 1/2" EWH-2 REFER TO PLAN VIEW FOR CONTINUATION. 110° H TO LAVATORY ANGLE STOP GENERAL DEMOLITION NOTES CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE WITH OWNER AND CONFIRM THE PROJECT AREA IS HAZARDOUS MATERIAL FREE PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF WORK. (FOR ALL PLUMBING DRAWINGS) BEFORE THE SYSTEM MAY BE USED FOR DOMESTIC PURPOSES, ISOLATE THE DOMESTIC WATER PIPING INSTALLED UNDER THIS CONTRACT FROM THE EXISTING DOMESTIC WATER PIPING & STERILIZE NEW PIPING IN ACCORDANCE WITH NYS DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH STANDARDS. REFER TO WRITTEN TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. PLUMBING STERILIZATION PROVIDE ISOLATION BALL VALVES IN EACH BRANCH DOMESTIC WATER PIPE. PROVIDE VALVE WHERE CONNECTION IS MADE TO EACH BRANCH MAIN. TYPICAL FOR ALL PIPING INSTALLED UNDER THIS CONTRACT. ISOLATION VALVE NOTE FIXTURE BRANCH PIPE SIZE SCHEDULE SANITARY WASTE & VENT PIPING - PROVIDE SERVICE WEIGHT NO-HUB CAST IRON & NO HUB FITTINGS WITH STAINLESS STEEL BAND CLAMPS WITH NEOPRENE GASKETS. PVC PIPING IS NOT ACCEPTABLE. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING - PROVIDE TYPE 'L' HARD TEMPER COPPER WITH WROT COPPER FITTINGS & LEAD FREE SOLDER. PRESS TYPE FITTING NOT ACCEPTABLE BALL VALVES - LEAD FREE, FULL PORT, QUARTER TURN, TWO PIECE, BRONZE BODY, STAINLESS STEEL BALL, 400 PSI WOG BALL VALVES. NIBCO S-585-66-LF DOMESTIC WATER PIPE INSULATION THICKNESS - REFER TO WRITTEN SPECIFICATIONS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING INSULATION THICKNESS. REFER TO WRITTEN SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. PIPING SCHEDULE DOMESTIC RECIRC PUMP DRP-1 EXPANSION TANK BELL & GOSSETT PTA-12 3/4" DOMESTIC COLD WATER SUPPLY TO BUILDING DOMESTIC WATER HEATER 50 GAL. PIPE FULL SIZE OF TEMPERATURE/PRESSURE SAFETY RELIEF VALVE THERMOMETER (TYP) BALL VALVE HEAT TRAP DOMESTIC HOT WATER PIPING DIAGRAM FROM BUILDING ET 3/4" CONTRACTOR TO PIPE SYSTEM IN ACCORDANCE WITH WATER HEATER MANUFACTURERS INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. PROVIDE ALL VALVES, UNION, DRAINS, VENTS, ETC... PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. 3/4" 1-1/2" ELECTRIC INSTANTANEOUS WATER HEATER PIPING DIAGRAM WATER HEATER SHELF PROVIDE UNIONS AT ALL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS TO PERMIT DISASSEMBLY. PROVIDE DRAINS AT ALL LOW POINTS WHERE DRAINAGE IS DESIRABLE PROVIDE ASME PRESSURE & TEMPERATURE RELIEF VALVE SIZED FOR 150 PSIG. PROVIDE DOMESTIC HOT WATER RECIRCULATION PUMPS DRP-1, DRP-2 & DRP-3 DRP-1 = BELL & GOSSETT PL-36 (BRONZE FITTED) 4 GPM @ 25' HD., 115V/1P, 1/6 HP REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOR TANK WATER HEATER INFORMATION. 1 2 3 4 5 DIAGRAM TYPICAL FOR ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS EWH-2 & 3. ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS EWH-4,5&6 SERVE A SINGLE LAVATORY. 110° H TO LAVATORY ANGLE STOP -DOMESTIC COLD WATERDCW -DOMESTIC HOT WATERDHW -DOMESTIC HOT RECIRCDHR -TYPICALTYP 1-1/2" 1-1/2" 1-1/2" 1-1/2" 3/4" DRINKING FOUNTAIN/BOTTLE FILL SCHEDULE UNIT DESCRIPTION DESIGN BASIS EWC-1 BI-LEVEL, ADA COMPLIANT, ELECTRIC WATER COOLER WITH FILTER & BOTTLE FILLER ELKAY LZSTLG8WSLK EWC-2SINGLE STATION, ADA COMPLIANT, ELECTRIC WATER COOLER WITH FILTER & BOTTLE FILLERELKAY LZS8WSLK BF-1 NON REFRIGERATED BOTTLE FILLING STATION WITH FILTER ELKAY LZWSSM NOTES: A.NO SUBSTITUTIONS B.ALL UNITS TO UTILIZE SAME MODEL FILTER. C.REFER TO SPECIFICATION 224200 FOR ALL OTHER FIXTURE SPECIFICATIONS PROVIDE A COMPLETE AND OPERABLE DOMESTIC WATER SUPPLY AND SANITARY & WASTE & VENT SYSTEM AS SHOWN AND SPECIFIED. CONCEAL ALL SUPPLY AND WASTE PIPING ABOVE SUSPENDED CEILINGS AND WITHIN WALL CONSTRUCTION. GENERAL NOTE HVAC SYSTEMS - CODE COMPLIANCE TO THE BEST OF OUR KNOWLEDGE, BELIEF AND PROFESSIONAL JUDGEMENT THESE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS WERE PREPARED IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE 2020 MECHANICAL CODE OF NEW YORK STATE. PLUMBING SYSTEMS - CODE COMPLIANCE TO THE BEST OF OUR KNOWLEDGE, BELIEF AND PROFESSIONAL JUDGEMENT THESE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS WERE PREPARED IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE 2020 PLUMBING CODE OF NEW YORK STATE. ENERGY CODE COMPLIANCE TO THE BEST OF OUR KNOWLEDGE, BELIEF AND PROFESSIONAL JUDGEMENT THESE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS WERE PREPARED IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE 2020 ENERGY CONSERVATION CONSTRUCTION CODE OF NEW YORK STATE. PROJECT NORTH 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 PLUMBING INFORMATION P-601 DECEMBER 18, 2020 220157.00 FOR CONSTRUCTION 5623 BURDOCK ROAD MORAVIA, NEW YORK 13118 PHONE: 315-730-4185 e-mail- smurphy@murphengineering.com MCE MURPHY CONSULTING ENGINEERING NOT TO SCALE NOT TO SCALE ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 MECHANICAL SYMBOLS MECHANICAL ABBREVIATIONS PROVIDE ALL CUTTING AND PATCHING, EXCEPT OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, REQUIRED TO PERFORM THE WORK SHOWN ON CONTRACT DRAWINGS. CONTRACTOR IS REQUIRED TO FIRE SEAL ALL PENETRATIONS THROUGH FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES WITH UL LISTED FIRE RATED MATERIALS AN FIRE RATED CAULK. PROVIDE PATCHING AND PAINTING AS REQUIRED TO MATCH EXISTING SURFACES; THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE WILL DETERMINE WHETHER THE CUTTING, PATCHING AND PAINTING HAS BEEN EXECUTED PROPERLY. AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER, REMOVE AND REPLACE WORK WHICH, IN THE JUDGMENT OF THE ENGINEER/OWNER HAS BEEN INSTALLED IN UNSATISFACTORY MANNER. PROVIDE CLEARANCE AROUND EQUIPMENT TO ELEMENTS OF PERMANENT CONSTRUCTION, INCLUDING OTHER INSTALLED EQUIPMENT WHICH IS SUFFICIENT TO ALLOW INSPECTION, SERVICE, REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT WITHOUT REQUIRING THE REMOVAL OF SUCH PERMANENT CONSTRUCTION. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, PROVIDE (AT A MINIMUM) THE EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED SERVICE CLEARANCES. ACCESS & SERVICE EQUIPMENT DESIGNATIONS SHOWN ARE FOR REFERENCE PURPOSES DURING CONSTRUCTION ONLY. COORDINATE ACTUAL EQUIPMENT DESIGNATIONS WITH OWNER PRIOR TO EQUIPMENT LABELING. EQUIPMENT DESIGNATIONS NEATLY CORE DRILL ALL PIPE PENETRATIONS THRU WALLS AND FLOORS. FIRE SEAL ALL PENETRATIONS WITH FIRE RATED CAULK. OVERCUTS ARE NOT ALLOWED. IT IS THE CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR ANY PENETRATIONS DEEMED UNSUITABLE BY THE OWNER/ENGINEER, TO THE OWNER/ENGINEERS SATISFACTION. MASONRY WALL/FLOOR PENETRATIONS CUTTING & PATCHING NOTE THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING ALL RIGGING, CRANE SERVICES AND LABOR NECESSARY TO PROVIDE THE SPECIFIED INDOOR AND OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, PIPING, ETC... AS SHOWN. PROVIDE COMPLETE AND OPERABLE SYSTEMS. RIGGING NOTE THE CONTRACTOR IS REQUIRED TO SUBMIT COORDINATION SHOP DRAWINGS SHOWING ALL TRADES. DRAWINGS SHALL INCLUDE ELEVATIONS ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR FOR ALL PIPING (INCLUDING PLUMBING AND FIRE PROTECTION), DUCTWORK AND BREECHING. COORDINATION SHOP DRAWING SHALL BE SUBMITTED FOR ENGINEER REVIEW PRIOR TO FABRICATION OR INSTALLATION. SHOP DRAWINGS CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING ALL MATERIALS AND LABOR AS REQUIRED TO RESULT IN A FULLY FUNCTIONING MECHANICAL & PLUMBING SYSTEMS. CONTRACTORS NOTE HVAC SYSTEMS - CODE COMPLIANCE TO THE BEST OF OUR KNOWLEDGE, BELIEF AND PROFESSIONAL JUDGEMENT THESE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS WERE PREPARED IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE 2020 MECHANICAL CODE OF NEW YORK STATE. PLUMBING SYSTEMS - CODE COMPLIANCE TO THE BEST OF OUR KNOWLEDGE, BELIEF AND PROFESSIONAL JUDGEMENT THESE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS WERE PREPARED IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE 2020 PLUMBING CODE OF NEW YORK STATE. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE COMMISSIONING OF THE HVAC AND PLUMBING SYSTEMS AS OUTLINED AND IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION C408 OF THE 2020 ENERGY CONSERVATION CONSTRUCTION CODE. THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING ALL LABOR, TESTING, DOCUMENTATION, PLANS, REPORTS AS REQUIRED FOR COMPLIANCE WITH SECTION C408. ALL REPORTS AND DOCUMENTATION SHALL BE DELIVERED TO THE BUILDING OWNER WITHIN 90 DAYS OF THE ISSUANCE OF THE CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY. COMMISSIONING THE CONTRACTOR IS REQUIRED TO SUPPORT ALL EQUIPMENT DUCTWORK & PIPING LOCATED ABOVE THE CEILINGS FROM THE EXISTING BUILDING STRUCTURAL STEEL SUPPORTS. SUPPORTING DUCTWORK, EQUIPMENT, PIPING, ETC... FROM THE EXISTING METAL ROOF DECKING IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED. THE REUSE OF EXISTING HANGERS ATTACHED TO ROOF DECKING IS PROHIBITED. PROVIDE ALL INTERMEDIATE STEEL BETWEEN EXISTING STRUCTURAL STEEL MEMBERS AS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE ALL SUPPORTS. CONTRACTOR SHALL TAKE CARE TO MINIMIZE THE DISPLACEMENT OF THE EXISTING FIREPROOFING. HANGERS & SUPPORTS CEILING PLENUM THE SPACE LOCATED ABOVE THE CEILING ON BOTH FIRST AND SECOND FLOOR LEVELS IS BEING USED AS A RETURN/EXHAUST AIR PLENUM. ALL MATERIALS INSTALLED ABOVE CEILING LEVEL WITHIN THE RETURN/EXHAUST AIR PLENUM SHALL BE PLENUM RATED AND IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 602 OF THE 2020 MECHANICAL CODE OF NEW YORK STATE EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION PROVIDE COLORED DOT WITH ADHESIVE BACKING ON CEILING TILE BELOW EACH PIECE OF EQUIPMENT LOCATED ABOVE THE CEILING. COORDINATE DETAILS WITH ITHACA COLLEGE. T S1 50 ENERGY CODE COMPLIANCE TO THE BEST OF OUR KNOWLEDGE, BELIEF AND PROFESSIONAL JUDGEMENT THESE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS WERE PREPARED IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE 2020 ENERGY CONSERVATION CONSTRUCTION CODE OF NEW YORK STATE. PROJECT NORTH 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 MECHANICAL INFORMATION M-100 220157.00 FOR CONSTRUCTION 5623 BURDOCK ROAD MORAVIA, NEW YORK 13118 PHONE: 315-730-4185 e-mail- smurphy@murphengineering.com MCE MURPHY CONSULTING ENGINEERING DECEMBER 18, 2020 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 UP UP 16 17 1815.1 1915 1 TYP TYP 3 TYP 3 5 TYP 6 7 TYP 14x12 SA 10Ø SA 16x14 RA 16x14 RA OED W/WWM AC-1 AC-2 S1 240 (TYP OF 6) 20X20 RA OED W/WWM 16x14 SA 10x10 SA 10Ø SA 16x16 SA 14x14 SA (TYP OF 6) 16x16 RA S1 100 S1 50 S1 100 AC-9 AC-8 6Ø SA 8Ø SA S1 90 S1 90 AC-12 AC-7 AC-16 AC-10 AC-11 AC-13 6Ø SA 6Ø SA 8Ø SA 10Ø SA 6Ø SA 6Ø SA 14x12 SA 6Ø SA R2 650 S1 90 6Ø SA 10Ø SA 6Ø SA 6Ø SA 8Ø SA 6Ø SA 6Ø SA 16x14 SA 16x14 SA 14x12 SA 12Ø SA 8Ø SA S1 210 (TYP OF 4) R2 650 14X14 RA OED W/WWM 14X14 RA OED W/WWM 16X14 RA OED W/WWM AC-3 6Ø SA 6Ø SA 6Ø SA 6Ø SA 6Ø SA AC-614x14 RA OED W/WWM R2 840 16X16 RA OED W/WWM AC-15 AC-14 R1 90 S1 90 (TYP OF 4) (TYP OF 4) 6x6 RA 6Ø SA 6Ø SA 6x6 RA 6x6 RA 6Ø SA 6x6 RA 6Ø SA AC-5 AC-4 FILTER BOX (TYP) R1 270 10x10 RA OED W/WWM 6Ø SA 14x12 SA 10Ø SA S1 190 (TYP OF 2) 8Ø SA 8Ø SA S1 110 (TYP OF 4) S1 90 (TYP OF 4)6Ø SA 6Ø SA6Ø SA 10Ø SA 6Ø SA 6Ø SA 6Ø SA 16x14 SA 8Ø SA 6Ø SA 14x12 SA 16x14 SA 8Ø SA R2 1000 16X16 RA OED W/WWM 16x14 RA OED W/WWM 8x8 RA OED W/WWM R1 200 (TYP OF 6) (TYP OF 6) ACOUSTIC LINED DUCTWORK 16x16 RA R2 730 14X14 RA OED W/WWM 6Ø SA S1 90 S1 90 12x12 SA S1 285 R2 1710 AC-36 12X12 SA TYP FOR 13 S1 90 (TYP OF 4) S-1 200 R2 1440 AC-35 LOBBY 100 JAN 121 IP EXAM 2 110 IP EXAM 3 111 LEARNING CENTER 115 IP EXAM 3 112 SM GROUP/RELAX 115A CONF 131 OFFICE 1 101 OFFICE 2 102 OFFICE 3 103 OFFICE 4 104 ADMISSIONS COORDINATOR 117 ALL GENDER BATHROOM 118 WOMENS 119 PRINCIPAL FACULTY 126 MENS RM 120 FACULTY & STAFF BREAK RM 127 CLASSROOM 132 CLASSROOM 133 PRINCIPAL FACULTY 130 ALL GENDER BATHROOM 108 PRINCIPAL FACULTY 128 PRINCIPAL FACULTY 129 CORR / STAIR 122 PROGRAM ACTIVITY CTR 107 IP EXAM 1 109 SITTING AREA 122A SITTING AREA 113 106 IT CLO 114 9 (TYP OF 3) R1 65 R1 65 6x6 RA 6x6 RA UP UP 16 17 1815.1 1915 2 TYP 1 TYP TYP 4 TYP 1 5 TYP 7 TYP AC-1 AC-9 AC-8 AC-12 AC-7 AC-16 AC-11 AC-3 AC-6 AC-15 AC-14 AC-5 AC-4 AC-2 AC-10 FILTER BOX TYPICAL 16x14 OA UP THRU FLR W/FD 12x12 EA 16x14 EA 12x12 OA 12x12 OA E1 25 6Ø EA 8Ø EA 6Ø OA 6Ø EA E1 85 6Ø EA E1 15 E1 15 4Ø OA 6Ø EA E1 15 4Ø OA 8Ø OA 4Ø OA E1 15 4Ø OA 4Ø OA AC-13 4Ø OA 8Ø EA 10Ø OA 5Ø OA 5Ø OA 10x8 EA 12x12 EA 12Ø OA 8x8 EA OED W/WWM 125 CFM 14x14 EA AND OA UP THRU FLOOR W/FD 12Ø OA 12x12 EA UP THRU FLR W/FD E1 150 E1 150 E1 75 6Ø EA 8Ø EA 10x10 EA E1 75 E1 75 6Ø EA 6Ø EA 10Ø EA 1" CD DN WITHIN CHASE TO INDIRECT WASTE CONNECTION CO 1" CD 1" CD 1" CD 1" CD 1" CD CO 1" CD 1" CD 1" CD 1" CD 1" CD 1" CD 1" CD 1" CD 1" CD 1" CD 1" CD 1" CD DN TO MOP SINK, TERMINATE 1'-0" AFF 1" CD 1" CD 1" CD E1 125 (TYP OF 4) 1" CD OED/WWM 700 CFM 12ø OA OED W/WWM, BALANCE TO 475 CFM 6Ø EA E1 75 8ø OA OED W/WWM, BALANCE TO 125 CFM 8ø OA OED W/WWM, BALANCE TO 220 CFM 10x8 EA OED W/WWM, BALANCE TO 345 CFM 8ø OA OED W/WWM, BALANCE TO 140 CFM12x12 OA DUCTED INTO RETURN DUCTWORK BALANCE TO 700 CFM E1 50 6Ø EA S1 80 10x10 EA 12x12 EA 14x14 EA14x14 OA 12Ø OA 8Ø OA R2 700 R2 700 AC-36 12x12 EA FIRE DAMPER FIRE DAMPER 12Ø OA 6x6 EA 6x6 EA 8Ø EA 8Ø EA AC-35 CO 1" CD 8Ø OA 8Ø OA E1 75 LOBBY 100 JAN 121 IP EXAM 2 110 LEARNING CENTER 115 IP EXAM 3 112 SM GROUP/RELAX 115A CONF 131 OFFICE 1 101 OFFICE 2 102 OFFICE 3 103 OFFICE 4 104 117 ALL GENDER BATHROOM 118 WOMENS 119 INSTRUCTIONAL FACULTY 124 INSTRUCTIONAL FACULTY 125 PRINCIPAL FACULTY 126 MENS RM 120 FACULTY & STAFF BREAK RM 127 CLASSROOM 132CLASSROOM 133 PRINCIPAL FACULTY 130 ALL GENDER BATHROOM 108 PRINCIPAL FACULTY 128 PRINCIPAL FACULTY 129 CORR / STAIR 122 PROGRAM ACTIVITY CTR 107 IP EXAM 1 109 IT CLO 114 SITTING AREA 122A SITTING AREA 113 WAITING/RECPT 106 8 E1 156Ø EA TYP 4 10 10 1 KEYED RENOVATION NOTES 2 3 4 5 PROVIDE CEILING CASSETTE FAN COIL UNIT AS SHOWN AND SPECIFIED. COORDINATE EXACT PLACEMENT OF CEILING MOUNTED UNIT WITH LIGHTS, CEILING GRID, FIRE PROTECTION, ETC... INSTALL UNITS PER MANUFACTURERS WRITTEN INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. TYPICAL FOR ALL. PROVIDE DUCTED CONCEALED FAN COIL UNIT AS SHOWN AND SPECIFIED. COORDINATE EXACT PLACEMENT OF CEILING MOUNTED UNIT AND ELEVATION WITH ABOVE CEILING OBSTRUCTIONS. MOUNT UNIT AND DUCTWORK A MINIMUM OF 30" ABOVE CEILING LEVEL. INSTALL UNITS PER MANUFACTURERS WRITTEN INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. TYPICAL FOR ALL. PROVIDE RETURN/EXHAUST TRANSFER AIR GRILLE WITH ACOUSTICALLY LINED SOUND TRAP AS SHOWN AND SPECIFIED. REFER TO DETAILS SHEET OF RETURN AIR SOUNDRAP DETAIL.TYPICAL FOR ALL. AIR CONDITIONING UNITS ARE EQUIPPED WITH AN INTERNAL CONDENSATE LIFT PUMP. AT EACH ACU UNIT OFFSET THE CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING UP TO A HEIGHT WHICH ALLOWS FOR THE HORIZONTAL CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING TO PITCH A MINIMUM OF 1/8" PER FOOT IN THE DIRECTION OF FLOW TO THE CONDENSATE DISCHARGE POINT. CONCEAL ALL CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING ABOVE THE SUSPENDED CEILING. TYPICAL FOR ALL. PROVIDE RIGID G90 GALVANIZED DUCTWORK ABOVE SUSPENDED CEILING. COORDINATE EXACT LAYOUT OF DUCTWORK WITH FIRE PROTECTION PIPING, ELECTRICAL CONDUITS, LIGHT FIXTURES, ETC...TYPICAL FOR ALL DUCTWORK. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. TYPICAL FOR ALL. PROVIDE 1" ACOUSTICALLY LINED DUCTWORK. LOCATE DUCTED FAN COIL UNITS WHERE FILTER BOX IS EASILY ACCESSIBLE FOR FILTER REPLACEMENT. TYPICAL FOR ALL. 16X14 EXHAUST AIR DUCT UP WITH FIRE DAMPER. 16X14 EA DUCT AND 12X12 TOILET EXHAUST DUCT LOCATED ABOVE 16X14 OA DUCTWORK. PROVIDE HARD DUCT CONNECTIONS ABOVE CLASSROOM CEILING 133. THE CEILING SPACE ABOVE CLASSROOM 133 SHALL NOT BE A RETURN/EXHAUST PLENUM. COORDINATE DUCT PENETRATIONS THOUGH SLIDING PARTITION FRAMING. ALTERNATE OPTION IS TO ROUTE DUCTWORK AROUND PARTITION. 6 7 CEILING PLENUM THE SPACE LOCATED ABOVE THE CEILING ON BOTH FIRST AND SECOND FLOOR LEVELS IS BEING USED AS A RETURN/EXHAUST AIR PLENUM. ALL MATERIALS INSTALLED ABOVE CEILING LEVEL WITHIN THE RETURN/EXHAUST AIR PLENUM SHALL BE PLENUM RATED AND IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 602 OF THE 2020 MECHANICAL CODE OF NEW YORK STATE. THE CONTRACTOR IS REQUIRED TO SUPPORT ALL EQUIPMENT DUCTWORK & PIPING LOCATED ABOVE THE CEILINGS FROM THE EXISTING BUILDING STRUCTURAL STEEL SUPPORTS. SUPPORTING DUCTWORK, EQUIPMENT, PIPING, ETC... FROM THE EXISTING METAL ROOF DECKING IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED. THE REUSE OF EXISTING HANGERS ATTACHED TO ROOF DECKING IS PROHIBITED. PROVIDE ALL INTERMEDIATE STEEL BETWEEN EXISTING STRUCTURAL STEEL MEMBERS AS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE ALL SUPPORTS. CONTRACTOR SHALL TAKE CARE TO MINIMIZE THE DISPLACEMENT OF THE EXISTING FIREPROOFING. HANGERS & SUPPORTS FIRE DAMPERS PROVIDE FIRE DAMPERS AT ALL DUCTWORK PENETRATIONS THROUGH FLOOR LEVEL BETWEEN FIRST AND SECOND FLOORS. PROVIDE ACCESS PANELS IN DUCT CHASES ON SECOND FLOOR LEVEL TO PERMIT INSPECTION AND SERVICE OF FIRE DAMPERS. REFER TO DETAILS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR MORE INFORMATION. 8 9 GENERAL NOTES ALL INTERIOR WALLS SHOWN ARE FULL HEIGHT TO FLOOR/ROOF DECK ABOVE. CONTRACTOR SHALL LOCATE ALL CONCEALED DUCTED AC UNITS SUCH THAT THE UNITS ARE EASILY SERVICED AND PROVIDE ADEQUATE ACCESS TO THE FILTER BOXES FOR FILTER REPLACEMENT. ANY UNIT INSTALLED WHICH DOES NOT PERMIT PROPER SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE WILL BE REQUIRED TO BE RELOCATED AT CONTRACTORS EXPENSE. PROVIDE RIGID G90 GALVANIZED DUCTWORK ABOVE SUSPENDED CEILING. COORDINATE EXACT LAYOUT OF DUCTWORK WITH FIRE PROTECTION PIPING, ELECTRICAL CONDUITS, LIGHT FIXTURES, ETC...TYPICAL FOR ALL DUCTWORK. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE ALL LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS, POWER SUPPLIES, CONTROL CABLING, CONTROLS, ETC... AS REQUIRED TO RESULT IN A FULLY OPERATIONAL AND COMPLETE HVAC SYSTEM. NOT ALL OUTSIDE AIR (OA) VOLUMES ARE LISTED AT TERMINAL UNITS. REFER TO SCHEDULES SHEET FOR MORE INFORMATION. FOR ALL CONCEALED DUCTED UNITS, EXTEND OUTSIDE AIR DUCTS (OA) TO RETURN AIR FILTER BOX AND TERMINATE AT RETURN OPENING. QUANTITIES OF DUCT ELBOWS, INTERNAL DUCT LINING AND RETURN AIR SOUND TRAP DUCTWORK ARE IN PLACE TO MAINTAIN A MINIMUM LEVEL OF NOISE TRANSMISSION FROM THE MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT TO INTERIOR OCCUPIED SPACES. PROVIDE DUCTWORK SYSTEMS AS SHOWN AND SPECIFIED. TYPICAL FOR ALL. PROVIDE TURNING VANES IN ALL MITERED ELBOWS. ALL DUCTWORK DIMENSIONS ARE CLEAR INSIDE DIMENSIONS (INCLUDING ACOUSTICALLY LINED DUCTWORK) REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL DETAILS. PROVIDE ALL DUCTWORK TRANSITIONS AT RETURN AIR FILTER BOXES ON CONCEALED DUCTED AC UNITS. DUCTWORK TRANSITIONS ARE NOT NECESSARILY SHOWN ON PLANS. REFER TO MANUFACTURER'S DATA SHEETS FOR REAR/TOP/BOTTOM DUCTWORK OPENING SIZES. 10 PROJECT NORTH 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 220157.00 FOR CONSTRUCTION M-101 FIRST FLOOR DUCTWORK PLAN 1/8" = 1'-0"M101 1 FIRST FLOOR DUCTWORK PLAN - TERMINAL UNITS 1/8" = 1'-0"M101 2 FIRST FLOOR DUCTWORK PLAN - VENTILATION/EXHAUST DECEMBER 18, 2020 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 5623 BURDOCK ROAD MORAVIA, NEW YORK 13118 PHONE: 315-730-4185 e-mail- smurphy@murphengineering.com MCE MURPHY CONSULTING ENGINEERING UP 16 17 1815.1 C B A D E F E.9 15 R2 1000 20X20 RA OED S1 280 (TYP OF 5) 8Ø SA 8Ø SA 12Ø SA 8Ø SA 14x12 SA 14x14 SA 16x14 SA 16x8 RA OED W/WWM AC-27 AC-28 AC-17AC-18 AC-29 R2 1710 S1 215 18X18 RA OED W/WWM 20X20 RA OED W/WWM 12x12 SA 10X10 SA 8Ø SA (TYP OF 8) S1 110 R1 110 (TYP OF 6) (TYP OF 6) 6x6 RA OED W/WWM (TYP OF 8) S1 90 (TYP OF 2) R1 90 (TYP OF 2) 6Ø SA 6Ø SA 8Ø SA 8x8 SA12x8 SA 6Ø SA 16x8 SA AC-30 AC-25 1 2 3 5 S1 175 S1 130 (TYP OF 3) 8Ø SA 8Ø SA 10Ø SA 12Ø SA S1 175 S1 145 R1 175 (TYP OF 2) R1 290 12Ø SA 6x8 RA R1 175 6x6 RA 4 4 6 S1 90 6Ø SA 16x14 SA 12Ø SA 8Ø SA 10Ø SA 6Ø SA S1 80 (TYP OF 4) 6 AC-20 AC-19 R1 320 R1 300 12x12 RA OED W/WWM AC-26 AC-24 AC-23 AC-22AC-21 AC-31 S1 110 R1 640 10X12 RA OED W/WWM (TYP OF 4) 6Ø SA 8Ø SA 6Ø SA 6Ø SA 10x8 SA 14x10 SA 10x12 RA OED W/WWM R2 1440 R2 940 16X16 RA OED W/WWM 16x14 RA OED W/WWM 16x14 RA OED W/WWM S1 240 (TYP OF 6) 8Ø SA 10x10 SA 14x12 SA 14x12 SA 16x14 SA 16x14 SA AC-32 AC-33 SIM STOR 233 PD OFFICE 207 PRINCIPAL FACULTY OFFICE 206 MED DIRECTOR 205 CLASSROOM 203 LEARNING CTR 202 ADMIN ASST / RECEPTION 204 PATIENT TLT 224 PATIENT RM 223 PROCEDURE ROOM 225 READY RM 227 LAUNDRY/STOR 234 MENS 241 WOMENS 240 LEARNER BREAK ROOM 239 CLASSROOM 231 IT 235 CONTROL 210 RECEPTION WAITING 208 TLT 209 CONTROL 222 DEBRIEF 219 LOCKERS 239A OPERATING ROOM 221 ELEV LOBBY 200 HALL 211 CORRIDOR 228 CORR 230 (TYP OF 6) 7 AC-34 S1 200 (TYP OF 2) 8Ø SA 10x10 SA 8Ø SA 16x8 RA 16x8 RA OED W/WWM FILTER BOX (TYPICAL) R1 640 12x12 RA OED W/WWM (TYP OF 8) 6Ø SA S1 235 (TYP OF 4) 12X14 SA 10X10 SA 16x16 SA S1 400 12x12 SA 10Ø SA AC-38 AC-37 9 9 9 10 TYP 11 TYP 12 TYP 12 TYP 12 TYP 14 14 6Ø SA S1 200 12X12 TRANSFER AIR DUCT W/SOUNDTRAP 12X12 TRANSFER AIR DUCT CC 19 202B 202A 8X8 TRANSFER AIR DUCT W SOUNDTRAP 8X8 TRANSFER AIR DUCT W SOUNDTRAP UP 16 17 1815.1 C B A D E F E.9 15 FILTER BOX (TYP) AC-27 AC-28 AC-18 AC-29 AC-30 AC-25 2 3 AC-20 AC-19 AC-26 AC-24 AC-23 AC-22AC-21 AC-31 FILTER BOX TYP AC-32 AC-33 SIM STOR 233 PD OFFICE 207 PRINCIPAL FACULTY OFFICE 206 MED DIRECTOR 205 CLASSROOM 203 LEARNING CTR 202 ADMIN ASST / RECEPTION 204 PATIENT TLT 224 PATIENT RM 223 PROCEDURE ROOM 225 READY RM 227 ALL GENDER TLT 242 MENS 241 WOMENS 240 LEARNER BREAK ROOM 239 CLASSROOM 231 IT 235 CONTROL 210 TLT 209 CONTROL 226 CONTROL 222 DEBRIEF 219 LOCKERS 239A OPERATING ROOM 221 ELEV LOBBY 200 HALL 211 CORRIDOR 228 CORR 230 E1 15 4Ø EA 8Ø EA 4Ø OA 4Ø OA 6Ø OA E1 30 E1 20 E1 20 4Ø EA 6Ø EA 4Ø OA 6Ø OA 8Ø OA 6Ø OA 12x12 OA 20x20 EA 16x14 EA AND OA DN THRU FLR W/FD 20x20 OA 20x20 EA 8Ø EA 12Ø OA 12Ø OA 8x8 EA OED W/WWM, BALANCE TO 225 CFM 8x8 EA 10x10 EA 14x12 OA 20x20 EA E1 30 4Ø EA 6Ø EA 6Ø OA 14x14 EA 6x6 EA OED W/WWM 8"Ø OA 20X20 OA 8x8 OA 12x12 EA OED W/WWM BALANCE TO 550 CFM 10Ø EA 14x14 OA AND EA DN THRU FLR W/FD E1 50 E1 65 7 E1 75 6Ø EA 6Ø EA 8Ø EA E1 30 E1 25 10Ø EA 4Ø EA ACOUSTIC LINED DUCTWORK (TYP) E1 150 1" CD 1" CD 1" CD 1" CD 1" CD 1" CD ROUTE 1" CD TO EXISTING MOP SINK AND TERMINATE 1'-0" AFF 1" CD 1" CD 1" CD 1" CD 1" CD 1" CD 1" CD 1" CD 1" CD CO 1" CD 1" CD 1" CD 1" CD 1" CD 1" CD 1" CD1" CD 8 1" CD AC-34 OED W/WWM, BALANCE TO 35 CFM 12x12 OA OED W/WWM, BALANCE TO 600 CFM 6Ø OA E1 50 6Ø EA 6Ø EA E1 50 AC-17 S1 135 6Ø EA 41x12 DUCT CONNECTION (TYP) 28x24 DUCT CONNECTION (TYP) 6"ø OA OED W/WWM, BALANCE TO 55 CFM 12x12 OA OED W/WWM BALANCE TO 700 CFM DSD MEP 232 8Ø EA E1 150 (TYP 2) 4Ø OA DSD AC-38 AC-37 9 9 10 TYP 11 TYP13 TYP 13 TYP 14 14 14 14 14 15 16 16 325 CFM 10x10 EA 20x20 EA 20X20 OA 20x20 EA 14 48"W x 24"T x 20"D FILTER BOX (TYP 2) 15 12x12 EA OED W/WWM BALANCE TO 550 CFM CO 1" CD 8Ø EA PROVIDE BACKDRAFT DAMPER IN MAKEUP AIR DUCT 8Ø OA 8Ø OA 18 18 18 18 E1 30 20 202B 202A 6Ø OA 6Ø OA S1 65 6Ø EA 325 CFM 21 1 KEYED RENOVATION NOTES 2 3 4 5 16X8 RA OED W/WWM. PROVIDE FILTER BOX WITH 10"Ø OA OED W/WWM. BALANCE TO 225 CFM. PROVIDE FILTER BOX WITH 10"Ø OA OED W/WWM. BALANCE TO 275 CFM. 6X6 RA OED W/WWM. 16X14 RA OED W/WWM. 10X10 RA OED W/WWM. PROVIDE S1 TYPE DIFFUSER. BALANCE TO 55 CFM PROVIDE 1" CONDENSATE DOWN TO INDIRECT WASTE CONNECTION. PROVIDE OUTDOOR HEAT PUMPS (TYP FOR 4) AND DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR UNITS (TYP FOR 2) LOCATED ON THE ROOF. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR MORE INFORMATION. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE INSTALLATIONS OF ALL INTERIOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT WITH BUILDING OWNER OR OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE AND FINAL PLACEMENTS OF ROOFTOP EQUIPMENT. PROVIDE CEILING CASSETTE FAN COIL UNIT AS SHOWN AND SPECIFIED. COORDINATE EXACT PLACEMENT OF CEILING MOUNTED UNIT WITH LIGHTS, CEILING GRID, FIRE PROTECTION, ETC... INSTALL UNITS PER MANUFACTURERS WRITTEN INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. TYPICAL. PROVIDE DUCTED CONCEALED FAN COIL UNIT AS SHOWN AND SPECIFIED. COORDINATE EXACT PLACEMENT OF CEILING MOUNTED UNIT AND ELEVATION WITH ABOVE CEILING OBSTRUCTIONS. MOUNT UNIT AND DUCTWORK A MINIMUM OF 30" ABOVE CEILING LEVEL. INSTALL UNITS PER MANUFACTURERS WRITTEN INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. PROVIDE RETURN/EXHAUST TRANSFER AIR GRILLE WITH ACOUSTICALLY LINED SOUND TRAP AS SHOWN AND SPECIFIED. REFER TO DETAILS SHEET OF RETURN AIR SOUNDRAP DETAIL. AIR CONDITIONING UNITS ARE EQUIPPED WITH AN INTERNAL CONDENSATE LIFT PUMP. AT EACH ACU UNIT OFFSET THE CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING UP TO A HEIGHT WHICH ALLOWS FOR THE HORIZONTAL CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING TO PITCH A MINIMUM OF 1/8" PER FOOT IN THE DIRECTION OF FLOW TO THE CONDENSATE DISCHARGE POINT. CONCEAL ALL CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING ABOVE THE SUSPENDED CEILING. PROVIDE 1" ACOUSTICALLY LINED DUCTWORK. PROVIDE DUCT MOUNTED SMOKE DETECTOR IN EXHAUST AIR DUCTWORK. ROOF MOUNTED DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR UNIT SHALL SHUT DOWN UPON ACTIVATION OF THE DUCT MOUNTED SMOKE DETECTOR. PROVIDE 48" WIDE X 24" TALL X 20" DEEP FILTER BOX TO ACCOMMODATE TWO 12" DEEP BY 24"X24" HEPA FILTERS (SIDE BY SIDE) WITH TWO 2" DEEP 24"X24" MERV 8 PRE-FILTERS. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE ONE SET OF FILTERS ALONG WITH ONE SET OF SPARE FILTERS FOR EACH FILTER BANK. 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 CEILING PLENUM THE SPACE LOCATED ABOVE THE CEILING ON BOTH FIRST AND SECOND FLOOR LEVELS IS BEING USED AS A RETURN/EXHAUST AIR PLENUM. ALL MATERIALS INSTALLED ABOVE CEILING LEVEL WITHIN THE RETURN/EXHAUST AIR PLENUM SHALL BE PLENUM RATED AND IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 602 OF THE 2020 MECHANICAL CODE OF NEW YORK STATE. THE CONTRACTOR IS REQUIRED TO SUPPORT ALL EQUIPMENT DUCTWORK & PIPING LOCATED ABOVE THE CEILINGS FROM THE EXISTING BUILDING STRUCTURAL STEEL SUPPORTS. SUPPORTING DUCTWORK, EQUIPMENT, PIPING, ETC... FROM THE EXISTING METAL ROOF DECKING IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED. THE REUSE OF EXISTING HANGERS ATTACHED TO ROOF DECKING IS PROHIBITED. PROVIDE ALL INTERMEDIATE STEEL BETWEEN EXISTING STRUCTURAL STEEL MEMBERS AS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE ALL SUPPORTS. CONTRACTOR SHALL TAKE CARE TO MINIMIZE THE DISPLACEMENT OF THE EXISTING FIREPROOFING. HANGERS & SUPPORTS 17 KEYED RENOVATION NOTES PROVIDE 4"Ø EXHAUST FROM CLOTHES DRYER UP THRU ROOM AND TERMINATE WITH CLOTHES DRYER OUTLET. REFER TO DRAWING M602 FOR DETAILS AND REQUIREMENTS. EXISTING TOILET ROOM EXHAUST REGISTER REMAINS FOR REUSE. REMOVE EXISTING EXHAUST GRILLE/ CLEAN & REINSTALL. VERIFY PROPER OPERATION OF EXHAUST FAN SYSTEM. PROVIDE LG CENTRAL CONTROLLER AS SPECIFIED AND LOCATE IN SECOND FLOOR IT ROOM. COORDINATE WITH OWNER ON EXACT PLACEMENT. COORDINATE WITH ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR AND IC ON CONNECTIVITY TO IC DATA NETWORK. 12X12 EXHAUST AIR DUCTWORK DOWN WITH FIRE DAMPER, 14X14 EXHAUST AIR DUCTWORK UP TO ROOF MOUNTED EXHAUST FAN EF-1. PROVIDE ELECTRICALLY OPERATED CLOSURE DAMPER AT FAN. CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE ALL CUTTING, FLASHING AND INSTALLATION OF EXHAUST FAN WITH BUILDING OWNER AND/OR REPRESENTATIVE. RETAIN SERVICES OF ROOFING CONTRACTOR THAT IS ACCEPTABLE TO IC AND BUILDING OWNER. TYPICAL FOR CLOTHES DRYER EXHAUST DUCTWORK PENETRATION & CURB MOUNTING. PROVIDE 4"Ø CLOTHES DRYER EXHAUST DUCTWORK FROM DRYER THROUGH ROOF AND TERMINATE WITH CLOTHES DRYER EXHAUST OUTLET. REFER TO DRAWING M-602 FOR ADDITIONAL DETAILS AND SPECIFICATIONS. PROVIDE LINT CLEANOUT AT BASE OF STACK. PROVIDE DUCTWORK IN COMPLIANCE WITH SECTION 504 OF THE 2020 NYS MECHANICAL CODE. 18 19 20 21 GENERAL NOTES ALL INTERIOR WALLS SHOWN ARE FULL HEIGHT TO FLOOR/ROOF DECK ABOVE. CONTRACTOR SHALL LOCATE ALL CONCEALED DUCTED AC UNITS SUCH THAT THE UNITS ARE EASILY SERVICED AND PROVIDE ADEQUATE ACCESS TO THE FILTER BOXES FOR FILTER REPLACEMENT. ANY UNIT INSTALLED WHICH DOES NOT PERMIT PROPER SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE WILL BE REQUIRED TO BE RELOCATED AT CONTRACTORS EXPENSE. PROVIDE RIGID G90 GALVANIZED DUCTWORK ABOVE SUSPENDED CEILING. COORDINATE EXACT LAYOUT OF DUCTWORK WITH FIRE PROTECTION PIPING, ELECTRICAL CONDUITS, LIGHT FIXTURES, ETC...TYPICAL FOR ALL DUCTWORK. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE ALL LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS, POWER SUPPLIES, CONTROL CABLING, CONTROLS, ETC... AS REQUIRED TO RESULT IN A FULLY OPERATIONAL AND COMPLETE HVAC SYSTEM. NOT ALL OUTSIDE AIR (OA) VOLUMES ARE LISTED AT TERMINAL UNITS. REFER TO SCHEDULES SHEET FOR MORE INFORMATION. FOR ALL CONCEALED DUCTED UNITS, EXTEND OUTSIDE AIR DUCTS (OA) TO RETURN AIR FILTER BOX AND TERMINATE AT RETURN OPENING. QUANTITIES OF DUCT ELBOWS, INTERNAL DUCT LINING AND RETURN AIR SOUND TRAP DUCTWORK ARE IN PLACE TO MAINTAIN A MINIMUM LEVEL OF NOISE TRANSMISSION FROM THE MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT TO INTERIOR OCCUPIED SPACES. PROVIDE DUCTWORK SYSTEMS AS SHOWN AND SPECIFIED. TYPICAL FOR ALL. PROVIDE TURNING VANES IN ALL MITERED ELBOWS. ALL DUCTWORK DIMENSIONS ARE CLEAR INSIDE DIMENSIONS (INCLUDING ACOUSTICALLY LINED DUCTWORK) REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL DETAILS. PROVIDE ALL DUCTWORK TRANSITIONS AT RETURN AIR FILTER BOXES ON CONCEALED DUCTED AC UNITS. DUCTWORK TRANSITIONS ARE NOT NECESSARILY SHOWN ON PLANS. REFER TO MANUFACTURER'S DATA SHEETS FOR REAR/TOP/BOTTOM DUCTWORK OPENING SIZES. PROJECT NORTH 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 220157.00 FOR CONSTRUCTION M-102 SECOND FLOOR DUCTWORK PLAN DECEMBER 18, 2020 1/8" = 1'-0"M102 1 SECOND FLOOR DUCTWORK PLAN - TERMINAL UNITS 1/8" = 1'-0"M102 2 SECOND FLOOR DUCTWORK PLAN - VENTILATION/EXHAUST ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 5623 BURDOCK ROAD MORAVIA, NEW YORK 13118 PHONE: 315-730-4185 e-mail- smurphy@murphengineering.com MCE MURPHY CONSULTING ENGINEERING 16 17 18 19 C B A D E F E.9 15 HP-1 HP-4 HP-3 DOAS-1 DOAS-2 1 PROVIDE SLIP SHEET PROVIDE HEAT PUMP UNIT TYPICAL - SECURE TO HEAT PUMP STAND PER MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS. PROVIDE SLIP SHEET TO HEAT RECOVERY BOX FRONT VIEW ROOF STRUCTURE (EXIST) SINGLE PLY ROOF MEMBRANE (EXIST) ROOF STRUCTURE (EXIST) SINGLE PLY ROOF MEMBRANE (EXIST) MAINTAIN ALL MANUFACTURER'S LISTED INSTALLATION AND SERVICE CLEARANCES PROVIDE 24" TALL OPEN BASE STAND. SECURE HEAT PUMP PER MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS. SECURE HEAT PUMP STAND TO ROOF AS OUTLINED IN KEYED NOTE 1 ON THIS DRAWING. PROVIDE HEAT PUMP UNIT - SECURE TO HEAT PUMP STAND PER MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS. EF-1 3 1 3 1 3 2 2 4 TYPICAL FOR 4 5 HEAT PUMP UNITS 1 & 4 ARE DOUBLE SECTION HP-213 6 PROVIDE 24" TALL OPEN BASE STAND. SECURE HEAT PUMP PER MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS. SECURE HEAT PUMP STAND TO ROOF AS OUTLINED IN KEYED NOTE 1 ON THIS DRAWING. 1 KEYED RENOVATION NOTES 2 3 PROVIDE OUTDOOR ROOFTOP HEAT PUMPS (TYP FOR 4) LOCATE HEAT PUMPS ON 24" TALL OPEN BASE STAND TO BE SUPPLIED BY EQUIPMENT DISTRIBUTOR. PROVIDE QUICKSLING SUPER STAND FOR EACH HEAT PUMP, MINIMUM 12"X12" SUPPORT PLATE, TWO SECTION (OR DOUBLE FRAME) HEAT PUMP HP-4 SHALL HAVE SUPPORT LEGS AND PLATES MIDSPAN OF UNIT. AT EACH LEG SUPPORT PLATE, PROVIDE ONE 1/2" THREADED ROD THROUGH MOUNTING HOLE ON SUPPORT PLATE, DOWN THROUGH ROOF IN CEILING SPACE TO A HORIZONTAL UNISTRUT WHICH SPANS A STRUCTURAL ROOF MEMBER ON EACH SIDE OF THE UNIT. PROVIDE 1/2" NUT AND WASHER AT ROOF SUPPORT PLATE AND AT UNISTRUT SUPPORT IN CEILINGS SPACE TO SECURE HEAT PUMP TO ROOF SURFACE. PROVIDE BUTYL SEALANT AT ROOF SUPPORT PLATE WHERE THREADED ROD PENETRATES ROOF AND SEAL WEATHERTIGHT. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL PLANS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. COORDINATE ALL LOCATIONS WITH BUILDING OWNER AND ITHACA COLLEGE PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. PROVIDE OUTDOOR ROOFTOP DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR UNITS (TYP FOR 2). LOCATE DOAS UNIT ON 18" HIGH FACTORY FABRICATE ROOF CURB. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL PLANS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. COORDINATE ALL LOCATIONS WITH BUILDING OWNER AND ITHACA COLLEGE PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. PROVIDE REFRIGERANT HOT GAS, VAPOR AND LIQUID LINES (3) PIPING FROM HEAT RECOVERY BOX TO OUTDOOR UNIT LOCATED ON THE ROOF ABOVE AREA 204. CONSULT LG FACTORY FOR EXACT REFRIGERANT PIPING SIZES. TYPICAL FOR ALL. REFRIGERANT PIPING LINE SETS NOT SHOWN. REFER TO DETAILS SHEET FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. CONTRACTOR TO DETERMINE LINE LENGTHS AND ROUTING IN THE FIELD. PROVIDE 12X12 ROOF CURB, 16" TALL, WITH CAP FOR REFRIGERANT PIPING AND CONTROLS FROM INDOOR HEAT RECOVERY BOX TO EXTERIOR ROOF MOUNTED HEAT PUMP UNIT. PROVIDE PIPE PENETRATION BOOTS FOR ALL PIPING, CONTROLS & WIRING. SEAL ALL PENETRATION WEATHER TIGHT. PROVIDE CURB AT EACH ROOF MOUNTED HEAT PUMP. PROVIDE ROOF MOUNTED EXHAUST FAN AS SHOWN AND SPECIFIED. REFER TO DETAILS SHEET FOR MORE INFORMATION. PROVIDE 4" CLOTHES DRYER EXHAUST VENT THROUGH ROOF. PROVIDE 18" HIGH INSULATED ROOF CURB AND DRYER VENT TERMINATION. REFER TO DRAWING M602 FOR DETAIL. 4 5 6 PROJECT NORTH 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 220157.00 FOR CONSTRUCTION M-103 ROOF PLAN 1/8" = 1'-0"M201 1 ROOF PLAN DECEMBER 18, 2020 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 NOT TO SCALE OUTDOOR HEATPUMP UNIT DETAIL (TYPICAL) 5623 BURDOCK ROAD MORAVIA, NEW YORK 13118 PHONE: 315-730-4185 e-mail- smurphy@murphengineering.com MCE MURPHY CONSULTING ENGINEERING LOBBY 100 IP EXAM 2 110 IP EXAM 3 111 LEARNING CENTER 115 IP EXAM 3 112 SM GROUP/RELAX 115A CONF 131 OFFICE 1 101 OFFICE 2 102 OFFICE 3 103 OFFICE 4 104 ADMISSIONS COORDINATOR 117 ALL GENDER BATHROOM 118 WOMENS 119 INSTRUCTIONAL FACULTY 124 INSTRUCTIONAL FACULTY 125 PRINCIPAL FACULTY 126 MENS RM 120 FACULTY & STAFF BREAK RM 127 CLASSROOM 132 CLASSROOM 133 PRINCIPAL FACULTY 130 134 ALL GENDER BATHROOM 108 PRINCIPAL FACULTY 128 PRINCIPAL FACULTY 129 EXIST ELEVATOR -CORR / STAIR 122 PROGRAM ACTIVITY CENTER 107 IP EXAM 1 109 IT ROOM 114 AC-1 AC-2 AC-9 AC-8 AC-12 AC-7 AC-16 AC-10 AC-11 AC-13 AC-3 AC-6 AC-15 AC-14 AC-5 AC-4 HRB-1 HRB-2 HRB-5 HRB-4 HRB-3 TT T T T T T T T T T T T T T T UP UP 16 17 1815.1 19 C B A D E F E.9 15 2 TYP 3 TYP 4 5 6 TYP 7 TYP AC-35 AC-36 T T SIM STOR 233 PD OFFICE 207 PRINCIPAL FACULTY OFFICE 206 MED DIRECTOR 205 CLASSROOM 203 LEARNING CTR 202 ADMIN ASST / RECEPTION 204 PATIENT TLT 224 PATIENT RM 223 PROCEDURE ROOM 225 READY RM 227 PAT EXAM RM 212 PAT EXAM RM 213 PAT EXAM RM 214 PAT EXAM RM 215 PAT EXAM RM 216 PAT EXAM RM 217 LAUNDRY STORAGE 234 ALL GENDER TLT 242 MENS 241 FACULTY & STAFF TLT 238 WOMENS 240 LEARNER BREAK ROOM 239 CLASSROOM 231 IT 235 CONTROL 210 RECEPTION WAITING 208 MEDICAL STORAGE 220 TLT 209 CONTROL 226 CONTROL 222 DEBRIEF 219 LOCKERS 239A OPERATING ROOM 221 ELEV LOBBY 200 HALL 211 CORRIDOR 228 CORR 230 AC-27 AC-28 AC-18AC-17 AC-29 AC-30 AC-25 AC-20 AC-19 AC-26 AC-24 AC-23 AC-22AC-21 AC-31 AC-33 HRB-8 HRB-10 HRB-7 HRB-9 HRB-6 T T T TT T T T T T T T T T T T T SM GROUP 202B SM GROUP 202A UP 16 17 1815.1 C B A D E F E.9 15 2 TYP 3 TYP 4 5 6 TYP 7 TYP AC-38 AC-37 AC-32 T T HP-1 HP-4 HP-2 HP-3 DOAS-1 DOAS-2 1 1 1 1 1 1 CEILING PLENUM THE SPACE LOCATED ABOVE THE CEILING ON BOTH FIRST AND SECOND FLOOR LEVELS IS BEING USED AS A RETURN/EXHAUST AIR PLENUM. ALL MATERIALS INSTALLED ABOVE CEILING LEVEL WITHIN THE RETURN/EXHAUST AIR PLENUM SHALL BE PLENUM RATED AND IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 602 OF THE 2020 MECHANICAL CODE OF NEW YORK STATE. THE CONTRACTOR IS REQUIRED TO SUPPORT ALL EQUIPMENT DUCTWORK & PIPING LOCATED ABOVE THE CEILINGS FROM THE EXISTING BUILDING STRUCTURAL STEEL SUPPORTS. SUPPORTING DUCTWORK, EQUIPMENT, PIPING, ETC... FROM THE EXISTING METAL ROOF DECKING IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED. THE REUSE OF EXISTING HANGERS ATTACHED TO ROOF DECKING IS PROHIBITED. PROVIDE ALL INTERMEDIATE STEEL BETWEEN EXISTING STRUCTURAL STEEL MEMBERS AS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE ALL SUPPORTS. CONTRACTOR SHALL TAKE CARE TO MINIMIZE THE DISPLACEMENT OF THE EXISTING FIREPROOFING. HANGERS & SUPPORTS 1 KEYED RENOVATION NOTES 2 3 4 5 PROVIDE OUTDOOR ROOFTOP HEAT PUMPS (TYP FOR 4) AND ROOFTOP DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR UNITS (TYP FOR 2) LOCATED ON THE ROOF ABOVE. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL PLANS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. COORDINATE ALL LOCATIONS WITH BUILDING OWNER AND ITHACA COLLEGE PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. PROVIDE CEILING CASSETTE FAN COIL UNIT AS SHOWN AND SPECIFIED. COORDINATE EXACT PLACEMENT OF CEILING MOUNTED UNIT WITH LIGHTS, CEILING GRID, FIRE PROTECTION, ETC... INSTALL UNITS PER MANUFACTURERS WRITTEN INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. TYPICAL FOR ALL. PROVIDE DUCTED CONCEALED FAN COIL UNIT AS SHOWN AND SPECIFIED. COORDINATE EXACT PLACEMENT OF CEILING MOUNTED UNIT AND ELEVATION WITH ABOVE CEILING OBSTRUCTIONS. MOUNT UNIT AND DUCTWORK A MINIMUM OF 30" ABOVE CEILING LEVEL. INSTALL UNITS PER MANUFACTURERS WRITTEN INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. PROVIDE REFRIGERANT HOT GAS AND LIQUID LINES PIPING FROM HEAT RECOVERY BOX TO CEILING AC UNITS. CONSULT LG FACTORY FOR EXACT REFRIGERANT PIPING SIZES. TYPICAL FOR ALL. REFRIGERANT PIPING LINE SETS NOT SHOWN. REFER TO DETAILS SHEET FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. CONTRACTOR TO DETERMINE LINE LENGTHS AND ROUTING IN THE FIELD. PROVIDE REFRIGERANT HOT GAS, VAPOR AND LIQUID LINES (3) PIPING FROM HEAT RECOVERY BOX TO OUTDOOR UNIT LOCATED ON THE ROOF ABOVE AREA 204. CONSULT LG FACTORY FOR EXACT REFRIGERANT PIPING SIZES. TYPICAL FOR ALL. REFRIGERANT PIPING LINE SETS NOT SHOWN. REFER TO DETAILS SHEET FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. CONTRACTOR TO DETERMINE LINE LENGTHS AND ROUTING IN THE FIELD. PROVIDE HEAT RECOVERY BOX. PROVIDE ALL MATERIALS AND PIPING AS REQUIRED TO RESULT IN FULLY OPERATIONAL SYSTEM. PROVIDE ISOLATION BALL VALVES ON ALL BRANCH REFRIGERANT LINES. PROVIDE LG PROGRAMMABLE REMOTE CONTROLLER FOR AC UNITS. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. TYPICAL FOR ALL. 6 7 GENERAL NOTES 1. ALL INTERIOR WALLS SHOWN ARE FULL HEIGHT TO FLOOR/ROOF DECK ABOVE. CONTRACTOR SHALL LOCATE ALL CONCEALED DUCTED AC UNITS SUCH THAT THE UNITS ARE EASILY SERVICED AND PROVIDE ADEQUATE ACCESS TO THE FILTER BOXES FOR FILTER REPLACEMENT. ANY UNIT INSTALLED WHICH DOES NOT PERMIT PROPER SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE WILL BE REQUIRED TO BE RELOCATED AT CONTRACTORS EXPENSE. 2. HRB UITS TO BE LOCATED ABOVE AREAS THAT ARE NOT SENSITIVE TO NOISE. LOCATE HRB UNITS ABOVE CORRIDORS & STORAGE ROOMS. PROJECT NORTH 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 220157.00 FOR CONSTRUCTION M-201 FIRST AND SECOND FLOOR PIPING PLAN 1/8" = 1'-0"M201 1 FIRST FLOOR PIPING PLAN 1/8" = 1'-0"M201 2 SECOND FLOOR PIPING PLAN DECEMBER 18, 2020 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 5623 BURDOCK ROAD MORAVIA, NEW YORK 13118 PHONE: 315-730-4185 e-mail- smurphy@murphengineering.com MCE MURPHY CONSULTING ENGINEERING DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR UNIT #1 WITH DEMAND CONTROL VENTILATION SEQUENCE - CLASSROOMS DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR UNIT - DOAS #1 DOAS WITH DX COOLING, ELECTRIC HEATING CONTROL, ENERGY RECOVERY AND DEMAND CONTROL VENTILATION OCCUPIED MODE: -DURING THE OCCUPIED PERIODS AS DETERMINED BY THE SCHEDULE SET IN THE LG CENTRAL CONTROLLER, THE EXHAUST AND OUTSIDE AIR MOTORIZED DAMPERS SHALL BE OPEN 100%.THE DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR UNIT SUPPLY AND EXHAUST AIR FANS SHALL OPERATE CONTINUOUSLY AT LOW SPEED AND BE INDEXED TO HIGH SPEED ON SIGNAL FROM THE RETURN AIR DUCT MOUNTED CO2 SENSOR. CO2 SENSOR SETPOINT THRESHOLDS SHALL BE SET AT 500PPM (ADJUSTABLE). -A MANUAL OVERRIDE BUTTON SHALL BE LOCATED IN A SPACE, AS DETERMINED BY THE OWNER, TO FORCE THE DOAS UNIT TO MAXIMUM SPEED. UNOCCUPIED MODE: - DURING THE UNOCCUPIED PERIODS AS DETERMINED BY THE SCHEDULE SET IN THE LG CENTRAL CONTROLLER, THE EXHAUST AND OUTSIDE AIR MOTORIZED DAMPERS SHALL BE CLOSED. THE DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR UNIT SUPPLY AND EXHAUST AIR FANS SHALL BE OFF. RETURN DUCT CO2 SENSOR OCCUPIED MODE; FAN SHALL BE ON AND CLOSURE DAMPER SHALL BE OPEN DURING THE OCCUPIED HOURS. UNOCCUPIED MODE; FAN SHALL BE OFF AND CLOSURE DAMPER SHALL BE FULLY CLOSED DURING THE UNOCCUPIED HOURS. PROVIDE CONTROL WIRING AND ASSOCIATED CONTROLS AND PROGRAMMING FROM LG CONTROL SYSTEM TO ROOF MOUNTED EXHAUST FAN FOR CLOSURE DAMPER OPERATOR CONTROL ROOF MOUNTED EXHAUST FAN - TOILET ROOMS 2900 CFM 2900 CFM 2900 CFM 2900 CFM DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR UNIT #2 - GENERAL AREAS 2650 CFM 2650 CFM 2650 CFM 2650 CFM HEAT PUMP AND FAN COIL UNITS (DUCTLESS AND DUCTED CONCEALED): OCCUPIED MODE: -DURING THE OCCUPIED PERIODS AS DETERMINED BY THE LG CENTRAL CONTROLLER,THE UNITS HEATING/COOLING SYSTEM SHALL OPERATE UNDER ITS FACTORY CONTROLS AS REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN SPACE TEMPERATURE SETPOINT. EACH FAN COIL UNIT SHALL HAVE A PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT FOR HEATING AND COOLING SETPOINTS. UNOCCUPIED MODE: -DURING THE UNOCCUPIED PERIODS AS DETERMINED BY THE LG CENTRAL CONTROLLER, THE UNITS HEATING/COOLING SYSTEM SHALL OPERATE UNDER ITS FACTORY CONTROLS AS REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN SPACE TEMPERATURE SETBACK SETPOINT. THE VRF SYSTEM SHALL PROVIDE HEATING/COOLING TO REACH SETPOINT TEMPERATURE IN THE FOLLOWING MODES A. IN THE HEATING MODE, THE VRF THERMOSTAT SHALL CALL FOR HEAT FROM THE FAN COIL AND THE FAN COIL SHALL REMAIN ON UNTIL SATISFYING THE SETPOINT TEMPERATURE. B. IN THE COOLING MODE, THE VRF THERMOSTAT SHALL CALL FOR COOLING FROM THE FAN COIL AND THE FAN COIL SHALL REMAIN ON UNTIL SATISFYING THE SETPOINT TEMPERATURE. C. THE VRF CENTRAL CONTROLLER SHALL BE ABLE TO VIEW THE ADJUSTABLE SETPOINT TEMPERATURES, SCHEDULE, AND BE ACCESSED REMOTELY. SAFETIES / OTHER CONTROL FUNCTIONS: -SHUTDOWN UNITS UPON ACTIVATION OF THE BUILDING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM. DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR UNIT - DOAS #1 DOAS WITH DX COOLING, ELECTRIC HEATING CONTROL, ENERGY RECOVERY AND DEMAND CONTROL VENTILATION OCCUPIED MODE: -DURING THE OCCUPIED PERIODS AS DETERMINED BY THE SCHEDULE SET IN THE LG CENTRAL CONTROLLER, THE EXHAUST AND OUTSIDE AIR MOTORIZED DAMPERS SHALL BE OPEN 100%.THE DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR UNIT SUPPLY AND EXHAUST AIR FANS SHALL OPERATE CONTINUOUSLY. UNOCCUPIED MODE: - DURING THE UNOCCUPIED PERIODS AS DETERMINED BY THE SCHEDULE SET IN THE LG CENTRAL CONTROLLER, THE EXHAUST AND OUTSIDE AIR MOTORIZED DAMPERS SHALL BE CLOSED. THE DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR UNIT SUPPLY AND EXHAUST AIR FANS SHALL BE OFF. MANUAL OVERRIDE HEATPUMP AND FANCOIL UNIT CONTROLS (DUCTLESS & DUCTED CONCEALED) PROJECT NORTH 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 CONTROLS M-501 220157.00 FOR CONSTRUCTION 5623 BURDOCK ROAD MORAVIA, NEW YORK 13118 PHONE: 315-730-4185 e-mail- smurphy@murphengineerin g.com MCE MURPHY CONSULTING ENGINEERING DECEMBER 18, 2020 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 ALL DOAS UNITS, INTERIOR MECHANICAL UNITS AND EXHAUST FANS SHALL BE ELECTRICALLY INTERLOCKED WITH FIRE ALARM SYSTEM TO SHUTDOWN IN THE EVENT OF FIRE ALARM ACTIVATION. THIS WORK TO BE PERFORMED BY THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. FIRE ALARM SHUTDOWN NOTEREFER TO WRITTEN SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS AND INFORMATION PIPE HANGER SPACING SCHEDULE DIFFUSER & REGISTER SCHEDULE EXHAUST FAN SCHEDULE OUTDOOR HEAT RECOVERY UNIT 1. CORRECTED CAPACITIES ACCOUNT FOR DESIGNED PIPING LAYOUT, DEFROST FACTOR, AND INDOOR/OUTDOOR DESIGN TEMPERATURES 2. OUTDOOR TEMPERATURES FOR CORRECTED TOTAL CAPACITY RATINGS LISTED ARE AT SUMMER: 86°F DB / 71°F WB WINTER: -10°F DB / -13°F WB 3. INDOOR TEMPERATURES FOR CORRECTED TOTAL CAPACITY RATINGS LISTED ARE AT SUMMER: 74°F DB / 62°F WB WINTER: 70°F DB / 54°F WB 4. PROVIDE UNIT ON AT LEAST 24" TALL OPEN BASED STAND WITH MIN 12"X12" FEET . PROVIDE QUICK SLING SUPER STAND OR APPROVED EQUAL. 5. PROVIDE UNIT WITH A BASE PAN HEATER AND HAIL GUARDS. 6. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE A DISCONNECT AT EACH HEAT PUMP MODULE. 7. PROVIDE SYSTEM AS A HEAT RECOVERY VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEM, CAPABLE OF SIMULTANEOUS HEATING AND COOLING. 8. SYSTEM IS SELECTED AS A 5-TON HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEM TO COMPLY WITH ASHRAE 15/34 CODES. 9. PROVIDE LG EQUIPMENT AS SPECIFIED. NO SUBSTITUTIONS. AIR CONDITIONING UNIT SCHEDULE 1. RATED CFM/CAPACITIES. REFER TO DRAWING M602 HEAT PUMP DIAGRAMS FOR CORRECTED CAPACITIES. 2. PROVIDE WITH A FACTORY INSTALLED CONDENSATE PUMP 3. PROVIDE WITH TOUCH SCREEN PROGRAMMABLE WALL MOUNTED CONTROLLER WITH OCCUPANCY SENSOR (PREMTBVC0) PER NOTATION ON DRAWINGS AND WIRING SCHEMATICS. 4. CORRECTED CAPACITIES ACCOUNT FOR DESIGNED PIPING LAYOUT, DEFROST FACTOR, AND INDOOR/OUTDOOR DESIGN TEMPERATURES. 5. OUTDOOR TEMPERATURES FOR CORRECTED TOTAL CAPACITY RATINGS LISTED ARE AT SUMMER: 86°F DB / 71°F WB WINTER: -10°F DB / -13°F WB 6. INDOOR TEMPERATURES FOR CORRECTED TOTAL CAPACITY RATINGS LISTED ARE AT SUMMER: 74°F DB / 62°F WB WINTER: 70°F DB / 54°F WB 7. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE SERVICE DISCONNECT SWITCH. 8. PROVIDE WITH WASHABLE FILTER. 9. PROVIDE LG SUPPLIED BY MEIER SUPPLY. NO SUBSTITUTIONS PROVIDE ALL CONTROLS & ACCESSORIES. 10. PROVIDE WITH FACTORY RETURN AIR FILTER BOX WITH 2" DEEP MERV 13 FILTERS. PROVIDE ONE SET SPARE FILTERS. 11. PROVIDE WITH FIELD INSTALLED CONDENSATE PUMP THAT INSTALLS INSIDE THE UNIT CHASSIS. PROVIDE ASPEN MINI AQUA SILENT PUMP MULTI-PORT HEAT RECOVERY BOX 1. UNIT TO BE MONITORED AND CONTROLLED VIA BACNET IP AND THE VRF CENTRAL CONTROLLER 2. PROVIDE HOODS AND DAMPERS ON BOTH AIR STREAMS 3. PROVIDE 18" ROOF CURB 4. PROVIDE UNIT WITH FACTORY MOUNTED DISCONNECT AND GFCI SERVICE RECEPTACLE 5. PROVIDE AUX. ELEC HEATING COIL WITH FULLY MODULATING SCR 6. FILTERS TO BE MERV 14, 4" DEPTH 7. PROVIDE EXTRA SET OF MERV 14 FILTERS 8. PROVIDE VFD'S FOR BOTH SUPPLY AND RETURN/EXHAUST FANS 9. PROVIDE FILTERS WITH FACTORY INSTALLED FILTER ALARM. 10. UNIT SHALL BE CONTROLLED VIA DUCT MOUNTED CO2 SENSOR 11. PROVIDE LG EQUIPMENT AS SPECIFIED. NO SUBSTITUTIONS. 12. RETURN AIR FLOW TO BE BALANCED AT 10% LESS TO ACCOUNT FOR TOILET EXHAUST. DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR UNIT SCHEDULE PROJECT NORTH 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 SCHEDULES M-601 220157.00 FOR CONSTRUCTION 5623 BURDOCK ROAD MORAVIA, NEW YORK 13118 PHONE: 315-730-4185 e-mail- smurphy@murphengineering.com MCE MURPHY CONSULTING ENGINEERING DECEMBER 18, 2020 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 PROVIDE DRYER EXHAUST VENT HOOD AS SPECIFIED PROVIDE 18" TALL INSULATED ROOF CURB PROVIDE ALL FLASHING AND SEAL WEATHERTIGHT. EXISTING ROOF ASSEMBLY CEILING SPACE SUSPENDED CEILING ELECTRIC CLOTHES DRYER PROVIDE 4"Ø RIGID ALUMINUM DRYER DUCTWORK. TYP ALL PROVIDE 4" WYE FITTING WITH CLEANOUT CAP AT BOTTOM PROVIDE OPENING THROUGH ROOF. PROVIDE DRYERJACK MODEL 486U, IMC 504.4 COMPLIANT, DRYER VENT TERMINATION WITH INTEGRAL BACKDRAFT DAMPER. PROVIDE 4"Ø RIGID ALUMINUM DRYER DUCTWORK & CONNECT TO DRYER. REFER TO CLOTHES DRYER VENTS NOTE ON THIS DRAWING FOR STRICT LIMITATIONS ON VENTING LENGTHS AND QUANTITIES OF FITTINGS. DUCTWORK CONSTRUCTION & GAUGE THICKNESS SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH SMACNA AND THE MECHANICAL CODE OF NEW YORK STATE & SECTION 504 OF THE 202 MECHANICAL CODE. PROVIDE 4"Ø RIGID ALUMINUM SPIRAL DUCTWORK WITH SMOOTH INTERIOR SURFACE FOR ALL CLOTHES DRYER DUCTING. ALL DUCTWORK SHALL BE FASTENED WITH DUCT CLAMPS THAT ARE RATED FOR CLOTHES DRYER EXHAUST TEMPERATURES. THE USE OF RIVETS OR SHEETMETAL SCREWS ARE STRICTLY PROHIBITED. PROVIDE RIGID SUPPORT OF DUCTWORK AT 4 FOOT INTERVALS (MAX.) UTILIZING UNISTRUT MOUNTED TO FLOOR OR OTHER METHOD AS APPROVED BY OWNER AND ENGINEER. ALL DUCTWORK SIZES SHOWN ARE CLEAR INSIDE DIMENSIONS. PROVIDE ALL DUCTWORK TRANSITIONS AND ADAPTORS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE A COMPLETE SYSTEM & CONNECTIONS AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. CLOTHES DRYER DUCTWORK ARUM241DTE5 Additional Refrigerant : 28.98 lbs (Precharged Refrigerant : 37.50 lbs) (210.53 kBtu/h)(161.22 kBtu/h) ARBLB071215/8:1+1/8:1+3/8 37.0 ft(0) PRHR043A #HRB-1 1/2:7/8:1+1/8 37.0 ft(0) 4 1 ARNU543M3A4 #1 (43.13 / 36.82 kBtu/h) (33.03 kBtu/h) 3/8:5/8 45.0 ft(0) AC-1/CLASSROOM - 133 ARNU483M3A4 #2 (38.42 / 31.56 kBtu/h) (29.42 kBtu/h) 3/8:5/8 17.0 ft(0) AC-2/CLASSROOM - 132 ARNU483M3A4 #3 (38.42 / 31.56 kBtu/h) (29.42 kBtu/h) 3/8:5/8 10.0 ft(0) AC-3/RESTROOMS & CORRIDOR - 122 ARNU073SJA4 (5.99 / 5.33 kBtu/h) (4.59 kBtu/h) 1/4:1/2 52.0 ft(0) AC-35/AV CLOSET - 134 PRHR043A #HRB-2 3/8:3/4:7/8 41.0 ft(0) 4 1 ARNU363M2A4 #4 (28.91 / 23.33 kBtu/h) (22.14 kBtu/h) 3/8:5/8 19.0 ft(0) AC-4/RECEPTION & IP EXAM ROOMS ARNU363M2A4 #5 (28.91 / 23.33 kBtu/h) (22.14 kBtu/h) 3/8:5/8 36.0 ft(0) AC-5/PROVIDER OFFICES & LOBBY ARNU283M2A4 #6 (22.36 / 18.11 kBtu/h) (17.13 kBtu/h) 3/8:5/8 61.0 ft(0) AC-6/LEARNING CENTER - 115 ARNU243SKA4 #7 (19.3 / 15.6 kBtu/h) (21.8 kBtu/h) 1/4:1/2 56.0 ft(0) AC-36/IT ROOM - 114 HP-1 ARUB060GSS4 Additional Refrigerant : 14.97 lbs (Precharged Refrigerant : 7.72 lbs) (48.24 kBtu/h)(42.89 kBtu/h) PRHR043A #HRB-3 3/8:5/8:3/4 44.0 ft(0) 4 1 PRHR043A #HRB-4 3/8:1/2:5/8 24.0 ft(0) 4 1 PRHR023A1/4:3/8:1/2 30.0 ft(0) 2 1 ARNU093TRD4 #8 (6.82 / 5.36 kBtu/h) (6.06 kBtu/h) 1/4:1/2 14.0 ft(0) AC-15/CONF - 131 ARNU073TRD4 #9 (5.33 / 4.22 kBtu/h) (4.74 kBtu/h) 1/4:1/2 28.0 ft(0) AC-14/SMALL GROUP/ RELAX ROOM - 115A ARNU053TRD4 #7 (3.91 / 2.99 kBtu/h) (3.47 kBtu/h) 1/4:1/2 21.0 ft(0) AC-13/ADMISSIONS CORDINATOR - 117 ARNU053TRD4 #6 (3.91 / 2.99 kBtu/h) (3.47 kBtu/h) 1/4:1/2 40.0 ft(0) AC-12/PRINCIPLE FACULTY - 126 ARNU053TRD4 #5 (3.91 / 2.99 kBtu/h) (3.47 kBtu/h) 1/4:1/2 20.0 ft(0) AC-11/INSTRUCTIONAL FACULTY - 124 ARNU053TRD4 #4 (3.91 / 2.99 kBtu/h) (3.47 kBtu/h) 1/4:1/2 30.0 ft(0) AC-10/INSTRUCTIONAL FACULTY - 125 ARNU123TRD4 #3 (8.74 / 6.89 kBtu/h) (7.77 kBtu/h) 1/4:1/2 46.0 ft(0) AC-9/BREAK ROOM - 127 ARNU053TRD4 #2 (3.91 / 2.99 kBtu/h) (3.47 kBtu/h) 1/4:1/2 40.0 ft(0) AC-8/PRINCIPLE FACULTY - 128 ARNU053TRD4 #1 (3.91 / 2.99 kBtu/h) (3.47 kBtu/h) 1/4:1/2 27.0 ft(0) AC-7/PRINCIPLE FACULTY - 129 ARNU053TRD4 #10 (3.91 / 2.99 kBtu/h) (3.47 kBtu/h) 1/4:1/2 15.0 ft(0) AC-16/PRINCIPLE FACULTY - 130 HP-2 #HRB-5 ARUB060GSS4 Additional Refrigerant : 15.02 lbs (Precharged Refrigerant : 7.72 lbs) (42.03 kBtu/h)(42.73 kBtu/h) ARBLB016213/8:5/8:3/4 49.0 ft(0) PRHR043A #HRB-8 3/8:1/2:5/8 62.0 ft(0) 4 1 ARNU093TRD4 #3 (6.85 / 5.39 kBtu/h) (6.96 kBtu/h) 1/4:1/2 12.0 ft(0) AC-24/ADMIN ASSIST / RECEPTION - 204 ARNU053TRD4 #8 (3.92 / 3.00 kBtu/h) (3.99 kBtu/h) 1/4:1/2 32.0 ft(0) AC-23/MED DIRECTOR - 205 ARNU093TRD4 #7 (6.85 / 5.39 kBtu/h) (6.96 kBtu/h) 1/4:1/2 42.0 ft(0) AC-22/PRINCIPLE FACULTY - 206 ARNU093TRD4 #6 (6.85 / 5.39 kBtu/h) (6.96 kBtu/h) 1/4:1/2 42.0 ft(0) AC-21/PD OFFICE - 207 PRHR023A #HRB-6 3/8:1/2:5/8 46.0 ft(0) 2 1 ARNU123TRD4 #1 (8.78 / 6.92 kBtu/h) (8.92 kBtu/h) 1/4:1/2 40.0 ft(0) AC-17/SM GROUP - 202B ARNU123TRD4 #2 (8.78 / 6.92 kBtu/h) (8.92 kBtu/h) 1/4:1/2 50.0 ft(0) AC-18/SM GROUP - 202A HP-3 ARUM312DTE5 Additional Refrigerant : 40.75 lbs (Precharged Refrigerant : 60.70 lbs) Connection branch pipe : ARCNB21 Combi. : ARUM096DTE5,ARUM216DTE5 (281.34 kBtu/h)(233.21 kBtu/h) ARBLB071213/4:1+1/8:1+3/8 30.0 ft(0) PRHR043A #HRB-7 5/8:7/8:1+1/8 3.0 ft(0) 4 1 PRHR063A #HRB-9 3/8:3/4:7/8 10.0 ft(0) 6 1 ARNU543M3A4 #5 (41.73 / 35.62 kBtu/h) (34.59 kBtu/h) 3/8:5/8 56.0 ft(0) AC-29/CLASSROOM - 231 ARNU183M2A4 #2 (14.76 / 12.54 kBtu/h) (12.23 kBtu/h) 1/4:1/2 50.0 ft(0) AC-34/CORRIDOR 230 ARNU183TQD4 #10 (14.76 / 11.59 kBtu/h) (12.23 kBtu/h) 1/4:1/2 49.0 ft(0) AC-27/LEARNER BREAK ROOM - 239 ARNU073TRD4 #12 (5.80 / 4.59 kBtu/h) (4.80 kBtu/h) 1/4:1/2 26.0 ft(0) AC-28/LOCKERS - 239A ARNU053SJA4 #11 (4.25 / 4.12 kBtu/h) (3.52 kBtu/h) 1/4:1/2 24.0 ft(0) AC-37/IT ROOM - 235 ARNU183SKA4 #141/4:1/2 69.0 ft(0) AC-38/ELECTRICAL ROOM ARNU483M3A4 #1 (37.17 / 30.53 kBtu/h) (30.81 kBtu/h) 3/8:5/8 22.0 ft(0) AC-25/OPERATING/PROCEDURE AREA ARNU283M2A4 #6 (21.64 / 17.52 kBtu/h) (17.93 kBtu/h) 3/8:5/8 11.0 ft(0) AC-30/PATIENT EXAM ROOMS ARNU093TRD4 #3 (7.42 / 5.83 kBtu/h) (6.15 kBtu/h) 1/4:1/2 19.0 ft(0) AC-20/CONTROL - 210 ARNU153TQD4 #4 (11.90 / 9.39 kBtu/h) (9.86 kBtu/h) 1/4:1/2 31.0 ft(0) AC-19/RECEPTION - 208 PRHR043A #HRB-10 1/2:7/8:1+1/8 60.0 ft(0) 4 1 ARNU543M3A4 #9 (41.73 / 35.62 kBtu/h) (34.59 kBtu/h) 3/8:5/8 20.0 ft(0) AC-33/CLASSROOM - 203 ARNU363M2A4 #13 (27.97 / 22.57 kBtu/h) (23.19 kBtu/h) 3/8:5/8 25.0 ft(0) AC-32/LEARNING CENTER - 202 ARNU183M2A4 #7 (14.76 / 12.54 kBtu/h) (12.23 kBtu/h) 1/4:1/2 41.0 ft(0) AC-31/ELEV LOBBY 230 ARNU363B8A4 #8 (27.97 / 22.09 kBtu/h) (23.19 kBtu/h) 3/8:3/4 46.0 ft(0) AC-26/CORRIDOR 228 & RESTROOMS HP-4 (14.76 / 11.59 kBtu/h) (12.23 kBtu/h) PROJECT NORTH 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 DETAILS & DIAGRAMS M-602 220157.00 FOR CONSTRUCTION 5623 BURDOCK ROAD MORAVIA, NEW YORK 13118 PHONE: 315-730-4185 e-mail- smurphy@murphengineering.com MCE MURPHY CONSULTING ENGINEERING VOLUME DAMPER DETAIL ACCESS PANEL & DOOR DETAILS COOLING COIL CONDENSATE DRAIN FIRE DAMPER DETAIL CONDENSATE DRAIN DETAIL RETURN/EXHAUST AIR SOUNDTRAP DETAIL CLOTHES DRYER VENTING DETAIL ROOF MOUNTED EXHAUST FAN DETAIL HEAT PUMP DIAGRAMS DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR UNIT DETAIL DECEMBER 18, 2020 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 R S T N B A ODU B A IDU B A CEN ARUM241DTE5 L N A B PRHR043A RLA : 0.06 L N A B ARNU543M3A4 (#1)(-) CN-REMO L N A B ARNU483M3A4 (#2)(-) CN-REMO L N A B ARNU483M3A4 (#3)(-) CN-REMO L N A B ARNU073SJA4 (#)(-) CN-REMO L N A B PRHR043A RLA : 0.06 L N A B ARNU363M2A4 (#4)(-) CN-REMO L N A B ARNU363M2A4 (#5)(-) CN-REMO L N A B ARNU283M2A4 (#6)(-) CN-REMO L N A B ARNU243SKA4 (#7)(-) RLA : 0.52 IT ROOM - 114 / AC-36 Total RLA : 15.54 CN-REMO HP-1 24vac PACS5A000 BMS B A CH2 B A CH1 1 2 DOAS-2 3 4 5 6 7 8 REMOTE DISPLAYMCA : 62.2 MOP : 70 V,Hz : 3Phase/460V/60Hz J10 1 2 DOAS-1 3 4 5 6 7 8 REMOTE DISPLAYMCA : 62.2 MOP : 70 V,Hz : 3Phase/460V/60Hz J10 TO HP-2 HRB-1 HRB-2 Power line(Outdoor unit) Power line(Indoor unit / HR unit) Communication line (ODU-IDU / ODU-ODU) : Stranded and shielded AWG 18 x 2C Communication line (ODU-CEN) : Stranded and shielded AWG 18 x 2C Communication line(Remote controller) : AWG 22 x 3C Ground shield wire at ODU only RLA : 2.50 CLASSROOM 133 / AC-1 RLA : 2.50 CLASSROOM 132 / AC-2 RLA : 2.50 RESTROOMS & CORRIDOR 122 / AC-3 RLA : 2.30 RECEPTION & IP EXAM ROOMS / AC-4 RLA : 2.30 PROVIDER OFFICES & LOBBY / AC-5 RLA : 2.30 LEARNING CENTER - 115 / AC-6 R.C : PREMTBVC0 R.C : PREMTBVC0 R.C : PREMTBVC0 R.C : PREMTBVC0 R.C : PREMTBVC0 R.C : PREMTBVC0 RLA : 0.25 R.C : PREMTBVC0 AV CLOSET - 134 / AC-35 R.C : PREMTBVC0 R S T N B A ODU B A IDU B A CEN ARUB060GSS4 L N A B PRHR023A RLA : 0.06 L N A B ARNU093TRD4 (#8)(-) CN-REMO L N A B ARNU073TRD4 (#9)(-) CN-REMO L N A B PRHR043A RLA : 0.06 L N A B ARNU053TRD4 (#7)(-) CN-REMO L N A B ARNU053TRD4 (#6)(-) CN-REMO L N A B ARNU053TRD4 (#5)(-) CN-REMO L N A B ARNU053TRD4 (#4)(-) CN-REMO L N A B PRHR043A RLA : 0.06 L N A B ARNU123TRD4 (#3)(-) CN-REMO L N A B ARNU053TRD4 (#2)(-) CN-REMO L N A B ARNU053TRD4 (#1)(-) CN-REMO L N A B ARNU053TRD4 (#10)(-) Total RLA : 2.38 CN-REMO HRB-5 HRB-4 HRB-3 HP-2 TO HP-3 FROM HP-1 RLA : 0.20 CONF - 131 / AC-15 RLA : 0.20 SMALL GROU/RELAX ROOM - 115A / AC-14 RLA : 0.20 ADMISSIONS COORDINATOR - 117 / AC-13 RLA : 0.20 PRINCIPLE FACULTY - 126 / AC-12 RLA : 0.20 INSTRUCTIONAL FACULTY - 124 / AC-11 RLA : 0.20 INSTRUCTIONAL FACULTY - 125 / AC-10 RLA : 0.20 BREAK ROOM - 127 / AC-9 RLA : 0.20 PRINCIPLE FACULTY - 128 / AC-8 RLA : 0.20 PRINCIPLE FACULTY - 129 / AC-7 RLA : 0.20 PRINCIPLE FACULTY - 130 / AC-16 R.C : PREMTBVC0 R.C : PREMTBVC0 R.C : PREMTBVC0 R.C : PREMTBVC0 R.C : PREMTBVC0 R.C : PREMTBVC0 R.C : PREMTBVC0 R.C : PREMTBVC0 R.C : PREMTBVC0 R.C : PREMTBVC0 R S T N B A ODU B A IDU B A CEN ARUB060GSS4 L N A B PRHR043A RLA : 0.06 L N A B ARNU093TRD4 (#3)(-) CN-REMO L N A B ARNU053TRD4 (#8)(-) CN-REMO L N A B ARNU093TRD4 (#7)(-) CN-REMO L N A B ARNU093TRD4 (#6)(-) CN-REMO L N A B PRHR023A RLA : 0.06 L N A B ARNU123TRD4 (#1)(-) CN-REMO L N A B ARNU123TRD4 (#2)(-) Total RLA : 1.52 CN-REMO HP-3 TO HP-4 FROM HP-2 HRB-8 HRB-6 RLA : 0.20 ADMIN ASSIST & RECEPTION - 204 / AC-24 RLA : 0.20 MED DIRECTOR - 205 / AC-23 RLA : 0.20 PRINCIPLE FACULTY - 206 / AC-22 RLA : 0.20 PD OFFICE - 207 / AC-21 RLA : 0.20 SM GROUP - 202B / AC-17 RLA : 0.20 SM GROUP - 202A / AC-18 R.C : PREMTBVC0 R.C : PREMTBVC0 R.C : PREMTBVC0 R.C : PREMTBVC0 R.C : PREMTBVC0 R.C : PREMTBVC0 R S T N B A ODU B A IDU B A CEN ARUM312DTE5 (ARUM096DTE5 ,ARUM216DTE5) L N A B PRHR063A RLA : 0.09 L N A B ARNU543M3A4 (#5)(-) RLA : 2.50 CN-REMO L N A B ARNU183M2A4 (#2)(-) RLA : 2.30 CN-REMO L N A B ARNU183TQD4 (#10)(-) RLA : 0.20 CN-REMO L N A B ARNU073TRD4 (#12)(-) RLA : 0.20 CN-REMO L N A B ARNU053SJA4 (#11)(-) RLA : 0.25 CN-REMO L N A B ARNU183SKA4 (#14)(-) RLA : 0.52 CN-REMO L N A B PRHR043A RLA : 0.06 L N A B ARNU483M3A4 (#1)(-) RLA : 2.50 CN-REMO L N A B ARNU283M2A4 (#6)(-) RLA : 2.30 CN-REMO L N A B ARNU093TRD4 (#3)(-) RLA : 0.20 CN-REMO L N A B ARNU153TQD4 (#4)(-) RLA : 0.20 CN-REMO L N A B PRHR043A RLA : 0.06 L N A B ARNU543M3A4 (#9)(-) RLA : 2.50 CN-REMO L N A B ARNU363M2A4 (#13)(-) RLA : 2.30 CN-REMO L N A B ARNU183M2A4 (#7)(-) RLA : 2.30 CN-REMO L N A B ARNU363B8A4 (#8)(-) RLA : 5.20 Total RLA : 28.88 CN-REMO HP-4 FROM HP-3 HRB-9 HRB-7 HRB-10 OPERATING/PROCEDURE AREA / AC-25 R.C : PREMTBVC0 CLASSROOM - 231 / AC-29 R.C : PREMTBVC0 CORRIDOR 230 / AC-34 R.C : PREMTBVC0 LEARNER BREAK ROOM 239 / AC-27 R.C : PREMTBVC0 IT ROOM 235 / AC-37 R.C : PREMTBVC0 ELECTRICAL ROOM / AC-38 R.C : PREMTBVC0 PATIENT EXAM ROOMS / AC-30 R.C : PREMTBVC0 RECEPTION 208 / AC-19 R.C : PREMTBVC0 CONTROL 210 / AC-20 R.C : PREMTBVC0 LOCKERS 239A / AC-28 R.C : PREMTBVC0 CLASSROOM 203 / AC-33 R.C : PREMTBVC0 LEARNING CENTER 202 / AC-32 R.C : PREMTBVC0 CORRIDOR 228 & RESTROOMS / AC-26 R.C : PREMTBVC0 ELEV LOBBY 230 / AC-31 R.C : PREMTBVC0 DARK SOLID LINE INDICATES EQUIPMENT & MATERIALS TO BE PROVIDED UNDER THIS CONTRACT PROJECT NORTH 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 DIAGRAMS M-603 220157.00 FOR CONSTRUCTION 5623 BURDOCK ROAD MORAVIA, NEW YORK 13118 PHONE: 315-730-4185 e-mail- smurphy@murphengineering.com MCE MURPHY CONSULTING ENGINEERING HEAT PUMP WIRING DIAGRAMS DECEMBER 18, 2020 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 E-001 PROJECT NORTH 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 GENERAL INFORMATION 220157.00 FOR CONSTRUCTION 5623 BURDOCK ROAD MORAVIA, NEW YORK 13118 PHONE: 315-730-4185 e-mail- smurphy@murphengineering.com MCE MURPHY CONSULTING ENGINEERING DECEMBER 18, 2020 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 UP REF. 16 17 1815.1 19 C B A D E F E.9 15 NEIGHBORING BUILDING EXIST TENANT SPACE (NO WORK) EXIST TENANT SPACE (NO WORK) EXIST COMMON SPACE (NO WORK) EXIST COMMON SPACE (NO WORK) EXIST STAIR (NO WORK) EXIST ELEVATOR UP 100 121 110 111 115 112 115A 131 101 102 103 104 117 119 124 125 126 120 127 132 133 130 108 128 129 107 109 113 EXIST TENANT SPACE (NO WORK) EXIST TENANT SPACE (NO WORK) 134 118 114 116 122 106 105 E-101 PROJECT NORTH 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 FIRST FLOOR PLAN POWER & SYSTEMS 220157.00 FOR CONSTRUCTION 5623 BURDOCK ROAD MORAVIA, NEW YORK 13118 PHONE: 315-730-4185 e-mail- smurphy@murphengineering.com MCE MURPHY CONSULTING ENGINEERING GENERAL NOTES (APPLY TO THIS DRAWING ONLY): A. WHERE POSSIBLE, ALL ELECTRICAL WIRING, CONDUITS, CABLING, ETC... SHALL BE CONCEALED WITHIN WALL CONSTRUCTION AND ABOVE CEILINGS. B. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, CIRCUIT 120V RECEPTACLES TO 20A-1P C/B'S IN PANELBOARD 'LP-1' (PANEL CIRCUIT NUMBER AS INDICATED). C. CIRCUIT DATA, TELEPHONE, AND WIRELESS ACCESS POINT CAT 6 CABLING TO DATA RACK 'MDF-B'. D. CIRCUIT VIDEO SURVEILLANCE CAMERA AND INTERCOM STATION (AXIS ENTRY CONTROLLER) CAT 6 CABLING TO DATA RACK 'MDF-B'. E. PROVIDE FIRE ALARM DEVICES AS INDICATED. DEVICES SHALL BE COMPATIBLE WITH EXISTING 'EST' FIRE ALARM SYSTEM. EXPAND AND MODIFY EXISTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM TO ACCOMMODATE ADDITIONAL DEVICES. PROVIDE PROGRAMMING BY AUTHORIZED SYSTEM VENDOR AS PART OF PROJECT. F. UNO, RECESS MOUNT DEVICES IN NEW WALLS. PROVIDE DUAL-CHANNEL, SURFACE RACEWAY (WIREMOLD 4000 SERIES) FOR RECEPTACLE AND COMMUNICATION OUTLETS SHOWN ON EXISTING WALLS. COORDINATE SURFACE RACEWAY FINISH SELECTION WITH ARCHITECT. G. THE SPACE LOCATED ABOVE THE CEILING ON BOTH FIRST AND SECOND FLOOR LEVELS IS BEING USED AS A RETURN/EXHAUST AIR PLENUM. ALL MATERIALS INSTALLED ABOVE CEILING LEVEL WITHIN THE RETURN/EXHAUST AIR PLENUM SHALL BE PLENUM RATED. H. COORDINATE LOCATIONS AND MOUNTING HEIGHTS OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT/DEVICES WITH ARCHITECTURAL PLANS, ELEVATIONS, FURNITURE LAYOUTS, AND WITH OTHER DIVISIONS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. CORRECT ANY INACCURACY RESULTING FROM FAILURE TO DO SO WITHOUT COST TO OWNER. FIRST FLOOR PLAN - POWER & SYSTEMS1 AUDIO/VISUAL EQUIPMENT NOTES (APPLY TO THIS DRAWING ONLY): x UNO, A/V EQUIPMENT AND ASSOCIATED A/V CABLING SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY THE AUDIO/VISUAL CONTRACTOR (AVC). ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING RACEWAYS, BOXES, RECEPTACLES, 120V CIRCUITRY, DATA JACKS AND DATA CABLING FOR AUDIO/VISUAL EQUIPMENT. REFER TO AUDIO/VISUAL SYMBOLS LIST ON DRAWING E-001 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. x REFER TO 'TA' CONTRACT DRAWINGS FOR AUDIO/VISUAL EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS, CIRCUITRY REQUIREMENTS AND ADDITIONAL INFORMATION REGARDING EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION. x PRIOR TO COMMENCING WORK, THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IS REQUIRED TO MEET JOINTLY WITH THE AUDIO/VISUAL EQUIPMENT CONTRACTOR TO EXCHANGE INFORMATION, COORDINATE PROJECT REQUIREMENTS, AND AGREE ON DETAILS OF EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENTS AND INSTALLATION INTERFACES. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR WILL BE REQUIRED TO CORRECT ANY INACCURACY RESULTING FROM FAILURE TO DO SO WITHOUT COST TO OWNER. KEYED NOTES (APPLY TO THIS DRAWING ONLY): 1. COORDINATE RECEPTACLE AND DATA OUTLET MOUNTING HEIGHT WITH SHELF AND MONITOR. 2. PROVIDE JUNCTION BOX AND 120V CIRCUITRY FOR FUTURE USE. CIRCUIT JUNCTION BOX WITH 2-#12 + #12 GND IN 3/4"C TO 20A-1P C/B IN PANELBOARD LP-1 (PANEL CIRCUIT NUMBER AS INDICATED). TERMINATE CIRCUITRY WITHIN JUNCTION BOX FOR FUTURE USE. 3. FOR DOOR HARDWARE POWER SUPPLY. CIRCUIT POWER SUPPLY WITH 2-#10 + #10 GND IN 3/4"C TO 20A-1P C/B IN PANELBOARD LP-1 (PANEL CIRCUIT NUMBER AS INDICATED). 4. PROVIDE 4" SQUARE DEVICE BOX FOR AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATOR CONTROLLER. PROVIDE CONTROL CIRCUITRY IN 3/4" CONDUIT FROM CONTROLLER TO AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATOR PER EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS. AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATOR CONTROLLER PROVIDED BY G.C. 5. MOUNT CABLE TRAY ABOVE CEILING. COORDINATE EXACT HEIGHT AND LOCATION WITH OTHER TRADES. SECURITY SYSTEM EQUIPMENT NOTES (APPLY TO THIS DRAWING ONLY): x UNO, SECURITY SYSTEM EQUIPMENT SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY THE SECURITY SYSTEM CONTRACTOR. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING RACEWAYS, BOXES, RECEPTACLES, 120V CIRCUITRY, DATA CABLING AND ACCESS CONTROL COMPOSITE CABLING FOR SECURITY SYSTEM EQUIPMENT. REFER TO DETAILS ON DRAWING E-503 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. x PRIOR TO COMMENCING WORK, THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IS REQUIRED TO MEET JOINTLY WITH THE SECURITY SYSTEM CONTRACTOR TO EXCHANGE INFORMATION, COORDINATE PROJECT REQUIREMENTS, AND AGREE ON DETAILS OF EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENTS AND INSTALLATION INTERFACES. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR WILL BE REQUIRED TO CORRECT ANY INACCURACY RESULTING FROM FAILURE TO DO SO WITHOUT COST TO OWNER. DECEMBER 18, 2020 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 UP 16 17 1815.1 C B A D E F E.9 15 ELEV EXIST STAIR EXIST STAIR TEMP TEMP TEMP 240 241 242 238 235 234 239 233 225 223 226 227 224 222 221 210 208 212 213 214 217 216 215 219 207 206 205 204 203 202 200 211 228 230 220 209 232 201 243 237 231 229 239A 218 202A202B E-102 PROJECT NORTH 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 SECOND FLOOR PLAN - POWER & SYSTEMS 220157.00 FOR CONSTRUCTION 5623 BURDOCK ROAD MORAVIA, NEW YORK 13118 PHONE: 315-730-4185 e-mail- smurphy@murphengineering.com MCE MURPHY CONSULTING ENGINEERING SECOND FLOOR PLAN - POWER & SYSTEMS1 GENERAL NOTES (APPLY TO THIS DRAWING ONLY): A. WHERE POSSIBLE, ALL ELECTRICAL WIRING, CONDUITS, CABLING, ETC... SHALL BE CONCEALED WITHIN WALL CONSTRUCTION AND ABOVE CEILINGS. B. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, CIRCUIT 120V RECEPTACLES TO 20A-1P C/B'S IN PANELBOARD 'LP-2' (PANEL CIRCUIT NUMBER AS INDICATED). C. CIRCUIT DATA, TELEPHONE, AND WIRELESS ACCESS POINT CABLING TO DATA RACK 'IDF-2'. D. CIRCUIT VIDEO SURVEILLANCE CAMERA AND INTERCOM STATION (AXIS ENTRY CONTROLLER) CAT 6 CABLING TO DATA RACK 'MDF-B'. E. PROVIDE FIRE ALARM DEVICES AS INDICATED. DEVICES SHALL BE COMPATIBLE WITH EXISTING 'EST' FIRE ALARM SYSTEM. EXPAND AND MODIFY EXISTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM TO ACCOMMODATE ADDITIONAL DEVICES. PROVIDE PROGRAMMING BY AUTHORIZED SYSTEM VENDOR AS PART OF PROJECT. F. UNO, RECESS MOUNT DEVICES IN NEW WALLS. PROVIDE DUAL-CHANNEL, SURFACE RACEWAY (WIREMOLD 4000 SERIES) FOR RECEPTACLE AND COMMUNICATION OUTLETS SHOWN ON EXISTING WALLS. COORDINATE SURFACE RACEWAY FINISH SELECTION WITH ARCHITECT. G. THE SPACE LOCATED ABOVE THE CEILING ON BOTH FIRST AND SECOND FLOOR LEVELS IS BEING USED AS A RETURN/EXHAUST AIR PLENUM. ALL MATERIALS INSTALLED ABOVE CEILING LEVEL WITHIN THE RETURN/EXHAUST AIR PLENUM SHALL BE PLENUM RATED. H. COORDINATE LOCATIONS AND MOUNTING HEIGHTS OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT/DEVICES WITH ARCHITECTURAL PLANS, ELEVATIONS, FURNITURE LAYOUTS, AND WITH OTHER DIVISIONS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. CORRECT ANY INACCURACY RESULTING FROM FAILURE TO DO SO WITHOUT COST TO OWNER. AUDIO/VISUAL EQUIPMENT NOTES (APPLY TO THIS DRAWING ONLY): x UNO, A/V EQUIPMENT AND ASSOCIATED A/V CABLING SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY THE AUDIO/VISUAL CONTRACTOR (AVC). ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING RACEWAYS, BOXES, RECEPTACLES, 120V CIRCUITRY, DATA JACKS AND DATA CABLING FOR AUDIO/VISUAL EQUIPMENT. REFER TO AUDIO/VISUAL SYMBOLS LIST ON DRAWING E-001 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. x REFER TO 'TA' CONTRACT DRAWINGS FOR AUDIO/VISUAL EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS, CIRCUITRY REQUIREMENTS AND ADDITIONAL INFORMATION REGARDING EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION. x PRIOR TO COMMENCING WORK, THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IS REQUIRED TO MEET JOINTLY WITH THE AUDIO/VISUAL EQUIPMENT CONTRACTOR TO EXCHANGE INFORMATION, COORDINATE PROJECT REQUIREMENTS, AND AGREE ON DETAILS OF EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENTS AND INSTALLATION INTERFACES. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR WILL BE REQUIRED TO CORRECT ANY INACCURACY RESULTING FROM FAILURE TO DO SO WITHOUT COST TO OWNER. KEYED NOTES (APPLY TO THIS DRAWING ONLY): 1. PROVIDE JUNCTION BOX AND 120V CIRCUITRY FOR FUTURE USE. CIRCUIT JUNCTION BOX WITH 2-#12 + #12 GND IN 3/4"C TO 20A-1P C/B IN PANELBOARD LP-2 (PANEL CIRCUIT NUMBER AS INDICATED). TERMINATE CIRCUITRY WITHIN JUNCTION BOX FOR FUTURE USE. 2. FOR DOOR HARDWARE POWER SUPPLY. CIRCUIT POWER SUPPLY WITH 2-#10 + #10 GND IN 3/4"C TO 20A-1P C/B IN PANELBOARD LP-2 (PANEL CIRCUIT NUMBER AS INDICATED). 3. REPLACE EXISTING DUPLEX RECEPTACLE WITH NEW GFI DUPLEX RECEPTACLE. REPLACE EXISTING COVERPLATE WITH NEW COVERPLATE. REUSE EXISTING CIRCUITRY FOR GFI RECEPTACLE. 4. PROVIDE NON-FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH FOR SECONDARY SIDE OF TRANSFORMER 'T-2'. REFER TO POWER ONE-LINE DIAGRAM FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 5. DISCONNECT AND REMOVE EXISTING FEEDER ASSOCIATED WITH EXISTING PANELBOARD 'P8'. PROVIDE NEW FEEDER FROM PANELBOARD LP-2. REFER TO POWER ONE-LINE DIAGRAM FOR FEEDER REQUIREMENTS AND ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. SECURITY SYSTEM EQUIPMENT NOTES (APPLY TO THIS DRAWING ONLY): x UNO, SECURITY SYSTEM EQUIPMENT SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY THE SECURITY SYSTEM CONTRACTOR. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING RACEWAYS, BOXES, RECEPTACLES, 120V CIRCUITRY, DATA CABLING AND ACCESS CONTROL COMPOSITE CABLING FOR SECURITY SYSTEM EQUIPMENT. REFER TO DETAILS ON DRAWING E-503 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. x PRIOR TO COMMENCING WORK, THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IS REQUIRED TO MEET JOINTLY WITH THE SECURITY SYSTEM CONTRACTOR TO EXCHANGE INFORMATION, COORDINATE PROJECT REQUIREMENTS, AND AGREE ON DETAILS OF EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENTS AND INSTALLATION INTERFACES. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR WILL BE REQUIRED TO CORRECT ANY INACCURACY RESULTING FROM FAILURE TO DO SO WITHOUT COST TO OWNER. DECEMBER 18, 2020 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 UP UP EXIST ELEVATOR 100 121 110 111 115 112 115A 131 101 102 103 104 117 119 124 125 126 120 127 132133 130 108 128 129 107 109 114 EXIST TENANT SPACE (NO WORK) EXIST TENANT SPACE (NO WORK) UP REF. 16 17 1815.1 19 C B A D E F E.9 15 NEIGHBORING BUILDING EXIST TENANT SPACE (NO WORK) EXIST TENANT SPACE (NO WORK) EXIST COMMON SPACE (NO WORK) EXIST COMMON SPACE (NO WORK) EXIST STAIR (NO WORK) EXIST ELEVATOR 122 134 116 113 106 118 FIRST FLOOR PLAN - LIGHTING GENERAL NOTES (APPLY TO THIS DRAWING ONLY): A. WHERE POSSIBLE, ALL ELECTRICAL WIRING, CONDUITS, CABLING, ETC... SHALL BE CONCEALED WITHIN WALL CONSTRUCTION AND ABOVE CEILINGS. B. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, CIRCUIT NON-EMERGENCY LIGHT FIXTURES TO 20A-1P C/B'S IN PANELBOARD 'LP-1' (PANEL CIRCUIT NUMBER AS INDICATED) REFER TO DRAWING E-102 FOR PANELBOARD LOCATION. C. CIRCUIT EXIT LIGHTS TO ONE (1) 20A-1P C/B IN PANELBOARD 'LP-1' (CKT #43). PROVIDE HANDLE LOCK ON CIRCUIT BREAKER AS REQUIRED. D. CIRCUIT LIGHT FIXTURES WITH ABBREVIATION 'NL' TO LINE SIDE OF LOCAL LIGHTING CIRCUIT AHEAD OF SWITCHES AND CONTROLS. E. CIRCUIT EMERGENCY LIGHT FIXTURES (TYPES EM) TO LINE SIDE OF LOCAL LIGHTING CIRCUIT AHEAD OF SWITCHES AND CONTROLS. F. THE SPACE LOCATED ABOVE THE CEILING ON BOTH FIRST AND SECOND FLOOR LEVELS IS BEING USED AS A RETURN/EXHAUST AIR PLENUM. ALL MATERIALS INSTALLED ABOVE CEILING LEVEL WITHIN THE RETURN/EXHAUST AIR PLENUM SHALL BE PLENUM RATED. G. COORDINATE LOCATIONS AND MOUNTING HEIGHTS OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT/DEVICES WITH ARCHITECTURAL PLANS, ELEVATIONS, FURNITURE LAYOUTS, AND WITH OTHER DIVISIONS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. CORRECT ANY INACCURACY RESULTING FROM FAILURE TO DO SO WITHOUT COST TO OWNER. 1 E-201 PROJECT NORTH 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 FIRST FLOOR PLAN LIGHTING 220157.00 FOR CONSTRUCTION 5623 BURDOCK ROAD MORAVIA, NEW YORK 13118 PHONE: 315-730-4185 e-mail- smurphy@murphengineering.com MCE MURPHY CONSULTING ENGINEERING KEYED NOTES (APPLY TO THIS DRAWING ONLY): 1. KEYED NOTE NOT USED. 2. FOR LIGHTING CONTROL INTERFACE WITH A/V CONTROL SYSTEM PROVIDE RS-232 CABLING IN 3/4" C FROM SERIAL DEVICE INTERFACE TO A/V RACK EQUIPMENT RACK. REFER TO DETAIL #3/E-401 FOR A/V EQUIPMENT RACK LOCATION. COORDINATE WORK WITH A/V CONTRACTOR. 3. SURFACE MOUNT TO UNDERSIDE OF STAIR LANDING. 4. MOUNT @ 10'-0" AF.F. COORDINATE EXACT MOUNTING HEIGHT WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN. DECEMBER 18, 2020 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 240 241 242 238 235 234 239 233 230 225 223 226 227 224 222 210 208 212 213 214 217 216 215 219 206 205 204 203 202 200 211 228 220 209 240A UP 16 17 1815.1 C B A D E F E.9 15 ELEV EXIST STAIR EXIST STAIR TEMP TEMP TEMP 221 207 202B 202A 201 243 237 239A 231 229 SECOND FLOOR PLAN - LIGHTING1 KEYED NOTES (APPLY TO THIS DRAWING ONLY): 1. CIRCUIT FOR TYPE 'L4' FIXTURE AND TYPE L8 FIXTURE (AMBIENT) CONTROL. 2. CIRCUIT FOR TYPE 'L8' FIXTURE (EXAM) CONTROL. 3. CIRCUIT FOR TYPE 'L15' FIXTURE CONTROL. 4. CIRCUIT FOR TYPE 'L16' FIXTURE CONTROL. 5. FOR DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROL INTERFACE WITH A/V CONTROL SYSTEM PROVIDE RS-232 CABLING IN 3/4" C FROM SERIAL DEVICE INTERFACE TO A/V RACK EQUIPMENT RACK. REFER TO DETAIL #?/E-401 FOR A/V EQUIPMENT RACK LOCATION. COORDINATE WORK WITH A/V CONTRACTOR. 6. ALTERNATE #1: PROVIDE VIRTUAL SKYLIGHT FOR STAIRWELL IN LIEU OF TYPE L2 LIGHT FIXTURE. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR VIRTUAL SKYLIGHT LOCATION. REFER TO LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE, TYPE L13 FOR VIRTUAL SKYLIGHT REQUIREMENTS. 7. BASE BID: PROVIDE LIGHT FIXTURE TYPE 'L2' AS INDICATED. 8. CIRCUIT FOR TYPE 'L9' FIXTURE (WHITE) CONTROL. 9. CIRCUIT FOR TYPE 'L9' FIXTURE (GREEN) CONTROL. GENERAL NOTES (APPLY TO THIS DRAWING ONLY): A. WHERE POSSIBLE, ALL ELECTRICAL WIRING, CONDUITS, CABLING, ETC... SHALL BE CONCEALED WITHIN WALL CONSTRUCTION AND ABOVE CEILINGS. B. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, CIRCUIT NON-EMERGENCY LIGHT FIXTURES TO 20A-1P C/B'S IN PANELBOARD 'LP-2' (PANEL CIRCUIT NUMBER AS INDICATED) REFER TO DRAWING E-102 FOR PANELBOARD LOCATION. C. CIRCUIT EXIT LIGHTS TO ONE (1) 20A-1P C/B IN PANELBOARD 'LP-2' (CKT #85). PROVIDE HANDLE LOCK ON CIRCUIT BREAKER AS REQUIRED. D. CIRCUIT LIGHT FIXTURES WITH ABBREVIATION 'NL' TO LINE SIDE OF LOCAL LIGHTING CIRCUIT AHEAD OF SWITCHES AND CONTROLS. E. CIRCUIT EMERGENCY LIGHT FIXTURES (TYPES EM) TO LINE SIDE OF LOCAL LIGHTING CIRCUIT AHEAD OF SWITCHES AND CONTROLS. F. THE SPACE LOCATED ABOVE THE CEILING ON BOTH FIRST AND SECOND FLOOR LEVELS IS BEING USED AS A RETURN/EXHAUST AIR PLENUM. ALL MATERIALS INSTALLED ABOVE CEILING LEVEL WITHIN THE RETURN/EXHAUST AIR PLENUM SHALL BE PLENUM RATED. G. COORDINATE LOCATIONS AND MOUNTING HEIGHTS OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT/DEVICES WITH ARCHITECTURAL PLANS, ELEVATIONS, FURNITURE LAYOUTS, AND WITH OTHER DIVISIONS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. CORRECT ANY INACCURACY RESULTING FROM FAILURE TO DO SO WITHOUT COST TO OWNER. E-202 PROJECT NORTH 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 SECOND FLOOR PLAN - LIGHTING 220157.00 FOR CONSTRUCTION 5623 BURDOCK ROAD MORAVIA, NEW YORK 13118 PHONE: 315-730-4185 e-mail- smurphy@murphengineering.com MCE MURPHY CONSULTING ENGINEERING DECEMBER 18, 2020 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 203 (NO WORK) EXIST COMMON SPACE (NO WORK) 133 132 134 122 TEMP 231 229 230 233 131 202B 202A UP 107 E-401 PROJECT NORTH 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 ENLARGED PLANS POWER & SYSTEMS 220157.00 FOR CONSTRUCTION 5623 BURDOCK ROAD MORAVIA, NEW YORK 13118 PHONE: 315-730-4185 e-mail- smurphy@murphengineering.com MCE MURPHY CONSULTING ENGINEERING PARTIAL SECOND FLOOR PLAN - POWER & SYSTEMS GENERAL NOTES (APPLY TO ENTIRE DRAWING ONLY): A. WHERE POSSIBLE, ALL ELECTRICAL WIRING, CONDUITS, CABLING, ETC... SHALL BE CONCEALED WITHIN WALL CONSTRUCTION AND ABOVE CEILINGS. B. PROVIDE FIRE ALARM DEVICES AS INDICATED. DEVICES SHALL BE COMPATIBLE WITH EXISTING 'EST' FIRE ALARM SYSTEM. EXPAND AND MODIFY EXISTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM TO ACCOMMODATE ADDITIONAL DEVICES. PROVIDE PROGRAMMING BY AUTHORIZED SYSTEM VENDOR AS PART OF PROJECT. C. PROVIDE ALL CORE DRILLING AND PATCHING OF EXISTING FLOORS AS REQUIRED FOR POKE-THROUGH ASSEMBLY INSTALLATIONS. D. UNO, RECESS MOUNT DEVICES IN NEW WALLS. PROVIDE DUAL-CHANNEL, SURFACE RACEWAY (WIREMOLD 4000 SERIES) FOR RECEPTACLE AND COMMUNICATION OUTLETS SHOWN ON EXISTING WALLS. COORDINATE SURFACE RACEWAY FINISH SELECTION WITH ARCHITECT. E. THE SPACE LOCATED ABOVE THE CEILING ON BOTH FIRST AND SECOND FLOOR LEVELS IS BEING USED AS A RETURN/EXHAUST AIR PLENUM. ALL MATERIALS INSTALLED ABOVE CEILING LEVEL WITHIN THE RETURN/EXHAUST AIR PLENUM SHALL BE PLENUM RATED. F. COORDINATE LOCATIONS AND MOUNTING HEIGHTS OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT/DEVICES WITH ARCHITECTURAL PLANS, ELEVATIONS, FURNITURE LAYOUTS, AND WITH OTHER DIVISIONS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. CORRECT ANY INACCURACY RESULTING FROM FAILURE TO DO SO WITHOUT COST TO OWNER. PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - POWER & SYSTEMS KEYED NOTES (APPLY TO THIS DRAWING ONLY): 1. AUDIO/VISUAL EQUIPMENT RACK PROVIDED BY OTHERS. PROVIDE ONE (1) EMPTY 1-1/4" CONDUIT FROM A/V RACK TO SERVER ROOM ???. REFER TO DRAWING E-402 FOR SERVER ROOM ??? LOCATION. 2. PROVIDE ELECTRICAL CONNECTION FOR PROJECTION SCREEN 120V POWER REQUIREMENTS. PROVIDE CIRCUITRY (2-#12 + #12 GND IN 3/4" C) FROM EQUIPMENT TO 20A-1P C/B IN PANELBOARD (PANEL AND CKT NUMBER AS INDICATED). PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN, COORDINATE ELECTRICAL CONNECTION WITH EQUIPMENT PROVIDER. 3. PROVIDE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE FOR CEILING PROJECTOR. RECESS RECEPTACLE IN CEILING TILE, DOWNWARD FACING. 3. FOR DOOR HARDWARE POWER SUPPLY. CIRCUIT POWER SUPPLY WITH 2-#12 + #12 GND IN 3/4"C TO 20A-1P C/B IN PANELBOARD LP-1 (PANEL CIRCUIT NUMBER AS INDICATED). GENERAL NOTES (APPLY TO ABOVE PARTIAL PLAN): A. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, CIRCUIT 120V RECEPTACLES TO 20A-1P C/B'S IN PANELBOARD 'LP-2' (PANEL CIRCUIT NUMBER AS INDICATED). B. CIRCUIT DATA, TELEPHONE, AND WIRELESS ACCESS POINT CABLING TO DATA RACK 'IDF-2'. GENERAL NOTES (APPLY TO ABOVE PARTIAL PLAN): A. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, CIRCUIT 120V RECEPTACLES TO 20A-1P C/B'S IN PANELBOARD 'LP-1' (PANEL CIRCUIT NUMBER AS INDICATED). B. CIRCUIT DATA, TELEPHONE, AND WIRELESS ACCESS POINT CABLING TO DATA RACK 'MDF-B'. 4 1 PARTIAL SECOND FLOOR PLAN - POWER & SYSTEMS GENERAL NOTES (APPLY TO ABOVE PARTIAL PLAN): A. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, CIRCUIT 120V RECEPTACLES TO 20A-1P C/B'S IN PANELBOARD 'LP-2' (PANEL CIRCUIT NUMBER AS INDICATED). B. CIRCUIT DATA, TELEPHONE, AND WIRELESS ACCESS POINT CABLING TO DATA RACK 'IDF-2'. 5 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - POWER & SYSTEMS GENERAL NOTES (APPLY TO ABOVE PARTIAL PLAN): A. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, CIRCUIT 120V RECEPTACLES TO 20A-1P C/B'S IN PANELBOARD 'LP-1' (PANEL CIRCUIT NUMBER AS INDICATED). B. CIRCUIT DATA, TELEPHONE, AND WIRELESS ACCESS POINT CABLING TO DATA RACK 'MDF-B'. 2PARTIAL SECOND FLOOR PLAN - POWER & SYSTEMS GENERAL NOTES (APPLY TO ABOVE PARTIAL PLAN): A. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, CIRCUIT 120V RECEPTACLES TO 20A-1P C/B'S IN PANELBOARD 'LP-2' (PANEL CIRCUIT NUMBER AS INDICATED). B. CIRCUIT DATA, TELEPHONE, AND WIRELESS ACCESS POINT CABLING TO DATA RACK 'IDF-2'. 3 AUDIO/VISUAL EQUIPMENT NOTES (APPLY TO THIS DRAWING ONLY): x UNO, A/V EQUIPMENT AND ASSOCIATED A/V CABLING SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY THE AUDIO/VISUAL CONTRACTOR (AVC). ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING RACEWAYS, BOXES, RECEPTACLES, 120V CIRCUITRY, DATA JACKS AND DATA CABLING FOR AUDIO/VISUAL EQUIPMENT. REFER TO AUDIO/VISUAL SYMBOLS LIST ON DRAWING E-001 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. x REFER TO 'TA' CONTRACT DRAWINGS FOR AUDIO/VISUAL EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS, CIRCUITRY REQUIREMENTS AND ADDITIONAL INFORMATION REGARDING EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION. x PRIOR TO COMMENCING WORK, THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IS REQUIRED TO MEET JOINTLY WITH THE AUDIO/VISUAL EQUIPMENT CONTRACTOR TO EXCHANGE INFORMATION, COORDINATE PROJECT REQUIREMENTS, AND AGREE ON DETAILS OF EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENTS AND INSTALLATION INTERFACES. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR WILL BE REQUIRED TO CORRECT ANY INACCURACY RESULTING FROM FAILURE TO DO SO WITHOUT COST TO OWNER. PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - POWER & SYSTEMS GENERAL NOTES (APPLY TO ABOVE PARTIAL PLAN): A. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, CIRCUIT 120V RECEPTACLES TO 20A-1P C/B'S IN PANELBOARD 'LP-1' (PANEL CIRCUIT NUMBER AS INDICATED). B. CIRCUIT DATA, TELEPHONE, AND WIRELESS ACCESS POINT CABLING TO DATA RACK 'MDF-B'. 6 SECURITY SYSTEM EQUIPMENT NOTES (APPLY TO THIS DRAWING ONLY): x UNO, SECURITY SYSTEM EQUIPMENT SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY THE SECURITY SYSTEM CONTRACTOR. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING RACEWAYS, BOXES, RECEPTACLES, 120V CIRCUITRY, DATA CABLING AND ACCESS CONTROL COMPOSITE CABLING FOR SECURITY SYSTEM EQUIPMENT. REFER TO DETAILS ON DRAWING E-503 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. x PRIOR TO COMMENCING WORK, THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IS REQUIRED TO MEET JOINTLY WITH THE SECURITY SYSTEM CONTRACTOR TO EXCHANGE INFORMATION, COORDINATE PROJECT REQUIREMENTS, AND AGREE ON DETAILS OF EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENTS AND INSTALLATION INTERFACES. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR WILL BE REQUIRED TO CORRECT ANY INACCURACY RESULTING FROM FAILURE TO DO SO WITHOUT COST TO OWNER. DECEMBER 18, 2020 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 ELEV TEMP TEMP 220 221 222 224 223 225 226 227 217 216 215 212 213 214 219 218 211 210 209 208 200 235 234 233 114 E-402 PROJECT NORTH 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 ENLARGED PLANS POWER & SYSTEMS 220157.00 FOR CONSTRUCTION 5623 BURDOCK ROAD MORAVIA, NEW YORK 13118 PHONE: 315-730-4185 e-mail- smurphy@murphengineering.com MCE MURPHY CONSULTING ENGINEERING PARTIAL SECOND FLOOR PLAN - POWER & SYSTEMS GENERAL NOTES (APPLY TO ENTIRE DRAWING ONLY): A. WHERE POSSIBLE, ALL ELECTRICAL WIRING, CONDUITS, CABLING, ETC... SHALL BE CONCEALED WITHIN WALL CONSTRUCTION AND ABOVE CEILINGS. B. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, CIRCUIT 120V RECEPTACLES TO 20A-1P C/B'S IN PANELBOARD 'LVP-2' (PANEL CIRCUIT NUMBER AS INDICATED). C. CIRCUIT DATA, TELEPHONE, AND WIRELESS ACCESS POINT CABLING TO DATA RACK 'IDF-2'. D. PROVIDE FIRE ALARM DEVICES AS INDICATED. DEVICES SHALL BE COMPATIBLE WITH EXISTING 'EST' FIRE ALARM SYSTEM. EXPAND AND MODIFY EXISTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM TO ACCOMMODATE ADDITIONAL DEVICES. PROVIDE PROGRAMMING BY AUTHORIZED SYSTEM VENDOR AS PART OF PROJECT. E. UNO, RECESS MOUNT DEVICES IN NEW WALLS. PROVIDE DUAL-CHANNEL, SURFACE RACEWAY (WIREMOLD 4000 SERIES) FOR RECEPTACLE AND COMMUNICATION OUTLETS SHOWN ON EXISTING WALLS. COORDINATE SURFACE RACEWAY FINISH SELECTION WITH ARCHITECT. F. THE SPACE LOCATED ABOVE THE CEILING ON BOTH FIRST AND SECOND FLOOR LEVELS IS BEING USED AS A RETURN/EXHAUST AIR PLENUM. ALL MATERIALS INSTALLED ABOVE CEILING LEVEL WITHIN THE RETURN/EXHAUST AIR PLENUM SHALL BE PLENUM RATED. G. COORDINATE LOCATIONS AND MOUNTING HEIGHTS OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT/DEVICES WITH ARCHITECTURAL PLANS, ELEVATIONS, FURNITURE LAYOUTS, AND WITH OTHER DIVISIONS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. CORRECT ANY INACCURACY RESULTING FROM FAILURE TO DO SO WITHOUT COST TO OWNER. PARTIAL SECOND FLOOR PLAN - POWER & SYSTEMS PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - POWER & SYSTEMS KEYED NOTES (APPLY TO THIS DRAWING ONLY): 1. PROVIDE 5/8" FIRE-RATED PLYWOOD BACKBOARD FOR OWNERS COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT. MOUNT BOTTOM OF BACKBOARD @ 24" A.F.F. PAINT BACKBOARD TO MATCH ADJACENT FINISHES. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH OWNER PRIOR TO COMMENCING WORK. 2. PROVIDE NEMA 5-30R SPECIAL PURPOSE RECEPTACLE FOR OWNERS COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT. COORDINATE RECEPTACLE NEMA CONFIGURATION AND EXACT LOCATION WITH OWNER PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN. 3. PROVIDE TWO (2) 4" EMT CONDUIT SLEEVES FOR COMMUNICATION CABLING. PROVIDE PLASTIC BUSHINGS ON EACH END OF CONDUITS. 4. MOUNT CABLE TRAY ABOVE DATA RACKS AT 8'-0" A.F.F. 5. SURGICAL LIGHT FURNISHED BY OTHERS; INSTALLED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. CIRCUIT SURGICAL LIGHT WITH (2)#12, (1)#12GND, 3 4"C TO 20A-1P C/B IN PANELBOARD LP-2 (PANEL CIRCUIT NUMBER AS INDICATED). 6. OPERATING ROOM TABLE PROVIDED BY OTHERS. CIRCUIT OPERATING ROOM TABLE POWER SUPPLY WITH (2)#12, (1)#12GND, 3 4"C TO 20A-1P C/B IN PANELBOARD LP-2 (PANEL CIRCUIT NUMBER AS INDICATED). 7. PROVIDE 30A, 208V SPECIAL PURPOSE RECEPTACLE FOR OWNERS CLOTHES DRYER. CIRCUIT SURGICAL LIGHT WITH (3)#10, (1)#10GND, 3 4"C TO 30A-2P C/B IN PANELBOARD LP-2 (PANEL CIRCUIT NUMBER AS INDICATED). COORDINATE RECEPTACLE NEMA CONFIGURATION AND EXACT LOCATION WITH OWNER PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN. 8. EMS EQUIPMENT RACK PROVIDED BY OWNER. 9. COORDINATE RECEPTACLE MOUNTING HEIGHT WITH INSTRUMENT. 10. COORDINATE RECEPTACLE AND DATA OUTLET MOUNTING HEIGHT WITH SHELF AND MONITOR. 11. PROVIDE DISCONNECT SWITCH FOR PRIMARY SIDE OF TRANSFORMER 'T-1'. REFER TO POWER ONE-LINE DIAGRAM FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 12. SURGICAL LIGHT CONTROL PAD FURNISHED BY OTHERS; INSTALLED BY E.C. PROVIDE CONTROL CIRCUITRY IN 34"C FROM CONTROL PAD TO ASSOCIATED SURGICAL LIGHT IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER WRITTEN INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. GENERAL NOTES (APPLY TO ABOVE PARTIAL PLAN): A. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, CIRCUIT 120V RECEPTACLES TO 20A-1P C/B'S IN PANELBOARD 'LP-2' (PANEL CIRCUIT NUMBER AS INDICATED). B. CIRCUIT DATA, TELEPHONE, AND WIRELESS ACCESS POINT CABLING TO DATA RACK 'IDF-2'. GENERAL NOTES (APPLY TO ABOVE PARTIAL PLAN): A. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, CIRCUIT 120V RECEPTACLES TO 20A-1P C/B'S IN PANELBOARD 'LP-2' (PANEL CIRCUIT NUMBER AS INDICATED). B. CIRCUIT DATA, TELEPHONE, AND WIRELESS ACCESS POINT CABLING TO DATA RACK 'IDF-2'. GENERAL NOTES (APPLY TO ABOVE PARTIAL PLAN): A. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, CIRCUIT 120V RECEPTACLES TO 20A-1P C/B'S IN PANELBOARD 'LP-1' (PANEL CIRCUIT NUMBER AS INDICATED). B. CIRCUIT DATA, TELEPHONE, AND WIRELESS ACCESS POINT CABLING TO DATA RACK 'MDF-B'. 1 2 3 AUDIO/VISUAL EQUIPMENT NOTES (APPLY TO THIS DRAWING ONLY): x UNO, A/V EQUIPMENT AND ASSOCIATED A/V CABLING SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY THE AUDIO/VISUAL CONTRACTOR (AVC). ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING RACEWAYS, BOXES, RECEPTACLES, 120V CIRCUITRY, DATA JACKS AND DATA CABLING FOR AUDIO/VISUAL EQUIPMENT. REFER TO AUDIO/VISUAL SYMBOLS LIST ON DRAWING E-001 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. x REFER TO 'TA' CONTRACT DRAWINGS FOR AUDIO/VISUAL EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS, CIRCUITRY REQUIREMENTS AND ADDITIONAL INFORMATION REGARDING EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION. x PRIOR TO COMMENCING WORK, THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IS REQUIRED TO MEET JOINTLY WITH THE AUDIO/VISUAL EQUIPMENT CONTRACTOR TO EXCHANGE INFORMATION, COORDINATE PROJECT REQUIREMENTS, AND AGREE ON DETAILS OF EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENTS AND INSTALLATION INTERFACES. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR WILL BE REQUIRED TO CORRECT ANY INACCURACY RESULTING FROM FAILURE TO DO SO WITHOUT COST TO OWNER. DECEMBER 18, 2020 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 E-501 PROJECT NORTH 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 DETAILS & DIAGRAMS 220157.00 FOR CONSTRUCTION 5623 BURDOCK ROAD MORAVIA, NEW YORK 13118 PHONE: 315-730-4185 e-mail- smurphy@murphengineering.com MCE MURPHY CONSULTING ENGINEERING DECEMBER 18, 2020 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 E-502 PROJECT NORTH 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 DETAILS & DIAGRAMS 220157.00 FOR CONSTRUCTION 5623 BURDOCK ROAD MORAVIA, NEW YORK 13118 PHONE: 315-730-4185 e-mail- smurphy@murphengineering.com MCE MURPHY CONSULTING ENGINEERING SYMBOLS: 4-11/16" SQUARE RECESSED WALL-BOX, REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR QUANTITIES AND LOCATIONS OF DEVICES. WALL 1" CONDUIT STUB TO ABOVECEILING SPACE. PROVIDE SUPPORTS AS REQUIRED BY PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS. LONG RADIUS 90° BEND PLASTIC BUSHING CEILING LEVEL 4 TYPICAL TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET SCALE: FRONT VIEW WALL SECTION DATA RJ-45 BLANKDATA RJ-45 LABEL (TYP) WALL PLATE BLANK (TYP)PROVIDE WIRED RJ45 CATEGORY 6 DATA JACKS (TYPICAL). RECESSED 4-11/16" SQUARE BOX (2-1/2" DEEP) WITH 2-GANG DEVICE MOUNTING BRACKET AND TRIM RING. 1" CONDUIT AND COMMUNICATION CABLING (CATEGORY 6 CABLE). REFER TO WALL SECTION FOR CONDUIT ROUTING REQUIREMENTS. LEGEND (FOR SPECIAL SYSTEMS RISER DIAGRAM): 6-STRAND SINGLE-MODE, ARMORED FIBER OPTIC CABLE IN 2" EMT CONDUIT. TERMINATE FIBER-OPTIC CABLING WITH TYPE LC CONNECTORS. PLENUM RATED CATEGORY 6 CABLING. (#) INDICATES QUANTITIES OF CABLE REQUIRED. DETAIL #1 KEYED NOTES: 1. PROVIDE TWO-POST EQUIPMENT RACK WITH CABLE MANAGEMENT (VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL) AND POWER DISTRIBUTION STRIPS. 2. PROVIDE UN-LOADED 48-PORT COPPER PATCH PANEL(S) IN EQUIPMENT RACK. PROVIDE PATCH PANEL(S) TO MATCH EQUIPMENT RACK CONSTRUCTION. PROVIDE QUANTITIES OF PATCH PANELS TO ACCOMMODATE NUMBER OF DEVICES SHOWN ON FLOOR PLANS. 3. PROVIDE 10' COILED, CABLE SERVICE LOOP (SLACK) AT EACH WIRELESS ACCESS POINT (WAP). WIRELESS ACCESS POINT (WITH WALL/ CEILING MOUNTING KIT) PROVIDED BY OWNER. REFER TO FLOOR PLANS FOR EXACT QUANTITIES, LOCATIONS AND ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. (TYP, UNO) 4. PROVIDE CATEGORY 6 PATCH CABLE(S) FROM PATCH PANEL(ES) TO POE SWITCH(ES). PROVIDE QUANTITIES OF PATCH CABLES AS REQUIRED TO FULFILL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS. (TYP, UNO) 5. PROVIDE EMPTY 2" CONDUIT FROM IT 114 TO UTILITY DEMARCATION FOR SERVICE ENTRANCE FIBER OPTIC CABLING. COORDINATE CONDUIT ROUTING PATH AND BASEMENT TERMINATION LOCATION WITH OWNER IT REPRESENTATIVE PRIOR TO COMMENCING WORK. SERVICE ENTRANCE FIBER OPTIC CABLING PROVIDED BY OWNER. 6. PROVIDE FIBER-OPTIC PATCH PANEL IN EQUIPMENT RACK. COORDINATE REQUIREMENTS WITH OWNER. 7. VIDEO SURVEILLANCE CAMERA FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY SECURITY SYSTEM CONTRACTOR. 8. INTERCOM STATION (AXIS ENTRY CONTROLLER) FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY SECURITY SYSTEM CONTRACTOR. # DETAIL #1 GENERAL NOTES: A. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, PROVIDE ALL EQUIPMENT, CABLING, TERMINATIONS, ETC. AS SHOWN ON DIAGRAM. COORDINATE ALL WORK WITH OWNER'S I.T. REPRESENTATIVE. B. RISER DIAGRAM IS DIAGRAMMATIC ONLY AND INTENDED TO ILLUSTRATE SCOPE OF WORK. REFER TO FLOOR PLANS FOR EXACT QUANTITIES OF OUTLETS, CABLE RUN LENGTHS, AND ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. C. EQUIPMENT SHOWN IN DATA RACKS IS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY, AND DOES NOT NECESSARILY REFLECT EXACT QUANTITY/ARRANGEMENT OF EQUIPMENT. D. ALL RACEWAYS MUST HAVE LONG SWEEPING BENDS. ALL CONDUIT ENDS MUST CONTAIN PLASTIC BUSHING. 6-SM-FOC 1 COMMUNICATION SYSTEM RISER DIAGRAM SCALE: N.T.S. (#) CAT 6 FIRST FLOOR SECOND FLOOR VIDEO SURV.SERVER (BY OWNER) VOIP SERVER (BY OWNER) ACCESS CONTROL SERVER (BY OWNER) CORE SWITCH (BY OWNER) FIBER SWITCH (BY OWNER) DATA RACK 'MDF-A' FIBER PATCH COPPER PATCH PANELS DATA RACK 'MDF-B' 4 (1) CAT 6 6-SM-FOC FIBER PATCH COPPER PATCH PANELS 1 DATA RACK 'IDF-2' 6-SM-FOC (TYP) - REFER TO FLOOR PLAN FOR QUANTITIES AND LOCATIONS (TYP) 3 (TYP) IT 114 IT 235 5 2 (TYP) UPS (BY OWNER) UPS (BY OWNER) POE SWITCH (BY OWNER) POE SWITCH (BY OWNER) (1) CAT 6 PER RJ-45 JACK (TYP) - REFER TO FLOOR PLAN FOR QUANTITIES AND LOCATIONS (TYP) - REFER TO FLOOR PLAN FOR QUANTITIES AND LOCATIONS WT #D,#T (TYP) - REFER TO FLOOR PLAN FOR QUANTITIES AND LOCATIONS #D(1) CAT 6 PER RJ-45 JACK (1) CAT 6 USE 4" STEEL SLEEVE FOR CABLE PENETRATIONS BETWEEN FLOORS (TYP) WAP (1) CAT 6 UPS (BY OWNER) (1) CAT 6 PER RJ-45 JACK WT #D,#T #D(1) CAT 6 PER RJ-45 JACK (1) CAT 6 WAP (TYP) 6 (TYP) #D,#T #D TELE RJ-45 FINISHED CEILING MIN. 6" 4' MAXIMUM SPACING TIE CABLE BUNDLES WITH HOOK AND LOOP STRAPS TO SECURE CABLES ONLY. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN OR DEFORM CABLE JACKETS SECURE SUPPORTS TO STRUCTURE APPROVED CABLE SUPPORT PROVIDE SADDLE TYPE CABLE HANGERS DESIGNED AND APPROVED FOR ALL SYSTEM CABLING. SECURE CABLE HANGERS TO STRUCTURE SECURE CABLES TO SUPPORT IN AREAS WHERE CABLES CHANGE DIRECTION GENERAL NOTES (FOR TYPICAL J-JOOK INSTALLATION DETAIL ONLY): A. LOCATE CABLE BUNDLES A MINIMUM OF 6" ABOVE REMOVABLE CEILINGS TO MAINTAIN CLEARANCE ALONG WALLS WHERE POSSIBLE. LOCATE IN AREAS THAT ARE ACCESSIBLE. B. USE 2 OR MORE CABLE HANGERS AT ALL TURNS TO MAINTAIN MANUFACTURER'S BEND RADIUS REQUIREMENTS. C. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL CABLE INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. 3 TYPICAL J-HOOK INSTALLATION SCALE: # KEYED NOTES (FOR CABLE TRAY INSTALLATION DETAIL ONLY): 1. PROVIDE HANGER AND SUPPORT HARDWARE ATTACHED TO BUILDING STRUCTURE. PROVIDE COMPONENTS PER MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS. ALL SUPPORT HANGERS SHALL SUPPORT THE FULL WIDTH OF CABLE TRAY AT RECOMMENDED INTERVALS. MOUNTING SYSTEM SHOWN FOR INFORMATION ONLY, ACTUAL SYSTEM MAY DIFFER. 2. LOCATE CABLE TRAY AND CABLING FOR UNRESTRICTED ACCESS TO CABLE TRAY TOP. MOUNT CABLE TRAY TO PROVIDE MINIMUM 6" ACCESS ABOVE CABLE TRAY TOP. 3. PROVIDE CONTINUOUS CABLE TRAY USING MANUFACTURER'S APPROVED FITTINGS FOR ALL TRANSITIONS. 4. PROVIDE MINIMUM #6 AWG GROUND CONDUCTOR AND APPROVED GROUNDING HARDWARE TO BOND CABLE TRAY SEGMENTS TO FORM A CONTINUOUS GROUNDING PATH. BOND TO COMMUNICATIONS GROUND BUS. 5. PROVIDE CABLING. REFER TO FLOOR PLANS FOR QUANTITIES FOR TELECOMMUNICATION OUTLETS, WIRELESS ACCESS POINTS, ACCESS CONTROL CARD READER, ETC. 1 1 5 4 2 3 2 TYPICAL CABLE TRAY INSTALLATION SCALE: TO UTILITY DEMARCATION (BASEMENT) (TYP) REFER TO FLOOR PLANS FOR QUANTITIES AND LOCATIONS. FIRST AND SECOND FLOOR VIDEO SURVEILLANCE CAMERAS SHALL BE CIRCUITED BACK TO PATCH PANELS IN DATA RACK 'MDF-B' (1) CAT 6 7 TO DOOR ACCESS CONTROLLER. COORDINATE REQUIREMENTS WITH SECURITY SYSTEM CONTRACTOR (1) CAT 6 IS (TYP) REFER TO FLOOR PLANS FOR QUANTITIES AND LOCATIONS. FIRST AND SECOND FLOOR INTERCOM STATIONS (AXIS ENTRY CONTROLLERS) SHALL BE CIRCUITED BACK TO PATCH PANELS IN DATA RACK 'MDF-B' 8 (1) CAT 6 DECEMBER 18, 2020 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 E-503 PROJECT NORTH 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 DETAILS & DIAGRAMS 220157.00 FOR CONSTRUCTION 5623 BURDOCK ROAD MORAVIA, NEW YORK 13118 PHONE: 315-730-4185 e-mail- smurphy@murphengineering.com MCE MURPHY CONSULTING ENGINEERING 1 SCALE: N.T.S. 2 SCALE: N.T.S. 3 SCALE: N.T.S. 4 SCALE: N.T.S. DECEMBER 18, 2020 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 E-601 PROJECT NORTH 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 SCHEDULES DECEMBER 18, 2020 220157.00 FOR CONSTRUCTION 5623 BURDOCK ROAD MORAVIA, NEW YORK 13118 PHONE: 315-730-4185 e-mail- smurphy@murphengineering.com MCE MURPHY CONSULTING ENGINEERING NOTES (FOR TRANSFORMER SCHEDULE ONLY): A. BOND NEUTRAL OF TRANSFORMER SECONDARY TO THE TRANSFORMER CASE WITH BONDING JUMPER AS PER NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE. B. GROUND THE CASING OF THE TRANSFORMER TO GROUND BAR. SEE DETAIL ON DRAWING E-501. TRANSFORMER SCHEDULE PRIMARY VOLTAGE SECONDARY VOLTAGE SIZE REMARKS T-1 480V 3 PHASE DELTA 208Y/120V 3 PHASE 4 WIRE 75 KVA PROVIDE TRANSFORMER WITH MINIMUM EFFICIENCIES AS TESTED AND RATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH DOE 2016 EFFICIENCY REQUIREMENTS. LIGHTING CONTROL SCHEDULE GENERAL NOTES (FOR LIGHTING CONTROL SCHEDULE ONLY): A. BASIS OF DESIGN IS WATTSTOPPER (NO SUBSTITUTIONS). B. PROVIDE ALL REQUIRED DIMMING ROOM CONTROLLERS (DRC'S) AND CIRCUITRY REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE AND OPERABLE DIGITAL LIGHTING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM. PROVIDE DRC'S WITH APPROPRIATE QUANTITY OF SWITCH LEGS TO ACCOMMODATE LIGHTING CONTROL SCHEME SHOWN ON FLOOR PLANS. DRC'S SHALL BE INSTALLED ABOVE ACCESSIBLE CEILINGS IN ACCORDANCE WITH WATTSTOPPER RECOMMENDATIONS. TO MAINTAIN DRAWING CLARITY, DRC'S HAVE NOT BEEN SHOWN ON FLOOR PLANS. C. PROVIDE ALL REQUIRED LOW-VOLTAGE POWER PACKS AND CIRCUITRY FOR A COMPLETE AND OPERABLE ANALOG LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM. LOW-VOLTAGE POWER PACKS SHALL BE INSTALLED ABOVE ACCESSIBLE CEILINGS IN ACCORDANCE WITH WATTSTOPPER RECOMMENDATIONS. TO MAINTAIN DRAWING CLARITY, LOW-VOLTAGE POWER PACKS HAVE NOT BEEN SHOWN ON FLOOR PLANS. D. IF REQUIRED, PROVIDE SENSOR MASKING KITS TO LIMIT COVERAGE OF AREAS. VERIFY WITH OWNER. E. VERIFY OCCUPANCY SENSOR COLOR SELECTION WITH OWNER REPRESENTATIVE. TYPE LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE DESCRIPTION LAMPS/ LED VOLTAGE MOUNTING DESIGN BASIS ACCEPTABLE MFR'S. REMARKS L1 L2 L6 L7 L9 L10 EM X1 L3 L4 L5 L8 GENERAL NOTES (FOR LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE ONLY): A. PROVIDE MOUNTING COMPONENTS AS REQUIRED. B. ALL RECESSED LIGHT FIXTURES MUST BE SUPPORTED INDEPENDENTLY FROM CEILING GRID. UNIVERSAL (CLG. OR WALL) NO SUBSTITUTIONS PROVIDE FIXTURE WITH INTEGRAL BATTERY BACK-UP WITH SELF-PERFORMING DIAGNOSTICS. REFER TO FLOOR PLANS FOR QUANTITIES & LOCATIONS OF WALL MOUNT AND CEILING MOUNT FIXTURES. PROVIDE DIRECTIONAL ARROWS AS INDICATED ON FLOOR PLANS. EDGE LIT LED EXIT SIGN W/ BATTERY BACKUP GREEN LED EXIT UNIVERSAL (120-277V) LIGHT FIXTURE INDUSTRIES ELRT-G-BB-XXX-ST REFERENCE NOTES (FOR PANELBOARD SCHEDULE ONLY): 1. DESIGN BASIS: SQUARE D (NO SUBSTITUTIONS) 2. 10,000 AIC 3. 22,000 AIC 4. 35,000 AIC 5. 42 CKT PANELBOARD 6. 2-SECTION PANELBOARD (54 CKT'S EACH SECTION; 108 CKT'S TOTAL) 7. FEED-THRU LUGS FOR FIRST SECTION 8. 3-SECTION PANELBOARD (42 CKT'S EACH SECTION; 126 CKT'S TOTAL) 9. FEED-THRU LUGS FOR FIRST AND SECOND SECTIONS. PANELBOARD SCHEDULE L11 L12 2X2 RECESSED LED TROFFER L1H UNIVERSAL (120-277V) 0-10V DIMMING METALUX 22CZ2-44-UNV-L840-CD1-U LED 4000K 4400 LUMENS NO SUBSTITUTIONS 2X2 RECESSED LED TROFFER UNIVERSAL (120-277V) 0-10V DIMMING METALUX 22CZ2-55-UNV-L840-CD1-U LED 4000K 5500 LUMENS NO SUBSTITUTIONS 2X2 RECESSED LED TROFFER UNIVERSAL (120-277V) 0-10V DIMMING METALUX 22CZ2-34-UNV-L840-CD1-U LED 4000K 3400 LUMENS NO SUBSTITUTIONS L6H L2S 2X2 SURFACE LED TROFFER CLG. MOUNT UNIVERSAL (120-277V) 0-10V DIMMING METALUX 22CZ2-34-UNV-L840-CD1-U-SK-22-WS LED 4000K 3400 LUMENS NO SUBSTITUTIONS 2X2 SHALLOW SURFACE MOUNT KIT L3L 2X2 RECESSED SEALED LED TROFFER UNIVERSAL (120-277V) 0-10V DIMMING LED 4000K 4400 LUMENS NO SUBSTITUTIONS RECESS GRID CLG. RECESS GRID CLG. RECESS GRID CLG. 2X2 GASKETED DRY-WALL FRAME KIT SEQUENCE OF OPERATION (FOR LIGHTING CONTROL SCHEDULE ONLY): OFFICE/SUPPORT: MANUAL ON ALL LIGHTS AUTO OFF ALL LIGHTS AFTER 30 MINUTES (VACANCY) CORRIDORS: AUTOMATIC ON ALL LIGHTS AUTO OFF ALL LIGHTS AFTER 30 MINUTES. OTHER SPACES: MANUAL ON ALL LIGHTS AUTO OFF ALL LIGHTS AFTER 30 MINUTES (VACANCY). L13 L14 L15 L16 24" UNDER-CABINET LED UNIVERSAL (120-277V) LED 4000K 1600 LUMENS NO SUBSTITUTIONS UNDERSIDE OF CABINET NO SUBSTITUTIONS36" UNDER-CABINET LED LED 4000K 2600 LUMENS LIGHT FIXTURE TYPE 'L13' IS ASSOCIATED WITH ALTERNATE #1. REFER TO DRAWING A-102 FOR CONFIGURATION NO SUBSTITUTIONS NO SUBSTITUTIONS NO SUBSTITUTIONS NO SUBSTITUTIONS NO SUBSTITUTIONS NO SUBSTITUTIONS NO SUBSTITUTIONS NO SUBSTITUTIONS NO SUBSTITUTIONS NO SUBSTITUTIONS NO SUBSTITUTIONS 2X2 RECESSED SEALED LED TROFFER 2X2 RECESSED SEALED LED TROFFER FAIL-SAFE 22FCZ2-55VHE-UNV-L840- CA125-CD1 RECESS GRID CLG. RECESS GYP. BD. CLG. RECESS GRID CLG. FAIL-SAFE 22FCZ2-44-UNV-L840-CA125-CD1 FAIL-SAFE 22FCZ2-44-UNV-L840-CA125-CD1DCFL-2424W-U UNIVERSAL (120-277V) 0-10V DIMMING LED 4000K 5500 LUMENS UNIVERSAL (120-277V) 0-10V DIMMING LED 4000K 4400 LUMENS TYPE 'L14' NOT USED FLOOR MOUNTING T-2 480V 3 PHASE DELTA 208Y/120V 3 PHASE 4 WIRE 112.5 KVA PROVIDE TRANSFORMER WITH MINIMUM EFFICIENCIES AS TESTED AND RATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH DOE 2016 EFFICIENCY REQUIREMENTS. TRAPEZE 4' LED VAPORTIGHT INDUSTRIAL UNIVERSAL (120-277V) 0-10V DIMMING LED 4000K 4000 LUMENS CHAIN MOUNT @ 9'-0" A.F.F. METALUX 4VT2-LD5-4-DR-W-UNV-L840-CD1U-VT2/CHAIN/SET-U 6" RECESSED LED DOWNLIGHT LED 4000K 2000 LUMENS UNIVERSAL (120-277V) 0-10V DIMMING RECESS GRID CLG. NO SUBSTITUTIONS HALO-COMMERCIAL PR6FS12D010-PR6M12MD8FSMW FIELD SELECTABLE LUMENS/CCT; SET FOR 2000 LUMENS / 4000 CCT NO SUBSTITUTIONS 6" RECESSED LED DOWNLIGHT LED 4000K 3000 LUMENS UNIVERSAL (120-277V) 0-10V DIMMING HALO-COMMERCIAL PR6FS24D010-PR6M24MD8FSMW FIELD SELECTABLE LUMENS/CCT; SET FOR 3000 LUMENS / 4000 CCT 4' LED LENSED STRIPLIGHT LED 4000K 3000 LUMENS UNIVERSAL (120-277V) 0-10V DIMMING (2 CIRCUITS) RECESS GRID CLG. RECESS GYP. BD. CLG. METALUX 4SNLED-LD5-30SL-LC-UNV-L840-CD1 2X4 RECESSED LED PATIENT ROOM LUMINAIRE LED 4000K RECESS GRID CLG. UNIVERSAL (120-277V) 0-10V DIMMING FAIL-SAFE MAE-G-4-LD4-120-2LO/HI-EDD1 CIRCUIT FOR INDEPENDENT CONTROL OF EXAM AND AMBIENT LIGHT LEVELS. AMBINET LUMENS: 4278 EXAM LUMENS: 7095 2X4 RECESSED LED OPERATING ROOM MULTI-COLOR LUMINAIRE UNIVERSAL (120-277V) 0-10V DIMMING LED 4000K 7500 LUMENS RECESS GRID CLG. 6" RECESSED LED OPERATING ROOM DOWNLIGHT LED 4000K 4000 LUMENS NO SUBSTITUTIONS 2' LED LENSED STRIPLIGHT LED 4000K 2200 LUMENS RECESS GRID CLG. METALUX 2SNLED-LD5-22SL-LC-UNV-L840-CD1 UNIVERSAL (120-277V) 0-10V DIMMING CHAIN MOUNTING KIT DESIGNATION SHAPER 605-37-W-L4/840-UNV-CC-2VTB/2HTB CUSTOM FINISH AS SELECTED BY ARCHITECT. VERIFY TRIM BAR REQUIREMENTS WITH ARCHITECT. WALL (COORDINATE HEIGHT W/ G.C.) UNIVERSAL (120-277V) 0-10V DIMMING LED 4000K 3000 LUMENS 37" LED WALL SCONCE NEW STAR AG-G-24-P-XYZ-B1-UN-57-DM1 DUAL-HEAD EMERGENCY LIGHT FIXTURE W/ BATTERY BACKUP TWO (2) HIGH-OUTPUT LED HEADS UNIVERSAL (120-277V) WALL UNDERSIDE OF CABINET UNIVERSAL (120-277V) SURE-LITES SEL50SD FAIL-SAFE UCL-2-LD4-40-A125125-EDC1-UNV FAIL-SAFE UCL-3-LD4-40-A125125-EDC1-UNV NO SUBSTITUTIONS UNIVERSAL (120-277V) 0-10V DIMMING RECESS GRID CLG. IMAGE OVERLAY STARTILES LED 5700K RECESS GRID CLG. UNIVERSAL (120-277V) 0-10V DIMMING FAIL-SAFE FLD6BX/OR40D010-FEU6B3/59040F6LBXSORM1LI 1% TO 100% DIMMING; 90 CRI FAIL-SAFE ORLG-24-4-INS-A125-LD43LO40/33LOG52-120-ED1D1 CIRCUIT FOR INDEPENDENT CONTROL OF WHITE AND GREEN LIGHT LEVELS. ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 E-602 PROJECT NORTH 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 A B C D E A B C D E IT IS A VIOLATION OF THE LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT, TO ALTER THIS DOCUMENT IN ANY WAY. IF ALTERED, THE ALTERING ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX THEIR SEAL AND THE NOTATION 'ALTERED BY' FOLLOWED BY THEIR SIGNATURE AND THE DATE OF SUCH ALTERATION, AND A SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION S H E E T T I T L E D A T E P R O J E C T N U M R E V I S I O N S P R O J E C T S T A T U S 450 SOUTH SALINA STREET SUITE 500 PO BOX 29 SYRACUSE, NY 13201-0029 SCHEDULES 220157.00 FOR CONSTRUCTION 5623 BURDOCK ROAD MORAVIA, NEW YORK 13118 PHONE: 315-730-4185 e-mail- smurphy@murphengineering.com MCE MURPHY CONSULTING ENGINEERING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT & CONTROL SCHEDULE EQUIPMENT SUPPLY CONTROLLER DEVICE TYPE REQUIRED & LOCATIONS ACCESSORIES (PROVIDED BY EC) REFERENCE NOTES (SEE BELOW) DESIGNATION DESCRIPTION ROOM LOCATION SIZE VOLTAGE /PHASE PANEL OR CONTROL CENTER CIRCUIT BREAKER POWER WIRING FROM PANEL TO CONTROL UNIT POWER WIRING FROM CONTROL UNIT TO EQUIPMENT GROUND WIRE (SIZED PER NEC) DESIGNATION FURNISHED BY INSTALLED BY PACKAGED CONTROL UNIT VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE (SEE MECH SCHEDULE FOR REQUIREMENTS) COMBINATION MAGNETIC STARTER MANUAL MOTOR STARTER WITH RELAY CONTROL DEVICE(S) INSTALLATION LOCATION FURNISHED BY INSTALLED BY WIRED BY SUPPLY DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR RETURN DUCT SMOKE D ETECTOR DISCONNECT SWITCH FIRE ALARM DESIGNATION NFD FRAME FUSE MOTOR RATED SNAP SWITCH LOCATION FAN SHUT DOWN RELAY HP KW FLA WIRE CONDUIT WIRE CONDUIT EF-1 EXHAUST FAN ROOF 1/4 120/1 LP-2 15A-1P 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 EF-1 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1,2 EF-1 HRB-1 HEAT RECOVERY BOX 1ST FLOOR - SEE PLANS .06 208/1 LP-1 20A-2P 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 HRB-1 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - HRB-1 AC-1 AIR CONDITIONING UNIT 1ST FLOOR - SEE PLANS 2.5 208/1 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 AC-1 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AC-1 AC-2 AIR CONDITIONING UNIT 1ST FLOOR - SEE PLANS 2.5 208/1 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 AC-2 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AC-2 AC-3 AIR CONDITIONING UNIT 1ST FLOOR - SEE PLANS 2.5 208/1 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 AC-3 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AC-3 AC-35 AIR CONDITIONING UNIT 1ST FLOOR - SEE PLANS .25 208/1 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 AC-35 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AC-35 HRB-2 HEAT RECOVERY BOX 1ST FLOOR - SEE PLANS .06 208/1 LP-1 20A-2P 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 HRB-2 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - HRB-2 AC-4 AIR CONDITIONING UNIT 1ST FLOOR - SEE PLANS 2.3 208/1 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 AC-4 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AC-4 AC-5 AIR CONDITIONING UNIT 1ST FLOOR - SEE PLANS 2.3 208/1 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 AC-5 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AC-5 AC-6 AIR CONDITIONING UNIT 1ST FLOOR - SEE PLANS 2.3 208/1 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 AC-6 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AC-6 AC-36 AIR CONDITIONING UNIT 1ST FLOOR - SEE PLANS .25 208/1 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 AC-36 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AC-36 HRB-3 HEAT RECOVERY BOX 1ST FLOOR - SEE PLANS .06 208/1 LP-1 15A-2P 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 HRB-3 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - HRB-3 AC-7 AIR CONDITIONING UNIT 1ST FLOOR - SEE PLANS .2 208/1 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 AC-7 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AC-7 AC-8 AIR CONDITIONING UNIT 1ST FLOOR - SEE PLANS .2 208/1 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 AC-8 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AC-8 AC-9 AIR CONDITIONING UNIT 1ST FLOOR - SEE PLANS .2 208/1 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 AC-9 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AC-9 AC-16 AIR CONDITIONING UNIT 1ST FLOOR - SEE PLANS .2 208/1 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 AC-16 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AC-16 HRB-4 HEAT RECOVERY BOX 1ST FLOOR - SEE PLANS .06 208/1 LP-1 15A-2P 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 HRB-4 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - HRB-4 AC-10 AIR CONDITIONING UNIT 1ST FLOOR - SEE PLANS .2 208/1 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 AC-10 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AC-10 AC-11 AIR CONDITIONING UNIT 1ST FLOOR - SEE PLANS .2 208/1 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 AC-11 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AC-11 AC-12 AIR CONDITIONING UNIT 1ST FLOOR - SEE PLANS .2 208/1 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 AC-12 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AC-12 AC-13 AIR CONDITIONING UNIT 1ST FLOOR - SEE PLANS .2 208/1 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 AC-13 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AC-13 HRB-5 HEAT RECOVERY BOX 1ST FLOOR - SEE PLANS .06 208/1 LP-1 15A-2P 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 HRB-5 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - HRB-5 AC-14 AIR CONDITIONING UNIT 1ST FLOOR - SEE PLANS .2 208/1 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 AC-14 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AC-14 AC-15 AIR CONDITIONING UNIT 1ST FLOOR - SEE PLANS .2 208/1 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 AC-15 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AC-15 HRB-6 HEAT RECOVERY BOX 2ND FLOOR - SEE PLANS .06 208/1 LP-2 15A-2P 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 HRB-6 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - HRB-6 AC-17 AIR CONDITIONING UNIT 2ND FLOOR - SEE PLANS .2 208/1 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 AC-17 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AC-17 AC-18 AIR CONDITIONING UNIT 2ND FLOOR - SEE PLANS .2 208/1 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 AC-18 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AC-18 HRB-7 HEAT RECOVERY BOX 2ND FLOOR - SEE PLANS .06 208/1 LP-2 15A-2P 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 HRB-7 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - HRB-7 AC-19 AIR CONDITIONING UNIT 2ND FLOOR - SEE PLANS .2 208/1 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 AC-19 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AC-19 AC-20 AIR CONDITIONING UNIT 2ND FLOOR - SEE PLANS .2 208/1 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 AC-20 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AC-20 AC-25 AIR CONDITIONING UNIT 2ND FLOOR - SEE PLANS 2.5 208/1 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 AC-25 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AC-25 AC-30 AIR CONDITIONING UNIT 2ND FLOOR - SEE PLANS 2.3 208/1 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 AC-30 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AC-30 HRB-8 HEAT RECOVERY BOX 2ND FLOOR - SEE PLANS .06 208/1 LP-2 15A-2P 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 HRB-8 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - HRB-8 AC-21 AIR CONDITIONING UNIT 2ND FLOOR - SEE PLANS .2 208/1 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 AC-21 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AC-21 AC-22 AIR CONDITIONING UNIT 2ND FLOOR - SEE PLANS .2 208/1 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 AC-22 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AC-22 AC-23 AIR CONDITIONING UNIT 2ND FLOOR - SEE PLANS .2 208/1 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 AC-23 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AC-23 AC-24 AIR CONDITIONING UNIT 2ND FLOOR - SEE PLANS .2 208/1 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 AC-24 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AC-24 HRB-9 HEAT RECOVERY BOX 2ND FLOOR - SEE PLANS .09 208/1 LP-2 15A-2P 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 HRB-9 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - HRB-9 AC-27 AIR CONDITIONING UNIT 2ND FLOOR - SEE PLANS .2 208/1 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 AC-27 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AC-27 AC-28 AIR CONDITIONING UNIT 2ND FLOOR - SEE PLANS .2 208/1 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 AC-28 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AC-28 AC-29 AIR CONDITIONING UNIT 2ND FLOOR - SEE PLANS 2.5 208/1 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 AC-29 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AC-29 AC-34 AIR CONDITIONING UNIT 2ND FLOOR - SEE PLANS 2.3 208/1 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 AC-34 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AC-34 AC-37 AIR CONDITIONING UNIT 2ND FLOOR - SEE PLANS .25 208/1 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 AC-37 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AC-37 AC-38 AIR CONDITIONING UNIT 2ND FLOOR - SEE PLANS .25 208/1 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 AC-38 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AC-38 HRB-10 HEAT RECOVERY BOX 2ND FLOOR - SEE PLANS .06 208/1 LP-2 25A-2P 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 HRB-10 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - HRB-10 AC-26 AIR CONDITIONING UNIT 2ND FLOOR - SEE PLANS 5.2 208/1 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 AC-26 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AC-26 AC-31 AIR CONDITIONING UNIT 2ND FLOOR - SEE PLANS 2.3 208/1 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 AC-31 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AC-31 AC-32 AIR CONDITIONING UNIT 2ND FLOOR - SEE PLANS 2.3 208/1 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 AC-32 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AC-32 AC-33 AIR CONDITIONING UNIT 2ND FLOOR - SEE PLANS 2.5 208/1 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 AC-33 EC EC - - - - - - X AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AC-33 EWH-1 ELECTRIC WATER HEATER 1ST FLOOR - SEE PLANS 4.5 208/1 LP-1 30A-2P 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 EWH-1 EC EC - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - X 30A - - - - AU - - - - EWH-1 EWH-2 ELECTRIC WATER HEATER 1ST FLOOR - SEE PLANS 30 208/1 LP-1 40A-2P 2#8 1" 2#8 1" #10 EWH-2 PC EC X - - - - - - AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 EWH-2 EWH-3 ELECTRIC WATER HEATER 1ST FLOOR - SEE PLANS 30 208/1 LP-1 40A-2P 2#8 1" 2#8 1" #10 EWH-3 PC EC X - - - - - - AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 EWH-3 EWH-4 ELECTRIC WATER HEATER 1ST FLOOR - SEE PLANS 15 208/1 LP-1 20A-2P 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 EWH-4 PC EC X - - - - - - AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 EWH-4 EWH-5 ELECTRIC WATER HEATER 1ST FLOOR - SEE PLANS 15 208/1 LP-1 20A-2P 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 EWH-5 PC EC X - - - - - - AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 EWH-5 EWH-6 ELECTRIC WATER HEATER 2ND FLOOR - SEE PLANS 15 208/1 LP-2 20A-2P 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 EWH-6 PC EC X - - - - - - AU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 EWH-6 DRP-1 DOMESTIC RECIRC PUMP 1ST FLOOR - SEE PLANS 1/6 120/1 LP-1 15A-1P 2#12 3/4" 2#12 3/4" #12 DRP-1 EC EC - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - X AU - - - - DRP-1 GENERAL NOTES: A. VERIFY ALL MOTOR SIZES BEFORE ORDERING ANY CONTROL DEVICES. B. UNO, DEVICES FURNISHED BY OTHERS SHALL BE INSTALLED & CIRCUITED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. C. CONTROLLER DEVICES, DISCONNECT SWITCHES, FIRE ALARM EQUIPMENT, AND CIRCUITRY SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. D. PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN, VERIFY SPECIFIED WIRE AND CONDUIT SIZE FOR VOLTAGE DROP BASED ON ACTUAL ROUTING DISTANCES IN THE FIELD. IF NECESSARY, INCREASE WIRE AND CONDUIT SIZE TO ACCOMMODATE THE CALCULATED VOLTAGE DROP. REFERENCE NOTES: 1. DISCONNECT SWITCH PROVIDED WITH EQUIPMENT. 2. PROVIDE NEMA 3R ENCLOSURE FOR CONTROL DEVICE. 3. PROVIDE ADDRESSABLE SMOKE DETECTORS IN SUPPLY AND / OR RETURN DUCTWORK OF UNIT AS DIRECTED BY THE DIVISION 23 CONTRACTOR. PROVIDE ASSOCIATED MONITOR MODULES, CONTROL MODULES, AND APPURTENANCES. CIRCUIT ALL FIRE ALARM DEVICES DEVICES COMPLETE SO THAT DUCT DETECTOR(S) SHUTDOWN ASSOCIATED UNIT AND REPORT BACK TO THE EXISTING 'EDWARDS' THE FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL. COORDINATE WITH DIVISION 23 CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO COMMENCING WORK. 4. PROVIDE WP GFI DUPLEX RECEPTACLE AT UNIT FOR MAINTENANCE. CIRCUIT RECEPTACLE WITH 2-#10 + 1-#10 GND IN 3 4"C TO ONE (1) 20A-1P C/B IN PANEL BOARD 'LP-2'. 5. WP GFI DUPLEX RECEPTACLE FURNISHED WITH UNIT. CIRCUIT RECEPTACLE WITH 2-#10 + 1-#10 GND IN 3 4"C TO ONE (1) 20A-1P C/B IN PANEL BOARD 'LP-2'. 6. PROVIDE NEMA 3R ENCLOSURE FOR DISCONNECT. DECEMBER 18, 2020 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD BUILDING 215 EAST STATE STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 DOAS-1 DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR UNIT ROOF 62.2 460/3 HP-1 70A-3P 3#4 1-1/4" 3#4 1-1/4" #8 DOAS-1 MC MC X - - - - - - AU MC EC EC X X - - - - - - - - - - X 1,3,5 DOAS-1 DOAS-1 DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR UNIT ROOF 60.9 460/3 HP-1 70A-3P 3#4 1-1/4" 3#4 1-1/4" #8 DOAS-2 MC MC X - - - - - - AU MC EC EC X X - - - - - - - - - - X 1,3,5 DOAS-2 HP-1 HEAT RECOVERY UNIT ROOF 41.4 460/3 HP-1 50A-3P 3#6 1" 3#6 1" #10 HP--1 MC MC X - - - - - - AU - - - - X 4,6 HP-1 - - - - - - - - - - X 60A HP-2 HEAT RECOVERY UNIT ROOF 25.4 460/3 HP-2 40A-3P 3#8 3#8 #10 HP-2 MC MC X - - - - - - AU - - - - X 6 HP-2 - - - - - - - - - - X 30A HP-3 HEAT RECOVERY UNIT ROOF 25.4 460/3 HP-3 40A-3P 3#8 3#8 #10 HP-3 MC MC X - - - - - - AU - - - - X HP-3 - - - - - - - - - - X 30A HP-4(1) HEAT RECOVERY UNIT ROOF 35.7 460/3 HP-4(1) 50A-3P 3#6 1" 3#6 1" #10 HP-4(1) MC MC X - - - - - - AU - - - - X HP-4(1) - - - - - - - - - - X 60A 6 6 HP-4(2) HEAT RECOVERY UNIT ROOF 16.4 460/3 HP-1(2) 25A-3P 3#10 3/4" 3#10 3/4" #10 HP-4(2) MC MC X - - - - - - AU - - - - X HP-4(2) - - - - - - - - - - X 30A 6 3/4" 3/4" 3/4" 3/4" ELECTRICAL & TELECOM SYMBOLS WALL MOUNTED CEILING MOUNTED FLOOR MOUNTED DESCRIPTION AC DUPLEX OUTLET AC QUAD OUTLET DIRECT POWER CONNECTION TO EQUIPMENT NETWORK DATA JACK - COPPER (# OF JACKS) NETWORK DATA JACK - FIBER (# OF JACKS) TELEPHONE JACK (# OF JACKS) NETWORK DATA/TELEPHONE COMBO JACK (# OF JACKS) CABLE TELEVISION JACK JUNCTION BOX INDEX OF DRAWINGS DRAWING # DRAWING NAME TA001 COVER SHEET TA101 KEY PLAN TA102 AV INFRASTRUCTURE DESIGN TA103 AV INFRASTRUCTURE DESIGN TA104 AV INFRASTRUCTURE DESIGN TA105 AV INFRASTRUCTURE DESIGN TA106 AV INFRASTRUCTURE DESIGN TA107 AV INFRASTRUCTURE DESIGN TA501 DETAILS TA502 DETAILS TA601 SCHEDULES RESPONSIBILITY CHART FURNISHED BY: INSTALLED BY: A.V.C. G.C. E.C. FURNITURE OWNER OTHER EXISTING A.V.C. G.C. E.C. FURNITURE OWNER OTHER EXISTING CEILING MOUNTED EQUIPMENT PROJECTION SCREEN & LOW VOLTAGE CONTROLLER PROJECTOR PROJECTOR CEILING MOUNTING PLATE & PIPE PROJECTOR CEILING MOUNTING STRUCTURE PROJECTOR MOUNTING BRACKET FLAT PANEL DISPLAY FLAT PANEL DISPLAY CEILING MOUNTING PLATE & PIPE FLAT PANEL DISPLAY CEILING MOUNTING STRUCTURE FLAT PANEL DISPLAY MOUNTING BRACKET CEILING SPEAKERS CEILING SPEAKER CEILING TIE-OFF ANCHOR POINTS CEILING MICROPHONES ASSISTIVE LISTENING IR EMITTER WALL MOUNTED EQUIPMENT PROJECTION SCREEN SWITCH FLAT PANEL DISPLAY FLAT PANEL DISPLAY WALL MOUNT BLOCKING FLAT PANEL DISPLAY WALL MOUNTING BRACKET FLAT PANEL DISPLAY IN-WALL BOX DIGITAL SIGNAGE MEDIA PLAYER WALL SPEAKERS CAMERA CAMERA MOUNT TOUCH SCREEN/BUTTON PANEL AV CONNECTOR WALL PLATE FLOOR EQUIPMENT FLOOR BOX & COVER FB NON-AV PARTS (POWER/DATA/CONDUIT FITTINGS/BLANKS) FLOOR BOX AV INPUT PLATES & CONNECTORS TABLE EQUIPMENT TABLE BOX TB PARTS (POWER/DATA/BLANKS) TABLE BOX AV INPUT PLATES & CONNECTORS LECTERN/RACK EQUIPMENT LECTERN LECTERN MICROPHONE EQUIPMENT RACK RESIDENT COMPUTER LOCAL MONITOR LOCAL MONITOR MOUNT TOUCH SCREEN/BUTTON PANEL RACK AV EQUIPMENT MANAGED AV NETWORK SWITCH CABLES LOW VOLTAGE AV CABLES AV CONNECTORS ELECTRICAL & CABLE PATH AC POWER OUTLETS DIRECT POWER CONNECTIONS (PROJECTION SCREENS) NETWORK DATA JACKS BACK BOXES/J-BOXES/LV CUT-IN RINGS/FACEPLATES J-HOOKS/CABLE HANGERS CONDUITS, RACEWAY, PULL STRINGS & PULL BOXES PROGRAMMING AV CONTROL SYSTEM PROGRAMMING AUDIO DSP PROGRAMMING ARCHITECTURAL & FURNITURE MILLWORK/TABLE PENETRATIONS & MODIFICATIONS FLOOR PENETRATIONS & MODIFICATIONS CEILING GRID/TILE/CLOUD MODIFICATIONS VENTILATION/AIR CONDITIONING ABBREVIATIONS ALT ALTERNATE LVC LOW VOLTAGE CONTROLLER AFC ABOVE FINISHED CEILING NIC NOT IN CONTRACT AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR NTS NOT TO SCALE AVC AUDIO VISUAL CONTRACTOR OC ON CENTER CL CENTER LINE OD OUTER DIAMETER DIA DIAMETER OFCI OWNER FURNISHED CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EC ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR OFE OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT EMT ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING OFOI OWNER FURNISHED OWNER INSTALLED EQ EQUAL RCP REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FB FLOOR BOX REV REVISION GC GENERAL CONTRACTOR SPEC SPECIFICATION HVAC HEATING, VENTING & AIR CONDITIONING SPKR SPEAKER ID INNER DIAMETER TB TABLE BOX IR INFRARED TBD TO BE DETERMINED IWE INCLUDED WITH EQUIPMENT TYP TYPICAL KO KNOCK OUT VIF VERIFY IN FIELD LV LOW VOLTAGE WB WALL BOX CONNECTORS 1/4"B 1/4" TIP-RING-SLEEVE BALANCED PHNX PHOENIX (CAPTIVE SCREW) 1/4"U 1/4" TIP-SLEEVE UNBALANCED RCA RCA 3.5MM 3.5MM STEREO AUDIO RJ45 UNSHIELDED RJ45 DB9 9-PIN DSUB SERIAL SRJ45 SHIELDED RJ45 DP DISPLAY PORT TB THUNDERBOLT DVI-A DVI ANALOG TERM TERMINAL BLOCK DVI-D DVI DIGITAL USB-A USB STANDARD TYPE A FCON F-TYPE COAX USB-B USB STANDARD TYPE B HDMI HDMI USB-C USB STANDARD TYPE C IEC IEC POWER VGA 15-PIN DSUB VGA IR INFRARED EMITTER VISCA SONY VISCA 8-PIN MINI-DIN MDP MINI DISPLAY PORT XLR XLR GENERAL NOTES & SPECIFICATIONS GENERAL NOTES 1. ALL SIZE, DIMENSION AND LOCATION INFORMATION MUST BE VERIFIED ON ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS. IF VALUES CONFLICT, CONTACT OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE FOR CLARIFICATION. 2. ALL BACK BOX, OUTLET AND SWITCH MEASUREMENTS ARE SPECIFIED AND DRAWN TO VERTICAL CENTER, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 3. FLUSH MOUNTED OUTLET, PULL, AND JUNCTION BOXES SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH COVERS WHICH OVERLAP BOX SIDES BY 3/4" TO COVER ROUGH OPENING IN FINISHED WALL. SURFACE MOUNTED BOXES SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH COVERS OF THE SAME SIZE AS BOX. 4. CONSTRUCTION WORK SHOWN IN THESE DRAWINGS IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE G.C. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 5. FURNITURE SHOWN ON THESE DRAWINGS FOR REFERENCE ONLY AND TO BE PROVIDED BY OTHERS, UNLESS AV RELATED FURNITURE (CREDENZA, LECTERN) NOTED TO BE PROVIDED BY AVC. 6. QUANTITIES SHOWN ON THESE DRAWINGS SHALL BE CONFIRMED BY EACH DISCIPLINE. DISCREPANCIES SHOULD BE REFERRED TO THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. 7. ALL WALL MOUNTED DEVICES SHALL HAVE 3/4" PLYWOOD WALL BLOCKING (PROVIDED BY GC) SPANNING THE WALL MOUNTING BRACKET. ELECTRICAL & TELECOM NOTES 1. ALL CABLE PATH, CIRCUIT, ROUTING AND LOCATION INFORMATION MUST BE VERIFIED ON ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. IF VALUES CONFLICT, CONTACT OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE FOR CLARIFICATION. 2. ALL ELECTRICAL WORK SHALL ABIDE BY NATIONAL AND LOCAL ELECTRICAL CODE. IF CODES CONFLICT, THE STRICTER OF THE TWO SHALL BE FOLLOWED. 3. E.C. SHALL PROVIDE ALL CONDUIT, PULL BOXES, JUNCTION BOXES, BOX COVERS, LOW VOLTAGE CUT-IN RINGS, J-HOOKS, BRIDLE RINGS, FLOOR BOXES, PLATES, PANELS, ENCLOSURES, POWER CIRCUITS, POWER CABLE AND POWER CONNECTIONS, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. CUSTOM AV PANELS SHALL BE PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY THE AVC, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 4. AC OUTLETS AND DATA/TELECOM JACKS SHOWN ON THESE DRAWINGS ARE FOR AV PURPOSES. REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR OTHER AC AND DATA/TELECOM NEEDS. 4. ALL LOW VOLTAGE AV RELATED DATA CABLES EXPOSED IN PLENUM SPACES MUST BE PLENUM RATED CABLE. 5. VERIFY FLOOR BOX LOCATION AND CONTENTS WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. LOCATIONS MAY CHANGE FROM ORIGINAL DRAWINGS BASED ON FINALIZED FURNITURE LAYOUTS. 6. ALL CIRCUITS POWERING AUDIO VISUAL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE DERIVED FROM THE SAME ELECTRICAL PHASE, BE INDIVIDUAL BRANCH CIRCUITS DEDICATED STRICTLY TO AV DEVICES, HAVE SUPPLEMENTAL INSULATED GROUNDING CONDUCTORS, AND BE PROTECTED BY 20 AMP BREAKERS PER CIRCUIT, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 7. HIGH VOLTAGE CIRCUITS POWERING AUDIO VISUAL EQUIPMENT SHALL NOT BE RUN IN CLOSE PROXIMITY TO OR SHARE BRANCH CIRCUITS POWERING MOTORIZED EQUIPMENT, LIGHTING SYSTEM DIMMERS OR ANY OTHER INDUCTIVE ELECTRICAL LOADS. 8. CONDUIT ROUTING TO BE COORDINATED & APPROVED ON SITE BY THE AUDIO VISUAL CONTRACTOR. 9. CONDUIT PULL BOXES SHALL BE PLACED AFTER 180 DEGREES OF BENDS AND/OR EVERY 100 FEET. 10. CONDUIT MATERIAL SHALL BE EMT STEEL CONDUIT (NOT FLEXIBLE, PVC OR ALUMINUM), ENDS SHALL BE FITTED WITH INSULATED BUSHINGS AND PULL STRING LEFT IN ALL CONDUIT. 11. CONDUIT CONTAINING AUDIO VISUAL CABLING SHALL NOT CONTAIN POWER OR DATA CABLING. AV SIGNAL CONDUIT SHALL BE SEPARATED FROM CONDUIT CONTAINING POWER CABLING BY AT LEAST 12". POWER CONDUIT MUST CROSS AV SIGNAL CONDUIT AT 90 DEGREE ANGLES. 12. BEND RADIUS FOR CONDUIT SIZED 2" OR LESS SHALL BE NO LESS THAN 6 TIMES THE INTERNAL DIAMETER. CONDUIT SIZED LARGER THAN 2" SHALL HAVE A BEND RADIUS NO LESS THAN 10 TIMES THE INTERNAL DIAMETER. 13. ALL FREE-AIR CABLES IN ACCESSIBLE CEILING SHALL BE IN J-HOOKS SECURED TO THE HARD DECK CEILING, WITH NO MORE THAN 60" SPACING BETWEEN HANGERS. HVAC NOTES 1. HVAC SUPPLY VENTS SHALL NOT BE INSTALLED IN THE CEILING BETWEEN THE PROJECTOR AND PROJECTION SCREEN TO PREVENT THERMAL ARTIFACTS IN PROJECTED IMAGE. 2. HVAC VENTS SHALL NOT BE INSTALLED NEXT TO HANGING (WALL OR CEILING MOUNTED) PROJECTION SCREENS TO PREVENT SCREEN MOVEMENT. AUDIO VISUAL INSTALLATION NOTES 1. ALL AUDIO VISUAL EQUIPMENT, CABLING, DEVICE MOUNTING AND TERMINATIONS SHOWN IN THESE DRAWINGS WILL BE PROVIDED BY THE AUDIO VISUAL CONTRACTOR, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 4. ALL LOW VOLTAGE AV CABLES SHALL BE PLENUM RATED CABLE. 5. ALL CABLES SHALL BE LABELED ON EACH END WITH WIRE ID #, AND SIGNAL SOURCE/DESTINATION. 6. ALL CONNECTION PLATE JACKS SHALL BE LABELED WITH ENGRAVING OR PRINTED LABELS. 7. RJ45 CONNECTORS SHALL BE TERMINATED USING THE T568B WIRING STANDARD. 8. VELCRO STRIPS SHALL BE USED TO SECURE CATX CABLES, NOT PLASTIC ZIP TIES. 9. POWER AND AV SIGNAL CABLES SHALL BE ROUTED ON SEPARATE SIDES OF THE EQUIPMENT RACK. RACK CABLING SHALL INCLUDE SERVICE LOOPS FOR EQUIPMENT REMOVAL AND SERVICING. 10. ALL AV DEVICES INSTALLED ON WALLS OR CEILING SHALL BE SECURED TO STRUCTURAL BLOCKING OR HARD DECK CEILING WITH SAFETY TETHERS. 11. SPEAKER GRILL PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS: FOLLOW MANUFACTURER INSTRUCTIONS, REMOVE GRILLS FROM SPEAKERS, USE ROLLERS OR BRUSHES (NOT SPRAYERS), AND CHECK THAT GRILL HOLES ARE NOT CLOGGED WITH PAINT. TVTV TV JJ J F F F DRAWING SYMBOLS DETAIL INDICATOR ELEVATION INDICATOR KEYNOTE 01 AV201 01 AV501 01 HEIGHT AFF (#) (#) (#) (#) (#) (#) (#) (#) (#) (#) (#) (#) AV DEVICE SYMBOLS SYMBOL DEVICE NAME DEVICE MOUNTING BOX TYPE BOX MIN DEPTH BOX MOUNTING METHOD PLATE NOTES ASSISTIVE LISTENING TRANSMITTER CEILING NONE NA NA NA DEVICE SURFACE MOUNTED ON T-BAR GRID ASSISTIVE LISTENING TRANSMITTER WALL 1-GANG 2-1/2" FLUSH TO FINISHED WALL LISTEN LA-347 DEVICE MOUNTED TO BOX PLATE AV INTERFACE WALL / FLOOR SEE SYMBOL FOR TYPE - REFER TO TA601 AV INTERFACE SCHEDULE PLATE TO OVERHANG BOX EDGES BY 3/4" CONTROL PANEL WALL SEE SYMBOL FOR TYPE - REFER TO TA601 CONTROL PANEL SCHEDULE 7" SEPARATION FROM BOX CENTERLINE TO ADJACENT BOX EDGE CAMERA CEILING / WALL SEE SYMBOL FOR TYPE - REFER TO TA601 CAMERA SCHEDULE DOCUMENT CAMERA CEILING 4" X 4" 3-1/2" SURFACE MOUNTED TO HARD DECK CEILING DEVICE FLUSH TO FINISHED CEILING FIRE ALARM INTERFACE WALL 4" x 4" 3-1/2" FLUSH TO FINISHED WALL BLANK FLOOR BOX FLOOR FLOOR BOXES SPECIFIED ON ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FLAT PANEL DISPLAY CEILING / WALL SEE SYMBOL FOR TYPE - REFER TO TA601 FLAT PANEL SCHEDULE MICROPHONE CEILING SEE SYMBOL FOR TYPE - REFER TO TA601 CEILING MICROPHONE SCHEDULE MICROPHONE WALL 1-GANG 3-1/2" FLUSH TO FINISHED WALL BLANK OCCUPANCY SENSOR CEILING 4" OCTAGON 2" FLUSH TO FINISHED CEILING PROJECTOR CEILING / WALL SEE SYMBOL FOR TYPE - REFER TO TA601 PROJECTOR SCHEDULE AV PULL BOX WALL SEE SYMBOL FOR TYPE - REFER TO TA601 AV PULL BOX SCHEDULE PROJECTION SCREEN CEILING / WALL SEE SYMBOL FOR TYPE - REFER TO TA601 PROJECTION SCREEN SCHEDULE ROOM AVAILABILITY PANEL WALL SEE SYMBOL FOR TYPE - REFER TO TA601 ROOM AVAILABILITY PANEL SCHEDULE SPEAKER CEILING / WALL SEE SYMBOL FOR TYPE & ZONE - REFER TO TA601 SPEAKER SCHEDULE PROJECTION SCREEN SWITCH (LOW VOLTAGE) WALL 1-GANG 2-1/2" FLUSH TO FINISHED WALL TABLE BOX FURNITURE SEE SYMBOL FOR TYPE - REFER TO TA601 TABLE BOX SCHEDULE VOLUME CONTROL WALL 1-GANG 3-1/2" FLUSH TO FINISHED WALL WIRELESS MIC ANTENNA CEILING (2) 1-GANG BOXES SPACED 14" APART 3-1/2" FLUSH TO FINISHED CEILING BLANK WIRELESS MIC ANTENNA WALL (2) 1-GANG BOXES SPACED 14" APART 3-1/2" FLUSH TO FINISHED WALL BLANK XXX# AL 18" SPEAKER ZONE NUMBER TYPE (REFER TO TA601 SCHEDULES) DEVICE SYMBOL AL AVX AV X CPX DC FPX FPX FA FB X M OS P X P X PB RA S X# S X# SS TB X VC WA WA AV DEVICE SYMBOLS KEY PSX PSX M C X C X TOMEI AV CONSULTING LLC 29 JANIVAR DRIVE ITHACA, NY 14850 607-592-5370 WWW.TOMEIAV.COM MIKE@TOMEIAV.COM DRAWING NUMBER: DRAWING TITLE: CLIENT: LOCATION: PROJECT NAME: REV # DATE REVISION THESE DRAWINGS ARE TO BE USED FOR DESIGN INTENT REFERENCE ONLY, NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION. THIS DOCUMENT MAY NOT BE COPIED, DUPLICATED OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN PERMISSION OF TOMEI AV CONSULTING LLC. © TOMEI AV CONSULTING LLC, . ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. ISSUE DATE: 2020 ITHACA COLLEGE ROTHSCHILD BLDG 215 E. STATE ST. ITHACA, NY PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 12/16/20 DRAWN BY: TA001 MT COVER SHEET - AV UP UP LOBBY 100 JAN 121 IP EXAM 2 110 IP EXAM 3 111 LEARNING CENTER 115 IP EXAM 3 112 SM GROUP/RELAX 115A CONF 131 OFFICE 1 101 OFFICE 2 102 OFFICE 3 103 OFFICE 4 104 ADMISSIONS COORDINATOR 117 ALL GENDER BATHROOM 118 WOMENS 119 INSTRUCTIONAL FACULTY 124 INSTRUCTIONAL FACULTY 125 PRINCIPAL FACULTY 126 MENS RM 120FACULTY & STAFF BREAK RM 127 CLASSROOM 132CLASSROOM 133 PRINCIPAL FACULTY 130 AV CLO 134 ALL GENDER BATHROOM 108 PRINCIPAL FACULTY 128 PRINCIPAL FACULTY 129 PROGRAM ACTIVITY CTR 107 IP EXAM 1 109 IT CLO 114 WAITING/RECPT 106 SITTING AREA 122A SITTING AREA 113 CORR / STAIR 122 HALL 116 CLO 106A BL1 BL3 ELEV LOBBY 105 WOMENS 240 MENS 241 ALL GENDER TLT 242 FACULTY & STAFF TLT 238 IT 235 LAUNDRY/STOR 234 LEARNER BREAK ROOM 239 SIM STOR 233 CLASSROOM 231 SM GROUP 202A SM GROUP 202B PROCEDURE ROOM 225 PATIENT RM 223 CONTROL 226 READY RM 227 PATIENT TLT 224 CONTROL 222 OPERATING ROOM 221 CONTROL 210 RECEPTION WAITING 208 PAT EXAM RM 212 PAT EXAM RM 213 PAT EXAM RM 214 PAT EXAM RM 217 PAT EXAM RM 216 PAT EXAM RM 215 DEBRIEF 219 PD OFFICE 207 PRINCIPAL FACULTY OFFICE 206 MED DIRECTOR 205 ADMIN ASST / RECEPTION 204 CLASSROOM 203 LEARNING CTR 202 ELEV LOBBY 200 HALL 211 CORRIDOR 228 CORR 230 MEDICAL STORAGE 220 TLT 209 LOCKERS 239A HALL 201 HALL 243 HALL 218 HALL 236 JAN 237 MEP 232 BL2 BL2A BL2A BL4 BL2 BL1 BL2A BL3 HALL 229 01-02 TA106 01-02 TA102 08 TA106 01-02 TA104 01 TA107 02 TA107 03 TA107 04 TA107 05 TA106 01-02 TA105 01 1ST FLOOR KEY PLAN - AV SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" DRAWN BY: TA101 MT KEY PLAN - AV TOMEI AV CONSULTING LLC 29 JANIVAR DRIVE ITHACA, NY 14850 607-592-5370 WWW.TOMEIAV.COM MIKE@TOMEIAV.COM DRAWING NUMBER: DRAWING TITLE: CLIENT: LOCATION: PROJECT NAME: REV # DATE REVISION THESE DRAWINGS ARE TO BE USED FOR DESIGN INTENT REFERENCE ONLY, NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION. THIS DOCUMENT MAY NOT BE COPIED, DUPLICATED OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN PERMISSION OF TOMEI AV CONSULTING LLC. © TOMEI AV CONSULTING LLC, . ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. ISSUE DATE: 2020 ITHACA COLLEGE ROTHSCHILD BLDG 215 E. STATE ST. ITHACA, NY PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 12/16/20 02 2ND FLOOR KEY PLAN - AV SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" 71"x126" (145" DIAGONAL) PROJECTION SCREEN WITH 2" BLACK DROP (TYPE A) (BY GC) (SEE TA501 DETAILS) DIVISIBLE WALL 8" 18" 8" 45" PROJECTION LOW VOLTAGE SCREEN SWITCH (BY GC) IN 1-GANG J-BOX (BY EC) FLUSH TO FINISHED WALL 139" 47" PROJECTION SCREEN LOW VOLTAGE SWITCH (BY GC) IN 1-GANG J-BOX (BY EC) FLUSH TO FINISHED WALL 90" PTZ CAMERA (TYPE A) (BY AVC). CAMERA MOUNT ATTACHED TO 2-GANG J-BOX (BY EC) FLUSH TO FINISHED WALL. LECTERN (BY AVC) (SEE TA502 DETAIL) SHADED - 10' WIDE AREA FOR WHITEBOARD (BY OTHERS) 71"x126" (145" DIAGONAL) PROJECTION SCREEN WITH 2" BLACK DROP (TYPE A) (BY GC) (SEE TA501 DETAILS) 119" 47" 90" PTZ CAMERA (TYPE A) (BY AVC). CAMERA MOUNT ATTACHED TO 2-GANG J-BOX (BY EC) FLUSH TO FINISHED WALL. SHADED - 10' WIDE AREA FOR WHITEBOARD (BY OTHERS) LECTERN (BY AVC) (SEE TA502 DETAIL) 27" 8" 18" 6"X6"X4" DEEP NEMA PULL BOX (TYPE B) FLUSH TO FINISHED WALL (BY EC) FOR LECTERN CABLE LOOM. DUPLEX POWER OUTLET, (4) DATA JACKS & (1) TELEPHONE JACK ADJACENT (BY EC). COVER PLATE (BY AVC) WITH GROMMET TO OVERHANG BOX BY 1" ON ALL SIDES TO COVER WALL ROUGH CUTOUT. PLATE COLOR TO MATCH FINISHED WALL. 6"X6"X4" DEEP NEMA PULL BOX (TYPE B) FLUSH TO FINISHED WALL (BY EC) FOR LECTERN CABLE LOOM. DUPLEX POWER OUTLET, (4) DATA JACKS & (1) TELEPHONE JACK ADJACENT (BY EC). COVER PLATE (BY AVC) WITH GROMMET TO OVERHANG BOX BY 1" ON ALL SIDES TO COVER WALL ROUGH CUTOUT. PLATE COLOR TO MATCH FINISHED WALL. UP CLASSROOM 132CLASSROOM 133 AV CLO 134 SS 45" SS 45" LECTERN WITH 60" ADA TURNING DIAMETER (SEE TA502 DETAIL) C A85" C A85" PB A18" 18" (4)18" EQUIPMENT RACK (BY AVC) ON CASTER BASE. AV CLOSET HVAC TO REMOVE ~4,500 BTU/HOUR OF HEAT CREATED BY AV DEVICES. TA102 04 03 TA102 04 03 C A90" C A90" FP G66" 66" FP D64" 64" FP D64" 64" 02 TA103 01 TA103 FP D64" 64" FP D64" 64" FP G66" 66" LECTERN WITH 60" ADA TURNING DIAMETER (SEE TA502 DETAIL) RA A45" (1) 115" RA A45" (1) 115" 08 TA107 08 TA107 CEILING MOUNTED PROJECTOR THROW & SCREEN DROP CEILING MOUNTED PROJECTOR THROW & SCREEN DROP PB B18" PB B18" 18" 18" CABLE LOOM ON FLOOR FROM WALL PULL BOX TO INSTRUCTOR RIGHT SIDE OF LECTERN (4D-1T)18" (4D-1T)18" CABLE LOOM ON FLOOR FROM WALL PULL BOX TO INSTRUCTOR RIGHT SIDE OF LECTERN DIVISIBLE WALL PILLAR IN MIDDLE OF ROOM 85"85" PTZ CAMERA (TYPE A) (BY AVC) ON PILLAR IN MIDDLE OF ROOM. CAMERA MOUNT ATTACHED TO 2-GANG J-BOX (BY EC) FLUSH TO FINISHED WALL. PTZ CAMERA (TYPE A) (BY AVC) ON PILLAR IN MIDDLE OF ROOM. CAMERA MOUNT ATTACHED TO 2-GANG J-BOX (BY EC) FLUSH TO FINISHED WALL. 48" EQUIPMENT RACK (BY AVC) INSIDE AV CLOSET. AV CLOSET HVAC TO REMOVE ~4,500 BTU/HOUR OF HEAT CREATED BY AV DEVICES. INSIDE AV CLOSET (ALL BY EC & FLUSH TO FINISHED WALL): 10"X10" NEMA WALL PULL BOX QUAD POWER OUTLET (4) DATA JACKS 18" PILLAR IN MIDDLE OF ROOM EQ.EQ. C L 75" FLAT PANEL DISPLAY (TYPE G) (BY AVC), WALL BLOCKING (BY GC) & CHIEF PAC526FW WALL BOX WITH DUPLEX POWER OUTLET (SEE TA501 DETAILS). DISPLAY TO ALSO ACT AS CONFIDENCE MONITOR DURING LECTURE STYLE TEACHING. 66" 75" FLAT PANEL DISPLAY (TYPE G) (BY AVC), WALL BLOCKING (BY GC) & CHIEF PAC526FW WALL BOX WITH DUPLEX POWER OUTLET (SEE TA501 DETAILS). DISPLAY TO ALSO ACT AS CONFIDENCE MONITOR DURING LECTURE STYLE TEACHING. 66" 601 AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 10'-0" AFF GWB AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 10'-0" AFF GWB AT 15'-0" AFF GWB AT 9'-0" AFF AL AL PS A THROW DISTANCE: 240" P A PS A THROW DISTANCE: 240" P A S A1 S A1 S A1 S A1 S A1 S A1 S A2 S A2 S A2 S A2 S A2 S A2 M A1 M A1 M A1 M A1 M A1 M A1 M A1 M A1 M A1 M A2 M A2 M A2 M A2 M A2 M A2 M A2 M A2 M A2 TOMEI AV CONSULTING LLC 29 JANIVAR DRIVE ITHACA, NY 14850 607-592-5370 WWW.TOMEIAV.COM MIKE@TOMEIAV.COM DRAWING NUMBER: DRAWING TITLE: CLIENT: LOCATION: PROJECT NAME: REV # DATE REVISION THESE DRAWINGS ARE TO BE USED FOR DESIGN INTENT REFERENCE ONLY, NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION. THIS DOCUMENT MAY NOT BE COPIED, DUPLICATED OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN PERMISSION OF TOMEI AV CONSULTING LLC. © TOMEI AV CONSULTING LLC, . ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. ISSUE DATE: 2020 ITHACA COLLEGE ROTHSCHILD BLDG 215 E. STATE ST. ITHACA, NY PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 12/16/20 DRAWN BY: TA102 MT AV INFRASTRUCTURE DESIGN 03 CLASSROOM 132 & 133 SOUTH WALL ELEVATION - AV SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" 01 CLASSROOM 132 & 133 ENLARGED FLOOR PLAN - AV SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 04 CLASSROOM 132 & 133 NORTH WALL & PILLAR ELEVATION - AV SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" 02 CLASSROOM 132 & 133 ENLARGED REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - AV SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" PB AV PULL BOX (RACK) SS SCREEN SWITCH FINISHED CEILING FINISHED FLOOR CLASSROOM 133 AV CLOSET 134 AV CLOSET 134 ALL AV CABLES TO BE RUN FREE-AIR THROUGH ACCESSIBLE CEILING ON J-HOOKS 3/4" 2" C CAMERA 2" 2" 1" FP FLAT PANEL DISPLAY WALL BOX 1" FP FLAT PANEL DISPLAY WALL BOX 1" FP FLAT PANEL DISPLAY WALL BOX 1" C CAMERA 1" AV AV PULL BOX (LECTERN) 1.25" 1.25" CLASSROOM 133 SS SCREEN SWITCH CLASSROOM 132 3/4" C CAMERA 1" FP FLAT PANEL DISPLAY WALL BOX 1" FP FLAT PANEL DISPLAY WALL BOX 1" FP FLAT PANEL DISPLAY WALL BOX 1" C CAMERA 1" AV AV PULL BOX (LECTERN) 1.25" 1.25" CLASSROOM 132 65" FLAT PANEL DISPLAY (TYPE D) (BY AVC), WALL BLOCKING (BY GC) & CHIEF PAC526FW WALL BOX WITH DUPLEX POWER OUTLET (SEE TA501 DETAILS) (TYPICAL OF 2) 64" 64" EQ.EQ. C L 109" PILLAR BOTTOM OF CAMERA: 80" AFF HANGING PENDANT CEILING MIC (BY AVC). SEE TA501 DETAIL. (TYPICAL OF 3) BOTTOM OF MIC: 96" AFF PILLAR HANGING PENDANT CEILING MIC (BY AVC). SEE TA501 DETAIL. (TYPICAL OF 3) BOTTOM OF MIC: 96" AFF 64" 65" FLAT PANEL DISPLAY (TYPE D) (BY AVC), WALL BLOCKING (BY GC) & CHIEF PAC526FW WALL BOX WITH DUPLEX POWER OUTLET (SEE TA501 DETAILS) (TYPICAL OF 2) 64" 85"85" C L BOTTOM OF CAMERA: 80" AFF TOMEI AV CONSULTING LLC 29 JANIVAR DRIVE ITHACA, NY 14850 607-592-5370 WWW.TOMEIAV.COM MIKE@TOMEIAV.COM DRAWING NUMBER: DRAWING TITLE: CLIENT: LOCATION: PROJECT NAME: REV # DATE REVISION THESE DRAWINGS ARE TO BE USED FOR DESIGN INTENT REFERENCE ONLY, NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION. THIS DOCUMENT MAY NOT BE COPIED, DUPLICATED OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN PERMISSION OF TOMEI AV CONSULTING LLC. © TOMEI AV CONSULTING LLC, . ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. ISSUE DATE: 2020 ITHACA COLLEGE ROTHSCHILD BLDG 215 E. STATE ST. ITHACA, NY PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 12/16/20 DRAWN BY: TA103 MT AV INFRASTRUCTURE DESIGN 03 CLASSROOMS 132 & 133 CONDUIT RISER - AV SCALE: NTS CONDUIT RISER NOTES 1) ALL CONDUIT TO BE 1" EMT STEEL EXCEPT WHERE INDICATED 2) ELECTRICAL AND NETWORK DATA CONDUIT/PULL-BOXES TO BE SPECIFIED BY OTHERS. IF SHOWN ON THIS DRAWING, THEY ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY. 3) THIS DRAWING DOES NOT INDICATE EXACT JUNCTION/PULL BOX LOCATIONS, QUANTITIES, OR CONDUIT ROUTING. COORDINATE FINAL LOCATION, ROUTING, AND FINISH IN FIELD WITH OWNER'S REP AND AV CONTRACTOR. 4) " T " INDICATES CONDUIT STUB, RATHER THAN CONTINUOUS CONDUIT RUN BETWEEN BOXES/DEVICES. CONDUIT STUBS TO ACCESSIBLE CEILING UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 5) ALL FREE-AIR CABLES IN ACCESSIBLE CEILING SHALL BE IN J-HOOKS SECURED TO THE HARD DECK CEILING, WITH NO MORE THAN 60" SPACING BETWEEN HANGERS (PROVIDED BY GC/EC) 6) LOW VOLTAGE CUT-IN RINGS AND FISHED WALLS MAY BE ACCEPTED PENDING APPROVAL BY THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE 01 CLASSROOM 132 EAST SECTION - AV SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" 02 CLASSROOM 133 WEST SECTION - AV SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" CLASSROOM 203 SS45" FB (4) C A 90" SS45" CEILING MOUNTED PROJECTOR THROW & SCREEN DROP LECTERN WITH 60" ADA TURNING DIAMETER (SEE TA502 DETAIL) CEILING MOUNTED PROJECTOR THROW & SCREEN DROP C A 85" FP D70" 70" FP G72" 72" FP D70" 70" TA104 04 0503 CP (1) FINISHED CEILING FINISHED FLOOR ALL AV CABLES TO BE RUN FREE-AIR THROUGH ACCESSIBLE CEILING ON J-HOOKS SS SCREEN SWITCH FBFLOOR BOX CLASSROOM 203 3/4" 1.25" 1.25" SS SCREEN SWITCH 3/4" C CAMERA 1" FP FLAT PANEL DISPLAY WALL BOX 1" FP FLAT PANEL DISPLAY WALL BOX 1" FP FLAT PANEL DISPLAY WALL BOX 1" C CAMERA 1" CLASSROOM 203 65" FLAT PANEL DISPLAY (TYPE D) (BY AVC), WALL BLOCKING (BY GC) & CHIEF PAC526FW WALL BOX WITH DUPLEX POWER OUTLET (SEE TA501 DETAILS) 70" 75" FLAT PANEL DISPLAY (TYPE G) (BY AVC), WALL BLOCKING (BY GC) & CHIEF PAC526FW WALL BOX WITH DUPLEX POWER OUTLET (SEE TA501 DETAILS). DISPLAY TO ALSO ACT AS CONFIDENCE MONITOR DURING LECTURE STYLE TEACHING. 72" PTZ CAMERA (TYPE A) (BY AVC). CAMERA MOUNT ATTACHED TO 2-GANG J-BOX (BY EC) FLUSH TO FINISHED WALL. EQ.EQ. C L 41" 85" EQ. EQ. AT 12'-0" AFF AT 10'-0" AFF 601 AT 10'-0" AFF 601 AT 10'-0" AFF S A1 M A S A1 S A1 S A1 S A1 S A1 M A M A M A M A M A M A M A AL THROW DISTANCE: 164" PS B P B THROW DISTANCE: 164" PS B P B 6" 45" 58"X104" (119" DIAGONAL) PROJECTION SCREEN WITH 14" BLACK DROP (TYPE B) (BY GC) (SEE TA501 DETAILS) PROJECTION SCREEN LOW VOLTAGE SWITCH (BY GC) IN 1-GANG J-BOX (BY EC) FLUSH TO FINISHED WALL 58"X104" (119" DIAGONAL) PROJECTION SCREEN WITH 14" BLACK DROP (TYPE B) (BY GC) (SEE TA501 DETAILS) 6" 45" PROJECTION SCREEN LOW VOLTAGE SWITCH (BY GC) IN 1-GANG J-BOX (BY EC) FLUSH TO FINISHED WALL 90" 48" PTZ CAMERA (TYPE A) (BY AVC). CAMERA MOUNT ATTACHED TO 2-GANG J-BOX (BY EC) FLUSH TO FINISHED WALL. SHADED - 10' WIDE AREA FOR WHITEBOARD (BY OTHERS) LECTERN (BY AVC) (SEE TA502 DETAIL) 65" FLAT PANEL DISPLAY (TYPE D) (BY AVC), WALL BLOCKING (BY GC) & CHIEF PAC526FW WALL BOX WITH DUPLEX POWER OUTLET (SEE TA501 DETAILS) 70" EQ.EQ. C L TOMEI AV CONSULTING LLC 29 JANIVAR DRIVE ITHACA, NY 14850 607-592-5370 WWW.TOMEIAV.COM MIKE@TOMEIAV.COM DRAWING NUMBER: DRAWING TITLE: CLIENT: LOCATION: PROJECT NAME: REV # DATE REVISION THESE DRAWINGS ARE TO BE USED FOR DESIGN INTENT REFERENCE ONLY, NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION. THIS DOCUMENT MAY NOT BE COPIED, DUPLICATED OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN PERMISSION OF TOMEI AV CONSULTING LLC. © TOMEI AV CONSULTING LLC, . ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. ISSUE DATE: 2020 ITHACA COLLEGE ROTHSCHILD BLDG 215 E. STATE ST. ITHACA, NY PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 12/16/20 DRAWN BY: TA104 MT AV INFRASTRUCTURE DESIGN CONDUIT RISER NOTES 1) ALL CONDUIT TO BE 1" EMT STEEL EXCEPT WHERE INDICATED 2) ELECTRICAL AND NETWORK DATA CONDUIT/PULL-BOXES TO BE SPECIFIED BY OTHERS. IF SHOWN ON THIS DRAWING, THEY ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY. 3) THIS DRAWING DOES NOT INDICATE EXACT JUNCTION/PULL BOX LOCATIONS, QUANTITIES, OR CONDUIT ROUTING. COORDINATE FINAL LOCATION, ROUTING, AND FINISH IN FIELD WITH OWNER'S REP AND AV CONTRACTOR. 4) " T " INDICATES CONDUIT STUB, RATHER THAN CONTINUOUS CONDUIT RUN BETWEEN BOXES/DEVICES. CONDUIT STUBS TO ACCESSIBLE CEILING UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 5) ALL FREE-AIR CABLES IN ACCESSIBLE CEILING SHALL BE IN J-HOOKS SECURED TO THE HARD DECK CEILING, WITH NO MORE THAN 60" SPACING BETWEEN HANGERS (PROVIDED BY GC/EC) 6) LOW VOLTAGE CUT-IN RINGS AND FISHED WALLS MAY BE ACCEPTED PENDING APPROVAL BY THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE 01 CLASSROOM 203 ENLARGED FLOOR PLAN - AV SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 03 CLASSROOM 203 WEST WALL ELEVATION - AV SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" 06 CLASSROOM 203 CONDUIT RISER - AV SCALE: NTS 02 CLASSROOM 203 ENLARGED REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - AV SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 05 CLASSROOM 203 EAST WALL ELEVATION - AV SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" 04 CLASSROOM 203 SOUTH WALL ELEVATION - AV SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" SIM STOR 233 CLASSROOM 231 CORR 230 HALL 229 SS 45" FP D70" 70" C A 85" FP G72" 72" TA105 05 03 04 CEILING MOUNTED PROJECTOR THROW & SCREEN DROP SS 45" FB (4) LECTERN WITH 60" ADA TURNING DIAMETER (SEE TA502 DETAIL) C A 90" FP D70" 70" CEILING MOUNTED PROJECTOR THROW & SCREEN DROP (1) FINISHED CEILING FINISHED FLOOR ALL AV CABLES TO BE RUN FREE-AIR THROUGH ACCESSIBLE CEILING ON J-HOOKS SS SCREEN SWITCH FBFLOOR BOX CLASSROOM 231 3/4" 1.25" 1.25" SS SCREEN SWITCH 3/4" C CAMERA 1" FP FLAT PANEL DISPLAY WALL BOX 1" FP FLAT PANEL DISPLAY WALL BOX 1" FP FLAT PANEL DISPLAY WALL BOX 1" C CAMERA 1" CLASSROOM 231 6" 45" 6" 45" 90" SHADED - 10' WIDE AREA FOR WHITEBOARD (BY OTHERS) 48" 65"X116" (133" DIAGONAL) PROJECTION SCREEN WITH 7" BLACK DROP (TYPE C) (BY GC) (SEE TA501 DETAILS) 65"X116" (133" DIAGONAL) PROJECTION SCREEN WITH 7" BLACK DROP (TYPE C) (BY GC) (SEE TA501 DETAILS) PTZ CAMERA (TYPE A) (BY AVC). CAMERA MOUNT ATTACHED TO 2-GANG J-BOX (BY EC) FLUSH TO FINISHED WALL. PROJECTION SCREEN LOW VOLTAGE SWITCH (BY GC) IN 1-GANG J-BOX (BY EC) FLUSH TO FINISHED WALL PROJECTION SCREEN LOW VOLTAGE SWITCH (BY GC) IN 1-GANG J-BOX (BY EC) FLUSH TO FINISHED WALL LECTERN (BY AVC) (SEE TA502 DETAIL) 601 AT 9'-0" AFF GWB AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 10'-0" AFF THROW DISTANCE: 196" P B PS C THROW DISTANCE: 196" P B PS C AL S A1 S A1 S A1 S A1 S A1 S A1 S A1 S A1 M A M A M A M A M A M A M A M A PILLAR IN MIDDLE OF ROOM 85" PTZ CAMERA (TYPE A) (BY AVC) ON PILLAR IN MIDDLE OF ROOM. CAMERA MOUNT ATTACHED TO 2-GANG J-BOX (BY EC) FLUSH TO FINISHED WALL. 75" FLAT PANEL DISPLAY (TYPE G) (BY AVC), WALL BLOCKING (BY GC) & CHIEF PAC526FW WALL BOX WITH DUPLEX POWER OUTLET (SEE TA501 DETAILS). DISPLAY TO ALSO ACT AS CONFIDENCE MONITOR DURING LECTURE STYLE TEACHING. 72" 65" FLAT PANEL DISPLAY (TYPE D) (BY AVC), WALL BLOCKING (BY GC) & CHIEF PAC526FW WALL BOX WITH DUPLEX POWER OUTLET (SEE TA501 DETAILS) 70" EQ.EQ. C LEQ.EQ. C L 65" FLAT PANEL DISPLAY (TYPE D) (BY AVC), WALL BLOCKING (BY GC) & CHIEF PAC526FW WALL BOX WITH DUPLEX POWER OUTLET (SEE TA501 DETAILS) 70" EQ.EQ. C L TOMEI AV CONSULTING LLC 29 JANIVAR DRIVE ITHACA, NY 14850 607-592-5370 WWW.TOMEIAV.COM MIKE@TOMEIAV.COM DRAWING NUMBER: DRAWING TITLE: CLIENT: LOCATION: PROJECT NAME: REV # DATE REVISION THESE DRAWINGS ARE TO BE USED FOR DESIGN INTENT REFERENCE ONLY, NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION. THIS DOCUMENT MAY NOT BE COPIED, DUPLICATED OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN PERMISSION OF TOMEI AV CONSULTING LLC. © TOMEI AV CONSULTING LLC, . ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. ISSUE DATE: 2020 ITHACA COLLEGE ROTHSCHILD BLDG 215 E. STATE ST. ITHACA, NY PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 12/16/20 DRAWN BY: TA105 MT AV INFRASTRUCTURE DESIGN CONDUIT RISER NOTES 1) ALL CONDUIT TO BE 1" EMT STEEL EXCEPT WHERE INDICATED 2) ELECTRICAL AND NETWORK DATA CONDUIT/PULL-BOXES TO BE SPECIFIED BY OTHERS. IF SHOWN ON THIS DRAWING, THEY ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY. 3) THIS DRAWING DOES NOT INDICATE EXACT JUNCTION/PULL BOX LOCATIONS, QUANTITIES, OR CONDUIT ROUTING. COORDINATE FINAL LOCATION, ROUTING, AND FINISH IN FIELD WITH OWNER'S REP AND AV CONTRACTOR. 4) " T " INDICATES CONDUIT STUB, RATHER THAN CONTINUOUS CONDUIT RUN BETWEEN BOXES/DEVICES. CONDUIT STUBS TO ACCESSIBLE CEILING UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 5) ALL FREE-AIR CABLES IN ACCESSIBLE CEILING SHALL BE IN J-HOOKS SECURED TO THE HARD DECK CEILING, WITH NO MORE THAN 60" SPACING BETWEEN HANGERS (PROVIDED BY GC/EC) 6) LOW VOLTAGE CUT-IN RINGS AND FISHED WALLS MAY BE ACCEPTED PENDING APPROVAL BY THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE 01 CLASSROOM 231 ENLARGED FLOOR PLAN - AV SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 03 CLASSROOM 231 SOUTH WALL ELEVATION - AV SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" 06 CLASSROOM 231 CONDUIT RISER - AV SCALE: NTS 02 CLASSROOM 231 ENLARGED REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - AV SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 05 CLASSROOM 231 NORTH WALL ELEVATION - AV SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" 04 CLASSROOM 231 WEST WALL ELEVATION - AV SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" CONF 131 FP B64" 64" (2)64" 03 TA106 RA A45" (1) 115" 08 TA107 AV C18" 18" (4)18" (1)18" 601 AT 9'-0" AFF 601 AT 9'-0" AFF AL FINISHED CEILING FINISHED FLOOR CONFERENCE ROOM 131 FP FLAT PANEL DISPLAY WALL BOX CONFERENCE ROOM 131 ALL AV CABLES TO BE RUN FREE-AIR THROUGH ACCESSIBLE CEILING ON J-HOOKS 1.25" AV AV INPUT PLATE 1" 1" EQ.EQ. C L 65" FLAT PANEL DISPLAY (TYPE B) (BY AVC), WALL BLOCKING (BY GC) & CHIEF PAC526FW WALL BOX WITH DUPLEX POWER OUTLET & (2) DATA JACKS (BY EC) (SEE TA501 DETAILS) 64" CAMERA/MIC/SOUNDBAR ON WALL MOUNT (BY AVC) WITH EXPANSION MIC ON TABLE (BY AVC) 18" 4-GANG 3.5" DEEP J-BOX FLUSH TO FINISHED WALL (BY EC) FOR AV INTERFACE PLATE (TYPE C) (BY AVC). DUPLEX POWER OUTLET, (4) DATA & (1) PHONE JACKS ADJACENT (BY EC). 18" 35" 55" FLAT PANEL DISPLAY (TYPE A) (BY AVC), WALL BLOCKING (BY GC) & CHIEF PAC526FW WALL BOX WITH DUPLEX POWER OUTLET & (2) DATA JACKS (BY EC) (SEE TA501 DETAILS) BUTTON CONTROL PANEL (TYPE A) (BY AVC) IN 2-GANG 3.5" DEEP J-BOX FLUSH TO FINISHED WALL (BY EC) 2-GANG 3.5" DEEP J-BOX FLUSH TO FINISHED WALL (BY EC) FOR POSSIBLE FUTURE AV INTERFACE PLATE (TYPE B) (BY AVC). DUPLEX POWER OUTLET & (2) DATA JACKS ADJACENT. 45" 15" 41" SHELF (SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING FOR SPECIFICATIONS & HEIGHT AFF) CP CONTROL PANEL AV AV INPUT PLATE FINISHED CEILING FINISHED FLOOR DEBRIEF 219 1.25" FP FLAT PANEL DISPLAY WALL BOX 3/4" DEBRIEF 219 DEBRIEF 219 MEDICAL STORAGE 220 FP A60" CP A45" AV B18" 18" (2)18" 60" (2)60" 09 TA106 SM GROUP 202A SM GROUP 202B FP A59" CP A45" AV A18" 18" (2) 18" 59" (2) 59" 06 TA106 FP A59" AV A18" 18" (2)18" 59" (2)59" CP A45" 06 TA106 CP CONTROL PANEL AV AV INPUT PLATE FINISHED CEILING FINISHED FLOOR SMALL GROUP ROOM (TYPICAL) 1.25" FP FLAT PANEL DISPLAY WALL BOX 3/4" SMALL GROUP ROOM (TYPICAL) 1.25" EQ.EQ. C L 18" 32" 55" FLAT PANEL DISPLAY (TYPE A) (BY AVC), WALL BLOCKING (BY GC) & CHIEF PAC526FW WALL BOX WITH DUPLEX POWER OUTLET & (2) DATA JACKS (BY EC) (SEE TA501 DETAILS) BUTTON CONTROL PANEL (TYPE A) (BY AVC) IN 2-GANG 3.5" DEEP J-BOX FLUSH TO FINISHED WALL (BY EC) CAMERA/MIC/SOUNDBAR ON WALL MOUNT (BY AVC) 2-GANG 3.5" DEEP J-BOX FLUSH TO FINISHED WALL (BY EC) FOR AV INTERFACE PLATE (TYPE A) (BY AVC). DUPLEX POWER OUTLET & (2) DATA JACKS ADJACENT (BY EC). 45" 14" DRAWN BY: TA106 MT AV INFRASTRUCTURE DESIGN TOMEI AV CONSULTING LLC 29 JANIVAR DRIVE ITHACA, NY 14850 607-592-5370 WWW.TOMEIAV.COM MIKE@TOMEIAV.COM DRAWING NUMBER: DRAWING TITLE: CLIENT: LOCATION: PROJECT NAME: REV # DATE REVISION THESE DRAWINGS ARE TO BE USED FOR DESIGN INTENT REFERENCE ONLY, NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION. THIS DOCUMENT MAY NOT BE COPIED, DUPLICATED OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN PERMISSION OF TOMEI AV CONSULTING LLC. © TOMEI AV CONSULTING LLC, . ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. ISSUE DATE: 2020 ITHACA COLLEGE ROTHSCHILD BLDG 215 E. STATE ST. ITHACA, NY PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 12/16/20 CONDUIT RISER NOTES 1) ALL CONDUIT TO BE 1" EMT STEEL EXCEPT WHERE INDICATED 2) ELECTRICAL AND NETWORK DATA CONDUIT/PULL-BOXES TO BE SPECIFIED BY OTHERS. IF SHOWN ON THIS DRAWING, THEY ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY. 3) THIS DRAWING DOES NOT INDICATE EXACT JUNCTION/PULL BOX LOCATIONS, QUANTITIES, OR CONDUIT ROUTING. COORDINATE FINAL LOCATION, ROUTING, AND FINISH IN FIELD WITH OWNER'S REP AND AV CONTRACTOR. 4) " T " INDICATES CONDUIT STUB, RATHER THAN CONTINUOUS CONDUIT RUN BETWEEN BOXES/DEVICES. CONDUIT STUBS TO ACCESSIBLE CEILING UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 5) ALL FREE-AIR CABLES IN ACCESSIBLE CEILING SHALL BE IN J-HOOKS SECURED TO THE HARD DECK CEILING, WITH NO MORE THAN 60" SPACING BETWEEN HANGERS (PROVIDED BY GC/EC) 6) LOW VOLTAGE CUT-IN RINGS AND FISHED WALLS MAY BE ACCEPTED PENDING APPROVAL BY THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE 01 CONFERENCE 131 ENL. FLOOR PLAN - AV SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 02 CONFERENCE 131 ENL. RCP - AV SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 03 CONFERENCE 131 WALL ELEVATION - AV SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" 04 CONFERENCE 131 CONDUIT RISER - AV SCALE: NTS 08 DEBRIEF 219 ENLARGED FLOOR PLAN - AV SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 09 DEBRIEF 219 WALL ELEVATION - AV SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" 10 DEBRIEF 219 CONDUIT RISER - AV SCALE: NTS 05 SM. GRP. ROOMS 202A & 202B ENL. FLOOR PLAN - AV SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 06 SM. GRP. ROOMS 202A & 202B (TYP) ELEVATION - AV SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" 07 SM. GRP. ROOMS 202A & 202B (TYP) CONDUIT RISER - AV SCALE: NTS 2-GANG 3.5" DEEP J-BOX WITH BLANK COVER PLATE (BY EC) FLUSH TO FINISHED WALL FOR POSSIBLE FUTURE INSTALLATION OF 7" ROOM AVAILABILITY TOUCH PANEL BY OWNER 45" (1) DATA JACK (BY EC) ABOVE FINISHED CEILING IN ACCESSIBLE SPACE. 3/4" EMT CONDUIT (BY EC) FROM 2-GANG WALL BOX BELOW STUBBED IN ACCESSIBLE CEILING NEAR DATA JACK. 12"12" CENTERLINE OF J-BOX TO BE 12" FROM DOORWAY (SEE FLOOR PLANS FOR RA SYMBOL LOCATIONS) FINISHED CEILING LOBBY 100 06 TA107 FP F66" 66" (2) 66" PROGRAM ACTIVITY CTR 107 CLO FP F66" 66" (2) 66" FP H66" 66" (2) 66" TA107 06 07 INSTRUCTIONAL CORR / STAIR 122 FP C66" 66" (2)66" 05 TA107 FACULTY & STAFF TLT 238 LEARNER BREAK ROOM 239 LOCKERS 239A HALL 236 FP C66" 66" (2) 66" 05 TA107 65" FLAT PANEL DISPLAY (TYPE F) (BY AVC), WALL BLOCKING (BY GC) & CHIEF PAC526FW WALL BOX WITH DUPLEX POWER OUTLET & (2) DATA JACKS (BY EC) (SEE TA501 DETAILS) 66" 43" FLAT PANEL DISPLAY (TYPE C) (BY AVC), WALL BLOCKING (BY GC) & CHIEF PAC526FW WALL BOX WITH DUPLEX POWER OUTLET & (2) DATA JACKS (BY EC) (SEE TA501 DETAILS) 66" FINISHED CEILING FINISHED FLOOR AV CABLE TO BE RUN FREE-AIR THROUGH ACCESSIBLE CEILING TO DATA JACK RA ROOM AVAILABILITY PANEL ROOM AVAILABILITY PANEL INFRASTRUCTURE (TYPICAL) 3/4" ROOM AVAILABILITY PANEL INFRASTRUCTURE (TYPICAL) INFRASTRUCURE ONLY FOR FUTURE FLAT PANEL DISPLAY (TYPE H): WALL BLOCKING (BY GC) & CHIEF PAC526FCW WALL BOX (INCLUDES WHITE COVER PLATE) WITH DUPLEX POWER OUTLET & (2) DATA JACKS (BY EC) (SEE TA501 DETAILS) 66" TOMEI AV CONSULTING LLC 29 JANIVAR DRIVE ITHACA, NY 14850 607-592-5370 WWW.TOMEIAV.COM MIKE@TOMEIAV.COM DRAWING NUMBER: DRAWING TITLE: CLIENT: LOCATION: PROJECT NAME: REV # DATE REVISION THESE DRAWINGS ARE TO BE USED FOR DESIGN INTENT REFERENCE ONLY, NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION. THIS DOCUMENT MAY NOT BE COPIED, DUPLICATED OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN PERMISSION OF TOMEI AV CONSULTING LLC. © TOMEI AV CONSULTING LLC, . ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. ISSUE DATE: 2020 ITHACA COLLEGE ROTHSCHILD BLDG 215 E. STATE ST. ITHACA, NY PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 12/16/20 DRAWN BY: TA107 MT AV INFRASTRUCTURE DESIGN CONDUIT RISER NOTES 1) ALL CONDUIT TO BE 1" EMT STEEL EXCEPT WHERE INDICATED 2) ELECTRICAL AND NETWORK DATA CONDUIT/PULL-BOXES TO BE SPECIFIED BY OTHERS. IF SHOWN ON THIS DRAWING, THEY ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY. 3) THIS DRAWING DOES NOT INDICATE EXACT JUNCTION/PULL BOX LOCATIONS, QUANTITIES, OR CONDUIT ROUTING. COORDINATE FINAL LOCATION, ROUTING, AND FINISH IN FIELD WITH OWNER'S REP AND AV CONTRACTOR. 4) " T " INDICATES CONDUIT STUB, RATHER THAN CONTINUOUS CONDUIT RUN BETWEEN BOXES/DEVICES. CONDUIT STUBS TO ACCESSIBLE CEILING UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 5) ALL FREE-AIR CABLES IN ACCESSIBLE CEILING SHALL BE IN J-HOOKS SECURED TO THE HARD DECK CEILING, WITH NO MORE THAN 60" SPACING BETWEEN HANGERS (PROVIDED BY GC/EC) 6) LOW VOLTAGE CUT-IN RINGS AND FISHED WALLS MAY BE ACCEPTED PENDING APPROVAL BY THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE 08 ROOM AVAILABILITY PANEL (TYP) ELEVATION - AV SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" 01 LOBBY 100 ENLARGED FLOOR PLAN - AV SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 02 PROGRAM ACTIVITY CENTER 107 ENL. FLOOR PLAN - AV SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 03 CORRIDOR 122 ENLARGED FLOOR PLAN - AV SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 04 LEARNER BREAK ROOM 239 ENL. FLOOR PLAN - AV SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 06 65" DIGITAL SIGNAGE DISPLAY (TYP) ELEVATION - AV SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0"05 43" DIGITAL SIGNAGE DISPLAY (TYP) ELEVATION - AV SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" 09 ROOM AVAILABILITY PANEL (TYP) CONDUIT RISER - AV SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0"07 DISPLAY INFRASTRUCTURE ONLY (TYP) ELEVATION - AV SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" DISPLAY HEIGHT AFF VARIES BY LOCATION DISPLAY SIZE VARIES BY LOCATION CHIEF PAC526FW IN-WALL BOX (PROVIDED BY EC) FLUSH TO FINISHED WALL, FOR POWER, DATA & CABLE PATH. SEE SEPARATE CHIEF PAC526FW DETAIL. WALL BLOCKING (3/4" PLYWOOD PROVIDED BY GC) BEHIND FINISHED WALL SECURED TO BUILDING STRUCTURE, SPANNING THE HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF THE DISPLAY MOUNT, MEASURING AT LEAST 46"W X 24"H. ABLE TO HOLD GROSS WEIGHT OF DISPLAY PER MANUFACTURER CUT SHEET PLUS SAFETY FACTOR OF FIVE. PROJECT ARCHITECT OR STRUCTURAL ENGINEER TO REVIEW. WALL MOUNT VARIES BY LOCATION BUILDING STRUCTURE (STUD) (BY GC) CHIEF PAC526FW IN-WALL BOX (BY EC) WALL BLOCKING (BY GC) FINISHED WALL (BY GC) POSSIBLE KO LOCATIONS FOR RACO 560 (OR EQUAL) SWITCH BOXES FOR INSIDE FACING AC DUPLEX OUTLET & DATA JACKS (BY EC) (TYP. OF BOTTOM AND SIDES) POSSIBLE KO LOCATIONS FOR 1/2", 1", OR 1.25" CONDUIT (BY EC) FOR AV LOW VOLTAGE CABLING (TYP. OF BOTTOM AND SIDES) TOP FRONT 14 1/4" REMOVABLE TABS FOR SHALLOW STUDS (TYP. OF SIDES & BOTTOM) SIDE 14 1/4" 3 7/8" BOTTOM ISO IN-WALL BOX SPANNING & ATTACHED TO TWO STUDS FINISHED WALL (BY GC) 3/4" PLYWOOD WALL BLOCKING (BY GC) COMPLETE OUTSIDE SURFACE OF BOX INSIDE WALL CAVITY SHALL BE TREATED WITH ACOUSTICAL PUTTY (KINETICS NOISE CONTROL ISO BACKER OR EQUAL) PROVIDED BY EC SHOWN WITH RACO 560 SWITCH BOXES FOR INSIDE FACING AC DUPLEX OUTLET & DATA JACKS (BY EC). SEE FLOOR PLANS FOR DATA JACK QUANTITY. CONDUIT FOR POWER/DATA SPECIFIED ON ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. AV LOW VOLTAGE CONDUIT SHOWN (BY EC - SEE CONDUIT RISERS FOR QUANTITY & SIZE). BOX INTERIOR TO REMAIN OPEN AND CLEAR FOR AV DEVICES. INSTALL FLANGE (INCLUDED WITH PAC526FW BOX) COVERING ROUGH CUT OF FINISHED WALL OPENING HARD DECK CEILING CEILING TILE T-BAR BRIDGE (PROVIDED BY AVC) (TYP. OF 2) SAFETY CABLE FROM SPEAKER BACKCAN SHALL BE AIRCRAFT CABLE (PROVIDED BY AVC) SUSPENDED FROM HARD DECK OR EQUIV. BUILDING STRUCTURE ANCHOR (PROVIDED BY GC) ABLE TO HOLD GROSS WEIGHT OF SPEAKER PLUS SAFETY FACTOR OF FIVE FINISHED CEILING (PROVIDED BY GC) DOG EARS (TYP. OF 4) HARD DECK CEILING (BY GC) MOUNTING BRACKET (INC.) SLIDES LEFT AND RIGHT ON CASE (TYP. OF 2) FINISHED CEILING (BY GC) 18" X 1 5/8" X 1 5/8" SLOTTED CHANNEL ANCHORED TO HARD DECK (PROVIDED BY GC) ABLE TO HOLD GROSS WEIGHT OF SCREEN PER MANUFACTURER CUT SHEET PLUS SAFETY FACTOR OF FIVE. PROJECT ARCHITECT OR STRUCTURAL ENGINEER TO REVIEW. (TYP. OF 2) HARD WIRED DIRECT 120V 20A AC POWER CONNECTION FLEXIBLE CONDUIT (PROVIDED BY EC) 3/8" THREADED ROD LENGTH TBD IN FIELD (PROVIDED BY GC) (TYP. OF 4) FRONT OF SCREEN FACING PROJECTORBACK OF SCREEN ELECTRICAL SERVICE FOR PROJECTION SCREEN (PROVIDED BY EC) SECTION TOP HARD DECK CEILING 24" X 1 5/8" X 1 5/8" SLOTTED CHANNEL ANCHORED TO HARD DECK ABLE TO HOLD GROSS WEIGHT OF PROJECTOR AND MOUNT ASSEMBLY PER MANUFACTURER CUT SHEETS PLUS SAFETY FACTOR OF FIVE. PROJECT ARCHITECT OR STRUCTURAL ENGINEER TO REVIEW. (PROVIDED BY GC) (TYP. OF 2) 24" X 1 5/8" X 1 5/8" SLOTTED CHANNEL (PROVIDED BY GC) (TYP. OF 2) CHIEF CMA330 CEILING PLATE (PROVIDED BY AVC) 1 1/2" NPT THREADED PIPE LENGTH TBD IN FIELD (PROVIDED BY AVC) FINISHED CEILING120V 20A DUPLEX POWER OUTLET FLUSH TO FINISHED CEILING DOWNWARD FACING (PROVIDED BY EC) ESCUTCHEON RING (PROVIDED BY AVC) Ø 0.825" HOLE CUT IN CEILING TILE CABLE LENGTH TBD IN FIELD AT LEAST 80" AFF FINISHED CEILING TILE & GRID (BY GC) WASHERS & NUTS (INC.) SECURED TO MIC THREAD & CEILING TILE BRIDGE PER MANUFACTURER INSTRUCTIONSMICROPHONE PLENUM INTERFACE BOX TO BE CLIPPED TO CEILING TILE BRIDGE OR CORNER OF T-BAR INTERSECTION BIAMP TB-1 CEILING TILE BRIDGE (BY AVC) HARD DECK CEILING SAFETY CABLE FROM MIC PLENUM INTERFACE BOX SHALL BE AIRCRAFT CABLE (BY AVC) ANCHORED TO HARD DECK OR EQUIV. BUILDING STRUCTURE ABLE TO HOLD GROSS WEIGHT OF DEVICE PLUS SAFETY FACTOR OF FIVE (NOT INCLUDED W/ MIC) TOMEI AV CONSULTING LLC 29 JANIVAR DRIVE ITHACA, NY 14850 607-592-5370 WWW.TOMEIAV.COM MIKE@TOMEIAV.COM DRAWING NUMBER: DRAWING TITLE: CLIENT: LOCATION: PROJECT NAME: REV # DATE REVISION THESE DRAWINGS ARE TO BE USED FOR DESIGN INTENT REFERENCE ONLY, NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION. THIS DOCUMENT MAY NOT BE COPIED, DUPLICATED OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN PERMISSION OF TOMEI AV CONSULTING LLC. © TOMEI AV CONSULTING LLC, . ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. ISSUE DATE: 2020 ITHACA COLLEGE ROTHSCHILD BLDG 215 E. STATE ST. ITHACA, NY PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 12/16/20 DRAWN BY: TA501 MT DETAILS - AV 01 FLAT PANEL DISPLAY WALL MOUNTING DETAIL SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" 02 CHIEF PAC526FW MOUNTING DETAIL SCALE: 2" = 1'-0" 03 CEILING SPEAKER MOUNTING DETAIL SCALE: 1-1/2" = 1'-0" 04 PROJECTION SCREEN MOUNTING DETAIL SCALE: 1-1/2" = 1'-0" 05 PROJECTOR MOUNTING DETAIL SCALE: 1-1/2" = 1'-0" 06 CEILING MICROPHONE MOUNTING DETAIL SCALE: 2" = 1'-0" 1 RU 2 RU 3 RU 4 RU 5 RU 6 RU 7 RU 8 RU 9 RU 10 RU 11 RU 12 RU 1 RU 2 RU 3 RU 4 RU 5 RU 6 RU 7 RU 8 RU 9 RU 10 RU 11 RU 12 RU ANNOTATIVE COMPUTER MONITOR RESIDENT PC SPECTRUM 12RU EQUIPMENT RACK CUBE SPECTRUM LINK LECTERN MEDIA MANAGER 55115 LECTERN (BY AVC) AV CONTROL 7" TOUCH PANEL DOCUMENT CAMERA CLASSROOMS 203 & 231 ONLY: MIDDLE ATLANTIC MFR-1227 EQUIPMENT RACK (BY AVC) SPECTRUM FLIP-UP SHELF (BY AVC) DOCUMENT CAMERA ELEVATION TOP AV CONTROL 7" TOUCH PANEL SECURED TO LECTERN SURFACE. Ø 1/4" HOLE IN LECTERN SURFACE UNDER TABLE STAND FOR CABLE ACCESS. LAPTOP CABLES IN EXTRON CABLE CUBBY 1202 (BY AVC) ANNOTATION COMPUTER MONITOR WIRED KEYBOARD & MOUSE SPECTRUM FLIP-UP SHELF (BY AVC) TOMEI AV CONSULTING LLC 29 JANIVAR DRIVE ITHACA, NY 14850 607-592-5370 WWW.TOMEIAV.COM MIKE@TOMEIAV.COM DRAWING NUMBER: DRAWING TITLE: CLIENT: LOCATION: PROJECT NAME: REV # DATE REVISION THESE DRAWINGS ARE TO BE USED FOR DESIGN INTENT REFERENCE ONLY, NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION. THIS DOCUMENT MAY NOT BE COPIED, DUPLICATED OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN PERMISSION OF TOMEI AV CONSULTING LLC. © TOMEI AV CONSULTING LLC, . ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. ISSUE DATE: 2020 ITHACA COLLEGE ROTHSCHILD BLDG 215 E. STATE ST. ITHACA, NY PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 12/16/20 DRAWN BY: TA502 MT DETAILS - AV 01 LECTERN LAYOUT DETAIL SCALE: 1" = 1'-0" CONTROL PANEL SCHEDULE TYPE STYLE PANEL MAKE & MODEL MOUNT MAKE & MODEL BOX TYPE BOX MIN DEPTH BOX MOUNTING METHOD DATA NOTES A BUTTON PANEL CRESTRON MPC3-201-B CRESTRON MPC3-101/102/201-RMB 2-GANG 3-1/2" FLUSH TO FINISHED WALL 7" SEPARATION FROM BOX CENTERLINE TO ANY ADJACENT BOX EDGE FLAT PANEL DISPLAY SCHEDULE TYPE DISPLAY SIZE DISPLAY MOUNTING DISPLAY MAKE & MODEL MOUNT MAKE & MODEL BLOCKING / SUPPORT BOX TYPE BOX MIN DEPTH BOX MOUNTING METHOD POWER DATA/VOICE NOTES A 55" WALL MOUNTED SAMSUNG QB55R CHIEF TS318TU 3/4" PLYWOOD (SEE TA501 DETAIL) CHIEF PAC526FW (SEE TA501 DETAIL) 4" FLUSH TO FINISHED WALL DUPLEX POWER OUTLET ATTACHED TO CHIEF PAC526FW BOX (SEE TA501 DETAIL) (2) DATA JACKS ATTACHED TO CHIEF PAC526FW BOX (SEE TA501 DETAIL) B 65" WALL MOUNTED SAMSUNG QB65R CHIEF TS318TU 3/4" PLYWOOD (SEE TA501 DETAIL) CHIEF PAC526FW (SEE TA501 DETAIL) 4" FLUSH TO FINISHED WALL DUPLEX POWER OUTLET ATTACHED TO CHIEF PAC526FW BOX (SEE TA501 DETAIL) (2) DATA JACKS ATTACHED TO CHIEF PAC526FW BOX (SEE TA501 DETAIL) C 43" WALL MOUNTED SAMSUNG QM43R CHIEF MTM1U 3/4" PLYWOOD (SEE TA501 DETAIL) CHIEF PAC526FW (SEE TA501 DETAIL) 4" FLUSH TO FINISHED WALL DUPLEX POWER OUTLET ATTACHED TO CHIEF PAC526FW BOX (SEE TA501 DETAIL) (2) DATA JACKS ATTACHED TO CHIEF PAC526FW BOX (SEE TA501 DETAIL) D 65" WALL MOUNTED SAMSUNG QB65R CHIEF LTM1U 3/4" PLYWOOD (SEE TA501 DETAIL) CHIEF PAC526FW (SEE TA501 DETAIL) 4" FLUSH TO FINISHED WALL DUPLEX POWER OUTLET ATTACHED TO CHIEF PAC526FW BOX (SEE TA501 DETAIL) NONE F 65" WALL MOUNTED SAMSUNG QM65R CHIEF LTM1U 3/4" PLYWOOD (SEE TA501 DETAIL) CHIEF PAC526FW (SEE TA501 DETAIL) 4" FLUSH TO FINISHED WALL DUPLEX POWER OUTLET ATTACHED TO CHIEF PAC526FW BOX (SEE TA501 DETAIL) (2) DATA JACKS ATTACHED TO CHIEF PAC526FW BOX (SEE TA501 DETAIL) G 75" WALL MOUNTED SAMSUNG QB75R CHIEF LTM1U 3/4" PLYWOOD (SEE TA501 DETAIL) CHIEF PAC526FW (SEE TA501 DETAIL) 4" FLUSH TO FINISHED WALL DUPLEX POWER OUTLET ATTACHED TO CHIEF PAC526FW BOX (SEE TA501 DETAIL) NONE H NA WALL MOUNTED INFRASTRUCTURE ONLY FOR FUTURE DISPLAY NONE 3/4" PLYWOOD (SEE TA501 DETAIL) CHIEF PAC526FCW (SEE TA501 DETAIL) 4" FLUSH TO FINISHED WALL DUPLEX POWER OUTLET ATTACHED TO CHIEF PAC526FCW BOX (SEE TA501 DETAIL) (2) DATA JACKS ATTACHED TO CHIEF PAC526FCW BOX (SEE TA501 DETAIL) NOTE DIFFERENT CHIEF PAC WALL BOX MODEL THAT INCLUDES A COVER PLATE PROJECTOR SCHEDULE TYPE DESCIPTION PROJECTOR MOUNTING PROJECTOR MAKE & MODEL MOUNT MAKE & MODEL BLOCKING / SUPPORT BOX TYPE BOX MIN DEPTH BOX MOUNTING METHOD POWER DATA/VOICE NOTES A CEILING MOUNTED PROJECTOR CEILING EPSON L1490UNL (ELPLM15 LENS) CHIEF CMA330 UNISTRUT TO HARD DECK (SEE TA501 DETAIL) NONE NA NA DUPLEX POWER OUTLET FLUSH TO FINISHED CEILING DOWNWARD FACING NONE B CEILING MOUNTED PROJECTOR CEILING EPSON L610U CHIEF CMA330 UNISTRUT TO HARD DECK (SEE TA501 DETAIL) NONE NA NA DUPLEX POWER OUTLET FLUSH TO FINISHED CEILING DOWNWARD FACING NONE SPEAKER SCHEDULE TYPE DESCIPTION SPEAKER MOUNTING SPEAKER MAKE & MODEL MOUNT MAKE & MODEL BLOCKING / SUPPORT BOX TYPE BOX MIN DEPTH BOX MOUNTING METHOD PLATE POWER NOTES A CEILING SPEAKER FLUSH TO FINISHED CEILING QSC AD-C6T-LP CEILING TILE TRAY INCLUDED SEE TA501 DETAIL NONE NA NA NONE NONE PROJECTION SCREEN SCHEDULE TYPE DESCIPTION SCREEN MOUNTING SCREEN MAKE & MODEL CASE FINISH CUSTOM DROP MOUNTING BRACKET MAKE & MODEL BLOCKING / SUPPORT POWER LOW VOLTAGE CONTROLLER LOCATION A RECESSED CEILING SCREEN CEILING DA-LITE ADVANTAGE ELECTROL CUSTOM 71"X126" (145" DIAGONAL) WHITE 2" STANDARD DROP NA SEE TA501 DETAIL DIRECT POWER CONNECTION TO SCREEN MOTOR INCLUDED IN SCREEN CASE B RECESSED CEILING SCREEN CEILING DA-LITE ADVANTAGE ELECTROL CUSTOM 58"x104" (119" DIAGONAL) WHITE 14" CUSTOM DROP NA SEE TA501 DETAIL DIRECT POWER CONNECTION TO SCREEN MOTOR INCLUDED IN SCREEN CASE C RECESSED CEILING SCREEN CEILING DA-LITE ADVANTAGE ELECTROL CUSTOM 65"x116" (133" DIAGONAL) WHITE 7" CUSTOM DROP NA SEE TA501 DETAIL DIRECT POWER CONNECTION TO SCREEN MOTOR INCLUDED IN SCREEN CASE AV INTERFACE SCHEDULE TYPE DESCRIPTION BOX TYPE BOX MIN DEPTH BOX MOUNTING METHOD POWER DATA/VOICE NOTES A HDMI/USB PLATE 2-GANG 3-1/2" FLUSH TO FINISHED WALL DUPLEX POWER OUTLET ADJACENT (2) DATA JACKS ADJACENT B INFRASTRUCTURE FOR FUTURE HDMI PLATE 2-GANG 3-1/2" FLUSH TO FINISHED WALL DUPLEX POWER OUTLET ADJACENT (2) DATA JACKS ADJACENT C MULTI-CONNECTOR AV IN/OUT PLATE 4-GANG 3-1/2" FLUSH TO FINISHED WALL DUPLEX POWER OUTLET ADJACENT (4) DATA JACKS ADJACENT CAMERA SCHEDULE TYPE DESCRIPTION CAMERA MOUNTING CAMERA MAKE & MODEL MOUNT MAKE & MODEL BLOCKING / SUPPORT BOX TYPE BOX MIN DEPTH BOX MOUNTING METHOD POWER DATA NOTES A PTZ CAMERA SURFACE MOUNTED PANASONIC AW-HE38HW VADDIO 535-2000-243 NONE 2-GANG J-BOX 2.5" FLUSH TO FINISHED WALL NONE NONE ROOM AVAILABILITY PANEL SCHEDULE TYPE DESCRIPTION PANEL MAKE & MODEL MOUNT MAKE & MODEL BOX TYPE BOX MIN DEPTH BOX MOUNTING METHOD PLATE DATA NOTES A INFRASTRUCTURE ONLY FOR FUTURE INSTALLATION OF 7" CRESTRON ROOM AVAILABILITY PANEL BY OWNER NA NA 2-GANG 3-1/2" FLUSH TO FINISHED WALL BLANK COVER PLATE MATCHING FINISHED WALL COLOR (1) DATA JACK ABOVE FINISHED CEILING CEILING MICROPHONE SCHEDULE TYPE DESCRIPTION MOUNTING METHOD MIC MAKE & MODEL CEILING MOUNT PIPE LENGTH MIC MOUNTING BRACKET BLOCKING / SUPPORT BOX TYPE BOX MIN DEPTH BOX MOUNTING METHOD NOTES A CEILING PENDANT MIC HANGING FROM FINISHED CEILING BIAMP TCM-1/TCM-1EX BIAMP TB-1 CEILING TILE BRIDGE NA NA SEE TA501 DETAIL NONE NA NA AV PULL BOX SCHEDULE TYPE DESCRIPTION BOX TYPE BOX MIN DEPTH BOX MOUNTING METHOD PLATE NOTES A AV CLOSET EQUIPMENT RACK PULL BOX 10"X10" NEMA 4" FLUSH TO FINISHED WALL NONE B LECTERN CABLE LOOM PULL BOX 6"X6" NEMA 4" FLUSH TO FINISHED WALL COVER PLATE (BY AVC) WITH GROMMET TO OVERHANG BOX BY 1" ON ALL SIDES TO COVER WALL ROUGH CUTOUT. PLATE COLOR TO MATCH FINISHED WALL. TOMEI AV CONSULTING LLC 29 JANIVAR DRIVE ITHACA, NY 14850 607-592-5370 WWW.TOMEIAV.COM MIKE@TOMEIAV.COM DRAWING NUMBER: DRAWING TITLE: CLIENT: LOCATION: PROJECT NAME: REV # DATE REVISION THESE DRAWINGS ARE TO BE USED FOR DESIGN INTENT REFERENCE ONLY, NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION. THIS DOCUMENT MAY NOT BE COPIED, DUPLICATED OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN PERMISSION OF TOMEI AV CONSULTING LLC. © TOMEI AV CONSULTING LLC, . ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. ISSUE DATE: 2020 ITHACA COLLEGE ROTHSCHILD BLDG 215 E. STATE ST. ITHACA, NY PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 12/16/20 DRAWN BY: TA601 MT SCHEDULES - AV IC PAP COMBINED SPEC 1-4-21.pdf TABLE OF CONTENTS Table of Contents SPECIFICATIONS GROUP 12/18/2020 VOLUME 1 DIVISION 0 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING DOCUMENTS GROUP 000100 Advertisement for Bids 000410 Bid Form 000431 Contractor’s Team, Subcontractors/Manufacturers and Documentation List 000852 Project Forms and Documents 000900 Contractor's Form of Guarantee 000901 Contract for Construction Services SPECIFICATIONS GROUP DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011000 Summary 012300 Alternates 012600 Contract Modification Procedures 012900 Payment Procedures 013000 Administrative Requirements 013100 Project Management and Coordination 013300 Submittal Procedures 014110 Special Inspections and Structural Testing 015000 Temporary Facilities and Controls 016000 Product Requirements 017300 Execution 017329 Cutting and Patching 017419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal 017700 Closeout Procedures 017823 Operation and Maintenance Data 017839 Project Record Documents DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS 024119 Selective Demolition DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 032000 Concrete Reinforcing 033000 Cast-in-Place Concrete DIVISION 05 - METALS 051200 Structural Steel Framing 055113 Metal Pan Stairs DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 061053 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 064116 Plastic-Laminate-Clad Architectural Cabinets TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 078413 Penetration Firestopping 079200 Joint Sealants DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 081113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 081416 Flush Wood Doors 083113 Access Doors and Frames 084113 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 084229 Swinging Automatic Entrances 087100 Door Hardware 088000 Glazing DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 092216 Non-structural Metal Framing 092900 Gypsum Board 095113 Acoustic Panel Ceilings 096513 Resilient Base and Accessories 099123 Interior Painting DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 101100 Visual Display Units 102113 Phenolic-Core Toilet Compartments 102239 Folding Panel Partitions 102800 Toilet, Bath and Laundry Accessories 104413 Fire Protection Cabinets DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 115213 Projection Screens DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 123623 Plastic-Laminate-Clad Countertops 123661 Solid Surfacing Countertops VOLUME 2 DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING 220501 Plumbing Basic Requirements 220503 Pipe and Tubes for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 220523 General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping 220528 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping 220553 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 220700 Plumbing Insulation 221119 Plumbing Specialties and Accessories 221305 Facility Sanitary Sewerage 224200 Plumbing Fixtures and Trim 227005 Cleaning, Testing and Adjusting TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 230101 HVAC Basic Requirements 230103 Operating and Maintenance Manuals 230513 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 230529 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 230553 Identification for HVAC Piping, Ductwork and Equipment 230593 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC 230700 HVAC Insulation 232300 Refrigerant Piping 233113 HVAC Ducts 233313 HVAC Dampers and Accessories 233713 Diffusers, Registers and Grilles 237000 VRF System with Heat Recovery DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 260100 Electrical Basic Requirements 260519 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 260523 Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables 260526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 260533 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 260936 Lighting Control 262213 Low-Voltage Distribution Transformers 262416 Panelboards 262726 Wiring Devices 262813 Fuses 262819 Enclosed Switches 262913 Enclosed Controllers 265119 LED Interior Lighting 265200 Emergency Lighting DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS 270526 Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems 270536 Cable Trays for Communications Systems 272100 Local Area Network System DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 283100 Fire Detection and Alarm END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 000100 - 1 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS QPK NO. 220157.00 000100 - 1 SECTION 000100 - ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS Ithaca College, 201 Physical Plant, Ithaca, New York 14850, herein called the Owner, invites: SEALED BIDS FOR: Single Prime Construction Contract FOR: Ithaca College – IC Physician Assistant Program Rothschild Renovation Ithaca Commons 215 East State Street Ithaca College, Ithaca, NY 14850 QPK Project No. 220157.00 TO: General Contractors Bids will be received by the Owner at 201 Physical Plant, Ithaca College, Ithaca, NY 14850 until 10:00 a.m. EST on Tuesday, January 26, 2021. Bids will be opened in private. Bid submissions shall be emailed to the attention of Mr. Steve Dayton, sdayton@ithaca.edu,with paper copy to follow within 2 business days. A mandatory pre-bid walkthrough is scheduled for Wednesday, January 13th at 10 a.m. at the project site. Requests for review of the project site and conditions other than at an official pre-bid walkthrough shall be made through Steve Dayton at Ithaca College by phone: 607-274-3225 or by email: sdayton@ithaca.edu . Requests will be granted at the discretion of Ithaca College. Questions shall be submitted in writing to the Architect via email to the attention of Vincent Nicotra, with project name and “RFI” in subject line, to: vnicotra@qpkdesign.com and with copy to: Mike Sherwood: msherwood@ithaca.edu Steve Dayton: sdayton@ithaca.edu. No bidder may withdraw his bid within forty-five (45) days after actual opening thereof. END OF ADVERTISEMENT ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 000410 - 1 BID FORM QPK NO. 220157.00 000410 - 1 SECTION 000410 - BID FORM THE PROJECT AND THE PARTIES 1.1 OWNER: ITHACA COLLEGE Office of Construction, Planning and Design 201 Physical Plant Ithaca, New York 14850 1.2 PROJECT: ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSCIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION Ithaca Commons 215 East State Street, Ithaca Ithaca, New York 14850 1.3 DATE: ___________________________ (BIDDER TO ENTER DATE) 1.4 SUBMITTED BY: A. Bidder’s Full Name: ___________________________________________________________ B. Address: _____________________________________________________________________ C. City, State, Zip ________________________________________________________________ 1.5 OFFER A. Having examined the Place of the Work and all matters referred to in the Instructions to Bidders and the Contract Documents prepared by QPK Design LLP for the above-mentioned projects, we, the undersigned, hereby offer to enter into a Contract to perform the Work as follows: B. BASE BID for Ithaca College for the Sum of: ________________________________________________________________ ______dollars ($___________________________); in lawful money of the United States of America. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 000410 - 2 BID FORM QPK NO. 220157.00 000410 - 2 C. ALTERNATE No. 1.- Provide Virtual Skylight in lieu acoustical tile above open stair north of Hall 221. ADD / DEDUCT/ NO CHANGE from the Base Bid the Sum of: (select one) ______________________________________________________________________dollars ($___________________________); in lawful money of the United States of America. These offers shall be open to acceptance and are irrevocable for 45 days from the bid closing date. D. BREAKOUT COST No. 1.- Contractor shall break out the total cost to provide all material and complete installation of all roof top HVAC equipment, wiring, ductwork indicated on the construction documents. Cost shall also include all structural steel framing and additional structural steel supports shown on the construction documents to support this equipment. All roofing crickets, roof curbs supporting equipment and roofing repairs shall be included in the cost. Fireproofing steel is the responsibility of the Landlord/Building Owner shall not be included. Total Cost included in the Base Bid amount for Breakout cost no. 1: (select one) _____________________________________________________________________dollars ($___________________________); in lawful money of the United States of America. E. BREAKOUT COST No.2.- Contractor shall break out the total cost of material and complete installation of door opening indicated as Temporary Doors on the door schedule (5 total). Include the cost of any partition framing that door is installed into, door/frame, hardware, painting and associated work to complete the installation of the temporary door opening. Total Cost included in the Base Bid amount for Breakout cost no. 2: (select one) ______________________________________________________________________dollars ($___________________________); in lawful money of the United States of America. F. BREAKOUT COST No.3.- Contractor shall break out the total cost of material and complete installation of door opening 230 indicated on the door schedule. Include the cost of partition framing that door is installed into, door/frame, hardware, painting and associated work to complete the installation of the door opening. Total Cost included in the Base Bid amount for Breakout cost no. 1: (select one) ______________________________________________________________________dollars ($___________________________) ; in lawful money of the United States of America. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 000410 - 3 BID FORM QPK NO. 220157.00 000410 - 3 G. If this Bid is accepted by the Owner within the time period stated above, we will: 1. Execute the Agreement within seven days of receipt of Notice of Award. 1.6 CONTRACT TIME A. If the Bid for the Project is accepted, we will: 1. Commence pre-construction services immediately upon execution of contract. 2. Commence construction on date to be determined. 3. Achieve Substantial Completion of the work as indicated in Section 011000 “Summary". 4. Achieve Final Completion of the Work as indicated in Section 011000 “Summary”. 1.7 ADDENDA A. The following Addenda have been received. The modifications to the Bid Documents noted below have been considered and all costs are included in the Bid Sum. 1. Addendum # 1 Dated _______________________ 2. Addendum #2 Dated _______________________ 3. Addendum # 3 Dated _______________________ 4. Addendum #4 Dated _______________________ 1.8 BID FORM REQUIREMENTS A. The following Supplements are required with this Bid Form and are considered an integral part of this Bid Form and shall be submitted with the Bid. Document 00431 is included in the construction specifications manual: 1. Document 00431 – Contractor’s Team and Subcontractors/ Manufacturers List. 2. Contractor’s proposed project schedule, including indication of Owner’s work conducted under separate contracts. Refer to Division 1 Section – Summary. 3. Contractor shall submit competitive bids for all subcontracts to Owner with their bid. 1.9 BID FORM SIGNATURE(S) A. The Corporate Seal of _______________________________________________________ (Bidder - print the full name of your firm) was hereunto affixed in the presence of: ________________________________ _______________________ (Authorized signing officer, Title) ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 000410 - 4 BID FORM QPK NO. 220157.00 000410 - 4 B. (Seal) C. _______________________________________________________ (Authorized signing officer, Title) 1.10 If the bid is a joint venture or partnership, add additional forms of execution for each member of the joint venture in the appropriate form or forms as above. 1.11 CERTIFICATION OF NON-COLLUSIVE BIDDING A. By submission of this bid, each bidder and each person signing on behalf of any bidder certificates, and in the case of a joint bid each party thereto certifies as to its own organization, under penalty of perjury, that to the best of the bidder’s knowledge and belief: 1. The prices in this bid have been arrived at independently and without collusion, consultation, communication, or agreement, for the purpose of restricting competition, as to any matter relating to such prices with any other bidder or competitor. 2. Unless otherwise required by law, the prices which have been quoted in this bid have not been knowingly disclosed by the bidder and will not knowingly be disclosed by the bidder prior to opening, directly or indirectly, to any other bidder or to any competitor; 3. No attempt has been made or will be made by the bidder to induce any other person, partnership, or corporation to submit or not to submit a bid for the purposes of restricting competition; 4. The person signing this bid or proposal certifies that he has fully informed himself regarding the accuracy of the statements contained in this certification, and under the penalties of perjury, affirms the truth thereof, such penalties being applicable to the bidder as well as to the person signing on its behalf; 5. The attached hereto (if corporate bidder) is a certified copy of resolution authorizing the execution of this certificate by the signator of this bid or proposal on behalf of the corporate bidder. END OF SECTION 000410 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 0000431 - 1 CONTRACTOR’S TEAM, SUBCONTRACTORS/MANUFACTURERS & DOCUMENTATION LIST QPK NO. 220157.0 000431 - 1 SECTION 000431 - CONTRACTOR’S TEAM, SUBCONTRACTORS/MANUFACTURERS AND DOCUMENTATION LIST THE FOLLOWING LIST IS TO BE SUBMITTED WITH THE BID Contractor’s Proposed Team: Project Manager: ________________________________________ ______ (name) (years with company in this role) Project Superintendent: ____________________________________ ______ (name) (years with company in this role) The following subcontractors and manufacturers are proposed for the Base Bid work of the Contract. Award of the Contract, however, does not constitute acceptance of any subcontractor or manufacturer listed herein. ONLY ONE (1) SUBCONTRACTOR AND MANUFACTURER SHALL BE LISTED FOR EACH SECTION. Subcontractor (or state if self-performed) Manufacturer 1. Demolition / Removals N/A 2. Concrete N/A 3. Structural Steel N/A 4. Metal Stairs and Handrails N/A 5. Doors, Frames, Hardware Provide as specified 6. Aluminum Storefront and Glazing Provide as specified 7. Folding Panel Partitions Provide as specified 8. Doors, Frames, Hardware Provide as specified 9. Aluminum Storefront and Glazing Provide as specified 10. Millwork N/A 11. Electrical Subcontractor N/A 12. HVAC/Plumbing Subcontractor N/A 13. Fire Protection Subcontractor N/A 14. Sheet Metal Subcontractor N/A END OF SECTION 000431 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 000852 - 1 PROJECT FORMS AND DOCUMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 000852 - 1 SECTION 000852 - PROJECT FORMS AND DOCUMENTS PART 1. - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The forms listed in this section relate to the Division 1 Specification Sections. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section lists the project forms used for administration of the project. 1.3 FORMS A. The following forms are or may be required to execute the contract. Format may be similar to comparable AIA forms or forms in a format acceptable to the Owner: 1. Application For Payment Form and Continuation Sheet. 2. Change Order. 3. Proposal Request. 4. Certificate of Substantial Completion (provided and completed by Architect). 5. Final Waiver of Claims and Liens and Release of Rights (Use Ithaca College form provided with the contract). 6. Construction Change Directive PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PROCEDURES A. Application for Payments: This form shall be used as outlined in Division 1 Section 012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES. B. Change Order: This document shall be used to issue changes to the contract as per the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. C. Certificate of Substantial Completion: This document shall be used to record the date of substantial and final completion as per the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. D. Final Release: Final Waiver of Claims and Liens and Release of Rights. E. Construction Change Directive: This document may be issued to proceed with a change in the Work, as per the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. END OF SECTION 000852 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 000900 - 1 CONTRACTORS FORM OF GUARANTEE QPK NO. 220157.00 000900 - 1 SECTION 000900 - CONTRACTOR'S FORM OF GUARANTEE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Instructions: Form shall be executed in duplicate. 1.2 FORM To: Ithaca College For: Ithaca College – Physician Assistant Program Rothschild Renovation Location: Ithaca Commons, 215 East State Street, Ithaca, New York 14850 Owner: Ithaca College Date of Contract: ____________________ The undersigned, Contractor for the _________________________________________, work on the above building, hereby guarantees all the workmanship and/or materials installed by him (them) or his (their) subcontractors to be of the quality that will comply with all the specific requirements of the Specifications and other Contract Documents governing the work under the Contract for the above building, and insures the Owner against all defects of material and/or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from and after the completion of the building and its acceptance by the Owner. It is agreed that if, after due inspection, the Architect or Owner shall decide that by reason of this Guarantee, the replacement or repair of any work is, in his opinion, necessary, such defective work will be repaired or removed and new work replaced meeting all the requirements of the Contract Documents, same being done promptly and without expense to the Owner, including all costs for replacing or repairing other work damaged by the removal and replacement of the work covered by this Guarantee. _________________________________________ Contractor By _______________________________________ Title ______________________________________ The Owner hereby certifies that the date of acceptance of the Ithaca College by the Owner on the above Contract was _____________ 20______. By: ________________________________________________________________________ Ithaca College END OF SECTION 000900 953 Danby Road • Ithaca, NY 14850 • (607) 274-3225 • (607) 274-1619 fax ITHACA COLLEGE PLANNING, DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION SERVICES This Agreement is made between Ithaca College (“the College”) and XXXXX (“Contractor”), a corporation incorporated and in good standing in the State of New York with current authority to do business in the State of New York. TERMS In consideration of the mutual covenants, promises, and conditions contained in this Agreement, the College and Contractor agree as follows: 1.0 Scope of Contract 1.1 The Contractor agrees to furnish and provide all the supplies, materials and labor, and to perform to the satisfaction of the College all work of every kind required, necessary or proper for or incidental to the XXXX, Project #XXX as per proposal/quote dated XXXX (attached) SCOPE OF WORK: As per XXXX at Ithaca College, hereinafter called the "Project", in strict accordance with this Contract, the Proposal, the Drawings and Specifications and the prescribed bonds, hereinafter collectively called the "Contract" or "Contract Documents", all of which have been examined by the Contractor and are deemed to be a part of this Contract. 1.2 The Contractor represents that it is fully licensed to perform all work in this Agreement, is experienced and skilled in this type of project, and is familiar with all applicable laws, regulations, and guidelines pertaining to this type of work, and is fully informed of the condition relating to construction and labor for the specific projects that will be performed. 1.3 The Contractor warrants that it will comply with all applicable environmental laws concerning handling, transport, and disposing of materials, and with all other applicable federal, state, and local laws, rules, or decisions respecting the construction to be effected hereunder. 2.0 Time of Performance The Contractor shall begin on XXXX and complete all the work covered by the Contract to the satisfaction of Ithaca College and in accordance with the Contract Documents on XXXX, unless such period is otherwise extended by the College, or be responsible to the College for any damage caused by the failure or omission by the Contractor to comply with this paragraph. 3.0 Performance and Payment Bond (BOND NOT REQUIRED ON THIS PROJECT) 4.0 Payment 4.1 The College shall pay to the Contractor and the latter shall accept as full and complete payment for the performance of this Contract for the total sum of XXXX Dollars, $XXXX which sum is the amount of the contract consideration. If the progress and performance of the work is satisfactory to the College, the latter, upon application submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Architect, if any, and the College, will make Project #XXX, XXX, XXX 2 953 Danby Road • Ithaca, NY 14850 • (607) 274-3225 • (607) 274-1619 fax periodic progress payments of the contract consideration to the Contractor, the amount of such progress payments to be based upon the value of the work performed by the Contractor since the last previous progress payment, less an amount equal to 10% thereof, which sum the College shall reserve from each progress payment until all the work covered by the Contract has been completed. 4.2 Time of Payment. The College shall make payment in the manner provided in this Agreement within thirty (30) calendar days of receipt and approval of submitted invoice. 4.3 Upon the completion by the Contractor and acceptance by the College of all the work covered by the Contract, the College shall make a final payment equal to the amount of the Contract consideration less all previous payments by the College to the Contractor. 4.4 The amounts allowed for overhead and profit for a change resulting in an increase in Contract price may be less than, but shall not exceed, the applicable percentages as follows: (a) For work done directly by the contractor, the sum of overhead amount plus profit amount shall not exceed 15% of the cost. (b) For work done by subcontractors of any tier, the sum of total overhead amounts of the subcontractors and contractors, plus total profit amounts for the subcontractors and contractor shall not exceed 20% of the cost. Subcontractor shall be limited to 15% and the contractor shall be limited to 5% for combined overhead and profit. Where work necessitated by the change order involves overtime, no payroll taxes, overhead or profit will be allowed on the premium portion of the overtime pay. 4.5 The acceptance by the Contractor, or by anyone claiming by or through him/her, of the final payment shall constitute and operate as a release to the College from any and all claims of any liability for anything done or furnished for or relating to or arising out of the work covered by the Contract and for any prior act, neglect or default on the part of the College or any of its officers, agents, or employees in connection therewith. Should the Contractor refuse to accept the final payment as tendered by the College or should he/she refuse to execute the final application for payment without protest and without reserving any rights or claims against the College, it shall constitute a waiver of any right to interest on the payment so tendered and/or on the amount set forth in said final application for payment. 4.6 The Contractor shall furnish the College with the Contractor’s Federal Tax Identification Number. 4.7 All invoices shall be mailed to the College's Representative Steve Dayton, Director of Planning, Design and Construction, 201 Office of Facilities, 953 Danby Road, Ithaca, New York 14850. The Contractor shall reference the College's General Capital Contract No. on all invoices submitted which is found on the first page. 5.0 Contractor’s Obligations 5.1 If Contractor performs work knowing it to be contrary to laws, statutes, building codes, and rules and regulations without such notice to the College, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for such work and bear the attributable costs. 5.2 Contractor shall supervise and direct the work, using Contractor’s best professional effort, skill, and attention. Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures for the project unless Contract documents give other specific instructions. 5.3 Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, and permits and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. Contractor shall keep Project #XXX, XXX, XXX 3 953 Danby Road • Ithaca, NY 14850 • (607) 274-3225 • (607) 274-1619 fax the premises and surrounding area free from accumulations of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the work, Contractor shall remove from the project site(s) any waste materials, rubbish, tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus materials. If Contractor fails to clean up, the College will withhold a portion of final payment to cover the costs where the contractor failed to clean up the site including all disposal fees. 5.4 Fencing off – (if applicable to the project) Prior to the start of the project, a drawing showing the fenced off area will be submitted for approval by the College. The construction site is the responsibility of the contractor, and, when deemed necessary for a project, must be completed as an initial step of the mobilization process.” 5.5 Safe walkways around the perimeter of the construction site must be maintained at all times. Contractor’s vehicles, equipment, etc. cannot permanently nor temporarily block pedestrian walking paths. 5.6 The Contractor shall preserve and protect all cultivated and planted areas, and all natural vegetation such as trees, shrubs, and grass on or adjacent to the premises which as determined by the Owner, do not unreasonably interfere with the performance of the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to any such property and unauthorized cutting or destroying of trees and vegetation, including damage due to careless operation of equipment, stockpiling of materials or tracking by equipment or vehicles. 5.7 Contractors/Vendors – College keys/fobs will be accessed and returned on a daily basis from the Maintenance Shop to contractors/Vendors working on campus. The required keys/fobs will be determined by the Director of Planning, Design and Construction and/or the Director of Facilities Maintenance. Access to the required keys will be set by the Office of Facilities and the ID Office. (a) A completed “Contractor/vendor Key/Fob Request Form” will be filled out before the keys/fobs are issued (see attached example page 11). All keys must be personally signed for by the contractor’s representative to whom the keys/fobs are issued. When Residence Halls are occupied, access to these areas will be determined through Planning, Design and Construction or Residential Life (occupied rooms will require a college assigned escort). (b) Duplicates of outstanding (uncleared) keys will not be issued. Per key policy contractors/vendors will be charged for any costs related to lost/stolen keys. Stolen/Lost Key Procedures Reporting 1. It is the responsibility of the contractor/vendor, to report lost or stolen keys. Stolen/lost keys need to reported immediately to both Public Safety and Planning, Design & Construction office; when they are determined to be lost/stolen. 2. Contact Public Safety to file a lost or stolen property report. An incident report must be filed with Public Safety, and the incident number will be required for obtaining replacement keys. 3. The Office of Facilities and Office of Public Safety will consult to determine if, the safety or security reasons, re-keying is required. Consultation may include the Office of Residential Life, where appropriate. Charges/Accountability for lost/stolen keys Project #XXX, XXX, XXX 4 953 Danby Road • Ithaca, NY 14850 • (607) 274-3225 • (607) 274-1619 fax 1. Contractor will be charged the rekey cost of $48.00 per recore plus $10.00 for each key cut when an individual room/office key is lost/stolen. 2. Lost Key charge will not be refunded, once the new key has been cut. 3. These charges will include any and all labor costs that the College incurres to rekey all areas/buildings the lost key is associated with. Any contractor or vendor who needs to access the campus facilities for emergencies, (outside of normal business hours), will pick up their keys at the Office of Public Safety dispatch window. These contractors/vendors will need to have either a college provided contractor/vendor card or an ID card issued by their place of employment. ID cards will also be issued for contractors/vendors Supervisors who have contracts for work on the campus. 6.0 Public Safety and Risk Involving Property In an emergency affecting the safety of life or of the work or of adjoining property, the Contractor, without special instruction or authorization from the College, is hereby permitted to act at his or her discretion to prevent such threatened loss or injury, and he shall so act without appeal if so authorized or instructed. Any compensation claimed by the Contractor on account of emergency work, shall be determined by the College and Architect. 7.0 Guarantees 7.1 The Contractor, at the convenience of the College, shall remove, replace and/or repair at his/her own cost and expense any defects in workmanship, materials, ratings, capacities or characteristics occurring in or to the work covered by the Contract within the (1) year or within such longer period as may otherwise be provided in the Contract, the period of such guarantee to commence with the College's final acceptance of all work covered under the Contract or at such other date or dates as the College may specify prior to that time, and the Contractor, upon demand, shall pay for all damage to all other work resulting from such defects and all expenses necessary to remove, replace and/or repair such other work which may be damaged in removing, replacing or repairing the said defects. 7.3 Unless such removal, replacement and/or repair shall be performed by the Contractor within ten (10) working days after he receives written notice from the College specifying such defect, or if such defect is of such a nature that it cannot be completely removed, repaired and/or replaced within said ten (10) day period and the Contractor shall not have diligently commenced removing, repairing and/or replacing such defect within said ten (10) day period and shall not thereafter with reasonable diligence and in good faith proceed to do such work, the College may employ such other person, firm or corporation as it may choose to perform such removal, replacement and/or repair and the Contractor agrees, upon demand, to pay to the College all amounts which it expends for such work. 8.0 Default of the Contractor In the event that the Contractor shall fail to proceed with the work when and as directed by the College or the Architect or if the Contractor in the opinion of the College, shall fail to carry on the work with proper speed or if the Contractor shall otherwise fail to comply with the provisions of this Contract, the College, upon fourteen (14) days written notice to the Contractor, may declare the Contractor in default of this Contract and arrange for the work to be finished in such manner and method as may be deemed advisable by the College. If the College declares the Contractor in default, the Contractor shall be liable to the College for the cost of all additional architectural and engineering services necessary, in the College's opinion, as a result of such default. The College shall deduct from the contract consideration the cost of such additional services and, if the College has the work completed by other than the Contractor's surety, the actual cost of completion of all work covered by the Contract. If the unpaid balance of the contract consideration, including retainage from progress payments, is insufficient Project #XXX, XXX, XXX 5 953 Danby Road • Ithaca, NY 14850 • (607) 274-3225 • (607) 274-1619 fax to pay such costs, then the Contractor, upon demand, shall pay the College the amount of such excess costs. 9.0 Indemnification and Hold Harmless Contractor shall assume the defense of, and shall indemnify and hold harmless Ithaca College and their officers, agents, consultants and employees, from and against any and all loss, liability, expense, claim, costs, suits and damages of every kind, nature and description directly or indirectly arising from all work performed under this contract. (a) To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor agrees to perform the work in a safe and proper manner and, so as to comply with all laws and ordinances referring to such work, and will indemnify and save the indemnities and, in the case of each of them their respective agents, consultants, servants and employees, harmless such indemnity, as used in this article, to include the defense of claims made against the Indemnities against all penalties for violation of same. To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor hereby assumes entire responsibility and liability for any and all damage or injury of any kind or nature to property, including adjoining property, caused by or resulting from the execution of work or occurring in connection therewith, and agrees to indemnify and save harmless the Indemnities from and against any and all claims, liability, loss and expense by reason of any liability imposed upon the Indemnities for damage because of injury to or destruction of property, caused or occasioned directly or indirectly by the negligence of the Contractor, its agents or employees, in the performance of work under this contract, or resulting from the use by the Contractor, its agents or employees, of any materials, tools, hoists, ladders, implements, appliances, scaffolding ways, works, machinery or other property of the Indemnities, whether or not the Indemnities are negligent in such event. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the safety of its work and all equipment and materials to be used therein until final completion and acceptance of the same shall promptly at its own expense repair any damages to the same, however cause. (b) The Contractor solely assumes all risks, except those risks caused by defects in the drawings or specifications prepared or furnished by the Owner or the Architect, for loss or damage, occurring prior to the Owner’s acceptance of all work, to all or any part of the work covered by the Contract and for all claims, losses and damages for bodily injury, including death, and property damage arising out of or as a result of or in connection with the performance by the Contractor of the work covered by the Contract. c) The Contractor’s obligations under this section shall not be deemed waived, limited or discharged by the enumeration in the Contract Documents of the kinds and amounts of insurance that the Contractor is required to and/or does procure. (d) Neither the Owner’s final acceptance of the work to be performed hereunder nor the making of payment therefore shall release the Contractor from their obligations under this section. (e) Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create or give third parties any claims or rights of action against the Owner to persons on, about or adjacent to the premises where the work is being performed. (f) Ithaca College reserves the right to retain whatever funds which would be due Contractor under this contract until such suits, action or actions, claim or claims for injuries or damages as aforesaid shall have been settled and satisfactory evidence to that effect furnished. 10.0 Insurance Project #XXX, XXX, XXX 6 953 Danby Road • Ithaca, NY 14850 • (607) 274-3225 • (607) 274-1619 fax 10.1 Contractor shall at its own expense obtain and maintain insurance, in accordance with the terms of Schedule A—Insurance, made a part hereof and attached hereto, to cover activities of Contractor and its subcontractors, agents, and/or employees. 10.2 In accordance with Schedule A, Contractor agrees to maintain insurance, on a per project basis, naming Ithaca College as additional insured and to provide the College with a certificate evidencing such insurance coverage in the manner described in Schedule A. 10.3 The Contractor's obligations under this section shall not be deemed waived, limited or discharged by the enumeration in the Contract Documents of the kinds and amounts of insurance that he is required to and/or does procure. 11.0 Relationship between the Parties 11.1 Contractor is an independent contractor of the College and not the agent or employee of the College. Nothing in this Agreement shall be deemed to make the College and Contractor partners or to create a relation of principal and agent between them, nor shall either party be bound by any representation, act or omission of the other made contrary to the provisions of this Agreement. 11.2 The College shall have no obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a subcontractor except as may otherwise be required by law. Upon receiving payment from the College, Contractor shall promptly pay each subcontractor furnishing materials or services, the amount to which said subcontractor is entitled, less any amounts actually retained from payments to Contractor on account of such subcontractor's portion of the work. Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement with each subcontractor, require each subcontractor to make payments to sub-subcontractors in similar manner. 12.0 Non-discrimination 12.1 The Contractor, subcontractor, or any person acting on behalf of the Contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment in the performance of this contract or any subcontract thereunder because of Equal Employment Opportunity protected class status including age, race, disability, ethnicity, national origin, religion, sex, sexual orientation, marital status, Vietnam Era or special disabled veteran status as applicable under federal, state and local laws. 13.0 Accountings, Inspection and Audit The Contractor agrees to keep books and records showing the costs incurred for the Work. Such books and records (including, without limitation, any electronic data processing files used by Contractor in analyzing and recording the Work) shall be open for inspection and audit by the College and its authorized representatives at reasonable hours at Contractor's local office or at the College's office, if necessary, and shall be retained by Contractor for a period of seven years after the Work has been completed. Each Contractor shall be similarly obligated to maintain, for inspection and audit by the College, books and records respecting the Work. 14.0 Liens Neither the final payment nor any part of the retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor shall deliver to the College a complete release or discharge of all liens arising out of this Contract, or receipts in full in lieu thereof and, in either case, an affidavit that so far as he has knowledge or information that the releases and receipts include all the labor and materials for which a lien could be filed; but the Contractor may, if any subcontractor refuses to furnish a receipt or release in full, furnish a bond satisfactory to the College, to indemnify the College against any lien. If any lien remains unsatisfied after all payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the College all monies that the later may be compelled to pay in discharging such a lien, including all costs and a reasonable attorney's fee. No Project #XXX, XXX, XXX 7 953 Danby Road • Ithaca, NY 14850 • (607) 274-3225 • (607) 274-1619 fax partial or progress payments shall be made to the Contractor as long as a lien is outstanding on the real property of the College by reason of claims arising out of the work of this Contract. 15.0 Non-Waiver The failure of either party to exercise any of its rights under this Agreement for a breach thereof shall not be deemed to be a waiver of such rights, and no waiver by either party, whether written or oral, express or implied, of any rights under or arising from the Agreement shall be binding on any subsequent occasion; and no concession by either party shall be treated as an implied modification of the Agreement unless specifically agreed in writing. 16.0 Force Majeure In the event the Premises are rendered unsuitable for the conduct of activities or events by reason of Force Majeure, the College may terminate this Agreement by written notice 30 days following such casualty and the College shall not be responsible for any damages sustained by Contractor but Contractor shall be entitled to a pro rata return of any sum paid or any other acceptable arrangement mutually agreed to by the parties. "Force majeure" shall mean fire, earthquake, flood, act of God, strikes, work stoppages, or other labor disturbances, riots or civil commotions, litigation, war or other act of any foreign nation, power of government, or governmental agency or authority, or any other cause like or unlike any cause above mentioned which is beyond the control or authority of the College. 17.0 Severability and Savings Clause. In the event one or more clauses of this Agreement are declared illegal, void or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, that shall not affect the validity of the remaining portions of this Agreement. 18.0 Entire Agreement; Modification. The Contract Documents constitute the entire agreement between the parties hereto and no statement, promise, condition, understanding, inducement or representation, oral or written, expressed or implied, which is not contained herein shall be binding or valid and the Contract Documents shall not be changed, modified or altered in any manner except by an instrument in writing executed by the parties hereto. 19.0 Provisions Required by Law Each and every provision required by law to be inserted in the Contract shall be deemed to be inserted herein and the Contract shall be read and enforced as though it were included herein and in the event any such provision is not inserted or is not correctly inserted then, upon the application of either party, this Contract shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion or correction. This Agreement contains all the terms between the parties and may be amended only in writing signed by both parties. Project #XXX, XXX, XXX 8 953 Danby Road • Ithaca, NY 14850 • (607) 274-3225 • (607) 274-1619 fax 20.0 Governing Law This Agreement shall be governed by the law of the State of New York. Any and all proceedings relating to the subject matter hereof shall be maintained in New York State Supreme Court, Tompkins county or the federal district court for the Northern District of New York, which courts shall have exclusive jurisdiction for such purposes. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have hereunto executed this Agreement on this _____ day of _________________, 20____, by and through their duly authorized representatives, as set forth below. (Signature) (Date) (Printed Name) (Title) (Signature) (Date) (Signature) (Date) Steve Dayton Dr. Timothy R. Carey (Printed Name) (Printed Name) Director of Planning, Design and Construction Associate VP of Facilities (Title) (Title) (Signature) (Date) William Guerrero (Printed Name) VP of Finance and Administration (Title) Project #XXX, XXX, XXX 9 953 Danby Road • Ithaca, NY 14850 • (607) 274-3225 • (607) 274-1619 fax SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR Ithaca College Construction Planning and Design General Capital Contract 1. Qualifications of Contractors All prospective contractors are hereby notified that, on request of the College, they must be able to prove to the satisfaction of the College, that they have the skill and experience, as well as the necessary facilities, ample financial resources, organization and general reliability to do the work to be performed under the provisions of the Contract, in a satisfactory manner and within the time specified. 2. Storage of Material and Equipment All material shall be stored in a neat, orderly manner within the confines of the contractor’s footprint (to be determined prior to the project’s start date). 3. Compliance to Document Follow drawings in the laying out of work and inspect locations of existing utilities and site conditions to be dealt with in the execution of this work. 4. Submittals After execution of Contract, and ordering of material, submit for approval the list of all materials, shop drawings and equipment proposed for use to avoid delay in construction schedule. Intention of using specified materials does not relieve obligation of submitting this list. 5. Permits Contractor shall obtain, maintain and pay for all permits and licenses necessary for the execution of the Work and for the use of such Work when completed. The Contractor shall give all notices, pay all fees and comply with all laws, rules and regulations applicable to the Work. 6. Changes within the Scope of the Work The Contractor shall, with the written approval of the College's representative, and without extra charge, make reasonable modifications in layout needed to prevent conflict with existing conditions for proper execution of this work. 7. Clean Up Contractor shall, at all times during the progress of his or her work, keep the site and adjacent roads (including street sweeping) and sidewalks free from accumulation of waste matter, dirt and rubbish. At the completion of the work, all excess materials, earth, etc., shall be removed from the site. Project #XXX, XXX, XXX 10 953 Danby Road • Ithaca, NY 14850 • (607) 274-3225 • (607) 274-1619 fax 8. Supervision Contractor shall supply services of an experienced and competent supervisor who shall be constantly in charge of work at the site and shall remain onsite until 100% completion of the project including any punchlist work required. 9. Representative of Ithaca College Ithaca College will assign a representative of the College. Only directives from Ithaca Colleges designated representative Steve Dayton (Project Manager) shall be recognized by the Contractor. 10. Employment Practices The Contractor warrants that with respect to all of its employees working on the College’s premises, the Contractor is in compliance with all federal, state and city laws, rules and regulations relating to labor relations, fair employment practices, pay rates, safety and similar rules and regulations. 11. Parking Permits Parking Permits are the contractor’s responsibility to obtain. All contractors, subcontractors and major vendors must obtain a college parking permit. (Parking Permits – can be obtained at the Office of Parking Services located within the Office of Public Safety on Farm Pond Road.) 12. Parking Parking near and around campus is limited. Contractor parking will be restricted to Red and Green parking lots when there is adequate access parking (depending on time of year). Only Superintendents and site sensitive equipment, personnel and delivery vehicles will be allowed on site parking privileges. These permits must be approved by the Director of Facilities Planning, Design and Construction. Contractor parking will not necessarily be accommodated immediately adjacent to the work site. Students and staff members have priority parking rights to College lots. It may be necessary to designate contractor parking in remote campus lots or locations, thereby requiring the contractor to arrange for shuttling to and from the job site (at no cost to Ithaca College). Final parking arrangements for projects will be discussed prior to the project kickoff, but the College will make the final determination on where contractors can and cannot park. Contractors or their subs who are ticketed are responsible for all fines, booting/towing expenses, etc. Ithaca College assumes no responsibility and will not seek to have fines or other costs waived. Project #XXX, XXX, XXX 11 953 Danby Road • Ithaca, NY 14850 • (607) 274-3225 • (607) 274-1619 fax SPECIAL CONDITIONS PART B FOR Ithaca College Construction Planning and Design General Capital Contract WORKPLACE COVID-19 SAFETY MEASURES 1. Perform routine environmental cleaning and disinfection. Routinely clean and disinfect all frequently touched surfaces in the workplace, such as workstations, telephones, doorknobs, etc. 2. Provision of needed occupational safety and health supplies ▪ Hand sanitizer and disposable disinfecting wipes ▪ Personal Protective Equipment (PPE): face shields, gloves, goggles, glasses, shoe covers, gowns, head covers, masks, respirators, etc. 3. Actively encourage sick employees to stay home and not to return to work until the CDC criteria to discontinue home isolation are met. 4. Inform employees of our possible exposure to COVID-19 if a fellow employee is confirmed to have COVID-19 infection (while maintaining confidentiality as required by the Americans with Disabilities Act). 5. Educate employees about how they can reduce the spread of COVID-19 by social distancing and avoiding using other employees’ phones, desks, offices, or other work tools and equipment, when possible. 6. Identify a workplace coordinator who will be responsible for COVID-19 issues and their impact at the workplace and who can work to keep employees safe. 7. Support respiratory etiquette and hand hygiene for employees, sub-contractors, delivery drivers and visitors. 8. Minimize travel. 9. Comply with applicable Federal, State, and Local health and safety guidelines, as well as health and safety protocols published by the College, which are subject to change over the duration of the public health crisis. Upon arrival, personnel should be prepared to: 10. Adhere to additional health and safety requirements, as communicated by College personnel. 11. Enter and exit through specified locations. 12. Wear additional PPE is designated locations. 13. Provide proof that the on-site visit is authorized to occur at the specific appointment time. 14. It will be the contractor’s responsibility to keep a daily log for everyone that has worked or visited each project on campus. Project #XXX, XXX, XXX 12 953 Danby Road • Ithaca, NY 14850 • (607) 274-3225 • (607) 274-1619 fax Ithaca College Planning, Design and Construction 201 Facilities Building Ithaca, NY 14850 607-274-1663 Key Transaction Date __________________ Company Name Company Address Company Phone Project Manager/Office Contact Employee (Name & ID # Required) Cell Phone Transaction: Tag # Quantity Key/Fob # Building Date Due Back Requestor Signature: Print: College Keys will be accessed and returned on a daily basis from the Facilities Maintenance Shop. Stolen/Lost Key Procedures A. Reporting 1. It is the responsibility of the employee, contractor/vendor, affiliate, or student to report lost or stolen keys. (a) Stolen/lost keys need to reported immediately; when they are determined to be lost/stolen (b) For student residential keys, lost or stolen keys must be reported to the residential area office in accordance with their designated residence. (c) For employee, contractor/vendor, or affiliate lost or stolen keys must be reported to Public Safety, Office of Facilities and to the Department originally authorizing the keys. 2. Contact Public Safety to file a lost or stolen property report. An incident report must be filed with Public Safety, and the incident number will be required for obtaining replacement keys. 3. The Office of Facilities and Office of Public Safety will consult to determine if, the safety or security reasons, rekeying is required. Consultation may include the Office of Residential Life, where appropriate. B. Charges/Accountability for lost/stolen keys 1. Contractor will be charged the rekey cost of $48.00 per recore plus $10.00 for each key cut when an individual room/office key is lost/stolen. 2. Lost Key charge will not be refunded, once the new key has been cut. Project #XXX, XXX, XXX 13 953 Danby Road • Ithaca, NY 14850 • (607) 274-3225 • (607) 274-1619 fax FINAL RELEASE FINAL WAIVER OF CLAIMS AND LIENS AND RELEASE OF RIGHTS Date ______________________ Contract Date ___________________ Project ______________________ Contract Price ___________________ Address ______________________ Net Extras and Deductions ___________________ City ______________________ Adjusted Contract Price ___________________ County ______________________ Amount Previously Paid ___________________ State ______________________ Balance Due - Final Payment ___________________ The undersigned hereby acknowledges that the above Balance Due when paid represents payment in full for all labor, materials, etc., furnished by the below named Contractor or Supplier in connection with its work on the above Project in accordance with the Contract. In consideration of the amounts and sums previously received, and the payment of $____________ being the full and Final Payment amount due, the below named Contractor or Supplier does hereby waive and release the College from any and all claims and liens and rights of liens upon the premises described above, and upon improvements now or hereafter thereon, and upon the monies or other considerations due or to become due from the College or from any other person, firm or corporation, said claims, liens and rights of liens being on account of labor, services, materials, fixtures or apparatus heretofore furnished by the below named Contractor or Supplier to the Project. The premises as to which said claims and liens are hereby released are identified as follows: _______________________________________________________________________________ The undersigned further represents and warrants that he/she is duly authorized and empowered to sign and execute this waiver on his/her own behalf and on behalf of the company or business for which he/she is signing; that it has properly performed all work and furnished all materials of the specified quality per plans and specifications and in a good and workmanlike manner, fully and completely; that it has paid for all the labor, materials, equipment and services that it has used or supplied, that it has no other outstanding and unpaid applications, invoices, retentions, holdbacks, expenses employed in the prosecution of work, chargeback’s or unbilled work or materials against the College as of the date of the aforementioned last and final payment application; and that any materials which have been supplied or incorporated into the above premises were either taken from its fully-paid or open stock or were fully paid for and supplied on the last and final payment application or invoice. The undersigned further agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless the College for any and all losses or expenses (including without limitation reasonable attorneys' fees) should any such claim, lien or right of lien be asserted by the below named Contractor or Supplier or by any of its or their laborers, material person or subcontractors. In addition, for and in consideration of the amounts and sums received, the below named Contractor or Supplier hereby waives, releases and relinquishes any and all claims, rights or causes of action in equity or law whatsoever arising out of through or under the above mentioned Contract and the performance of work pursuant thereto. The below named Contractor or Supplier further guarantees that all portions of the work furnished and installed are in accordance with the Contract and that the terms of the Contract with respect to this guarantee will remain in effect for the period specified in said Contract. _______________________________________ Sworn to before me this Corporation or Business Name ______day of____________________, 20____ By: ____________________________________ Title ___________________________________ Project #XXX, XXX, XXX 14 953 Danby Road • Ithaca, NY 14850 • (607) 274-3225 • (607) 274-1619 fax SCHEDULE A INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of employees on the worksite, and shall comply with all applicable provisions of Federal, State and Municipal safety laws and building codes to prevent accident or injury to persons on, about or adjacent to the premises where work is being performed. Contractor shall erect and properly maintain at all times as required by the conditions and progress of the work, all necessary safeguards for the protection of workmen and the public and shall post danger signs warning against the hazards created by this work. The Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless Ithaca College from claims for losses and damage for bodily injury, including death, and property damage arising out of, or as a result of, or in connection with the performance by the Contractor of the work covered by this contract. Contractor shall maintain the following coverage: Workers’ Compensation insurance policies in full compliance with the Workers’ Compensation Laws of the State of New York and all states where the work is performed or in which a claim shall be presented, with Coverage B – Employer’s Liability with limits of $1,000,000 each accident for Bodily Injury by Accident, $1,000,000 each employee for Bodily Injury by Disease, and $1,000,000 policy limit Bodily Injury by Disease, covering operations of the Contractor and its Sub-Contractors performed in connection with the work at the project site and where employees are dedicated to the project site. Comprehensive Commercial General Liability insurance, on an occurrence form, including premises-operations, hazards of explosion, collapse and underground, elevators, independent contractors, completed operations (3 year post- completion), cross-liability, severability of interest, broad form blanket contractual liability coverage for claims arising out of the work hereunder for personal injury, bodily injury and property damage, and products and completed operations, with available limits not less than $1,000,000 combined single limit per occurrence, $2,000,000 general annual aggregate, and $2,000,000 completed operations aggregate. Comprehensive Automobile Liability insurance covering all owned, non-owned and hired automobiles. The limits of liability to be provided shall be not less than $1,000,000. Combined Single Limit each occurrence for Bodily Injury and Property Damage. Excess Umbrella Liability insurance over all underlying exposures including, without limitation, operations and completed operations, with limits of not less than $5,000,000. Should aircraft of any kind be used by the Contractor or its Sub-Contractors or by anyone else on their behalf, the Contractor shall maintain or cause to be maintained aircraft liability insurance including bodily injury, property damage and passenger liability, as respects any aircraft owned, used, operated or hired in connection with the work by the Contractor, Sub-Contractors, or anyone else, with limits of $100,000,000 combined single limit for bodily injury and property damage any one occurrence. Furthermore, the Contractor shall secure the following terms and conditions to the policies listed: Project #XXX, XXX, XXX 15 953 Danby Road • Ithaca, NY 14850 • (607) 274-3225 • (607) 274-1619 fax All insurance carriers shall be authorized in the State of New York, acceptable to the Owner, and with a minimum rating of “A,” Class X in Best’s Key Rating Guide published by A.M. Best and Company, Inc. The insurance may be provided in a policy or policies, primary and excess, including the so-called Umbrella form, which may include the coverage, or layer thereof, of the insurance required by Ithaca College. The terms and conditions of all insurance provided by the Contractor shall be acceptable to Ithaca College. The limits of liability shall be as stated herein, unless prior to commencement of any work, written approval is granted by the Ithaca College for variance from those limits. Each insurance policy required to be provided, with the exception of the Workers’ Compensation and Employer’s Liability, shall be endorsed. To name as additional insured Ithaca College, their directors, members, officers, employees, assigns, successors, and all other persons or entities as may be reasonably required by Ithaca College. The coverage afforded the additional insured under these policies shall be primary insurance, and the policies shall include a severability of interest or cross-liability endorsement. If the additional insured has other insurance, which is applicable to the loss, such other insurance shall be on an excess, secondary and non-contributory basis. To provide that, in the event of any claims made by reason of bodily injury, personal injury or property damage which would be controverted, denied, or otherwise not covered by respecting the named insured due to a breach of a policy warranty or violation of a policy condition, such controversion, denial or otherwise shall not be imposed by the insurance company respecting the additional insured in the above paragraph. To provide that, in the event of any claims being made by reason of bodily injury, personal injury or property damage sustained by any agent, servant or employee of one insured for which another insured is or may be liable, then the policy shall cover such insured against whom a claim is made in the same manner as if a separate policy had been issued to each insured. To provide that the carrier(s) shall provide written notice to Ithaca College at least thirty (30) days prior to the date that any coverage or limits of liability shall be materially altered, non-renewed, canceled, reduced or allowed to expire. To provide that coverage will be provided for the indemnification obligation assumed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall furnish any Sub-Contractor, vendor, material supplier, haulers and/or independent haulers, or other party a copy of these insurance provisions and shall make the same requirements to them with respect to their sub-contract or procurement procedures. The duties, obligations and requirements of these insurance provisions shall apply and not be deviated to any additional parties employed by the contractor. Prior to the date on which the Contractor or its Sub-Contractors, and including vendors, material suppliers, haulers, or others who merely transport, pick up, deliver or carry materials, commences performance or operations under the Contract, the Contractor shall cause to be furnished to Ithaca College certificates of insurance evidencing all insurance as required herein, and which shall contain a provision the coverage and limits of liability afforded under the policies shall not be materially Project #XXX, XXX, XXX 16 953 Danby Road • Ithaca, NY 14850 • (607) 274-3225 • (607) 274-1619 fax altered, non-renewed, canceled, reduced or allowed to expire without thirty (30) days prior written notice to the certificate holder. In addition to providing any notice or complying with any other reporting requirements imposed by any policy hereunder, the Contractor shall immediately report in writing to Ithaca College designated insurance representative, any claim under any of the coverage mentioned herein. The Contractor agrees to cooperate with Ithaca College in promptly releasing reasonable information periodically as to the disposition of any claims, including a resume of claims experienced relating to Ithaca College. All policies of insurance that are in any way related to the work under the Contract and that are secured and maintained by the Contractor and its Sub-Contractors shall include clauses providing that each underwriter shall waive all of its rights of recovery, under subrogation or otherwise, against Ithaca College, its officers, members, directors, employees, sub-contractors, successors and assigns. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 001100- 1 SUMMARY QPK NO. 220157.00 011000 - 1 SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Schedule 4. Work under separate contracts. 5. Access to site. 6. Coordination with occupants. 7. Work restrictions. 8. Specification and drawing conventions. 9. Miscellaneous provisions. 1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Identification: Ithaca College Physician Assistant Program Rothschild Renovation 1. Project Location: Ithaca Commons, 215 East State Street, Ithaca, NY 14850 a. Rothschild Building Owner-Tenant: Ithaca College: Owner's Representative: Steve Dayton, Dir. for Planning Design & Construction Ithaca College Office for Facilities 201 Facilities Building 953 Danby Road Ithaca, NY 14850 (607) 274-1663 Landlord/Building Owner: Jeffrey Rimland. 2. Communication: All communication shall initially be with Owner-Tenant Representative Steve Dayton. Mr. Dayton will provide any additional direction with regard to communication with the Landlord/Building Owner. B. Architect: QPK Design, LLP, 450 S. Salina Street, Syracuse, New York 13202 Project Manager: Vincent Nicotra, R.A. 315-472-7806. 1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following to be accomplished: ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 001100- 2 SUMMARY QPK NO. 220157.00 011000 - 2 1. Construction Work of this Contract includes Selective Removals, General Construction, Mechanical, Electrical and Fire Alarm, Plumbing, and Fire Protection work. 2. The project requires: a. Ithaca College is leasing space for this buildout from the Landlord/Building Owner. The Landlord has cleared a majority of the floor area, and is providing perimeter tenant walls, door openings that will be in place or currently under construction at commencement of the construction of this project. b. Selective removals of existing slab on grade for new bathrooms and other plumbing fixtures. Selective removals of miscellaneous partitions, doors, door frames, and MEP system items. Preparing existing space to received construction show on documents. c. The project includes an interior buildout of two floors of leased space. General construction includes cast-in-place concrete at new steel posts and slab repairs at sanitary line installs below existing slab on grade and additional structural steel install at roof to support new roof top HVAC equipment. Also included are stud/gypsum board partitions, doors/frames and hardware, acoustical panel ceilings, wall finishes, installation of Owner provided flooring materials, millwork and painting, See documents for additional scope. d. Installation of Owner provided medical equipment. See Work Under Separate Contracts in this Section for further scope descriptions. e. Electrical – The electrical scope of work involves electric service panels, transformers and power distribution system to serve IC leased space. Electric service will be an extension of the existing electrical service. Provide power for MEP equipment, general use receptacles, led lighting. Electrical to include installation of LED lighting, lighting controls and fire alarm. The project includes routing of network & telephone cabling. See documents for additional scope. f. Plumbing – Installation of under slab sanitary piping below an existing concrete slab. Project includes installation of domestic water heaters, sanitary waste & vent along with domestic water supply piping, tempering valves and insulation. Installation of plumbing fixtures & supports. See documents for additional scope. g. Heating – Installation of an air source heat pump system with dedicated outdoor air units to serve IC leased space. Installation includes concealed ducted fan coils, ceiling mounted cassette and wall mounted heat pump units. System will include ductwork, insulation and refrigerant piping. System will include HVAC controls system and control wiring. See documents for additional scope. h. Fire Protection – As an extension of the existing fire protection sprinkler system, provide branch fire protection piping and sprinkler head coverage in IC leased space. See documents for additional scope. B. Type of Contract: Project will be constructed under a single-prime contract. 1. Prevailing Wage Rates are not required for this Project. 2. Bid Bonds and Performance bonds are not required for this Project. 1.4 SCHEDULE A. Work of this contract shall commence immediately upon notice to proceed from the Owner. B. Contract shall include pre-construction services to prepare for the construction, including weekly Owner’s meetings from date of Notice to Proceed until start of construction. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 001100- 3 SUMMARY QPK NO. 220157.00 011000 - 3 C. Construction Work of this Contract shall commence on date to be determined during the bid period. 1. Contractor shall disconnect plumbing and electrical connections prior to removals and coordinate shut-offs with Owner. D. Final Completion of the Work shall be no later than Friday, July 23, 2021 at 5 p.m. 1.5 WORK UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors and Owner’s vendors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or other contracts. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts. B. Concurrent work: The Owner will award separate contracts for the following scopes (refer to schedules provide in Construction Drawings): 1. EMS (Educational Management Solutions): EMS will provide the platform (software and hardware) for the simulated training program conducted in the second floor exam rooms, operating and procedure rooms. Ithaca College will order all equipment and software. EMS will install all systems working closely with Ithaca College Information Technology Staff. Data wiring for cameras, computers and monitoring equipment will be installed by EMS and/or Ithaca IT in pathways provided under the General Construction Contract as indicated on the Construction Documents. Refer to attached Project Schedule for installation anticipated installation dates. 2. Audio Visual equipment: Ithaca College will hire a contractor to install all audio-visual equipment indicated on Tomei AV Consulting drawings attached for reference to the Construction Contract Drawings, including TV monitors and brackets. Coordinate installation of blocking provide by this contract. Data wiring and cabling will be in pathways provided under the General Construction Contract as indicated on the Construction Documents. 3. Laerdal Medical: Ithaca College will purchase simulation manikins and equipment and have delivered to the project site. General Contractor will unload delivery vehicle and transport equipment to second floor SIM Storage room, operating room or other location on the second floor as directed by the College. Delivery will consist of (7) small to medium size boxes and (3) large boxes. The College will unbox the equipment. 4. Diametrical USA: Ithaca College will purchase medical equipment, sinks, faucets and other medical related training items and have delivered to the project site. General Contractor General Contractor will unload delivery vehicle and transport equipment to second floor into the building where schedule. Contractor will store, handle, protect and install all equipment as scheduled. 5. Office Furnishings: Ithaca College will purchase office furnishings from their selected vendor. Vendor will deliver and install all new office furnishings. General Contractor to coordinate and facilitate vendor’s installation with overall work. 6. Classroom and Learning Center and other furnishings: Ithaca College will purchase office furnishings from their selected vendor. Vendor will deliver and install all new classroom and learning center and other furnishings. General Contractor to coordinate and facilitate vendor’s installation with overall work. 7. On Site Stored Furnishings installed by Ithaca College: Ithaca College will clean, transport and install previously salvaged furnishings stored in the basement of the ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 001100- 4 SUMMARY QPK NO. 220157.00 011000 - 4 Rothschild Building. Ithaca College will clean, and place stored refrigerators into locations shown on construction drawings. General Contraction to coordinate and facilitate installation with overall work. 8. Stored Lockers from previous Salvage: General Contractor shall retrieve previously salvaged lockers to be installed in second floor breakroom from the basement of the Rothschild Building. Contractor shall clean, check operation, and touch up paint existing lockers as necessary to match new scheduled lockers. 9. Miscellaneous equipment: Ithaca College will purchase and install microwaves and washer and dryer. 10. Salvaged items to be reinstalled: Refer to documents for items currently in place on the project site that require General Contractor to salvage and reinstall. 1.6 LANDLORD/BUILDING OWNER PROVIDED WORK A. The Landlord/Building Owner is providing the exterior Ithaca College Lobby entrance storefront door. Hardware is specified by Ithaca College and installed by building owner’s contractor for these doors, with the exception of the Besam Automatic Door Operator to be installed by work of this contractor. Building Owner will provide a pathway to hardware requiring electronic functions to above ceiling for the Lobby 100 door. Ithaca College’s selected General Construction Contractor for this project will provide any additional pathways as identified on construction documents and complete the wiring to the locations indicated on the Ithaca College Construction Documents. B. The Landlord/Building Owner is providing doors and frames installed on the first floor of tenant wall perimeter partitions scheduled to be in place at time of construction of this contract. Hardware for these doors shall be provided and installed by work of this contract. Refer to construction drawings and hardware schedules for door openings and hardware. 1.7 BREAKOUT COST WORK: A. Bid form indicates work to be included in the Base Bid amount of this contract but the cost broken out for use by Ithaca College. These are not Alternates, but a summary of costs for scopes described on Bid Form and amounts shall be included in the Base Bid. 1.8 FUTURE WORK: A. Refer to contract drawings for portions of the work shown for coordination purposes but is not included in the scope of this phase of the project. The future work is for identified portions of the Interprofessional clinic area on the first floor. 1.9 ACCESS TO SITE A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project and Landlord’s right to perform work or to retain other contractors for concurrent work on in other parts of the building or adjacent ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 001100- 5 SUMMARY QPK NO. 220157.00 011000 - 5 structures. Landlord’s existing tenants must have the right to continue maintain access to their spaces and continue operations without interruption. B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Limits: Confine construction operations to the designated floors. 2. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways, loading areas, and entrances serving premises clear and available to Landlord/Building Owner and its tenants, construction personnel and other service personnel, Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. C. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. 1.10 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS A. Ithaca College as Tenant/Owner Occupancy: Ithaca College will not occupy the building during construction. The site, driveways, walkways and public spaces and adjacent buildings will be occupied during the construction period. Cooperate with Landlord/Building Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Landlord/Building Owner usage and existing tenant uses. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Building Owner's other ongoing construction operations. 1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or in-use facilities. Do not close or obstruct driveways, parking spaces, walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Ithaca College and Landlord/Building Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide not less than 48-hours’ notice to Owner of activities that will affect Ithaca College or Landlord/Building Owner's and/or tenants operations. B. Owner’s Limited Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed portions of the Work, prior to Substantial Completion of the Work, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and limited occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. 1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied prior to Owner acceptance of the completed Work. 2. Obtain a Certificate of Completion from authorities having jurisdiction before limited Owner occupancy. 3. Before limited Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 001100- 6 SUMMARY QPK NO. 220157.00 011000 - 6 occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of Work. 4. Upon occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of Work. 1.11 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. 1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours of 7:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m., 7 days a week, unless otherwise indicated. Work outside normal working hours shall be coordinated and scheduled in advance with Ithaca College and City of Ithaca officials. 1. Costs for over-time and/or holiday- time shall be included in the Contractor’s bid, based upon Contractor’s schedule requirements to meet the Owner’s completion schedule. 2. Overtime work (night shifts and/or Holidays) is acceptable, provided the Contractor adheres to local noise control and lighting ordinances. Coordinate security and activity restrictions with Ithaca College representative. C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner not less than seven days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions. D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner. 1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed disruptive operations. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations. E. Controlled Substances: Use of controlled substances is not permitted. Use of tobacco products is restricted to designated areas identified (if any) locations at the pre-construction meeting. 1.12 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 001100- 7 SUMMARY QPK NO. 220157.00 011000 - 7 B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products: 1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections. 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations scheduled on Drawings. 1.13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS A. Contractor shall arrange for parking of their construction vehicles. Ithaca College will provide parking on the Ithaca campus for carpooling construction personnel. B. Any proposed staging areas outside the project work area shall be coordinated with the Ithaca College project representative. 1. Contractor can use existing on-site restroom facilities on second floor of the Project. Contractor shall provide temporary facilities if on site facilities are disrupted or interfere with progression of the work C. Proposed location of cranes, if utilized, shall be reviewed and coordinated with the Ithaca College representative for coordination with Landlord and authorities having jurisdiction. D. Arrange for and conduct a pre-installation conference for the crane installation. Obtain all required permits and approvals prior to use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUSTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 011000 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 012300 - 1 ALTERNATES QPK NO. 220157.00 012300 - 1 SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement. 2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternates into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. B. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. C. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 012300 - 2 ALTERNATES QPK NO. 220157.00 012300 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate No. 1 - Provide Virtual Skylight in lieu of Acoustical Panel Ceiling/Lighting. 1. Base Bid: Provide suspended acoustical panel suspended ceiling system and lighting with gypsum soffit over intercommunicating stair north of Hall 229 as indicated on drawings. 2. Alternate: Virtual Skylight, including fixture and complete installation as indicated on drawings as Alternate No. 1 in lieu of base bid acoustical panel ceiling and lighting. Gypsum soffit to remain. END OF SECTION 012300 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 012600 - 1 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES QPK NO. 220157.00 012600 - 1 SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. 1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, as "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." 1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Architect. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 012600 - 2 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES QPK NO. 220157.00 012600 - 2 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 6. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. C. Proposal Request Form: Use acceptable form for Proposal Requests. 1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect or Owner will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on acceptable form. 1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive unless other method of compensation indicated. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012600 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 012900 - 1 PAYMENT PROCEDURES QPK NO. 220157.00 012900 - 1 SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b. Submittals Schedule. c. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than ten days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 012900 - 2 PAYMENT PROCEDURES QPK NO. 220157.00 012900 - 2 b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Submit draft of Schedule of Values with appropriate breakdown as approved. 3. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value. 1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. 5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 6. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If specified, include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing. 7. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 8. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 012900 - 3 PAYMENT PROCEDURES QPK NO. 220157.00 012900 - 3 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: Progress payments shall be submitted to Architect by the twentyeighth of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the twenty-fifth day of the month, unless otherwise indicated in the Agreement. C. Payment Application Forms: Use acceptable forms. D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. E. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. F. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 4. Products list. 5. Schedule of unit prices (if any). 6. Submittals Schedule (final). 7. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 8. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 9. Copies of building permits. 10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 11. Initial progress report. 12. Report of preconstruction conference. 13. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 14. Performance and payment bonds. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 012900 - 4 PAYMENT PROCEDURES QPK NO. 220157.00 012900 - 4 15. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. 16. Initial settlement survey and damage report if required. G. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion (if any), submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. H. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. Final Waiver of Claims and Liens and Release of Rights (Use Ithaca College form provided with the contract). 5. Evidence that claims have been settled. 6. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012900 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 013000- 1 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 013000 - 1 SECTION 013000 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preconstruction meeting. B. Preconstruction Services C. Progress meetings. D. Daily progress reporting. E. Related Section: 013300 “Submittal Procedures” PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Owner will schedule a meeting after Notice of Award. B. Attendance Required: 1. Owner. 2. Architect. 3. MEP&FP Engineer. 4. Contractor. 5. Major Subcontractors. C. Agenda: 1. Execution of Owner – Contractor Agreement. 2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 3. Distribution of Contract Documents. 4. Submission of construction schedule. 5. Designation of personnel representing the parties in Contract, and the Architect. 6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures, and other Administrative requirements. 7. Review of long lead items. 8. Review of Ithaca College construction period procedures. 9. Review of procedures regarding Landlord’s ongoing operations, including construction and existing and possible new tenants occupying adjacent spaces. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 013000- 2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 013000 - 2 D. Architect shall record minutes and distribute copies within seven days after meeting to participants, with copies to Architect, Owner and participants. 3.2 PRECONSTRUCTION SERVICES A. Owner will make arrangements for project meetings every two weeks and preside at meetings. Contractor will prepare agenda with copies for participants. Weekly meetings may take place at discretion of Owner. B. Preconstruction meetings will be conducted from date of Award of Contract until start of Construction. C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Owner. D. Contractor shall prepare critical path schedule, including work by other contracts as listed in Section 011000 “Summary”. E. Contractor shall prepare a submittal log of all submittals. Contractor update log for review at weekly project meetings. F. Agenda for review and management of preconstruction activities: 1. Review of sub-contractor contract status. 2. Review of critical path for Preconstruction and Construction activities. 3. Identifications, tracking, and documentation of long-lead items purchase and delivery. 4. Planning for means and methods of site access issues and crane locations. 5. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 6. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 7. Maintenance of preconstruction schedule. 8. Other business relating to Work. G. Contractor shall record minutes and distribute copies within four days after meeting to participants, with copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule and administer weekly meetings throughout progress of the Work or as directed by the Owner's representative. B. Owner will make arrangements for weekly project meetings and preside at meetings unless otherwise determined. Contractor will prepare agenda with copies for participants. C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Owner, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. D. Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 013000- 3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 013000 - 3 4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals and contractors weekly updated submittal log. 6. Maintenance of progress schedule. 7. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 8. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 9. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 10. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 11. Other business relating to Work. E. Contractor shall record minutes and distribute copies within four days after meeting to participants, with copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.4 DAILY PROGRESS REPORTS AND SCHEDULES A. The Contractor shall provide written daily progress reports and schedule updates to the Owner’s representative for the Owner’s use in monitoring the progress of the work. 3.5 WEEKLY SUBMITTALS LOG A. The Contractor shall provide weekly submittals logs for review at preconstruction and construction progress meetings. END OF SECTION ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 013100- 1 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION QPK NO. 220157.00 013100 - 1 SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. General coordination procedures. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. RFIs. 4. Digital project management procedures. 5. Project meetings. 6. Submittal Logs for review at project meetings. B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility are assigned to a specific contractor. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. 2. Section 017300 "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-Architecting services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BIM: Building Information Modeling. B. RFI: Request for Information. Request from Owner, Architect or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 013100- 2 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION QPK NO. 220157.00 013100 - 2 1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. B. Key Personnel Names: Within 5 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 1. Post copies of list in project meeting room. Keep list current at all times. 1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. Coordination: Each contractor shall coordinate its construction operations with those of other contractors and entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Each contractor shall coordinate its own operations with operations included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. C. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. D. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and scheduled activities of other contractors performing work under separate contract to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 013100- 3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION QPK NO. 220157.00 013100 - 3 1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals and maintenance of contractor’s submittal log. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 1.6 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (RFI) A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information, clarification, or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. Architect will return without response those RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches. C. RFI Forms: Format as approved by Owner and Architect. 1. Attachments shall be electronic files in PDF format. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 013100- 4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION QPK NO. 220157.00 013100 - 4 D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow five working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods. d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs. 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt by Architect of additional information. 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures." a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 7 days of receipt of the RFI response. E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Include the following: 1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 9. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response. 1.7 DIGITAL PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES A. Use of Architect's Digital Data Files: Digital data files of Architect's CAD drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use during construction upon agreement for release of Architect’s liability. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 013100- 5 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION QPK NO. 220157.00 013100 - 5 1. Digital data files may be used by Contractor in preparing coordination drawings, Shop Drawings, and Project record Drawings. 2. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data files as they relate to Contract Drawings. 3. Digital Drawing Software Program: Contract Drawings are available in AutoCAD format. 4. Contractor shall agree to a waiver of liability for using files provided on behalf of the Owner. 5. The following digital data files will be furnished for each appropriate discipline as requested: a. Floor plans. b. Reflected ceiling plans. B. Newforma (web-based) Project Software: Use Architect's, Newforma Project software site for purposes of managing Project communication and documentation until Final Completion. 1. Newforma Project software site includes, at a minimum, the following features: a. Compilation of Project data, including Contractor, subcontractors, Architect, Architect's consultants, Owner, and other entities involved in Project. Include names of individuals and contact information. b. Creation, logging, tracking, and notification for Project communications required in other Specification Sections, including, but not limited to, RFIs, submittals, Minor Changes in the Work, Construction Change Directives, and Change Orders. c. Track status of each Project communication in real time, and log time and date when responses are provided. d. Procedures for handling PDFs or similar file formats, allowing markups by each entity. e. Processing and tracking of payment applications. f. Processing and tracking of contract modifications. g. Creating and distributing meeting minutes. h. Document management for Drawings, Specifications, and coordination drawings, including revision control. C. PDF Document Preparation: Where PDFs are required to be submitted to Architect, prepare as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item. 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 3. Certifications: Where digitally submitted certificates and certifications are required, provide a digital signature with digital certificate on where indicated. 1.8 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences that include the architect, Owner and major subcontractors at Project site unless otherwise indicated at a minimum every two weeks. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 013100- 6 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION QPK NO. 220157.00 013100 - 6 Meet with Owner’s Representative weekly. Owner may request weekly meetings with major subcontractors. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times a minimum of 10 working days prior to meeting. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: Owner will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect that will not affect the ability of the contractor to meet the project completion schedule. 1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Responsibilities and personnel assignments. b. Tentative construction schedule. c. Phasing. d. Critical work sequencing and long lead items. e. Designation of key personnel and their duties. f. Lines of communications. g. Use of web-based Project software. h. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. i. Procedures for RFIs. j. Procedures for testing and inspecting. k. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. l. Distribution of the Contract Documents. m. Submittal procedures. n. Sustainable design requirements. o. Preparation of Record Documents. p. Use of the premises and existing building. q. Work restrictions. r. Working hours. s. Owner's occupancy requirements. t. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. u. Procedures for moisture and mold control. v. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. w. Construction waste management and recycling. x. Parking availability. y. Office, work, and storage areas. z. Equipment deliveries and priorities. aa. First aid. bb. Security. cc. Progress cleaning. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 013100- 7 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION QPK NO. 220157.00 013100 - 7 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity when required by other sections and when required for coordination with other construction. 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Sustainable design requirements. i. Review of mockups. j. Possible conflicts. k. Compatibility requirements. l. Time schedules. m. Weather limitations. n. Manufacturer's written instructions. o. Warranty requirements. p. Compatibility of materials. q. Acceptability of substrates. r. Temporary facilities and controls. s. Space and access limitations. t. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. u. Testing and inspecting requirements. v. Installation procedures. w. Coordination with other work. x. Required performance results. y. Protection of adjacent work. z. Protection of construction and personnel. 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information. 5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at biweekly intervals. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 013100- 8 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION QPK NO. 220157.00 013100 - 8 1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Resolution of BIM component conflicts. 4) Status of submittals. 5) Status of sustainable design documentation. 6) Deliveries. 7) Off-site fabrication. 8) Access. 9) Site use. 10) Temporary facilities and controls. 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Status of correction of deficient items. 14) Field observations. 15) Status of RFIs. 16) Status of Proposal Requests. 17) Pending changes. 18) Status of Change Orders. 19) Pending claims and disputes. 20) Documentation of information for payment requests. 4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 013100- 9 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION QPK NO. 220157.00 013100 - 9 E. Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings at regular intervals as necessary to maintain the progress of work and meet the contract schedule. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings and preinstallation conferences. 1. Attendees: Each contractor, subcontractor, supplier and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meetings shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to combined Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. b. Schedule Updating: Revise combined Contractor's construction schedule after each coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting. c. Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Resolution of BIM component conflicts. 4) Status of submittals. 5) Deliveries. 6) Off-site fabrication. 7) Access. 8) Site use. 9) Temporary facilities and controls. 10) Work hours. 11) Hazards and risks. 12) Progress cleaning. 13) Quality and work standards. 14) Status of RFIs. 15) Proposal Requests. 16) Change Orders. 17) Pending changes. 3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 013100- 10 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION QPK NO. 220157.00 013100 - 10 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 013100 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 013300- 1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES QPK NO. 220157.00 013300 - 1 SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals." B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals." C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files. D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. 1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 013300- 2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES QPK NO. 220157.00 013300 - 2 2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first 21 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. 3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule. a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals. 4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format: a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. c. Submittal category: Action; informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. g. Scheduled date of fabrication. h. Scheduled dates for purchasing. i. Scheduled dates for installation. j. Activity or event number. 1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule. 3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals. 4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. B. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 10 business days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. 2. Resubmittal Review: Allow 5 business days for review of each resubmittal. C. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows: ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 013300- 3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES QPK NO. 220157.00 013300 - 3 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item. 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-061000.01.A). 3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Owner and Architect, containing the following information: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name of Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. f. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. g. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. h. Category and type of submittal. i. Submittal purpose and description. j. Specification Section number and title. k. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of multiple items. l. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. m. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. n. Related physical samples submitted directly. o. Indication of full or partial submittal. p. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. q. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. r. Other necessary identification. s. Remarks. D. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect. E. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal. F. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's stamp. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 013300- 4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES QPK NO. 220157.00 013300 - 4 G. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. H. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections. 1. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files. a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. 2. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted certificates and certifications where indicated. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information. 4. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 5. Submit Product Data in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 013300- 5 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES QPK NO. 220157.00 013300 - 5 C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional Architect if specified. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm), but no larger than 30 by 42 inches (750 by 1067 mm). 3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item. 3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record. 4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for qualitycontrol comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 013300- 6 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES QPK NO. 220157.00 013300 - 6 a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain one and Owner will retain one. E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated. 2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3. Number and name of room or space. 4. Location within room or space. 5. Submit product schedule in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. F. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of Architects and owners, and other information specified. G. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. H. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. I. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. J. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. K. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 013300- 7 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES QPK NO. 220157.00 013300 - 7 L. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. M. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: 1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use. N. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. O. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. P. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. Q. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. 2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 013300- 8 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES QPK NO. 220157.00 013300 - 8 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. 2. Design Professional shall be licensed and registered to practice in New York State and have a minimum of $1,000,000 of professional liability coverage in addition to statutory requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action. B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect. D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review. E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action. 3.3 CONTRACTOR’S SUBMITTAL TRACKING A. Contractor shall maintain a submittal log, updated weekly. Contractor shall provide copies of submittal log to be reviewed at each pre-construction and construction project meeting. END OF SECTION 013300 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 014110 - 1 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS & TESTING QPK NO. 220157.00 014110 - 1 SECTION 014110 – SPECIAL INSPECTIONS & TESTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related documents attached to this specification: 1. Statement of Special Inspections. 2. Schedule of Special Inspection Services. 3. Final Report of Special Inspections. 1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. This specification section delineates Special Inspection and Testing Requirements for the following construction: 1. Structural. 2. Architectural. B. Special Inspections and Testing shall be in accordance with Chapter 17 of the 2018 International Building Code and as modified by 2020 Building Code of New York State. C. This specification section is intended to inform the Contractor of the Owner’s quality assurance program and the extent of the Contractor’s responsibilities. This specification section is also intended to notify the Special Inspector, Testing Laboratory, and other Agents of the Special Inspector of their requirements and responsibilities. 1.3 SCHEDULE OF INSPECTIONS AND TESTS A. Required inspections and tests are described in the attached Schedule of Special Inspection Services and in the individual specification Sections for the items to be inspected or tested. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. See Table herein for Special Inspector qualifications. The Special Inspector and Testing Laboratory shall be approved by the Registered Design Professional (RDP) and the local Building Official. B. The testing laboratory shall either maintain or contract with a full time licensed Professional Engineer in the State of New York who shall certify all test reports. The Engineer shall be responsible for the training of the testing technicians and shall be in responsible charge of the field and laboratory testing operations. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 014110 - 2 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS & TESTING QPK NO. 220157.00 014110 - 2 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. The Special Inspector and Testing Laboratory shall submit to the RDP and Building Official for review a copy of their qualifications which shall include the names and qualifications of each of the individual inspectors and technicians who will be performing inspections or tests. B. The Special Inspector and Testing Laboratory shall disclose any past or present business relationship or potential conflict of interest with the Contractor or any of the Subcontractors whose work will be inspected or tested. 1.6 PAYMENT A. The Owner shall engage and pay for the services of the Special Inspector and Testing Laboratory. B. If any materials which require Special Inspections are fabricated in a plant which is not located within 100 miles of the project, the Contractor shall be responsible for the travel expenses of the Special Inspector or Testing Laboratory. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of any retesting or re-inspection of work which fails to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.7 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Special Inspector so that the Special Inspections and testing may be performed without hindrance. B. The Contractor shall review the Statement of Special Inspections and shall be responsible for coordinating and scheduling inspections and tests. The Contractor shall notify the Special Inspector or Testing Laboratory at least 24 hours in advance of a required inspection or test. Uninspected work that required inspection may be rejected solely on that basis. C. The Contractor shall provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access to the work to be inspected or tested, to obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of products to be tested, to facilitate tests and inspections, storage and curing of test samples. D. The Contractor shall keep at the project site the latest set of construction drawings, field sketches, approved shop drawings, and specifications for use by the inspectors and testing technicians. E. The Special Inspection program shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his obligation to perform work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents or from implementing an effective Quality Control program. All work that is to be subjected to Special Inspections shall first be reviewed by the Contractor’s quality control personnel. F. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for construction site safety. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 014110 - 3 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS & TESTING QPK NO. 220157.00 014110 - 3 1.8 LIMITS OF AUTHORITY A. The Special Inspector or Testing Laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. The Special Inspector or Testing Laboratory will not have control nor responsibility over the Contractor’s means and methods of construction. C. The Special Inspector or Testing Laboratory shall not be responsible for construction site safety. D. The Special Inspector or Testing Laboratory has no authority to stop the work. 1.9 STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS A. The Statement of Special Inspections will be prepared by the Registered Design Professional (RDP). B. The Statement of Special Inspections shall be submitted with the application for Building Permit. 1.10 RECORDS AND REPORTS A. Detailed daily reports shall be prepared of each inspection or test submitted to the Special Inspector. Reports shall include: 1. date of test or inspection 2. name of inspector or technician 3. location of specific areas tested or inspected 4. description of test or inspection and results 5. applicable ASTM standard 6. weather conditions 7. construction documents referenced for inspections and tests. B. The Special Inspector shall submit reports to the RDP and Building Official daily. Hand written reports may be submitted if final typed copies are not available. C. Any discrepancies from the Contract Documents found during a Special Inspection shall be immediately reported to the Contractor. If the discrepancies are not corrected, the Special Inspector shall notify the RDP and Building Official. Reports shall document all discrepancies identified and the corrective action taken. D. The Testing Laboratory shall immediately notify the Special Inspector and the RDP and Building Official by telephone or fax of any test results which fail to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents E. At the completion of the work requiring Special Inspections, each Special Inspector and Testing Laboratory shall provide a statement to the RDP and Building Official that all work was completed in substantial conformance with the Contract Documents and that all appropriate inspections and tests were performed. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 014110 - 4 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS & TESTING QPK NO. 220157.00 014110 - 4 1.11 FINAL REPORT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS A. The Final Report of Special Inspections shall be completed by the Special Inspector and submitted to the RDP and Building Official prior to the issuance of a Certificate of Use and Occupancy. B. The Final Report of Special Inspections will certify that all required inspections have been performed and will itemize any discrepancies that were not corrected or resolved. SPECIAL INSPECTOR QUALIFICATIONS CATEGORY CODE REFERENCE MINIMUM QUALIFICATIONS Reinforced Concrete 1705.3 1. Current ICC Reinforced Concrete Special Inspector or ACI Concrete Construction Inspector. 2. Concrete field testing can be by an ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician with Grade 1 Certification. 3. Engineer-in-Training (EIT) with relevant experience. 4. Licensed Professional Engineer (P.E.) with relevant experience. Welding 1705.2 1705.2.2 1. Current AWS Certified Welding Inspector. 2. Current ICC Structural Steel and welding certificate plus one year of relevant experience. 3. Current Level II Certification form the American Society for Nondestructive Testing (NDT). 4. Current NDT Level III provided previously certified as NDT Level II. High-strength Bolting & Steel Frame Inspection 1705.2 1. Current ICC Structural Steel and Welding Certificate and one year of relevant experience. 2. EIT with relevant experience. 3. P.E. with relevant experience. Masonry 1705.4 1. Current ICC Structural Masonry Certificate and one year of relevant experience. 2. EIT with relevant experience. 3. P.E. with relevant experience. Sprayed Fireproofing Intumescent Fireresistant coatings 1705.14 1705.15 1. Current ICC Spray-Applied Fireproofing Certificate and one year of relevant experience. 2. NFCA SFRM/IFRM Inspector Certificate and one year of relevant experience. 3. EIT with relevant experience. 4. P.E. with relevant experience. Excavation and Filling; Verification of Soils; Piling & Drilled Piers; Helical Piles, Driven Deep Foundations 1705.6 1705.7 1705.8 1705.9 1. Current Level II Certificate in geotechnical engineering technology/construction from the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET). 2. EIT with relevant experience. 3. P.E. with relevant experience. Inspection of Fabricators 1704.2.5 1. Structural Steel: See welding requirements. Exterior Insulation and Finish System 1705.16 1. RDP with relevant experience. 2. EIT with relevant experience. Smoke Control 1705.18 1. The RDP responsible for design. Seismic Resistance 1705.12 1705.13 1. See the applicable categories in this table. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 014110 - 5 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS & TESTING QPK NO. 220157.00 014110 - 5 Wood Construction 1705.5 1. EIT with relevant experience. 2. P.E. with relevant experience. Wind Resistance 1705.11 See the applicable categories in this table. Fire-resistant Penetrations and Joints 1705.17 1. Current ICC Firestop Inspector Certificate and one year of relevant experience. 2. Current IFC (International Firestop Council) Firestop Inspector Certificate and one year of relevant experience. 3. EIT with relevant experience. 4. P.E. with relevant experience. PART 2 - (NOT USED) PART 3 - (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 014110 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 014110 - 2 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTING 014110 - 2 QPK No. 220157.00 Schedule of Special Inspection Services This Statement of Special Inspections includes the following building systems: Special Cases Mechanical & Electrical Components Steel Construction Storage Racks Cold-Formed Steel Framing Spray Fire-Resistant Materials Concrete Construction Mastic & Intumescent Fire-Resistant Coatings Masonry Construction Exterior Insulation & Finish Systems Wood Construction Fire-Resistant Penetrations and Joints Soils and Foundations Smoke Control Systems Architectural Components Other Special Inspection Agencies Firm Address, Telephone, e-mail 1. Special Inspection Coordinator QPK Design, LLP 450 S. Salina Street, Ste. 500 Syracuse, NY 13201 2. Inspector To be determined 3. Inspector To be determined 4. Testing Agency To be determined 5. Testing Agency To be determined 6. Other SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTION SERVICES Per IBC Section 1704 of the 2018 International Building Code the following items require Special Inspections. Special Inspection items may have been added by the Registered Design Professional. PROJECT: Ithaca College Physician Assistant Program- Rothschild Renovation OWNER: Ithaca College MATERIAL / ACTIVITY SERVICE APPLICABLE TO THIS PROJECT Y/N EXTENT AGENT* SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTING 014110 - 2 QPK No. 220157.00 1704.2.5 Inspection of Fabricators Verify fabrication/quality control procedures In-plant review (3) Y Periodic 1705.1.1 Special Cases (work unusual in nature, including but not limited to alternative materials and systems, unusual design applications, materials and systems with special manufacturer's requirements) Submittal review, shop (3) and/or field inspection N 1705.2 Steel Construction 1. Fabricator and erector documents (Verify reports and certificates as listed in AISC 360, chapter N, paragraph 3.2 for compliance with construction documents) Submittal Review Y Each submittal 2. Material verification of structural steel Shop (3) and field inspection Y Periodic 3. Embedments (Verify diameter, grade, type, length, embedment. See 1705.3 for anchors) Field inspection Y Continuous 4. Verify member locations, braces, stiffeners, and application of joint details at each connection comply with construction documents Field inspection Y Periodic 5. Structural steel welding: a. Inspection tasks Prior to Welding (Observe, or perform for each welded joint or member, the QA tasks listed in AISC 360, Table N5.4-1) Shop (3) and field inspection Y Observe or Perform as noted (4) b. Inspection tasks During Welding (Observe, or perform for each welded joint or member, the QA tasks listed in AISC 360, Table N5.4 1) Shop (3) and field inspection Y Observe (4) c. Inspection tasks After Welding (Observe, or perform for each welded joint or member, the QA tasks listed in AISC 360, Table N5.4 3) Shop (3) and field inspection Y Observe or Perform as noted (4) d. Nondestructive testing (NDT) of welded joints: see Commentary 1) Complete penetration groove welds 5/16" or greater in risk category III or IV Shop (3) or field ultrasonic testing - 100% N Periodic 2) Complete penetration groove welds 5/16" or greater in risk category II Shop (3) or field ultrasonic testing - 10% of welds minimum Y Periodic 3) Thermally cut surfaces of access holes when material t > 2" Shop (3) or field magnetic Partical or Penetrant testing Y Periodic 4) Welded joints subject to fatigue when required by AISC 360, Appendix 3, Table A-3.1 Shop (3) or field radiographic or Ultrasonic testing N Periodic 5) Fabricator's NDT reports when fabricator performs NDT Verify reports Y Each submittal (5) 6. Structural steel bolting: Shop (3) and field inspection a. Inspection tasks Prior to Bolting (Observe, or perform tasks for each bolted connection, in accordance with Y Observe or Perform SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTION SERVICES Per IBC Section 1704 of the 2018 International Building Code the following items require Special Inspections. Special Inspection items may have been added by the Registered Design Professional. PROJECT: Ithaca College Physician Assistant Program- Rothschild Renovation OWNER: Ithaca College MATERIAL / ACTIVITY SERVICE APPLICABLE TO THIS PROJECT Y/N EXTENT AGENT* SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTING 014110 - 3 QPK No. 220157.00 a. Mechanical Connections: Sizes at locations of all fasteners. Field inspection N Periodic b. Welding: Shop at field welds inspected per AWS D.3 Shop (3) and field inspection N Periodic 5. Cold-formed steel trusses spanning 60 feet or greater QA tasks listed in AISC 360, Table N5.6-1) as noted (4) b. Inspection tasks During Bolting (Observe the QA tasks listed in AISC 360, Table N5.6-2) Y Observe (4) 1) Pre-tensioned and slip-critical joints a) Turn-of-nut with matching markings Y Periodic b) Direct tension indicator Y Periodic c) Twist-off type tension control bolt Y Periodic d) Turn-of-nut without matching markings Y Continuous e) Calibrated wrench Y Continuous 2) Snug-tight joints Y Periodic c. Inspection tasks After Bolting (Perform tasks for each bolted connection in accordance with QA tasks listed in AISC 360, Table N5.6-3) Y Perform (4) 7. Inspection of steel elements of composite construction prior to concrete placement in accordance with QA tasks listed in AISC 360, Table N6.1 Shop (3) and field inspection and testing N Observe or Perform as noted (4) 1705.2.2 Steel Construction Other Than Structural Steel 1. Material verification of cold-formed steel deck: a. Identification markings Field inspection Y Periodic b. Manufacturer's certified test reports Submittal Review Y Each submittal 2. Connection of cold-formed steel deck to supporting structure: Shop (3) and field inspection a. Welding Y Periodic b. Other fasteners (in accordance with AISC 360, Section N6) Y 1) Verify fasteners are in conformance with approved submittal Y Periodic 2) Verify fastener installation is in conformance with approved submittal and manufacturer's recommendations Y Periodic 3. Reinforcing steel Shop (3) and field inspection a. Verification of weldability of steel other than ASTM A706 N Periodic b. Reinforcing steel resisting flexural and axial forces in intermediate and special moment frames, boundary elements of special concrete structural walls and shear reinforcement N Continuous c. Shear reinforcement N Continuous d. Other reinforcing steel N Periodic 4.Cold-formed framing: SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTION SERVICES Per IBC Section 1704 of the 2018 International Building Code the following items require Special Inspections. Special Inspection items may have been added by the Registered Design Professional. PROJECT: Ithaca College Physician Assistant Program- Rothschild Renovation OWNER: Ithaca College MATERIAL / ACTIVITY SERVICE APPLICABLE TO THIS PROJECT Y/N EXTENT AGENT* SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTING 014110 - 4 QPK No. 220157.00 a. Verify temporary and permanent restraint/bracing are installed in accordance with the approved truss submittal package Field inspection N Periodic 1705.3 Concrete Construction 1. Inspection of reinforcing steel installation (see 1705.2.2 for welding) Shop (3) and field inspection Y Periodic. 2. Inspection of prestressing steel installation Shop (3) and field inspection Y Periodic a. Verify temporary and permanent restraint/bracing are installed in accordance with the approved truss submittal package Field inspection Periodic 3. Inspection of anchors cast in concrete where allowable loads have been increased per section 1908.5 or where strength design is used Shop (3) and field inspection N Continuous 4. Inspection of anchors and reinforcing steel post-installed in hardened concrete: Per research reports including verification of anchor type, anchor dimensions, hole dimensions, hole cleaning procedures, anchor spacing, edge distances, concrete minimum thickness, anchor embedment and tightening torque Field inspection Y Periodic or as required by the research report issued by an approved source 5. Verify use of approved design mix Shop (3) and field inspection Y Periodic 6. Fresh concrete sampling, perform slump and air content tests and determine temperature of concrete Shop (3) and field inspection Y Continuous 7. Inspection of concrete and shotcrete placement for proper application techniques Shop (3) and field inspection Y Continuous 8. Inspection for maintenance of specified curing temperature and techniques Shop (3) and field inspection Y Periodic 9. Inspection of prestressed concrete: Shop (3) and field inspection N a. Application of prestressing force N Continuous b. Grouting of bonded prestressing tendons in the seismic-force- resisting system N Continuous 10. Erection of precast concrete members a. Inspect in accordance with construction documents Field inspection N In accordance with construction documents b. Perform inspections of welding and bolting in accordance with Section 1705.2 Field inspection N In accordance with Section 1705.2 11. Verification of in-situ concrete strength, prior to stressing of tendons in post tensioned concrete and prior to removal of shores and forms from beams and structural slabs Review field testing and laboratory reports N Periodic 12. Inspection of formwork for shape, lines, location and dimensions Field inspection Y Periodic 13. Concrete strength testing and verification of compliance with Field testing and review of Y Periodic SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTION SERVICES Per IBC Section 1704 of the 2018 International Building Code the following items require Special Inspections. Special Inspection items may have been added by the Registered Design Professional. PROJECT: Ithaca College Physician Assistant Program- Rothschild Renovation OWNER: Ithaca College MATERIAL / ACTIVITY SERVICE APPLICABLE TO THIS PROJECT Y/N EXTENT AGENT* SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTING 014110 - 5 QPK No. 220157.00 construction documents laboratory reports 1705.4 Masonry Construction (A) Level A, B and C Quality Assurance: 1. Verify compliance with approved submittals Field Inspection N Periodic (B) Level B Quality Assurance: 1. Verification of f'm and f'AAC prior to construction Testing by unit strength method or prism test method N Periodic (C) Level C Quality Assurance: 1. Verification of f'm and f'AAC prior to construction and for every 5,000 SF during construction Testing by unit strength method or prism test method N Periodic 2. Verification of proportions of materials in premixed or preblended mortar, prestressing grout, and grout other than self- consolidating grout, as delivered to the project site Field inspection N Continuous 3. Verify placement of masonry units Field Inspection N Periodic (D) Levels B and C Quality Assurance: 1. Verification of Slump Flow and Visual Stability Index (VSI) of self- consolidating grout as delivered to the project Field testing N Continuous 2. Verify compliance with approved submittals Field inspection N Periodic 3. Verify proportions of site-mixed mortar, grout and prestressing grout for bonded tendons Field Inspection N Periodic 4. Verify grade, type, and size of reinforcement and anchor bolts, and prestressing tendons and anchorages Field Inspection N Periodic 5. Verify construction of mortar joints Field Inspection N Periodic 6. Verify placement of reinforcement, connectors, and prestressing tendons and anchorages Field Inspection N Level B - Periodic Level C - Continuous 7. Verify grout space prior to grouting Field Inspection N Level B - Periodic N Level C - Continuous 8. Verify placement of grout and prestressing grout for bonded tendons Field Inspection N Continuous 9. Verify size and location of structural masonry elements Field Inspection N Periodic 10. Verify type, size, and location of anchors, including details of anchorage of masonry to structural members, frames, or other construction. Field inspection N Level B - Periodic N Level C - Continuous 11. Verify welding of reinforcement (see 1705.2.2) Field inspection N Continuous SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTION SERVICES Per IBC Section 1704 of the 2018 International Building Code the following items require Special Inspections. Special Inspection items may have been added by the Registered Design Professional. PROJECT: Ithaca College Physician Assistant Program- Rothschild Renovation OWNER: Ithaca College MATERIAL / ACTIVITY SERVICE APPLICABLE TO THIS PROJECT Y/N EXTENT AGENT* SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTING 014110 - 6 QPK No. 220157.00 12. Verify preparation, construction, and protestion of masonry during cold weather (temperature below 40oF) or hot weather (temperature above 90oF) Field inspection N Periodic 13. Verify application and measurement of prestressing force Field Inspection N Continuous 14. Verify placement of AAC masonry units and construction of thin-bed mortar joints (first 5000 SF of AAC masonry) Field inspection N Continuous 15. Verify placement of AAC masonry units and construction of thin-bed mortar joints (after the first 5000 SF of AAC masonry) Field inspection N Level B - Periodic N Level C - Continuous 16. Verify properties of thin-bed mortar for AAC masonry (first 5000 SF of AAC masonry) Field inspection N Continuous 17. Verify properties of thin-bed mortar forAAC masonry (after the first 5000 SF of AAC masonry) Field inspection N Level B - Periodic N Level C - Continuous 18. Prepare grout and mortar specimens Field testing N Level B - Periodic N Level C - Continuous 19. Observe preparation of prisms Field inspection N Level B - Periodic N Level C Continuous 1705.5 Wood Construction 1. Inspection of the fabrication process of wood structural elements and assemblies in accordance with Section 1704.2.5 and shearwalls In-plant review (3) Y Periodic 2. Diaphragms: verify grade and thickness of structural panel sheathing agree with approved building plans and shearwalls. Field inspection Y Periodic 3. Diaphragms, verify nominal size of framing members at adjoining panel edges, nail or staple diameter and length, number of fastener lines, and that spacing between fasteners in each line and at edge margins agree with approved building plans. Installation of hold-down and tie-down systems. Field inspection Y Periodic 4. Metal-plate-connected wood trusses spanning 60 feet or greater: verify temporary and permanent restraint/bracing are installed in accordance with the approved truss submittal package. Field inspection N Periodic 5. Connections: Y a. Installation of metal framing anchors Field inspection Y Periodic b. Attachment of multi-ply members Field inspection Y Periodic SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTION SERVICES Per IBC Section 1704 of the 2018 International Building Code the following items require Special Inspections. Special Inspection items may have been added by the Registered Design Professional. PROJECT: Ithaca College Physician Assistant Program- Rothschild Renovation OWNER: Ithaca College MATERIAL / ACTIVITY SERVICE APPLICABLE TO THIS PROJECT Y/N EXTENT AGENT* SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTING 014110 - 7 QPK No. 220157.00 c. Installation of connections spec Field inspection Y Periodic 6. Framing and Details Y a. Verification of load bearing framing member size and configuration Field inspection Y Periodic 1705.6 Soils 1. Verify materials below shallow foundations are adequate to achieve the design bearing capacity. Field inspection Periodic 2. Verify excavations are extended to proper depth and have reached proper material. Field inspection Periodic 3. Perform classification and testing of controlled fill materials. Field inspection Periodic 4. Verify use of proper materials, densities, and lift thicknesses during placement and compaction of controlled fill Field inspection Continuous 5. Prior to placement of controlled fill, observe subgrade and verify that site has been prepared properly Field inspection Periodic 1705.7 Driven Deep Foundations 1. Verify element materials, sizes and lengths comply with requirements Field inspection Continuous 2. Determine capacities of test elements and conduct additional load tests, as required Field inspection Continuous 3. Observe driving operations and maintain complete and accurate records for each element Field inspection Continuous 4. Verify placement locations and plumbness, confirm type and size of hammer, record number of blows per foot of penetration, determine required penetrations to achieve design capacity, record tip and butt elevations and document any damage to foundation element Field inspection Continuous 5. For steel elements, perform additional inspections per Section 1705.2 See Section 1705.2 See Section 1705.2 6. For concrete elements and concrete-filled elements, perform additional inspections per Section 1705.3 See Section 1705.3 See Section 1705.3 7. For specialty elements, perform additional inspections as determined by the registered design professional in responsible charge Field inspection In accordance with construction documents 8. Perform additional inspections and tests in accordance with the construction documents Field Inspection and testing In accordance with construction documents 1705.8 Cast-in-Place Deep Foundations 1.Observe drilling operations and maintain complete and accurate records for each element Field inspection Continuous 2. Verify placement locations and plumbness, confirm element diameters, bell diameters (if SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTION SERVICES Per IBC Section 1704 of the 2018 International Building Code the following items require Special Inspections. Special Inspection items may have been added by the Registered Design Professional. PROJECT: Ithaca College Physician Assistant Program- Rothschild Renovation OWNER: Ithaca College MATERIAL / ACTIVITY SERVICE APPLICABLE TO THIS PROJECT Y/N EXTENT AGENT* SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTING 014110 - 8 QPK No. 220157.00 applicable), lengths, embedment into bedrock (if applicable) and adequate end-bearing strata capacity. Record concrete or grout volumes Field inspection Continuous 3. For concrete elements, perform additional inspections in accordance with Section 1705.3 See Section 1705.3 See Section 1705.3 4. Perform additional inspections and tests in accordance with the construction documents Field Inspection and testing In accordance with construction documents 1705.9 Helical Pile Foundations 1. Verify installation equipment, pile dimensions, tip elevations, final depth, final installation torque and other data as required. Field inspection Continuous 2. Perform additional inspections and tests in accordance with the construction documents Field Inspection and testing In accordance with construction documents 1705.11.1 Structural Wood Special Inspections For Wind Resistance 1. Inspection of field gluing operations of elements of the main windforce-resisting system Field inspection N Continuous 2. Inspection of nailing, bolting, anchoring and other fastening of components within the main windforce-resisting system Shop (3) and field inspection Y Periodic 1705.11.2 Cold-formed Steel Special Inspections For Wind Resistance 1.Inspection during welding operations of elements of the main windforce-resisting system Shop (3) and field inspection N Periodic 2.Inspections for screw attachment, bolting, anchoring and other fastening of components within the main windforce-resisting system Shop (3) and field inspection N Periodic 1705.11.3 Wind-resisting Components 1. Roof cladding Shop (3) and field inspection N Periodic 2. Wall cladding Shop (3) and field inspection N Periodic 1705.12.1 Structural Steel Special Inspections for Seismic Resistance Inspection of structural steel in accordance with AISC 341 Shop (3) and field inspection N In accordance with AISC 341 1705.12.2 Structural Wood Special Inspections for Seismic Resistance 1. Inspection of field gluing operations of elements of the seismic- force resisting system Field inspection N Continuous 2. Inspection of nailing, bolting, anchoring and other fastening of components within the seismic-force- resisting system Shop (3) and field inspection N Periodic 1705.12.3 Cold-formed Steel Light-Frame Construction SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTION SERVICES Per IBC Section 1704 of the 2018 International Building Code the following items require Special Inspections. Special Inspection items may have been added by the Registered Design Professional. PROJECT: Ithaca College Physician Assistant Program- Rothschild Renovation OWNER: Ithaca College MATERIAL / ACTIVITY SERVICE APPLICABLE TO THIS PROJECT Y/N EXTENT AGENT* SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTING 014110 - 9 QPK No. 220157.00 Special Inspections for Seismic Resistance 1. Inspection during welding operations of elements of the seismic- force-resisting system Shop (3) and field inspection N Periodic 2. Inspections for screw attachment, bolting, anchoring and other fastening of components within the seismic- force-resisting system Shop (3) and field inspection N Periodic 1705.12.4 Designated Seismic Systems Verification Inspect and verify that that the component label, anchorage or mounting conforms to the certificate of compliance in accordance with Section 1705.12.3 Field inspection N Periodic 1705.12.5 Architectural Components Special Inspections for Seismic Resistance 1. Inspection during the erection and fastening of exterior cladding and interior and exterior veneer Field inspection N Periodic 2. Inspection during the erection and fastening of interior and exterior nonbearing walls Field inspection N Periodic 3. Inspection during anchorage of access floors Field inspection N Periodic 1705.12.6 Mechanical and Electrical Components Special Inspections for Seismic Resistance 1. Inspection during the anchorage of electrical equipment for emergency or standby power systems. (SDC C,D,E,F) Field inspection Periodic 2. Inspection during the anchorage of other electrical equipment. (SDC E,F) Field inspection Periodic 3. Inspection during installation and anchorage of piping systems designed to carry hazardous materials, and their associated mechanical units (SDC C,D,E,F) Field inspection Periodic 4. Inspection during the installation and anchorage of HVAC ductwork that will contain hazardous materials. (SDC C,D,E,F) Field inspection Periodic 5. Inspection during the anchorage of storage racks 8 feet or greater in height Field inspection Periodic 1705.12.7 Storage Racks Special Inspections for Seismic Resistance (SDC D,E,F) Inspection during the anchorage of storage racks 8 feet or greater in height Field inspection N Periodic 1705.12.8 Seismic Isolation Systems (SDC B,C,D,E,F) Inspection during the fabrication and installation of isolator units and energy dissipation devices used as part of the seismic isolation system Shop and field inspection N Periodic SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTION SERVICES Per IBC Section 1704 of the 2018 International Building Code the following items require Special Inspections. Special Inspection items may have been added by the Registered Design Professional. PROJECT: Ithaca College Physician Assistant Program- Rothschild Renovation OWNER: Ithaca College MATERIAL / ACTIVITY SERVICE APPLICABLE TO THIS PROJECT Y/N EXTENT AGENT* SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTING 014110 - 10 QPK No. 220157.00 1705.12 Concrete Reinforcement Testing and Qualification for Seismic Resistance 1. Review certified mill test reports for each shipment of reinforcement used to resist earthquake-induced flexural and axial forces in reinforced concrete special moment frames, special structural walls, and coupling beams connecting special structural walls Review certified mill test reports N Each shipment 2. Verify reinforcement weldability of ASTM A615 reinforcement used to resist earthquake-induced flexural and axial forces in reinforced concrete special moment frames, special structural walls, and coupling beams connecting special structural walls Review test reports N Each shipment 1705.13.1 Structural Steel Testing and Qualification for Seismic Resistance Test in accordance with the quality assurance requirements of AISC 341 Shop (3) and field testing N Per AISC 341 1705.13.2 Seismic Certification of Nonstructural Components Review certificate of compliance for designated seismic system components. Certificate of compliance review N Each submittal 1705.13.4 Seismic Isolation Systems Test seismic isolation system in accordance with ASCE 7 Section 17.8 Prototype testing N Per ASCE 7 1705.14 Sprayed Fire-resistant Materials 1. Verify surface condition preparation of structural members Field inspection N Periodic 3. Verify average thickness of sprayed fire-resistant materials applied to structural members Field inspection N Periodic 4. Verify density of the sprayed fire- resistant material complies with approved fire-resistant design Field inspection and testing N Per IBC Section 1705.13.5 5. Verify the cohesive/adhesive bond strength of the cured sprayed fire- resistant material Field inspection and testing N Per IBC Section 1705.13.6 1705.15 Mastic and Intumescent Fire-Resistant Coatings Inspect mastic and intumescent fire- resistant coatings applied to structural elements and decks Field inspection Periodic 1705.16 Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) 1. Verify materials, details and installations are per the approved construction documents Field inspection Y Periodic SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTION SERVICES Per IBC Section 1704 of the 2018 International Building Code the following items require Special Inspections. Special Inspection items may have been added by the Registered Design Professional. PROJECT: Ithaca College Physician Assistant Program- Rothschild Renovation OWNER: Ithaca College MATERIAL / ACTIVITY SERVICE APPLICABLE TO THIS PROJECT Y/N EXTENT AGENT* SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTING 014110 - 11 QPK No. 220157.00 2. Inspection of water-resistive barrier over sheathing substrate Field inspection N Periodic 1705.17 Fire-Resistant Penetrations and Joints 1. Inspect penetration firestop systems Field testing Y Per ASTM E2174 2. Inspect fire-resistant joint systems Field testing Y Per ASTM E2393 1705.18 Smoke Control Systems 1. Leakage testing and recording of device locations prior to concealment Field testing N Periodic 2. Prior to occupancy and after sufficient completion, pressure difference testing, flow measurements, and detection and control verification Field testing N Periodic Notes: 1. The inspection and testing agent(s) shall be engaged by the Owner or the Owner's Agent, and not by the Contractor or Subcontractor whose work is to be inspected or tested. Any conflict of interest must be disclosed to the Building Official prior to commencing work. The qualifications of the Special Inspector(s) and/or testing agencies may be subject to the approval of the Building Official and/or the Design Professional. 2. The list of Special Inspectors may be submitted as a separate document, if noted so above. 3. Special Inspections as required by Section 1704.2.5 are not required where the fabricator is approved in accordance with IBC Section 1704.2.5.2 4. Observe on a random basis, operations need not be delayed pending these inspections. Perform these tasks for each welded joint, bolted connection, or steel element. 5. NDT of welds completed in an approved fabricator’s shop may be performed by that fabricator when approved by the AHJ. Refer to AISC 360 N7. CASE Form 102 · Final Report of Special Inspections · ©CASE 2001 Final Report of Special Inspections CASE Council of American Structural Engineers Project: Ithaca College Physician Assistant Program – Rothschild Renovation Location: Rothschild Building, Ithaca Commons, 215 East State Street, Ithaca, NY 14850 Owner: Ithaca College Owner’s Address: 953 Danby Road Ithaca, NY 14850 Architect of Record: QPK Design, LLP Structural Engineer of Record: QPK Design, LLP To the best of my information, knowledge and belief, the Special Inspections required for this project, and itemized in the Statement of Special Inspections submitted for permit, have been performed and all discovered discrepancies have been reported and resolved other than the following: Comments: (Attach continuation sheets if required to complete the description of corrections.) Interim reports submitted prior to this final report form a basis for and are to be considered an integral part of this final report. Respectfully submitted, Special Inspector James F. Kaplan (Type or print name) Signature Date Licensed Professional Seal ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 015000- 1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS QPK NO. 220157.00 015000 - 1 SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." 1.4 USE CHARGES A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, testing agencies and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Water Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges if not disabled by the construction operations. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. Provide temporary water from other buildings or locations if existing building water service is disrupted due to construction operations. C. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. Provide temporary power from generators or adjacent buildings if existing building power is disrupted due to construction operations. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities and utility hookups. If on site staging areas for construction and parking areas for construction personnel are allowed, indicate locations. B. Moisture-Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and construction from water absorption and damage. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 015000- 2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS QPK NO. 220157.00 015000 - 2 1. Describe delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water absorption or water damage. 2. Indicate procedures for discarding water-damaged materials, protocols for mitigating water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water-damaged Work. C. Dust- and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the dust- and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. Include the following: 1. Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of work. 2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing. 3. Location of proposed air-filtration system discharge. 4. Waste handling procedures. 5. Other dust-control measures. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures and meeting requirements of the Building and Fire Code of New York State. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 015000- 3 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS QPK NO. 220157.00 015000 - 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. 1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 011000 "Summary." B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. B. Water Service: Connect to building’s existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. C. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel if on identified on site facilities are not available. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. D. Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust, fumes, and odors from entering occupied areas. 1. Prior to commencing work, isolate the HVAC system in area where work is to be performed according to coordination drawings. a. Disconnect supply and return ductwork in work area from HVAC systems servicing occupied areas. b. Perform daily construction cleanup and final cleanup. E. Electric Power Service: Connect to building’s existing electric power service. Maintain equipment in a condition acceptable to Owner. F. Telephone Service: 1. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone. G. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. H. Parking: Ithaca College will provide on campus parking for commuting to project site. All other parking arrangements are the responsibility of the contractor. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 015000- 4 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS QPK NO. 220157.00 015000 - 4 I. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated or required by Owners standards and procedures. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 1. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 2. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times. 3. Pedestrian walkway signage: Provide and maintain signage for pedestrian walkway use and direction throughout the duration of the project, where required. 4. Remove signs upon project completion. J. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction AND with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." Coordinate with Landlord operations. K. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. 1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. L. Temporary Elevator Use: Use of existing elevator for construction operations is allowable. Protect elevator at all times from damage by use of plywood protection boards and entrance frames and within cab, in addition to protective coverings and other measures as necessary. Repair any damage to preconstruction condition or better. M. Existing Stair Usage: Use of north east existing stair will be permitted, provided stairs are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore stairs to condition existing before initial use. 1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs and to maintain means of egress. If stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work. 3.3 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities. B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. C. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 015000- 5 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS QPK NO. 220157.00 015000 - 5 D. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. E. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with applicable regulations. 1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 3.4 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction. B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Protect porous materials from water damage. 2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water. 3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete. 4. Remove standing water from decks. 5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed. C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Discard or replace water-damaged material. 2. Do not install material that is wet. 3. Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. 3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. END OF SECTION 015000 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 016000- 1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 016000 - 1 SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for Contract closeout. 2. Divisions 2 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and installations specified to be warranted. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, which is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 016000- 2 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 016000 - 2 C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A or equivalent. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of Architects and owners. g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery. j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. l. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 3 days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 016000- 3 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 016000 - 3 7 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order. b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. B. Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 7 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors. 2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 016000- 4 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 016000 - 4 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms. 5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 8. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner. 1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using appropriate form properly executed. 3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 016000- 5 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 016000 - 5 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Architect's. 6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish "salient characteristics" of products. 7. Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal" or "or approved equal" or "or approved," comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Product: Where Specifications or Drawings name a single product and manufacturer, provide the named product that complies with requirements. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications or Drawings name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. 3. Products: Where Specifications or Drawings include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. 4. Manufacturers: Where Specifications or Drawings include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. 5. Available Products: Where Specifications or Drawings include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications or Drawings include a list of manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 7. Product Options: Where Specifications or Drawings indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system. 8. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications or Drawings name a product and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 016000- 6 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 016000 - 6 the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the other named manufacturers. 9. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications or Drawings require matching an established Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for proposal of product. 10. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications or Drawings include the phrase "as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with other specified requirements. a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items. b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 7 days after the Notice of Award. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. 2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. 4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. 7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 016000- 7 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 016000 - 7 9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. 10. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. 2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. Architect is not obligated to approve a comparable product. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of Architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01600 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017300- 1 EXECUTION QPK NO. 220157.00 017300 - 1 SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. General installation. 2. Progress cleaning. 3. Adjusting. 4. Protection of installed construction. 5. Correction of the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Preconstruction survey: Contractor shall confirm that the core and shell dimensions of the perimeter of Owner’s leased space is as shown on the construction drawings. Provide a marked up plan showing conformance or discrepancies. Report any discrepancies with a copy of the marked plan to the Owner’s representative prior to commencing construction. B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work. C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 2. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 3. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017300- 2 EXECUTION QPK NO. 220157.00 017300 - 2 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner’s representative for conveyance to Landlord and local utility that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction if required. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017300- 3 EXECUTION QPK NO. 220157.00 017300 - 3 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 4. Verify type of anchor is acceptable to the Architect for exposed locations, load bearing conditions and anchors in concrete plank. H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.4 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in applicable regulations for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C). 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. F. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017300- 4 EXECUTION QPK NO. 220157.00 017300 - 4 G. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. H. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. I. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation. 3.6 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. 3.7 CORRECTION OF THE WORK A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. 1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces. END OF SECTION 017300 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017329 - 1 CUTTING AND PATCHING QPK NO. 220157.00 017329 - 1 SECTION 017329 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section 024116 "Selective Demolition" for demolition of selected portions of the building. 2. Divisions 2 through 33 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. C. Refer to the drawings for additional information on cutting and patching concrete. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. B. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017329 - 2 CUTTING AND PATCHING QPK NO. 220157.00 017329 - 2 1.5 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. 1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017329 - 3 CUTTING AND PATCHING QPK NO. 220157.00 017329 - 3 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017329 - 4 CUTTING AND PATCHING QPK NO. 220157.00 017329 - 4 D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials. END OF SECTION 017329 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017419 - 1 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL QPK NO. 220157.00 017419 - 1 SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 2. Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 3. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging. B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations. C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse. E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility. F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Practice efficient waste management in the use of materials in the course of the Work. Use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and incinerators. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials, including the following: 1. Demolition Waste: ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017419 - 2 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL QPK NO. 220157.00 017419 - 2 a. Roofing. b. Insulation. c. Metals. 2. Construction Waste: a. Roofing. b. Insulation. c. Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated in "General" Paragraph above, salvage or recycle 100 percent of the following uncontaminated packaging materials: 1) Paper. 2) Cardboard. 3) Boxes. 4) Plastic sheet and film. 5) Polystyrene packaging. 6) Wood crates. 7) Plastic pails. 8) Metals. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices. B. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017419 - 3 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL QPK NO. 220157.00 017419 - 3 1. Comply with operation, termination, and removal requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold. 2. Comply with Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control. 3.2 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers. B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for recycling waste materials shall accrue to Contractor. C. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process. D. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved construction waste management plan. 1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin. a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if found. 2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather. 5. Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or processor. 3.3 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE A. Packaging: 1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location. 2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017419 - 4 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL QPK NO. 220157.00 017419 - 4 3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. 4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. 3.4 DISPOSAL OF WASTE A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials. C. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them. END OF SECTION 017419 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017700- 1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES QPK NO. 220157.00 017700 - 1 SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Warranties. 3. Final cleaning. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section 012900 "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion. 2. Division 1 Section 017300 "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site. 3. Division 1 Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 4. Divisions 2 through 33 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list) and the value of items on the list. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals. Damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017700- 2 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES QPK NO. 220157.00 017700 - 2 8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. 1.4 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017700- 3 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES QPK NO. 220157.00 017700 - 3 1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 1.6 WARRANTIES A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor. C. Submit all warranties with closeout documents no later than forty-five days after project Substantial Completion. D. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. E. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017700- 4 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES QPK NO. 220157.00 017700 - 4 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Staging Areas: Contractor is to protect, clean and restore all staging areas to their preconstruction condition or better. C. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. b. Clean exposed hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. c. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs and balconies. d. Prevent debris from falling through balcony openings and dispose of properly. e. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. f. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. g. Remove labels that are not permanent. h. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. i. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and sealant droppings, and other foreign substances. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017700- 5 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES QPK NO. 220157.00 017700 - 5 j. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. k. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. END OF SECTION 017700 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017823- 1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA QPK NO. 220157.00 017823 - 1 SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. Operation and product data manuals. 2. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, and finishes. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section 013000 "Administrative Requirements" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Division 1 Section017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 3. Drawing notations for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction. B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit one copy of each manual in final form at least 7 days before final inspection. Architect will return copy with comments within 7 days after final inspection. 1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit 2 copies of each corrected manual within 7 days of receipt of Architect's comments. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017823- 2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA QPK NO. 220157.00 017823 - 2 1.5 COORDINATION A. Where operation and maintenance documentation include information on installations by more than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information furnished by representatives and prepare manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OPERATION MANUALS A. Content: Provide operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1. System descriptions. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating procedures. B. Descriptions: Include the following: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Operating characteristics. 4. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Routine and normal operating instructions. 2. Special operating instructions and procedures. 2.2 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Paint color swatches ad indicated in Division 9 Specification Section, Interior Painting. 5. Material and chemical composition. 6. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017823- 3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA QPK NO. 220157.00 017823 - 3 D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 1. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 2. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION A. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. B. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. C. Comply with Division 1 Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. END OF SECTION 017823 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017839- 1 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 017839 - 1 SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Product Data. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 2. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Submit all closeout documents no later than 45 days after Substantial Completion. 2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows: a. Initial Submittal: 1) Submit one set of marked-up record prints. 2) Submit a PDF electronic file of the scanned record prints. 3) Architect will review and indicate whether general scope of changes, additional information recorded and legibility of work is acceptable. 4) If modifications, clarifications or additional information is requested by Architect, resubmit updated information in the same manner as initial submission. b. Final Submittal: 1) Architect will be transferring final approved data to digital files for Owner record information. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017839- 2 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 017839 - 2 B. Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy and annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal. 1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual. 1.4 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued. 1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding photographic documentation. 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. 3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints. 4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017839- 3 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 017839 - 3 B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows: 1. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 2. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints. Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. 3. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution. C. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Organize record prints into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file. 3. Identification: As follows: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor. 1.5 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project. B. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders and record Drawings where applicable. C. Format: Submit record Product Data as one paper copy and scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Product Data and submittals. 1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017839- 4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 017839 - 4 1.6 MAINTENANCE OF RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintenance of Record Documents: Store record documents in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. PART 2 - PRODUCTS PART 3 - EXECUTION END OF SECTION 017839 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 024119 - 1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION SELECTIVE DEMOLITION QPK NO. 220157.00 024119 - 1 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. B. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated. C. Existing to Remain: Leave existing items that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre-demolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations. 5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 024119 - 2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION SELECTIVE DEMOLITION QPK NO. 220157.00 024119 - 2 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control and, for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers. B. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's and other tenants' on-site operations are uninterrupted. 2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Use of stairs. C. Warranties: Documentation indicating that existing warranties are still in effect after completion of selective demolition. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. C. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials and using approved contractors so as not to void existing warranties. Notify warrantor before proceeding. Existing warranties include the following: 1. Roofing. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 024119 - 3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION SELECTIVE DEMOLITION QPK NO. 220157.00 024119 - 3 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. B. Notify warrantor on completion of selective demolition, and obtain documentation verifying that existing system has been inspected and warranty remains in effect. Submit documentation at Project closeout. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's and adjacent tenant operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities within the area of the work have been disconnected as necessary before starting selective demolition operations. B. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction or other existing condition and hazardous material information provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated or abandoned; provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 024119 - 4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION SELECTIVE DEMOLITION QPK NO. 220157.00 024119 - 4 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. 2. Disconnect, demolish and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing and HVAC systems, equipment and components indicated on Drawings to be removed. Coordinate actual MEP&FP removals with the drawings. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material and leave in place. c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material and leave in place. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings and equipment that have not been removed. 5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." B. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. C. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 024119 - 5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION SELECTIVE DEMOLITION QPK NO. 220157.00 024119 - 5 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 4. Maintain fire watch during and for at least two hours after flame-cutting operations. 5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. C. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, and then remove concrete between saw cuts. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 024119 - 6 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION SELECTIVE DEMOLITION QPK NO. 220157.00 024119 - 6 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. B. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, and then break up and remove. C. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings." Do not use methods requiring solvent-based adhesive strippers. D. Roofing: Perform selective removals of no more existing roofing than what can be covered in one day by new roofing and so that building interior remains watertight and weathertight. 1. Removal and repair work shall be performed by roofing contractor as necessary to maintain existing in place watertight warranty. 2. Remove and replace only as necessary to install new roof top equipment and associated accessories. 3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and dispose of them in an EPA-approved construction and demolition waste landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 4. Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. 3.8 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SCHEDULE A. Remove: All materials as indicated on Drawings. B. Remove and Reinstall: Specific items as indicated on Drawings, including, but not limited to, window framing, doors and associated hardware. C. Existing to Remain: All items not indicated to be removed. END OF SECTION 024119 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 032000 - 1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CONCRETE REINFORCING QPK NO. 220157.00 032000 - 1 SECTION 032000 - CONCRETE REINFORCING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel reinforcement bars. 2. Welded-wire reinforcement. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Each type of steel reinforcement. 2. Bar supports. 3. Mechanical splice couplers. B. Shop Drawings: Comply with ACI SP-066: 1. Include placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. 2. Include bar sizes, lengths, materials, grades, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, location of splices, lengths of lap splices, details of mechanical splice couplers, details of welding splices, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. C. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to build the structure. 1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Statements: For testing and inspection agency. B. Welding certificates. 1. Reinforcement To Be Welded: Welding procedure specification in accordance with AWS D1.4/D1.4M C. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency: ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 032000 - 2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CONCRETE REINFORCING QPK NO. 220157.00 032000 - 2 1. Steel Reinforcement: a. For reinforcement to be welded, mill test analysis for chemical composition and carbon equivalent of the steel in accordance with ASTM A706/A706M. 2. Mechanical splice couplers. D. Field quality-control reports. E. Minutes of preinstallation conference. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified in accordance with ASTM C1077 and ASTM E329 for testing indicated. B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel in accordance with AWS D1.4/D 1.4M. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. 1. Store reinforcement to avoid contact with earth. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed. B. Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A1064/A1064M, plain, fabricated from asdrawn steel wire into flat sheets. 2.2 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain-steel bars, cut true to length with ends square and free of burrs. B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place. 1. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete in accordance with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows: ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 032000 - 3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CONCRETE REINFORCING QPK NO. 220157.00 032000 - 3 a. For concrete surfaces exposed to view, where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire, all-plastic bar supports, or CRSI Class 2 stainless steel bar supports. C. Mechanical Splice Couplers: ACI 318 (ACI 318M) same material of reinforcing bar being spliced; tension-compression type. D. Steel Tie Wire: ASTM A1064/A1064M, annealed steel, not less than 0.0508 inch (1.2908 mm) in diameter. 1. Finish: Plain unless otherwise noted. 2.3 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protection of In-Place Conditions: 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. 2. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that reduce bond to concrete. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing and supporting reinforcement. B. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. C. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that reduce bond to concrete. D. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. 1. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. 2. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. E. Preserve clearance between bars of not less than 1 inch (25 mm), not less than one bar diameter, or not less than 1-1/3 times size of large aggregate, whichever is greater. F. Provide concrete coverage in accordance with ACI 318 (ACI 318M). ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 032000 - 4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CONCRETE REINFORCING QPK NO. 220157.00 032000 - 4 G. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. H. Splices: Lap splices as indicated on Drawings. 1. Bars indicated to be continuous, and all vertical bars shall be lapped not less than 36 bar diameters at splices, or 24 inches (610 mm), whichever is greater. 2. Stagger splices in accordance with ACI 318 (ACI 318M). 3. Mechanical Splice Couplers: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 4. Weld reinforcing bars in accordance with AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, where indicated on Drawings. I. Install welded-wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths. 1. Support welded-wire reinforcement in accordance with CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice." a. For reinforcement less than W4.0 or D4.0, continuous support spacing shall not exceed 12 inches (305 mm). 2. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one wire spacing plus 2 inches (50 mm). 3. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. 4. Lace overlaps with wire. 3.3 JOINTS A. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. 2. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. 3. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. B. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length, to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. 3.4 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Comply with ACI 117 (ACI 117M). 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Inspections: 1. Steel-reinforcement placement. 2. Steel-reinforcement mechanical splice couplers. 3. Steel-reinforcement welding. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 032000 - 5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CONCRETE REINFORCING QPK NO. 220157.00 032000 - 5 END OF SECTION 032000 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 033000 - 1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE QPK NO. 220157.00 033000 - 1 SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cast-in-place concrete, including concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 032000 "Concrete Reinforcing" for steel reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, other pozzolans, and silica fume; materials subject to compliance with requirements. B. Water/Cement Ratio (w/cm): The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each of the following. 1. Portland cement. 2. Fly ash. 3. Slag cement. 4. Blended hydraulic cement. 5. Silica fume. 6. Performance-based hydraulic cement 7. Aggregates. 8. Admixtures: a. Include limitations of use, including restrictions on cementitious materials, supplementary cementitious materials, air entrainment, aggregates, temperature at time of concrete placement, relative humidity at time of concrete placement, curing conditions, and use of other admixtures. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 033000 - 2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE QPK NO. 220157.00 033000 - 2 9. Fiber reinforcement. 10. Vapor retarders. 11. Curing materials. 12. Joint fillers. 13. Repair materials. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture, include the following: 1. Mixture identification. 2. Minimum 28-day compressive strength. 3. Durability exposure class. 4. Maximum w/cm. 5. Slump limit. 6. Air content. 7. Nominal maximum aggregate size. 8. Synthetic micro-fiber content. 9. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site if permitted. 10. Intended placement method. 11. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. C. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure. 1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Fiber reinforcement. 4. Curing compounds. 5. Bonding agents. 6. Adhesives. 7. Vapor retarders. 8. Semirigid joint filler. 9. Joint-filler strips. 10. Repair materials. B. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency: 1. Portland cement. 2. Fly ash. 3. Slag cement. 4. Blended hydraulic cement. 5. Silica fume. 6. Performance-based hydraulic cement. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 033000 - 3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE QPK NO. 220157.00 033000 - 3 7. Aggregates. 8. Admixtures: a. Permeability-Reducing Admixture: Include independent test reports, indicating compliance with specified requirements, including dosage rate used in test. C. Field quality-control reports. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs Project personnel qualified as an ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is a certified ACI Flatwork Concrete Finisher/Technician or an ACI Concrete Flatwork Technician. 1. Post-Installed Concrete Anchors Installers: ACI-certified Adhesive Anchor Installer. B. Ready-Mixed Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C94/C94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer certified in accordance with NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities." C. Laboratory Testing Agency Qualifications: A testing agency qualified in accordance with ASTM C1077 and ASTM E329 for testing indicated and employing an ACI-certified Concrete Quality Control Technical Manager. 1. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade I. Testing agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade II. D. Field Quality Control Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified in accordance with ASTM C1077 and ASTM E329 for testing indicated. 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as an ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, in accordance with ACI CPP 610.1 or an equivalent certification program. 1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on each concrete mixture. 1. Include the following information in each test report: a. Admixture dosage rates. b. Slump. c. Air content. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 033000 - 4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE QPK NO. 220157.00 033000 - 4 d. Seven-day compressive strength. e. 28-day compressive strength. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with ASTM C94/C94M and ACI 301 (ACI 301M). 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) and ACI 306.1 and as follows. 1. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 2. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301 (ACI 301M). 3. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. 4. Do not place concrete in contact with surfaces less than 35 deg F (1.7 deg C), other than reinforcing steel. 5. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs. B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) and ACI 305.1 (ACI 305.1M), and as follows: 1. Maintain concrete temperature at time of discharge to not exceed 95 deg F (35 deg C). 2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL A. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. 2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Source Limitations: 1. Obtain all concrete mixtures from a single ready-mixed concrete manufacturer for entire Project. 2. Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant. 3. Obtain aggregate from single source. 4. Obtain each type of admixture from single source from single manufacturer. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 033000 - 5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE QPK NO. 220157.00 033000 - 5 B. Cementitious Materials: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I/II. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F. 3. Slag Cement: ASTM C989/C989M, Grade 100 or 120. C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C33/C33M, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source. 1. Alkali-Silica Reaction: Comply with one of the following: a. Expansion Result of Aggregate: Not more than 0.04 percent at one-year when tested in accordance with ASTM C1293. b. Expansion Results of Aggregate and Cementitious Materials in Combination: Not more than 0.10 percent at an age of 16 days when tested in accordance with ASTM C1567. c. Alkali Content in Concrete: Not more than 4 lb./cu. yd. (2.37 kg/cu. m) for moderately reactive aggregate or 3 lb./cu. yd. (1.78 kg/cu. m) for highly reactive aggregate, when tested in accordance with ASTM C1293 and categorized in accordance with ASTM C1778, based on alkali content being calculated in accordance with ACI 301 (ACI 301M). 2. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: a. Footings,: 1-1/2 inches nominal. b. Slabs-on-Grade: 1 inch nominal. c. Coarse Aggregate shall be crushed limestone. 3. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260/C260M. E. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and -Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and -Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C1017/C1017M, Type II. F. Water and Water Used to Make Ice: ASTM C94/C94M, potable. 2.3 FIBER REINFORCEMENT A. Synthetic Fibrillated Micro-Fiber: Fibrillated polypropylene micro-fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete, complying with ASTM C1116/C1116M, Type III, 1/2 to 1-1/2 inches (13 to 38 mm) long. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 033000 - 6 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE QPK NO. 220157.00 033000 - 6 2.4 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Sheet Vapor Retarder, Class A: ASTM E1745, Class A; not less than 10 mils (0.25 mm) thick. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape. 2.5 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry. C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C171, polyethylene film burlap-polyethylene sheet. 1. Color: a. Ambient Temperature Below 50 deg F (10 deg C): Black. b. Ambient Temperature between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 85 deg F (29 deg C): Any color. c. Ambient Temperature Above 85 deg F (29 deg C): White. D. Water: Potable or complying with ASTM C1602/C1602M. E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming, Dissipating Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B. 2.6 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D1752, cork or self-expanding cork. B. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Type A shore durometer hardness of 80 in accordance with ASTM D2240. C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C1059/C1059M, Type II, nonredispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. D. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade and class to suit requirements, and as follows: 1. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete. 2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, in accordance with ACI 301 (ACI 301M). ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 033000 - 7 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE QPK NO. 220157.00 033000 - 7 1. Use a qualified testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs, based on laboratory trial mixtures. B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows: 1. Fly Ash: 25 percent. 2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent. 3. Slag Cement: 50 percent. 4. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan and Slag Cement: 50 percent Portland cement minimum, with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25 percent. C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.30 percent by weight of cement. D. Admixtures: Use admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing, or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use water-reducing and -retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs, parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a w/cm below 0.50. 4. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated. 5. Use permeability-reducing admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated. 2.8 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS A. Footings: Normal-weight concrete. 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) at 28 days. 2. Maximum w/c Ratio: 0.50. 3. Slump Limit: 8 inches (200 mm) for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches (50 to 100 mm) before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 4. Air Content: 5.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for concrete containing 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size. B. Slabs-on-Grade: Normal-weight concrete. 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days. 2. Maximum w/cm: 0.45. 3. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 520 lb/cu. yd. (309 kg/cu. m). 4. Slump Limit: 5 inches (100 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 5. Air Content: a. Do not use an air-entraining admixture or allow total air content to exceed 3 percent for concrete used in trowel-finished floors. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 033000 - 8 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE QPK NO. 220157.00 033000 - 8 2.9 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. B. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer. 1. For mixer capacity of 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but not more than five minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released. 2. For mixer capacity larger than 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m), increase mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m). 3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixture time, quantity, and amount of water added. Record approximate location of final deposit in structure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of concrete forms, accessories, and reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. 2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide reasonable auxiliary services to accommodate field testing and inspections, acceptable to testing agency, including the following: 1. Daily access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Secure space for storage, initial curing, and field curing of test samples, including source of water and continuous electrical power at Project site during site curing period for test samples. 4. Security and protection for test samples and for testing and inspection equipment at Project site. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 033000 - 9 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE QPK NO. 220157.00 033000 - 9 3.3 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining Work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. 1. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 2. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of ANSI/AISC 303. 3. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDER A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder in accordance with ASTM E1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install vapor retarder with longest dimension parallel with direction of concrete pour. 2. Face laps away from exposed direction of concrete pour. 3. Lap vapor retarder over footings and grade beams not less than 6 inches (150 mm), sealing vapor retarder to concrete. 4. Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. 5. Terminate vapor retarder at the top of floor slabs, grade beams, and pile caps, sealing entire perimeter to floor slabs, grade beams, foundation walls, or pile caps. 6. Seal penetrations in accordance with vapor retarder manufacturer's instructions. 7. Protect vapor retarder during placement of reinforcement and concrete. a. Repair damaged areas by patching with vapor retarder material, overlapping damages area by 6 inches (150 mm) on all sides, and sealing to vapor retarder. 3.5 JOINTS A. Construct joints true to line, with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Coordinate with floor slab pattern and concrete placement sequence. 1. Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated on Drawings or as approved by Architect. 2. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. a. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. b. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. 3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders at third points of spans. Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection. 4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 033000 - 10 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE QPK NO. 220157.00 033000 - 10 5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated on Drawings. Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, locate vertical joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible. 6. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. C. Control Joints in Slabs-on-Ground: Form weakened-plane control joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct control joints for a depth as indicated and as follows. 1. Sawed Joints: Form control joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) wide joints into concrete when cutting action does not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random cracks. D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Ground: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than 1 inch (25 mm) below finished concrete surface, where joint sealants, specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," are indicated. 3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together. E. Doweled Joints: 1. Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated on Drawings. 2. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel bar length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. 3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, embedded items, and vapor retarder is complete and that required inspections are completed. 1. Immediately prior to concrete placement, inspect vapor retarder for damage and deficient installation, and repair defective areas. 2. Provide continuous inspection of vapor retarder during concrete placement and make necessary repairs to damaged areas as Work progresses. B. Notify Architect and testing and inspection agencies 24 hours prior to commencement of concrete placement. C. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect in writing, but not to exceed the amount indicated on the concrete delivery ticket. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 033000 - 11 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE QPK NO. 220157.00 033000 - 11 1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture. D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. 1. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. 2. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 3. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 4. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment in accordance with ACI 301 (ACI 301M). a. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. b. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. c. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. d. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete, and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate. E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Do not place concrete floors and slabs in a checkerboard sequence. 2. Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 3. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 4. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 5. Level concrete, cut high areas, and fill low areas. 6. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 7. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. 8. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. 3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. As-Cast Surface Finishes: 1. ACI 301 (ACI 301M) Surface Finish SF-1.0: As-cast concrete texture imparted by formfacing material. a. Patch voids larger than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide or 1/2 inch (13 mm) deep. b. Remove projections larger than 1 inch (25 mm). c. Tie holes do not require patching. d. Surface Tolerance: ACI 117 (ACI 117M) Class D. e. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 033000 - 12 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE QPK NO. 220157.00 033000 - 12 2. ACI 301 (ACI 301M) Surface Finish SF-2.0: As-cast concrete texture imparted by formfacing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. a. Patch voids larger than 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide or 1/2 inch (13 mm) deep. b. Remove projections larger than 1/4 inch (6 mm). c. Patch tie holes. d. Surface Tolerance: ACI 117 (ACI 117M) Class B. e. Locations: Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete. B. Related Unformed Surfaces: 1. At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a color and texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. 2. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.8 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Float Finish: 1. When bleedwater sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of specific float apparatus, consolidate concrete surface with powerdriven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power-driven floats. 2. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture and complies with ACI 117 (ACI A117M) tolerances for conventional concrete. 3. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish and to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo. C. Trowel Finish: 1. After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. 2. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. 3. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 4. Do not add water to concrete surface. 5. Do not apply hard-troweled finish to concrete, which has a total air content greater than 3 percent. 6. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-filmfinish coating system. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 033000 - 13 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE QPK NO. 220157.00 033000 - 13 7. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, in accordance with ASTM E1155 (ASTM E1155M), for a randomly trafficked floor surface: a. Slabs on Ground: 1) Specified overall values of flatness, FF 35; and of levelness, FL 25; with minimum local values of flatness, FF 24; and of levelness, FL 17. D. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thinset method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom perpendicular to main traffic route. 1. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. 2. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces. E. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and locations indicated on Drawings. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. 2. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. 3.9 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: 1. Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after Work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. 2. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. 3. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work. B. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items. 1. Cast-in inserts and accessories, as shown on Drawings. 2. Screed, tamp, and trowel finish concrete surfaces. 3.10 CONCRETE CURING A. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. 1. Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) and ACI 306.1 for cold weather protection during curing. 2. Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) and ACI 305.1 (ACI 305.1M) for hot-weather protection during curing. 3. Maintain moisture loss no more than 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h), calculated in accordance with ACI 305.1,) before and during finishing operations. B. Curing Formed Surfaces: Comply with ACI 308.1 (ACI 308.1M) as follows: ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 033000 - 14 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE QPK NO. 220157.00 033000 - 14 1. Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. 2. Cure concrete containing color pigments in accordance with color pigment manufacturer's instructions. 3. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. 4. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder of curing period, as follows: a. Continuous Fogging: Maintain standing water on concrete surface until final setting of concrete. b. Continuous Sprinkling: Maintain concrete surface continuously wet. c. Absorptive Cover: Pre-dampen absorptive material before application; apply additional water to absorptive material to maintain concrete surface continuously wet. d. Water-Retention Sheeting Materials: Cover exposed concrete surfaces with sheeting material, taping, or lapping seams. e. Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 1) Recoat areas subject to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. 2) Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. C. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Comply with ACI 308.1 (ACI 308.1M) as follows: 1. Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. 2. Interior Concrete Floors: a. Floors to Receive Floor Coverings Specified in Other Sections: Contractor has option of the following: 1) Absorptive Cover: As soon as concrete has sufficient set to permit application without marring concrete surface, install prewetted absorptive cover over entire area of floor. a) Lap edges and ends of absorptive cover not less than 12-inches (300mm). b) Maintain absorptive cover water saturated, and in place, for duration of curing period, but not less than seven days. 2) Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moistureretaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. a) Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape. b) Cure for not less than seven days. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 033000 - 15 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE QPK NO. 220157.00 033000 - 15 3) Ponding or Continuous Sprinkling of Water: Maintain concrete surfaces continuously wet for not less than seven days, utilizing one, or a combination of, the following: a) Water. b) Continuous water-fog spray. b. Floors to Receive Curing Compound: 1) Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 2) Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. 3) Maintain continuity of coating, and repair damage during curing period. 4) Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound does not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project. 3.11 TOLERANCES A. Conform to ACI 117 (ACI 117M). 3.12 JOINT FILLING A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month. 2. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased. B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joints clean and dry. C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches (50 mm) deep in formed joints. D. Overfill joint, and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening. 3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: 1. Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. 2. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 033000 - 16 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE QPK NO. 220157.00 033000 - 16 C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension to solid concrete. a. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch (19 mm). b. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. c. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. d. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. e. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement, so that, when dry, patching mortar matches surrounding color. a. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. b. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that will affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect. D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: 1. Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish, and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. a. Correct low and high areas. b. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 2. Repair finished surfaces containing surface defects, including spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing, and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. 3. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 4. Correct localized low areas during, or immediately after, completing surface-finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. a. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 5. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. a. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. b. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 6. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with repair topping. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 033000 - 17 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE QPK NO. 220157.00 033000 - 17 a. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent floor elevations. b. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. 7. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. a. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts, and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch (19-mm) clearance all around. b. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. c. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete, except without coarse aggregate. d. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. e. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 8. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching mortar. a. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete, and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. b. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. c. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. d. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. e. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval. 3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector to perform field tests and inspections and prepare testing and inspection reports. B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and to submit reports. 1. Testing agency shall be responsible for providing curing container for composite samples on Site and verifying that field-cured composite samples are cured in accordance with ASTM C31/C31M. 2. Testing agency shall immediately report to Architect, Contractor, and concrete manufacturer any failure of Work to comply with Contract Documents. 3. Testing agency shall report results of tests and inspections, in writing, to Owner, Architect, Contractor, and concrete manufacturer within 48 hours of inspections and tests. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 033000 - 18 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE QPK NO. 220157.00 033000 - 18 a. Test reports shall include reporting requirements of ASTM C31/C31M, ASTM C39/C39M, and ACI 301, including the following as applicable to each test and inspection: 1) Project name. 2) Name of testing agency. 3) Names and certification numbers of field and laboratory technicians performing inspections and testing. 4) Name of concrete manufacturer. 5) Date and time of inspection, sampling, and field testing. 6) Date and time of concrete placement. 7) Location in Work of concrete represented by samples. 8) Date and time sample was obtained. 9) Truck and batch ticket numbers. 10) Design compressive strength at 28 days. 11) Concrete mixture designation, proportions, and materials. 12) Field test results. 13) Information on storage and curing of samples before testing, including curing method and maximum and minimum temperatures during initial curing period. 14) Type of fracture and compressive break strengths at seven days and 28 days. C. Batch Tickets: For each load delivered, submit three copies of batch delivery ticket to testing agency, indicating quantity, mix identification, admixtures, design strength, aggregate size, design air content, design slump at time of batching, and amount of water that can be added at Project site. D. Inspections: 1. Headed bolts and studs. 2. Steel reinforcement placement. 3. Verification of use of required design mixture. 4. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 5. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 6. In-Field Reinforcing Steel Inspection: Includes verification of placement tolerances, splicing procedures, size and Grade, Stability (chairs and spacers), cleanliness, and condition of protective coating. E. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained in accordance with ASTM C 172/C 172M shall be performed in accordance with the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof. a. When frequency of testing provides fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 2. Slump: ASTM C143/C143M: ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 033000 - 19 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE QPK NO. 220157.00 033000 - 19 a. One test at point of placement for each truck. b. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content: ASTM C231/C231M pressure method, for normal-weight concrete: a. One test for each truck. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C1064/C1064M: a. One test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below or 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test per truck. 5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C31/C31M: a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two 6-inch (150 mm) by 12-inch (300 mm) or 4-inch (100 mm) by 8-inch (200 mm) cylinder specimens for each composite sample. b. Cast, initial cure, and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M. a. Test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens at seven days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. 7. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength, and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa) if specified compressive strength is 5000 psi (34.5 MPa), or no compressive strength test value is less than 10 percent of specified compressive strength if specified compressive strength is greater than 5000 psi (34.5 MPa). 8. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. 9. Additional Tests: a. Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. b. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42/C42M or by other methods as directed by Architect. 1) Acceptance criteria for concrete strength shall be in accordance with ACI 301 (ACI 301M), section 1.6.6.3. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 033000 - 20 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE QPK NO. 220157.00 033000 - 20 10. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 11. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents. F. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness in accordance with ASTM E1155 (ASTM E1155M) within 24 hours of completion of floor finishing and promptly report test results to Architect. 3.15 PROTECTION A. Protect concrete surfaces as follows: 1. Protect from petroleum stains. 2. Diaper hydraulic equipment used over concrete surfaces. 3. Prohibit vehicles from interior concrete slabs. 4. Prohibit use of pipe-cutting machinery over concrete surfaces. 5. Prohibit placement of steel items on concrete surfaces. 6. Prohibit use of acids or acidic detergents over concrete surfaces. END OF SECTION 033000 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 051200 - 1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING QPK NO. 220157.00 051200 - 1 SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Dvision 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Structural steel. 2. Shrinkage-resistant grout. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in ANSI/AISC 303. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Structural-steel materials. 2. High-strength, bolt-nut-washer assemblies. 3. Anchor rods. 4. Threaded rods. 5. Shop primer. 6. Shrinkage-resistant grout. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components. 1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 051200 - 2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING QPK NO. 220157.00 051200 - 2 2. Include embedment Drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain. 4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical, high-strength bolted connections. 5. Identify members not to be shop primed. C. Delegated Design Submittal: For structural-steel connections indicated on Drawings to comply with design loads, include analysis data. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator, and testing agency. B. Welding certificates. C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. D. Mill test reports for structural-steel materials, including chemical and physical properties. E. Product Test Reports: For the following: 1. Bolts, nuts, and washers, including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 2. Direct-tension indicators. 3. Tension-control, high-strength, bolt-nut-washer assemblies. F. Survey of existing conditions. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category BU or is accredited by the IAS Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel (Acceptance Criteria 172). B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified Installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE. C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 051200 - 3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING QPK NO. 220157.00 051200 - 3 1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact. 1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes repackaging and seals containers. 2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating ASTM F3125/F3125M, Grade F1852 bolt assemblies and for retesting bolt assemblies after lubrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. ANSI/AISC 303. 2. ANSI/AISC 360. 3. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts." B. Connection Design Information: 1. Fabricator's experienced steel detailer shall select or complete connections in accordance with ANSI/AISC 303. a. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and ANSI/AISC 360. b. Use Allowable Stress Design; data are given at service-load level. 2.2 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS A. W-Shapes: ASTM A992/A992M. B. Channels, Angles, M-Shapes: ASTM A36/A36M. C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A36/A36M. D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B structural tubing. E. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. 2.3 BOLTS AND CONNECTORS A. High-Strength A325 Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F3125/F3125M, Grade A325 (Grade A325M), Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A563, Grade DH ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 051200 - 4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING QPK NO. 220157.00 051200 - 4 (ASTM A563M, Class 10S), heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F436/F436M, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish. 1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F959/F959M, Type 325-1 (Type 8.8-1), compressiblewasher type with plain finish. B. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F3125/F3125M, Grade F1852, Type 1, heavy-hex head assemblies, consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends; ASTM A563, Grade DH (ASTM A563M, Class 10S), heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F436/F436M, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain. 2.4 RODS A. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F1554, Grade 36. 1. Configuration: As indicated. 2. Nuts: ASTM A563 (ASTM A563M) heavy-hex carbon steel. 3. Plate Washers: ASTM A36/A36M carbon steel. 4. Washers: ASTM F436 (ASTM F436M), Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 5. Finish: Plain. 2.5 PRIMER A. Steel Primer: 1. Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 2.6 SHRINKAGE-RESISTANT GROUT A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate in accordance with ANSI/AISC 303 and to ANSI/AISC 360. 1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated. 2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up. 3. Identify high-strength structural steel in accordance with ASTM A6/A6M and maintain markings until structural-steel framing has been erected. 4. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 5. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shoppriming operations. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 051200 - 5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING QPK NO. 220157.00 051200 - 5 B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M. C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads. E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted in accordance with SSPC-SP 3. F. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass through steel members. 1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning. 2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work. 2.8 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts in accordance with RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened unless noted otherwise. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in ANSI/AISC 303 for mill material. 2.9 SHOP PRIMING A. Shop prime steel surfaces, except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm). 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces of high-strength bolted, slip-critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing). B. Surface Preparation of Steel: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces in accordance with the following specifications and standards: 1. SSPC-SP 2 or, if more stringent, as required. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 051200 - 6 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING QPK NO. 220157.00 051200 - 6 C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first. 2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and inspections. 1. Allow testing agency access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections. 2. Bolted Connections: Inspect and test shop-bolted connections in accordance with RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts." 3. Welded Connections: Visually inspect shop-welded connections in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 4. Prepare test and inspection reports. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements. 1. Prepare a certified survey of existing conditions. Include bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction and structuralsteel framing until cast-in-place concrete has attained its design compressive strength. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 051200 - 7 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING QPK NO. 220157.00 051200 - 7 3.3 ERECTION A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and in accordance with ANSI/AISC 303 and ANSI/AISC 360. B. Baseplates, Bearing Plates, and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates. 1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate. 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout. 4. Promptly pack shrinkage-resistant grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates, so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for grouting. C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within ANSI/AISC 303. D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that are in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. Slope roof framing members to slopes indicated on Drawings. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service. E. Splice members only where indicated. F. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. 3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts in accordance with RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts" for bolt and joint type specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened unless otherwise noted. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with ANSI/AISC 303 and ANSI/AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in ANSI/AISC 303 for mill material. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 051200 - 8 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING QPK NO. 220157.00 051200 - 8 3.5 REPAIR A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing, and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780/A780M. B. Touchup Painting: 1. Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or missing, and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. a. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1. Verify structural-steel materials and inspect steel frame joint details. 2. Verify weld materials and inspect welds. 3. Verify connection materials and inspect high-strength bolted connections. B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. 1. Bolted Connections: Inspect and test bolted connections in accordance with RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts." 2. Welded Connections: Visually inspect field welds in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. END OF SECTION 051200 METAL PAN STAIRS QPK NO. 220157.00 055113 - 1 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 055113 - 1 SECTION 055113 - METAL PAN STAIRS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Preassembled steel stairs with concrete-filled treads. 2. Steel tube railings and guards attached to metal stairs. 3. Steel tube handrails attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written instructions to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs, railings and guards. 1. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, blocking for attachment of wall-mounted handrails and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. 2. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. C. Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so they do not encroach on required stair width and are within fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure. D. Schedule installation of railings and guards so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. 1. Do not support railings and guards temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For metal pan stairs and the following: 1. Shop primer products. 2. Handrail wall brackets. 3. Grout. METAL PAN STAIRS QPK NO. 220157.00 055113 - 2 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 055113 - 2 B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work. 2. Indicate sizes of metal sections, thickness of metals, profiles, holes and field joints. 3. Include plan at each level. 4. Indicate locations of anchors and blocking for attachment of wall-mounted handrails. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For treads, landing slab, railings and guards, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer's experience with providing delegated-design engineering services of the kind indicated, including documentation that engineer is licensed in the State in which Project is located. B. Welding certificates. C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. 1. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage or other supports and spacers. 2. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 3. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. a. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. METAL PAN STAIRS QPK NO. 220157.00 055113 - 3 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 055113 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design stairs, railings and guards, including attachment. 1. Stair stringers, landing framing and post support shall be as indicated on Drawings. Delegated engineering design is not required for these elements. B. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft. (4.79 kN/sq. m). 2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf (1.33 kN) applied on an area of 4 sq. in. (2580 sq. mm). 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 4. Limit deflection of treads and platforms construction to L/360 or 1/4 inch (6.4 mm), whichever is less. C. Structural Performance of Railings and Guards: Railings and guards, including attachment to building construction, shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. (0.093 sq. m). b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 3. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. a. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. 2.2 METALS A. Metal Surfaces: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M. METAL PAN STAIRS QPK NO. 220157.00 055113 - 4 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 055113 - 4 C. Steel Pipe for Railings and Guards: ASTM A53/A53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads. D. Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M structural steel, Grade 25 (Grade 170), unless another grade is required by design loads; exposed. E. Uncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1011/A1011M, structural steel, Grade 30 (Grade 205), unless another grade is required by design loads. 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941/F1941M, Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. 1. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings and Guards to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings and guards to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads. C. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A563 (ASTM A563M); and, where indicated, flat washers. D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A563 (ASTM A563M); and, where indicated, flat washers. E. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E488/E488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941/F1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Handrail Wall Brackets: Cast aluminum, center of rail 3-1/8 inches (79.4 mm) from face of wall. B. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. C. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. D. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout; recommended by manufacturer for interior use; noncorrosive and nonstaining; mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. METAL PAN STAIRS QPK NO. 220157.00 055113 - 5 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 055113 - 5 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings and guards, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure. 1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated. 2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. B. Assemble stairs, railings and guards in shop to greatest extent possible. 1. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. 2. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. C. Cut, drill and punch metals cleanly and accurately. 1. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. 2. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. D. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. E. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. F. Weld connections to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated. 5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Finish #1 - No evidence of welded joint. G. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. 1. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts unless otherwise indicated. 2. Locate joints where least conspicuous. 3. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. 4. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate internally. 2.6 FABRICATION OF STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS A. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for Architectural Class, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. METAL PAN STAIRS QPK NO. 220157.00 055113 - 6 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 055113 - 6 B. Stair Framing: 1. Fabricate stringers of steel channels as shown. Extend stringers continuous around perimeter of intermediate landing construction. a. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel and rectangular tube stringers. b. Finish: Shop primed. 2. Construct platform frame of steel channel headers and miscellaneous framing members as shown. a. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel and rectangular tube framing. b. Finish: Shop primed. 3. Weld stringers to headers; weld framing members to stringers and headers. 4. Provide tube steel post framing as indicated on drawings to support intermediate landing. C. Metal Pan Stairs: Form risers, subtread pans and subplatforms to configurations shown from steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than 0.067 inch (1.7 mm). 1. Steel Sheet: Uncoated, cold-rolled steel sheet. 2. Directly weld metal pans to stringers; locate welds on top of subtreads where they will be concealed by concrete fill. Do not weld risers to stringers. 3. Shape metal pans to include nosing integral with riser. 4. Provide subplatforms as follows. Weld subplatforms to platform framing. a. Smooth Soffit Construction: Construct subplatforms with flat metal pans under surfaces to produce smooth soffits with tight butt joints. 5. Concrete Thickness: a. Treads: 2 inches (51 mm). b. Landing: 3 inches (76 mm). 2.7 FABRICATION OF STAIR RAILINGS AND GUARDS A. Fabricate railings and guards to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of member, post spacings, wall bracket spacing, and anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads. 1. Rails and Posts: 1-5/8-inch- (41-mm-) diameter top rails and posts. 2. Picket Infill: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) square pickets spaced to prohibit the passage of a 4-inch (100-mm) diameter sphere. 3. Provide continuous steel channel at top and bottom of pickets, punched to receive pickets with welds concealed on back side of channel. 4. Picket and channel assemblies to be welded or mechanically fastened to underside of guard rail top post, vertical posts and top of stair stringer. a. If mechanically fastening use counter sunk flat head fasteners threaded into tapped holes in substrate material. METAL PAN STAIRS QPK NO. 220157.00 055113 - 7 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 055113 - 7 B. Welded Connections: Fabricate railings and guards with welded connections. 1. Fabricate connections that are exposed to weather in a manner that excludes water. a. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate internally. 2. Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. 3. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 4. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 5. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 6. Remove flux immediately. 7. Finish welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Finish #1 - No evidence of a welded joint as shown in NAAMM AMP 521. C. Form changes in direction of railings and guards as follows: 1. By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings. D. For changes in direction made by bending, use jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. E. Close exposed ends of railing and guard members with prefabricated end fittings. F. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Maintain 1/4 inch (6 mm) maximum separation between rail return and wall. G. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding unless otherwise indicated. H. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to other work. 1. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting to concrete or masonry work. 2. Provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets, fasteners and sleeves. 3. Provide type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt and that provides 2-1/8 inches (54 mm) minimum clearance from inside face of handrail to finished wall surface. I. Fillers: Provide fillers made from steel plate, or other suitably crush-resistant material, where needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports. 1. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses and to produce adequate bearing area to prevent bracket rotation and overstressing of substrate. 2.8 FINISHES A. Finish metal stairs after assembly. METAL PAN STAIRS QPK NO. 220157.00 055113 - 8 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 055113 - 8 B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated, ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPCSP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify elevations of floors, bearing surfaces and locations of bearing plates and other embedments for compliance with requirements. 1. For wall-mounted railings, verify locations of concealed reinforcement within gypsum board and plaster assemblies. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF METAL PAN STAIRS A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal stairs to in-place construction. 1. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors. B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. C. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure unless otherwise indicated. 1. Grouted Baseplates: Clean concrete-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. a. Clean bottom surface of plates. b. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts. c. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. d. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout. e. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. 1) Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. 2) Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkageresistant grouts. METAL PAN STAIRS QPK NO. 220157.00 055113 - 9 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 055113 - 9 D. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. E. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. 1. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. 2. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. 3. Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General" Article. F. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with ACI 301. Coordinate finish quality with specified flooring material. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF RAILINGS AND GUARDS A. Adjust railing and guard systems before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints with tight, hairline joints. 1. Space posts at spacing indicated or, if not indicated, as required by design loads. 2. Plumb posts in each direction, within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m). 3. Align rails and guards so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of stairs for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (6 mm in 3.5 m). 4. Secure posts, rail ends and guard ends to building construction as follows: a. Anchor posts to steel by welding to steel supporting members. B. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. 1. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. 2. Secure wall brackets to building construction as required to comply with performance requirements. a. For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members. 3.4 REPAIR A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness. END OF SECTION 055113 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY QPK NO. 220157.00 061053 - 1 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 061053 - 1 SECTION 061053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wood blocking and nailers. 2. Plywood backing panels. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Boards or Strips: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) size in least dimension. B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) or greater size but less than 5 inches nominal (114 mm actual) size in least dimension. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES: 1. Preservative-treated wood. 2. Power-driven fasteners. 3. Post-installed anchors. MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY QPK NO. 220157.00 061053 - 2 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 061053 - 2 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with ground. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings. E. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln-dry plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. F. Concealed Boards: 15 percent maximum moisture content of any of the following species and grades: 1. Mixed southern pine or southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB. 2. Eastern softwoods, No. 2 Common grade; NELMA. 3. Northern species, No. 2 Common grade; NLGA. 4. Western woods, Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA. MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY QPK NO. 220157.00 061053 - 3 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 061053 - 3 G. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose. H. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. I. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling. 2.3 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, DOC PS 1, Exterior, A-C, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal thickness. 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F1667. C. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C1002, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. D. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70. E. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC01, ICC-ES AC58, ICC-ES AC193 or ICC-ES AC308 as appropriate for the substrate. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B633, Class Fe/Zn 5. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. B. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate nailers, blocking and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. C. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY QPK NO. 220157.00 061053 - 4 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 061053 - 4 D. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. E. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. F. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. 1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. G. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. 2. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILER A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. B. Protect miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, miscellaneous rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. END OF SECTION 061053 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS QPK NO. 220157.00 064116 - 1 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 064116 - 1 SECTION 064116 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plastic-laminate-clad architectural cabinets. 2. Cabinet hardware and accessories. 3. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-clad architectural cabinets that are not concealed within other construction. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing cabinets that are concealed within other construction before cabinet installation. 2. Section 123623 "Plastic-Laminate-Clad Countertops." 3. Section 123661 “Solid Surface Countertops”. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to support loads imposed by installed and fully loaded cabinets. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Show large-scale details. 3. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 4. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed in plastic-laminate architectural cabinets. C. Samples for Verification: For the following: 1. Plastic Laminates: 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish required. 2. Exposed Cabinet Hardware and Accessories: One full-size unit for each type and finish. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS QPK NO. 220157.00 064116 - 2 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 064116 - 2 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For fabricator. B. Product Certificates: For each type of product. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator’s Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer of products. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar finish operations that might damage architectural cabinets have been completed in installation areas. Store cabinets in installation areas or in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations with Humidity Control: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet-work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field measurements before being enclosed/concealed by construction, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. C. Established Dimensions: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where cabinets are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS QPK NO. 220157.00 064116 - 3 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 064116 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the Architectural Woodwork Standards for grades of cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. The Contract Documents contain requirements that are more stringent than the referenced quality standard. Comply with requirements of Contract Documents in addition to those of the referenced quality standard. B. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Premium. C. Type of Construction: Frameless. D. Door and Drawer-Front Style: Flush overlay. E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by quality standard. 1. Basis of Design: Provide laminate as indicated in Finish Legend on Drawings. F. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: 1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS. 2. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS. 3. Edges: Grade HGS. 4. Pattern Direction: Vertically for doors and fixed panels, horizontally for drawer fronts. G. Materials for Semi-exposed Surfaces: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermally fused laminate panels. a. Edges of Thermally Fused Laminate Panel Shelves: PVC or polyester edge banding. b. For semi-exposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS. 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermally fused laminate panels. H. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic-Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL. I. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body. 1. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical fasteners or glued dovetail joints. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS QPK NO. 220157.00 064116 - 4 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 064116 - 4 J. Colors, Patterns and Finishes (PLAM-504): Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. As indicated by laminate manufacturer's designations. 2.2 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of architectural cabinet and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent. B. Composite Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of architectural cabinet and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Medium-Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2, Grade 130. 2. Particleboard (Medium Density): ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. 3. Thermally Fused Laminate (TFL) Panels: Particleboard or MDF finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for Test Methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10. 2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with cabinets. B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): ANSI/BHMA A156.9, B01602, 135 degrees of opening, self-closing. C. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 5 inches (127 mm) long, 2-1/2 inches (63.5 mm) deep, and 5/16 inch (8 mm) in diameter. D. Shelf Rests: ANSI/BHMA A156.9, B04013; two-pin plastic with shelf hold-down clip. E. Drawer Slides: ANSI/BHMA A156.9. 1. Standard Duty (Grade 1): Side mount and extending under bottom edge of drawer. 2. Heavy-Duty (Grade 1HD-100): Side mount. a. Type: Full extension. b. Material: Epoxy-coated polymer or zinc-plated ball bearing slides. c. Motion Feature: Soft close dampener or self-closing mechanism. 3. General-purpose drawers but not more than 6 inches (150 mm) high and not more than 24 inches (600 mm) wide, provide 75 lb (34 kg) load capacity. 4. File drawers more than 6 inches (150 mm) high or more than 24 inches (600 mm) wide, provide 100 lb (45 kg) load capacity. 5. Lateral file drawers more than 6 inches (150 mm) high and more than 24 inches (600 mm) but not more than 30 inches (762 mm) wide, provide 150 lb (68 kg) load capacity. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS QPK NO. 220157.00 064116 - 5 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 064116 - 5 F. Door Locks: ANSI/BHMA A156.11, E07121. G. Drawer Locks: ANSI/BHMA A156.11, E07041. H. Door and Drawer Silencers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, L03011. I. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with ANSI/BHMA A156.18 for ANSI/BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Satin Chromium Plated: ANSI/BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; ANSI/BHMA 652 for steel base. 2. Satin Stainless Steel: ANSI/BHMA 630. J. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in ANSI/BHMA A156.9. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrousmetal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors. C. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: PVA. 1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive. 2. Panel assemblies fabricated with PVA adhesive to be laminated with minimum 5 psi continuous pressure evenly applied to entire panel surface. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate architectural cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. B. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. C. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS QPK NO. 220157.00 064116 - 6 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 064116 - 6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition cabinets to humidity conditions in installation areas for not less than 72 hours. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Install cabinets to comply with quality standard grade of item to be installed. B. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with wafer-head cabinet installation screws. D. Install cabinets level, plumb, and true in line to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm) using concealed shims. 1. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. 2. Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects. Where not possible to repair, replace architectural cabinets. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate and adjust hardware. C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. END OF SECTION 064116 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING QPK NO. 220157.00 078413 - 1 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 078413 - 1 SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Penetration firestopping systems for the following applications: a. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls. b. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 078443 "Joint Firestopping" for joints in or between fire-resistance-rat ed construction, at exterior curtain-wall/floor intersections, and in smoke barriers. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location, illustration of firestopping system, and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency. 1. Contractor to submit schedule formatted as indicated in Part 3 identifying construction and rating of wall assembly being penetrated, the properties of the penetrating item(s) and the proposed firestopping material including any necessary backing. 2. Engineering Judgments: Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping system, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly. Obtain approval of authorities having jurisdiction prior to submittal. PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING QPK NO. 220157.00 078413 - 2 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 078413 - 2 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Test Reports: For each penetration firestopping system, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that penetration firestopping systems have been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Approval according to FM Approval 4991, "Approval Standard for Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements." 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping system when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping system manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Install and cure penetration firestopping materials per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping systems can be installed according to specified firestopping system design. B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: 1. Perform penetration firestopping system tests by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING QPK NO. 220157.00 078413 - 3 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 078413 - 3 2. Test per testing standards referenced in "Penetration Firestopping Systems" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. Penetration firestopping systems shall bear classification marking of a qualified testing agency. 1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." 2) Intertek Group in its "Directory of Listed Building Products." 3) FM Approval in its "Approval Guide." 2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS A. Penetration Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 3M Fire Protection Products. 2. Hilti, Inc. 3. Nelson Thermal Insulation and Fire Stopping 4. Specified Technologies, Inc. C. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa). 1. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. D. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa). 1. F-Rating: One hour. 2. T-Rating: One hour, except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall. 3. W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping systems showing no evidence of water leakage when tested according to UL 1479. a. All sanitary waste line, supply water and sprinkler line floor penetrations. E. Exposed Penetration Firestopping Systems: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E84. PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING QPK NO. 220157.00 078413 - 4 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 078413 - 4 F. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for conditions indicated. 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials. 2. Substrate primers. 3. Collars. 2.3 FILL MATERIALS A. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during exposure to moisture. B. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant. C. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced intumescent elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet. D. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening, water-resistant, intumescent putties containing no solvents or inorganic fibers. E. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side. F. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar. G. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. H. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants. 2.4 MIXING A. Penetration Firestopping Materials: For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING QPK NO. 220157.00 078413 - 5 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 078413 - 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Before installing penetration firestopping systems, clean out openings immediately to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping materials. 2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. B. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install penetration firestopping systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications. B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings. 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not forming permanent components of firestopping. PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING QPK NO. 220157.00 078413 - 6 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 078413 - 6 C. Install fill materials by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories and penetrating items to achieve required fire-resistance ratings. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Wall Identification: Permanently label walls containing penetration firestopping systems with the words "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER - PROTECT ALL OPENINGS," using lettering not less than 3 inches (76 mm) high and with minimum 0.375-inch (9.5-mm) strokes. 1. Locate in accessible concealed floor, floor-ceiling, or attic space at 15 feet (4.57 m) from end of wall and at intervals not exceeding 30 feet (9.14 m). B. Penetration Identification: Identify each penetration firestopping system with legible metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (150 mm) of penetration firestopping system edge so labels are visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping systems. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping material and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements. PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING QPK NO. 220157.00 078413 - 7 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 078413 - 7 3.6 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEM SCHEDULE A. Penetration Firestopping System for (specific penetrating item and wall construction): 1. Testing Agency System Designation: 2. F-Rating: 1 hour. 3. T-Rating (for horizontal assemblies not within wall cavities): 1 hour. 4. W-Rating (at specified locations.) 5. Properties and size of penetrating item(s). 6. Type of Fill Materials: B. Clearly indicate all ancillary space requirements of void. C. Group horizontal systems (floor) and vertical systems (walls) separately. END OF SECTION 078413 JOINT SEALANTS QPK NO. 220157.00 079200 - 1 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 079200 - 1 SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Urethane joint sealants. 2. Mildew-resistant joint sealants. 3. Latex joint sealants. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for sealing joints in sound-rated construction. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product. B. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide by 3 inch (75 mm) long strips. C. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each kind of joint sealant, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency. B. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. JOINT SEALANTS QPK NO. 220157.00 079200 - 2 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 079200 - 2 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency. 1. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C1021 to conduct the testing indicated. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by jointsealant manufacturer. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. JOINT SEALANTS QPK NO. 220157.00 079200 - 3 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 079200 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 1. Sealant color for tile shall match grout color. 2.2 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS A. Urethane, S, NS, 25, T, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses T and NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Pecora Corporation; DynaTrol I-XL. b. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex – 1a. B. Urethane, M, NS, 50, T, NT: Multi-component, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 50, Uses T and NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Pecora Corporation; DynaTrol II. b. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex – 2c NS EZ Mix+. 2.3 MILDEW-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS A. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealants: Formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with fungicide to prevent mold and mildew growth. B. Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT: Mildew-resistant, single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, acid-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Building Systems; Omniplus. b. Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant. c. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700. d. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200 Sanitary. JOINT SEALANTS QPK NO. 220157.00 079200 - 4 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 079200 - 4 2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C834, Type OP, Grade NF. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolac. b. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 600. c. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. 2.5 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), Type O (open-cell material), Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin) or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. JOINT SEALANTS QPK NO. 220157.00 079200 - 5 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 079200 - 5 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Concrete. b. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of jointsealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. JOINT SEALANTS QPK NO. 220157.00 079200 - 6 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 079200 - 6 D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C1193 unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. 3.6 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 1. Joint Locations: a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, NS, 25, T, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: a. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. JOINT SEALANTS QPK NO. 220157.00 079200 - 7 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 079200 - 7 B. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces. 1. Joint Locations: a. Control joints between suspended bulkheads and full height walls. (Joint movement acting in shear.) 2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, M, NS, 50, T, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: a. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. C. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 1. Joint Locations: a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors and counters. 2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, mildew resistant, acid curing, S, NS, 25, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. D. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces not subject to significant movement. 1. Joint Locations: a. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows and elevator entrances. 2. Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: Paintable. END OF SECTION 079200 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES QPK NO. 220157.00 081113 - 1 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 081113 - 1 SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Interior standard steel doors and frames. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 081416 "Flush Wood Doors " for doors installed in hollow metal frames. 2. Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow-metal doors. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or ANSI/SDI A250.8. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. B. Coordinate requirements for installation of door hardware, electrified door hardware, and access control and security systems. 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions and finishes. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES QPK NO. 220157.00 081113 - 2 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 081113 - 2 B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door type. 2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of electrical raceway and preparation for electrified hardware, access control systems, and security systems. 7. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices and connections. 8. Details of accessories. 9. Details of moldings, removable stops and glazing. C. Product Schedule: For hollow-metal doors and frames, prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final door hardware schedule. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each type of fire-rated hollow-metal door and frame assembly for tests performed by a qualified testing agency indicating compliance with performance requirements. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow-metal doors and frames palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use non-vented plastic. 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units. B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. C. Store hollow-metal doors and frames vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch- (102-mm-) high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm) space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design: Curries Co., M Series frames and 707 Series doors. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable alternative doors and frames from one of the following: a. Ceco Door, SU Series frames and Legion doors. b. Steelcraft, F Series frames and L Series doors. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES QPK NO. 220157.00 081113 - 3 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 081113 - 3 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated on Drawings, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. 2.3 INTERIOR STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES A. Construct hollow-metal doors and frames to comply with standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances and as specified. B. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8, Level 2; ANSI/SDI A250.4, Level B. 1. Doors: a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm). c. Face: Uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0 mm). d. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless. e. Edge Bevel: Bevel lock and hinge edges 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3.2 mm in 51 mm). f. Core for Non-Rated Doors: Polystyrene. g. Fire-Rated Core: Manufacturer's standard core for fire-rated doors. 2. Frames: a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm). b. Sidelite and Transom Frames: Fabricated from same thickness material as adjacent door frame. c. Construction: Face welded. 3. Exposed Finish: Prime. 2.4 BORROWED LITES A. Fabricate of uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm). B. Construction: Face welded. C. Fabricate in one piece except where handling and shipping limitations require multiple sections. Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of metal of same or greater thickness as metal as frames. D. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES QPK NO. 220157.00 081113 - 4 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 081113 - 4 2.5 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Type: Anchors of minimum size and type required by applicable door and frame standard, and suitable for performance level indicated. 2. Quantity: Minimum of three anchors per jamb, with one additional anchor for frames with no floor anchor. Provide one additional anchor for each 24 inches (610 mm) of frame height above 7 feet (2.1 m). 3. Postinstalled Expansion Anchor: Minimum 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts, with manufacturer's standard pipe spacer. B. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor. C. Material: ASTM A879/A879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z (12G) coating designation; mill phosphatized. 2.6 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1011/A1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A153/A153M. E. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated. F. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smokedeveloped indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E136 for combustion characteristics. G. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing." 2.7 FABRICATION A. Hollow-Metal Frames: Fabricate in one piece except where handling and shipping limitations require multiple sections. Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of metal of same or greater thickness as frames. 1. Sidelite and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by welding. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES QPK NO. 220157.00 081113 - 5 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 081113 - 5 2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 3. Door Silencers: Drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers. B. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal doors and frames to receive templated mortised hardware, and electrical wiring; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to ANSI/SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates. 1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised and surface-mounted door hardware. 2. Comply with BHMA A156.115 for preparing hollow-metal doors and frames for hardware. C. Glazed Lites: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with mitered hairline joints. 1. Provide stops and moldings flush with face of door, and with square stops unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide fixed frame moldings on secure side of interior doors and frames. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal doors and frames. 3. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation types indicated. 4. Provide stops for installation with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches (230 mm) o.c. and not more than 2 inches (51 mm) o.c. from each corner. 2.8 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Touch up factory-applied finishes where spreaders are removed. B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised and surface-mounted door hardware. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES QPK NO. 220157.00 081113 - 6 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 081113 - 6 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install hollow-metal doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with approved Shop Drawings and with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11. 1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces without damage to completed Work. a. Where frames are fabricated in sections, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Touch-up finishes. b. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. 2. Fire-Rated Openings: Install frames according to NFPA 80. 3. Floor Anchors: Secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 4. Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames. 5. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal frames to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor. C. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit and adjust hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. 1. Steel Doors: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with hollowmetal manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 REPAIR A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. B. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 081113 FLUSH WOOD DOORS QPK NO. 220157.00 081416 - 1 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 081416 - 1 SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid-core flush wood veneer-faced doors for transparent finish. 2. Solid-core flush wood doors with plastic-veneer-faces. 3. Factory finishing flush wood doors. 4. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 081113 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for frame requirements. 2. Section 084113 “Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts” for surface mounted sliding door frame assembly requirements. 3. Section 087100 " Door Hardware" for related hardware requirements. 4. Section 088000 "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including the following: 1. Door core materials and construction. 2. Door edge construction 3. Door face type and characteristics. 4. Door trim for openings. 5. Factory-machining criteria. 6. Factory-finishing specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each type of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following: 1. Door schedule indicating door location, type, size, fire protection rating and swing. 2. Door elevations, dimension and locations of hardware and lite cutouts. FLUSH WOOD DOORS QPK NO. 220157.00 081416 - 2 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 081416 - 2 3. Details of frame for each frame type, including dimensions and profile. 4. Details of electrical raceway and preparation for electrified hardware, access control systems, and security systems. 5. Dimensions and locations of blocking for hardware attachment. 6. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 7. Clearances and undercuts. 8. Requirements for veneer matching. 9. Doors to be factory finished and application requirements. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For plastic-laminate door faces and factory-finished doors. D. Samples for Verification: 1. Factory wood veneer finishes applied to actual door face material, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm). 2. Plastic veneer, 6 inches (150 mm) square, for each color, texture and pattern selected. 3. Replaceable door edge cover, with specified finish, 6 inches (150 mm) long. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample Warranty: For special warranties. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Special warranties. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons. C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels designed for building occupants for the remainder of construction period. FLUSH WOOD DOORS QPK NO. 220157.00 081416 - 3 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 081416 - 3 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Delamination of veneer. b. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) in a 42-by-84-inch (1067-by-2134-mm) section. c. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch (0.25 mm in a 76.2-mm) span. 2. Warranty for above defects shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 3. Additional coverage for plastic veneer clad doors shall include material replacement of damaged replaceable extruded door edge covers by manufacturer. 4. Warranty Period for all Solid-Core Interior Doors and Components: Life of installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Solid Core Wood Doors: 1. Basis of Design Wood Veneer Doors: Graham Doors, GPD Series. a. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable alternative doors and frames from the following: 1) Marshfield Doors, DPC Series. 2. Basis of Design Plastic Laminate Faced Doors: Construction Specialties, Inc., Acrovyn Door System. No substitutions. B. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer except as follows: 1. Provide plastic veneer clad flush wood doors from specified manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Rated Wood Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fireprotection ratings indicated on Drawings, based on testing at positive pressure in accordance with UL 10C or NFPA 252. FLUSH WOOD DOORS QPK NO. 220157.00 081416 - 4 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 081416 - 4 2.3 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1A. 1. The Contract Documents contain requirements that are more stringent than the referenced quality standard. Comply with the Contract Documents in addition to those of the referenced quality standard. 2.4 SOLID-CORE FLUSH WOOD VENEER-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Interior Doors: 1. Performance Grade: ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1A Extra Heavy Duty. 2. Faces: Single-ply wood veneer not less than 1/50 inch (0.508 mm) thick. a. Species: Red oak. b. Cut: Plain sliced (flat sliced). c. Match between Veneer Leaves: Slip match. d. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance match. e. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening. 3. Exposed Vertical Edges: Applied wood edges of same species as faces and covering edges of crossbands - Architectural Woodwork Standards edge Type D. a. Fire-Rated Doors: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed vertical edges. b. Mineral-Core Doors: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. 1) Screw-Holding Capability: 550 lbf (2440 N) in accordance with WDMA T.M. 10. 4. Cores for Non-Fire Rated Doors: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1 particleboard. a. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware. 5. Core for Fire-Rated Doors: As required to achieve fire-protection rating indicated. a. Blocking for Mineral-Core Doors: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated on Drawings as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware. 6. Construction: Five plies, hot-pressed bonded (vertical and horizontal edging is bonded to core), with entire unit abrasive planed before veneering. FLUSH WOOD DOORS QPK NO. 220157.00 081416 - 5 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 081416 - 5 2.5 SOLID-CORE FLUSH WOOD DOORS WITH PLASTIC-VENEER FACES A. Interior Doors: 1. Performance Grade: ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1A Extra Heavy Duty. 2. Plastic-Veneer Faces: Impact resistant, PVC-free plastic panels with integral base color throughout full panel thickness and the following performance characteristics: a. Face Veneer Wear Index: Abrasion Resistance per ASTM D-4060 to 28,000 cycles with no scratching or scuffing. b. Face Veneer Impact Resistance: Per ASTM D-4226 to 86 in./lb. without damage. 3. Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of options. 4. Door Edges: Plastic extrusions to match face finish with the following features: a. Edge covers shall fully wrap door vertical stiles and be flush with both door faces. b. Edge covers shall have 1/4-inch radiused corners. c. Edge covers shall be installed with concealed fastening. d. Edge covers and stiles shall comply with WDMA TM-8 and TM-10 Extra Heavy Duty hinge and screw holding capacities. 5. Door Cores: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1 particleboard. a. Blocking: Provide blocking as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware. 6. Construction: Five plies, hot-pressed or cold-pressed bonded (horizontal edging is bonded to core), with entire unit abrasive planed before faces and crossbands are applied. 2.6 LIGHT FRAMES A. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard wood beads unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood Species: Same species as door faces. 2. Profile: Flush rectangular beads. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. 1. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. 2. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. 1. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. 2. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, ANSI/BHMA156.115-W, and hardware templates. 3. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames, to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. 4. Provide factory-installed raceway and wiring in all doors to accommodate specified hardware including the future addition of electrified hardware for access control systems. FLUSH WOOD DOORS QPK NO. 220157.00 081416 - 6 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 081416 - 6 C. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors. 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Glazing: Installed as part of Section 088000 "Glazing." 2.8 FACTORY FINISHING A. Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. 1. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing. 2. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. 3. Stains and fillers may be omitted on bottom edges, edges of cutouts and mortises. B. Factory finish doors not specified for plastic-veneer faces. C. Transparent Finish: 1. ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1A Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1A TR-6 Catalyzed Polyurethane. 3. Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Effect: Filled finish. 5. Sheen: Satin. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors. 1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware." B. Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated. C. Install doors level, plumb, true and straight. 1. Install fire-rated doors and frames in accordance with NFPA 80. D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. FLUSH WOOD DOORS QPK NO. 220157.00 081416 - 7 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 081416 - 7 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION 081416 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES QPK NO. 220157.00 083113 - 1 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 083113 - 1 SECTION 083113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Access doors and frames. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles and finishes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES A. Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges: 1. Description: Face of door flush with frame, with exposed flange and concealed hinge. 2. Optional Features: Piano hinges. 3. Locations: Wall. 4. Door Size: 24 inches (610 mm) square minimum. 5. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.060 inch (1.52 mm), 16 gage, factory primed. 6. Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door. 7. Latch and Lock: Cam latch with operation method as directed by Owner. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M. B. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc coated, ASTM A879/A879M, with cold-rolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed. C. Frame Anchors: Same material as door face. ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES QPK NO. 220157.00 083113 - 2 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 083113 - 2 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation. B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish mounting holes, attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to types of supports indicated. D. Latch and Lock Hardware: 1. Quantity: Furnish number of latches and locks required to hold doors tightly closed. 2.4 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. D. Painted Finishes: Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish. 1. Factory Primed: Apply manufacturer's standard, lead- and chromate-free, universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames. ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES QPK NO. 220157.00 083113 - 3 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 083113 - 3 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation. 3.4 SCHEDULE A. Provide doors at all concealed valve locations. Coordinate location and count with plumbing trade and Owner requirements. END OF SECTION 083113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS QPK NO. 220157.00 084113 - 1 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 0841113- 1 SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Aluminum-framed storefront systems. 2. Aluminum-framed entrance door systems. 3. Aluminum sliding door frame systems. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 081416 "Flush Wood Doors" for wood doors installed in aluminum sliding door frame assemblies. 2. Section 084229 "Swinging Automatic Entrances" for low energy operators installed with entrance door assemblies 3. Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for additional hardware components. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts and aluminum sliding door frames. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work. 1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior. 2. Include full-size isometric details of each type of vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, showing the following: a. Joinery, including concealed welds. b. Anchorage. c. Glazing. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS QPK NO. 220157.00 084113 - 2 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 0841113- 2 3. Include point-to-point wiring diagrams showing the following: a. Power requirements for each electrically operated door hardware. b. Location and types of switches, signal device, conduit sizes and number and size of wires. C. Samples for Verification: For each exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes. D. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: 1. For Installer. B. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed entrances, storefronts and sliding door components to include in maintenance manuals. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer and that employs a qualified glazing contractor for this Project who is certified under the North American Contractor Certification Program (NACC) for Architectural Glass & Metal (AG&M) contractors. B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. 1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS QPK NO. 220157.00 084113 - 3 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 0841113- 3 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures, including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. c. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering. d. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas. e. Failure of operating components. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Finish Warranty, Anodized Finishes: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of anodized finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Delta E units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, peeling, or chipping. 2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of aluminum-framed entrance and storefront system, including framing and accessories, from single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. 1. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand movements of supporting structure, including, but not limited to, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 2. Failure also includes the following: a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. b. Glass breakage. c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. e. Failure of operating units. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS QPK NO. 220157.00 084113 - 4 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 0841113- 4 B. Structural Loads: 1. Lateral Loads: 10 psf. C. Deflection of Framing Members Supporting Glass: At design wind load, as follows: 1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span. 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to amount not exceeding that which reduces glazing bite to less than 75 percent of design dimension and that which reduces edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed components to less than 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). D. Structural: Test according to ASTM E330/E330M as follows: 1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, storefront assemblies, including entrance doors, do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. 2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, storefront assemblies, including entrance doors and anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span. 3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds. 2.3 STOREFRONT SYSTEMS A. Basis of Design: EFCO Corp., Series 401 framing. B. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Interior Framing Construction: Nonthermal. 2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 3. Glazing Plane: Center. 4. Finish: Clear anodic finish. 5. Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated stick system. 6. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 7. Steel Reinforcement: As required by manufacturer. C. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction. D. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. 2.4 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS A. Basis of Design: EFCO Corp., Series D500 medium stile doors ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS QPK NO. 220157.00 084113 - 5 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 0841113- 5 B. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for swing operation. 1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch (44.5-mm) overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch- (3.2-mm-) thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. 2. Door Design: Wide stile; 5-inch (127-mm) nominal width. 3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on secure side of door. 4. Finish: Match adjacent storefront framing finish. 2.5 SLIDING DOOR SYSTEMS A. Basis of Design: AD Systems, 2201 100th St. SW, Everett, WA 98204. Web: http://specADsystems.com. ExamSlide, high performance Barn (Sliding) door system. B. Extruded aluminum wrap around frame profile with minimum 0.125-inch- (3.2-mm-) thick, extruded-aluminum frame members and integral seals. C. Overhead Track Assembly: Surface mounted, extruded aluminum, square profile enclosure with single track and tandem nylon rollers sized to accommodate weight of specified wood door. Provide soft and self-closing damper mechanism at both sides of door leaf. D. Finish: Clear anodized aluminum or painted finish to match storefront system framing. 2.6 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE A. Entrance Door Hardware: Hardware not specified in this Section is specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware." B. General: Provide entrance door hardware and entrance door hardware sets indicated in "Entrance Door Hardware Sets" Article for each entrance door, to comply with requirements in this Section. 1. Entrance Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and products complying with BHMA standard referenced. 2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated. 3. Opening-Force Requirements: a. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N) to fully open door. C. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, quantity, size and other distinctive qualities of each type of entrance door hardware are indicated in "Entrance Door Hardware Sets" Article. Products are identified by using hardware designations as follows: 1. References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with these standards and requirements for description, quality and function. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS QPK NO. 220157.00 084113 - 6 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 0841113- 6 D. Butt Hinges: BHMA A156.1, Grade 1, radius corner. 1. Nonremovable Pins: Provide setscrew in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while entrance door is closed. 2. Electric Transfer Hinges: a. Hinge comparable to McKinney, Electro-Lynx hinge with QC option and Molex standardized plug in connectors. b. 24 Volt rating with sufficient concealed wires to accommodate specified functions. 3. Finish: Satin Chrome (26D) unless noted otherwise. E. Mortise Locksets: Provided under Section 087100 for Base Contract scope. F. Panic Exit Devices: Provided under Section 087100 for Base Contract scope. G. Cylinders: Provided under Section 087100 for Base Contract scope. H. Strikes: Provide strike with black-plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt; fabricated for aluminum framing. I. Operating Trim: Provided under Section 087100 for Base Contract scope. J. Closers: Provided under Section 087100 for Base Contract scope. K. Door Stops: Provided under Section 087100 for Base Contract scope. L. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components. 1. Compression Type: Made of ASTM D2000 molded neoprene or ASTM D2287 PVC. 2.7 GLAZING A. Glazing: Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing." B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black, resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers. 2.8 MATERIALS A. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M). B. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M). C. Structural Profiles: ASTM B308/B308M. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS QPK NO. 220157.00 084113 - 7 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 0841113- 7 D. Steel Reinforcement: 1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M. 2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A1008/A1008M. 3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A1011/A1011M. E. Steel Reinforcement Primer: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPCSP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. 2.9 ACCESSORIES A. Automatic Door Operators: Section 084229 "Swinging Automatic Entrances." B. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. C. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1 inch (25.4 mm) that accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer. 1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts complying with ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M requirements. D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint containing no asbestos, formulated for 30mil (0.762-mm) thickness per coat. 2.10 FABRICATION A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 5. Fasteners, anchors and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS QPK NO. 220157.00 084113 - 8 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 0841113- 8 E. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using shear-block system. F. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware. 1. At doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. G. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware. H. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes. I. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. 2.11 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Do not install damaged components. C. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. D. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. E. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. F. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. G. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose or by installing nonconductive spacers. 2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS QPK NO. 220157.00 084113 - 9 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 0841113- 9 H. Set continuous sill members in full sealant bed, as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants". I. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer. J. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF GLAZING A. Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing." 3.4 INSTALLATION OF ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCE DOORS A. Install entrance doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. 1. Doors: Install to produce a tight fit at weather stripping. 2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. 3.5 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Install aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to comply with the following maximum tolerances: 1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3.2 mm in 3 m); 1/4 inch in 40 feet (6.35 mm in 12.2 m). 2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet (3.2 mm in 6 m); 1/4 inch in 40 feet (6.35 mm in 12.2 m). 3. Alignment: a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1 inch (12.7 to 25.4 mm) wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch (25.4 mm) wide or more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch (6 mm). 4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m); 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) over total length. 3.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Entrance Door Hardware Maintenance: 1. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of entrance door hardware. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS QPK NO. 220157.00 084113 - 10 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 0841113- 10 3.7 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE – ALUMINUM STOREFRONT ENTRIES A. Hardware Set #1 (Door 105): 1. Butts: 2 required. 2. Electric Butt: 1 required. 3. Rim Electric Panic - (1 required): As specified in Section 087100. 4. Low Energy Door Operator: As specified in Section 084229. 5. Weatherstripping: Head and jambs. Theory of Operation: Door always open from the interior by use of panic hardware. Doors can be unlocked at any time via electronic control. Upon activation of the door operator by use of door controls, the panic device latch shall first be retracted prior to initiating door operation. Doors can be unlatched from secure side by key, access control device (ACD) as provided by Security Contractor or control switch mounted at 2nd Floor Admin Assistant Reception desk. Door status reported by use of door contacts to security system. Door is fail-secure in case of power outage. ACD has integrated camera, door buzzer and security electronics. Upon retraction of the latch, the door operator control device shall become active. The occupant then has the option to either manually open the door or use the door operator function. B. Hardware Set #2 (Door 106B): 1. Butts: 3 required. 2. Mortised Lockset: As specified in Section 087100. 3. Surface Closer: As specified in Section 087100. 4. Weatherstripping: Head and jambs. 5. Wall Stop: As specified in Section 087100. C. Hardware Set #3 (Doors 212B, 213B, 214B, 215B, 216B and 217B): 1. Sliding Door Frame Assembly. 2. Pulls (2 required): As specified in Section 087100. END OF SECTION 084113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS QPK NO. 220157.00 084113 - 11 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 0841113- 11 SWINGING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES QPK NO. 220157.00 084229 - 1 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 084229 - 1 SECTION 084229 - SWINGING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior, swinging, low-energy automatic entrances. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 081113 “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames” for frame information. 2. Section 081416 “Flush Wood Doors” for door information. 3. Section 084113 “Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts” for door and frame information. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. AAADM: American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers. B. Activation Device: A control that, when actuated, sends an electrical signal to the door operator to open the door. C. Double-Egress Doors: A pair of doors that simultaneously swing with the two doors moving in opposite directions, with no mullion between them. D. Double-Swing Doors: A pair of doors that swing with the two doors moving in opposite directions, with a mullion between them; each door functioning as a single-swing door. E. IBC: International Building Code. F. Safety Device: A control that, to avoid injury, prevents a door from opening or closing. G. For automatic door terminology, refer to BHMA A156.19 for definitions of terms. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of recesses in concrete floors for recessed control mats that control automatic entrances. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified elsewhere. SWINGING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES QPK NO. 220157.00 084229 - 2 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 084229 - 2 B. Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing automatic entrances. C. Coordinate hardware with doors, frames and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function and finish. Coordinate hardware for automatic entrances with hardware required for rest of Project. D. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of automatic entrances with connections to power supplies. 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Discuss exact activation hardware location and activation time settings of units. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for automatic entrances. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: For swinging automatic entrances. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware mounting heights, and attachment details. 2. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 4. Indicate locations of activation and safety devices. 5. Include hardware schedule and indicate hardware types, functions, quantities and locations. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color of finishes. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer. B. Product Test Reports: For each type of automatic entrance, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. C. Field quality-control reports. D. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties. SWINGING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES QPK NO. 220157.00 084229 - 3 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 084229 - 3 1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For automatic entrances, safety devices, and control systems to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer with Company Certificate issued by AAADM indicating that manufacturer has a Certified Inspector on staff. B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of automatic entrances that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Faulty operation of operators, controls, and hardware. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE ASSEMBLIES A. Source Limitations: Obtain swinging automatic entrances from single source from single manufacturer. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Low-Energy Door Standard: BHMA A156.19. SWINGING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES QPK NO. 220157.00 084229 - 4 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 084229 - 4 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Opening Force: 1. Accessible, Power-Assist Interior Doors: Not more than 5 lbf (22 N) to push or pull door to fully open position. 2.3 SWINGING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard automatic entrances, including doors, framing, headers, door operators, controls, and accessories required for a complete installation. B. Swinging, Low-Energy, Power-Open Automatic Entrance: 1. Basis of Design: Provide Besam, Model SW200i operators. No substitutions. 2. Configuration: Single-swinging door. a. Traffic Pattern: Two way. b. Mounting: Surface on push side of opening. 3. Operator Features: a. Power opening and spring closing. b. Adjustable opening and closing speeds. c. Adjustable hold-open time between zero and 30 seconds. d. Adjustable backcheck and latching. e. Obstruction recycle. f. Automatic door re-open if stopped while closing. g. On-off/hold-open switch to control electric power to operator, key operated. 4. Activation Device: Touchless switch on each side of door to activate door operator. 5. Finish: Finish framing, door(s), and header with Class I, clear anodic finish. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Extrusions: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M). 2. Sheet: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M). B. Steel Reinforcement: Reinforcement with corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00 applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Use surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. C. Sealants and Joint Fillers: As specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." D. Fasteners and Accessories: Corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. SWINGING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES QPK NO. 220157.00 084229 - 5 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 084229 - 5 2.5 DOOR OPERATORS AND CONTROLS A. General: Provide operators and controls, which include activation and safety devices, according to BHMA standards, for condition of exposure, and for long-term, maintenance-free operation under normal traffic load for type of occupancy indicated. B. Door Operators: Provide door operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size, weight, and movement. 1. Door Operator Performance: Door operators shall open and close doors and maintain them in fully closed position when subjected to Project's design wind loads. 2. Electromechanical Operators: Concealed, self-contained, overhead units powered by fractional-horsepower, permanent-magnet dc motor; with closing speed controlled mechanically by gear train and dynamically by braking action of electric motor; with solid-state microprocessor controller; complying with UL 325; and with manual operation with power off. C. Presence Sensors: Self-contained, active-infrared scanner units; adjustable to provide detectionfield sizes and functions required by BHMA A156.10. Sensors shall remain active at all times. 1. Provide one sensor mounted to pull side of door. D. Touchless Switch: Hands-free-activation door-control switch with flat motion sensor faceplate with adjustable operating range between 2 inches and 24 inches (50 mm and 600 mm). 1. Configuration: 4.56-by-4.56-inch (115.8-by-115.8-mm) (double gang) square faceplate. a. Mounting: Recess mounted in wall. 2. Faceplate Material: Plastic with contrasting color lettering. 3. Message: International symbol of accessibility, "Wave to Open," and wave symbol. E. Electrical Interlocks: Unless units are equipped with self-protecting devices or circuits, provide electrical interlocks to prevent activation of operator when door is locked, latched, or bolted. 2.6 HARDWARE A. General: Provide units in sizes and types recommended by automatic entrance and hardware manufacturers for entrances and uses indicated. Finish exposed parts to match door finish unless otherwise indicated. B. Manual Opening for Power-Assist and Low-Energy Doors: Provide hardware that, in a power failure, allows door to open with a manual force as stipulated in "Performance Requirements" Article. SWINGING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES QPK NO. 220157.00 084229 - 6 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 084229 - 6 2.7 ACCESSORIES 2.8 FABRICATION A. General: Factory fabricate automatic entrance components to designs, sizes, and thicknesses indicated and to comply with indicated standards. 1. Form aluminum shapes before finishing. 2. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. 3. Use concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use countersunk Phillips flat-head machine screws, finished to match framing. a. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking devices. b. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 4. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. B. Door Operators: Factory fabricated and installed in headers, including adjusting and testing. C. Controls: 1. General: Factory install safety devices in doors and headers as required by BHMA A156.10 for type of door and direction of travel. 2.9 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Apply anodic finishes to formed metal after fabrication unless otherwise indicated. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.10 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. SWINGING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES QPK NO. 220157.00 084229 - 7 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 084229 - 7 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, header support, and other conditions affecting performance of automatic entrances. B. Examine roughing-in for electrical systems to verify actual locations of power connections before automatic entrance installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install automatic entrances according to manufacturer's written instructions and cited BHMA A156.10 for direction of pedestrian travel, including signage, controls, wiring, and connection to the building's power supply. 1. Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Seal joints watertight. 2. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 3. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating. B. Entrances: Install automatic entrances plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades without warp or rack of framing members and doors. Anchor securely in place. 1. Install surface-mounted hardware using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. 2. Set headers, operating brackets, and guides level and true to location with anchorage for permanent support. 3. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within system to exterior. C. Door Operators: Connect door operators to electrical power distribution system. D. Access-Control Devices: Connect access-control devices to access-control system as specified in Section 281300 "Access Control Software and Database Management." 1. See Section 087100 “Door Hardware” Hardware Schedule for Theory of Operation of doors to receive low energy operators. 2. Provide all necessary accessories to integrate with security system controls as necessary to operate doors without damage to equipment. E. Controls: Install and adjust activation and safety devices according to manufacturer's written instructions and cited BHMA standard for direction of pedestrian travel. Connect control wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." SWINGING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES QPK NO. 220157.00 084229 - 8 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 084229 - 8 F. Wiring within Automatic Entrance Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's written limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust hardware, moving parts, door operators, and controls to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer; comply with requirements of applicable BHMA standards. 1. Adjust doors for tight closure. B. Readjust door operators and controls after repeated operation of completed installation equivalent to three days' use by normal traffic (100 to 300 cycles). C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean metal surfaces promptly after installation. Remove dirt and other substances. Repair damaged finish to match original finish. 3.5 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of automatic entrance Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper automatic entrance operation. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain automatic entrances. END OF SECTION 084229 DOOR HARDWARE QPK NO. 220157.00 087100 - 1 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 087100 - 1 SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Mechanical door hardware for the following: a. Swinging doors. b. Sliding doors. 2. Cylinders for door hardware specified in other Sections. 3. Electrified door hardware. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 081113 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for door silencers provided as part of hollow-metal frames. 2. Section 081416 "Flush Wood Doors" for doors to receive hardware. 3. Section 084113 "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts" for additional entrance door hardware supplied by door manufacturer. 4. Section 087113 "Automatic Door Operators" for low-energy power operators. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames and other work specified to be factory prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. B. Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with Owner's security consultant. C. Electrical System Roughing-In: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies and building safety and security systems. D. Existing Openings: Where hardware components are scheduled for application to existing construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify existing conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and to provide proper door operation. DOOR HARDWARE QPK NO. 220157.00 087100 - 2 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 087100 - 2 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at site local to the Project. 1. Preinstallation conference shall be attended by installers of hardware (including electrical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Conference will include a discussion on the expected use of installation manuals, hardware schedule, templates and physical product samples. 2. The manufacturer’s representative(s) for the life safety and security products shall inspect and approve the installation of the products they represent. Any identified installation or product issues shall be directed to the attention of the Architect for the purpose of generating the final punch list. 3. All doors and door hardware to be used shall be approved by the Ithaca College Lock Shop and Planning, Design and Construction Department prior to use on the project. B. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at site local to the Project. 1. Conference participants shall include the hardware Supplier and Installer. 2. Incorporate conference decisions into keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including, but not limited to, the following: a. Flow of traffic and degree of security required. b. Preliminary key system schematic diagram. c. Requirements for key control system. d. Requirements for access control. e. Address for delivery of keys. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profiles and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For electrified door hardware. 1. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 2. Include details of interface of electrified door hardware and building safety and security systems. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed product, in each finish specified. 1. Sample Size: Full-size units. a. Full-size Samples will be returned to Contractor. Units that are acceptable and remain undamaged through submittal, review, and field comparison process may, after final check of operation, be incorporated into the Work. 2. Tag Samples with full product description to coordinate Samples with door hardware schedule. DOOR HARDWARE QPK NO. 220157.00 087100 - 3 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 087100 - 3 D. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant. Coordinate door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule concurrent with submissions of Product Data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule. 2. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in door hardware schedule in the Contract Documents. 3. Content: Include the following information: a. Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size and material of each door and frame. b. Locations of each door hardware set cross-referenced to Drawings on floor plans and to door and frame schedule. c. Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style, function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product. d. Description of electrified door hardware sequences of operation and interfaces with other building control systems. e. Fastenings and other installation information. f. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and designations contained in door hardware schedule. g. Mounting locations for door hardware. h. List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and frame. E. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations that are coordinated with the Contract Documents. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Certificates: For each type of electrified door hardware. 1. Certify that door hardware for use on each type and size of labeled fire-rated doors complies with listed fire-rated door assemblies. C. Product Test Reports: For compliance with accessibility requirements, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for door hardware on doors located in accessible routes. D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals. B. Schedules: Final door hardware and keying schedule. DOOR HARDWARE QPK NO. 220157.00 087100 - 4 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 087100 - 4 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved by product manufacturers and of an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the course of the Work to consult Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. 1. Warehousing Facilities: In Project's vicinity. 2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedule. 3. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with the final door hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package. C. Deliver keys and permanent cores to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. b. Faulty operation of doors and door hardware. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use. 2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion unless otherwise indicated below: a. Exit Devices: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. c. Mortised Locksets: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door hardware from single manufacturer. DOOR HARDWARE QPK NO. 220157.00 087100 - 5 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 087100 - 5 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated doors are indicated, provide door hardware complying with NFPA 80 that is listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fireprotection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. B. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. D. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with the USDOJ's "2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design" and ICC A117.1. 1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N). 2. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements: a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied perpendicular to door. b. Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied parallel to door at latch. c. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) high. 4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 90 degrees, the door will take at least 5 seconds to move to a position of 12 degrees from the latch. 2.3 HINGES A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1. Provide template-produced hinges for hinges installed on hollow-metal doors and hollow-metal frames. 1. McKinney Hinges: Model and size as indicated in Schedule. No substitutions allowed. 2. Configuration: a. Heavy Weight Hinges: Full mortise, five-knuckle bearing hinges. b. Standard Weight Hinges: Full mortise, five-knuckle bearing hinges. c. Electric Transfer Hinges: McKinney, Electro-Lynx hinge with QC option and Molex standardized plug in connectors. Match weight rating of non-electric hinges. 1) 24 Volt with sufficient concealed wires to accommodate specified functions. 3. Finish: BHMA 652, satin chrome. 2.4 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Lock Functions: As indicated in door hardware schedule. DOOR HARDWARE QPK NO. 220157.00 087100 - 6 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 087100 - 6 B. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors, and as follows: 1. Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch (19-mm) latchbolt throw. C. Lock Backset: 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) unless otherwise indicated. D. Lock Trim: 1. Description: Lever design with end return and 2-1/8 inch diameter rose. 2. Levers: Cast - comparable to Sargent L design. 3. Escutcheons (Roses): Wrought - comparable to Sargent LN design. E. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch. 1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer. F. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13; Operational Grade 1; stamped steel case with steel or brass parts; Series 1000. 1. Sargent Manufacturing Co.: 8200 Series. No substitutions allowed. 2. Provide remote latch retraction function and request to exit function as indicated in hardware schedule. 3. Provide exterior side status indicator option as indicated in hardware schedule. Coordinate message content with Owner. 2.5 ELECTRIC STRIKES A. Electric Strikes: BHMA A156.31; Grade 1; with faceplate to suit lock and frame. 1. Basis of Design: Provide HES, 1500 Series or comparable product by Adams Rite. 2. Provide lock and strike monitor option. 3. Power: 24 volts. 2.6 SELF-CONTAINED ELECTRONIC LOCKS A. Self-Contained Electronic Locks: BHMA A156.25, mortise; with internal, battery-powered, self-contained electronic locks; consisting of complete lockset, motor-driven lock mechanism, and actuating device; enclosed in zinc-dichromate-plated, wrought-steel case, and strike that suits frame. Provide key override, low-battery detection and warning, LED status indicators, and ability to program at the lock. 1. Basis of Design: Sargent Manufacturing Co., IN120 Series. No substitutions allowed. 2. Credential Format: BIP 3. Operating hardware to match standard locksets. 4. Reader Color: Black reader and trim. DOOR HARDWARE QPK NO. 220157.00 087100 - 7 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 087100 - 7 2.7 MANUAL FLUSH BOLTS A. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16; minimum 3/4-inch (19-mm) throw; designed for mortising into door edge. 1. Basis of Design: McKinney, FB M Series flush bolts with DPS Series dust proof strike or one of the following: a. Rockwood Manufacturing: 555 Series flush bolts with 570 Series strike. b. Trimco: 3917 Series flush bolt with 3910 Series strike. 2.8 EXIT DEVICES AND AUXILIARY ITEMS A. Exit Devices and Auxiliary Items: BHMA A156.3. 1. Sargent Manufacturing Co.: 8600 Series. No substitutions allowed. 2. Configuration: a. Rim Panic: 1) Provide exterior operating trim as indicated in hardware schedule. 2) Provide request to exit signal switch as indicated in hardware schedule. 3) Provide remote latch retraction as indicated in hardware schedule. 4) Provide electronic locking functions as indicated in hardware schedule. 5) Provide cylinder dogging as indicated in hardware schedule. b. Concealed Vertical Rod Device: For information only (Landlord scope). 2.9 LOCK CYLINDERS A. Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver. 1. Provide Best cylinders for all locking devices. No substitutions allowed B. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.5; Grade 1 permanent cores; face finished to match lockset. 1. Core Type: Small format, interchangeable, 7 pin design. C. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores. Provide 10 construction master keys. 2.10 KEYING A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, appendix. Provide one extra key blank for each lock. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference. 1. Grand Master Key System: Provide as directed by Owner during keying conference to integrate with existing campus keying system. Change keys and master level keys operate cylinders. a. Provide three (3) cylinder change keys and five (5) keys for each level. DOOR HARDWARE QPK NO. 220157.00 087100 - 8 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 087100 - 8 B. Keys: Nickel silver. 1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the following notation: a. Notation: Information to be furnished by Owner. 2.11 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM A. Key Control Cabinet: BHMA A156.28; metal cabinet with baked-enamel finish; containing key-holding hooks, labels, two sets of key tags with self-locking key holders, key-gathering envelopes, and temporary and permanent markers; with key capacity of 150 percent of the number of locks. 1. Basis of Design: Provide key control cabinets from either Telkee or Lund Equipment Co. 2. Wall-Mounted Cabinet: Grade 1 cabinet with hinged-panel door equipped with keyholding panels and pin-tumbler cylinder door lock. 2.12 OPERATING TRIM A. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6; stainless steel unless otherwise indicated. 1. Basis of Design: Rockwood Manufacturing or comparable products by the following: a. McKinney. b. Trimco. 2. Profiles: As indicated in hardware schedule. 3. Provide silver ion based anti-microbial finish. 2.13 SURFACE CLOSERS A. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves and forged-steel main arm. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. 1. Basis of Design: Sargent, 351 Series. No substitutions allowed. 2. Provide forged heavy-duty parallel arms for push side closers. 2.14 MECHANICAL STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Wall-Mounted Stops: BHMA A156.16. 1. Basis of Design: McKinney, WS03 Series wall stop or one of the following: a. Rockwood Manufacturing: 400 Series wall stops. b. Trimco: 1270 Series wall stops. 2. Provide cast stops with resilient concave bumper and concealed mounting. DOOR HARDWARE QPK NO. 220157.00 087100 - 9 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 087100 - 9 2.15 SLIDING DOOR HARDWARE A. Sliding Door Hardware: BHMA A156.14; consisting of complete sets including rails, hangers, supports, ball bearing rollers, bumpers, floor guides and accessories indicated. 1. Basis of Design: Johnson Hardware, 1500SC Series soft-close pocket door frame kit. 2. Split Stud Wall Construction: 18 gauge cold rolled galvanized steel framing to match width of wall studs. 3. Rated Capacity: 200 lbs. (91kg). 2.16 METAL PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS A. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; fabricated from 0.050-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick stainless steel and beveled edges all sides; with manufacturer's standard machine or self-tapping screw fasteners. 1. Basis of Design: McKinney, KP50 Series protection plates or one of the following: a. Rockwood Manufacturing: K1050 Series protection plates. b. Trimco: K0050 Series protection plates. 2.17 FABRICATION A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire-rating labels and as otherwise approved by Architect. 1. Manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal indicated, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18. C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware unless otherwise indicated. 1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt. 2. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow-metal doors. 3. Gasketing Fasteners: Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. DOOR HARDWARE QPK NO. 220157.00 087100 - 10 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 087100 - 10 2.18 FINISHES A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Metal Doors and Frames: For surface-applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6. B. Wood Doors: Comply with door and hardware manufacturers' written instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Wood Doors: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. DOOR HARDWARE QPK NO. 220157.00 087100 - 11 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 087100 - 11 C. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule, but not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches (750 mm) of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided. D. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period. 1. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation. E. Key Control System: 1. Key Control Cabinet: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control system cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule. F. Boxed Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, in equipment rooms or IT Closets as directed by Owner in field. 1. Configuration: Provide least number of power supplies required to adequately serve doors with electrified door hardware. G. Stops: Provide wall stops for doors unless floor or other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately three months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and readjust each item of door hardware, including adjusting operating forces, as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. DOOR HARDWARE QPK NO. 220157.00 087100 - 12 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 087100 - 12 3.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. B. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper door and door hardware operation. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware. 3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE – ALUMINUM STOREFRONT ENTRIES A. Hardware Set #1 (Door 105): 1. Butts: Provided by door manufacturer. 2. Electric Butt: Provided by door manufacturer. 3. Rim Electric Panic - (1 required): Sargent 80 Series – 06 function with request to exit switch (55), electric latch retraction (56) and cylinder dogging (16). Provide exterior lever with cylinder (ETL trim). Fail secure design (24 volt). 4. Low Energy Door Operator: As specified in Section 084229. 5. Weatherstripping: Provided by door manufacturer. Theory of Operation: Door always open from the interior by use of panic hardware. Doors can be unlocked at any time via electronic control. Upon activation of the door operator by use of door controls, the panic device latch shall first be retracted prior to initiating door operation. Doors can be unlatched from secure side by key, access control device (ACD) as provided by Security Contractor or control switch mounted at 2nd Floor Admin Assistant Reception desk. Door status reported by use of door contacts to security system. Door is fail-secure in case of power outage. ACD has integrated camera, door buzzer and security electronics. Upon retraction of the latch, the door operator control device shall become active. The occupant then has the option to either manually open the door or use the door operator function. B. Hardware Set #2 (Door 106B): 1. Butts: Provided by door manufacturer. 2. Mortised Lockset: Sargent, 8200 Series (Classroom Intruder function). 3. Surface Closer: Sargent, 351 Series (pull side mounted). 4. Weatherstripping: Provided by door manufacturer. 5. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. C. Hardware Set #3 (Doors 212B, 213B, 214B, 215B, 216B and 217B): 1. Sliding Door Frame Assembly by door frame manufacturer. 2. Pulls (2 required): Rockwood, RM3421 NeoTek, 1-1/4-inch diameter by 12-inch long stainless-steel pull with round ends and peened gripping surface. Mount back to back. DOOR HARDWARE QPK NO. 220157.00 087100 - 13 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 087100 - 13 3.9 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE – INTERIOR DOORS A. Hardware Set #4 (Doors 101, 102, 103, 104, 117, 124, 125, 126, 128, 129, 130, 205, 206 and 207): 1. Butts: 1-1/2 pair, McKinney, TA2714, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Mortised Lockset: Sargent, 8200 Series (Office function). 3. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. B. Hardware Set #5 (Door 106A): 1. Butts: 1-1/2 pair, McKinney, TA2714, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Self-Contained Electronic Lockset: Sargent, IN120 Series. 3. Surface Closer: Sargent, 351 Series (push side mounted). 4. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. C. Hardware Set #6 (Doors 106C, 115B, 115C, 132, 133A, 202, 203A, 203B, 231A and 231B): 1. Butts: 1-1/2 pair, McKinney, T4A3786 heavy weight hinges, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Mortised Lockset: Sargent, 8200 Series (Classroom Intruder function). 3. Surface Closer: Sargent, 351 Series (push side mounted). 4. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. D. Hardware Set #7 (Door 107): 1. Butts: 1-1/2 pair, McKinney, TA2714, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Mortised Lockset: Sargent, 8200 Series (Classroom function). 3. Surface Closer: Sargent, 351 Series (pull side mounted). 4. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. E. Hardware Set #8 (Doors 108, 118 and 209): 1. Butts: 1-1/2 pair, McKinney, TA2714, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Mortised Lockset: Sargent, 8200 Series (Dormitory function). Provide status indicator with secure rose (50) and round thumb turn backplate (130KB). 3. Surface Closer: Sargent, 351 Series (pull side mounted). 4. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. F. Hardware Set #9 (Doors 109, 110, 111, 112, 212A, 213A, 214A, 215A, 216A, 217A and 224): 1. Butts: 1-1/2 pair, McKinney, TA2714, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Mortised Lockset: Sargent, 8200 Series (Classroom function) with ALP Push/Pull trim. 3. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. G. Hardware Set #10 (Doors 114, 220, 234 and 235): 1. Butts: 1-1/2 pair, McKinney, TA2714, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Mortised Lockset: Sargent, 8200 Series (Classroom function). 3. Surface Closer: Sargent, 351 Series (pull side mounted). 4. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. DOOR HARDWARE QPK NO. 220157.00 087100 - 14 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 087100 - 14 H. Hardware Set #11 (Door 115A): 1. Sliding (Pocket) Door Hardware Kit: Johnson Hardware, 1500SC Series. 2. Pulls (2 required): Rockwood, RM3421 NeoTek, 1-1/4-inch diameter by 12-inch long stainless-steel pull with round ends and peened gripping surface. Mount back to back. Note: Set location of pocket door stop so pulls do not impact door frame. I. Hardware Set #12 (Doors 119, 120 and 240): 1. Butts: 1-1/2 pair, McKinney, T4A3786 heavy weight hinges, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Operating Hardware: Rockwood, FP1230 foot pull, 1933 hand/arm pull and 70C series push plate (4” x 16”). 3. Surface Closer: Sargent, 351 Series (pull side mounted). 4. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. J. Hardware Set #13 (Doors 121 and 134): 1. Butts: 1-1/2 pair, McKinney, TA2714, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Mortised Lockset: Sargent, 8200 Series (Storeroom function). 3. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. K. Hardware Set #14 (Doors 127, 131, 202A, 202B, 208B and 239A): 1. Butts: 1-1/2 pair, McKinney, T4A3786 heavy weight hinges, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Mortised Lockset: Sargent, 8200 Series (Classroom Intruder function). 3. Surface Closer: Sargent, 351 Series (pull side mounted). 4. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. L. Hardware Set #15 (Door 201): 1. Cylinder: Best for existing locking hardware. 2. Provide door contact for monitoring opening status. M. Hardware Set #16 (Doors 204 and 208A): 1. Butts: 1-1/2 pair, McKinney, T4A3786 heavy weight hinges, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Mortised Lockset: Sargent, 8200 Series (Classroom Intruder function). 3. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. N. Hardware Set #17 (Door 210A): 1. Butts: 1-1/2 pair, McKinney, TA2714, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Self-Contained Electronic Lockset: Sargent, IN120 Series. 3. Surface Closer: Sargent, 351 Series (pull side mounted). 4. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. Theory of Operation: Doors always open from the interior. WiFi, battery operated. electronic lockset controls access to room. DOOR HARDWARE QPK NO. 220157.00 087100 - 15 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 087100 - 15 O. Hardware Set #18 (Doors 219B and 233): 1. Butts: 2 pair, McKinney, TA2714, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Self-Contained Electronic Lockset: Sargent, IN120 Series. 3. Surface Closer: Sargent, 351 Series (pull side mounted). 4. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. Theory of Operation: Doors always open from the interior. WiFi, battery operated. electronic lockset controls access to room. P. Hardware Set #19 (Doors 210B, 222 and 226): 1. Butts: 1-1/2 pair, McKinney, TA2714, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Mortised Lockset: Sargent, 8200 Series (Office function). 3. Surface Closer: Sargent, 351 Series (pull side mounted). 4. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. Q. Hardware Set #20 (Door 218): 1. Butts: 1-1/2 pair, McKinney, TA2714, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Mortised Lockset: Sargent, 8200 Series (Classroom function). 3. Electric Strike: HES, 1500 Series with monitoring. 4. Low Energy Door Operator: As specified in Section 084229. 5. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. Theory of Operation: Doors always open from the interior. Upon activation of door operator control switch, the electric strike shall first be retracted prior to initiating door operation. Doors can be unlocked from secure side by key. Door can be unlatched without unlocking by use of access control device (ACD) provided by Security Contractor. Door status reported by use of electric strike to security system. Door is fail-secure in case of power outage. After retraction of the latch, the (ACD) shall signal door operator control device to become active. The occupant then has the option to either manually open the door or use the door operator. When door is unlocked by use of cylinder, door operator remains inactive. R. Hardware Set #21 (Door 219A): 1. Butts: 1 pair, McKinney, T4A3786 heavy weight hinges, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Electric Transfer Hinge: 1/2 pair, McKinney, Electro-Lynx hinge matching butts. 3. Mortised Lockset: Sargent, 8200 Series, electromechanical fail secure operation (71). Coordinate with Axis A8004 VE Entry Control system. Power: 24 Volts. 4. Surface Closer: Sargent, 351 Series (pull side mounted). 5. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. Theory of Operation: Doors always open from the interior. Door can be unlocked remotely during operating hours via electronic control. When locked, door can be unlatched from exterior by use of key override, access control device (ACD) provided by Security Contractor or control switch mounted at Reception/Waiting desk. ACD has integrated camera, door buzzer and security electronics. DOOR HARDWARE QPK NO. 220157.00 087100 - 16 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 087100 - 16 S. Hardware #22 (Door 221): (Verify door size and operation – latching or push/pull.) 1. Butts: 1-1/2 pair, McKinney, TA2714, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Electric Butt: 1/2 pair, McKinney, Electro-Lynx hinge with QC option and Molex standardized plug in connectors 3. Rim Electric Panic: Sargent 80 Series - passage function (15) with remote latch retraction (56) and cylinder dogging (16). Provide exterior lever (L trim). Power: 24 volts. 4. Low Energy Door Operator: As specified in Section 084229. 5. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. Theory of Operation: Doors always open from both sides. Upon activation of door operator control switch, the panic device latch shall first be retracted prior to initiating door operation. Door operator can be activated from either side of door. T. Hardware Set #23 (Door 223): 1. Butts: 3 pair, McKinney, TA2714, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Mortised Lockset (1 required – active leaf): Sargent, 8200 Series (Classroom function) with ALP Push/Pull trim. 3. Manual Flush Bolts (1 top and bottom of inactive leaf): McKinney, FB M Series flush bolts with DPS Series dust proof strike 4. Wall Stop (1 required – active leaf): McKinney, WS03 Series. U. Hardware Set #24 (Doors 225 and 227): 1. Butts: 1-1/2 pair, McKinney, TA2714, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Mortised Lockset: Sargent, 8200 Series (Classroom function) with ALP Push/Pull trim. 3. Surface Closer: Sargent, 351 Series (pull side mounted). 4. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. V. Hardware Set #25 (Door 232): 1. Butts: 3 pair, McKinney, TA2714, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Mortised Lockset (1 required – LHR leaf): Sargent, 8200 Series (Classroom function). 3. Manual Flush Bolts (1 top and bottom of inactive leaf): McKinney, FB M Series flush bolts with DPS Series dust proof strike 4. Wall Stop (1 required – RHR leaf): McKinney, WS03 Series. W. Hardware Set #26 (TEMP-1, TEMP-3, TEMP-4 and TEMP-5) – Temporary hall door: 1. Butts: 1-1/2 pair, McKinney, T4A3786 heavy weight hinges, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Self-Contained Electronic Lockset: Sargent, IN120 Series. 3. Surface Closer: Sargent, 351 Series (pull side mounted). 4. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. Theory of Operation: Door always open from the interior. WiFi, battery operated. electronic lockset controls access to room. DOOR HARDWARE QPK NO. 220157.00 087100 - 17 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 087100 - 17 X. Hardware Set #27 (TEMP-2) – Temporary hall door: 1. Butts: 1-1/2 pair, McKinney, T4A3786 heavy weight hinges, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Mortised Lockset: Sargent, 8200 Series (Classroom function). 3. Electric Strike: HES, 1500 Series with monitoring. 4. Surface Closer: Sargent, 351 Series (push side mounted). 5. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. Theory of Operation: Door always open from Hall 201 side. Door can be locked from Hall 211 side of opening by use of keyed cylinder. Door unlatched without key by use of access control device provided by security contractor and building fire alarm system in case of emergency. Door is fail-secure in case of power outage. Power: 24 volts. Y. Hardware Set #28 (Door 122): (Door and frame by Landlord) 1. Butts: 1 pair, McKinney, T4A3786 heavy weight hinges, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Electric Transfer Hinge: 1/2 pair, McKinney, Electro-Lynx hinge matching butts. 3. Rim Electric Panic: Sargent 80 Series - 76 function with request to exit switch (55) and cylinder dogging (16). Provide exterior lever with cylinder (ETL trim). Power: 24 volt. 4. Surface Closer: Sargent, 351 Series (pull side mounted). 5. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. Theory of Operation: Door always open from the interior by use of panic hardware monitored by REX signal switch and associated access control device provided by Security Contractor. Door accessible from exterior by use of key. Z. Hardware Set #29 (Door 133B): (Door and frame by Landlord) 1. Butts: 1 pair, McKinney, T4A3786 heavy weight hinges, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Electric Transfer Hinge: 1/2 pair, McKinney, Electro-Lynx hinge matching butts. 3. Rim Electric Panic: Sargent 80 Series with request to exit switch (55). No exterior trim. 4. Surface Closer: Sargent, 351 Series (push side mounted). 5. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. Theory of Operation: Door always open from the interior by use of panic hardware monitored by REX signal switch and associated access control device provided by Security Contractor. Door not accessible from exterior. DOOR HARDWARE QPK NO. 220157.00 087100 - 18 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 087100 - 18 AA. Hardware Set #30 (Door 230): 1. Butts: 1 pair, McKinney, T4A3786 heavy weight hinges, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Electric Transfer Hinge: 1/2 pair, McKinney, Electro-Lynx hinge matching butts. 3. Rim Electric Panic - (1 required): Sargent 80 Series – 06 function with request to exit switch (55), electric latch retraction (56) and cylinder dogging (16). Provide exterior lever with cylinder (ETL trim). Fail secure design (24 volt). 4. Low Energy Door Operator: As specified in Section 084229. 5. Weatherstripping: Provided by door manufacturer. Theory of Operation: Door always open from the interior by use of panic hardware. Doors can be unlocked at any time via electronic control. Upon activation of the door operator by use of door controls, the panic device latch shall first be retracted prior to initiating door operation. Doors can be unlatched from secure side by key, access control device (ACD) as provided by Security Contractor or control switch mounted at 2nd Floor Admin Assistant Reception desk. Door status reported by use of door contacts to security system. Door is fail-secure in case of power outage. ACD has integrated camera, door buzzer and security electronics. Upon retraction of the latch, the door operator control device shall become active. The occupant then has the option to either manually open the door or use the door operator function. BB. Hardware Set #31 (Door 100): 1. Low Energy Door Operators (LHR leaf): As specified in Section 084229. 2. Remainder of hardware supplied as part of Landlord door package. See Set #L-1 below. DOOR HARDWARE QPK NO. 220157.00 087100 - 19 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 087100 - 19 3.10 LANDLORD DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Hardware Set #L-1 (Door 100): (For information only) 1. Continuous Hinges with Electric Transfer (2 required.): Securitron EL-DEPT 10. 2. Concealed Vertical Rod Electric Panic (LHR leaf): Sargent 80 Series - 06 function with request to exit switch (55), electric latch retraction (56) and cylinder dogging (16). Provide exterior lever with cylinder (ETL trim). Fail secure design (24 volt). 3. Concealed Vertical Rod Electric Panic (RHR leaf): Sargent 80 Series - 74 function with request to exit switch (55) and cylinder dogging (16). Provide exterior lever with cylinder (ETL trim). Fail secure design (24 volt). 4. Low Energy Door Operators (LHR leaf): 1 required. Supplied under Section 084229.. 5. Surface Closer (RHR leaf): Sargent, 351 Series with heavy duty parallel arm. 6. Weatherstripping: Head, jambs, meeting rail and sill. 7. Threshold: Full design – 5 inches (127 mm) wide. Theory of Operation: Doors always open from the interior by use of panic hardware monitored by REX signal switch. Doors to be unlocked during operating hours via electronic control. Activation of RHR door leaf operator from inside or out retracts latch prior to opening door leaf. Door operator is functional only when doors are unlocked. Operator shall automatically shut down when doors are locked When locked, LHR leaf can be unlatched from exterior by use of key override, access control device (ACD) provided by Security Contractor or control switch mounted at 2nd Floor Admin Assistant Reception desk. When door is unlocked, door operator becomes active and can be operated by use of touchless switch. RHR leaf can be unlocked via electronic control only (no key or ACD override). Door status reported by use of door contacts to security system. Door is fail-secure in case of power outage. ACD has integrated camera, door buzzer and security electronics. END OF SECTION 087100 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 088000 - 1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION GLAZING QPK NO. 220157.00 088000 - 1 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. SECTION 088000 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Glass products. 2. Glazing sealants. 3. Glazing tapes. 4. Miscellaneous glazing materials. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 102800 "Toilet, Bath and Laundry Accessories." 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters in accordance with ASTM C1036. C. IBC: International Building Code. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances to achieve proper safety margins for glazing retention under each design load case, load case combination, and service condition. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 088000 - 2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION GLAZING QPK NO. 220157.00 088000 - 2 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricated-Glass Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer of fabricated glass units who is approved by primary glass manufacturer. B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified glazing contractor for this Project who is certified under the North American Contractor Certification Program (NACC) for Architectural Glass & Metal (AG&M) contractors. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain glass from single source from single manufacturer. B. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: For each product and installation method, obtain from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category II. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 088000 - 3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION GLAZING QPK NO. 220157.00 088000 - 3 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. 2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. NGA Publications: "Glazing Manual." B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. C. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. 1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: 6 mm. 2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3. B. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3. 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: 1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: Clear. B. Acid-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealant, Class 25: Complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Use NT. 1. Applications: Cap bead to tape glazed openings. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 088000 - 4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION GLAZING QPK NO. 220157.00 088000 - 4 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. 2.6 GLAZING TAPES A. Use either of the following at Contractor option: 1. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: a. AAMA 806.3 tape, for applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. b. AAMA 807.3 tape, for applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure. 2. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: a. AAMA 810.1, Type 1. b. AAMA 810.1, Type 2. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, recommended in writing by manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: 1. EPDM or Silicone with Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. 2. Type recommended in writing by sealant or glass manufacturer. D. Spacers: 1. Neoprene blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. 2. Type recommended in writing by sealant or glass manufacturer. E. Edge Blocks: 1. EPDM or Silicone with Shore A durometer hardness per manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Type recommended in writing by sealant or glass manufacturer. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 088000 - 5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION GLAZING QPK NO. 220157.00 088000 - 5 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. 2.8 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. 1. Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components. a. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible marks in the completed Work. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or impair appearance. C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 088000 - 6 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION GLAZING QPK NO. 220157.00 088000 - 6 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm). 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and in accordance with requirements in referenced glazing publications. H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. I. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. J. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended in writing by gasket manufacturer. 3.4 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first, then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs, then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed. F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. G. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 088000 - 7 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION GLAZING QPK NO. 220157.00 088000 - 7 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. 3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended in writing by gasket manufacturer. D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressureglazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended in writing by gasket manufacturer. E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Immediately after installation, remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains. 1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings. C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period. D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. 3.7 MONOLITHIC GLASS SCHEDULE A. Clear Glass Type: Fully tempered float glass. 1. Minimum Thickness: 6 mm. 2. Provided safety glazing labeling. END OF SECTION 088000 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING QPK NO. 220157.00 092216 - 1 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 092216 - 1 SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior partitions. 2. Suspension systems for interior ceilings and soffits. 3. Grid suspension systems for gypsum board ceilings. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of code-compliance certification for studs and tracks. B. Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors and power-actuated fasteners, from ICC-ES or other qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated on Drawings, according to ASTM E90 and classified according to ASTM E413 by an independent testing agency. B. Horizontal Deflection: For composite wall assemblies, limited to 1/360 of the wall height based on horizontal loading of 5 lbf/sq. ft. (239 Pa). NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING QPK NO. 220157.00 092216 - 2 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 092216 - 2 2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C645 requirements for steel. 2. Protective Coating: Coating with equivalent corrosion resistance of ASTM A653/A653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated. B. Studs and Tracks: ASTM C645. Use only conventional steel studs and tracks. 1. Steel Studs and Tracks: a. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.836 mm). b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following: 1. Single Long-Leg Track System: ASTM C645 top track with 2-inch- (51-mm-) deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top track and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches (305 mm) of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing. 2. Double-Track System: ASTM C645 top outer tracks, inside track with 2-inch- (51-mm-) deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer track sized to friction-fit over inner track. 3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top track manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. D. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.0538-inch (1.367-mm) minimum base-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges. 1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38 by 38 mm), 0.068-inch- (1.72-mm-) thick, galvanized steel. E. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) deep, asymmetrical configuration, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: 1. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC01, AC193, AC58 or AC308 as appropriate for the substrate and fastener type. a. Uses: Securing hangers to structure. b. Type: Torque-controlled, expansion anchor, torque-controlled, adhesive anchor or adhesive anchor. c. Material: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941 (ASTM F1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING QPK NO. 220157.00 092216 - 3 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 092216 - 3 B. Wire Hangers: ASTM A641/A641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch (4.12 mm) in diameter. C. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 1. Steel Studs and Tracks: ASTM C645. a. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.836 mm). b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings or 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) minimum if not shown. D. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc; Drywall Grid Systems. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; 640/660 Drywall Ceiling Suspension. c. United States Gypsum Company; Drywall Suspension System or Wall-to-Wall Drywall Suspension System as applicable. 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Steel Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength. 1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING QPK NO. 220157.00 092216 - 4 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 092216 - 4 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C754. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C840 that apply to framing installation. B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections securely fastened. C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. 3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 2. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. C. Install tracks at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts that penetrate partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch (13-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 4. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. D. Direct Furring: 1. Screw to metal framing. E. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING QPK NO. 220157.00 092216 - 5 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 092216 - 5 3.5 INSTALLING CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Hangers: 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c. 2. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 5. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms. 6. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 7. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. D. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. E. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. END OF SECTION 092216 GYPSUM BOARD QPK NO. 220157.00 092900 - 1 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 092900 - 1 SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Miscellaneous aluminum specialty trim. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural steel framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board panels. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Gypsum board, Type X. 2. Gypsum ceiling board. 3. Interior trim. 4. Joint treatment materials. 5. Sound-attenuation blankets. 6. Acoustical sealant. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. GYPSUM BOARD QPK NO. 220157.00 092900 - 2 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 092900 - 2 C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E90 and classified according to ASTM E413 by an independent testing agency. 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. 2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C1396/C1396M. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered. B. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C1396/C1396M. 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc or paper-faced galvanized-steel sheet. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. Expansion (control) joint. 1) Joints at juncture of suspended bulkheads and full height walls are not to be manufactured control joint trim. They shall be open joints with sealant. GYPSUM BOARD QPK NO. 220157.00 092900 - 3 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 092900 - 3 B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated. 1. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Based on conformance with specified criteria provide prefinished aluminum trim by Gordon Interior Specialties or comparable products by one of the following: a. Fry Reglet Architectural Metals. b. Pittcon Industries 2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5. 3. Trim Profiles (Based upon Basis of Design Manufacturer Products): a. Drywall Corner (Edge) Trim: Final Forms II, TD-58. b. Wall Closure Trim: Mullion Mate, verify opening dimensions in field based upon existing window framing conditions. Provide gasket accessories either end to maintain an airtight closure between rooms. 4. Finish: Class I, clear anodized. 2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C475/C475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping [compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C1002 unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick. C. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. GYPSUM BOARD QPK NO. 220157.00 092900 - 4 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 092900 - 4 D. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and support framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION AND FINISHING OF PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C840. B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant. GYPSUM BOARD QPK NO. 220157.00 092900 - 5 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 092900 - 5 G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C919 and with manufacturer's written instructions for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Type X: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces. B. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated. 2. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: 1. Joints within wall plane: Install control joint trim at locations indicated on Drawings or if not shown according to ASTM C840 in locations approved by Architect for visual effect. 2. Joints at juncture of suspended bulkheads and full height walls: Terminate gypsum panels with edge trim as indicated below and seal joint per Section 079200. C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. Provide either of the following at exposed gypsum board edges: a. LC-Bead: Use. b. L-Bead: Use. D. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings per manufacturer direction: 1. At units without bedding flanges, butt trim tight to surrounding drywall. Cut drywall with neat, true edge as required to conceal cut edge behind aluminum trim flanges. GYPSUM BOARD QPK NO. 220157.00 092900 - 6 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 092900 - 6 3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 092900 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 095113 - 1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS QPK NO. 220157.00 095113 - 1 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for interior ceilings. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of sizes indicated below: 1. Acoustical Panels: Set of 6-inch- (150-mm-) square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 095113 - 2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS QPK NO. 220157.00 095113 - 2 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and its supporting suspension system from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Basis of Design: Provide materials as indicated in Finish Legend on Drawings. B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: Class A according to ASTM E1264. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS A. Basis of Design: Provide ceiling panels as indicated in Finish Legend on Drawings. B. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels according to ASTM E1264 and designated by type, form, pattern, acoustical rating, and light reflectance unless otherwise indicated. C. Classification: Provide panels as follows: 1. APC-601: a. Type/Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 4, cast or molded. b. Pattern: F (heavily textured). 2. APC-602: a. Type/Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, water felted. b. Pattern: E (lightly textured). D. Color: White. E. Light Reflectance (LR): 1. APC-601: Not less than 0.70. 2. APC-602: Not less than 0.85. F. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): 1. APC-601: Not less than 0.65. 2. APC-602: Not less than 0.70. G. Edge/Joint Detail: Reveal sized to fit flange of exposed suspension-system members. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 095113 - 3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS QPK NO. 220157.00 095113 - 3 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. H. Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm). I. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm). J. Antimicrobial Treatment: Manufacturer's standard broad spectrum, antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D3273, ASTM D3274, or ASTM G21 and evaluated according to ASTM D3274 or ASTM G21. 2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Basis of Design: Provide ceiling grid as indicated in Finish Legend on Drawings. B. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard, direct-hung, metal suspension system and accessories according to ASTM C635/C635M and designated by type, structural classification, and finish indicated. C. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized, G30 (Z90) coating designation; with prefinished 15/16-inch- (24-mm-) wide metal caps on flanges. 1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system. 2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type. 3. Face Design: Flat, flush. 4. Cap Material: Cold-rolled steel. 5. Cap Finish: Painted white. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C635/C635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. 1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E488/E488M or ASTM E1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. a. Type: Postinstalled expansion or postinstalled bonded anchors. b. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated according to ASTM B633, Class SC 1 (mild) service condition. 2. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 095113 - 4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS QPK NO. 220157.00 095113 - 4 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. B. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires as follows: 1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A641/A641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Size: Wire diameter sufficient for its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C635/C635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but not less than 0.106-inch- (2.69-mm-) diameter wire. 2.6 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM A. Provide material from same manufacturer as grid system. B. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners. 1. Edge moldings shall fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated and match width and configuration of exposed runners unless otherwise indicated. 2. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension member in lieu of cutting reveal in tile edge. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. B. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders unless otherwise indicated and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. B. Layout openings for penetrations centered on the penetrating items. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 095113 - 5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS QPK NO. 220157.00 095113 - 5 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install acoustical panel ceilings according to ASTM C636/C636M and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly to structure or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete. 6. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. 7. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 8. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 9. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends of each member. 10. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards. C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors. D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. or more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 2. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. E. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 095113 - 6 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS QPK NO. 220157.00 095113 - 6 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. F. Install panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide precise fit. 1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels in a basket-weave pattern. 2. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. 3. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer. 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Suspended Ceilings and Moldings: Install main and cross runners level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m), non-cumulative. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. B. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 095113 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 096513 - 1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES QPK NO. 220157.00 096513 - 1 SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Vinyl base. 2. Rubber stair accessories. 3. Vinyl molding accessories. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated and for each color, texture, and pattern required in manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet (3 linear m) for every 500 linear feet (150 linear m) or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C). ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 096513 - 2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES QPK NO. 220157.00 096513 - 2 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive resilient products during the following periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C). C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VINYL BASE (RB-401) A. Basis of Design: Provide material as indicated in Finish Legend on Drawings. B. Product Standard: ASTM F1861, Type TV (vinyl, thermoplastic). 1. Group: I (solid, homogeneous). 2. Style and Location: a. Style A, Straight: Provide in areas with carpet. b. Style B, Cove: Provide in areas with resilient floor coverings. C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm). D. Height: 4 inches (102 mm). E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. F. Outside Corners: Job formed or preformed. G. Inside Corners: Job formed. H. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. 2.2 RUBBER STAIR ACCESSORIES (RESIL-303) A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 096513 - 3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES QPK NO. 220157.00 096513 - 3 B. Basis of Design: Provide material as indicated in Finish Legend on Drawings. C. Stair Treads: ASTM F2169. 1. Type: TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset). 2. Class: 2 (pattern; embossed, grooved, or ribbed). 3. Group: 2 (with contrasting color for the visually impaired). 4. Nosing Style: Square, adjustable to cover angles between 60 and 90 degrees. 5. Nosing Height: 2 inches (51 mm). 6. Thickness: 1/4 inch (6 mm) and tapered to back edge. 7. Size: Lengths and depths to fit each stair tread in one piece. 8. Integral Risers: Smooth, flat; in height that fully covers substrate. D. Landing Tile: Matching treads; produced by same manufacturer as treads and recommended by manufacturer for installation with treads. E. Locations: Provide rubber stair accessories in areas indicated. F. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's sample. 2.3 VINYL MOLDING ACCESSORY A. Basis of Design: Provide accessories by resilient base manufacturer. B. Description: Vinyl carpet edge for glue-down applications, nosing for resilient floor covering and joiner for tile and carpet as indicated below. C. Locations: Provide vinyl molding accessories at carpet and resilient floor finish transitions as necessary to provide a complete finished project. D. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect. 2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. C. Stair-Tread Nose Filler: Two-part epoxy compound recommended by resilient stair-tread manufacturer to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 096513 - 4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES QPK NO. 220157.00 096513 - 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Accessories: Prepare horizontal surfaces according to ASTM F710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH. 4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq. ft. (18.6 sq. m) and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas. a. Relative Humidity Test: Using in-situ probes, ASTM F2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement. C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. D. Do not install resilient products until materials are the same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed. E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 096513 - 5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES QPK NO. 220157.00 096513 - 5 3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. F. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces. G. Job-Formed Corners: 1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 6 inches (152 mm) in length. a. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. 2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 6 inches (152 mm) in length. a. Miter or cope corners to minimize open joints. 3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories. B. Resilient Stair Accessories: 1. Use stair-tread-nose filler to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours. 2. Tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. C. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would otherwise be exposed. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop horizontal surfaces to remove marks and soil. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 096513 - 6 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES QPK NO. 220157.00 096513 - 6 C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 096513 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 099123 - 1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION INTERIOR PAINTING QPK NO. 220157.00 099123 - 1 SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Primers. 2. Water-based finish coatings. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 055113 "Metal Pan Stairs" for shop priming metal pan stairs and support steel. 2. Section 081113 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for shop priming doors and frames. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. 1. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. 2. Indicate VOC content. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square. 2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. C. Product Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in the Interior Painting Schedule to cross-reference paint systems specified in this Section. Include color designations. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint Products: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 099123 - 2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION INTERIOR PAINTING QPK NO. 220157.00 099123 - 2 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C). 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C). B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures of less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design: Provide paint as indicated in Finish Legend on Drawings. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each paint product from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 PAINT PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: 1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. B. Colors: As indicated on Drawings. 2.3 PRIMERS A. Interior, Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Primer Sealer: Water-based primer sealer with low-odor characteristics and a VOC of less than 10 grams per liter for use on new interior plaster, concrete, and gypsum wallboard surfaces that are subsequently to be painted with latex finish coats. B. Water-Based Bonding Primer: Water-based-emulsion primer formulated to promote adhesion of subsequent specified coatings. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 099123 - 3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION INTERIOR PAINTING QPK NO. 220157.00 099123 - 3 2.4 WATER-BASED FINISH COATS A. Interior, Latex, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, Flat: White or colored latex paint with low-odor characteristics and a VOC of less than 10 grams per liter, for use in areas, such as hospitals and other occupied buildings, where the odor and VOC levels of conventional latex products would preclude their use. 1. Gloss and Sheen Level: Manufacturer's standard flat finish. B. Interior, Latex, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, Eggshell: White or colored latex paint with lowodor characteristics and a VOC of less than 10 grams per liter, for use in areas, such as hospitals and other occupied buildings, where the odor and VOC levels of conventional latex products would preclude their use. 1. Gloss and Sheen Level: Gloss of 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and sheen of 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees when tested in accordance with ASTM D523. C. Interior, Latex, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, Semigloss: White or colored latex paint with lowodor characteristics and a VOC of less than 10 grams per liter, for use in areas, such as hospitals and other occupied buildings, where the odor and VOC levels of conventional latex products would preclude their use. 1. Gloss Level: Gloss of 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees when tested in accordance with ASTM D523. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Wood: 15 percent. 2. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth. D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers. E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 099123 - 4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION INTERIOR PAINTING QPK NO. 220157.00 099123 - 4 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces. E. Existing Wood Substrates (Clear finished flush wood doors): 1. Inspect door faces and edges for delamination of wood veneer flitches. Remove loose material and fill voids and depressions in door surface with putty or plastic wood filler before applying primer. 2. Sand all surfaces, including repairs, to remove existing sheen and create an even smooth surface ready for painting. Dust off to remove all loose particles. 3. Prime both faces, edges, top and bottom of wood door panels. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 099123 - 5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION INTERIOR PAINTING QPK NO. 220157.00 099123 - 5 B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Painting Fire-Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work: 1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms: a. Piping, hangers and supports. b. Conduit, hangers and supports. c. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. 2. No unfinished mechanical electrical materials are to be visible in occupied spaces. 3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. 1. Do not clean equipment with free-draining water and prevent solvents, thinners, cleaners, and other contaminants from entering into waterways, sanitary and storm drain systems, and ground. 2. Dispose of contaminants in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Allow empty paint cans to dry before disposal. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 099123 - 6 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION INTERIOR PAINTING QPK NO. 220157.00 099123 - 6 3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Steel Substrates: 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex applied over Shop-Applied Primer System: a. Prime Coat: Shop applied primer installed by fabricator of material. b. Intermediate Coat: Matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior, latex, institutional low odor/VOC, semigloss. B. Finish Carpentry: Existing Doors. 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Water based bonding primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior, latex, institutional low odor/VOC, semigloss. C. Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Interior, institutional low-odor/VOC primer sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior, latex, institutional low odor/VOC: 1) Ceilings: Flat. 2) Walls: Eggshell. D. Cotton or Canvas and ASJ Insulation-Covering Substrates: Including pipe and duct coverings. 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior, latex, institutional low odor/VOC, flat. END OF SECTION 099123 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS QPK NO. 220157.00 101100 - 1 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 101100 - 1 SECTION 101100 - VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Visual display board assemblies. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, finishes and accessories for visual display units. B. Shop Drawings: For visual display units. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachment to other work. 2. Include sections of typical trim members. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of visual display unit indicated. 1. Visual Display Panel: Not less than 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm), with facing, core, and backing indicated for final Work. 2. Trim: 6-inch- (150-mm-) long sections of each trim profile. D. Product Schedule: For visual display units. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS QPK NO. 220157.00 101100 - 2 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 101100 - 2 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver factory-fabricated visual display units completely assembled in one piece. If dimensions exceed maximum manufactured unit size, or if unit size is impracticable to ship in one piece, provide two or more pieces with joints in locations indicated on approved Shop Drawings. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install visual display units until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheets: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace porcelain-enamel face sheets that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Surfaces lose original writing and erasing qualities. b. Surfaces exhibit crazing, cracking, or flaking. 2. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARD ASSEMBLY A. Basis of Design: Steelcase Inc., 110 Series B. Visual Display Board Assembly: Factory fabricated. 1. Assembly: Markerboard. 2. Corners: Square. 3. Width: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Height: As indicated on Drawings. 5. Mounting Method: Direct to wall. Provide all necessary mounting accessories. C. Markerboard Panel: Porcelain-enamel-faced markerboard panel on core indicated. 1. Color: White. D. Aluminum Frames and Trim: Fabricated from not less than 0.062-inch- (1.57-mm-) thick, extruded aluminum; standard size and shape. 1. Aluminum Finish: Clear anodic finish. VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS QPK NO. 220157.00 101100 - 3 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 101100 - 3 E. Chalktray: Manufacturer's standard; continuous. 1. Box Type: Extruded aluminum with slanted front, grooved tray, and cast-aluminum end closures. 2.2 MARKERBOARD PANELS A. Porcelain-Enamel Markerboard Panels: Balanced, high-pressure, factory-laminated markerboard assembly of three-ply construction, consisting of moisture-barrier backing, core material, and porcelain-enamel face sheet with high-gloss finish. Laminate panels under heat and pressure with manufacturer's standard, flexible waterproof adhesive. 1. Face Sheet Thickness: 0.013 inch (0.33 mm) minimum uncoated base metal thickness. 2. Manufacturer's Standard Core: Minimum 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, with manufacturer's standard moisture-barrier backing. 3. Laminating Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard moisture-resistant thermoplastic type. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheet: PEI-1002, with face sheet manufacturer's standard two- or threecoat process. B. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4, tempered. C. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-1. D. MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130. E. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), Alloy 6063. 2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM/NOMMA 500 for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker. VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS QPK NO. 220157.00 101100 - 4 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 101100 - 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, surface conditions of wall and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine walls and partitions for proper preparation and backing for visual display units. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation. B. Clean substrates of substances, such as dirt, mold, and mildew, that could impair the performance of and affect the smooth, finished surfaces of visual display boards. C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, defects, projections, depressions and substances that will affect visual display units installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install visual display surfaces in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings, or if not indicated, at heights indicated below. Keep perimeter lines straight, level, and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, brackets, anchors, trim and accessories necessary for complete installation. B. Factory-Fabricated Visual Display Board Assemblies: Attach concealed clips, hangers, and grounds to wall surfaces and to visual display board assemblies with fasteners at not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. Secure tops and bottoms of boards to walls. C. Visual Display Board Assembly Mounting Heights: Install visual display units at mounting heights indicated on Drawings. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean visual display units in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Attach one removable cleaning instructions label to visual display unit in each room. B. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. C. Cover and protect visual display units after installation and cleaning. END OF SECTION 101100 PHENOLIC-CORE TOILET COMPARTMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 102113 - 1 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 102113 - 1 SECTION 102113 - PHENOLIC-CORE TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Phenolic-core toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for blocking. 2. Section 102800 "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories" for toilet tissue dispensers, grab bars and similar accessories mounted on toilet compartments. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for toilet compartments. B. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment details. 2. Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures. C. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes unless otherwise indicated: 1. Each type of material, color, and finish required for toilet compartments, prepared on 6inch- (152-mm-) square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work. 2. Each type of hardware and accessory. D. Product Schedule: For toilet compartments, prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing location and selected colors for toilet compartment material. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of toilet compartment. PHENOLIC-CORE TOILET COMPARTMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 102113 - 2 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 102113 - 2 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For toilet compartments to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: 75 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities and ICC A117.1 for toilet compartments designated as accessible. 2.2 PHENOLIC-CORE TOILET COMPARMENTS A. Basis of Design: Provide partitions as indicated in Finish Legend on Drawings. B. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Overhead braced. C. Door, Panel and Pilaster Construction: Solid phenolic-core panel material with melamine facing on both sides fused to substrate during panel manufacture (not separately laminated), and with eased and polished edges and no-sightline system. Provide minimum 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick doors and pilasters and minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick panels. D. Pilaster Shoes: Formed from stainless steel sheet, not less than 0.031-inch (0.79-mm) nominal thickness and 3 inches (76 mm) high, finished to match hardware. E. Brackets (Fittings): 1. Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; aluminum. F. Phenolic-Panel Finish: 1. Color and Pattern (PLAM-505): As indicated by manufacturer's designations. 2. Edge Color: Manufacturer's standard. PHENOLIC-CORE TOILET COMPARTMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 102113 - 3 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 102113 - 3 2.3 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard operating hardware and accessories. 1. Material: Cast stainless steel. 2. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard paired, self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees, allowing emergency access by lifting door. 3. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit designed for emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible. 4. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories. 5. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors. 6. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible. B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish. C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless steel, hot-dip galvanized-steel, or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel compatible with related materials. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B26/B26M. B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M). C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness. D. Stainless Steel Castings: ASTM A743/A743M. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabrication, General: Fabricate toilet compartment components to sizes indicated. Coordinate requirements and provide cutouts for through-partition toilet accessories where required for attachment of toilet accessories. B. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism. C. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- (610-mm-) wide inswinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch- (813-mm-) wide clear opening for compartments designated as accessible. PHENOLIC-CORE TOILET COMPARTMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 102113 - 4 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 102113 - 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for fastening, support, alignment, operating clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Confirm location and adequacy of blocking and supports required for installation. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. 1. Maximum Clearances: a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch (13 mm). b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Full-Height (Continuous) Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with fullheight brackets. a. Locate bracket fasteners so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls. B. Overhead-Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 1-3/4 inches (44 mm) into structural floor unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with no fewer than two fasteners. Hang doors to align tops of doors with tops of panels, and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position. END OF SECTION 102113 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 102239 - 1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS QPK NO. 220157.00 102239 - 1 SECTION 102239 - FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manually operated, acoustical panel partitions. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. NIC: Noise Isolation Class. B. STC: Sound Transmission Class. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Discuss coordination requirements for overhead structure installation and required anchorage spacing. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For operable panel partitions. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, pass door requirements and attachment details. 2. Indicate stacking and operating clearances. Indicate location and installation requirements for hardware and track, blocking and direction of travel. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed material, finish, covering, or facing, prepared on Samples of size indicated below: 1. Textile Facing Material: Full width by not less than 36-inch- (914-mm-) long section of fabric from dye lot to be used for the Work, with specified treatments applied. Show complete pattern repeat. 2. Panel Edge Material: Not less than 3 inches (75 mm) long. 3. Hardware: One of each exposed door-operating device. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 102239 - 2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS QPK NO. 220157.00 102239 - 2 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Setting Drawings: For embedded items and cutouts required in other work, including supportbeam, mounting-hole template. B. Qualification Data: For Installer. C. Product Certificates: For each type of operable panel partition. 1. Include approval letter signed by manufacturer acknowledging Owner-furnished panel facing material complies with requirements. D. Product Test Reports: For each operable panel partition, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. E. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For operable partitions to include in maintenance manuals. 1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: a. Panel finish facings and finishes for exposed trim and accessories. Include precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes and performance. b. Seals, hardware, track, track switches, carriers and other operating components. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protectively package and sequence panels in order for installation. Clearly mark with numbering system used on Shop Drawings. Do not use permanent markings on panels. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of operable panel partitions that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Faulty operation of operable panel partitions. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes and other materials beyond normal use. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 102239 - 3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS QPK NO. 220157.00 102239 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Acoustical Performance: Provide operable panel partitions tested by a qualified testing agency for the following acoustical properties according to test methods indicated: 1. Sound-Transmission Requirements: Operable panel partition assembly tested for laboratory sound-transmission loss performance according to ASTM E90, determined by ASTM E413, and rated for not less than the STC indicated. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide panels with finishes complying with one of the following as determined by testing identical products by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 2.2 OPERABLE ACOUSTICAL PANELS A. Operable Acoustical Panels: Partition system, including panels, seals, finish facing, suspension system, operators, and accessories. 1. Basis of Design: Panelfold, ModuFlex 420 operable wall panels. B. Panel Operation: Manually operated, paired panels. C. Panel Construction: As required to support panel from suspension components and with reinforcement for hardware attachment. Fabricate panels with tight hairline joints and concealed fasteners. Fabricate panels so finished in-place partition is rigid; level; plumb; aligned, with tight joints and uniform appearance; and free of bow, warp, twist, deformation, and surface and finish irregularities. D. Dimensions: Fabricate operable acoustical panel partitions to form an assembled system of dimensions indicated and verified by field measurements. 1. Panel Width: Standard width panel with adjustable hinged trailing panel pair as necessary to make full width closure and maintain specified acoustical performance. E. STC: Not less than 50. F. Panel Weight: 8 lb/sq. ft. (40 kg/sq. m) maximum. G. Panel Thickness: Nominal dimension of 3 inches (75 mm). ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 102239 - 4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS QPK NO. 220157.00 102239 - 4 H. Panel Materials: 1. Steel Frame: Steel sheet, manufacturer's standard nominal minimum thickness for uncoated steel. 2. Steel Face/Liner Sheets: Tension-leveled steel sheet, manufacturer's standard minimum nominal thickness for uncoated steel. I. Panel Closure: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated. 1. Initial Closure: Fixed jamb with resilient, bulb-shaped acoustical seal. 2. Final Closure: Constant-force, lever-operated mechanical closure expanding from panel edge to create a constant-pressure acoustical seal. J. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard as required to operate operable panel partition and accessories; with decorative, protective finish. 1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard concealed (invisible) hinges. K. Finish Facing: Fabric wall covering. 2.3 SEALS A. Description: Seals that produce operable panel partitions complying with performance requirements and the following: 1. Manufacturer's standard seals unless otherwise indicated. 2. Seals made from materials and in profiles that minimize sound leakage. 3. Seals fitting tight at contact surfaces and sealing continuously between adjacent panels and between operable panel partition perimeter and adjacent surfaces, when operable panel partition is extended and closed. B. Vertical Seals: Deep-nesting, interlocking steel astragals mounted on each edge of panel, with continuous, resilient acoustical seal. C. Horizontal Top Seals: Continuous-contact, resilient seal exerting uniform constant pressure on track. D. Horizontal Bottom Seals: Resilient, mechanical, retractable, constant-force-contact seal exerting uniform constant pressure on floor when extended, ensuring horizontal and vertical sealing and resisting panel movement. 1. Automatically Operated for Acoustical Panels: Extension and retraction of bottom seal automatically operated by movement of partition, with operating range not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) between retracted seal and floor finish. 2.4 PANEL FINISH FACINGS A. Description: Finish facings for panels that comply with indicated fire-test-response characteristics and that are factory applied to operable panel partitions with appropriate backing, ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 102239 - 5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS QPK NO. 220157.00 102239 - 5 using mildew-resistant nonstaining adhesive as recommended by facing manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Apply one-piece, seamless facings free of air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects, with edges concealed at panel returns with no gaps or overlaps. Horizontal seams are not permitted. Tightly secure and conceal raw and selvage edges of facing for finished appearance. 2. Where facings with directional or repeating patterns or directional weave are indicated, mark facing top and attach facing in same direction. 3. Match facing pattern 72 inches (1830 mm) above finished floor. B. Fabric Wall Covering: Manufacturer's standard woven fabric, from same dye lot, treated to resist stains. 1. Color/Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of Tek-Wall 1002 color and pattern options. C. Trimless Edges: Fabricate exposed panel edges so finish facing wraps uninterrupted around panel, covering edge and resulting in an installed partition with facing visible on vertical panel edges, without trim, for minimal sightlines at panel-to-panel joints. 2.5 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Tracks: Steel or aluminum with adjustable steel hanger rods for overhead support, designed for operation, size, and weight of operable panel partition indicated. Size track to support partition operation and storage without damage to suspension system, operable panel partitions, or adjacent construction. Limit track deflection to no more than 0.10 inch (2.54 mm) between bracket supports. Provide a continuous system of track sections and accessories to accommodate configuration and layout indicated for partition operation and storage. 1. Panel Guide: Aluminum guide on both sides of the track to facilitate straightening of the panels; finished with factory-applied, decorative, protective finish. 2. Head Closure Trim: As required for acoustical performance; with factory-applied, decorative, protective finish. B. Carriers: Trolley system as required for configuration type, size, and weight of partition and for easy operation; with ball-bearing wheels. C. Track Intersections, Switches, and Accessories: As required for operation, storage, track configuration, and layout indicated for operable panel partitions, and compatible with partition assembly specified. Fabricate track intersections and switches from steel or aluminum. D. Aluminum Finish: Mill finish or manufacturer's standard, factory-applied, decorative finish unless otherwise indicated. E. Steel Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied, corrosion-resistant, protective coating unless otherwise indicated. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 102239 - 6 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS QPK NO. 220157.00 102239 - 6 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Pass Doors: Swinging door built into and matching panel materials, construction, acoustical qualities, finish and thickness, complete with frames and operating hardware. Hinges finished to match other exposed hardware. 1. Accessibility Standard: Fabricate doors to comply with applicable provisions in the USDOJ's "2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design" and ICC A117.1. 2. Single Pass Door: 36 by 80 inches (914 by 2032 mm). Swing direction as indicated on Drawings. 3. Pass-Door Hardware: Equip pass door with operating hardware including the following: a. Door Seals: Mechanically operated floor seal on panels containing pass doors. b. Panic hardware. c. Concealed door closer. d. Door Viewer: Installed with view in direction of swing. e. Exit Sign: Recessed, self-illuminated on push side of door. B. Storage Pocket Door: Full height at end of partition runs to conceal stacked partition; of same materials, finish, construction, thickness, and acoustical qualities as panels; complete with operating hardware. Hinges in finish to match other exposed hardware. 1. Manufacturer's standard method to secure storage pocket door in closed position. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine flooring, floor levelness, structural support, and opening, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of operable panel partitions. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install operable panel partitions and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed in area of partition installation. B. Install panels in numbered sequence indicated on Shop Drawings. C. Broken, cracked, chipped, deformed, or unmatched panels are not acceptable. D. Broken, cracked, deformed, or unmatched gasketing or gasketing with gaps at butted ends is not acceptable. E. Light-Leakage Test: Illuminate one side of partition installation and observe vertical joints and top and bottom seals for voids. Adjust partitions for alignment and full closure of vertical joints and full closure along top and bottom seals. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 102239 - 7 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS QPK NO. 220157.00 102239 - 7 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operable panel partitions, hardware and other moving parts to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. B. Adjust pass doors and storage pocket doors to operate smoothly and easily, without binding or warping. C. Verify that safety devices are properly functioning. 3.4 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include 12 months' full maintenance by manufacturer's authorized service representative. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper operable-partition operation. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain operable panel partitions. END OF SECTION 102239 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES QPK NO. 220157.00 102800 - 1 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 102800 - 1 SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Public-use washroom accessories. 2. Childcare accessories. 3. Custodial accessories. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. 2. Include anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. 1. Identify locations using room designations indicated. 2. Identify accessories using designations indicated. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranties. TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES QPK NO. 220157.00 102800 - 2 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 102800 - 2 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For accessories to include in maintenance manuals. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Mirrors: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace mirrors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, visible silver spoilage defects. 2. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED MATERIALS A. Owner-Furnished Materials: The following materials as indicted in the Toilet Accessory Schedule on the Drawings will be supplied by the Owner and installed by the Contractor: 1. Toilet Paper Dispenser (1-1): Surface mounted to wall. 2. Soap Dispensers (1-9): Surface mounted to wall. 3. Paper Towel Dispenser (1-10): Surface mounted to wall. 2.2 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES A. Source Limitations: Obtain public-use washroom accessories from single source from single manufacturer. B. Grab Bar (1-3, 1-4, and 1-5): 1. Basis of Design: Provide items as indicated in Toilet Accessory Schedule on Drawings. 2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 3. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) thick. a. Finish: Smooth, ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin) on ends and slipresistant texture in grip area. 4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 5. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings. C. Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit (1-2): 1. Basis of Design: Provide items as indicated in Toilet Accessory Schedule on Drawings. 2. Mounting: Surface mounted. 3. Door or Cover: Self-closing, disposal-opening cover and hinged face panel with tumbler lockset. 4. Receptacle: Removable. 5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin). TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES QPK NO. 220157.00 102800 - 3 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 102800 - 3 D. Mirror Unit (1-7 and 1-8): 1. Basis of Design: Provide items as indicated in Toilet Accessory Schedule on Drawings. 2. Frame: Stainless steel angle, 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) thick. a. Corners: Welded and ground smooth. 3. Size: As indicated in Schedule. 4. Hangers: Manufacturer's standard rigid, tamper and theft resistant. 2.3 CHILDCARE ACCESSORIES A. Source Limitations: Obtain childcare accessories from single source from single manufacturer. B. Diaper-Changing Station (1-12): 1. Basis of Design: Provide items as indicated in Toilet Accessory Schedule on Drawings. 2. Description: Horizontal unit that opens by folding down from stored position and with child-protection strap. a. Engineered to support minimum of 250-lb (113-kg) static load when opened. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted, with unit projecting not more than 4 inches (102 mm) from wall when closed. 4. Operation: By pneumatic shock-absorbing mechanism. 5. Material and Finish: HDPE in manufacturer's standard color. 6. Liner Dispenser: Provide built-in dispenser for disposable sanitary liners. 2.4 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES A. Source Limitations: Obtain custodial and toilet accessories from single source from single manufacturer. B. Custodial Mop and Broom Holder (1-11): 1. Basis of Design: Provide items as indicated in Toilet Accessory Schedule on Drawings. 2. Description: Unit with shelf, hooks and holders. 3. Length: 44 inches (1118 mm). 4. Hooks: Five. 5. Mop/Broom Holders: Four, spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type. 6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin). a. Shelf: Not less than nominal 0.045-inch- (1.15-mm-) thick stainless steel. 2.5 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666, Type 304, 0.031-inch- (0.8-mm-) minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated. TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES QPK NO. 220157.00 102800 - 4 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 102800 - 4 B. Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A153/A153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. C. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer or specified in this Section, and tamper and theft resistant where exposed, and of stainless or galvanized steel where concealed. D. Mirrors: ASTM C1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick. 2.6 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates. B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. 1. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. B. Grab Bars: Install to comply with specified structural-performanc e requirements. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 102800 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 104413 - 1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS QPK NO. 220157.00 104413 - 1 SECTION 104413 - FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fire-protection cabinets for the following: a. Portable fire extinguishers. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Show door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. Include roughing-in dimensions and details showing semi-recessed method and relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction. B. Shop Drawings: For fire-protection cabinets. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on samples 6 by 6 inches (150 by 150 mm) square. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For fire-protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire-protection cabinets with wall depths. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 104413 - 2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS QPK NO. 220157.00 104413 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire-protection cabinets, accessories, and fire extinguishers from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher. 1. Basis of Design: JL Industries, Academy, Model 8126, aluminum fire extinguisher cabinet. B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated. C. Cabinet Material: Aluminum sheet. D. Semi-recessed Cabinet: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface, with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). 1. Square-Edge Trim: 1-1/4- to 1-1/2-inch (32- to 38-mm) backbend depth. E. Surface-Mounted Cabinet: Cabinet box fully exposed and mounted directly on wall with no trim. F. Cabinet Trim Material: Aluminum sheet. G. Door Material: Aluminum sheet. H. Door Style: Vertical duo panel with frame. I. Door Glazing: Clear acrylic sheet. J. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. 1. Provide recessed door pull and friction latch. 2. Provide manufacturer's standard hinge, permitting door to open 180 degrees. K. Accessories: 1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire-protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish. 2. Lettered Door Handle: One-piece, cast-iron door handle with the word "FIRE" embossed into face. 3. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling sharply on door handle. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 104413 - 3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS QPK NO. 220157.00 104413 - 3 4. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing and location. Lettering requirements to be finalized during submittal phase. a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire-protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER." 1) Location: Applied to cabinet glazing. 2) Application Process: Decals or pressure-sensitive vinyl letters. 3) Lettering Color: Black. 4) Orientation: Vertical. L. Materials: 1. Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M) for extruded shapes and aluminum sheet, with strength and durability characteristics of not less than Alloy 6063-T5 for aluminum sheet. a. Finish: Clear anodic. 2. Transparent Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), in manufacturer’s standard thickness, with Finish 1 (smooth or polished) 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. 1. Weld joints and grind smooth. 2. Miter corners and grind smooth. 3. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. 4. Prepare doors and frames to receive locks. 5. Install door locks at factory. B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles. 1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick. 2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames and grind smooth. C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. 2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's AMP 500, "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products," for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire-protection cabinets from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 104413 - 4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS QPK NO. 220157.00 104413 - 4 C. Finish fire-protection cabinets after assembly. D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in for hose [valves] [racks] and cabinets to verify actual locations of piping connections before cabinet installation. B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semi-recessed cabinets will be installed. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare recesses for semi-recessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire-protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at height indicated below: 1. Fire-Protection Cabinets: 42 inches (1067 mm) above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher. Coordinate final mounting height with Owner. B. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 1. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire-protection cabinets, square and plumb. C. Identification: 1. Apply decals or vinyl lettering at locations indicated. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire-protection cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 104413 - 5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS QPK NO. 220157.00 104413 - 5 C. On completion of fire-protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. D. Touch up marred finishes or replace fire-protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factoryfinished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fireprotection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers. E. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 104413 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 115213 - 1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION PROJECTION SCREENS QPK NO. 220157.00 115213 - 1 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. SECTION 115213 - PROJECTION SCREENS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. This Section includes the furnishing of all necessary labor, supervision, materials, equipment, accessories, and services to completely execute the provision of products as described in this specification, including but not limited to: a. Projection screens. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 26 “Electrical” 1.3 REFERENCES & DEFINITIONS A. References 1. The workmanship and products shall comply with the following safety, certification, and industry standards. The following documents, or the versions closest in time prior to the release of this specification, form a part of this specification to the extent specified herein. Where the requirements of these documents conflict with the instructions herein, the Contractor shall notify the Owner for written clarification. a. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA) 70, “National Electrical Code”. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General 1. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00 (Submittal Procedures) and as required by other sections of the Specifications. 2. Unless directed otherwise in writing by the Owner’s Representative, the Contractor is not authorized to proceed with the acquisition, fabrication, assembly, installation, or any work related to any systems or components until the submittals outlined in this section have been approved by the Owner’s Representative. Any acquisition, assembly or installation of any systems or components without the Owner Representative’s approval shall be subject to removal at the Contractor’s expense. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 115213 - 2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION PROJECTION SCREENS QPK NO. 220157.00 115213 - 2 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. B. Product Data 1. Product data sheets shall be submitted for products listed in Part 2 of this Section. C. Shop Drawings 1. Shop drawings shall be submitted for projection screens. 2. Shop drawings shall show projection screen size, screen case size & color, screen material, screen drop length, mounting points & dimensions, methods of attachment, electric wiring diagram, screen centerline relative to screen case. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories 1. Shall have the listing of the Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. and shall bear the labels attesting to UL listing, and types approved by the Municipal Departments having jurisdiction. 2. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Qualifications 1. Worker experienced in performing work of this Section who has specialized in work similar to that required of this project. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements 1. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. 2. The Contractor is responsible for assessing the conditions of the job site and facilities for delivery of materials and products. 3. Projection screens shall not be delivered until the building is enclosed, other construction within spaces where screens shall be installed is substantially complete, and installation of screens is ready to begin. 4. The Contractor shall confirm before delivery that hallways, stairways, passageways, doorways, rooms, entries, elevators and foyers are of sufficient size to accommodate the passage and installation of the products and systems. B. Storage and Handling Requirements 1. The Contractor is responsible for assessing the conditions of the job site, and facilities for storage and handling of materials and products. 2. Store projection screens in a dry, ventilated area, protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions, at temperature less than 80 degrees F. 3. Projection screens shall always be transported, handled, and stored in a horizontal position, never vertically. 4. Handle projection screen materials with care in order to prevent damage. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 115213 - 3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION PROJECTION SCREENS QPK NO. 220157.00 115213 - 3 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. 1.7 SITE CONDITIONS A. General 1. Refer to Division 1 of the construction documents for this project for coordination with other trades on this project. 2. The Contractor is responsible for assessing the conditions of the job site, and facilities for installing of materials and products. 3. Perform projection screen work when temperatures are greater than 40 degrees F. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Acceptable products are listed in this Section, and on the drawings. B. Each product to be supplied under this specification shall be new, under warranty, and the current model of a standard product of an original product manufacturer of record. B-stock, previously installed, refurbished or used products shall not be provided on this project. C. Product substitution is allowed only by written consent of the Owner’s Representative. D. The Contractor shall provide all options, accessories, and hardware necessary to meet the function of the design even if they are not specifically listed. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Projection Screen (Classrooms 132 & 133) 1. Ceiling mounted electric motorized projection screen. 2. Complete screen (case, surface, roller & motor). 3. Manufacturer & model: Da-Lite Advantage Electrol. 4. Quantity: 2. 5. Viewing area: 71” W x 126” H (145” diagonal). 6. Aspect ratio: 16:9. 7. Screen material: Matte white, non-tensioned, no seam, flame retardant, mildew resistant. 8. Screen (black) drop: 2” at top of screen material. 9. Screen edge: black masking borders. 10. Case color/finish: white. 11. Low voltage controller: Included on screen case. 12. Wall switch: Included, low voltage, three button switch. 13. Closure type: Slot. 14. Motor: Standard 120V (60Hz). ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 115213 - 4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION PROJECTION SCREENS QPK NO. 220157.00 115213 - 4 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. B. Projection Screen (Classroom 203) 1. Ceiling mounted electric motorized projection screen. 2. Complete screen (case, surface, roller & motor). 3. Manufacturer & model: Da-Lite Advantage Electrol. 4. Quantity: 2. 5. Viewing area: 58” W x 104” H (119” diagonal). 6. Aspect ratio: 16:9. 7. Screen material: Matte white, non-tensioned, no seam, flame retardant, mildew resistant. 8. Screen (black) drop: 14” at [top] of screen material. 9. Screen edge: black masking borders. 10. Case color/finish: white. 11. Low voltage controller: Included on screen case. 12. Wall switch: Included, low voltage, three button switch. 13. Closure type: Slot. 14. Motor: Standard 120V (60Hz). C. Projection Screen (Classroom 231) 1. Ceiling mounted electric motorized projection screen. 2. Complete screen (case, surface, roller & motor). 3. Manufacturer & model: Da-Lite Advantage Electrol. 4. Quantity: 2. 5. Viewing area: 65” W x 116” H (133” diagonal). 6. Aspect ratio: 16:9. 7. Screen material: Matte white, non-tensioned, no seam, flame retardant, mildew resistant. 8. Screen (black) drop: 7” at top of screen material. 9. Screen edge: black masking borders. 10. Case color/finish: white. 11. Low voltage controller: Included on screen case. 12. Wall switch: Included, low voltage, three button switch. 13. Closure type: Slot. 14. Motor: Standard 120V (60Hz). 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all fasteners, hardware, anchors, brackets and other components to assure complete, functional and secure installation of all products. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions 1. The Contractor shall assess the readiness and cleanliness of the site prior to product installation. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 115213 - 5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION PROJECTION SCREENS QPK NO. 220157.00 115213 - 5 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Projection Screen and Mounting Brackets 1. Comply with manufacturer’s written data and specifications, including product technical bulletins, installation instructions, and technical data sheets. 2. Install all products at locations and heights indicated on Drawings. 3. Coordinate projection screen placement with placement of other ceiling and wall mounted components, including but not limited to lighting fixtures, HVAC duct & equipment, fire alarm/suppression systems, conduit, pipes, and chalk/white boards. Notify the Owner’s Representative of conflicts prior to product installation. 4. All supports shall meet or exceed the load requirements of the intended application with a minimum safety factor of five. 5. Coordinate requirements for blocking, structural supports, bracing, and ceiling openings to ensure adequate means for installation of screen. 6. Coordinate requirements for conduit and wiring for projection screen and controls. 7. Coordinate installation of finish ceiling materials surrounding the projection screen case. 8. Install projection screens, mounting brackets/hardware, and accessories in accordance with reviewed shop drawings at locations and heights indicated. 9. Install screen housing and make electrical connections prior to installation of ceiling system. Where screen electrical connections will be inaccessible after installation, coordinate with Owner’s Representative for location and installation of hinged access door. 10. Securely install screen components plumb and level to supporting substrate. 11. Remove all adhesives, strings, plastic wrap, and similar items that would prevent the unobstructed movement of the projection screen and screen material. 12. Install three button wall switch in location indicated on the audio visual design drawings and wire switch to screen low voltage controller. B. Interface with Other Work 1. Coordinate with AV Contractor for connection and testing of audio visual system low voltage control wiring to projection screen. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Site Tests and Inspections 1. Verify controls, limit switches, automatic doors, and other components function as designed and meet project requirements. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust motors, controls and components to allow for smooth, unobstructed screen operation. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect projection screens from damage during construction until Owner occupancy. END OF SECTION 115213 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS QPK NO. 220157.00 123623 - 1 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 123663 - 1 SECTION 123623 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plastic-laminate-clad countertops. 2. Concealed counter support brackets. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 064116 “Plastic-Laminate-Clad Architectural Cabinets” for fabricated casework. 2. Section 123661 "Solid Surfacing Countertops" for additional counter scope. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For plastic-laminate-clad countertops. 1. Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Detail fabrication and installation, including field joints. 2. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed in plastic-laminate-clad countertops. C. Samples for Verification: As follows: 1. Plastic Laminates: For each type, color, pattern, and surface finish required, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm) in size. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For fabricator. B. Product Certificates: For the following: 1. Composite wood products. 2. High-pressure decorative laminate. 3. Adhesives. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful inservice performance. B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS QPK NO. 220157.00 123623 - 2 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 123663 - 2 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver countertops only after casework and supports on which they will be installed have been completed in installation areas. B. Store countertops in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. C. Keep surfaces of countertops covered with protective covering during handling and installation. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations with Humidity Control: Do not deliver or install countertops until building is enclosed, wet-work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where countertops are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Established Dimensions: Where countertops are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where countertops are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of plastic-laminate-clad countertops indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. The Contract Documents contain requirements that are more stringent than the referenced quality standard. Comply with requirements of Contract Documents in addition to those of the referenced quality standard. B. Grade: Premium. C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS. 1. Basis of Design: Provide laminate as indicated in Finish Legend on Drawings D. Colors, Patterns and Finishes (PLAM-504): Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. As indicated by manufacturer's designations. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS QPK NO. 220157.00 123623 - 3 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 123663 - 3 E. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. F. Core Material: Particleboard or MDF. G. Core Material at Sinks: Particleboard or MDF made with exterior glue. H. Core Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm). 1. Build up countertop thickness to 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) at front, back, and ends with additional layers of core material laminated to top. I. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL, on underside of countertop substrate. 2.2 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent. B. Composite Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of countertop and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. MDF: Medium-density fiberboard, ANSI A208.2, Grade 130. 2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Wire-Management Grommets: Circular, molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage. 1. Basis of Design: Doug Mockett and Co., Inc. 2. Outside Diameter: 2 inches (51 mm). 3. Color: Color as selected. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: PVA. 1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive. 2. Panel assemblies fabricated with PVA adhesive to be laminated with minimum 5 psi continuous pressure evenly applied to entire panel surface. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS QPK NO. 220157.00 123623 - 4 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 123663 - 4 B. Flush Mount, Concealed Counter Mounting Brackets: 1. Manufacturer: Provide indicated product or comparable substitution as approved. a. Rakks, EH Series sized for counter depth as shown. 2. Material: Extruded aluminum – 6063-T6. 3. Finish: Clear anodized. 4. Design: 2 inches by 2 inches by 1/4-inch (50 m by 50 mm by 6 mm) angle designed to be mounted to side face of stud concealed within wall cavity. Horizontal leg exposed along under side of counter surface. 5. Capacity: 300 lbs (204 kg). 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate countertops to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Provide front and end overhang of 1 inch (25 mm) over base cabinets. B. Complete fabrication, including assembly, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. C. Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately, and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 1. Seal edges of cutouts by saturating with varnish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition countertops to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing countertops, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install countertops to comply with same grade as item to be installed. B. Install concealed wall brackets lag bolted to side of wood blocking nested within stud cavity as directed by manufacturer to maintain indicated tolerances. Space at 32 inches (810 mm) on center or as indicated on drawings. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS QPK NO. 220157.00 123623 - 5 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 123663 - 5 C. Assemble countertops and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop. 1. Provide cutouts for appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 2. Seal edges of cutouts by saturating with varnish. D. Field Jointing: Where possible, make in the same manner as shop jointing, using dowels, splines, adhesives, and fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Prepare edges to be joined in shop so Project-site processing of top and edge surfaces is not required. Locate field joints where shown on Shop Drawings. 1. Secure field joints in countertops with concealed clamping devices located within 6 inches (150 mm) of front and back edges and at intervals not exceeding 24 inches (600 mm). Tighten in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to exert a constant, heavy-clamping pressure at joints. E. Scribe and cut countertops to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged finish. F. Countertop Installation: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets, counter brackets or other supports into underside of countertop. 1. Install countertops level and true in line. Use concealed shims as required to maintain not more than a 1/8-inch-in-96-inches (3-mm-in-2400-mm) variation from a straight, level plane. 2. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and to walls with adhesive. 3. Seal joints between countertop and backsplash, if any, and joints where countertop and backsplash abut walls with mildew-resistant silicone sealant or another permanently elastic sealing compound recommended by countertop material manufacturer. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective countertops, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects. Where not possible to repair, replace countertops. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean countertops on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. C. Protection: Provide Kraft paper or other suitable covering over countertop surfaces, taped to underside of countertop at a minimum of 48 inches (1220 mm) o.c. Remove protection at Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 123623 SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS QPK NO. 220157.00 123661 - 1 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 123661 - 1 SECTION 123661 - SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid surface material countertops and splashes. 2. Solid surface material sinks. 3. Concealed counter support brackets. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 123623 "Plastic Laminate-Clad Counters" for additional counter scope. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For countertop materials and sinks. B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures. 1. Show locations and details of joints. 2. Show direction of directional pattern, if any. C. Samples for Verification: For the following products: 1. Countertop material, 6 inches (150 mm) square. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For fabricator. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For solid surface material countertops to include in maintenance manuals. Include Product Data for care products used or recommended by Installer and names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local sources for products. SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS QPK NO. 220157.00 123661 - 2 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 123661 - 2 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate countertops similar to that required for this Project, and whose products have a record of successful inservice performance. B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of countertops. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements before countertop fabrication is complete. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOP MATERIALS A. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous-filled plastic resin complying with ICPA SS-1. 1. Basis of Design: Provide material as indicated in Finish Legend on Drawings. 2. Type: Provide Standard type. 3. Integral Sink Bowls: Comply with CSA B45.5/IAPMO Z124. 4. Colors and Patterns (SSM-501 and SSM-503): As indicated by manufacturer's designations listed in Finish Legend on Drawings. B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue. 2.2 COUNTER ACCESSORIES A. Integral Sink Bowls: Comply with ISSFA-2 and ANSI Z124.3, Type 5 or Type 6, without a pre-coated finish. 1. Basis of Design Products: a. Corian, Model 810 where indicated on drawings. 2. Shape and Size (Over All Nominal Dimensions): a. Model 810: Oval shaped bowl; 18-1/2 inches (470 mm) long by 15-1/8 inches (384 mm) wide by 6-1/4 inches (158 mm) deep. 3. Colors and Patterns (SSM-502): As indicated in Finish Legend on Drawings. B. Sink Mounting Accessories: Manufacturer's approved adhesive, bowl clips, brass inserts and fasteners for attachment of undermount sinks. SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS QPK NO. 220157.00 123661 - 3 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 123661 - 3 2.3 COUNTERTOP FABRICATION A. Fabricate countertops according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions and to the AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards." 1. Grade: Premium. B. Configuration: 1. Front: Straight, slightly eased at top. 2. Splashes: Straight, slightly eased at corner. C. Countertops: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick, solid surface material with front edge built up with same material. D. Splashes: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick, solid surface material. E. Fabricate tops with shop-applied edges unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 1. Fabricate with loose splashes for field assembly. 2. Install integral sink bowls in countertops in the shop. F. Joints: Fabricate countertops without joints for full length installation. G. Cutouts and Holes: 1. Undercounter Plumbing Fixtures: Make cutouts for fixtures in shop using template or pattern furnished by fixture manufacturer. Form cutouts to smooth, even curves. a. Provide vertical edges, slightly eased at juncture of cutout edges with top and bottom surfaces of countertop and projecting 3/16 inch (5 mm) into fixture opening. 2. Fittings: Drill countertops in shop for plumbing fittings, undercounter soap dispensers and similar items. 2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Adhesive: Product recommended by solid surface material manufacturer. B. Sealant for Countertops: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 079200. C. ADA Compliant Vanity Support Brackets: 1. Manufacturer: Provide indicated product or comparable substitution as approved. a. Rakks, Vanity bracket sized for counter depth and apron as shown. 2. Material: Extruded aluminum – 6063-T6. 3. Finish: Mill aluminum. 4. Design: 2 inches by 2 inches by 1/4-inch (50 m by 50 mm by 6 mm) angle frame designed for surface mounting through wall finish to stud framing backup. Frame concealed by field installed apron as supplied by counter fabricator. 5. Capacity: 450 lbs (306 kg). SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS QPK NO. 220157.00 123661 - 4 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 123661 - 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to receive solid surface material countertops and conditions under which countertops will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of countertops. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet (3 mm in 2.4 m), 1/4 inch (6 mm) maximum. Do not exceed 1/64-inch (0.4-mm) difference between planes of adjacent units. B. Install wall brackets lag bolted to wood blocking within stud cavity as directed by manufacturer to maintain indicated tolerances. Space at 32 inches (810 mm) on center or as indicated on drawings. C. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units or counter brackets into underside of countertop. Predrill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. D. Fasten subtops to cabinets by screwing through subtops into cornerblocks of base cabinets or counter brackets. Shim as needed to align subtops in a level plane. E. Secure countertops to subtops with adhesive according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. F. Install backsplashes and end splashes by adhering to wall and countertops with adhesive. Mask areas of countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. G. Install aprons to backing and countertops with adhesive. Mask areas of countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. Fasten by screwing through backing. Predrill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. H. Complete cutouts not finished in shop. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to cutouts to prevent damage while cutting. Make cutouts to accurately fit items to be installed, and at right angles to finished surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges slightly. 1. Seal edges of cutouts in particleboard subtops by saturating with varnish. I. Apply sealant to gaps at walls; comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." END OF SECTION 123661 TABLE OF CONTENTS Table of Contents SPECIFICATIONS GROUP 12/18/2020 VOLUME 1 DIVISION 0 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING DOCUMENTS GROUP 000100 Advertisement for Bids 000410 Bid Form 000431 Contractor’s Team, Subcontractors/Manufacturers and Documentation List 000852 Project Forms and Documents 000900 Contractor's Form of Guarantee 000901 Contract for Construction Services SPECIFICATIONS GROUP DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011000 Summary 012300 Alternates 012600 Contract Modification Procedures 012900 Payment Procedures 013000 Administrative Requirements 013100 Project Management and Coordination 013300 Submittal Procedures 014110 Special Inspections and Structural Testing 015000 Temporary Facilities and Controls 016000 Product Requirements 017300 Execution 017329 Cutting and Patching 017419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal 017700 Closeout Procedures 017823 Operation and Maintenance Data 017839 Project Record Documents DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS 024119 Selective Demolition DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 032000 Concrete Reinforcing 033000 Cast-in-Place Concrete DIVISION 05 - METALS 051200 Structural Steel Framing 055113 Metal Pan Stairs DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 061053 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 064116 Plastic-Laminate-Clad Architectural Cabinets TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 078413 Penetration Firestopping 079200 Joint Sealants DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 081113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 081416 Flush Wood Doors 083113 Access Doors and Frames 084113 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 084229 Swinging Automatic Entrances 087100 Door Hardware 088000 Glazing DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 092216 Non-structural Metal Framing 092900 Gypsum Board 095113 Acoustic Panel Ceilings 096513 Resilient Base and Accessories 099123 Interior Painting DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 101100 Visual Display Units 102113 Phenolic-Core Toilet Compartments 102239 Folding Panel Partitions 102800 Toilet, Bath and Laundry Accessories 104413 Fire Protection Cabinets DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 115213 Projection Screens DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 123623 Plastic-Laminate-Clad Countertops 123661 Solid Surfacing Countertops VOLUME 2 DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING 220501 Plumbing Basic Requirements 220503 Pipe and Tubes for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 220523 General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping 220528 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping 220553 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 220700 Plumbing Insulation 221119 Plumbing Specialties and Accessories 221305 Facility Sanitary Sewerage 224200 Plumbing Fixtures and Trim 227005 Cleaning, Testing and Adjusting TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 230101 HVAC Basic Requirements 230103 Operating and Maintenance Manuals 230513 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 230529 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 230553 Identification for HVAC Piping, Ductwork and Equipment 230593 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC 230700 HVAC Insulation 232300 Refrigerant Piping 233113 HVAC Ducts 233313 HVAC Dampers and Accessories 233713 Diffusers, Registers and Grilles 237000 VRF System with Heat Recovery DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 260100 Electrical Basic Requirements 260519 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 260523 Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables 260526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 260533 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 260936 Lighting Control 262213 Low-Voltage Distribution Transformers 262416 Panelboards 262726 Wiring Devices 262813 Fuses 262819 Enclosed Switches 262913 Enclosed Controllers 265119 LED Interior Lighting 265200 Emergency Lighting DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS 270526 Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems 270536 Cable Trays for Communications Systems 272100 Local Area Network System DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 283100 Fire Detection and Alarm END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 000100 - 1 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS QPK NO. 220157.00 000100 - 1 SECTION 000100 - ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS Ithaca College, 201 Physical Plant, Ithaca, New York 14850, herein called the Owner, invites: SEALED BIDS FOR: Single Prime Construction Contract FOR: Ithaca College – IC Physician Assistant Program Rothschild Renovation Ithaca Commons 215 East State Street Ithaca College, Ithaca, NY 14850 QPK Project No. 220157.00 TO: General Contractors Bids will be received by the Owner at 201 Physical Plant, Ithaca College, Ithaca, NY 14850 until 2:00 p.m. EST on Monday, January 11, 2021. Bids will be opened in private. Bid submissions shall be emailed to the attention of Mr. Steve Dayton, sdayton@ithaca.edu,with paper copy to follow within 2 business days. A pre-bid walkthrough may be scheduled by the Owner’s representative. Information will be provided during the bid period for date and time. Requests for review of the project site and conditions other than at an official pre-bid walkthrough shall be made through Mike Sherwood at Ithaca College by phone: 607-274-3225 or by email: msherwood@ithaca.edu. Requests will be granted at the discretion of Ithaca College. Questions shall be submitted in writing to the Architect via email to the attention of Vincent Nicotra, with project name and “RFI” in subject line, to: vnicotra@qpkdesign.com and with copy to: Mike Sherwood: msherwood@ithaca.edu Steve Dayton: sdayton@ithaca.edu. No bidder may withdraw his bid within forty-five (45) days after actual opening thereof. END OF ADVERTISEMENT ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 000410 - 1 BID FORM QPK NO. 220157.00 000410 - 1 SECTION 000410 - BID FORM THE PROJECT AND THE PARTIES 1.1 OWNER: ITHACA COLLEGE Office of Construction, Planning and Design 201 Physical Plant Ithaca, New York 14850 1.2 PROJECT: ITHACA COLLEGE PHYSCIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION Ithaca Commons 215 East State Street, Ithaca Ithaca, New York 14850 1.3 DATE: ___________________________ (BIDDER TO ENTER DATE) 1.4 SUBMITTED BY: A. Bidder’s Full Name: ___________________________________________________________ B. Address: ____________________________________________________________________ _ C. City, State, Zip ________________________________________________________________ 1.5 OFFER A. Having examined the Place of the Work and all matters referred to in the Instructions to Bidders and the Contract Documents prepared by QPK Design LLP for the above-mentioned projects, we, the undersigned, hereby offer to enter into a Contract to perform the Work as follows: B. BASE BID for Ithaca College for the Sum of: ______________________________________________________________________dollars ($___________________________); in lawful money of the United States of America. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 000410 - 2 BID FORM QPK NO. 220157.00 000410 - 2 C. ALTERNATE No. 1.- Provide Virtual Skylight in lieu acoustical tile above open stair north of Hall 221. ADD / DEDUCT/ NO CHANGE from the Base Bid the Sum of: (select one) _____________________________________________________ _________________dollars ($___________________________); in lawful money of the United States of America. These offers shall be open to acceptance and are irrevocable for 45 days from the bid closing date. D. BREAKOUT COST No. 1.- Contractor shall break out the total cost to provide all material and complete installation of all roof top HVAC equipment, wiring, ductwork indicated on the construction documents. Cost shall also include all structural steel framing and additional structural steel supports shown on the construction documents to support this equipment. All roofing crickets, roof curbs supporting equipment and roofing repairs shall be included in the cost. Fireproofing steel is the responsibility of the Landlord/Building Owner shall not be included. Total Cost included in the Base Bid amount for Breakout cost no. 1: (select one) _____________________________________________________________________dollars ($___________________________); in lawful money of the United States of America. E. BREAKOUT COST No.2.- Contractor shall break out the total cost of material and complete installation of door opening indicated as Temporary Doors on the door schedule (5 total). Include the cost of any partition framing that door is installed into, door/frame, hardware, painting and associated work to complete the installation of the temporary door opening. Total Cost included in the Base Bid amount for Breakout cost no. 2: (select one) _________________________________________ _____________________________dollars ($___________________________); in lawful money of the United States of America. F. BREAKOUT COST No.3.- Contractor shall break out the total cost of material and complete installation of door opening 230 indicated on the door schedule. Include the cost of partition framing that door is installed into, door/frame, hardware, painting and associated work to complete the installation of the door opening. Total Cost included in the Base Bid amount for Breakout cost no. 1: (select one) _______________________________________________ _______________________dollars ($___________________________); in lawful money of the United States of America. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 000410 - 3 BID FORM QPK NO. 220157.00 000410 - 3 G. If this Bid is accepted by the Owner within the time period stated above, we will: 1. Execute the Agreement within seven days of receipt of Notice of Award. 1.6 CONTRACT TIME A. If the Bid for the Project is accepted, we will: 1. Commence pre-construction services immediately upon execution of contract. 2. Commence construction on Monday, January 18, 2021. 3. Achieve Substantial Completion of the work as indicated in Section 011000 “Summary". 4. Achieve Final Completion of the Work as indicated in Section 011000 “Summary”. 1.7 ADDENDA A. The following Addenda have been received. The modifications to the Bid Documents noted below have been considered and all costs are included in the Bid Sum. 1. Addendum # 1 Dated _______________________ 2. Addendum #2 Dated _______________________ 3. Addendum # 3 Dated _______________________ 4. Addendum #4 Dated _______________________ 1.8 BID FORM REQUIREMENTS A. The following Supplements are required with this Bid Form and are considered an integral part of this Bid Form and shall be submitted with the Bid. Document 00431 is included in the construction specifications manual: 1. Document 00431 – Contractor’s Team and Subcontractors/ Manufacturers List. 2. Contractor’s proposed project schedule, including indication of Owner’s work conducted under separate contracts. Refer to Division 1 Section – Summary. 3. Contractor shall submit competitive bids for all subcontracts to Owner with their bid. 1.9 BID FORM SIGNATURE(S) A. The Corporate Seal of _______________________________________________________ (Bidder - print the full name of your firm) was hereunto affixed in the presence of: _______________________________________________________ (Authorized signing officer, Title) ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 000410 - 4 BID FORM QPK NO. 220157.00 000410 - 4 B. (Seal) C. _______________________________________________________ (Authorized signing officer, Title) 1.10 If the bid is a joint venture or partnership, add additional forms of execution for each member of the joint venture in the appropriate form or forms as above. 1.11 CERTIFICATION OF NON-COLLUSIVE BIDDING A. By submission of this bid, each bidder and each person signing on behalf of any bidder certificates, and in the case of a joint bid each party thereto certifies as to its own organization, under penalty of perjury, that to the best of the bidder’s knowledge and belief: 1. The prices in this bid have been arrived at independently and without collusion, consultation, communication, or agreement, for the purpose of restricting competition, as to any matter relating to such prices with any other bidder or competitor. 2. Unless otherwise required by law, the prices which have been quoted in this bid have not been knowingly disclosed by the bidder and will not knowingly be disclosed by the bidder prior to opening, directly or indirectly, to any other bidder or to any competitor; 3. No attempt has been made or will be made by the bidder to induce any other person, partnership, or corporation to submit or not to submit a bid for the purposes of restricting competition; 4. The person signing this bid or proposal certifies that he has fully informed himself regarding the accuracy of the statements contained in this certification, and under the penalties of perjury, affirms the truth thereof, such penalties being applicable to the bidder as well as to the person signing on its behalf; 5. The attached hereto (if corporate bidder) is a certified copy of resolution authorizing the execution of this certificate by the signator of this bid or proposal on behalf of the corporate bidder. END OF SECTION 000410 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 0000431 - 1 CONTRACTOR’S TEAM, SUBCONTRACTORS/MANUFACTURERS & DOCUMENTATION LIST QPK NO. 220157.0 000431 - 1 SECTION 000431 - CONTRACTOR’S TEAM, SUBCONTRACTORS/MANUFACTURERS AND DOCUMENTATION LIST THE FOLLOWING LIST IS TO BE SUBMITTED WITH THE BID Contractor’s Proposed Team: Project Manager: ________________________________________ ______ (name) (years with company in this role) Project Superintendent: ____________________________________ ______ (name) (years with company in this role) The following subcontractors and manufacturers are proposed for the Base Bid work of the Contract. Award of the Contract, however, does not constitute acceptance of any subcontractor or manufacturer listed herein. ONLY ONE (1) SUBCONTRACTOR AND MANUFACTURER SHALL BE LISTED FOR EACH SECTION. Subcontractor (or state if self-performed) Manufacturer 1. Demolition / Removals N/A 2. Concrete N/A 3. Structural Steel N/A 4. Metal Stairs and Handrails N/A 5. Doors, Frames, Hardware Provide as specified 6. Aluminum Storefront and Glazing Provide as specified 7. Folding Panel Partitions Provide as specified 8. Doors, Frames, Hardware Provide as specified 9. Aluminum Storefront and Glazing Provide as specified 10. Millwork N/A 11. Electrical Subcontractor N/A 12. HVAC/Plumbing Subcontractor N/A 13. Fire Protection Subcontractor N/A 14. Sheet Metal Subcontractor N/A END OF SECTION 000431 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 000852 - 1 PROJECT FORMS AND DOCUMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 000852 - 1 SECTION 000852 - PROJECT FORMS AND DOCUMENTS PART 1. - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The forms listed in this section relate to the Division 1 Specification Sections. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section lists the project forms used for administration of the project. 1.3 FORMS A. The following forms are or may be required to execute the contract. Format may be similar to comparable AIA forms or forms in a format acceptable to the Owner: 1. Application For Payment Form and Continuation Sheet. 2. Change Order. 3. Proposal Request. 4. Certificate of Substantial Completion (provided and completed by Architect). 5. Final Waiver of Claims and Liens and Release of Rights (Use Ithaca College form provided with the contract). 6. Construction Change Directive PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PROCEDURES A. Application for Payments: This form shall be used as outlined in Division 1 Section 012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES. B. Change Order: This document shall be used to issue changes to the contract as per the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. C. Certificate of Substantial Completion: This document shall be used to record the date of substantial and final completion as per the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. D. Final Release: Final Waiver of Claims and Liens and Release of Rights. E. Construction Change Directive: This document may be issued to proceed with a change in the Work, as per the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. END OF SECTION 000852 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 000900 - 1 CONTRACTORS FORM OF GUARANTEE QPK NO. 220157.00 000900 - 1 SECTION 000900 - CONTRACTOR'S FORM OF GUARANTEE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Instructions: Form shall be executed in duplicate. 1.2 FORM To: Ithaca College For: Ithaca College – Physician Assistant Program Rothschild Renovation Location: Ithaca Commons, 215 East State Street, Ithaca, New York 14850 Owner: Ithaca College Date of Contract: ____________________ The undersigned, Contractor for the _________________________________ ________, work on the above building, hereby guarantees all the workmanship and/or materials installed by him (them) or his (their) subcontractors to be of the quality that will comply with all the specific requirements of the Specifications and other Contract Documents governing the work under the Contract for the above building, and insures the Owner against all defects of material and/or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from and after the completion of the building and its acceptance by the Owner. It is agreed that if, after due inspection, the Architect or Owner shall decide that by reason of this Guarantee, the replacement or repair of any work is, in his opinion, necessary, such defective work will be repaired or removed and new work replaced meeting all the requirements of the Contract Documents, same being done promptly and without expense to the Owner, including all costs for replacing or repairing other work damaged by the removal and replacement of the work covered by this Guarantee. _________________________________________ Contractor By _______________________________________ Title ______________________________________ The Owner hereby certifies that the date of acceptance of the Ithaca College by the Owner on the above Contract was _____________ 20______. By: ________________________________________________________________________ Ithaca College END OF SECTION 000900 953 Danby Road • Ithaca, NY 14850 • (607) 274-3225 • (607) 274-1619 fax ITHACA COLLEGE PLANNING, DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION SERVICES This Agreement is made between Ithaca College (“the College”) and XXXXX (“Contractor”), a corporation incorporated and in good standing in the State of New York with current authority to do business in the State of New York. TERMS In consideration of the mutual covenants, promises, and conditions contained in this Agreement, the College and Contractor agree as follows: 1.0 Scope of Contract 1.1 The Contractor agrees to furnish and provide all the supplies, materials and labor, and to perform to the satisfaction of the College all work of every kind required, necessary or proper for or incidental to the XXXX, Project #XXX as per proposal/quote dated XXXX (attached) SCOPE OF WORK: As per XXXX at Ithaca College, hereinafter called the "Project", in strict accordance with this Contract, the Proposal, the Drawings and Specifications and the prescribed bonds, hereinafter collectively called the "Contract" or "Contract Documents", all of which have been examined by the Contractor and are deemed to be a part of this Contract. 1.2 The Contractor represents that it is fully licensed to perform all work in this Agreement, is experienced and skilled in this type of project, and is familiar with all applicable laws, regulations, and guidelines pertaining to this type of work, and is fully informed of the condition relating to construction and labor for the specific projects that will be performed. 1.3 The Contractor warrants that it will comply with all applicable environmental laws concerning handling, transport, and disposing of materials, and with all other applicable federal, state, and local laws, rules, or decisions respecting the construction to be effected hereunder. 2.0 Time of Performance The Contractor shall begin on XXXX and complete all the work covered by the Contract to the satisfaction of Ithaca College and in accordance with the Contract Documents on XXXX, unless such period is otherwise extended by the College, or be responsible to the College for any damage caused by the failure or omission by the Contractor to comply with this paragraph. 3.0 Performance and Payment Bond (BOND NOT REQUIRED ON THIS PROJECT) 4.0 Payment 4.1 The College shall pay to the Contractor and the latter shall accept as full and complete payment for the performance of this Contract for the total sum of XXXX Dollars, $XXXX which sum is the amount of the contract consideration. If the progress and performance of the work is satisfactory to the College, the latter, upon application submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Architect, if any, and the College, will make Project #XXX, XXX, XXX 2 953 Danby Road • Ithaca, NY 14850 • (607) 274-3225 • (607) 274-1619 fax periodic progress payments of the contract consideration to the Contractor, the amount of such progress payments to be based upon the value of the work performed by the Contractor since the last previous progress payment, less an amount equal to 10% thereof, which sum the College shall reserve from each progress payment until all the work covered by the Contract has been completed. 4.2 Time of Payment. The College shall make payment in the manner provided in this Agreement within thirty (30) calendar days of receipt and approval of submitted invoice. 4.3 Upon the completion by the Contractor and acceptance by the College of all the work covered by the Contract, the College shall make a final payment equal to the amount of the Contract consideration less all previous payments by the College to the Contractor. 4.4 The amounts allowed for overhead and profit for a change resulting in an increase in Contract price may be less than, but shall not exceed, the applicable percentages as follows: (a) For work done directly by the contractor, the sum of overhead amount plus profit amount shall not exceed 15% of the cost. (b) For work done by subcontractors of any tier, the sum of total overhead amounts of the subcontractors and contractors, plus total profit amounts for the subcontractors and contractor shall not exceed 20% of the cost. Subcontractor shall be limited to 15% and the contractor shall be limited to 5% for combined overhead and profit. Where work necessitated by the change order involves overtime, no payroll taxes, overhead or profit will be allowed on the premium portion of the overtime pay. 4.5 The acceptance by the Contractor, or by anyone claiming by or through him/her, of the final payment shall constitute and operate as a release to the College from any and all claims of any liability for anything done or furnished for or relating to or arising out of the work covered by the Contract and for any prior act, neglect or default on the part of the College or any of its officers, agents, or employees in connection therewith. Should the Contractor refuse to accept the final payment as tendered by the College or should he/she refuse to execute the final application for payment without protest and without reserving any rights or claims against the College, it shall constitute a waiver of any right to interest on the payment so tendered and/or on the amount set forth in said final application for payment. 4.6 The Contractor shall furnish the College with the Contractor’s Federal Tax Identification Number. 4.7 All invoices shall be mailed to the College's Representative Steve Dayton, Director of Planning, Design and Construction, 201 Office of Facilities, 953 Danby Road, Ithaca, New York 14850. The Contractor shall reference the College's General Capital Contract No. on all invoices submitted which is found on the first page. 5.0 Contractor’s Obligations 5.1 If Contractor performs work knowing it to be contrary to laws, statutes, building codes, and rules and regulations without such notice to the College, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for such work and bear the attributable costs. 5.2 Contractor shall supervise and direct the work, using Contractor’s best professional effort, skill, and attention. Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures for the project unless Contract documents give other specific instructions. 5.3 Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, and permits and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. Contractor shall keep Project #XXX, XXX, XXX 3 953 Danby Road • Ithaca, NY 14850 • (607) 274-3225 • (607) 274-1619 fax the premises and surrounding area free from accumulations of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the work, Contractor shall remove from the project site(s) any waste materials, rubbish, tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus materials. If Contractor fails to clean up, the College will withhold a portion of final payment to cover the costs where the contractor failed to clean up the site including all disposal fees. 5.4 Fencing off – (if applicable to the project) Prior to the start of the project, a drawing showing the fenced off area will be submitted for approval by the College. The construction site is the responsibility of the contractor, and, when deemed necessary for a project, must be completed as an initial step of the mobilization process.” 5.5 Safe walkways around the perimeter of the construction site must be maintained at all times. Contractor’s vehicles, equipment, etc. cannot permanently nor temporarily block pedestrian walking paths. 5.6 The Contractor shall preserve and protect all cultivated and planted areas, and all natural vegetation such as trees, shrubs, and grass on or adjacent to the premises which as determined by the Owner, do not unreasonably interfere with the performance of the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to any such property and unauthorized cutting or destroying of trees and vegetation, including damage due to careless operation of equipment, stockpiling of materials or tracking by equipment or vehicles. 5.7 Contractors/Vendors – College keys/fobs will be accessed and returned on a daily basis from the Maintenance Shop to contractors/Vendors working on campus. The required keys/fobs will be determined by the Director of Planning, Design and Construction and/or the Director of Facilities Maintenance. Access to the required keys will be set by the Office of Facilities and the ID Office. (a) A completed “Contractor/vendor Key/Fob Request Form” will be filled out before the keys/fobs are issued (see attached example page 11). All keys must be personally signed for by the contractor’s representative to whom the keys/fobs are issued. When Residence Halls are occupied, access to these areas will be determined through Planning, Design and Construction or Residential Life (occupied rooms will require a college assigned escort). (b) Duplicates of outstanding (uncleared) keys will not be issued. Per key policy contractors/vendors will be charged for any costs related to lost/stolen keys. Stolen/Lost Key Procedures Reporting 1. It is the responsibility of the contractor/vendor, to report lost or stolen keys. Stolen/lost keys need to reported immediately to both Public Safety and Planning, Design & Construction office; when they are determined to be lost/stolen. 2. Contact Public Safety to file a lost or stolen property report. An incident report must be filed with Public Safety, and the incident number will be required for obtaining replacement keys. 3. The Office of Facilities and Office of Public Safety will consult to determine if, the safety or security reasons, re-keying is required. Consultation may include the Office of Residential Life, where appropriate. Charges/Accountability for lost/stolen keys Project #XXX, XXX, XXX 4 953 Danby Road • Ithaca, NY 14850 • (607) 274-3225 • (607) 274-1619 fax 1. Contractor will be charged the rekey cost of $48.00 per recore plus $10.00 for each key cut when an individual room/office key is lost/stolen. 2. Lost Key charge will not be refunded, once the new key has been cut. 3. These charges will include any and all labor costs that the College incurres to rekey all areas/buildings the lost key is associated with. Any contractor or vendor who needs to access the campus facilities for emergencies, (outside of normal business hours), will pick up their keys at the Office of Public Safety dispatch window. These contractors/vendors will need to have either a college provided contractor/vendor card or an ID card issued by their place of employment. ID cards will also be issued for contractors/vendors Supervisors who have contracts for work on the campus. 6.0 Public Safety and Risk Involving Property In an emergency affecting the safety of life or of the work or of adjoining property, the Contractor, without special instruction or authorization from the College, is hereby permitted to act at his or her discretion to prevent such threatened loss or injury, and he shall so act without appeal if so authorized or instructed. Any compensation claimed by the Contractor on account of emergency work, shall be determined by the College and Architect. 7.0 Guarantees 7.1 The Contractor, at the convenience of the College, shall remove, replace and/or repair at his/her own cost and expense any defects in workmanship, materials, ratings, capacities or characteristics occurring in or to the work covered by the Contract within the (1) year or within such longer period as may otherwise be provided in the Contract, the period of such guarantee to commence with the College's final acceptance of all work covered under the Contract or at such other date or dates as the College may specify prior to that time, and the Contractor, upon demand, shall pay for all damage to all other work resulting from such defects and all expenses necessary to remove, replace and/or repair such other work which may be damaged in removing, replacing or repairing the said defects. 7.3 Unless such removal, replacement and/or repair shall be performed by the Contractor within ten (10) working days after he receives written notice from the College specifying such defect, or if such defect is of such a nature that it cannot be completely removed, repaired and/or replaced within said ten (10) day period and the Contractor shall not have diligently commenced removing, repairing and/or replacing such defect within said ten (10) day period and shall not thereafter with reasonable diligence and in good faith proceed to do such work, the College may employ such other person, firm or corporation as it may choose to perform such removal, replacement and/or repair and the Contractor agrees, upon demand, to pay to the College all amounts which it expends for such work. 8.0 Default of the Contractor In the event that the Contractor shall fail to proceed with the work when and as directed by the College or the Architect or if the Contractor in the opinion of the College, shall fail to carry on the work with proper speed or if the Contractor shall otherwise fail to comply with the provisions of this Contract, the College, upon fourteen (14) days written notice to the Contractor, may declare the Contractor in default of this Contract and arrange for the work to be finished in such manner and method as may be deemed advisable by the College. If the College declares the Contractor in default, the Contractor shall be liable to the College for the cost of all additional architectural and engineering services necessary, in the College's opinion, as a result of such default. The College shall deduct from the contract consideration the cost of such additional services and, if the College has the work completed by other than the Contractor's surety, the actual cost of completion of all work covered by the Contract. If the unpaid balance of the contract consideration, including retainage from progress payments, is insufficient Project #XXX, XXX, XXX 5 953 Danby Road • Ithaca, NY 14850 • (607) 274-3225 • (607) 274-1619 fax to pay such costs, then the Contractor, upon demand, shall pay the College the amount of such excess costs. 9.0 Indemnification and Hold Harmless Contractor shall assume the defense of, and shall indemnify and hold harmless Ithaca College and their officers, agents, consultants and employees, from and against any and all loss, liability, expense, claim, costs, suits and damages of every kind, nature and description directly or indirectly arising from all work performed under this contract. (a) To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor agrees to perform the work in a safe and proper manner and, so as to comply with all laws and ordinances referring to such work, and will indemnify and save the indemnities and, in the case of each of them their respective agents, consultants, servants and employees, harmless such indemnity, as used in this article, to include the defense of claims made against the Indemnities against all penalties for violation of same. To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor hereby assumes entire responsibility and liability for any and all damage or injury of any kind or nature to property, including adjoining property, caused by or resulting from the execution of work or occurring in connection therewith, and agrees to indemnify and save harmless the Indemnities from and against any and all claims, liability, loss and expense by reason of any liability imposed upon the Indemnities for damage because of injury to or destruction of property, caused or occasioned directly or indirectly by the negligence of the Contractor, its agents or employees, in the performance of work under this contract, or resulting from the use by the Contractor, its agents or employees, of any materials, tools, hoists, ladders, implements, appliances, scaffolding ways, works, machinery or other property of the Indemnities, whether or not the Indemnities are negligent in such event. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the safety of its work and all equipment and materials to be used therein until final completion and acceptance of the same shall promptly at its own expense repair any damages to the same, however cause. (b) The Contractor solely assumes all risks, except those risks caused by defects in the drawings or specifications prepared or furnished by the Owner or the Architect, for loss or damage, occurring prior to the Owner’s acceptance of all work, to all or any part of the work covered by the Contract and for all claims, losses and damages for bodily injury, including death, and property damage arising out of or as a result of or in connection with the performance by the Contractor of the work covered by the Contract. c) The Contractor’s obligations under this section shall not be deemed waived, limited or discharged by the enumeration in the Contract Documents of the kinds and amounts of insurance that the Contractor is required to and/or does procure. (d) Neither the Owner’s final acceptance of the work to be performed hereunder nor the making of payment therefore shall release the Contractor from their obligations under this section. (e) Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create or give third parties any claims or rights of action against the Owner to persons on, about or adjacent to the premises where the work is being performed. (f) Ithaca College reserves the right to retain whatever funds which would be due Contractor under this contract until such suits, action or actions, claim or claims for injuries or damages as aforesaid shall have been settled and satisfactory evidence to that effect furnished. 10.0 Insurance Project #XXX, XXX, XXX 6 953 Danby Road • Ithaca, NY 14850 • (607) 274-3225 • (607) 274-1619 fax 10.1 Contractor shall at its own expense obtain and maintain insurance, in accordance with the terms of Schedule A—Insurance, made a part hereof and attached hereto, to cover activities of Contractor and its subcontractors, agents, and/or employees. 10.2 In accordance with Schedule A, Contractor agrees to maintain insurance, on a per project basis, naming Ithaca College as additional insured and to provide the College with a certificate evidencing such insurance coverage in the manner described in Schedule A. 10.3 The Contractor's obligations under this section shall not be deemed waived, limited or discharged by the enumeration in the Contract Documents of the kinds and amounts of insurance that he is required to and/or does procure. 11.0 Relationship between the Parties 11.1 Contractor is an independent contractor of the College and not the agent or employee of the College. Nothing in this Agreement shall be deemed to make the College and Contractor partners or to create a relation of principal and agent between them, nor shall either party be bound by any representation, act or omission of the other made contrary to the provisions of this Agreement. 11.2 The College shall have no obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a subcontractor except as may otherwise be required by law. Upon receiving payment from the College, Contractor shall promptly pay each subcontractor furnishing materials or services, the amount to which said subcontractor is entitled, less any amounts actually retained from payments to Contractor on account of such subcontractor's portion of the work. Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement with each subcontractor, require each subcontractor to make payments to sub-subcontractors in similar manner. 12.0 Non-discrimination 12.1 The Contractor, subcontractor, or any person acting on behalf of the Contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment in the performance of this contract or any subcontract thereunder because of Equal Employment Opportunity protected class status including age, race, disability, ethnicity, national origin, religion, sex, sexual orientation, marital status, Vietnam Era or special disabled veteran status as applicable under federal, state and local laws. 13.0 Accountings, Inspection and Audit The Contractor agrees to keep books and records showing the costs incurred for the Work. Such books and records (including, without limitation, any electronic data processing files used by Contractor in analyzing and recording the Work) shall be open for inspection and audit by the College and its authorized representatives at reasonable hours at Contractor's local office or at the College's office, if necessary, and shall be retained by Contractor for a period of seven years after the Work has been completed. Each Contractor shall be similarly obligated to maintain, for inspection and audit by the College, books and records respecting the Work. 14.0 Liens Neither the final payment nor any part of the retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor shall deliver to the College a complete release or discharge of all liens arising out of this Contract, or receipts in full in lieu thereof and, in either case, an affidavit that so far as he has knowledge or information that the releases and receipts include all the labor and materials for which a lien could be filed; but the Contractor may, if any subcontractor refuses to furnish a receipt or release in full, furnish a bond satisfactory to the College, to indemnify the College against any lien. If any lien remains unsatisfied after all payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the College all monies that the later may be compelled to pay in discharging such a lien, including all costs and a reasonable attorney's fee. No Project #XXX, XXX, XXX 7 953 Danby Road • Ithaca, NY 14850 • (607) 274-3225 • (607) 274-1619 fax partial or progress payments shall be made to the Contractor as long as a lien is outstanding on the real property of the College by reason of claims arising out of the work of this Contract. 15.0 Non-Waiver The failure of either party to exercise any of its rights under this Agreement for a breach thereof shall not be deemed to be a waiver of such rights, and no waiver by either party, whether written or oral, express or implied, of any rights under or arising from the Agreement shall be binding on any subsequent occasion; and no concession by either party shall be treated as an implied modification of the Agreement unless specifically agreed in writing. 16.0 Force Majeure In the event the Premises are rendered unsuitable for the conduct of activities or events by reason of Force Majeure, the College may terminate this Agreement by written notice 30 days following such casualty and the College shall not be responsible for any damages sustained by Contractor but Contractor shall be entitled to a pro rata return of any sum paid or any other acceptable arrangement mutually agreed to by the parties. "Force majeure" shall mean fire, earthquake, flood, act of God, strikes, work stoppages, or other labor disturbances, riots or civil commotions, litigation, war or other act of any foreign nation, power of government, or governmental agency or authority, or any other cause like or unlike any cause above mentioned which is beyond the control or authority of the College. 17.0 Severability and Savings Clause. In the event one or more clauses of this Agreement are declared illegal, void or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, that shall not affect the validity of the remaining portions of this Agreement. 18.0 Entire Agreement; Modification. The Contract Documents constitute the entire agreement between the parties hereto and no statement, promise, condition, understanding, inducement or representation, oral or written, expressed or implied, which is not contained herein shall be binding or valid and the Contract Documents shall not be changed, modified or altered in any manner except by an instrument in writing executed by the parties hereto. 19.0 Provisions Required by Law Each and every provision required by law to be inserted in the Contract shall be deemed to be inserted herein and the Contract shall be read and enforced as though it were included herein and in the event any such provision is not inserted or is not correctly inserted then, upon the application of either party, this Contract shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion or correction. This Agreement contains all the terms between the parties and may be amended only in writing signed by both parties. Project #XXX, XXX, XXX 8 953 Danby Road • Ithaca, NY 14850 • (607) 274-3225 • (607) 274-1619 fax 20.0 Governing Law This Agreement shall be governed by the law of the State of New York. Any and all proceedings relating to the subject matter hereof shall be maintained in New York State Supreme Court, Tompkins county or the federal district court for the Northern District of New York, which courts shall have exclusive jurisdiction for such purposes. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have hereunto executed this Agreement on this _____ day of _________________, 20____, by and through their duly authorized representatives, as set forth below. (Signature) (Date) (Printed Name) (Title) (Signature) (Date) (Signature) (Date) Steve Dayton Dr. Timothy R. Carey (Printed Name) (Printed Name) Director of Planning, Design and Construction Associate VP of Facilities (Title) (Title) (Signature) (Date) William Guerrero (Printed Name) VP of Finance and Administration (Title) Project #XXX, XXX, XXX 9 953 Danby Road • Ithaca, NY 14850 • (607) 274-3225 • (607) 274-1619 fax SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR Ithaca College Construction Planning and Design General Capital Contract 1. Qualifications of Contractors All prospective contractors are hereby notified that, on request of the College, they must be able to prove to the satisfaction of the College, that they have the skill and experience, as well as the necessary facilities, ample financial resources, organization and general reliability to do the work to be performed under the provisions of the Contract, in a satisfactory manner and within the time specified. 2. Storage of Material and Equipment All material shall be stored in a neat, orderly manner within the confines of the contractor’s footprint (to be determined prior to the project’s start date). 3. Compliance to Document Follow drawings in the laying out of work and inspect locations of existing utilities and site conditions to be dealt with in the execution of this work. 4. Submittals After execution of Contract, and ordering of material, submit for approval the list of all materials, shop drawings and equipment proposed for use to avoid delay in construction schedule. Intention of using specified materials does not relieve obligation of submitting this list. 5. Permits Contractor shall obtain, maintain and pay for all permits and licenses necessary for the execution of the Work and for the use of such Work when completed. The Contractor shall give all notices, pay all fees and comply with all laws, rules and regulations applicable to the Work. 6. Changes within the Scope of the Work The Contractor shall, with the written approval of the College's representative, and without extra charge, make reasonable modifications in layout needed to prevent conflict with existing conditions for proper execution of this work. 7. Clean Up Contractor shall, at all times during the progress of his or her work, keep the site and adjacent roads (including street sweeping) and sidewalks free from accumulation of waste matter, dirt and rubbish. At the completion of the work, all excess materials, earth, etc., shall be removed from the site. Project #XXX, XXX, XXX 10 953 Danby Road • Ithaca, NY 14850 • (607) 274-3225 • (607) 274-1619 fax 8. Supervision Contractor shall supply services of an experienced and competent supervisor who shall be constantly in charge of work at the site and shall remain onsite until 100% completion of the project including any punchlist work required. 9. Representative of Ithaca College Ithaca College will assign a representative of the College. Only directives from Ithaca Colleges designated representative Steve Dayton (Project Manager) shall be recognized by the Contractor. 10. Employment Practices The Contractor warrants that with respect to all of its employees working on the College’s premises, the Contractor is in compliance with all federal, state and city laws, rules and regulations relating to labor relations, fair employment practices, pay rates, safety and similar rules and regulations. 11. Parking Permits Parking Permits are the contractor’s responsibility to obtain. All contractors, subcontractors and major vendors must obtain a college parking permit. (Parking Permits – can be obtained at the Office of Parking Services located within the Office of Public Safety on Farm Pond Road.) 12. Parking Parking near and around campus is limited. Contractor parking will be restricted to Red and Green parking lots when there is adequate access parking (depending on time of year). Only Superintendents and site sensitive equipment, personnel and delivery vehicles will be allowed on site parking privileges. These permits must be approved by the Director of Facilities Planning, Design and Construction. Contractor parking will not necessarily be accommodated immediately adjacent to the work site. Students and staff members have priority parking rights to College lots. It may be necessary to designate contractor parking in remote campus lots or locations, thereby requiring the contractor to arrange for shuttling to and from the job site (at no cost to Ithaca College). Final parking arrangements for projects will be discussed prior to the project kickoff, but the College will make the final determination on where contractors can and cannot park. Contractors or their subs who are ticketed are responsible for all fines, booting/towing expenses, etc. Ithaca College assumes no responsibility and will not seek to have fines or other costs waived. Project #XXX, XXX, XXX 11 953 Danby Road • Ithaca, NY 14850 • (607) 274-3225 • (607) 274-1619 fax SPECIAL CONDITIONS PART B FOR Ithaca College Construction Planning and Design General Capital Contract WORKPLACE COVID-19 SAFETY MEASURES 1. Perform routine environmental cleaning and disinfection. Routinely clean and disinfect all frequently touched surfaces in the workplace, such as workstations, telephones, doorknobs, etc. 2. Provision of needed occupational safety and health supplies ▪ Hand sanitizer and disposable disinfecting wipes ▪ Personal Protective Equipment (PPE): face shields, gloves, goggles, glasses, shoe covers, gowns, head covers, masks, respirators, etc. 3. Actively encourage sick employees to stay home and not to return to work until the CDC criteria to discontinue home isolation are met. 4. Inform employees of our possible exposure to COVID-19 if a fellow employee is confirmed to have COVID-19 infection (while maintaining confidentiality as required by the Americans with Disabilities Act). 5. Educate employees about how they can reduce the spread of COVID-19 by social distancing and avoiding using other employees’ phones, desks, offices, or other work tools and equipment, when possible. 6. Identify a workplace coordinator who will be responsible for COVID-19 issues and their impact at the workplace and who can work to keep employees safe. 7. Support respiratory etiquette and hand hygiene for employees, sub-contractors, delivery drivers and visitors. 8. Minimize travel. 9. Comply with applicable Federal, State, and Local health and safety guidelines, as well as health and safety protocols published by the College, which are subject to change over the duration of the public health crisis. Upon arrival, personnel should be prepared to: 10. Adhere to additional health and safety requirements, as communicated by College personnel. 11. Enter and exit through specified locations. 12. Wear additional PPE is designated locations. 13. Provide proof that the on-site visit is authorized to occur at the specific appointment time. 14. It will be the contractor’s responsibility to keep a daily log for everyone that has worked or visited each project on campus. Project #XXX, XXX, XXX 12 953 Danby Road • Ithaca, NY 14850 • (607) 274-3225 • (607) 274-1619 fax Ithaca College Planning, Design and Construction 201 Facilities Building Ithaca, NY 14850 607-274-1663 Key Transaction Date __________________ Company Name Company Address Company Phone Project Manager/Office Contact Employee (Name & ID # Required) Cell Phone Transaction: Tag # Quantity Key/Fob # Building Date Due Back Requestor Signature: Print: College Keys will be accessed and returned on a daily basis from the Facilities Maintenance Shop. Stolen/Lost Key Procedures A. Reporting 1. It is the responsibility of the employee, contractor/vendor, affiliate, or student to report lost or stolen keys. (a) Stolen/lost keys need to reported immediately; when they are determined to be lost/stolen (b) For student residential keys, lost or stolen keys must be reported to the residential area office in accordance with their designated residence. (c) For employee, contractor/vendor, or affiliate lost or stolen keys must be reported to Public Safety, Office of Facilities and to the Department originally authorizing the keys. 2. Contact Public Safety to file a lost or stolen property report. An incident report must be filed with Public Safety, and the incident number will be required for obtaining replacement keys. 3. The Office of Facilities and Office of Public Safety will consult to determine if, the safety or security reasons, rekeying is required. Consultation may include the Office of Residential Life, where appropriate. B. Charges/Accountability for lost/stolen keys 1. Contractor will be charged the rekey cost of $48.00 per recore plus $10.00 for each key cut when an individual room/office key is lost/stolen. 2. Lost Key charge will not be refunded, once the new key has been cut. Project #XXX, XXX, XXX 13 953 Danby Road • Ithaca, NY 14850 • (607) 274-3225 • (607) 274-1619 fax FINAL RELEASE FINAL WAIVER OF CLAIMS AND LIENS AND RELEASE OF RIGHTS Date ______________________ Contract Date ___________________ Project ______________________ Contract Price ___________________ Address ______________________ Net Extras and Deductions ___________________ City ______________________ Adjusted Contract Price ___________________ County ______________________ Amount Previously Paid ___________________ State ______________________ Balance Due - Final Payment ___________________ The undersigned hereby acknowledges that the above Balance Due when paid represents payment in full for all labor, materials, etc., furnished by the below named Contractor or Supplier in connection with its work on the above Project in accordance with the Contract. In consideration of the amounts and sums previously received, and the payment of $____________ being the full and Final Payment amount due, the below named Contractor or Supplier does hereby waive and release the College from any and all claims and liens and rights of liens upon the premises described above, and upon improvements now or hereafter thereon, and upon the monies or other considerations due or to become due from the College or from any other person, firm or corporation, said claims, liens and rights of liens being on account of labor, services, materials, fixtures or apparatus heretofore furnished by the below named Contractor or Supplier to the Project. The premises as to which said claims and liens are hereby released are identified as follows: _______________________________________________________________________________ The undersigned further represents and warrants that he/she is duly authorized and empowered to sign and execute this waiver on his/her own behalf and on behalf of the company or business for which he/she is signing; that it has properly performed all work and furnished all materials of the specified quality per plans and specifications and in a good and workmanlike manner, fully and completely; that it has paid for all the labor, materials, equipment and services that it has used or supplied, that it has no other outstanding and unpaid applications, invoices, retentions, holdbacks, expenses employed in the prosecution of work, chargeback’s or unbilled work or materials against the College as of the date of the aforementioned last and final payment application; and that any materials which have been supplied or incorporated into the above premises were either taken from its fully-paid or open stock or were fully paid for and supplied on the last and final payment application or invoice. The undersigned further agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless the College for any and all losses or expenses (including without limitation reasonable attorneys' fees) should any such claim, lien or right of lien be asserted by the below named Contractor or Supplier or by any of its or their laborers, material person or subcontractors. In addition, for and in consideration of the amounts and sums received, the below named Contractor or Supplier hereby waives, releases and relinquishes any and all claims, rights or causes of action in equity or law whatsoever arising out of through or under the above mentioned Contract and the performance of work pursuant thereto. The below named Contractor or Supplier further guarantees that all portions of the work furnished and installed are in accordance with the Contract and that the terms of the Contract with respect to this guarantee will remain in effect for the period specified in said Contract. _______________________________________ Sworn to before me this Corporation or Business Name ______day of____________________, 20____ By: ____________________________________ Title ___________________________________ Project #XXX, XXX, XXX 14 953 Danby Road • Ithaca, NY 14850 • (607) 274-3225 • (607) 274-1619 fax SCHEDULE A INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of employees on the worksite, and shall comply with all applicable provisions of Federal, State and Municipal safety laws and building codes to prevent accident or injury to persons on, about or adjacent to the premises where work is being performed. Contractor shall erect and properly maintain at all times as required by the conditions and progress of the work, all necessary safeguards for the protection of workmen and the public and shall post danger signs warning against the hazards created by this work. The Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless Ithaca College from claims for losses and damage for bodily injury, including death, and property damage arising out of, or as a result of, or in connection with the performance by the Contractor of the work covered by this contract. Contractor shall maintain the following coverage: Workers’ Compensation insurance policies in full compliance with the Workers’ Compensation Laws of the State of New York and all states where the work is performed or in which a claim shall be presented, with Coverage B – Employer’s Liability with limits of $1,000,000 each accident for Bodily Injury by Accident, $1,000,000 each employee for Bodily Injury by Disease, and $1,000,000 policy limit Bodily Injury by Disease, covering operations of the Contractor and its Sub-Contractors performed in connection with the work at the project site and where employees are dedicated to the project site. Comprehensive Commercial General Liability insurance, on an occurrence form, including premises-operations, hazards of explosion, collapse and underground, elevators, independent contractors, completed operations (3 year post- completion), cross-liability, severability of interest, broad form blanket contractual liability coverage for claims arising out of the work hereunder for personal injury, bodily injury and property damage, and products and completed operations, with available limits not less than $1,000,000 combined single limit per occurrence, $2,000,000 general annual aggregate, and $2,000,000 completed operations aggregate. Comprehensive Automobile Liability insurance covering all owned, non-owned and hired automobiles. The limits of liability to be provided shall be not less than $1,000,000. Combined Single Limit each occurrence for Bodily Injury and Property Damage. Excess Umbrella Liability insurance over all underlying exposures including, without limitation, operations and completed operations, with limits of not less than $5,000,000. Should aircraft of any kind be used by the Contractor or its Sub-Contractors or by anyone else on their behalf, the Contractor shall maintain or cause to be maintained aircraft liability insurance including bodily injury, property damage and passenger liability, as respects any aircraft owned, used, operated or hired in connection with the work by the Contractor, Sub-Contractors, or anyone else, with limits of $100,000,000 combined single limit for bodily injury and property damage any one occurrence. Furthermore, the Contractor shall secure the following terms and conditions to the policies listed: Project #XXX, XXX, XXX 15 953 Danby Road • Ithaca, NY 14850 • (607) 274-3225 • (607) 274-1619 fax All insurance carriers shall be authorized in the State of New York, acceptable to the Owner, and with a minimum rating of “A,” Class X in Best’s Key Rating Guide published by A.M. Best and Company, Inc. The insurance may be provided in a policy or policies, primary and excess, including the so-called Umbrella form, which may include the coverage, or layer thereof, of the insurance required by Ithaca College. The terms and conditions of all insurance provided by the Contractor shall be acceptable to Ithaca College. The limits of liability shall be as stated herein, unless prior to commencement of any work, written approval is granted by the Ithaca College for variance from those limits. Each insurance policy required to be provided, with the exception of the Workers’ Compensation and Employer’s Liability, shall be endorsed. To name as additional insured Ithaca College, their directors, members, officers, employees, assigns, successors, and all other persons or entities as may be reasonably required by Ithaca College. The coverage afforded the additional insured under these policies shall be primary insurance, and the policies shall include a severability of interest or cross-liability endorsement. If the additional insured has other insurance, which is applicable to the loss, such other insurance shall be on an excess, secondary and non-contributory basis. To provide that, in the event of any claims made by reason of bodily injury, personal injury or property damage which would be controverted, denied, or otherwise not covered by respecting the named insured due to a breach of a policy warranty or violation of a policy condition, such controversion, denial or otherwise shall not be imposed by the insurance company respecting the additional insured in the above paragraph. To provide that, in the event of any claims being made by reason of bodily injury, personal injury or property damage sustained by any agent, servant or employee of one insured for which another insured is or may be liable, then the policy shall cover such insured against whom a claim is made in the same manner as if a separate policy had been issued to each insured. To provide that the carrier(s) shall provide written notice to Ithaca College at least thirty (30) days prior to the date that any coverage or limits of liability shall be materially altered, non-renewed, canceled, reduced or allowed to expire. To provide that coverage will be provided for the indemnification obligation assumed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall furnish any Sub-Contractor, vendor, material supplier, haulers and/or independent haulers, or other party a copy of these insurance provisions and shall make the same requirements to them with respect to their sub-contract or procurement procedures. The duties, obligations and requirements of these insurance provisions shall apply and not be deviated to any additional parties employed by the contractor. Prior to the date on which the Contractor or its Sub-Contractors, and including vendors, material suppliers, haulers, or others who merely transport, pick up, deliver or carry materials, commences performance or operations under the Contract, the Contractor shall cause to be furnished to Ithaca College certificates of insurance evidencing all insurance as required herein, and which shall contain a provision the coverage and limits of liability afforded under the policies shall not be materially Project #XXX, XXX, XXX 16 953 Danby Road • Ithaca, NY 14850 • (607) 274-3225 • (607) 274-1619 fax altered, non-renewed, canceled, reduced or allowed to expire without thirty (30) days prior written notice to the certificate holder. In addition to providing any notice or complying with any other reporting requirements imposed by any policy hereunder, the Contractor shall immediately report in writing to Ithaca College designated insurance representative, any claim under any of the coverage mentioned herein. The Contractor agrees to cooperate with Ithaca College in promptly releasing reasonable information periodically as to the disposition of any claims, including a resume of claims experienced relating to Ithaca College. All policies of insurance that are in any way related to the work under the Contract and that are secured and maintained by the Contractor and its Sub-Contractors shall include clauses providing that each underwriter shall waive all of its rights of recovery, under subrogation or otherwise, against Ithaca College, its officers, members, directors, employees, sub-contractors, successors and assigns. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 001100- 1 SUMMARY QPK NO. 220157.00 011000 - 1 SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Schedule 4. Work under separate contracts. 5. Access to site. 6. Coordination with occupants. 7. Work restrictions. 8. Specification and drawing conventions. 9. Miscellaneous provisions. 1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Identification: Ithaca College Physician Assistant Program Rothschild Renovation 1. Project Location: Ithaca Commons, 215 East State Street, Ithaca, NY 14850 a. Rothschild Building Owner-Tenant: Ithaca College: Owner's Representative: Steve Dayton, Dir. for Planning Design & Construction Ithaca College Office for Facilities 201 Facilities Building 953 Danby Road Ithaca, NY 14850 (607) 274-1663 Landlord/Building Owner: Jeffrey Rimland. 2. Communication: All communication shall initially be with Owner-Tenant Representative Steve Dayton. Mr. Dayton will provide any additional direction with regard to communication with the Landlord/Building Owner. B. Architect: QPK Design, LLP, 450 S. Salina Street, Syracuse, New York 13202 Project Manager: Vincent Nicotra, R.A. 315-472-7806. 1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following to be accomplished: ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 001100- 2 SUMMARY QPK NO. 220157.00 011000 - 2 1. Construction Work of this Contract includes Selective Removals, General Construction, Mechanical, Electrical and Fire Alarm, Plumbing, and Fire Protection work. 2. The project requires: a. Ithaca College is leasing space for this buildout from the Landlord/Building Owner. The Landlord has cleared a majority of the floor area, and is providing perimeter tenant walls, door openings that will be in place or currently under construction at commencement of the construction of this project. b. Selective removals of existing slab on grade for new bathrooms and other plumbing fixtures. Selective removals of miscellaneous partitions, doors, door frames, and MEP system items. Preparing existing space to received construction show on documents. c. The project includes an interior buildout of two floors of leased space. General construction includes cast-in-place concrete at new steel posts and slab repairs at sanitary line installs below existing slab on grade and additional structural steel install at roof to support new roof top HVAC equipment. Also included are stud/gypsum board partitions, doors/frames and hardware, acoustical panel ceilings, wall finishes, installation of Owner provided flooring materials, millwork and painting, See documents for additional scope. d. Installation of Owner provided medical equipment. See Work Under Separate Contracts in this Section for further scope descriptions. e. Electrical – The electrical scope of work involves electric service panels, transformers and power distribution system to serve IC leased space. Electric service will be an extension of the existing electrical service. Provide power for MEP equipment, general use receptacles, led lighting. Electrical to include installation of LED lighting, lighting controls and fire alarm. The project includes routing of network & telephone cabling. See documents for additional scope. f. Plumbing – Installation of under slab sanitary piping below an existing concrete slab. Project includes installation of domestic water heaters, sanitary waste & vent along with domestic water supply piping, tempering valves and insulation. Installation of plumbing fixtures & supports. See documents for additional scope. g. Heating – Installation of an air source heat pump system with dedicated outdoor air units to serve IC leased space. Installation includes concealed ducted fan coils, ceiling mounted cassette and wall mounted heat pump units. System will include ductwork, insulation and refrigerant piping. System will include HVAC controls system and control wiring. See documents for additional scope. h. Fire Protection – As an extension of the existing fire protection sprinkler system, provide branch fire protection piping and sprinkler head coverage in IC leased space. See documents for additional scope. B. Type of Contract: Project will be constructed under a single-prime contract. 1. Prevailing Wage Rates are not required for this Project. 2. Bid Bonds and Performance bonds are not required for this Project. 1.4 SCHEDULE A. Work of this contract shall commence immediately upon notice to proceed from the Owner. B. Contract shall include pre-construction services to prepare for the construction, including weekly Owner’s meetings from date of Notice to Proceed until start of construction. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 001100- 3 SUMMARY QPK NO. 220157.00 011000 - 3 C. Construction Work of this Contract shall commence on January 18, 2021. 1. Contractor shall disconnect plumbing and electrical connections prior to removals and coordinate shut-offs with Owner. D. Final Completion of the Work shall be no later than Friday, July 23, 2021 at 5 p.m. 1.5 WORK UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors and Owner’s vendors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or other contracts. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts. B. Concurrent work: The Owner will award separate contracts for the following scopes (refer to schedules provide in Construction Drawings): 1. EMS (Educational Management Solutions): EMS will provide the platform (software and hardware) for the simulated training program conducted in the second floor exam rooms, operating and procedure rooms. Ithaca College will order all equipment and software. EMS will install all systems working closely with Ithaca College Information Technology Staff. Data wiring for cameras, computers and monitoring equipment will be installed by EMS and/or Ithaca IT in pathways provided under the General Construction Contract as indicated on the Construction Documents. Refer to attached Project Schedule for installation anticipated installation dates. 2. Audio Visual equipment: Ithaca College will hire a contractor to install all audio-visual equipment indicated on Tomei AV Consulting drawings attached for reference to the Construction Contract Drawings, including TV monitors and brackets. Coordinate installation of blocking provide by this contract. Data wiring and cabling will be in pathways provided under the General Construction Contract as indicated on the Construction Documents. 3. Laerdal Medical: Ithaca College will purchase simulation manikins and equipment and have delivered to the project site. General Contractor will unload delivery vehicle and transport equipment to second floor SIM Storage room, operating room or other location on the second floor as directed by the College. Delivery will consist of (7) small to medium size boxes and (3) large boxes. The College will unbox the equipment. 4. Diametrical USA: Ithaca College will purchase medical equipment, sinks, faucets and other medical related training items and have delivered to the project site. General Contractor General Contractor will unload delivery vehicle and transport equipment to second floor into the building where schedule. Contractor will store, handle, protect and install all equipment as scheduled. 5. Office Furnishings: Ithaca College will purchase office furnishings from their selected vendor. Vendor will deliver and install all new office furnishings. General Contractor to coordinate and facilitate vendor’s installation with overall work. 6. Classroom and Learning Center and other furnishings: Ithaca College will purchase office furnishings from their selected vendor. Vendor will deliver and install all new classroom and learning center and other furnishings. General Contractor to coordinate and facilitate vendor’s installation with overall work. 7. On Site Stored Furnishings installed by Ithaca College: Ithaca College will clean, transport and install previously salvaged furnishings stored in the basement of the Rothschild Building. Ithaca College will clean, and place stored refrigerators into ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 001100- 4 SUMMARY QPK NO. 220157.00 011000 - 4 locations shown on construction drwawings. General Contraction to coordinate and facilitate installation with overall work. 8. Stored Lockers from previous Salvage: General Contractor shall retrieve previously salvaged lockers to be installed in second floor breakroom from the basement of the Rothschild Building. Contractor shall clean, check operation, and touch up paint existing lockers as necessary to match new scheduled lockers. 9. Miscellaneous equipment: Ithaca College will purchase and install microwaves and washer and dryer. 10. Salvaged items to be reinstalled: Refer to documents for items currently in place on the project site that require General Contractor to salvage and reinstall. 1.6 LANDLORD/BUILDING OWNER PROVIDED WORK A. The Landlord/Building Owner is providing the exterior Ithaca College Lobby entrance storefront door. Hardware is specified by Ithaca College and installed by building owner’s contractor for these doors, with the exception of the Besam Automatic Door Operator to be installed by work of this contractor. Building Owner will provide a pathway to hardware requiring electronic functions to above ceiling for the Lobby 100 door. Ithaca College’s selected General Construction Contractor for this project will provide any additional pathways as identified on construction documents and complete the wiring to the locations indicated on the Ithaca College Construction Documents. B. The Landlord/Building Owner is providing doors and frames installed on the first floor of tenant wall perimeter partitions scheduled to be in place at time of construction of this contract. Hardware for these doors shall be provided and installed by work of this contract. Refer to construction drawings and hardware schedules for door openings and hardware. 1.7 BREAKOUT COST WORK: A. Bid form indicates work to be included in the Base Bid amount of this contract but the cost broken out for use by Ithaca College. These are not Alternates, but a summary of costs for scopes described on Bid Form and amounts shall be included in the Base Bid. 1.8 FUTURE WORK: A. Refer to contract drawings for portions of the work shown for coordination purposes but is not included in the scope of this phase of the project. The future work is for identified portions of the Interprofessional clinic area on the first floor. 1.9 ACCESS TO SITE A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project and Landlord’s right to perform work or to retain other contractors for concurrent work on in other parts of the building or adjacent structures. Landlord’s existing tenants must have the right to continue maintain access to their spaces and continue operations without interruption. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 001100- 5 SUMMARY QPK NO. 220157.00 011000 - 5 B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Limits: Confine construction operations to the designated floors. 2. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways, loading areas, and entrances serving premises clear and available to Landlord/Building Owner and its tenants, construction personnel and other service personnel, Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. C. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. 1.10 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS A. Ithaca College as Tenant/Owner Occupancy: Ithaca College will not occupy the building during construction. The site, driveways, walkways and public spaces and adjacent buildings will be occupied during the construction period. Cooperate with Landlord/Building Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Landlord/Building Owner usage and existing tenant uses. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Building Owner's other ongoing construction operations. 1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or in-use facilities. Do not close or obstruct driveways, parking spaces, walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Ithaca College and Landlord/Building Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide not less than 48-hours’ notice to Owner of activities that will affect Ithaca College or Landlord/Building Owner's and/or tenants operations. B. Owner’s Limited Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed portions of the Work, prior to Substantial Completion of the Work, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and limited occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. 1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied prior to Owner acceptance of the completed Work. 2. Obtain a Certificate of Completion from authorities having jurisdiction before limited Owner occupancy. 3. Before limited Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of Work. 4. Upon occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of Work. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 001100- 6 SUMMARY QPK NO. 220157.00 011000 - 6 1.11 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. 1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours of 7:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m., 7 days a week, unless otherwise indicated. Work outside normal working hours shall be coordinated and scheduled in advance with Ithaca College and City of Ithaca officials. 1. Costs for over-time and/or holiday- time shall be included in the Contractor’s bid, based upon Contractor’s schedule requirements to meet the Owner’s completion schedule. 2. Overtime work (night shifts and/or Holidays) is acceptable, provided the Contractor adheres to local noise control and lighting ordinances. Coordinate security and activity restrictions with Ithaca College representative. C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner not less than seven days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions. D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner. 1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed disruptive operations. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations. E. Controlled Substances: Use of controlled substances is not permitted. Use of tobacco products is restricted to designated areas identified (if any) locations at the pre-construction meeting. 1.12 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise. B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 001100- 7 SUMMARY QPK NO. 220157.00 011000 - 7 C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products: 1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections. 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations scheduled on Drawings. 1.13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS A. Contractor shall arrange for parking of their construction vehicles. Ithaca College will provide parking on the Ithaca campus for carpooling construction personnel. B. Any proposed staging areas outside the project work area shall be coordinated with the Ithaca College project representative. 1. Contractor can use existing on-site restroom facilities on second floor of the Project. Contractor shall provide temporary facilities if on site facilities are disrupted or interfere with progression of the work C. Proposed location of cranes, if utilized, shall be reviewed and coordinated with the Ithaca College representative for coordination with Landlord and authorities having jurisdiction. D. Arrange for and conduct a pre-installation conference for the crane installation. Obtain all required permits and approvals prior to use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUSTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 011000 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 012300 - 1 ALTERNATES QPK NO. 220157.00 012300 - 1 SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement. 2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternates into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. B. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. C. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 012300 - 2 ALTERNATES QPK NO. 220157.00 012300 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate No. 1 - Provide Virtual Skylight in lieu of Acoustical Panel Ceiling/Lighting. 1. Base Bid: Provide suspended acoustical panel suspended ceiling system and lighting with gypsum soffit over intercommunicating stair north of Hall 229 as indicated on drawings. 2. Alternate: Virtual Skylight, including fixture and complete installation as indicated on drawings as Alternate No. 1 in lieu of base bid acoustical panel ceiling and lighting. Gypsum soffit to remain. END OF SECTION 012300 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 012600 - 1 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES QPK NO. 220157.00 012600 - 1 SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. 1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, as "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." 1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Architect. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 012600 - 2 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES QPK NO. 220157.00 012600 - 2 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 6. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. C. Proposal Request Form: Use acceptable form for Proposal Requests. 1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect or Owner will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on acceptable form. 1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive unless other method of compensation indicated. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012600 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 012900 - 1 PAYMENT PROCEDURES QPK NO. 220157.00 012900 - 1 SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b. Submittals Schedule. c. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than ten days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 012900 - 2 PAYMENT PROCEDURES QPK NO. 220157.00 012900 - 2 b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Submit draft of Schedule of Values with appropriate breakdown as approved. 3. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value. 1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. 5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 6. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If specified, include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing. 7. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 8. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 012900 - 3 PAYMENT PROCEDURES QPK NO. 220157.00 012900 - 3 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: Progress payments shall be submitted to Architect by the twentyeighth of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the twenty-fifth day of the month, unless otherwise indicated in the Agreement. C. Payment Application Forms: Use acceptable forms. D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. E. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. F. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 4. Products list. 5. Schedule of unit prices (if any). 6. Submittals Schedule (final). 7. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 8. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 9. Copies of building permits. 10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 11. Initial progress report. 12. Report of preconstruction conference. 13. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 14. Performance and payment bonds. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 012900 - 4 PAYMENT PROCEDURES QPK NO. 220157.00 012900 - 4 15. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. 16. Initial settlement survey and damage report if required. G. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion (if any), submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. H. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. Final Waiver of Claims and Liens and Release of Rights (Use Ithaca College form provided with the contract). 5. Evidence that claims have been settled. 6. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012900 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 013000- 1 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 013000 - 1 SECTION 013000 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preconstruction meeting. B. Preconstruction Services C. Progress meetings. D. Daily progress reporting. E. Related Section: 013300 “Submittal Procedures” PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Owner will schedule a meeting after Notice of Award. B. Attendance Required: 1. Owner. 2. Architect. 3. MEP&FP Engineer. 4. Contractor. 5. Major Subcontractors. C. Agenda: 1. Execution of Owner – Contractor Agreement. 2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 3. Distribution of Contract Documents. 4. Submission of construction schedule. 5. Designation of personnel representing the parties in Contract, and the Architect. 6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures, and other Administrative requirements. 7. Review of long lead items. 8. Review of Ithaca College construction period procedures. 9. Review of procedures regarding Landlord’s ongoing operations, including construction and existing and possible new tenants occupying adjacent spaces. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 013000- 2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 013000 - 2 D. Architect shall record minutes and distribute copies within seven days after meeting to participants, with copies to Architect, Owner and participants. 3.2 PRECONSTRUCTION SERVICES A. Owner will make arrangements for project meetings every two weeks and preside at meetings. Contractor will prepare agenda with copies for participants. Weekly meetings may take place at discretion of Owner. B. Preconstruction meetings will be conducted from date of Award of Contract until start of Construction. C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Owner. D. Contractor shall prepare critical path schedule, including work by other contracts as listed in Section 011000 “Summary”. E. Contractor shall prepare a submittal log of all submittals. Contractor update log for review at weekly project meetings. F. Agenda for review and management of preconstruction activities: 1. Review of sub-contractor contract status. 2. Review of critical path for Preconstruction and Construction activities. 3. Identifications, tracking, and documentation of long-lead items purchase and delivery. 4. Planning for means and methods of site access issues and crane locations. 5. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 6. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 7. Maintenance of preconstruction schedule. 8. Other business relating to Work. G. Contractor shall record minutes and distribute copies within four days after meeting to participants, with copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule and administer weekly meetings throughout progress of the Work or as directed by the Owner's representative. B. Owner will make arrangements for weekly project meetings and preside at meetings unless otherwise determined. Contractor will prepare agenda with copies for participants. C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Owner, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. D. Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 013000- 3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 013000 - 3 4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals and contractors weekly updated submittal log. 6. Maintenance of progress schedule. 7. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 8. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 9. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 10. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 11. Other business relating to Work. E. Contractor shall record minutes and distribute copies within four days after meeting to participants, with copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.4 DAILY PROGRESS REPORTS AND SCHEDULES A. The Contractor shall provide written daily progress reports and schedule updates to the Owner’s representative for the Owner’s use in monitoring the progress of the work. 3.5 WEEKLY SUBMITTALS LOG A. The Contractor shall provide weekly submittals logs for review at preconstruction and construction progress meetings. END OF SECTION ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 013100- 1 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION QPK NO. 220157.00 013100 - 1 SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. General coordination procedures. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. RFIs. 4. Digital project management procedures. 5. Project meetings. 6. Submittal Logs for review at project meetings. B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility are assigned to a specific contractor. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. 2. Section 017300 "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-Architecting services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BIM: Building Information Modeling. B. RFI: Request for Information. Request from Owner, Architect or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 013100- 2 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION QPK NO. 220157.00 013100 - 2 1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. B. Key Personnel Names: Within 5 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 1. Post copies of list in project meeting room. Keep list current at all times. 1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. Coordination: Each contractor shall coordinate its construction operations with those of other contractors and entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Each contractor shall coordinate its own operations with operations included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. C. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. D. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and scheduled activities of other contractors performing work under separate contract to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 013100- 3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION QPK NO. 220157.00 013100 - 3 1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals and maintenance of contractor’s submittal log. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 1.6 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (RFI) A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information, clarification, or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. Architect will return without response those RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches. C. RFI Forms: Format as approved by Owner and Architect. 1. Attachments shall be electronic files in PDF format. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 013100- 4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION QPK NO. 220157.00 013100 - 4 D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow five working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods. d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs. 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt by Architect of additional information. 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures." a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 7 days of receipt of the RFI response. E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Include the following: 1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 9. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response. 1.7 DIGITAL PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES A. Use of Architect's Digital Data Files: Digital data files of Architect's CAD drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use during construction upon agreement for release of Architect’s liability. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 013100- 5 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION QPK NO. 220157.00 013100 - 5 1. Digital data files may be used by Contractor in preparing coordination drawings, Shop Drawings, and Project record Drawings. 2. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data files as they relate to Contract Drawings. 3. Digital Drawing Software Program: Contract Drawings are available in AutoCAD format. 4. Contractor shall agree to a waiver of liability for using files provided on behalf of the Owner. 5. The following digital data files will be furnished for each appropriate discipline as requested: a. Floor plans. b. Reflected ceiling plans. B. Newforma (web-based) Project Software: Use Architect's, Newforma Project software site for purposes of managing Project communication and documentation until Final Completion. 1. Newforma Project software site includes, at a minimum, the following features: a. Compilation of Project data, including Contractor, subcontractors, Architect, Architect's consultants, Owner, and other entities involved in Project. Include names of individuals and contact information. b. Creation, logging, tracking, and notification for Project communications required in other Specification Sections, including, but not limited to, RFIs, submittals, Minor Changes in the Work, Construction Change Directives, and Change Orders. c. Track status of each Project communication in real time, and log time and date when responses are provided. d. Procedures for handling PDFs or similar file formats, allowing markups by each entity. e. Processing and tracking of payment applications. f. Processing and tracking of contract modifications. g. Creating and distributing meeting minutes. h. Document management for Drawings, Specifications, and coordination drawings, including revision control. C. PDF Document Preparation: Where PDFs are required to be submitted to Architect, prepare as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item. 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 3. Certifications: Where digitally submitted certificates and certifications are required, provide a digital signature with digital certificate on where indicated. 1.8 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences that include the architect, Owner and major subcontractors at Project site unless otherwise indicated at a minimum every two weeks. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 013100- 6 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION QPK NO. 220157.00 013100 - 6 Meet with Owner’s Representative weekly. Owner may request weekly meetings with major subcontractors. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times a minimum of 10 working days prior to meeting. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: Owner will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect that will not affect the ability of the contractor to meet the project completion schedule. 1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Responsibilities and personnel assignments. b. Tentative construction schedule. c. Phasing. d. Critical work sequencing and long lead items. e. Designation of key personnel and their duties. f. Lines of communications. g. Use of web-based Project software. h. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. i. Procedures for RFIs. j. Procedures for testing and inspecting. k. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. l. Distribution of the Contract Documents. m. Submittal procedures. n. Sustainable design requirements. o. Preparation of Record Documents. p. Use of the premises and existing building. q. Work restrictions. r. Working hours. s. Owner's occupancy requirements. t. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. u. Procedures for moisture and mold control. v. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. w. Construction waste management and recycling. x. Parking availability. y. Office, work, and storage areas. z. Equipment deliveries and priorities. aa. First aid. bb. Security. cc. Progress cleaning. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 013100- 7 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION QPK NO. 220157.00 013100 - 7 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity when required by other sections and when required for coordination with other construction. 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Sustainable design requirements. i. Review of mockups. j. Possible conflicts. k. Compatibility requirements. l. Time schedules. m. Weather limitations. n. Manufacturer's written instructions. o. Warranty requirements. p. Compatibility of materials. q. Acceptability of substrates. r. Temporary facilities and controls. s. Space and access limitations. t. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. u. Testing and inspecting requirements. v. Installation procedures. w. Coordination with other work. x. Required performance results. y. Protection of adjacent work. z. Protection of construction and personnel. 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information. 5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at biweekly intervals. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 013100- 8 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION QPK NO. 220157.00 013100 - 8 1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Resolution of BIM component conflicts. 4) Status of submittals. 5) Status of sustainable design documentation. 6) Deliveries. 7) Off-site fabrication. 8) Access. 9) Site use. 10) Temporary facilities and controls. 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Status of correction of deficient items. 14) Field observations. 15) Status of RFIs. 16) Status of Proposal Requests. 17) Pending changes. 18) Status of Change Orders. 19) Pending claims and disputes. 20) Documentation of information for payment requests. 4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 013100- 9 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION QPK NO. 220157.00 013100 - 9 E. Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings at regular intervals as necessary to maintain the progress of work and meet the contract schedule. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings and preinstallation conferences. 1. Attendees: Each contractor, subcontractor, supplier and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meetings shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to combined Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. b. Schedule Updating: Revise combined Contractor's construction schedule after each coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting. c. Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Resolution of BIM component conflicts. 4) Status of submittals. 5) Deliveries. 6) Off-site fabrication. 7) Access. 8) Site use. 9) Temporary facilities and controls. 10) Work hours. 11) Hazards and risks. 12) Progress cleaning. 13) Quality and work standards. 14) Status of RFIs. 15) Proposal Requests. 16) Change Orders. 17) Pending changes. 3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 013100- 10 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION QPK NO. 220157.00 013100 - 10 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 013100 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 013300- 1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES QPK NO. 220157.00 013300 - 1 SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals." B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals." C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files. D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. 1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 013300- 2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES QPK NO. 220157.00 013300 - 2 2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first 21 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. 3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule. a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals. 4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format: a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. c. Submittal category: Action; informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. g. Scheduled date of fabrication. h. Scheduled dates for purchasing. i. Scheduled dates for installation. j. Activity or event number. 1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule. 3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals. 4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. B. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 10 business days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. 2. Resubmittal Review: Allow 5 business days for review of each resubmittal. C. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows: ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 013300- 3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES QPK NO. 220157.00 013300 - 3 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item. 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-061000.01.A). 3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Owner and Architect, containing the following information: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name of Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. f. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. g. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. h. Category and type of submittal. i. Submittal purpose and description. j. Specification Section number and title. k. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of multiple items. l. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. m. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. n. Related physical samples submitted directly. o. Indication of full or partial submittal. p. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. q. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. r. Other necessary identification. s. Remarks. D. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect. E. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal. F. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's stamp. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 013300- 4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES QPK NO. 220157.00 013300 - 4 G. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. H. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections. 1. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files. a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. 2. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted certificates and certifications where indicated. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information. 4. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 5. Submit Product Data in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 013300- 5 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES QPK NO. 220157.00 013300 - 5 C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional Architect if specified. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm), but no larger than 30 by 42 inches (750 by 1067 mm). 3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item. 3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record. 4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for qualitycontrol comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 013300- 6 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES QPK NO. 220157.00 013300 - 6 a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain one and Owner will retain one. E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated. 2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3. Number and name of room or space. 4. Location within room or space. 5. Submit product schedule in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. F. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of Architects and owners, and other information specified. G. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. H. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. I. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. J. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. K. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 013300- 7 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES QPK NO. 220157.00 013300 - 7 L. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. M. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: 1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use. N. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. O. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. P. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. Q. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. 2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 013300- 8 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES QPK NO. 220157.00 013300 - 8 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. 2. Design Professional shall be licensed and registered to practice in New York State and have a minimum of $1,000,000 of professional liability coverage in addition to statutory requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action. B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect. D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review. E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action. 3.3 CONTRACTOR’S SUBMITTAL TRACKING A. Contractor shall maintain a submittal log, updated weekly. Contractor shall provide copies of submittal log to be reviewed at each pre-construction and construction project meeting. END OF SECTION 013300 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 014110 - 1 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS & TESTING QPK NO. 220157.00 014110 - 1 SECTION 014110 – SPECIAL INSPECTIONS & TESTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related documents attached to this specification: 1. Statement of Special Inspections. 2. Schedule of Special Inspection Services. 3. Final Report of Special Inspections. 1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. This specification section delineates Special Inspection and Testing Requirements for the following construction: 1. Structural. 2. Architectural. B. Special Inspections and Testing shall be in accordance with Chapter 17 of the 2018 International Building Code and as modified by 2020 Building Code of New York State. C. This specification section is intended to inform the Contractor of the Owner’s quality assurance program and the extent of the Contractor’s responsibilities. This specification section is also intended to notify the Special Inspector, Testing Laboratory, and other Agents of the Special Inspector of their requirements and responsibilities. 1.3 SCHEDULE OF INSPECTIONS AND TESTS A. Required inspections and tests are described in the attached Schedule of Special Inspection Services and in the individual specification Sections for the items to be inspected or tested. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. See Table herein for Special Inspector qualifications. The Special Inspector and Testing Laboratory shall be approved by the Registered Design Professional (RDP) and the local Building Official. B. The testing laboratory shall either maintain or contract with a full time licensed Professional Engineer in the State of New York who shall certify all test reports. The Engineer shall be responsible for the training of the testing technicians and shall be in responsible charge of the field and laboratory testing operations. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 014110 - 2 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS & TESTING QPK NO. 220157.00 014110 - 2 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. The Special Inspector and Testing Laboratory shall submit to the RDP and Building Official for review a copy of their qualifications which shall include the names and qualifications of each of the individual inspectors and technicians who will be performing inspections or tests. B. The Special Inspector and Testing Laboratory shall disclose any past or present business relationship or potential conflict of interest with the Contractor or any of the Subcontractors whose work will be inspected or tested. 1.6 PAYMENT A. The Owner shall engage and pay for the services of the Special Inspector and Testing Laboratory. B. If any materials which require Special Inspections are fabricated in a plant which is not located within 100 miles of the project, the Contractor shall be responsible for the travel expenses of the Special Inspector or Testing Laboratory. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of any retesting or re-inspection of work which fails to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.7 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Special Inspector so that the Special Inspections and testing may be performed without hindrance. B. The Contractor shall review the Statement of Special Inspections and shall be responsible for coordinating and scheduling inspections and tests. The Contractor shall notify the Special Inspector or Testing Laboratory at least 24 hours in advance of a required inspection or test. Uninspected work that required inspection may be rejected solely on that basis. C. The Contractor shall provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access to the work to be inspected or tested, to obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of products to be tested, to facilitate tests and inspections, storage and curing of test samples. D. The Contractor shall keep at the project site the latest set of construction drawings, field sketches, approved shop drawings, and specifications for use by the inspectors and testing technicians. E. The Special Inspection program shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his obligation to perform work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents or from implementing an effective Quality Control program. All work that is to be subjected to Special Inspections shall first be reviewed by the Contractor’s quality control personnel. F. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for construction site safety. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 014110 - 3 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS & TESTING QPK NO. 220157.00 014110 - 3 1.8 LIMITS OF AUTHORITY A. The Special Inspector or Testing Laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. The Special Inspector or Testing Laboratory will not have control nor responsibility over the Contractor’s means and methods of construction. C. The Special Inspector or Testing Laboratory shall not be responsible for construction site safety. D. The Special Inspector or Testing Laboratory has no authority to stop the work. 1.9 STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS A. The Statement of Special Inspections will be prepared by the Registered Design Professional (RDP). B. The Statement of Special Inspections shall be submitted with the application for Building Permit. 1.10 RECORDS AND REPORTS A. Detailed daily reports shall be prepared of each inspection or test submitted to the Special Inspector. Reports shall include: 1. date of test or inspection 2. name of inspector or technician 3. location of specific areas tested or inspected 4. description of test or inspection and results 5. applicable ASTM standard 6. weather conditions 7. construction documents referenced for inspections and tests. B. The Special Inspector shall submit reports to the RDP and Building Official daily. Hand written reports may be submitted if final typed copies are not available. C. Any discrepancies from the Contract Documents found during a Special Inspection shall be immediately reported to the Contractor. If the discrepancies are not corrected, the Special Inspector shall notify the RDP and Building Official. Reports shall document all discrepancies identified and the corrective action taken. D. The Testing Laboratory shall immediately notify the Special Inspector and the RDP and Building Official by telephone or fax of any test results which fail to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents E. At the completion of the work requiring Special Inspections, each Special Inspector and Testing Laboratory shall provide a statement to the RDP and Building Official that all work was completed in substantial conformance with the Contract Documents and that all appropriate inspections and tests were performed. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 014110 - 4 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS & TESTING QPK NO. 220157.00 014110 - 4 1.11 FINAL REPORT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS A. The Final Report of Special Inspections shall be completed by the Special Inspector and submitted to the RDP and Building Official prior to the issuance of a Certificate of Use and Occupancy. B. The Final Report of Special Inspections will certify that all required inspections have been performed and will itemize any discrepancies that were not corrected or resolved. SPECIAL INSPECTOR QUALIFICATIONS CATEGORY CODE REFERENCE MINIMUM QUALIFICATIONS Reinforced Concrete 1705.3 1. Current ICC Reinforced Concrete Special Inspector or ACI Concrete Construction Inspector. 2. Concrete field testing can be by an ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician with Grade 1 Certification. 3. Engineer-in-Training (EIT) with relevant experience. 4. Licensed Professional Engineer (P.E.) with relevant experience. Welding 1705.2 1705.2.2 1. Current AWS Certified Welding Inspector. 2. Current ICC Structural Steel and welding certificate plus one year of relevant experience. 3. Current Level II Certification form the American Society for Nondestructive Testing (NDT). 4. Current NDT Level III provided previously certified as NDT Level II. High-strength Bolting & Steel Frame Inspection 1705.2 1. Current ICC Structural Steel and Welding Certificate and one year of relevant experience. 2. EIT with relevant experience. 3. P.E. with relevant experience. Masonry 1705.4 1. Current ICC Structural Masonry Certificate and one year of relevant experience. 2. EIT with relevant experience. 3. P.E. with relevant experience. Sprayed Fireproofing Intumescent Fireresistant coatings 1705.14 1705.15 1. Current ICC Spray-Applied Fireproofing Certificate and one year of relevant experience. 2. NFCA SFRM/IFRM Inspector Certificate and one year of relevant experience. 3. EIT with relevant experience. 4. P.E. with relevant experience. Excavation and Filling; Verification of Soils; Piling & Drilled Piers; Helical Piles, Driven Deep Foundations 1705.6 1705.7 1705.8 1705.9 1. Current Level II Certificate in geotechnical engineering technology/construction from the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET). 2. EIT with relevant experience. 3. P.E. with relevant experience. Inspection of Fabricators 1704.2.5 1. Structural Steel: See welding requirements. Exterior Insulation and Finish System 1705.16 1. RDP with relevant experience. 2. EIT with relevant experience. Smoke Control 1705.18 1. The RDP responsible for design. Seismic Resistance 1705.12 1705.13 1. See the applicable categories in this table. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 014110 - 5 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS & TESTING QPK NO. 220157.00 014110 - 5 Wood Construction 1705.5 1. EIT with relevant experience. 2. P.E. with relevant experience. Wind Resistance 1705.11 See the applicable categories in this table. Fire-resistant Penetrations and Joints 1705.17 1. Current ICC Firestop Inspector Certificate and one year of relevant experience. 2. Current IFC (International Firestop Council) Firestop Inspector Certificate and one year of relevant experience. 3. EIT with relevant experience. 4. P.E. with relevant experience. PART 2 - (NOT USED) PART 3 - (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 014110 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 014110 - 2 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTING 014110 - 2 QPK No. 220157.00 Schedule of Special Inspection Services This Statement of Special Inspections includes the following building systems: Special Cases Mechanical & Electrical Components Steel Construction Storage Racks Cold-Formed Steel Framing Spray Fire-Resistant Materials Concrete Construction Mastic & Intumescent Fire-Resistant Coatings Masonry Construction Exterior Insulation & Finish Systems Wood Construction Fire-Resistant Penetrations and Joints Soils and Foundations Smoke Control Systems Architectural Components Other Special Inspection Agencies Firm Address, Telephone, e-mail 1. Special Inspection Coordinator QPK Design, LLP 450 S. Salina Street, Ste. 500 Syracuse, NY 13201 2. Inspector To be determined 3. Inspector To be determined 4. Testing Agency To be determined 5. Testing Agency To be determined 6. Other SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTION SERVICES Per IBC Section 1704 of the 2018 International Building Code the following items require Special Inspections. Special Inspection items may have been added by the Registered Design Professional. PROJECT: Ithaca College Physician Assistant Program- Rothschild Renovation OWNER: Ithaca College MATERIAL / ACTIVITY SERVICE APPLICABLE TO THIS PROJECT Y/N EXTENT AGENT* SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTING 014110 - 2 QPK No. 220157.00 1704.2.5 Inspection of Fabricators Verify fabrication/quality control procedures In-plant review (3) Y Periodic 1705.1.1 Special Cases (work unusual in nature, including but not limited to alternative materials and systems, unusual design applications, materials and systems with special manufacturer's requirements) Submittal review, shop (3) and/or field inspection N 1705.2 Steel Construction 1. Fabricator and erector documents (Verify reports and certificates as listed in AISC 360, chapter N, paragraph 3.2 for compliance with construction documents) Submittal Review Y Each submittal 2. Material verification of structural steel Shop (3) and field inspection Y Periodic 3. Embedments (Verify diameter, grade, type, length, embedment. See 1705.3 for anchors) Field inspection Y Continuous 4. Verify member locations, braces, stiffeners, and application of joint details at each connection comply with construction documents Field inspection Y Periodic 5. Structural steel welding: a. Inspection tasks Prior to Welding (Observe, or perform for each welded joint or member, the QA tasks listed in AISC 360, Table N5.4-1) Shop (3) and field inspection Y Observe or Perform as noted (4) b. Inspection tasks During Welding (Observe, or perform for each welded joint or member, the QA tasks listed in AISC 360, Table N5.4 1) Shop (3) and field inspection Y Observe (4) c. Inspection tasks After Welding (Observe, or perform for each welded joint or member, the QA tasks listed in AISC 360, Table N5.4 3) Shop (3) and field inspection Y Observe or Perform as noted (4) d. Nondestructive testing (NDT) of welded joints: see Commentary 1) Complete penetration groove welds 5/16" or greater in risk category III or IV Shop (3) or field ultrasonic testing - 100% N Periodic 2) Complete penetration groove welds 5/16" or greater in risk category II Shop (3) or field ultrasonic testing - 10% of welds minimum Y Periodic 3) Thermally cut surfaces of access holes when material t > 2" Shop (3) or field magnetic Partical or Penetrant testing Y Periodic 4) Welded joints subject to fatigue when required by AISC 360, Appendix 3, Table A-3.1 Shop (3) or field radiographic or Ultrasonic testing N Periodic 5) Fabricator's NDT reports when fabricator performs NDT Verify reports Y Each submittal (5) 6. Structural steel bolting: Shop (3) and field inspection a. Inspection tasks Prior to Bolting (Observe, or perform tasks for each bolted connection, in accordance with Y Observe or Perform SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTION SERVICES Per IBC Section 1704 of the 2018 International Building Code the following items require Special Inspections. Special Inspection items may have been added by the Registered Design Professional. PROJECT: Ithaca College Physician Assistant Program- Rothschild Renovation OWNER: Ithaca College MATERIAL / ACTIVITY SERVICE APPLICABLE TO THIS PROJECT Y/N EXTENT AGENT* SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTING 014110 - 3 QPK No. 220157.00 a. Mechanical Connections: Sizes at locations of all fasteners. Field inspection N Periodic b. Welding: Shop at field welds inspected per AWS D.3 Shop (3) and field inspection N Periodic 5. Cold-formed steel trusses spanning 60 feet or greater QA tasks listed in AISC 360, Table N5.6-1) as noted (4) b. Inspection tasks During Bolting (Observe the QA tasks listed in AISC 360, Table N5.6-2) Y Observe (4) 1) Pre-tensioned and slip-critical joints a) Turn-of-nut with matching markings Y Periodic b) Direct tension indicator Y Periodic c) Twist-off type tension control bolt Y Periodic d) Turn-of-nut without matching markings Y Continuous e) Calibrated wrench Y Continuous 2) Snug-tight joints Y Periodic c. Inspection tasks After Bolting (Perform tasks for each bolted connection in accordance with QA tasks listed in AISC 360, Table N5.6-3) Y Perform (4) 7. Inspection of steel elements of composite construction prior to concrete placement in accordance with QA tasks listed in AISC 360, Table N6.1 Shop (3) and field inspection and testing N Observe or Perform as noted (4) 1705.2.2 Steel Construction Other Than Structural Steel 1. Material verification of cold-formed steel deck: a. Identification markings Field inspection Y Periodic b. Manufacturer's certified test reports Submittal Review Y Each submittal 2. Connection of cold-formed steel deck to supporting structure: Shop (3) and field inspection a. Welding Y Periodic b. Other fasteners (in accordance with AISC 360, Section N6) Y 1) Verify fasteners are in conformance with approved submittal Y Periodic 2) Verify fastener installation is in conformance with approved submittal and manufacturer's recommendations Y Periodic 3. Reinforcing steel Shop (3) and field inspection a. Verification of weldability of steel other than ASTM A706 N Periodic b. Reinforcing steel resisting flexural and axial forces in intermediate and special moment frames, boundary elements of special concrete structural walls and shear reinforcement N Continuous c. Shear reinforcement N Continuous d. Other reinforcing steel N Periodic 4.Cold-formed framing: SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTION SERVICES Per IBC Section 1704 of the 2018 International Building Code the following items require Special Inspections. Special Inspection items may have been added by the Registered Design Professional. PROJECT: Ithaca College Physician Assistant Program- Rothschild Renovation OWNER: Ithaca College MATERIAL / ACTIVITY SERVICE APPLICABLE TO THIS PROJECT Y/N EXTENT AGENT* SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTING 014110 - 4 QPK No. 220157.00 a. Verify temporary and permanent restraint/bracing are installed in accordance with the approved truss submittal package Field inspection N Periodic 1705.3 Concrete Construction 1. Inspection of reinforcing steel installation (see 1705.2.2 for welding) Shop (3) and field inspection Y Periodic. 2. Inspection of prestressing steel installation Shop (3) and field inspection Y Periodic a. Verify temporary and permanent restraint/bracing are installed in accordance with the approved truss submittal package Field inspection Periodic 3. Inspection of anchors cast in concrete where allowable loads have been increased per section 1908.5 or where strength design is used Shop (3) and field inspection N Continuous 4. Inspection of anchors and reinforcing steel post-installed in hardened concrete: Per research reports including verification of anchor type, anchor dimensions, hole dimensions, hole cleaning procedures, anchor spacing, edge distances, concrete minimum thickness, anchor embedment and tightening torque Field inspection Y Periodic or as required by the research report issued by an approved source 5. Verify use of approved design mix Shop (3) and field inspection Y Periodic 6. Fresh concrete sampling, perform slump and air content tests and determine temperature of concrete Shop (3) and field inspection Y Continuous 7. Inspection of concrete and shotcrete placement for proper application techniques Shop (3) and field inspection Y Continuous 8. Inspection for maintenance of specified curing temperature and techniques Shop (3) and field inspection Y Periodic 9. Inspection of prestressed concrete: Shop (3) and field inspection N a. Application of prestressing force N Continuous b. Grouting of bonded prestressing tendons in the seismic-force- resisting system N Continuous 10. Erection of precast concrete members a. Inspect in accordance with construction documents Field inspection N In accordance with construction documents b. Perform inspections of welding and bolting in accordance with Section 1705.2 Field inspection N In accordance with Section 1705.2 11. Verification of in-situ concrete strength, prior to stressing of tendons in post tensioned concrete and prior to removal of shores and forms from beams and structural slabs Review field testing and laboratory reports N Periodic 12. Inspection of formwork for shape, lines, location and dimensions Field inspection Y Periodic 13. Concrete strength testing and verification of compliance with Field testing and review of Y Periodic SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTION SERVICES Per IBC Section 1704 of the 2018 International Building Code the following items require Special Inspections. Special Inspection items may have been added by the Registered Design Professional. PROJECT: Ithaca College Physician Assistant Program- Rothschild Renovation OWNER: Ithaca College MATERIAL / ACTIVITY SERVICE APPLICABLE TO THIS PROJECT Y/N EXTENT AGENT* SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTING 014110 - 5 QPK No. 220157.00 construction documents laboratory reports 1705.4 Masonry Construction (A) Level A, B and C Quality Assurance: 1. Verify compliance with approved submittals Field Inspection N Periodic (B) Level B Quality Assurance: 1. Verification of f'm and f'AAC prior to construction Testing by unit strength method or prism test method N Periodic (C) Level C Quality Assurance: 1. Verification of f'm and f'AAC prior to construction and for every 5,000 SF during construction Testing by unit strength method or prism test method N Periodic 2. Verification of proportions of materials in premixed or preblended mortar, prestressing grout, and grout other than self- consolidating grout, as delivered to the project site Field inspection N Continuous 3. Verify placement of masonry units Field Inspection N Periodic (D) Levels B and C Quality Assurance: 1. Verification of Slump Flow and Visual Stability Index (VSI) of self- consolidating grout as delivered to the project Field testing N Continuous 2. Verify compliance with approved submittals Field inspection N Periodic 3. Verify proportions of site-mixed mortar, grout and prestressing grout for bonded tendons Field Inspection N Periodic 4. Verify grade, type, and size of reinforcement and anchor bolts, and prestressing tendons and anchorages Field Inspection N Periodic 5. Verify construction of mortar joints Field Inspection N Periodic 6. Verify placement of reinforcement, connectors, and prestressing tendons and anchorages Field Inspection N Level B - Periodic Level C - Continuous 7. Verify grout space prior to grouting Field Inspection N Level B - Periodic N Level C - Continuous 8. Verify placement of grout and prestressing grout for bonded tendons Field Inspection N Continuous 9. Verify size and location of structural masonry elements Field Inspection N Periodic 10. Verify type, size, and location of anchors, including details of anchorage of masonry to structural members, frames, or other construction. Field inspection N Level B - Periodic N Level C - Continuous 11. Verify welding of reinforcement (see 1705.2.2) Field inspection N Continuous SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTION SERVICES Per IBC Section 1704 of the 2018 International Building Code the following items require Special Inspections. Special Inspection items may have been added by the Registered Design Professional. PROJECT: Ithaca College Physician Assistant Program- Rothschild Renovation OWNER: Ithaca College MATERIAL / ACTIVITY SERVICE APPLICABLE TO THIS PROJECT Y/N EXTENT AGENT* SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTING 014110 - 6 QPK No. 220157.00 12. Verify preparation, construction, and protestion of masonry during cold weather (temperature below 40oF) or hot weather (temperature above 90oF) Field inspection N Periodic 13. Verify application and measurement of prestressing force Field Inspection N Continuous 14. Verify placement of AAC masonry units and construction of thin-bed mortar joints (first 5000 SF of AAC masonry) Field inspection N Continuous 15. Verify placement of AAC masonry units and construction of thin-bed mortar joints (after the first 5000 SF of AAC masonry) Field inspection N Level B - Periodic N Level C - Continuous 16. Verify properties of thin-bed mortar for AAC masonry (first 5000 SF of AAC masonry) Field inspection N Continuous 17. Verify properties of thin-bed mortar forAAC masonry (after the first 5000 SF of AAC masonry) Field inspection N Level B - Periodic N Level C - Continuous 18. Prepare grout and mortar specimens Field testing N Level B - Periodic N Level C - Continuous 19. Observe preparation of prisms Field inspection N Level B - Periodic N Level C Continuous 1705.5 Wood Construction 1. Inspection of the fabrication process of wood structural elements and assemblies in accordance with Section 1704.2.5 and shearwalls In-plant review (3) Y Periodic 2. Diaphragms: verify grade and thickness of structural panel sheathing agree with approved building plans and shearwalls. Field inspection Y Periodic 3. Diaphragms, verify nominal size of framing members at adjoining panel edges, nail or staple diameter and length, number of fastener lines, and that spacing between fasteners in each line and at edge margins agree with approved building plans. Installation of hold-down and tie-down systems. Field inspection Y Periodic 4. Metal-plate-connected wood trusses spanning 60 feet or greater: verify temporary and permanent restraint/bracing are installed in accordance with the approved truss submittal package. Field inspection N Periodic 5. Connections: Y a. Installation of metal framing anchors Field inspection Y Periodic b. Attachment of multi-ply members Field inspection Y Periodic SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTION SERVICES Per IBC Section 1704 of the 2018 International Building Code the following items require Special Inspections. Special Inspection items may have been added by the Registered Design Professional. PROJECT: Ithaca College Physician Assistant Program- Rothschild Renovation OWNER: Ithaca College MATERIAL / ACTIVITY SERVICE APPLICABLE TO THIS PROJECT Y/N EXTENT AGENT* SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTING 014110 - 7 QPK No. 220157.00 c. Installation of connections spec Field inspection Y Periodic 6. Framing and Details Y a. Verification of load bearing framing member size and configuration Field inspection Y Periodic 1705.6 Soils 1. Verify materials below shallow foundations are adequate to achieve the design bearing capacity. Field inspection Periodic 2. Verify excavations are extended to proper depth and have reached proper material. Field inspection Periodic 3. Perform classification and testing of controlled fill materials. Field inspection Periodic 4. Verify use of proper materials, densities, and lift thicknesses during placement and compaction of controlled fill Field inspection Continuous 5. Prior to placement of controlled fill, observe subgrade and verify that site has been prepared properly Field inspection Periodic 1705.7 Driven Deep Foundations 1. Verify element materials, sizes and lengths comply with requirements Field inspection Continuous 2. Determine capacities of test elements and conduct additional load tests, as required Field inspection Continuous 3. Observe driving operations and maintain complete and accurate records for each element Field inspection Continuous 4. Verify placement locations and plumbness, confirm type and size of hammer, record number of blows per foot of penetration, determine required penetrations to achieve design capacity, record tip and butt elevations and document any damage to foundation element Field inspection Continuous 5. For steel elements, perform additional inspections per Section 1705.2 See Section 1705.2 See Section 1705.2 6. For concrete elements and concrete-filled elements, perform additional inspections per Section 1705.3 See Section 1705.3 See Section 1705.3 7. For specialty elements, perform additional inspections as determined by the registered design professional in responsible charge Field inspection In accordance with construction documents 8. Perform additional inspections and tests in accordance with the construction documents Field Inspection and testing In accordance with construction documents 1705.8 Cast-in-Place Deep Foundations 1.Observe drilling operations and maintain complete and accurate records for each element Field inspection Continuous 2. Verify placement locations and plumbness, confirm element diameters, bell diameters (if SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTION SERVICES Per IBC Section 1704 of the 2018 International Building Code the following items require Special Inspections. Special Inspection items may have been added by the Registered Design Professional. PROJECT: Ithaca College Physician Assistant Program- Rothschild Renovation OWNER: Ithaca College MATERIAL / ACTIVITY SERVICE APPLICABLE TO THIS PROJECT Y/N EXTENT AGENT* SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTING 014110 - 8 QPK No. 220157.00 applicable), lengths, embedment into bedrock (if applicable) and adequate end-bearing strata capacity. Record concrete or grout volumes Field inspection Continuous 3. For concrete elements, perform additional inspections in accordance with Section 1705.3 See Section 1705.3 See Section 1705.3 4. Perform additional inspections and tests in accordance with the construction documents Field Inspection and testing In accordance with construction documents 1705.9 Helical Pile Foundations 1. Verify installation equipment, pile dimensions, tip elevations, final depth, final installation torque and other data as required. Field inspection Continuous 2. Perform additional inspections and tests in accordance with the construction documents Field Inspection and testing In accordance with construction documents 1705.11.1 Structural Wood Special Inspections For Wind Resistance 1. Inspection of field gluing operations of elements of the main windforce-resisting system Field inspection N Continuous 2. Inspection of nailing, bolting, anchoring and other fastening of components within the main windforce-resisting system Shop (3) and field inspection Y Periodic 1705.11.2 Cold-formed Steel Special Inspections For Wind Resistance 1.Inspection during welding operations of elements of the main windforce-resisting system Shop (3) and field inspection N Periodic 2.Inspections for screw attachment, bolting, anchoring and other fastening of components within the main windforce-resisting system Shop (3) and field inspection N Periodic 1705.11.3 Wind-resisting Components 1. Roof cladding Shop (3) and field inspection N Periodic 2. Wall cladding Shop (3) and field inspection N Periodic 1705.12.1 Structural Steel Special Inspections for Seismic Resistance Inspection of structural steel in accordance with AISC 341 Shop (3) and field inspection N In accordance with AISC 341 1705.12.2 Structural Wood Special Inspections for Seismic Resistance 1. Inspection of field gluing operations of elements of the seismic- force resisting system Field inspection N Continuous 2. Inspection of nailing, bolting, anchoring and other fastening of components within the seismic-force- resisting system Shop (3) and field inspection N Periodic 1705.12.3 Cold-formed Steel Light-Frame Construction SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTION SERVICES Per IBC Section 1704 of the 2018 International Building Code the following items require Special Inspections. Special Inspection items may have been added by the Registered Design Professional. PROJECT: Ithaca College Physician Assistant Program- Rothschild Renovation OWNER: Ithaca College MATERIAL / ACTIVITY SERVICE APPLICABLE TO THIS PROJECT Y/N EXTENT AGENT* SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTING 014110 - 9 QPK No. 220157.00 Special Inspections for Seismic Resistance 1. Inspection during welding operations of elements of the seismic- force-resisting system Shop (3) and field inspection N Periodic 2. Inspections for screw attachment, bolting, anchoring and other fastening of components within the seismic- force-resisting system Shop (3) and field inspection N Periodic 1705.12.4 Designated Seismic Systems Verification Inspect and verify that that the component label, anchorage or mounting conforms to the certificate of compliance in accordance with Section 1705.12.3 Field inspection N Periodic 1705.12.5 Architectural Components Special Inspections for Seismic Resistance 1. Inspection during the erection and fastening of exterior cladding and interior and exterior veneer Field inspection N Periodic 2. Inspection during the erection and fastening of interior and exterior nonbearing walls Field inspection N Periodic 3. Inspection during anchorage of access floors Field inspection N Periodic 1705.12.6 Mechanical and Electrical Components Special Inspections for Seismic Resistance 1. Inspection during the anchorage of electrical equipment for emergency or standby power systems. (SDC C,D,E,F) Field inspection Periodic 2. Inspection during the anchorage of other electrical equipment. (SDC E,F) Field inspection Periodic 3. Inspection during installation and anchorage of piping systems designed to carry hazardous materials, and their associated mechanical units (SDC C,D,E,F) Field inspection Periodic 4. Inspection during the installation and anchorage of HVAC ductwork that will contain hazardous materials. (SDC C,D,E,F) Field inspection Periodic 5. Inspection during the anchorage of storage racks 8 feet or greater in height Field inspection Periodic 1705.12.7 Storage Racks Special Inspections for Seismic Resistance (SDC D,E,F) Inspection during the anchorage of storage racks 8 feet or greater in height Field inspection N Periodic 1705.12.8 Seismic Isolation Systems (SDC B,C,D,E,F) Inspection during the fabrication and installation of isolator units and energy dissipation devices used as part of the seismic isolation system Shop and field inspection N Periodic SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTION SERVICES Per IBC Section 1704 of the 2018 International Building Code the following items require Special Inspections. Special Inspection items may have been added by the Registered Design Professional. PROJECT: Ithaca College Physician Assistant Program- Rothschild Renovation OWNER: Ithaca College MATERIAL / ACTIVITY SERVICE APPLICABLE TO THIS PROJECT Y/N EXTENT AGENT* SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTING 014110 - 10 QPK No. 220157.00 1705.12 Concrete Reinforcement Testing and Qualification for Seismic Resistance 1. Review certified mill test reports for each shipment of reinforcement used to resist earthquake-induced flexural and axial forces in reinforced concrete special moment frames, special structural walls, and coupling beams connecting special structural walls Review certified mill test reports N Each shipment 2. Verify reinforcement weldability of ASTM A615 reinforcement used to resist earthquake-induced flexural and axial forces in reinforced concrete special moment frames, special structural walls, and coupling beams connecting special structural walls Review test reports N Each shipment 1705.13.1 Structural Steel Testing and Qualification for Seismic Resistance Test in accordance with the quality assurance requirements of AISC 341 Shop (3) and field testing N Per AISC 341 1705.13.2 Seismic Certification of Nonstructural Components Review certificate of compliance for designated seismic system components. Certificate of compliance review N Each submittal 1705.13.4 Seismic Isolation Systems Test seismic isolation system in accordance with ASCE 7 Section 17.8 Prototype testing N Per ASCE 7 1705.14 Sprayed Fire-resistant Materials 1. Verify surface condition preparation of structural members Field inspection N Periodic 3. Verify average thickness of sprayed fire-resistant materials applied to structural members Field inspection N Periodic 4. Verify density of the sprayed fire- resistant material complies with approved fire-resistant design Field inspection and testing N Per IBC Section 1705.13.5 5. Verify the cohesive/adhesive bond strength of the cured sprayed fire- resistant material Field inspection and testing N Per IBC Section 1705.13.6 1705.15 Mastic and Intumescent Fire-Resistant Coatings Inspect mastic and intumescent fire- resistant coatings applied to structural elements and decks Field inspection Periodic 1705.16 Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) 1. Verify materials, details and installations are per the approved construction documents Field inspection Y Periodic SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTION SERVICES Per IBC Section 1704 of the 2018 International Building Code the following items require Special Inspections. Special Inspection items may have been added by the Registered Design Professional. PROJECT: Ithaca College Physician Assistant Program- Rothschild Renovation OWNER: Ithaca College MATERIAL / ACTIVITY SERVICE APPLICABLE TO THIS PROJECT Y/N EXTENT AGENT* SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTING 014110 - 11 QPK No. 220157.00 2. Inspection of water-resistive barrier over sheathing substrate Field inspection N Periodic 1705.17 Fire-Resistant Penetrations and Joints 1. Inspect penetration firestop systems Field testing Y Per ASTM E2174 2. Inspect fire-resistant joint systems Field testing Y Per ASTM E2393 1705.18 Smoke Control Systems 1. Leakage testing and recording of device locations prior to concealment Field testing N Periodic 2. Prior to occupancy and after sufficient completion, pressure difference testing, flow measurements, and detection and control verification Field testing N Periodic Notes: 1. The inspection and testing agent(s) shall be engaged by the Owner or the Owner's Agent, and not by the Contractor or Subcontractor whose work is to be inspected or tested. Any conflict of interest must be disclosed to the Building Official prior to commencing work. The qualifications of the Special Inspector(s) and/or testing agencies may be subject to the approval of the Building Official and/or the Design Professional. 2. The list of Special Inspectors may be submitted as a separate document, if noted so above. 3. Special Inspections as required by Section 1704.2.5 are not required where the fabricator is approved in accordance with IBC Section 1704.2.5.2 4. Observe on a random basis, operations need not be delayed pending these inspections. Perform these tasks for each welded joint, bolted connection, or steel element. 5. NDT of welds completed in an approved fabricator’s shop may be performed by that fabricator when approved by the AHJ. Refer to AISC 360 N7. CASE Form 102 · Final Report of Special Inspections · ©CASE 2001 Final Report of Special Inspections CASE Council of American Structural Engineers Project: Ithaca College Physician Assistant Program – Rothschild Renovation Location: Rothschild Building, Ithaca Commons, 215 East State Street, Ithaca, NY 14850 Owner: Ithaca College Owner’s Address: 953 Danby Road Ithaca, NY 14850 Architect of Record: QPK Design, LLP Structural Engineer of Record: QPK Design, LLP To the best of my information, knowledge and belief, the Special Inspections required for this project, and itemized in the Statement of Special Inspections submitted for permit, have been performed and all discovered discrepancies have been reported and resolved other than the following: Comments: (Attach continuation sheets if required to complete the description of corrections.) Interim reports submitted prior to this final report form a basis for and are to be considered an integral part of this final report. Respectfully submitted, Special Inspector James F. Kaplan (Type or print name) Signature Date Licensed Professional Seal ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 015000- 1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS QPK NO. 220157.00 015000 - 1 SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." 1.4 USE CHARGES A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, testing agencies and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Water Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges if not disabled by the construction operations. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. Provide temporary water from other buildings or locations if existing building water service is disrupted due to construction operations. C. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. Provide temporary power from generators or adjacent buildings if existing building power is disrupted due to construction operations. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities and utility hookups. If on site staging areas for construction and parking areas for construction personnel are allowed, indicate locations. B. Moisture-Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and construction from water absorption and damage. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 015000- 2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS QPK NO. 220157.00 015000 - 2 1. Describe delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water absorption or water damage. 2. Indicate procedures for discarding water-damaged materials, protocols for mitigating water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water-damaged Work. C. Dust- and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the dust- and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. Include the following: 1. Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of work. 2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing. 3. Location of proposed air-filtration system discharge. 4. Waste handling procedures. 5. Other dust-control measures. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures and meeting requirements of the Building and Fire Code of New York State. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 015000- 3 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS QPK NO. 220157.00 015000 - 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. 1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 011000 "Summary." B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. B. Water Service: Connect to building’s existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. C. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel if on identified on site facilities are not available. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. D. Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust, fumes, and odors from entering occupied areas. 1. Prior to commencing work, isolate the HVAC system in area where work is to be performed according to coordination drawings. a. Disconnect supply and return ductwork in work area from HVAC systems servicing occupied areas. b. Perform daily construction cleanup and final cleanup. E. Electric Power Service: Connect to building’s existing electric power service. Maintain equipment in a condition acceptable to Owner. F. Telephone Service: 1. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone. G. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. H. Parking: Ithaca College will provide on campus parking for commuting to project site. All other parking arrangements are the responsibility of the contractor. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 015000- 4 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS QPK NO. 220157.00 015000 - 4 I. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated or required by Owners standards and procedures. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 1. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 2. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times. 3. Pedestrian walkway signage: Provide and maintain signage for pedestrian walkway use and direction throughout the duration of the project, where required. 4. Remove signs upon project completion. J. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction AND with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." Coordinate with Landlord operations. K. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. 1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. L. Temporary Elevator Use: Use of existing elevator for construction operations is allowable. Protect elevator at all times from damage by use of plywood protection boards and entrance frames and within cab, in addition to protective coverings and other measures as necessary. Repair any damage to preconstruction condition or better. M. Existing Stair Usage: Use of north east existing stair will be permitted, provided stairs are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore stairs to condition existing before initial use. 1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs and to maintain means of egress. If stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work. 3.3 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities. B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. C. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 015000- 5 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS QPK NO. 220157.00 015000 - 5 D. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. E. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with applicable regulations. 1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 3.4 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction. B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Protect porous materials from water damage. 2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water. 3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete. 4. Remove standing water from decks. 5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed. C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Discard or replace water-damaged material. 2. Do not install material that is wet. 3. Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. 3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. END OF SECTION 015000 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 016000- 1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 016000 - 1 SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for Contract closeout. 2. Divisions 2 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and installations specified to be warranted. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, which is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 016000- 2 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 016000 - 2 C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A or equivalent. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of Architects and owners. g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery. j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. l. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 3 days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 016000- 3 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 016000 - 3 7 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order. b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. B. Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 7 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors. 2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 016000- 4 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 016000 - 4 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms. 5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 8. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner. 1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using appropriate form properly executed. 3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 016000- 5 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 016000 - 5 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Architect's. 6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish "salient characteristics" of products. 7. Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal" or "or approved equal" or "or approved," comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Product: Where Specifications or Drawings name a single product and manufacturer, provide the named product that complies with requirements. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications or Drawings name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. 3. Products: Where Specifications or Drawings include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. 4. Manufacturers: Where Specifications or Drawings include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. 5. Available Products: Where Specifications or Drawings include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications or Drawings include a list of manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 7. Product Options: Where Specifications or Drawings indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system. 8. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications or Drawings name a product and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 016000- 6 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 016000 - 6 the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the other named manufacturers. 9. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications or Drawings require matching an established Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for proposal of product. 10. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications or Drawings include the phrase "as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with other specified requirements. a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items. b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 7 days after the Notice of Award. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. 2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. 4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. 7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 016000- 7 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 016000 - 7 9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. 10. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. 2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. Architect is not obligated to approve a comparable product. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of Architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01600 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017300- 1 EXECUTION QPK NO. 220157.00 017300 - 1 SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. General installation. 2. Progress cleaning. 3. Adjusting. 4. Protection of installed construction. 5. Correction of the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Preconstruction survey: Contractor shall confirm that the core and shell dimensions of the perimeter of Owner’s leased space is as shown on the construction drawings. Provide a marked up plan showing conformance or discrepancies. Report any discrepancies with a copy of the marked plan to the Owner’s representative prior to commencing construction. B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work. C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 2. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 3. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017300- 2 EXECUTION QPK NO. 220157.00 017300 - 2 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner’s representative for conveyance to Landlord and local utility that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction if required. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017300- 3 EXECUTION QPK NO. 220157.00 017300 - 3 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 4. Verify type of anchor is acceptable to the Architect for exposed locations, load bearing conditions and anchors in concrete plank. H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.4 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in applicable regulations for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C). 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. F. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017300- 4 EXECUTION QPK NO. 220157.00 017300 - 4 G. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. H. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. I. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation. 3.6 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. 3.7 CORRECTION OF THE WORK A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. 1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces. END OF SECTION 017300 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017329 - 1 CUTTING AND PATCHING QPK NO. 220157.00 017329 - 1 SECTION 017329 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section 024116 "Selective Demolition" for demolition of selected portions of the building. 2. Divisions 2 through 33 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. C. Refer to the drawings for additional information on cutting and patching concrete. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. B. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017329 - 2 CUTTING AND PATCHING QPK NO. 220157.00 017329 - 2 1.5 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. 1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017329 - 3 CUTTING AND PATCHING QPK NO. 220157.00 017329 - 3 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017329 - 4 CUTTING AND PATCHING QPK NO. 220157.00 017329 - 4 D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials. END OF SECTION 017329 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017419 - 1 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL QPK NO. 220157.00 017419 - 1 SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 2. Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 3. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging. B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations. C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse. E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility. F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Practice efficient waste management in the use of materials in the course of the Work. Use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and incinerators. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials, including the following: 1. Demolition Waste: ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017419 - 2 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL QPK NO. 220157.00 017419 - 2 a. Roofing. b. Insulation. c. Metals. 2. Construction Waste: a. Roofing. b. Insulation. c. Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated in "General" Paragraph above, salvage or recycle 100 percent of the following uncontaminated packaging materials: 1) Paper. 2) Cardboard. 3) Boxes. 4) Plastic sheet and film. 5) Polystyrene packaging. 6) Wood crates. 7) Plastic pails. 8) Metals. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices. B. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017419 - 3 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL QPK NO. 220157.00 017419 - 3 1. Comply with operation, termination, and removal requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold. 2. Comply with Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control. 3.2 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers. B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for recycling waste materials shall accrue to Contractor. C. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process. D. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved construction waste management plan. 1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin. a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if found. 2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather. 5. Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or processor. 3.3 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE A. Packaging: 1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location. 2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017419 - 4 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL QPK NO. 220157.00 017419 - 4 3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. 4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. 3.4 DISPOSAL OF WASTE A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials. C. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them. END OF SECTION 017419 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017700- 1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES QPK NO. 220157.00 017700 - 1 SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Warranties. 3. Final cleaning. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section 012900 "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion. 2. Division 1 Section 017300 "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site. 3. Division 1 Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 4. Divisions 2 through 33 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list) and the value of items on the list. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals. Damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017700- 2 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES QPK NO. 220157.00 017700 - 2 8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. 1.4 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017700- 3 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES QPK NO. 220157.00 017700 - 3 1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 1.6 WARRANTIES A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor. C. Submit all warranties with closeout documents no later than forty-five days after project Substantial Completion. D. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. E. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017700- 4 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES QPK NO. 220157.00 017700 - 4 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Staging Areas: Contractor is to protect, clean and restore all staging areas to their preconstruction condition or better. C. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. b. Clean exposed hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. c. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs and balconies. d. Prevent debris from falling through balcony openings and dispose of properly. e. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. f. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. g. Remove labels that are not permanent. h. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. i. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and sealant droppings, and other foreign substances. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017700- 5 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES QPK NO. 220157.00 017700 - 5 j. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. k. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. END OF SECTION 017700 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017823- 1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA QPK NO. 220157.00 017823 - 1 SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. Operation and product data manuals. 2. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, and finishes. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section 013000 "Administrative Requirements" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Division 1 Section017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 3. Drawing notations for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction. B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit one copy of each manual in final form at least 7 days before final inspection. Architect will return copy with comments within 7 days after final inspection. 1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit 2 copies of each corrected manual within 7 days of receipt of Architect's comments. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017823- 2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA QPK NO. 220157.00 017823 - 2 1.5 COORDINATION A. Where operation and maintenance documentation include information on installations by more than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information furnished by representatives and prepare manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OPERATION MANUALS A. Content: Provide operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1. System descriptions. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating procedures. B. Descriptions: Include the following: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Operating characteristics. 4. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Routine and normal operating instructions. 2. Special operating instructions and procedures. 2.2 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Paint color swatches ad indicated in Division 9 Specification Section, Interior Painting. 5. Material and chemical composition. 6. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017823- 3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA QPK NO. 220157.00 017823 - 3 D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 1. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 2. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION A. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. B. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. C. Comply with Division 1 Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. END OF SECTION 017823 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017839- 1 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 017839 - 1 SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Product Data. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 2. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Submit all closeout documents no later than 45 days after Substantial Completion. 2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows: a. Initial Submittal: 1) Submit one set of marked-up record prints. 2) Submit a PDF electronic file of the scanned record prints. 3) Architect will review and indicate whether general scope of changes, additional information recorded and legibility of work is acceptable. 4) If modifications, clarifications or additional information is requested by Architect, resubmit updated information in the same manner as initial submission. b. Final Submittal: 1) Architect will be transferring final approved data to digital files for Owner record information. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017839- 2 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 017839 - 2 B. Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy and annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal. 1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual. 1.4 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued. 1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding photographic documentation. 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. 3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints. 4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017839- 3 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 017839 - 3 B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows: 1. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 2. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints. Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. 3. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution. C. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Organize record prints into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file. 3. Identification: As follows: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor. 1.5 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project. B. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders and record Drawings where applicable. C. Format: Submit record Product Data as one paper copy and scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Product Data and submittals. 1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 017839- 4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 017839 - 4 1.6 MAINTENANCE OF RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintenance of Record Documents: Store record documents in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. PART 2 - PRODUCTS PART 3 - EXECUTION END OF SECTION 017839 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 024119 - 1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION SELECTIVE DEMOLITION QPK NO. 220157.00 024119 - 1 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. B. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated. C. Existing to Remain: Leave existing items that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre-demolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations. 5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 024119 - 2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION SELECTIVE DEMOLITION QPK NO. 220157.00 024119 - 2 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control and, for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers. B. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's and other tenants' on-site operations are uninterrupted. 2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Use of stairs. C. Warranties: Documentation indicating that existing warranties are still in effect after completion of selective demolition. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. C. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials and using approved contractors so as not to void existing warranties. Notify warrantor before proceeding. Existing warranties include the following: 1. Roofing. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 024119 - 3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION SELECTIVE DEMOLITION QPK NO. 220157.00 024119 - 3 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. B. Notify warrantor on completion of selective demolition, and obtain documentation verifying that existing system has been inspected and warranty remains in effect. Submit documentation at Project closeout. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's and adjacent tenant operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities within the area of the work have been disconnected as necessary before starting selective demolition operations. B. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction or other existing condition and hazardous material information provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated or abandoned; provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 024119 - 4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION SELECTIVE DEMOLITION QPK NO. 220157.00 024119 - 4 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. 2. Disconnect, demolish and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing and HVAC systems, equipment and components indicated on Drawings to be removed. Coordinate actual MEP&FP removals with the drawings. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material and leave in place. c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material and leave in place. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings and equipment that have not been removed. 5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." B. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. C. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 024119 - 5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION SELECTIVE DEMOLITION QPK NO. 220157.00 024119 - 5 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 4. Maintain fire watch during and for at least two hours after flame-cutting operations. 5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. C. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, and then remove concrete between saw cuts. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 024119 - 6 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION SELECTIVE DEMOLITION QPK NO. 220157.00 024119 - 6 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. B. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, and then break up and remove. C. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings." Do not use methods requiring solvent-based adhesive strippers. D. Roofing: Perform selective removals of no more existing roofing than what can be covered in one day by new roofing and so that building interior remains watertight and weathertight. 1. Removal and repair work shall be performed by roofing contractor as necessary to maintain existing in place watertight warranty. 2. Remove and replace only as necessary to install new roof top equipment and associated accessories. 3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and dispose of them in an EPA-approved construction and demolition waste landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 4. Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. 3.8 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SCHEDULE A. Remove: All materials as indicated on Drawings. B. Remove and Reinstall: Specific items as indicated on Drawings, including, but not limited to, window framing, doors and associated hardware. C. Existing to Remain: All items not indicated to be removed. END OF SECTION 024119 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 032000 - 1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CONCRETE REINFORCING QPK NO. 220157.00 032000 - 1 SECTION 032000 - CONCRETE REINFORCING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel reinforcement bars. 2. Welded-wire reinforcement. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Each type of steel reinforcement. 2. Bar supports. 3. Mechanical splice couplers. B. Shop Drawings: Comply with ACI SP-066: 1. Include placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. 2. Include bar sizes, lengths, materials, grades, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, location of splices, lengths of lap splices, details of mechanical splice couplers, details of welding splices, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. C. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to build the structure. 1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Statements: For testing and inspection agency. B. Welding certificates. 1. Reinforcement To Be Welded: Welding procedure specification in accordance with AWS D1.4/D1.4M C. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency: ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 032000 - 2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CONCRETE REINFORCING QPK NO. 220157.00 032000 - 2 1. Steel Reinforcement: a. For reinforcement to be welded, mill test analysis for chemical composition and carbon equivalent of the steel in accordance with ASTM A706/A706M. 2. Mechanical splice couplers. D. Field quality-control reports. E. Minutes of preinstallation conference. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified in accordance with ASTM C1077 and ASTM E329 for testing indicated. B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel in accordance with AWS D1.4/D 1.4M. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. 1. Store reinforcement to avoid contact with earth. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed. B. Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A1064/A1064M, plain, fabricated from asdrawn steel wire into flat sheets. 2.2 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain-steel bars, cut true to length with ends square and free of burrs. B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place. 1. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete in accordance with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows: ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 032000 - 3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CONCRETE REINFORCING QPK NO. 220157.00 032000 - 3 a. For concrete surfaces exposed to view, where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire, all-plastic bar supports, or CRSI Class 2 stainless steel bar supports. C. Mechanical Splice Couplers: ACI 318 (ACI 318M) same material of reinforcing bar being spliced; tension-compression type. D. Steel Tie Wire: ASTM A1064/A1064M, annealed steel, not less than 0.0508 inch (1.2908 mm) in diameter. 1. Finish: Plain unless otherwise noted. 2.3 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protection of In-Place Conditions: 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. 2. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that reduce bond to concrete. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing and supporting reinforcement. B. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. C. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that reduce bond to concrete. D. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. 1. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. 2. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. E. Preserve clearance between bars of not less than 1 inch (25 mm), not less than one bar diameter, or not less than 1-1/3 times size of large aggregate, whichever is greater. F. Provide concrete coverage in accordance with ACI 318 (ACI 318M). ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 032000 - 4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CONCRETE REINFORCING QPK NO. 220157.00 032000 - 4 G. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. H. Splices: Lap splices as indicated on Drawings. 1. Bars indicated to be continuous, and all vertical bars shall be lapped not less than 36 bar diameters at splices, or 24 inches (610 mm), whichever is greater. 2. Stagger splices in accordance with ACI 318 (ACI 318M). 3. Mechanical Splice Couplers: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 4. Weld reinforcing bars in accordance with AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, where indicated on Drawings. I. Install welded-wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths. 1. Support welded-wire reinforcement in accordance with CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice." a. For reinforcement less than W4.0 or D4.0, continuous support spacing shall not exceed 12 inches (305 mm). 2. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one wire spacing plus 2 inches (50 mm). 3. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. 4. Lace overlaps with wire. 3.3 JOINTS A. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. 2. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. 3. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. B. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length, to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. 3.4 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Comply with ACI 117 (ACI 117M). 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Inspections: 1. Steel-reinforcement placement. 2. Steel-reinforcement mechanical splice couplers. 3. Steel-reinforcement welding. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 032000 - 5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CONCRETE REINFORCING QPK NO. 220157.00 032000 - 5 END OF SECTION 032000 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 033000 - 1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE QPK NO. 220157.00 033000 - 1 SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cast-in-place concrete, including concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 032000 "Concrete Reinforcing" for steel reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, other pozzolans, and silica fume; materials subject to compliance with requirements. B. Water/Cement Ratio (w/cm): The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each of the following. 1. Portland cement. 2. Fly ash. 3. Slag cement. 4. Blended hydraulic cement. 5. Silica fume. 6. Performance-based hydraulic cement 7. Aggregates. 8. Admixtures: a. Include limitations of use, including restrictions on cementitious materials, supplementary cementitious materials, air entrainment, aggregates, temperature at time of concrete placement, relative humidity at time of concrete placement, curing conditions, and use of other admixtures. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 033000 - 2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE QPK NO. 220157.00 033000 - 2 9. Fiber reinforcement. 10. Vapor retarders. 11. Curing materials. 12. Joint fillers. 13. Repair materials. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture, include the following: 1. Mixture identification. 2. Minimum 28-day compressive strength. 3. Durability exposure class. 4. Maximum w/cm. 5. Slump limit. 6. Air content. 7. Nominal maximum aggregate size. 8. Synthetic micro-fiber content. 9. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site if permitted. 10. Intended placement method. 11. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. C. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure. 1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Fiber reinforcement. 4. Curing compounds. 5. Bonding agents. 6. Adhesives. 7. Vapor retarders. 8. Semirigid joint filler. 9. Joint-filler strips. 10. Repair materials. B. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency: 1. Portland cement. 2. Fly ash. 3. Slag cement. 4. Blended hydraulic cement. 5. Silica fume. 6. Performance-based hydraulic cement. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 033000 - 3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE QPK NO. 220157.00 033000 - 3 7. Aggregates. 8. Admixtures: a. Permeability-Reducing Admixture: Include independent test reports, indicating compliance with specified requirements, including dosage rate used in test. C. Field quality-control reports. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs Project personnel qualified as an ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is a certified ACI Flatwork Concrete Finisher/Technician or an ACI Concrete Flatwork Technician. 1. Post-Installed Concrete Anchors Installers: ACI-certified Adhesive Anchor Installer. B. Ready-Mixed Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C94/C94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer certified in accordance with NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities." C. Laboratory Testing Agency Qualifications: A testing agency qualified in accordance with ASTM C1077 and ASTM E329 for testing indicated and employing an ACI-certified Concrete Quality Control Technical Manager. 1. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade I. Testing agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade II. D. Field Quality Control Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified in accordance with ASTM C1077 and ASTM E329 for testing indicated. 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as an ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, in accordance with ACI CPP 610.1 or an equivalent certification program. 1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on each concrete mixture. 1. Include the following information in each test report: a. Admixture dosage rates. b. Slump. c. Air content. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 033000 - 4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE QPK NO. 220157.00 033000 - 4 d. Seven-day compressive strength. e. 28-day compressive strength. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with ASTM C94/C94M and ACI 301 (ACI 301M). 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) and ACI 306.1 and as follows. 1. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 2. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301 (ACI 301M). 3. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. 4. Do not place concrete in contact with surfaces less than 35 deg F (1.7 deg C), other than reinforcing steel. 5. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs. B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) and ACI 305.1 (ACI 305.1M), and as follows: 1. Maintain concrete temperature at time of discharge to not exceed 95 deg F (35 deg C). 2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL A. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. 2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Source Limitations: 1. Obtain all concrete mixtures from a single ready-mixed concrete manufacturer for entire Project. 2. Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant. 3. Obtain aggregate from single source. 4. Obtain each type of admixture from single source from single manufacturer. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 033000 - 5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE QPK NO. 220157.00 033000 - 5 B. Cementitious Materials: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I/II. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F. 3. Slag Cement: ASTM C989/C989M, Grade 100 or 120. C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C33/C33M, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source. 1. Alkali-Silica Reaction: Comply with one of the following: a. Expansion Result of Aggregate: Not more than 0.04 percent at one-year when tested in accordance with ASTM C1293. b. Expansion Results of Aggregate and Cementitious Materials in Combination: Not more than 0.10 percent at an age of 16 days when tested in accordance with ASTM C1567. c. Alkali Content in Concrete: Not more than 4 lb./cu. yd. (2.37 kg/cu. m) for moderately reactive aggregate or 3 lb./cu. yd. (1.78 kg/cu. m) for highly reactive aggregate, when tested in accordance with ASTM C1293 and categorized in accordance with ASTM C1778, based on alkali content being calculated in accordance with ACI 301 (ACI 301M). 2. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: a. Footings,: 1-1/2 inches nominal. b. Slabs-on-Grade: 1 inch nominal. c. Coarse Aggregate shall be crushed limestone. 3. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260/C260M. E. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and -Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and -Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C1017/C1017M, Type II. F. Water and Water Used to Make Ice: ASTM C94/C94M, potable. 2.3 FIBER REINFORCEMENT A. Synthetic Fibrillated Micro-Fiber: Fibrillated polypropylene micro-fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete, complying with ASTM C1116/C1116M, Type III, 1/2 to 1-1/2 inches (13 to 38 mm) long. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 033000 - 6 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE QPK NO. 220157.00 033000 - 6 2.4 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Sheet Vapor Retarder, Class A: ASTM E1745, Class A; not less than 10 mils (0.25 mm) thick. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape. 2.5 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry. C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C171, polyethylene film burlap-polyethylene sheet. 1. Color: a. Ambient Temperature Below 50 deg F (10 deg C): Black. b. Ambient Temperature between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 85 deg F (29 deg C): Any color. c. Ambient Temperature Above 85 deg F (29 deg C): White. D. Water: Potable or complying with ASTM C1602/C1602M. E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming, Dissipating Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B. 2.6 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D1752, cork or self-expanding cork. B. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Type A shore durometer hardness of 80 in accordance with ASTM D2240. C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C1059/C1059M, Type II, nonredispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. D. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade and class to suit requirements, and as follows: 1. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete. 2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, in accordance with ACI 301 (ACI 301M). ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 033000 - 7 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE QPK NO. 220157.00 033000 - 7 1. Use a qualified testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs, based on laboratory trial mixtures. B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows: 1. Fly Ash: 25 percent. 2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent. 3. Slag Cement: 50 percent. 4. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan and Slag Cement: 50 percent Portland cement minimum, with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25 percent. C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.30 percent by weight of cement. D. Admixtures: Use admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing, or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use water-reducing and -retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs, parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a w/cm below 0.50. 4. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated. 5. Use permeability-reducing admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated. 2.8 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS A. Footings: Normal-weight concrete. 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) at 28 days. 2. Maximum w/c Ratio: 0.50. 3. Slump Limit: 8 inches (200 mm) for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches (50 to 100 mm) before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 4. Air Content: 5.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for concrete containing 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size. B. Slabs-on-Grade: Normal-weight concrete. 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days. 2. Maximum w/cm: 0.45. 3. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 520 lb/cu. yd. (309 kg/cu. m). 4. Slump Limit: 5 inches (100 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 5. Air Content: a. Do not use an air-entraining admixture or allow total air content to exceed 3 percent for concrete used in trowel-finished floors. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 033000 - 8 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE QPK NO. 220157.00 033000 - 8 2.9 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. B. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer. 1. For mixer capacity of 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but not more than five minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released. 2. For mixer capacity larger than 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m), increase mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m). 3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixture time, quantity, and amount of water added. Record approximate location of final deposit in structure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of concrete forms, accessories, and reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. 2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide reasonable auxiliary services to accommodate field testing and inspections, acceptable to testing agency, including the following: 1. Daily access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Secure space for storage, initial curing, and field curing of test samples, including source of water and continuous electrical power at Project site during site curing period for test samples. 4. Security and protection for test samples and for testing and inspection equipment at Project site. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 033000 - 9 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE QPK NO. 220157.00 033000 - 9 3.3 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining Work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. 1. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 2. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of ANSI/AISC 303. 3. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDER A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder in accordance with ASTM E1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install vapor retarder with longest dimension parallel with direction of concrete pour. 2. Face laps away from exposed direction of concrete pour. 3. Lap vapor retarder over footings and grade beams not less than 6 inches (150 mm), sealing vapor retarder to concrete. 4. Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. 5. Terminate vapor retarder at the top of floor slabs, grade beams, and pile caps, sealing entire perimeter to floor slabs, grade beams, foundation walls, or pile caps. 6. Seal penetrations in accordance with vapor retarder manufacturer's instructions. 7. Protect vapor retarder during placement of reinforcement and concrete. a. Repair damaged areas by patching with vapor retarder material, overlapping damages area by 6 inches (150 mm) on all sides, and sealing to vapor retarder. 3.5 JOINTS A. Construct joints true to line, with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Coordinate with floor slab pattern and concrete placement sequence. 1. Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated on Drawings or as approved by Architect. 2. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. a. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. b. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. 3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders at third points of spans. Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection. 4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 033000 - 10 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE QPK NO. 220157.00 033000 - 10 5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated on Drawings. Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, locate vertical joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible. 6. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. C. Control Joints in Slabs-on-Ground: Form weakened-plane control joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct control joints for a depth as indicated and as follows. 1. Sawed Joints: Form control joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) wide joints into concrete when cutting action does not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random cracks. D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Ground: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than 1 inch (25 mm) below finished concrete surface, where joint sealants, specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," are indicated. 3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together. E. Doweled Joints: 1. Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated on Drawings. 2. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel bar length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. 3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, embedded items, and vapor retarder is complete and that required inspections are completed. 1. Immediately prior to concrete placement, inspect vapor retarder for damage and deficient installation, and repair defective areas. 2. Provide continuous inspection of vapor retarder during concrete placement and make necessary repairs to damaged areas as Work progresses. B. Notify Architect and testing and inspection agencies 24 hours prior to commencement of concrete placement. C. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect in writing, but not to exceed the amount indicated on the concrete delivery ticket. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 033000 - 11 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE QPK NO. 220157.00 033000 - 11 1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture. D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. 1. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. 2. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 3. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 4. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment in accordance with ACI 301 (ACI 301M). a. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. b. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. c. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. d. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete, and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate. E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Do not place concrete floors and slabs in a checkerboard sequence. 2. Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 3. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 4. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 5. Level concrete, cut high areas, and fill low areas. 6. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 7. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. 8. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. 3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. As-Cast Surface Finishes: 1. ACI 301 (ACI 301M) Surface Finish SF-1.0: As-cast concrete texture imparted by formfacing material. a. Patch voids larger than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide or 1/2 inch (13 mm) deep. b. Remove projections larger than 1 inch (25 mm). c. Tie holes do not require patching. d. Surface Tolerance: ACI 117 (ACI 117M) Class D. e. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 033000 - 12 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE QPK NO. 220157.00 033000 - 12 2. ACI 301 (ACI 301M) Surface Finish SF-2.0: As-cast concrete texture imparted by formfacing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. a. Patch voids larger than 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide or 1/2 inch (13 mm) deep. b. Remove projections larger than 1/4 inch (6 mm). c. Patch tie holes. d. Surface Tolerance: ACI 117 (ACI 117M) Class B. e. Locations: Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete. B. Related Unformed Surfaces: 1. At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a color and texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. 2. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.8 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Float Finish: 1. When bleedwater sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of specific float apparatus, consolidate concrete surface with powerdriven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power-driven floats. 2. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture and complies with ACI 117 (ACI A117M) tolerances for conventional concrete. 3. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish and to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo. C. Trowel Finish: 1. After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. 2. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. 3. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 4. Do not add water to concrete surface. 5. Do not apply hard-troweled finish to concrete, which has a total air content greater than 3 percent. 6. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-filmfinish coating system. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 033000 - 13 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE QPK NO. 220157.00 033000 - 13 7. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, in accordance with ASTM E1155 (ASTM E1155M), for a randomly trafficked floor surface: a. Slabs on Ground: 1) Specified overall values of flatness, FF 35; and of levelness, FL 25; with minimum local values of flatness, FF 24; and of levelness, FL 17. D. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thinset method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom perpendicular to main traffic route. 1. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. 2. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces. E. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and locations indicated on Drawings. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. 2. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. 3.9 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: 1. Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after Work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. 2. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. 3. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work. B. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items. 1. Cast-in inserts and accessories, as shown on Drawings. 2. Screed, tamp, and trowel finish concrete surfaces. 3.10 CONCRETE CURING A. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. 1. Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) and ACI 306.1 for cold weather protection during curing. 2. Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) and ACI 305.1 (ACI 305.1M) for hot-weather protection during curing. 3. Maintain moisture loss no more than 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h), calculated in accordance with ACI 305.1,) before and during finishing operations. B. Curing Formed Surfaces: Comply with ACI 308.1 (ACI 308.1M) as follows: ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 033000 - 14 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE QPK NO. 220157.00 033000 - 14 1. Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. 2. Cure concrete containing color pigments in accordance with color pigment manufacturer's instructions. 3. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. 4. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder of curing period, as follows: a. Continuous Fogging: Maintain standing water on concrete surface until final setting of concrete. b. Continuous Sprinkling: Maintain concrete surface continuously wet. c. Absorptive Cover: Pre-dampen absorptive material before application; apply additional water to absorptive material to maintain concrete surface continuously wet. d. Water-Retention Sheeting Materials: Cover exposed concrete surfaces with sheeting material, taping, or lapping seams. e. Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 1) Recoat areas subject to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. 2) Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. C. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Comply with ACI 308.1 (ACI 308.1M) as follows: 1. Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. 2. Interior Concrete Floors: a. Floors to Receive Floor Coverings Specified in Other Sections: Contractor has option of the following: 1) Absorptive Cover: As soon as concrete has sufficient set to permit application without marring concrete surface, install prewetted absorptive cover over entire area of floor. a) Lap edges and ends of absorptive cover not less than 12-inches (300mm). b) Maintain absorptive cover water saturated, and in place, for duration of curing period, but not less than seven days. 2) Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moistureretaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. a) Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape. b) Cure for not less than seven days. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 033000 - 15 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE QPK NO. 220157.00 033000 - 15 3) Ponding or Continuous Sprinkling of Water: Maintain concrete surfaces continuously wet for not less than seven days, utilizing one, or a combination of, the following: a) Water. b) Continuous water-fog spray. b. Floors to Receive Curing Compound: 1) Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 2) Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. 3) Maintain continuity of coating, and repair damage during curing period. 4) Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound does not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project. 3.11 TOLERANCES A. Conform to ACI 117 (ACI 117M). 3.12 JOINT FILLING A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month. 2. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased. B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joints clean and dry. C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches (50 mm) deep in formed joints. D. Overfill joint, and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening. 3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: 1. Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. 2. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 033000 - 16 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE QPK NO. 220157.00 033000 - 16 C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension to solid concrete. a. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch (19 mm). b. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. c. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. d. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. e. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement, so that, when dry, patching mortar matches surrounding color. a. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. b. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that will affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect. D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: 1. Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish, and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. a. Correct low and high areas. b. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 2. Repair finished surfaces containing surface defects, including spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing, and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. 3. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 4. Correct localized low areas during, or immediately after, completing surface-finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. a. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 5. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. a. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. b. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 6. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with repair topping. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 033000 - 17 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE QPK NO. 220157.00 033000 - 17 a. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent floor elevations. b. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. 7. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. a. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts, and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch (19-mm) clearance all around. b. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. c. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete, except without coarse aggregate. d. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. e. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 8. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching mortar. a. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete, and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. b. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. c. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. d. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. e. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval. 3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector to perform field tests and inspections and prepare testing and inspection reports. B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and to submit reports. 1. Testing agency shall be responsible for providing curing container for composite samples on Site and verifying that field-cured composite samples are cured in accordance with ASTM C31/C31M. 2. Testing agency shall immediately report to Architect, Contractor, and concrete manufacturer any failure of Work to comply with Contract Documents. 3. Testing agency shall report results of tests and inspections, in writing, to Owner, Architect, Contractor, and concrete manufacturer within 48 hours of inspections and tests. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 033000 - 18 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE QPK NO. 220157.00 033000 - 18 a. Test reports shall include reporting requirements of ASTM C31/C31M, ASTM C39/C39M, and ACI 301, including the following as applicable to each test and inspection: 1) Project name. 2) Name of testing agency. 3) Names and certification numbers of field and laboratory technicians performing inspections and testing. 4) Name of concrete manufacturer. 5) Date and time of inspection, sampling, and field testing. 6) Date and time of concrete placement. 7) Location in Work of concrete represented by samples. 8) Date and time sample was obtained. 9) Truck and batch ticket numbers. 10) Design compressive strength at 28 days. 11) Concrete mixture designation, proportions, and materials. 12) Field test results. 13) Information on storage and curing of samples before testing, including curing method and maximum and minimum temperatures during initial curing period. 14) Type of fracture and compressive break strengths at seven days and 28 days. C. Batch Tickets: For each load delivered, submit three copies of batch delivery ticket to testing agency, indicating quantity, mix identification, admixtures, design strength, aggregate size, design air content, design slump at time of batching, and amount of water that can be added at Project site. D. Inspections: 1. Headed bolts and studs. 2. Steel reinforcement placement. 3. Verification of use of required design mixture. 4. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 5. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 6. In-Field Reinforcing Steel Inspection: Includes verification of placement tolerances, splicing procedures, size and Grade, Stability (chairs and spacers), cleanliness, and condition of protective coating. E. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained in accordance with ASTM C 172/C 172M shall be performed in accordance with the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof. a. When frequency of testing provides fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 2. Slump: ASTM C143/C143M: ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 033000 - 19 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE QPK NO. 220157.00 033000 - 19 a. One test at point of placement for each truck. b. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content: ASTM C231/C231M pressure method, for normal-weight concrete: a. One test for each truck. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C1064/C1064M: a. One test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below or 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test per truck. 5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C31/C31M: a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two 6-inch (150 mm) by 12-inch (300 mm) or 4-inch (100 mm) by 8-inch (200 mm) cylinder specimens for each composite sample. b. Cast, initial cure, and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M. a. Test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens at seven days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. 7. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength, and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa) if specified compressive strength is 5000 psi (34.5 MPa), or no compressive strength test value is less than 10 percent of specified compressive strength if specified compressive strength is greater than 5000 psi (34.5 MPa). 8. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. 9. Additional Tests: a. Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. b. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42/C42M or by other methods as directed by Architect. 1) Acceptance criteria for concrete strength shall be in accordance with ACI 301 (ACI 301M), section 1.6.6.3. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 033000 - 20 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE QPK NO. 220157.00 033000 - 20 10. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 11. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents. F. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness in accordance with ASTM E1155 (ASTM E1155M) within 24 hours of completion of floor finishing and promptly report test results to Architect. 3.15 PROTECTION A. Protect concrete surfaces as follows: 1. Protect from petroleum stains. 2. Diaper hydraulic equipment used over concrete surfaces. 3. Prohibit vehicles from interior concrete slabs. 4. Prohibit use of pipe-cutting machinery over concrete surfaces. 5. Prohibit placement of steel items on concrete surfaces. 6. Prohibit use of acids or acidic detergents over concrete surfaces. END OF SECTION 033000 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 051200 - 1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING QPK NO. 220157.00 051200 - 1 SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Dvision 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Structural steel. 2. Shrinkage-resistant grout. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in ANSI/AISC 303. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Structural-steel materials. 2. High-strength, bolt-nut-washer assemblies. 3. Anchor rods. 4. Threaded rods. 5. Shop primer. 6. Shrinkage-resistant grout. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components. 1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 051200 - 2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING QPK NO. 220157.00 051200 - 2 2. Include embedment Drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain. 4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical, high-strength bolted connections. 5. Identify members not to be shop primed. C. Delegated Design Submittal: For structural-steel connections indicated on Drawings to comply with design loads, include analysis data. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator, and testing agency. B. Welding certificates. C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. D. Mill test reports for structural-steel materials, including chemical and physical properties. E. Product Test Reports: For the following: 1. Bolts, nuts, and washers, including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 2. Direct-tension indicators. 3. Tension-control, high-strength, bolt-nut-washer assemblies. F. Survey of existing conditions. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category BU or is accredited by the IAS Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel (Acceptance Criteria 172). B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified Installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE. C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 051200 - 3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING QPK NO. 220157.00 051200 - 3 1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact. 1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes repackaging and seals containers. 2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating ASTM F3125/F3125M, Grade F1852 bolt assemblies and for retesting bolt assemblies after lubrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. ANSI/AISC 303. 2. ANSI/AISC 360. 3. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts." B. Connection Design Information: 1. Fabricator's experienced steel detailer shall select or complete connections in accordance with ANSI/AISC 303. a. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and ANSI/AISC 360. b. Use Allowable Stress Design; data are given at service-load level. 2.2 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS A. W-Shapes: ASTM A992/A992M. B. Channels, Angles, M-Shapes: ASTM A36/A36M. C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A36/A36M. D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B structural tubing. E. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. 2.3 BOLTS AND CONNECTORS A. High-Strength A325 Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F3125/F3125M, Grade A325 (Grade A325M), Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A563, Grade DH ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 051200 - 4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING QPK NO. 220157.00 051200 - 4 (ASTM A563M, Class 10S), heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F436/F436M, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish. 1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F959/F959M, Type 325-1 (Type 8.8-1), compressiblewasher type with plain finish. B. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F3125/F3125M, Grade F1852, Type 1, heavy-hex head assemblies, consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends; ASTM A563, Grade DH (ASTM A563M, Class 10S), heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F436/F436M, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain. 2.4 RODS A. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F1554, Grade 36. 1. Configuration: As indicated. 2. Nuts: ASTM A563 (ASTM A563M) heavy-hex carbon steel. 3. Plate Washers: ASTM A36/A36M carbon steel. 4. Washers: ASTM F436 (ASTM F436M), Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 5. Finish: Plain. 2.5 PRIMER A. Steel Primer: 1. Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 2.6 SHRINKAGE-RESISTANT GROUT A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate in accordance with ANSI/AISC 303 and to ANSI/AISC 360. 1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated. 2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up. 3. Identify high-strength structural steel in accordance with ASTM A6/A6M and maintain markings until structural-steel framing has been erected. 4. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 5. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shoppriming operations. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 051200 - 5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING QPK NO. 220157.00 051200 - 5 B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M. C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads. E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted in accordance with SSPC-SP 3. F. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass through steel members. 1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning. 2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work. 2.8 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts in accordance with RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened unless noted otherwise. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in ANSI/AISC 303 for mill material. 2.9 SHOP PRIMING A. Shop prime steel surfaces, except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm). 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces of high-strength bolted, slip-critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing). B. Surface Preparation of Steel: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces in accordance with the following specifications and standards: 1. SSPC-SP 2 or, if more stringent, as required. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 051200 - 6 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING QPK NO. 220157.00 051200 - 6 C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first. 2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and inspections. 1. Allow testing agency access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections. 2. Bolted Connections: Inspect and test shop-bolted connections in accordance with RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts." 3. Welded Connections: Visually inspect shop-welded connections in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 4. Prepare test and inspection reports. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements. 1. Prepare a certified survey of existing conditions. Include bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction and structuralsteel framing until cast-in-place concrete has attained its design compressive strength. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 051200 - 7 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING QPK NO. 220157.00 051200 - 7 3.3 ERECTION A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and in accordance with ANSI/AISC 303 and ANSI/AISC 360. B. Baseplates, Bearing Plates, and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates. 1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate. 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout. 4. Promptly pack shrinkage-resistant grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates, so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for grouting. C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within ANSI/AISC 303. D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that are in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. Slope roof framing members to slopes indicated on Drawings. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service. E. Splice members only where indicated. F. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. 3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts in accordance with RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts" for bolt and joint type specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened unless otherwise noted. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with ANSI/AISC 303 and ANSI/AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in ANSI/AISC 303 for mill material. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 051200 - 8 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING QPK NO. 220157.00 051200 - 8 3.5 REPAIR A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing, and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780/A780M. B. Touchup Painting: 1. Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or missing, and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. a. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1. Verify structural-steel materials and inspect steel frame joint details. 2. Verify weld materials and inspect welds. 3. Verify connection materials and inspect high-strength bolted connections. B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. 1. Bolted Connections: Inspect and test bolted connections in accordance with RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts." 2. Welded Connections: Visually inspect field welds in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. END OF SECTION 051200 METAL PAN STAIRS QPK NO. 220157.00 055113 - 1 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 055113 - 1 SECTION 055113 - METAL PAN STAIRS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Preassembled steel stairs with concrete-filled treads. 2. Steel tube railings and guards attached to metal stairs. 3. Steel tube handrails attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written instructions to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs, railings and guards. 1. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, blocking for attachment of wall-mounted handrails and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. 2. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. C. Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so they do not encroach on required stair width and are within fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure. D. Schedule installation of railings and guards so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. 1. Do not support railings and guards temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For metal pan stairs and the following: 1. Shop primer products. 2. Handrail wall brackets. 3. Grout. METAL PAN STAIRS QPK NO. 220157.00 055113 - 2 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 055113 - 2 B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work. 2. Indicate sizes of metal sections, thickness of metals, profiles, holes and field joints. 3. Include plan at each level. 4. Indicate locations of anchors and blocking for attachment of wall-mounted handrails. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For treads, landing slab, railings and guards, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer's experience with providing delegated-design engineering services of the kind indicated, including documentation that engineer is licensed in the State in which Project is located. B. Welding certificates. C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. 1. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage or other supports and spacers. 2. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 3. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. a. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. METAL PAN STAIRS QPK NO. 220157.00 055113 - 3 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 055113 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design stairs, railings and guards, including attachment. 1. Stair stringers, landing framing and post support shall be as indicated on Drawings. Delegated engineering design is not required for these elements. B. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft. (4.79 kN/sq. m). 2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf (1.33 kN) applied on an area of 4 sq. in. (2580 sq. mm). 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 4. Limit deflection of treads and platforms construction to L/360 or 1/4 inch (6.4 mm), whichever is less. C. Structural Performance of Railings and Guards: Railings and guards, including attachment to building construction, shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. (0.093 sq. m). b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 3. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. a. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. 2.2 METALS A. Metal Surfaces: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M. METAL PAN STAIRS QPK NO. 220157.00 055113 - 4 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 055113 - 4 C. Steel Pipe for Railings and Guards: ASTM A53/A53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads. D. Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M structural steel, Grade 25 (Grade 170), unless another grade is required by design loads; exposed. E. Uncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1011/A1011M, structural steel, Grade 30 (Grade 205), unless another grade is required by design loads. 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941/F1941M, Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. 1. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings and Guards to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings and guards to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads. C. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A563 (ASTM A563M); and, where indicated, flat washers. D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A563 (ASTM A563M); and, where indicated, flat washers. E. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E488/E488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941/F1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Handrail Wall Brackets: Cast aluminum, center of rail 3-1/8 inches (79.4 mm) from face of wall. B. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. C. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. D. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout; recommended by manufacturer for interior use; noncorrosive and nonstaining; mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. METAL PAN STAIRS QPK NO. 220157.00 055113 - 5 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 055113 - 5 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings and guards, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure. 1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated. 2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. B. Assemble stairs, railings and guards in shop to greatest extent possible. 1. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. 2. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. C. Cut, drill and punch metals cleanly and accurately. 1. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. 2. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. D. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. E. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. F. Weld connections to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated. 5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Finish #1 - No evidence of welded joint. G. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. 1. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts unless otherwise indicated. 2. Locate joints where least conspicuous. 3. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. 4. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate internally. 2.6 FABRICATION OF STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS A. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for Architectural Class, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. METAL PAN STAIRS QPK NO. 220157.00 055113 - 6 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 055113 - 6 B. Stair Framing: 1. Fabricate stringers of steel channels as shown. Extend stringers continuous around perimeter of intermediate landing construction. a. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel and rectangular tube stringers. b. Finish: Shop primed. 2. Construct platform frame of steel channel headers and miscellaneous framing members as shown. a. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel and rectangular tube framing. b. Finish: Shop primed. 3. Weld stringers to headers; weld framing members to stringers and headers. 4. Provide tube steel post framing as indicated on drawings to support intermediate landing. C. Metal Pan Stairs: Form risers, subtread pans and subplatforms to configurations shown from steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than 0.067 inch (1.7 mm). 1. Steel Sheet: Uncoated, cold-rolled steel sheet. 2. Directly weld metal pans to stringers; locate welds on top of subtreads where they will be concealed by concrete fill. Do not weld risers to stringers. 3. Shape metal pans to include nosing integral with riser. 4. Provide subplatforms as follows. Weld subplatforms to platform framing. a. Smooth Soffit Construction: Construct subplatforms with flat metal pans under surfaces to produce smooth soffits with tight butt joints. 5. Concrete Thickness: a. Treads: 2 inches (51 mm). b. Landing: 3 inches (76 mm). 2.7 FABRICATION OF STAIR RAILINGS AND GUARDS A. Fabricate railings and guards to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of member, post spacings, wall bracket spacing, and anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads. 1. Rails and Posts: 1-5/8-inch- (41-mm-) diameter top rails and posts. 2. Picket Infill: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) square pickets spaced to prohibit the passage of a 4-inch (100-mm) diameter sphere. 3. Provide continuous steel channel at top and bottom of pickets, punched to receive pickets with welds concealed on back side of channel. 4. Picket and channel assemblies to be welded or mechanically fastened to underside of guard rail top post, vertical posts and top of stair stringer. a. If mechanically fastening use counter sunk flat head fasteners threaded into tapped holes in substrate material. METAL PAN STAIRS QPK NO. 220157.00 055113 - 7 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 055113 - 7 B. Welded Connections: Fabricate railings and guards with welded connections. 1. Fabricate connections that are exposed to weather in a manner that excludes water. a. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate internally. 2. Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. 3. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 4. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 5. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 6. Remove flux immediately. 7. Finish welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Finish #1 - No evidence of a welded joint as shown in NAAMM AMP 521. C. Form changes in direction of railings and guards as follows: 1. By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings. D. For changes in direction made by bending, use jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. E. Close exposed ends of railing and guard members with prefabricated end fittings. F. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Maintain 1/4 inch (6 mm) maximum separation between rail return and wall. G. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding unless otherwise indicated. H. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to other work. 1. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting to concrete or masonry work. 2. Provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets, fasteners and sleeves. 3. Provide type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt and that provides 2-1/8 inches (54 mm) minimum clearance from inside face of handrail to finished wall surface. I. Fillers: Provide fillers made from steel plate, or other suitably crush-resistant material, where needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports. 1. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses and to produce adequate bearing area to prevent bracket rotation and overstressing of substrate. 2.8 FINISHES A. Finish metal stairs after assembly. METAL PAN STAIRS QPK NO. 220157.00 055113 - 8 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 055113 - 8 B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated, ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPCSP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify elevations of floors, bearing surfaces and locations of bearing plates and other embedments for compliance with requirements. 1. For wall-mounted railings, verify locations of concealed reinforcement within gypsum board and plaster assemblies. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF METAL PAN STAIRS A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal stairs to in-place construction. 1. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors. B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. C. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure unless otherwise indicated. 1. Grouted Baseplates: Clean concrete-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. a. Clean bottom surface of plates. b. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts. c. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. d. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout. e. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. 1) Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. 2) Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkageresistant grouts. METAL PAN STAIRS QPK NO. 220157.00 055113 - 9 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 055113 - 9 D. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. E. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. 1. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. 2. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. 3. Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General" Article. F. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with ACI 301. Coordinate finish quality with specified flooring material. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF RAILINGS AND GUARDS A. Adjust railing and guard systems before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints with tight, hairline joints. 1. Space posts at spacing indicated or, if not indicated, as required by design loads. 2. Plumb posts in each direction, within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m). 3. Align rails and guards so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of stairs for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (6 mm in 3.5 m). 4. Secure posts, rail ends and guard ends to building construction as follows: a. Anchor posts to steel by welding to steel supporting members. B. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. 1. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. 2. Secure wall brackets to building construction as required to comply with performance requirements. a. For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members. 3.4 REPAIR A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness. END OF SECTION 055113 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY QPK NO. 220157.00 061053 - 1 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 061053 - 1 SECTION 061053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wood blocking and nailers. 2. Plywood backing panels. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Boards or Strips: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) size in least dimension. B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) or greater size but less than 5 inches nominal (114 mm actual) size in least dimension. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES: 1. Preservative-treated wood. 2. Power-driven fasteners. 3. Post-installed anchors. MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY QPK NO. 220157.00 061053 - 2 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 061053 - 2 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with ground. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings. E. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln-dry plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. F. Concealed Boards: 15 percent maximum moisture content of any of the following species and grades: 1. Mixed southern pine or southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB. 2. Eastern softwoods, No. 2 Common grade; NELMA. 3. Northern species, No. 2 Common grade; NLGA. 4. Western woods, Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA. MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY QPK NO. 220157.00 061053 - 3 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 061053 - 3 G. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose. H. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. I. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling. 2.3 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, DOC PS 1, Exterior, A-C, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal thickness. 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F1667. C. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C1002, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. D. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70. E. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC01, ICC-ES AC58, ICC-ES AC193 or ICC-ES AC308 as appropriate for the substrate. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B633, Class Fe/Zn 5. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. B. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate nailers, blocking and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. C. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY QPK NO. 220157.00 061053 - 4 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 061053 - 4 D. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. E. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. F. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. 1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. G. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. 2. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILER A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. B. Protect miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, miscellaneous rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. END OF SECTION 061053 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS QPK NO. 220157.00 064116 - 1 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 064116 - 1 SECTION 064116 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plastic-laminate-clad architectural cabinets. 2. Cabinet hardware and accessories. 3. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-clad architectural cabinets that are not concealed within other construction. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing cabinets that are concealed within other construction before cabinet installation. 2. Section 123623 "Plastic-Laminate-Clad Countertops." 3. Section 123661 “Solid Surface Countertops”. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to support loads imposed by installed and fully loaded cabinets. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Show large-scale details. 3. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 4. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed in plastic-laminate architectural cabinets. C. Samples for Verification: For the following: 1. Plastic Laminates: 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish required. 2. Exposed Cabinet Hardware and Accessories: One full-size unit for each type and finish. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS QPK NO. 220157.00 064116 - 2 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 064116 - 2 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For fabricator. B. Product Certificates: For each type of product. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator’s Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer of products. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar finish operations that might damage architectural cabinets have been completed in installation areas. Store cabinets in installation areas or in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations with Humidity Control: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet-work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field measurements before being enclosed/concealed by construction, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. C. Established Dimensions: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where cabinets are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS QPK NO. 220157.00 064116 - 3 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 064116 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the Architectural Woodwork Standards for grades of cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. The Contract Documents contain requirements that are more stringent than the referenced quality standard. Comply with requirements of Contract Documents in addition to those of the referenced quality standard. B. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Premium. C. Type of Construction: Frameless. D. Door and Drawer-Front Style: Flush overlay. E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by quality standard. 1. Basis of Design: Provide laminate as indicated in Finish Legend on Drawings. F. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: 1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS. 2. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS. 3. Edges: Grade HGS. 4. Pattern Direction: Vertically for doors and fixed panels, horizontally for drawer fronts. G. Materials for Semi-exposed Surfaces: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermally fused laminate panels. a. Edges of Thermally Fused Laminate Panel Shelves: PVC or polyester edge banding. b. For semi-exposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS. 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermally fused laminate panels. H. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic-Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL. I. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body. 1. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical fasteners or glued dovetail joints. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS QPK NO. 220157.00 064116 - 4 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 064116 - 4 J. Colors, Patterns and Finishes (PLAM-504): Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. As indicated by laminate manufacturer's designations. 2.2 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of architectural cabinet and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent. B. Composite Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of architectural cabinet and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Medium-Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2, Grade 130. 2. Particleboard (Medium Density): ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. 3. Thermally Fused Laminate (TFL) Panels: Particleboard or MDF finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for Test Methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10. 2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with cabinets. B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): ANSI/BHMA A156.9, B01602, 135 degrees of opening, self-closing. C. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 5 inches (127 mm) long, 2-1/2 inches (63.5 mm) deep, and 5/16 inch (8 mm) in diameter. D. Shelf Rests: ANSI/BHMA A156.9, B04013; two-pin plastic with shelf hold-down clip. E. Drawer Slides: ANSI/BHMA A156.9. 1. Standard Duty (Grade 1): Side mount and extending under bottom edge of drawer. 2. Heavy-Duty (Grade 1HD-100): Side mount. a. Type: Full extension. b. Material: Epoxy-coated polymer or zinc-plated ball bearing slides. c. Motion Feature: Soft close dampener or self-closing mechanism. 3. General-purpose drawers but not more than 6 inches (150 mm) high and not more than 24 inches (600 mm) wide, provide 75 lb (34 kg) load capacity. 4. File drawers more than 6 inches (150 mm) high or more than 24 inches (600 mm) wide, provide 100 lb (45 kg) load capacity. 5. Lateral file drawers more than 6 inches (150 mm) high and more than 24 inches (600 mm) but not more than 30 inches (762 mm) wide, provide 150 lb (68 kg) load capacity. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS QPK NO. 220157.00 064116 - 5 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 064116 - 5 F. Door Locks: ANSI/BHMA A156.11, E07121. G. Drawer Locks: ANSI/BHMA A156.11, E07041. H. Door and Drawer Silencers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, L03011. I. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with ANSI/BHMA A156.18 for ANSI/BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Satin Chromium Plated: ANSI/BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; ANSI/BHMA 652 for steel base. 2. Satin Stainless Steel: ANSI/BHMA 630. J. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in ANSI/BHMA A156.9. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrousmetal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors. C. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: PVA. 1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive. 2. Panel assemblies fabricated with PVA adhesive to be laminated with minimum 5 psi continuous pressure evenly applied to entire panel surface. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate architectural cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. B. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. C. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS QPK NO. 220157.00 064116 - 6 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 064116 - 6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition cabinets to humidity conditions in installation areas for not less than 72 hours. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Install cabinets to comply with quality standard grade of item to be installed. B. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with wafer-head cabinet installation screws. D. Install cabinets level, plumb, and true in line to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm) using concealed shims. 1. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. 2. Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects. Where not possible to repair, replace architectural cabinets. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate and adjust hardware. C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. END OF SECTION 064116 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING QPK NO. 220157.00 078413 - 1 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 078413 - 1 SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Penetration firestopping systems for the following applications: a. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls. b. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 078443 "Joint Firestopping" for joints in or between fire-resistance-rat ed construction, at exterior curtain-wall/floor intersections, and in smoke barriers. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location, illustration of firestopping system, and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency. 1. Contractor to submit schedule formatted as indicated in Part 3 identifying construction and rating of wall assembly being penetrated, the properties of the penetrating item(s) and the proposed firestopping material including any necessary backing. 2. Engineering Judgments: Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping system, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly. Obtain approval of authorities having jurisdiction prior to submittal. PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING QPK NO. 220157.00 078413 - 2 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 078413 - 2 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Test Reports: For each penetration firestopping system, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that penetration firestopping systems have been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Approval according to FM Approval 4991, "Approval Standard for Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements." 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping system when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping system manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Install and cure penetration firestopping materials per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping systems can be installed according to specified firestopping system design. B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: 1. Perform penetration firestopping system tests by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING QPK NO. 220157.00 078413 - 3 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 078413 - 3 2. Test per testing standards referenced in "Penetration Firestopping Systems" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. Penetration firestopping systems shall bear classification marking of a qualified testing agency. 1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." 2) Intertek Group in its "Directory of Listed Building Products." 3) FM Approval in its "Approval Guide." 2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS A. Penetration Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 3M Fire Protection Products. 2. Hilti, Inc. 3. Nelson Thermal Insulation and Fire Stopping 4. Specified Technologies, Inc. C. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa). 1. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. D. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa). 1. F-Rating: One hour. 2. T-Rating: One hour, except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall. 3. W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping systems showing no evidence of water leakage when tested according to UL 1479. a. All sanitary waste line, supply water and sprinkler line floor penetrations. E. Exposed Penetration Firestopping Systems: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E84. PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING QPK NO. 220157.00 078413 - 4 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 078413 - 4 F. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for conditions indicated. 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials. 2. Substrate primers. 3. Collars. 2.3 FILL MATERIALS A. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during exposure to moisture. B. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant. C. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced intumescent elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet. D. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening, water-resistant, intumescent putties containing no solvents or inorganic fibers. E. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side. F. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar. G. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. H. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants. 2.4 MIXING A. Penetration Firestopping Materials: For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING QPK NO. 220157.00 078413 - 5 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 078413 - 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Before installing penetration firestopping systems, clean out openings immediately to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping materials. 2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. B. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install penetration firestopping systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications. B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings. 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not forming permanent components of firestopping. PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING QPK NO. 220157.00 078413 - 6 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 078413 - 6 C. Install fill materials by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories and penetrating items to achieve required fire-resistance ratings. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Wall Identification: Permanently label walls containing penetration firestopping systems with the words "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER - PROTECT ALL OPENINGS," using lettering not less than 3 inches (76 mm) high and with minimum 0.375-inch (9.5-mm) strokes. 1. Locate in accessible concealed floor, floor-ceiling, or attic space at 15 feet (4.57 m) from end of wall and at intervals not exceeding 30 feet (9.14 m). B. Penetration Identification: Identify each penetration firestopping system with legible metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (150 mm) of penetration firestopping system edge so labels are visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping systems. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping material and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements. PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING QPK NO. 220157.00 078413 - 7 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 078413 - 7 3.6 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEM SCHEDULE A. Penetration Firestopping System for (specific penetrating item and wall construction): 1. Testing Agency System Designation: 2. F-Rating: 1 hour. 3. T-Rating (for horizontal assemblies not within wall cavities): 1 hour. 4. W-Rating (at specified locations.) 5. Properties and size of penetrating item(s). 6. Type of Fill Materials: B. Clearly indicate all ancillary space requirements of void. C. Group horizontal systems (floor) and vertical systems (walls) separately. END OF SECTION 078413 JOINT SEALANTS QPK NO. 220157.00 079200 - 1 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 079200 - 1 SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Urethane joint sealants. 2. Mildew-resistant joint sealants. 3. Latex joint sealants. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for sealing joints in sound-rated construction. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product. B. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide by 3 inch (75 mm) long strips. C. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each kind of joint sealant, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency. B. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. JOINT SEALANTS QPK NO. 220157.00 079200 - 2 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 079200 - 2 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency. 1. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C1021 to conduct the testing indicated. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by jointsealant manufacturer. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. JOINT SEALANTS QPK NO. 220157.00 079200 - 3 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 079200 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 1. Sealant color for tile shall match grout color. 2.2 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS A. Urethane, S, NS, 25, T, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses T and NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Pecora Corporation; DynaTrol I-XL. b. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex – 1a. B. Urethane, M, NS, 50, T, NT: Multi-component, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 50, Uses T and NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Pecora Corporation; DynaTrol II. b. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex – 2c NS EZ Mix+. 2.3 MILDEW-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS A. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealants: Formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with fungicide to prevent mold and mildew growth. B. Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT: Mildew-resistant, single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, acid-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Building Systems; Omniplus. b. Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant. c. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700. d. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200 Sanitary. JOINT SEALANTS QPK NO. 220157.00 079200 - 4 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 079200 - 4 2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C834, Type OP, Grade NF. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolac. b. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 600. c. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. 2.5 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), Type O (open-cell material), Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin) or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. JOINT SEALANTS QPK NO. 220157.00 079200 - 5 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 079200 - 5 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Concrete. b. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of jointsealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. JOINT SEALANTS QPK NO. 220157.00 079200 - 6 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 079200 - 6 D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C1193 unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. 3.6 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 1. Joint Locations: a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, NS, 25, T, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: a. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. JOINT SEALANTS QPK NO. 220157.00 079200 - 7 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 079200 - 7 B. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces. 1. Joint Locations: a. Control joints between suspended bulkheads and full height walls. (Joint movement acting in shear.) 2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, M, NS, 50, T, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: a. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. C. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 1. Joint Locations: a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors and counters. 2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, mildew resistant, acid curing, S, NS, 25, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. D. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces not subject to significant movement. 1. Joint Locations: a. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows and elevator entrances. 2. Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: Paintable. END OF SECTION 079200 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES QPK NO. 220157.00 081113 - 1 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 081113 - 1 SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Interior standard steel doors and frames. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 081416 "Flush Wood Doors " for doors installed in hollow metal frames. 2. Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow-metal doors. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or ANSI/SDI A250.8. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. B. Coordinate requirements for installation of door hardware, electrified door hardware, and access control and security systems. 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions and finishes. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES QPK NO. 220157.00 081113 - 2 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 081113 - 2 B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door type. 2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of electrical raceway and preparation for electrified hardware, access control systems, and security systems. 7. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices and connections. 8. Details of accessories. 9. Details of moldings, removable stops and glazing. C. Product Schedule: For hollow-metal doors and frames, prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final door hardware schedule. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each type of fire-rated hollow-metal door and frame assembly for tests performed by a qualified testing agency indicating compliance with performance requirements. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow-metal doors and frames palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use non-vented plastic. 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units. B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. C. Store hollow-metal doors and frames vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch- (102-mm-) high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm) space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design: Curries Co., M Series frames and 707 Series doors. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable alternative doors and frames from one of the following: a. Ceco Door, SU Series frames and Legion doors. b. Steelcraft, F Series frames and L Series doors. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES QPK NO. 220157.00 081113 - 3 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 081113 - 3 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated on Drawings, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. 2.3 INTERIOR STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES A. Construct hollow-metal doors and frames to comply with standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances and as specified. B. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8, Level 2; ANSI/SDI A250.4, Level B. 1. Doors: a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm). c. Face: Uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0 mm). d. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless. e. Edge Bevel: Bevel lock and hinge edges 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3.2 mm in 51 mm). f. Core for Non-Rated Doors: Polystyrene. g. Fire-Rated Core: Manufacturer's standard core for fire-rated doors. 2. Frames: a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm). b. Sidelite and Transom Frames: Fabricated from same thickness material as adjacent door frame. c. Construction: Face welded. 3. Exposed Finish: Prime. 2.4 BORROWED LITES A. Fabricate of uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm). B. Construction: Face welded. C. Fabricate in one piece except where handling and shipping limitations require multiple sections. Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of metal of same or greater thickness as metal as frames. D. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES QPK NO. 220157.00 081113 - 4 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 081113 - 4 2.5 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Type: Anchors of minimum size and type required by applicable door and frame standard, and suitable for performance level indicated. 2. Quantity: Minimum of three anchors per jamb, with one additional anchor for frames with no floor anchor. Provide one additional anchor for each 24 inches (610 mm) of frame height above 7 feet (2.1 m). 3. Postinstalled Expansion Anchor: Minimum 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts, with manufacturer's standard pipe spacer. B. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor. C. Material: ASTM A879/A879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z (12G) coating designation; mill phosphatized. 2.6 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1011/A1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A153/A153M. E. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated. F. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smokedeveloped indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E136 for combustion characteristics. G. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing." 2.7 FABRICATION A. Hollow-Metal Frames: Fabricate in one piece except where handling and shipping limitations require multiple sections. Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of metal of same or greater thickness as frames. 1. Sidelite and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by welding. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES QPK NO. 220157.00 081113 - 5 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 081113 - 5 2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 3. Door Silencers: Drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers. B. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal doors and frames to receive templated mortised hardware, and electrical wiring; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to ANSI/SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates. 1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised and surface-mounted door hardware. 2. Comply with BHMA A156.115 for preparing hollow-metal doors and frames for hardware. C. Glazed Lites: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with mitered hairline joints. 1. Provide stops and moldings flush with face of door, and with square stops unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide fixed frame moldings on secure side of interior doors and frames. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal doors and frames. 3. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation types indicated. 4. Provide stops for installation with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches (230 mm) o.c. and not more than 2 inches (51 mm) o.c. from each corner. 2.8 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Touch up factory-applied finishes where spreaders are removed. B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised and surface-mounted door hardware. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES QPK NO. 220157.00 081113 - 6 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 081113 - 6 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install hollow-metal doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with approved Shop Drawings and with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11. 1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces without damage to completed Work. a. Where frames are fabricated in sections, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Touch-up finishes. b. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. 2. Fire-Rated Openings: Install frames according to NFPA 80. 3. Floor Anchors: Secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 4. Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames. 5. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal frames to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor. C. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit and adjust hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. 1. Steel Doors: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with hollowmetal manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 REPAIR A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. B. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 081113 FLUSH WOOD DOORS QPK NO. 220157.00 081416 - 1 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 081416 - 1 SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid-core flush wood veneer-faced doors for transparent finish. 2. Solid-core flush wood doors with plastic-veneer-faces. 3. Factory finishing flush wood doors. 4. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 081113 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for frame requirements. 2. Section 084113 “Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts” for surface mounted sliding door frame assembly requirements. 3. Section 087100 " Door Hardware" for related hardware requirements. 4. Section 088000 "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including the following: 1. Door core materials and construction. 2. Door edge construction 3. Door face type and characteristics. 4. Door trim for openings. 5. Factory-machining criteria. 6. Factory-finishing specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each type of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following: 1. Door schedule indicating door location, type, size, fire protection rating and swing. 2. Door elevations, dimension and locations of hardware and lite cutouts. FLUSH WOOD DOORS QPK NO. 220157.00 081416 - 2 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 081416 - 2 3. Details of frame for each frame type, including dimensions and profile. 4. Details of electrical raceway and preparation for electrified hardware, access control systems, and security systems. 5. Dimensions and locations of blocking for hardware attachment. 6. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 7. Clearances and undercuts. 8. Requirements for veneer matching. 9. Doors to be factory finished and application requirements. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For plastic-laminate door faces and factory-finished doors. D. Samples for Verification: 1. Factory wood veneer finishes applied to actual door face material, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm). 2. Plastic veneer, 6 inches (150 mm) square, for each color, texture and pattern selected. 3. Replaceable door edge cover, with specified finish, 6 inches (150 mm) long. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample Warranty: For special warranties. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Special warranties. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons. C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels designed for building occupants for the remainder of construction period. FLUSH WOOD DOORS QPK NO. 220157.00 081416 - 3 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 081416 - 3 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Delamination of veneer. b. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) in a 42-by-84-inch (1067-by-2134-mm) section. c. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch (0.25 mm in a 76.2-mm) span. 2. Warranty for above defects shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 3. Additional coverage for plastic veneer clad doors shall include material replacement of damaged replaceable extruded door edge covers by manufacturer. 4. Warranty Period for all Solid-Core Interior Doors and Components: Life of installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Solid Core Wood Doors: 1. Basis of Design Wood Veneer Doors: Graham Doors, GPD Series. a. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable alternative doors and frames from the following: 1) Marshfield Doors, DPC Series. 2. Basis of Design Plastic Laminate Faced Doors: Construction Specialties, Inc., Acrovyn Door System. No substitutions. B. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer except as follows: 1. Provide plastic veneer clad flush wood doors from specified manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Rated Wood Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fireprotection ratings indicated on Drawings, based on testing at positive pressure in accordance with UL 10C or NFPA 252. FLUSH WOOD DOORS QPK NO. 220157.00 081416 - 4 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 081416 - 4 2.3 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1A. 1. The Contract Documents contain requirements that are more stringent than the referenced quality standard. Comply with the Contract Documents in addition to those of the referenced quality standard. 2.4 SOLID-CORE FLUSH WOOD VENEER-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Interior Doors: 1. Performance Grade: ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1A Extra Heavy Duty. 2. Faces: Single-ply wood veneer not less than 1/50 inch (0.508 mm) thick. a. Species: Red oak. b. Cut: Plain sliced (flat sliced). c. Match between Veneer Leaves: Slip match. d. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance match. e. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening. 3. Exposed Vertical Edges: Applied wood edges of same species as faces and covering edges of crossbands - Architectural Woodwork Standards edge Type D. a. Fire-Rated Doors: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed vertical edges. b. Mineral-Core Doors: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. 1) Screw-Holding Capability: 550 lbf (2440 N) in accordance with WDMA T.M. 10. 4. Cores for Non-Fire Rated Doors: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1 particleboard. a. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware. 5. Core for Fire-Rated Doors: As required to achieve fire-protection rating indicated. a. Blocking for Mineral-Core Doors: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated on Drawings as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware. 6. Construction: Five plies, hot-pressed bonded (vertical and horizontal edging is bonded to core), with entire unit abrasive planed before veneering. FLUSH WOOD DOORS QPK NO. 220157.00 081416 - 5 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 081416 - 5 2.5 SOLID-CORE FLUSH WOOD DOORS WITH PLASTIC-VENEER FACES A. Interior Doors: 1. Performance Grade: ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1A Extra Heavy Duty. 2. Plastic-Veneer Faces: Impact resistant, PVC-free plastic panels with integral base color throughout full panel thickness and the following performance characteristics: a. Face Veneer Wear Index: Abrasion Resistance per ASTM D-4060 to 28,000 cycles with no scratching or scuffing. b. Face Veneer Impact Resistance: Per ASTM D-4226 to 86 in./lb. without damage. 3. Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of options. 4. Door Edges: Plastic extrusions to match face finish with the following features: a. Edge covers shall fully wrap door vertical stiles and be flush with both door faces. b. Edge covers shall have 1/4-inch radiused corners. c. Edge covers shall be installed with concealed fastening. d. Edge covers and stiles shall comply with WDMA TM-8 and TM-10 Extra Heavy Duty hinge and screw holding capacities. 5. Door Cores: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1 particleboard. a. Blocking: Provide blocking as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware. 6. Construction: Five plies, hot-pressed or cold-pressed bonded (horizontal edging is bonded to core), with entire unit abrasive planed before faces and crossbands are applied. 2.6 LIGHT FRAMES A. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard wood beads unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood Species: Same species as door faces. 2. Profile: Flush rectangular beads. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. 1. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. 2. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. 1. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. 2. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, ANSI/BHMA156.115-W, and hardware templates. 3. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames, to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. 4. Provide factory-installed raceway and wiring in all doors to accommodate specified hardware including the future addition of electrified hardware for access control systems. FLUSH WOOD DOORS QPK NO. 220157.00 081416 - 6 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 081416 - 6 C. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors. 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Glazing: Installed as part of Section 088000 "Glazing." 2.8 FACTORY FINISHING A. Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. 1. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing. 2. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. 3. Stains and fillers may be omitted on bottom edges, edges of cutouts and mortises. B. Factory finish doors not specified for plastic-veneer faces. C. Transparent Finish: 1. ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1A Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1A TR-6 Catalyzed Polyurethane. 3. Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Effect: Filled finish. 5. Sheen: Satin. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors. 1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware." B. Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated. C. Install doors level, plumb, true and straight. 1. Install fire-rated doors and frames in accordance with NFPA 80. D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. FLUSH WOOD DOORS QPK NO. 220157.00 081416 - 7 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 081416 - 7 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION 081416 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES QPK NO. 220157.00 083113 - 1 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 083113 - 1 SECTION 083113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Access doors and frames. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles and finishes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES A. Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges: 1. Description: Face of door flush with frame, with exposed flange and concealed hinge. 2. Optional Features: Piano hinges. 3. Locations: Wall. 4. Door Size: 24 inches (610 mm) square minimum. 5. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.060 inch (1.52 mm), 16 gage, factory primed. 6. Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door. 7. Latch and Lock: Cam latch with operation method as directed by Owner. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M. B. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc coated, ASTM A879/A879M, with cold-rolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed. C. Frame Anchors: Same material as door face. ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES QPK NO. 220157.00 083113 - 2 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 083113 - 2 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation. B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish mounting holes, attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to types of supports indicated. D. Latch and Lock Hardware: 1. Quantity: Furnish number of latches and locks required to hold doors tightly closed. 2.4 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. D. Painted Finishes: Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish. 1. Factory Primed: Apply manufacturer's standard, lead- and chromate-free, universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames. ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES QPK NO. 220157.00 083113 - 3 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 083113 - 3 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation. 3.4 SCHEDULE A. Provide doors at all concealed valve locations. Coordinate location and count with plumbing trade and Owner requirements. END OF SECTION 083113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS QPK NO. 220157.00 084113 - 1 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 0841113- 1 SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Aluminum-framed storefront systems. 2. Aluminum-framed entrance door systems. 3. Aluminum sliding door frame systems. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 081416 "Flush Wood Doors" for wood doors installed in aluminum sliding door frame assemblies. 2. Section 084229 "Swinging Automatic Entrances" for low energy operators installed with entrance door assemblies 3. Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for additional hardware components. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts and aluminum sliding door frames. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work. 1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior. 2. Include full-size isometric details of each type of vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, showing the following: a. Joinery, including concealed welds. b. Anchorage. c. Glazing. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS QPK NO. 220157.00 084113 - 2 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 0841113- 2 3. Include point-to-point wiring diagrams showing the following: a. Power requirements for each electrically operated door hardware. b. Location and types of switches, signal device, conduit sizes and number and size of wires. C. Samples for Verification: For each exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes. D. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: 1. For Installer. B. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed entrances, storefronts and sliding door components to include in maintenance manuals. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer and that employs a qualified glazing contractor for this Project who is certified under the North American Contractor Certification Program (NACC) for Architectural Glass & Metal (AG&M) contractors. B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. 1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS QPK NO. 220157.00 084113 - 3 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 0841113- 3 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures, including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. c. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering. d. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas. e. Failure of operating components. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Finish Warranty, Anodized Finishes: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of anodized finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Delta E units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, peeling, or chipping. 2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of aluminum-framed entrance and storefront system, including framing and accessories, from single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. 1. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand movements of supporting structure, including, but not limited to, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 2. Failure also includes the following: a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. b. Glass breakage. c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. e. Failure of operating units. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS QPK NO. 220157.00 084113 - 4 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 0841113- 4 B. Structural Loads: 1. Lateral Loads: 10 psf. C. Deflection of Framing Members Supporting Glass: At design wind load, as follows: 1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span. 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to amount not exceeding that which reduces glazing bite to less than 75 percent of design dimension and that which reduces edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed components to less than 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). D. Structural: Test according to ASTM E330/E330M as follows: 1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, storefront assemblies, including entrance doors, do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. 2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, storefront assemblies, including entrance doors and anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span. 3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds. 2.3 STOREFRONT SYSTEMS A. Basis of Design: EFCO Corp., Series 401 framing. B. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Interior Framing Construction: Nonthermal. 2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 3. Glazing Plane: Center. 4. Finish: Clear anodic finish. 5. Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated stick system. 6. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 7. Steel Reinforcement: As required by manufacturer. C. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction. D. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. 2.4 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS A. Basis of Design: EFCO Corp., Series D500 medium stile doors ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS QPK NO. 220157.00 084113 - 5 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 0841113- 5 B. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for swing operation. 1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch (44.5-mm) overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch- (3.2-mm-) thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. 2. Door Design: Wide stile; 5-inch (127-mm) nominal width. 3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on secure side of door. 4. Finish: Match adjacent storefront framing finish. 2.5 SLIDING DOOR SYSTEMS A. Basis of Design: AD Systems, 2201 100th St. SW, Everett, WA 98204. Web: http://specADsystems.com. ExamSlide, high performance Barn (Sliding) door system. B. Extruded aluminum wrap around frame profile with minimum 0.125-inch- (3.2-mm-) thick, extruded-aluminum frame members and integral seals. C. Overhead Track Assembly: Surface mounted, extruded aluminum, square profile enclosure with single track and tandem nylon rollers sized to accommodate weight of specified wood door. Provide soft and self-closing damper mechanism at both sides of door leaf. D. Finish: Clear anodized aluminum or painted finish to match storefront system framing. 2.6 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE A. Entrance Door Hardware: Hardware not specified in this Section is specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware." B. General: Provide entrance door hardware and entrance door hardware sets indicated in "Entrance Door Hardware Sets" Article for each entrance door, to comply with requirements in this Section. 1. Entrance Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and products complying with BHMA standard referenced. 2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated. 3. Opening-Force Requirements: a. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N) to fully open door. C. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, quantity, size and other distinctive qualities of each type of entrance door hardware are indicated in "Entrance Door Hardware Sets" Article. Products are identified by using hardware designations as follows: 1. References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with these standards and requirements for description, quality and function. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS QPK NO. 220157.00 084113 - 6 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 0841113- 6 D. Butt Hinges: BHMA A156.1, Grade 1, radius corner. 1. Nonremovable Pins: Provide setscrew in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while entrance door is closed. 2. Electric Transfer Hinges: a. Hinge comparable to McKinney, Electro-Lynx hinge with QC option and Molex standardized plug in connectors. b. 24 Volt rating with sufficient concealed wires to accommodate specified functions. 3. Finish: Satin Chrome (26D) unless noted otherwise. E. Mortise Locksets: Provided under Section 087100 for Base Contract scope. F. Panic Exit Devices: Provided under Section 087100 for Base Contract scope. G. Cylinders: Provided under Section 087100 for Base Contract scope. H. Strikes: Provide strike with black-plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt; fabricated for aluminum framing. I. Operating Trim: Provided under Section 087100 for Base Contract scope. J. Closers: Provided under Section 087100 for Base Contract scope. K. Door Stops: Provided under Section 087100 for Base Contract scope. L. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components. 1. Compression Type: Made of ASTM D2000 molded neoprene or ASTM D2287 PVC. 2.7 GLAZING A. Glazing: Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing." B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black, resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers. 2.8 MATERIALS A. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M). B. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M). C. Structural Profiles: ASTM B308/B308M. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS QPK NO. 220157.00 084113 - 7 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 0841113- 7 D. Steel Reinforcement: 1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M. 2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A1008/A1008M. 3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A1011/A1011M. E. Steel Reinforcement Primer: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPCSP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. 2.9 ACCESSORIES A. Automatic Door Operators: Section 084229 "Swinging Automatic Entrances." B. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. C. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1 inch (25.4 mm) that accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer. 1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts complying with ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M requirements. D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint containing no asbestos, formulated for 30mil (0.762-mm) thickness per coat. 2.10 FABRICATION A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 5. Fasteners, anchors and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS QPK NO. 220157.00 084113 - 8 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 0841113- 8 E. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using shear-block system. F. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware. 1. At doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. G. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware. H. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes. I. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. 2.11 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Do not install damaged components. C. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. D. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. E. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. F. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. G. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose or by installing nonconductive spacers. 2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS QPK NO. 220157.00 084113 - 9 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 0841113- 9 H. Set continuous sill members in full sealant bed, as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants". I. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer. J. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF GLAZING A. Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing." 3.4 INSTALLATION OF ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCE DOORS A. Install entrance doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. 1. Doors: Install to produce a tight fit at weather stripping. 2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. 3.5 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Install aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to comply with the following maximum tolerances: 1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3.2 mm in 3 m); 1/4 inch in 40 feet (6.35 mm in 12.2 m). 2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet (3.2 mm in 6 m); 1/4 inch in 40 feet (6.35 mm in 12.2 m). 3. Alignment: a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1 inch (12.7 to 25.4 mm) wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch (25.4 mm) wide or more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch (6 mm). 4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m); 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) over total length. 3.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Entrance Door Hardware Maintenance: 1. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of entrance door hardware. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS QPK NO. 220157.00 084113 - 10 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 0841113- 10 3.7 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE – ALUMINUM STOREFRONT ENTRIES A. Hardware Set #1 (Door 105): 1. Butts: 2 required. 2. Electric Butt: 1 required. 3. Rim Electric Panic - (1 required): As specified in Section 087100. 4. Low Energy Door Operator: As specified in Section 084229. 5. Weatherstripping: Head and jambs. Theory of Operation: Door always open from the interior by use of panic hardware. Doors can be unlocked at any time via electronic control. Upon activation of the door operator by use of door controls, the panic device latch shall first be retracted prior to initiating door operation. Doors can be unlatched from secure side by key, access control device (ACD) as provided by Security Contractor or control switch mounted at 2nd Floor Admin Assistant Reception desk. Door status reported by use of door contacts to security system. Door is fail-secure in case of power outage. ACD has integrated camera, door buzzer and security electronics. Upon retraction of the latch, the door operator control device shall become active. The occupant then has the option to either manually open the door or use the door operator function. B. Hardware Set #2 (Door 106B): 1. Butts: 3 required. 2. Mortised Lockset: As specified in Section 087100. 3. Surface Closer: As specified in Section 087100. 4. Weatherstripping: Head and jambs. 5. Wall Stop: As specified in Section 087100. C. Hardware Set #3 (Doors 212B, 213B, 214B, 215B, 216B and 217B): 1. Sliding Door Frame Assembly. 2. Pulls (2 required): As specified in Section 087100. END OF SECTION 084113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS QPK NO. 220157.00 084113 - 11 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 0841113- 11 SWINGING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES QPK NO. 220157.00 084229 - 1 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 084229 - 1 SECTION 084229 - SWINGING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior, swinging, low-energy automatic entrances. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 081113 “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames” for frame information. 2. Section 081416 “Flush Wood Doors” for door information. 3. Section 084113 “Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts” for door and frame information. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. AAADM: American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers. B. Activation Device: A control that, when actuated, sends an electrical signal to the door operator to open the door. C. Double-Egress Doors: A pair of doors that simultaneously swing with the two doors moving in opposite directions, with no mullion between them. D. Double-Swing Doors: A pair of doors that swing with the two doors moving in opposite directions, with a mullion between them; each door functioning as a single-swing door. E. IBC: International Building Code. F. Safety Device: A control that, to avoid injury, prevents a door from opening or closing. G. For automatic door terminology, refer to BHMA A156.19 for definitions of terms. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of recesses in concrete floors for recessed control mats that control automatic entrances. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified elsewhere. SWINGING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES QPK NO. 220157.00 084229 - 2 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 084229 - 2 B. Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing automatic entrances. C. Coordinate hardware with doors, frames and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function and finish. Coordinate hardware for automatic entrances with hardware required for rest of Project. D. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of automatic entrances with connections to power supplies. 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Discuss exact activation hardware location and activation time settings of units. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for automatic entrances. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: For swinging automatic entrances. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware mounting heights, and attachment details. 2. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 4. Indicate locations of activation and safety devices. 5. Include hardware schedule and indicate hardware types, functions, quantities and locations. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color of finishes. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer. B. Product Test Reports: For each type of automatic entrance, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. C. Field quality-control reports. D. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties. SWINGING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES QPK NO. 220157.00 084229 - 3 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 084229 - 3 1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For automatic entrances, safety devices, and control systems to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer with Company Certificate issued by AAADM indicating that manufacturer has a Certified Inspector on staff. B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of automatic entrances that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Faulty operation of operators, controls, and hardware. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE ASSEMBLIES A. Source Limitations: Obtain swinging automatic entrances from single source from single manufacturer. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Low-Energy Door Standard: BHMA A156.19. SWINGING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES QPK NO. 220157.00 084229 - 4 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 084229 - 4 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Opening Force: 1. Accessible, Power-Assist Interior Doors: Not more than 5 lbf (22 N) to push or pull door to fully open position. 2.3 SWINGING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard automatic entrances, including doors, framing, headers, door operators, controls, and accessories required for a complete installation. B. Swinging, Low-Energy, Power-Open Automatic Entrance: 1. Basis of Design: Provide Besam, Model SW200i operators. No substitutions. 2. Configuration: Single-swinging door. a. Traffic Pattern: Two way. b. Mounting: Surface on push side of opening. 3. Operator Features: a. Power opening and spring closing. b. Adjustable opening and closing speeds. c. Adjustable hold-open time between zero and 30 seconds. d. Adjustable backcheck and latching. e. Obstruction recycle. f. Automatic door re-open if stopped while closing. g. On-off/hold-open switch to control electric power to operator, key operated. 4. Activation Device: Touchless switch on each side of door to activate door operator. 5. Finish: Finish framing, door(s), and header with Class I, clear anodic finish. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Extrusions: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M). 2. Sheet: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M). B. Steel Reinforcement: Reinforcement with corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00 applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Use surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. C. Sealants and Joint Fillers: As specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." D. Fasteners and Accessories: Corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. SWINGING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES QPK NO. 220157.00 084229 - 5 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 084229 - 5 2.5 DOOR OPERATORS AND CONTROLS A. General: Provide operators and controls, which include activation and safety devices, according to BHMA standards, for condition of exposure, and for long-term, maintenance-free operation under normal traffic load for type of occupancy indicated. B. Door Operators: Provide door operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size, weight, and movement. 1. Door Operator Performance: Door operators shall open and close doors and maintain them in fully closed position when subjected to Project's design wind loads. 2. Electromechanical Operators: Concealed, self-contained, overhead units powered by fractional-horsepower, permanent-magnet dc motor; with closing speed controlled mechanically by gear train and dynamically by braking action of electric motor; with solid-state microprocessor controller; complying with UL 325; and with manual operation with power off. C. Presence Sensors: Self-contained, active-infrared scanner units; adjustable to provide detectionfield sizes and functions required by BHMA A156.10. Sensors shall remain active at all times. 1. Provide one sensor mounted to pull side of door. D. Touchless Switch: Hands-free-activation door-control switch with flat motion sensor faceplate with adjustable operating range between 2 inches and 24 inches (50 mm and 600 mm). 1. Configuration: 4.56-by-4.56-inch (115.8-by-115.8-mm) (double gang) square faceplate. a. Mounting: Recess mounted in wall. 2. Faceplate Material: Plastic with contrasting color lettering. 3. Message: International symbol of accessibility, "Wave to Open," and wave symbol. E. Electrical Interlocks: Unless units are equipped with self-protecting devices or circuits, provide electrical interlocks to prevent activation of operator when door is locked, latched, or bolted. 2.6 HARDWARE A. General: Provide units in sizes and types recommended by automatic entrance and hardware manufacturers for entrances and uses indicated. Finish exposed parts to match door finish unless otherwise indicated. B. Manual Opening for Power-Assist and Low-Energy Doors: Provide hardware that, in a power failure, allows door to open with a manual force as stipulated in "Performance Requirements" Article. SWINGING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES QPK NO. 220157.00 084229 - 6 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 084229 - 6 2.7 ACCESSORIES 2.8 FABRICATION A. General: Factory fabricate automatic entrance components to designs, sizes, and thicknesses indicated and to comply with indicated standards. 1. Form aluminum shapes before finishing. 2. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. 3. Use concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use countersunk Phillips flat-head machine screws, finished to match framing. a. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking devices. b. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 4. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. B. Door Operators: Factory fabricated and installed in headers, including adjusting and testing. C. Controls: 1. General: Factory install safety devices in doors and headers as required by BHMA A156.10 for type of door and direction of travel. 2.9 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Apply anodic finishes to formed metal after fabrication unless otherwise indicated. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.10 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. SWINGING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES QPK NO. 220157.00 084229 - 7 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 084229 - 7 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, header support, and other conditions affecting performance of automatic entrances. B. Examine roughing-in for electrical systems to verify actual locations of power connections before automatic entrance installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install automatic entrances according to manufacturer's written instructions and cited BHMA A156.10 for direction of pedestrian travel, including signage, controls, wiring, and connection to the building's power supply. 1. Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Seal joints watertight. 2. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 3. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating. B. Entrances: Install automatic entrances plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades without warp or rack of framing members and doors. Anchor securely in place. 1. Install surface-mounted hardware using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. 2. Set headers, operating brackets, and guides level and true to location with anchorage for permanent support. 3. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within system to exterior. C. Door Operators: Connect door operators to electrical power distribution system. D. Access-Control Devices: Connect access-control devices to access-control system as specified in Section 281300 "Access Control Software and Database Management." 1. See Section 087100 “Door Hardware” Hardware Schedule for Theory of Operation of doors to receive low energy operators. 2. Provide all necessary accessories to integrate with security system controls as necessary to operate doors without damage to equipment. E. Controls: Install and adjust activation and safety devices according to manufacturer's written instructions and cited BHMA standard for direction of pedestrian travel. Connect control wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." SWINGING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES QPK NO. 220157.00 084229 - 8 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 084229 - 8 F. Wiring within Automatic Entrance Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's written limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust hardware, moving parts, door operators, and controls to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer; comply with requirements of applicable BHMA standards. 1. Adjust doors for tight closure. B. Readjust door operators and controls after repeated operation of completed installation equivalent to three days' use by normal traffic (100 to 300 cycles). C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean metal surfaces promptly after installation. Remove dirt and other substances. Repair damaged finish to match original finish. 3.5 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of automatic entrance Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper automatic entrance operation. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain automatic entrances. END OF SECTION 084229 DOOR HARDWARE QPK NO. 220157.00 087100 - 1 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 087100 - 1 SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Mechanical door hardware for the following: a. Swinging doors. b. Sliding doors. 2. Cylinders for door hardware specified in other Sections. 3. Electrified door hardware. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 081113 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for door silencers provided as part of hollow-metal frames. 2. Section 081416 "Flush Wood Doors" for doors to receive hardware. 3. Section 084113 "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts" for additional entrance door hardware supplied by door manufacturer. 4. Section 087113 "Automatic Door Operators" for low-energy power operators. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames and other work specified to be factory prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. B. Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with Owner's security consultant. C. Electrical System Roughing-In: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies and building safety and security systems. D. Existing Openings: Where hardware components are scheduled for application to existing construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify existing conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and to provide proper door operation. DOOR HARDWARE QPK NO. 220157.00 087100 - 2 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 087100 - 2 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at site local to the Project. 1. Preinstallation conference shall be attended by installers of hardware (including electrical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Conference will include a discussion on the expected use of installation manuals, hardware schedule, templates and physical product samples. 2. The manufacturer’s representative(s) for the life safety and security products shall inspect and approve the installation of the products they represent. Any identified installation or product issues shall be directed to the attention of the Architect for the purpose of generating the final punch list. 3. All doors and door hardware to be used shall be approved by the Ithaca College Lock Shop and Planning, Design and Construction Department prior to use on the project. B. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at site local to the Project. 1. Conference participants shall include the hardware Supplier and Installer. 2. Incorporate conference decisions into keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including, but not limited to, the following: a. Flow of traffic and degree of security required. b. Preliminary key system schematic diagram. c. Requirements for key control system. d. Requirements for access control. e. Address for delivery of keys. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profiles and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For electrified door hardware. 1. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 2. Include details of interface of electrified door hardware and building safety and security systems. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed product, in each finish specified. 1. Sample Size: Full-size units. a. Full-size Samples will be returned to Contractor. Units that are acceptable and remain undamaged through submittal, review, and field comparison process may, after final check of operation, be incorporated into the Work. 2. Tag Samples with full product description to coordinate Samples with door hardware schedule. DOOR HARDWARE QPK NO. 220157.00 087100 - 3 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 087100 - 3 D. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant. Coordinate door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule concurrent with submissions of Product Data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule. 2. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in door hardware schedule in the Contract Documents. 3. Content: Include the following information: a. Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size and material of each door and frame. b. Locations of each door hardware set cross-referenced to Drawings on floor plans and to door and frame schedule. c. Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style, function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product. d. Description of electrified door hardware sequences of operation and interfaces with other building control systems. e. Fastenings and other installation information. f. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and designations contained in door hardware schedule. g. Mounting locations for door hardware. h. List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and frame. E. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations that are coordinated with the Contract Documents. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Certificates: For each type of electrified door hardware. 1. Certify that door hardware for use on each type and size of labeled fire-rated doors complies with listed fire-rated door assemblies. C. Product Test Reports: For compliance with accessibility requirements, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for door hardware on doors located in accessible routes. D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals. B. Schedules: Final door hardware and keying schedule. DOOR HARDWARE QPK NO. 220157.00 087100 - 4 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 087100 - 4 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved by product manufacturers and of an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the course of the Work to consult Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. 1. Warehousing Facilities: In Project's vicinity. 2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedule. 3. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with the final door hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package. C. Deliver keys and permanent cores to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. b. Faulty operation of doors and door hardware. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use. 2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion unless otherwise indicated below: a. Exit Devices: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. c. Mortised Locksets: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door hardware from single manufacturer. DOOR HARDWARE QPK NO. 220157.00 087100 - 5 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 087100 - 5 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated doors are indicated, provide door hardware complying with NFPA 80 that is listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fireprotection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. B. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. D. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with the USDOJ's "2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design" and ICC A117.1. 1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N). 2. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements: a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied perpendicular to door. b. Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied parallel to door at latch. c. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) high. 4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 90 degrees, the door will take at least 5 seconds to move to a position of 12 degrees from the latch. 2.3 HINGES A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1. Provide template-produced hinges for hinges installed on hollow-metal doors and hollow-metal frames. 1. McKinney Hinges: Model and size as indicated in Schedule. No substitutions allowed. 2. Configuration: a. Heavy Weight Hinges: Full mortise, five-knuckle bearing hinges. b. Standard Weight Hinges: Full mortise, five-knuckle bearing hinges. c. Electric Transfer Hinges: McKinney, Electro-Lynx hinge with QC option and Molex standardized plug in connectors. Match weight rating of non-electric hinges. 1) 24 Volt with sufficient concealed wires to accommodate specified functions. 3. Finish: BHMA 652, satin chrome. 2.4 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Lock Functions: As indicated in door hardware schedule. DOOR HARDWARE QPK NO. 220157.00 087100 - 6 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 087100 - 6 B. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors, and as follows: 1. Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch (19-mm) latchbolt throw. C. Lock Backset: 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) unless otherwise indicated. D. Lock Trim: 1. Description: Lever design with end return and 2-1/8 inch diameter rose. 2. Levers: Cast - comparable to Sargent L design. 3. Escutcheons (Roses): Wrought - comparable to Sargent LN design. E. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch. 1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer. F. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13; Operational Grade 1; stamped steel case with steel or brass parts; Series 1000. 1. Sargent Manufacturing Co.: 8200 Series. No substitutions allowed. 2. Provide remote latch retraction function and request to exit function as indicated in hardware schedule. 3. Provide exterior side status indicator option as indicated in hardware schedule. Coordinate message content with Owner. 2.5 ELECTRIC STRIKES A. Electric Strikes: BHMA A156.31; Grade 1; with faceplate to suit lock and frame. 1. Basis of Design: Provide HES, 1500 Series or comparable product by Adams Rite. 2. Provide lock and strike monitor option. 3. Power: 24 volts. 2.6 SELF-CONTAINED ELECTRONIC LOCKS A. Self-Contained Electronic Locks: BHMA A156.25, mortise; with internal, battery-powered, self-contained electronic locks; consisting of complete lockset, motor-driven lock mechanism, and actuating device; enclosed in zinc-dichromate-plated, wrought-steel case, and strike that suits frame. Provide key override, low-battery detection and warning, LED status indicators, and ability to program at the lock. 1. Basis of Design: Sargent Manufacturing Co., IN120 Series. No substitutions allowed. 2. Credential Format: BIP 3. Operating hardware to match standard locksets. 4. Reader Color: Black reader and trim. DOOR HARDWARE QPK NO. 220157.00 087100 - 7 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 087100 - 7 2.7 MANUAL FLUSH BOLTS A. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16; minimum 3/4-inch (19-mm) throw; designed for mortising into door edge. 1. Basis of Design: McKinney, FB M Series flush bolts with DPS Series dust proof strike or one of the following: a. Rockwood Manufacturing: 555 Series flush bolts with 570 Series strike. b. Trimco: 3917 Series flush bolt with 3910 Series strike. 2.8 EXIT DEVICES AND AUXILIARY ITEMS A. Exit Devices and Auxiliary Items: BHMA A156.3. 1. Sargent Manufacturing Co.: 8600 Series. No substitutions allowed. 2. Configuration: a. Rim Panic: 1) Provide exterior operating trim as indicated in hardware schedule. 2) Provide request to exit signal switch as indicated in hardware schedule. 3) Provide remote latch retraction as indicated in hardware schedule. 4) Provide electronic locking functions as indicated in hardware schedule. 5) Provide cylinder dogging as indicated in hardware schedule. b. Concealed Vertical Rod Device: For information only (Landlord scope). 2.9 LOCK CYLINDERS A. Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver. 1. Provide Best cylinders for all locking devices. No substitutions allowed B. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.5; Grade 1 permanent cores; face finished to match lockset. 1. Core Type: Small format, interchangeable, 7 pin design. C. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores. Provide 10 construction master keys. 2.10 KEYING A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, appendix. Provide one extra key blank for each lock. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference. 1. Grand Master Key System: Provide as directed by Owner during keying conference to integrate with existing campus keying system. Change keys and master level keys operate cylinders. a. Provide three (3) cylinder change keys and five (5) keys for each level. DOOR HARDWARE QPK NO. 220157.00 087100 - 8 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 087100 - 8 B. Keys: Nickel silver. 1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the following notation: a. Notation: Information to be furnished by Owner. 2.11 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM A. Key Control Cabinet: BHMA A156.28; metal cabinet with baked-enamel finish; containing key-holding hooks, labels, two sets of key tags with self-locking key holders, key-gathering envelopes, and temporary and permanent markers; with key capacity of 150 percent of the number of locks. 1. Basis of Design: Provide key control cabinets from either Telkee or Lund Equipment Co. 2. Wall-Mounted Cabinet: Grade 1 cabinet with hinged-panel door equipped with keyholding panels and pin-tumbler cylinder door lock. 2.12 OPERATING TRIM A. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6; stainless steel unless otherwise indicated. 1. Basis of Design: Rockwood Manufacturing or comparable products by the following: a. McKinney. b. Trimco. 2. Profiles: As indicated in hardware schedule. 3. Provide silver ion based anti-microbial finish. 2.13 SURFACE CLOSERS A. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves and forged-steel main arm. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. 1. Basis of Design: Sargent, 351 Series. No substitutions allowed. 2. Provide forged heavy-duty parallel arms for push side closers. 2.14 MECHANICAL STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Wall-Mounted Stops: BHMA A156.16. 1. Basis of Design: McKinney, WS03 Series wall stop or one of the following: a. Rockwood Manufacturing: 400 Series wall stops. b. Trimco: 1270 Series wall stops. 2. Provide cast stops with resilient concave bumper and concealed mounting. DOOR HARDWARE QPK NO. 220157.00 087100 - 9 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 087100 - 9 2.15 SLIDING DOOR HARDWARE A. Sliding Door Hardware: BHMA A156.14; consisting of complete sets including rails, hangers, supports, ball bearing rollers, bumpers, floor guides and accessories indicated. 1. Basis of Design: Johnson Hardware, 1500SC Series soft-close pocket door frame kit. 2. Split Stud Wall Construction: 18 gauge cold rolled galvanized steel framing to match width of wall studs. 3. Rated Capacity: 200 lbs. (91kg). 2.16 METAL PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS A. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; fabricated from 0.050-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick stainless steel and beveled edges all sides; with manufacturer's standard machine or self-tapping screw fasteners. 1. Basis of Design: McKinney, KP50 Series protection plates or one of the following: a. Rockwood Manufacturing: K1050 Series protection plates. b. Trimco: K0050 Series protection plates. 2.17 FABRICATION A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire-rating labels and as otherwise approved by Architect. 1. Manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal indicated, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18. C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware unless otherwise indicated. 1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt. 2. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow-metal doors. 3. Gasketing Fasteners: Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. DOOR HARDWARE QPK NO. 220157.00 087100 - 10 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 087100 - 10 2.18 FINISHES A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Metal Doors and Frames: For surface-applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6. B. Wood Doors: Comply with door and hardware manufacturers' written instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Wood Doors: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. DOOR HARDWARE QPK NO. 220157.00 087100 - 11 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 087100 - 11 C. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule, but not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches (750 mm) of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided. D. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period. 1. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation. E. Key Control System: 1. Key Control Cabinet: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control system cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule. F. Boxed Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, in equipment rooms or IT Closets as directed by Owner in field. 1. Configuration: Provide least number of power supplies required to adequately serve doors with electrified door hardware. G. Stops: Provide wall stops for doors unless floor or other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately three months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and readjust each item of door hardware, including adjusting operating forces, as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. DOOR HARDWARE QPK NO. 220157.00 087100 - 12 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 087100 - 12 3.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. B. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper door and door hardware operation. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware. 3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE – ALUMINUM STOREFRONT ENTRIES A. Hardware Set #1 (Door 105): 1. Butts: Provided by door manufacturer. 2. Electric Butt: Provided by door manufacturer. 3. Rim Electric Panic - (1 required): Sargent 80 Series – 06 function with request to exit switch (55), electric latch retraction (56) and cylinder dogging (16). Provide exterior lever with cylinder (ETL trim). Fail secure design (24 volt). 4. Low Energy Door Operator: As specified in Section 084229. 5. Weatherstripping: Provided by door manufacturer. Theory of Operation: Door always open from the interior by use of panic hardware. Doors can be unlocked at any time via electronic control. Upon activation of the door operator by use of door controls, the panic device latch shall first be retracted prior to initiating door operation. Doors can be unlatched from secure side by key, access control device (ACD) as provided by Security Contractor or control switch mounted at 2nd Floor Admin Assistant Reception desk. Door status reported by use of door contacts to security system. Door is fail-secure in case of power outage. ACD has integrated camera, door buzzer and security electronics. Upon retraction of the latch, the door operator control device shall become active. The occupant then has the option to either manually open the door or use the door operator function. B. Hardware Set #2 (Door 106B): 1. Butts: Provided by door manufacturer. 2. Mortised Lockset: Sargent, 8200 Series (Classroom Intruder function). 3. Surface Closer: Sargent, 351 Series (pull side mounted). 4. Weatherstripping: Provided by door manufacturer. 5. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. C. Hardware Set #3 (Doors 212B, 213B, 214B, 215B, 216B and 217B): 1. Sliding Door Frame Assembly by door frame manufacturer. 2. Pulls (2 required): Rockwood, RM3421 NeoTek, 1-1/4-inch diameter by 12-inch long stainless-steel pull with round ends and peened gripping surface. Mount back to back. DOOR HARDWARE QPK NO. 220157.00 087100 - 13 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 087100 - 13 3.9 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE – INTERIOR DOORS A. Hardware Set #4 (Doors 101, 102, 103, 104, 117, 124, 125, 126, 128, 129, 130, 205, 206 and 207): 1. Butts: 1-1/2 pair, McKinney, TA2714, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Mortised Lockset: Sargent, 8200 Series (Office function). 3. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. B. Hardware Set #5 (Door 106A): 1. Butts: 1-1/2 pair, McKinney, TA2714, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Self-Contained Electronic Lockset: Sargent, IN120 Series. 3. Surface Closer: Sargent, 351 Series (push side mounted). 4. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. C. Hardware Set #6 (Doors 106C, 115B, 115C, 132, 133A, 202, 203A, 203B, 231A and 231B): 1. Butts: 1-1/2 pair, McKinney, T4A3786 heavy weight hinges, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Mortised Lockset: Sargent, 8200 Series (Classroom Intruder function). 3. Surface Closer: Sargent, 351 Series (push side mounted). 4. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. D. Hardware Set #7 (Door 107): 1. Butts: 1-1/2 pair, McKinney, TA2714, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Mortised Lockset: Sargent, 8200 Series (Classroom function). 3. Surface Closer: Sargent, 351 Series (pull side mounted). 4. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. E. Hardware Set #8 (Doors 108, 118 and 209): 1. Butts: 1-1/2 pair, McKinney, TA2714, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Mortised Lockset: Sargent, 8200 Series (Dormitory function). Provide status indicator with secure rose (50) and round thumb turn backplate (130KB). 3. Surface Closer: Sargent, 351 Series (pull side mounted). 4. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. F. Hardware Set #9 (Doors 109, 110, 111, 112, 212A, 213A, 214A, 215A, 216A, 217A and 224): 1. Butts: 1-1/2 pair, McKinney, TA2714, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Mortised Lockset: Sargent, 8200 Series (Classroom function) with ALP Push/Pull trim. 3. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. G. Hardware Set #10 (Doors 114, 220, 234 and 235): 1. Butts: 1-1/2 pair, McKinney, TA2714, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Mortised Lockset: Sargent, 8200 Series (Classroom function). 3. Surface Closer: Sargent, 351 Series (pull side mounted). 4. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. DOOR HARDWARE QPK NO. 220157.00 087100 - 14 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 087100 - 14 H. Hardware Set #11 (Door 115A): 1. Sliding (Pocket) Door Hardware Kit: Johnson Hardware, 1500SC Series. 2. Pulls (2 required): Rockwood, RM3421 NeoTek, 1-1/4-inch diameter by 12-inch long stainless-steel pull with round ends and peened gripping surface. Mount back to back. Note: Set location of pocket door stop so pulls do not impact door frame. I. Hardware Set #12 (Doors 119, 120 and 240): 1. Butts: 1-1/2 pair, McKinney, T4A3786 heavy weight hinges, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Operating Hardware: Rockwood, FP1230 foot pull, 1933 hand/arm pull and 70C series push plate (4” x 16”). 3. Surface Closer: Sargent, 351 Series (pull side mounted). 4. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. J. Hardware Set #13 (Doors 121 and 134): 1. Butts: 1-1/2 pair, McKinney, TA2714, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Mortised Lockset: Sargent, 8200 Series (Storeroom function). 3. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. K. Hardware Set #14 (Doors 127, 131, 202A, 202B, 208B and 239A): 1. Butts: 1-1/2 pair, McKinney, T4A3786 heavy weight hinges, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Mortised Lockset: Sargent, 8200 Series (Classroom Intruder function). 3. Surface Closer: Sargent, 351 Series (pull side mounted). 4. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. L. Hardware Set #15 (Door 201): 1. Cylinder: Best for existing locking hardware. 2. Provide door contact for monitoring opening status. M. Hardware Set #16 (Doors 204 and 208A): 1. Butts: 1-1/2 pair, McKinney, T4A3786 heavy weight hinges, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Mortised Lockset: Sargent, 8200 Series (Classroom Intruder function). 3. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. N. Hardware Set #17 (Door 210A): 1. Butts: 1-1/2 pair, McKinney, TA2714, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Self-Contained Electronic Lockset: Sargent, IN120 Series. 3. Surface Closer: Sargent, 351 Series (pull side mounted). 4. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. Theory of Operation: Doors always open from the interior. WiFi, battery operated. electronic lockset controls access to room. DOOR HARDWARE QPK NO. 220157.00 087100 - 15 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 087100 - 15 O. Hardware Set #18 (Doors 219B and 233): 1. Butts: 2 pair, McKinney, TA2714, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Self-Contained Electronic Lockset: Sargent, IN120 Series. 3. Surface Closer: Sargent, 351 Series (pull side mounted). 4. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. Theory of Operation: Doors always open from the interior. WiFi, battery operated. electronic lockset controls access to room. P. Hardware Set #19 (Doors 210B, 222 and 226): 1. Butts: 1-1/2 pair, McKinney, TA2714, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Mortised Lockset: Sargent, 8200 Series (Office function). 3. Surface Closer: Sargent, 351 Series (pull side mounted). 4. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. Q. Hardware Set #20 (Door 218): 1. Butts: 1-1/2 pair, McKinney, TA2714, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Mortised Lockset: Sargent, 8200 Series (Classroom function). 3. Electric Strike: HES, 1500 Series with monitoring. 4. Low Energy Door Operator: As specified in Section 084229. 5. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. Theory of Operation: Doors always open from the interior. Upon activation of door operator control switch, the electric strike shall first be retracted prior to initiating door operation. Doors can be unlocked from secure side by key. Door can be unlatched without unlocking by use of access control device (ACD) provided by Security Contractor. Door status reported by use of electric strike to security system. Door is fail-secure in case of power outage. After retraction of the latch, the (ACD) shall signal door operator control device to become active. The occupant then has the option to either manually open the door or use the door operator. When door is unlocked by use of cylinder, door operator remains inactive. R. Hardware Set #21 (Door 219A): 1. Butts: 1 pair, McKinney, T4A3786 heavy weight hinges, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Electric Transfer Hinge: 1/2 pair, McKinney, Electro-Lynx hinge matching butts. 3. Mortised Lockset: Sargent, 8200 Series, electromechanical fail secure operation (71). Coordinate with Axis A8004 VE Entry Control system. Power: 24 Volts. 4. Surface Closer: Sargent, 351 Series (pull side mounted). 5. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. Theory of Operation: Doors always open from the interior. Door can be unlocked remotely during operating hours via electronic control. When locked, door can be unlatched from exterior by use of key override, access control device (ACD) provided by Security Contractor or control switch mounted at Reception/Waiting desk. ACD has integrated camera, door buzzer and security electronics. DOOR HARDWARE QPK NO. 220157.00 087100 - 16 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 087100 - 16 S. Hardware #22 (Door 221): (Verify door size and operation – latching or push/pull.) 1. Butts: 1-1/2 pair, McKinney, TA2714, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Electric Butt: 1/2 pair, McKinney, Electro-Lynx hinge with QC option and Molex standardized plug in connectors 3. Rim Electric Panic: Sargent 80 Series - passage function (15) with remote latch retraction (56) and cylinder dogging (16). Provide exterior lever (L trim). Power: 24 volts. 4. Low Energy Door Operator: As specified in Section 084229. 5. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. Theory of Operation: Doors always open from both sides. Upon activation of door operator control switch, the panic device latch shall first be retracted prior to initiating door operation. Door operator can be activated from either side of door. T. Hardware Set #23 (Door 223): 1. Butts: 3 pair, McKinney, TA2714, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Mortised Lockset (1 required – active leaf): Sargent, 8200 Series (Classroom function) with ALP Push/Pull trim. 3. Manual Flush Bolts (1 top and bottom of inactive leaf): McKinney, FB M Series flush bolts with DPS Series dust proof strike 4. Wall Stop (1 required – active leaf): McKinney, WS03 Series. U. Hardware Set #24 (Doors 225 and 227): 1. Butts: 1-1/2 pair, McKinney, TA2714, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Mortised Lockset: Sargent, 8200 Series (Classroom function) with ALP Push/Pull trim. 3. Surface Closer: Sargent, 351 Series (pull side mounted). 4. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. V. Hardware Set #25 (Door 232): 1. Butts: 3 pair, McKinney, TA2714, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Mortised Lockset (1 required – LHR leaf): Sargent, 8200 Series (Classroom function). 3. Manual Flush Bolts (1 top and bottom of inactive leaf): McKinney, FB M Series flush bolts with DPS Series dust proof strike 4. Wall Stop (1 required – RHR leaf): McKinney, WS03 Series. W. Hardware Set #26 (TEMP-1, TEMP-3, TEMP-4 and TEMP-5) – Temporary hall door: 1. Butts: 1-1/2 pair, McKinney, T4A3786 heavy weight hinges, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Self-Contained Electronic Lockset: Sargent, IN120 Series. 3. Surface Closer: Sargent, 351 Series (pull side mounted). 4. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. Theory of Operation: Door always open from the interior. WiFi, battery operated. electronic lockset controls access to room. DOOR HARDWARE QPK NO. 220157.00 087100 - 17 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 087100 - 17 X. Hardware Set #27 (TEMP-2) – Temporary hall door: 1. Butts: 1-1/2 pair, McKinney, T4A3786 heavy weight hinges, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Mortised Lockset: Sargent, 8200 Series (Classroom function). 3. Electric Strike: HES, 1500 Series with monitoring. 4. Surface Closer: Sargent, 351 Series (push side mounted). 5. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. Theory of Operation: Door always open from Hall 201 side. Door can be locked from Hall 211 side of opening by use of keyed cylinder. Door unlatched without key by use of access control device provided by security contractor and building fire alarm system in case of emergency. Door is fail-secure in case of power outage. Power: 24 volts. Y. Hardware Set #28 (Door 122): (Door and frame by Landlord) 1. Butts: 1 pair, McKinney, T4A3786 heavy weight hinges, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Electric Transfer Hinge: 1/2 pair, McKinney, Electro-Lynx hinge matching butts. 3. Rim Electric Panic: Sargent 80 Series - 76 function with request to exit switch (55) and cylinder dogging (16). Provide exterior lever with cylinder (ETL trim). Power: 24 volt. 4. Surface Closer: Sargent, 351 Series (pull side mounted). 5. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. Theory of Operation: Door always open from the interior by use of panic hardware monitored by REX signal switch and associated access control device provided by Security Contractor. Door accessible from exterior by use of key. Z. Hardware Set #29 (Door 133B): (Door and frame by Landlord) 1. Butts: 1 pair, McKinney, T4A3786 heavy weight hinges, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Electric Transfer Hinge: 1/2 pair, McKinney, Electro-Lynx hinge matching butts. 3. Rim Electric Panic: Sargent 80 Series with request to exit switch (55). No exterior trim. 4. Surface Closer: Sargent, 351 Series (push side mounted). 5. Wall Stop: McKinney, WS03 Series. Theory of Operation: Door always open from the interior by use of panic hardware monitored by REX signal switch and associated access control device provided by Security Contractor. Door not accessible from exterior. DOOR HARDWARE QPK NO. 220157.00 087100 - 18 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 087100 - 18 AA. Hardware Set #30 (Door 230): 1. Butts: 1 pair, McKinney, T4A3786 heavy weight hinges, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”. 2. Electric Transfer Hinge: 1/2 pair, McKinney, Electro-Lynx hinge matching butts. 3. Rim Electric Panic - (1 required): Sargent 80 Series – 06 function with request to exit switch (55), electric latch retraction (56) and cylinder dogging (16). Provide exterior lever with cylinder (ETL trim). Fail secure design (24 volt). 4. Low Energy Door Operator: As specified in Section 084229. 5. Weatherstripping: Provided by door manufacturer. Theory of Operation: Door always open from the interior by use of panic hardware. Doors can be unlocked at any time via electronic control. Upon activation of the door operator by use of door controls, the panic device latch shall first be retracted prior to initiating door operation. Doors can be unlatched from secure side by key, access control device (ACD) as provided by Security Contractor or control switch mounted at 2nd Floor Admin Assistant Reception desk. Door status reported by use of door contacts to security system. Door is fail-secure in case of power outage. ACD has integrated camera, door buzzer and security electronics. Upon retraction of the latch, the door operator control device shall become active. The occupant then has the option to either manually open the door or use the door operator function. BB. Hardware Set #31 (Door 100): 1. Low Energy Door Operators (LHR leaf): As specified in Section 084229. 2. Remainder of hardware supplied as part of Landlord door package. See Set #L-1 below. DOOR HARDWARE QPK NO. 220157.00 087100 - 19 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 087100 - 19 3.10 LANDLORD DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Hardware Set #L-1 (Door 100): (For information only) 1. Continuous Hinges with Electric Transfer (2 required.): Securitron EL-DEPT 10. 2. Concealed Vertical Rod Electric Panic (LHR leaf): Sargent 80 Series - 06 function with request to exit switch (55), electric latch retraction (56) and cylinder dogging (16). Provide exterior lever with cylinder (ETL trim). Fail secure design (24 volt). 3. Concealed Vertical Rod Electric Panic (RHR leaf): Sargent 80 Series - 74 function with request to exit switch (55) and cylinder dogging (16). Provide exterior lever with cylinder (ETL trim). Fail secure design (24 volt). 4. Low Energy Door Operators (LHR leaf): 1 required. Supplied under Section 084229.. 5. Surface Closer (RHR leaf): Sargent, 351 Series with heavy duty parallel arm. 6. Weatherstripping: Head, jambs, meeting rail and sill. 7. Threshold: Full design – 5 inches (127 mm) wide. Theory of Operation: Doors always open from the interior by use of panic hardware monitored by REX signal switch. Doors to be unlocked during operating hours via electronic control. Activation of RHR door leaf operator from inside or out retracts latch prior to opening door leaf. Door operator is functional only when doors are unlocked. Operator shall automatically shut down when doors are locked When locked, LHR leaf can be unlatched from exterior by use of key override, access control device (ACD) provided by Security Contractor or control switch mounted at 2nd Floor Admin Assistant Reception desk. When door is unlocked, door operator becomes active and can be operated by use of touchless switch. RHR leaf can be unlocked via electronic control only (no key or ACD override). Door status reported by use of door contacts to security system. Door is fail-secure in case of power outage. ACD has integrated camera, door buzzer and security electronics. END OF SECTION 087100 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 088000 - 1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION GLAZING QPK NO. 220157.00 088000 - 1 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. SECTION 088000 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Glass products. 2. Glazing sealants. 3. Glazing tapes. 4. Miscellaneous glazing materials. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 102800 "Toilet, Bath and Laundry Accessories." 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters in accordance with ASTM C1036. C. IBC: International Building Code. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances to achieve proper safety margins for glazing retention under each design load case, load case combination, and service condition. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 088000 - 2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION GLAZING QPK NO. 220157.00 088000 - 2 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricated-Glass Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer of fabricated glass units who is approved by primary glass manufacturer. B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified glazing contractor for this Project who is certified under the North American Contractor Certification Program (NACC) for Architectural Glass & Metal (AG&M) contractors. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain glass from single source from single manufacturer. B. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: For each product and installation method, obtain from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category II. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 088000 - 3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION GLAZING QPK NO. 220157.00 088000 - 3 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. 2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. NGA Publications: "Glazing Manual." B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. C. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. 1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: 6 mm. 2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3. B. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3. 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: 1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: Clear. B. Acid-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealant, Class 25: Complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Use NT. 1. Applications: Cap bead to tape glazed openings. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 088000 - 4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION GLAZING QPK NO. 220157.00 088000 - 4 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. 2.6 GLAZING TAPES A. Use either of the following at Contractor option: 1. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: a. AAMA 806.3 tape, for applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. b. AAMA 807.3 tape, for applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure. 2. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: a. AAMA 810.1, Type 1. b. AAMA 810.1, Type 2. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, recommended in writing by manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: 1. EPDM or Silicone with Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. 2. Type recommended in writing by sealant or glass manufacturer. D. Spacers: 1. Neoprene blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. 2. Type recommended in writing by sealant or glass manufacturer. E. Edge Blocks: 1. EPDM or Silicone with Shore A durometer hardness per manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Type recommended in writing by sealant or glass manufacturer. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 088000 - 5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION GLAZING QPK NO. 220157.00 088000 - 5 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. 2.8 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. 1. Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components. a. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible marks in the completed Work. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or impair appearance. C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 088000 - 6 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION GLAZING QPK NO. 220157.00 088000 - 6 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm). 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and in accordance with requirements in referenced glazing publications. H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. I. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. J. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended in writing by gasket manufacturer. 3.4 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first, then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs, then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed. F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. G. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 088000 - 7 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION GLAZING QPK NO. 220157.00 088000 - 7 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. 3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended in writing by gasket manufacturer. D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressureglazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended in writing by gasket manufacturer. E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Immediately after installation, remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains. 1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings. C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period. D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. 3.7 MONOLITHIC GLASS SCHEDULE A. Clear Glass Type: Fully tempered float glass. 1. Minimum Thickness: 6 mm. 2. Provided safety glazing labeling. END OF SECTION 088000 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING QPK NO. 220157.00 092216 - 1 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 092216 - 1 SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior partitions. 2. Suspension systems for interior ceilings and soffits. 3. Grid suspension systems for gypsum board ceilings. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of code-compliance certification for studs and tracks. B. Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors and power-actuated fasteners, from ICC-ES or other qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated on Drawings, according to ASTM E90 and classified according to ASTM E413 by an independent testing agency. B. Horizontal Deflection: For composite wall assemblies, limited to 1/360 of the wall height based on horizontal loading of 5 lbf/sq. ft. (239 Pa). NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING QPK NO. 220157.00 092216 - 2 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 092216 - 2 2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C645 requirements for steel. 2. Protective Coating: Coating with equivalent corrosion resistance of ASTM A653/A653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated. B. Studs and Tracks: ASTM C645. Use only conventional steel studs and tracks. 1. Steel Studs and Tracks: a. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.836 mm). b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following: 1. Single Long-Leg Track System: ASTM C645 top track with 2-inch- (51-mm-) deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top track and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches (305 mm) of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing. 2. Double-Track System: ASTM C645 top outer tracks, inside track with 2-inch- (51-mm-) deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer track sized to friction-fit over inner track. 3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top track manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. D. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.0538-inch (1.367-mm) minimum base-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges. 1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38 by 38 mm), 0.068-inch- (1.72-mm-) thick, galvanized steel. E. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) deep, asymmetrical configuration, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: 1. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC01, AC193, AC58 or AC308 as appropriate for the substrate and fastener type. a. Uses: Securing hangers to structure. b. Type: Torque-controlled, expansion anchor, torque-controlled, adhesive anchor or adhesive anchor. c. Material: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941 (ASTM F1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING QPK NO. 220157.00 092216 - 3 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 092216 - 3 B. Wire Hangers: ASTM A641/A641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch (4.12 mm) in diameter. C. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 1. Steel Studs and Tracks: ASTM C645. a. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.836 mm). b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings or 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) minimum if not shown. D. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc; Drywall Grid Systems. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; 640/660 Drywall Ceiling Suspension. c. United States Gypsum Company; Drywall Suspension System or Wall-to-Wall Drywall Suspension System as applicable. 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Steel Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength. 1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING QPK NO. 220157.00 092216 - 4 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 092216 - 4 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C754. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C840 that apply to framing installation. B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections securely fastened. C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. 3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 2. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. C. Install tracks at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts that penetrate partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch (13-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 4. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. D. Direct Furring: 1. Screw to metal framing. E. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING QPK NO. 220157.00 092216 - 5 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 092216 - 5 3.5 INSTALLING CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Hangers: 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c. 2. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 5. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms. 6. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 7. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. D. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. E. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. END OF SECTION 092216 GYPSUM BOARD QPK NO. 220157.00 092900 - 1 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 092900 - 1 SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Miscellaneous aluminum specialty trim. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural steel framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board panels. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Gypsum board, Type X. 2. Gypsum ceiling board. 3. Interior trim. 4. Joint treatment materials. 5. Sound-attenuation blankets. 6. Acoustical sealant. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. GYPSUM BOARD QPK NO. 220157.00 092900 - 2 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 092900 - 2 C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E90 and classified according to ASTM E413 by an independent testing agency. 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. 2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C1396/C1396M. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered. B. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C1396/C1396M. 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc or paper-faced galvanized-steel sheet. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. Expansion (control) joint. 1) Joints at juncture of suspended bulkheads and full height walls are not to be manufactured control joint trim. They shall be open joints with sealant. GYPSUM BOARD QPK NO. 220157.00 092900 - 3 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 092900 - 3 B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated. 1. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Based on conformance with specified criteria provide prefinished aluminum trim by Gordon Interior Specialties or comparable products by one of the following: a. Fry Reglet Architectural Metals. b. Pittcon Industries 2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5. 3. Trim Profiles (Based upon Basis of Design Manufacturer Products): a. Drywall Corner (Edge) Trim: Final Forms II, TD-58. b. Wall Closure Trim: Mullion Mate, verify opening dimensions in field based upon existing window framing conditions. Provide gasket accessories either end to maintain an airtight closure between rooms. 4. Finish: Class I, clear anodized. 2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C475/C475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping [compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C1002 unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick. C. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. GYPSUM BOARD QPK NO. 220157.00 092900 - 4 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 092900 - 4 D. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and support framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION AND FINISHING OF PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C840. B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant. GYPSUM BOARD QPK NO. 220157.00 092900 - 5 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 092900 - 5 G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C919 and with manufacturer's written instructions for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Type X: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces. B. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated. 2. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: 1. Joints within wall plane: Install control joint trim at locations indicated on Drawings or if not shown according to ASTM C840 in locations approved by Architect for visual effect. 2. Joints at juncture of suspended bulkheads and full height walls: Terminate gypsum panels with edge trim as indicated below and seal joint per Section 079200. C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. Provide either of the following at exposed gypsum board edges: a. LC-Bead: Use. b. L-Bead: Use. D. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings per manufacturer direction: 1. At units without bedding flanges, butt trim tight to surrounding drywall. Cut drywall with neat, true edge as required to conceal cut edge behind aluminum trim flanges. GYPSUM BOARD QPK NO. 220157.00 092900 - 6 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 092900 - 6 3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 092900 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 095113 - 1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS QPK NO. 220157.00 095113 - 1 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for interior ceilings. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of sizes indicated below: 1. Acoustical Panels: Set of 6-inch- (150-mm-) square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 095113 - 2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS QPK NO. 220157.00 095113 - 2 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and its supporting suspension system from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Basis of Design: Provide materials as indicated in Finish Legend on Drawings. B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: Class A according to ASTM E1264. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS A. Basis of Design: Provide ceiling panels as indicated in Finish Legend on Drawings. B. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels according to ASTM E1264 and designated by type, form, pattern, acoustical rating, and light reflectance unless otherwise indicated. C. Classification: Provide panels as follows: 1. APC-601: a. Type/Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 4, cast or molded. b. Pattern: F (heavily textured). 2. APC-602: a. Type/Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, water felted. b. Pattern: E (lightly textured). D. Color: White. E. Light Reflectance (LR): 1. APC-601: Not less than 0.70. 2. APC-602: Not less than 0.85. F. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): 1. APC-601: Not less than 0.65. 2. APC-602: Not less than 0.70. G. Edge/Joint Detail: Reveal sized to fit flange of exposed suspension-system members. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 095113 - 3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS QPK NO. 220157.00 095113 - 3 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. H. Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm). I. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm). J. Antimicrobial Treatment: Manufacturer's standard broad spectrum, antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D3273, ASTM D3274, or ASTM G21 and evaluated according to ASTM D3274 or ASTM G21. 2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Basis of Design: Provide ceiling grid as indicated in Finish Legend on Drawings. B. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard, direct-hung, metal suspension system and accessories according to ASTM C635/C635M and designated by type, structural classification, and finish indicated. C. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized, G30 (Z90) coating designation; with prefinished 15/16-inch- (24-mm-) wide metal caps on flanges. 1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system. 2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type. 3. Face Design: Flat, flush. 4. Cap Material: Cold-rolled steel. 5. Cap Finish: Painted white. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C635/C635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. 1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E488/E488M or ASTM E1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. a. Type: Postinstalled expansion or postinstalled bonded anchors. b. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated according to ASTM B633, Class SC 1 (mild) service condition. 2. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 095113 - 4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS QPK NO. 220157.00 095113 - 4 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. B. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires as follows: 1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A641/A641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Size: Wire diameter sufficient for its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C635/C635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but not less than 0.106-inch- (2.69-mm-) diameter wire. 2.6 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM A. Provide material from same manufacturer as grid system. B. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners. 1. Edge moldings shall fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated and match width and configuration of exposed runners unless otherwise indicated. 2. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension member in lieu of cutting reveal in tile edge. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. B. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders unless otherwise indicated and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. B. Layout openings for penetrations centered on the penetrating items. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 095113 - 5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS QPK NO. 220157.00 095113 - 5 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install acoustical panel ceilings according to ASTM C636/C636M and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly to structure or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete. 6. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. 7. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 8. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 9. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends of each member. 10. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards. C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors. D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. or more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 2. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. E. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 095113 - 6 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS QPK NO. 220157.00 095113 - 6 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. F. Install panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide precise fit. 1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels in a basket-weave pattern. 2. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. 3. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer. 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Suspended Ceilings and Moldings: Install main and cross runners level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m), non-cumulative. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. B. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 095113 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 096513 - 1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES QPK NO. 220157.00 096513 - 1 SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Vinyl base. 2. Rubber stair accessories. 3. Vinyl molding accessories. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated and for each color, texture, and pattern required in manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet (3 linear m) for every 500 linear feet (150 linear m) or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C). ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 096513 - 2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES QPK NO. 220157.00 096513 - 2 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive resilient products during the following periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C). C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VINYL BASE (RB-401) A. Basis of Design: Provide material as indicated in Finish Legend on Drawings. B. Product Standard: ASTM F1861, Type TV (vinyl, thermoplastic). 1. Group: I (solid, homogeneous). 2. Style and Location: a. Style A, Straight: Provide in areas with carpet. b. Style B, Cove: Provide in areas with resilient floor coverings. C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm). D. Height: 4 inches (102 mm). E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. F. Outside Corners: Job formed or preformed. G. Inside Corners: Job formed. H. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. 2.2 RUBBER STAIR ACCESSORIES (RESIL-303) A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 096513 - 3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES QPK NO. 220157.00 096513 - 3 B. Basis of Design: Provide material as indicated in Finish Legend on Drawings. C. Stair Treads: ASTM F2169. 1. Type: TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset). 2. Class: 2 (pattern; embossed, grooved, or ribbed). 3. Group: 2 (with contrasting color for the visually impaired). 4. Nosing Style: Square, adjustable to cover angles between 60 and 90 degrees. 5. Nosing Height: 2 inches (51 mm). 6. Thickness: 1/4 inch (6 mm) and tapered to back edge. 7. Size: Lengths and depths to fit each stair tread in one piece. 8. Integral Risers: Smooth, flat; in height that fully covers substrate. D. Landing Tile: Matching treads; produced by same manufacturer as treads and recommended by manufacturer for installation with treads. E. Locations: Provide rubber stair accessories in areas indicated. F. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's sample. 2.3 VINYL MOLDING ACCESSORY A. Basis of Design: Provide accessories by resilient base manufacturer. B. Description: Vinyl carpet edge for glue-down applications, nosing for resilient floor covering and joiner for tile and carpet as indicated below. C. Locations: Provide vinyl molding accessories at carpet and resilient floor finish transitions as necessary to provide a complete finished project. D. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect. 2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. C. Stair-Tread Nose Filler: Two-part epoxy compound recommended by resilient stair-tread manufacturer to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 096513 - 4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES QPK NO. 220157.00 096513 - 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Accessories: Prepare horizontal surfaces according to ASTM F710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH. 4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq. ft. (18.6 sq. m) and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas. a. Relative Humidity Test: Using in-situ probes, ASTM F2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement. C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. D. Do not install resilient products until materials are the same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed. E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 096513 - 5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES QPK NO. 220157.00 096513 - 5 3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. F. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces. G. Job-Formed Corners: 1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 6 inches (152 mm) in length. a. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. 2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 6 inches (152 mm) in length. a. Miter or cope corners to minimize open joints. 3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories. B. Resilient Stair Accessories: 1. Use stair-tread-nose filler to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours. 2. Tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. C. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would otherwise be exposed. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop horizontal surfaces to remove marks and soil. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 096513 - 6 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES QPK NO. 220157.00 096513 - 6 C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 096513 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 099123 - 1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION INTERIOR PAINTING QPK NO. 220157.00 099123 - 1 SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Primers. 2. Water-based finish coatings. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 055113 "Metal Pan Stairs" for shop priming metal pan stairs and support steel. 2. Section 081113 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for shop priming doors and frames. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. 1. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. 2. Indicate VOC content. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square. 2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. C. Product Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in the Interior Painting Schedule to cross-reference paint systems specified in this Section. Include color designations. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint Products: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 099123 - 2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION INTERIOR PAINTING QPK NO. 220157.00 099123 - 2 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C). 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C). B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures of less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design: Provide paint as indicated in Finish Legend on Drawings. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each paint product from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 PAINT PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: 1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. B. Colors: As indicated on Drawings. 2.3 PRIMERS A. Interior, Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Primer Sealer: Water-based primer sealer with low-odor characteristics and a VOC of less than 10 grams per liter for use on new interior plaster, concrete, and gypsum wallboard surfaces that are subsequently to be painted with latex finish coats. B. Water-Based Bonding Primer: Water-based-emulsion primer formulated to promote adhesion of subsequent specified coatings. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 099123 - 3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION INTERIOR PAINTING QPK NO. 220157.00 099123 - 3 2.4 WATER-BASED FINISH COATS A. Interior, Latex, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, Flat: White or colored latex paint with low-odor characteristics and a VOC of less than 10 grams per liter, for use in areas, such as hospitals and other occupied buildings, where the odor and VOC levels of conventional latex products would preclude their use. 1. Gloss and Sheen Level: Manufacturer's standard flat finish. B. Interior, Latex, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, Eggshell: White or colored latex paint with lowodor characteristics and a VOC of less than 10 grams per liter, for use in areas, such as hospitals and other occupied buildings, where the odor and VOC levels of conventional latex products would preclude their use. 1. Gloss and Sheen Level: Gloss of 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and sheen of 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees when tested in accordance with ASTM D523. C. Interior, Latex, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, Semigloss: White or colored latex paint with lowodor characteristics and a VOC of less than 10 grams per liter, for use in areas, such as hospitals and other occupied buildings, where the odor and VOC levels of conventional latex products would preclude their use. 1. Gloss Level: Gloss of 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees when tested in accordance with ASTM D523. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Wood: 15 percent. 2. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth. D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers. E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 099123 - 4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION INTERIOR PAINTING QPK NO. 220157.00 099123 - 4 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces. E. Existing Wood Substrates (Clear finished flush wood doors): 1. Inspect door faces and edges for delamination of wood veneer flitches. Remove loose material and fill voids and depressions in door surface with putty or plastic wood filler before applying primer. 2. Sand all surfaces, including repairs, to remove existing sheen and create an even smooth surface ready for painting. Dust off to remove all loose particles. 3. Prime both faces, edges, top and bottom of wood door panels. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 099123 - 5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION INTERIOR PAINTING QPK NO. 220157.00 099123 - 5 B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Painting Fire-Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work: 1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms: a. Piping, hangers and supports. b. Conduit, hangers and supports. c. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. 2. No unfinished mechanical electrical materials are to be visible in occupied spaces. 3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. 1. Do not clean equipment with free-draining water and prevent solvents, thinners, cleaners, and other contaminants from entering into waterways, sanitary and storm drain systems, and ground. 2. Dispose of contaminants in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Allow empty paint cans to dry before disposal. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 099123 - 6 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION INTERIOR PAINTING QPK NO. 220157.00 099123 - 6 3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Steel Substrates: 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex applied over Shop-Applied Primer System: a. Prime Coat: Shop applied primer installed by fabricator of material. b. Intermediate Coat: Matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior, latex, institutional low odor/VOC, semigloss. B. Finish Carpentry: Existing Doors. 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Water based bonding primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior, latex, institutional low odor/VOC, semigloss. C. Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Interior, institutional low-odor/VOC primer sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior, latex, institutional low odor/VOC: 1) Ceilings: Flat. 2) Walls: Eggshell. D. Cotton or Canvas and ASJ Insulation-Covering Substrates: Including pipe and duct coverings. 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior, latex, institutional low odor/VOC, flat. END OF SECTION 099123 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS QPK NO. 220157.00 101100 - 1 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 101100 - 1 SECTION 101100 - VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Visual display board assemblies. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, finishes and accessories for visual display units. B. Shop Drawings: For visual display units. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachment to other work. 2. Include sections of typical trim members. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of visual display unit indicated. 1. Visual Display Panel: Not less than 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm), with facing, core, and backing indicated for final Work. 2. Trim: 6-inch- (150-mm-) long sections of each trim profile. D. Product Schedule: For visual display units. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS QPK NO. 220157.00 101100 - 2 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 101100 - 2 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver factory-fabricated visual display units completely assembled in one piece. If dimensions exceed maximum manufactured unit size, or if unit size is impracticable to ship in one piece, provide two or more pieces with joints in locations indicated on approved Shop Drawings. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install visual display units until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheets: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace porcelain-enamel face sheets that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Surfaces lose original writing and erasing qualities. b. Surfaces exhibit crazing, cracking, or flaking. 2. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARD ASSEMBLY A. Basis of Design: Steelcase Inc., 110 Series B. Visual Display Board Assembly: Factory fabricated. 1. Assembly: Markerboard. 2. Corners: Square. 3. Width: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Height: As indicated on Drawings. 5. Mounting Method: Direct to wall. Provide all necessary mounting accessories. C. Markerboard Panel: Porcelain-enamel-faced markerboard panel on core indicated. 1. Color: White. D. Aluminum Frames and Trim: Fabricated from not less than 0.062-inch- (1.57-mm-) thick, extruded aluminum; standard size and shape. 1. Aluminum Finish: Clear anodic finish. VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS QPK NO. 220157.00 101100 - 3 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 101100 - 3 E. Chalktray: Manufacturer's standard; continuous. 1. Box Type: Extruded aluminum with slanted front, grooved tray, and cast-aluminum end closures. 2.2 MARKERBOARD PANELS A. Porcelain-Enamel Markerboard Panels: Balanced, high-pressure, factory-laminated markerboard assembly of three-ply construction, consisting of moisture-barrier backing, core material, and porcelain-enamel face sheet with high-gloss finish. Laminate panels under heat and pressure with manufacturer's standard, flexible waterproof adhesive. 1. Face Sheet Thickness: 0.013 inch (0.33 mm) minimum uncoated base metal thickness. 2. Manufacturer's Standard Core: Minimum 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, with manufacturer's standard moisture-barrier backing. 3. Laminating Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard moisture-resistant thermoplastic type. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheet: PEI-1002, with face sheet manufacturer's standard two- or threecoat process. B. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4, tempered. C. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-1. D. MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130. E. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), Alloy 6063. 2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM/NOMMA 500 for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker. VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS QPK NO. 220157.00 101100 - 4 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 101100 - 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, surface conditions of wall and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine walls and partitions for proper preparation and backing for visual display units. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation. B. Clean substrates of substances, such as dirt, mold, and mildew, that could impair the performance of and affect the smooth, finished surfaces of visual display boards. C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, defects, projections, depressions and substances that will affect visual display units installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install visual display surfaces in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings, or if not indicated, at heights indicated below. Keep perimeter lines straight, level, and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, brackets, anchors, trim and accessories necessary for complete installation. B. Factory-Fabricated Visual Display Board Assemblies: Attach concealed clips, hangers, and grounds to wall surfaces and to visual display board assemblies with fasteners at not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. Secure tops and bottoms of boards to walls. C. Visual Display Board Assembly Mounting Heights: Install visual display units at mounting heights indicated on Drawings. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean visual display units in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Attach one removable cleaning instructions label to visual display unit in each room. B. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. C. Cover and protect visual display units after installation and cleaning. END OF SECTION 101100 PHENOLIC-CORE TOILET COMPARTMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 102113 - 1 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 102113 - 1 SECTION 102113 - PHENOLIC-CORE TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Phenolic-core toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for blocking. 2. Section 102800 "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories" for toilet tissue dispensers, grab bars and similar accessories mounted on toilet compartments. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for toilet compartments. B. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment details. 2. Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures. C. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes unless otherwise indicated: 1. Each type of material, color, and finish required for toilet compartments, prepared on 6inch- (152-mm-) square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work. 2. Each type of hardware and accessory. D. Product Schedule: For toilet compartments, prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing location and selected colors for toilet compartment material. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of toilet compartment. PHENOLIC-CORE TOILET COMPARTMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 102113 - 2 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 102113 - 2 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For toilet compartments to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: 75 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities and ICC A117.1 for toilet compartments designated as accessible. 2.2 PHENOLIC-CORE TOILET COMPARMENTS A. Basis of Design: Provide partitions as indicated in Finish Legend on Drawings. B. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Overhead braced. C. Door, Panel and Pilaster Construction: Solid phenolic-core panel material with melamine facing on both sides fused to substrate during panel manufacture (not separately laminated), and with eased and polished edges and no-sightline system. Provide minimum 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick doors and pilasters and minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick panels. D. Pilaster Shoes: Formed from stainless steel sheet, not less than 0.031-inch (0.79-mm) nominal thickness and 3 inches (76 mm) high, finished to match hardware. E. Brackets (Fittings): 1. Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; aluminum. F. Phenolic-Panel Finish: 1. Color and Pattern (PLAM-505): As indicated by manufacturer's designations. 2. Edge Color: Manufacturer's standard. PHENOLIC-CORE TOILET COMPARTMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 102113 - 3 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 102113 - 3 2.3 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard operating hardware and accessories. 1. Material: Cast stainless steel. 2. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard paired, self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees, allowing emergency access by lifting door. 3. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit designed for emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible. 4. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories. 5. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors. 6. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible. B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish. C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless steel, hot-dip galvanized-steel, or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel compatible with related materials. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B26/B26M. B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M). C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness. D. Stainless Steel Castings: ASTM A743/A743M. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabrication, General: Fabricate toilet compartment components to sizes indicated. Coordinate requirements and provide cutouts for through-partition toilet accessories where required for attachment of toilet accessories. B. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism. C. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- (610-mm-) wide inswinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch- (813-mm-) wide clear opening for compartments designated as accessible. PHENOLIC-CORE TOILET COMPARTMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 102113 - 4 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 102113 - 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for fastening, support, alignment, operating clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Confirm location and adequacy of blocking and supports required for installation. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. 1. Maximum Clearances: a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch (13 mm). b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Full-Height (Continuous) Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with fullheight brackets. a. Locate bracket fasteners so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls. B. Overhead-Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 1-3/4 inches (44 mm) into structural floor unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with no fewer than two fasteners. Hang doors to align tops of doors with tops of panels, and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position. END OF SECTION 102113 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 102239 - 1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS QPK NO. 220157.00 102239 - 1 SECTION 102239 - FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manually operated, acoustical panel partitions. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. NIC: Noise Isolation Class. B. STC: Sound Transmission Class. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Discuss coordination requirements for overhead structure installation and required anchorage spacing. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For operable panel partitions. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, pass door requirements and attachment details. 2. Indicate stacking and operating clearances. Indicate location and installation requirements for hardware and track, blocking and direction of travel. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed material, finish, covering, or facing, prepared on Samples of size indicated below: 1. Textile Facing Material: Full width by not less than 36-inch- (914-mm-) long section of fabric from dye lot to be used for the Work, with specified treatments applied. Show complete pattern repeat. 2. Panel Edge Material: Not less than 3 inches (75 mm) long. 3. Hardware: One of each exposed door-operating device. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 102239 - 2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS QPK NO. 220157.00 102239 - 2 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Setting Drawings: For embedded items and cutouts required in other work, including supportbeam, mounting-hole template. B. Qualification Data: For Installer. C. Product Certificates: For each type of operable panel partition. 1. Include approval letter signed by manufacturer acknowledging Owner-furnished panel facing material complies with requirements. D. Product Test Reports: For each operable panel partition, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. E. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For operable partitions to include in maintenance manuals. 1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: a. Panel finish facings and finishes for exposed trim and accessories. Include precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes and performance. b. Seals, hardware, track, track switches, carriers and other operating components. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protectively package and sequence panels in order for installation. Clearly mark with numbering system used on Shop Drawings. Do not use permanent markings on panels. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of operable panel partitions that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Faulty operation of operable panel partitions. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes and other materials beyond normal use. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 102239 - 3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS QPK NO. 220157.00 102239 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Acoustical Performance: Provide operable panel partitions tested by a qualified testing agency for the following acoustical properties according to test methods indicated: 1. Sound-Transmission Requirements: Operable panel partition assembly tested for laboratory sound-transmission loss performance according to ASTM E90, determined by ASTM E413, and rated for not less than the STC indicated. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide panels with finishes complying with one of the following as determined by testing identical products by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 2.2 OPERABLE ACOUSTICAL PANELS A. Operable Acoustical Panels: Partition system, including panels, seals, finish facing, suspension system, operators, and accessories. 1. Basis of Design: Panelfold, ModuFlex 420 operable wall panels. B. Panel Operation: Manually operated, paired panels. C. Panel Construction: As required to support panel from suspension components and with reinforcement for hardware attachment. Fabricate panels with tight hairline joints and concealed fasteners. Fabricate panels so finished in-place partition is rigid; level; plumb; aligned, with tight joints and uniform appearance; and free of bow, warp, twist, deformation, and surface and finish irregularities. D. Dimensions: Fabricate operable acoustical panel partitions to form an assembled system of dimensions indicated and verified by field measurements. 1. Panel Width: Standard width panel with adjustable hinged trailing panel pair as necessary to make full width closure and maintain specified acoustical performance. E. STC: Not less than 50. F. Panel Weight: 8 lb/sq. ft. (40 kg/sq. m) maximum. G. Panel Thickness: Nominal dimension of 3 inches (75 mm). ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 102239 - 4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS QPK NO. 220157.00 102239 - 4 H. Panel Materials: 1. Steel Frame: Steel sheet, manufacturer's standard nominal minimum thickness for uncoated steel. 2. Steel Face/Liner Sheets: Tension-leveled steel sheet, manufacturer's standard minimum nominal thickness for uncoated steel. I. Panel Closure: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated. 1. Initial Closure: Fixed jamb with resilient, bulb-shaped acoustical seal. 2. Final Closure: Constant-force, lever-operated mechanical closure expanding from panel edge to create a constant-pressure acoustical seal. J. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard as required to operate operable panel partition and accessories; with decorative, protective finish. 1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard concealed (invisible) hinges. K. Finish Facing: Fabric wall covering. 2.3 SEALS A. Description: Seals that produce operable panel partitions complying with performance requirements and the following: 1. Manufacturer's standard seals unless otherwise indicated. 2. Seals made from materials and in profiles that minimize sound leakage. 3. Seals fitting tight at contact surfaces and sealing continuously between adjacent panels and between operable panel partition perimeter and adjacent surfaces, when operable panel partition is extended and closed. B. Vertical Seals: Deep-nesting, interlocking steel astragals mounted on each edge of panel, with continuous, resilient acoustical seal. C. Horizontal Top Seals: Continuous-contact, resilient seal exerting uniform constant pressure on track. D. Horizontal Bottom Seals: Resilient, mechanical, retractable, constant-force-contact seal exerting uniform constant pressure on floor when extended, ensuring horizontal and vertical sealing and resisting panel movement. 1. Automatically Operated for Acoustical Panels: Extension and retraction of bottom seal automatically operated by movement of partition, with operating range not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) between retracted seal and floor finish. 2.4 PANEL FINISH FACINGS A. Description: Finish facings for panels that comply with indicated fire-test-response characteristics and that are factory applied to operable panel partitions with appropriate backing, ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 102239 - 5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS QPK NO. 220157.00 102239 - 5 using mildew-resistant nonstaining adhesive as recommended by facing manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Apply one-piece, seamless facings free of air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects, with edges concealed at panel returns with no gaps or overlaps. Horizontal seams are not permitted. Tightly secure and conceal raw and selvage edges of facing for finished appearance. 2. Where facings with directional or repeating patterns or directional weave are indicated, mark facing top and attach facing in same direction. 3. Match facing pattern 72 inches (1830 mm) above finished floor. B. Fabric Wall Covering: Manufacturer's standard woven fabric, from same dye lot, treated to resist stains. 1. Color/Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of Tek-Wall 1002 color and pattern options. C. Trimless Edges: Fabricate exposed panel edges so finish facing wraps uninterrupted around panel, covering edge and resulting in an installed partition with facing visible on vertical panel edges, without trim, for minimal sightlines at panel-to-panel joints. 2.5 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Tracks: Steel or aluminum with adjustable steel hanger rods for overhead support, designed for operation, size, and weight of operable panel partition indicated. Size track to support partition operation and storage without damage to suspension system, operable panel partitions, or adjacent construction. Limit track deflection to no more than 0.10 inch (2.54 mm) between bracket supports. Provide a continuous system of track sections and accessories to accommodate configuration and layout indicated for partition operation and storage. 1. Panel Guide: Aluminum guide on both sides of the track to facilitate straightening of the panels; finished with factory-applied, decorative, protective finish. 2. Head Closure Trim: As required for acoustical performance; with factory-applied, decorative, protective finish. B. Carriers: Trolley system as required for configuration type, size, and weight of partition and for easy operation; with ball-bearing wheels. C. Track Intersections, Switches, and Accessories: As required for operation, storage, track configuration, and layout indicated for operable panel partitions, and compatible with partition assembly specified. Fabricate track intersections and switches from steel or aluminum. D. Aluminum Finish: Mill finish or manufacturer's standard, factory-applied, decorative finish unless otherwise indicated. E. Steel Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied, corrosion-resistant, protective coating unless otherwise indicated. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 102239 - 6 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS QPK NO. 220157.00 102239 - 6 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Pass Doors: Swinging door built into and matching panel materials, construction, acoustical qualities, finish and thickness, complete with frames and operating hardware. Hinges finished to match other exposed hardware. 1. Accessibility Standard: Fabricate doors to comply with applicable provisions in the USDOJ's "2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design" and ICC A117.1. 2. Single Pass Door: 36 by 80 inches (914 by 2032 mm). Swing direction as indicated on Drawings. 3. Pass-Door Hardware: Equip pass door with operating hardware including the following: a. Door Seals: Mechanically operated floor seal on panels containing pass doors. b. Panic hardware. c. Concealed door closer. d. Door Viewer: Installed with view in direction of swing. e. Exit Sign: Recessed, self-illuminated on push side of door. B. Storage Pocket Door: Full height at end of partition runs to conceal stacked partition; of same materials, finish, construction, thickness, and acoustical qualities as panels; complete with operating hardware. Hinges in finish to match other exposed hardware. 1. Manufacturer's standard method to secure storage pocket door in closed position. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine flooring, floor levelness, structural support, and opening, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of operable panel partitions. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install operable panel partitions and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed in area of partition installation. B. Install panels in numbered sequence indicated on Shop Drawings. C. Broken, cracked, chipped, deformed, or unmatched panels are not acceptable. D. Broken, cracked, deformed, or unmatched gasketing or gasketing with gaps at butted ends is not acceptable. E. Light-Leakage Test: Illuminate one side of partition installation and observe vertical joints and top and bottom seals for voids. Adjust partitions for alignment and full closure of vertical joints and full closure along top and bottom seals. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 102239 - 7 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS QPK NO. 220157.00 102239 - 7 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operable panel partitions, hardware and other moving parts to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. B. Adjust pass doors and storage pocket doors to operate smoothly and easily, without binding or warping. C. Verify that safety devices are properly functioning. 3.4 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include 12 months' full maintenance by manufacturer's authorized service representative. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper operable-partition operation. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain operable panel partitions. END OF SECTION 102239 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES QPK NO. 220157.00 102800 - 1 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 102800 - 1 SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Public-use washroom accessories. 2. Childcare accessories. 3. Custodial accessories. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. 2. Include anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. 1. Identify locations using room designations indicated. 2. Identify accessories using designations indicated. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranties. TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES QPK NO. 220157.00 102800 - 2 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 102800 - 2 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For accessories to include in maintenance manuals. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Mirrors: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace mirrors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, visible silver spoilage defects. 2. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED MATERIALS A. Owner-Furnished Materials: The following materials as indicted in the Toilet Accessory Schedule on the Drawings will be supplied by the Owner and installed by the Contractor: 1. Toilet Paper Dispenser (1-1): Surface mounted to wall. 2. Soap Dispensers (1-9): Surface mounted to wall. 3. Paper Towel Dispenser (1-10): Surface mounted to wall. 2.2 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES A. Source Limitations: Obtain public-use washroom accessories from single source from single manufacturer. B. Grab Bar (1-3, 1-4, and 1-5): 1. Basis of Design: Provide items as indicated in Toilet Accessory Schedule on Drawings. 2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 3. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) thick. a. Finish: Smooth, ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin) on ends and slipresistant texture in grip area. 4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 5. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings. C. Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit (1-2): 1. Basis of Design: Provide items as indicated in Toilet Accessory Schedule on Drawings. 2. Mounting: Surface mounted. 3. Door or Cover: Self-closing, disposal-opening cover and hinged face panel with tumbler lockset. 4. Receptacle: Removable. 5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin). TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES QPK NO. 220157.00 102800 - 3 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 102800 - 3 D. Mirror Unit (1-7 and 1-8): 1. Basis of Design: Provide items as indicated in Toilet Accessory Schedule on Drawings. 2. Frame: Stainless steel angle, 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) thick. a. Corners: Welded and ground smooth. 3. Size: As indicated in Schedule. 4. Hangers: Manufacturer's standard rigid, tamper and theft resistant. 2.3 CHILDCARE ACCESSORIES A. Source Limitations: Obtain childcare accessories from single source from single manufacturer. B. Diaper-Changing Station (1-12): 1. Basis of Design: Provide items as indicated in Toilet Accessory Schedule on Drawings. 2. Description: Horizontal unit that opens by folding down from stored position and with child-protection strap. a. Engineered to support minimum of 250-lb (113-kg) static load when opened. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted, with unit projecting not more than 4 inches (102 mm) from wall when closed. 4. Operation: By pneumatic shock-absorbing mechanism. 5. Material and Finish: HDPE in manufacturer's standard color. 6. Liner Dispenser: Provide built-in dispenser for disposable sanitary liners. 2.4 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES A. Source Limitations: Obtain custodial and toilet accessories from single source from single manufacturer. B. Custodial Mop and Broom Holder (1-11): 1. Basis of Design: Provide items as indicated in Toilet Accessory Schedule on Drawings. 2. Description: Unit with shelf, hooks and holders. 3. Length: 44 inches (1118 mm). 4. Hooks: Five. 5. Mop/Broom Holders: Four, spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type. 6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin). a. Shelf: Not less than nominal 0.045-inch- (1.15-mm-) thick stainless steel. 2.5 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666, Type 304, 0.031-inch- (0.8-mm-) minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated. TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES QPK NO. 220157.00 102800 - 4 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 102800 - 4 B. Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A153/A153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. C. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer or specified in this Section, and tamper and theft resistant where exposed, and of stainless or galvanized steel where concealed. D. Mirrors: ASTM C1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick. 2.6 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates. B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. 1. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. B. Grab Bars: Install to comply with specified structural-performanc e requirements. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 102800 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 104413 - 1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS QPK NO. 220157.00 104413 - 1 SECTION 104413 - FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fire-protection cabinets for the following: a. Portable fire extinguishers. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Show door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. Include roughing-in dimensions and details showing semi-recessed method and relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction. B. Shop Drawings: For fire-protection cabinets. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on samples 6 by 6 inches (150 by 150 mm) square. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For fire-protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire-protection cabinets with wall depths. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 104413 - 2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS QPK NO. 220157.00 104413 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire-protection cabinets, accessories, and fire extinguishers from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher. 1. Basis of Design: JL Industries, Academy, Model 8126, aluminum fire extinguisher cabinet. B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated. C. Cabinet Material: Aluminum sheet. D. Semi-recessed Cabinet: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface, with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). 1. Square-Edge Trim: 1-1/4- to 1-1/2-inch (32- to 38-mm) backbend depth. E. Surface-Mounted Cabinet: Cabinet box fully exposed and mounted directly on wall with no trim. F. Cabinet Trim Material: Aluminum sheet. G. Door Material: Aluminum sheet. H. Door Style: Vertical duo panel with frame. I. Door Glazing: Clear acrylic sheet. J. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. 1. Provide recessed door pull and friction latch. 2. Provide manufacturer's standard hinge, permitting door to open 180 degrees. K. Accessories: 1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire-protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish. 2. Lettered Door Handle: One-piece, cast-iron door handle with the word "FIRE" embossed into face. 3. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling sharply on door handle. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 104413 - 3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS QPK NO. 220157.00 104413 - 3 4. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing and location. Lettering requirements to be finalized during submittal phase. a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire-protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER." 1) Location: Applied to cabinet glazing. 2) Application Process: Decals or pressure-sensitive vinyl letters. 3) Lettering Color: Black. 4) Orientation: Vertical. L. Materials: 1. Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M) for extruded shapes and aluminum sheet, with strength and durability characteristics of not less than Alloy 6063-T5 for aluminum sheet. a. Finish: Clear anodic. 2. Transparent Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), in manufacturer’s standard thickness, with Finish 1 (smooth or polished) 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. 1. Weld joints and grind smooth. 2. Miter corners and grind smooth. 3. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. 4. Prepare doors and frames to receive locks. 5. Install door locks at factory. B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles. 1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick. 2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames and grind smooth. C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. 2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's AMP 500, "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products," for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire-protection cabinets from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 104413 - 4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS QPK NO. 220157.00 104413 - 4 C. Finish fire-protection cabinets after assembly. D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in for hose [valves] [racks] and cabinets to verify actual locations of piping connections before cabinet installation. B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semi-recessed cabinets will be installed. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare recesses for semi-recessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire-protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at height indicated below: 1. Fire-Protection Cabinets: 42 inches (1067 mm) above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher. Coordinate final mounting height with Owner. B. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 1. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire-protection cabinets, square and plumb. C. Identification: 1. Apply decals or vinyl lettering at locations indicated. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire-protection cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 104413 - 5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS QPK NO. 220157.00 104413 - 5 C. On completion of fire-protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. D. Touch up marred finishes or replace fire-protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factoryfinished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fireprotection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers. E. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 104413 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 115213 - 1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION PROJECTION SCREENS QPK NO. 220157.00 115213 - 1 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. SECTION 115213 - PROJECTION SCREENS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. This Section includes the furnishing of all necessary labor, supervision, materials, equipment, accessories, and services to completely execute the provision of products as described in this specification, including but not limited to: a. Projection screens. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 26 “Electrical” 1.3 REFERENCES & DEFINITIONS A. References 1. The workmanship and products shall comply with the following safety, certification, and industry standards. The following documents, or the versions closest in time prior to the release of this specification, form a part of this specification to the extent specified herein. Where the requirements of these documents conflict with the instructions herein, the Contractor shall notify the Owner for written clarification. a. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA) 70, “National Electrical Code”. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General 1. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00 (Submittal Procedures) and as required by other sections of the Specifications. 2. Unless directed otherwise in writing by the Owner’s Representative, the Contractor is not authorized to proceed with the acquisition, fabrication, assembly, installation, or any work related to any systems or components until the submittals outlined in this section have been approved by the Owner’s Representative. Any acquisition, assembly or installation of any systems or components without the Owner Representative’s approval shall be subject to removal at the Contractor’s expense. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 115213 - 2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION PROJECTION SCREENS QPK NO. 220157.00 115213 - 2 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. B. Product Data 1. Product data sheets shall be submitted for products listed in Part 2 of this Section. C. Shop Drawings 1. Shop drawings shall be submitted for projection screens. 2. Shop drawings shall show projection screen size, screen case size & color, screen material, screen drop length, mounting points & dimensions, methods of attachment, electric wiring diagram, screen centerline relative to screen case. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories 1. Shall have the listing of the Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. and shall bear the labels attesting to UL listing, and types approved by the Municipal Departments having jurisdiction. 2. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Qualifications 1. Worker experienced in performing work of this Section who has specialized in work similar to that required of this project. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements 1. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. 2. The Contractor is responsible for assessing the conditions of the job site and facilities for delivery of materials and products. 3. Projection screens shall not be delivered until the building is enclosed, other construction within spaces where screens shall be installed is substantially complete, and installation of screens is ready to begin. 4. The Contractor shall confirm before delivery that hallways, stairways, passageways, doorways, rooms, entries, elevators and foyers are of sufficient size to accommodate the passage and installation of the products and systems. B. Storage and Handling Requirements 1. The Contractor is responsible for assessing the conditions of the job site, and facilities for storage and handling of materials and products. 2. Store projection screens in a dry, ventilated area, protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions, at temperature less than 80 degrees F. 3. Projection screens shall always be transported, handled, and stored in a horizontal position, never vertically. 4. Handle projection screen materials with care in order to prevent damage. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 115213 - 3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION PROJECTION SCREENS QPK NO. 220157.00 115213 - 3 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. 1.7 SITE CONDITIONS A. General 1. Refer to Division 1 of the construction documents for this project for coordination with other trades on this project. 2. The Contractor is responsible for assessing the conditions of the job site, and facilities for installing of materials and products. 3. Perform projection screen work when temperatures are greater than 40 degrees F. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Acceptable products are listed in this Section, and on the drawings. B. Each product to be supplied under this specification shall be new, under warranty, and the current model of a standard product of an original product manufacturer of record. B-stock, previously installed, refurbished or used products shall not be provided on this project. C. Product substitution is allowed only by written consent of the Owner’s Representative. D. The Contractor shall provide all options, accessories, and hardware necessary to meet the function of the design even if they are not specifically listed. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Projection Screen (Classrooms 132 & 133) 1. Ceiling mounted electric motorized projection screen. 2. Complete screen (case, surface, roller & motor). 3. Manufacturer & model: Da-Lite Advantage Electrol. 4. Quantity: 2. 5. Viewing area: 71” W x 126” H (145” diagonal). 6. Aspect ratio: 16:9. 7. Screen material: Matte white, non-tensioned, no seam, flame retardant, mildew resistant. 8. Screen (black) drop: 2” at top of screen material. 9. Screen edge: black masking borders. 10. Case color/finish: white. 11. Low voltage controller: Included on screen case. 12. Wall switch: Included, low voltage, three button switch. 13. Closure type: Slot. 14. Motor: Standard 120V (60Hz). ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 115213 - 4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION PROJECTION SCREENS QPK NO. 220157.00 115213 - 4 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. B. Projection Screen (Classroom 203) 1. Ceiling mounted electric motorized projection screen. 2. Complete screen (case, surface, roller & motor). 3. Manufacturer & model: Da-Lite Advantage Electrol. 4. Quantity: 2. 5. Viewing area: 58” W x 104” H (119” diagonal). 6. Aspect ratio: 16:9. 7. Screen material: Matte white, non-tensioned, no seam, flame retardant, mildew resistant. 8. Screen (black) drop: 14” at [top] of screen material. 9. Screen edge: black masking borders. 10. Case color/finish: white. 11. Low voltage controller: Included on screen case. 12. Wall switch: Included, low voltage, three button switch. 13. Closure type: Slot. 14. Motor: Standard 120V (60Hz). C. Projection Screen (Classroom 231) 1. Ceiling mounted electric motorized projection screen. 2. Complete screen (case, surface, roller & motor). 3. Manufacturer & model: Da-Lite Advantage Electrol. 4. Quantity: 2. 5. Viewing area: 65” W x 116” H (133” diagonal). 6. Aspect ratio: 16:9. 7. Screen material: Matte white, non-tensioned, no seam, flame retardant, mildew resistant. 8. Screen (black) drop: 7” at top of screen material. 9. Screen edge: black masking borders. 10. Case color/finish: white. 11. Low voltage controller: Included on screen case. 12. Wall switch: Included, low voltage, three button switch. 13. Closure type: Slot. 14. Motor: Standard 120V (60Hz). 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all fasteners, hardware, anchors, brackets and other components to assure complete, functional and secure installation of all products. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions 1. The Contractor shall assess the readiness and cleanliness of the site prior to product installation. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 115213 - 5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION PROJECTION SCREENS QPK NO. 220157.00 115213 - 5 Copyright © 2020 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Projection Screen and Mounting Brackets 1. Comply with manufacturer’s written data and specifications, including product technical bulletins, installation instructions, and technical data sheets. 2. Install all products at locations and heights indicated on Drawings. 3. Coordinate projection screen placement with placement of other ceiling and wall mounted components, including but not limited to lighting fixtures, HVAC duct & equipment, fire alarm/suppression systems, conduit, pipes, and chalk/white boards. Notify the Owner’s Representative of conflicts prior to product installation. 4. All supports shall meet or exceed the load requirements of the intended application with a minimum safety factor of five. 5. Coordinate requirements for blocking, structural supports, bracing, and ceiling openings to ensure adequate means for installation of screen. 6. Coordinate requirements for conduit and wiring for projection screen and controls. 7. Coordinate installation of finish ceiling materials surrounding the projection screen case. 8. Install projection screens, mounting brackets/hardware, and accessories in accordance with reviewed shop drawings at locations and heights indicated. 9. Install screen housing and make electrical connections prior to installation of ceiling system. Where screen electrical connections will be inaccessible after installation, coordinate with Owner’s Representative for location and installation of hinged access door. 10. Securely install screen components plumb and level to supporting substrate. 11. Remove all adhesives, strings, plastic wrap, and similar items that would prevent the unobstructed movement of the projection screen and screen material. 12. Install three button wall switch in location indicated on the audio visual design drawings and wire switch to screen low voltage controller. B. Interface with Other Work 1. Coordinate with AV Contractor for connection and testing of audio visual system low voltage control wiring to projection screen. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Site Tests and Inspections 1. Verify controls, limit switches, automatic doors, and other components function as designed and meet project requirements. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust motors, controls and components to allow for smooth, unobstructed screen operation. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect projection screens from damage during construction until Owner occupancy. END OF SECTION 115213 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS QPK NO. 220157.00 123623 - 1 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 123663 - 1 SECTION 123623 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plastic-laminate-clad countertops. 2. Concealed counter support brackets. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 064116 “Plastic-Laminate-Clad Architectural Cabinets” for fabricated casework. 2. Section 123661 "Solid Surfacing Countertops" for additional counter scope. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For plastic-laminate-clad countertops. 1. Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Detail fabrication and installation, including field joints. 2. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed in plastic-laminate-clad countertops. C. Samples for Verification: As follows: 1. Plastic Laminates: For each type, color, pattern, and surface finish required, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm) in size. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For fabricator. B. Product Certificates: For the following: 1. Composite wood products. 2. High-pressure decorative laminate. 3. Adhesives. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful inservice performance. B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS QPK NO. 220157.00 123623 - 2 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 123663 - 2 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver countertops only after casework and supports on which they will be installed have been completed in installation areas. B. Store countertops in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. C. Keep surfaces of countertops covered with protective covering during handling and installation. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations with Humidity Control: Do not deliver or install countertops until building is enclosed, wet-work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where countertops are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Established Dimensions: Where countertops are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where countertops are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of plastic-laminate-clad countertops indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. The Contract Documents contain requirements that are more stringent than the referenced quality standard. Comply with requirements of Contract Documents in addition to those of the referenced quality standard. B. Grade: Premium. C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS. 1. Basis of Design: Provide laminate as indicated in Finish Legend on Drawings D. Colors, Patterns and Finishes (PLAM-504): Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. As indicated by manufacturer's designations. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS QPK NO. 220157.00 123623 - 3 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 123663 - 3 E. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. F. Core Material: Particleboard or MDF. G. Core Material at Sinks: Particleboard or MDF made with exterior glue. H. Core Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm). 1. Build up countertop thickness to 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) at front, back, and ends with additional layers of core material laminated to top. I. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL, on underside of countertop substrate. 2.2 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent. B. Composite Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of countertop and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. MDF: Medium-density fiberboard, ANSI A208.2, Grade 130. 2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Wire-Management Grommets: Circular, molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage. 1. Basis of Design: Doug Mockett and Co., Inc. 2. Outside Diameter: 2 inches (51 mm). 3. Color: Color as selected. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: PVA. 1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive. 2. Panel assemblies fabricated with PVA adhesive to be laminated with minimum 5 psi continuous pressure evenly applied to entire panel surface. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS QPK NO. 220157.00 123623 - 4 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 123663 - 4 B. Flush Mount, Concealed Counter Mounting Brackets: 1. Manufacturer: Provide indicated product or comparable substitution as approved. a. Rakks, EH Series sized for counter depth as shown. 2. Material: Extruded aluminum – 6063-T6. 3. Finish: Clear anodized. 4. Design: 2 inches by 2 inches by 1/4-inch (50 m by 50 mm by 6 mm) angle designed to be mounted to side face of stud concealed within wall cavity. Horizontal leg exposed along under side of counter surface. 5. Capacity: 300 lbs (204 kg). 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate countertops to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Provide front and end overhang of 1 inch (25 mm) over base cabinets. B. Complete fabrication, including assembly, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. C. Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately, and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 1. Seal edges of cutouts by saturating with varnish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition countertops to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing countertops, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install countertops to comply with same grade as item to be installed. B. Install concealed wall brackets lag bolted to side of wood blocking nested within stud cavity as directed by manufacturer to maintain indicated tolerances. Space at 32 inches (810 mm) on center or as indicated on drawings. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS QPK NO. 220157.00 123623 - 5 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 123663 - 5 C. Assemble countertops and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop. 1. Provide cutouts for appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 2. Seal edges of cutouts by saturating with varnish. D. Field Jointing: Where possible, make in the same manner as shop jointing, using dowels, splines, adhesives, and fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Prepare edges to be joined in shop so Project-site processing of top and edge surfaces is not required. Locate field joints where shown on Shop Drawings. 1. Secure field joints in countertops with concealed clamping devices located within 6 inches (150 mm) of front and back edges and at intervals not exceeding 24 inches (600 mm). Tighten in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to exert a constant, heavy-clamping pressure at joints. E. Scribe and cut countertops to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged finish. F. Countertop Installation: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets, counter brackets or other supports into underside of countertop. 1. Install countertops level and true in line. Use concealed shims as required to maintain not more than a 1/8-inch-in-96-inches (3-mm-in-2400-mm) variation from a straight, level plane. 2. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and to walls with adhesive. 3. Seal joints between countertop and backsplash, if any, and joints where countertop and backsplash abut walls with mildew-resistant silicone sealant or another permanently elastic sealing compound recommended by countertop material manufacturer. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective countertops, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects. Where not possible to repair, replace countertops. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean countertops on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. C. Protection: Provide Kraft paper or other suitable covering over countertop surfaces, taped to underside of countertop at a minimum of 48 inches (1220 mm) o.c. Remove protection at Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 123623 SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS QPK NO. 220157.00 123661 - 1 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 123661 - 1 SECTION 123661 - SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid surface material countertops and splashes. 2. Solid surface material sinks. 3. Concealed counter support brackets. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 123623 "Plastic Laminate-Clad Counters" for additional counter scope. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For countertop materials and sinks. B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures. 1. Show locations and details of joints. 2. Show direction of directional pattern, if any. C. Samples for Verification: For the following products: 1. Countertop material, 6 inches (150 mm) square. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For fabricator. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For solid surface material countertops to include in maintenance manuals. Include Product Data for care products used or recommended by Installer and names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local sources for products. SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS QPK NO. 220157.00 123661 - 2 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 123661 - 2 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate countertops similar to that required for this Project, and whose products have a record of successful inservice performance. B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of countertops. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements before countertop fabrication is complete. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOP MATERIALS A. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous-filled plastic resin complying with ICPA SS-1. 1. Basis of Design: Provide material as indicated in Finish Legend on Drawings. 2. Type: Provide Standard type. 3. Integral Sink Bowls: Comply with CSA B45.5/IAPMO Z124. 4. Colors and Patterns (SSM-501 and SSM-503): As indicated by manufacturer's designations listed in Finish Legend on Drawings. B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue. 2.2 COUNTER ACCESSORIES A. Integral Sink Bowls: Comply with ISSFA-2 and ANSI Z124.3, Type 5 or Type 6, without a pre-coated finish. 1. Basis of Design Products: a. Corian, Model 810 where indicated on drawings. 2. Shape and Size (Over All Nominal Dimensions): a. Model 810: Oval shaped bowl; 18-1/2 inches (470 mm) long by 15-1/8 inches (384 mm) wide by 6-1/4 inches (158 mm) deep. 3. Colors and Patterns (SSM-502): As indicated in Finish Legend on Drawings. B. Sink Mounting Accessories: Manufacturer's approved adhesive, bowl clips, brass inserts and fasteners for attachment of undermount sinks. SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS QPK NO. 220157.00 123661 - 3 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 123661 - 3 2.3 COUNTERTOP FABRICATION A. Fabricate countertops according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions and to the AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards." 1. Grade: Premium. B. Configuration: 1. Front: Straight, slightly eased at top. 2. Splashes: Straight, slightly eased at corner. C. Countertops: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick, solid surface material with front edge built up with same material. D. Splashes: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick, solid surface material. E. Fabricate tops with shop-applied edges unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 1. Fabricate with loose splashes for field assembly. 2. Install integral sink bowls in countertops in the shop. F. Joints: Fabricate countertops without joints for full length installation. G. Cutouts and Holes: 1. Undercounter Plumbing Fixtures: Make cutouts for fixtures in shop using template or pattern furnished by fixture manufacturer. Form cutouts to smooth, even curves. a. Provide vertical edges, slightly eased at juncture of cutout edges with top and bottom surfaces of countertop and projecting 3/16 inch (5 mm) into fixture opening. 2. Fittings: Drill countertops in shop for plumbing fittings, undercounter soap dispensers and similar items. 2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Adhesive: Product recommended by solid surface material manufacturer. B. Sealant for Countertops: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 079200. C. ADA Compliant Vanity Support Brackets: 1. Manufacturer: Provide indicated product or comparable substitution as approved. a. Rakks, Vanity bracket sized for counter depth and apron as shown. 2. Material: Extruded aluminum – 6063-T6. 3. Finish: Mill aluminum. 4. Design: 2 inches by 2 inches by 1/4-inch (50 m by 50 mm by 6 mm) angle frame designed for surface mounting through wall finish to stud framing backup. Frame concealed by field installed apron as supplied by counter fabricator. 5. Capacity: 450 lbs (306 kg). SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS QPK NO. 220157.00 123661 - 4 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 123661 - 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to receive solid surface material countertops and conditions under which countertops will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of countertops. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet (3 mm in 2.4 m), 1/4 inch (6 mm) maximum. Do not exceed 1/64-inch (0.4-mm) difference between planes of adjacent units. B. Install wall brackets lag bolted to wood blocking within stud cavity as directed by manufacturer to maintain indicated tolerances. Space at 32 inches (810 mm) on center or as indicated on drawings. C. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units or counter brackets into underside of countertop. Predrill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. D. Fasten subtops to cabinets by screwing through subtops into cornerblocks of base cabinets or counter brackets. Shim as needed to align subtops in a level plane. E. Secure countertops to subtops with adhesive according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. F. Install backsplashes and end splashes by adhering to wall and countertops with adhesive. Mask areas of countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. G. Install aprons to backing and countertops with adhesive. Mask areas of countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. Fasten by screwing through backing. Predrill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. H. Complete cutouts not finished in shop. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to cutouts to prevent damage while cutting. Make cutouts to accurately fit items to be installed, and at right angles to finished surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges slightly. 1. Seal edges of cutouts in particleboard subtops by saturating with varnish. I. Apply sealant to gaps at walls; comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." END OF SECTION 123661 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 220501-1 PLUMBING BASIC REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 220501 - 1 SECTION 220501 - PLUMBING BASIC REQUIREMENTS PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.2 LAYOUT A. The Contract Drawings are diagrammatic in showing physical layout. Exact locations must be established in coordination with all other work. B. Arrange work in a neat, well organized manner running parallel to walls and with maximum overhead clearances. C. Locate operating and control equipment to provide easy access for operation and maintenance. D. Piping sloped for drainage shall have priority in layout. 1.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Provide all cutting and patching (unless otherwise noted on Contract Drawings) required to perform Plumbing Work in accordance with Division 01, General Requirements. B. Existing Conditions 1. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to verify all existing pipe sizes and locations in the field. C. Core Drilling: Core drilling required for plumbing work is the responsibility of the Contractor. 1. Existing Buildings a. Sleeves are not required for piping passing through existing floors, inside walls and partitions, which have been neatly core drilled, with the following exceptions: 1) Floors having a waterproofed construction. 2) Floors in spaces having a floor drain. D. Review the Contract Drawings, Specifications and Room Finish Schedule to become familiar with all aspects of the Project. E. Provide all cutting and patching required to perform Plumbing Work. Provide patching as required to match existing surfaces. F. In no case may floors or walls that are waterproofed be cut for further admission of any equipment or materials, nor may any structural member be pierced without written permission. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 220501-2 PLUMBING BASIC REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 220501 - 2 1.4 PIPE SLEEVES A. Install pipe sleeves for each pipe passing through floors, walls, partitions and roof decks with the following exception: 1. Piping through inside walls and partitions, which have been neatly core drilled. B. Fire-rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at penetrations through fire-rated walls and partitions. Seal insulation ends with vapor barrier coating. Fill the annular space between the sleeve and pipe to prevent the passage of flame and hot gases. The fire stop used to fill the annular space shall be an approved penetration fire stop system installed in accordance with ASTM E814, with a minimum positive pressure differential of 0.01 inch of water and shall have an F rating of not less than the fire resistance rating of the wall penetrated. Comply with Section 302 of the 2020 Plumbing Code of NYS. C. Floor Penetrations: Terminate insulation at penetrations through fire-rated floor. Seal insulation ends with vapor barrier coating. Fill the annular space between the sleeve and pipe to prevent the passage of flame and hot gases. The fire stop used to fill the annular space shall be an approved penetration fire stop system installed in accordance with ASTM E814, with a minimum positive pressure differential of 0.01 inch of water and shall have an F rating of not less than the fire resistance rating of the floor penetrated. Comply with Section 302 of the 2020 Plumbing Code of NYS. 1.5 PAINTING A. All painting of exposed work in finished areas shall be provided by the Contractor. Paint exposed work to match adjacent surfaces, unless noted otherwise. 1.6 REMOVALS A. Remove all existing materials and equipment included in the work of this Division from construction which is scheduled to be demolished. B. Refer to Contract Drawings to determine extent of construction being removed and visit Job Site to examine existing conditions. C. Where removals occur on services that are to remain in operation, cap or otherwise terminate the remaining services beneath finished surfaces. D. Contractor shall coordinate with Owner, unless otherwise directed, as to the disposition of removed materials and equipment. E. Any removed materials and equipment scheduled for the Owner to retain shall remain the Owner’s property and shall be carefully removed and turned over in good condition at the Job Site. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 220501-3 PLUMBING BASIC REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 220501 - 3 F. All removed materials and equipment not scheduled to be retained by the Owner shall become the property of the Contractor and be promptly removed from the Job Site. G. Wherever removal work entails the handling of hazardous material, (for example: asbestos), all removal procedures and disposal of removed material shall be in strict compliance with OSHA, EPA and New York State requirements currently in force. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide all plumbing work in accordance with the 2020 Plumbing Code of N.Y.S. Health Code and any local codes that may apply. 1.8 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data for approval before products or equipment are delivered to the Job. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Only products manufactured, fabricated or assembled by countries which are based in a member country of NAFTA shall be approved for use on this Job. 2.2 MANUALS A. Submit complete manual(s) for all work of this Division, in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements. Manuals shall include: 1. Installation, maintenance, operating instructions and full catalog description including exploded parts drawings of all equipment. 2. All valve charts and lists. 3. Emergency phone numbers for service for all equipment. 4. List of all Suppliers and Subcontractors including addresses, responsible personnel and phone numbers. 5. All receipts, submittals and test reports. 6. All warranties. 7. Maintenance schedule for all equipment. 2.3 SLEEVES A. Materials 1. Sleeves shall be of similar material to adjacent pipe, conduit, etc., but no less than 16 US gauge metal. a. Type A: Schedule 40 steel pipe. b. Type B: 16 gauge galvanized sheet steel. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 220501-4 PLUMBING BASIC REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 220501 - 4 2. Size of Sleeves a. Size sleeves for bare (un-insulated) pipe so as to provide 1/4" annular clearance between the sleeve and the outside surface of the pipe. b. On renovation projects, where the specifications allow core drilling of holes for piping, in lieu of sleeves, size holes to provide 1/4" annular clearance between the outside of the pipe and the hole. c. When insulation on piping is required to extend continuously through construction work, size core drilled holes to accommodate insulated pipe and allow for packing where specified. 3. Length of Sleeves a. In Walls and Partitions 1) Install sleeves of length as required, so as to be equal in length to thickness of wall or partition construction, including all applied finishes on said walls and partitions. b. Floors 1) Install sleeves 1/2" longer than the overall depth of the construction including final finishes. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 OWNER’S INSTRUCTION A. After completion of work, including punchlists, and after testing of systems, conduct a complete and thorough seminar for Owner’s designated personnel at the Job Site. B. Seminar Shall Include: 1. Operation and Maintenance of all Systems 2. Explanation of Identification Systems 3. Emergency Procedures 4. Review of Manuals C. Seminar shall be conducted by persons thoroughly familiar with equipment and installation. 3.2 SLEEVES A. Improperly located sleeves shall be removed and openings patched. B. Cut sleeves flush with adjacent surfaces unless otherwise indicated. C. Sleeves in floors subject to frequent wash down shall extend 1" above finished floor. D. Pack all spaces between service and sleeves with acoustic sealant. E. Sleeve Types 1. Type A a. Install Type A sleeves for piping passing through waterproofed walls and floors. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 220501-5 PLUMBING BASIC REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 220501 - 5 2. Type B a. Install Type B sleeves for all other piping, not specified to receive a Type A sleeve. 1) Install Type B sleeves, with sheet metal ears soldered to sleeves, for piping passing through core drilled holes in waterproofed floor construction on rehabilitation projects. Seal annular space between sleeve and hole watertight, with silicone caulking compound. F. Sleeve Packing 1. Render sleeves from mechanical equipment, penthouses and mechanical equipment rooms into any building space or enclosure, air- and vapor-tight by packing the annular space between the pipe and sleeve with a noncombustible insulating material, as specified. 2. Render sleeves in inside walls, partitions or floors, not hereinbefore specified, airtight by packing with acoustic sealant. 3. Render sleeves in firewalls as in Subparagraph 2 above. 3.3 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS A. Obtain and pay for all permits, testing and inspections required for the work of this Division. END OF SECTION 220501 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 220503-1 PIPE AND TUBES FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT QPK NO. 220157.00 220503 - 1 SECTION 220503 - PIPE AND TUBES FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Listed under this Section is the piping required for the sanitary transmission of potable water. B. Included under this Section is piping to be used for handling: 1. Potable Water 2. Domestic Hot Water C. Pipe fittings include all couplings, tees, elbows, flanges, unions, connectors and joints required for a complete installation. D. All materials installed shall meet the lead free definition under the Safe Drinking Water Act. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installation of all products shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and in accordance with all applicable codes. B. All pipe shall be ASTM pressure test rated for the type of service. C. Provide dielectric fittings or unions between dissimilar materials. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Schedules 1. Before beginning work provide for approval a schedule of all materials and manufacturers’ proposals to be used for all products. B. Samples 1. Submit for approval upon request. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COPPER PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Service Weight 1. Forced Flow and Pressurized Type: Type “L” hard tempered copper for general plumbing. 2. Complying with ASTM B75; B88; B251; B447. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 220503-2 PIPE AND TUBES FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT QPK NO. 220157.00 220503 - 2 B. Terminations 1. Sweat type, lead free solder. 2. Press type fittings not acceptable. C. Fittings 1. Pressure type, sweat copper, for water lines. 2. ASME B16.15; B16.18; B16.22; B16.23; B16.26 & B16.29. 2.2 BRASS PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Service Weight 1. Schedule 40. 2. Complying with ASTM B43. B. Finish 1. Chrome plated, where piping is exposed in finished rooms. C. Fittings 1. Rough brass, chrome plated, where piping is exposed in finished rooms. 2. Complying with ASTM F 1974. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Potable Water 1. Provide copper pipe and fittings for the entire system. 2. Included under this Specification shall be cold water and hot water. B. Copper Pipe and Tubing 1. Provide secure supports for horizontal runs and for vertical runs. Refer to the Contract Drawings for spacing of hangers or supports. 2. Cut pipe squarely; ream, remove all metal chips and burrs. 3. Make all soldered copper pipe, tube joints using lead-free solder. 4. Install in accordance with industry standards. 5. All changes in direction shall be made by using manufactured fittings. Bending of straight lengths is not permitted. C. All piping that requires proper grading shall be pitched down in direction of flow without pockets or sags. D. When installing the piping, make necessary allowance for movement due to expansion and contraction so that temperature changes shall not damage either the piping or the building attachments. E. Install all piping and fittings exposed to view in finished rooms using chrome plated brass. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 220503-3 PIPE AND TUBES FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT QPK NO. 220157.00 220503 - 3 F. Provide supports and hangers for all piping; install piping neatly. G. Support piping located above ceilings from building structure.. H. Completely disassemble, provide new fittings and reassemble all piping found to be unsatisfactory upon testing. I. Provide dielectric fittings or unions at connection point of dissimilar materials. END OF SECTION 220503 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 220523-1 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING QPK NO. 220157.00 220523 - 1 SECTION 220523 - GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Shall include all control, ball, check, balancing and other valves required for installation of the plumbing work. B. All materials installed shall meet the lead free definition under the Safe Drinking Water Act. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All products shall be pressure rated for a minimum working pressure of 125 psig in accordance with ASTM Specifications. B. All service valves, ball and check shall be a product of the same manufacturer. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data on all products. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Interiors: Bronze (ASTM B62) B. Exteriors: Bronze (ASTM B62), Ferrosteel (ASTM A126, B&C), and chrome plated brass. 2.2 BALL VALVES A. 3" and Smaller 1. Material: Body, Bronze (ASTM B62). 2. Type: Full port equal to the connecting pipe size, no lubrication required, two-way flow, stainless steel ball, quarter turn handle for ON-OFF, two-piece body, bronze construction rated at 400 psi WOG, threaded or solder female connection ends as determined by connecting piping. 3. Style: Nibco S-685-66-LF, or approved equal. 2.3 CHECK VALVES A. 2" and Smaller 1. Material: Body and disc, bronze (ASTM B62). 2. Type: Swing type, screw ends, Class 125. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 220523-2 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING QPK NO. 220157.00 220523 - 1 B. Style: Watts B5000 or approved equal by Jenkins, Crane or Milwaukee. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Install all valves in such a manner that they are readily accessible. B. Provide all piping adapters required to transition from screwed and flanged fittings to sweat fittings. C. Provide only chrome plated brass valves in finished rooms. D. Provide dielectric fittings or unions at the connection point of dissimilar materials. 3.2 BALL VALVES A. Provide in water piping at all fixtures and plumbing equipment. Stops provided with fixtures are considered acceptable. Ball valves shall be used for water service, unless otherwise directed. B. Provide at each branch line, near the main, supplying a group of fixtures. 3.3 CHECK VALVES A. Provide at all locations where reverse flow may occur. Use rubber-faced disc where high head pressure may occur. B. Install only in horizontal lines or in vertical lines where the flow is upward. END OF SECTION 220523 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 220528-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING QPK NO. 220157.00 220528-1 SECTION 220528 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide hangers, supports and attachments as indicated in this Section which comply with: 1. MSS SP-58; Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture 2. MSS SP-69; Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application 3. MSS SP-89; Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices 4. MSS SP-90; Guidelines for Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports 5. ASME B31 Series; Pressure Piping Code 6. AWS D1.1; Structural Welding Code - Steel B. Manufacturer 1. Design Basis: ITT Grinnell a. The figure numbers listed in this Section are figure numbers used by ITT Grinnell and are intended only as a method of identifying the type hanger required. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: ITT Grinnell F and S Manufacturing Fee and Mason Elcen Metal Products Company Carpenter and Patterson, Incorporated B-Line Systems Approved equivalent 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Trapeze Hangers a. Submit drawings for all trapeze hanger type supports complete with size and type of horizontal members, hanger rod sizes, accessories and the method of support from the overhead construction. b. In addition, include the number and size of pipe lines to be supported on each type of trapeze hanger. 2. Anchors and Supports a. Submit assembly-type shop drawings for each type of anchor, support, or sway brace, indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, methods of assembly of components and methods of attachment to permanent construction. B. Product Data 1. Hangers and Manufactured Accessories a. Submit pipe hanger and support schedule showing manufacturer’s figure number, size, location and features for each required pipe hanger and support. b. Submit manufacturer’s catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructions for each item scheduled. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 220528-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING QPK NO. 220157.00 220528-2 1.3 COORDINATION A. Existing Construction 1. The Contractor whose work includes the installation of products furnished under this Section is responsible for all work involved in the installation of such products, including cutting and patching. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports 1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hanger: MSS Type 1. a. Figure 260; use for non-insulated stationary pipe, 1/2" through 30". b. Figure 260; use with MSS Type 40 shield for hot or cold service insulated stationary pipe, 1/2" through 4". c. Figure 300; use for hot service insulated stationary pipe, 1/2" through 6". d. Figure CT-65; use for copper tubing, 1/2" through 4". 2. Adjustable Swivel Ring, Band Type: MSS Type 10. a. Figure 69, 70; use for suspension of non-insulated stationary pipe, 1/2" through 8". b. Figure CT-69; use for suspension of non-insulated stationary copper tubing, 1/2" through 8". 3. U-Bolts: MSS Type 24. a. Figure 137, 137S, 137C; use for support or guide of heavy loads, 1/2" through 36". B. Vertical-Piping Clamps 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamp: MSS Type 8. a. Figure 261; use for support and steadying of pipe risers, 3/4" through 20". b. Figure CT-121; use for support and steadying of copper tubing risers, 1/2" through 4". 2. Carbon or Alloy Steel Riser Clamp: MSS Type 42. a. Similar to MSS Type 8 with longer ends. C. Hanger Rods 1. Provide mild, low carbon steel, with two removable nuts at each threaded end for positioning rod and hanger and locking in place. a. Figure 140, 253; threaded both ends, 3/8" through 3-3/4". b. Figure 146; continuous thread, 1/4" through 1-1/2". D. Hanger Rod Attachments 1. Steel Turnbuckle: MSS Type 13. a. Figure 230; use for adjustment up to 6" for heavy loads. 2. Swivel Turnbuckle or Turnbuckle Adjuster: MSS Type 15. a. Figure 114; use with split pipe rings (MSS Type 11). 3. Malleable Iron Socket: MSS Type 16. a. Figure 110R; use for attaching hanger rod to various types of building attachments. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 220528-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING QPK NO. 220157.00 220528-3 E. Building Attachments 1. Top Beam C-Clamp: MSS Type 19. a. Figure 92, 93, 94; use under roof installations with bar joist construction for attachment to top flange of structural shape. 2. Side-Beam or Channel Clamp: MSS Type 20. a. Figure 225, 226; use for attachment to bottom flange of beams, channels or angles. 3. Center-Beam Clamp: MSS Type 21. a. Figure 133, 134; use for attachment to center of bottom flange of beams. 4. Welded Beam Attachment: MSS Type 22. a. Figure 66; use for attachments to bottom of beams where loads are considerable and rod sizes are large. 5. C-Clamp: MSS Type 23. a. Figure 86, 92, 93, 95; use for attachments to structural shapes. 6. Top-Beam or Adjustable Side Beam Clamp: MSS Type 25. a. Figure 217; use where it is necessary for the hanger rod to run vertically close to a beam edge, thus eliminating drilling of holes in structural members. 7. Adjustable Beam Clamp: MSS Type 27. a. Figure 14; use for supporting pipe from the bottom flange of beams. 8. Welded Steel Brackets a. Light (MSS Type 31): Figure 194; use to support 750 pound maximum load. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): Figure 195: use to support 1500 pound maximum load. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): Figure 199; use to support 3000 pound maximum load. 9. Side Beam Bracket: MSS Type 34. a. Figure 202, 206, 207; use on sides of steel or wood beams. 10. Plate Lug: MSS Type 57. a. Figure 55; use for attachment to steel beams where flexibility at the beam is desired. F. Insulation Filler Pieces and Shields 1. Insulation Filler Pieces a. Provide high density fiberglass insulation, or cellular glass insulation, or high density foam insulation filler pieces. b. Filler pieces shall be any of the following: 1) Fiberglass: H-block pipe support insulation as manufactured by ICA Fittings or approved equivalent. 2) Cellular foam glass insulation as manufactured by Pittsburgh Corning or approved equivalent. 2. Provide pressure treated wood spacers, custom cut to the thickness necessary to support pipe at each hanger location. Spaces shall be a minimum of 3/4" wide x length of metal protection shield x thickness required to match exactly the thickness of the pipe insulation into which the wood spacer is to be embedded. The wood spacer shall accomplish the purpose of supporting the pipe while also eliminating any wrinkles or indentations on the pipe insulation’s all service jacket. 3. Protection Shield: MSS Type 40. a. Figure 167; use for outside of foam, fiberglass or cellular foamglass insulation to prevent crushing of insulation or damage to vapor barrier. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 220528-4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING QPK NO. 220157.00 220528-4 b. Protection shield shall be 180 degree, galvanized sheet metal molded to fit the outside diameter of the pipe insulation. Shields shall be 16” in length. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Metal Framing 1. Provide products complying with NEMA STD ML1. B. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars 1. Provide products complying with ASTM A36. C. Heavy Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from steel shapes selected for the loads required; weld steel in accordance with AWS standards. D. Shop Painting and Plating 1. Provide shop coat of red lead or zinc primer paint on all hangers, supports, rods, metal framing, steel plates, shapes and bars furnished under this Section, unless cadmium plated, copper plated or galvanized. 2. Provide electroplated copper hangers, rods, supports and accessories for use with copper pipe or copper tubing when hangers or supports are in direct contact with pipe or tubing. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPE HANGERS AND PIPE SUPPORTS A. General 1. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure; comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. 2. Use copper plated or PVC coated hangers and supports for the support of copper pipe and tubing as a means of preventing electrolysis when hangers or supports are in direct contact with pipe or tubing. B. Horizontal Piping 1. Support groupings of parallel runs of horizontal piping together on field-fabricated heavyduty trapeze hangers where possible. 2. Comply with hanger spacing schedule as shown on the Contract Drawings and International Plumbing Code 2015 for maximum spacing between hangers and supports. 3. Where piping of various sizes is supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe as specified above for individual pipe hangers. 4. Do not use wire or perforated metal straps to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping or ductwork. 5. Install a hanger or support close to the point of change of direction of all pipe runs in either a horizontal or vertical plane. 6. Install additional hangers or supports, spaced as required and directed, to support concentrated loads such as in-line pumps, valves, fittings, equipment or other accessories. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 220528-5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING QPK NO. 220157.00 220528-5 7. Install a minimum of one hanger, and additional hangers if required by the hanger spacing schedules, in branch piping runs and runouts over 5 feet in length. 8. Support all insulated service piping by means of hangers or supports with high density insulation inserts and insulation protection shields installed outside of the insulation at each hanger/support location. C. Hanger Rods 1. Comply with MSS SP-69 for application and sizing of hanger rods. 2. Secure hanger rods with four nuts, two at upper attachment, and two at hanger; tighten against each other to lock hanger in place. D. Vertical Piping 1. Support vertical risers of piping systems with heavy duty hangers installed close to base of risers and riser clamps with extension arms at intermediate floors. 2. Install riser clamps above floor slabs, with the extension arms resting on the slabs. 3. Make adequate provision for risers that are subject to appreciable expansion or contraction. 4. Install intermediate supports between riser clamps on maximum 6 ft. centers for copper tubing risers 1-1/4" in size and smaller. 3.2 UPPER HANGER ATTACHMENTS A. General 1. In all cases, secure upper hanger attachments to overhead structural steel or steel bar joists wherever possible. 2. Do not attach hangers to steel decks which are not to receive concrete fill. 3. Do not attach hangers to precast concrete plank decks except as indicated below or recommended by the manufacturer. 4. Do not use flat bars or bent rods as upper hanger attachments. B. Attachment to Steel Frame Construction 1. Secure upper hanger attachments to structural steel or bar joists. 2. Secure upper hanger attachments to steel bar joists only at panel points of joists. 3. Do not drill holes in main structural steel members. 4. Provide intermediate structural steel members where required by pipe support spacing. 5. Select steel members used for intermediate supports based on a minimum safety factor of five. 6. Do not use drive-on beam clamps. 7. C-clamp types of upper hanger attachments with restraining straps may be used for piping systems up to 3" in size, with average system temperatures not less than 50F nor more than 200F. 8. Do not support piping over 4" in size from steel bar joists. C. Attachment to Concrete Filled Steel Decks 1. Do not attach hangers to decks less than 2-1/2" thick. 2. Where necessary, attach hangers to the deck with welding studs (except at roof decks), thrubolts with fish plates, or tee hangers. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 220528-6 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING QPK NO. 220157.00 220528-6 3. Do not support a load in excess of 250 pounds from any single welded stud. 4. Do not support piping over 4" in size from thru-bolts with fish plates or tee hangers. D. Attachment to Existing Cast-in-Place Concrete 1. For piping up to a maximum of 4" in size, secure hangers to overhead construction with selfdrilling type expansion shields and machine bolts. 2. Secure hangers to wall or floor construction with single unit expansion shields or self-drilling type expansion shields and machine bolts. 3.3 INSULATION FILLER PIECES AND SHIELDS A. Insulation Filler Pieces 1. Install high density insulation filler pieces at each point of support of insulated piping except as otherwise specified. 2. Install filler pieces of the same thickness as adjoining pipe insulation, around the full circumference of the pipe, and at least 2" longer than the insulation shield as follows: a. Install high density fibrous glass, high density molded urethane foam or high density cellular foam glass filler pieces for piping or tubing up to 2" in size insulated with fibrous glass. 3. For pipe or tubing 2 1/2" – 8” size use custom cut spacers of pressure treated wood between the pipe and hanger. Wood spacers shall be embedded within the pre-sized fiberglass insulation and encapsulated in lagging mastic. Wood spacers shall be sized to eliminate any wrinkles in the all service jacket at hanger locations. B. Pipe Insulation Shields 1. Install a pipe insulation shield at all points of support between hanger and insulation installed on pipe or tubing. 2. Center shields on all hangers and supports and install in such a manner so as not to cut, puncture or press into the insulation, or in any manner be detrimental to the vapor barrier. C. In lieu of providing individual filler pieces and shields, the Contractor may use pre-insulated, pipe insulation shield and vapor barrier jacketed high density insulating saddle at points of support. END OF SECTION 220528 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 220553-1 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT QPK NO. 220157.00 220553 - 1 SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Label all piping and equipment as to type, function or service described herein. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Identification labels, tags and charts - Seton Name Plate Corporation, New Haven, Connecticut or approved equal. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Product Data for pipe system identification labels, valve identification tags and valve service chart frames. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 IDENTIFICATION - VALVES A. Valve Service Identification Tags 1. No. 19 B&S gauge brass, or approved equal, with 1/4" high valve service abbreviated lettering on one line over 1/2" high valve service chart number, with 3/16" top hole for fastener. Tags, deep stamped and black filled; 1-1/2" round for plumbing use. B. Valve Tag Fasteners 1. Brass “S” hooks, or size as required for the valve to which attached. C. Valve Service Identification Chart Frames 1. Satin finished extruded aluminum of size to suit 8-1/2" x 11" chart. Provide rigid clear plastic glazing. 2.2 IDENTIFICATION - PIPING A. Provide pre-printed, vinyl, color-coded, pipe labels. B. Provide pre-printed, vinyl flow arrow labels to show direction of piping flow. C. Provide labels which identify pipe system by its abbreviated (if necessary) generic piping system name. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 220553-2 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT QPK NO. 220157.00 220553 - 2 2.3 IDENTIFICATION - EQUIPMENT A. Provide engraved plastic laminate signs. B. Provide text of sufficient clarity and lettering of adequate size to convey the information at each location. C. Comply with industry standards for color and design. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Complete all testing, insulation and finish painting work required by the Specification, prior to the application of identification information and flow arrows on piping. 3.2 VALVE IDENTIFICATION A. Application 1. Tag every valve, cock and control device in each piping system; exclude check valves, valves within equipment units, hose bibbs, faucets and shut-off valve of plumbing fixtures and similar multiple unit terminal valves. B. Valve Schedule 1. Prepare and submit valve tag schedule listing each tagged valve by location, service and tag description. Install each page of the valve schedule in glazed frames and mount where directed. 3.3 PIPING SYSTEM A. General 1. Provide adequate marking of piping which is exposed, including that which is concealed in accessible spaces. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for colors. Include arrows to show direction of flow. Locate markers at terminations of lines and near major branches; near control valves and at equipment connections; where lines pass through wall, floors and ceilings; at access doors where piping is in concealed spaces; and at spacing of not more than 25' along each line for exposed piping. 2. Provide "Asbestos Free" labels to all pipe insulation installed under this Contract. Apply labels at 25' intervals. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 220553-3 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT QPK NO. 220157.00 220553 - 3 3.4 EQUIPMENT A. Operational Tags 1. Where needed for proper and adequate information on operation and maintenance of plumbing systems, provide tags of plasticized card stock, either preprinted or typed to convey the message. END OF SECTION 220553 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 220700-1 PLUMBING INSULATION QPK NO. 220157.00 220700- 1 SECTION 220700 - PLUMBING INSULATION PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Included under this Specification is insulation required for all plumbing work. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All products shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Products shall be components of UL recognized insulation system. C. Installation shall be performed only by qualified workmen. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog data sheets for approval. B. Submit schedule indicating service, insulation thickness, insulation type, jacket and finish. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Concealed Locations: Above suspended ceilings, in pipe chases and mechanical rooms. B. Exposed Locations: All other locations within the building not classified as concealed as described above. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING INSULATION A. Thermal Conductivity: 0.25 BTU/hour/square inch at 75°F mean temperature. B. Moisture Absorption: 0.2% by volume 96 hours @ 120°F and 95% R.H. C. Specific Heat: 0.20 BTU/pound degree Fahrenheit. D. Shrinkage: None E. Alkalinity: PH9 F. Capillarity: Negligible after 24 hours. G. Dimensional Stability: Shall not warp, shrink, rot or decompose. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 220700-2 PLUMBING INSULATION QPK NO. 220157.00 220700- 2 H. Vermin and Rodent Resistance: Provides no sustenance. I. Temperature Limitations: Recommended for water piping from 60°F to +450°F. J. Jacket 1. Water Vapor Performance: 0.02 perms. 2. Beach Puncture: Minimum 50 units. K. Fire Hazard Classification 1. Flame Spread: 25 2. Fuel Contributed: 50 L. Construction: One-piece, with integral vapor barrier. M. Style: Owens-Corning Fiberglass 25 ASJ or approved equal by Armstrong, Certainteed or Knauf. 2.2 FITTING AND VALVE INSULATION A. Properties are to be the same as specified in Article 2.1 above for piping insulation. B. Provide presized fiberglass insulation inserts with PVC prefabricated fitting covers. C. PVC Insulated Fitting Covers 1. Provide prefabricated PVC fitting covers in conjunction with fiberglass insulation inserts on all pipe fittings. a. Material: PVC b. Temperature Range: 0°F to 450°F PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING A. Install insulation in accordance with the insulation manufacturer’s written installation instructions. B. Install Insulation on: 1. Domestic cold water piping, fittings and valve bodies. 2. Domestic hot water piping, fittings and valve bodies. 3. Note exception: Flanges and unions in domestic hot water piping are not to be insulated. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 220700-3 PLUMBING INSULATION QPK NO. 220157.00 220700- 3 C. Begin Installing Insulation after: 1. All piping has been tested and tests accepted. 2. All surfaces have been properly cleaned. 3. All surfaces are dry. D. Insulation thickness for all piping systems listed within this Section shall be as follows: 1. Domestic hot water piping insulation shall be minimum of 1" thick for piping up to and including 1-1/4”. Piping 1-1/2” and larger shall be 1-1/2”. 2. Domestic cold water piping insulation shall be minimum of 1/2" thick for piping up to and including 1-1/4”. Piping 1-1/2” and larger shall be 1”. E. Finish exterior of insulation to be compatible with painting or other markings. F. Provide continuous insulation through all hangers; provide galvanized sheet metal shield to protect insulation at hangers. G. Do not install staples in vapor barriers. H. Fittings and Valves 1. Install premolded fiberglass inserts of the same thickness as the adjoining insulation. 2. Install insulation on valves up to and including bonnets without interfering with packing glands. 3. Butt insulation neatly and firmly against fittings, flanges and valves. 4. Vapor seal all joints. I. Provide white PVC jacket over piping insulation in all locations, where piping is exposed, in finished and/or occupied spaces, including storage rooms. J. Re-insulate all existing piping where the existing insulation was damaged or removed during demolition or construction. END OF SECTION 220700 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 221119-1 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES QPK NO. 220157.00 221119 - 1 SECTION 221119 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Shall include all products listed for a quality installation. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform installation of all products in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and in accordance with all applicable codes. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Provide a schedule of all equipment and manufacturer’s data for all products. B. Provide shop drawings for all products. C. Samples: Submit for approval upon request. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VENTS A. Material: Same as piping in which they are installed. 2.2 TRAPS A. Materials: Same as piping in which they are installed. B. Style: Positive siphoning type. Non-siphoning type is not acceptable. C. Lavatories shall have interceptor type traps. 2.3 WATER SHOCK ABSORBERS A. Shock Absorber with stainless steel shell, hydro-pneumatic cushion of argon gas and pure glycerine, elastomer bellows, stainless steel adapter and male threaded plug. B. Shock Absorber to be sized in accordance with Plumbing and Drainage Institute “Standard P.D.I. - WH210” or manufacturer’s “Fixture-Unit Rating Table.” C. Shock Absorber to be Smith, Hydrotrol or approved equal by Josam or Zurn. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 221119-2 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES QPK NO. 220157.00 221119 - 2 2.4 CLEANOUTS A. Materials: Same as piping in which they are installed. B. Floor Type 1. Body: Cast iron inside caulk with adjustable head. 2. Plug: Bronze, countersunk. 3. Top: Buff polished bronze. 4. Cover: Smooth, Nikoloy type, secured with screws. C. Wall Type, Finished Areas 1. Caulking Ferrule: Cast Iron (for soil pipe hub). 2. Plug: Tapered thread, bronze, countersunk. 3. Access Cover Plated: Round polished Nikoloy secure to plug by counterscrew. D. Wall Type, Unfinished Areas 1. Material: Same as piping in which they are installed. 2. Plug: Countersunk. 2.5 ESCUTCHEON PLATES AND FLANGES A. Materials 1. Flanges: Cast brass, chrome plated. 2. Escutcheon Plates: Chrome plated brass. B. Size: As required to match pipe sizes and over rough work. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 VENTS A. Install on all fixtures and group of fixtures. B. Slope vent piping so it shall drain back to waste line by gravity. C. Install back vents on all traps. 3.2 TRAPS A. Install traps on all fixtures and plumbing equipment, not equipped with integral traps. B. Protect all traps from siphonage. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 221119-3 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES QPK NO. 220157.00 221119 - 3 3.3 WATER SHOCK ABSORBERS A. Provide at the tops of all risers and at the end of all runs in excess of 50', in all hot and cold water piping. B. Provide at the end of all lines serving a group of fixtures. C. Install in accessible locations. D. Sizing and selection shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.4 CLEANOUTS A. Provide at end of all runs and where shown on the Contract Drawings. B. Install cleanouts in such a manner that all piping may be readily reached for purposes of cleaning. C. Install floor cleanouts flush with the floor. D. Cleanouts shall be of the same nominal size as the pipe, but need not be larger than 4". 3.5 ESCUTCHEON PLATES AND FLANGES A. Install escutcheons on all piping where the piping passes through walls, floors and ceilings exposed to view. B. Install flanges over rough sleeves or piping wherever the sleeves or piping pass through walls, floors and ceilings exposed to view. END OF SECTION 221119 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 221305-1 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE QPK NO. 220157.00 221305 - 1 SECTION 221305 - FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Listed under this Section is the piping required for the transmission of sanitary waste. B. Included under this Section is piping to be used for handling: 1. Sanitary Waste Above Grade C. Pipe fittings include all couplings, tees, wyes, elbows, flanges, unions, connectors and joints required for a complete installation. D. Refer to Section 224200 - Plumbing Fixtures and Trim for floor drains and cleanouts. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installation of all products shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and in accordance with all applicable codes. B. Cast iron piping shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute. C. All pipe shall be ASTM pressure test rated for the type of service. D. Comply with Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Standard CISPI 301 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste and Vent Piping Applications. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Schedules 1. Before beginning work provide for approval a schedule of all materials and manufacturers’ proposals to be used for all products. B. Samples 1. Submit for approval upon request. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CAST IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Type 1. Extra heavy weight or service weight, ASA approved. 2. Complying with ASTM A74; ASTM A888. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 221305-2 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE QPK NO. 220157.00 221305 - 2 B. Construction 1. Smooth interior with Bell and Spigot ends for compression type joints; straight ends for use with “no-hub” fittings. C. Finish 1. Dip coated inside and out with asphalt paint. D. Fittings 1. ASTM B16.1; B16.4; B16.12; A74; A888. 2.2 COPPER PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Service Weight 1. Atmospheric Pressure and Gravity Flow Type: DWV tubing. 2. Complying with ASTM B75; B88; B251; B306. B. Terminations 1. Sweat type. C. Fittings 1. Drainage type, sweat copper, for drain and vent lines. 2. ASME B16.23; B16.26 & B16.29. 2.3 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS (GALVANIZED) A. Service Weight 1. Standard Full Weight. 2. Complying with ASTM A53. B. Construction 1. Threaded steel, heavily galvanized inside and out (including threads). C. Identification 1. All components shall bear the manufacturer’s trademark. D. Fittings 1. All nipples, couplings, unions, etc., shall be malleable iron of a streamlined design so as not to interfere with flow. Approved fitting manufacturers: Grinnell, Crane Company. 2. Drainage pattern fittings for sanitary water piping. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 221305-3 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE QPK NO. 220157.00 221305 - 3 PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Sanitary Piping (Waste and Vent or Copper DWV Pipe) 1. Provide cast iron fittings for all sanitary piping. B. Cast Iron Pipe 1. Use “no-hub” joints for all cast iron pipe installed inside the building. 2. Provide secure supports for horizontal runs and for vertical runs in suspended piping. Refer to Section 220529 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment, for spacing of hangers or supports. 3. Use 1/8 bends wherever the piping changes direction. 4. Provide stainless steel shield and clamp assembly on all “no-hub” joints. C. Copper Tubing 1. Provide secure supports for horizontal runs and for vertical runs. Refer to Section 220529 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment, for spacing of hangers or supports. 2. Cut pipe squarely; ream, remove all metal chips and burrs. 3. Install in accordance with industry standards. 4. All changes in direction shall be made by using manufactured fittings. Bending of straight lengths is not permitted. D. Steel Pipe 1. Provide secure supports for horizontal runs and vertical runs. Refer to Section 220529 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment, for spacing of hangers or supports. 2. All changes in direction shall be made by using manufactured fittings. Bending of straight lengths is not permitted. E. All piping that requires proper grading shall be pitched down in direction of flow without pockets or sags. F. When installing the piping, make necessary allowance for movement due to expansion and contraction so that temperature changes shall not damage either the piping or the building attachments. Piping installed within floor slabs is not permitted. G. Install all piping and fittings exposed to view in finished rooms using chrome plated brass. H. Provide supports and hangers for all piping; install piping neatly. I. Support piping located above ceilings from building structure. Piping supported from metal roof decks is not permitted. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 221305-4 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE QPK NO. 220157.00 221305 - 4 J. Completely disassemble, provide new fittings and reassemble all piping found to be unsatisfactory upon testing. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Protect open ends with temporary plugs or caps. 3.3 INSTALLATION – ABOVE GROUND A. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1/8 inch per foot minimum on mains 4 inches and larger. Install branch mains smaller than 4 inch with 1/4 inch per foot slope. Maintain gradients. B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Provide clearances at cleanout for snaking drainage system. C. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor. D. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls. E. Install piping to maintain headroom. F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints or connected equipment. G. Support cast iron drainage piping at each joint and at intervals per the 2020 Plumbing Code of NYS. END OF SECTION 221305 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 224200-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM QPK NO. 220157.00 224200-1 SECTION 224200 - PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Included under this Section are plumbing fixtures and related trim. Supports for wall hung fixtures are specified under Section 220529 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All fixtures shall be furnished by one of the following manufacturers: 1. Sloan 2. American Standard 3. Fiat 4. Elkay 5. Approved equal B. Toilet seats shall be manufactured by either Church, Beneke, or approved equal. C. All fixture trim shall be furnished by one of the following manufacturers: 1. American Standard 2. Sloan 3. Approved equal 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer’s data for approval. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All products shall be new and in original cartons. Provide complete with all necessary connections, equipment, trim, fittings and supports. B. Provide water saver type fixtures. C. Provide products constructed using materials free from defects. D. Provide vitreous china products thoroughly fused and vitrified to a homogeneous mass. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 224200-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM QPK NO. 220157.00 224200-2 2.2 FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT WC-1 Water Closet 1. Description: Flush Valve - Low Consumption 2. Mounting: Wall Hung Carrier 3. Outlet: Rear 4. Construction: Vitreous China, Color: White 5. Bowl: Vitreous china, reverse trap, siphon action, elongated rim bowl with self-draining jet. 6. Height: 17" floor to rim. 7. Flush valve, sensor actuation, battery powered, exposed, metal housing. Sloan Royal Model 111. SFSM-1.28. 8. Seat: Beneke solid plastic, elongated seat without cover. 9. Consumption at 30 psig = 1.28 gallons per flush. 10. ADA compliant. 11. Design Basis: American Standard AFWALL 2257.101. WC-2 Water Closet 1. Description: Flush Valve - Low Consumption 2. Mounting: Wall Hung Carrier 3. Outlet: Rear 4. Construction: Vitreous China, Color: White 5. Bowl: Vitreous china, reverse trap, siphon action, elongated rim bowl with self-draining jet. 6. Height: 15" floor to rim. 7. Flush valve, sensor actuation, battery powered, exposed, metal housing. Sloan Royal Model 111. SFSM-1.28. 8. Seat: Beneke solid plastic, elongated seat without cover. 9. Consumption at 30 psig = 1.28 gallons per flush. 10. Design Basis: American Standard AFWALL 2257.101. FD-1 Floor Drain 1. Description: Floor drain toilet rooms and finished areas. 2. Type: Double drainage type. 3. Construction: Cast iron body and 5 inch square nickel bronzed adjustable strainer head. 4. Equip floor drain with auxiliary inlet fitting for 1/2" F.P.T. threaded trap primer connection. 5. Style: WATTS FD-100-M. 6. Provide waterless drain trap sealer as manufactured by SureSeal or approved equal. US-1 Scrub Sink 1. Description: Double surgical scrub sink. 2. Mounting: Wall mount; provide wall bracket and all mounting hardware. 3. Construction: Stainless steel construction. 4. Trim: Infrared faucet battery. Provide thermostatic mixing assembly. 5. Supply Pipes: Chrome plated, loose key angle stops. 6. Trap: Cast brass, adjustable, with cleanout plug, tubing outlet and wall flange. 7. Style: ES47-IR. As offered by Paragon Medical. 8. Number of Stations: Varies - refer to drawings. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 224200-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM QPK NO. 220157.00 224200-3 L-1 Lavatory 1. Description: Nominal 20" x 18". 2. Mounting: Wall mount; provide floor mount concealed carrier. 3. Construction: Vitreous china; color: white; single hole to match trim. 4. Trim: Sloan Model EAF-100-HLT, chrome plated finish, 0.35 gpm, battery powered, infrared, chrome plated faucet. 5. Supply Pipes: Chrome plated, loose key angle stops. 6. Trap: Cast brass, adjustable, with cleanout plug, tubing outlet and wall flange. 7. Style: American Standard Lucerne 0356. Note: Provide “Handi Lav-Guard” insulation kits on lavatory plumbing. L-2 Lavatory 1. Description: Integral with vanity top. 2. Trim: Sloan Model EAF-100-HLT, chrome plated finish, 0.35 gpm, battery powered, infrared, chrome plated faucet. 3. Supply Pipes: Chrome plated, loose key angle stops. 4. Trap: Cast brass, adjustable, with cleanout plug, tubing outlet and wall flange. Note: Provide “Handi Lav-Guard” insulation kits on lavatory plumbing. MS-1 Mop Sink 1. Mounting: Floor set. 2. Construction: One piece, “molded stone”, 24" x 24" x 10" deep, with bumper guard plate. 3. Trim: Faucet with bucket hook, top brace and 8" spout. Drain cast brass (2" IPS) with dome strainer and lint basket. American Standard 8344.012. 4. Accessories: 12 ounce cartridge of sealant, 30" long x 5/8" jobber hose and bracket. 5. Style: Fiat #MSB-2424 or approved equal. Electric Water Heater EWH-2 & EWH-3 1. Description: Electric tankless point of use water heater. 2. Mounting: Wall mounted. 3. Construction: Cast aluminum alloy. 4. Electrical Characteristics: 30 amps, 208v/1p, hard wire connection UL listed. Provide electrical disconnect. 5. Capacity: 43°F temperature rise at 1.00 gpm, low flow activated 0.35 gpm. 110° limit setting 6. Style: chronomite m-30l/208. Electric Water Heater EWH-4 & EWH-5 & EWH-6 1. Description: Electric tankless point of use water heater. 2. Mounting: Wall mounted. 3. Construction: Cast aluminum alloy. 4. Electrical Characteristics: 30 amps, 120v/1p, hard wire connection UL listed. Provide electrical disconnect. 5. Capacity: 50°F temperature rise at 0.50 gpm, low flow activated 0.35 gpm. 110° limit setting. 6. Style: Chronomite sr-30l/120. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 224200-4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM QPK NO. 220157.00 224200-4 Electric Water Heater EWH-1 1. Description: 50 gallon electric tank type water heater. 2. Mounting: Wall mounted on shelf. 3. Construction: Heavy gauge steel tank with 1" foam insulation. 4. Electrical Characteristics: Dual 4500w element, 208v/1p, hard wire connection UL listed with T&P relief valve. Provide electrical disconnect. 5. Capacity: 90°f temperature rise at 21 gph. 6. Style: AO Smith ENL-50 suspended on shelf. 7. Shelf: Holdrite 50-SWHP-W wall mount shelf CS-1 Countertop Sink - ADA Compliant 1. Description: Single bowl with basin 14" x 16" x 6.5” with center drain hole. 2. Mounting: Self rim. 3. Construction: 18 gauge, type 302 stainless steel, seamless drawn, radius corners, satin finish, underside coated, 3 faucet holes, 8” centers. 4. Trim: Just Manufacturing Commercial Faucet Model JTR-51-w4, 8" wide spread faucet, 6-5/8" reach, gooseneck spout with aerator and wrist blade handles. Chrome plated brass construction. 5. Supply pipes: Chrome plated, angle supplies with loose key stops. 6. Trap: Cast brass, adjustable, with cleanout plug, tubing outlet and wall flange. 7. Strainer: Polished chrome with 1-1/2" tailpiece. 8. Style: Just Manufacturing model SL-ADA-1921-A-GR. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Provide carriers for all wall-mounted fixtures. B. Install all products level and plumb. C. Furnish and install chrome plated piping, fittings, valves, escutcheons, trim, etc., for fixture connections which are exposed to view. D. Install all fixtures at mounting heights shown on the Contract Drawings. E. Provide mounting supports for all products. F. Install all trim and accessories, providing adequate wall supports behind all wall-mounted components. G. Seal perimeter joints of fixtures with sealant recommended by fixture manufacturer for the locations and mounting surfaces indicated. END OF SECTION 224200 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 227005-1 CLEANING, TESTING AND ADJUSTING QPK NO. 220157.00 227005 - 1 SECTION 227005 - CLEANING, TESTING AND ADJUSTING PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work of this Section consists of all products and work required prior to making the plumbing operational as well as all work required to observe its performance. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All work shall be performed in accordance with accepted standards. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for approval and/or record on all tests performed. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE) PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Test all concealed piping before it is covered. B. All equipment or piping failing tests shall be repaired or replaced and then re-tested. 3.2 WASTE AND VENT PIPING A. Test all sanitary and vent piping before fixtures are connected. B. Cap or plug all openings, fill the system with a 10 foot high column of water and allow to stand for three (3) hours. If level of water does not drop in three (3) hours, the test may be considered satisfactory. 3.3 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING A. Pressure Testing 1. Apply a 125 psi hydrostatic test for four (4) hours before fixtures or faucets are connected. 2. Apply a 75 psi hydrostatic test for four (4) hours after the fixtures and faucets are connected. 3. Pressure shall remain constant for the duration of the test to be considered acceptable. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 227005-2 CLEANING, TESTING AND ADJUSTING QPK NO. 220157.00 227005 - 2 B. Sterility Test 1. Before the system may be used for domestic purposes, sterilize by slowly filling with water to which a sterilizing agent has been applied, at a rate giving 50 PPM of chlorine, as determined by residual chlorine test at extremities of the line. 2. After lines have been filled for a period of three (3) hours, test for residual chlorine shall show not less than 5 PPM. If less than 5 PPM is indicated, drain and flush out the lines and repeat sterilization treatment until tests indicate at least 5 PPM of residual chlorine after three (3) hours. 3. Flush lines out until all traces of chemical have been removed to the extent of 0.2 PPM maximum chlorine. 4. The Contractor shall collect two (2) water samples from each piping system and shall procure the services of a laboratory approved by the New York State Health Department (NYSDOH) to test the water samples in accordance with NYSDOH procedures. Results of these water sterility tests shall be forwarded to the Architect/Engineer. 3.4 VALVES AND FAUCETS A. Prior to acceptance open full force for 5 minutes. B. If leaking is observed around packings, the packings shall be replaced. 3.5 FIXTURES A. Remove all labels and completely clean all fixtures. END OF SECTION 227005 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 230101-1 HVAC BASIC REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 230101 - 1 SECTION 230101 - HVAC BASIC REQUIREMENTS PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. The requirements of this Section apply to: Division 23 - Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning (HVAC). 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Bidding and Contract Requirements (Division 00) of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and General Requirements (Division 01), apply to all HVAC Work. B. The following technical sections also have applicability as referenced herein: 1. Division 26 - Electrical. 2. Other sections as may be referenced herein or cross-referenced. 1.3 LAYOUT OF WORK A. The Contract Drawings are diagrammatic in showing physical layout. Exact locations must be established in coordination with all other work of this and other trades. B. Arrange work in a neat, well organized manner running parallel to walls and close to structure and other work above for maximum clearances. C. Locate operating and control equipment to insure access for operation and maintenance. D. Piping sloped for drainage shall have priority in layout. E. Coordinate the work of this Division with the work of other trades and make adjustments to the work as may be necessary to fit the spaces allotted. 1.4 PROJECT MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. All materials, equipment, piping, tubing, fittings, insulation, ductwork, etc., shall be manufactured, fabricated or assembled by companies which are based in a member country of NAFTA. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver products to the Site in sturdy shipping containers, properly labeled as to type, function and location. B. Handle products carefully at all times during shipping, storing and installing. Avoid crushing containers and prevent dirt and debris from entering or settling on products. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 230101-2 HVAC BASIC REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 230101 - 2 C. Store products in original shipping containers and protect from weather and construction work traffic. D. Where possible, store inside; otherwise, store above grade and enclose with weatherproof wrapping. 1.6 ELECTRICAL A. Provide all wiring from power panels and wiring, connections and accessories within and between items of equipment required to perform the work of this Division. B. Comply with the applicable provisions of Division 26 - Electrical, except as otherwise specifically indicated. 1.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. The Contractor shall provide all cutting and patching required to complete the HVAC work. B. Where patching requires the use of skilled tradespersons, the Contractor shall employ the services of an experienced sub-contractor who is qualified to perform the patching work. C. Unless stated otherwise the Contractor shall patch disturbed areas to match the existing finish and texture of the existing surfaces immediately adjacent to the disturbed area. 1.8 REMOVALS A. Remove all existing HVAC systems materials and equipment not indicated for re-use. B. Refer to Contract Drawings to determine extent of construction being removed, and visit Job Site to examine existing conditions. C. Where removals occur on services that are to remain in operation, cap or otherwise terminate the remaining services beneath finished surfaces. D. Carefully remove and turn over to the Owner in good condition at the Job Site all removed materials and equipment indicated for Owner’s retainage. E. Remove from the Job Site all existing materials and equipment not scheduled to be re-used or retained by the Owner. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FIELD PAINTING A. Provide all field painting required to perform the work of this Division. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 230101-3 HVAC BASIC REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 230101 - 3 2.2 SLEEVES A. Provide sleeves in the following locations: 1. All interior penetrations through fire rated construction. 2. All interior penetrations through previously erected or existing concrete or masonry which cannot be neatly drilled or cut. 3. All penetrations of piping subject to significant movement (thermal expansion) or at building expansion joints. 4. All penetrations required to be watertight, and areas subject to frequent washdown, extend 1" above floors. 5. At all other locations specifically noted in the Contract Documents. 6. At other locations desired by Installer. B. Provide Schedule 40 black steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6"; 10 gauge galvanized sheet- metal round tube with welded longitudinal joint for sleeves 6" or larger. C. Provide sleeves compatible with penetration and material penetrated. D. Provide 1/2" minimum clearance around penetration. E. Provide sleeves at all pipe penetrations through concrete and masonry construction, and through fire-rated drywall construction. F. Fill all sleeves through fire-rated construction with an approved silicone fire-seal sealant or UL listed alumina fiber and board. Pack all other sleeves with fiberglass insulation. Fill the annular space between the sleeve and pipe to prevent the passage of flame and hot gases. The fire-stop used to fill the annular space shall be an approved penetration fire-stop system installed in accordance with ASTM E814, with a minimum positive pressure differential of 0.01 inch of water and shall have an F rating of not less than the fire resistance rating of the floor penetrated. Comply with Section 302 of the 2020 Mechanical Code of NYS. G. Sleeves through structural members are not permitted without prior approval from Engineer. H. Cut sleeves flush with adjacent surfaces unless otherwise indicated. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 LUBRICATION FITTINGS A. Mount all grease and oil fittings directly on bearings, except when bearings are not readily accessible. When equipment bearings are not visible, or are inaccessible, provide readily accessible and secured copper tubing extensions to bearing lubrication fittings, including plug closed extensions from grease bearing reliefs. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 230101-4 HVAC BASIC REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 230101 - 4 3.2 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Provide all cutting and patching, except as otherwise specified. B. Remove and replace work which, in the judgment of the Engineer, has been cut and patched in an unsatisfactory manner. 3.3 OWNER’S INSTRUCTION A. After Substantial Completion of Work, including testing and balancing of systems, conduct a complete and thorough seminar for Owner’s designated personnel at the Job Site. B. Include the following instructions: 1. Operation and maintenance of all systems 2. Explanation of identification systems 3. Emergency and alarm procedures 4. Sequencing requirements 5. Seasonal provisions 6. Security and safety 7. Review of manuals C. Conduct seminar by persons thoroughly familiar with equipment and installation, who may include manufacturer’s representatives. D. Contractor shall conduct testing and equipment startup prior to scheduling Owner's training and instruction session(s). Owner's instruction and equipment startup shall not occur simultaneously. 3.4 MANUALS A. Refer to Section 230103 - Operating and Maintenance Manuals. END OF SECTION 230101 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 230103-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS QPK NO. 220157.00 230103-1 SECTION 230103 - OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit three (3) hard copies and one (1) electronic of completed manuals to Engineer to be retained by Engineer and Owner unless otherwise indicated. B. List of Submittals 1. Electronic edition on flash drive. 2. Three (3) Copies of Operating and Maintenance Manuals. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUALS A. Provide electronic edition and also provide hard cover three ring binders suitable for 8-1/2" x 11" paper size of sufficient capacity to contain all required data, or provide multiple binders containing associated portions of the data and labeled accordingly. B. Label outside front cover and heel cover with filled embossed letters having a contrasting color. Label shall include Project name, Manual title and general category (for multiple binders), as applicable. C. Provide a typewritten index for each manual. D. Provide tabbed dividers between various portions of manuals. E. Contents 1. Installation, maintenance, operating instructions and full catalog description including exploded parts drawings of all equipment. 2. All valve charts and lists. 3. Lubrication list for all equipment including type of lubricant, source and frequency of lubrication stated for each unit of equipment. 4. Control description and diagrams which shall include data required in Item 1 above. 5. Emergency phone numbers for service for all equipment. 6. List of all suppliers and subcontractors including addresses, responsible personnel and phone numbers. 7. All balancing reports, receipts and submittals, all test reports. 8. All warranties. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 230103-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS QPK NO. 220157.00 230103-2 9. Schematic diagrams for all HVAC systems. 10. Wiring and control diagrams for all equipment. 11. Maintenance schedule for all equipment, including lubrication and filter replacement. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTRUCTION A. Review manuals with Owner’s personnel at completion of work, during Owner instruction seminar. END OF SECTION 230103 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 230513-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT QPK NO. 220157.00 230513-1 SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. The work to be performed shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Provide motors and auxiliaries as specified pieces of the systems called for in the Contract Documents. Provide motor starters for specific applications and motor disconnects integral in equipment where specified in the Contract Documents. B. Motor starters, disconnect switches, fuses, auxiliary devices shall be provided by Division 26 Electrical Sub-Contractor, unless specified otherwise and/or scheduled on the Contract Drawings to be provided by the HVAC Sub-Contractor. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All equipment shall be new and UL listed. B. NFPA 70 (National Electric Code) 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings of motors and starters, where specified to be provided with the equipment or where the starter is integral in packaged control systems, including wiring diagrams, starter heater sizes. 1. Submit model number of all motors, type and guaranteed minimum full load efficiency. B. List of Submittals 1. Motors and Accessories. C. Refer to Division 1, Document Distribution Section. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MOTORS A. All motors rated 1/2 HP and greater shall be special design, high efficiency, energy-saver type with a guaranteed minimum full load efficiency. All motors rated greater than one horsepower shall have a minimum power factor of 85% under rated load conditions. B. Provide all motors built for 60 Hz operation and with voltage and phase characteristics as indicated on the Contract Drawings. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 230513-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT QPK NO. 220157.00 230513-2 GUARANTEED MINIMUM EFFICIENCIES AT FULL LOAD WITHOUT CAPACITORS Totally Enclosed Open Drip-Proof Fan Cooled 1800 1800 HP RPM RPM 1/2 78 78 3/4 78 78 1 85 85 1.5 85.5 85.5 2 85.5 85.5 3 88 88 5 88.5 88.5 7.5 90 90 10 90 90 15 92 92 20 & larger 92.5 92.5 C. Nominal Motor Voltage Table Nominal System Voltage Motor Nameplate 480 V - 3 Phase 460 Volt 208 V - 3 Phase 200 Volt 208 V - 1 Phase 200 Volt 120 V - 1 Phase 115 Volt D. Application: Each motor shall be suitable for continuous operation and of speed, enclosure, rating, type and horsepower no less than that scheduled or specified. 1. Each equipment manufacturer responsible for the selection and application of motors to his respective equipment, using motors having adequate starting torque to properly accelerate driven equipment without undue heating or distress of any kind. 2. Apply motors on the basis of standard nameplate rated horsepower, exclusive of the 1.15 service factor. E. Construction: In compliance with all NEMA Standards, wound specifically for nameplate voltages with a 1.15 service factor at rated voltage and frequency. 1. Motors shall have Class F insulation system, with Class B temperature rise. 2. Motor enclosures and maximum allowable temperature rise by resistance in degrees over 104°F ambient at rated HP shall be as follows: a. General Purpose: Drip proof 104°F or encapsulated design 140°F. b. Refrigeration compressors, hermetic type. 3. Polyphase: Constant speed, squirrel cage totally enclosed for 1/2 HP and larger. 4. Single-Phase: Capacitor start, induction run or split phase type, as scheduled. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 230513-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT QPK NO. 220157.00 230513-3 5. Bearings: a. Fractional Horsepower Motors: Precision ball bearings 20,000 hours rated life, designed for heavy axial thrust requirements. b. Integral Horsepower Motors: Precision ball or roller bearings, rated 20,000 hours life, unless specifically scheduled as long life hours. 6. V-Belt Connected Motors: Provided with adjustable slide rail bases and pulleys sized and applied so that total motor torque shall not exceed maximum load allowed by motor design and construction. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 SELECTION OF MOTORS A. Furnished by equipment manufacturer and especially manufactured and/or selected, mounted and installed so completed installation is substantially noiseless in performance under intended use. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF MOTORS A. Install all motors in proper mounting position at end of slide rail nearest equipment to permit future belt take-up and in such a manner as to be accessible for normal maintenance, removal and wiring. B. Install per requirements of National Electric Code. 3.3 DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Provide integral in equipment where specified in Contract Documents. END OF SECTION 230513 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 230529-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT QPK NO. 220157.00 230529-1 SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide hangers, supports and attachments as indicated in this Section which comply with: 1. MSS SP-58; Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture 2. MSS SP-69; Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application 3. MSS SP-89; Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices 4. MSS SP-90; Guidelines for Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports 5. ASME B31 Series; Pressure Piping Code 6. AWS D1.1; Structural Welding Code - Steel B. Manufacturer 1. Design Basis: ITT Grinnell a. The figure numbers listed in this Section are figure numbers used by ITT Grinnell and are intended only as a method of identifying the type hanger required. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: ITT Grinnell F and S Manufacturing Fee and Mason Elcen Metal Products Company Carpenter and Patterson, Incorporated B-Line Systems Approved equal 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Trapeze Hangers a. Submit drawings for all trapeze hanger type supports complete with size and type of horizontal members, hanger rod sizes, accessories and the method of support from the overhead construction. b. In addition, include the number and size of pipe lines to be supported on each type of trapeze hanger. 2. Anchors and Supports a. Submit assembly-type shop drawings for each type of anchor, support, or sway brace, indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, methods of assembly of components and methods of attachment to permanent construction. B. Product Data 1. Hangers and Manufactured Accessories a. Submit pipe hanger and support schedule showing manufacturer’s figure number, size, location and features for each required pipe hanger and support. b. Submit manufacturer’s catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructions for each item scheduled. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 230529-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT QPK NO. 220157.00 230529-2 1.3 COORDINATION A. New Construction 1. The Contractor is responsible for identifying the location and the setting in place of all hanger systems, hanger attachments or support bases in ample time so as not to delay construction work, or interfere with or impede in any way the work of other trades. B. Existing Construction 1. The Contractor whose work includes the installation of products furnished under this Section is responsible for all work involved in the installation of such products, including cutting and patching. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports 1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hanger: MSS Type 1. a. Figure 260; use for non-insulated stationary pipe, 1/2" through 30". b. Figure 260; use with MSS Type 40 shield for hot or cold service insulated stationary pipe, 1/2" through 4". c. Figure 300; use for hot service insulated stationary pipe, 1/2" through 6". d. Figure CT-65; use for copper tubing, 1/2" through 4". 2. Adjustable Swivel Ring, Band Type: MSS Type 10. a. Figure 69, 70; use for suspension of non-insulated stationary pipe, 1/2" through 8". b. Figure CT-69; use for suspension of non-insulated stationary copper tubing, 1/2" through 8". 3. U-Bolts: MSS Type 24. a. Figure 137, 137S, 137C; use for support or guide of heavy loads, 1/2" through 36". B. Vertical-Piping Clamps 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamp: MSS Type 8. a. Figure 261; use for support and steadying of pipe risers, 3/4" through 20". b. Figure CT-121; use for support and steadying of copper tubing risers, 1/2" through 4". 2. Carbon or Alloy Steel Riser Clamp: MSS Type 42. a. Similar to MSS Type 8 with longer ends. C. Hanger Rods 1. Provide mild, low carbon steel, with two removable nuts at each threaded end for positioning rod and hanger and locking in place. a. Figure 140, 253; threaded both ends, 3/8" through 3-3/4". b. Figure 146; continuous thread, 1/4" through 1-1/2". D. Hanger Rod Attachments 1. Steel Turnbuckle: MSS Type 13. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 230529-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT QPK NO. 220157.00 230529-3 a. Figure 230; use for adjustment up to 6" for heavy loads. 2. Swivel Turnbuckle or Turnbuckle Adjuster: MSS Type 15. a. Figure 114; use with split pipe rings (MSS Type 11). 3. Malleable Iron Socket: MSS Type 16. a. Figure 110R; use for attaching hanger rod to various types of building attachments. E. Building Attachments 1. Mechanical - Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type zinc coated or stainless steel, designed for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension and shear capacities appropriate for suspended loads. 2. Top Beam C-Clamp: MSS Type 19. a. Figure 92, 93, 94; use under roof installations with bar joist construction for attachment to top flange of structural shape. 3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamp: MSS Type 20. a. Figure 225, 226; use for attachment to bottom flange of beams, channels or angles. 4. Center-Beam Clamp: MSS Type 21. a. Figure 133, 134; use for attachment to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachment: MSS Type 22. a. Figure 66; use for attachments to bottom of beams where loads are considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamp: MSS Type 23. a. Figure 86, 92, 93, 95; use for attachments to structural shapes. 7. Top-Beam or Adjustable Side Beam Clamp: MSS Type 25. a. Figure 217; use where it is necessary for the hanger rod to run vertically close to a beam edge, thus eliminating drilling of holes in structural members. 8. Adjustable Beam Clamp: MSS Type 27. a. Figure 14; use for supporting pipe from the bottom flange of beams. 9. Steel Beam Clamp With Eye Nut: MSS Type 28. a. Figure 228, 292, 292L; use for suspension of heavy loads from American Standard I-beams and wide flange beams. 10. Linked Steel Clamp With Eye Nut: MSS Type 29. a. Figure 228, 292, 292L; same as MSS Type 28 with link extensions. 11. Malleable Beam Clamp: MSS Type 30. a. Figure 218; use for attachment to structural steel. 12. Welded Steel Brackets a. Light (MSS Type 31): Figure 194; use to support 750 pound maximum load. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): Figure 195: use to support 1500 pound maximum load. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): Figure 199; use to support 3000 pound maximum load. 13. Side Beam Bracket: MSS Type 34. a. Figure 202, 206, 207; use on sides of steel or wood beams. 14. Plate Lug: MSS Type 57. a. Figure 55; use for attachment to steel beams where flexibility at the beam is desired. F. Saddles and Shields 1. Steel Pipe Covering Protection Saddle: MSS Type 39A, 39B. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 230529-4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT QPK NO. 220157.00 230529-4 a. Figure 160-165, 165A, 166A; use for high temperature service or where heat losses are to be kept to a minimum and to protect insulation against damage. b. Fill interior voids with segments of insulation matching adjoining insulation. 2. Protection Shield: MSS Type 40. a. Figure 167; use for outside of foam or fiberglass insulation to prevent crushing of insulation or damage to vapor barrier. 3. Thermal Hanger Shield: (Not an MSS Type). a. Constructed of 360 degree insert of high density, 100 psi, waterproofed calcium silicate, encased in 360 degree sheet metal shield, with assembled thickness to match adjoining insulation. b. Use of this shield shall result in better visual insulation installation and shall reduce thermal losses. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Metal Framing 1. Provide products complying with NEMA STD ML1. B. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars 1. Provide products complying with ASTM A36. C. Cement Grout 1. Portland cement (ASTM C150, Type I or Type III) and clean uniformly graded, natural sand (ASTM C404, Size #2). 2. Mix at a ration of 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts sand, by volume, with only the minimum amount of water required for placement and hydration. D. Heavy Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from steel shapes selected for the loads required; weld steel in accordance with AWS standards. E. Shop Painting and Plating 1. Provide shop coat of red lead or zinc primer paint on all hangers, supports, rods, metal framing, steel plates, shapes and bars furnished under this Section, unless cadmium plated, copper plated or galvanized. 2. Provide electroplated copper hangers, rods, supports and accessories for use with copper pipe or copper tubing. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPE HANGERS AND PIPE SUPPORTS A. General 1. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure; comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. 2. Use copper plated or PVC coated hangers and supports for the support of copper pipe and tubing as a means of preventing electrolysis. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 230529-5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT QPK NO. 220157.00 230529-5 B. Horizontal Piping 1. Support groupings of parallel runs of horizontal piping together on field-fabricated heavyduty trapeze hangers where possible. 2. Comply with hanger spacing schedule as shown on the Contract Drawings and MSS SP-69 for maximum spacing between hangers and supports. 3. Where piping of various sizes is supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe as specified above for individual pipe hangers. 4. Do not use wire or perforated metal straps to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping or ductwork. 5. Install a hanger or support close to the point of change of direction of all pipe runs in either a horizontal or vertical plane. 6. Install additional hangers or supports, spaced as required and directed, to support concentrated loads such as in-line pumps, valves, fittings, equipment or other accessories. 7. Install a minimum of one hanger, and additional hangers if required by the hanger spacing schedules, in branch piping runs and runouts over 5 feet in length. 8. Support all insulated service piping by means of hangers or supports with high density insulation inserts and insulation protection shields installed outside of the insulation. C. Hanger Rods 1. Comply with MSS SP-69 for application and sizing of hanger rods. 2. Secure hanger rods with four nuts, two at upper attachment, and two at hanger; tighten against each other to lock hanger in place. D. Vertical Piping 1. Support vertical risers of piping systems with heavy duty hangers installed close to base of risers and riser clamps with extension arms at intermediate floors. 2. Install riser clamps above floor slabs, with the extension arms resting on the slabs. 3. Make adequate provision for risers that are subject to appreciable expansion or contraction. 4. Install intermediate supports between riser clamps on maximum 6 ft. centers for copper tubing risers 1-1/4" in size and smaller. 3.2 UPPER HANGER ATTACHMENTS A. General 1. In all cases, secure upper hanger attachments to overhead structural steel or steel bar joists wherever possible. 2. Do not attach hangers to steel decks which are not to receive concrete fill. 3. Do not attach hangers to precast concrete plank decks except as indicated below or recommended by the manufacturer. 4. Do not use flat bars or bent rods as upper hanger attachments. B. Attachment to Steel Frame Construction 1. Secure upper hanger attachments to structural steel or bar joists. 2. Secure upper hanger attachments to steel bar joists only at panel points of joists. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 230529-6 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT QPK NO. 220157.00 230529-6 3. Do not drill holes in main structural steel members. 4. Provide intermediate structural steel members where required by pipe support spacing. 5. Select steel members used for intermediate supports based on a minimum safety factor of five. 6. Do not use drive-on beam clamps. 7. C-clamp types of upper hanger attachments with restraining straps may be used for piping systems up to 3" in size, with average system temperatures not less than 50F nor more than 200F. 8. Do not support piping over 4" in size from steel bar joists. C. Attachment to Concrete Filled Steel Decks 1. Do not attach hangers to decks less than 2-1/2" thick. 2. Where necessary, attach hangers to the deck with welding studs (except at roof decks), thrubolts with fish plates, or tee hangers. 3. Do not support a load in excess of 250 pounds from any single welded stud. 4. Do not support piping over 4" in size from thru-bolts with fish plates or tee hangers. D. Attachment to Existing Cast-in-Place Concrete 1. For piping up to a maximum of 4" in size, secure hangers to overhead construction with selfdrilling type expansion shields and machine bolts. 2. Secure hangers to wall or floor construction with single unit expansion shields or self-drilling type expansion shields and machine bolts. 3.3 INSULATION FILLER PIECES AND SHIELDS A. Insulation Filler Pieces 1. Install high density insulation filler pieces at all points of support of insulated piping except as otherwise specified. 2. Install filler pieces of the same thickness as adjoining pipe insulation, around the full circumference of the pipe, and at least 2" longer than the insulation shield as follows: a. Install high density molded polyurethane or high density cellular foam glass filler pieces, for pipe or tubing insulated with polyurethane or polystyrene. b. Install high density fibrous glass, high density molded urethane or high density cellular foam glass filler pieces for piping or tubing up to 2" in size insulated with fibrous glass. For pipe or tubing sizes over 2" in size use high density molded polyurethane or high density polystyrene foam. B. Pipe Insulation Shields 1. Install a pipe insulation shield at all points of support between hanger and insulation installed on pipe or tubing. 2. Center shields on all hangers and supports and install in such a manner so as not to cut, puncture or press into the insulation, or in any manner be detrimental to the vapor barrier. C. In lieu of providing individual filler pieces and shields, the Contractor may use combination clevis hanger, pipe insulation shield and vapor barrier jacketed high density insulating saddle at points of support. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 230529-7 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT QPK NO. 220157.00 230529-7 3.4 PIPE COVERING PROTECTION SADDLES A. Install pipe covering protection saddles at all points of support of hot service steel piping 6" in size and larger. B. Weld saddles to piping to insure movement with pipe. END OF SECTION 230529 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 230553 - 1 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING, DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT QPK NO. 220157.00 230553 - 1 SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING, DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. The extent of the HVAC system identification shall include the labeling and identification of all HVAC systems including supply, return and exhaust duct systems, piping systems and all HVAC equipment. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acceptable Manufacturers - Valve and pipe system identification tags, labels and charts, Seton Name Plate Corporation, Indianapolis Badge and Nameplate Company, National Badge and Tag Company or approved equal. B. Source Quality Control - Paint shall be the product of well known manufacturers. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Paint: Semi-gloss enamel, unless otherwise directed. B. Provide pre-printed, color coded, adhesive backed vinyl labels for ductwork identification and flow arrows. Pre-printed letters shall be at least 1" tall and contrasted in color with label background. Use generic ductwork system name(s) as indicated on Contract Drawings. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Complete all testing, insulation and finish painting work required by the Contract Documents, prior to the application of identification information and flow arrows on piping. 3.2 AIR SYSTEMS IDENTIFICATION A. General 1. Provide stencil painted identification on ductwork and housings of the air handling system, with lettering size sufficient for reading but not less than 1", and including arrows to show direction of flow. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 230553 - 2 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING, DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT QPK NO. 220157.00 230553 - 2 2. Indicate service and system number at housings and at primary duct connections and branches. 3. On access doors, indicate service and equipment being accessed. 4. Space identification at 25' intervals along exposed ducts. Where ducts are concealed behind access doors or removable ceilings, identification may be by plasticized tags in lieu of stencil painted markers. 3.3 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Signs 1. Provide engraved plastic laminate signs at locations of major equipment units, primary control devices, emergency equipment, dangerous elements of the HVAC work and similar places. 2. Provide text of sufficient clarity and lettering, of sufficient size to convey adequate information at each location and mount permanently in an appropriate and effective location. 3. Comply with recognized industry standards for color and design. B. Operational Tags 1. Where needed for proper and adequate information on operation and maintenance of HVAC systems, provide tags of plasticized card stock, either preprinted or hand printed to convey the message; example: “DO NOT CLOSE THIS VALVE EXCEPT WHEN BURNER IS OFF.” END OF SECTION 230553 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 230593-1 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC QPK NO. 220157.00 230593 - 1 SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements (if any), apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of test-adjust-balance work is indicated by the requirements of this Section, and also by Contract Drawings and Schedules, and is defined to include, but is not necessarily limited to, air distribution systems, associated equipment and apparatus of HVAC work. The work consists of setting speed and volume (flow) adjusting facilities provided for the systems, recording data, conducting tests, preparing and submitting reports and recommending modifications to the work as required by the Contract Documents. B. The component types of testing, adjusting and balancing specified in this Section include the following as applied to HVAC equipment: 1. Ductwork Systems 2. Exhaust Fans 3. Registers and Grilles 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: A firm certified by the National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) in those testing and balancing disciplines similar to those required for this Project, who is not Installer of system to be tested and is otherwise independent of the Project. B. NEBB Compliance: Comply with NEBB’s “Procedural Standards for Testing-AdjustingBalancing of Environmental Systems” as applicable to HVAC, air and hydronic distribution systems and associated equipment and apparatus. C. Industry Standards: Comply with ASHRAE (American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Incorporated) recommendations pertaining to measurements, instruments and testing, adjusting and balancing, except as otherwise indicated. D. NEBB Certification: Employ technicians who have successfully completed the NEBB certification program. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit certified test report signed by the Test and Balance Supervisor who performed the TAB work. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 230593-2 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC QPK NO. 220157.00 230593 - 2 B. Include identification and types of instruments used and their most recent calibration date with submission of final test report. C. List of Submittals 1. Outline indicating anticipated method of balancing for each component including instrument to be used. (This shall be submitted prior to any balancing work.) 2. List of Instruments Used and Calibration Date 3. Certified Test Report 4. NEBB certification for each technician assigned to this Project. 1.5 JOB CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with testing, adjusting and balancing work until method outline has been approved by Engineer and the installation work has been completed and is operable. Insure that there is no latent residual work still to be completed. B. Do not proceed until the work scheduled for Test-Adjust-Balancing is clean and free from debris, dirt and discarded building materials. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PATCHING MATERIALS A. Except as otherwise indicated, use same products as used by original Installer for patching holes in insulation, ductwork and housing which have been cut or drilled for test purposes, including access for test instruments, attaching jigs and similar purposes. B. At Tester’s option, plastic plugs with retainers may be used to patch drilled holes in ductwork and housings. 2.2 TEST INSTRUMENTS A. Utilize test instruments and equipment for the TAB work required, of the type, precision and capacity as recommended in the following TAB standards: 1. NEBB’s Procedural Standards for Testing-Adjusting-Balancing of Environmental Systems. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 TESTING A. Tester must examine the installed work and conditions under which testing is to be done to insure that work has been completed, cleaned and is operable. Notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper completion of the test-adjust-balance work. Do not proceed with the TAB work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Tester. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 230593-3 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC QPK NO. 220157.00 230593 - 3 B. Test, adjust and balance the environmental systems and components, as indicated, in accordance with the procedures outlined in the applicable standards. C. Test, adjust and balance system during the summer for air conditioning systems and during winter for heating systems, including at least a period of operation at outside conditions within 5°F wet bulb temperature of maximum summer design condition, and within 10°F dry bulb temperature of minimum winter design condition. When seasonal operation does not permit measuring the final temperatures, then take the final temperature readings when the seasonal operation does permit. D. Prepare report of test results, including instrumentation calibration reports, in format recommended by the applicable standards. E. Patch holes in insulation, ductwork and housings, which have been cut or drilled for test purposes, in a manner recommended by the original Installer. F. Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions, valve indicators, fan speed control levers and similar controls and devices, to show final settings at completion of TAB work. Provide markings with paint or other suitable permanent identification materials. 3.2 CONFIRMATION OF BALANCING A. The Engineer shall, at his option, be present at the time balancing is being performed. B. When there is a substantial deviation from the flows indicated on the Contract Documents the Contractor shall make all the necessary adjustments required to comply with design flows to the satisfaction of the Engineer. END OF SECTION 230593 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 230700-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HVAC INSULATION QPK NO. 220157.00 230700-1 SECTION 23 07 00 - HVAC INSULATION PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide insulation, jackets, coatings, adhesives and accessories for insulation of HVAC systems which comply with applicable sections of the following: 1. ASTM C195 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement. 2. ASTM C449 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement. 3. ASTM C547 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation. 4. ASTM 552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation. 5. ASTM C553 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt Insulation (Industrial Type). 6. ASTM C612 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation. 7. ASTM C921 - Specification for Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation. 8. ASTM C1136 - Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation. 9. ASTM C1290 - Standard Specification for Flexible Fibrous Glass Blanket Insulation Used to Externally Insulate HVAC Ducts. 10. ASTM D579 - Specification for Greige Woven Glass Fabrics. 11. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. (NFPA 255, UL-723 also apply.) a. Insulation Inside Building: Flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less. b. Insulation Outside Building: Flame spread rating of 75 or less and a smoke developed rating of 150 or less. c. Listed standards above apply to insulation assembly, including insulation, facings, cements and adhesives. Label insulation with appropriate markings of the testing laboratory. 12. NFPA 90A - Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 13. NFPA 90B - Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems. 14. NFPA 220 - Standard on Types of Building Construction. B. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Provide insulation products as applicable to the installation from one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Incorporated b. CertainTeed Corporation c. The Carborundum Company, Fibers Division d. Insulation Materials Corporation of America e. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH f. Manville g. Pittsburgh-Corning: Foamglas h. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation, Mechanical Division i. Approved equal ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 230700-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HVAC INSULATION QPK NO. 220157.00 230700-2 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Insulation 2. Jackets 3. Cements, Adhesives, Coatings 4. Accessories 5. Installation Instructions B. Certificates 1. Material certificates, when allowed in other sections, in lieu of laboratory test and label. a. Provide certifications from the manufacturer to show compliance with these specifications and governing regulations. b. Include proof of compliance for test of products for fire rating, corrosiveness and compressive strength. C. Schedule 1. Submit a schedule indicating thermal insulation applications, including the service and corresponding insulation and installation method to be used. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS FIBER A. Material: Inorganic glass fibers, bonded with a thermosetting resin. B. Jacket: All-purpose, factory-applied, laminated glass-fiber-reinforced, flame retardant kraft paper and aluminum foil with self-sealing lap. C. Board: ASTM C612, Class 2, semi-rigid jacketed board. 1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.26 average maximum at 75F mean temperature. 2. Density: 3 pcf average minimum. 3. Thickness: Minimum 1.5" thick, R = 5.76. D. Blanket: ASTM C553, Type II, Class F-1, jacketed flexible blankets. 1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.32 average maximum at 75F mean temperature. 2. Density: 3/4 pcf average minimum. 3. Thickness: Minimum 2" thick, R = 6.25. E. Preformed Pipe Insulation: ASTM C547, Class 1, rigid pipe insulation, jacketed. 1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.26 average maximum at 75F mean temperature. 2. Density: 3 pcf average minimum. 3. Thickness: Minimum 1.5" thick, R = 5.77. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 230700-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HVAC INSULATION QPK NO. 220157.00 230700-3 F. Adhesive: Produced under the UL Classification and Follow-up service. 1. Type: Non-flammable, solvent based. 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to 180F. G. Vapor Barrier Coating: Waterproof coating as recommended by insulation manufacturer. 2.2 CELLULAR GLASS A. ASTM C552, Type II - pipe and tubing insulation. Class 2 - Jacketed. 1. K-factor = 0.29 @ 75°F. 2.3 GLASS FIBER – DUCT LINER A. ASTM C1071 Thermal and Acoustical Insulation – Type II. B. Adhesive: Waterproof, ASTM E162, fire retardant type. C. Liner Fasteners: Welded, galvanized steel with integral press-on head. D. Lining shall be 1-1/2 pounds per cubic foot density and be constructed of long fibers, firmly bonded together with a thermosetting resin. The air stream side shall have a strong, smooth mat, integrally laminated to the insulation. Finished surface shall endure scuffing and abrasion from the mechanical fasteners, shop tools and normal handling. Coefficient of friction not over .022” w.g./100 feet. 1. Lining shall meet UL No. 181. NFPA 90A, and shall have a flame spread classification of not more than 25 and a smoke developed rating of 50 maximum. 2. Make: Johns-Manville “linacoustic” or approved equal. 2.4 JACKETS FOR FIELD APPLICATION A. General: ASTM C921, Type 1, except as otherwise indicated. B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant kraft paper and aluminum foil. 1. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.02 perm maximum, when tested according to ASTM E96. 2. Puncture Resistance: 50 beach units minimum, when tested according to ASTM D781. C. PVC Jacketing: High impact, ultra-violet-resistant PVC, 20 mils thick, roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming to indicated sizes. 1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer. D. PVC Fitting Covers: Factory-fabricated fitting covers manufactured from 20 mil thick, highimpact, ultra-violet-resistant PVC. 1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 230700-4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HVAC INSULATION QPK NO. 220157.00 230700-4 2.5 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Woven glass fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 ounces per square yard. 1. Tape Width: 4 inches. 2. Cloth Standard: MIL-C-20079H, Type I. 3. Tape Standard: MIL-C-20079H, Type II. B. Bands: 3/4-inch width, compatible with jacket material. 1. Stainless Steel: Type 304, 0.020 inch thick. 2. Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch thick. 3. Aluminum: 0.007 inch thick. 4. Brass: 0.01 inch thick. 5. Nickel-Copper Alloy: 0.005 inch thick. C. Wire 1. Nickel-Copper Alloy: 14 gauge. 2. Stainless Steel: 16 gauge, soft annealed. 3. Galvanized Steel: 16 gauge, soft annealed. 2.6 SEALING COMPOUNDS A. Vapor Barrier Compound: Water-based, fire resistive composition. 1. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.08 perm maximum. 2. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to 180F. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Examine areas and conditions under which insulation is to be installed and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. B. Surface Preparation: Clean, dry and remove foreign materials such as rust, scale and dirt from all surfaces to be insulated. C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water. Follow cement manufacturer’s printed instructions for mixing and portions. 3.2 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to the technical sections of this Specification for materials, thickness, forms, jackets and accessories for thermal insulation requirements of each HVAC system. B. Select accessories compatible with materials suitable for the service. Select accessories that do not corrode, soften or otherwise attack the insulation or jacket in either the wet or dry state. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 230700-5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HVAC INSULATION QPK NO. 220157.00 230700-5 C. Install vapor barriers on insulated pipes, ducts and equipment having service operating temperatures below 60F. Seal joints and seams to maintain vapor barrier. D. Apply insulation material, accessories and finishes according to manufacturer’s printed instructions. Install insulation and jackets with smooth, straight and even surfaces. E. Seal penetrations for hangers, supports, anchors and other projections in insulation requiring a vapor barrier. Seal ends of insulation with lagging adhesive. F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. 3.3 PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. General 1. Tightly butt longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond with adhesive. 2. Apply insulation continuously over fittings, valves and specialties, except as otherwise indicated. 3. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows: a. Pull jacket tight and smooth. b. Cover circumferential joints with butt strips, at least 3 inches wide, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of butt strip and space 4 inches on center. c. Overlap longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches on center. 1) Exception: Do not staple longitudinal laps on insulation applied to piping with surface temperature at or below 35F. d. Where vapor barriers are specified, apply on seams and joints, over staples and at ends butt to flanges, unions, valves and fittings. e. At penetrations in jackets for thermometers, pressure gauges and other control sensors or devices, fill and seal voids with vapor barrier coating. f. Repair damaged insulation jackets, by applying jacket material around damaged jacket. Adhere, staple and seal. Extend patch at least 2 inches in both directions beyond damaged insulation jacket and around the entire circumference of the pipe. 4. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Unless shown otherwise, apply insulation continuously through wall and partitions, except fire-rated walls and partitions. Pack annular space between insulation jacket and penetration with batt insulation. Provide closure collar. 5. Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at penetrations through firerated walls and partitions. Seal insulation ends with vapor barrier coating. Seal around penetration with fire-stopping or fire-resistant joint sealer. 6. Floor Penetrations: Terminate insulation underside of floor assembly and at floor support at top of floor. Seal insulation ends with vapor barrier coating. Seal around penetration with fire-stopping or fire-resistant joint sealer. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 230700-6 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HVAC INSULATION QPK NO. 220157.00 230700-6 7. Flanges, Fittings and Valves: Coat pipe insulation ends with vapor barrier coating. Apply premolded, precut or field-fabricated segments of insulation around flanges, unions, valves and fittings. Make joints tight. Bond with adhesive. a. Use same material and thickness as adjacent pipe insulation. b. Overlap nesting insulation by 2 inches or 1-pipe diameter, whichever is greater. c. Apply materials with adhesive, fill voids with mineral fiber insulating cement. Secure with wire or tape. d. Insulate elbows and tees smaller than 3 inches pipe size with premolded insulation. e. Insulate elbows and tees 3 inches and larger with premolded insulation or insulation material segments. Use at least 3 segments for each elbow. f. Cover insulation, except for metal jacketed insulation, with PVC fitting covers and seal circumferential joints with butt strips. 8. Hangers and Anchors: Apply insulation continuously through hangers. B. Glass Fiber Pipe Insulation 1. Bond insulation to pipe with lagging adhesive. 2. Seal exposed ends with lagging adhesive. 3. Seal seams and joints with vapor barrier compound. C. For systems conveying fluids below ambient air temperature: Insulate entire piping system, including piping, fittings, valves, flanges, unions, strainers, flexible connectors, etc. For exterior locations: Provide vapor retarder jacket. Insulate entire system and provide coating of mesh reinforced vapor retarder cement. Cover with aluminum jacketing with seams oriented to prevent the intrusion of water into the insulation system. D. Equipment located within mechanical equipment rooms or finished spaces: Finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers. E. Do not cover nameplates or ASME stamps. F. Allow for easy removal and replacement of insulation when insulating equipment requiring access for maintenance. 3.4 DUCT INSULATION A. Install block and board insulation as follows: 1. Adhesive and Band Attachment: Secure block and board insulation tight and smooth with at least 50 percent coverage of adhesive. Install bands spaced 12 inches apart. Protect insulation under bands and at exterior corners with metal corner angles. Fill joints, seams and chipped edges with vapor barrier compound. 2. Speed Washers Attachment: Secure insulation tight and smooth with speed washers and welded pins. Space anchor pins 18 inches apart each way and 3 inches from edges on insulation joints. Apply vapor barrier coating compound to insulation in contact with pins, open joints, breaks, punctures and voids in insulation. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 230700-7 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HVAC INSULATION QPK NO. 220157.00 230700-7 B. Install Blanket Insulation as follows: 1. Install tight and smooth. 2. Stagger joints on double layered insulation. 3. Secure to ducts having long sides or diameters smaller than 24 inches with bonding adhesive applied in 6-inch-wide transverse strips on 12-inch centers. 4. Secure to ducts having long sides or diameters 24 inches or larger with anchor pins spaced 12 inches apart each way. Apply bonding adhesive to prevent sagging of the insulation. 5. Overlap joints 3 inches. 6. Seal joints, breaks and punctures with vapor barrier compound. 3.5 DUCT INSULATION JACKETS A. Foil and Paper Jackets: Install jackets drawn tight. Install lap or butt strips at joints with material same as jacket. Secure with adhesive. Install jackets with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal joints and 3-inch wide butt strips at end joints. 1. Seal openings, puncture and breaks in vapor barrier jackets and exposed insulation with vapor barrier compound. B. Install continuous glass cloth jackets on interior exposed insulation, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install glass cloth directly over insulation. 2. On insulation with a factory applied jacket, install the glass cloth jacket over the factory applied jacket. 3. Install jacket drawn smooth and tight with a 2-inch overlap at joints. 4. Embed glass cloth between two 1/16-inch-thick coats of lagging adhesive. 5. Completely encapsulate the insulation with the jacket, leaving no exposed raw insulation. 3.6 DUCT LINER A. Provide 100% adhesive coverage for securing liner to duct. B. Comply with SMACNA standards for spacing of mechanical liner fasteners. C. Seal and smooth joints. Seal and coat all joints and seams. D. Seal liner penetrations with adhesive. E. Duct dimensions, shown on the Contract Drawings, are clear inside dimensions following liner installation. Increase duct size to allow for thickness of duct liner. F. Provide leading edge protection on liner to prevent air velocity erosion of liner. 3.7 THICKNESSES A. Heating System Piping 1. Application Requirements ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 230700-8 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HVAC INSULATION QPK NO. 220157.00 230700-8 a. Insulate piping, fittings, valves and accessories, except where indicated as “uninsulated,” including (but not necessarily limited to) the following: 1) Heating Water Supply and Return 2) Makeup Water and Expansion Tank Connections 3) Refrigerant Piping 4) Cooling Coil Condensate Drain Lines 2. Insulation Types and Thicknesses a. Insulate main piping runs, branches and crossovers of each piping system as follows, except as specifically noted otherwise on the Contract Drawings. 1) Refrigerant Piping a) Flexible Elastomeric Insulation i) 1-1/2" thick for refrigerant suction, liquid and hot gas bypass piping located inside building. ii) 1-1/2" thick for refrigerant suction, liquid and hot gas bypass piping located outside of building. Provide weatherproof coating per insulation manufacturer's recommendations. 2) Cooling Coil Condensate Drain Lines a) Preformed fiberglass with vapor barrier and all-service jacket. i) 1" thick for all sizes. 3) Runout Piping a) Insulate runout piping (small size branch piping less than 1" inside and less than 4 feet long and connected directly to terminal units) with one of the following types and minimum thicknesses of insulation, except as otherwise indicated on the Contract Drawings. i) Preformed Fiberglass with All-Service Jacket (a) 1" thick b) Insulate fittings, valves and accessories with fiberglass inserts and PVC covers to match thickness of adjacent insulation. B. Ductwork Insulation 1. General a. Install insulation products to ensure that the insulation serves its intended purpose, in compliance with: 1) SMACNA Standards 2) Section 23 07 00 - HVAC Insulation 3) Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions b. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. c. Clean and dry ductwork prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered. d. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier on ductwork insulation, and protect it to prevent puncture and other damage. e. Extend ductwork insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar ductwork penetrations, except where otherwise indicated. f. Corner Angles 1) Install corner angles on external corners of insulation on ductwork in exposed finished spaces before covering with jacketing. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 230700-9 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HVAC INSULATION QPK NO. 220157.00 230700-9 2. Exposed Supply Air Ductwork a. Insulate and vapor seal all exposed supply air ductwork. 1) Insulation: Rigid fiberglass; 2" thick, increase thickness to 2" in machine, fan and equipment rooms. 2) Secure insulation to ductwork, with duct insulation fasteners spaced 3" from all corners, with intermediate fasteners on maximum 16" centers in all directions. Butt all edges of insulation and fill all voids with similar insulation. 3) Seal longitudinal jacket laps continuously with vapor barrier lap adhesive. Lap circumferential joints with 4" wide jacket material and seal laps continuously with vapor barrier lap adhesive. 4) Install metal corner angles over the jacketed insulated corners. 5) Seal exposed ends of insulation with vapor barrier mastic. 6) Field apply an extra jacket layer over the vapor barrier jacketed insulation. Smoothly paste the jacket over the entire insulated ductwork surface with lagging adhesive, with 2" lap on all seams. Apply a heavy coat of lagging adhesive to the entire exterior surface. 7) Unless stated otherwise, the finished exterior surface shall be white. 3. Concealed Supply Ductwork Insulation a. Insulate and vapor seal all concealed supply air ductwork. 1) Flexible fiberglass; 2" thick, application limited to concealed locations. 2) Secure insulation to ductwork surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions with either adhesive or mechanical fasteners. 3) Secure longitudinal and circumferential joints with outwardly clinching staples. When the bottom dimension of duct is in excess of 32 inches, install mechanical duct fasteners. Install mechanical duct fasteners on the sides of ducts having a dimension over 24 inches in size. Where manufacturer recommends, install 16 gauge wire loops around insulation and duct at the intervals recommended. 4) Seal all longitudinal and butt joints in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Tape all joints. 5) Insulate ducts prior to erection when ducts are required to be installed close to walls, ceilings, equipment, etc., which would not allow installation of insulation after duct is installed. 4. Return Air Ductwork (including Return/Exhaust Systems) a. For return air ductwork located in mechanical equipment rooms and unconditioned interior spaces: 1) For return air ductwork located in mechanical rooms, provide the same insulation system as required for exposed supply air ductwork. 2) For return air ductwork located in unheated spaces, provide the same insulation system as required for concealed supply air ductwork. b. For return air ductwork located within the conditioned space, including above suspended ceilings, within soffits and duct chases: 1) Do not insulate return air ductwork in these locations, unless specifically noted on the Contract Drawings. 5. Exhaust Air Ductwork a. For ductwork used exclusively for exhaust air (not return/exhaust systems): ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 230700-10 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HVAC INSULATION QPK NO. 220157.00 230700-10 1) Do not insulate exhaust air ductwork unless specifically noted on the Contract Drawings. 6. Outside Air Intake Ductwork a. For outside air intake ductwork located inside the building: 1) Provide the same insulation system as required for exposed supply air ductwork. END OF SECTION 230700 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 232300-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION REFRIGERANT PIPING QPK NO. 220157.00 232300-1 SECTION 23 23 00 - REFRIGERANT PIPING PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. The work to be performed shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Refrigerant Piping and Tubing 2. Pipe Fittings 3. Pipe Hangers and Supports 4. The extent of the refrigerant piping system work is shown on the Contract Drawings. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping Materials 1. All piping products shall be identified with markings in conformance with applicable standards, including ANSI B9.1, ANSI/SAE J513F and ANSI B16.22. B. Brazing 1. Certify brazing procedures, brazers and operators in accordance with ANSI B31.5, Paragraph 527.5 for Shop and Job Site Brazing of Piping Work. C. Technicians performing refrigerant work shall, at a minimum, have earned an EPA Type 1 Certification. D. All refrigerant work must be performed in compliance with the Clean Air Act - Section 608 as administered by the EPA. E. Each refrigerant technician, upon arriving on the Project Site, shall furnish the Construction Manager's field representative with a photocopy of his/her EPA certification (Type I, II or III Certificate). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit a schedule listing manufacturer’s name, type or kind of pipe, fitting, hangers and material, weight and finish. B. Shop Drawings 1. Layouts of piping systems on the Contract Drawings are required to be submitted for approval. Drawings shall show clearances required by other trades. Distribute complete shop drawings to all related trades and coordinate these shop drawings with such trades prior to the installation of the piping system. 2. Submit the following: a. Type and schedule of piping and type of joints. b. Method of attachment of pipe hangers to the building construction. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 232300-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION REFRIGERANT PIPING QPK NO. 220157.00 232300-2 c. Layout drawings of mechanical equipment rooms showing all related equipment and equipment clearances required by other trades. d. Layout drawings in all areas in which it may be necessary to deviate from layout shown on the Contract Drawings. Show relocation of piping. C. List of Submittals 1. Piping Shop Drawings 2. Pipe Hangers and Supports PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND TUBING A. Copper Pipe and Copper Tubing 1. Refrigerant Grade (ACR): Hard temper as specified, ASTM B88. 2.2 PIPE FITTINGS A. General: Pipe fittings shall be same material and pressure class as adjoining pipe, unless otherwise noted. B. Copper Pipe and Tube Fittings (Solder Connections) 1. Piping or Tubing: Hard temper, ASTM B88; Type ACR. 2. Tees, Elbows, and Reducers: Wrought copper or cast bronze, sweat end connections, ASTM B-62, ANSI B16.22. 2.3 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Pipe Hangers and Supports 1. Refer to Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 REFRIGERANT PIPING A. Refrigerant suction, liquid and hot gas by-pass piping shall be refrigerant grade Type L (ACR) copper tubing, hard temper deoxidized, dehydrated and sealed. B. Fittings, Valves and Accessories 1. 45 flared tubing fittings ANSI B70.1. 2. Fittings shall be refrigerant grade wrought copper, ANSI B16.22. Use 95-5 silver solder and follow manufacturer’s recommendations written procedures for joints. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 232300-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION REFRIGERANT PIPING QPK NO. 220157.00 232300-3 C. Provide suitable factory made pipe hangers and supports. Use job fabricated supports only as approved, using “Unistrut” as much as possible. Hangers and supports exposed to weather shall be galvanized. D. Piping shall be installed and arranged per requirements and recommendations of air conditioning equipment manufacturer. E. Use only factory made suction traps. F. Anchor piping to prevent vibration, wearing and sway. G. Allow for expansion. H. Provide for sufficient flexibility at compressor connections as recommended by manufacturer. I. Short radius elbows are not permitted. J. Piping and system shall meet the requirements of Mechanical Refrigeration Safety Code, ANSI B9.1. K. Test all refrigerant piping with dry nitrogen 150 psi “low” side and 300 psi “high” side. System shall hold this charge with no pressure drop for 24 hours. Repair all leaks by remaking joints; then retest. L. Clean piping, then pump-down and evacuate all systems with high grade vacuum pump. Unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer, evacuate system to 2.5 Hg, break vacuum with dry nitrogen and re-evacuate to 2.5 Hg and hold for 4 hours; then charge system. M. Charge with refrigerant as recommended by manufacturer. 3.2 REFRIGERANT (FIELD INSTALLED DX PIPING) A. After erection, charge system with dry nitrogen as follows: 1. 300 psi for other refrigerants. B. System shall hold this charge with no pressure drop for 24 hours; then leak test piping as specified previously. C. All Tests: No change in pressure under stable temperature conditions, unless otherwise specified. END OF SECTION 232300 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 233113- 1 HVAC DUCTS QPK NO. 220157.00 233113 - 1 SECTION 233113 - HVAC DUCTS PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. SMACNA Manual 1. Gauges of materials, fabrication, installation and methods of supporting ductwork shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the SMACNA HVAC DUCT CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS, unless otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings or specified herein. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Layouts of duct systems shown on the Contract Drawings are required to be submitted for approval. Drawings shall show clearances required by other trades. Distribute complete shop drawings to all related trades and coordinate these shop drawings with such trades prior to sheet metal fabrication. 2. Submit the following: a. Gauge of ductwork, type of joints and duct reinforcing for each size range, including sketches or SMACNA plates for joints, method fabrication and reinforcing. b. Method of attachment of duct hangers to building construction. c. Layout drawings of mechanical equipment rooms showing all related equipment and equipment clearances required by other trades. d. Layout drawings of all areas in which it is necessary to deviate from layout shown on the Contract Drawings. Minor transitions in ductwork, required to avoid local interference with other trades, are allowable, as long as the cross sectional duct area is maintained, subject to approval by the Engineer. Show relocation of ductwork and changes in size of duct. Coordinate shop drawings with all trades prior to ductwork fabrication. B. List of Submittals 1. Sheet Metal Specifications and SMACNA Plates for each application. 2. Layout Drawings PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCTWORK MATERIALS A. Sheet Metal 1. Galvanized Steel: G-90 ASTM A653 and A924 Lock Forming Quality, gauges in accordance with current SMACNA standards Commercial Coating Class - 1.25 ounce per square foot. B. Galvanized Round Spiral or Flat Oval Duct - Single Wall 1. Duct shall be round or oval spiral lockseam construction. 2. Duct gauge shall be in accordance with SMACNA standards. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 233113- 2 HVAC DUCTS QPK NO. 220157.00 233113 - 2 3. Flat oval duct shall be reinforced based on its flat span dimension and maximum operating pressure. Reinforcement shall be in accordance with SMACNA HVAC duct construction standards. 4. Provide duct in continuous, unjoined lengths wherever possible. 5. Refer to the Contract Drawings for application of round and oval single wall ductwork. C. Galvanized Elbows - Single Wall Round or Flat Oval 1. Fittings shall be of the same manufacturer as the duct and shall be constructed in the same gauges as the duct. 2. Fittings shall have standing seam or spot welded and sealed joints. 3. Provide protective coating on the outside surface of all welded joints. 4. Elbows shall be die-stamped, gored, pleated or mitered construction. 5. Elbow bend radius shall be 1.5 times the elbow diameter, long radius. 6. Elbows 12" and less shall be minimum 22 gauge. Elbows larger than 12" shall match connecting ductwork gauge. 7. Mitered elbows shall be used only where space restrictions prevent use of long radius fittings and shall be equipped with turning vanes. D. Takeoffs and Branch Fittings 1. All fittings shall be factory fabricated fittings or duct-tap assemblies. Fittings shall be of the same manufacturer as ductwork. E. Duct Hangers 1. Duct hangers shall be as manufactured by the duct system manufacturer. 2. Duct hanger construction and attachment shall comply with SMACNA standards. F. The type of duct to be provided is indicated on the Contract Drawings. G. Perform fabrication, installation and methods of supporting ductwork in accordance with the latest edition of the SMACNA HVAC DUCT CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS. H. Duct Hangers 1. Band Hangers: Galvanized Sheet Metal 2. Rod Type Hangers a. Mild low carbon steel, unless otherwise specified; fully threaded or threaded each end, with two removable nuts each end for positioning and locking rod in place. Unless galvanized or cadmium plated, provide a shop coat of red lead or zinc chromate primer paint. I. Miscellaneous Fasteners and Upper Hanger Attachments 1. Sheet Metal Screws: Galvanized steel 2. Machine Bolts and Nuts: Galvanized or cadmium plated steel ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 233113- 3 HVAC DUCTS QPK NO. 220157.00 233113 - 3 2.2 PREFABRICATED INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCT A. Flexible metal duct shall be bendable, self-supporting and mechanically interlocked to be totally leakproof under operating conditions without manufacturing use of adhesives. Flex-duct sections shall consist of a flexible vinyl duct liner, fiberglass insulation and a vinyl film vapor barrier jacket, all combined to form an integral unit. B. Flexible ductwork shall be factory fabricated complying with NFPA No. 90A and UL 181. 2.3 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Factory pre-fabricated pre-assembled flexible fabric connectors with minimum #24 USS gauge metal edges: 1. Heavy glass fabric coated with neoprene weighing a minimum of 30 ounces per square yard. 2.4 GASKET MATERIAL A. For use with registers, grilles and diffusers installed in exposed uninsulated ductwork: 1/4" thick felt or sponge rubber material, of width as required by the flange on the particular device. B. For use with flanged joints in ducts: 1/8" thick reinforced inert plastic of the self-conforming type, of width as required by the particular flange. 2.5 TURNING VANES A. Provide turning vanes, fabricated of the same material and gauge as the ductwork in which installed, unless otherwise indicated, with the following additional construction features. 1. Blades: 2" R. up to 36" ducts 2. Blades: 4" R. 36" and over ducts B. Turning vanes shall be constructed in accordance with SMACNA fabrication plates. 2.6 DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Provide access doors of the same manufacturer as the duct system. B. Minimum material thickness equal to 20 gauge. C. Access doors in double-wall duct shall be of double wall construction. D. Unless not possible due to duct size the minimum access door dimensions shall be 16" x 12". 2.7 ACCESSORIES A. All volume dampers, turning vanes, etc., shall be of the same manufacturer as the duct system. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 233113- 4 HVAC DUCTS QPK NO. 220157.00 233113 - 4 PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Seal all supply air, return air and exhaust air duct transverse joints and branch duct connections using mastic or mastic and tape as required to produce an essentially airtight duct system. B. Elbows shall be long radius type whenever possible, with a centerline radius not less than 1-1/2 times the width or diameter of the duct. Where space does not permit the use of long radius elbows, short radius or square elbows with factory fabricated turning vanes shall be used. C. Perform fabrication, installation and methods of supporting ductwork in accordance with the latest edition of the SMACNA HVAC DUCT CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS. D. Provide ductwork connected to air handling equipment, or air inlet and outlet devices, with all necessary transformation pieces, flexible fabric connections, as indicated or required. E. All ducts shall be constructed, assembled, supported and installed in accordance with the duct system manufacturer’s standards. F. Duct system proposed shall meet or exceed the construction and performance standards of United McGill Corporation. G. Maximum allowable leakage is 10 cfm/100 square feet of duct surface. H. The use of flexible ductwork shall be limited to the final connection of terminal devices and the length of a flexible duct runout shall not exceed twice the connecting duct diameter (i.e., 24" maximum length for a 12" diameter duct). I. The last elbow at terminal unit connection shall be a rigid elbow and not flexible ductwork. When terminal unit is directly beneath main ductwork and connection is straight with no offset the rigid elbow may be omitted. When the flexible duct is connected to an insulated distribution system it shall be provided with insulation equivalent to the primary system insulation. J. Provide ductwork connected to air handling equipment, or air inlet and outlet devices, with all necessary transformation pieces, flexible fabric connections, as indicated or required. 3.2 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Provide flexible duct connections where sheet metal connections are made to fans or where ducts or dissimilar metals are connected. For round ducts, the flexible material shall be secured by zinc coated, iron, or as appropriate, aluminum clinch type draw bands. For rectangular ducts, the flexible material locked to metal collars shall be installed using normal duct construction methods. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 233113- 5 HVAC DUCTS QPK NO. 220157.00 233113 - 5 B. Make ductwork connections to air handling equipment with flexible fabric connectors. Install connectors so as to have sufficient slack to prevent vibration transmission. C. For round duct connection, install fabric connectors a minimum of 3" in length for ducts having a maximum diameter of 18", and a minimum of 5" in length for duct diameters over 18" in size. D. Secure fabric connectors to fans, casings and ducts as follows: 1. Secure round connectors with #12 USS gauge x 1" wide galvanized steel draw bands. Secure bands with bolts and nuts. 2. Secure rectangular connectors with 1" x 1/8" thick flat galvanized steel bars, with screws or bolts on maximum 8" centers, or with approved sheet metal slip joints. Tightly crimp fabric into sheet metal joint and secure complete joint with sheet metal screws on maximum 6" centers. E. Fabric connectors may be factory pre-fabricated pre-assembled units, with minimum #24 USS gauge metal edges, secured to fabric with double lock seams. F. Do not paint or insulate fabric connectors. 3.3 CLOSURE COLLAR A. A closure collar of galvanized steel sheet metal not less than 4 inches wide shall be provided for ducts on each side of walls or floors where openings for the passage of ductwork are provided. Collar shall be installed tight against wall/floor surface. 3.4 TURNING VANES A. Provide turning vanes in all squared 90 degree duct elbows; construction and reinforcing as required by applicable SMACNA standards. 3.5 HANGERS FOR DUCTS A. Install hangers for ducts as specified in the SMACNA Manual. 3.6 UPPER HANGER ATTACHMENTS A. General 1. Do not use flat bars or bent rods as upper hanger attachments. a. Do not use powder driven pins or expansion nails. b Do not support a load, in excess of 250 lbs. from any single welded or powder driven stud. B. Attachment to Existing Cast-In-Place Concrete 1. Secure hangers to overhead construction with self-drilling type expansion shields and machine bolts. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 233113- 6 HVAC DUCTS QPK NO. 220157.00 233113 - 6 2. Secure hanger attachments required to be supported from wall or floor construction with single unit expansion shields or self-drilling type expansion shields and machine bolts. 3.7 DUCT RISER SUPPORTS A. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Contract Drawings, support vertical ducts by means of two steel angles, secured to duct and resting on floor slab. Size supports as follows: Max. Size Dimension Size of Steel Angle Secure to Duct With Min. Bearing Each End 36" 1" x 1" x 1/8" Screws 2" 48" 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8" Bolts 3" 60" 2" x 2" x 1/8" Bolts 3" Over 60" 2-1/2" x 2-1/2" x 3/16" Bolts 4" 3.8 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK INSULATION A. General 1. Install insulation products to ensure that the insulation serves its intended purpose, in compliance with: a. SMACNA Standards. b. Section 230700 - HVAC Insulation. c. Manufacturer’s installation instructions. 3.9 PAINTING A. Paint the exterior of all uninsulated ductwork exposed to view in the color(s) selected by the Architect. B. Clean and prime metal ductwork in accordance with paint manufacturer's recommendations. C. Provide two (2) coats, minimum, to the exterior surface of all ductwork exposed in occupied spaces. Additional coat(s) may be required if in the judgment of the Architect the resulting finish and coverage is unsatisfactory. D. Ductwork located in mechanical spaces does not require painting, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. END OF SECTION 233113 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 233313-1 HVAC DAMPERS AND ACCESSORIES QPK NO. 220157.00 233313 - 1 SECTION 233313 - HVAC DAMPERS AND ACCESSORIES PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. The extent of the HVAC damper work is as indicated by the Contract Drawings and Schedules and by the requirements of this Section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NFPA Code 1. Comply with NFPA No. 90A, “Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning with Ventilating Systems” pertaining to HVAC dampers. B. Industry Standards 1. Comply with SMACNA (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor’s National Association, Incorporated) recommendations for fabrication, construction and installation procedures as contained in applicable guides and manuals on HVAC dampers and low velocity and high pressure ductwork. 2. Comply with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, 1985 Edition, unless otherwise shown on the Contract Drawing or specified herein. 3. Design Basis: Ruskin Phillips Air Balance, Inc. Approved equal 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. List of Submittals 1. Volume Dampers 2. Duct Access Doors 3. Fire Dampers PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VOLUME DAMPERS A. Rectangular Duct Volume Dampers 1. Provide galvanized multi-blade volume damper (dampers less than 12 inches high shall have single blade) as follows: ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 233313-2 HVAC DAMPERS AND ACCESSORIES QPK NO. 220157.00 233313 - 2 a. Frame - 16 gauge galvanized steel channel b. Blade - 8" maximum width, 16 gauge opposed blade c. Linkage - Exposed or concealed d. Axles - 1/2" Hex. e. Bearings - Molded synthetic f. Control Shaft - 3/8" plated steel g. Finish - Mill galvanized h. Control Operator - Manual locking quadrant with position indicator 2. Design Basis: Ruskin Model MD-35 Acceptable Manufacturers: Ruskin Titus Arrow Johnson Approved equal B. Round Duct Volume Dampers 1. Provide galvanized single blade damper as follows: a. Blade - 14" maximum diameter, 16 gauge b. Axles - Mechanically fastened to blade c. Bearings - None required d. Control Operator - Manual locking quadrant with position indicator 2.2 DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Provide access doors a minimum of 12" x 12" in size, fabricated of the galvanized sheet metal, the same finish and gauge as the ductwork in which installed, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Uninsulated Ducts a. Provide folded edges on all four sides of door panels, lapping 1" over the outside surface of the duct, on each of the four edges of the duct opening. Provide each door with a minimum of two hinges and two casement fasteners. B. Provide all doors with a 3/4" wide sponge rubber or felt gasket, around all four sides of duct opening. 2.3 FIRE DAMPERS A. Construction: Galvanized steel, UL listed and labeled, 1-1/2 hour rating under UL Standard 555. B. Leakage Rating: No higher than Class II (15 cfm/sq ft @ 1" w.g.) at an elevated temperature category B (250F for 30 minutes) under UL 555S. UL leakage ratings shall apply to all sizes of dampers required and elevated temperature ratings shall apply to operators as well as dampers. C. Mounting Sleeve: Provide factory sleeves and mounting angles, minimum 14 gauge, required to provide installation equivalent to the damper manufacturer’s UL test installation. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 233313-3 HVAC DAMPERS AND ACCESSORIES QPK NO. 220157.00 233313 - 3 D. Damper Blades: Provide 100% free area curtain style damper with welded head for mini-mum pressure loss in an open position. Damper manufacturer shall submit certified test data taken in accordance with AMCA Standard 500 showing proposed damper to have pressure drops in the open position of less than 0.1 in. w.g. with average duct velocities of 2500 fpm. Refer to Fire Damper Details on Contract Drawings. E. Fusible Link: Provide fusible links, for each damper, which shall melt at 165F causing damper to close and lock in closed position. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Extra Fire Damper Fusible Links 1. As maintenance spare parts, furnish 5%, but a minimum of three (3), of each type and operating characteristic of fusible links used in Project. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Install HVAC damper products in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve the intended function. Comply with applicable portions of NFPA’s Installation Standard 90A. 2. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, as required to ensure installation results in properly functioning fire dampers. 3. Install fire dampers in compliance with detail(s) shown on the Contract Drawings and applicable codes. 3.2 VOLUME DAMPERS A. Manual volume dampers shall be provided where indicated and shall be operated by locking type quadrant operators. When installed in insulated ductwork, provide with standoff mounting brackets to provide clearance between the duct surface and operator not less than the thickness of the insulation. Standoff mounting items shall be integral with the operator or a standard accessory of the operator manufacturer. 3.3 DAMPER ACCESS DOORS A. Provide access doors at all HVAC damper locations to allow visible inspection and resetting or replacing fusible link devices. B. Access doors shall be provided in ductwork at all automatic dampers, fire dampers and other apparatus requiring service and inspection in the duct system, and, unless shown otherwise, shall conform to applicable SMACNA HVAC DUCT CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS. Doors shall be a minimum 15 by 18 inches, unless otherwise shown. Where duct size will not permit this size ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 233313-4 HVAC DAMPERS AND ACCESSORIES QPK NO. 220157.00 233313 - 4 door, the doors shall be as large as practical. Doors 24 by 24 inches or larger shall be provided with fasteners operable from both sides. Doors in insulated ducts shall be the insulated type. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test installed units for compliance with the requirements, including those of governing regulations. 3.5 PERSONNEL TRAINING A. HVAC Damper Maintenance Training 1. Train Owner’s personnel by demonstrating to them how to visually inspect and test damper operation and how to replace fire damper links. END OF SECTION 233313 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 233713-1 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES QPK NO. 220157.00 233713- 1 SECTION 233713 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. The extent of the grille work is as indicated on the Contract Drawings and Schedules and by the requirements of this Section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with National Fire Protection Standard No. 90, as applicable to construction and installation of required grilles. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer’s data on diffusers, grilles and registers, marked to show types and sizes to be provided. B. Arrange registers, grilles and diffusers submittal in schedule form identifying types, sizes, accessories, etc. Reference numbers/letters used on Contract Drawings shall be matched to each grille type submitted. C. List of Submittals 1. Grilles, Registers and Diffusers. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide diffusers, grilles and registers where shown; of the size, shape, capacity and type indicated in Schedules, constructed of materials and components as indicated in the Specifications and Schedule, as required for complete installation. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork and ductwork accessories, as necessary to interface installation of grilles properly with other work. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 233713-2 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES QPK NO. 220157.00 233713- 2 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install registers, grilles and diffusers in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and in accordance with recognized industry practices to insure that products serve the intended function. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Balance air flow for each register, grille and diffuser as specified. END OF SECTION 233713 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 237000-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION VRF SYSTEM WITH HEAT RECOVERY 237000-1 QPK NO. 220157.00 SECTION 23 70 00 - VRF SYSTEM WITH HEAT RECOVERY HEAT RECOVERY PART 1.0 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) HVAC system shall be a variable capacity, direct expansion (DX) heat recovery or heat pump engineered system. The outdoor unit shall consist of one or more cabinet(s) connected through common refrigerant piping. Each system shall have single or multiple, inverter compressor(s). Each system shall be connected to multiple indoor units (IDUs - ducted, non-ducted or combination thereof) through a common refrigerant piping and integrated system controls. Each indoor unit shall be controlled individually. Additionally heat recovery system shall be capable of simultaneous heating and cooling individual zone(s). 1.1 SIMULTANEOUS COOLING AND HEATING VRF SYSTEM (HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEM) A. VRF heat recovery system shall be an air cooled, system consisting of one to three outdoor unit(s) connected to Heat Recovery (HRU) unit(s) and indoor unit(s). Multi-port heat recovery units shall allow simultaneous heating and cooling of individual zone(s). Communication between components shall be provided as an integrated feature of the VRF system. B. The heat recovery system shall be capable of operating with 480V 60Hz, 3 phase power. PART 2.0 - STANDARDS/CERTIFICATIONS 2.1 VRF (variable refrigerant flow) heat pump and heat recovery systems shall have published performance ratings certified by AHRI (Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute) and listed in the AHRI Standard 1230 certified product directory www.AHRInet.org. 2.2 VRF heat pump and heat recovery system components shall be manufactured in production facilities maintaining the following ISO certifications: A. ISO 9001 Quality Management System B. ISO 14001 Environmental Management System 2.3 VRF heat pump and heat recovery system components shall comply with Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1995 Heating and Cooling Equipment Standard for Safety and bear the Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL) label. 2.4 VRF heat pump and heat recovery system field provided electrical power wiring shall be installed according to National Electrical Code (NEC) and all local authorities having jurisdiction (AHJs). 2.5 The VRF systems must be installed by a qualified contractor who has installed at least 10 VRF systems of the same manufacturer as the manufacturer being supplied for this project. 2.6 The Installing contractor must provide VRF installation training certificates (matching the supplied VRF System) for all installation and service technicians who will be installing, starting, and/or commissioning the VRF system. These certificates must be supplied with the contractor’s submittal package. Untrained contractors who wish to bid this project may contact Meier Supply prior to the bid to arrange training. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 237000-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION VRF SYSTEM WITH HEAT RECOVERY 237000-2 QPK NO. 220157.00 2.7 The supplying manufacturer must have at least 2 certified and factory authorized trainers / system commissioning agents within 60 miles of the project site. 2.8 Design Basis: LG Air Conditioning Technologies to be supplied by Meier Supply. No Substitutions. PART 3.0 - WARRANTY 3.1 Extended warranty is required for this system. It must be installed by a contractor who has successfully completed the installation and service courses and must have a complete commissioning report approved by the manufacturer. A. Ten (10) year parts warranty The part(s) are warranted for a ten (10) year period the date of original installation or 30 months from the date manufacture shown on the equipment nameplate label, whichever occurs first. B. Ten (10) year compressor warranty The compressor is warranted for ten (10) year period after the date of original installation or 30 months from the date of manufacture shown on the system nameplate label, whichever occurs first. PART 4.0 - VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW (HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEM) 4.1 The supplied VRF systems shall be LG. All alternates must be pre-approved by the owner and specifying engineer. 4.2 Outdoor Unit shall be capable of maintaining continuous compressor operation under all of the following operating ambient air conditions. A. Heat Recovery System 1. All IDUs Cooling: 14°F DB to 122°F DB (-9.9°F DB to 122°F DB with optional low ambient kit). 2. All IDUs Heating: -13°F WB to 61°F WB. 3. Cooling based synchronous: 14°F DB to 81°F DB. 4. Heating-based synchronous: 14°F WB to 61°F WB. B. The VRF system shall maintain normal heating and/or cooling operation at all IDUs while any one IDU is powered down for service. When power is restored to the IDU serviced, normal operation shall be restored with no system shutdown, interruption, reset, or power cycling of the outdoor unit. C. VRF systems with a low ambient heating lock-out temperature shall not be accepted. 4.3 GENERAL A. The air-conditioning system shall use R410A refrigerant. B. Each system shall have one, two or three air source outdoor units. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 237000-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION VRF SYSTEM WITH HEAT RECOVERY 237000-3 QPK NO. 220157.00 C. Multi-frame configurations shall be field piped together using manufacturer’s designed and supplied Y-branch kit and field provided interconnecting pipe to form a common refrigerant circuit. D. Refrigerant circuit configuration for Heat Recovery System 1. The refrigerant circuit shall be constructed using field provided copper piped together with manufacturer supplied Heat Recovery unit(s) and Y- branches or Header fittings connected to multiple (ducted, non-ducted or combination thereof) indoor units to effectively and efficiently control the simultaneous heating and cooling operation of the VRF system. 2. Each refrigerant pipe, y-branch, header kit, elbows and valves shall be individually insulated with no air gaps. All joints shall be glued and sealed. 3. The VRF manufacturer shall provide published documentation that specifically allows the installation of field provided full-port high quality refrigerant system isolation valves rated for use with R410A on any and all pipes of the VRF system. Isolation valves shall be strategically placed in the refrigerant piping system to allow the VRF system service provider to isolate a portion of the piping system to avoid a pump down of the entire refrigerant piping system when replacing/repairing the refrigeration circuit piping, HR unit(s), or indoor unit(s). E. Factory installed microprocessor controls in the outdoor unit(s), HR unit(s), and indoor unit(s) shall perform functions to efficiently operate the VRF system and communicate in a daisy chain configuration between outdoor unit and HR unit(s) and indoor unit(s) over a RS485 18AWG stranded and twisted wire data link. F. The system shall be designed to accept connection up to 64 indoor units. G. The total nominal capacity of all indoor units shall be no less than 50% and no more than 130% of outdoor unit’s nominal capacity to ensure the VRF system will have sufficient capacity to meet the building’s cooling and heating load at design day weather conditions. H. The maximum allowable system combination ratio shall be 130%. Systems designed with a combination ratio above 130% will not be accepted. I. Each outdoor unit refrigerant circuit shall have a high-pressure safety threaded rupture disk or threaded fusible plug fitting. J. The outdoor unit assembly, indoor unit assembly and/or heat recovery unit assembly shall be shipped from the factory assembled and pressure tested including internal refrigerant piping, compressor, contacts, relay(s), control components, power and communications wiring necessary. K. Each outdoor unit refrigeration circuit shall have the following components: 1. Inverter variable speed compressor(s) 2. Outdoor unit heat exchanger 3. Refrigerant strainer(s) 4. Check valve(s) 5. Oil separator 6. Accumulator 7. Heat exchanger circuiting control 8. Electronic expansion valve(s) 9. 4-way reversing valve 10. Sub-cooler circuit with controls ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 237000-4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION VRF SYSTEM WITH HEAT RECOVERY 237000-4 QPK NO. 220157.00 11. High and low side Schrader valve service ports with caps. 12. Service valves L. Each outdoor unit shall be mounted on 18” tall open base metal stands. (Quick-Sling or approved equal). M. All outdoor units must be Wi-Fi enabled from the manufacturer. N. A mobile Wi-Fi service tool with service tablet shall be supplied with the project and turned over to the owner at project completion. 4.4 SYSTEM A. Each outdoor unit frame shall have a stand-alone microprocessor control that varies the use of the outdoor coil circuits to optimize the use of heat transfer surface. Control shall be able to dynamically change the path and coil circuiting based on one of the following operating parameters: head pressure, suction pressure, system sub-cooling requirements, available refrigerant charge, system mode of operation, coil heat transfer efficiency shall have a variable flow path heat exchanger function to vary the refrigerant flow path based on system operating mode and operating conditions. B. System inverter compressors shall have a mid-stage, medium pressure vapor economizer apparatus to maximize refrigerant compression efficiency. C. System accumulator shall be provided with controls that continuously monitors, modifies, and controls the amount of refrigerant in circulation (active refrigerant charge) while the system is operating. The active refrigerant charge microprocessor shall monitor system high and low side gas pressure, coil approach temperature, liquid line temperature and pressure, and system subcooling requirement to control the refrigerant charge. D. System shall comprise of the following frame configurations: 1. 6 through 14 ton systems shall be a single frame only. 2. 16 through 28 ton systems shall be dual frame only. 3. 30 to 42 ton systems shall be triple frame only. 4.5 REFRIGERANT PIPE SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS A. The outdoor unit shall be capable of operating at an elevation difference of up to 360 feet above or below the lowest or highest indoor unit respectively. B. The outdoor unit shall be capable of operating with up to 3280 equivalent length feet of interconnecting liquid line refrigerant pipe in the network. C. The outdoor unit shall be capable of operating with up to 656 actual feet or 738 equivalent length feet of liquid line refrigerant pipe spanning between outdoor unit and farthest indoor unit. D. The refrigerant piping joints shall be joined via mechanical bonding wherever possible via ZoomLock (or equal) braze-free mechanical joining system. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 237000-5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION VRF SYSTEM WITH HEAT RECOVERY 237000-5 QPK NO. 220157.00 4.6 DEFROST OPERATIONS A. The outdoor unit(s) shall be capable of Intelligent defrost operation to melt accumulated frost, snow and ice that may have accumulated on the outdoor unit heat exchanger. The defrost cycle length and sequence shall be based on outdoor ambient temperatures, outdoor unit heat exchanger temperature, and various differential pressure variables. B. Defrost Mode Selection: The outdoor unit shall be provided with three field-selectable defrost operation modes; Normal, Fast, or Forced. 1. Normal Defrost operation intended for use in areas of the country with mild winter temperatures and light to moderate humidity levels. The strategy minimizes defrost cycle frequency allowing frozen precipitation to build longer in between cycles. Minimum time between defrost cycles shall be 20 minutes. Intelligent Defrost shall choose between split coil/frame and full system methods to minimize energy consumption and cycle time. 2. Fast Defrost operation intended for use in areas of the country that experience adverse winter weather with periods of heavy winter precipitation and extremely low temperatures. This strategy shall maximize the systems heating performance and maintain operational efficiency. When the ambient temperature is above 32°F, Intelligent Defrost shall continue to heat until the discharge temperature declines. At temperatures below 32°F, the time between defrost cycles shall be a minimum of 90 minutes. At temperatures below 4°F, a defrost cycle shall occur every two hours to optimize system heating efficiency. 3. Forced Defrost operation shall be available for the service provider to test defrost operations at any weather condition and to manually clear frozen water from the outdoor coil surfaces. C. Defrost Method Selection: The outdoor unit shall be provided with two field-selectable defrost operation methods; Split Coil/Frame and Full System. 1. Split Coil/Frame method shall be available when Normal Defrost mode is selected. Split Coil method shall be available on all Heat Pump and Heat Recovery single-frame VRF systems. Split Frame defrost shall be available on all Heat Pump and Heat Recovery multi-frame outdoor units. 2. Split Coil method shall remove ice from the bottom half of the outdoor unit coil first for six minutes, then the bottom half for six minutes. Next the bottom coil shall be heated again for an additional three minutes to remove any frozen water that may have dripped onto the lower coil during the top coil defrost operation. 3. When Split Coil/Frame method is selected, a Full System defrost shall occur every third defrost cycle to assure 100% of the frozen precipitation has been removed to maintain optimum efficient performance. 4. Full System method shall be available as a field selectable option. Outdoor units located in areas of the country where large volumes of frozen precipitation are common, the commissioning agent shall select the Full System defrost method. D. Indoor Unit Fan Operation During Defrost 1. During partial defrost operation indoor units operating in cooling or dry mode shall continue normal operation. 2. During partial defrost operation, indoor units that are commissioned with fans set for continuous operation shall maintain normal fan speed unless the leaving air temperature drops, then the fan speed will be reduced to low speed for the remainder of the defrost cycle. 3. During full system defrost operation, indoor unit fans will cycle off and remain off during the remainder of the defrost cycle. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 237000-6 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION VRF SYSTEM WITH HEAT RECOVERY 237000-6 QPK NO. 220157.00 4.7 OIL MANAGEMENT A. Each outdoor unit shall have an independently operating Hi-POR (High Pressure Oil Return) system to maximize compressor efficiency and ensure a consistent film of oil on all moving compressor parts at all speeds. B. The oil return system shall include a dedicated centrifugal oil separator for each compressor designed to extract oil from the oil/refrigerant gas stream leaving the compressor. C. Oil collected by each compressors independent oil return system shall be returned directly to the compressor oil sump passively without the use of mechanical pumps or other apparatus. D. Oil return systems that depend on differential pressure to return oil to the compressor sump, for example bleeding off or bypassing any amount of high pressure gas to push oil back to the compressor sump or the suction inlet of the compressor chamber, shall not be accepted. E. Compressor oil shall be maintained at the same temperature as the discharge gas leaving the compressor to prevent any blending of refrigerant and oil to maintain stable oil viscosity during compressor operation. F. The oil return system shall not inject, blend, or otherwise mix collected oil with suction vapor refrigerant before entering the compressor scroll or other gas compression apparatus. G. The oil return system shall provide an oil level monitor for each compressor that provides continuous feedback to the outdoor unit microprocessor. H. The microprocessor shall initiate an oil return cycle when the oil level monitoring sensor indicates a low oil level in the compressor sump. I. Timed and/or scheduled unmonitored oil return operations and/or any oil return system that does not initiate an oil return cycle based on compressor sump low level reading shall not be permitted. 4.8 CABINET A. Outdoor unit cabinet shall be made of 20 gauge galvanized steel with an enamel finish. B. Outdoor unit cabinet shall have a heavy gauge coated wire coil guard. C. Outdoor unit cabinet finish shall have been tested in accordance with ASTM B-117 salt spray test procedure for a minimum of 1000 hours. D. All internal serviceable components shall be accessible by removing the front panel of the unit. Outdoor units that require the removal of side and/or rear service panels shall not be permitted. E. A controls maintenance and unit diagnostic access port shall be provided in front of the microprocessor to allow quick access to read service codes, set DIP switches, perform microprocessor operational checks, address system components and extract operational data without removing the unit’s front panel(s). F. The controls access port shall be no larger than 6-1/4” x 6-3/4” to the possibility of weather related moisture entering the control panel while service is in progress. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 237000-7 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION VRF SYSTEM WITH HEAT RECOVERY 237000-7 QPK NO. 220157.00 G. A baked galvanized steel access port cover with a baked enamel finish (color matching unit cabinet) shall be provided and easily removed. H. Controls access port cover shall be secured to the unit with a factory provided braided steel wire lanyard to prevent loss/damage to the port cover. I. The cabinet shall be designed with pre-punched pipe and electrical knockouts. Cabinet shall be designed to accept connection of refrigerant pipe, power cable, and communications wiring either: 1. Through the front panel. 2. Through the right side. 3. Through the unit’s base pan (bottom). 4.9 FAN ASSEMBLY(S) A. Each 6 ton cabinet shall be equipped with one direct drive variable speed propeller fan with Brushless Digitally Controlled (BLDC) motor mounted in a vertical top air discharge configuration. B. Each 8 to 14 ton cabinet shall be equipped with two direct drive variable speed propeller fans with independent BLDC motors mounted in a vertical top air discharge configuration. C. The fan blades shall be made of non-metallic light-weight Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene (ABS) material. D. Fan blade design shall be a quiet, deep-V designed to minimize air turbulence as air passes over and leaves the trailing edge of the fan blade. Fan shroud shall be designed in conjunction with fan blade to minimize air turbulence along the edge of the blades to minimize noise generation. E. Outdoor unit fan motors shall be powered using a dc inverter drive capable of operating the fans at a maximum speed of 1100 RPM. F. Each fan motor case/frame shall be made with a lightweight non-ferrous metal alloy. Bearing shall be sealed and permanently lubricated. G. Only one fan blade per fan motor shall be accepted. Dual fan assemblies driven by a double-end shaft motor shall not be permitted. H. Each fan blade and motor assembly shall be balanced, tested, and mounted to the unit frame using a means of isolation that will eliminate any objectionable audible harmonic or vibration being transferred to the unit frame. I. A raised ferrous wire metal guard with a baked enamel finish (color matching unit cabinet) shall be provided to prevent large object and animal contact with moving parts. J. The outdoor fan inverter drive shall be provided with a DIP switch that reprograms the DC inverter drive to allow outdoor unit fan assemblies to operate under high discharge static conditions (up to 0.32 in-wg external static pressure) such as a ducted discharge application. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 237000-8 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION VRF SYSTEM WITH HEAT RECOVERY 237000-8 QPK NO. 220157.00 4.10 OUTDOOR UNIT COIL A. Shall be a variable path design. B. Shall be provided and built by the VRF outdoor unit provider. C. It shall be comprised of aluminum fins mechanically bonded on copper tubing. D. The copper tubes shall be internally ribbed to maximize heat transfer. Smooth bore tubes are not acceptable. E. The aluminum fin heat transfer surfaces shall be treated to maximize the life of the fin material. Coil fin heat transfer surfaces shall be treated with a factory applied corrosion resistant GoldFin™ coating. Coating of fins shall be a two-step process. Base coat shall be an anticorrosive paint specifically engineered for bonding to bare aluminum. The top coat shall be a Hydrophilic paint with a gloss finish to protect the anti-corrosion coat. Hydrophilic paint shall be specifically formulated to promote liquid precipitation runoff and assist in minimizing particulate debris from sticking to the fin’s heat transfer surfaces. F. Fin material coating shall be tested in accordance with ASTM B-117 salt spray test procedure for a minimum of 1000 hours. G. The outdoor unit coil assembly shall be factory pressure tested to a pressure of 551 psig. H. Coil fin series shall be up to 22 Fins per Inch (FPI). I. All the outdoor units shall have a minimum of a 3 row heat exchanger. 4.11 COMPRESSOR(S) A. Each 6, 8, 10 ton frames shall be equipped with one hermetically sealed, inverter driven, High Side Shell (HSS) scroll compressor. B. The 12 and 14 ton frames shall be equipped with two hermetically-sealed, inverter-speed controlled scroll compressors. C. Outdoor unit frames containing constant speed 50-60 Hz compressor(s) or containing a constant speed 50-60 Hz compressor in combination with an inverter compressor(s) are not acceptable. D. Each inverter driven, HSS scroll compressor shall be capable of operating in a frequency range from 15 Hz to 150 Hz with control in 0.5 Hz increments. E. Each compressor shall be equipped with a minimum of a 60 Watt crankcase heater. F. The compressor shall be provided from the factory with a full charge of Polyvinyl Ether (PVE) oil. Ester based oils are not acceptable (POE) to prevent gum from forming in the system in the case of a motor burn. G. All compressor bearing(s) shall have Teflon™ coating. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 237000-9 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION VRF SYSTEM WITH HEAT RECOVERY 237000-9 QPK NO. 220157.00 H. All compressors shall be protected with: 1. High Pressure switch. 2. Over-current/under current protection. 3. Phase failure. 4. Phase reversal. 4.12 SOUND LEVELS A. Outdoor unit noise levels shall not exceed 60 dB A. Test protocol includes a sound level measurement taken at an elevation of 5 ft. above the mounting surface at the center point of the width of the outdoor unit frame at a distance of 1 meter in front of the front panel surface with all fans running at absolute maximum motor design speed at all unit operating modes including high heating mode in an anechoic chamber using ISO3745 test standard protocol. 4.13 SENSORS A. Each single cabinet shall have: 1. Suction temperature sensor. 2. Discharge temperature sensor. 3. High Pressure sensor. 4. Low Pressure sensor. 5. Outdoor temperature sensor. 6. Outdoor unit heat exchanger temperature sensor. PART 5.0 - HEAT RECOVERY UNIT (HRU) 5.1 GENERAL A. HR unit shall be designed and manufactured by the same manufacturer of VRF indoor unit(s) and outdoor unit(s). Provide LG. No Substitutions. B. HR units shall be available in a 2, 3, and 4-port design. Single port designs and pipe system designs that require a dedicated HR unit is not acceptable. C. HR unit casing shall be made with galvanized steel and have a galvanized steel finish. D. HR unit shall be powered using a 208-230V/1-phase/60Hz power supply. E. HR Unit shall be an intermediate refrigerant control device between the air source outdoor unit and the indoor units to control the systems simultaneous cooling and heating operation. F. HR unit shall be engineered to work with a three pipe VRF system comprised of the following: 1. High Pressure Vapor Pipe. 2. Low Pressure Vapor Pipe. 3. Liquid Pipe. G. HR unit shall be designed to be piped in a series or parallel pipe configuration relative to each other. H. HR unit shall be a multi-port design capable of serving between one and 8 indoor units per HR unit port with a combined cooling nominal capacity of 54 Mbh per IDU port. HR units shall be ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 237000-10 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION VRF SYSTEM WITH HEAT RECOVERY 237000-10 QPK NO. 220157.00 able to accept/service at least two indoor units per HR unit up to a combined connected IDU cooling capacity of 192 Mbh. I. VRF system controller shall be capable of accommodating up to 16 HR units connected to HR units piped in a single series string. J. Each port shall be capable of operating in cooling or heating independently regardless of the operating mode of any other port on the HR unit or in the system. K. HR unit shall be internally piped, wired, assembled, leak and run tested at the factory. L. HR unit shall be designed for installation in a conditioned environment and provided with factory applied insulation on all cold surfaces. M. HR unit shall have a liquid bypass circuit between the high pressure vapor and the low pressure vapor pipes. N. Each port IDU port shall have a pair (2) two-position solenoid valves. O. HR unit shall have a balancing valve to control the pressure between the high pressure and low pressure pipe during mode switching. P. HR unit shall contain a sub-cooler circuit with stand-alone controls for each HR unit. Q. HR cold surface pipes shall be factory insulated to prevent condensation. R. HR unit shall not require a condensate drain. Manufacturer’s providing HR models that require a condensate drain line shall reimburse the pipe fitter or others responsible for the portion of the cost associated with the condensate drain system design, parts, and installation. S. All field provided refrigerant piping and VRF system refrigerant piping components between outdoor unit and HR unit and from HR unit to indoor unit shall be field insulated. T. The HR unit shall not exceed a net unit weight of 49 lbs. U. At least 1 empty port on a HRU must be a supplied per system for future renovation and/or service. V. Each port of each HRU shall be equipped with a field installed full port R-410a rated ball valve with a service port. These ball valves shall be wrapped with at least 1/2" insulation provided by the valve manufacturer. 5.2 3-PHASE VRF SYSTEM PIPING CAPABILITIES A. The elevation difference between indoor units on heat pump systems shall be 131 feet. B. The elevation differences for heat recovery systems shall be: 1. Heat recovery unit (HRU) to connected indoor unit shall be 49 feet. 2. HRU to HRU shall be 49 feet. 3. Indoor unit to indoor unit connected to same HRU shall be 49 feet. 4. Indoor unit to indoor unit connected to separate parallel HRU’s shall be 131 feet. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 237000-11 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION VRF SYSTEM WITH HEAT RECOVERY 237000-11 QPK NO. 220157.00 C. The acceptable elevation difference between two series connected HR units shall be 16 feet. 5.3 CONTROLS A. HR unit(s) shall have factory installed unit mounted control boards and integral microprocessor to communicate with indoor units and outdoor units over a single stranded, shielded, twisted wire pair. B. Manufacturer shall provide screw terminal connections at the HR unit to terminate power wiring and communications cables. PART 6.0 - INDOOR UNITS 6.1 4-WAY CEILING CASSETTE A. General 1. Unit shall be manufactured by LG. 2. Unit shall be factory assembled, wired, piped and run tested. 3. Unit shall be designed to be installed for indoor application. 4. Unit shall be designed to mount recessed in the ceiling and has a surface mounted grille on the bottom of the unit. 5. The unit shall be available in both 2’ x 2’ and 3’ x 3’ chassis. 6. All 3’x3’ chassis ceiling cassettes shall be provided with return filter auto-elevation kits capable of lowering the return filter down 14’ from the ceiling cassette via a wireless remote. 7. All ceiling cassettes shall be provided with decorative shrouds that match the color of the ceiling cassettes front grille, to hide the metal casing of the ceiling cassette. B. Casing/Panel 1 Unit case shall be manufactured using galvanized steel plate. 2 The unit shall be provided with an off-white Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene (ABS) polymeric resin architectural grille. 3 The grille shall have a tapered trim edge, and a hinged, spring clip (screw-less) return air filter-grille door. 4 Unit shall be provided with metal ears designed to support the unit weight on four corners. 5 Ears shall have pre-punched holes designed to accept field supplied all thread rod hangers. C. Cabinet Assembly 1. Unit shall have four supply air outlets and one return air inlet. 2. The supply air outlet shall be through four-directional slot diffuser each equipped with independent oscillating motorized guide vane designed to change the airflow direction. 3. The grille shall have a discharge range of motion of 40° in an up/down direction with capabilities of locking the vanes. 4. The unit shall have a guide vane algorithm designed to sequentially change the predominant discharge airflow direction in counterclockwise pattern. 5. Guide vanes shall provide airflow in all directions. 6. Unit shall be equipped with factory installed temperature thermistors for: a. Return air b. Refrigerant entering coil c. Refrigerant leaving coil ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 237000-12 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION VRF SYSTEM WITH HEAT RECOVERY 237000-12 QPK NO. 220157.00 7. Unit shall have a factory assembled, piped and wired electronic expansion valve (EEV) for refrigerant control. 8. Unit shall have a built-in control panel to communicate with other indoor units and to the outdoor unit. 9. The unit shall have factory designated branch duct knockouts on the unit case. 10. The unit shall have provision of fresh air ventilation through a knock-out on the cabinet. 11. The branch duct knockouts shall have the ability to duct up to ½ the unit airflow capacity. 12. The branch duct cannot be ducted to another room. 13. Unit shall have the following functions as standard: a. Self-diagnostic function. b. Auto addressing. c. Auto restart function. d. Auto changeover function (Heat Recovery system only). e. Auto operation function. f. Child lock function. g. Forced operation. h. Dual thermistor control. i Sleep mode. j. Dual setpoint control. k. Multiple aux heater applications. l. Filter life and power consumption display. D. Fan Assembly 1. The unit shall have a single, direct drive, turbo fan made of high strength ABS HT-700 polymeric resin. 2. The fan impeller shall be statically and dynamically balanced. 3. The fan motor is Brushless Digitally controlled (BLDC) with permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearings. 4. The fan motor shall include thermal, overcurrent and low RPM protection. 5. The fan/motor assembly shall be mounted on vibration attenuating rubber grommets. 6. The fan speed shall be controlled using microprocessor based direct digitally controlled algorithm. 7. In cooling mode, the indoor fan shall have the following settings: Low, Med, High, Power Cool, and Auto. 8. In heating mode, the indoor fan shall have the following settings: Low, Med, High, and Auto. 9. Unit shall have factory installed motorized louver to provide flow of air in up and down direction for uniform airflow. E. Filter Assembly 1. The return air inlet shall have a factory supplied removable, washable filter with antifungal treatment. 2. The unit shall have the option for a secondary plasma filter accessory. 3. The filter access shall be from the bottom of the unit. 4. The unit shall have provision for an optional auto-elevating grille kit designed to provide motorized ascent/descent of the return air grille/pre filter assembly. a. The ascent/descent of the return air grille shall be up to a distance of 14-3/4 feet allowing access to remove and clean the filter. b. The auto-elevating grille shall have a control algorithm to accept up, down and stop control commands from the controller. c. The auto-elevating grille shall have a control to stop the descent automatically if a contact is made with any obstacle. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 237000-13 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION VRF SYSTEM WITH HEAT RECOVERY 237000-13 QPK NO. 220157.00 F. Coil Assembly 1. Unit shall have a factory built coil comprised of aluminum fins mechanically bonded on copper tubing. 2. The copper tubing shall have inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchanger. 3. Unit shall have a minimum 1 or 2 row coil, 18-19 fins per inch. 4. Unit shall have a factory supplied condensate drain pan below the coil constructed of EPS (expandable polystyrene resin). 5. Unit shall include an installed and wired condensate drain pump capable of providing minimum 27.5-inch lift from bottom surface of the unit. 6. The drain pump shall have a safety switch to shut off the unit if condensate rises too high in the drain pan. 7. Unit shall have provision of 45° flare refrigerant pipe connections. 8. The coil shall be factory pressure tested at a minimum of 551 psig. 9. All refrigerant piping from outdoor unit to indoor unit shall be field insulated. G. Microprocessor Control 1. The unit shall have a factory installed microprocessor controller capable of performing functions necessary to operate the system. 2. The unit shall be able to communicate with other indoor units and the outdoor unit using a field supplied minimum of 18 AWG, 2 core, stranded and shielded communication cable. 3. The unit controls shall operate the indoor unit using one of the five operating modes: a. Auto changeover (Heat Recovery System only). b. Heating. c. Cooling. d. Dry. e. Fan only. H. Electrical 1. The unit electrical power shall be 208-230/1/60 (V/Ph/Hz). 2. The unit shall be capable of operating within voltage limits of +/- 10% of the rated voltage. I. Controls 1. Unit shall use controls provided by the manufacturer to perform all functions necessary to operate the system effectively and efficiently and communicate with the outdoor unit over an RS485 daisy chain. 6.2 DUCTED – HIGH STATIC A. General 1. Unit shall be manufactured by LG. 2. Unit shall be factory assembled, wired, piped and run tested. 3. Unit shall be designed to be installed for indoor application. 4. Unit shall be designed to mount fully concealed above the finished ceiling. 5. Unit shall have opening to supply air from front horizontal and a dedicated rear horizontal return. 6. The supply air shall be flanged for field installed ductwork that shall not exceed the external static pressure limitation of the unit. 7. Unit shall be capable to be installed with heat pump or heat recovery or cooling VRF system. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 237000-14 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION VRF SYSTEM WITH HEAT RECOVERY 237000-14 QPK NO. 220157.00 B. Casing/Panel 1. Unit case shall be manufactured using galvanized steel plate. 2. The cold surfaces of the unit shall be covered internally with a coated polystyrene insulating material. 3. The cold surfaces of the unit shall be covered externally with sheet insulation made of Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer (M-Class) (EPDM). 4. The external insulation shall be plenum rated and conform to ASTM Standard D-1418. 5. Unit shall be provided with hanger brackets designed to support the unit weight on four corners. 6. Hanger brackets shall have pre-punched holes designed to accept field supplied, all thread rod hangers. C. Cabinet Assembly 1. Unit shall have supply air discharge outlets horizontal and a return air inlet horizontal. 2. Unit shall be equipped with factory installed temperature thermistors for: a. Return air. b. Refrigerant entering coil. c. Refrigerant leaving coil. 3. Unit shall have a factory assembled, piped and wired electronic expansion valve (EEV) for refrigerant control. 4. Unit shall have a built-in control panel to communicate with other indoor units and to the outdoor unit. 5. Unit shall have the following functions as standard: a. Self-diagnostic function. b. Auto addressing. c. Auto restart function. d. Auto changeover function (Heat Recovery system only). e. Auto operation function. f. Child lock function. g. Forced operation. h. Dual thermistor control. i. Sleep mode. j. External static pressure (ESP) control. k. Dual setpoint control. l. Multiple aux heater applications. m. Filter life and power consumption display. D. Fan Assembly 1. The unit shall have two direct drive Sirocco fans made of high strength ABS GP-2200 polymeric resin. 2. The fan impeller shall be statically and dynamically balanced. 3. The fans shall be mounted on a common shaft. 4. The fan motor is Brushless Digitally controlled (BLDC) with permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearings. 5. The fan motor shall include thermal, overcurrent and low RPM protection. 6. The fan/motor assembly shall be mounted on vibration attenuating rubber grommets. 7. The fan speed shall be controlled using microprocessor based direct digitally controlled algorithm. 8. In cooling mode, the indoor fan shall have the following settings: Low, Med, High, Power Cool, and Auto. 9. In heating mode, the indoor fan shall have the following settings: Low, Med, High, and Auto. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 237000-15 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION VRF SYSTEM WITH HEAT RECOVERY 237000-15 QPK NO. 220157.00 10. Each of the settings can be field adjusted from the factory setting (RPM/ESP). 11. Unit shall be designed for high speed air volume against an external static pressure of up to 0.98” water gauge. E. Filter Assembly 1. The return air inlet shall have a factory supplied removable, washable filter with antifungal treatment. 2. The filter access shall be from the rear of the unit. F. Coil Assembly 1. Unit shall have a factory built coil comprised of aluminum fins mechanically bonded on copper tubing. 2. The copper tubing shall have inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchanger. 3. Unit shall have a minimum 2-3 row coil, 19-21 fins per inch. 4. Unit shall have a factory supplied condensate drain pan below the coil constructed of HIPS (high impact polystyrene resin). 5. Unit shall include an installed and wired condensate drain pump capable of providing minimum 27.5 inch lift from bottom surface of the unit. 6. The drain pump shall have a safety switch to shut off the unit if condensate rises too high in the drain pan. 7. Unit shall have provision of 45° flare refrigerant pipe connections. 8. The coil shall be factory pressure tested at a minimum of 551 psig. 9. All refrigerant piping from outdoor unit to indoor unit shall be field insulated. G. Microprocessor Control 1. The unit shall have a factory installed microprocessor controller capable of performing functions necessary to operate the system. 2. The unit shall be able to communicate with other indoor units and the outdoor unit using a field supplied minimum of 18 AWG, 2 core, stranded and shielded communication cable. 3. The unit controls shall operate the indoor unit using one of the five operating modes: a. Auto changeover (Heat Recovery System only) b. Heating c. Cooling d. Dry e. Fan only H. Electrical 1. The unit electrical power shall be 208-230/1/60 (V/Ph/Hz). 2. The unit shall be capable of operating within voltage limits of +/- 10% of the rated voltage. I. Controls 1. Unit shall use controls provided by the manufacturer to perform all functions necessary to operate the system effectively and efficiently and communicate with the outdoor unit over an RS485 daisy chain. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 237000-16 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION VRF SYSTEM WITH HEAT RECOVERY 237000-16 QPK NO. 220157.00 PART 7.0 - CONTROLS 7.1 PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER A. Overview The Programmable Wired Remote Controller shall be capable of controlling up to sixteen indoor units (one group). The Programmable Wired Remote Controller shall be capable of monitoring and controlling the group in terms of On/Off, Mode of Operation, Airflow direction, Fan Speed, space temperature, and space temperature set point based on the available functions of the connected system. Additionally, the Programmable Wired Remote Controller shall be capable of providing seven-day programmable scheduling of Occupied/Unoccupied settings, On/Off, Mode of Operation, set point and fan speed. B. General 1. The Programmable Wired Remote Controller shall be compatible with the VRF indoor units. 2. The Programmable Wired Remote Controller shall communicate to the VRF indoor unit via the VRF RS-485 daisy chain communication protocol. 3. The Programmable Wired Remote Controller shall have a 4-1/4” backlit LCD display with screen saver capability. 4. The Programmable Wired Remote Controller shall have an internal time clock and calendar. 5. The Programmable Wired Remote Controller shall be able to display temperature in °F or °C based on user settings. 6. The Programmable Wired Remote Controller shall be able to monitor and control up to sixteen indoor units (one group) as a single zone. 7. Up to 2 Programmable Wired Remote Controllers shall be connectable to a single group and operate in a master/slave configuration. C. Basic Functions Function Description Monitor Control On/Off On/Off operation for group X X Mode of Operation Mode of Operation for group (Heat/Cool/Fan/Dry/Auto) X X Set Point Space temperature set point for group. Setting temperature range 64-84°F. Separate Heat/Cool set points settings for Auto Mode. *Set Point ranges dependent on operation mode and connected equipment. X X Space Temperature Display measured space temperature X Fan Speed Select fan speeds Hi-Mid1-Mid2-Low-Auto X X Airflow Direction Select air direction settings Auto/Swing/Fixed X X Lock setting Ability to lock out operation of the controller X X Filter check Notification to change dirty filter X Dehumidification Ability to remove moisture from the air X X Temperature set point range limit Ability to limit heating and cooling set point ranges X X Available functions/features may differ based on connected system. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 237000-17 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION VRF SYSTEM WITH HEAT RECOVERY 237000-17 QPK NO. 220157.00 D. Advanced Functions Function Description Monitor Control Schedule 7-day programmable schedule Minimum of 5 events per day with On/Off, Occupied/Unoccupied, Mode, Set temperature, and Fan Speed selectable per event. X X Timed Override Timed override of Unoccupied settings X X Occupied/Unoccupied Setting Ability to have different settings for both modes X X Energy Use Display Display actual operational time and power consumption X Operation Time Limit Limit the run time of an indoor unit X X Auto Changeover Deadband Adjust Ability to adjust dead-band between indoor unit heating and cooling modes X X Set back Ability to change heating and cooling set points X X 2 set point auto operation Automatically manage room temperature for heating and cooling X Central Control display Display if a signal is received from Central Control X X Interlocking Ability to interlock with 3rd party devices X Available functions/features may differ based on connected system. E. Electrical 1. The remote controller shall be powered via the indoor unit remote controller communication bus. Power shall be 24 VDC. 7.2 AC SMART IV CENTRAL CONTROLLER/INTEGRATION GATEWAY A Overview The AC Smart BACnet Gateway shall be capable of monitoring and control of up to 128 devices (including indoor units, ERV, DI/DOs, DOKITS, AWHPs, AHUs) or 64 devices (including indoor units, ERV, DI/DOs, DOKITS, AWHPs and AHUs) and 9 I/O Modules through its touchscreen interface and embedded web browser. The AC Smart BACnet Gateway shall provide multiple energy management schemes and control of third‐party equipment when paired with associated I/O Module. Additionally, the AC Smart BACnet Gateway shall be capable of providing daily, weekly, yearly, and holiday programmable scheduling of Occupied/Unoccupied settings, On/Off, Mode of Operation, set point and fan speed based on the available functions of the connected system. B. General 1. The AC Smart BACnet Gateway shall communicate to the LG Multi V™ VRF indoor unit via the VRF RS‐485 daisy‐chain communication protocol. 2. The AC Smart BACnet Gateway shall communicate to a third‐party Building Automation System via BACnet/IP. 3. The AC Smart BACnet Gateway shall have a 10.2” backlit touchscreen LCD display screen. 4. The AC Smart BACnet Gateway shall have web access with user control. 5. The AC Smart BACnet Gateway shall be able to generate an operation and error history log with reporting capabilities. 6. The AC Smart BACnet Gateway shall be able to control up to 128 indoor units in a group or as a single zone. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 237000-18 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION VRF SYSTEM WITH HEAT RECOVERY 237000-18 QPK NO. 220157.00 7. The AC Smart BACnet Gateway shall support two digital input and two digital outputs for device interlock. 8. The AC Smart BACnet Gateway shall have two set point auto changeover. 9. The AC Smart BACnet Gateway shall have occupied/unoccupied set point control. 10. The AC Smart BACnet Gateway shall have remote controller lock (All, Set point, Mode, and Fan Speed). 11. The AC Smart BACnet Gateway shall have error e‐mail notification. 12. The AC Smart BACnet Gateway shall have visual floor plan navigation. C. Basic Functions Function Description Monitor Control On/Off On/Off operation for group X X Mode of Operation Mode of Operation for group (Heat/Cool/Fan/Auto/Dry) X X Set Point Space temperature set point for group. Setting temperature range 64°F-84°F depending on operation mode and connected equipment. X X Space Temperature Display measured space temperature X Fan Speed Select fan speeds Hi-Mid1-Mid2-Low-Auto X X Airflow Direction Select air direction settings Auto/Swing/Fixed X X Group Control Control and Monitor a group or multiple groups X X Operational and Event Log History Record system operation and fault code history X Language Selection Choice of multiple languages X Available functions/features may differ based on connected system. D. Advanced Functions Function Description Monitor Control Schedule Daily, Weekly, Yearly and Holiday programmable schedule Minimum of five events per day with On/Off, Occupied/Unoccupied, Mode, Set temperature, and Fan X X Timed Override Timed override of Unoccupied settings X X Occupied/Unoccupied Setting Ability to have different settings for both modes X X Energy Use Display Display actual operational time and power consumption. X X Operation Run Time Limit Limit the run time of an indoor unit X X Two set point auto operation Automatically manage room temperature for heating and cooling X X Error E-Mail Notification Send E-Mail when a system failure has been detected X X Peak/Demand Control Control and Limit power consumption of external devices X X Temperature set point range limit Ability to limit heating and cooling set point ranges X X Remote controller Lock setting Ability to lock out operation of the controller X X ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 237000-19 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION VRF SYSTEM WITH HEAT RECOVERY 237000-19 QPK NO. 220157.00 Available functions/features may differ based on connected system. E. Electrical 1. The AC Smart IV Central controller shall be powered via 24 VAC or 12 VDC. END OF SECTION 237000 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260100-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ELECTRICAL BASIC REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 260100-1 SECTION 260100 - ELECTRICAL BASIC REQUIREMENTS PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. The requirements of this Section apply to all work of Division 26, Division 27 and Division 28. B. This Section specifies the basic requirements for electrical installations and includes requirements common to more than one section of Division 26 - Electrical. It expands and supplements the requirements specified in sections of Division 00 - Bidding and Contract Requirements and Division 01 - General Requirements. C. Refer to Submittal Procedures specification section for requirements on submittals. D. Approval of items, whether evidenced by seal, label or stamp, shall not absolve Contractor from compliance with requirements of Contract Documents. 1.2 LAYOUT OF WORK A. The Contract Drawings are diagrammatic in showing physical layout. Exact locations must be established in coordination with all other work of this and other trades. B. Arrange work in a neat, well organized manner running parallel to walls and close to structure and other work above for maximum clearances. C. Locate operating and control equipment to insure access for operation and maintenance. D. Coordinate the work of this Division with the work of other trades and make adjustments to the work as may be necessary to fit the spaces allotted. 1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver products to the Site in sturdy shipping containers, properly labeled as to type, function and location. B. Handle products carefully at all times during shipping, storing and installing. Avoid crushing containers and prevent dirt and debris from entering or settling on products. Do not install damaged equipment or components; replace with new. C. Store products in original shipping containers and protect from weather and construction work traffic. D. Where possible, store inside; otherwise, store above grade and enclose with weatherproof wrapping. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260100-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ELECTRICAL BASIC REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 260100-2 E. Mark and tag conductors for delivery to the Site the same as required for sample labels. Insulated conductors over one year old, when delivered to the Site, shall not be acceptable. 1.4 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS A. Underwriters Certificate: A New York Board of Fire Underwriters inspection and certificate is required. Provide an Underwriters Certificate to the Engineer prior to request for Final Payment. B. Acquire all required permits for execution of the work and include the cost of same in the Bid Price. 1.5 CODES, STANDARDS AND LISTING A. Provide all products and perform all electrical installation work in accordance with applicable requirements of: 1. 2020 Building Code of New York State. 2. 2020 Fire Code of New Yor5k State. 3. 2020 Energy Conservation Code of New York State. 4. American Society for Testing Material (ASTM). 5. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 6. Association of Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC). 7. Edison Electric Institute (EEI). 8. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). 9. Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA). 10. National Electric Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA). 11. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). a. National Electric Code, NFPA No. 70-2017. b. Other publications included in ‘National Fire Codes,’ volume set published by NFPA. 12. National Electric Safety Code, Handbook No. H30, except for requirements which have been superseded by NFPA Publications (NESC). 13. Local Electric Code. 14. Local Utility Standards. 15. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). B. All electrical devices, materials and packaged equipment shall meet the requirements of a recognized testing agency such as the Underwriters Laboratories, Incorporated, and shall bear its label. 1.6 NOTIFICATIONS A. Notify and obtain permission from the Owner seven days in advance of interrupting any utilities. B. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of all tests. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260100-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ELECTRICAL BASIC REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 260100-3 1.7 REMOVALS A. Refer to Contract Drawings to determine extent of construction being removed and visit Job Site to examine existing conditions. B. Where removals occur on services that are to remain in operation, cap or otherwise terminate the remaining services beneath finished surfaces. C. Carefully remove and store all equipment to be reused in a safe place until ready for reinstallation. Clean materials before reinstallation and ensure equipment is still fully operational. D. Carefully remove and turn over to the Owner in good condition at the Job Site all removed materials and/or equipment the Owner wishes to retain. Remove from the Job Site all other existing materials and equipment. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SLEEVES A. Provide Schedule 40 black steel pipe sleeves, unless otherwise required. B. Provide sleeves compatible with penetration and material penetrated. C. Provide 1/2" minimum clearance around penetration. D. Provide sleeves at all conduit penetrations through concrete and masonry construction, and through fire rated drywall construction. E. Seal all openings around electrical boxes and raceways where passing through concrete slabs and masonry walls with mortar or non-flammable, non-toxic sealant capable of maintaining the inherent fire rating and smoke rating of the slab or wall. F. Fire-rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Fill the annular space between the sleeve and conduit to prevent the passage of flame and hot gases. The fire stop used to fill the annular space shall be an approved penetration fire stop system installed in accordance with UL 1479 and ASTM E814, with a minimum positive pressure differential of 0.01 inch of water and shall have an F rating of not less than the fire resistance rating of the wall penetrated. G. Floor Penetrations: Fill the annular space between the sleeve and conduit to prevent the passage of flame and hot gases. The fire stop used to fill the annular space shall be an approved penetration fire stop system installed in accordance with UL 1479 and ASTM E814, with a minimum positive pressure differential of 0.01 inch of water and shall have an F rating of not less than the fire resistance rating of the floor penetrated. H. Seal all exterior wall penetrations with sealant so as to prevent moisture from entering building. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260100-4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ELECTRICAL BASIC REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 260100-4 I. Sleeves through structural members are not permitted without prior approval from the Engineer. J. Cut sleeves flush with adjacent surfaces unless otherwise indicated. K. Sleeves in mechanical equipment rooms and floors subject to frequent wash down shall extend 1" above finished floor. L. Waterproofing Seals: 1. Provide expanding link type seal, for installation between duct/conduit, and sleeve or coredrilled hole in concrete. 2. Make: Link Seal, manufactured by GTP or approved equal. 2.2 CONCRETE INSERTS A. Provide metal type inserts, specifically designed for support of hangers, equipment, conduit, etc. B. Install inserts before concrete is poured. C. Provide percussion or expansion type fasteners instead of inserts where the inserts were not installed when the concrete was poured. 2.3 NAMEPLATES A. Provide standard phenolic nameplates with 3/8" minimum size engraved lettering indicating the load served, power source, voltage, phases and circuit number on covers of safety switches, motor controllers, panelboards, etc. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXECUTION OF WORK A. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components. B. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install electrical services and overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom available. C. Coordinate electrical equipment and materials installation with other building components; above ceilings with suspension system, coordinate with mechanical equipment and systems and with structural components. D. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. E. Perform all work in accordance with the Plans, Specifications and all other Contract Documents. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260100-5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ELECTRICAL BASIC REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 260100-5 F. In general, the Contract Drawings indicate locations of equipment in floor plan and the locations of equipment within systems by means of riser diagrams. G. Provide all systems in accordance with the descriptions outlined in the Specifications. H. Install all equipment in a manner that shall allow ease of maintenance, safety of personnel and ready accessibility. I. If the Engineer determines that any installed system does not function in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications, the Contractor who installed the system(s) improperly shall remove the equipment and reinstall it properly at the Contractor’s own expense. In the event the removal and reinstallation of improperly installed equipment would result in an interruption of services the Contractor shall provide whatever temporary services are required to prevent interruptions of service. J. For equipment furnished by others requiring an electrical connection, obtain submittals from equipment supplier and verify electrical characteristics before installation. 3.2 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Provide all cutting and patching, except as otherwise specified, required to perform the work of this Division. B. Provide patching and painting as required to match existing adjacent surfaces; the Engineer’s Representative shall determine whether patching has been executed properly. C. Remove and replace work which, in the judgment of the Engineer, has been cut and patched in an unsatisfactory manner. 3.3 TESTS, BALANCING AND DEMONSTRATION A. Arrange with the Engineer to witness all tests, and perform all testing at a mutually agreed upon time. Owner is to pay for energy used during testing. B. Prior to commencement of work, the Contactor(s) effecting such system shall survey all building electrical systems and components, including fire alarm, security, communications, clock and computer; make written notice to the Owner regarding existing damages, missing items and incomplete systems. Prior to the conclusion of this project, the Contractor shall verify with the Project Inspector that all building systems have been returned to their original conditions. C. Load Test and Balancing 1. Upon completion of the electrical installation, conduct a load test by turning on all lights, motors and other electrical equipment throughout the entire Project for a continuous period. 2. Alter fuses, breakers, circuit connection arrangements, etc., as required to permit satisfactory performance. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260100-6 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ELECTRICAL BASIC REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 260100-6 3. Reconnect the circuits to the busses at each panel and distribution location as required so that the load on the phases and/or the neutral shall be balanced within 5%. D. Demonstration 1. Before final acceptance, demonstrate the operation of the entire system and instruct the Owner’s maintenance personnel in the complete operation of all systems, and in the resetting and fuse replacement of all equipment. 3.4 OWNER’S INSTRUCTION A. After Substantial Completion of Work, including testing and balancing of systems, conduct a complete and thorough seminar for Owner’s designated personnel at the Job Site. B. Include the following instructions: 1. Operation and Maintenance of All Systems 2. Explanation of Identification Systems 3. Emergency and Alarm Procedures 4. Sequencing Requirements 5. Seasonal Provisions 6. Security and Safety 7. Review of Manuals C. Conduct seminar by persons (may include manufacturer’s representatives) who are thoroughly familiar with equipment and installation. D. Provide Engineer duplicate letter signed by Owner’s Representative confirming completion of above. 3.5 VIDEO TAPING OF TRAINING SESSIONS A. The Contractor shall videotape all training sessions required by their discipline. Video to be transferred to DVD format and two (2) copies submitted to the Owner. DVD to be individually marked with training session name, installing Contractor and date of training. 3.6 MANUALS A. Submit a complete manual for all work of this Division, including: 1. Installation, maintenance, operating instructions and full catalog description, including exploded parts drawings of all equipment. 2. Load test results and motor list. 3. Lubrication list for all equipment, including type of lubricant, source and frequency of lubrication stated for each unit of equipment. 4. Control description and diagrams which shall include data required in Subparagraph 1 above. 5. Emergency phone numbers for service for all equipment. 6. List of all Suppliers and Subcontractors, including addresses, responsible personnel and phone numbers. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260100-7 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ELECTRICAL BASIC REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 260100-7 7. All warranties. 8. Schematic diagrams for all systems. 9. Wiring and control diagrams for all equipment. 10. Maintenance schedule for all equipment, including lubrication. 11. Refer to Division 01, General Requirements for additional information. END OF SECTION 260100 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260519-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES QPK NO. 220157.00 260519-1 SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Electrical wires, cables and connectors specified in this Section include all conductors for power distribution circuits, lighting circuits, motor branch circuits and appliance and equipment branch circuits to which 600 volts or less is applied, unless otherwise noted. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compliance and Labeling: Comply with applicable requirements of Codes, Standards and Listing as listed in Section 260100 - Electrical Basic Requirements. B. Manufacturer: Company with minimum five (5) years experience specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s data on electrical wires, cables and connectors. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide wires, cables and connectors of manufacturer’s standard materials, as indicated by published product information; designed and constructed as recommended by manufacturer, for a complete installation, and as required for the installation indicated. 2.2 WIRES AND CABLES A. Provide factory-fabricated wires and cables of sizes, ampacity ratings and materials for applications and services indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection to comply with Project’s installation requirements, NEC and NEMA standards. B. Wires: Provide the following types: 1. Type THHN/THWN: Provide wire having copper conductor and flame-retardant, moisture- and heat-resistant thermoplastic insulation with nylon jacket; rated for maximum operating temperature of 90°C dry, 75°C wet. 2. Type THW: Provide wire having copper conductor and flame-retardant, moisture- and heatresistant thermoplastic insulation; rated for maximum operating temperature of 90°C dry, 75°C wet. 3. Type XHHW: Provide wire having copper conductor and flame-retardant, cross-linked synthetic polymer insulation; rated for maximum operating temperature of 90˚ C dry, 75˚ C wet. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260519-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES QPK NO. 220157.00 260519-2 Acceptable Manufacturers: Southwire Company WESCO Technologies Corporation Approved equal C. Connectors and Splices: Factory-fabricated connectors, splices and lugs of size, ampacity rating, material, type and class for application and service indicated; listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. D. Jacketed Cable Connectors: For steel and aluminum jackets cables, zinc die-cast with set screws, designed to connect conductors specified in this Section. E. Lugs: One piece, seamless, designed to terminate conductors specified in this Section. 1. Material: Copper 2. Type: One or two hole with standard barrels. 3. Termination: Compression F. Acceptable Manufacturers: 3M Electrical Products Atkore International (AFC Cable Systems) Ideal Industries, Inc. Service Wire Co. TE Connectivity Ltd. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Install electrical cables, wires and connectors as indicated, in compliance with applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, UL and NECA’s “Standard of Installation,” and in accordance with recognized industry practices. B. Coordinate wire/cable installation work, including electrical raceway and equipment installation work, as necessary to properly interface with other work. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF WIRES AND CABLES A. Types and Use: Provide wires and cables as indicated on the Contract Drawings and as follows: 1. Type THHN/THWN Wire: Provide for all branch circuits and feeders #3 AWG or smaller, unless otherwise noted. 2. Type XHHW Wire: Provide for all feeders #2 AWG or larger. B. Install all wires in raceway. Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in same raceway. Use pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Use pulling means, including fish cord, cable, rope ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260519-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES QPK NO. 220157.00 260519-3 and basket weave wire/cable grips, which shall not damage conductors or raceway. Do not install conductors in raceway until all work which may cause damage has been completed. C. Keep conductor splices to a minimum. As far as practicable, provide feeder circuits that are continuous from origin to panel termination without running splices in intermediate pull boxes or splicing chambers. D. Provide #12 AWG minimum for branch circuits, except that branch circuits longer than 100' from panel to load center shall be 10 AWG minimum. E. Unless noted otherwise, ensure that each branch circuit is connected to a different phase in the panelboard. F. Install wiring as shown on Contract Drawings; do not combine circuits, unless as allowed by NEC. Increase wire size if necessary to comply with equipment power requirements or derating factors in NEC Article 310, and increase conduit size if necessary to comply with NEC fill requirements. G. Provide sufficient slack (12" minimum) at terminations to make proper connections. H. Install wiring and cabling so that when completed the system shall be free from short circuits and unintentional grounds. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONNECTORS A. Types and Uses 1. In dry interior locations: a. Conductors 8 AWG or Smaller: Provide indent type connectors with insulating jacket or spring type connectors. b. Conductors 6 AWG or Larger: Provide indent type pressure connectors. Fill indentations and cover connector with insulation tape to provide insulation equivalent to that of the conductor. c. Gutter Taps in Panelboards: Provide indent type pressure connectors or bolt-on pressure connector gutter taps having insulating covers. Wrap insulating cover with several wraps of insulation tape so that it is completely covered by the tape. 2. In Damp Interior Locations, or Exterior Locations: Provide indent type pressure connectors and insulate with splice kit. 3. Make cable terminals, taps and splices secure using solderless pressure type connectors. B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturer’s published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer’s torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A and B. C. Tape all joints in a manner approved for circuit voltages. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260519-4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES QPK NO. 220157.00 260519-4 D. Where conductors are to be connected to metallic surfaces, polish the coated surfaces of the metal before installing the connector. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prior to energization of circuitry, check installed wires and cable with megohm meter to determine insulation resistance levels and ensure requirements are fulfilled. B. Prior to energization, test wires and cables for electrical continuity and for short-circuits. C. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuitry and demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements. Where necessary, correct malfunctioning units and then retest to demonstrate compliance. END OF SECTION 260519 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260523-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CONTROL VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES QPK NO. 220157.00 260523-1 SECTION 260523 - CONTROL VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Control/signal conductors specified in this Section include all low voltage conductors used on the Project for the fire alarm and smoke detection system, and energy management system. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. UL Compliance and Labeling: Comply with applicable requirements of UL safety standards pertaining to control/signal wiring, cabling and connectors. Provide products which are UL listed and labeled. B. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC requirements as applicable to construction, installation and color coding of control/signal wires and cables. C. ASTM Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ASTM B1, 2, 3, 8, 33, D-2219 and D-2220. Provide copper conductors with conductivity of not less than 98% at 20°C. D. NEMA/ICEA Compliance: Comply with NEMA/ICEA Standard Publication No. 5, “Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy”. E. Provide conductors in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the equipment to which the conductors are connected. F. Manufacturer: Company with minimum five (5) years experience specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit for approval manufacturer’s data on control/signal conductors. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide control/signal conductors of manufacturer’s standard materials, as indicated by published product information; designed and constructed as recommended by the manufacturer for a complete installation, and as required for the installation indicated. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260523-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CONTROL VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES QPK NO. 220157.00 260523-2 2.2 WIRES AND CABLES A. Provide factory-fabricated wires and cables of sizes, ampacity ratings and materials for applications indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection to comply with Project’s installation requirements, NEC and NEMA requirements. B. All cabling located in air plenum ceilings and above suspended ceiling without conduit shall be plenum rated. C. Provide the following types of wires and cables: 1. Type THHN/THWN Wire: Provide wire having copper conductor and flame-resistant, moisture- and heat-resistant thermoplastic insulation with nylon jacket; rated for maximum operating temperature of 90°C dry and 75°C wet. Acceptable Manufacturers: Southwire Company WESCO General Cable Technologies Corporation Approved equal 2. Type TFN Wire: Provide wire having copper conductor and heat-resistant thermoplastic insulation with nylon jacket; rated for maximum operating temperature of 90°C dry. Acceptable Manufacturers: Southwire Company WESCO General Cable Technologies Corporation Approved equal 3. Multi-Conductor Cable: Provide number of conductors or pairs as required; shielded or unshielded, with or without drain wire, as required; tinned solid copper conductors, minimum size 22 AWG; each conductor individually insulated with polyethylene or PVC, color coded; and with an overall jacket of PVC. Cotton or other insulating materials that deteriorate with age are not acceptable. Acceptable Manufacturers: Allied Wire & Cable Inc. General Cable Technologies Corporation Southwire Company Approved equal 4. Plenum Cable: Provide multi-conductor or paired cable, number of conductors or pairs as required; shielded or unshielded, with or without drain wire, as required; tinned solid copper conductors, minimum size 22 AWG; primary insulation consisting of a fluoropolymer resin rated 300 volts and having a minimum insulation wall thickness of 0.012" for 16 AWG through 22 AWG and 0.014" for 12 and 14 AWG; having a sheath of coated glass fiber or polyester tape; and with a fluoropolymer jacket over marker tape. Provide cables UL listed for flame resistance and low smoke properties in accordance with NEC Articles 725, 760 and 800, and that are approved for use in air plenum ceilings without conduit. Acceptable Manufacturers: Philadelphia Wire & Cable Inc. Superior Essex Inc. West Penn Wire Approved equal ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260523-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CONTROL VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES QPK NO. 220157.00 260523-3 D. Connectors: Factory-fabricated connectors of size, ampacity rating, material, type and class for application and service indicated; listed and labeled as defined NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. E. Acceptable Manufacturers: 3M Electrical Products Atkore International (AFC Cable Systems) Ideal Industries, Inc. Service Wire Co. TE Connectivity Ltd. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Install control/signal conductors as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions, in compliance with applicable requirements of NEC and in accordance with recognized industry practices. B. Coordinate control/signal conductor installation work, including electrical raceway and equipment installation work, as necessary to properly interface with other work. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF WIRES AND CABLES A. Types and Use: Provide control/signal conductors as indicated on the Contract Drawings as recommended by the manufacturer of the equipment to which the conductors are connected and as follows: 1. Type THHN/THWN Wire: Provide for wiring 14 AWG or larger, for nonpower-limited and supply-side power-limited fire alarm wiring, and for Class 1 wiring of other systems. 2. Type TFN Wire: Provide for 18 AWG and 16 AWG wiring for nonpower-limited and supply-side power-limited fire alarm wiring, and for Class 1 wiring of other systems. (Note: Wire complying with the requirements of NEC Articles 725 and 760 may be used in lieu of TFN, providing it is approved by the Engineer.) 3. Multi-Conductor or Twisted-Pair Cable: Provide for all wiring that is installed in raceway, for load-side power-limited fire alarm wiring and for Class 2 and Class 3 wiring of other systems. 4. Plenum Cable: Provide for all wiring that is not installed in raceway, for load-side powerlimited fire alarm wiring and for all Class 2 and Class 3 wiring of other systems. Plenum cable may be used only when so indicated in other sections of these Specifications. B. Install all wires and cables other than plenum cable in raceway, unless noted otherwise on Contract Drawings. Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in same raceway. Use pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Use pulling means, including fish cord, cable, rope and basket weave wire/cable grips, which shall not damage conductors or raceway. Do not install conductors in raceway until all work which may cause damage has been completed. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260523-4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CONTROL VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES QPK NO. 220157.00 260523-4 C. Install plenum cables concealed behind ceiling or wall finish, unless otherwise indicated. Install exposed cables parallel or at right angles to walls or structural members. In areas not provided with ceiling or wall finish, install cables and outlets so as to permit the future application of a room finish without disturbing the cables or resetting the boxes. Provide cable supports as required by NEC. D. Keep conductor splices to a minimum. Install without splices between the control panel and the first outlet, and between outlets. E. Provide 18 AWG minimum for single conductors and 22 AWG minimum for multi-conductor cables. F. Provide sufficient slack (12" minimum) at terminations to make proper connections. G. Install wiring so that when completed the system shall be free from short circuits and unintentional grounds. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONNECTORS A. Make joints in circuits (except coaxial cable) with indent type connectors, spring type connectors or terminal strips. B. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturer’s published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer’s torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A and B. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prior to usage, test control/signal conductors for electrical continuity and for short circuits, and correct any malfunctions. B. Subsequent to control/signal conductor hook-ups, demonstrate proper functioning in accordance with requirements. Where necessary, correct malfunctioning units and then retest to demonstrate compliance. END OF SECTION 260523 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260526-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526-1 QPK NO. 220157.00 SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation and maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Certified by NETA. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION. A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Burndy, Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems. 2. ERICO, a brand of nVent. 3. Thomas & Betts Corporation, a Member of the ABB Group 2.3 CONDUCTORS A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260526-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526-2 QPK NO. 220157.00 3. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter. 4. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 5. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. C. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4 inches x 12 inches in cross section, with 9/32-inch holes spaced 1-1/8 inches apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V and shall be Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V. 2.4 CONNECTORS A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. B. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions. C. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless exothermic-type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar. D. Beam Clamps: Mechanical type, terminal, ground wire access from four directions, with dual, tinplated or silicon bronze bolts. E. Cable-to-Cable Connectors: Compression type, copper or copper alloy. F. Conduit Hubs: Mechanical type, terminal with threaded hub. G. Lay-in Lug Connector: Mechanical type, copper rated for direct burial terminal with set screw. H. Straps: Solid copper, copper lugs. Rated for 600 A. 2.5 GROUNDING ELECTRODES A. Ground Plates: 1/4 inch thick, hot-dip galvanized. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated. B. Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. C. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Install bus horizontally, on insulated spacers 2 inches minimum from wall, 6 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260526-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526-3 QPK NO. 220157.00 D. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. 3.2 GROUNDING AT THE SERVICE A. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall be connected to the ground bus. Install a main bonding jumper between the neutral and ground buses. 3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits. B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70: 1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs. 7. Armored and metal clad cable runs. C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping. D. Water Heater Circuits: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components. E Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. B. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. 2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260526-4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526-4 QPK NO. 220157.00 3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp. C. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. 2. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve. D. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity. E. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet apart. F. Connections: Make connections so possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact are galvanically compatible. 1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact points closer in order of galvanic series. 2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact. 3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechanical clamps. 4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized-steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and mechanical clamps. 5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. B. Perform tests and inspections. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, at ground test wells, and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected. a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260526-5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526-5 QPK NO. 220157.00 without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81. D. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. F. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values: 1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System: 5 ohms. G. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. END OF SECTION 260526 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260533-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-1 QPK NO. 220157.00 SECTION 260533 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Types of raceways, electrical boxes and fittings specified in this Section include the following: 1. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) 2. Flexible Metal Conduit 3. Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit 4. Rigid Metal Conduit 5. Surface Metal raceways 6. Wireways 7. Outlet Boxes 8. Poke-Through Service Fittings 9. Flush Floor Boxes 10. Junction Boxes 12. Pull Boxes 12. Bushings 13. Locknuts 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Dry Location: A location not normally subject to dampness or wetness. B. Damp Location: A location subject to moderate degree of moisture. C. Wet Location: A location subject to saturation with water or other liquids. Installations underground or in concrete slabs or masonry in direct contact with the earth are to be considered as equivalent to wet locations. D. Spaces Which Have Finishing Materials: Areas completed with finishing materials such as paint, plaster, ceramic tile, enamel glazing, face brick, etc., applied to the walls and/or ceilings, including steel roof deck. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compliance and Labeling: Comply with applicable requirements of Codes, Standards and Listing as listed in Section 260100 - Electrical Basic Requirements. B. Manufacturer: Company with minimum five (5) years experience specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260533-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-2 QPK NO. 220157.00 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data. Include specifications and installation instructions for each type of raceway system required. Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide conduit, tubing and fittings of types, sizes and weights for each service indicated. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection to fulfill wiring requirements and to comply with provisions of NEC for raceways. B. For each electrical raceway system indicated, provide a complete assembly of conduit, tubing, with fittings including, but not necessarily limited to, connectors, nipples, couplings, elbows, expansion fittings and other components and accessories as needed to form a complete system of type indicated. C. Provide boxes and fittings of types and sizes indicated and suitable for installation at locations indicated. Where types and sizes are not indicated, provide proper selection to fulfill wiring requirements and to comply with provisions of NEC for boxes and fittings. D. Provide accessories as required for each installation, including box supports, mounting ears and brackets, wall board hangers, box extension rings, fixture studs, cable clamps and metal straps, which are compatible with the boxes being used. Where more than one type of accessory meets NEC requirements, selection is Installer’s option, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Provide electrical metallic tubing (EMT) of mild steel, hot-dipped galvanized, having welded seams and smooth circular bore. Acceptable Manufacturers: ABB Allied Tube and Conduit Wheatland Tube Company Approved equal B. Provide flexible metal conduit fabricated of hot-dipped galvanized steel strip shaped into interlocking convolutions. Acceptable Manufacturers: AFC Cable Systems Approved equal ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260533-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-3 QPK NO. 220157.00 C. Provide liquid-tight flexible metal conduit fabricated of hot-dipped galvanized steel strip shaped into interlocking convolutions with an overall PVC jacket. Acceptable Manufacturers: AFC Cable Systems Approved equal D. Provide rigid metal conduit of mild steel, hot-dipped galvanized, having welded seams and smooth circular bore, with threaded ends. Acceptable Manufacturers: ABB Allied Tube and Conduit Wheatland Tube Company Approved equal E. Provide surface metal raceways of 0.040" steel with buff colored baked enamel finish. Provide type as indicated on the Contract Drawings or as required to fulfill wiring requirements of NEC. 1. Type 1 Raceway: Single-piece type, nominal 3/4" wide, depth as required. Provide Wiremold 500 or 700 or approved equivalent. F. Provide rigid nonmetallic conduit of PVC, UL-listed in accordance with NEC Article 347 and constructed to NEMA Standard TC-2. Provide extra heavy wall conduit, Schedule 80. Provide Allied Tube and Conduit or approved equal. G. Provide lay-in wireways constructed in accordance with UL Standard 870. Provide wireways having hinged covers and connectors that do not require removal to utilize the lay-in feature of the wireway. Protect sheet metal parts with rust inhibiting coating and baked enamel finish. Plate finish hardware to prevent corrosion. To prevent wire insulation damage, provide spring nuts on screws installed toward inside of wireway. Provide wireways with knockouts. Acceptable Manufacturers: ABB Approved equal H Provide connectors, couplings and fittings for conduit as follows: 1. For EMT: Compression ring or set screw type. Acceptable Manufacturers: ABB Approved equal 2. For Flexible Metal Conduit: Connectors with female end having clamp and deep slotted machine screw for securing conduit, male threaded end provided with locknut. Provide straight connectors with one-piece body, 45° and 90° connectors with two-piece body with removable upper section. Acceptable Manufacturers: AFC Cable Systems Approved equal ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260533-4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-4 QPK NO. 220157.00 3. For Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Cadmium plated malleable iron, with compression type steel ferrule and neoprene gasket sealing rings. Acceptable Manufacturers: AFC Cable Systems Approved equal 4. For Rigid Metal Conduit: a. Connectors of cast malleable iron, galvanized or cadmium plated, with locknuts on both sides and bushing on termination side. Acceptable Manufacturers: ABB Approved equal b. Couplings of threaded mild steel, hot-dipped galvanized. Provide couplings of same manufacturer as conduit. I Outlet Boxes: Provide galvanized coated flat rolled sheet-steel boxes. Provide boxes with mounting holes, cable and conduit knockouts in bottom and sides and mounting lugs or ears for covers. Provide with threaded screw holes and corrosion-resistant screws for fastening cable clamps and covers, and for equipment grounding. Acceptable Manufacturers: ABB (Steel City) Approved equal J. Switch Boxes: Provide gangable galvanized coated flat rolled sheet-steel boxes. Provide flush mounting boxes, mounting holes, cable and conduit knockouts in bottom and ends and mounting lugs or ears for covers. Provide with threaded screw holes and corrosion-resistant screws for fastening cable clamps and covers and for equipment grounding. Acceptable Manufacturers: ABB (Steel City) Approved equal K. Poke-Through Service Fittings: 1. Poke-Through Service Fitting (Power/Communication): a. Provide poke-through suitable for installation in a cored floor opening. Shall be complete with junction box, conduit and flush devices as indicated on plans. The complete assembly shall be suitable for two hour fire rated floors, be UL CEYY listed and have UL scrub water protected metallic color as selected by the Architect cover and trim ring. Cover shall be suitable for carpet, tile, wood and concrete. Unit protrusion above floor plane shall not exceed 0.2". Extend or reduce unit raceway length as needed to accommodate floor thickness and project conditions. Provide indicated devices in units. b. Type C: 8 in. diameter core unit with capacity for five duplex 20A receptacle or 22 RJ45 communication outlets, minimum, and any combination of these and or audio/visual connections. c. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hubbell S1 Series (Design Make) Steel City Wiremold Approved equal L. Flush Floor Boxes: Boxes shall be cast in place with height adjustability prior to pour. Provide power, communication and/or audio/visual outlets as indicated. Installation shall be suitable for ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260533-5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-5 QPK NO. 220157.00 the intended floor finish: if carpet, then provide a carpet flange, if tile/terrazzo/concrete finish, then provide a collar flush with finished floor and no flange. Units shall be stamped steel with a depth of 2 standard depth of 3.75 in. Units shall meet UL scrub water protected requirements. To have integral ground terminal. 1. Fire rated multiple service type unit to have 100 cubic inches of device volume minimum, four individual entrance compartments each with two (2) 1-1/4 in. and one (1) 3/4 in. conduit knockouts/hubs, removable dividers between compartments and reinforced cover with color to match surrounding and hinged cable opening (dust protection and support to keep all weight off cables). Provide flooring insert. Unit shall be UL CEYY listed. Provide the following device plates for each compartment with spares turned over to the Owner. a. Standard duplex. b. Style line/decorator/GFI duplex. c. Six port RJ45. d. Blank. e. Plates for any devices indicated. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Wiremold Omni or RFB Series, CEYY listed Approved equal. M. Junction and Pull Boxes: Provide galvanized code-gauge sheet-steel boxes with welded seams, screw-on covers and stainless steel hardware. Provide boxes with knockouts as required. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hoffman Approved equal N. Threaded Outlet Boxes: Provide malleable iron boxes with cadmium finish, with threaded conduit holes. Acceptable Manufacturers: ABB Approved equal O. Bushings: Provide malleable iron, insulated bushings. Acceptable Manufacturers: ABB Approved equal P. Locknuts: Provide corrosion-resistant conduit locknuts. Acceptable Manufacturers: ABB Approved equal PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Location: Before proceeding with the installation, verify the location of all raceways and electrical boxes. Where locations are shown on the Drawings, the locations are not to be changed, unless so directed by the Engineer’s Representative. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260533-6 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-6 QPK NO. 220157.00 3.2 GENERAL A. Install raceways as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions, and in compliance with NECA’s “Standards of Installation” and NEC. B. For electrically operated units, use roughing-in dimensions furnished by supplier. Set conduit and boxes for connection to units only after reviewing dimensions and after checking location with other trades. C. Coordinate with other trades. Install raceways above lay-in ceilings in such a manner that they do not interfere with the lift-out feature of the ceiling system. D. Provide expansion fittings in raceways every 200' linear run or wherever structural expansion joints are crossed. E. Raceways are not to cross pipe shafts or ventilating duct openings and are not to be routed through elevator shafts, or elevator mechanical rooms, unless specifically serving elevator or elevator related systems. F. Install electrical boxes and fittings as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA’s “Standard of Installation” and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill Project requirements. G. Electrical boxes are to be recessed in all new walls and surface mounted on existing masonry walls unless otherwise indicated. H. Ground and bond raceway and boxes in accordance with Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUIT SYSTEMS A. Types and Locations: Provide conduit as follows, as indicated on the Drawings, and as required to satisfy requirements of NEC: 1. EMT: Provide for all branch circuits and interior feeders, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide for final branch circuit conduit connections to recessed ceiling lighting fixtures. Nominal trade size of 3/8" may be used if length is 6' or less. 3. Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide for final branch circuit connections to all motors and other equipment subject to vibration. Provide an 18" length at all motors. 4. Rigid Metal Conduit: Provide in wet locations and in areas where physical damage can occur. Provide for feeders and exterior work as indicated on the Drawins. B. Interior Conduits 1. Concealed Conduits: Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, install conduits concealed in new walls or partitions of the building, above suspended ceilings, or under concrete floor slab or in ceiling slab; conduits are not to be installed within floors-on-grade or in areas ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260533-7 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-7 QPK NO. 220157.00 where the surface of the concrete floor or ceiling is specified to be exposed. (See Room Finish Schedule of Contract Documents.) a. Partitions or Side Walls: Avoid horizontal runs. Horizontal runs are not permitted in masonry walls. b. Structural Members: Install conduits so as not to damage or run through structural members. c. If any portions of the conduit system cannot be installed concealed due to conditions encountered in building, report such conditions and await approval in writing before proceeding. d. Furnish and install a minimum of five (5) 3/4” empty conduits in the top of all recessed panelboards. Stub conduits into the suspended ceiling space directly above the panelboard and terminate in individual junction boxes for future use. 2. Exposed Conduits: Install vertical runs perpendicular to the floor. Install runs on the ceiling perpendicular or parallel to the walls. Install horizontal runs parallel to the floor. Do not install conduits directly on the floor. Do not run conduits in close proximity to heating pipes. Maintain a separation of 3" from water and waste piping and 12" from steam piping. Install exposed conduit work so as not to interfere with ceiling inserts, lights, ventilation ducts, or outlets. Exposed conduits shall be allowed only in mechanical rooms and in certain other areas where indicated on the Drawings. a. Waterproof Walls: Run conduits for outlets exposed. Set supporting anchors in waterproof cement. b. Mechanical Rooms: Install conduits as high as possible and coordinate locations with other trades to avoid interference. C. Conduit Size: Do not provide raceways smaller than 1/2" inside diameter. Otherwise provide code size conduits, unless larger conduits are indicated on the Drawings. D. Conduit Ends: Install conduits of length to fit properly in outlet boxes and cabinets. Arrange terminations in cabinets with the ends at the same level. Plug the ends of conduits with a cap to exclude all foreign materials until wiring is installed. E. Bends: Provide manufactured or field fabricated offsets or bends. Make field fabricated offsets or bends with a bender specifically designed for this purpose and without damaging the circular bore. The radius of the inner curve of all bends shall not be less than allowed by NEC. F. Cutting of Conduits: Use a cutter which shall give even cut ends. Ream the cut end after threading has been completed and file as required to result in a smooth finished cut. G. Conduit for Future Use: Provide a pull cord in each conduit installed for future use. H. Parallel Feeders: Keep conduits the same length. Install all phase conductors with their neutral conductor in the same conduit to reduce the inductive effect. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260533-8 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-8 QPK NO. 220157.00 3.4 INSTALLATION OF SURFACE METAL RACEWAY AND WIREWAY A. General: Mechanically assemble to form a continuous electrical conductor and connect to boxes, fittings and cabinets so as to provide effective electrical continuity and rigid mechanical assembly. 1. Bends: Make changes in direction with proper fittings, supplied by wireway manufacturer. No field bends of sections shall be permitted. 2. Supports: Properly support and anchor wireways for their entire length; do not span any space unsupported. 3. Boxes: Use boxes as supplied by wireway manufacturer wherever junction, pull or device boxes are required. Standard electrical “handy” boxes, etc., shall not be permitted for use with wireway installations. B. Surface Metal Raceway: Provide surface metal raceway for exposed raceway system in spaces that have finishing materials, unless otherwise specified or indicated. Do not run through walls which have a plaster finish nor through masonry walls or floors. Provide a pipe sleeve, or a short length of conduit complete with junction boxes and adapter fittings for runs through such areas. Install along top of baseboards, care being taken to avoid telephone and other signal wiring. Where raceway crosses chair railing or picture molding, cut the railing or molding to permit the raceway to lie flat against the wall. Install raceway around door frames and other openings. Run on ceiling or walls perpendicular to or parallel with walls and floors. 1. Covers: For boxes for pendant mounted fluorescent fixtures on surface metal raceway outlets, covers may be omitted providing the Contractor notches the fixture canopy to receive the raceway and the canopy fits snugly against the ceiling. 2. Box Extension: Provide box extension adapter on existing outlet boxes where circuits are extended to new outlets. C. Wireways: Secure sections to structures independently from conduit terminations. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL BOXES A. Types and Locations: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following types of boxes: 1. Concealed Work: Provide standard 4" square or octagonal outlet boxes for lighting fixtures, receptacles, etc., with device covers; provide plaster rings as required. Outlet boxes located in finished wall surfaces other than plaster, such as tile, marble or concrete block, are to be of design that shall permit the face plates to cover the openings made for the installation of the boxes. Where ganging of switches is required, provide switch box minimum 3" high by width as required for number of switches. Provide junction and pull boxes with flush covers. 2. Exposed Work: Provide threaded type boxes and fittings for all work, except that on conduit sized 1-1/4" or larger, provide standard galvanized steel junction and pull boxes. Provide FS boxes for switch and receptacle outlets where a maximum of two (2) conductors “in” and two (2) conductors “out” enter each box; where more than four (4) conductors enter each box, provide FD boxes. Do not locate surface mounted junction or pull boxes in finished rooms. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260533-9 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-9 QPK NO. 220157.00 B. Mounting of Outlet Boxes: Install boxes for single and duplex receptacles so that the long axis of the face plate shall be vertical unless specifically designated to be horizontally mounted. Do not install outlet boxes “back-to-back” in walls. C. Floor outlet boxes and poke-through service fittings shall be installed flush with finished floor, adjust level and tile as required. Where finished floor is terrazzo, provide boxes specifically designed for installation in terrazzo. Where floors are to receive carpet or flooring material, coordinate with appropriate trade and provide insert. Rectangular covers shall be parallel and perpendicular with the building and, if used, floor tile/floor joints/pattern. Coordinate cover type with the flooring and device type. D. Size and Spacing of Junction and Pull Boxes: Provide junction or pull boxes of proper size and design when required to facilitate installation of wires. Install boxes of sizes as required by NEC; locate boxes at intervals consistent with maximum allowable wire and cable pulling tensions. E. Height of Wall Outlets: Refer to the Contract Drawings for the mounting height of electrical system components. F. Supports: Fasten electrical boxes firmly and rigidly to structural surfaces to which attached, or solidly embed in concrete or masonry. Boxes must be supported independently of conduits entering them. 3.6 FIRESTOPPING. A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating according to Division 07 Sections. 1. All penetrations shall be under constant visual surveillance until firestopping is applied unless an approved "ILSM" is in place for each location. 2. Products: Specified Technologies, Inc. END OF SECTION 260533 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260936-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LIGHTING CONTROL 260936 - 1 QPK NO. 220157.00 SECTION 260936 - LIGHTING CONTROL PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide a complete lighting control system as indicated on the Contract Documents and as specified herein. Refer to Lighting Control Schedule on Contract Drawings for additional information. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All methods of construction, details of workmanship that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents, shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated in their respective sections of the specifications. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Equipment types, device ratings, dimensions, etc. correspond to the nomenclature dictated by those manufacturers. All equipment shall be tested at the factory. B. Installation shall be accordance with NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code), energy conservation codes, state codes, local codes, and requirements of authority having jurisdiction. C. Equipment shall be designed, manufactured, assembled, and tested in accordance with the latest revisions of applicable published ANSI, NEMA and IEEE Standards. D. All equipment shall NRTL tested. E. The controls provider must: 1. Provide equipment from manufacturers for which they maintain a contract, distributorship, are an agent, or other formal arrangement for which documentation can be produced showing authority to sell and service the equipment in this territory. 2. Demonstrate that they have successfully installed similar systems, utilizing their standard products, for a minimum period of five (5) years. 3. Maintain adequate spare parts inventory to provide both normal and emergency service. 4. Employ service technicians who are trained in accordance with the systems manufacturer's recommendations. 5. Own and demonstrate proficiency in the use of the required test equipment, tools, etc. for the proper installation, set-up, testing and maintenance of the system. If requested, must provide a listing of tools and/or equipment and where appropriate, certifications in the proper training and use of the tools and/or equipment. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260936-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LIGHTING CONTROL 260936 - 2 QPK NO. 220157.00 a. Provide all system programming to meet the Owner's requirements. b. All system programming is to be completed to the satisfaction of the Owner. After six (6) months of use of the system, and/or training, the increased understanding of the system's features and capabilities necessitates reprogramming to any extent, it is to be performed at no additional cost. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following equipment, materials, and products including all components and accessories: 1. Digital Lighting Control System 2. Vacancy/occupancy Sensors 3. Low Voltage Switches 4. Wiring diagrams 5. Equipment data sheets 6. Commissioning Plan 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The lighting control system and/or components, as specified and indicated on the drawings to provide the intended and required control of the lighting systems, includes but is not limited to a digital lighting control system, automatic lighting control system, and associated room controllers and switches. B. All components and assemblies are to be factory pretested. C. Manufacturer shall utilize open communication protocol (Bacnet, Modbus, etc) for transferring information between network devices, allowing the lighting control system to be interoperable with devices from other manufacturers and with other network systems such as building control or other systems. 1.6 DIGITAL SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Additional Lighting Control system as defined under this section covers the following equipment: 1. Digital Room Controllers – Self-configuring, digitally addressable one, two or three relays controllers with 0-10 volt control for ballasts (where dimming is indicated) and single relay application-specific plug load controllers. 2. Digital Occupancy Sensors – Self-configuring, digitally addressable and calibrated occupancy sensors with LCD display and two-way active infrared (IR) communications. Shall be capable of manual on operation. 3. Digital Switches – Self-configuring, digitally addressable pushbutton switches, dimmers, and scene switches with two-way active infrared (IR) communications. 4. Configuration Tools – Handheld remote for room configuration provides two way infrared (IR) communications to digital devices and allows complete configuration and reconfiguration of the device / room from up to 30 feet away. Unit to have Organic LED display, simple pushbutton interface, and allow send and receive of room variables and store of occupancy sensor settings. Computer software also customizes room settings. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260936-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LIGHTING CONTROL 260936 - 3 QPK NO. 220157.00 5. Digital Lighting local network – open topology, plug-in wiring system (Cat 5e) for power and data to room devices. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Vacancy/Occupancy Sensors: 1. Wall or ceiling mounted (to suit installation) dual technology digital (passive infrared and ultrasonic) occupancy sensor. Provide unit to accommodate the square-foot coverage requirements for each area controlled, utilizing room controllers, digital occupancy sensors and accessories to meet the lighting and electrical system parameters. 2. Sensors shall provide graphic LCD display for digital calibration and electronic documentation. Features shall include the following: a. Sensitivity: 0-100% in 10% increments. b. Time Delay: 1-30 minutes in 1 minute increment. Time delay shall be set 20 minutes from the factory. c. Detection Technology: Dual technology activation and or re-activation. The sensor shall be capable of being set to either PRI & Ultrasonic, PIR Only or Ultrasonic Only as required by the space being controlled. d. Test mode – Five second time delay e. Walk-through mode f. Load parameters including Auto (Occupancy) / Manual (Vacancy) - ON, blink warning, and daylight enable/disable when photosenors/day-light sensors are included in the digital network. 3. Two RJ-45 port(s) for connection to digital lighting control network. 4. Two-way infrared (IR) transceiver to allow remote programming through handheld commissioning tool and control by remote personal controls. 5. Device Status LEDs including: a. PIR Detection b. Ultrasonic detection c. Configuration mode 6. Assignment of occupancy sensor to a specific load within the room without wiring or special tools. 7. Manual override of controlled loads. 8. Multiple occupancy sensors may be installed in a room by simply connecting them to the open topology digital lighting control network. No additional configuration will be required. a. Acceptable Manufacturer: WattStopper product numbers: LMDC Approved equal. B. Digital Wall Switches 1. Low voltage momentary pushbutton switches to have 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 8 button configurations; colors to be white, light almond, ivory, grey and black; compatible with wall plates with decorator opening. The color shall match the other devices and be coordinated with the architect. Wall switches shall include the following features: a. Two-way infrared (IR) transceiver for use with personal and configuration remote controls. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260936-4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LIGHTING CONTROL 260936 - 4 QPK NO. 220157.00 b. Red configuration LED on each switch that blinks to indicate data transmission. c. Blue Load/Scene Status LED on each switch button with the following characteristics: a) Bi-level LED that is field configurable. b) Dim locator level indicates power to switch c) Bright status level indicates that load or scene is active d. Dimming switches shall include seven bi-level LEDs to indicate load levels using 14 steps. 2. Two RJ-45 ports for connection to DLM local network. 3. Multiple digital wall switches may be installed in a room by connecting them to the open lighting control network. No additional configuration shall be required to achieve multi-way switching. 4. The following switch attributes shall be changed or selected using a wireless configuration tool or laptop: a. Load and Scene button function reconfigured for individual buttons (from Load to Scene, and vice versa). b. Individual button function may be configured to Toggle, On only or Off only. c. Individual scenes may be locked to prevent unauthorized change. d. Fade Up and Fade Down times for individual scenes and loads adjustable from 0 seconds to 18 hours. e. Ramp rate adjustable for each dimmer switch from 0 to 10 minutes. f. Switch buttons may be bound to any load on any room controller and are not load type dependent; each button may be bound to multiple loads. 5. WattStopper product numbers: LMSW and LMDW Series or approved equal. B. Room Controllers 1. Room Controllers automatically bind the room loads to the connected devices in the space without the use of any tools. Room Controllers shall be provided to match the room lighting load and control requirements. The controllers will not have, dip switches, potentiometers or require special configuration. The control units will include the following features: a. Automatic room configuration to the most energy-efficient sequence of operation based upon the devices in the room. b. Replacement – Using the default automatic configuration capabilities, a room controller may be replaced with an off-the-shelf unit without requiring any configuration or setup. c. Device Status LEDs to indicate: 1) Data transmission 2) Device has power 3) Status for each load 4) Configuration status d. Installation features: 1) Standard junction box mounting 2) Low voltage connections using standard RJ-45 patch cable e. Plenum rated f. Manual override and LED indication for each load ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260936-5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LIGHTING CONTROL 260936 - 5 QPK NO. 220157.00 g. Dual voltage (120/277 VAC, 60 Hz) with full 20A rated isolated relays. h. Zero cross circuitry switching for each load. 2. On/Off/Dimming enhanced Room Controllers shall include: a. Real time current monitoring b. One, two or three relay configuration c. Efficient 250 mA switching power supply d. 70 deg. C rating. e. Four RJ-45 digital lighting control network ports. f. One (1) 0-10V analog output per relay for control of compatible dimming ballasts and LED drivers. g. Capability to provide forward phase dimming control for two separate loads. Compatible with line voltage luminaires being dimmed. h. Network Bridge for BACnet MS/TP communications to allow communication and networking of all building room controllers. i. The following dimming attributes may be changed or selected using a wireless configuration tool: 1) Establish preset level for each load from 0-100% 2) Set high and low trim for each load 3) Set controller for switched or dimmed applications j. Discrete model listed for connection to receptacles, for occupancy-based control of plug loads within the space. Locations requiring connection to receptacles are indicated on the construction drawings as a "controlled" receptacle. k. One relay configuration only l. Automatic-ON/OFF configuration m. Room controllers shall have a separate isolated relay interface to allow direct connection to the building management system (BMS) for occupied/unoccupied control through the room occupancy sensors. n. Acceptable Manufacturer: WattStopper product numbers: LMRC-210 and LMRC-220 Series. Approved Equal. C. Digital Lighting Control Network 1. The system network is to be an open topology lighting control physical connection and communication protocol designed to control the lighting in a area of a building. Digital room devices to connect to the network using CAT 5e cables with RJ-45 connectors to provide both data and power to room devices. Features to include: a. Plug n’ Go automatic configuration and binding of occupancy sensors, switches and lighting loads to the most energy-efficient sequence of operation based upon the device attached. b. Replacement of any device in the network with a standard off the shelf unit without requiring commissioning, configuration or setup. D. Configuration Tools 1. Provide a configuration tool to facilitate optional customization of digital lighting control system, and used to set up open loop daylighting sensors. The wireless configuration tool shall feature infrared communications, while PC software connects to each local network via a USB interface. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260936-6 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LIGHTING CONTROL 260936 - 6 QPK NO. 220157.00 2. Features and functionality of the wireless configuration tool shall include: a. Two-way infrared (IR) communication with system devices within a range of approximately 30 feet. b. High visibility organic LED (OLED) display, pushbutton user interface and menu-driven operation. c. Read, modify and send parameters for occupancy sensors, daylighting sensors, room controllers and buttons on digital wall switches and network settings. d. Save up to nine occupancy sensor setting profiles, and apply profiles to selected sensors. e. Temporarily adjust light level of any load(s) on the local network, and incorporate those levels in scene setting. f. Adjust or fine-tune daylighting settings established during autocommissioning, and input light level data to complete commissioning of open loop daylighting controls. 3. Provide a total of two (2) configuration tools. The units shall be turned over to the owner for distributions to the building occupants and the campus facilities group to allow for future modifications to the DLM local network system setup and programming. 4. Acceptable Manufacturer: WattStopper Product Number: LMCT-100. Approved equal 2.2 VACANCY/OCUPANCY SENSORS A. Vacancy/occupancy Sensors: 1. Vacancy/occupancy sensors shall comply with the following as a minimum: a. Zero crossing switching operation (switch on/off only where sine wave is at zero volts) suitable for linear, non-linear and electronic/magnetic fluorescent ballasts for the loads indicated. Where the load to be controlled exceeds the sensor load rating provide a separate relay of adequate rating. b. Failure of the unit shall be to the on/closed position or manual operation. c. Motion sensitivity adjustment (dip switch or dial) and time delay adjustment (5 to 30 minutes minimum, dip switch or dial). d. Line voltage input and switching. Field selectable for 120 or 277 VAC, 60 Hz. e. UL listed and have a five (5) year manufacturer full replacement warranty. f. Test mode feature to override the set time delay to allow adjusting of the sensitivity. g. Sensor locations shall be adjusted during construction and at occupancy as recommended by the manufacturer for optimal sensing and operation. h. Operation shall be field selectable manual "on" with close switch/contact upon motion sensing and open after the set amount of time delay without motion or automatic on upon motion sensing. i. Adjustable controls/settings shall only be accessible when the front cover is removed or from the back of the unit. j. Unit color shall match the project devices except for the ceiling-mounted units which shall match the ceiling color. All color selections shall be by the Architect. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260936-7 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LIGHTING CONTROL 260936 - 7 QPK NO. 220157.00 k. Ultrasonic sensing shall not be affected by air movement and shall operate at 32 kHz minimum (shall not interfere with hearing aids or other equipment). l. Provide components as needed for the indicated control. m. A factory-authorized representative shall coordinate and instruct the startup services of the sensors providing placement recommendations, connection guidance and startup supervision and adjustment. 2. Wall Mounted - Dual Technology (PIR and Ultrasonic): a. Unit shall fit into a standard single gang electrical box, have an Off button, and utilize PIR and ultrasonic technology motion sensing. Both types of sensing are needed for contact closure but only one (1) is needed to keep it closed. b. Minimum Switching Capacity: 120 V - 800 W, 277 V - 1200 W. c. The sensing shall be 180 degrees and the sensitivity area to be a minimum of: 1) Major Motion (Walking/Arm Wave): 35 ft. x 30 ft. 2) Minor Motion (Small Motion at Desk): 20 ft. x 15 ft. d. Ambient light level sensing (adjustable 20-300 fc) to prevent "On" operation when the ambient light level is greater than the setpoint level. e. High impact resistant sensor lens. f. Acceptable Manufacturers: Watt Stopper DW-100 & DW-200 Series (Design Make) Hubbell Model Cooper Sensor Switch 3. Wall Mounted - Dual Technology - Dual Switching: a. Unit shall fit into a standard single gang electrical box, have two (2) Off buttons, and utilize PIR and ultrasonic technology motion sensing. Both types of sensing are needed for contact closure but only one (1) is needed to keep it closed. To have two (2) contacts each fully rated, electrically separate and be commonly controlled. b. Minimum Switching Capacity: 120 V - 800 W, 277 V - 1200 W. c. The sensing shall be 180 degrees and the sensitivity area to be a minimum of: 1) Major Motion (Walking/Arm Wave): 35 ft. x 30 ft. 2) Minor Motion (Small Motion at Desk): 20 ft. x 15 ft. d. Ambient light level sensing (adjustable 20-300fc) to prevent "On" operation when the ambient light level is greater than the setpoint level. e. High impact resistant sensor lens. f. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hubbell Model AD1277x2 (Design Make) Watt Stopper Cooper Sensor Switch 4. Ceiling Mounted - Ultrasonic: a. Unit shall mount to standard octagonal box, have auxiliary contact (Form C, 0.5A at 24 VDC), and utilize ultrasonic sensing. b. Shall have self-contained rated contacts or control a separate switch pack. If a self-contained unit, then the ratings and function shall meet or exceed the switch pack specifications. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260936-8 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LIGHTING CONTROL 260936 - 8 QPK NO. 220157.00 c. Sensing shall be 360 degrees with a minimum operating area of: 1) Major Motion (Walking/Arm Wave): 50 ft. x 30 ft. 2) Minor Motion (Small Motion at Desk): 40 ft. x 20 ft. d. Corridor (Major Motion): 50 ft. x 16 ft. e. Units shall be suitable for overlap of motion detection areas without reduction in spacing and false operation. f. Sensing shall be suitable for a ceiling/mounting height of up to 12 ft. minimum. g. Ambient light level sensing (adjustable 20-300 fc) to prevent "On" operation when the ambient light level is greater than the setpoint level. h. The maximum depth shall be 1.5 in. below the ceiling/box. 1) Acceptable Manufacturers: Hubbell Model ATU2000CRP (Design Make) Watt Stopper Cooper Sensor Switch 5. Ceiling Mounted - Dual Technology: a. Unit shall mount to standard octagonal box, have auxiliary contact (Form C, 0.5A at 24 VDC), and utilize PIR and ultrasonic technology motion sensing. Both types of sensing are needed for contact closure but only one (1) is needed to keep it closed. b. Shall have self-contained rated contacts or control a separate switch pack. If a self-contained unit, then the ratings and function shall meet or exceed the switch pack specifications. c. Sensing shall be 360 degrees with a minimum operating area of: 1) Major Motion (Walking/Arm Wave): 50 ft. x 30 ft. 2) Minor Motion (Small Motion at Desk): 40 ft. x 20 ft. d. Corridor (Major Motion): 50 ft. x 16 ft. e. Units shall be suitable for overlap of motion detection areas without reduction in spacing and false operation. f. Sensing shall be suitable for a ceiling/mounting height of up to 12 ft. minimum. g. Ambient light level sensing (adjustable 20-300 fc) to prevent "On" operation when the ambient light level is greater than the setpoint level. h. The maximum depth shall be 1.5 in. below the ceiling/box. i. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hubbell Model ATD2000CRP (Design Make) Watt Stopper Cooper Sensor Switch 6. Switch Pack: a. Provide a minimum of one (1) switch pack for each ceiling-mounted vacancy sensor. Provide additional units for multiple circuits (quantity to match the quantity of circuits). b. Unit shall be plenum rated with line voltage side into a metallic box. c. Low voltage power shall be suitable for a minimum of three (3) sensors. Multiple sensors shall be able to control a single switch pack. d. Minimum switching capacity shall be 20A (all types of loads) at 120/277 VAC. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260936-9 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LIGHTING CONTROL 260936 - 9 QPK NO. 220157.00 B. Testing: 1. Each sensor shall be fully tested for proper operation of all functions after installation. 2. Testing shall include sensitivity, time delay, ambient lighting level, manual "on", auto "off", etc. 3. Operation and settings shall be acceptable to the Owner. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, TESTING AND TRAINING A. Manufacturer shall provide a factory trained technician to confirm proper installation and operation of all system components. B. Manufacturer shall provide factory trained application engineer to train owner personnel in the operation and programming of the lighting control system. C. Manufacturer shall provide system documentation including: 1. System 1-line showing all components, number and type of switches. 2. Drawings for each component showing hardware configuration and numbering. 3. Device and network wiring schedules. 4. Typical wiring diagrams for each component. D. All low voltage control cabling shall be plenum rated. Cabling shall be installed in conduit in vertical runs in walls/partitions. 3.2 RESPONSIBILITY A. The manufacturer shall submit engineering drawings of the system with specification sheets covering all component parts for approval prior to installation. All electronic equipment shall be approved by UL and shall be products of a single manufacturer of established reputation and experience. B. Supervision of Installation and Final Testing: 1. The lighting control system manufacturer shall include in his pricing to the Electrical Contractor 16 hours to perform testing and start-up of all system components. 2. The lighting conttol system's manufacturer shall supply at least one (1) service technician after all systems have been tested and in full operation as described above to assist the installing electrician to demonstrate and instruct the Owner's Representative on the operation and any uniqueness of the dimming system. Minimum time required for Owner instruction of the system is two (2) eight (8) hour session. Time of demonstration and instruction to be at Owner's convenience during normal working hours. 3. The presence of the system manufacturer's service technicians to assist the installing electrician in all of the above is a requirement of this project and proof of time expended shall be provided to the Owner's Representative. 4. The project bid shall include two (2) eight (8) hour days startup assistance and training to include transportation and accommodations for two (2) site visits. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260936-10 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LIGHTING CONTROL 260936 - 10 QPK NO. 220157.00 3.3 SYSTEM TEST AND APPROVAL A. The lighting control system(s) shall be commissioned to verify sensor location, time delay & sensitivity is properly set, override times & controls, day-lighting control is operating correctly, communications between control panels is operational, and timeclock controls. B. The Contractor shall submit a written test report from an authorized representative of the equipment manufacturer indicating that the system has been 100% tested and approved. C. The Contractor shall provide instruction to the Owner's Representative with regard to use and operation of the system. Obtain signed receipt from Owner's Representative that instruction has been given. END OF SECTION 260936 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262213-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOW-VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS 262213-1 QPK NO. 220157.00 SECTION 262213 - LOW-VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes distribution, dry-type transformers with a nominal primary and secondary rating of 600 V and less, with capacities up to 1500 kVA. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product: 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type and size of transformer. 2. Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum clearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of transformer. B. Shop Drawings 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agency. B. Source quality control reports. C. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Accredited by NETA. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262213-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOW-VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS 262213-2 QPK NO. 220157.00 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Inspection: On receipt, inspect for and note any shipping damage to packaging and transformer. 1. If manufacturer packaging is removed for inspection, and transformer will be stored after inspection, re-package transformer using original or new packaging materials that provide protection equivalent to manufacturer's packaging. B. Storage: Store in a warm, dry, and temperature-stable location in original shipping packaging. C. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit, throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity. D. Handling: Follow manufacturer's instructions for lifting and transporting transformers. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Square D Schneider Electric No substitutions B. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS A. Description: Factory-assembled and tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service. B. Comply with NFPA 70. 1. Electrical components, Devices and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency and marked for intended location and use. C. Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger. 1. Comply with 10 CFR 431 (DOE 2016) efficiency levels. 2. Marked as compliant with DOE 2016 efficiency levels by an NRTL. 2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS A. Comply with NFPA 70. B. Cores: Electrical grade, non-aging silicon steel with high permeability and low hysteresis losses. 1. One leg per phase. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262213-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOW-VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS 262213-3 QPK NO. 220157.00 2. Core volume shall allow efficient transformer operation at 10 percent above the nominal tap voltage. 3. Grounded to enclosure. C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps. 1. Coil Material: Copper. 2. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type. 3. Terminal Connections: Bolted. D. Encapsulation: Transformers smaller than 30 kVA shall have core and coils completely resin encapsulated. E. Enclosure: Ventilated 1. NEMA 250, Type 2: Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound to seal out moisture and air. 2. KVA Ratings: Based on convection cooling only and not relying on auxiliary fans. 3. Wiring Compartment: Sized for conduit entry and wiring installation. 4. Finish: Comply with NEMA 250. a. Finish Color: ANSI 61 gray, weather resistant enamel. F. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and four 2.5 percent taps below normal full capacity. G. Insulation Class, 30 kVA and Larger: 220 degree C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum 115degree C rise above 40 degree C ambient temperature. H. Grounding: Provide ground-bar kit or a ground bar installed on the inside of the transformer enclosure. I. Electrostatic Shielding: Each winding shall have an independent, single, full-width copper electrostatic shield arranged to minimize interwinding capacitance. 1. Arrange coil leads and terminal strips to minimize capacitive coupling between input and output terminals. 2. Include special terminal for grounding the shield. J. Low-Sound-Level Requirements: Maximum sound levels when factory tested according to IEEE C57.12.91, as follows: 1. 50.01 to 150.00 kVA: 50 dBA for K-factors of 1, 4 and 9. 2.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-acrylic or melamine plastic signs for each distribution transformer, mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262213-4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOW-VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS 262213-4 QPK NO. 220157.00 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.01 and IEEE C57.12.91. 1. Resistance measurements of all windings at rated voltage connections and at all tap connections. 2. Ratio tests at rated voltage connections and at all tap connections. 3. Phase relation and polarity tests at rated voltage connections. 4. No load losses and excitation current and rated voltage at rated voltage connections. 5. Impedance and load losses at rated current and rated frequency at rated voltage connections. 6. Applied and induced tensile tests. 7. Regulation and efficiency at rated load and voltage. 8. Insulation-resistance Tests: a. High-voltage to ground. b. Low-voltage to ground. c. High-voltage to low-voltage. 9. Temperature tests. B. Factory Sound-Level Tests: Conduct prototype sound-level tests on production line products. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for each transformer. B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions. C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where transformers will be installed. D. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at location of transformer. E. Environment: Enclosures shall be rated for the environment in which they are located. Covers for NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosures shall not cause accessibility problems. F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install wall-mounted transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated by transformer manufacturer. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262213-5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOW-VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS 262213-5 QPK NO. 220157.00 1. Coordinate installation of wall-mounted and structure-hanging supports with actual transformer provided B. Install transformers level and plumb on a concrete base with vibration-dampening supports. Locate transformers away from corners and not parallel to adjacent wall surface. C. Construct concrete bases according to Contract Drawings and anchor floor-mounted transformers according to manufacturer's written instructions and requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." 1. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast anchorbolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete. D. Secure transformer to concrete base according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Secure covers to enclosure and tighten all bolts to manufacturer-recommended torques to reduce noise generation. F. Remove shipping bolts, blocking, and wedges. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" and details on Contract Drawings. B. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B. D. Provide flexible connections at all conduit and conductor terminations and supports to eliminate sound and vibration transmission to the building structure. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Perform tests and inspections. C. Dry-Type Transformer Field Tests: 1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection. a. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. b. Inspect anchorage, alignment and grounding. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262213-6 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOW-VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS 262213-6 QPK NO. 220157.00 c. Verify that resilient mounts are free and that any shipping brackets have been removed. d. Verify the unit is clean. e. Perform specific inspections and mechanical tests recommended by manufacturer. f. Verify that as-left tap connections are as specified. g. Verify the presence of surge arresters and that their ratings are as specified. 2. Electrical Tests. a. Measure resistance at each winding, tap, and bolted connection. b. Perform insulation-resistance tests winding-to-winding and each winding-to-ground. Apply voltage according to manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.5. Calculate polarization index: the value of the index shall not be less than 1.0. c. Perform turns-ratio tests at all tap positions. Test results shall not deviate by more than one-half percent from either the adjacent coils or the calculated ratio. If test fails, replace the transformer. d. Verify correct secondary voltage, phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral, after energization and prior to loading. D. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above. E. Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed "Satisfactory Test" label to tested component. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical occupancy period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals. Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 5 percent and not being lower than nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap settings as test results. B. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings. 3.6 CLEANING A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. END OF SECTION 262213 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262416-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION PANELBOARDS 262416-1 QPK NO. 220157.00 SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This Specification Section describes branch circuit protective devices of the circuit breaker type bussed together and housed in an enclosure for the purpose of providing electrical overload protection of branch and/or feeder circuit wiring. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compliance and Labeling: Comply with applicable requirements of Codes, Standards and Listing as listed in Section 260100 - Electrical Basic Requirements. B. Provide assemblies that are naturally ventilated and that are constructed in such a manner that the temperature rise with circuit breakers installed does not cause nuisance tripping. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Lighting and Appliance Type Panelboard: Panelboards serving branch circuit loads such as lighting circuits, receptacle circuits and other electrical appliances rated less than 100 amperes. This type of panelboard is not to be used to serve other panelboards. B. Distribution Type Panelboards: Panelboards serving feeder circuit loads such as other panelboards or electrical loads that are 100 amperes or greater. This type of panelboard is to be provided whenever the mains of the panelboard exceed 225 amperes. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer’s data for approval on each type of panelboard. Include a summary of each panel, listing type, size voltage, circuit breaker count and mounting information. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide panelboards, enclosures and ancillary components, of types, sizes, ratings indicated, which comply with manufacturer’s standard materials, design and construction in accordance with published product information; equip with number of unit panelboard devices as required for a complete installation. Where types, sizes or ratings are not otherwise indicated, comply with NEC, UL and established industry standards for applications indicated. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262416-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION PANELBOARDS 262416-2 QPK NO. 220157.00 2.2 PANELBOARDS A. General: Provide dead-front safety type panelboards, equipped with circuit breaker switching and protective devices, in quantities, ratings, types and arrangements indicated. B. Enclosures: Provide enclosures fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards, which mate properly with panelboards. Provide galvanized steel backboxes; provide trims of code gauge steel with rust-inhibiting primer and baked enamel finish. 1. Provide one-piece trim, equipped with a continuous hinge that, when fastened to the backbox, shall allow access to the cabinet wiring without requiring removal of the trim; with lockable door fastened to cabinet with adjustable clamps and/or continuous hinges. Key all panelboards alike. In addition to the lock, equip all doors over 48" in height with a nickel plated vault handle and 3 point catch arranged to fasten door at top, bottom and center. Provide a directory frame with clear plastic cover, mounted on the inside of the door. 2. Provide wiring (“gutter”) space in panelboards as required by UL and NEC. C. Bussing: Provide bare copper bus bars, with supports insulated to suit system voltage. Provide ampere rating of bus bars not less than either the frame size of main circuit breaker in the panelboard or, in the case of main lug only panelboards, the NEC ampere rating of the conductors feeding it. Provide bus bars having a maximum current density of 1000 amperes per square inch based on copper conductors. Provide bus bars braced to withstand the same fault currents as the branch circuit breakers specified. 1. Provide bus bar connections to branch circuit breakers of the “distributive phase” type. 2. Provide full capacity neutral. 3. Provide ground bus having sufficient lugs to accept the number of ground conductors required on this Project, plus six (6) spare lugs for future connections. D. Lugs: Provide solderless type lugs, size and number as required to accept cables indicated on incoming and outgoing conductors. E. Circuit Breakers: Provide thermal-magnetic, quick-make, quick-break, circuit breakers having minimum interrupting ratings as indicated on the Contract Drawings; trip free type that cannot be held closed against a fault. Provide trip-indicating type, with the breaker handle taking a position midway between the On and Off positions when the breaker has tripped. Provide multi-pole breaker design that provides tripping of all poles if a fault condition occurs on any phase. Provide trip current ratings as indicated. Provide circuit breakers that “bolt on” the distributive phase bussing unless otherwise indicated. Provide a main circuit breaker 1) where indicated on the Contract Drawings, or 2) where the panelboard is used as service entrance equipment and contains more than six (6) branch circuits (unless protected by a fusible switch). F. Spaces: Equip sections designated “space” with all accessories required to accept a future circuit breaker. G. Surge Protective Device: 1. Device shall be rated for location as shown on drawings. 2. Seven Mode Protection: Line-to-neutral (three), line-to-ground (three) and neutral-to-ground. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262416-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION PANELBOARDS 262416-3 QPK NO. 220157.00 3. Provide test report from a recognized independent testing laboratory verifying the Surge Protective Devices (SPD) can survive published surge current rating on both a per mode and per phase basis. ANSI/UL 1449, latest edition. 4. Surge Current Capacity - The minimum total surge current tested with the ANSI/IEEE C42.41, 20 kA-8/20 microsecond waveform that the device is capable of withstanding shall be as shown in the following table: Application Peak Surge Current Per Phase Nominal Discharge Current - In Per Mode a. Type 1 - Before Service Entrance 250 kA 20 kA b. Type 2 - After Service Entrance 160 kA 20 kA 5. Unit shall comply with ANSI/UL-1449, latest edition. Voltage Protection Rating (VPR) per Mode must not exceed the following for Type 2 SPD: a. 208Y/120, L-N 800 volts, L-G 700 volts, N-G 800 volts, L-L 1000 volts. b. 480Y/277, L-N 1000 volts, L-G 1200 volts, N-G 900 volts, L-L 1800 volts. 6. UL-1283 bi-directional high frequency noise attenuation for electric line noise shall be 50 dB at 10 kHz-100 MHz. 7. Short Circuit Current Rating: 200 KAIC. 8. Indication system: a. A green/red LED indicator for each phase. b. Flashing trouble light. c. Shall alarm open circuit damage, thermal conditions and overcurrent. d. Transient surge counter. e. Provide dry contact for remote monitoring. 9. Integrated model. 2.3 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. “Distribution” Type Panelboards: Square D I-Line or Square D NF. No Substitutions. B. Lighting and Appliance Type Panelboards: Square D Type NQ. No Substitutions. C. Provide all panelboards as manufactured by Square D. No Substitutions. 2.4 EXISTING PANELBOARDS A. Provide circuit breakers to match existing panelboards. B. Provide a typewritten directory that indicates all items controlled by each circuit breaker. C. Provide blank covers for each space not occupied by a circuit breaker. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262416-4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION PANELBOARDS 262416-4 QPK NO. 220157.00 PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine areas and conditions under which panelboards are to be installed and notify the Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 GENERAL A. Install panelboards and enclosures as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA’s “Standard of Installation” and in compliance with recognized industry practices. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Anchor enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they are permanently and mechanically secure. B. Set cabinets at height as directed at the time of installation, but in general, set at such height so that the top branch breaker is not over 6'-6" from the floor. C. Set flush cabinets so that edges shall be flush with the finished wall line. Where space will not permit flush type cabinets to be set entirely in the wall, set cabinet as nearly flush as possible, and cover the protruding sides with the trim extending over the exposed sides of the cabinet and back to the finished wall line. D. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturer’s published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer’s torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standards 486A and B. E. Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. Connect equipment ground bars of panels in accordance with NFPA 70. F. Provide a typewritten directory that indicates the lights or other items controlled by each circuit breaker. G. Provide handle locks on exit light, fire alarm, emergency lighting, sprinkler and other circuits as indicated. H. Provide phenolic nameplate on cover of each panelboard indicating panel designation, amperage, voltage, phasing and power source. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262416-5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION PANELBOARDS 262416-5 QPK NO. 220157.00 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prior to energization of circuitry, tighten all accessible connections to manufacturer’s tightening torque specifications. B. Prior to energization of panelboards, check with ground resistance tester phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground insulation resistance levels to ensure requirements are fulfilled. C. Prior to energization, check panelboards for electrical continuity of circuits and for short-circuits. D. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize panelboards and demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements. Where necessary, correct malfunctioning units and then retest to demonstrate compliance. END OF SECTION 262416 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262726-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION WIRING DEVICES QPK NO. 220157.00 262726-1 SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Standard-grade receptacles, 125 V, 20 A. 2. USB receptacles. 3. GFCI receptacles, 125 V, 20 A. 4. SPD receptacles, 125 V, 20 A. 5. Twist-locking receptacles. 6. Cord and plug sets. 7. Toggle switches, 120/277 V, 20A. 8. Wall plates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. AFCI: Arc-fault circuit interrupter. B. BAS: Building automation system. C. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. D. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. E. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor. F. RFI: Radio-frequency interference. G. SPD: Surge protective device. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates. C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality-control reports. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262726-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION WIRING DEVICES QPK NO. 220157.00 262726-2 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packinglabel warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. RoHS compliant. D. Comply with NEMA WD 1. E. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the following conditions: 1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire. 2. Devices shall comply with requirements in this Section. F. Devices for Owner-Furnished Equipment 1. Receptacles: Match plug configurations. 2. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements. G. Device Color 1. Wiring Devices: As selected by Architect otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing. 2. SPD Devices: Blue. H. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color. I. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 STANDARD-GRADE RECEPTACLES, 125 V, 20 A A. Duplex Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. b. Pass & Seymour; Legrand North America, LLC. c. Wiring Device-Kellems; Hubbell Incorporated, Commercial and Industrial. 2. Description: Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. 3. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. 4. Standards: Comply with UL 498 and FS W-C-596. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262726-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION WIRING DEVICES QPK NO. 220157.00 262726-3 2.3 USB RECEPTACLES A. USB Charging Receptacles 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. b. Pass & Seymour; Legrand North America, LLC. c. Wiring Device-Kellems; Hubbell Incorporated, Commercial and Industrial. 2. Description: Single-piece, rivetless, nickel-plated, all-brass grounding system. Nickelplated, brass mounting strap. 3. USB Receptacles: Dual, USB Type A, 5 V dc, and 2.1 A per receptacle (minimum). 4. Standards: Comply with UL 1310 and USB 3.0 devices. 2.4 GFCI RECEPTACLES, 125 V, 20 A A. Duplex GFCI Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. b. Pass & Seymour; Legrand North America, LLC. c. Wiring Device-Kellems; Hubbell Incorporated, Commercial and Industrial. 2. Description: Integral GFCI with "Test" and "Reset" buttons and LED indicator light. Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. 3. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. 4. Type: Non-feed through. 5. Standards: Comply with UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596. 2.5 SPD RECEPTACLES, 125 V, 20 A A. Duplex SPD Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. b. Pass & Seymour; Legrand North America, LLC. c. Wiring Device-Kellems; Hubbell Incorporated, Commercial and Industrial. 2. Description: Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. Integral SPD in line to ground, line to neutral, and neutral to ground. LED indicator light. 3. SPD Components: Multiple metal-oxide varistors; with a nominal clamp-level rating of 400 V and minimum single transient pulse energy dissipation of 240 J, according to IEEE C62.41.2 and IEEE C62.45. 4. Active SPD Indication: Visual and audible, with light visible in face of device to indicate device is "active" or "no longer in service." 5. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. 6. Standards: Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 498, UL 1449, and FS W-C-596. 2.6 TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLES A. Twist-Lock, Single Receptacles, 250 V, 30 A 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Hubbell Premise Wiring; Hubbell Incorporated, Commercial and Industrial. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262726-4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION WIRING DEVICES QPK NO. 220157.00 262726-4 b. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. c. Pass & Seymour; Legrand North America, LLC. 2. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration L5-30R. 3. Standards: Comply with UL 498. 2.7 CORD AND PLUG SETS A. Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment being connected. B. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with greeninsulated grounding conductor and ampacity of at least 130 percent of the equipment rating. C. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for connection. 2.8 WALL PLATES A. Single Source: Obtain wall plates from same manufacturer of wiring devices. B. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices. 1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel 4. Material for Damp Locations: Thermoplastic with spring-loaded lift cover and listed and labeled for use in wet and damp locations. C. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weatherresistant, thermoplastic with lockable cover. 2.9 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated. B. Coordination with Other Trades 1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes, and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes. 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. C. Conductors 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262726-5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION WIRING DEVICES QPK NO. 220157.00 262726-5 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall comply with NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. D. Device Installation 1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (152 mm) in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact. E. Receptacle Orientation 1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right. F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates. H. Adjust locations of floor service outlets to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings. 2.10 GFCI RECEPTACLES A. Install non-feed-through GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not required. 2.11 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped, or engraved machine printing with lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes. 2.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262726-6 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION WIRING DEVICES QPK NO. 220157.00 262726-6 B. Test Instrument for Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement. C. Perform the following tests and inspections 1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 2. Test Instrument for Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement. D. Tests for Receptacles 1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault-current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above. E. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 262726 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262813-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FUSES 262813-1 QPK NO. 220157.00 SECTION 262813 - FUSES PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide the UL listing on all products. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for approval on each type of fuse required. B. Maintenance Materials (Extra Stock) 1. Deliver to the Owner’s Representative, spare fuses of each size and category. Spare fuses shall consist of fuse links, fuse holders and any accessories required for a complete installation. Provide spare fuses amounting to one half of a duplicate set and not less than one complete set of each size. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide fuses of manufacturer’s standard materials, as indicated by published product information; designed and constructed as recommended by the manufacturer and as required for a complete installation. 2.2 FUSES A. Provide fuses for all safety switches and service disconnects that are rated 600 volts and lower as follows: 1. Type: Cartridge, time delay. 2. Interrupting Capacity: 200,000 amps. 3. Ampere Rating 0-99 amps: Eaton (Bussman) “Fusetron.” 4. Ampere Rating 100-599 amps: Eaton (Bussman) “Low-Peak.” 5. Design Basis: Eaton. 6. Acceptable Manufacturers: Eaton, Little Fuse, Mersen USA, approved equal. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Provide fuses in all fusible equipment furnished by this Contractor. B. Provide spare fuses. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262813-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FUSES 262813-2 QPK NO. 220157.00 C. Provide a signed receipt from the Owner for all of the required spare fuses. END OF SECTION 262813 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262819-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ENCLOSED SWITCHES 262819-1 QPK NO. 220157.00 SECTION 262819 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Safety switches specified in this Section include motor-circuit disconnects, equipment disconnects and appliance disconnects. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. UL Compliance and Labeling: Comply with requirements of UL 98, “Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches.” Provide safety switches which have been UL-listed and labeled. B. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC requirements pertaining to construction and installation of electrical circuit and motor disconnect devices. C. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Standards, Publication No. KS 1, “Enclosed Switches” and 250, “Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)”. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer’s data for approval on each type required. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide safety switches of types, sizes, characteristics and ratings indicated which comply with manufacturer’s standard design, materials, components and construction in accordance with published product information and as required for a complete installation. 2.2 PRODUCTS A. Safety Switches: Provide switches with “quick-make” and “quick-break” switch mechanism, with dual cover interlock. Provide switches rated 240 volts for 208 volt and 240 volt systems, and 600 volts for 480 volt systems; ampere rating and number of poles as indicated on the Contract Drawings, or if not indicated, same as branch circuit or feeder serving the switch; with neutral bus when neutral and/or grounding conductor is included in the circuit. Unless otherwise indicated, provide heavy-duty non-fusible switches, with NEMA I enclosures. B. Design Basis: Square D Company heavy-duty series switches. No substitutions. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262819-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ENCLOSED SWITCHES 262819-2 QPK NO. 220157.00 C. Nameplates: Provide standard phenolic nameplates with 3/8" minimum size engraved lettering on each safety switch indicating the load served, voltage, phases, power source and circuit number. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Install safety switches as indicated, complying with manufacturer’s written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, and NECA’s “Standard of Installation” and in accordance with recognized industry practices. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install safety switches for use with motor-driven appliances within sight of controller position, unless otherwise indicated, and unless capable of being locked in the open position. B. Wall mount all safety switches so that the maximum height above the floor to the center of the operating handle does not exceed 6'-0". C. For all fusible safety switches, provide fuses that meet the requirements of Section 262813 - Fuses. D. Provide phenolic nameplate on cover of each switch indicating load served, voltage, phases, power source and circuit number. E. Ground and bond safety switches in accordance with Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. END OF SECTION 262819 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262913-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913-1 QPK NO. 220157.00 SECTION 262913 - ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Motor Controllers are devices to provide manual and magnetic on/off control of motors as well as to provide thermal overload protection. B. Control Devices are devices to provide remote on/off control of motor controllers and include such products as pushbutton stations, relays, magnetic contactors, timing relays, etc. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 262813 - Fuses 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product data: Submit catalog cut sheets which indicate voltage, controller size, ratings and size of switching, over current protection devices, short circuit ratings, dimensions and enclosure details. B. Test Reports: Provide field test, inspection procedures and test results. C. Record Drawings: Provide record drawings which indicate actual locations and sizes of enclosed controllers. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide equipment manufactured to NEMA and IETA Standards. B. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products in this Section with minimum five (5) years documented experience. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide motor controllers, control devices and control wiring of types, sizes and ratings indicated, which comply with manufacturer’s standard materials, design and construction in accordance with published product information. Where types, sizes or ratings are not otherwise indicated, comply with NEC, UL and established industry standards for applications indicated. B. Provide motor controllers with general characteristics as follow: 1. Minimum Size: Provide NEMA size 0 motor controllers. 2. Enclosures: Unless otherwise indicated, provide NEMA I enclosures. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262913-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913-2 QPK NO. 220157.00 3. Under Voltage Devices for Magnetic Starters: Provide 3 wire control circuits (momentary contact pushbutton control) having under voltage protection. 4. Holding Coils: Guarantee holding coils to be of the “extra quiet” type under continuous operation, or replace the coils until satisfactory devices are installed. 2.2 MANUAL MOTOR CONTROLLERS A. Product Description: AC general purpose, Class A, manually operated, full voltage controller with overload element, red pilot light, auxiliary contacts and toggle operator. B. Manufacturer: Square D. No substitutions. 2.3 FULL-VOLTAGE NON-REVERSING CONTROLLERS A. Product Description: AC general purpose, Class A, magnetic controller for induction motors rated in horsepower. The controller includes, but is not limited to the following features: bi-metal overload relays, fused control power transformer, rotary type H.O.A. selector switches, transformer type red pilot light in cover, auxiliary contacts, recessed pushbuttons and relays. B. Combination Type: Combine motor controller with fused disconnect in common enclosure. Size fuses per HVAC equipment manufacturer's recommendations. C. Manufacturer: Square D. No substitutions. 2.4 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES A. Furnished by the HVAC Sub-Contractor and installed by the Electrical Contractor. 2.5 REMOTE PUSHBUTTON STATIONS A. Provide remote pushbutton station (momentary contact) in surface NEMA I enclosure. 1. ON, OFF, and red pilot light for single speed motors. 2. OFF, LOW-HIGH, and 2 red pilot lights (one for each speed for 2-speed motors). 2.6 FIRE SHUTDOWN RELAY A. Generally provide as part of the fire alarm panels. For remote relays provide NEMA I enclosure, contacts rated 20 amps and holding coils guaranteed to be of the “extra quiet” type. Provide the number of contacts as required. 2.7 MAGNETIC CONTACTORS A. Provide electrically operated, electrically held contactors, rated for resistance loads, equipped with NEMA I enclosures having a pilot light and hand-off-automatic switch in cover and number of poles as required. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262913-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913-3 QPK NO. 220157.00 2.8 SPACE HEATERS A. Equip motor controllers which are installed outdoors, and indoors in unheated locations, with space heaters and humidistat to prevent condensation within the enclosure. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Install enclosed controllers a minimum of 4'-0" and a maximum of 6'-6" above the floor to the disconnect switch. Disconnect shall be mounted in the vertical direction with ‘ON’ in the up position. 2. Contractor shall provide all fuses, overloads and control devices for motor controllers. 3. Contractor shall provide sized thermal overloads in motor controllers to match installed motor characteristics. 4. Install motor controllers within sight of the motor and within 50 ft. If not, then Contractor is responsible for providing a disconnecting means for equipment. Disconnect shall be lockable. B. Control Wiring 1. Provide all control wiring and connections to all remote control devices indicated. 2. Provide the quantities of separate 120 volt control circuits to each group of motor starters in a specific area required to handle the number of starters indicated without overloading the control circuit. 3. Provide products for control wiring that comply with Section 260533 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems and Section 260519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. C. Power Wiring 1. Provide all power wiring and connections. 2. Provide connections to power factor correction capacitors on the load side of magnetic starters for all motors 10 HP and larger where indicated. 3. Provide products for power wiring that comply with Section 260533 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems and Section 260519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. D. Control Equipment 1. Set and connect complete with power and control wiring, all control equipment itemized under Article 1.1, “Description.” E. Nameplates 1. Provide phenolic nameplate on each motor controller indicating the motor it is controlling, panelboard from which the power is obtained, voltage and phases. 2. Provide phenolic nameplate on remote control stations indicating the motor it is controlling. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262913-4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913-4 QPK NO. 220157.00 3. Provide phenolic nameplate on fire shutdown relays indicating “fire shutdown” and a listing of all motors and equipment shutdown. END OF SECTION 262913 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 265119-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LED LIGHTING 265119-1 QPK NO. 220157.00 SECTION 265119 - LED LIGHTING PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid-state luminaires that use LED technology. 2. Lighting fixture supports. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CCT: Correlated color temperature. B. CRI: Color Rendering Index. C. Fixture: See "Luminaire." D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating. E. LED: Light-emitting diode. F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both. G. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Arrange in order of luminaire designation. 2. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes. 3. Include physical description and dimensions of luminaires. 4. Include emergency lighting units, including batteries and chargers. 5. Include life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy efficiency data. B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom luminaires. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details. 2. Include details of luminaire assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. C. Product Schedule: For luminaires and LED's. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 265119-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LED LIGHTING 265119-2 QPK NO. 220157.00 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing laboratory providing photometric data for luminaires. B. Product Certificates: For each type of luminaire. C. Product Test Reports: For each luminaire. D. Sample warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and lighting systems to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1. Provide a list of all LED types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Diffusers and Lenses: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 2. Globes and Guards: One for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type. B. Each luminaire type shall be binned within a three-step MacAdam Ellipse to ensure color consistency among luminaires. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. B. Warranty Period: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, product(s) indicated on Drawings. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 265119-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LED LIGHTING 265119-3 QPK NO. 220157.00 2.2 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4. C. CRI of minimum 80. D. Rated LED life of 50,000 hours. E. LED's dimmable from 100 percent to 10 percent of maximum light output. F. Internal driver. G. Nominal Operating Voltage: 120 V ac, 277 V ac, or 208V ac. Refer to Contract Drawings. 1. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch (3.175 mm) minimum unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Metal Parts: 1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. 2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated. 3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. B. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. C. Diffusers and Globes: 1. Acrylic Diffusers: One hundred percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. 2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated. 3. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch (3.175 mm) minimum unless otherwise indicated. D. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended LED's. Locate labels where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when LED's are in place. 1. Label shall include the following lamp characteristics: a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type. b. LED wattage. c. CCT and CRI for all luminaires. 2.4 METAL FINISHES A. Variations in finishes are unacceptable in the same piece. Variations in finishes of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and if they can be and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 265119-4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LED LIGHTING 265119-4 QPK NO. 220157.00 2.5 LUMINAIRE FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS A. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as luminaire. B. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm). C. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch (5-mm) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod. D. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to luminaire, line voltage, and equipment with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical connections before fixture installation. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. If approved by the Architect, use selected permanent luminaires for temporary lighting. When construction is sufficiently complete, clean luminaires used for temporary lighting and install new lamps. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. C. Supports: 1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight. 2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning and relamping. 3. Provide support for luminaire without causing deflection of ceiling or wall. 4. Luminaire mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100 percent of luminaire weight and vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight. D. Flush-Mounted Luminaire Support: 1. Secured to outlet box. 2. Attached to ceiling structural members at four points equally spaced around circumference of luminaire. 3. Trim ring flush with finished surface. E. Wall-Mounted Luminaire Support: 1. Do not attach luminaires directly to gypsum board. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 265119-5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LED LIGHTING 265119-5 QPK NO. 220157.00 F. Suspended Luminaire Support: 1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches (1200 mm), brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Luminaires: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. Support with approved outlet box and accessories that hold stem and provide damping of luminaire oscillations. Support outlet box vertically to building structure using approved devices. 3. Continuous Rows of Luminaires: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for each unit length of luminaire chassis, including one at each end. 4. Do not use ceiling grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to building structure. G. Ceiling-Grid-Mounted Luminaires: 1. Secure to any required outlet box. 2. Secure luminaire to the luminaire opening using approved fasteners in a minimum of four locations, spaced near corners of luminaire. 3. Use approved devices and support components to connect luminaire to ceiling grid and building structure in a minimum of four locations, spaced near corners of luminaire. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation. B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting the direction of aim of luminaires to suit occupied conditions. Make up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal hours for this purpose. Some of this work may be required during hours of darkness. 1. During adjustment visits, inspect all luminaires. Replace lamps or luminaires that are defective. 2. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. 3. Adjust the aim of luminaires in the presence of the Architect. END OF SECTION 265119 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 265200-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION EMERGENCY LIGHTING 265200-1 QPK NO. 220157.00 SECTION 265200 - EMERGENCY LIGHTING PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Types of emergency lighting work specified in this Section include emergency lighting battery units, remote emergency lighting fixtures and exit fixtures. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 2. Section 260533 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. UL Compliance and Labeling: Comply with UL standards pertaining to emergency lighting battery units, and emergency and exit fixtures. Provide emergency lighting battery units, and emergency lighting and exit fixtures that are UL listed and labeled. B. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation and construction of emergency lighting battery units, and emergency lighting and exit fixtures. C. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA standards, Publication Nos. 1B 4 and 1B 5 pertaining to emergency lighting battery units. D. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 101, “Life Safety Code.” E. Manufacturer: Company with minimum five (5) years documented experience specializing in manufacturing products in this Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data on emergency lighting battery units, emergency lighting and exit fixtures. Submit data sheets in booklet form with separate sheet for each fixture and battery unit, assembled in “luminaire or battery unit type” alphabetical or numerical order, with proposed fixture or battery unit and accessories, clearly indicated on each sheet. B. Warranties: Provide a minimum six (6) year warranty (1 year unconditional and 5 year pro-rata) on the batteries. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 265200-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION EMERGENCY LIGHTING 265200-2 QPK NO. 220157.00 PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide emergency lighting battery units and emergency lighting and exit fixtures of manufacturer’s standard materials, design and construction, in accordance with published product information and as required for a complete installation. B. Provide fixtures of types as indicated in the lighting fixture schedule on contract drawings. 2.2 EMERGENCY LIGHTING BATTERY UNITS A. Battery: Unless noted otherwise in the Light Fixture Schedule, provide sealed, maintenance-free lead-calcium battery of sufficient capacity to energize connected load for a period of 1-1/2 hours without voltage falling below 87-1/2% of nominal battery voltage. Provide units with nominal voltage as indicated in the Lighting Fixture Schedule on the Contract Drawings. B. Charger: Provide two-rate fully automatic solid-state battery charger with full recharging capability in 12 hours or less, after full discharge. C. Controls: Provide fused load relay, “push-to-test” switch, LED indicating light for AC power, AC overload protection and brownout protection. D. Cabinet: Provide cabinet of 18 to 20 gauge steel, with manufacturer’s standard finish unless otherwise indicated. E. Integral Lighting Heads: Provide LED lamps, number and wattage as indicated in the Lighting Fixture Schedule on the Contract Drawings. F. Accessories: Provide wall mounting bracket or shelf, of manufacturer’s standard design, and with same finish as cabinet. 2.3 EXIT FIXTURES A. Provide fixtures of types as indicated in the Lighting Fixture Schedule on the Contract Drawings. Fixtures of similar design and equivalent energy efficiency, light-distribution and brightness characteristics and of equal finish and quality to those listed in the Lighting Fixture Schedule shall be acceptable if Engineer approved. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine areas and conditions under which emergency lighting is to be installed and substrate which shall support lighting fixtures. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 265200-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION EMERGENCY LIGHTING 265200-3 QPK NO. 220157.00 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install emergency lighting battery units, emergency lighting, and exit fixtures at locations and heights as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NECA’s “Standard of Installation,” NEMA standards and recognized industry practices to ensure that battery units and fixtures fulfill Project requirements. B. Connect emergency lighting units and exit signs as indicated on Contract Drawings. C. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within unit. D. Ground and bond emergency lighting units and exit signs in accordance with Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. 3.3 CLEANING A. Clean emergency lighting and exit fixtures of dirt and debris upon completion of installation. Protect installed fixtures from damage during remainder of construction period. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Upon completion of installation of emergency lighting battery units, emergency lighting and exit fixtures, and after building circuitry has been energized with normal power source, demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test emergency lighting to demonstrate operation under emergency conditions. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at Site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting. END OF SECTION 265200 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 270526-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS QPK NO. 220157.00 270526- 1 SECTION 270526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Grounding conductors. 2. Grounding connectors. 3. Grounding busbars. 4. Grounding rods. 5. Grounding labeling. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BCT: Bonding conductor for telecommunications. B. TGB: Telecommunications grounding busbar. C. TMGB: Telecommunications main grounding busbar. D. Service Provider: The operator of a service that provides telecommunications transmission delivered over access provider facilities. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For communications equipment room signal reference grid. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. As-Built Data: Plans showing as-built locations of grounding and bonding infrastructure, including the following: 1. BCT, TMGB, TGBs, and routing of their bonding conductors. B. Field quality-control reports. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 270526-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS QPK NO. 220157.00 270526- 2 a. Result of the ground-resistance test, measured at the point of BCT connection. b. Result of the bonding-resistance test at each TGB and its nearest grounding electrode. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. C. Comply with TIA-607-B. 2.2 CONDUCTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Harger Lightning & Grounding. 2. Panduit Corp. 3. TE Connectivity Ltd. B. Comply with UL 486A-486B. C. Insulated Conductors: Stranded copper wire, green or green with yellow stripe insulation, insulated for 600 V, and complying with UL 83. 1. Ground wire for custom-length equipment ground jumpers shall be No. 6 AWG, 19strand, UL-listed, Type THHN wire. 2. Cable Tray Equipment Grounding Wire: No. 6 AWG. D. Cable Tray Grounding Jumper: 1. Not smaller than No. 6 AWG and not longer than 12 inches. If jumper is a wire, it shall have a crimped grounding lug with two holes and long barrel for two crimps. If jumper is a flexible braid, it shall have a one-hole ferrule. Attach with grounding screw or connector provided by cable tray manufacturer. E. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B8. 3. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmils, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, and 1/4 inch in diameter. 4. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 5. Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with two-hole copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 270526-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS QPK NO. 220157.00 270526- 3 2.3 CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems. 2. Chatsworth Products, Inc. 3. Harger Lightning & Grounding. 4. Panduit Corp. 5. TE Connectivity Ltd. B. Irreversible connectors listed for the purpose. Listed by an NRTL as complying with NFPA 70 for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. Comply with UL 486A-486B. C. Compression Wire Connectors: Crimp-and-compress connectors that bond to the conductor when the connector is compressed around the conductor. Comply with UL 467. 1. Electroplated tinned copper, C and H shaped. D. Busbar Connectors: Cast silicon bronze, solderless compression or exothermic-type, mechanical connector; with a long barrel and two holes spaced on 5/8- or 1-inch centers for a two-bolt connection to the busbar. E. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions. 2.4 GROUNDING BUSBARS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Chatsworth Products, Inc. 2. Harger Lightning & Grounding. 3. Panduit Corp. B. TMGB: Predrilled, wall-mounted, rectangular bars of hard-drawn solid copper, 1/4 by 4 inches by 8 inches in cross section, length as indicated on Drawings. The busbar shall be NRTL listed for use as TMGB and shall comply with TIA-607-B. 1. Predrilling shall be with holes for use with lugs specified in this Section. 2. Mounting Hardware: Stand-off brackets that provide a 4-inch clearance to access the rear of the busbar. Brackets and bolts shall be stainless steel. 3. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall be Lexan or PVC. Comply with UL 891 for use in 600-V switchboards, impulse tested at 5000 V. C. TGB: Predrilled rectangular bars of hard-drawn solid copper, 1/4 by 2 inches by 8 inches in cross section, length as indicated on Drawings. The busbar shall be for wall mounting, shall be NRTL listed as complying with UL 467, and shall comply with TIA-607-B. 1. Predrilling shall be with holes for use with lugs specified in this Section. 2. Mounting Hardware: Stand-off brackets that provide at least a 2-inch clearance to access the rear of the busbar. Brackets and bolts shall be stainless steel. 3. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall be Lexan or PVC. Comply with UL 891 for use in 600-V switchboards, impulse tested at 5000 V. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 270526-4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS QPK NO. 220157.00 270526- 4 D. Rack and Cabinet Grounding Busbars: Rectangular bars of hard-drawn solid copper, accepting conductors ranging from No. 14 to No. 2/0 AWG, NRTL listed as complying with UL 467, and complying with TIA-607-B. Predrilling shall be with holes for use with lugs specified in this Section. 1. Rack-Mounted Horizontal Busbar: Designed for mounting in 19- or 23-inch equipment racks. Include a copper splice bar for transitioning to an adjoining rack, and stainlesssteel or copper-plated hardware for attachment to the rack. 2.5 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with requirements for identification products in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine the ac grounding electrode system and equipment grounding for compliance with requirements for maximum ground-resistance level and other conditions affecting performance of grounding and bonding of the electrical system. B. Inspect the test results of the ac grounding system measured at the point of BCT connection. C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. D. Proceed with connection of the BCT only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Bonding shall include the ac utility power service entrance, the communications cable entrance, and the grounding electrode system. The bonding of these elements shall form a loop so that each element is connected to at least two others. B. Comply with NECA 1. C. Comply with TIA-607-B. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated. 1. The bonding conductors between the TGB and structural steel of steel-frame buildings shall not be smaller than No. 6 AWG. 2. The bonding conductors between the TMGB and structural steel of steel-frame buildings shall not be smaller than No. 6 AWG. B. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 270526-5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS QPK NO. 220157.00 270526- 5 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. 3. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. C. Conductor Support: 1. Secure grounding and bonding conductors at intervals of not less than 36 inches. D. Grounding and Bonding Conductors: 1. Install in the straightest and shortest route between the origination and termination point, and no longer than required. The bend radius shall not be smaller than eight times the diameter of the conductor. No one bend may exceed 90 degrees. 2. Install without splices. 3. Support at not more than 36-inch intervals. 4. Install grounding and bonding conductors in 3/4-inch PVC conduit until conduit enters a telecommunications room. The grounding and bonding conductor pathway through a plenum shall be in EMT. Conductors shall not be installed in EMT unless otherwise indicated. a. If a grounding and bonding conductor is installed in ferrous metallic conduit, bond the conductor to the conduit using a grounding bushing that complies with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems," and bond both ends of the conduit to a TGB. 3.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM A. The BCT between the TMGB and the ac service equipment ground shall not be smaller than No. 4/0 AWG. 3.5 GROUNDING BUSBARS A. Indicate locations of grounding busbars on Drawings. Install busbars horizontally, on insulated spacers 2 inches minimum from wall, 12 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. B. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top of doorway, and down; connect to horizontal bus. 3.6 CONNECTIONS A. Bond metallic equipment in a telecommunications equipment room to the grounding busbar in that room, using equipment grounding conductors not smaller than No. 6 AWG. B. Stacking of conductors under a single bolt is not permitted when connecting to busbars. C. Assemble the wire connector to the conductor, complying with manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: 1. Use crimping tool and the die specific to the connector. 2. Pretwist the conductor. 3. Apply an antioxidant compound to all bolted and compression connections. D. Primary Protector: Bond to the TMGB with insulated bonding conductor. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 270526-6 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS QPK NO. 220157.00 270526- 6 E. Interconnections: Interconnect all TGBs with the TMGB with the telecommunications backbone conductor. F. Telecommunications Enclosures and Equipment Racks: Bond metallic components of enclosures to the telecommunications bonding and grounding system. Install top-mounted rack grounding busbar unless the enclosure and rack are manufactured with the busbar. Bond the equipment grounding busbar to the TGB No. 2 AWG bonding conductors. G. Structural Steel: Where the structural steel of a steel frame building is readily accessible within the room or space, bond each TGB and TMGB to the vertical steel of the building frame. H. Panelboards: Where an electrical panelboard for telecommunications equipment is located in the same room or space, bond each TGB to the ground bar of the panelboard. I. Shielded Cable: Bond the shield of shielded cable to the TGB in communications rooms and spaces. Comply with TIA-568-C.1 and TIA-568-C.2 when grounding shielded balanced twisted-pair cables. J. Rack- and Cabinet-Mounted Equipment: Bond powered equipment chassis to the cabinet or rack grounding bar. Power connection shall comply with NFPA 70; the equipment grounding conductor in the power cord of cord- and plug-connected equipment shall be considered as a supplement to bonding requirements in this Section. 3.7 IDENTIFICATION A. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type. 1. Label TMGB(s) with "fs-TMGB," where "fs" is the telecommunications space identifier for the space containing the TMGB. 2. Label TGB(s) with "fs-TGB," where "fs" is the telecommunications space identifier for the space containing the TGB. 3. Label the BCT and each telecommunications backbone conductor at its attachment point: "WARNING! TELECOMMUNICATIONS BONDING CONDUCTOR. DO NOT REMOVE OR DISCONNECT!" 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Test the bonding connections of the system using an ac earth ground-resistance tester, taking two-point bonding measurements in each telecommunications equipment room containing a TMGB and a TGB and using the process recommended by BICSI TDMM. Conduct tests with the facility in operation. 3. Test for ground loop currents using a digital clamp-on ammeter, with a full-scale of not more than 10 A, displaying current in increments of 0.01 A at an accuracy of plus/minus 2.0 percent. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 270526-7 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS QPK NO. 220157.00 270526- 7 a. With the grounding infrastructure completed and the communications system electronics operating, measure the current in every conductor connected to the TMGB and in each TGB. Maximum acceptable ac current level is 1 A. C. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground at the BCT exceeds 5 ohms, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. D. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 270526 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 270536-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS QPK NO. 220157.00 270536-1 SECTION 270536 - CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ladder cable trays. 2. Wire-basket cable trays. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For each type of cable tray. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CABLE TRAYS A. Cable Trays and Accessories: Identified as defined in NFPA 70 and marked for intended location, application, and grounding. B. Sizes and Configurations: Refer to contract drawings for specific requirements for types, materials, sizes, and configurations. C. Structural Performance: See articles on individual cable tray types for specific values for uniform load distribution, concentrated load, and load and safety factor parameters. 2.2 WIRE-BASKET CABLE TRAYS A. Description: 1. Configuration: Wires are formed into a standard 2-by-4-inch (50-by-100-mm) wire mesh pattern with intersecting wires welded together. Mesh sections must have at least one bottom longitudinal wire along entire length of section. 2. Materials: High-strength-steel longitudinal wires with no bends. 3. Safety Provisions: Wire ends along wire-basket sides (flanges) rounded during manufacturing to maintain integrity of cables and installer safety. 4. Sizes: a. Straight sections shall be furnished in standard 118-inch (3000-mm) lengths. b. Wire-Basket Depth: 2-inch (100-mm) usable loading depth. Refer to drawings for widths. 5. Connector Assemblies: Bolt welded to plate shaped to fit around adjoining tray wires and mating plate. Mechanically joins adjacent tray wires to splice sections together or to create horizontal fittings. 6. Connector Assembly Capacity: Splices located within support span shall not diminish rated loading capacity of cable tray. 7. Hardware and Fasteners: Steel, zinc plated according to ASTM B 633. 8. Design Basis Manufacturer: Cablofill. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 270536-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS QPK NO. 220157.00 270536-2 2.3 MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Steel: 1. Straight Section and Fitting Side Rails and Rungs: Steel complies with the minimum mechanical properties of ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Grade 33, Type 2. 2. Steel Tray Splice Plates: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, HSLAS, Grade 50, Class 1. 3. Fasteners: Steel complies with the minimum mechanical properties of ASTM A 510/A 510M, Grade 1008. 4. Finish: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. a. Hardware: Chromium-zinc plated, ASTM F 1136 2.4 CABLE TRAY ACCESSORIES A. Fittings: Tees, crosses, risers, elbows, and other fittings as indicated, of same materials and finishes as cable tray. B. Barrier Strips: Same materials and finishes as for cable tray. C. Cable tray supports and connectors, including bonding jumpers, as recommended by cable tray manufacturer. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 CABLE TRAY INSTALLATION A. Install cable trays according to NEMA VE 2. B. Install cable trays as a complete system, including fasteners, hold-down clips, support systems, barrier strips, adjustable horizontal and vertical splice plates, elbows, reducers, tees, crosses, cable dropouts, adapters, covers, and bonding. C. Fasten cable tray supports to building structure. D. Design fasteners and supports to carry cable tray, the cables, and a concentrated load of 200 lb (90 kg). Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." E. Support wire-basket cable trays with trapeze hangers. F. Support trapeze hangers for wire-basket trays with 1/2-inch diameter rods. G. Make connections to equipment with flanged fittings fastened to cable trays and to equipment. Support cable trays independent of fittings. Do not carry weight of cable trays on equipment enclosure. H. Install expansion connectors where cable trays cross building expansion joints and in cable tray runs that exceed dimensions recommended in NEMA VE 2. Space connectors and set gaps according to applicable standard. I. Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping." ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 270536-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS QPK NO. 220157.00 270536-3 J. Install capped metal sleeves for future cables through firestop-sealed cable tray penetrations of fire and smoke barriers. K. Install warning signs in visible locations on or near cable trays after cable tray installation. 3.2 CABLE TRAY GROUNDING A. Ground cable trays according to NFPA 70 unless additional grounding is specified. Comply with requirements in Section 270526 "Grounding and Bonding for Communication Systems." B. Cable trays with communications cable shall be bonded together with splice plates listed for grounding purposes or with listed bonding jumpers. C. Cable trays with control conductors shall be bonded together with splice plates listed for grounding purposes or with listed bonding jumpers. D. Bond cable trays to power source for cables contained within with bonding conductors sized according to NFPA 70, Article 250.122, "Size of Equipment Grounding Conductors." 3.3 CABLE INSTALLATION A. Install cables only when each cable tray run has been completed and inspected. B. Fasten cables on horizontal runs with cable clamps or cable ties according to NEMA VE 2. Tighten clamps only enough to secure the cable, without indenting the cable jacket. C. Fasten cables on vertical runs to cable trays every 18 inches (450 mm). D. Fasten and support cables that pass from one cable tray to another or drop from cable trays to equipment enclosures. Fasten cables to the cable tray at the point of exit and support cables independent of the enclosure. The cable length between cable trays or between cable tray and enclosure shall be no more than 72 inches (1800 mm). 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Connect raceways to cable trays according to requirements in NEMA VE 2 and NEMA FG 1. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. After installing cable trays and after electrical circuitry has been energized, survey for compliance with requirements. 2. Visually inspect cable insulation for damage. Correct sharp corners, protuberances in cable trays, vibrations, and thermal expansion and contraction conditions, which may cause or have caused damage. 3. Verify that there are no intruding items such as pipes, hangers, or other equipment in the cable tray. 4. Visually inspect each cable tray joint and each ground connection for mechanical continuity. Check bolted connections between sections for corrosion. Clean and retorque in suspect areas. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 270536-4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS QPK NO. 220157.00 270536-4 5. Check for missing, incorrect, or damaged bolts, bolt heads, or nuts. When found, replace with specified hardware. 6. Perform visual and mechanical checks for adequacy of cable tray grounding; verify that all takeoff raceways are bonded to cable trays. B. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed cable trays and cables. END OF SECTION 270536 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 272100-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM 272100-1 QPK NO. 220157.00 SECTION 272100 - LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, services, etc. for a complete functional Local Area Network (LAN) and related work as required in the Contract Documents. B. The systems to be provided shall be for a switched LAN environment. The system shall hereafter be referred to as the Data Network System. C. Basic Intent: 1. Located throughout the building as shown on the drawings, are places where computers and associated equipment are intended to be placed and connected to the network for the purposes of utilizing common resources. 2. The telecommunications rooms for the data network in the building(s) are located as shown on the drawings. 3. Located in various other places are additional Telecommunication Rooms. It is intended that these be connected with the Main Telecommunication Room by a fiber optic cable backbone. From each of these locations, data cable is to be run to the data jacks where computer equipment is connected. 4. Patch panels shall be used as termination points for all fiber optic cabling. Provide backbone cabling between telecommunication rooms as indicated. 5. Patch panels shall be used as termination points for all data cables and the individual fiber cables in telecommunication rooms. D. Description of System: 1. The system shall include the items listed below, as described herein and as indicated on the Contract Documents: a. Utility service to the building(s). b. Building Main Distribution Frame (MDF) for service entrance and distribution. c. Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF) as indicated for cabling distribution. d. Backbone wiring from entrance facility to the MDF and from MDF to the IDFs. e. Complete raceway system (cable tray, J hooks, conduit) for cabling distribution. f. Grounding of all racks, raceway and equipment. g. Power for the telecommunication rooms. 1.2 TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS A. Each telecommunication room shall be furnished with 3/4 in. plywood backboard, floor to ceiling on all walls, with the plywood backboard painted with two (2) coats of fire resistant paint (UL/ASTM Class A), all surfaces. 1. ANSI/TIA/EIA Telecommunications Building Wiring Standards. 2. IEEE Telecommunications Standards. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 272100-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM 272100-2 QPK NO. 220157.00 3. BICSI Methods Manuals. 4. NFPA 70: NEC 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Work shall be as specified herein and it shall be neat and orderly installation. All methods of construction, details of workmanship that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents, shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. B. Unless specified elsewhere, standard factory inspection and operational tests will be acceptable. C. Installation shall be accordance with NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code), TIA/EIA, IEEE, IEC, state codes, local codes, and requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction. D. Equipment shall be designed, manufactured, assembled, and tested in accordance with the latest revisions of applicable published ANSI, NEMAIEC, TIA/EIA and IEEE Standards. E. Each item shall be NRTL tested and listed. F. The system provider must: 1. Provide equipment from manufacturers for which they maintain a contract, distributorship, are an agent, or other formal arrangement for which documentation can be produced showing authority to sell and service the equipment in this territory. 2. Demonstrate that they have successfully installed these systems, utilizing their standard products, for a period of five (5) years. 3. Maintain adequate spare parts inventory to provide both normal and emergency service. 4. Employ service technicians who are trained in accordance with the systems manufacturer's recommendations. 5. Own and demonstrate proficiency in the use of the required test equipment, tools, etc. for the proper installation, set-up, testing and maintenance of the system. If requested, must provide a listing of tools and/or equipment and where appropriate, certifications in the proper training and use of the tools and/or equipment. G. Contractor Qualifications: 1. The cable installer shall provide documentation and references from three (3) similar installations installed within the previous two (2) years within a 60 mile radius. H. Installer Qualifications: 1. Cabling installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide the following in a single clear and organized submittal. Package shall be submitted as specified in: ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 272100-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM 272100-3 QPK NO. 220157.00 1. Manufacturers catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructions for all system components. 2. Detailed description of system operation. 3. Itemized list of all features and functions. 4. Dimensioned drawings of all system control cabinets and layouts for all equipment rooms. 5. Wiring diagrams showing typical connections for equipment. 6. Contractor certification and qualifications. 7. Riser diagrams showing all components, devices and interconnecting cable types. 8. List of three (3) installations of equivalent or larger systems that have been installed within the past two (2) years and have been operating satisfactorily for a minimum of one (1) year. 9. Warranty information. 10. System test reports. 11. Provide scaled elevation and plan drawings indicating walls, data racks, patch panels, wire management, cable trays, power strips, door swing, etc. for each cable closet/room. 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide a complete and fully operational state of the art Local Area Network (LAN) system as described herein and indicated on the contract documents. Include any and all interface equipment to supply a complete network with complete equipment connections necessary to form a complete "turnkey" network system as outlined in these specifications. B. The complete system shall include, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Equipment Room build-out. 2. Telecommunications Room build-out. 3. Equipment cabinets and racks. 4. Patch panels and patch cables. 5. Wire management. 6. Fiber optic backbone cabling. 7. Horizontal cabling. 8. Modular jacks, backboxes and faceplates. 9. Terminations and testing. 10. Raceways, pathways, cable tray, sleeves, pull boxes. 11. Firestopping. 12. Fiber adapters and downlinks. 13. Training and system programming. C. Owner shall provide the network electronics. 1.6 WARRANTY A. All cable plant parts shall be warranted to the owner for a period of five (5) years as a complete end-to-end system. B. All network equipment shall be warranted to the owner for a period of one (1) year. Provide technical support at no charge to the customer for a period of one (1) year after system has been commissioned. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 272100-4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM 272100-4 QPK NO. 220157.00 C. Make available an extended warranty to the customer. D. Warranties shall commence upon final acceptance of the system. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BACKBONE WIRING - FIBER OPTIC CABLE A. All of the fiber optic cable must meet or exceed the following requirements and specifications. B. Individual fiber optic cables shall consist of: 1. The fiber. 2. Tight buffer. 3. Thermoplastic jacket. 4. Central strength member. 5. Aramid strength member. 6. Second core wrap with ripcord. 7. Polyester barrier. 8. Outer jacket. C. All backbone fiber optic cable shall be: 1. Installed in EMT conduit labeled on 10 ft. centers - Fiber Optic Cable. D. Single Mode Fiber (Indoor/Outdoor): 1. Maximum Attenuation per KM: a. 1310 nM- 0.5 b. 1550 nM - 0.5 2. 1310/1550 nM. 3. Shall be tight buffer, plenum rated, indoor-outdoor breakout style. 4. Core Type: Single Mode. 5. Core Diameter: 8.3 Microns. 6. Clad Diameter: 125 Microns. 7. Minimum bend radius shall be 20 times the diameter. 8. Strength members shall be FGE/Aramid yarn. 9. Shall meet requirements for plenum and vertical tray cable specifications of the NEC. 10. Provide number of fibers/cable as indicated in riser diagram on Drawings. 11. Shall have individual fiber tube colors per TIA/EIA-598 and an overall yellow jacket. E. Acceptable Manufacturers: Corning Belden OCC TE Connectivity Draka ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 272100-5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM 272100-5 QPK NO. 220157.00 2.2 HORIZONTAL CABLE A. Category 6 UTP Cable: 1. Initially, the manufacturer shall perform qualification tests on each cable. These tests shall be performed in accordance with the latest revision of the ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-C.2 Permanent Link Transmission Performance standard prior to shipment. 2. Date of Manufacture: Cable shall be a maximum of one (1) year old, from date of manufacture when installed. 3. Cable shall have a ripcord. 4. Cable shall be plenum rated, 4 pair, 100 OHM, 23 AWG. 5. Cable shall meet all requirements of FCC 68, the latest revision of the TIA/EIA 568B-C.2 and Addenda. 6. Cable shall have blue colored thermoplastic jacket with overall diameter not to exceed 0.365 in. 7. The cable pulling tension shall be rated for 25 pounds minimum. 8. Cable shall be able to withstand a minimum bend radius of 1.0 in. at -20ºC without insulation cracking. 9. Cable shall be color coded in accordance with the latest revision of the TIA/EIA T568B polarization sequence. 10. Cable shall not exceed maximum length of 90 meters. 11. Provide a printed report documenting testing based on ANSI/TIA 568 C.2 testing at 250 MHz. The following are the minimum values associated with the cable for a 100 meter length. a. Less than 21.000 ohm per 100 m DC loop resistance. b. Return loss > 20.0 dB. c. Insertion Loss < 31.1 dB/100M. d. Near end cross talk (NEXT)> 35.3 dB (43.4 dB). e. Power Sum - near end cross talk (PS-NEXT)> 41.0 dB. f. Attention to cross talk ratio (ACRF) > 16.2 dB (24.8 dB). g. Power Sum - Attenuation to cross talk ratio (PSACRF) > 13.2 dB (21.8 dB). h. DC resistance unbalance between any two (2) conductors of any pair shall not exceed 3%. i. The capacitance unbalance of any pair to ground shall not exceed 33.0pF. j. Delay < 490 ns. k. Delay skew < 44 ns. l. Cable shall be ANSI/TIA/EIA-568.B.2 Category 6 compliant. The cable shall be tested and characterized by the manufacturer. 12. Acceptable Manufacturers: Belden Berk-Tek TE Connectivity General Cable Comm Scope 2.3 PATCH CABLES A. Patch Cables - UTP: 1. Provide patch cable for use in the patch panels and field outlets, a minimum of two for each circuit/channel. Quantity of patch cords shall be sufficient to ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 272100-6 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM 272100-6 QPK NO. 220157.00 terminate all outlets indicated on drawings as well as 25% spare outlets of each type. Patch cable type shall correlate to the cable color and type and match or exceed the performance characteristics. 2. Field verify exact length of patch cords for field outlets and patch panel outlets with the Owner. Assume a typical of two (2) meters each. 3. Patch cord shall be stranded with overall jacket and factory made connectors with protective boots. 4. All patch cords shall be third party verified. 5. Acceptable Manufacturers: Belden Berk-Tek TE Connectivity General Cable Comm Scope B. Patch Cables - Fiber Optic Cable 1. Provide patch cable for use in the patch panels and field outlets, a minimum of two for each circuit/channel. Quantity of patch cords shall be sufficient to terminate all outlets indicated on drawings as well as 25% spare outlets of each type. Patch cable type shall correlate to the cable color and type and match or exceed the performance characteristics. 2. Field verify exact length of patch cords for field outlets and patch panel outlets with the Owner. Assume a typical of two (2) meters each. 3. Patch cord shall meet the specifications for the cable to which it is connected to. 4. All patch cords shall be third party verified. 5. Acceptable Manufacturers: Corning Belden OCC TE Connectivity Draka 2.4 PATCH PANELS A. UTP Cable Patch Panels: 1. All panels should consist of a faceplate, mounting, hardware, isolation bushings, connector assemblies and labels for all ports. 2. Provide patch panels in each enclosure or rack to which the cable is to be terminated. Patch panels shall be of the type, performance and Category to match the cabling. 3. Patch panels shall be mounted in standard 19 in. racks/cabinets. a. Contractor shall provide multiple 48-port patch panels having wiring configuration specified with insulation displacement connectors on the back and 8P8C universal modular jacks on the front. b. Contractor shall provide quantity of patch panels to terminate all UTP cable. There shall be a minimum of 25% spare capacity for future installation. 4. Jacks shall be 8P8C, T568 universal and have 110 style termination blocks. 5. Panels shall have factory labels for each port. 6. All cables are to be terminated per EIA/TIA 568B standards, if applicable, and dressed in a neat workmanship way. 7. Modular jacks shall be mounted on PC boards to offer low insertion and NEXT loss. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 272100-7 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM 272100-7 QPK NO. 220157.00 8. Provide grounding screw assembly with serrated head screw and manufacturer recommended connection to the associated rack. 9. Shall exceed EIA/TIA-568, UL1863 and FCC Part 68 performance specified. 10. Acceptable Manufacturers: Ortronics Panduit Hubbell Belden TE Connectivity B. Fiber Optic Patch Panels 1. Provide fiber optic patch panels in where fiber optic cable is to be terminated. 2. Provide LC to LC style panel base. Provide quantity of ports to terminate all strands of the fiber optic cable with additional 25% spare ports. 3. Shall mount in standard 19 in. rack and be constructed of 16 gauge steel and have gasketed openings and hinged door for easy access. 4. Provide wire management below and in rear of patch panel. 5. Patch panels to have modular ports with 12 minimum ports. 6. Acceptable Manufacturers: Corning Panduit Belden TE Connectivity 2.5 OUTLETS AND CONNECTORS A. UTP Outlets/Connectors: 1. Physical Specifications: a. Shall be 8 position connector compatible with the cable characteristics. b. Shall be modular and snap-in to user configurable faceplates for future retrofits meeting durability requirements specified in the latest revision of the CEI/IEC standard. c. Shall be IDC type suitable for eight 22-24 AWG wires with a gas-tight connection. d. Each contact surface shall have at a minimum, copper alloy with 50 micro-inches gold over nickel and a minimum contact force of 100g. e. Conductors shall be separated and aligned internally by jack comb. f. Shall have easy to read 568A/B color scheme to prevent termination errors. g. Wired in accordance with TIA/EIA polarization sequence specified in Patch Panel section of this specification. h. Transmission characteristics shall meet the requirements for the UTP cabling specified. i. Minimum durability shall be 1000 connecting cycles. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Ortronics Panduit Belden Hubbell TE Connectivity B. Fiber Optic Multimode Outlets/Connectors 1. Physical Characteristics: a. Shall be LC type with insertion release mechanism. b. Shall terminate up to 125 micron fiber. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 272100-8 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM 272100-8 QPK NO. 220157.00 c. Shall meet dimensional criteria of the latest revision of ANSI/EIA/TIA. d. Typical outlet box shall be sized to insure minimum bend radius and store 1 meter of two strand fiber cable. 2. Transmission Characteristics: a. Maximum loss of 0.3 dB per pair. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: Panduit Belden Hubbell Ortronics TE Connectivity 2.6 COLOR CODING A. Cable outer jacket shall follow the color coding scheme as follows. Jacket color shall be continuous. Patch cords shall match the cabling. B. Copper Cable: 1. Data Communication: a. Category 6 - Blue 2. Voice Communication: a. Category 6 – Blue C. Fiber Optic Cable: 1. Backbone Cabling: a. Single Mode – Yellow 2.7 DISTRIBUTION ENCLOSURES/RACKS A. All enclosure/racks shall be properly sized and of the proper quantity to house all of the required components and 25% spare space capacity. Provide grounding stud for each vertical rack. B. Label each rack/enclosure designating it per the latest TIA/EIA standard: 1. Adhered plastic electronic printed label with 1/2" high lettering minimum. 2. Mount to top and bottom of each rack/enclosure. C. Enclosed, Floor Mounted Cabinet: 1. Steel framed, smoked Plexiglas door with lock (keyed to the Owners standard), full length piano hinge and field adjustable swing. 2. Steel Rear Door with Lock (lower half vented). 3. Two (2) eight position vertical mounted power strips. 4. Fan Assembly - Suitable top mounted fans (two minimum) for an ambient temperature of 85°F. 5. Wire management brackets. 6. Adjustable front and rear mounting rails. 7. Adjustable 19 in. wide mounting rails. Depth to accommodate the intended equipment (32 in. minimum). 8. Color black. 9. Verify swing of door in the field prior to ordering. 10. Unit width shall accommodate racking, power strips and cable management. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 272100-9 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM 272100-9 QPK NO. 220157.00 11. In locations requiring two or more enclosures, side panels shall be removed and cabinets shall be bolted together allowing access between cabinets. D. Open, Floor Mounted Racks: 1. Nominal size shall be 19 in. wide x 7 ft. high x 20 in. (minimum) deep. Rated for 2000 lb. minimum. Depth to match the intended equipment. 2. Rack shall be constructed of 6061-T6 aluminum extrusion, with EIA = 3 in. x 1.265 in. channel, 1/4 in. thick flange. 3. Provide base angles and top cross bars. 4. The back of rack shall have wire management panels and cable tray to wall. 5. Rack shall have baked enamel finish. E. Equipment Shelves: 1. Provide quantity of equipment shelves required by Owner during interviews. 2. Shelves shall be made of .09 in. aluminum and shall support up to 30 lbs. on each side. All mounting hardware shall have baked enamel finish. F. Acceptable Manufacturers: Chatsworth Ortronics Homaco Mid-Atlantic Great Lakes 2.8 CABLE MANAGEMENT A. All racks are to be provided with cable management hardware to insure a neat, functional system when complete. Racks shall as a minimum, include the following: 1. PVC construction; duct fingers to manage cabling; color to match enclosure. B. All racks shall have 8 in. wide vertical full height cable management, including cover, front and rear, on both sides of the rack. C. Cabinets shall have 1RU space horizontal panels, front and rear, above and below each patch panel and piece of equipment. D. All data distribution frame plywood backboards shall be provided with vertical and horizontal wire management with capacities to house all possible future cabling and patch cords for a neat and orderly installation. E. Acceptable manufacturers: Panduit Ortronics Leviton 2.9 LABELING A. General: 1. System labeling shall be in accordance with the latest revision of TIA/EIA 606. System shall provide as built final conditions for each cable, port, panel, rack, etc. and utilize MS Excel or approved equal documentation. Provide hard and electronic copy of labeling documentation to the Owner as part of the O and M process. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 272100-10 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM 272100-10 QPK NO. 220157.00 2. Each label shall contain the Telecommunication Room designated, the room number and the port number in the room. Verify color of label and size of font prior to completion. Provide samples as requested. 3. Labels shall correspond to the room/names/numbers upon completion of the project. Contractor shall not necessarily utilize existing room/names/numbers or those indicated on the blueprints. 4. Label each rack and patch panel with 1 in. high lettering, black on white, adhered electronically printed plastic type label with labels at top, bottom, front and back. B. Patch Panel 1. Individually label all patch panel ports. Port numbers shall match opposite end outlet/port number. C. Outlets 1. Individually label all patch panel ports. Labels shall be installed in a workmanlike manner and fit completely in the recessed area of the labeled location. 2. Contractor shall utilize adhered labels at poke-thru locations and any other locations that do not have a label location. D. Cable 1. Fiber Optic: a. Individually label fiber optic cables at each termination point indicating destination room, rack number, panel number, port number, strand number and strand color. b. Each strand color shall match a specific fiber termination number in each closet, i.e. blue - fiber 1, orange - fiber 2, green - fiber 3, etc. c. Cable label shall be adhered electronically printed plastic type with cable designation fully visible. 2. Copper a. Specifically label cables at each termination point indicating the destination room, rack number, panel number and port number. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Cable: 1. Provide a minimum of one horizontal UTP cable to each communication outlet jack from respective equipment/telecomm unications room patch panel as called for. Quantity of data jacks equals minimum quantity of UTP cables (typical). 2. Provide a minimum of one (1) pair (2 strands) of multi-mode fiber optic cable to each fiber jack from respective equipment/telecommunications room as called for. Quantity of fiber jacks equals minimum quantity of 2 strand cables (typical). 3. All risers, and wiring concealed in walls or soffits, shall be installed in metal conduits. 4. All cable above accessible ceilings shall be installed in cable tray or J-hook style cable rings 3 ft. O.C. 5. Provide wire management and Velcro cable wraps every 24 in. throughout closets. Provide Velcro cable wraps every 36 in. elsewhere. 6. Wiring/cabling shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. If the manufacturer recommends larger wire sizes, they shall ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 272100-11 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM 272100-11 QPK NO. 220157.00 be provided. However, smaller sizes or lower cable categories are not acceptable. 7. All Contract Documents are schematic. The system supplier shall incorporate their wiring requirements on the system drawings. The Contractor in conjunction with the system manufacturer shall be responsible for complete wiring requirements and conduit sizes. 8. Install UTP cable in accordance with latest revision of TIA/EIA 568 standards. 9. The Contractor shall be responsible for replacing all cables that do not pass required bandwidth and throughput tests. 10. All raceways and closets shall be installed in accordance with latest revision of TIA/EIA-569. 11. All cables shall be labeled in accordance with latest revision of TIA/EIA 606 and these specifications. 12. All horizontal cables shall be terminated in patch panels at the distribution frames, and at the UTP jack at the telecommunications outlet. 13. Maximum length shall be 90 meters. B. Fiber Optic Cable: 1. Terminate backbone fiber cables in rack mounted patch panels at both ends. 2. Adhere to all manufacturer bend radius recommendations. C. Terminations: 1. All terminations shall be made by a manufacturer's trained representative. 2. Use termination kits for fiber and UTP that are approved by the manufacturer of the cable. 3. All backbone cable shall be terminated in a patch panel and all connections between horizontal and backbone cables shall be through cross connect cable. D. Equipment and Devices: 1. Install all devices where shown on drawings. Provide all necessary conduit outlet boxes, junction boxes, supports, etc. Verify all required box sizes with the system supplier and coordinate with bending radius needs. All devices shall be modular for future moves and changes. 2. Install all equipment in specified 19 in. racks/cabinets leaving minimum 30 in. of access space on sides and back of rack and 36 in. in front of rack. 3. Provide all power outlets and plug strips required for system operation but not shown on plans. E. Raceways: 1. Minimum size raceway shall be 1 in. 2. Minimum backbox size for telecommunications outlet locations shall be twogang with raised cover; no single-gang boxes allowed. 3. Provide no greater than 180° in bends without pull box in any raceway. F. Data Network Ground System: 1. Provide grounding system for all equipment rooms and telecommunication rooms as called for in Specification Section 260526. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 272100-12 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM 272100-12 QPK NO. 220157.00 G. Telecommunications Rooms: 1. Provide 3/4 in. x 4 ft. high continuous plywood backboard with two (2) coats of medium gray fireproof paint in telecommunications rooms. 2. Coordinate with other trades to avoid services being installed above telecommunications racks. 3.2 TESTING A. Copper Cable: System supplier shall channel test end-to-end each permanent link connection using latest 200 MHz for Cat 6 1000 Mbps IEEE testing procedure. Tester must conform to the latest standards at the time of testing not time of bid and be Fluke DTX-5000 with latest software version, or approved equal. Testing shall be performed by a technician trained with the specific testing equipment. Testing shall be witnessed by the Owner's Representative. B. Fiber Optic Cable: Provide an OTDR test for all fiber optic cable and connections per latest IEEE and ANSI accepted procedures. Test shall utilize Fluke Opti Fiber Pro OTDR. C. Replace any cables and connectors that do not meet or exceed standards referenced and stated herein and then tested. Testing shall be end-to-end / port-to-port for each cable. D. Test equipmen2 shall be in good condition and working order, calibrated within one year of its use and utilize leads without twisting and kinks. Unit calibration shall be in accordance with Level III Field Tester per ANSI/TIA 1152. E. A representative of the end-user will select a random sample of 5% of the installed links. The representative (or his authorized delegate) shall test these randomly selected links. The results obtained shall be compared to the data provided by the installation contractor. If more than 2% of the sample results differ in terms of the pass/fail determination, the installation contractor under supervision of the end-user representative shall repeat 100% testing at no additional cost. Cables and connectors that do not pass shall be replaced and retested until acceptable results are obtained. F. Test Reporting: 1. The field testing shall be accurately documented for submission, inclusion in O&M Manuals and for Owner future use. 2. Test reports shall include data directory table cross-referencing room numbers and cable numbers with the test report. Post copies of directory at telecommunications room location. 3. Report shall utilize electronic Windows based documenting with a hard and electronic copy provided to the Owner. 4. The report documentation for each cable test shall include the following as a minimum: a. Project name. b. Test equipment manufacturer and model number, and last calibration date. c. Date and time of the test. d. Patch panel identification. e. Cable identification. f. Cable type. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 272100-13 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM 272100-13 QPK NO. 220157.00 g. Pass/Fail: Pass indicating meeting or exceeding the identified criteria or standard (whichever more stringent) for all parameters. Fail indicating test not meeting identified criteria for one or more parameters. h. Test pass criteria. i. Cable length. j. Propagation delay and attainable bandwidth. k. List of tested parameters with test and allowable values. Any failed parameters shall be noted or highlighted. l. 3.3 TRAINING AND INSTRUCTION A. Provide eight (8) hours minimum of instruction to Owner personnel regarding system set up configuration and management. Training shall be sufficient for the Owner to understand the system operation, components, configuration, functions, testing and troubleshooting. All Owner questions shall be answered. B. Training agenda (estimated duration, intent, specifications to be covered) shall be submitted for approval prior to the training. A finalized agenda shall be issued to the Owner and construction representative one (1) week minimum prior to the scheduled training. Owner's comments shall be incorporated and agenda redistributed prior to the training. C. Two (2) hard copies and one (1) electronic (pdf) copy of the training materials shall be provided. 3.4 WARRANTY A. All cable plant parts shall be warranted to the owner for a period of five (5) years as a complete end-to-end system. B. Make available an extended warranty to the customer. C. Warranties shall commence upon final acceptance of the system. END OF SECTION 272100 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 283100-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-1 QPK NO. 220157.00 SECTION 283100 - FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Fire alarm control unit expansion. 2. Manual fire-alarm boxes. 3. System smoke detectors. 4. Heat detectors. 5. Fire alarm notification appliances. 6. Device guards. 7. Magnetic door holders. 8. Addressable interface device. B. The fire alarm system shall be an extension of the existing Edwards system. (No Substitutions) C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables" for cables and conductors for firealarm systems. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing. B. FCAP: Fire Alarm Control Panel. C. HLI: High Level Interface. D. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies. E. PC: Personal Computer. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including furnished options and accessories. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions, profiles and finishes. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and electrical characteristics. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 283100-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-2 QPK NO. 220157.00 B. Shop Drawings: For fire alarm system 1. Comply with recommendations and requirements in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72. 2. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 3. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and locations. Indicate conductor sizes, indicate termination locations and requirements, and distinguish between factory and field wiring. 4. Detail assembly and support requirements. 5. Include voltage drop calculations for notification-appliance circuits. 6. Include battery-size calculations. 7. Include input/output matrix. 8. Include statement from manufacturer that all equipment and components have been tested as a system and meet all requirements in this Specification and in NFPA 72. 9. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector. 10. Verify that each duct detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating. 11. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts, drawn to scale; coordinate location of duct smoke detectors and access to them. a. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators. b. Show field wiring required for HVAC unit shutdown on alarm. c. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations. 12. Include grounding schematic, amplifier power calculation, and single-line connection diagram. 13. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device. Show size and route of cable and conduits and point-to-point wiring diagrams. C. General Submittal Requirements: 1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them to Architect. 2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications: a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design. b. NICET-certified, fire-alarm technician; Level III minimum. c. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For notification appliances and smoke and heat detectors, in addition to submittals listed above, indicate compliance with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Drawings showing the location of each notification appliance and smoke and heat detector, ratings of each, and installation details as needed to comply with listing conditions of the device. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting the spacing and sensitivity of detection, complying with NFPA 72. Calculate spacing and intensities for strobe signals and sound-pressure levels for audible appliances. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 283100-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-3 QPK NO. 220157.00 3. Indicate audible appliances required to produce square wave signal per NFPA 72. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer: B. Field quality control reports. C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire alarm systems and components to include in emergency, operation and maintenance manuals. 1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following and deliver copies to authorities having jurisdiction: a. Comply with the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72. b. Provide "Fire Alarm and Emergency Communications System Record of Completion Documents" according to the "Completion Documents" Article in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72. c. Complete wiring diagrams showing connections between all devices and equipment. Each conductor shall be numbered at every junction point with indication of origination and termination points. d. Riser diagram. e. Device addresses. f. Record copy of site specific software. g. Provide "Inspection and Testing Form" according to the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72, and include the following: 1) Equipment tested. 2) Frequency of testing of installed components. 3) Frequency of inspection of installed components. 4) Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance. 5) Manufacturer's user training manuals. h. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements. i. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit and each annunciator unit. B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: 1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 283100-4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-4 QPK NO. 220157.00 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project. B. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by a UL-listed alarm company. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Perform a full test of the existing system prior to starting work. Document any equipment or components not functioning as designed. B. Interruption of Existing Fire-Alarm Service: Do not interrupt fire-alarm service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary guard service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner no fewer than fourteen days in advance of proposed interruption of fire-alarm service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of fire alarm service without Owner's written permission. C. Use of Devices during Construction: Protect devices during construction unless devices are placed in service to protect the facility during construction. 1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Existing Fire-Alarm Equipment: Maintain existing equipment fully operational until new equipment has been tested and accepted. As new equipment is installed, label it "NOT IN SERVICE" until it is accepted. Remove labels from new equipment when put into service, and label existing fire-alarm equipment "NOT IN SERVICE" until removed from the building. B. Equipment Removal: After acceptance of new fire-alarm system, remove existing disconnected fire-alarm equipment and wiring. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire-alarm system equipment and components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Extent: All equipment and components not covered in the Maintenance Service Agreement. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 283100-5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-5 QPK NO. 220157.00 PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Components shall be compatible with, and operate as an extension of, existing system. Provide system manufacturer's certification that all components provided have been tested as, and will operate as, a system. B. Noncoded, UL-certified addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission and horn/strobe evacuation. C. All components provided shall be listed for use with the selected system. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.2 SYSTEM OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and systems: 1. Manual stations. 2. Heat detectors. 3. Flame detectors. 4. Smoke detectors. 5. Duct smoke detectors. 6. Combustible gas detectors. 7. Fire extinguishing system operation. B. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions: 1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances. 2. Identify alarm and specific initiating device at fire-alarm control unit, connected network control panels, off-premises network control panels, and remote annunciators. 3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station. 4. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths. 5. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders. 6. Activate alarm communication system. 7. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire-alarm mode. 8. Close smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems. 9. Recall elevators to primary or alternate recall floors. 10. Activate elevator power shunt trip. 11. Activate emergency lighting control. 12. Activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies. 13. Record events in the system memory. 14. Record events by the system printer. 15. Indicate device in alarm on the remote annunciator. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 283100-6 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-6 QPK NO. 220157.00 C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions: 1. Elevator shunt-trip supervision. 2. Independent fire-detection and -suppression systems. 3. User disabling of zones or individual devices. 4. Loss of communication with any panel on the network. 5. Carbon monoxide detectors. D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions: 1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits. 2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating devices. 3. Loss of communication with any addressable sensor, input module, relay, control module, remote annunciator, printer interface, or Ethernet module. 4. Loss of primary power at fire alarm control unit. 5. Ground or a single break in internal circuits of fire-alarm control unit. 6. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit. 7. Break in standby battery circuitry. 8. Failure of battery charging. 9. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator. 10. Voice signal amplifier failure. 11. Hose cabinet door open. E. System Supervisory Signal Actions: 1. Initiate notification appliances. 2. Identify specific device initiating the event at fire-alarm control unit, connected network control panels, off-premises network control panels, and remote annunciators. 3. Record the event on system printer. 4. After a time delay of 200 seconds, transmit a trouble or supervisory signal to the remote alarm receiving station. 5. Transmit system status to building management system. 6. Display system status on remote annunciator. 2.3 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Edwards. B. General Requirements for Fire-Alarm Control Unit: 1. Extend existing main control panel to include all fire alarm system devices shown on Contract Documents. Provide secondary battery backup power supply as required for proper operation of all devices in the event of a power failure. C. Initiating-Device, Notification-Appliance, and Signaling-Line Circuits: 1. Pathway Class Designations: Match existing wiring scheme in building (Class A or B) ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 283100-7 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-7 QPK NO. 220157.00 D. Smoke-Alarm Verification: 1. Initiate audible and visible indication of an "alarm-verification" signal at fire-alarm control unit. 2. Activate an approved "alarm-verification" sequence at fire-alarm control unit and detector. 3. Record events by the system printer. 4. Sound general alarm if the alarm is verified. 5. Cancel fire-alarm control unit indication and system reset if the alarm is not verified. E. Notification-Appliance Circuit: 1. Audible appliances shall sound in a three-pulse temporal pattern, as defined in NFPA 72. 2. Visual alarm appliances shall flash in synchronization where multiple appliances are in the same field of view, as defined in NFPA 72. F. Elevator Recall: 1. Elevator recall shall be initiated only by one of the following alarm-initiating devices: a. Elevator lobby detectors except the lobby detector on the designated floor. b. Smoke detector in elevator machine room. c. Smoke detectors in elevator hoistway. 2. Elevator controller shall be programmed to move the cars to the alternate recall floor if lobby detectors located on the designated recall floors are activated. 3. Refer to Contract Drawings for additional information regarding elevator. G. Door Controls: Door hold-open devices that are controlled by smoke detectors at doors in smokebarrier walls shall be connected to fire-alarm system. H. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to a remote alarm station. I. Printout of Events: On receipt of signal, print alarm, supervisory, and trouble events. Identify zone, device, and function. Include type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or trouble) and date and time of occurrence. Differentiate alarm signals from all other printed indications. Also print system reset event, including same information for device, location, date, and time. Commands initiate the printing of a list of existing alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions in the system and a historical log of events. J. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, supervisory signals, supervisory and digital alarm communicator transmitters shall be powered by 24-V dc source. 1. Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the powersupply module rating. K. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and automatic transfer switch. 1. Batteries: Sealed lead calcium. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 283100-8 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-8 QPK NO. 220157.00 L. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions. 2.4 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Edwards. B. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall be finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box. 1. Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull-lever type; with integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit. 2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch. 3. Indoor Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated, clear plastic enclosure hinged at the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover actuates an integral batterypowered audible horn intended to discourage false-alarm operation. 2.5 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Edwards. B. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors: 1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal. 2. Detectors wire type shall be compatible with existing system. 3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit. 4. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a twistlock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring. 5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation. 6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type, indicating detector has operated and power-on status. 7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be digital-addressable type, individually monitored at fire-alarm control unit for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition. C. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: 1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 283100-9 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-9 QPK NO. 220157.00 2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector: a. Primary status. b. Device type. c. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected. e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.) D. Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A. 1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting. 2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector: a. Primary status. b. Device type. c. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected. e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.). 3. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X; NRTL listed for use with the supplied detector for smoke detection in HVAC system ducts. 4. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity. 5. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for specific duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied. 6. Relay Fan Shutdown: Fully programmable relay rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit. 2.6 HEAT DETECTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Edwards. B. General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521. 1. Temperature sensors shall test for and communicate the sensitivity range of the device. C. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 degree F or a rate of rise that exceeds 15 degree F per minute unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting. 2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit. D. Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a fixed temperature of 190 degree F. 1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting. 2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 283100-10 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-10 QPK NO. 220157.00 2.7 FIRE ALARM NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Edwards. B. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Individually addressed, connected to a signaling-line circuit, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system connections. C. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification-appliance signal circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system connections. 1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-mounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system connections. D. Chimes, Low-Level Output: Vibrating type, 75-dBA minimum rated output. E. Chimes, High-Level Output: Vibrating type, 81-dBA minimum rated output. F. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of 90 dBA, measured 10 feet from the horn, using the coded signal prescribed in UL 464 test protocol. G. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights complying with UL 1971, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch-high letters on the lens. 1. Rated Light Output: a. 15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field. 2. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated. 3. For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be determined with guards in place. 4. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units. 5. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals. 6. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished red. 2.8 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS A. Description: Units are equipped for wall or floor mounting as indicated and are complete with matching doorplate. 1. Electromagnets: Require no more than 3 W to develop 25-lbf holding force. 2. Wall-Mounted Units: Flush mounted unless otherwise indicated. 3. Rating: 24-V ac or dc. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 283100-11 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-11 QPK NO. 220157.00 B. Material and Finish: Match door hardware. 2.9 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE A. General: 1. Include address-setting means on the module. 2. Store an internal identifying code for control panel use to identify the module type. 3. Listed for controlling HVAC fan motor controllers. B. Monitor Module: Microelectronic module providing a system address for alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts. C. Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal to elevator controller to initiate elevator recall and to circuit-breaker shunt trip for power shutdown. 1. Allow the control panel to switch the relay contacts on command. 2. Have a minimum of two normally open and two normally closed contacts available for field wiring. D. Control Module: 1. Operate notification devices. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for ventilation, temperature, humidity, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that manufacturer's written instructions for environmental conditions have been permanently established in spaces where equipment and wiring are installed, before installation begins. B. Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations of connections before installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NFPA 72, NFPA 101, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for installation and testing of fire-alarm equipment. Install all electrical wiring to comply with requirements in NFPA 70 including, but not limited to, Article 760, "Fire Alarm Systems." 1. Devices placed in service before all other trades have completed cleanup shall be replaced. 2. Devices installed but not yet placed in service shall be protected from construction dust, debris, dirt, moisture, and damage according to manufacturer's written storage instructions. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 283100-12 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-12 QPK NO. 220157.00 B. Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire-alarm system is operational before making changes or connections. 1. Connect new equipment to existing control panel in existing part of the building. 2. Connect new equipment to existing monitoring equipment at the supervising station. 3. Expand, modify, and supplement existing control and monitoring equipment as necessary to extend existing control and monitoring functions to the new points. New components shall be capable of merging with existing configuration without degrading the performance of either system. C. Install wall-mounted equipment, with tops of cabinets not more than 78 inches above the finished floor. D. Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: 1. Install manual fire-alarm box in the normal path of egress within 60 inches of the exit doorway. 2. Mount manual fire-alarm box on a background of a contrasting color. 3. The operable part of manual fire-alarm box shall be between 42 inches and 48 inches above floor level. All devices shall be mounted at the same height unless otherwise indicated. E. Smoke or Heat Detector Spacing: 1. Comply with the "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" section in the "Initiating Devices" chapter in NFPA 72, for smoke-detector spacing. 2. Comply with the "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" section in the "Initiating Devices" chapter in NFPA 72, for heat-detector spacing. 3. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet. 4. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for high ceiling areas shall be determined according to Annex A in NFPA 72. 5. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 36 inches from air-supply diffuser or return-air opening. 6. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches from any part of a lighting fixture and not directly above pendant mounted or indirect lighting. F. Install a cover on each smoke detector that is not placed in service during construction. Cover shall remain in place except during system testing. Remove cover prior to system turnover. G. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of duct. Tubes more than 36 inches long shall be supported at both ends. 1. Do not install smoke detector in duct smoke-detector housing during construction. Install detector only during system testing and prior to system turnover. H. Elevator Shafts: Coordinate temperature rating and location with sprinkler rating and location. Do not install smoke detectors in sprinklered elevator shafts. I. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install in a visible location near each smoke detector, sprinkler water-flow switch, and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing position. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 283100-13 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-13 QPK NO. 220157.00 J. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille. Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated. K. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated. L. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor. 3.3 PATHWAYS A. Pathways above recessed ceilings and in nonaccessible locations may be routed exposed. 1. Exposed pathways located less than 96 inches above the floor shall be installed in EMT. B. Pathways shall be installed in EMT. C. Exposed EMT shall be painted red enamel. 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. For fire-protection systems related to doors in fire-rated walls and partitions and to doors in smoke partitions, comply with requirements in Section 087100 "Door Hardware." Connect hardware and devices to fire-alarm system. 1. Verify that hardware and devices are listed for use with installed fire-alarm system before making connections. B. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and systems. Install the interface device less than 36 inches from the device controlled. Make an addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system being controlled. 1. Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated HVAC duct systems. 2. Magnetically held-open doors. 3. Electronically locked doors and access gates. 4. Alarm-initiating connection to elevator recall system and components. 5. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies. 6. Supervisory connections at elevator shunt-trip breaker. 7. Data communication circuits for connection to building management system. 8. Supervisory connections at fire-extinguisher locations. 3.5 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 283100-14 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-14 QPK NO. 220157.00 3.6 GROUNDING A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit. B. Ground shielded cables at the control panel location only. Insulate shield at device location. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field tests shall be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. C. Perform tests and inspections. D. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative: 1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing. a. Inspection shall be based on completed record Drawings and system documentation that is required by the "Completion Documents, Preparation" table in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72. b. Comply with the "Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in the "Inspection" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components. 2. System Testing: Comply with the "Test Methods" table in the "Testing" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72. 3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2 requirements in ANSI S1.4. 4. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. 5. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion" in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72. E. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or replaced devices and appliances. F. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. G. Prepare test and inspection reports. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 283100-15 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-15 QPK NO. 220157.00 H. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly, quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections. I. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections. 3.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of manufacturer's designated service organization. Include preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper operation. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. 1. Include visual inspections according to the "Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in the "Testing" paragraph of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72. 2. Perform tests in the "Test Methods" table in the "Testing" paragraph of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72. 3. Perform tests per the "Testing Frequencies" table in the "Testing" paragraph of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72. 3.9 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT A. Comply with UL 864. B. Technical Support: Beginning at Substantial Completion, service agreement shall include software support for two years. C. Upgrade Service: At Substantial Completion, update software to latest version. Install and program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system and new or revised licenses for using software. 1. Upgrade Notice: At least 30 days to allow Owner to schedule access to system and to upgrade computer equipment if necessary. 3.10 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system. END OF SECTION 283100 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 220501-1 PLUMBING BASIC REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 220501 - 1 SECTION 220501 - PLUMBING BASIC REQUIREMENTS PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.2 LAYOUT A. The Contract Drawings are diagrammatic in showing physical layout. Exact locations must be established in coordination with all other work. B. Arrange work in a neat, well organized manner running parallel to walls and with maximum overhead clearances. C. Locate operating and control equipment to provide easy access for operation and maintenance. D. Piping sloped for drainage shall have priority in layout. 1.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Provide all cutting and patching (unless otherwise noted on Contract Drawings) required to perform Plumbing Work in accordance with Division 01, General Requirements. B. Existing Conditions 1. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to verify all existing pipe sizes and locations in the field. C. Core Drilling: Core drilling required for plumbing work is the responsibility of the Contractor. 1. Existing Buildings a. Sleeves are not required for piping passing through existing floors, inside walls and partitions, which have been neatly core drilled, with the following exceptions: 1) Floors having a waterproofed construction. 2) Floors in spaces having a floor drain. D. Review the Contract Drawings, Specifications and Room Finish Schedule to become familiar with all aspects of the Project. E. Provide all cutting and patching required to perform Plumbing Work. Provide patching as required to match existing surfaces. F. In no case may floors or walls that are waterproofed be cut for further admission of any equipment or materials, nor may any structural member be pierced without written permission. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 220501-2 PLUMBING BASIC REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 220501 - 2 1.4 PIPE SLEEVES A. Install pipe sleeves for each pipe passing through floors, walls, partitions and roof decks with the following exception: 1. Piping through inside walls and partitions, which have been neatly core drilled. B. Fire-rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at penetrations through fire-rated walls and partitions. Seal insulation ends with vapor barrier coating. Fill the annular space between the sleeve and pipe to prevent the passage of flame and hot gases. The fire stop used to fill the annular space shall be an approved penetration fire stop system installed in accordance with ASTM E814, with a minimum positive pressure differential of 0.01 inch of water and shall have an F rating of not less than the fire resistance rating of the wall penetrated. Comply with Section 302 of the 2020 Plumbing Code of NYS. C. Floor Penetrations: Terminate insulation at penetrations through fire-rated floor. Seal insulation ends with vapor barrier coating. Fill the annular space between the sleeve and pipe to prevent the passage of flame and hot gases. The fire stop used to fill the annular space shall be an approved penetration fire stop system installed in accordance with ASTM E814, with a minimum positive pressure differential of 0.01 inch of water and shall have an F rating of not less than the fire resistance rating of the floor penetrated. Comply with Section 302 of the 2020 Plumbing Code of NYS. 1.5 PAINTING A. All painting of exposed work in finished areas shall be provided by the Contractor. Paint exposed work to match adjacent surfaces, unless noted otherwise. 1.6 REMOVALS A. Remove all existing materials and equipment included in the work of this Division from construction which is scheduled to be demolished. B. Refer to Contract Drawings to determine extent of construction being removed and visit Job Site to examine existing conditions. C. Where removals occur on services that are to remain in operation, cap or otherwise terminate the remaining services beneath finished surfaces. D. Contractor shall coordinate with Owner, unless otherwise directed, as to the disposition of removed materials and equipment. E. Any removed materials and equipment scheduled for the Owner to retain shall remain the Owner’s property and shall be carefully removed and turned over in good condition at the Job Site. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 220501-3 PLUMBING BASIC REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 220501 - 3 F. All removed materials and equipment not scheduled to be retained by the Owner shall become the property of the Contractor and be promptly removed from the Job Site. G. Wherever removal work entails the handling of hazardous material, (for example: asbestos), all removal procedures and disposal of removed material shall be in strict compliance with OSHA, EPA and New York State requirements currently in force. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide all plumbing work in accordance with the 2020 Plumbing Code of N.Y.S. Health Code and any local codes that may apply. 1.8 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data for approval before products or equipment are delivered to the Job. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Only products manufactured, fabricated or assembled by countries which are based in a member country of NAFTA shall be approved for use on this Job. 2.2 MANUALS A. Submit complete manual(s) for all work of this Division, in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements. Manuals shall include: 1. Installation, maintenance, operating instructions and full catalog description including exploded parts drawings of all equipment. 2. All valve charts and lists. 3. Emergency phone numbers for service for all equipment. 4. List of all Suppliers and Subcontractors including addresses, responsible personnel and phone numbers. 5. All receipts, submittals and test reports. 6. All warranties. 7. Maintenance schedule for all equipment. 2.3 SLEEVES A. Materials 1. Sleeves shall be of similar material to adjacent pipe, conduit, etc., but no less than 16 US gauge metal. a. Type A: Schedule 40 steel pipe. b. Type B: 16 gauge galvanized sheet steel. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 220501-4 PLUMBING BASIC REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 220501 - 4 2. Size of Sleeves a. Size sleeves for bare (un-insulated) pipe so as to provide 1/4" annular clearance between the sleeve and the outside surface of the pipe. b. On renovation projects, where the specifications allow core drilling of holes for piping, in lieu of sleeves, size holes to provide 1/4" annular clearance between the outside of the pipe and the hole. c. When insulation on piping is required to extend continuously through construction work, size core drilled holes to accommodate insulated pipe and allow for packing where specified. 3. Length of Sleeves a. In Walls and Partitions 1) Install sleeves of length as required, so as to be equal in length to thickness of wall or partition construction, including all applied finishes on said walls and partitions. b. Floors 1) Install sleeves 1/2" longer than the overall depth of the construction including final finishes. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 OWNER’S INSTRUCTION A. After completion of work, including punchlists, and after testing of systems, conduct a complete and thorough seminar for Owner’s designated personnel at the Job Site. B. Seminar Shall Include: 1. Operation and Maintenance of all Systems 2. Explanation of Identification Systems 3. Emergency Procedures 4. Review of Manuals C. Seminar shall be conducted by persons thoroughly familiar with equipment and installation. 3.2 SLEEVES A. Improperly located sleeves shall be removed and openings patched. B. Cut sleeves flush with adjacent surfaces unless otherwise indicated. C. Sleeves in floors subject to frequent wash down shall extend 1" above finished floor. D. Pack all spaces between service and sleeves with acoustic sealant. E. Sleeve Types 1. Type A a. Install Type A sleeves for piping passing through waterproofed walls and floors. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 220501-5 PLUMBING BASIC REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 220501 - 5 2. Type B a. Install Type B sleeves for all other piping, not specified to receive a Type A sleeve. 1) Install Type B sleeves, with sheet metal ears soldered to sleeves, for piping passing through core drilled holes in waterproofed floor construction on rehabilitation projects. Seal annular space between sleeve and hole watertight, with silicone caulking compound. F. Sleeve Packing 1. Render sleeves from mechanical equipment, penthouses and mechanical equipment rooms into any building space or enclosure, air- and vapor-tight by packing the annular space between the pipe and sleeve with a noncombustible insulating material, as specified. 2. Render sleeves in inside walls, partitions or floors, not hereinbefore specified, airtight by packing with acoustic sealant. 3. Render sleeves in firewalls as in Subparagraph 2 above. 3.3 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS A. Obtain and pay for all permits, testing and inspections required for the work of this Division. END OF SECTION 220501 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 220503-1 PIPE AND TUBES FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT QPK NO. 220157.00 220503 - 1 SECTION 220503 - PIPE AND TUBES FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Listed under this Section is the piping required for the sanitary transmission of potable water. B. Included under this Section is piping to be used for handling: 1. Potable Water 2. Domestic Hot Water C. Pipe fittings include all couplings, tees, elbows, flanges, unions, connectors and joints required for a complete installation. D. All materials installed shall meet the lead free definition under the Safe Drinking Water Act. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installation of all products shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and in accordance with all applicable codes. B. All pipe shall be ASTM pressure test rated for the type of service. C. Provide dielectric fittings or unions between dissimilar materials. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Schedules 1. Before beginning work provide for approval a schedule of all materials and manufacturers’ proposals to be used for all products. B. Samples 1. Submit for approval upon request. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COPPER PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Service Weight 1. Forced Flow and Pressurized Type: Type “L” hard tempered copper for general plumbing. 2. Complying with ASTM B75; B88; B251; B447. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 220503-2 PIPE AND TUBES FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT QPK NO. 220157.00 220503 - 2 B. Terminations 1. Sweat type, lead free solder. 2. Press type fittings not acceptable. C. Fittings 1. Pressure type, sweat copper, for water lines. 2. ASME B16.15; B16.18; B16.22; B16.23; B16.26 & B16.29. 2.2 BRASS PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Service Weight 1. Schedule 40. 2. Complying with ASTM B43. B. Finish 1. Chrome plated, where piping is exposed in finished rooms. C. Fittings 1. Rough brass, chrome plated, where piping is exposed in finished rooms. 2. Complying with ASTM F 1974. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Potable Water 1. Provide copper pipe and fittings for the entire system. 2. Included under this Specification shall be cold water and hot water. B. Copper Pipe and Tubing 1. Provide secure supports for horizontal runs and for vertical runs. Refer to the Contract Drawings for spacing of hangers or supports. 2. Cut pipe squarely; ream, remove all metal chips and burrs. 3. Make all soldered copper pipe, tube joints using lead-free solder. 4. Install in accordance with industry standards. 5. All changes in direction shall be made by using manufactured fittings. Bending of straight lengths is not permitted. C. All piping that requires proper grading shall be pitched down in direction of flow without pockets or sags. D. When installing the piping, make necessary allowance for movement due to expansion and contraction so that temperature changes shall not damage either the piping or the building attachments. E. Install all piping and fittings exposed to view in finished rooms using chrome plated brass. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 220503-3 PIPE AND TUBES FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT QPK NO. 220157.00 220503 - 3 F. Provide supports and hangers for all piping; install piping neatly. G. Support piping located above ceilings from building structure.. H. Completely disassemble, provide new fittings and reassemble all piping found to be unsatisfactory upon testing. I. Provide dielectric fittings or unions at connection point of dissimilar materials. END OF SECTION 220503 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 220523-1 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING QPK NO. 220157.00 220523 - 1 SECTION 220523 - GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Shall include all control, ball, check, balancing and other valves required for installation of the plumbing work. B. All materials installed shall meet the lead free definition under the Safe Drinking Water Act. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All products shall be pressure rated for a minimum working pressure of 125 psig in accordance with ASTM Specifications. B. All service valves, ball and check shall be a product of the same manufacturer. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data on all products. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Interiors: Bronze (ASTM B62) B. Exteriors: Bronze (ASTM B62), Ferrosteel (ASTM A126, B&C), and chrome plated brass. 2.2 BALL VALVES A. 3" and Smaller 1. Material: Body, Bronze (ASTM B62). 2. Type: Full port equal to the connecting pipe size, no lubrication required, two-way flow, stainless steel ball, quarter turn handle for ON-OFF, two-piece body, bronze construction rated at 400 psi WOG, threaded or solder female connection ends as determined by connecting piping. 3. Style: Nibco S-685-66-LF, or approved equal. 2.3 CHECK VALVES A. 2" and Smaller 1. Material: Body and disc, bronze (ASTM B62). 2. Type: Swing type, screw ends, Class 125. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 220523-2 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING QPK NO. 220157.00 220523 - 1 B. Style: Watts B5000 or approved equal by Jenkins, Crane or Milwaukee. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Install all valves in such a manner that they are readily accessible. B. Provide all piping adapters required to transition from screwed and flanged fittings to sweat fittings. C. Provide only chrome plated brass valves in finished rooms. D. Provide dielectric fittings or unions at the connection point of dissimilar materials. 3.2 BALL VALVES A. Provide in water piping at all fixtures and plumbing equipment. Stops provided with fixtures are considered acceptable. Ball valves shall be used for water service, unless otherwise directed. B. Provide at each branch line, near the main, supplying a group of fixtures. 3.3 CHECK VALVES A. Provide at all locations where reverse flow may occur. Use rubber-faced disc where high head pressure may occur. B. Install only in horizontal lines or in vertical lines where the flow is upward. END OF SECTION 220523 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 220528-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING QPK NO. 220157.00 220528-1 SECTION 220528 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide hangers, supports and attachments as indicated in this Section which comply with: 1. MSS SP-58; Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture 2. MSS SP-69; Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application 3. MSS SP-89; Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices 4. MSS SP-90; Guidelines for Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports 5. ASME B31 Series; Pressure Piping Code 6. AWS D1.1; Structural Welding Code - Steel B. Manufacturer 1. Design Basis: ITT Grinnell a. The figure numbers listed in this Section are figure numbers used by ITT Grinnell and are intended only as a method of identifying the type hanger required. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: ITT Grinnell F and S Manufacturing Fee and Mason Elcen Metal Products Company Carpenter and Patterson, Incorporated B-Line Systems Approved equivalent 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Trapeze Hangers a. Submit drawings for all trapeze hanger type supports complete with size and type of horizontal members, hanger rod sizes, accessories and the method of support from the overhead construction. b. In addition, include the number and size of pipe lines to be supported on each type of trapeze hanger. 2. Anchors and Supports a. Submit assembly-type shop drawings for each type of anchor, support, or sway brace, indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, methods of assembly of components and methods of attachment to permanent construction. B. Product Data 1. Hangers and Manufactured Accessories a. Submit pipe hanger and support schedule showing manufacturer’s figure number, size, location and features for each required pipe hanger and support. b. Submit manufacturer’s catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructions for each item scheduled. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 220528-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING QPK NO. 220157.00 220528-2 1.3 COORDINATION A. Existing Construction 1. The Contractor whose work includes the installation of products furnished under this Section is responsible for all work involved in the installation of such products, including cutting and patching. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports 1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hanger: MSS Type 1. a. Figure 260; use for non-insulated stationary pipe, 1/2" through 30". b. Figure 260; use with MSS Type 40 shield for hot or cold service insulated stationary pipe, 1/2" through 4". c. Figure 300; use for hot service insulated stationary pipe, 1/2" through 6". d. Figure CT-65; use for copper tubing, 1/2" through 4". 2. Adjustable Swivel Ring, Band Type: MSS Type 10. a. Figure 69, 70; use for suspension of non-insulated stationary pipe, 1/2" through 8". b. Figure CT-69; use for suspension of non-insulated stationary copper tubing, 1/2" through 8". 3. U-Bolts: MSS Type 24. a. Figure 137, 137S, 137C; use for support or guide of heavy loads, 1/2" through 36". B. Vertical-Piping Clamps 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamp: MSS Type 8. a. Figure 261; use for support and steadying of pipe risers, 3/4" through 20". b. Figure CT-121; use for support and steadying of copper tubing risers, 1/2" through 4". 2. Carbon or Alloy Steel Riser Clamp: MSS Type 42. a. Similar to MSS Type 8 with longer ends. C. Hanger Rods 1. Provide mild, low carbon steel, with two removable nuts at each threaded end for positioning rod and hanger and locking in place. a. Figure 140, 253; threaded both ends, 3/8" through 3-3/4". b. Figure 146; continuous thread, 1/4" through 1-1/2". D. Hanger Rod Attachments 1. Steel Turnbuckle: MSS Type 13. a. Figure 230; use for adjustment up to 6" for heavy loads. 2. Swivel Turnbuckle or Turnbuckle Adjuster: MSS Type 15. a. Figure 114; use with split pipe rings (MSS Type 11). 3. Malleable Iron Socket: MSS Type 16. a. Figure 110R; use for attaching hanger rod to various types of building attachments. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 220528-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING QPK NO. 220157.00 220528-3 E. Building Attachments 1. Top Beam C-Clamp: MSS Type 19. a. Figure 92, 93, 94; use under roof installations with bar joist construction for attachment to top flange of structural shape. 2. Side-Beam or Channel Clamp: MSS Type 20. a. Figure 225, 226; use for attachment to bottom flange of beams, channels or angles. 3. Center-Beam Clamp: MSS Type 21. a. Figure 133, 134; use for attachment to center of bottom flange of beams. 4. Welded Beam Attachment: MSS Type 22. a. Figure 66; use for attachments to bottom of beams where loads are considerable and rod sizes are large. 5. C-Clamp: MSS Type 23. a. Figure 86, 92, 93, 95; use for attachments to structural shapes. 6. Top-Beam or Adjustable Side Beam Clamp: MSS Type 25. a. Figure 217; use where it is necessary for the hanger rod to run vertically close to a beam edge, thus eliminating drilling of holes in structural members. 7. Adjustable Beam Clamp: MSS Type 27. a. Figure 14; use for supporting pipe from the bottom flange of beams. 8. Welded Steel Brackets a. Light (MSS Type 31): Figure 194; use to support 750 pound maximum load. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): Figure 195: use to support 1500 pound maximum load. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): Figure 199; use to support 3000 pound maximum load. 9. Side Beam Bracket: MSS Type 34. a. Figure 202, 206, 207; use on sides of steel or wood beams. 10. Plate Lug: MSS Type 57. a. Figure 55; use for attachment to steel beams where flexibility at the beam is desired. F. Insulation Filler Pieces and Shields 1. Insulation Filler Pieces a. Provide high density fiberglass insulation, or cellular glass insulation, or high density foam insulation filler pieces. b. Filler pieces shall be any of the following: 1) Fiberglass: H-block pipe support insulation as manufactured by ICA Fittings or approved equivalent. 2) Cellular foam glass insulation as manufactured by Pittsburgh Corning or approved equivalent. 2. Provide pressure treated wood spacers, custom cut to the thickness necessary to support pipe at each hanger location. Spaces shall be a minimum of 3/4" wide x length of metal protection shield x thickness required to match exactly the thickness of the pipe insulation into which the wood spacer is to be embedded. The wood spacer shall accomplish the purpose of supporting the pipe while also eliminating any wrinkles or indentations on the pipe insulation’s all service jacket. 3. Protection Shield: MSS Type 40. a. Figure 167; use for outside of foam, fiberglass or cellular foamglass insulation to prevent crushing of insulation or damage to vapor barrier. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 220528-4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING QPK NO. 220157.00 220528-4 b. Protection shield shall be 180 degree, galvanized sheet metal molded to fit the outside diameter of the pipe insulation. Shields shall be 16” in length. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Metal Framing 1. Provide products complying with NEMA STD ML1. B. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars 1. Provide products complying with ASTM A36. C. Heavy Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from steel shapes selected for the loads required; weld steel in accordance with AWS standards. D. Shop Painting and Plating 1. Provide shop coat of red lead or zinc primer paint on all hangers, supports, rods, metal framing, steel plates, shapes and bars furnished under this Section, unless cadmium plated, copper plated or galvanized. 2. Provide electroplated copper hangers, rods, supports and accessories for use with copper pipe or copper tubing when hangers or supports are in direct contact with pipe or tubing. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPE HANGERS AND PIPE SUPPORTS A. General 1. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure; comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. 2. Use copper plated or PVC coated hangers and supports for the support of copper pipe and tubing as a means of preventing electrolysis when hangers or supports are in direct contact with pipe or tubing. B. Horizontal Piping 1. Support groupings of parallel runs of horizontal piping together on field-fabricated heavyduty trapeze hangers where possible. 2. Comply with hanger spacing schedule as shown on the Contract Drawings and International Plumbing Code 2015 for maximum spacing between hangers and supports. 3. Where piping of various sizes is supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe as specified above for individual pipe hangers. 4. Do not use wire or perforated metal straps to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping or ductwork. 5. Install a hanger or support close to the point of change of direction of all pipe runs in either a horizontal or vertical plane. 6. Install additional hangers or supports, spaced as required and directed, to support concentrated loads such as in-line pumps, valves, fittings, equipment or other accessories. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 220528-5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING QPK NO. 220157.00 220528-5 7. Install a minimum of one hanger, and additional hangers if required by the hanger spacing schedules, in branch piping runs and runouts over 5 feet in length. 8. Support all insulated service piping by means of hangers or supports with high density insulation inserts and insulation protection shields installed outside of the insulation at each hanger/support location. C. Hanger Rods 1. Comply with MSS SP-69 for application and sizing of hanger rods. 2. Secure hanger rods with four nuts, two at upper attachment, and two at hanger; tighten against each other to lock hanger in place. D. Vertical Piping 1. Support vertical risers of piping systems with heavy duty hangers installed close to base of risers and riser clamps with extension arms at intermediate floors. 2. Install riser clamps above floor slabs, with the extension arms resting on the slabs. 3. Make adequate provision for risers that are subject to appreciable expansion or contraction. 4. Install intermediate supports between riser clamps on maximum 6 ft. centers for copper tubing risers 1-1/4" in size and smaller. 3.2 UPPER HANGER ATTACHMENTS A. General 1. In all cases, secure upper hanger attachments to overhead structural steel or steel bar joists wherever possible. 2. Do not attach hangers to steel decks which are not to receive concrete fill. 3. Do not attach hangers to precast concrete plank decks except as indicated below or recommended by the manufacturer. 4. Do not use flat bars or bent rods as upper hanger attachments. B. Attachment to Steel Frame Construction 1. Secure upper hanger attachments to structural steel or bar joists. 2. Secure upper hanger attachments to steel bar joists only at panel points of joists. 3. Do not drill holes in main structural steel members. 4. Provide intermediate structural steel members where required by pipe support spacing. 5. Select steel members used for intermediate supports based on a minimum safety factor of five. 6. Do not use drive-on beam clamps. 7. C-clamp types of upper hanger attachments with restraining straps may be used for piping systems up to 3" in size, with average system temperatures not less than 50F nor more than 200F. 8. Do not support piping over 4" in size from steel bar joists. C. Attachment to Concrete Filled Steel Decks 1. Do not attach hangers to decks less than 2-1/2" thick. 2. Where necessary, attach hangers to the deck with welding studs (except at roof decks), thrubolts with fish plates, or tee hangers. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 220528-6 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING QPK NO. 220157.00 220528-6 3. Do not support a load in excess of 250 pounds from any single welded stud. 4. Do not support piping over 4" in size from thru-bolts with fish plates or tee hangers. D. Attachment to Existing Cast-in-Place Concrete 1. For piping up to a maximum of 4" in size, secure hangers to overhead construction with selfdrilling type expansion shields and machine bolts. 2. Secure hangers to wall or floor construction with single unit expansion shields or self-drilling type expansion shields and machine bolts. 3.3 INSULATION FILLER PIECES AND SHIELDS A. Insulation Filler Pieces 1. Install high density insulation filler pieces at each point of support of insulated piping except as otherwise specified. 2. Install filler pieces of the same thickness as adjoining pipe insulation, around the full circumference of the pipe, and at least 2" longer than the insulation shield as follows: a. Install high density fibrous glass, high density molded urethane foam or high density cellular foam glass filler pieces for piping or tubing up to 2" in size insulated with fibrous glass. 3. For pipe or tubing 2 1/2" – 8” size use custom cut spacers of pressure treated wood between the pipe and hanger. Wood spacers shall be embedded within the pre-sized fiberglass insulation and encapsulated in lagging mastic. Wood spacers shall be sized to eliminate any wrinkles in the all service jacket at hanger locations. B. Pipe Insulation Shields 1. Install a pipe insulation shield at all points of support between hanger and insulation installed on pipe or tubing. 2. Center shields on all hangers and supports and install in such a manner so as not to cut, puncture or press into the insulation, or in any manner be detrimental to the vapor barrier. C. In lieu of providing individual filler pieces and shields, the Contractor may use pre-insulated, pipe insulation shield and vapor barrier jacketed high density insulating saddle at points of support. END OF SECTION 220528 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 220553-1 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT QPK NO. 220157.00 220553 - 1 SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Label all piping and equipment as to type, function or service described herein. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Identification labels, tags and charts - Seton Name Plate Corporation, New Haven, Connecticut or approved equal. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Product Data for pipe system identification labels, valve identification tags and valve service chart frames. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 IDENTIFICATION - VALVES A. Valve Service Identification Tags 1. No. 19 B&S gauge brass, or approved equal, with 1/4" high valve service abbreviated lettering on one line over 1/2" high valve service chart number, with 3/16" top hole for fastener. Tags, deep stamped and black filled; 1-1/2" round for plumbing use. B. Valve Tag Fasteners 1. Brass “S” hooks, or size as required for the valve to which attached. C. Valve Service Identification Chart Frames 1. Satin finished extruded aluminum of size to suit 8-1/2" x 11" chart. Provide rigid clear plastic glazing. 2.2 IDENTIFICATION - PIPING A. Provide pre-printed, vinyl, color-coded, pipe labels. B. Provide pre-printed, vinyl flow arrow labels to show direction of piping flow. C. Provide labels which identify pipe system by its abbreviated (if necessary) generic piping system name. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 220553-2 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT QPK NO. 220157.00 220553 - 2 2.3 IDENTIFICATION - EQUIPMENT A. Provide engraved plastic laminate signs. B. Provide text of sufficient clarity and lettering of adequate size to convey the information at each location. C. Comply with industry standards for color and design. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Complete all testing, insulation and finish painting work required by the Specification, prior to the application of identification information and flow arrows on piping. 3.2 VALVE IDENTIFICATION A. Application 1. Tag every valve, cock and control device in each piping system; exclude check valves, valves within equipment units, hose bibbs, faucets and shut-off valve of plumbing fixtures and similar multiple unit terminal valves. B. Valve Schedule 1. Prepare and submit valve tag schedule listing each tagged valve by location, service and tag description. Install each page of the valve schedule in glazed frames and mount where directed. 3.3 PIPING SYSTEM A. General 1. Provide adequate marking of piping which is exposed, including that which is concealed in accessible spaces. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for colors. Include arrows to show direction of flow. Locate markers at terminations of lines and near major branches; near control valves and at equipment connections; where lines pass through wall, floors and ceilings; at access doors where piping is in concealed spaces; and at spacing of not more than 25' along each line for exposed piping. 2. Provide "Asbestos Free" labels to all pipe insulation installed under this Contract. Apply labels at 25' intervals. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 220553-3 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT QPK NO. 220157.00 220553 - 3 3.4 EQUIPMENT A. Operational Tags 1. Where needed for proper and adequate information on operation and maintenance of plumbing systems, provide tags of plasticized card stock, either preprinted or typed to convey the message. END OF SECTION 220553 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 220700-1 PLUMBING INSULATION QPK NO. 220157.00 220700- 1 SECTION 220700 - PLUMBING INSULATION PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Included under this Specification is insulation required for all plumbing work. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All products shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Products shall be components of UL recognized insulation system. C. Installation shall be performed only by qualified workmen. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog data sheets for approval. B. Submit schedule indicating service, insulation thickness, insulation type, jacket and finish. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Concealed Locations: Above suspended ceilings, in pipe chases and mechanical rooms. B. Exposed Locations: All other locations within the building not classified as concealed as described above. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING INSULATION A. Thermal Conductivity: 0.25 BTU/hour/square inch at 75°F mean temperature. B. Moisture Absorption: 0.2% by volume 96 hours @ 120°F and 95% R.H. C. Specific Heat: 0.20 BTU/pound degree Fahrenheit. D. Shrinkage: None E. Alkalinity: PH9 F. Capillarity: Negligible after 24 hours. G. Dimensional Stability: Shall not warp, shrink, rot or decompose. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 220700-2 PLUMBING INSULATION QPK NO. 220157.00 220700- 2 H. Vermin and Rodent Resistance: Provides no sustenance. I. Temperature Limitations: Recommended for water piping from 60°F to +450°F. J. Jacket 1. Water Vapor Performance: 0.02 perms. 2. Beach Puncture: Minimum 50 units. K. Fire Hazard Classification 1. Flame Spread: 25 2. Fuel Contributed: 50 L. Construction: One-piece, with integral vapor barrier. M. Style: Owens-Corning Fiberglass 25 ASJ or approved equal by Armstrong, Certainteed or Knauf. 2.2 FITTING AND VALVE INSULATION A. Properties are to be the same as specified in Article 2.1 above for piping insulation. B. Provide presized fiberglass insulation inserts with PVC prefabricated fitting covers. C. PVC Insulated Fitting Covers 1. Provide prefabricated PVC fitting covers in conjunction with fiberglass insulation inserts on all pipe fittings. a. Material: PVC b. Temperature Range: 0°F to 450°F PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING A. Install insulation in accordance with the insulation manufacturer’s written installation instructions. B. Install Insulation on: 1. Domestic cold water piping, fittings and valve bodies. 2. Domestic hot water piping, fittings and valve bodies. 3. Note exception: Flanges and unions in domestic hot water piping are not to be insulated. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 220700-3 PLUMBING INSULATION QPK NO. 220157.00 220700- 3 C. Begin Installing Insulation after: 1. All piping has been tested and tests accepted. 2. All surfaces have been properly cleaned. 3. All surfaces are dry. D. Insulation thickness for all piping systems listed within this Section shall be as follows: 1. Domestic hot water piping insulation shall be minimum of 1" thick for piping up to and including 1-1/4”. Piping 1-1/2” and larger shall be 1-1/2”. 2. Domestic cold water piping insulation shall be minimum of 1/2" thick for piping up to and including 1-1/4”. Piping 1-1/2” and larger shall be 1”. E. Finish exterior of insulation to be compatible with painting or other markings. F. Provide continuous insulation through all hangers; provide galvanized sheet metal shield to protect insulation at hangers. G. Do not install staples in vapor barriers. H. Fittings and Valves 1. Install premolded fiberglass inserts of the same thickness as the adjoining insulation. 2. Install insulation on valves up to and including bonnets without interfering with packing glands. 3. Butt insulation neatly and firmly against fittings, flanges and valves. 4. Vapor seal all joints. I. Provide white PVC jacket over piping insulation in all locations, where piping is exposed, in finished and/or occupied spaces, including storage rooms. J. Re-insulate all existing piping where the existing insulation was damaged or removed during demolition or construction. END OF SECTION 220700 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 221119-1 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES QPK NO. 220157.00 221119 - 1 SECTION 221119 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Shall include all products listed for a quality installation. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform installation of all products in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and in accordance with all applicable codes. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Provide a schedule of all equipment and manufacturer’s data for all products. B. Provide shop drawings for all products. C. Samples: Submit for approval upon request. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VENTS A. Material: Same as piping in which they are installed. 2.2 TRAPS A. Materials: Same as piping in which they are installed. B. Style: Positive siphoning type. Non-siphoning type is not acceptable. C. Lavatories shall have interceptor type traps. 2.3 WATER SHOCK ABSORBERS A. Shock Absorber with stainless steel shell, hydro-pneumatic cushion of argon gas and pure glycerine, elastomer bellows, stainless steel adapter and male threaded plug. B. Shock Absorber to be sized in accordance with Plumbing and Drainage Institute “Standard P.D.I. - WH210” or manufacturer’s “Fixture-Unit Rating Table.” C. Shock Absorber to be Smith, Hydrotrol or approved equal by Josam or Zurn. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 221119-2 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES QPK NO. 220157.00 221119 - 2 2.4 CLEANOUTS A. Materials: Same as piping in which they are installed. B. Floor Type 1. Body: Cast iron inside caulk with adjustable head. 2. Plug: Bronze, countersunk. 3. Top: Buff polished bronze. 4. Cover: Smooth, Nikoloy type, secured with screws. C. Wall Type, Finished Areas 1. Caulking Ferrule: Cast Iron (for soil pipe hub). 2. Plug: Tapered thread, bronze, countersunk. 3. Access Cover Plated: Round polished Nikoloy secure to plug by counterscrew. D. Wall Type, Unfinished Areas 1. Material: Same as piping in which they are installed. 2. Plug: Countersunk. 2.5 ESCUTCHEON PLATES AND FLANGES A. Materials 1. Flanges: Cast brass, chrome plated. 2. Escutcheon Plates: Chrome plated brass. B. Size: As required to match pipe sizes and over rough work. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 VENTS A. Install on all fixtures and group of fixtures. B. Slope vent piping so it shall drain back to waste line by gravity. C. Install back vents on all traps. 3.2 TRAPS A. Install traps on all fixtures and plumbing equipment, not equipped with integral traps. B. Protect all traps from siphonage. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 221119-3 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES QPK NO. 220157.00 221119 - 3 3.3 WATER SHOCK ABSORBERS A. Provide at the tops of all risers and at the end of all runs in excess of 50', in all hot and cold water piping. B. Provide at the end of all lines serving a group of fixtures. C. Install in accessible locations. D. Sizing and selection shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.4 CLEANOUTS A. Provide at end of all runs and where shown on the Contract Drawings. B. Install cleanouts in such a manner that all piping may be readily reached for purposes of cleaning. C. Install floor cleanouts flush with the floor. D. Cleanouts shall be of the same nominal size as the pipe, but need not be larger than 4". 3.5 ESCUTCHEON PLATES AND FLANGES A. Install escutcheons on all piping where the piping passes through walls, floors and ceilings exposed to view. B. Install flanges over rough sleeves or piping wherever the sleeves or piping pass through walls, floors and ceilings exposed to view. END OF SECTION 221119 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 221305-1 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE QPK NO. 220157.00 221305 - 1 SECTION 221305 - FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Listed under this Section is the piping required for the transmission of sanitary waste. B. Included under this Section is piping to be used for handling: 1. Sanitary Waste Above Grade C. Pipe fittings include all couplings, tees, wyes, elbows, flanges, unions, connectors and joints required for a complete installation. D. Refer to Section 224200 - Plumbing Fixtures and Trim for floor drains and cleanouts. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installation of all products shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and in accordance with all applicable codes. B. Cast iron piping shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute. C. All pipe shall be ASTM pressure test rated for the type of service. D. Comply with Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Standard CISPI 301 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste and Vent Piping Applications. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Schedules 1. Before beginning work provide for approval a schedule of all materials and manufacturers’ proposals to be used for all products. B. Samples 1. Submit for approval upon request. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CAST IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Type 1. Extra heavy weight or service weight, ASA approved. 2. Complying with ASTM A74; ASTM A888. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 221305-2 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE QPK NO. 220157.00 221305 - 2 B. Construction 1. Smooth interior with Bell and Spigot ends for compression type joints; straight ends for use with “no-hub” fittings. C. Finish 1. Dip coated inside and out with asphalt paint. D. Fittings 1. ASTM B16.1; B16.4; B16.12; A74; A888. 2.2 COPPER PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Service Weight 1. Atmospheric Pressure and Gravity Flow Type: DWV tubing. 2. Complying with ASTM B75; B88; B251; B306. B. Terminations 1. Sweat type. C. Fittings 1. Drainage type, sweat copper, for drain and vent lines. 2. ASME B16.23; B16.26 & B16.29. 2.3 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS (GALVANIZED) A. Service Weight 1. Standard Full Weight. 2. Complying with ASTM A53. B. Construction 1. Threaded steel, heavily galvanized inside and out (including threads). C. Identification 1. All components shall bear the manufacturer’s trademark. D. Fittings 1. All nipples, couplings, unions, etc., shall be malleable iron of a streamlined design so as not to interfere with flow. Approved fitting manufacturers: Grinnell, Crane Company. 2. Drainage pattern fittings for sanitary water piping. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 221305-3 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE QPK NO. 220157.00 221305 - 3 PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Sanitary Piping (Waste and Vent or Copper DWV Pipe) 1. Provide cast iron fittings for all sanitary piping. B. Cast Iron Pipe 1. Use “no-hub” joints for all cast iron pipe installed inside the building. 2. Provide secure supports for horizontal runs and for vertical runs in suspended piping. Refer to Section 220529 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment, for spacing of hangers or supports. 3. Use 1/8 bends wherever the piping changes direction. 4. Provide stainless steel shield and clamp assembly on all “no-hub” joints. C. Copper Tubing 1. Provide secure supports for horizontal runs and for vertical runs. Refer to Section 220529 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment, for spacing of hangers or supports. 2. Cut pipe squarely; ream, remove all metal chips and burrs. 3. Install in accordance with industry standards. 4. All changes in direction shall be made by using manufactured fittings. Bending of straight lengths is not permitted. D. Steel Pipe 1. Provide secure supports for horizontal runs and vertical runs. Refer to Section 220529 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment, for spacing of hangers or supports. 2. All changes in direction shall be made by using manufactured fittings. Bending of straight lengths is not permitted. E. All piping that requires proper grading shall be pitched down in direction of flow without pockets or sags. F. When installing the piping, make necessary allowance for movement due to expansion and contraction so that temperature changes shall not damage either the piping or the building attachments. Piping installed within floor slabs is not permitted. G. Install all piping and fittings exposed to view in finished rooms using chrome plated brass. H. Provide supports and hangers for all piping; install piping neatly. I. Support piping located above ceilings from building structure. Piping supported from metal roof decks is not permitted. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 221305-4 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE QPK NO. 220157.00 221305 - 4 J. Completely disassemble, provide new fittings and reassemble all piping found to be unsatisfactory upon testing. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Protect open ends with temporary plugs or caps. 3.3 INSTALLATION – ABOVE GROUND A. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1/8 inch per foot minimum on mains 4 inches and larger. Install branch mains smaller than 4 inch with 1/4 inch per foot slope. Maintain gradients. B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Provide clearances at cleanout for snaking drainage system. C. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor. D. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls. E. Install piping to maintain headroom. F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints or connected equipment. G. Support cast iron drainage piping at each joint and at intervals per the 2020 Plumbing Code of NYS. END OF SECTION 221305 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 224200-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM QPK NO. 220157.00 224200-1 SECTION 224200 - PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Included under this Section are plumbing fixtures and related trim. Supports for wall hung fixtures are specified under Section 220529 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All fixtures shall be furnished by one of the following manufacturers: 1. Sloan 2. American Standard 3. Fiat 4. Elkay 5. Approved equal B. Toilet seats shall be manufactured by either Church, Beneke, or approved equal. C. All fixture trim shall be furnished by one of the following manufacturers: 1. American Standard 2. Sloan 3. Approved equal 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer’s data for approval. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All products shall be new and in original cartons. Provide complete with all necessary connections, equipment, trim, fittings and supports. B. Provide water saver type fixtures. C. Provide products constructed using materials free from defects. D. Provide vitreous china products thoroughly fused and vitrified to a homogeneous mass. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 224200-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM QPK NO. 220157.00 224200-2 2.2 FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT WC-1 Water Closet 1. Description: Flush Valve - Low Consumption 2. Mounting: Wall Hung Carrier 3. Outlet: Rear 4. Construction: Vitreous China, Color: White 5. Bowl: Vitreous china, reverse trap, siphon action, elongated rim bowl with self-draining jet. 6. Height: 17" floor to rim. 7. Flush valve, sensor actuation, battery powered, exposed, metal housing. Sloan Royal Model 111. SFSM-1.28. 8. Seat: Beneke solid plastic, elongated seat without cover. 9. Consumption at 30 psig = 1.28 gallons per flush. 10. ADA compliant. 11. Design Basis: American Standard AFWALL 2257.101. WC-2 Water Closet 1. Description: Flush Valve - Low Consumption 2. Mounting: Wall Hung Carrier 3. Outlet: Rear 4. Construction: Vitreous China, Color: White 5. Bowl: Vitreous china, reverse trap, siphon action, elongated rim bowl with self-draining jet. 6. Height: 15" floor to rim. 7. Flush valve, sensor actuation, battery powered, exposed, metal housing. Sloan Royal Model 111. SFSM-1.28. 8. Seat: Beneke solid plastic, elongated seat without cover. 9. Consumption at 30 psig = 1.28 gallons per flush. 10. Design Basis: American Standard AFWALL 2257.101. FD-1 Floor Drain 1. Description: Floor drain toilet rooms and finished areas. 2. Type: Double drainage type. 3. Construction: Cast iron body and 5 inch square nickel bronzed adjustable strainer head. 4. Equip floor drain with auxiliary inlet fitting for 1/2" F.P.T. threaded trap primer connection. 5. Style: WATTS FD-100-M. 6. Provide waterless drain trap sealer as manufactured by SureSeal or approved equal. US-1 Scrub Sink 1. Description: Double surgical scrub sink. 2. Mounting: Wall mount; provide wall bracket and all mounting hardware. 3. Construction: Stainless steel construction. 4. Trim: Infrared faucet battery. Provide thermostatic mixing assembly. 5. Supply Pipes: Chrome plated, loose key angle stops. 6. Trap: Cast brass, adjustable, with cleanout plug, tubing outlet and wall flange. 7. Style: ES47-IR. As offered by Paragon Medical. 8. Number of Stations: Varies - refer to drawings. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 224200-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM QPK NO. 220157.00 224200-3 L-1 Lavatory 1. Description: Nominal 20" x 18". 2. Mounting: Wall mount; provide floor mount concealed carrier. 3. Construction: Vitreous china; color: white; single hole to match trim. 4. Trim: Sloan Model EAF-100-HLT, chrome plated finish, 0.35 gpm, battery powered, infrared, chrome plated faucet. 5. Supply Pipes: Chrome plated, loose key angle stops. 6. Trap: Cast brass, adjustable, with cleanout plug, tubing outlet and wall flange. 7. Style: American Standard Lucerne 0356. Note: Provide “Handi Lav-Guard” insulation kits on lavatory plumbing. L-2 Lavatory 1. Description: Integral with vanity top. 2. Trim: Sloan Model EAF-100-HLT, chrome plated finish, 0.35 gpm, battery powered, infrared, chrome plated faucet. 3. Supply Pipes: Chrome plated, loose key angle stops. 4. Trap: Cast brass, adjustable, with cleanout plug, tubing outlet and wall flange. Note: Provide “Handi Lav-Guard” insulation kits on lavatory plumbing. MS-1 Mop Sink 1. Mounting: Floor set. 2. Construction: One piece, “molded stone”, 24" x 24" x 10" deep, with bumper guard plate. 3. Trim: Faucet with bucket hook, top brace and 8" spout. Drain cast brass (2" IPS) with dome strainer and lint basket. American Standard 8344.012. 4. Accessories: 12 ounce cartridge of sealant, 30" long x 5/8" jobber hose and bracket. 5. Style: Fiat #MSB-2424 or approved equal. Electric Water Heater EWH-2 & EWH-3 1. Description: Electric tankless point of use water heater. 2. Mounting: Wall mounted. 3. Construction: Cast aluminum alloy. 4. Electrical Characteristics: 30 amps, 208v/1p, hard wire connection UL listed. Provide electrical disconnect. 5. Capacity: 43°F temperature rise at 1.00 gpm, low flow activated 0.35 gpm. 110° limit setting 6. Style: chronomite m-30l/208. Electric Water Heater EWH-4 & EWH-5 & EWH-6 1. Description: Electric tankless point of use water heater. 2. Mounting: Wall mounted. 3. Construction: Cast aluminum alloy. 4. Electrical Characteristics: 30 amps, 120v/1p, hard wire connection UL listed. Provide electrical disconnect. 5. Capacity: 50°F temperature rise at 0.50 gpm, low flow activated 0.35 gpm. 110° limit setting. 6. Style: Chronomite sr-30l/120. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 224200-4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM QPK NO. 220157.00 224200-4 Electric Water Heater EWH-1 1. Description: 50 gallon electric tank type water heater. 2. Mounting: Wall mounted on shelf. 3. Construction: Heavy gauge steel tank with 1" foam insulation. 4. Electrical Characteristics: Dual 4500w element, 208v/1p, hard wire connection UL listed with T&P relief valve. Provide electrical disconnect. 5. Capacity: 90°f temperature rise at 21 gph. 6. Style: AO Smith ENL-50 suspended on shelf. 7. Shelf: Holdrite 50-SWHP-W wall mount shelf CS-1 Countertop Sink - ADA Compliant 1. Description: Single bowl with basin 14" x 16" x 6.5” with center drain hole. 2. Mounting: Self rim. 3. Construction: 18 gauge, type 302 stainless steel, seamless drawn, radius corners, satin finish, underside coated, 3 faucet holes, 8” centers. 4. Trim: Just Manufacturing Commercial Faucet Model JTR-51-w4, 8" wide spread faucet, 6-5/8" reach, gooseneck spout with aerator and wrist blade handles. Chrome plated brass construction. 5. Supply pipes: Chrome plated, angle supplies with loose key stops. 6. Trap: Cast brass, adjustable, with cleanout plug, tubing outlet and wall flange. 7. Strainer: Polished chrome with 1-1/2" tailpiece. 8. Style: Just Manufacturing model SL-ADA-1921-A-GR. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Provide carriers for all wall-mounted fixtures. B. Install all products level and plumb. C. Furnish and install chrome plated piping, fittings, valves, escutcheons, trim, etc., for fixture connections which are exposed to view. D. Install all fixtures at mounting heights shown on the Contract Drawings. E. Provide mounting supports for all products. F. Install all trim and accessories, providing adequate wall supports behind all wall-mounted components. G. Seal perimeter joints of fixtures with sealant recommended by fixture manufacturer for the locations and mounting surfaces indicated. END OF SECTION 224200 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 227005-1 CLEANING, TESTING AND ADJUSTING QPK NO. 220157.00 227005 - 1 SECTION 227005 - CLEANING, TESTING AND ADJUSTING PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work of this Section consists of all products and work required prior to making the plumbing operational as well as all work required to observe its performance. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All work shall be performed in accordance with accepted standards. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for approval and/or record on all tests performed. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE) PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Test all concealed piping before it is covered. B. All equipment or piping failing tests shall be repaired or replaced and then re-tested. 3.2 WASTE AND VENT PIPING A. Test all sanitary and vent piping before fixtures are connected. B. Cap or plug all openings, fill the system with a 10 foot high column of water and allow to stand for three (3) hours. If level of water does not drop in three (3) hours, the test may be considered satisfactory. 3.3 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING A. Pressure Testing 1. Apply a 125 psi hydrostatic test for four (4) hours before fixtures or faucets are connected. 2. Apply a 75 psi hydrostatic test for four (4) hours after the fixtures and faucets are connected. 3. Pressure shall remain constant for the duration of the test to be considered acceptable. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 227005-2 CLEANING, TESTING AND ADJUSTING QPK NO. 220157.00 227005 - 2 B. Sterility Test 1. Before the system may be used for domestic purposes, sterilize by slowly filling with water to which a sterilizing agent has been applied, at a rate giving 50 PPM of chlorine, as determined by residual chlorine test at extremities of the line. 2. After lines have been filled for a period of three (3) hours, test for residual chlorine shall show not less than 5 PPM. If less than 5 PPM is indicated, drain and flush out the lines and repeat sterilization treatment until tests indicate at least 5 PPM of residual chlorine after three (3) hours. 3. Flush lines out until all traces of chemical have been removed to the extent of 0.2 PPM maximum chlorine. 4. The Contractor shall collect two (2) water samples from each piping system and shall procure the services of a laboratory approved by the New York State Health Department (NYSDOH) to test the water samples in accordance with NYSDOH procedures. Results of these water sterility tests shall be forwarded to the Architect/Engineer. 3.4 VALVES AND FAUCETS A. Prior to acceptance open full force for 5 minutes. B. If leaking is observed around packings, the packings shall be replaced. 3.5 FIXTURES A. Remove all labels and completely clean all fixtures. END OF SECTION 227005 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 230101-1 HVAC BASIC REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 230101 - 1 SECTION 230101 - HVAC BASIC REQUIREMENTS PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. The requirements of this Section apply to: Division 23 - Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning (HVAC). 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Bidding and Contract Requirements (Division 00) of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and General Requirements (Division 01), apply to all HVAC Work. B. The following technical sections also have applicability as referenced herein: 1. Division 26 - Electrical. 2. Other sections as may be referenced herein or cross-referenced. 1.3 LAYOUT OF WORK A. The Contract Drawings are diagrammatic in showing physical layout. Exact locations must be established in coordination with all other work of this and other trades. B. Arrange work in a neat, well organized manner running parallel to walls and close to structure and other work above for maximum clearances. C. Locate operating and control equipment to insure access for operation and maintenance. D. Piping sloped for drainage shall have priority in layout. E. Coordinate the work of this Division with the work of other trades and make adjustments to the work as may be necessary to fit the spaces allotted. 1.4 PROJECT MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. All materials, equipment, piping, tubing, fittings, insulation, ductwork, etc., shall be manufactured, fabricated or assembled by companies which are based in a member country of NAFTA. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver products to the Site in sturdy shipping containers, properly labeled as to type, function and location. B. Handle products carefully at all times during shipping, storing and installing. Avoid crushing containers and prevent dirt and debris from entering or settling on products. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 230101-2 HVAC BASIC REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 230101 - 2 C. Store products in original shipping containers and protect from weather and construction work traffic. D. Where possible, store inside; otherwise, store above grade and enclose with weatherproof wrapping. 1.6 ELECTRICAL A. Provide all wiring from power panels and wiring, connections and accessories within and between items of equipment required to perform the work of this Division. B. Comply with the applicable provisions of Division 26 - Electrical, except as otherwise specifically indicated. 1.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. The Contractor shall provide all cutting and patching required to complete the HVAC work. B. Where patching requires the use of skilled tradespersons, the Contractor shall employ the services of an experienced sub-contractor who is qualified to perform the patching work. C. Unless stated otherwise the Contractor shall patch disturbed areas to match the existing finish and texture of the existing surfaces immediately adjacent to the disturbed area. 1.8 REMOVALS A. Remove all existing HVAC systems materials and equipment not indicated for re-use. B. Refer to Contract Drawings to determine extent of construction being removed, and visit Job Site to examine existing conditions. C. Where removals occur on services that are to remain in operation, cap or otherwise terminate the remaining services beneath finished surfaces. D. Carefully remove and turn over to the Owner in good condition at the Job Site all removed materials and equipment indicated for Owner’s retainage. E. Remove from the Job Site all existing materials and equipment not scheduled to be re-used or retained by the Owner. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FIELD PAINTING A. Provide all field painting required to perform the work of this Division. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 230101-3 HVAC BASIC REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 230101 - 3 2.2 SLEEVES A. Provide sleeves in the following locations: 1. All interior penetrations through fire rated construction. 2. All interior penetrations through previously erected or existing concrete or masonry which cannot be neatly drilled or cut. 3. All penetrations of piping subject to significant movement (thermal expansion) or at building expansion joints. 4. All penetrations required to be watertight, and areas subject to frequent washdown, extend 1" above floors. 5. At all other locations specifically noted in the Contract Documents. 6. At other locations desired by Installer. B. Provide Schedule 40 black steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6"; 10 gauge galvanized sheet- metal round tube with welded longitudinal joint for sleeves 6" or larger. C. Provide sleeves compatible with penetration and material penetrated. D. Provide 1/2" minimum clearance around penetration. E. Provide sleeves at all pipe penetrations through concrete and masonry construction, and through fire-rated drywall construction. F. Fill all sleeves through fire-rated construction with an approved silicone fire-seal sealant or UL listed alumina fiber and board. Pack all other sleeves with fiberglass insulation. Fill the annular space between the sleeve and pipe to prevent the passage of flame and hot gases. The fire-stop used to fill the annular space shall be an approved penetration fire-stop system installed in accordance with ASTM E814, with a minimum positive pressure differential of 0.01 inch of water and shall have an F rating of not less than the fire resistance rating of the floor penetrated. Comply with Section 302 of the 2020 Mechanical Code of NYS. G. Sleeves through structural members are not permitted without prior approval from Engineer. H. Cut sleeves flush with adjacent surfaces unless otherwise indicated. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 LUBRICATION FITTINGS A. Mount all grease and oil fittings directly on bearings, except when bearings are not readily accessible. When equipment bearings are not visible, or are inaccessible, provide readily accessible and secured copper tubing extensions to bearing lubrication fittings, including plug closed extensions from grease bearing reliefs. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 230101-4 HVAC BASIC REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 230101 - 4 3.2 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Provide all cutting and patching, except as otherwise specified. B. Remove and replace work which, in the judgment of the Engineer, has been cut and patched in an unsatisfactory manner. 3.3 OWNER’S INSTRUCTION A. After Substantial Completion of Work, including testing and balancing of systems, conduct a complete and thorough seminar for Owner’s designated personnel at the Job Site. B. Include the following instructions: 1. Operation and maintenance of all systems 2. Explanation of identification systems 3. Emergency and alarm procedures 4. Sequencing requirements 5. Seasonal provisions 6. Security and safety 7. Review of manuals C. Conduct seminar by persons thoroughly familiar with equipment and installation, who may include manufacturer’s representatives. D. Contractor shall conduct testing and equipment startup prior to scheduling Owner's training and instruction session(s). Owner's instruction and equipment startup shall not occur simultaneously. 3.4 MANUALS A. Refer to Section 230103 - Operating and Maintenance Manuals. END OF SECTION 230101 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 230103-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS QPK NO. 220157.00 230103-1 SECTION 230103 - OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit three (3) hard copies and one (1) electronic of completed manuals to Engineer to be retained by Engineer and Owner unless otherwise indicated. B. List of Submittals 1. Electronic edition on flash drive. 2. Three (3) Copies of Operating and Maintenance Manuals. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUALS A. Provide electronic edition and also provide hard cover three ring binders suitable for 8-1/2" x 11" paper size of sufficient capacity to contain all required data, or provide multiple binders containing associated portions of the data and labeled accordingly. B. Label outside front cover and heel cover with filled embossed letters having a contrasting color. Label shall include Project name, Manual title and general category (for multiple binders), as applicable. C. Provide a typewritten index for each manual. D. Provide tabbed dividers between various portions of manuals. E. Contents 1. Installation, maintenance, operating instructions and full catalog description including exploded parts drawings of all equipment. 2. All valve charts and lists. 3. Lubrication list for all equipment including type of lubricant, source and frequency of lubrication stated for each unit of equipment. 4. Control description and diagrams which shall include data required in Item 1 above. 5. Emergency phone numbers for service for all equipment. 6. List of all suppliers and subcontractors including addresses, responsible personnel and phone numbers. 7. All balancing reports, receipts and submittals, all test reports. 8. All warranties. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 230103-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS QPK NO. 220157.00 230103-2 9. Schematic diagrams for all HVAC systems. 10. Wiring and control diagrams for all equipment. 11. Maintenance schedule for all equipment, including lubrication and filter replacement. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTRUCTION A. Review manuals with Owner’s personnel at completion of work, during Owner instruction seminar. END OF SECTION 230103 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 230513-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT QPK NO. 220157.00 230513-1 SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. The work to be performed shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Provide motors and auxiliaries as specified pieces of the systems called for in the Contract Documents. Provide motor starters for specific applications and motor disconnects integral in equipment where specified in the Contract Documents. B. Motor starters, disconnect switches, fuses, auxiliary devices shall be provided by Division 26 Electrical Sub-Contractor, unless specified otherwise and/or scheduled on the Contract Drawings to be provided by the HVAC Sub-Contractor. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All equipment shall be new and UL listed. B. NFPA 70 (National Electric Code) 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings of motors and starters, where specified to be provided with the equipment or where the starter is integral in packaged control systems, including wiring diagrams, starter heater sizes. 1. Submit model number of all motors, type and guaranteed minimum full load efficiency. B. List of Submittals 1. Motors and Accessories. C. Refer to Division 1, Document Distribution Section. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MOTORS A. All motors rated 1/2 HP and greater shall be special design, high efficiency, energy-saver type with a guaranteed minimum full load efficiency. All motors rated greater than one horsepower shall have a minimum power factor of 85% under rated load conditions. B. Provide all motors built for 60 Hz operation and with voltage and phase characteristics as indicated on the Contract Drawings. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 230513-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT QPK NO. 220157.00 230513-2 GUARANTEED MINIMUM EFFICIENCIES AT FULL LOAD WITHOUT CAPACITORS Totally Enclosed Open Drip-Proof Fan Cooled 1800 1800 HP RPM RPM 1/2 78 78 3/4 78 78 1 85 85 1.5 85.5 85.5 2 85.5 85.5 3 88 88 5 88.5 88.5 7.5 90 90 10 90 90 15 92 92 20 & larger 92.5 92.5 C. Nominal Motor Voltage Table Nominal System Voltage Motor Nameplate 480 V - 3 Phase 460 Volt 208 V - 3 Phase 200 Volt 208 V - 1 Phase 200 Volt 120 V - 1 Phase 115 Volt D. Application: Each motor shall be suitable for continuous operation and of speed, enclosure, rating, type and horsepower no less than that scheduled or specified. 1. Each equipment manufacturer responsible for the selection and application of motors to his respective equipment, using motors having adequate starting torque to properly accelerate driven equipment without undue heating or distress of any kind. 2. Apply motors on the basis of standard nameplate rated horsepower, exclusive of the 1.15 service factor. E. Construction: In compliance with all NEMA Standards, wound specifically for nameplate voltages with a 1.15 service factor at rated voltage and frequency. 1. Motors shall have Class F insulation system, with Class B temperature rise. 2. Motor enclosures and maximum allowable temperature rise by resistance in degrees over 104°F ambient at rated HP shall be as follows: a. General Purpose: Drip proof 104°F or encapsulated design 140°F. b. Refrigeration compressors, hermetic type. 3. Polyphase: Constant speed, squirrel cage totally enclosed for 1/2 HP and larger. 4. Single-Phase: Capacitor start, induction run or split phase type, as scheduled. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 230513-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT QPK NO. 220157.00 230513-3 5. Bearings: a. Fractional Horsepower Motors: Precision ball bearings 20,000 hours rated life, designed for heavy axial thrust requirements. b. Integral Horsepower Motors: Precision ball or roller bearings, rated 20,000 hours life, unless specifically scheduled as long life hours. 6. V-Belt Connected Motors: Provided with adjustable slide rail bases and pulleys sized and applied so that total motor torque shall not exceed maximum load allowed by motor design and construction. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 SELECTION OF MOTORS A. Furnished by equipment manufacturer and especially manufactured and/or selected, mounted and installed so completed installation is substantially noiseless in performance under intended use. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF MOTORS A. Install all motors in proper mounting position at end of slide rail nearest equipment to permit future belt take-up and in such a manner as to be accessible for normal maintenance, removal and wiring. B. Install per requirements of National Electric Code. 3.3 DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Provide integral in equipment where specified in Contract Documents. END OF SECTION 230513 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 230529-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT QPK NO. 220157.00 230529-1 SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide hangers, supports and attachments as indicated in this Section which comply with: 1. MSS SP-58; Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture 2. MSS SP-69; Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application 3. MSS SP-89; Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices 4. MSS SP-90; Guidelines for Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports 5. ASME B31 Series; Pressure Piping Code 6. AWS D1.1; Structural Welding Code - Steel B. Manufacturer 1. Design Basis: ITT Grinnell a. The figure numbers listed in this Section are figure numbers used by ITT Grinnell and are intended only as a method of identifying the type hanger required. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: ITT Grinnell F and S Manufacturing Fee and Mason Elcen Metal Products Company Carpenter and Patterson, Incorporated B-Line Systems Approved equal 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Trapeze Hangers a. Submit drawings for all trapeze hanger type supports complete with size and type of horizontal members, hanger rod sizes, accessories and the method of support from the overhead construction. b. In addition, include the number and size of pipe lines to be supported on each type of trapeze hanger. 2. Anchors and Supports a. Submit assembly-type shop drawings for each type of anchor, support, or sway brace, indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, methods of assembly of components and methods of attachment to permanent construction. B. Product Data 1. Hangers and Manufactured Accessories a. Submit pipe hanger and support schedule showing manufacturer’s figure number, size, location and features for each required pipe hanger and support. b. Submit manufacturer’s catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructions for each item scheduled. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 230529-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT QPK NO. 220157.00 230529-2 1.3 COORDINATION A. New Construction 1. The Contractor is responsible for identifying the location and the setting in place of all hanger systems, hanger attachments or support bases in ample time so as not to delay construction work, or interfere with or impede in any way the work of other trades. B. Existing Construction 1. The Contractor whose work includes the installation of products furnished under this Section is responsible for all work involved in the installation of such products, including cutting and patching. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports 1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hanger: MSS Type 1. a. Figure 260; use for non-insulated stationary pipe, 1/2" through 30". b. Figure 260; use with MSS Type 40 shield for hot or cold service insulated stationary pipe, 1/2" through 4". c. Figure 300; use for hot service insulated stationary pipe, 1/2" through 6". d. Figure CT-65; use for copper tubing, 1/2" through 4". 2. Adjustable Swivel Ring, Band Type: MSS Type 10. a. Figure 69, 70; use for suspension of non-insulated stationary pipe, 1/2" through 8". b. Figure CT-69; use for suspension of non-insulated stationary copper tubing, 1/2" through 8". 3. U-Bolts: MSS Type 24. a. Figure 137, 137S, 137C; use for support or guide of heavy loads, 1/2" through 36". B. Vertical-Piping Clamps 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamp: MSS Type 8. a. Figure 261; use for support and steadying of pipe risers, 3/4" through 20". b. Figure CT-121; use for support and steadying of copper tubing risers, 1/2" through 4". 2. Carbon or Alloy Steel Riser Clamp: MSS Type 42. a. Similar to MSS Type 8 with longer ends. C. Hanger Rods 1. Provide mild, low carbon steel, with two removable nuts at each threaded end for positioning rod and hanger and locking in place. a. Figure 140, 253; threaded both ends, 3/8" through 3-3/4". b. Figure 146; continuous thread, 1/4" through 1-1/2". D. Hanger Rod Attachments 1. Steel Turnbuckle: MSS Type 13. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 230529-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT QPK NO. 220157.00 230529-3 a. Figure 230; use for adjustment up to 6" for heavy loads. 2. Swivel Turnbuckle or Turnbuckle Adjuster: MSS Type 15. a. Figure 114; use with split pipe rings (MSS Type 11). 3. Malleable Iron Socket: MSS Type 16. a. Figure 110R; use for attaching hanger rod to various types of building attachments. E. Building Attachments 1. Mechanical - Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type zinc coated or stainless steel, designed for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension and shear capacities appropriate for suspended loads. 2. Top Beam C-Clamp: MSS Type 19. a. Figure 92, 93, 94; use under roof installations with bar joist construction for attachment to top flange of structural shape. 3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamp: MSS Type 20. a. Figure 225, 226; use for attachment to bottom flange of beams, channels or angles. 4. Center-Beam Clamp: MSS Type 21. a. Figure 133, 134; use for attachment to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachment: MSS Type 22. a. Figure 66; use for attachments to bottom of beams where loads are considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamp: MSS Type 23. a. Figure 86, 92, 93, 95; use for attachments to structural shapes. 7. Top-Beam or Adjustable Side Beam Clamp: MSS Type 25. a. Figure 217; use where it is necessary for the hanger rod to run vertically close to a beam edge, thus eliminating drilling of holes in structural members. 8. Adjustable Beam Clamp: MSS Type 27. a. Figure 14; use for supporting pipe from the bottom flange of beams. 9. Steel Beam Clamp With Eye Nut: MSS Type 28. a. Figure 228, 292, 292L; use for suspension of heavy loads from American Standard I-beams and wide flange beams. 10. Linked Steel Clamp With Eye Nut: MSS Type 29. a. Figure 228, 292, 292L; same as MSS Type 28 with link extensions. 11. Malleable Beam Clamp: MSS Type 30. a. Figure 218; use for attachment to structural steel. 12. Welded Steel Brackets a. Light (MSS Type 31): Figure 194; use to support 750 pound maximum load. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): Figure 195: use to support 1500 pound maximum load. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): Figure 199; use to support 3000 pound maximum load. 13. Side Beam Bracket: MSS Type 34. a. Figure 202, 206, 207; use on sides of steel or wood beams. 14. Plate Lug: MSS Type 57. a. Figure 55; use for attachment to steel beams where flexibility at the beam is desired. F. Saddles and Shields 1. Steel Pipe Covering Protection Saddle: MSS Type 39A, 39B. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 230529-4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT QPK NO. 220157.00 230529-4 a. Figure 160-165, 165A, 166A; use for high temperature service or where heat losses are to be kept to a minimum and to protect insulation against damage. b. Fill interior voids with segments of insulation matching adjoining insulation. 2. Protection Shield: MSS Type 40. a. Figure 167; use for outside of foam or fiberglass insulation to prevent crushing of insulation or damage to vapor barrier. 3. Thermal Hanger Shield: (Not an MSS Type). a. Constructed of 360 degree insert of high density, 100 psi, waterproofed calcium silicate, encased in 360 degree sheet metal shield, with assembled thickness to match adjoining insulation. b. Use of this shield shall result in better visual insulation installation and shall reduce thermal losses. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Metal Framing 1. Provide products complying with NEMA STD ML1. B. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars 1. Provide products complying with ASTM A36. C. Cement Grout 1. Portland cement (ASTM C150, Type I or Type III) and clean uniformly graded, natural sand (ASTM C404, Size #2). 2. Mix at a ration of 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts sand, by volume, with only the minimum amount of water required for placement and hydration. D. Heavy Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from steel shapes selected for the loads required; weld steel in accordance with AWS standards. E. Shop Painting and Plating 1. Provide shop coat of red lead or zinc primer paint on all hangers, supports, rods, metal framing, steel plates, shapes and bars furnished under this Section, unless cadmium plated, copper plated or galvanized. 2. Provide electroplated copper hangers, rods, supports and accessories for use with copper pipe or copper tubing. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPE HANGERS AND PIPE SUPPORTS A. General 1. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure; comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. 2. Use copper plated or PVC coated hangers and supports for the support of copper pipe and tubing as a means of preventing electrolysis. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 230529-5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT QPK NO. 220157.00 230529-5 B. Horizontal Piping 1. Support groupings of parallel runs of horizontal piping together on field-fabricated heavyduty trapeze hangers where possible. 2. Comply with hanger spacing schedule as shown on the Contract Drawings and MSS SP-69 for maximum spacing between hangers and supports. 3. Where piping of various sizes is supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe as specified above for individual pipe hangers. 4. Do not use wire or perforated metal straps to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping or ductwork. 5. Install a hanger or support close to the point of change of direction of all pipe runs in either a horizontal or vertical plane. 6. Install additional hangers or supports, spaced as required and directed, to support concentrated loads such as in-line pumps, valves, fittings, equipment or other accessories. 7. Install a minimum of one hanger, and additional hangers if required by the hanger spacing schedules, in branch piping runs and runouts over 5 feet in length. 8. Support all insulated service piping by means of hangers or supports with high density insulation inserts and insulation protection shields installed outside of the insulation. C. Hanger Rods 1. Comply with MSS SP-69 for application and sizing of hanger rods. 2. Secure hanger rods with four nuts, two at upper attachment, and two at hanger; tighten against each other to lock hanger in place. D. Vertical Piping 1. Support vertical risers of piping systems with heavy duty hangers installed close to base of risers and riser clamps with extension arms at intermediate floors. 2. Install riser clamps above floor slabs, with the extension arms resting on the slabs. 3. Make adequate provision for risers that are subject to appreciable expansion or contraction. 4. Install intermediate supports between riser clamps on maximum 6 ft. centers for copper tubing risers 1-1/4" in size and smaller. 3.2 UPPER HANGER ATTACHMENTS A. General 1. In all cases, secure upper hanger attachments to overhead structural steel or steel bar joists wherever possible. 2. Do not attach hangers to steel decks which are not to receive concrete fill. 3. Do not attach hangers to precast concrete plank decks except as indicated below or recommended by the manufacturer. 4. Do not use flat bars or bent rods as upper hanger attachments. B. Attachment to Steel Frame Construction 1. Secure upper hanger attachments to structural steel or bar joists. 2. Secure upper hanger attachments to steel bar joists only at panel points of joists. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 230529-6 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT QPK NO. 220157.00 230529-6 3. Do not drill holes in main structural steel members. 4. Provide intermediate structural steel members where required by pipe support spacing. 5. Select steel members used for intermediate supports based on a minimum safety factor of five. 6. Do not use drive-on beam clamps. 7. C-clamp types of upper hanger attachments with restraining straps may be used for piping systems up to 3" in size, with average system temperatures not less than 50F nor more than 200F. 8. Do not support piping over 4" in size from steel bar joists. C. Attachment to Concrete Filled Steel Decks 1. Do not attach hangers to decks less than 2-1/2" thick. 2. Where necessary, attach hangers to the deck with welding studs (except at roof decks), thrubolts with fish plates, or tee hangers. 3. Do not support a load in excess of 250 pounds from any single welded stud. 4. Do not support piping over 4" in size from thru-bolts with fish plates or tee hangers. D. Attachment to Existing Cast-in-Place Concrete 1. For piping up to a maximum of 4" in size, secure hangers to overhead construction with selfdrilling type expansion shields and machine bolts. 2. Secure hangers to wall or floor construction with single unit expansion shields or self-drilling type expansion shields and machine bolts. 3.3 INSULATION FILLER PIECES AND SHIELDS A. Insulation Filler Pieces 1. Install high density insulation filler pieces at all points of support of insulated piping except as otherwise specified. 2. Install filler pieces of the same thickness as adjoining pipe insulation, around the full circumference of the pipe, and at least 2" longer than the insulation shield as follows: a. Install high density molded polyurethane or high density cellular foam glass filler pieces, for pipe or tubing insulated with polyurethane or polystyrene. b. Install high density fibrous glass, high density molded urethane or high density cellular foam glass filler pieces for piping or tubing up to 2" in size insulated with fibrous glass. For pipe or tubing sizes over 2" in size use high density molded polyurethane or high density polystyrene foam. B. Pipe Insulation Shields 1. Install a pipe insulation shield at all points of support between hanger and insulation installed on pipe or tubing. 2. Center shields on all hangers and supports and install in such a manner so as not to cut, puncture or press into the insulation, or in any manner be detrimental to the vapor barrier. C. In lieu of providing individual filler pieces and shields, the Contractor may use combination clevis hanger, pipe insulation shield and vapor barrier jacketed high density insulating saddle at points of support. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 230529-7 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT QPK NO. 220157.00 230529-7 3.4 PIPE COVERING PROTECTION SADDLES A. Install pipe covering protection saddles at all points of support of hot service steel piping 6" in size and larger. B. Weld saddles to piping to insure movement with pipe. END OF SECTION 230529 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 230553 - 1 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING, DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT QPK NO. 220157.00 230553 - 1 SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING, DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. The extent of the HVAC system identification shall include the labeling and identification of all HVAC systems including supply, return and exhaust duct systems, piping systems and all HVAC equipment. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acceptable Manufacturers - Valve and pipe system identification tags, labels and charts, Seton Name Plate Corporation, Indianapolis Badge and Nameplate Company, National Badge and Tag Company or approved equal. B. Source Quality Control - Paint shall be the product of well known manufacturers. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Paint: Semi-gloss enamel, unless otherwise directed. B. Provide pre-printed, color coded, adhesive backed vinyl labels for ductwork identification and flow arrows. Pre-printed letters shall be at least 1" tall and contrasted in color with label background. Use generic ductwork system name(s) as indicated on Contract Drawings. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Complete all testing, insulation and finish painting work required by the Contract Documents, prior to the application of identification information and flow arrows on piping. 3.2 AIR SYSTEMS IDENTIFICATION A. General 1. Provide stencil painted identification on ductwork and housings of the air handling system, with lettering size sufficient for reading but not less than 1", and including arrows to show direction of flow. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 230553 - 2 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING, DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT QPK NO. 220157.00 230553 - 2 2. Indicate service and system number at housings and at primary duct connections and branches. 3. On access doors, indicate service and equipment being accessed. 4. Space identification at 25' intervals along exposed ducts. Where ducts are concealed behind access doors or removable ceilings, identification may be by plasticized tags in lieu of stencil painted markers. 3.3 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Signs 1. Provide engraved plastic laminate signs at locations of major equipment units, primary control devices, emergency equipment, dangerous elements of the HVAC work and similar places. 2. Provide text of sufficient clarity and lettering, of sufficient size to convey adequate information at each location and mount permanently in an appropriate and effective location. 3. Comply with recognized industry standards for color and design. B. Operational Tags 1. Where needed for proper and adequate information on operation and maintenance of HVAC systems, provide tags of plasticized card stock, either preprinted or hand printed to convey the message; example: “DO NOT CLOSE THIS VALVE EXCEPT WHEN BURNER IS OFF.” END OF SECTION 230553 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 230593-1 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC QPK NO. 220157.00 230593 - 1 SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements (if any), apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of test-adjust-balance work is indicated by the requirements of this Section, and also by Contract Drawings and Schedules, and is defined to include, but is not necessarily limited to, air distribution systems, associated equipment and apparatus of HVAC work. The work consists of setting speed and volume (flow) adjusting facilities provided for the systems, recording data, conducting tests, preparing and submitting reports and recommending modifications to the work as required by the Contract Documents. B. The component types of testing, adjusting and balancing specified in this Section include the following as applied to HVAC equipment: 1. Ductwork Systems 2. Exhaust Fans 3. Registers and Grilles 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: A firm certified by the National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) in those testing and balancing disciplines similar to those required for this Project, who is not Installer of system to be tested and is otherwise independent of the Project. B. NEBB Compliance: Comply with NEBB’s “Procedural Standards for Testing-AdjustingBalancing of Environmental Systems” as applicable to HVAC, air and hydronic distribution systems and associated equipment and apparatus. C. Industry Standards: Comply with ASHRAE (American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Incorporated) recommendations pertaining to measurements, instruments and testing, adjusting and balancing, except as otherwise indicated. D. NEBB Certification: Employ technicians who have successfully completed the NEBB certification program. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit certified test report signed by the Test and Balance Supervisor who performed the TAB work. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 230593-2 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC QPK NO. 220157.00 230593 - 2 B. Include identification and types of instruments used and their most recent calibration date with submission of final test report. C. List of Submittals 1. Outline indicating anticipated method of balancing for each component including instrument to be used. (This shall be submitted prior to any balancing work.) 2. List of Instruments Used and Calibration Date 3. Certified Test Report 4. NEBB certification for each technician assigned to this Project. 1.5 JOB CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with testing, adjusting and balancing work until method outline has been approved by Engineer and the installation work has been completed and is operable. Insure that there is no latent residual work still to be completed. B. Do not proceed until the work scheduled for Test-Adjust-Balancing is clean and free from debris, dirt and discarded building materials. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PATCHING MATERIALS A. Except as otherwise indicated, use same products as used by original Installer for patching holes in insulation, ductwork and housing which have been cut or drilled for test purposes, including access for test instruments, attaching jigs and similar purposes. B. At Tester’s option, plastic plugs with retainers may be used to patch drilled holes in ductwork and housings. 2.2 TEST INSTRUMENTS A. Utilize test instruments and equipment for the TAB work required, of the type, precision and capacity as recommended in the following TAB standards: 1. NEBB’s Procedural Standards for Testing-Adjusting-Balancing of Environmental Systems. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 TESTING A. Tester must examine the installed work and conditions under which testing is to be done to insure that work has been completed, cleaned and is operable. Notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper completion of the test-adjust-balance work. Do not proceed with the TAB work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Tester. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 230593-3 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC QPK NO. 220157.00 230593 - 3 B. Test, adjust and balance the environmental systems and components, as indicated, in accordance with the procedures outlined in the applicable standards. C. Test, adjust and balance system during the summer for air conditioning systems and during winter for heating systems, including at least a period of operation at outside conditions within 5°F wet bulb temperature of maximum summer design condition, and within 10°F dry bulb temperature of minimum winter design condition. When seasonal operation does not permit measuring the final temperatures, then take the final temperature readings when the seasonal operation does permit. D. Prepare report of test results, including instrumentation calibration reports, in format recommended by the applicable standards. E. Patch holes in insulation, ductwork and housings, which have been cut or drilled for test purposes, in a manner recommended by the original Installer. F. Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions, valve indicators, fan speed control levers and similar controls and devices, to show final settings at completion of TAB work. Provide markings with paint or other suitable permanent identification materials. 3.2 CONFIRMATION OF BALANCING A. The Engineer shall, at his option, be present at the time balancing is being performed. B. When there is a substantial deviation from the flows indicated on the Contract Documents the Contractor shall make all the necessary adjustments required to comply with design flows to the satisfaction of the Engineer. END OF SECTION 230593 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 230700-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HVAC INSULATION QPK NO. 220157.00 230700-1 SECTION 23 07 00 - HVAC INSULATION PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide insulation, jackets, coatings, adhesives and accessories for insulation of HVAC systems which comply with applicable sections of the following: 1. ASTM C195 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement. 2. ASTM C449 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement. 3. ASTM C547 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation. 4. ASTM 552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation. 5. ASTM C553 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt Insulation (Industrial Type). 6. ASTM C612 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation. 7. ASTM C921 - Specification for Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation. 8. ASTM C1136 - Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation. 9. ASTM C1290 - Standard Specification for Flexible Fibrous Glass Blanket Insulation Used to Externally Insulate HVAC Ducts. 10. ASTM D579 - Specification for Greige Woven Glass Fabrics. 11. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. (NFPA 255, UL-723 also apply.) a. Insulation Inside Building: Flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less. b. Insulation Outside Building: Flame spread rating of 75 or less and a smoke developed rating of 150 or less. c. Listed standards above apply to insulation assembly, including insulation, facings, cements and adhesives. Label insulation with appropriate markings of the testing laboratory. 12. NFPA 90A - Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 13. NFPA 90B - Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems. 14. NFPA 220 - Standard on Types of Building Construction. B. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Provide insulation products as applicable to the installation from one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Incorporated b. CertainTeed Corporation c. The Carborundum Company, Fibers Division d. Insulation Materials Corporation of America e. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH f. Manville g. Pittsburgh-Corning: Foamglas h. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation, Mechanical Division i. Approved equal ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 230700-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HVAC INSULATION QPK NO. 220157.00 230700-2 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Insulation 2. Jackets 3. Cements, Adhesives, Coatings 4. Accessories 5. Installation Instructions B. Certificates 1. Material certificates, when allowed in other sections, in lieu of laboratory test and label. a. Provide certifications from the manufacturer to show compliance with these specifications and governing regulations. b. Include proof of compliance for test of products for fire rating, corrosiveness and compressive strength. C. Schedule 1. Submit a schedule indicating thermal insulation applications, including the service and corresponding insulation and installation method to be used. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS FIBER A. Material: Inorganic glass fibers, bonded with a thermosetting resin. B. Jacket: All-purpose, factory-applied, laminated glass-fiber-reinforced, flame retardant kraft paper and aluminum foil with self-sealing lap. C. Board: ASTM C612, Class 2, semi-rigid jacketed board. 1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.26 average maximum at 75F mean temperature. 2. Density: 3 pcf average minimum. 3. Thickness: Minimum 1.5" thick, R = 5.76. D. Blanket: ASTM C553, Type II, Class F-1, jacketed flexible blankets. 1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.32 average maximum at 75F mean temperature. 2. Density: 3/4 pcf average minimum. 3. Thickness: Minimum 2" thick, R = 6.25. E. Preformed Pipe Insulation: ASTM C547, Class 1, rigid pipe insulation, jacketed. 1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.26 average maximum at 75F mean temperature. 2. Density: 3 pcf average minimum. 3. Thickness: Minimum 1.5" thick, R = 5.77. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 230700-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HVAC INSULATION QPK NO. 220157.00 230700-3 F. Adhesive: Produced under the UL Classification and Follow-up service. 1. Type: Non-flammable, solvent based. 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to 180F. G. Vapor Barrier Coating: Waterproof coating as recommended by insulation manufacturer. 2.2 CELLULAR GLASS A. ASTM C552, Type II - pipe and tubing insulation. Class 2 - Jacketed. 1. K-factor = 0.29 @ 75°F. 2.3 GLASS FIBER – DUCT LINER A. ASTM C1071 Thermal and Acoustical Insulation – Type II. B. Adhesive: Waterproof, ASTM E162, fire retardant type. C. Liner Fasteners: Welded, galvanized steel with integral press-on head. D. Lining shall be 1-1/2 pounds per cubic foot density and be constructed of long fibers, firmly bonded together with a thermosetting resin. The air stream side shall have a strong, smooth mat, integrally laminated to the insulation. Finished surface shall endure scuffing and abrasion from the mechanical fasteners, shop tools and normal handling. Coefficient of friction not over .022” w.g./100 feet. 1. Lining shall meet UL No. 181. NFPA 90A, and shall have a flame spread classification of not more than 25 and a smoke developed rating of 50 maximum. 2. Make: Johns-Manville “linacoustic” or approved equal. 2.4 JACKETS FOR FIELD APPLICATION A. General: ASTM C921, Type 1, except as otherwise indicated. B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant kraft paper and aluminum foil. 1. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.02 perm maximum, when tested according to ASTM E96. 2. Puncture Resistance: 50 beach units minimum, when tested according to ASTM D781. C. PVC Jacketing: High impact, ultra-violet-resistant PVC, 20 mils thick, roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming to indicated sizes. 1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer. D. PVC Fitting Covers: Factory-fabricated fitting covers manufactured from 20 mil thick, highimpact, ultra-violet-resistant PVC. 1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 230700-4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HVAC INSULATION QPK NO. 220157.00 230700-4 2.5 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Woven glass fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 ounces per square yard. 1. Tape Width: 4 inches. 2. Cloth Standard: MIL-C-20079H, Type I. 3. Tape Standard: MIL-C-20079H, Type II. B. Bands: 3/4-inch width, compatible with jacket material. 1. Stainless Steel: Type 304, 0.020 inch thick. 2. Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch thick. 3. Aluminum: 0.007 inch thick. 4. Brass: 0.01 inch thick. 5. Nickel-Copper Alloy: 0.005 inch thick. C. Wire 1. Nickel-Copper Alloy: 14 gauge. 2. Stainless Steel: 16 gauge, soft annealed. 3. Galvanized Steel: 16 gauge, soft annealed. 2.6 SEALING COMPOUNDS A. Vapor Barrier Compound: Water-based, fire resistive composition. 1. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.08 perm maximum. 2. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to 180F. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Examine areas and conditions under which insulation is to be installed and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. B. Surface Preparation: Clean, dry and remove foreign materials such as rust, scale and dirt from all surfaces to be insulated. C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water. Follow cement manufacturer’s printed instructions for mixing and portions. 3.2 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to the technical sections of this Specification for materials, thickness, forms, jackets and accessories for thermal insulation requirements of each HVAC system. B. Select accessories compatible with materials suitable for the service. Select accessories that do not corrode, soften or otherwise attack the insulation or jacket in either the wet or dry state. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 230700-5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HVAC INSULATION QPK NO. 220157.00 230700-5 C. Install vapor barriers on insulated pipes, ducts and equipment having service operating temperatures below 60F. Seal joints and seams to maintain vapor barrier. D. Apply insulation material, accessories and finishes according to manufacturer’s printed instructions. Install insulation and jackets with smooth, straight and even surfaces. E. Seal penetrations for hangers, supports, anchors and other projections in insulation requiring a vapor barrier. Seal ends of insulation with lagging adhesive. F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. 3.3 PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. General 1. Tightly butt longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond with adhesive. 2. Apply insulation continuously over fittings, valves and specialties, except as otherwise indicated. 3. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows: a. Pull jacket tight and smooth. b. Cover circumferential joints with butt strips, at least 3 inches wide, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of butt strip and space 4 inches on center. c. Overlap longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches on center. 1) Exception: Do not staple longitudinal laps on insulation applied to piping with surface temperature at or below 35F. d. Where vapor barriers are specified, apply on seams and joints, over staples and at ends butt to flanges, unions, valves and fittings. e. At penetrations in jackets for thermometers, pressure gauges and other control sensors or devices, fill and seal voids with vapor barrier coating. f. Repair damaged insulation jackets, by applying jacket material around damaged jacket. Adhere, staple and seal. Extend patch at least 2 inches in both directions beyond damaged insulation jacket and around the entire circumference of the pipe. 4. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Unless shown otherwise, apply insulation continuously through wall and partitions, except fire-rated walls and partitions. Pack annular space between insulation jacket and penetration with batt insulation. Provide closure collar. 5. Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at penetrations through firerated walls and partitions. Seal insulation ends with vapor barrier coating. Seal around penetration with fire-stopping or fire-resistant joint sealer. 6. Floor Penetrations: Terminate insulation underside of floor assembly and at floor support at top of floor. Seal insulation ends with vapor barrier coating. Seal around penetration with fire-stopping or fire-resistant joint sealer. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 230700-6 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HVAC INSULATION QPK NO. 220157.00 230700-6 7. Flanges, Fittings and Valves: Coat pipe insulation ends with vapor barrier coating. Apply premolded, precut or field-fabricated segments of insulation around flanges, unions, valves and fittings. Make joints tight. Bond with adhesive. a. Use same material and thickness as adjacent pipe insulation. b. Overlap nesting insulation by 2 inches or 1-pipe diameter, whichever is greater. c. Apply materials with adhesive, fill voids with mineral fiber insulating cement. Secure with wire or tape. d. Insulate elbows and tees smaller than 3 inches pipe size with premolded insulation. e. Insulate elbows and tees 3 inches and larger with premolded insulation or insulation material segments. Use at least 3 segments for each elbow. f. Cover insulation, except for metal jacketed insulation, with PVC fitting covers and seal circumferential joints with butt strips. 8. Hangers and Anchors: Apply insulation continuously through hangers. B. Glass Fiber Pipe Insulation 1. Bond insulation to pipe with lagging adhesive. 2. Seal exposed ends with lagging adhesive. 3. Seal seams and joints with vapor barrier compound. C. For systems conveying fluids below ambient air temperature: Insulate entire piping system, including piping, fittings, valves, flanges, unions, strainers, flexible connectors, etc. For exterior locations: Provide vapor retarder jacket. Insulate entire system and provide coating of mesh reinforced vapor retarder cement. Cover with aluminum jacketing with seams oriented to prevent the intrusion of water into the insulation system. D. Equipment located within mechanical equipment rooms or finished spaces: Finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers. E. Do not cover nameplates or ASME stamps. F. Allow for easy removal and replacement of insulation when insulating equipment requiring access for maintenance. 3.4 DUCT INSULATION A. Install block and board insulation as follows: 1. Adhesive and Band Attachment: Secure block and board insulation tight and smooth with at least 50 percent coverage of adhesive. Install bands spaced 12 inches apart. Protect insulation under bands and at exterior corners with metal corner angles. Fill joints, seams and chipped edges with vapor barrier compound. 2. Speed Washers Attachment: Secure insulation tight and smooth with speed washers and welded pins. Space anchor pins 18 inches apart each way and 3 inches from edges on insulation joints. Apply vapor barrier coating compound to insulation in contact with pins, open joints, breaks, punctures and voids in insulation. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 230700-7 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HVAC INSULATION QPK NO. 220157.00 230700-7 B. Install Blanket Insulation as follows: 1. Install tight and smooth. 2. Stagger joints on double layered insulation. 3. Secure to ducts having long sides or diameters smaller than 24 inches with bonding adhesive applied in 6-inch-wide transverse strips on 12-inch centers. 4. Secure to ducts having long sides or diameters 24 inches or larger with anchor pins spaced 12 inches apart each way. Apply bonding adhesive to prevent sagging of the insulation. 5. Overlap joints 3 inches. 6. Seal joints, breaks and punctures with vapor barrier compound. 3.5 DUCT INSULATION JACKETS A. Foil and Paper Jackets: Install jackets drawn tight. Install lap or butt strips at joints with material same as jacket. Secure with adhesive. Install jackets with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal joints and 3-inch wide butt strips at end joints. 1. Seal openings, puncture and breaks in vapor barrier jackets and exposed insulation with vapor barrier compound. B. Install continuous glass cloth jackets on interior exposed insulation, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install glass cloth directly over insulation. 2. On insulation with a factory applied jacket, install the glass cloth jacket over the factory applied jacket. 3. Install jacket drawn smooth and tight with a 2-inch overlap at joints. 4. Embed glass cloth between two 1/16-inch-thick coats of lagging adhesive. 5. Completely encapsulate the insulation with the jacket, leaving no exposed raw insulation. 3.6 DUCT LINER A. Provide 100% adhesive coverage for securing liner to duct. B. Comply with SMACNA standards for spacing of mechanical liner fasteners. C. Seal and smooth joints. Seal and coat all joints and seams. D. Seal liner penetrations with adhesive. E. Duct dimensions, shown on the Contract Drawings, are clear inside dimensions following liner installation. Increase duct size to allow for thickness of duct liner. F. Provide leading edge protection on liner to prevent air velocity erosion of liner. 3.7 THICKNESSES A. Heating System Piping 1. Application Requirements ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 230700-8 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HVAC INSULATION QPK NO. 220157.00 230700-8 a. Insulate piping, fittings, valves and accessories, except where indicated as “uninsulated,” including (but not necessarily limited to) the following: 1) Heating Water Supply and Return 2) Makeup Water and Expansion Tank Connections 3) Refrigerant Piping 4) Cooling Coil Condensate Drain Lines 2. Insulation Types and Thicknesses a. Insulate main piping runs, branches and crossovers of each piping system as follows, except as specifically noted otherwise on the Contract Drawings. 1) Refrigerant Piping a) Flexible Elastomeric Insulation i) 1-1/2" thick for refrigerant suction, liquid and hot gas bypass piping located inside building. ii) 1-1/2" thick for refrigerant suction, liquid and hot gas bypass piping located outside of building. Provide weatherproof coating per insulation manufacturer's recommendations. 2) Cooling Coil Condensate Drain Lines a) Preformed fiberglass with vapor barrier and all-service jacket. i) 1" thick for all sizes. 3) Runout Piping a) Insulate runout piping (small size branch piping less than 1" inside and less than 4 feet long and connected directly to terminal units) with one of the following types and minimum thicknesses of insulation, except as otherwise indicated on the Contract Drawings. i) Preformed Fiberglass with All-Service Jacket (a) 1" thick b) Insulate fittings, valves and accessories with fiberglass inserts and PVC covers to match thickness of adjacent insulation. B. Ductwork Insulation 1. General a. Install insulation products to ensure that the insulation serves its intended purpose, in compliance with: 1) SMACNA Standards 2) Section 23 07 00 - HVAC Insulation 3) Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions b. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. c. Clean and dry ductwork prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered. d. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier on ductwork insulation, and protect it to prevent puncture and other damage. e. Extend ductwork insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar ductwork penetrations, except where otherwise indicated. f. Corner Angles 1) Install corner angles on external corners of insulation on ductwork in exposed finished spaces before covering with jacketing. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 230700-9 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HVAC INSULATION QPK NO. 220157.00 230700-9 2. Exposed Supply Air Ductwork a. Insulate and vapor seal all exposed supply air ductwork. 1) Insulation: Rigid fiberglass; 2" thick, increase thickness to 2" in machine, fan and equipment rooms. 2) Secure insulation to ductwork, with duct insulation fasteners spaced 3" from all corners, with intermediate fasteners on maximum 16" centers in all directions. Butt all edges of insulation and fill all voids with similar insulation. 3) Seal longitudinal jacket laps continuously with vapor barrier lap adhesive. Lap circumferential joints with 4" wide jacket material and seal laps continuously with vapor barrier lap adhesive. 4) Install metal corner angles over the jacketed insulated corners. 5) Seal exposed ends of insulation with vapor barrier mastic. 6) Field apply an extra jacket layer over the vapor barrier jacketed insulation. Smoothly paste the jacket over the entire insulated ductwork surface with lagging adhesive, with 2" lap on all seams. Apply a heavy coat of lagging adhesive to the entire exterior surface. 7) Unless stated otherwise, the finished exterior surface shall be white. 3. Concealed Supply Ductwork Insulation a. Insulate and vapor seal all concealed supply air ductwork. 1) Flexible fiberglass; 2" thick, application limited to concealed locations. 2) Secure insulation to ductwork surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions with either adhesive or mechanical fasteners. 3) Secure longitudinal and circumferential joints with outwardly clinching staples. When the bottom dimension of duct is in excess of 32 inches, install mechanical duct fasteners. Install mechanical duct fasteners on the sides of ducts having a dimension over 24 inches in size. Where manufacturer recommends, install 16 gauge wire loops around insulation and duct at the intervals recommended. 4) Seal all longitudinal and butt joints in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Tape all joints. 5) Insulate ducts prior to erection when ducts are required to be installed close to walls, ceilings, equipment, etc., which would not allow installation of insulation after duct is installed. 4. Return Air Ductwork (including Return/Exhaust Systems) a. For return air ductwork located in mechanical equipment rooms and unconditioned interior spaces: 1) For return air ductwork located in mechanical rooms, provide the same insulation system as required for exposed supply air ductwork. 2) For return air ductwork located in unheated spaces, provide the same insulation system as required for concealed supply air ductwork. b. For return air ductwork located within the conditioned space, including above suspended ceilings, within soffits and duct chases: 1) Do not insulate return air ductwork in these locations, unless specifically noted on the Contract Drawings. 5. Exhaust Air Ductwork a. For ductwork used exclusively for exhaust air (not return/exhaust systems): ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 230700-10 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION HVAC INSULATION QPK NO. 220157.00 230700-10 1) Do not insulate exhaust air ductwork unless specifically noted on the Contract Drawings. 6. Outside Air Intake Ductwork a. For outside air intake ductwork located inside the building: 1) Provide the same insulation system as required for exposed supply air ductwork. END OF SECTION 230700 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 232300-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION REFRIGERANT PIPING QPK NO. 220157.00 232300-1 SECTION 23 23 00 - REFRIGERANT PIPING PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. The work to be performed shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Refrigerant Piping and Tubing 2. Pipe Fittings 3. Pipe Hangers and Supports 4. The extent of the refrigerant piping system work is shown on the Contract Drawings. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping Materials 1. All piping products shall be identified with markings in conformance with applicable standards, including ANSI B9.1, ANSI/SAE J513F and ANSI B16.22. B. Brazing 1. Certify brazing procedures, brazers and operators in accordance with ANSI B31.5, Paragraph 527.5 for Shop and Job Site Brazing of Piping Work. C. Technicians performing refrigerant work shall, at a minimum, have earned an EPA Type 1 Certification. D. All refrigerant work must be performed in compliance with the Clean Air Act - Section 608 as administered by the EPA. E. Each refrigerant technician, upon arriving on the Project Site, shall furnish the Construction Manager's field representative with a photocopy of his/her EPA certification (Type I, II or III Certificate). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit a schedule listing manufacturer’s name, type or kind of pipe, fitting, hangers and material, weight and finish. B. Shop Drawings 1. Layouts of piping systems on the Contract Drawings are required to be submitted for approval. Drawings shall show clearances required by other trades. Distribute complete shop drawings to all related trades and coordinate these shop drawings with such trades prior to the installation of the piping system. 2. Submit the following: a. Type and schedule of piping and type of joints. b. Method of attachment of pipe hangers to the building construction. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 232300-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION REFRIGERANT PIPING QPK NO. 220157.00 232300-2 c. Layout drawings of mechanical equipment rooms showing all related equipment and equipment clearances required by other trades. d. Layout drawings in all areas in which it may be necessary to deviate from layout shown on the Contract Drawings. Show relocation of piping. C. List of Submittals 1. Piping Shop Drawings 2. Pipe Hangers and Supports PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND TUBING A. Copper Pipe and Copper Tubing 1. Refrigerant Grade (ACR): Hard temper as specified, ASTM B88. 2.2 PIPE FITTINGS A. General: Pipe fittings shall be same material and pressure class as adjoining pipe, unless otherwise noted. B. Copper Pipe and Tube Fittings (Solder Connections) 1. Piping or Tubing: Hard temper, ASTM B88; Type ACR. 2. Tees, Elbows, and Reducers: Wrought copper or cast bronze, sweat end connections, ASTM B-62, ANSI B16.22. 2.3 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Pipe Hangers and Supports 1. Refer to Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 REFRIGERANT PIPING A. Refrigerant suction, liquid and hot gas by-pass piping shall be refrigerant grade Type L (ACR) copper tubing, hard temper deoxidized, dehydrated and sealed. B. Fittings, Valves and Accessories 1. 45 flared tubing fittings ANSI B70.1. 2. Fittings shall be refrigerant grade wrought copper, ANSI B16.22. Use 95-5 silver solder and follow manufacturer’s recommendations written procedures for joints. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 232300-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION REFRIGERANT PIPING QPK NO. 220157.00 232300-3 C. Provide suitable factory made pipe hangers and supports. Use job fabricated supports only as approved, using “Unistrut” as much as possible. Hangers and supports exposed to weather shall be galvanized. D. Piping shall be installed and arranged per requirements and recommendations of air conditioning equipment manufacturer. E. Use only factory made suction traps. F. Anchor piping to prevent vibration, wearing and sway. G. Allow for expansion. H. Provide for sufficient flexibility at compressor connections as recommended by manufacturer. I. Short radius elbows are not permitted. J. Piping and system shall meet the requirements of Mechanical Refrigeration Safety Code, ANSI B9.1. K. Test all refrigerant piping with dry nitrogen 150 psi “low” side and 300 psi “high” side. System shall hold this charge with no pressure drop for 24 hours. Repair all leaks by remaking joints; then retest. L. Clean piping, then pump-down and evacuate all systems with high grade vacuum pump. Unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer, evacuate system to 2.5 Hg, break vacuum with dry nitrogen and re-evacuate to 2.5 Hg and hold for 4 hours; then charge system. M. Charge with refrigerant as recommended by manufacturer. 3.2 REFRIGERANT (FIELD INSTALLED DX PIPING) A. After erection, charge system with dry nitrogen as follows: 1. 300 psi for other refrigerants. B. System shall hold this charge with no pressure drop for 24 hours; then leak test piping as specified previously. C. All Tests: No change in pressure under stable temperature conditions, unless otherwise specified. END OF SECTION 232300 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 233113- 1 HVAC DUCTS QPK NO. 220157.00 233113 - 1 SECTION 233113 - HVAC DUCTS PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. SMACNA Manual 1. Gauges of materials, fabrication, installation and methods of supporting ductwork shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the SMACNA HVAC DUCT CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS, unless otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings or specified herein. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Layouts of duct systems shown on the Contract Drawings are required to be submitted for approval. Drawings shall show clearances required by other trades. Distribute complete shop drawings to all related trades and coordinate these shop drawings with such trades prior to sheet metal fabrication. 2. Submit the following: a. Gauge of ductwork, type of joints and duct reinforcing for each size range, including sketches or SMACNA plates for joints, method fabrication and reinforcing. b. Method of attachment of duct hangers to building construction. c. Layout drawings of mechanical equipment rooms showing all related equipment and equipment clearances required by other trades. d. Layout drawings of all areas in which it is necessary to deviate from layout shown on the Contract Drawings. Minor transitions in ductwork, required to avoid local interference with other trades, are allowable, as long as the cross sectional duct area is maintained, subject to approval by the Engineer. Show relocation of ductwork and changes in size of duct. Coordinate shop drawings with all trades prior to ductwork fabrication. B. List of Submittals 1. Sheet Metal Specifications and SMACNA Plates for each application. 2. Layout Drawings PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCTWORK MATERIALS A. Sheet Metal 1. Galvanized Steel: G-90 ASTM A653 and A924 Lock Forming Quality, gauges in accordance with current SMACNA standards Commercial Coating Class - 1.25 ounce per square foot. B. Galvanized Round Spiral or Flat Oval Duct - Single Wall 1. Duct shall be round or oval spiral lockseam construction. 2. Duct gauge shall be in accordance with SMACNA standards. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 233113- 2 HVAC DUCTS QPK NO. 220157.00 233113 - 2 3. Flat oval duct shall be reinforced based on its flat span dimension and maximum operating pressure. Reinforcement shall be in accordance with SMACNA HVAC duct construction standards. 4. Provide duct in continuous, unjoined lengths wherever possible. 5. Refer to the Contract Drawings for application of round and oval single wall ductwork. C. Galvanized Elbows - Single Wall Round or Flat Oval 1. Fittings shall be of the same manufacturer as the duct and shall be constructed in the same gauges as the duct. 2. Fittings shall have standing seam or spot welded and sealed joints. 3. Provide protective coating on the outside surface of all welded joints. 4. Elbows shall be die-stamped, gored, pleated or mitered construction. 5. Elbow bend radius shall be 1.5 times the elbow diameter, long radius. 6. Elbows 12" and less shall be minimum 22 gauge. Elbows larger than 12" shall match connecting ductwork gauge. 7. Mitered elbows shall be used only where space restrictions prevent use of long radius fittings and shall be equipped with turning vanes. D. Takeoffs and Branch Fittings 1. All fittings shall be factory fabricated fittings or duct-tap assemblies. Fittings shall be of the same manufacturer as ductwork. E. Duct Hangers 1. Duct hangers shall be as manufactured by the duct system manufacturer. 2. Duct hanger construction and attachment shall comply with SMACNA standards. F. The type of duct to be provided is indicated on the Contract Drawings. G. Perform fabrication, installation and methods of supporting ductwork in accordance with the latest edition of the SMACNA HVAC DUCT CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS. H. Duct Hangers 1. Band Hangers: Galvanized Sheet Metal 2. Rod Type Hangers a. Mild low carbon steel, unless otherwise specified; fully threaded or threaded each end, with two removable nuts each end for positioning and locking rod in place. Unless galvanized or cadmium plated, provide a shop coat of red lead or zinc chromate primer paint. I. Miscellaneous Fasteners and Upper Hanger Attachments 1. Sheet Metal Screws: Galvanized steel 2. Machine Bolts and Nuts: Galvanized or cadmium plated steel ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 233113- 3 HVAC DUCTS QPK NO. 220157.00 233113 - 3 2.2 PREFABRICATED INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCT A. Flexible metal duct shall be bendable, self-supporting and mechanically interlocked to be totally leakproof under operating conditions without manufacturing use of adhesives. Flex-duct sections shall consist of a flexible vinyl duct liner, fiberglass insulation and a vinyl film vapor barrier jacket, all combined to form an integral unit. B. Flexible ductwork shall be factory fabricated complying with NFPA No. 90A and UL 181. 2.3 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Factory pre-fabricated pre-assembled flexible fabric connectors with minimum #24 USS gauge metal edges: 1. Heavy glass fabric coated with neoprene weighing a minimum of 30 ounces per square yard. 2.4 GASKET MATERIAL A. For use with registers, grilles and diffusers installed in exposed uninsulated ductwork: 1/4" thick felt or sponge rubber material, of width as required by the flange on the particular device. B. For use with flanged joints in ducts: 1/8" thick reinforced inert plastic of the self-conforming type, of width as required by the particular flange. 2.5 TURNING VANES A. Provide turning vanes, fabricated of the same material and gauge as the ductwork in which installed, unless otherwise indicated, with the following additional construction features. 1. Blades: 2" R. up to 36" ducts 2. Blades: 4" R. 36" and over ducts B. Turning vanes shall be constructed in accordance with SMACNA fabrication plates. 2.6 DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Provide access doors of the same manufacturer as the duct system. B. Minimum material thickness equal to 20 gauge. C. Access doors in double-wall duct shall be of double wall construction. D. Unless not possible due to duct size the minimum access door dimensions shall be 16" x 12". 2.7 ACCESSORIES A. All volume dampers, turning vanes, etc., shall be of the same manufacturer as the duct system. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 233113- 4 HVAC DUCTS QPK NO. 220157.00 233113 - 4 PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Seal all supply air, return air and exhaust air duct transverse joints and branch duct connections using mastic or mastic and tape as required to produce an essentially airtight duct system. B. Elbows shall be long radius type whenever possible, with a centerline radius not less than 1-1/2 times the width or diameter of the duct. Where space does not permit the use of long radius elbows, short radius or square elbows with factory fabricated turning vanes shall be used. C. Perform fabrication, installation and methods of supporting ductwork in accordance with the latest edition of the SMACNA HVAC DUCT CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS. D. Provide ductwork connected to air handling equipment, or air inlet and outlet devices, with all necessary transformation pieces, flexible fabric connections, as indicated or required. E. All ducts shall be constructed, assembled, supported and installed in accordance with the duct system manufacturer’s standards. F. Duct system proposed shall meet or exceed the construction and performance standards of United McGill Corporation. G. Maximum allowable leakage is 10 cfm/100 square feet of duct surface. H. The use of flexible ductwork shall be limited to the final connection of terminal devices and the length of a flexible duct runout shall not exceed twice the connecting duct diameter (i.e., 24" maximum length for a 12" diameter duct). I. The last elbow at terminal unit connection shall be a rigid elbow and not flexible ductwork. When terminal unit is directly beneath main ductwork and connection is straight with no offset the rigid elbow may be omitted. When the flexible duct is connected to an insulated distribution system it shall be provided with insulation equivalent to the primary system insulation. J. Provide ductwork connected to air handling equipment, or air inlet and outlet devices, with all necessary transformation pieces, flexible fabric connections, as indicated or required. 3.2 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Provide flexible duct connections where sheet metal connections are made to fans or where ducts or dissimilar metals are connected. For round ducts, the flexible material shall be secured by zinc coated, iron, or as appropriate, aluminum clinch type draw bands. For rectangular ducts, the flexible material locked to metal collars shall be installed using normal duct construction methods. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 233113- 5 HVAC DUCTS QPK NO. 220157.00 233113 - 5 B. Make ductwork connections to air handling equipment with flexible fabric connectors. Install connectors so as to have sufficient slack to prevent vibration transmission. C. For round duct connection, install fabric connectors a minimum of 3" in length for ducts having a maximum diameter of 18", and a minimum of 5" in length for duct diameters over 18" in size. D. Secure fabric connectors to fans, casings and ducts as follows: 1. Secure round connectors with #12 USS gauge x 1" wide galvanized steel draw bands. Secure bands with bolts and nuts. 2. Secure rectangular connectors with 1" x 1/8" thick flat galvanized steel bars, with screws or bolts on maximum 8" centers, or with approved sheet metal slip joints. Tightly crimp fabric into sheet metal joint and secure complete joint with sheet metal screws on maximum 6" centers. E. Fabric connectors may be factory pre-fabricated pre-assembled units, with minimum #24 USS gauge metal edges, secured to fabric with double lock seams. F. Do not paint or insulate fabric connectors. 3.3 CLOSURE COLLAR A. A closure collar of galvanized steel sheet metal not less than 4 inches wide shall be provided for ducts on each side of walls or floors where openings for the passage of ductwork are provided. Collar shall be installed tight against wall/floor surface. 3.4 TURNING VANES A. Provide turning vanes in all squared 90 degree duct elbows; construction and reinforcing as required by applicable SMACNA standards. 3.5 HANGERS FOR DUCTS A. Install hangers for ducts as specified in the SMACNA Manual. 3.6 UPPER HANGER ATTACHMENTS A. General 1. Do not use flat bars or bent rods as upper hanger attachments. a. Do not use powder driven pins or expansion nails. b Do not support a load, in excess of 250 lbs. from any single welded or powder driven stud. B. Attachment to Existing Cast-In-Place Concrete 1. Secure hangers to overhead construction with self-drilling type expansion shields and machine bolts. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 233113- 6 HVAC DUCTS QPK NO. 220157.00 233113 - 6 2. Secure hanger attachments required to be supported from wall or floor construction with single unit expansion shields or self-drilling type expansion shields and machine bolts. 3.7 DUCT RISER SUPPORTS A. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Contract Drawings, support vertical ducts by means of two steel angles, secured to duct and resting on floor slab. Size supports as follows: Max. Size Dimension Size of Steel Angle Secure to Duct With Min. Bearing Each End 36" 1" x 1" x 1/8" Screws 2" 48" 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8" Bolts 3" 60" 2" x 2" x 1/8" Bolts 3" Over 60" 2-1/2" x 2-1/2" x 3/16" Bolts 4" 3.8 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK INSULATION A. General 1. Install insulation products to ensure that the insulation serves its intended purpose, in compliance with: a. SMACNA Standards. b. Section 230700 - HVAC Insulation. c. Manufacturer’s installation instructions. 3.9 PAINTING A. Paint the exterior of all uninsulated ductwork exposed to view in the color(s) selected by the Architect. B. Clean and prime metal ductwork in accordance with paint manufacturer's recommendations. C. Provide two (2) coats, minimum, to the exterior surface of all ductwork exposed in occupied spaces. Additional coat(s) may be required if in the judgment of the Architect the resulting finish and coverage is unsatisfactory. D. Ductwork located in mechanical spaces does not require painting, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. END OF SECTION 233113 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 233313-1 HVAC DAMPERS AND ACCESSORIES QPK NO. 220157.00 233313 - 1 SECTION 233313 - HVAC DAMPERS AND ACCESSORIES PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. The extent of the HVAC damper work is as indicated by the Contract Drawings and Schedules and by the requirements of this Section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NFPA Code 1. Comply with NFPA No. 90A, “Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning with Ventilating Systems” pertaining to HVAC dampers. B. Industry Standards 1. Comply with SMACNA (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor’s National Association, Incorporated) recommendations for fabrication, construction and installation procedures as contained in applicable guides and manuals on HVAC dampers and low velocity and high pressure ductwork. 2. Comply with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, 1985 Edition, unless otherwise shown on the Contract Drawing or specified herein. 3. Design Basis: Ruskin Phillips Air Balance, Inc. Approved equal 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. List of Submittals 1. Volume Dampers 2. Duct Access Doors 3. Fire Dampers PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VOLUME DAMPERS A. Rectangular Duct Volume Dampers 1. Provide galvanized multi-blade volume damper (dampers less than 12 inches high shall have single blade) as follows: ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 233313-2 HVAC DAMPERS AND ACCESSORIES QPK NO. 220157.00 233313 - 2 a. Frame - 16 gauge galvanized steel channel b. Blade - 8" maximum width, 16 gauge opposed blade c. Linkage - Exposed or concealed d. Axles - 1/2" Hex. e. Bearings - Molded synthetic f. Control Shaft - 3/8" plated steel g. Finish - Mill galvanized h. Control Operator - Manual locking quadrant with position indicator 2. Design Basis: Ruskin Model MD-35 Acceptable Manufacturers: Ruskin Titus Arrow Johnson Approved equal B. Round Duct Volume Dampers 1. Provide galvanized single blade damper as follows: a. Blade - 14" maximum diameter, 16 gauge b. Axles - Mechanically fastened to blade c. Bearings - None required d. Control Operator - Manual locking quadrant with position indicator 2.2 DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Provide access doors a minimum of 12" x 12" in size, fabricated of the galvanized sheet metal, the same finish and gauge as the ductwork in which installed, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Uninsulated Ducts a. Provide folded edges on all four sides of door panels, lapping 1" over the outside surface of the duct, on each of the four edges of the duct opening. Provide each door with a minimum of two hinges and two casement fasteners. B. Provide all doors with a 3/4" wide sponge rubber or felt gasket, around all four sides of duct opening. 2.3 FIRE DAMPERS A. Construction: Galvanized steel, UL listed and labeled, 1-1/2 hour rating under UL Standard 555. B. Leakage Rating: No higher than Class II (15 cfm/sq ft @ 1" w.g.) at an elevated temperature category B (250F for 30 minutes) under UL 555S. UL leakage ratings shall apply to all sizes of dampers required and elevated temperature ratings shall apply to operators as well as dampers. C. Mounting Sleeve: Provide factory sleeves and mounting angles, minimum 14 gauge, required to provide installation equivalent to the damper manufacturer’s UL test installation. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 233313-3 HVAC DAMPERS AND ACCESSORIES QPK NO. 220157.00 233313 - 3 D. Damper Blades: Provide 100% free area curtain style damper with welded head for mini-mum pressure loss in an open position. Damper manufacturer shall submit certified test data taken in accordance with AMCA Standard 500 showing proposed damper to have pressure drops in the open position of less than 0.1 in. w.g. with average duct velocities of 2500 fpm. Refer to Fire Damper Details on Contract Drawings. E. Fusible Link: Provide fusible links, for each damper, which shall melt at 165F causing damper to close and lock in closed position. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Extra Fire Damper Fusible Links 1. As maintenance spare parts, furnish 5%, but a minimum of three (3), of each type and operating characteristic of fusible links used in Project. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Install HVAC damper products in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve the intended function. Comply with applicable portions of NFPA’s Installation Standard 90A. 2. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, as required to ensure installation results in properly functioning fire dampers. 3. Install fire dampers in compliance with detail(s) shown on the Contract Drawings and applicable codes. 3.2 VOLUME DAMPERS A. Manual volume dampers shall be provided where indicated and shall be operated by locking type quadrant operators. When installed in insulated ductwork, provide with standoff mounting brackets to provide clearance between the duct surface and operator not less than the thickness of the insulation. Standoff mounting items shall be integral with the operator or a standard accessory of the operator manufacturer. 3.3 DAMPER ACCESS DOORS A. Provide access doors at all HVAC damper locations to allow visible inspection and resetting or replacing fusible link devices. B. Access doors shall be provided in ductwork at all automatic dampers, fire dampers and other apparatus requiring service and inspection in the duct system, and, unless shown otherwise, shall conform to applicable SMACNA HVAC DUCT CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS. Doors shall be a minimum 15 by 18 inches, unless otherwise shown. Where duct size will not permit this size ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 233313-4 HVAC DAMPERS AND ACCESSORIES QPK NO. 220157.00 233313 - 4 door, the doors shall be as large as practical. Doors 24 by 24 inches or larger shall be provided with fasteners operable from both sides. Doors in insulated ducts shall be the insulated type. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test installed units for compliance with the requirements, including those of governing regulations. 3.5 PERSONNEL TRAINING A. HVAC Damper Maintenance Training 1. Train Owner’s personnel by demonstrating to them how to visually inspect and test damper operation and how to replace fire damper links. END OF SECTION 233313 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 233713-1 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES QPK NO. 220157.00 233713- 1 SECTION 233713 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. The extent of the grille work is as indicated on the Contract Drawings and Schedules and by the requirements of this Section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with National Fire Protection Standard No. 90, as applicable to construction and installation of required grilles. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer’s data on diffusers, grilles and registers, marked to show types and sizes to be provided. B. Arrange registers, grilles and diffusers submittal in schedule form identifying types, sizes, accessories, etc. Reference numbers/letters used on Contract Drawings shall be matched to each grille type submitted. C. List of Submittals 1. Grilles, Registers and Diffusers. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide diffusers, grilles and registers where shown; of the size, shape, capacity and type indicated in Schedules, constructed of materials and components as indicated in the Specifications and Schedule, as required for complete installation. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork and ductwork accessories, as necessary to interface installation of grilles properly with other work. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION 233713-2 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES QPK NO. 220157.00 233713- 2 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install registers, grilles and diffusers in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and in accordance with recognized industry practices to insure that products serve the intended function. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Balance air flow for each register, grille and diffuser as specified. END OF SECTION 233713 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 237000-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION VRF SYSTEM WITH HEAT RECOVERY 237000-1 QPK NO. 220157.00 SECTION 23 70 00 - VRF SYSTEM WITH HEAT RECOVERY HEAT RECOVERY PART 1.0 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) HVAC system shall be a variable capacity, direct expansion (DX) heat recovery or heat pump engineered system. The outdoor unit shall consist of one or more cabinet(s) connected through common refrigerant piping. Each system shall have single or multiple, inverter compressor(s). Each system shall be connected to multiple indoor units (IDUs - ducted, non-ducted or combination thereof) through a common refrigerant piping and integrated system controls. Each indoor unit shall be controlled individually. Additionally heat recovery system shall be capable of simultaneous heating and cooling individual zone(s). 1.1 SIMULTANEOUS COOLING AND HEATING VRF SYSTEM (HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEM) A. VRF heat recovery system shall be an air cooled, system consisting of one to three outdoor unit(s) connected to Heat Recovery (HRU) unit(s) and indoor unit(s). Multi-port heat recovery units shall allow simultaneous heating and cooling of individual zone(s). Communication between components shall be provided as an integrated feature of the VRF system. B. The heat recovery system shall be capable of operating with 480V 60Hz, 3 phase power. PART 2.0 - STANDARDS/CERTIFICATIONS 2.1 VRF (variable refrigerant flow) heat pump and heat recovery systems shall have published performance ratings certified by AHRI (Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute) and listed in the AHRI Standard 1230 certified product directory www.AHRInet.org. 2.2 VRF heat pump and heat recovery system components shall be manufactured in production facilities maintaining the following ISO certifications: A. ISO 9001 Quality Management System B. ISO 14001 Environmental Management System 2.3 VRF heat pump and heat recovery system components shall comply with Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1995 Heating and Cooling Equipment Standard for Safety and bear the Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL) label. 2.4 VRF heat pump and heat recovery system field provided electrical power wiring shall be installed according to National Electrical Code (NEC) and all local authorities having jurisdiction (AHJs). 2.5 The VRF systems must be installed by a qualified contractor who has installed at least 10 VRF systems of the same manufacturer as the manufacturer being supplied for this project. 2.6 The Installing contractor must provide VRF installation training certificates (matching the supplied VRF System) for all installation and service technicians who will be installing, starting, and/or commissioning the VRF system. These certificates must be supplied with the contractor’s submittal package. Untrained contractors who wish to bid this project may contact Meier Supply prior to the bid to arrange training. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 237000-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION VRF SYSTEM WITH HEAT RECOVERY 237000-2 QPK NO. 220157.00 2.7 The supplying manufacturer must have at least 2 certified and factory authorized trainers / system commissioning agents within 60 miles of the project site. 2.8 Design Basis: LG Air Conditioning Technologies to be supplied by Meier Supply. No Substitutions. PART 3.0 - WARRANTY 3.1 Extended warranty is required for this system. It must be installed by a contractor who has successfully completed the installation and service courses and must have a complete commissioning report approved by the manufacturer. A. Ten (10) year parts warranty The part(s) are warranted for a ten (10) year period the date of original installation or 30 months from the date manufacture shown on the equipment nameplate label, whichever occurs first. B. Ten (10) year compressor warranty The compressor is warranted for ten (10) year period after the date of original installation or 30 months from the date of manufacture shown on the system nameplate label, whichever occurs first. PART 4.0 - VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW (HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEM) 4.1 The supplied VRF systems shall be LG. All alternates must be pre-approved by the owner and specifying engineer. 4.2 Outdoor Unit shall be capable of maintaining continuous compressor operation under all of the following operating ambient air conditions. A. Heat Recovery System 1. All IDUs Cooling: 14°F DB to 122°F DB (-9.9°F DB to 122°F DB with optional low ambient kit). 2. All IDUs Heating: -13°F WB to 61°F WB. 3. Cooling based synchronous: 14°F DB to 81°F DB. 4. Heating-based synchronous: 14°F WB to 61°F WB. B. The VRF system shall maintain normal heating and/or cooling operation at all IDUs while any one IDU is powered down for service. When power is restored to the IDU serviced, normal operation shall be restored with no system shutdown, interruption, reset, or power cycling of the outdoor unit. C. VRF systems with a low ambient heating lock-out temperature shall not be accepted. 4.3 GENERAL A. The air-conditioning system shall use R410A refrigerant. B. Each system shall have one, two or three air source outdoor units. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 237000-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION VRF SYSTEM WITH HEAT RECOVERY 237000-3 QPK NO. 220157.00 C. Multi-frame configurations shall be field piped together using manufacturer’s designed and supplied Y-branch kit and field provided interconnecting pipe to form a common refrigerant circuit. D. Refrigerant circuit configuration for Heat Recovery System 1. The refrigerant circuit shall be constructed using field provided copper piped together with manufacturer supplied Heat Recovery unit(s) and Y- branches or Header fittings connected to multiple (ducted, non-ducted or combination thereof) indoor units to effectively and efficiently control the simultaneous heating and cooling operation of the VRF system. 2. Each refrigerant pipe, y-branch, header kit, elbows and valves shall be individually insulated with no air gaps. All joints shall be glued and sealed. 3. The VRF manufacturer shall provide published documentation that specifically allows the installation of field provided full-port high quality refrigerant system isolation valves rated for use with R410A on any and all pipes of the VRF system. Isolation valves shall be strategically placed in the refrigerant piping system to allow the VRF system service provider to isolate a portion of the piping system to avoid a pump down of the entire refrigerant piping system when replacing/repairing the refrigeration circuit piping, HR unit(s), or indoor unit(s). E. Factory installed microprocessor controls in the outdoor unit(s), HR unit(s), and indoor unit(s) shall perform functions to efficiently operate the VRF system and communicate in a daisy chain configuration between outdoor unit and HR unit(s) and indoor unit(s) over a RS485 18AWG stranded and twisted wire data link. F. The system shall be designed to accept connection up to 64 indoor units. G. The total nominal capacity of all indoor units shall be no less than 50% and no more than 130% of outdoor unit’s nominal capacity to ensure the VRF system will have sufficient capacity to meet the building’s cooling and heating load at design day weather conditions. H. The maximum allowable system combination ratio shall be 130%. Systems designed with a combination ratio above 130% will not be accepted. I. Each outdoor unit refrigerant circuit shall have a high-pressure safety threaded rupture disk or threaded fusible plug fitting. J. The outdoor unit assembly, indoor unit assembly and/or heat recovery unit assembly shall be shipped from the factory assembled and pressure tested including internal refrigerant piping, compressor, contacts, relay(s), control components, power and communications wiring necessary. K. Each outdoor unit refrigeration circuit shall have the following components: 1. Inverter variable speed compressor(s) 2. Outdoor unit heat exchanger 3. Refrigerant strainer(s) 4. Check valve(s) 5. Oil separator 6. Accumulator 7. Heat exchanger circuiting control 8. Electronic expansion valve(s) 9. 4-way reversing valve 10. Sub-cooler circuit with controls ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 237000-4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION VRF SYSTEM WITH HEAT RECOVERY 237000-4 QPK NO. 220157.00 11. High and low side Schrader valve service ports with caps. 12. Service valves L. Each outdoor unit shall be mounted on 18” tall open base metal stands. (Quick-Sling or approved equal). M. All outdoor units must be Wi-Fi enabled from the manufacturer. N. A mobile Wi-Fi service tool with service tablet shall be supplied with the project and turned over to the owner at project completion. 4.4 SYSTEM A. Each outdoor unit frame shall have a stand-alone microprocessor control that varies the use of the outdoor coil circuits to optimize the use of heat transfer surface. Control shall be able to dynamically change the path and coil circuiting based on one of the following operating parameters: head pressure, suction pressure, system sub-cooling requirements, available refrigerant charge, system mode of operation, coil heat transfer efficiency shall have a variable flow path heat exchanger function to vary the refrigerant flow path based on system operating mode and operating conditions. B. System inverter compressors shall have a mid-stage, medium pressure vapor economizer apparatus to maximize refrigerant compression efficiency. C. System accumulator shall be provided with controls that continuously monitors, modifies, and controls the amount of refrigerant in circulation (active refrigerant charge) while the system is operating. The active refrigerant charge microprocessor shall monitor system high and low side gas pressure, coil approach temperature, liquid line temperature and pressure, and system subcooling requirement to control the refrigerant charge. D. System shall comprise of the following frame configurations: 1. 6 through 14 ton systems shall be a single frame only. 2. 16 through 28 ton systems shall be dual frame only. 3. 30 to 42 ton systems shall be triple frame only. 4.5 REFRIGERANT PIPE SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS A. The outdoor unit shall be capable of operating at an elevation difference of up to 360 feet above or below the lowest or highest indoor unit respectively. B. The outdoor unit shall be capable of operating with up to 3280 equivalent length feet of interconnecting liquid line refrigerant pipe in the network. C. The outdoor unit shall be capable of operating with up to 656 actual feet or 738 equivalent length feet of liquid line refrigerant pipe spanning between outdoor unit and farthest indoor unit. D. The refrigerant piping joints shall be joined via mechanical bonding wherever possible via ZoomLock (or equal) braze-free mechanical joining system. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 237000-5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION VRF SYSTEM WITH HEAT RECOVERY 237000-5 QPK NO. 220157.00 4.6 DEFROST OPERATIONS A. The outdoor unit(s) shall be capable of Intelligent defrost operation to melt accumulated frost, snow and ice that may have accumulated on the outdoor unit heat exchanger. The defrost cycle length and sequence shall be based on outdoor ambient temperatures, outdoor unit heat exchanger temperature, and various differential pressure variables. B. Defrost Mode Selection: The outdoor unit shall be provided with three field-selectable defrost operation modes; Normal, Fast, or Forced. 1. Normal Defrost operation intended for use in areas of the country with mild winter temperatures and light to moderate humidity levels. The strategy minimizes defrost cycle frequency allowing frozen precipitation to build longer in between cycles. Minimum time between defrost cycles shall be 20 minutes. Intelligent Defrost shall choose between split coil/frame and full system methods to minimize energy consumption and cycle time. 2. Fast Defrost operation intended for use in areas of the country that experience adverse winter weather with periods of heavy winter precipitation and extremely low temperatures. This strategy shall maximize the systems heating performance and maintain operational efficiency. When the ambient temperature is above 32°F, Intelligent Defrost shall continue to heat until the discharge temperature declines. At temperatures below 32°F, the time between defrost cycles shall be a minimum of 90 minutes. At temperatures below 4°F, a defrost cycle shall occur every two hours to optimize system heating efficiency. 3. Forced Defrost operation shall be available for the service provider to test defrost operations at any weather condition and to manually clear frozen water from the outdoor coil surfaces. C. Defrost Method Selection: The outdoor unit shall be provided with two field-selectable defrost operation methods; Split Coil/Frame and Full System. 1. Split Coil/Frame method shall be available when Normal Defrost mode is selected. Split Coil method shall be available on all Heat Pump and Heat Recovery single-frame VRF systems. Split Frame defrost shall be available on all Heat Pump and Heat Recovery multi-frame outdoor units. 2. Split Coil method shall remove ice from the bottom half of the outdoor unit coil first for six minutes, then the bottom half for six minutes. Next the bottom coil shall be heated again for an additional three minutes to remove any frozen water that may have dripped onto the lower coil during the top coil defrost operation. 3. When Split Coil/Frame method is selected, a Full System defrost shall occur every third defrost cycle to assure 100% of the frozen precipitation has been removed to maintain optimum efficient performance. 4. Full System method shall be available as a field selectable option. Outdoor units located in areas of the country where large volumes of frozen precipitation are common, the commissioning agent shall select the Full System defrost method. D. Indoor Unit Fan Operation During Defrost 1. During partial defrost operation indoor units operating in cooling or dry mode shall continue normal operation. 2. During partial defrost operation, indoor units that are commissioned with fans set for continuous operation shall maintain normal fan speed unless the leaving air temperature drops, then the fan speed will be reduced to low speed for the remainder of the defrost cycle. 3. During full system defrost operation, indoor unit fans will cycle off and remain off during the remainder of the defrost cycle. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 237000-6 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION VRF SYSTEM WITH HEAT RECOVERY 237000-6 QPK NO. 220157.00 4.7 OIL MANAGEMENT A. Each outdoor unit shall have an independently operating Hi-POR (High Pressure Oil Return) system to maximize compressor efficiency and ensure a consistent film of oil on all moving compressor parts at all speeds. B. The oil return system shall include a dedicated centrifugal oil separator for each compressor designed to extract oil from the oil/refrigerant gas stream leaving the compressor. C. Oil collected by each compressors independent oil return system shall be returned directly to the compressor oil sump passively without the use of mechanical pumps or other apparatus. D. Oil return systems that depend on differential pressure to return oil to the compressor sump, for example bleeding off or bypassing any amount of high pressure gas to push oil back to the compressor sump or the suction inlet of the compressor chamber, shall not be accepted. E. Compressor oil shall be maintained at the same temperature as the discharge gas leaving the compressor to prevent any blending of refrigerant and oil to maintain stable oil viscosity during compressor operation. F. The oil return system shall not inject, blend, or otherwise mix collected oil with suction vapor refrigerant before entering the compressor scroll or other gas compression apparatus. G. The oil return system shall provide an oil level monitor for each compressor that provides continuous feedback to the outdoor unit microprocessor. H. The microprocessor shall initiate an oil return cycle when the oil level monitoring sensor indicates a low oil level in the compressor sump. I. Timed and/or scheduled unmonitored oil return operations and/or any oil return system that does not initiate an oil return cycle based on compressor sump low level reading shall not be permitted. 4.8 CABINET A. Outdoor unit cabinet shall be made of 20 gauge galvanized steel with an enamel finish. B. Outdoor unit cabinet shall have a heavy gauge coated wire coil guard. C. Outdoor unit cabinet finish shall have been tested in accordance with ASTM B-117 salt spray test procedure for a minimum of 1000 hours. D. All internal serviceable components shall be accessible by removing the front panel of the unit. Outdoor units that require the removal of side and/or rear service panels shall not be permitted. E. A controls maintenance and unit diagnostic access port shall be provided in front of the microprocessor to allow quick access to read service codes, set DIP switches, perform microprocessor operational checks, address system components and extract operational data without removing the unit’s front panel(s). F. The controls access port shall be no larger than 6-1/4” x 6-3/4” to the possibility of weather related moisture entering the control panel while service is in progress. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 237000-7 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION VRF SYSTEM WITH HEAT RECOVERY 237000-7 QPK NO. 220157.00 G. A baked galvanized steel access port cover with a baked enamel finish (color matching unit cabinet) shall be provided and easily removed. H. Controls access port cover shall be secured to the unit with a factory provided braided steel wire lanyard to prevent loss/damage to the port cover. I. The cabinet shall be designed with pre-punched pipe and electrical knockouts. Cabinet shall be designed to accept connection of refrigerant pipe, power cable, and communications wiring either: 1. Through the front panel. 2. Through the right side. 3. Through the unit’s base pan (bottom). 4.9 FAN ASSEMBLY(S) A. Each 6 ton cabinet shall be equipped with one direct drive variable speed propeller fan with Brushless Digitally Controlled (BLDC) motor mounted in a vertical top air discharge configuration. B. Each 8 to 14 ton cabinet shall be equipped with two direct drive variable speed propeller fans with independent BLDC motors mounted in a vertical top air discharge configuration. C. The fan blades shall be made of non-metallic light-weight Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene (ABS) material. D. Fan blade design shall be a quiet, deep-V designed to minimize air turbulence as air passes over and leaves the trailing edge of the fan blade. Fan shroud shall be designed in conjunction with fan blade to minimize air turbulence along the edge of the blades to minimize noise generation. E. Outdoor unit fan motors shall be powered using a dc inverter drive capable of operating the fans at a maximum speed of 1100 RPM. F. Each fan motor case/frame shall be made with a lightweight non-ferrous metal alloy. Bearing shall be sealed and permanently lubricated. G. Only one fan blade per fan motor shall be accepted. Dual fan assemblies driven by a double-end shaft motor shall not be permitted. H. Each fan blade and motor assembly shall be balanced, tested, and mounted to the unit frame using a means of isolation that will eliminate any objectionable audible harmonic or vibration being transferred to the unit frame. I. A raised ferrous wire metal guard with a baked enamel finish (color matching unit cabinet) shall be provided to prevent large object and animal contact with moving parts. J. The outdoor fan inverter drive shall be provided with a DIP switch that reprograms the DC inverter drive to allow outdoor unit fan assemblies to operate under high discharge static conditions (up to 0.32 in-wg external static pressure) such as a ducted discharge application. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 237000-8 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION VRF SYSTEM WITH HEAT RECOVERY 237000-8 QPK NO. 220157.00 4.10 OUTDOOR UNIT COIL A. Shall be a variable path design. B. Shall be provided and built by the VRF outdoor unit provider. C. It shall be comprised of aluminum fins mechanically bonded on copper tubing. D. The copper tubes shall be internally ribbed to maximize heat transfer. Smooth bore tubes are not acceptable. E. The aluminum fin heat transfer surfaces shall be treated to maximize the life of the fin material. Coil fin heat transfer surfaces shall be treated with a factory applied corrosion resistant GoldFin™ coating. Coating of fins shall be a two-step process. Base coat shall be an anticorrosive paint specifically engineered for bonding to bare aluminum. The top coat shall be a Hydrophilic paint with a gloss finish to protect the anti-corrosion coat. Hydrophilic paint shall be specifically formulated to promote liquid precipitation runoff and assist in minimizing particulate debris from sticking to the fin’s heat transfer surfaces. F. Fin material coating shall be tested in accordance with ASTM B-117 salt spray test procedure for a minimum of 1000 hours. G. The outdoor unit coil assembly shall be factory pressure tested to a pressure of 551 psig. H. Coil fin series shall be up to 22 Fins per Inch (FPI). I. All the outdoor units shall have a minimum of a 3 row heat exchanger. 4.11 COMPRESSOR(S) A. Each 6, 8, 10 ton frames shall be equipped with one hermetically sealed, inverter driven, High Side Shell (HSS) scroll compressor. B. The 12 and 14 ton frames shall be equipped with two hermetically-sealed, inverter-speed controlled scroll compressors. C. Outdoor unit frames containing constant speed 50-60 Hz compressor(s) or containing a constant speed 50-60 Hz compressor in combination with an inverter compressor(s) are not acceptable. D. Each inverter driven, HSS scroll compressor shall be capable of operating in a frequency range from 15 Hz to 150 Hz with control in 0.5 Hz increments. E. Each compressor shall be equipped with a minimum of a 60 Watt crankcase heater. F. The compressor shall be provided from the factory with a full charge of Polyvinyl Ether (PVE) oil. Ester based oils are not acceptable (POE) to prevent gum from forming in the system in the case of a motor burn. G. All compressor bearing(s) shall have Teflon™ coating. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 237000-9 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION VRF SYSTEM WITH HEAT RECOVERY 237000-9 QPK NO. 220157.00 H. All compressors shall be protected with: 1. High Pressure switch. 2. Over-current/under current protection. 3. Phase failure. 4. Phase reversal. 4.12 SOUND LEVELS A. Outdoor unit noise levels shall not exceed 60 dB A. Test protocol includes a sound level measurement taken at an elevation of 5 ft. above the mounting surface at the center point of the width of the outdoor unit frame at a distance of 1 meter in front of the front panel surface with all fans running at absolute maximum motor design speed at all unit operating modes including high heating mode in an anechoic chamber using ISO3745 test standard protocol. 4.13 SENSORS A. Each single cabinet shall have: 1. Suction temperature sensor. 2. Discharge temperature sensor. 3. High Pressure sensor. 4. Low Pressure sensor. 5. Outdoor temperature sensor. 6. Outdoor unit heat exchanger temperature sensor. PART 5.0 - HEAT RECOVERY UNIT (HRU) 5.1 GENERAL A. HR unit shall be designed and manufactured by the same manufacturer of VRF indoor unit(s) and outdoor unit(s). Provide LG. No Substitutions. B. HR units shall be available in a 2, 3, and 4-port design. Single port designs and pipe system designs that require a dedicated HR unit is not acceptable. C. HR unit casing shall be made with galvanized steel and have a galvanized steel finish. D. HR unit shall be powered using a 208-230V/1-phase/60Hz power supply. E. HR Unit shall be an intermediate refrigerant control device between the air source outdoor unit and the indoor units to control the systems simultaneous cooling and heating operation. F. HR unit shall be engineered to work with a three pipe VRF system comprised of the following: 1. High Pressure Vapor Pipe. 2. Low Pressure Vapor Pipe. 3. Liquid Pipe. G. HR unit shall be designed to be piped in a series or parallel pipe configuration relative to each other. H. HR unit shall be a multi-port design capable of serving between one and 8 indoor units per HR unit port with a combined cooling nominal capacity of 54 Mbh per IDU port. HR units shall be ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 237000-10 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION VRF SYSTEM WITH HEAT RECOVERY 237000-10 QPK NO. 220157.00 able to accept/service at least two indoor units per HR unit up to a combined connected IDU cooling capacity of 192 Mbh. I. VRF system controller shall be capable of accommodating up to 16 HR units connected to HR units piped in a single series string. J. Each port shall be capable of operating in cooling or heating independently regardless of the operating mode of any other port on the HR unit or in the system. K. HR unit shall be internally piped, wired, assembled, leak and run tested at the factory. L. HR unit shall be designed for installation in a conditioned environment and provided with factory applied insulation on all cold surfaces. M. HR unit shall have a liquid bypass circuit between the high pressure vapor and the low pressure vapor pipes. N. Each port IDU port shall have a pair (2) two-position solenoid valves. O. HR unit shall have a balancing valve to control the pressure between the high pressure and low pressure pipe during mode switching. P. HR unit shall contain a sub-cooler circuit with stand-alone controls for each HR unit. Q. HR cold surface pipes shall be factory insulated to prevent condensation. R. HR unit shall not require a condensate drain. Manufacturer’s providing HR models that require a condensate drain line shall reimburse the pipe fitter or others responsible for the portion of the cost associated with the condensate drain system design, parts, and installation. S. All field provided refrigerant piping and VRF system refrigerant piping components between outdoor unit and HR unit and from HR unit to indoor unit shall be field insulated. T. The HR unit shall not exceed a net unit weight of 49 lbs. U. At least 1 empty port on a HRU must be a supplied per system for future renovation and/or service. V. Each port of each HRU shall be equipped with a field installed full port R-410a rated ball valve with a service port. These ball valves shall be wrapped with at least 1/2" insulation provided by the valve manufacturer. 5.2 3-PHASE VRF SYSTEM PIPING CAPABILITIES A. The elevation difference between indoor units on heat pump systems shall be 131 feet. B. The elevation differences for heat recovery systems shall be: 1. Heat recovery unit (HRU) to connected indoor unit shall be 49 feet. 2. HRU to HRU shall be 49 feet. 3. Indoor unit to indoor unit connected to same HRU shall be 49 feet. 4. Indoor unit to indoor unit connected to separate parallel HRU’s shall be 131 feet. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 237000-11 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION VRF SYSTEM WITH HEAT RECOVERY 237000-11 QPK NO. 220157.00 C. The acceptable elevation difference between two series connected HR units shall be 16 feet. 5.3 CONTROLS A. HR unit(s) shall have factory installed unit mounted control boards and integral microprocessor to communicate with indoor units and outdoor units over a single stranded, shielded, twisted wire pair. B. Manufacturer shall provide screw terminal connections at the HR unit to terminate power wiring and communications cables. PART 6.0 - INDOOR UNITS 6.1 4-WAY CEILING CASSETTE A. General 1. Unit shall be manufactured by LG. 2. Unit shall be factory assembled, wired, piped and run tested. 3. Unit shall be designed to be installed for indoor application. 4. Unit shall be designed to mount recessed in the ceiling and has a surface mounted grille on the bottom of the unit. 5. The unit shall be available in both 2’ x 2’ and 3’ x 3’ chassis. 6. All 3’x3’ chassis ceiling cassettes shall be provided with return filter auto-elevation kits capable of lowering the return filter down 14’ from the ceiling cassette via a wireless remote. 7. All ceiling cassettes shall be provided with decorative shrouds that match the color of the ceiling cassettes front grille, to hide the metal casing of the ceiling cassette. B. Casing/Panel 1 Unit case shall be manufactured using galvanized steel plate. 2 The unit shall be provided with an off-white Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene (ABS) polymeric resin architectural grille. 3 The grille shall have a tapered trim edge, and a hinged, spring clip (screw-less) return air filter-grille door. 4 Unit shall be provided with metal ears designed to support the unit weight on four corners. 5 Ears shall have pre-punched holes designed to accept field supplied all thread rod hangers. C. Cabinet Assembly 1. Unit shall have four supply air outlets and one return air inlet. 2. The supply air outlet shall be through four-directional slot diffuser each equipped with independent oscillating motorized guide vane designed to change the airflow direction. 3. The grille shall have a discharge range of motion of 40° in an up/down direction with capabilities of locking the vanes. 4. The unit shall have a guide vane algorithm designed to sequentially change the predominant discharge airflow direction in counterclockwise pattern. 5. Guide vanes shall provide airflow in all directions. 6. Unit shall be equipped with factory installed temperature thermistors for: a. Return air b. Refrigerant entering coil c. Refrigerant leaving coil ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 237000-12 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION VRF SYSTEM WITH HEAT RECOVERY 237000-12 QPK NO. 220157.00 7. Unit shall have a factory assembled, piped and wired electronic expansion valve (EEV) for refrigerant control. 8. Unit shall have a built-in control panel to communicate with other indoor units and to the outdoor unit. 9. The unit shall have factory designated branch duct knockouts on the unit case. 10. The unit shall have provision of fresh air ventilation through a knock-out on the cabinet. 11. The branch duct knockouts shall have the ability to duct up to ½ the unit airflow capacity. 12. The branch duct cannot be ducted to another room. 13. Unit shall have the following functions as standard: a. Self-diagnostic function. b. Auto addressing. c. Auto restart function. d. Auto changeover function (Heat Recovery system only). e. Auto operation function. f. Child lock function. g. Forced operation. h. Dual thermistor control. i Sleep mode. j. Dual setpoint control. k. Multiple aux heater applications. l. Filter life and power consumption display. D. Fan Assembly 1. The unit shall have a single, direct drive, turbo fan made of high strength ABS HT-700 polymeric resin. 2. The fan impeller shall be statically and dynamically balanced. 3. The fan motor is Brushless Digitally controlled (BLDC) with permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearings. 4. The fan motor shall include thermal, overcurrent and low RPM protection. 5. The fan/motor assembly shall be mounted on vibration attenuating rubber grommets. 6. The fan speed shall be controlled using microprocessor based direct digitally controlled algorithm. 7. In cooling mode, the indoor fan shall have the following settings: Low, Med, High, Power Cool, and Auto. 8. In heating mode, the indoor fan shall have the following settings: Low, Med, High, and Auto. 9. Unit shall have factory installed motorized louver to provide flow of air in up and down direction for uniform airflow. E. Filter Assembly 1. The return air inlet shall have a factory supplied removable, washable filter with antifungal treatment. 2. The unit shall have the option for a secondary plasma filter accessory. 3. The filter access shall be from the bottom of the unit. 4. The unit shall have provision for an optional auto-elevating grille kit designed to provide motorized ascent/descent of the return air grille/pre filter assembly. a. The ascent/descent of the return air grille shall be up to a distance of 14-3/4 feet allowing access to remove and clean the filter. b. The auto-elevating grille shall have a control algorithm to accept up, down and stop control commands from the controller. c. The auto-elevating grille shall have a control to stop the descent automatically if a contact is made with any obstacle. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 237000-13 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION VRF SYSTEM WITH HEAT RECOVERY 237000-13 QPK NO. 220157.00 F. Coil Assembly 1. Unit shall have a factory built coil comprised of aluminum fins mechanically bonded on copper tubing. 2. The copper tubing shall have inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchanger. 3. Unit shall have a minimum 1 or 2 row coil, 18-19 fins per inch. 4. Unit shall have a factory supplied condensate drain pan below the coil constructed of EPS (expandable polystyrene resin). 5. Unit shall include an installed and wired condensate drain pump capable of providing minimum 27.5-inch lift from bottom surface of the unit. 6. The drain pump shall have a safety switch to shut off the unit if condensate rises too high in the drain pan. 7. Unit shall have provision of 45° flare refrigerant pipe connections. 8. The coil shall be factory pressure tested at a minimum of 551 psig. 9. All refrigerant piping from outdoor unit to indoor unit shall be field insulated. G. Microprocessor Control 1. The unit shall have a factory installed microprocessor controller capable of performing functions necessary to operate the system. 2. The unit shall be able to communicate with other indoor units and the outdoor unit using a field supplied minimum of 18 AWG, 2 core, stranded and shielded communication cable. 3. The unit controls shall operate the indoor unit using one of the five operating modes: a. Auto changeover (Heat Recovery System only). b. Heating. c. Cooling. d. Dry. e. Fan only. H. Electrical 1. The unit electrical power shall be 208-230/1/60 (V/Ph/Hz). 2. The unit shall be capable of operating within voltage limits of +/- 10% of the rated voltage. I. Controls 1. Unit shall use controls provided by the manufacturer to perform all functions necessary to operate the system effectively and efficiently and communicate with the outdoor unit over an RS485 daisy chain. 6.2 DUCTED – HIGH STATIC A. General 1. Unit shall be manufactured by LG. 2. Unit shall be factory assembled, wired, piped and run tested. 3. Unit shall be designed to be installed for indoor application. 4. Unit shall be designed to mount fully concealed above the finished ceiling. 5. Unit shall have opening to supply air from front horizontal and a dedicated rear horizontal return. 6. The supply air shall be flanged for field installed ductwork that shall not exceed the external static pressure limitation of the unit. 7. Unit shall be capable to be installed with heat pump or heat recovery or cooling VRF system. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 237000-14 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION VRF SYSTEM WITH HEAT RECOVERY 237000-14 QPK NO. 220157.00 B. Casing/Panel 1. Unit case shall be manufactured using galvanized steel plate. 2. The cold surfaces of the unit shall be covered internally with a coated polystyrene insulating material. 3. The cold surfaces of the unit shall be covered externally with sheet insulation made of Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer (M-Class) (EPDM). 4. The external insulation shall be plenum rated and conform to ASTM Standard D-1418. 5. Unit shall be provided with hanger brackets designed to support the unit weight on four corners. 6. Hanger brackets shall have pre-punched holes designed to accept field supplied, all thread rod hangers. C. Cabinet Assembly 1. Unit shall have supply air discharge outlets horizontal and a return air inlet horizontal. 2. Unit shall be equipped with factory installed temperature thermistors for: a. Return air. b. Refrigerant entering coil. c. Refrigerant leaving coil. 3. Unit shall have a factory assembled, piped and wired electronic expansion valve (EEV) for refrigerant control. 4. Unit shall have a built-in control panel to communicate with other indoor units and to the outdoor unit. 5. Unit shall have the following functions as standard: a. Self-diagnostic function. b. Auto addressing. c. Auto restart function. d. Auto changeover function (Heat Recovery system only). e. Auto operation function. f. Child lock function. g. Forced operation. h. Dual thermistor control. i. Sleep mode. j. External static pressure (ESP) control. k. Dual setpoint control. l. Multiple aux heater applications. m. Filter life and power consumption display. D. Fan Assembly 1. The unit shall have two direct drive Sirocco fans made of high strength ABS GP-2200 polymeric resin. 2. The fan impeller shall be statically and dynamically balanced. 3. The fans shall be mounted on a common shaft. 4. The fan motor is Brushless Digitally controlled (BLDC) with permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearings. 5. The fan motor shall include thermal, overcurrent and low RPM protection. 6. The fan/motor assembly shall be mounted on vibration attenuating rubber grommets. 7. The fan speed shall be controlled using microprocessor based direct digitally controlled algorithm. 8. In cooling mode, the indoor fan shall have the following settings: Low, Med, High, Power Cool, and Auto. 9. In heating mode, the indoor fan shall have the following settings: Low, Med, High, and Auto. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 237000-15 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION VRF SYSTEM WITH HEAT RECOVERY 237000-15 QPK NO. 220157.00 10. Each of the settings can be field adjusted from the factory setting (RPM/ESP). 11. Unit shall be designed for high speed air volume against an external static pressure of up to 0.98” water gauge. E. Filter Assembly 1. The return air inlet shall have a factory supplied removable, washable filter with antifungal treatment. 2. The filter access shall be from the rear of the unit. F. Coil Assembly 1. Unit shall have a factory built coil comprised of aluminum fins mechanically bonded on copper tubing. 2. The copper tubing shall have inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchanger. 3. Unit shall have a minimum 2-3 row coil, 19-21 fins per inch. 4. Unit shall have a factory supplied condensate drain pan below the coil constructed of HIPS (high impact polystyrene resin). 5. Unit shall include an installed and wired condensate drain pump capable of providing minimum 27.5 inch lift from bottom surface of the unit. 6. The drain pump shall have a safety switch to shut off the unit if condensate rises too high in the drain pan. 7. Unit shall have provision of 45° flare refrigerant pipe connections. 8. The coil shall be factory pressure tested at a minimum of 551 psig. 9. All refrigerant piping from outdoor unit to indoor unit shall be field insulated. G. Microprocessor Control 1. The unit shall have a factory installed microprocessor controller capable of performing functions necessary to operate the system. 2. The unit shall be able to communicate with other indoor units and the outdoor unit using a field supplied minimum of 18 AWG, 2 core, stranded and shielded communication cable. 3. The unit controls shall operate the indoor unit using one of the five operating modes: a. Auto changeover (Heat Recovery System only) b. Heating c. Cooling d. Dry e. Fan only H. Electrical 1. The unit electrical power shall be 208-230/1/60 (V/Ph/Hz). 2. The unit shall be capable of operating within voltage limits of +/- 10% of the rated voltage. I. Controls 1. Unit shall use controls provided by the manufacturer to perform all functions necessary to operate the system effectively and efficiently and communicate with the outdoor unit over an RS485 daisy chain. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 237000-16 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION VRF SYSTEM WITH HEAT RECOVERY 237000-16 QPK NO. 220157.00 PART 7.0 - CONTROLS 7.1 PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER A. Overview The Programmable Wired Remote Controller shall be capable of controlling up to sixteen indoor units (one group). The Programmable Wired Remote Controller shall be capable of monitoring and controlling the group in terms of On/Off, Mode of Operation, Airflow direction, Fan Speed, space temperature, and space temperature set point based on the available functions of the connected system. Additionally, the Programmable Wired Remote Controller shall be capable of providing seven-day programmable scheduling of Occupied/Unoccupied settings, On/Off, Mode of Operation, set point and fan speed. B. General 1. The Programmable Wired Remote Controller shall be compatible with the VRF indoor units. 2. The Programmable Wired Remote Controller shall communicate to the VRF indoor unit via the VRF RS-485 daisy chain communication protocol. 3. The Programmable Wired Remote Controller shall have a 4-1/4” backlit LCD display with screen saver capability. 4. The Programmable Wired Remote Controller shall have an internal time clock and calendar. 5. The Programmable Wired Remote Controller shall be able to display temperature in °F or °C based on user settings. 6. The Programmable Wired Remote Controller shall be able to monitor and control up to sixteen indoor units (one group) as a single zone. 7. Up to 2 Programmable Wired Remote Controllers shall be connectable to a single group and operate in a master/slave configuration. C. Basic Functions Function Description Monitor Control On/Off On/Off operation for group X X Mode of Operation Mode of Operation for group (Heat/Cool/Fan/Dry/Auto) X X Set Point Space temperature set point for group. Setting temperature range 64-84°F. Separate Heat/Cool set points settings for Auto Mode. *Set Point ranges dependent on operation mode and connected equipment. X X Space Temperature Display measured space temperature X Fan Speed Select fan speeds Hi-Mid1-Mid2-Low-Auto X X Airflow Direction Select air direction settings Auto/Swing/Fixed X X Lock setting Ability to lock out operation of the controller X X Filter check Notification to change dirty filter X Dehumidification Ability to remove moisture from the air X X Temperature set point range limit Ability to limit heating and cooling set point ranges X X Available functions/features may differ based on connected system. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 237000-17 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION VRF SYSTEM WITH HEAT RECOVERY 237000-17 QPK NO. 220157.00 D. Advanced Functions Function Description Monitor Control Schedule 7-day programmable schedule Minimum of 5 events per day with On/Off, Occupied/Unoccupied, Mode, Set temperature, and Fan Speed selectable per event. X X Timed Override Timed override of Unoccupied settings X X Occupied/Unoccupied Setting Ability to have different settings for both modes X X Energy Use Display Display actual operational time and power consumption X Operation Time Limit Limit the run time of an indoor unit X X Auto Changeover Deadband Adjust Ability to adjust dead-band between indoor unit heating and cooling modes X X Set back Ability to change heating and cooling set points X X 2 set point auto operation Automatically manage room temperature for heating and cooling X Central Control display Display if a signal is received from Central Control X X Interlocking Ability to interlock with 3rd party devices X Available functions/features may differ based on connected system. E. Electrical 1. The remote controller shall be powered via the indoor unit remote controller communication bus. Power shall be 24 VDC. 7.2 AC SMART IV CENTRAL CONTROLLER/INTEGRATION GATEWAY A Overview The AC Smart BACnet Gateway shall be capable of monitoring and control of up to 128 devices (including indoor units, ERV, DI/DOs, DOKITS, AWHPs, AHUs) or 64 devices (including indoor units, ERV, DI/DOs, DOKITS, AWHPs and AHUs) and 9 I/O Modules through its touchscreen interface and embedded web browser. The AC Smart BACnet Gateway shall provide multiple energy management schemes and control of third‐party equipment when paired with associated I/O Module. Additionally, the AC Smart BACnet Gateway shall be capable of providing daily, weekly, yearly, and holiday programmable scheduling of Occupied/Unoccupied settings, On/Off, Mode of Operation, set point and fan speed based on the available functions of the connected system. B. General 1. The AC Smart BACnet Gateway shall communicate to the LG Multi V™ VRF indoor unit via the VRF RS‐485 daisy‐chain communication protocol. 2. The AC Smart BACnet Gateway shall communicate to a third‐party Building Automation System via BACnet/IP. 3. The AC Smart BACnet Gateway shall have a 10.2” backlit touchscreen LCD display screen. 4. The AC Smart BACnet Gateway shall have web access with user control. 5. The AC Smart BACnet Gateway shall be able to generate an operation and error history log with reporting capabilities. 6. The AC Smart BACnet Gateway shall be able to control up to 128 indoor units in a group or as a single zone. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 237000-18 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION VRF SYSTEM WITH HEAT RECOVERY 237000-18 QPK NO. 220157.00 7. The AC Smart BACnet Gateway shall support two digital input and two digital outputs for device interlock. 8. The AC Smart BACnet Gateway shall have two set point auto changeover. 9. The AC Smart BACnet Gateway shall have occupied/unoccupied set point control. 10. The AC Smart BACnet Gateway shall have remote controller lock (All, Set point, Mode, and Fan Speed). 11. The AC Smart BACnet Gateway shall have error e‐mail notification. 12. The AC Smart BACnet Gateway shall have visual floor plan navigation. C. Basic Functions Function Description Monitor Control On/Off On/Off operation for group X X Mode of Operation Mode of Operation for group (Heat/Cool/Fan/Auto/Dry) X X Set Point Space temperature set point for group. Setting temperature range 64°F-84°F depending on operation mode and connected equipment. X X Space Temperature Display measured space temperature X Fan Speed Select fan speeds Hi-Mid1-Mid2-Low-Auto X X Airflow Direction Select air direction settings Auto/Swing/Fixed X X Group Control Control and Monitor a group or multiple groups X X Operational and Event Log History Record system operation and fault code history X Language Selection Choice of multiple languages X Available functions/features may differ based on connected system. D. Advanced Functions Function Description Monitor Control Schedule Daily, Weekly, Yearly and Holiday programmable schedule Minimum of five events per day with On/Off, Occupied/Unoccupied, Mode, Set temperature, and Fan X X Timed Override Timed override of Unoccupied settings X X Occupied/Unoccupied Setting Ability to have different settings for both modes X X Energy Use Display Display actual operational time and power consumption. X X Operation Run Time Limit Limit the run time of an indoor unit X X Two set point auto operation Automatically manage room temperature for heating and cooling X X Error E-Mail Notification Send E-Mail when a system failure has been detected X X Peak/Demand Control Control and Limit power consumption of external devices X X Temperature set point range limit Ability to limit heating and cooling set point ranges X X Remote controller Lock setting Ability to lock out operation of the controller X X ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 237000-19 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION VRF SYSTEM WITH HEAT RECOVERY 237000-19 QPK NO. 220157.00 Available functions/features may differ based on connected system. E. Electrical 1. The AC Smart IV Central controller shall be powered via 24 VAC or 12 VDC. END OF SECTION 237000 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260100-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ELECTRICAL BASIC REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 260100-1 SECTION 260100 - ELECTRICAL BASIC REQUIREMENTS PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. The requirements of this Section apply to all work of Division 26, Division 27 and Division 28. B. This Section specifies the basic requirements for electrical installations and includes requirements common to more than one section of Division 26 - Electrical. It expands and supplements the requirements specified in sections of Division 00 - Bidding and Contract Requirements and Division 01 - General Requirements. C. Refer to Submittal Procedures specification section for requirements on submittals. D. Approval of items, whether evidenced by seal, label or stamp, shall not absolve Contractor from compliance with requirements of Contract Documents. 1.2 LAYOUT OF WORK A. The Contract Drawings are diagrammatic in showing physical layout. Exact locations must be established in coordination with all other work of this and other trades. B. Arrange work in a neat, well organized manner running parallel to walls and close to structure and other work above for maximum clearances. C. Locate operating and control equipment to insure access for operation and maintenance. D. Coordinate the work of this Division with the work of other trades and make adjustments to the work as may be necessary to fit the spaces allotted. 1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver products to the Site in sturdy shipping containers, properly labeled as to type, function and location. B. Handle products carefully at all times during shipping, storing and installing. Avoid crushing containers and prevent dirt and debris from entering or settling on products. Do not install damaged equipment or components; replace with new. C. Store products in original shipping containers and protect from weather and construction work traffic. D. Where possible, store inside; otherwise, store above grade and enclose with weatherproof wrapping. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260100-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ELECTRICAL BASIC REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 260100-2 E. Mark and tag conductors for delivery to the Site the same as required for sample labels. Insulated conductors over one year old, when delivered to the Site, shall not be acceptable. 1.4 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS A. Underwriters Certificate: A New York Board of Fire Underwriters inspection and certificate is required. Provide an Underwriters Certificate to the Engineer prior to request for Final Payment. B. Acquire all required permits for execution of the work and include the cost of same in the Bid Price. 1.5 CODES, STANDARDS AND LISTING A. Provide all products and perform all electrical installation work in accordance with applicable requirements of: 1. 2020 Building Code of New York State. 2. 2020 Fire Code of New Yor5k State. 3. 2020 Energy Conservation Code of New York State. 4. American Society for Testing Material (ASTM). 5. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 6. Association of Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC). 7. Edison Electric Institute (EEI). 8. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). 9. Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA). 10. National Electric Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA). 11. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). a. National Electric Code, NFPA No. 70-2017. b. Other publications included in ‘National Fire Codes,’ volume set published by NFPA. 12. National Electric Safety Code, Handbook No. H30, except for requirements which have been superseded by NFPA Publications (NESC). 13. Local Electric Code. 14. Local Utility Standards. 15. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). B. All electrical devices, materials and packaged equipment shall meet the requirements of a recognized testing agency such as the Underwriters Laboratories, Incorporated, and shall bear its label. 1.6 NOTIFICATIONS A. Notify and obtain permission from the Owner seven days in advance of interrupting any utilities. B. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of all tests. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260100-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ELECTRICAL BASIC REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 260100-3 1.7 REMOVALS A. Refer to Contract Drawings to determine extent of construction being removed and visit Job Site to examine existing conditions. B. Where removals occur on services that are to remain in operation, cap or otherwise terminate the remaining services beneath finished surfaces. C. Carefully remove and store all equipment to be reused in a safe place until ready for reinstallation. Clean materials before reinstallation and ensure equipment is still fully operational. D. Carefully remove and turn over to the Owner in good condition at the Job Site all removed materials and/or equipment the Owner wishes to retain. Remove from the Job Site all other existing materials and equipment. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SLEEVES A. Provide Schedule 40 black steel pipe sleeves, unless otherwise required. B. Provide sleeves compatible with penetration and material penetrated. C. Provide 1/2" minimum clearance around penetration. D. Provide sleeves at all conduit penetrations through concrete and masonry construction, and through fire rated drywall construction. E. Seal all openings around electrical boxes and raceways where passing through concrete slabs and masonry walls with mortar or non-flammable, non-toxic sealant capable of maintaining the inherent fire rating and smoke rating of the slab or wall. F. Fire-rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Fill the annular space between the sleeve and conduit to prevent the passage of flame and hot gases. The fire stop used to fill the annular space shall be an approved penetration fire stop system installed in accordance with UL 1479 and ASTM E814, with a minimum positive pressure differential of 0.01 inch of water and shall have an F rating of not less than the fire resistance rating of the wall penetrated. G. Floor Penetrations: Fill the annular space between the sleeve and conduit to prevent the passage of flame and hot gases. The fire stop used to fill the annular space shall be an approved penetration fire stop system installed in accordance with UL 1479 and ASTM E814, with a minimum positive pressure differential of 0.01 inch of water and shall have an F rating of not less than the fire resistance rating of the floor penetrated. H. Seal all exterior wall penetrations with sealant so as to prevent moisture from entering building. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260100-4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ELECTRICAL BASIC REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 260100-4 I. Sleeves through structural members are not permitted without prior approval from the Engineer. J. Cut sleeves flush with adjacent surfaces unless otherwise indicated. K. Sleeves in mechanical equipment rooms and floors subject to frequent wash down shall extend 1" above finished floor. L. Waterproofing Seals: 1. Provide expanding link type seal, for installation between duct/conduit, and sleeve or coredrilled hole in concrete. 2. Make: Link Seal, manufactured by GTP or approved equal. 2.2 CONCRETE INSERTS A. Provide metal type inserts, specifically designed for support of hangers, equipment, conduit, etc. B. Install inserts before concrete is poured. C. Provide percussion or expansion type fasteners instead of inserts where the inserts were not installed when the concrete was poured. 2.3 NAMEPLATES A. Provide standard phenolic nameplates with 3/8" minimum size engraved lettering indicating the load served, power source, voltage, phases and circuit number on covers of safety switches, motor controllers, panelboards, etc. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXECUTION OF WORK A. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components. B. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install electrical services and overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom available. C. Coordinate electrical equipment and materials installation with other building components; above ceilings with suspension system, coordinate with mechanical equipment and systems and with structural components. D. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. E. Perform all work in accordance with the Plans, Specifications and all other Contract Documents. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260100-5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ELECTRICAL BASIC REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 260100-5 F. In general, the Contract Drawings indicate locations of equipment in floor plan and the locations of equipment within systems by means of riser diagrams. G. Provide all systems in accordance with the descriptions outlined in the Specifications. H. Install all equipment in a manner that shall allow ease of maintenance, safety of personnel and ready accessibility. I. If the Engineer determines that any installed system does not function in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications, the Contractor who installed the system(s) improperly shall remove the equipment and reinstall it properly at the Contractor’s own expense. In the event the removal and reinstallation of improperly installed equipment would result in an interruption of services the Contractor shall provide whatever temporary services are required to prevent interruptions of service. J. For equipment furnished by others requiring an electrical connection, obtain submittals from equipment supplier and verify electrical characteristics before installation. 3.2 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Provide all cutting and patching, except as otherwise specified, required to perform the work of this Division. B. Provide patching and painting as required to match existing adjacent surfaces; the Engineer’s Representative shall determine whether patching has been executed properly. C. Remove and replace work which, in the judgment of the Engineer, has been cut and patched in an unsatisfactory manner. 3.3 TESTS, BALANCING AND DEMONSTRATION A. Arrange with the Engineer to witness all tests, and perform all testing at a mutually agreed upon time. Owner is to pay for energy used during testing. B. Prior to commencement of work, the Contactor(s) effecting such system shall survey all building electrical systems and components, including fire alarm, security, communications, clock and computer; make written notice to the Owner regarding existing damages, missing items and incomplete systems. Prior to the conclusion of this project, the Contractor shall verify with the Project Inspector that all building systems have been returned to their original conditions. C. Load Test and Balancing 1. Upon completion of the electrical installation, conduct a load test by turning on all lights, motors and other electrical equipment throughout the entire Project for a continuous period. 2. Alter fuses, breakers, circuit connection arrangements, etc., as required to permit satisfactory performance. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260100-6 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ELECTRICAL BASIC REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 260100-6 3. Reconnect the circuits to the busses at each panel and distribution location as required so that the load on the phases and/or the neutral shall be balanced within 5%. D. Demonstration 1. Before final acceptance, demonstrate the operation of the entire system and instruct the Owner’s maintenance personnel in the complete operation of all systems, and in the resetting and fuse replacement of all equipment. 3.4 OWNER’S INSTRUCTION A. After Substantial Completion of Work, including testing and balancing of systems, conduct a complete and thorough seminar for Owner’s designated personnel at the Job Site. B. Include the following instructions: 1. Operation and Maintenance of All Systems 2. Explanation of Identification Systems 3. Emergency and Alarm Procedures 4. Sequencing Requirements 5. Seasonal Provisions 6. Security and Safety 7. Review of Manuals C. Conduct seminar by persons (may include manufacturer’s representatives) who are thoroughly familiar with equipment and installation. D. Provide Engineer duplicate letter signed by Owner’s Representative confirming completion of above. 3.5 VIDEO TAPING OF TRAINING SESSIONS A. The Contractor shall videotape all training sessions required by their discipline. Video to be transferred to DVD format and two (2) copies submitted to the Owner. DVD to be individually marked with training session name, installing Contractor and date of training. 3.6 MANUALS A. Submit a complete manual for all work of this Division, including: 1. Installation, maintenance, operating instructions and full catalog description, including exploded parts drawings of all equipment. 2. Load test results and motor list. 3. Lubrication list for all equipment, including type of lubricant, source and frequency of lubrication stated for each unit of equipment. 4. Control description and diagrams which shall include data required in Subparagraph 1 above. 5. Emergency phone numbers for service for all equipment. 6. List of all Suppliers and Subcontractors, including addresses, responsible personnel and phone numbers. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260100-7 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ELECTRICAL BASIC REQUIREMENTS QPK NO. 220157.00 260100-7 7. All warranties. 8. Schematic diagrams for all systems. 9. Wiring and control diagrams for all equipment. 10. Maintenance schedule for all equipment, including lubrication. 11. Refer to Division 01, General Requirements for additional information. END OF SECTION 260100 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260519-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES QPK NO. 220157.00 260519-1 SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Electrical wires, cables and connectors specified in this Section include all conductors for power distribution circuits, lighting circuits, motor branch circuits and appliance and equipment branch circuits to which 600 volts or less is applied, unless otherwise noted. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compliance and Labeling: Comply with applicable requirements of Codes, Standards and Listing as listed in Section 260100 - Electrical Basic Requirements. B. Manufacturer: Company with minimum five (5) years experience specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s data on electrical wires, cables and connectors. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide wires, cables and connectors of manufacturer’s standard materials, as indicated by published product information; designed and constructed as recommended by manufacturer, for a complete installation, and as required for the installation indicated. 2.2 WIRES AND CABLES A. Provide factory-fabricated wires and cables of sizes, ampacity ratings and materials for applications and services indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection to comply with Project’s installation requirements, NEC and NEMA standards. B. Wires: Provide the following types: 1. Type THHN/THWN: Provide wire having copper conductor and flame-retardant, moisture- and heat-resistant thermoplastic insulation with nylon jacket; rated for maximum operating temperature of 90°C dry, 75°C wet. 2. Type THW: Provide wire having copper conductor and flame-retardant, moisture- and heatresistant thermoplastic insulation; rated for maximum operating temperature of 90°C dry, 75°C wet. 3. Type XHHW: Provide wire having copper conductor and flame-retardant, cross-linked synthetic polymer insulation; rated for maximum operating temperature of 90˚ C dry, 75˚ C wet. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260519-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES QPK NO. 220157.00 260519-2 Acceptable Manufacturers: Southwire Company WESCO Technologies Corporation Approved equal C. Connectors and Splices: Factory-fabricated connectors, splices and lugs of size, ampacity rating, material, type and class for application and service indicated; listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. D. Jacketed Cable Connectors: For steel and aluminum jackets cables, zinc die-cast with set screws, designed to connect conductors specified in this Section. E. Lugs: One piece, seamless, designed to terminate conductors specified in this Section. 1. Material: Copper 2. Type: One or two hole with standard barrels. 3. Termination: Compression F. Acceptable Manufacturers: 3M Electrical Products Atkore International (AFC Cable Systems) Ideal Industries, Inc. Service Wire Co. TE Connectivity Ltd. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Install electrical cables, wires and connectors as indicated, in compliance with applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, UL and NECA’s “Standard of Installation,” and in accordance with recognized industry practices. B. Coordinate wire/cable installation work, including electrical raceway and equipment installation work, as necessary to properly interface with other work. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF WIRES AND CABLES A. Types and Use: Provide wires and cables as indicated on the Contract Drawings and as follows: 1. Type THHN/THWN Wire: Provide for all branch circuits and feeders #3 AWG or smaller, unless otherwise noted. 2. Type XHHW Wire: Provide for all feeders #2 AWG or larger. B. Install all wires in raceway. Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in same raceway. Use pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Use pulling means, including fish cord, cable, rope ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260519-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES QPK NO. 220157.00 260519-3 and basket weave wire/cable grips, which shall not damage conductors or raceway. Do not install conductors in raceway until all work which may cause damage has been completed. C. Keep conductor splices to a minimum. As far as practicable, provide feeder circuits that are continuous from origin to panel termination without running splices in intermediate pull boxes or splicing chambers. D. Provide #12 AWG minimum for branch circuits, except that branch circuits longer than 100' from panel to load center shall be 10 AWG minimum. E. Unless noted otherwise, ensure that each branch circuit is connected to a different phase in the panelboard. F. Install wiring as shown on Contract Drawings; do not combine circuits, unless as allowed by NEC. Increase wire size if necessary to comply with equipment power requirements or derating factors in NEC Article 310, and increase conduit size if necessary to comply with NEC fill requirements. G. Provide sufficient slack (12" minimum) at terminations to make proper connections. H. Install wiring and cabling so that when completed the system shall be free from short circuits and unintentional grounds. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONNECTORS A. Types and Uses 1. In dry interior locations: a. Conductors 8 AWG or Smaller: Provide indent type connectors with insulating jacket or spring type connectors. b. Conductors 6 AWG or Larger: Provide indent type pressure connectors. Fill indentations and cover connector with insulation tape to provide insulation equivalent to that of the conductor. c. Gutter Taps in Panelboards: Provide indent type pressure connectors or bolt-on pressure connector gutter taps having insulating covers. Wrap insulating cover with several wraps of insulation tape so that it is completely covered by the tape. 2. In Damp Interior Locations, or Exterior Locations: Provide indent type pressure connectors and insulate with splice kit. 3. Make cable terminals, taps and splices secure using solderless pressure type connectors. B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturer’s published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer’s torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A and B. C. Tape all joints in a manner approved for circuit voltages. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260519-4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES QPK NO. 220157.00 260519-4 D. Where conductors are to be connected to metallic surfaces, polish the coated surfaces of the metal before installing the connector. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prior to energization of circuitry, check installed wires and cable with megohm meter to determine insulation resistance levels and ensure requirements are fulfilled. B. Prior to energization, test wires and cables for electrical continuity and for short-circuits. C. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuitry and demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements. Where necessary, correct malfunctioning units and then retest to demonstrate compliance. END OF SECTION 260519 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260523-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CONTROL VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES QPK NO. 220157.00 260523-1 SECTION 260523 - CONTROL VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Control/signal conductors specified in this Section include all low voltage conductors used on the Project for the fire alarm and smoke detection system, and energy management system. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. UL Compliance and Labeling: Comply with applicable requirements of UL safety standards pertaining to control/signal wiring, cabling and connectors. Provide products which are UL listed and labeled. B. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC requirements as applicable to construction, installation and color coding of control/signal wires and cables. C. ASTM Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ASTM B1, 2, 3, 8, 33, D-2219 and D-2220. Provide copper conductors with conductivity of not less than 98% at 20°C. D. NEMA/ICEA Compliance: Comply with NEMA/ICEA Standard Publication No. 5, “Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy”. E. Provide conductors in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the equipment to which the conductors are connected. F. Manufacturer: Company with minimum five (5) years experience specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit for approval manufacturer’s data on control/signal conductors. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide control/signal conductors of manufacturer’s standard materials, as indicated by published product information; designed and constructed as recommended by the manufacturer for a complete installation, and as required for the installation indicated. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260523-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CONTROL VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES QPK NO. 220157.00 260523-2 2.2 WIRES AND CABLES A. Provide factory-fabricated wires and cables of sizes, ampacity ratings and materials for applications indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection to comply with Project’s installation requirements, NEC and NEMA requirements. B. All cabling located in air plenum ceilings and above suspended ceiling without conduit shall be plenum rated. C. Provide the following types of wires and cables: 1. Type THHN/THWN Wire: Provide wire having copper conductor and flame-resistant, moisture- and heat-resistant thermoplastic insulation with nylon jacket; rated for maximum operating temperature of 90°C dry and 75°C wet. Acceptable Manufacturers: Southwire Company WESCO General Cable Technologies Corporation Approved equal 2. Type TFN Wire: Provide wire having copper conductor and heat-resistant thermoplastic insulation with nylon jacket; rated for maximum operating temperature of 90°C dry. Acceptable Manufacturers: Southwire Company WESCO General Cable Technologies Corporation Approved equal 3. Multi-Conductor Cable: Provide number of conductors or pairs as required; shielded or unshielded, with or without drain wire, as required; tinned solid copper conductors, minimum size 22 AWG; each conductor individually insulated with polyethylene or PVC, color coded; and with an overall jacket of PVC. Cotton or other insulating materials that deteriorate with age are not acceptable. Acceptable Manufacturers: Allied Wire & Cable Inc. General Cable Technologies Corporation Southwire Company Approved equal 4. Plenum Cable: Provide multi-conductor or paired cable, number of conductors or pairs as required; shielded or unshielded, with or without drain wire, as required; tinned solid copper conductors, minimum size 22 AWG; primary insulation consisting of a fluoropolymer resin rated 300 volts and having a minimum insulation wall thickness of 0.012" for 16 AWG through 22 AWG and 0.014" for 12 and 14 AWG; having a sheath of coated glass fiber or polyester tape; and with a fluoropolymer jacket over marker tape. Provide cables UL listed for flame resistance and low smoke properties in accordance with NEC Articles 725, 760 and 800, and that are approved for use in air plenum ceilings without conduit. Acceptable Manufacturers: Philadelphia Wire & Cable Inc. Superior Essex Inc. West Penn Wire Approved equal ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260523-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CONTROL VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES QPK NO. 220157.00 260523-3 D. Connectors: Factory-fabricated connectors of size, ampacity rating, material, type and class for application and service indicated; listed and labeled as defined NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. E. Acceptable Manufacturers: 3M Electrical Products Atkore International (AFC Cable Systems) Ideal Industries, Inc. Service Wire Co. TE Connectivity Ltd. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Install control/signal conductors as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions, in compliance with applicable requirements of NEC and in accordance with recognized industry practices. B. Coordinate control/signal conductor installation work, including electrical raceway and equipment installation work, as necessary to properly interface with other work. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF WIRES AND CABLES A. Types and Use: Provide control/signal conductors as indicated on the Contract Drawings as recommended by the manufacturer of the equipment to which the conductors are connected and as follows: 1. Type THHN/THWN Wire: Provide for wiring 14 AWG or larger, for nonpower-limited and supply-side power-limited fire alarm wiring, and for Class 1 wiring of other systems. 2. Type TFN Wire: Provide for 18 AWG and 16 AWG wiring for nonpower-limited and supply-side power-limited fire alarm wiring, and for Class 1 wiring of other systems. (Note: Wire complying with the requirements of NEC Articles 725 and 760 may be used in lieu of TFN, providing it is approved by the Engineer.) 3. Multi-Conductor or Twisted-Pair Cable: Provide for all wiring that is installed in raceway, for load-side power-limited fire alarm wiring and for Class 2 and Class 3 wiring of other systems. 4. Plenum Cable: Provide for all wiring that is not installed in raceway, for load-side powerlimited fire alarm wiring and for all Class 2 and Class 3 wiring of other systems. Plenum cable may be used only when so indicated in other sections of these Specifications. B. Install all wires and cables other than plenum cable in raceway, unless noted otherwise on Contract Drawings. Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in same raceway. Use pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Use pulling means, including fish cord, cable, rope and basket weave wire/cable grips, which shall not damage conductors or raceway. Do not install conductors in raceway until all work which may cause damage has been completed. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260523-4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CONTROL VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES QPK NO. 220157.00 260523-4 C. Install plenum cables concealed behind ceiling or wall finish, unless otherwise indicated. Install exposed cables parallel or at right angles to walls or structural members. In areas not provided with ceiling or wall finish, install cables and outlets so as to permit the future application of a room finish without disturbing the cables or resetting the boxes. Provide cable supports as required by NEC. D. Keep conductor splices to a minimum. Install without splices between the control panel and the first outlet, and between outlets. E. Provide 18 AWG minimum for single conductors and 22 AWG minimum for multi-conductor cables. F. Provide sufficient slack (12" minimum) at terminations to make proper connections. G. Install wiring so that when completed the system shall be free from short circuits and unintentional grounds. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONNECTORS A. Make joints in circuits (except coaxial cable) with indent type connectors, spring type connectors or terminal strips. B. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturer’s published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer’s torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A and B. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prior to usage, test control/signal conductors for electrical continuity and for short circuits, and correct any malfunctions. B. Subsequent to control/signal conductor hook-ups, demonstrate proper functioning in accordance with requirements. Where necessary, correct malfunctioning units and then retest to demonstrate compliance. END OF SECTION 260523 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260526-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526-1 QPK NO. 220157.00 SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation and maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Certified by NETA. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION. A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Burndy, Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems. 2. ERICO, a brand of nVent. 3. Thomas & Betts Corporation, a Member of the ABB Group 2.3 CONDUCTORS A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260526-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526-2 QPK NO. 220157.00 3. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter. 4. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 5. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. C. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4 inches x 12 inches in cross section, with 9/32-inch holes spaced 1-1/8 inches apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V and shall be Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V. 2.4 CONNECTORS A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. B. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions. C. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless exothermic-type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar. D. Beam Clamps: Mechanical type, terminal, ground wire access from four directions, with dual, tinplated or silicon bronze bolts. E. Cable-to-Cable Connectors: Compression type, copper or copper alloy. F. Conduit Hubs: Mechanical type, terminal with threaded hub. G. Lay-in Lug Connector: Mechanical type, copper rated for direct burial terminal with set screw. H. Straps: Solid copper, copper lugs. Rated for 600 A. 2.5 GROUNDING ELECTRODES A. Ground Plates: 1/4 inch thick, hot-dip galvanized. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated. B. Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. C. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Install bus horizontally, on insulated spacers 2 inches minimum from wall, 6 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260526-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526-3 QPK NO. 220157.00 D. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. 3.2 GROUNDING AT THE SERVICE A. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall be connected to the ground bus. Install a main bonding jumper between the neutral and ground buses. 3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits. B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70: 1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs. 7. Armored and metal clad cable runs. C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping. D. Water Heater Circuits: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components. E Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. B. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. 2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260526-4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526-4 QPK NO. 220157.00 3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp. C. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. 2. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve. D. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity. E. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet apart. F. Connections: Make connections so possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact are galvanically compatible. 1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact points closer in order of galvanic series. 2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact. 3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechanical clamps. 4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized-steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and mechanical clamps. 5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. B. Perform tests and inspections. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, at ground test wells, and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected. a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260526-5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526-5 QPK NO. 220157.00 without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81. D. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. F. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values: 1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System: 5 ohms. G. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. END OF SECTION 260526 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260533-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-1 QPK NO. 220157.00 SECTION 260533 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Types of raceways, electrical boxes and fittings specified in this Section include the following: 1. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) 2. Flexible Metal Conduit 3. Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit 4. Rigid Metal Conduit 5. Surface Metal raceways 6. Wireways 7. Outlet Boxes 8. Poke-Through Service Fittings 9. Flush Floor Boxes 10. Junction Boxes 12. Pull Boxes 12. Bushings 13. Locknuts 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Dry Location: A location not normally subject to dampness or wetness. B. Damp Location: A location subject to moderate degree of moisture. C. Wet Location: A location subject to saturation with water or other liquids. Installations underground or in concrete slabs or masonry in direct contact with the earth are to be considered as equivalent to wet locations. D. Spaces Which Have Finishing Materials: Areas completed with finishing materials such as paint, plaster, ceramic tile, enamel glazing, face brick, etc., applied to the walls and/or ceilings, including steel roof deck. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compliance and Labeling: Comply with applicable requirements of Codes, Standards and Listing as listed in Section 260100 - Electrical Basic Requirements. B. Manufacturer: Company with minimum five (5) years experience specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260533-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-2 QPK NO. 220157.00 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data. Include specifications and installation instructions for each type of raceway system required. Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide conduit, tubing and fittings of types, sizes and weights for each service indicated. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection to fulfill wiring requirements and to comply with provisions of NEC for raceways. B. For each electrical raceway system indicated, provide a complete assembly of conduit, tubing, with fittings including, but not necessarily limited to, connectors, nipples, couplings, elbows, expansion fittings and other components and accessories as needed to form a complete system of type indicated. C. Provide boxes and fittings of types and sizes indicated and suitable for installation at locations indicated. Where types and sizes are not indicated, provide proper selection to fulfill wiring requirements and to comply with provisions of NEC for boxes and fittings. D. Provide accessories as required for each installation, including box supports, mounting ears and brackets, wall board hangers, box extension rings, fixture studs, cable clamps and metal straps, which are compatible with the boxes being used. Where more than one type of accessory meets NEC requirements, selection is Installer’s option, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Provide electrical metallic tubing (EMT) of mild steel, hot-dipped galvanized, having welded seams and smooth circular bore. Acceptable Manufacturers: ABB Allied Tube and Conduit Wheatland Tube Company Approved equal B. Provide flexible metal conduit fabricated of hot-dipped galvanized steel strip shaped into interlocking convolutions. Acceptable Manufacturers: AFC Cable Systems Approved equal ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260533-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-3 QPK NO. 220157.00 C. Provide liquid-tight flexible metal conduit fabricated of hot-dipped galvanized steel strip shaped into interlocking convolutions with an overall PVC jacket. Acceptable Manufacturers: AFC Cable Systems Approved equal D. Provide rigid metal conduit of mild steel, hot-dipped galvanized, having welded seams and smooth circular bore, with threaded ends. Acceptable Manufacturers: ABB Allied Tube and Conduit Wheatland Tube Company Approved equal E. Provide surface metal raceways of 0.040" steel with buff colored baked enamel finish. Provide type as indicated on the Contract Drawings or as required to fulfill wiring requirements of NEC. 1. Type 1 Raceway: Single-piece type, nominal 3/4" wide, depth as required. Provide Wiremold 500 or 700 or approved equivalent. F. Provide rigid nonmetallic conduit of PVC, UL-listed in accordance with NEC Article 347 and constructed to NEMA Standard TC-2. Provide extra heavy wall conduit, Schedule 80. Provide Allied Tube and Conduit or approved equal. G. Provide lay-in wireways constructed in accordance with UL Standard 870. Provide wireways having hinged covers and connectors that do not require removal to utilize the lay-in feature of the wireway. Protect sheet metal parts with rust inhibiting coating and baked enamel finish. Plate finish hardware to prevent corrosion. To prevent wire insulation damage, provide spring nuts on screws installed toward inside of wireway. Provide wireways with knockouts. Acceptable Manufacturers: ABB Approved equal H Provide connectors, couplings and fittings for conduit as follows: 1. For EMT: Compression ring or set screw type. Acceptable Manufacturers: ABB Approved equal 2. For Flexible Metal Conduit: Connectors with female end having clamp and deep slotted machine screw for securing conduit, male threaded end provided with locknut. Provide straight connectors with one-piece body, 45° and 90° connectors with two-piece body with removable upper section. Acceptable Manufacturers: AFC Cable Systems Approved equal ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260533-4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-4 QPK NO. 220157.00 3. For Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Cadmium plated malleable iron, with compression type steel ferrule and neoprene gasket sealing rings. Acceptable Manufacturers: AFC Cable Systems Approved equal 4. For Rigid Metal Conduit: a. Connectors of cast malleable iron, galvanized or cadmium plated, with locknuts on both sides and bushing on termination side. Acceptable Manufacturers: ABB Approved equal b. Couplings of threaded mild steel, hot-dipped galvanized. Provide couplings of same manufacturer as conduit. I Outlet Boxes: Provide galvanized coated flat rolled sheet-steel boxes. Provide boxes with mounting holes, cable and conduit knockouts in bottom and sides and mounting lugs or ears for covers. Provide with threaded screw holes and corrosion-resistant screws for fastening cable clamps and covers, and for equipment grounding. Acceptable Manufacturers: ABB (Steel City) Approved equal J. Switch Boxes: Provide gangable galvanized coated flat rolled sheet-steel boxes. Provide flush mounting boxes, mounting holes, cable and conduit knockouts in bottom and ends and mounting lugs or ears for covers. Provide with threaded screw holes and corrosion-resistant screws for fastening cable clamps and covers and for equipment grounding. Acceptable Manufacturers: ABB (Steel City) Approved equal K. Poke-Through Service Fittings: 1. Poke-Through Service Fitting (Power/Communication): a. Provide poke-through suitable for installation in a cored floor opening. Shall be complete with junction box, conduit and flush devices as indicated on plans. The complete assembly shall be suitable for two hour fire rated floors, be UL CEYY listed and have UL scrub water protected metallic color as selected by the Architect cover and trim ring. Cover shall be suitable for carpet, tile, wood and concrete. Unit protrusion above floor plane shall not exceed 0.2". Extend or reduce unit raceway length as needed to accommodate floor thickness and project conditions. Provide indicated devices in units. b. Type C: 8 in. diameter core unit with capacity for five duplex 20A receptacle or 22 RJ45 communication outlets, minimum, and any combination of these and or audio/visual connections. c. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hubbell S1 Series (Design Make) Steel City Wiremold Approved equal L. Flush Floor Boxes: Boxes shall be cast in place with height adjustability prior to pour. Provide power, communication and/or audio/visual outlets as indicated. Installation shall be suitable for ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260533-5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-5 QPK NO. 220157.00 the intended floor finish: if carpet, then provide a carpet flange, if tile/terrazzo/concrete finish, then provide a collar flush with finished floor and no flange. Units shall be stamped steel with a depth of 2 standard depth of 3.75 in. Units shall meet UL scrub water protected requirements. To have integral ground terminal. 1. Fire rated multiple service type unit to have 100 cubic inches of device volume minimum, four individual entrance compartments each with two (2) 1-1/4 in. and one (1) 3/4 in. conduit knockouts/hubs, removable dividers between compartments and reinforced cover with color to match surrounding and hinged cable opening (dust protection and support to keep all weight off cables). Provide flooring insert. Unit shall be UL CEYY listed. Provide the following device plates for each compartment with spares turned over to the Owner. a. Standard duplex. b. Style line/decorator/GFI duplex. c. Six port RJ45. d. Blank. e. Plates for any devices indicated. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Wiremold Omni or RFB Series, CEYY listed Approved equal. M. Junction and Pull Boxes: Provide galvanized code-gauge sheet-steel boxes with welded seams, screw-on covers and stainless steel hardware. Provide boxes with knockouts as required. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hoffman Approved equal N. Threaded Outlet Boxes: Provide malleable iron boxes with cadmium finish, with threaded conduit holes. Acceptable Manufacturers: ABB Approved equal O. Bushings: Provide malleable iron, insulated bushings. Acceptable Manufacturers: ABB Approved equal P. Locknuts: Provide corrosion-resistant conduit locknuts. Acceptable Manufacturers: ABB Approved equal PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Location: Before proceeding with the installation, verify the location of all raceways and electrical boxes. Where locations are shown on the Drawings, the locations are not to be changed, unless so directed by the Engineer’s Representative. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260533-6 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-6 QPK NO. 220157.00 3.2 GENERAL A. Install raceways as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions, and in compliance with NECA’s “Standards of Installation” and NEC. B. For electrically operated units, use roughing-in dimensions furnished by supplier. Set conduit and boxes for connection to units only after reviewing dimensions and after checking location with other trades. C. Coordinate with other trades. Install raceways above lay-in ceilings in such a manner that they do not interfere with the lift-out feature of the ceiling system. D. Provide expansion fittings in raceways every 200' linear run or wherever structural expansion joints are crossed. E. Raceways are not to cross pipe shafts or ventilating duct openings and are not to be routed through elevator shafts, or elevator mechanical rooms, unless specifically serving elevator or elevator related systems. F. Install electrical boxes and fittings as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA’s “Standard of Installation” and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill Project requirements. G. Electrical boxes are to be recessed in all new walls and surface mounted on existing masonry walls unless otherwise indicated. H. Ground and bond raceway and boxes in accordance with Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUIT SYSTEMS A. Types and Locations: Provide conduit as follows, as indicated on the Drawings, and as required to satisfy requirements of NEC: 1. EMT: Provide for all branch circuits and interior feeders, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide for final branch circuit conduit connections to recessed ceiling lighting fixtures. Nominal trade size of 3/8" may be used if length is 6' or less. 3. Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide for final branch circuit connections to all motors and other equipment subject to vibration. Provide an 18" length at all motors. 4. Rigid Metal Conduit: Provide in wet locations and in areas where physical damage can occur. Provide for feeders and exterior work as indicated on the Drawins. B. Interior Conduits 1. Concealed Conduits: Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, install conduits concealed in new walls or partitions of the building, above suspended ceilings, or under concrete floor slab or in ceiling slab; conduits are not to be installed within floors-on-grade or in areas ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260533-7 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-7 QPK NO. 220157.00 where the surface of the concrete floor or ceiling is specified to be exposed. (See Room Finish Schedule of Contract Documents.) a. Partitions or Side Walls: Avoid horizontal runs. Horizontal runs are not permitted in masonry walls. b. Structural Members: Install conduits so as not to damage or run through structural members. c. If any portions of the conduit system cannot be installed concealed due to conditions encountered in building, report such conditions and await approval in writing before proceeding. d. Furnish and install a minimum of five (5) 3/4” empty conduits in the top of all recessed panelboards. Stub conduits into the suspended ceiling space directly above the panelboard and terminate in individual junction boxes for future use. 2. Exposed Conduits: Install vertical runs perpendicular to the floor. Install runs on the ceiling perpendicular or parallel to the walls. Install horizontal runs parallel to the floor. Do not install conduits directly on the floor. Do not run conduits in close proximity to heating pipes. Maintain a separation of 3" from water and waste piping and 12" from steam piping. Install exposed conduit work so as not to interfere with ceiling inserts, lights, ventilation ducts, or outlets. Exposed conduits shall be allowed only in mechanical rooms and in certain other areas where indicated on the Drawings. a. Waterproof Walls: Run conduits for outlets exposed. Set supporting anchors in waterproof cement. b. Mechanical Rooms: Install conduits as high as possible and coordinate locations with other trades to avoid interference. C. Conduit Size: Do not provide raceways smaller than 1/2" inside diameter. Otherwise provide code size conduits, unless larger conduits are indicated on the Drawings. D. Conduit Ends: Install conduits of length to fit properly in outlet boxes and cabinets. Arrange terminations in cabinets with the ends at the same level. Plug the ends of conduits with a cap to exclude all foreign materials until wiring is installed. E. Bends: Provide manufactured or field fabricated offsets or bends. Make field fabricated offsets or bends with a bender specifically designed for this purpose and without damaging the circular bore. The radius of the inner curve of all bends shall not be less than allowed by NEC. F. Cutting of Conduits: Use a cutter which shall give even cut ends. Ream the cut end after threading has been completed and file as required to result in a smooth finished cut. G. Conduit for Future Use: Provide a pull cord in each conduit installed for future use. H. Parallel Feeders: Keep conduits the same length. Install all phase conductors with their neutral conductor in the same conduit to reduce the inductive effect. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260533-8 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-8 QPK NO. 220157.00 3.4 INSTALLATION OF SURFACE METAL RACEWAY AND WIREWAY A. General: Mechanically assemble to form a continuous electrical conductor and connect to boxes, fittings and cabinets so as to provide effective electrical continuity and rigid mechanical assembly. 1. Bends: Make changes in direction with proper fittings, supplied by wireway manufacturer. No field bends of sections shall be permitted. 2. Supports: Properly support and anchor wireways for their entire length; do not span any space unsupported. 3. Boxes: Use boxes as supplied by wireway manufacturer wherever junction, pull or device boxes are required. Standard electrical “handy” boxes, etc., shall not be permitted for use with wireway installations. B. Surface Metal Raceway: Provide surface metal raceway for exposed raceway system in spaces that have finishing materials, unless otherwise specified or indicated. Do not run through walls which have a plaster finish nor through masonry walls or floors. Provide a pipe sleeve, or a short length of conduit complete with junction boxes and adapter fittings for runs through such areas. Install along top of baseboards, care being taken to avoid telephone and other signal wiring. Where raceway crosses chair railing or picture molding, cut the railing or molding to permit the raceway to lie flat against the wall. Install raceway around door frames and other openings. Run on ceiling or walls perpendicular to or parallel with walls and floors. 1. Covers: For boxes for pendant mounted fluorescent fixtures on surface metal raceway outlets, covers may be omitted providing the Contractor notches the fixture canopy to receive the raceway and the canopy fits snugly against the ceiling. 2. Box Extension: Provide box extension adapter on existing outlet boxes where circuits are extended to new outlets. C. Wireways: Secure sections to structures independently from conduit terminations. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL BOXES A. Types and Locations: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following types of boxes: 1. Concealed Work: Provide standard 4" square or octagonal outlet boxes for lighting fixtures, receptacles, etc., with device covers; provide plaster rings as required. Outlet boxes located in finished wall surfaces other than plaster, such as tile, marble or concrete block, are to be of design that shall permit the face plates to cover the openings made for the installation of the boxes. Where ganging of switches is required, provide switch box minimum 3" high by width as required for number of switches. Provide junction and pull boxes with flush covers. 2. Exposed Work: Provide threaded type boxes and fittings for all work, except that on conduit sized 1-1/4" or larger, provide standard galvanized steel junction and pull boxes. Provide FS boxes for switch and receptacle outlets where a maximum of two (2) conductors “in” and two (2) conductors “out” enter each box; where more than four (4) conductors enter each box, provide FD boxes. Do not locate surface mounted junction or pull boxes in finished rooms. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260533-9 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-9 QPK NO. 220157.00 B. Mounting of Outlet Boxes: Install boxes for single and duplex receptacles so that the long axis of the face plate shall be vertical unless specifically designated to be horizontally mounted. Do not install outlet boxes “back-to-back” in walls. C. Floor outlet boxes and poke-through service fittings shall be installed flush with finished floor, adjust level and tile as required. Where finished floor is terrazzo, provide boxes specifically designed for installation in terrazzo. Where floors are to receive carpet or flooring material, coordinate with appropriate trade and provide insert. Rectangular covers shall be parallel and perpendicular with the building and, if used, floor tile/floor joints/pattern. Coordinate cover type with the flooring and device type. D. Size and Spacing of Junction and Pull Boxes: Provide junction or pull boxes of proper size and design when required to facilitate installation of wires. Install boxes of sizes as required by NEC; locate boxes at intervals consistent with maximum allowable wire and cable pulling tensions. E. Height of Wall Outlets: Refer to the Contract Drawings for the mounting height of electrical system components. F. Supports: Fasten electrical boxes firmly and rigidly to structural surfaces to which attached, or solidly embed in concrete or masonry. Boxes must be supported independently of conduits entering them. 3.6 FIRESTOPPING. A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating according to Division 07 Sections. 1. All penetrations shall be under constant visual surveillance until firestopping is applied unless an approved "ILSM" is in place for each location. 2. Products: Specified Technologies, Inc. END OF SECTION 260533 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260936-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LIGHTING CONTROL 260936 - 1 QPK NO. 220157.00 SECTION 260936 - LIGHTING CONTROL PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide a complete lighting control system as indicated on the Contract Documents and as specified herein. Refer to Lighting Control Schedule on Contract Drawings for additional information. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All methods of construction, details of workmanship that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents, shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated in their respective sections of the specifications. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Equipment types, device ratings, dimensions, etc. correspond to the nomenclature dictated by those manufacturers. All equipment shall be tested at the factory. B. Installation shall be accordance with NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code), energy conservation codes, state codes, local codes, and requirements of authority having jurisdiction. C. Equipment shall be designed, manufactured, assembled, and tested in accordance with the latest revisions of applicable published ANSI, NEMA and IEEE Standards. D. All equipment shall NRTL tested. E. The controls provider must: 1. Provide equipment from manufacturers for which they maintain a contract, distributorship, are an agent, or other formal arrangement for which documentation can be produced showing authority to sell and service the equipment in this territory. 2. Demonstrate that they have successfully installed similar systems, utilizing their standard products, for a minimum period of five (5) years. 3. Maintain adequate spare parts inventory to provide both normal and emergency service. 4. Employ service technicians who are trained in accordance with the systems manufacturer's recommendations. 5. Own and demonstrate proficiency in the use of the required test equipment, tools, etc. for the proper installation, set-up, testing and maintenance of the system. If requested, must provide a listing of tools and/or equipment and where appropriate, certifications in the proper training and use of the tools and/or equipment. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260936-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LIGHTING CONTROL 260936 - 2 QPK NO. 220157.00 a. Provide all system programming to meet the Owner's requirements. b. All system programming is to be completed to the satisfaction of the Owner. After six (6) months of use of the system, and/or training, the increased understanding of the system's features and capabilities necessitates reprogramming to any extent, it is to be performed at no additional cost. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following equipment, materials, and products including all components and accessories: 1. Digital Lighting Control System 2. Vacancy/occupancy Sensors 3. Low Voltage Switches 4. Wiring diagrams 5. Equipment data sheets 6. Commissioning Plan 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The lighting control system and/or components, as specified and indicated on the drawings to provide the intended and required control of the lighting systems, includes but is not limited to a digital lighting control system, automatic lighting control system, and associated room controllers and switches. B. All components and assemblies are to be factory pretested. C. Manufacturer shall utilize open communication protocol (Bacnet, Modbus, etc) for transferring information between network devices, allowing the lighting control system to be interoperable with devices from other manufacturers and with other network systems such as building control or other systems. 1.6 DIGITAL SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Additional Lighting Control system as defined under this section covers the following equipment: 1. Digital Room Controllers – Self-configuring, digitally addressable one, two or three relays controllers with 0-10 volt control for ballasts (where dimming is indicated) and single relay application-specific plug load controllers. 2. Digital Occupancy Sensors – Self-configuring, digitally addressable and calibrated occupancy sensors with LCD display and two-way active infrared (IR) communications. Shall be capable of manual on operation. 3. Digital Switches – Self-configuring, digitally addressable pushbutton switches, dimmers, and scene switches with two-way active infrared (IR) communications. 4. Configuration Tools – Handheld remote for room configuration provides two way infrared (IR) communications to digital devices and allows complete configuration and reconfiguration of the device / room from up to 30 feet away. Unit to have Organic LED display, simple pushbutton interface, and allow send and receive of room variables and store of occupancy sensor settings. Computer software also customizes room settings. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260936-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LIGHTING CONTROL 260936 - 3 QPK NO. 220157.00 5. Digital Lighting local network – open topology, plug-in wiring system (Cat 5e) for power and data to room devices. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Vacancy/Occupancy Sensors: 1. Wall or ceiling mounted (to suit installation) dual technology digital (passive infrared and ultrasonic) occupancy sensor. Provide unit to accommodate the square-foot coverage requirements for each area controlled, utilizing room controllers, digital occupancy sensors and accessories to meet the lighting and electrical system parameters. 2. Sensors shall provide graphic LCD display for digital calibration and electronic documentation. Features shall include the following: a. Sensitivity: 0-100% in 10% increments. b. Time Delay: 1-30 minutes in 1 minute increment. Time delay shall be set 20 minutes from the factory. c. Detection Technology: Dual technology activation and or re-activation. The sensor shall be capable of being set to either PRI & Ultrasonic, PIR Only or Ultrasonic Only as required by the space being controlled. d. Test mode – Five second time delay e. Walk-through mode f. Load parameters including Auto (Occupancy) / Manual (Vacancy) - ON, blink warning, and daylight enable/disable when photosenors/day-light sensors are included in the digital network. 3. Two RJ-45 port(s) for connection to digital lighting control network. 4. Two-way infrared (IR) transceiver to allow remote programming through handheld commissioning tool and control by remote personal controls. 5. Device Status LEDs including: a. PIR Detection b. Ultrasonic detection c. Configuration mode 6. Assignment of occupancy sensor to a specific load within the room without wiring or special tools. 7. Manual override of controlled loads. 8. Multiple occupancy sensors may be installed in a room by simply connecting them to the open topology digital lighting control network. No additional configuration will be required. a. Acceptable Manufacturer: WattStopper product numbers: LMDC Approved equal. B. Digital Wall Switches 1. Low voltage momentary pushbutton switches to have 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 8 button configurations; colors to be white, light almond, ivory, grey and black; compatible with wall plates with decorator opening. The color shall match the other devices and be coordinated with the architect. Wall switches shall include the following features: a. Two-way infrared (IR) transceiver for use with personal and configuration remote controls. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260936-4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LIGHTING CONTROL 260936 - 4 QPK NO. 220157.00 b. Red configuration LED on each switch that blinks to indicate data transmission. c. Blue Load/Scene Status LED on each switch button with the following characteristics: a) Bi-level LED that is field configurable. b) Dim locator level indicates power to switch c) Bright status level indicates that load or scene is active d. Dimming switches shall include seven bi-level LEDs to indicate load levels using 14 steps. 2. Two RJ-45 ports for connection to DLM local network. 3. Multiple digital wall switches may be installed in a room by connecting them to the open lighting control network. No additional configuration shall be required to achieve multi-way switching. 4. The following switch attributes shall be changed or selected using a wireless configuration tool or laptop: a. Load and Scene button function reconfigured for individual buttons (from Load to Scene, and vice versa). b. Individual button function may be configured to Toggle, On only or Off only. c. Individual scenes may be locked to prevent unauthorized change. d. Fade Up and Fade Down times for individual scenes and loads adjustable from 0 seconds to 18 hours. e. Ramp rate adjustable for each dimmer switch from 0 to 10 minutes. f. Switch buttons may be bound to any load on any room controller and are not load type dependent; each button may be bound to multiple loads. 5. WattStopper product numbers: LMSW and LMDW Series or approved equal. B. Room Controllers 1. Room Controllers automatically bind the room loads to the connected devices in the space without the use of any tools. Room Controllers shall be provided to match the room lighting load and control requirements. The controllers will not have, dip switches, potentiometers or require special configuration. The control units will include the following features: a. Automatic room configuration to the most energy-efficient sequence of operation based upon the devices in the room. b. Replacement – Using the default automatic configuration capabilities, a room controller may be replaced with an off-the-shelf unit without requiring any configuration or setup. c. Device Status LEDs to indicate: 1) Data transmission 2) Device has power 3) Status for each load 4) Configuration status d. Installation features: 1) Standard junction box mounting 2) Low voltage connections using standard RJ-45 patch cable e. Plenum rated f. Manual override and LED indication for each load ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260936-5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LIGHTING CONTROL 260936 - 5 QPK NO. 220157.00 g. Dual voltage (120/277 VAC, 60 Hz) with full 20A rated isolated relays. h. Zero cross circuitry switching for each load. 2. On/Off/Dimming enhanced Room Controllers shall include: a. Real time current monitoring b. One, two or three relay configuration c. Efficient 250 mA switching power supply d. 70 deg. C rating. e. Four RJ-45 digital lighting control network ports. f. One (1) 0-10V analog output per relay for control of compatible dimming ballasts and LED drivers. g. Capability to provide forward phase dimming control for two separate loads. Compatible with line voltage luminaires being dimmed. h. Network Bridge for BACnet MS/TP communications to allow communication and networking of all building room controllers. i. The following dimming attributes may be changed or selected using a wireless configuration tool: 1) Establish preset level for each load from 0-100% 2) Set high and low trim for each load 3) Set controller for switched or dimmed applications j. Discrete model listed for connection to receptacles, for occupancy-based control of plug loads within the space. Locations requiring connection to receptacles are indicated on the construction drawings as a "controlled" receptacle. k. One relay configuration only l. Automatic-ON/OFF configuration m. Room controllers shall have a separate isolated relay interface to allow direct connection to the building management system (BMS) for occupied/unoccupied control through the room occupancy sensors. n. Acceptable Manufacturer: WattStopper product numbers: LMRC-210 and LMRC-220 Series. Approved Equal. C. Digital Lighting Control Network 1. The system network is to be an open topology lighting control physical connection and communication protocol designed to control the lighting in a area of a building. Digital room devices to connect to the network using CAT 5e cables with RJ-45 connectors to provide both data and power to room devices. Features to include: a. Plug n’ Go automatic configuration and binding of occupancy sensors, switches and lighting loads to the most energy-efficient sequence of operation based upon the device attached. b. Replacement of any device in the network with a standard off the shelf unit without requiring commissioning, configuration or setup. D. Configuration Tools 1. Provide a configuration tool to facilitate optional customization of digital lighting control system, and used to set up open loop daylighting sensors. The wireless configuration tool shall feature infrared communications, while PC software connects to each local network via a USB interface. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260936-6 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LIGHTING CONTROL 260936 - 6 QPK NO. 220157.00 2. Features and functionality of the wireless configuration tool shall include: a. Two-way infrared (IR) communication with system devices within a range of approximately 30 feet. b. High visibility organic LED (OLED) display, pushbutton user interface and menu-driven operation. c. Read, modify and send parameters for occupancy sensors, daylighting sensors, room controllers and buttons on digital wall switches and network settings. d. Save up to nine occupancy sensor setting profiles, and apply profiles to selected sensors. e. Temporarily adjust light level of any load(s) on the local network, and incorporate those levels in scene setting. f. Adjust or fine-tune daylighting settings established during autocommissioning, and input light level data to complete commissioning of open loop daylighting controls. 3. Provide a total of two (2) configuration tools. The units shall be turned over to the owner for distributions to the building occupants and the campus facilities group to allow for future modifications to the DLM local network system setup and programming. 4. Acceptable Manufacturer: WattStopper Product Number: LMCT-100. Approved equal 2.2 VACANCY/OCUPANCY SENSORS A. Vacancy/occupancy Sensors: 1. Vacancy/occupancy sensors shall comply with the following as a minimum: a. Zero crossing switching operation (switch on/off only where sine wave is at zero volts) suitable for linear, non-linear and electronic/magnetic fluorescent ballasts for the loads indicated. Where the load to be controlled exceeds the sensor load rating provide a separate relay of adequate rating. b. Failure of the unit shall be to the on/closed position or manual operation. c. Motion sensitivity adjustment (dip switch or dial) and time delay adjustment (5 to 30 minutes minimum, dip switch or dial). d. Line voltage input and switching. Field selectable for 120 or 277 VAC, 60 Hz. e. UL listed and have a five (5) year manufacturer full replacement warranty. f. Test mode feature to override the set time delay to allow adjusting of the sensitivity. g. Sensor locations shall be adjusted during construction and at occupancy as recommended by the manufacturer for optimal sensing and operation. h. Operation shall be field selectable manual "on" with close switch/contact upon motion sensing and open after the set amount of time delay without motion or automatic on upon motion sensing. i. Adjustable controls/settings shall only be accessible when the front cover is removed or from the back of the unit. j. Unit color shall match the project devices except for the ceiling-mounted units which shall match the ceiling color. All color selections shall be by the Architect. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260936-7 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LIGHTING CONTROL 260936 - 7 QPK NO. 220157.00 k. Ultrasonic sensing shall not be affected by air movement and shall operate at 32 kHz minimum (shall not interfere with hearing aids or other equipment). l. Provide components as needed for the indicated control. m. A factory-authorized representative shall coordinate and instruct the startup services of the sensors providing placement recommendations, connection guidance and startup supervision and adjustment. 2. Wall Mounted - Dual Technology (PIR and Ultrasonic): a. Unit shall fit into a standard single gang electrical box, have an Off button, and utilize PIR and ultrasonic technology motion sensing. Both types of sensing are needed for contact closure but only one (1) is needed to keep it closed. b. Minimum Switching Capacity: 120 V - 800 W, 277 V - 1200 W. c. The sensing shall be 180 degrees and the sensitivity area to be a minimum of: 1) Major Motion (Walking/Arm Wave): 35 ft. x 30 ft. 2) Minor Motion (Small Motion at Desk): 20 ft. x 15 ft. d. Ambient light level sensing (adjustable 20-300 fc) to prevent "On" operation when the ambient light level is greater than the setpoint level. e. High impact resistant sensor lens. f. Acceptable Manufacturers: Watt Stopper DW-100 & DW-200 Series (Design Make) Hubbell Model Cooper Sensor Switch 3. Wall Mounted - Dual Technology - Dual Switching: a. Unit shall fit into a standard single gang electrical box, have two (2) Off buttons, and utilize PIR and ultrasonic technology motion sensing. Both types of sensing are needed for contact closure but only one (1) is needed to keep it closed. To have two (2) contacts each fully rated, electrically separate and be commonly controlled. b. Minimum Switching Capacity: 120 V - 800 W, 277 V - 1200 W. c. The sensing shall be 180 degrees and the sensitivity area to be a minimum of: 1) Major Motion (Walking/Arm Wave): 35 ft. x 30 ft. 2) Minor Motion (Small Motion at Desk): 20 ft. x 15 ft. d. Ambient light level sensing (adjustable 20-300fc) to prevent "On" operation when the ambient light level is greater than the setpoint level. e. High impact resistant sensor lens. f. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hubbell Model AD1277x2 (Design Make) Watt Stopper Cooper Sensor Switch 4. Ceiling Mounted - Ultrasonic: a. Unit shall mount to standard octagonal box, have auxiliary contact (Form C, 0.5A at 24 VDC), and utilize ultrasonic sensing. b. Shall have self-contained rated contacts or control a separate switch pack. If a self-contained unit, then the ratings and function shall meet or exceed the switch pack specifications. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260936-8 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LIGHTING CONTROL 260936 - 8 QPK NO. 220157.00 c. Sensing shall be 360 degrees with a minimum operating area of: 1) Major Motion (Walking/Arm Wave): 50 ft. x 30 ft. 2) Minor Motion (Small Motion at Desk): 40 ft. x 20 ft. d. Corridor (Major Motion): 50 ft. x 16 ft. e. Units shall be suitable for overlap of motion detection areas without reduction in spacing and false operation. f. Sensing shall be suitable for a ceiling/mounting height of up to 12 ft. minimum. g. Ambient light level sensing (adjustable 20-300 fc) to prevent "On" operation when the ambient light level is greater than the setpoint level. h. The maximum depth shall be 1.5 in. below the ceiling/box. 1) Acceptable Manufacturers: Hubbell Model ATU2000CRP (Design Make) Watt Stopper Cooper Sensor Switch 5. Ceiling Mounted - Dual Technology: a. Unit shall mount to standard octagonal box, have auxiliary contact (Form C, 0.5A at 24 VDC), and utilize PIR and ultrasonic technology motion sensing. Both types of sensing are needed for contact closure but only one (1) is needed to keep it closed. b. Shall have self-contained rated contacts or control a separate switch pack. If a self-contained unit, then the ratings and function shall meet or exceed the switch pack specifications. c. Sensing shall be 360 degrees with a minimum operating area of: 1) Major Motion (Walking/Arm Wave): 50 ft. x 30 ft. 2) Minor Motion (Small Motion at Desk): 40 ft. x 20 ft. d. Corridor (Major Motion): 50 ft. x 16 ft. e. Units shall be suitable for overlap of motion detection areas without reduction in spacing and false operation. f. Sensing shall be suitable for a ceiling/mounting height of up to 12 ft. minimum. g. Ambient light level sensing (adjustable 20-300 fc) to prevent "On" operation when the ambient light level is greater than the setpoint level. h. The maximum depth shall be 1.5 in. below the ceiling/box. i. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hubbell Model ATD2000CRP (Design Make) Watt Stopper Cooper Sensor Switch 6. Switch Pack: a. Provide a minimum of one (1) switch pack for each ceiling-mounted vacancy sensor. Provide additional units for multiple circuits (quantity to match the quantity of circuits). b. Unit shall be plenum rated with line voltage side into a metallic box. c. Low voltage power shall be suitable for a minimum of three (3) sensors. Multiple sensors shall be able to control a single switch pack. d. Minimum switching capacity shall be 20A (all types of loads) at 120/277 VAC. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260936-9 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LIGHTING CONTROL 260936 - 9 QPK NO. 220157.00 B. Testing: 1. Each sensor shall be fully tested for proper operation of all functions after installation. 2. Testing shall include sensitivity, time delay, ambient lighting level, manual "on", auto "off", etc. 3. Operation and settings shall be acceptable to the Owner. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, TESTING AND TRAINING A. Manufacturer shall provide a factory trained technician to confirm proper installation and operation of all system components. B. Manufacturer shall provide factory trained application engineer to train owner personnel in the operation and programming of the lighting control system. C. Manufacturer shall provide system documentation including: 1. System 1-line showing all components, number and type of switches. 2. Drawings for each component showing hardware configuration and numbering. 3. Device and network wiring schedules. 4. Typical wiring diagrams for each component. D. All low voltage control cabling shall be plenum rated. Cabling shall be installed in conduit in vertical runs in walls/partitions. 3.2 RESPONSIBILITY A. The manufacturer shall submit engineering drawings of the system with specification sheets covering all component parts for approval prior to installation. All electronic equipment shall be approved by UL and shall be products of a single manufacturer of established reputation and experience. B. Supervision of Installation and Final Testing: 1. The lighting control system manufacturer shall include in his pricing to the Electrical Contractor 16 hours to perform testing and start-up of all system components. 2. The lighting conttol system's manufacturer shall supply at least one (1) service technician after all systems have been tested and in full operation as described above to assist the installing electrician to demonstrate and instruct the Owner's Representative on the operation and any uniqueness of the dimming system. Minimum time required for Owner instruction of the system is two (2) eight (8) hour session. Time of demonstration and instruction to be at Owner's convenience during normal working hours. 3. The presence of the system manufacturer's service technicians to assist the installing electrician in all of the above is a requirement of this project and proof of time expended shall be provided to the Owner's Representative. 4. The project bid shall include two (2) eight (8) hour days startup assistance and training to include transportation and accommodations for two (2) site visits. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 260936-10 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LIGHTING CONTROL 260936 - 10 QPK NO. 220157.00 3.3 SYSTEM TEST AND APPROVAL A. The lighting control system(s) shall be commissioned to verify sensor location, time delay & sensitivity is properly set, override times & controls, day-lighting control is operating correctly, communications between control panels is operational, and timeclock controls. B. The Contractor shall submit a written test report from an authorized representative of the equipment manufacturer indicating that the system has been 100% tested and approved. C. The Contractor shall provide instruction to the Owner's Representative with regard to use and operation of the system. Obtain signed receipt from Owner's Representative that instruction has been given. END OF SECTION 260936 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262213-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOW-VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS 262213-1 QPK NO. 220157.00 SECTION 262213 - LOW-VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes distribution, dry-type transformers with a nominal primary and secondary rating of 600 V and less, with capacities up to 1500 kVA. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product: 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type and size of transformer. 2. Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum clearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of transformer. B. Shop Drawings 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agency. B. Source quality control reports. C. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Accredited by NETA. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262213-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOW-VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS 262213-2 QPK NO. 220157.00 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Inspection: On receipt, inspect for and note any shipping damage to packaging and transformer. 1. If manufacturer packaging is removed for inspection, and transformer will be stored after inspection, re-package transformer using original or new packaging materials that provide protection equivalent to manufacturer's packaging. B. Storage: Store in a warm, dry, and temperature-stable location in original shipping packaging. C. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit, throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity. D. Handling: Follow manufacturer's instructions for lifting and transporting transformers. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Square D Schneider Electric No substitutions B. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS A. Description: Factory-assembled and tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service. B. Comply with NFPA 70. 1. Electrical components, Devices and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency and marked for intended location and use. C. Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger. 1. Comply with 10 CFR 431 (DOE 2016) efficiency levels. 2. Marked as compliant with DOE 2016 efficiency levels by an NRTL. 2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS A. Comply with NFPA 70. B. Cores: Electrical grade, non-aging silicon steel with high permeability and low hysteresis losses. 1. One leg per phase. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262213-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOW-VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS 262213-3 QPK NO. 220157.00 2. Core volume shall allow efficient transformer operation at 10 percent above the nominal tap voltage. 3. Grounded to enclosure. C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps. 1. Coil Material: Copper. 2. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type. 3. Terminal Connections: Bolted. D. Encapsulation: Transformers smaller than 30 kVA shall have core and coils completely resin encapsulated. E. Enclosure: Ventilated 1. NEMA 250, Type 2: Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound to seal out moisture and air. 2. KVA Ratings: Based on convection cooling only and not relying on auxiliary fans. 3. Wiring Compartment: Sized for conduit entry and wiring installation. 4. Finish: Comply with NEMA 250. a. Finish Color: ANSI 61 gray, weather resistant enamel. F. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and four 2.5 percent taps below normal full capacity. G. Insulation Class, 30 kVA and Larger: 220 degree C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum 115degree C rise above 40 degree C ambient temperature. H. Grounding: Provide ground-bar kit or a ground bar installed on the inside of the transformer enclosure. I. Electrostatic Shielding: Each winding shall have an independent, single, full-width copper electrostatic shield arranged to minimize interwinding capacitance. 1. Arrange coil leads and terminal strips to minimize capacitive coupling between input and output terminals. 2. Include special terminal for grounding the shield. J. Low-Sound-Level Requirements: Maximum sound levels when factory tested according to IEEE C57.12.91, as follows: 1. 50.01 to 150.00 kVA: 50 dBA for K-factors of 1, 4 and 9. 2.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-acrylic or melamine plastic signs for each distribution transformer, mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262213-4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOW-VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS 262213-4 QPK NO. 220157.00 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.01 and IEEE C57.12.91. 1. Resistance measurements of all windings at rated voltage connections and at all tap connections. 2. Ratio tests at rated voltage connections and at all tap connections. 3. Phase relation and polarity tests at rated voltage connections. 4. No load losses and excitation current and rated voltage at rated voltage connections. 5. Impedance and load losses at rated current and rated frequency at rated voltage connections. 6. Applied and induced tensile tests. 7. Regulation and efficiency at rated load and voltage. 8. Insulation-resistance Tests: a. High-voltage to ground. b. Low-voltage to ground. c. High-voltage to low-voltage. 9. Temperature tests. B. Factory Sound-Level Tests: Conduct prototype sound-level tests on production line products. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for each transformer. B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions. C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where transformers will be installed. D. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at location of transformer. E. Environment: Enclosures shall be rated for the environment in which they are located. Covers for NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosures shall not cause accessibility problems. F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install wall-mounted transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated by transformer manufacturer. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262213-5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOW-VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS 262213-5 QPK NO. 220157.00 1. Coordinate installation of wall-mounted and structure-hanging supports with actual transformer provided B. Install transformers level and plumb on a concrete base with vibration-dampening supports. Locate transformers away from corners and not parallel to adjacent wall surface. C. Construct concrete bases according to Contract Drawings and anchor floor-mounted transformers according to manufacturer's written instructions and requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." 1. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast anchorbolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete. D. Secure transformer to concrete base according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Secure covers to enclosure and tighten all bolts to manufacturer-recommended torques to reduce noise generation. F. Remove shipping bolts, blocking, and wedges. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" and details on Contract Drawings. B. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B. D. Provide flexible connections at all conduit and conductor terminations and supports to eliminate sound and vibration transmission to the building structure. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Perform tests and inspections. C. Dry-Type Transformer Field Tests: 1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection. a. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. b. Inspect anchorage, alignment and grounding. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262213-6 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOW-VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS 262213-6 QPK NO. 220157.00 c. Verify that resilient mounts are free and that any shipping brackets have been removed. d. Verify the unit is clean. e. Perform specific inspections and mechanical tests recommended by manufacturer. f. Verify that as-left tap connections are as specified. g. Verify the presence of surge arresters and that their ratings are as specified. 2. Electrical Tests. a. Measure resistance at each winding, tap, and bolted connection. b. Perform insulation-resistance tests winding-to-winding and each winding-to-ground. Apply voltage according to manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.5. Calculate polarization index: the value of the index shall not be less than 1.0. c. Perform turns-ratio tests at all tap positions. Test results shall not deviate by more than one-half percent from either the adjacent coils or the calculated ratio. If test fails, replace the transformer. d. Verify correct secondary voltage, phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral, after energization and prior to loading. D. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above. E. Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed "Satisfactory Test" label to tested component. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical occupancy period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals. Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 5 percent and not being lower than nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap settings as test results. B. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings. 3.6 CLEANING A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. END OF SECTION 262213 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262416-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION PANELBOARDS 262416-1 QPK NO. 220157.00 SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This Specification Section describes branch circuit protective devices of the circuit breaker type bussed together and housed in an enclosure for the purpose of providing electrical overload protection of branch and/or feeder circuit wiring. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compliance and Labeling: Comply with applicable requirements of Codes, Standards and Listing as listed in Section 260100 - Electrical Basic Requirements. B. Provide assemblies that are naturally ventilated and that are constructed in such a manner that the temperature rise with circuit breakers installed does not cause nuisance tripping. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Lighting and Appliance Type Panelboard: Panelboards serving branch circuit loads such as lighting circuits, receptacle circuits and other electrical appliances rated less than 100 amperes. This type of panelboard is not to be used to serve other panelboards. B. Distribution Type Panelboards: Panelboards serving feeder circuit loads such as other panelboards or electrical loads that are 100 amperes or greater. This type of panelboard is to be provided whenever the mains of the panelboard exceed 225 amperes. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer’s data for approval on each type of panelboard. Include a summary of each panel, listing type, size voltage, circuit breaker count and mounting information. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide panelboards, enclosures and ancillary components, of types, sizes, ratings indicated, which comply with manufacturer’s standard materials, design and construction in accordance with published product information; equip with number of unit panelboard devices as required for a complete installation. Where types, sizes or ratings are not otherwise indicated, comply with NEC, UL and established industry standards for applications indicated. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262416-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION PANELBOARDS 262416-2 QPK NO. 220157.00 2.2 PANELBOARDS A. General: Provide dead-front safety type panelboards, equipped with circuit breaker switching and protective devices, in quantities, ratings, types and arrangements indicated. B. Enclosures: Provide enclosures fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards, which mate properly with panelboards. Provide galvanized steel backboxes; provide trims of code gauge steel with rust-inhibiting primer and baked enamel finish. 1. Provide one-piece trim, equipped with a continuous hinge that, when fastened to the backbox, shall allow access to the cabinet wiring without requiring removal of the trim; with lockable door fastened to cabinet with adjustable clamps and/or continuous hinges. Key all panelboards alike. In addition to the lock, equip all doors over 48" in height with a nickel plated vault handle and 3 point catch arranged to fasten door at top, bottom and center. Provide a directory frame with clear plastic cover, mounted on the inside of the door. 2. Provide wiring (“gutter”) space in panelboards as required by UL and NEC. C. Bussing: Provide bare copper bus bars, with supports insulated to suit system voltage. Provide ampere rating of bus bars not less than either the frame size of main circuit breaker in the panelboard or, in the case of main lug only panelboards, the NEC ampere rating of the conductors feeding it. Provide bus bars having a maximum current density of 1000 amperes per square inch based on copper conductors. Provide bus bars braced to withstand the same fault currents as the branch circuit breakers specified. 1. Provide bus bar connections to branch circuit breakers of the “distributive phase” type. 2. Provide full capacity neutral. 3. Provide ground bus having sufficient lugs to accept the number of ground conductors required on this Project, plus six (6) spare lugs for future connections. D. Lugs: Provide solderless type lugs, size and number as required to accept cables indicated on incoming and outgoing conductors. E. Circuit Breakers: Provide thermal-magnetic, quick-make, quick-break, circuit breakers having minimum interrupting ratings as indicated on the Contract Drawings; trip free type that cannot be held closed against a fault. Provide trip-indicating type, with the breaker handle taking a position midway between the On and Off positions when the breaker has tripped. Provide multi-pole breaker design that provides tripping of all poles if a fault condition occurs on any phase. Provide trip current ratings as indicated. Provide circuit breakers that “bolt on” the distributive phase bussing unless otherwise indicated. Provide a main circuit breaker 1) where indicated on the Contract Drawings, or 2) where the panelboard is used as service entrance equipment and contains more than six (6) branch circuits (unless protected by a fusible switch). F. Spaces: Equip sections designated “space” with all accessories required to accept a future circuit breaker. G. Surge Protective Device: 1. Device shall be rated for location as shown on drawings. 2. Seven Mode Protection: Line-to-neutral (three), line-to-ground (three) and neutral-to-ground. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262416-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION PANELBOARDS 262416-3 QPK NO. 220157.00 3. Provide test report from a recognized independent testing laboratory verifying the Surge Protective Devices (SPD) can survive published surge current rating on both a per mode and per phase basis. ANSI/UL 1449, latest edition. 4. Surge Current Capacity - The minimum total surge current tested with the ANSI/IEEE C42.41, 20 kA-8/20 microsecond waveform that the device is capable of withstanding shall be as shown in the following table: Application Peak Surge Current Per Phase Nominal Discharge Current - In Per Mode a. Type 1 - Before Service Entrance 250 kA 20 kA b. Type 2 - After Service Entrance 160 kA 20 kA 5. Unit shall comply with ANSI/UL-1449, latest edition. Voltage Protection Rating (VPR) per Mode must not exceed the following for Type 2 SPD: a. 208Y/120, L-N 800 volts, L-G 700 volts, N-G 800 volts, L-L 1000 volts. b. 480Y/277, L-N 1000 volts, L-G 1200 volts, N-G 900 volts, L-L 1800 volts. 6. UL-1283 bi-directional high frequency noise attenuation for electric line noise shall be 50 dB at 10 kHz-100 MHz. 7. Short Circuit Current Rating: 200 KAIC. 8. Indication system: a. A green/red LED indicator for each phase. b. Flashing trouble light. c. Shall alarm open circuit damage, thermal conditions and overcurrent. d. Transient surge counter. e. Provide dry contact for remote monitoring. 9. Integrated model. 2.3 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. “Distribution” Type Panelboards: Square D I-Line or Square D NF. No Substitutions. B. Lighting and Appliance Type Panelboards: Square D Type NQ. No Substitutions. C. Provide all panelboards as manufactured by Square D. No Substitutions. 2.4 EXISTING PANELBOARDS A. Provide circuit breakers to match existing panelboards. B. Provide a typewritten directory that indicates all items controlled by each circuit breaker. C. Provide blank covers for each space not occupied by a circuit breaker. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262416-4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION PANELBOARDS 262416-4 QPK NO. 220157.00 PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine areas and conditions under which panelboards are to be installed and notify the Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 GENERAL A. Install panelboards and enclosures as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA’s “Standard of Installation” and in compliance with recognized industry practices. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Anchor enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they are permanently and mechanically secure. B. Set cabinets at height as directed at the time of installation, but in general, set at such height so that the top branch breaker is not over 6'-6" from the floor. C. Set flush cabinets so that edges shall be flush with the finished wall line. Where space will not permit flush type cabinets to be set entirely in the wall, set cabinet as nearly flush as possible, and cover the protruding sides with the trim extending over the exposed sides of the cabinet and back to the finished wall line. D. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturer’s published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer’s torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standards 486A and B. E. Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. Connect equipment ground bars of panels in accordance with NFPA 70. F. Provide a typewritten directory that indicates the lights or other items controlled by each circuit breaker. G. Provide handle locks on exit light, fire alarm, emergency lighting, sprinkler and other circuits as indicated. H. Provide phenolic nameplate on cover of each panelboard indicating panel designation, amperage, voltage, phasing and power source. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262416-5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION PANELBOARDS 262416-5 QPK NO. 220157.00 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prior to energization of circuitry, tighten all accessible connections to manufacturer’s tightening torque specifications. B. Prior to energization of panelboards, check with ground resistance tester phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground insulation resistance levels to ensure requirements are fulfilled. C. Prior to energization, check panelboards for electrical continuity of circuits and for short-circuits. D. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize panelboards and demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements. Where necessary, correct malfunctioning units and then retest to demonstrate compliance. END OF SECTION 262416 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262726-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION WIRING DEVICES QPK NO. 220157.00 262726-1 SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Standard-grade receptacles, 125 V, 20 A. 2. USB receptacles. 3. GFCI receptacles, 125 V, 20 A. 4. SPD receptacles, 125 V, 20 A. 5. Twist-locking receptacles. 6. Cord and plug sets. 7. Toggle switches, 120/277 V, 20A. 8. Wall plates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. AFCI: Arc-fault circuit interrupter. B. BAS: Building automation system. C. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. D. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. E. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor. F. RFI: Radio-frequency interference. G. SPD: Surge protective device. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates. C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality-control reports. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262726-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION WIRING DEVICES QPK NO. 220157.00 262726-2 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packinglabel warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. RoHS compliant. D. Comply with NEMA WD 1. E. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the following conditions: 1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire. 2. Devices shall comply with requirements in this Section. F. Devices for Owner-Furnished Equipment 1. Receptacles: Match plug configurations. 2. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements. G. Device Color 1. Wiring Devices: As selected by Architect otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing. 2. SPD Devices: Blue. H. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color. I. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 STANDARD-GRADE RECEPTACLES, 125 V, 20 A A. Duplex Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. b. Pass & Seymour; Legrand North America, LLC. c. Wiring Device-Kellems; Hubbell Incorporated, Commercial and Industrial. 2. Description: Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. 3. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. 4. Standards: Comply with UL 498 and FS W-C-596. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262726-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION WIRING DEVICES QPK NO. 220157.00 262726-3 2.3 USB RECEPTACLES A. USB Charging Receptacles 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. b. Pass & Seymour; Legrand North America, LLC. c. Wiring Device-Kellems; Hubbell Incorporated, Commercial and Industrial. 2. Description: Single-piece, rivetless, nickel-plated, all-brass grounding system. Nickelplated, brass mounting strap. 3. USB Receptacles: Dual, USB Type A, 5 V dc, and 2.1 A per receptacle (minimum). 4. Standards: Comply with UL 1310 and USB 3.0 devices. 2.4 GFCI RECEPTACLES, 125 V, 20 A A. Duplex GFCI Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. b. Pass & Seymour; Legrand North America, LLC. c. Wiring Device-Kellems; Hubbell Incorporated, Commercial and Industrial. 2. Description: Integral GFCI with "Test" and "Reset" buttons and LED indicator light. Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. 3. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. 4. Type: Non-feed through. 5. Standards: Comply with UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596. 2.5 SPD RECEPTACLES, 125 V, 20 A A. Duplex SPD Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. b. Pass & Seymour; Legrand North America, LLC. c. Wiring Device-Kellems; Hubbell Incorporated, Commercial and Industrial. 2. Description: Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. Integral SPD in line to ground, line to neutral, and neutral to ground. LED indicator light. 3. SPD Components: Multiple metal-oxide varistors; with a nominal clamp-level rating of 400 V and minimum single transient pulse energy dissipation of 240 J, according to IEEE C62.41.2 and IEEE C62.45. 4. Active SPD Indication: Visual and audible, with light visible in face of device to indicate device is "active" or "no longer in service." 5. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. 6. Standards: Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 498, UL 1449, and FS W-C-596. 2.6 TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLES A. Twist-Lock, Single Receptacles, 250 V, 30 A 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Hubbell Premise Wiring; Hubbell Incorporated, Commercial and Industrial. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262726-4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION WIRING DEVICES QPK NO. 220157.00 262726-4 b. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. c. Pass & Seymour; Legrand North America, LLC. 2. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration L5-30R. 3. Standards: Comply with UL 498. 2.7 CORD AND PLUG SETS A. Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment being connected. B. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with greeninsulated grounding conductor and ampacity of at least 130 percent of the equipment rating. C. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for connection. 2.8 WALL PLATES A. Single Source: Obtain wall plates from same manufacturer of wiring devices. B. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices. 1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel 4. Material for Damp Locations: Thermoplastic with spring-loaded lift cover and listed and labeled for use in wet and damp locations. C. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weatherresistant, thermoplastic with lockable cover. 2.9 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated. B. Coordination with Other Trades 1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes, and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes. 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. C. Conductors 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262726-5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION WIRING DEVICES QPK NO. 220157.00 262726-5 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall comply with NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. D. Device Installation 1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (152 mm) in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact. E. Receptacle Orientation 1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right. F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates. H. Adjust locations of floor service outlets to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings. 2.10 GFCI RECEPTACLES A. Install non-feed-through GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not required. 2.11 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped, or engraved machine printing with lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes. 2.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262726-6 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION WIRING DEVICES QPK NO. 220157.00 262726-6 B. Test Instrument for Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement. C. Perform the following tests and inspections 1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 2. Test Instrument for Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement. D. Tests for Receptacles 1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault-current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above. E. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 262726 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262813-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FUSES 262813-1 QPK NO. 220157.00 SECTION 262813 - FUSES PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide the UL listing on all products. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for approval on each type of fuse required. B. Maintenance Materials (Extra Stock) 1. Deliver to the Owner’s Representative, spare fuses of each size and category. Spare fuses shall consist of fuse links, fuse holders and any accessories required for a complete installation. Provide spare fuses amounting to one half of a duplicate set and not less than one complete set of each size. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide fuses of manufacturer’s standard materials, as indicated by published product information; designed and constructed as recommended by the manufacturer and as required for a complete installation. 2.2 FUSES A. Provide fuses for all safety switches and service disconnects that are rated 600 volts and lower as follows: 1. Type: Cartridge, time delay. 2. Interrupting Capacity: 200,000 amps. 3. Ampere Rating 0-99 amps: Eaton (Bussman) “Fusetron.” 4. Ampere Rating 100-599 amps: Eaton (Bussman) “Low-Peak.” 5. Design Basis: Eaton. 6. Acceptable Manufacturers: Eaton, Little Fuse, Mersen USA, approved equal. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Provide fuses in all fusible equipment furnished by this Contractor. B. Provide spare fuses. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262813-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FUSES 262813-2 QPK NO. 220157.00 C. Provide a signed receipt from the Owner for all of the required spare fuses. END OF SECTION 262813 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262819-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ENCLOSED SWITCHES 262819-1 QPK NO. 220157.00 SECTION 262819 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Safety switches specified in this Section include motor-circuit disconnects, equipment disconnects and appliance disconnects. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. UL Compliance and Labeling: Comply with requirements of UL 98, “Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches.” Provide safety switches which have been UL-listed and labeled. B. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC requirements pertaining to construction and installation of electrical circuit and motor disconnect devices. C. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Standards, Publication No. KS 1, “Enclosed Switches” and 250, “Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)”. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer’s data for approval on each type required. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide safety switches of types, sizes, characteristics and ratings indicated which comply with manufacturer’s standard design, materials, components and construction in accordance with published product information and as required for a complete installation. 2.2 PRODUCTS A. Safety Switches: Provide switches with “quick-make” and “quick-break” switch mechanism, with dual cover interlock. Provide switches rated 240 volts for 208 volt and 240 volt systems, and 600 volts for 480 volt systems; ampere rating and number of poles as indicated on the Contract Drawings, or if not indicated, same as branch circuit or feeder serving the switch; with neutral bus when neutral and/or grounding conductor is included in the circuit. Unless otherwise indicated, provide heavy-duty non-fusible switches, with NEMA I enclosures. B. Design Basis: Square D Company heavy-duty series switches. No substitutions. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262819-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ENCLOSED SWITCHES 262819-2 QPK NO. 220157.00 C. Nameplates: Provide standard phenolic nameplates with 3/8" minimum size engraved lettering on each safety switch indicating the load served, voltage, phases, power source and circuit number. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Install safety switches as indicated, complying with manufacturer’s written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, and NECA’s “Standard of Installation” and in accordance with recognized industry practices. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install safety switches for use with motor-driven appliances within sight of controller position, unless otherwise indicated, and unless capable of being locked in the open position. B. Wall mount all safety switches so that the maximum height above the floor to the center of the operating handle does not exceed 6'-0". C. For all fusible safety switches, provide fuses that meet the requirements of Section 262813 - Fuses. D. Provide phenolic nameplate on cover of each switch indicating load served, voltage, phases, power source and circuit number. E. Ground and bond safety switches in accordance with Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. END OF SECTION 262819 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262913-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913-1 QPK NO. 220157.00 SECTION 262913 - ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Motor Controllers are devices to provide manual and magnetic on/off control of motors as well as to provide thermal overload protection. B. Control Devices are devices to provide remote on/off control of motor controllers and include such products as pushbutton stations, relays, magnetic contactors, timing relays, etc. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 262813 - Fuses 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product data: Submit catalog cut sheets which indicate voltage, controller size, ratings and size of switching, over current protection devices, short circuit ratings, dimensions and enclosure details. B. Test Reports: Provide field test, inspection procedures and test results. C. Record Drawings: Provide record drawings which indicate actual locations and sizes of enclosed controllers. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide equipment manufactured to NEMA and IETA Standards. B. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products in this Section with minimum five (5) years documented experience. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide motor controllers, control devices and control wiring of types, sizes and ratings indicated, which comply with manufacturer’s standard materials, design and construction in accordance with published product information. Where types, sizes or ratings are not otherwise indicated, comply with NEC, UL and established industry standards for applications indicated. B. Provide motor controllers with general characteristics as follow: 1. Minimum Size: Provide NEMA size 0 motor controllers. 2. Enclosures: Unless otherwise indicated, provide NEMA I enclosures. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262913-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913-2 QPK NO. 220157.00 3. Under Voltage Devices for Magnetic Starters: Provide 3 wire control circuits (momentary contact pushbutton control) having under voltage protection. 4. Holding Coils: Guarantee holding coils to be of the “extra quiet” type under continuous operation, or replace the coils until satisfactory devices are installed. 2.2 MANUAL MOTOR CONTROLLERS A. Product Description: AC general purpose, Class A, manually operated, full voltage controller with overload element, red pilot light, auxiliary contacts and toggle operator. B. Manufacturer: Square D. No substitutions. 2.3 FULL-VOLTAGE NON-REVERSING CONTROLLERS A. Product Description: AC general purpose, Class A, magnetic controller for induction motors rated in horsepower. The controller includes, but is not limited to the following features: bi-metal overload relays, fused control power transformer, rotary type H.O.A. selector switches, transformer type red pilot light in cover, auxiliary contacts, recessed pushbuttons and relays. B. Combination Type: Combine motor controller with fused disconnect in common enclosure. Size fuses per HVAC equipment manufacturer's recommendations. C. Manufacturer: Square D. No substitutions. 2.4 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES A. Furnished by the HVAC Sub-Contractor and installed by the Electrical Contractor. 2.5 REMOTE PUSHBUTTON STATIONS A. Provide remote pushbutton station (momentary contact) in surface NEMA I enclosure. 1. ON, OFF, and red pilot light for single speed motors. 2. OFF, LOW-HIGH, and 2 red pilot lights (one for each speed for 2-speed motors). 2.6 FIRE SHUTDOWN RELAY A. Generally provide as part of the fire alarm panels. For remote relays provide NEMA I enclosure, contacts rated 20 amps and holding coils guaranteed to be of the “extra quiet” type. Provide the number of contacts as required. 2.7 MAGNETIC CONTACTORS A. Provide electrically operated, electrically held contactors, rated for resistance loads, equipped with NEMA I enclosures having a pilot light and hand-off-automatic switch in cover and number of poles as required. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262913-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913-3 QPK NO. 220157.00 2.8 SPACE HEATERS A. Equip motor controllers which are installed outdoors, and indoors in unheated locations, with space heaters and humidistat to prevent condensation within the enclosure. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Install enclosed controllers a minimum of 4'-0" and a maximum of 6'-6" above the floor to the disconnect switch. Disconnect shall be mounted in the vertical direction with ‘ON’ in the up position. 2. Contractor shall provide all fuses, overloads and control devices for motor controllers. 3. Contractor shall provide sized thermal overloads in motor controllers to match installed motor characteristics. 4. Install motor controllers within sight of the motor and within 50 ft. If not, then Contractor is responsible for providing a disconnecting means for equipment. Disconnect shall be lockable. B. Control Wiring 1. Provide all control wiring and connections to all remote control devices indicated. 2. Provide the quantities of separate 120 volt control circuits to each group of motor starters in a specific area required to handle the number of starters indicated without overloading the control circuit. 3. Provide products for control wiring that comply with Section 260533 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems and Section 260519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. C. Power Wiring 1. Provide all power wiring and connections. 2. Provide connections to power factor correction capacitors on the load side of magnetic starters for all motors 10 HP and larger where indicated. 3. Provide products for power wiring that comply with Section 260533 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems and Section 260519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. D. Control Equipment 1. Set and connect complete with power and control wiring, all control equipment itemized under Article 1.1, “Description.” E. Nameplates 1. Provide phenolic nameplate on each motor controller indicating the motor it is controlling, panelboard from which the power is obtained, voltage and phases. 2. Provide phenolic nameplate on remote control stations indicating the motor it is controlling. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 262913-4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913-4 QPK NO. 220157.00 3. Provide phenolic nameplate on fire shutdown relays indicating “fire shutdown” and a listing of all motors and equipment shutdown. END OF SECTION 262913 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 265119-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LED LIGHTING 265119-1 QPK NO. 220157.00 SECTION 265119 - LED LIGHTING PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid-state luminaires that use LED technology. 2. Lighting fixture supports. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CCT: Correlated color temperature. B. CRI: Color Rendering Index. C. Fixture: See "Luminaire." D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating. E. LED: Light-emitting diode. F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both. G. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Arrange in order of luminaire designation. 2. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes. 3. Include physical description and dimensions of luminaires. 4. Include emergency lighting units, including batteries and chargers. 5. Include life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy efficiency data. B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom luminaires. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details. 2. Include details of luminaire assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. C. Product Schedule: For luminaires and LED's. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 265119-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LED LIGHTING 265119-2 QPK NO. 220157.00 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing laboratory providing photometric data for luminaires. B. Product Certificates: For each type of luminaire. C. Product Test Reports: For each luminaire. D. Sample warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and lighting systems to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1. Provide a list of all LED types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Diffusers and Lenses: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 2. Globes and Guards: One for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type. B. Each luminaire type shall be binned within a three-step MacAdam Ellipse to ensure color consistency among luminaires. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. B. Warranty Period: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, product(s) indicated on Drawings. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 265119-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LED LIGHTING 265119-3 QPK NO. 220157.00 2.2 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4. C. CRI of minimum 80. D. Rated LED life of 50,000 hours. E. LED's dimmable from 100 percent to 10 percent of maximum light output. F. Internal driver. G. Nominal Operating Voltage: 120 V ac, 277 V ac, or 208V ac. Refer to Contract Drawings. 1. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch (3.175 mm) minimum unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Metal Parts: 1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. 2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated. 3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. B. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. C. Diffusers and Globes: 1. Acrylic Diffusers: One hundred percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. 2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated. 3. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch (3.175 mm) minimum unless otherwise indicated. D. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended LED's. Locate labels where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when LED's are in place. 1. Label shall include the following lamp characteristics: a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type. b. LED wattage. c. CCT and CRI for all luminaires. 2.4 METAL FINISHES A. Variations in finishes are unacceptable in the same piece. Variations in finishes of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and if they can be and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 265119-4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LED LIGHTING 265119-4 QPK NO. 220157.00 2.5 LUMINAIRE FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS A. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as luminaire. B. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm). C. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch (5-mm) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod. D. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to luminaire, line voltage, and equipment with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical connections before fixture installation. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. If approved by the Architect, use selected permanent luminaires for temporary lighting. When construction is sufficiently complete, clean luminaires used for temporary lighting and install new lamps. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. C. Supports: 1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight. 2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning and relamping. 3. Provide support for luminaire without causing deflection of ceiling or wall. 4. Luminaire mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100 percent of luminaire weight and vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight. D. Flush-Mounted Luminaire Support: 1. Secured to outlet box. 2. Attached to ceiling structural members at four points equally spaced around circumference of luminaire. 3. Trim ring flush with finished surface. E. Wall-Mounted Luminaire Support: 1. Do not attach luminaires directly to gypsum board. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 265119-5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LED LIGHTING 265119-5 QPK NO. 220157.00 F. Suspended Luminaire Support: 1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches (1200 mm), brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Luminaires: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. Support with approved outlet box and accessories that hold stem and provide damping of luminaire oscillations. Support outlet box vertically to building structure using approved devices. 3. Continuous Rows of Luminaires: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for each unit length of luminaire chassis, including one at each end. 4. Do not use ceiling grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to building structure. G. Ceiling-Grid-Mounted Luminaires: 1. Secure to any required outlet box. 2. Secure luminaire to the luminaire opening using approved fasteners in a minimum of four locations, spaced near corners of luminaire. 3. Use approved devices and support components to connect luminaire to ceiling grid and building structure in a minimum of four locations, spaced near corners of luminaire. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation. B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting the direction of aim of luminaires to suit occupied conditions. Make up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal hours for this purpose. Some of this work may be required during hours of darkness. 1. During adjustment visits, inspect all luminaires. Replace lamps or luminaires that are defective. 2. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. 3. Adjust the aim of luminaires in the presence of the Architect. END OF SECTION 265119 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 265200-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION EMERGENCY LIGHTING 265200-1 QPK NO. 220157.00 SECTION 265200 - EMERGENCY LIGHTING PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Types of emergency lighting work specified in this Section include emergency lighting battery units, remote emergency lighting fixtures and exit fixtures. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 2. Section 260533 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. UL Compliance and Labeling: Comply with UL standards pertaining to emergency lighting battery units, and emergency and exit fixtures. Provide emergency lighting battery units, and emergency lighting and exit fixtures that are UL listed and labeled. B. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation and construction of emergency lighting battery units, and emergency lighting and exit fixtures. C. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA standards, Publication Nos. 1B 4 and 1B 5 pertaining to emergency lighting battery units. D. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 101, “Life Safety Code.” E. Manufacturer: Company with minimum five (5) years documented experience specializing in manufacturing products in this Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data on emergency lighting battery units, emergency lighting and exit fixtures. Submit data sheets in booklet form with separate sheet for each fixture and battery unit, assembled in “luminaire or battery unit type” alphabetical or numerical order, with proposed fixture or battery unit and accessories, clearly indicated on each sheet. B. Warranties: Provide a minimum six (6) year warranty (1 year unconditional and 5 year pro-rata) on the batteries. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 265200-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION EMERGENCY LIGHTING 265200-2 QPK NO. 220157.00 PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide emergency lighting battery units and emergency lighting and exit fixtures of manufacturer’s standard materials, design and construction, in accordance with published product information and as required for a complete installation. B. Provide fixtures of types as indicated in the lighting fixture schedule on contract drawings. 2.2 EMERGENCY LIGHTING BATTERY UNITS A. Battery: Unless noted otherwise in the Light Fixture Schedule, provide sealed, maintenance-free lead-calcium battery of sufficient capacity to energize connected load for a period of 1-1/2 hours without voltage falling below 87-1/2% of nominal battery voltage. Provide units with nominal voltage as indicated in the Lighting Fixture Schedule on the Contract Drawings. B. Charger: Provide two-rate fully automatic solid-state battery charger with full recharging capability in 12 hours or less, after full discharge. C. Controls: Provide fused load relay, “push-to-test” switch, LED indicating light for AC power, AC overload protection and brownout protection. D. Cabinet: Provide cabinet of 18 to 20 gauge steel, with manufacturer’s standard finish unless otherwise indicated. E. Integral Lighting Heads: Provide LED lamps, number and wattage as indicated in the Lighting Fixture Schedule on the Contract Drawings. F. Accessories: Provide wall mounting bracket or shelf, of manufacturer’s standard design, and with same finish as cabinet. 2.3 EXIT FIXTURES A. Provide fixtures of types as indicated in the Lighting Fixture Schedule on the Contract Drawings. Fixtures of similar design and equivalent energy efficiency, light-distribution and brightness characteristics and of equal finish and quality to those listed in the Lighting Fixture Schedule shall be acceptable if Engineer approved. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine areas and conditions under which emergency lighting is to be installed and substrate which shall support lighting fixtures. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 265200-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION EMERGENCY LIGHTING 265200-3 QPK NO. 220157.00 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install emergency lighting battery units, emergency lighting, and exit fixtures at locations and heights as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NECA’s “Standard of Installation,” NEMA standards and recognized industry practices to ensure that battery units and fixtures fulfill Project requirements. B. Connect emergency lighting units and exit signs as indicated on Contract Drawings. C. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within unit. D. Ground and bond emergency lighting units and exit signs in accordance with Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. 3.3 CLEANING A. Clean emergency lighting and exit fixtures of dirt and debris upon completion of installation. Protect installed fixtures from damage during remainder of construction period. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Upon completion of installation of emergency lighting battery units, emergency lighting and exit fixtures, and after building circuitry has been energized with normal power source, demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test emergency lighting to demonstrate operation under emergency conditions. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at Site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting. END OF SECTION 265200 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 270526-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS QPK NO. 220157.00 270526- 1 SECTION 270526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Grounding conductors. 2. Grounding connectors. 3. Grounding busbars. 4. Grounding rods. 5. Grounding labeling. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BCT: Bonding conductor for telecommunications. B. TGB: Telecommunications grounding busbar. C. TMGB: Telecommunications main grounding busbar. D. Service Provider: The operator of a service that provides telecommunications transmission delivered over access provider facilities. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For communications equipment room signal reference grid. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. As-Built Data: Plans showing as-built locations of grounding and bonding infrastructure, including the following: 1. BCT, TMGB, TGBs, and routing of their bonding conductors. B. Field quality-control reports. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 270526-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS QPK NO. 220157.00 270526- 2 a. Result of the ground-resistance test, measured at the point of BCT connection. b. Result of the bonding-resistance test at each TGB and its nearest grounding electrode. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. C. Comply with TIA-607-B. 2.2 CONDUCTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Harger Lightning & Grounding. 2. Panduit Corp. 3. TE Connectivity Ltd. B. Comply with UL 486A-486B. C. Insulated Conductors: Stranded copper wire, green or green with yellow stripe insulation, insulated for 600 V, and complying with UL 83. 1. Ground wire for custom-length equipment ground jumpers shall be No. 6 AWG, 19strand, UL-listed, Type THHN wire. 2. Cable Tray Equipment Grounding Wire: No. 6 AWG. D. Cable Tray Grounding Jumper: 1. Not smaller than No. 6 AWG and not longer than 12 inches. If jumper is a wire, it shall have a crimped grounding lug with two holes and long barrel for two crimps. If jumper is a flexible braid, it shall have a one-hole ferrule. Attach with grounding screw or connector provided by cable tray manufacturer. E. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B8. 3. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmils, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, and 1/4 inch in diameter. 4. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 5. Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with two-hole copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 270526-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS QPK NO. 220157.00 270526- 3 2.3 CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems. 2. Chatsworth Products, Inc. 3. Harger Lightning & Grounding. 4. Panduit Corp. 5. TE Connectivity Ltd. B. Irreversible connectors listed for the purpose. Listed by an NRTL as complying with NFPA 70 for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. Comply with UL 486A-486B. C. Compression Wire Connectors: Crimp-and-compress connectors that bond to the conductor when the connector is compressed around the conductor. Comply with UL 467. 1. Electroplated tinned copper, C and H shaped. D. Busbar Connectors: Cast silicon bronze, solderless compression or exothermic-type, mechanical connector; with a long barrel and two holes spaced on 5/8- or 1-inch centers for a two-bolt connection to the busbar. E. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions. 2.4 GROUNDING BUSBARS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Chatsworth Products, Inc. 2. Harger Lightning & Grounding. 3. Panduit Corp. B. TMGB: Predrilled, wall-mounted, rectangular bars of hard-drawn solid copper, 1/4 by 4 inches by 8 inches in cross section, length as indicated on Drawings. The busbar shall be NRTL listed for use as TMGB and shall comply with TIA-607-B. 1. Predrilling shall be with holes for use with lugs specified in this Section. 2. Mounting Hardware: Stand-off brackets that provide a 4-inch clearance to access the rear of the busbar. Brackets and bolts shall be stainless steel. 3. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall be Lexan or PVC. Comply with UL 891 for use in 600-V switchboards, impulse tested at 5000 V. C. TGB: Predrilled rectangular bars of hard-drawn solid copper, 1/4 by 2 inches by 8 inches in cross section, length as indicated on Drawings. The busbar shall be for wall mounting, shall be NRTL listed as complying with UL 467, and shall comply with TIA-607-B. 1. Predrilling shall be with holes for use with lugs specified in this Section. 2. Mounting Hardware: Stand-off brackets that provide at least a 2-inch clearance to access the rear of the busbar. Brackets and bolts shall be stainless steel. 3. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall be Lexan or PVC. Comply with UL 891 for use in 600-V switchboards, impulse tested at 5000 V. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 270526-4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS QPK NO. 220157.00 270526- 4 D. Rack and Cabinet Grounding Busbars: Rectangular bars of hard-drawn solid copper, accepting conductors ranging from No. 14 to No. 2/0 AWG, NRTL listed as complying with UL 467, and complying with TIA-607-B. Predrilling shall be with holes for use with lugs specified in this Section. 1. Rack-Mounted Horizontal Busbar: Designed for mounting in 19- or 23-inch equipment racks. Include a copper splice bar for transitioning to an adjoining rack, and stainlesssteel or copper-plated hardware for attachment to the rack. 2.5 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with requirements for identification products in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine the ac grounding electrode system and equipment grounding for compliance with requirements for maximum ground-resistance level and other conditions affecting performance of grounding and bonding of the electrical system. B. Inspect the test results of the ac grounding system measured at the point of BCT connection. C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. D. Proceed with connection of the BCT only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Bonding shall include the ac utility power service entrance, the communications cable entrance, and the grounding electrode system. The bonding of these elements shall form a loop so that each element is connected to at least two others. B. Comply with NECA 1. C. Comply with TIA-607-B. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated. 1. The bonding conductors between the TGB and structural steel of steel-frame buildings shall not be smaller than No. 6 AWG. 2. The bonding conductors between the TMGB and structural steel of steel-frame buildings shall not be smaller than No. 6 AWG. B. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 270526-5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS QPK NO. 220157.00 270526- 5 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. 3. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. C. Conductor Support: 1. Secure grounding and bonding conductors at intervals of not less than 36 inches. D. Grounding and Bonding Conductors: 1. Install in the straightest and shortest route between the origination and termination point, and no longer than required. The bend radius shall not be smaller than eight times the diameter of the conductor. No one bend may exceed 90 degrees. 2. Install without splices. 3. Support at not more than 36-inch intervals. 4. Install grounding and bonding conductors in 3/4-inch PVC conduit until conduit enters a telecommunications room. The grounding and bonding conductor pathway through a plenum shall be in EMT. Conductors shall not be installed in EMT unless otherwise indicated. a. If a grounding and bonding conductor is installed in ferrous metallic conduit, bond the conductor to the conduit using a grounding bushing that complies with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems," and bond both ends of the conduit to a TGB. 3.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM A. The BCT between the TMGB and the ac service equipment ground shall not be smaller than No. 4/0 AWG. 3.5 GROUNDING BUSBARS A. Indicate locations of grounding busbars on Drawings. Install busbars horizontally, on insulated spacers 2 inches minimum from wall, 12 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. B. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top of doorway, and down; connect to horizontal bus. 3.6 CONNECTIONS A. Bond metallic equipment in a telecommunications equipment room to the grounding busbar in that room, using equipment grounding conductors not smaller than No. 6 AWG. B. Stacking of conductors under a single bolt is not permitted when connecting to busbars. C. Assemble the wire connector to the conductor, complying with manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: 1. Use crimping tool and the die specific to the connector. 2. Pretwist the conductor. 3. Apply an antioxidant compound to all bolted and compression connections. D. Primary Protector: Bond to the TMGB with insulated bonding conductor. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 270526-6 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS QPK NO. 220157.00 270526- 6 E. Interconnections: Interconnect all TGBs with the TMGB with the telecommunications backbone conductor. F. Telecommunications Enclosures and Equipment Racks: Bond metallic components of enclosures to the telecommunications bonding and grounding system. Install top-mounted rack grounding busbar unless the enclosure and rack are manufactured with the busbar. Bond the equipment grounding busbar to the TGB No. 2 AWG bonding conductors. G. Structural Steel: Where the structural steel of a steel frame building is readily accessible within the room or space, bond each TGB and TMGB to the vertical steel of the building frame. H. Panelboards: Where an electrical panelboard for telecommunications equipment is located in the same room or space, bond each TGB to the ground bar of the panelboard. I. Shielded Cable: Bond the shield of shielded cable to the TGB in communications rooms and spaces. Comply with TIA-568-C.1 and TIA-568-C.2 when grounding shielded balanced twisted-pair cables. J. Rack- and Cabinet-Mounted Equipment: Bond powered equipment chassis to the cabinet or rack grounding bar. Power connection shall comply with NFPA 70; the equipment grounding conductor in the power cord of cord- and plug-connected equipment shall be considered as a supplement to bonding requirements in this Section. 3.7 IDENTIFICATION A. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type. 1. Label TMGB(s) with "fs-TMGB," where "fs" is the telecommunications space identifier for the space containing the TMGB. 2. Label TGB(s) with "fs-TGB," where "fs" is the telecommunications space identifier for the space containing the TGB. 3. Label the BCT and each telecommunications backbone conductor at its attachment point: "WARNING! TELECOMMUNICATIONS BONDING CONDUCTOR. DO NOT REMOVE OR DISCONNECT!" 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Test the bonding connections of the system using an ac earth ground-resistance tester, taking two-point bonding measurements in each telecommunications equipment room containing a TMGB and a TGB and using the process recommended by BICSI TDMM. Conduct tests with the facility in operation. 3. Test for ground loop currents using a digital clamp-on ammeter, with a full-scale of not more than 10 A, displaying current in increments of 0.01 A at an accuracy of plus/minus 2.0 percent. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 270526-7 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS QPK NO. 220157.00 270526- 7 a. With the grounding infrastructure completed and the communications system electronics operating, measure the current in every conductor connected to the TMGB and in each TGB. Maximum acceptable ac current level is 1 A. C. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground at the BCT exceeds 5 ohms, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. D. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 270526 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 270536-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS QPK NO. 220157.00 270536-1 SECTION 270536 - CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ladder cable trays. 2. Wire-basket cable trays. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For each type of cable tray. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CABLE TRAYS A. Cable Trays and Accessories: Identified as defined in NFPA 70 and marked for intended location, application, and grounding. B. Sizes and Configurations: Refer to contract drawings for specific requirements for types, materials, sizes, and configurations. C. Structural Performance: See articles on individual cable tray types for specific values for uniform load distribution, concentrated load, and load and safety factor parameters. 2.2 WIRE-BASKET CABLE TRAYS A. Description: 1. Configuration: Wires are formed into a standard 2-by-4-inch (50-by-100-mm) wire mesh pattern with intersecting wires welded together. Mesh sections must have at least one bottom longitudinal wire along entire length of section. 2. Materials: High-strength-steel longitudinal wires with no bends. 3. Safety Provisions: Wire ends along wire-basket sides (flanges) rounded during manufacturing to maintain integrity of cables and installer safety. 4. Sizes: a. Straight sections shall be furnished in standard 118-inch (3000-mm) lengths. b. Wire-Basket Depth: 2-inch (100-mm) usable loading depth. Refer to drawings for widths. 5. Connector Assemblies: Bolt welded to plate shaped to fit around adjoining tray wires and mating plate. Mechanically joins adjacent tray wires to splice sections together or to create horizontal fittings. 6. Connector Assembly Capacity: Splices located within support span shall not diminish rated loading capacity of cable tray. 7. Hardware and Fasteners: Steel, zinc plated according to ASTM B 633. 8. Design Basis Manufacturer: Cablofill. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 270536-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS QPK NO. 220157.00 270536-2 2.3 MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Steel: 1. Straight Section and Fitting Side Rails and Rungs: Steel complies with the minimum mechanical properties of ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Grade 33, Type 2. 2. Steel Tray Splice Plates: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, HSLAS, Grade 50, Class 1. 3. Fasteners: Steel complies with the minimum mechanical properties of ASTM A 510/A 510M, Grade 1008. 4. Finish: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. a. Hardware: Chromium-zinc plated, ASTM F 1136 2.4 CABLE TRAY ACCESSORIES A. Fittings: Tees, crosses, risers, elbows, and other fittings as indicated, of same materials and finishes as cable tray. B. Barrier Strips: Same materials and finishes as for cable tray. C. Cable tray supports and connectors, including bonding jumpers, as recommended by cable tray manufacturer. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 CABLE TRAY INSTALLATION A. Install cable trays according to NEMA VE 2. B. Install cable trays as a complete system, including fasteners, hold-down clips, support systems, barrier strips, adjustable horizontal and vertical splice plates, elbows, reducers, tees, crosses, cable dropouts, adapters, covers, and bonding. C. Fasten cable tray supports to building structure. D. Design fasteners and supports to carry cable tray, the cables, and a concentrated load of 200 lb (90 kg). Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." E. Support wire-basket cable trays with trapeze hangers. F. Support trapeze hangers for wire-basket trays with 1/2-inch diameter rods. G. Make connections to equipment with flanged fittings fastened to cable trays and to equipment. Support cable trays independent of fittings. Do not carry weight of cable trays on equipment enclosure. H. Install expansion connectors where cable trays cross building expansion joints and in cable tray runs that exceed dimensions recommended in NEMA VE 2. Space connectors and set gaps according to applicable standard. I. Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping." ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 270536-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS QPK NO. 220157.00 270536-3 J. Install capped metal sleeves for future cables through firestop-sealed cable tray penetrations of fire and smoke barriers. K. Install warning signs in visible locations on or near cable trays after cable tray installation. 3.2 CABLE TRAY GROUNDING A. Ground cable trays according to NFPA 70 unless additional grounding is specified. Comply with requirements in Section 270526 "Grounding and Bonding for Communication Systems." B. Cable trays with communications cable shall be bonded together with splice plates listed for grounding purposes or with listed bonding jumpers. C. Cable trays with control conductors shall be bonded together with splice plates listed for grounding purposes or with listed bonding jumpers. D. Bond cable trays to power source for cables contained within with bonding conductors sized according to NFPA 70, Article 250.122, "Size of Equipment Grounding Conductors." 3.3 CABLE INSTALLATION A. Install cables only when each cable tray run has been completed and inspected. B. Fasten cables on horizontal runs with cable clamps or cable ties according to NEMA VE 2. Tighten clamps only enough to secure the cable, without indenting the cable jacket. C. Fasten cables on vertical runs to cable trays every 18 inches (450 mm). D. Fasten and support cables that pass from one cable tray to another or drop from cable trays to equipment enclosures. Fasten cables to the cable tray at the point of exit and support cables independent of the enclosure. The cable length between cable trays or between cable tray and enclosure shall be no more than 72 inches (1800 mm). 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Connect raceways to cable trays according to requirements in NEMA VE 2 and NEMA FG 1. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. After installing cable trays and after electrical circuitry has been energized, survey for compliance with requirements. 2. Visually inspect cable insulation for damage. Correct sharp corners, protuberances in cable trays, vibrations, and thermal expansion and contraction conditions, which may cause or have caused damage. 3. Verify that there are no intruding items such as pipes, hangers, or other equipment in the cable tray. 4. Visually inspect each cable tray joint and each ground connection for mechanical continuity. Check bolted connections between sections for corrosion. Clean and retorque in suspect areas. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 270536-4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS QPK NO. 220157.00 270536-4 5. Check for missing, incorrect, or damaged bolts, bolt heads, or nuts. When found, replace with specified hardware. 6. Perform visual and mechanical checks for adequacy of cable tray grounding; verify that all takeoff raceways are bonded to cable trays. B. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed cable trays and cables. END OF SECTION 270536 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 272100-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM 272100-1 QPK NO. 220157.00 SECTION 272100 - LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, services, etc. for a complete functional Local Area Network (LAN) and related work as required in the Contract Documents. B. The systems to be provided shall be for a switched LAN environment. The system shall hereafter be referred to as the Data Network System. C. Basic Intent: 1. Located throughout the building as shown on the drawings, are places where computers and associated equipment are intended to be placed and connected to the network for the purposes of utilizing common resources. 2. The telecommunications rooms for the data network in the building(s) are located as shown on the drawings. 3. Located in various other places are additional Telecommunication Rooms. It is intended that these be connected with the Main Telecommunication Room by a fiber optic cable backbone. From each of these locations, data cable is to be run to the data jacks where computer equipment is connected. 4. Patch panels shall be used as termination points for all fiber optic cabling. Provide backbone cabling between telecommunication rooms as indicated. 5. Patch panels shall be used as termination points for all data cables and the individual fiber cables in telecommunication rooms. D. Description of System: 1. The system shall include the items listed below, as described herein and as indicated on the Contract Documents: a. Utility service to the building(s). b. Building Main Distribution Frame (MDF) for service entrance and distribution. c. Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF) as indicated for cabling distribution. d. Backbone wiring from entrance facility to the MDF and from MDF to the IDFs. e. Complete raceway system (cable tray, J hooks, conduit) for cabling distribution. f. Grounding of all racks, raceway and equipment. g. Power for the telecommunication rooms. 1.2 TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS A. Each telecommunication room shall be furnished with 3/4 in. plywood backboard, floor to ceiling on all walls, with the plywood backboard painted with two (2) coats of fire resistant paint (UL/ASTM Class A), all surfaces. 1. ANSI/TIA/EIA Telecommunications Building Wiring Standards. 2. IEEE Telecommunications Standards. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 272100-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM 272100-2 QPK NO. 220157.00 3. BICSI Methods Manuals. 4. NFPA 70: NEC 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Work shall be as specified herein and it shall be neat and orderly installation. All methods of construction, details of workmanship that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents, shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. B. Unless specified elsewhere, standard factory inspection and operational tests will be acceptable. C. Installation shall be accordance with NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code), TIA/EIA, IEEE, IEC, state codes, local codes, and requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction. D. Equipment shall be designed, manufactured, assembled, and tested in accordance with the latest revisions of applicable published ANSI, NEMAIEC, TIA/EIA and IEEE Standards. E. Each item shall be NRTL tested and listed. F. The system provider must: 1. Provide equipment from manufacturers for which they maintain a contract, distributorship, are an agent, or other formal arrangement for which documentation can be produced showing authority to sell and service the equipment in this territory. 2. Demonstrate that they have successfully installed these systems, utilizing their standard products, for a period of five (5) years. 3. Maintain adequate spare parts inventory to provide both normal and emergency service. 4. Employ service technicians who are trained in accordance with the systems manufacturer's recommendations. 5. Own and demonstrate proficiency in the use of the required test equipment, tools, etc. for the proper installation, set-up, testing and maintenance of the system. If requested, must provide a listing of tools and/or equipment and where appropriate, certifications in the proper training and use of the tools and/or equipment. G. Contractor Qualifications: 1. The cable installer shall provide documentation and references from three (3) similar installations installed within the previous two (2) years within a 60 mile radius. H. Installer Qualifications: 1. Cabling installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide the following in a single clear and organized submittal. Package shall be submitted as specified in: ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 272100-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM 272100-3 QPK NO. 220157.00 1. Manufacturers catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructions for all system components. 2. Detailed description of system operation. 3. Itemized list of all features and functions. 4. Dimensioned drawings of all system control cabinets and layouts for all equipment rooms. 5. Wiring diagrams showing typical connections for equipment. 6. Contractor certification and qualifications. 7. Riser diagrams showing all components, devices and interconnecting cable types. 8. List of three (3) installations of equivalent or larger systems that have been installed within the past two (2) years and have been operating satisfactorily for a minimum of one (1) year. 9. Warranty information. 10. System test reports. 11. Provide scaled elevation and plan drawings indicating walls, data racks, patch panels, wire management, cable trays, power strips, door swing, etc. for each cable closet/room. 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide a complete and fully operational state of the art Local Area Network (LAN) system as described herein and indicated on the contract documents. Include any and all interface equipment to supply a complete network with complete equipment connections necessary to form a complete "turnkey" network system as outlined in these specifications. B. The complete system shall include, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Equipment Room build-out. 2. Telecommunications Room build-out. 3. Equipment cabinets and racks. 4. Patch panels and patch cables. 5. Wire management. 6. Fiber optic backbone cabling. 7. Horizontal cabling. 8. Modular jacks, backboxes and faceplates. 9. Terminations and testing. 10. Raceways, pathways, cable tray, sleeves, pull boxes. 11. Firestopping. 12. Fiber adapters and downlinks. 13. Training and system programming. C. Owner shall provide the network electronics. 1.6 WARRANTY A. All cable plant parts shall be warranted to the owner for a period of five (5) years as a complete end-to-end system. B. All network equipment shall be warranted to the owner for a period of one (1) year. Provide technical support at no charge to the customer for a period of one (1) year after system has been commissioned. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 272100-4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM 272100-4 QPK NO. 220157.00 C. Make available an extended warranty to the customer. D. Warranties shall commence upon final acceptance of the system. PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BACKBONE WIRING - FIBER OPTIC CABLE A. All of the fiber optic cable must meet or exceed the following requirements and specifications. B. Individual fiber optic cables shall consist of: 1. The fiber. 2. Tight buffer. 3. Thermoplastic jacket. 4. Central strength member. 5. Aramid strength member. 6. Second core wrap with ripcord. 7. Polyester barrier. 8. Outer jacket. C. All backbone fiber optic cable shall be: 1. Installed in EMT conduit labeled on 10 ft. centers - Fiber Optic Cable. D. Single Mode Fiber (Indoor/Outdoor): 1. Maximum Attenuation per KM: a. 1310 nM- 0.5 b. 1550 nM - 0.5 2. 1310/1550 nM. 3. Shall be tight buffer, plenum rated, indoor-outdoor breakout style. 4. Core Type: Single Mode. 5. Core Diameter: 8.3 Microns. 6. Clad Diameter: 125 Microns. 7. Minimum bend radius shall be 20 times the diameter. 8. Strength members shall be FGE/Aramid yarn. 9. Shall meet requirements for plenum and vertical tray cable specifications of the NEC. 10. Provide number of fibers/cable as indicated in riser diagram on Drawings. 11. Shall have individual fiber tube colors per TIA/EIA-598 and an overall yellow jacket. E. Acceptable Manufacturers: Corning Belden OCC TE Connectivity Draka ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 272100-5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM 272100-5 QPK NO. 220157.00 2.2 HORIZONTAL CABLE A. Category 6 UTP Cable: 1. Initially, the manufacturer shall perform qualification tests on each cable. These tests shall be performed in accordance with the latest revision of the ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-C.2 Permanent Link Transmission Performance standard prior to shipment. 2. Date of Manufacture: Cable shall be a maximum of one (1) year old, from date of manufacture when installed. 3. Cable shall have a ripcord. 4. Cable shall be plenum rated, 4 pair, 100 OHM, 23 AWG. 5. Cable shall meet all requirements of FCC 68, the latest revision of the TIA/EIA 568B-C.2 and Addenda. 6. Cable shall have blue colored thermoplastic jacket with overall diameter not to exceed 0.365 in. 7. The cable pulling tension shall be rated for 25 pounds minimum. 8. Cable shall be able to withstand a minimum bend radius of 1.0 in. at -20ºC without insulation cracking. 9. Cable shall be color coded in accordance with the latest revision of the TIA/EIA T568B polarization sequence. 10. Cable shall not exceed maximum length of 90 meters. 11. Provide a printed report documenting testing based on ANSI/TIA 568 C.2 testing at 250 MHz. The following are the minimum values associated with the cable for a 100 meter length. a. Less than 21.000 ohm per 100 m DC loop resistance. b. Return loss > 20.0 dB. c. Insertion Loss < 31.1 dB/100M. d. Near end cross talk (NEXT)> 35.3 dB (43.4 dB). e. Power Sum - near end cross talk (PS-NEXT)> 41.0 dB. f. Attention to cross talk ratio (ACRF) > 16.2 dB (24.8 dB). g. Power Sum - Attenuation to cross talk ratio (PSACRF) > 13.2 dB (21.8 dB). h. DC resistance unbalance between any two (2) conductors of any pair shall not exceed 3%. i. The capacitance unbalance of any pair to ground shall not exceed 33.0pF. j. Delay < 490 ns. k. Delay skew < 44 ns. l. Cable shall be ANSI/TIA/EIA-568.B.2 Category 6 compliant. The cable shall be tested and characterized by the manufacturer. 12. Acceptable Manufacturers: Belden Berk-Tek TE Connectivity General Cable Comm Scope 2.3 PATCH CABLES A. Patch Cables - UTP: 1. Provide patch cable for use in the patch panels and field outlets, a minimum of two for each circuit/channel. Quantity of patch cords shall be sufficient to ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 272100-6 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM 272100-6 QPK NO. 220157.00 terminate all outlets indicated on drawings as well as 25% spare outlets of each type. Patch cable type shall correlate to the cable color and type and match or exceed the performance characteristics. 2. Field verify exact length of patch cords for field outlets and patch panel outlets with the Owner. Assume a typical of two (2) meters each. 3. Patch cord shall be stranded with overall jacket and factory made connectors with protective boots. 4. All patch cords shall be third party verified. 5. Acceptable Manufacturers: Belden Berk-Tek TE Connectivity General Cable Comm Scope B. Patch Cables - Fiber Optic Cable 1. Provide patch cable for use in the patch panels and field outlets, a minimum of two for each circuit/channel. Quantity of patch cords shall be sufficient to terminate all outlets indicated on drawings as well as 25% spare outlets of each type. Patch cable type shall correlate to the cable color and type and match or exceed the performance characteristics. 2. Field verify exact length of patch cords for field outlets and patch panel outlets with the Owner. Assume a typical of two (2) meters each. 3. Patch cord shall meet the specifications for the cable to which it is connected to. 4. All patch cords shall be third party verified. 5. Acceptable Manufacturers: Corning Belden OCC TE Connectivity Draka 2.4 PATCH PANELS A. UTP Cable Patch Panels: 1. All panels should consist of a faceplate, mounting, hardware, isolation bushings, connector assemblies and labels for all ports. 2. Provide patch panels in each enclosure or rack to which the cable is to be terminated. Patch panels shall be of the type, performance and Category to match the cabling. 3. Patch panels shall be mounted in standard 19 in. racks/cabinets. a. Contractor shall provide multiple 48-port patch panels having wiring configuration specified with insulation displacement connectors on the back and 8P8C universal modular jacks on the front. b. Contractor shall provide quantity of patch panels to terminate all UTP cable. There shall be a minimum of 25% spare capacity for future installation. 4. Jacks shall be 8P8C, T568 universal and have 110 style termination blocks. 5. Panels shall have factory labels for each port. 6. All cables are to be terminated per EIA/TIA 568B standards, if applicable, and dressed in a neat workmanship way. 7. Modular jacks shall be mounted on PC boards to offer low insertion and NEXT loss. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 272100-7 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM 272100-7 QPK NO. 220157.00 8. Provide grounding screw assembly with serrated head screw and manufacturer recommended connection to the associated rack. 9. Shall exceed EIA/TIA-568, UL1863 and FCC Part 68 performance specified. 10. Acceptable Manufacturers: Ortronics Panduit Hubbell Belden TE Connectivity B. Fiber Optic Patch Panels 1. Provide fiber optic patch panels in where fiber optic cable is to be terminated. 2. Provide LC to LC style panel base. Provide quantity of ports to terminate all strands of the fiber optic cable with additional 25% spare ports. 3. Shall mount in standard 19 in. rack and be constructed of 16 gauge steel and have gasketed openings and hinged door for easy access. 4. Provide wire management below and in rear of patch panel. 5. Patch panels to have modular ports with 12 minimum ports. 6. Acceptable Manufacturers: Corning Panduit Belden TE Connectivity 2.5 OUTLETS AND CONNECTORS A. UTP Outlets/Connectors: 1. Physical Specifications: a. Shall be 8 position connector compatible with the cable characteristics. b. Shall be modular and snap-in to user configurable faceplates for future retrofits meeting durability requirements specified in the latest revision of the CEI/IEC standard. c. Shall be IDC type suitable for eight 22-24 AWG wires with a gas-tight connection. d. Each contact surface shall have at a minimum, copper alloy with 50 micro-inches gold over nickel and a minimum contact force of 100g. e. Conductors shall be separated and aligned internally by jack comb. f. Shall have easy to read 568A/B color scheme to prevent termination errors. g. Wired in accordance with TIA/EIA polarization sequence specified in Patch Panel section of this specification. h. Transmission characteristics shall meet the requirements for the UTP cabling specified. i. Minimum durability shall be 1000 connecting cycles. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Ortronics Panduit Belden Hubbell TE Connectivity B. Fiber Optic Multimode Outlets/Connectors 1. Physical Characteristics: a. Shall be LC type with insertion release mechanism. b. Shall terminate up to 125 micron fiber. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 272100-8 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM 272100-8 QPK NO. 220157.00 c. Shall meet dimensional criteria of the latest revision of ANSI/EIA/TIA. d. Typical outlet box shall be sized to insure minimum bend radius and store 1 meter of two strand fiber cable. 2. Transmission Characteristics: a. Maximum loss of 0.3 dB per pair. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: Panduit Belden Hubbell Ortronics TE Connectivity 2.6 COLOR CODING A. Cable outer jacket shall follow the color coding scheme as follows. Jacket color shall be continuous. Patch cords shall match the cabling. B. Copper Cable: 1. Data Communication: a. Category 6 - Blue 2. Voice Communication: a. Category 6 – Blue C. Fiber Optic Cable: 1. Backbone Cabling: a. Single Mode – Yellow 2.7 DISTRIBUTION ENCLOSURES/RACKS A. All enclosure/racks shall be properly sized and of the proper quantity to house all of the required components and 25% spare space capacity. Provide grounding stud for each vertical rack. B. Label each rack/enclosure designating it per the latest TIA/EIA standard: 1. Adhered plastic electronic printed label with 1/2" high lettering minimum. 2. Mount to top and bottom of each rack/enclosure. C. Enclosed, Floor Mounted Cabinet: 1. Steel framed, smoked Plexiglas door with lock (keyed to the Owners standard), full length piano hinge and field adjustable swing. 2. Steel Rear Door with Lock (lower half vented). 3. Two (2) eight position vertical mounted power strips. 4. Fan Assembly - Suitable top mounted fans (two minimum) for an ambient temperature of 85°F. 5. Wire management brackets. 6. Adjustable front and rear mounting rails. 7. Adjustable 19 in. wide mounting rails. Depth to accommodate the intended equipment (32 in. minimum). 8. Color black. 9. Verify swing of door in the field prior to ordering. 10. Unit width shall accommodate racking, power strips and cable management. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 272100-9 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM 272100-9 QPK NO. 220157.00 11. In locations requiring two or more enclosures, side panels shall be removed and cabinets shall be bolted together allowing access between cabinets. D. Open, Floor Mounted Racks: 1. Nominal size shall be 19 in. wide x 7 ft. high x 20 in. (minimum) deep. Rated for 2000 lb. minimum. Depth to match the intended equipment. 2. Rack shall be constructed of 6061-T6 aluminum extrusion, with EIA = 3 in. x 1.265 in. channel, 1/4 in. thick flange. 3. Provide base angles and top cross bars. 4. The back of rack shall have wire management panels and cable tray to wall. 5. Rack shall have baked enamel finish. E. Equipment Shelves: 1. Provide quantity of equipment shelves required by Owner during interviews. 2. Shelves shall be made of .09 in. aluminum and shall support up to 30 lbs. on each side. All mounting hardware shall have baked enamel finish. F. Acceptable Manufacturers: Chatsworth Ortronics Homaco Mid-Atlantic Great Lakes 2.8 CABLE MANAGEMENT A. All racks are to be provided with cable management hardware to insure a neat, functional system when complete. Racks shall as a minimum, include the following: 1. PVC construction; duct fingers to manage cabling; color to match enclosure. B. All racks shall have 8 in. wide vertical full height cable management, including cover, front and rear, on both sides of the rack. C. Cabinets shall have 1RU space horizontal panels, front and rear, above and below each patch panel and piece of equipment. D. All data distribution frame plywood backboards shall be provided with vertical and horizontal wire management with capacities to house all possible future cabling and patch cords for a neat and orderly installation. E. Acceptable manufacturers: Panduit Ortronics Leviton 2.9 LABELING A. General: 1. System labeling shall be in accordance with the latest revision of TIA/EIA 606. System shall provide as built final conditions for each cable, port, panel, rack, etc. and utilize MS Excel or approved equal documentation. Provide hard and electronic copy of labeling documentation to the Owner as part of the O and M process. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 272100-10 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM 272100-10 QPK NO. 220157.00 2. Each label shall contain the Telecommunication Room designated, the room number and the port number in the room. Verify color of label and size of font prior to completion. Provide samples as requested. 3. Labels shall correspond to the room/names/numbers upon completion of the project. Contractor shall not necessarily utilize existing room/names/numbers or those indicated on the blueprints. 4. Label each rack and patch panel with 1 in. high lettering, black on white, adhered electronically printed plastic type label with labels at top, bottom, front and back. B. Patch Panel 1. Individually label all patch panel ports. Port numbers shall match opposite end outlet/port number. C. Outlets 1. Individually label all patch panel ports. Labels shall be installed in a workmanlike manner and fit completely in the recessed area of the labeled location. 2. Contractor shall utilize adhered labels at poke-thru locations and any other locations that do not have a label location. D. Cable 1. Fiber Optic: a. Individually label fiber optic cables at each termination point indicating destination room, rack number, panel number, port number, strand number and strand color. b. Each strand color shall match a specific fiber termination number in each closet, i.e. blue - fiber 1, orange - fiber 2, green - fiber 3, etc. c. Cable label shall be adhered electronically printed plastic type with cable designation fully visible. 2. Copper a. Specifically label cables at each termination point indicating the destination room, rack number, panel number and port number. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Cable: 1. Provide a minimum of one horizontal UTP cable to each communication outlet jack from respective equipment/telecomm unications room patch panel as called for. Quantity of data jacks equals minimum quantity of UTP cables (typical). 2. Provide a minimum of one (1) pair (2 strands) of multi-mode fiber optic cable to each fiber jack from respective equipment/telecommunications room as called for. Quantity of fiber jacks equals minimum quantity of 2 strand cables (typical). 3. All risers, and wiring concealed in walls or soffits, shall be installed in metal conduits. 4. All cable above accessible ceilings shall be installed in cable tray or J-hook style cable rings 3 ft. O.C. 5. Provide wire management and Velcro cable wraps every 24 in. throughout closets. Provide Velcro cable wraps every 36 in. elsewhere. 6. Wiring/cabling shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. If the manufacturer recommends larger wire sizes, they shall ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 272100-11 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM 272100-11 QPK NO. 220157.00 be provided. However, smaller sizes or lower cable categories are not acceptable. 7. All Contract Documents are schematic. The system supplier shall incorporate their wiring requirements on the system drawings. The Contractor in conjunction with the system manufacturer shall be responsible for complete wiring requirements and conduit sizes. 8. Install UTP cable in accordance with latest revision of TIA/EIA 568 standards. 9. The Contractor shall be responsible for replacing all cables that do not pass required bandwidth and throughput tests. 10. All raceways and closets shall be installed in accordance with latest revision of TIA/EIA-569. 11. All cables shall be labeled in accordance with latest revision of TIA/EIA 606 and these specifications. 12. All horizontal cables shall be terminated in patch panels at the distribution frames, and at the UTP jack at the telecommunications outlet. 13. Maximum length shall be 90 meters. B. Fiber Optic Cable: 1. Terminate backbone fiber cables in rack mounted patch panels at both ends. 2. Adhere to all manufacturer bend radius recommendations. C. Terminations: 1. All terminations shall be made by a manufacturer's trained representative. 2. Use termination kits for fiber and UTP that are approved by the manufacturer of the cable. 3. All backbone cable shall be terminated in a patch panel and all connections between horizontal and backbone cables shall be through cross connect cable. D. Equipment and Devices: 1. Install all devices where shown on drawings. Provide all necessary conduit outlet boxes, junction boxes, supports, etc. Verify all required box sizes with the system supplier and coordinate with bending radius needs. All devices shall be modular for future moves and changes. 2. Install all equipment in specified 19 in. racks/cabinets leaving minimum 30 in. of access space on sides and back of rack and 36 in. in front of rack. 3. Provide all power outlets and plug strips required for system operation but not shown on plans. E. Raceways: 1. Minimum size raceway shall be 1 in. 2. Minimum backbox size for telecommunications outlet locations shall be twogang with raised cover; no single-gang boxes allowed. 3. Provide no greater than 180° in bends without pull box in any raceway. F. Data Network Ground System: 1. Provide grounding system for all equipment rooms and telecommunication rooms as called for in Specification Section 260526. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 272100-12 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM 272100-12 QPK NO. 220157.00 G. Telecommunications Rooms: 1. Provide 3/4 in. x 4 ft. high continuous plywood backboard with two (2) coats of medium gray fireproof paint in telecommunications rooms. 2. Coordinate with other trades to avoid services being installed above telecommunications racks. 3.2 TESTING A. Copper Cable: System supplier shall channel test end-to-end each permanent link connection using latest 200 MHz for Cat 6 1000 Mbps IEEE testing procedure. Tester must conform to the latest standards at the time of testing not time of bid and be Fluke DTX-5000 with latest software version, or approved equal. Testing shall be performed by a technician trained with the specific testing equipment. Testing shall be witnessed by the Owner's Representative. B. Fiber Optic Cable: Provide an OTDR test for all fiber optic cable and connections per latest IEEE and ANSI accepted procedures. Test shall utilize Fluke Opti Fiber Pro OTDR. C. Replace any cables and connectors that do not meet or exceed standards referenced and stated herein and then tested. Testing shall be end-to-end / port-to-port for each cable. D. Test equipmen2 shall be in good condition and working order, calibrated within one year of its use and utilize leads without twisting and kinks. Unit calibration shall be in accordance with Level III Field Tester per ANSI/TIA 1152. E. A representative of the end-user will select a random sample of 5% of the installed links. The representative (or his authorized delegate) shall test these randomly selected links. The results obtained shall be compared to the data provided by the installation contractor. If more than 2% of the sample results differ in terms of the pass/fail determination, the installation contractor under supervision of the end-user representative shall repeat 100% testing at no additional cost. Cables and connectors that do not pass shall be replaced and retested until acceptable results are obtained. F. Test Reporting: 1. The field testing shall be accurately documented for submission, inclusion in O&M Manuals and for Owner future use. 2. Test reports shall include data directory table cross-referencing room numbers and cable numbers with the test report. Post copies of directory at telecommunications room location. 3. Report shall utilize electronic Windows based documenting with a hard and electronic copy provided to the Owner. 4. The report documentation for each cable test shall include the following as a minimum: a. Project name. b. Test equipment manufacturer and model number, and last calibration date. c. Date and time of the test. d. Patch panel identification. e. Cable identification. f. Cable type. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 272100-13 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM 272100-13 QPK NO. 220157.00 g. Pass/Fail: Pass indicating meeting or exceeding the identified criteria or standard (whichever more stringent) for all parameters. Fail indicating test not meeting identified criteria for one or more parameters. h. Test pass criteria. i. Cable length. j. Propagation delay and attainable bandwidth. k. List of tested parameters with test and allowable values. Any failed parameters shall be noted or highlighted. l. 3.3 TRAINING AND INSTRUCTION A. Provide eight (8) hours minimum of instruction to Owner personnel regarding system set up configuration and management. Training shall be sufficient for the Owner to understand the system operation, components, configuration, functions, testing and troubleshooting. All Owner questions shall be answered. B. Training agenda (estimated duration, intent, specifications to be covered) shall be submitted for approval prior to the training. A finalized agenda shall be issued to the Owner and construction representative one (1) week minimum prior to the scheduled training. Owner's comments shall be incorporated and agenda redistributed prior to the training. C. Two (2) hard copies and one (1) electronic (pdf) copy of the training materials shall be provided. 3.4 WARRANTY A. All cable plant parts shall be warranted to the owner for a period of five (5) years as a complete end-to-end system. B. Make available an extended warranty to the customer. C. Warranties shall commence upon final acceptance of the system. END OF SECTION 272100 ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 283100-1 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-1 QPK NO. 220157.00 SECTION 283100 - FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM PART 1.0 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Fire alarm control unit expansion. 2. Manual fire-alarm boxes. 3. System smoke detectors. 4. Heat detectors. 5. Fire alarm notification appliances. 6. Device guards. 7. Magnetic door holders. 8. Addressable interface device. B. The fire alarm system shall be an extension of the existing Edwards system. (No Substitutions) C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables" for cables and conductors for firealarm systems. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing. B. FCAP: Fire Alarm Control Panel. C. HLI: High Level Interface. D. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies. E. PC: Personal Computer. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including furnished options and accessories. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions, profiles and finishes. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and electrical characteristics. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 283100-2 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-2 QPK NO. 220157.00 B. Shop Drawings: For fire alarm system 1. Comply with recommendations and requirements in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72. 2. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 3. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and locations. Indicate conductor sizes, indicate termination locations and requirements, and distinguish between factory and field wiring. 4. Detail assembly and support requirements. 5. Include voltage drop calculations for notification-appliance circuits. 6. Include battery-size calculations. 7. Include input/output matrix. 8. Include statement from manufacturer that all equipment and components have been tested as a system and meet all requirements in this Specification and in NFPA 72. 9. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector. 10. Verify that each duct detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating. 11. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts, drawn to scale; coordinate location of duct smoke detectors and access to them. a. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators. b. Show field wiring required for HVAC unit shutdown on alarm. c. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations. 12. Include grounding schematic, amplifier power calculation, and single-line connection diagram. 13. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device. Show size and route of cable and conduits and point-to-point wiring diagrams. C. General Submittal Requirements: 1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them to Architect. 2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications: a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design. b. NICET-certified, fire-alarm technician; Level III minimum. c. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For notification appliances and smoke and heat detectors, in addition to submittals listed above, indicate compliance with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Drawings showing the location of each notification appliance and smoke and heat detector, ratings of each, and installation details as needed to comply with listing conditions of the device. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting the spacing and sensitivity of detection, complying with NFPA 72. Calculate spacing and intensities for strobe signals and sound-pressure levels for audible appliances. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 283100-3 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-3 QPK NO. 220157.00 3. Indicate audible appliances required to produce square wave signal per NFPA 72. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer: B. Field quality control reports. C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire alarm systems and components to include in emergency, operation and maintenance manuals. 1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following and deliver copies to authorities having jurisdiction: a. Comply with the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72. b. Provide "Fire Alarm and Emergency Communications System Record of Completion Documents" according to the "Completion Documents" Article in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72. c. Complete wiring diagrams showing connections between all devices and equipment. Each conductor shall be numbered at every junction point with indication of origination and termination points. d. Riser diagram. e. Device addresses. f. Record copy of site specific software. g. Provide "Inspection and Testing Form" according to the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72, and include the following: 1) Equipment tested. 2) Frequency of testing of installed components. 3) Frequency of inspection of installed components. 4) Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance. 5) Manufacturer's user training manuals. h. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements. i. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit and each annunciator unit. B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: 1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 283100-4 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-4 QPK NO. 220157.00 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project. B. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by a UL-listed alarm company. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Perform a full test of the existing system prior to starting work. Document any equipment or components not functioning as designed. B. Interruption of Existing Fire-Alarm Service: Do not interrupt fire-alarm service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary guard service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner no fewer than fourteen days in advance of proposed interruption of fire-alarm service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of fire alarm service without Owner's written permission. C. Use of Devices during Construction: Protect devices during construction unless devices are placed in service to protect the facility during construction. 1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Existing Fire-Alarm Equipment: Maintain existing equipment fully operational until new equipment has been tested and accepted. As new equipment is installed, label it "NOT IN SERVICE" until it is accepted. Remove labels from new equipment when put into service, and label existing fire-alarm equipment "NOT IN SERVICE" until removed from the building. B. Equipment Removal: After acceptance of new fire-alarm system, remove existing disconnected fire-alarm equipment and wiring. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire-alarm system equipment and components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Extent: All equipment and components not covered in the Maintenance Service Agreement. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 283100-5 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-5 QPK NO. 220157.00 PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Components shall be compatible with, and operate as an extension of, existing system. Provide system manufacturer's certification that all components provided have been tested as, and will operate as, a system. B. Noncoded, UL-certified addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission and horn/strobe evacuation. C. All components provided shall be listed for use with the selected system. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.2 SYSTEM OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and systems: 1. Manual stations. 2. Heat detectors. 3. Flame detectors. 4. Smoke detectors. 5. Duct smoke detectors. 6. Combustible gas detectors. 7. Fire extinguishing system operation. B. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions: 1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances. 2. Identify alarm and specific initiating device at fire-alarm control unit, connected network control panels, off-premises network control panels, and remote annunciators. 3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station. 4. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths. 5. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders. 6. Activate alarm communication system. 7. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire-alarm mode. 8. Close smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems. 9. Recall elevators to primary or alternate recall floors. 10. Activate elevator power shunt trip. 11. Activate emergency lighting control. 12. Activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies. 13. Record events in the system memory. 14. Record events by the system printer. 15. Indicate device in alarm on the remote annunciator. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 283100-6 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-6 QPK NO. 220157.00 C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions: 1. Elevator shunt-trip supervision. 2. Independent fire-detection and -suppression systems. 3. User disabling of zones or individual devices. 4. Loss of communication with any panel on the network. 5. Carbon monoxide detectors. D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions: 1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits. 2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating devices. 3. Loss of communication with any addressable sensor, input module, relay, control module, remote annunciator, printer interface, or Ethernet module. 4. Loss of primary power at fire alarm control unit. 5. Ground or a single break in internal circuits of fire-alarm control unit. 6. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit. 7. Break in standby battery circuitry. 8. Failure of battery charging. 9. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator. 10. Voice signal amplifier failure. 11. Hose cabinet door open. E. System Supervisory Signal Actions: 1. Initiate notification appliances. 2. Identify specific device initiating the event at fire-alarm control unit, connected network control panels, off-premises network control panels, and remote annunciators. 3. Record the event on system printer. 4. After a time delay of 200 seconds, transmit a trouble or supervisory signal to the remote alarm receiving station. 5. Transmit system status to building management system. 6. Display system status on remote annunciator. 2.3 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Edwards. B. General Requirements for Fire-Alarm Control Unit: 1. Extend existing main control panel to include all fire alarm system devices shown on Contract Documents. Provide secondary battery backup power supply as required for proper operation of all devices in the event of a power failure. C. Initiating-Device, Notification-Appliance, and Signaling-Line Circuits: 1. Pathway Class Designations: Match existing wiring scheme in building (Class A or B) ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 283100-7 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-7 QPK NO. 220157.00 D. Smoke-Alarm Verification: 1. Initiate audible and visible indication of an "alarm-verification" signal at fire-alarm control unit. 2. Activate an approved "alarm-verification" sequence at fire-alarm control unit and detector. 3. Record events by the system printer. 4. Sound general alarm if the alarm is verified. 5. Cancel fire-alarm control unit indication and system reset if the alarm is not verified. E. Notification-Appliance Circuit: 1. Audible appliances shall sound in a three-pulse temporal pattern, as defined in NFPA 72. 2. Visual alarm appliances shall flash in synchronization where multiple appliances are in the same field of view, as defined in NFPA 72. F. Elevator Recall: 1. Elevator recall shall be initiated only by one of the following alarm-initiating devices: a. Elevator lobby detectors except the lobby detector on the designated floor. b. Smoke detector in elevator machine room. c. Smoke detectors in elevator hoistway. 2. Elevator controller shall be programmed to move the cars to the alternate recall floor if lobby detectors located on the designated recall floors are activated. 3. Refer to Contract Drawings for additional information regarding elevator. G. Door Controls: Door hold-open devices that are controlled by smoke detectors at doors in smokebarrier walls shall be connected to fire-alarm system. H. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to a remote alarm station. I. Printout of Events: On receipt of signal, print alarm, supervisory, and trouble events. Identify zone, device, and function. Include type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or trouble) and date and time of occurrence. Differentiate alarm signals from all other printed indications. Also print system reset event, including same information for device, location, date, and time. Commands initiate the printing of a list of existing alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions in the system and a historical log of events. J. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, supervisory signals, supervisory and digital alarm communicator transmitters shall be powered by 24-V dc source. 1. Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the powersupply module rating. K. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and automatic transfer switch. 1. Batteries: Sealed lead calcium. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 283100-8 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-8 QPK NO. 220157.00 L. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions. 2.4 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Edwards. B. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall be finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box. 1. Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull-lever type; with integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit. 2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch. 3. Indoor Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated, clear plastic enclosure hinged at the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover actuates an integral batterypowered audible horn intended to discourage false-alarm operation. 2.5 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Edwards. B. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors: 1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal. 2. Detectors wire type shall be compatible with existing system. 3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit. 4. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a twistlock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring. 5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation. 6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type, indicating detector has operated and power-on status. 7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be digital-addressable type, individually monitored at fire-alarm control unit for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition. C. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: 1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 283100-9 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-9 QPK NO. 220157.00 2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector: a. Primary status. b. Device type. c. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected. e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.) D. Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A. 1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting. 2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector: a. Primary status. b. Device type. c. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected. e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.). 3. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X; NRTL listed for use with the supplied detector for smoke detection in HVAC system ducts. 4. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity. 5. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for specific duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied. 6. Relay Fan Shutdown: Fully programmable relay rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit. 2.6 HEAT DETECTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Edwards. B. General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521. 1. Temperature sensors shall test for and communicate the sensitivity range of the device. C. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 degree F or a rate of rise that exceeds 15 degree F per minute unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting. 2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit. D. Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a fixed temperature of 190 degree F. 1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting. 2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 283100-10 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-10 QPK NO. 220157.00 2.7 FIRE ALARM NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Edwards. B. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Individually addressed, connected to a signaling-line circuit, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system connections. C. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification-appliance signal circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system connections. 1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-mounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system connections. D. Chimes, Low-Level Output: Vibrating type, 75-dBA minimum rated output. E. Chimes, High-Level Output: Vibrating type, 81-dBA minimum rated output. F. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of 90 dBA, measured 10 feet from the horn, using the coded signal prescribed in UL 464 test protocol. G. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights complying with UL 1971, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch-high letters on the lens. 1. Rated Light Output: a. 15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field. 2. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated. 3. For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be determined with guards in place. 4. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units. 5. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals. 6. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished red. 2.8 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS A. Description: Units are equipped for wall or floor mounting as indicated and are complete with matching doorplate. 1. Electromagnets: Require no more than 3 W to develop 25-lbf holding force. 2. Wall-Mounted Units: Flush mounted unless otherwise indicated. 3. Rating: 24-V ac or dc. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 283100-11 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-11 QPK NO. 220157.00 B. Material and Finish: Match door hardware. 2.9 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE A. General: 1. Include address-setting means on the module. 2. Store an internal identifying code for control panel use to identify the module type. 3. Listed for controlling HVAC fan motor controllers. B. Monitor Module: Microelectronic module providing a system address for alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts. C. Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal to elevator controller to initiate elevator recall and to circuit-breaker shunt trip for power shutdown. 1. Allow the control panel to switch the relay contacts on command. 2. Have a minimum of two normally open and two normally closed contacts available for field wiring. D. Control Module: 1. Operate notification devices. PART 3.0 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for ventilation, temperature, humidity, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that manufacturer's written instructions for environmental conditions have been permanently established in spaces where equipment and wiring are installed, before installation begins. B. Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations of connections before installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NFPA 72, NFPA 101, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for installation and testing of fire-alarm equipment. Install all electrical wiring to comply with requirements in NFPA 70 including, but not limited to, Article 760, "Fire Alarm Systems." 1. Devices placed in service before all other trades have completed cleanup shall be replaced. 2. Devices installed but not yet placed in service shall be protected from construction dust, debris, dirt, moisture, and damage according to manufacturer's written storage instructions. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 283100-12 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-12 QPK NO. 220157.00 B. Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire-alarm system is operational before making changes or connections. 1. Connect new equipment to existing control panel in existing part of the building. 2. Connect new equipment to existing monitoring equipment at the supervising station. 3. Expand, modify, and supplement existing control and monitoring equipment as necessary to extend existing control and monitoring functions to the new points. New components shall be capable of merging with existing configuration without degrading the performance of either system. C. Install wall-mounted equipment, with tops of cabinets not more than 78 inches above the finished floor. D. Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: 1. Install manual fire-alarm box in the normal path of egress within 60 inches of the exit doorway. 2. Mount manual fire-alarm box on a background of a contrasting color. 3. The operable part of manual fire-alarm box shall be between 42 inches and 48 inches above floor level. All devices shall be mounted at the same height unless otherwise indicated. E. Smoke or Heat Detector Spacing: 1. Comply with the "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" section in the "Initiating Devices" chapter in NFPA 72, for smoke-detector spacing. 2. Comply with the "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" section in the "Initiating Devices" chapter in NFPA 72, for heat-detector spacing. 3. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet. 4. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for high ceiling areas shall be determined according to Annex A in NFPA 72. 5. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 36 inches from air-supply diffuser or return-air opening. 6. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches from any part of a lighting fixture and not directly above pendant mounted or indirect lighting. F. Install a cover on each smoke detector that is not placed in service during construction. Cover shall remain in place except during system testing. Remove cover prior to system turnover. G. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of duct. Tubes more than 36 inches long shall be supported at both ends. 1. Do not install smoke detector in duct smoke-detector housing during construction. Install detector only during system testing and prior to system turnover. H. Elevator Shafts: Coordinate temperature rating and location with sprinkler rating and location. Do not install smoke detectors in sprinklered elevator shafts. I. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install in a visible location near each smoke detector, sprinkler water-flow switch, and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing position. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 283100-13 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-13 QPK NO. 220157.00 J. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille. Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated. K. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated. L. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor. 3.3 PATHWAYS A. Pathways above recessed ceilings and in nonaccessible locations may be routed exposed. 1. Exposed pathways located less than 96 inches above the floor shall be installed in EMT. B. Pathways shall be installed in EMT. C. Exposed EMT shall be painted red enamel. 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. For fire-protection systems related to doors in fire-rated walls and partitions and to doors in smoke partitions, comply with requirements in Section 087100 "Door Hardware." Connect hardware and devices to fire-alarm system. 1. Verify that hardware and devices are listed for use with installed fire-alarm system before making connections. B. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and systems. Install the interface device less than 36 inches from the device controlled. Make an addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system being controlled. 1. Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated HVAC duct systems. 2. Magnetically held-open doors. 3. Electronically locked doors and access gates. 4. Alarm-initiating connection to elevator recall system and components. 5. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies. 6. Supervisory connections at elevator shunt-trip breaker. 7. Data communication circuits for connection to building management system. 8. Supervisory connections at fire-extinguisher locations. 3.5 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 283100-14 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-14 QPK NO. 220157.00 3.6 GROUNDING A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit. B. Ground shielded cables at the control panel location only. Insulate shield at device location. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field tests shall be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. C. Perform tests and inspections. D. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative: 1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing. a. Inspection shall be based on completed record Drawings and system documentation that is required by the "Completion Documents, Preparation" table in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72. b. Comply with the "Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in the "Inspection" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components. 2. System Testing: Comply with the "Test Methods" table in the "Testing" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72. 3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2 requirements in ANSI S1.4. 4. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. 5. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion" in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72. E. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or replaced devices and appliances. F. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. G. Prepare test and inspection reports. ITHACA COLLEGE – PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT PROGRAM 283100-15 ROTHSCHILD RENOVATION FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-15 QPK NO. 220157.00 H. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly, quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections. I. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections. 3.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of manufacturer's designated service organization. Include preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper operation. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. 1. Include visual inspections according to the "Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in the "Testing" paragraph of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72. 2. Perform tests in the "Test Methods" table in the "Testing" paragraph of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72. 3. Perform tests per the "Testing Frequencies" table in the "Testing" paragraph of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72. 3.9 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT A. Comply with UL 864. B. Technical Support: Beginning at Substantial Completion, service agreement shall include software support for two years. C. Upgrade Service: At Substantial Completion, update software to latest version. Install and program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system and new or revised licenses for using software. 1. Upgrade Notice: At least 30 days to allow Owner to schedule access to system and to upgrade computer equipment if necessary. 3.10 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system. END OF SECTION 283100